JP2024087033A - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a gaming machine that can increase a player's interest in the game.
[Solution] The presentation mode displayed on the display means by the presentation mode display means is changed by the variable display means, and the notification means arranges the notification mode at the position where the presentation mode is displayed. Then, when a plurality of presentation modes are displayed on the display means, the suggestion control means suggests the variable presentation mode by arranging the notification mode, so that the notification mode can be made interesting and the player's interest in the game can be increased.
[Selected Figure] Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a ball that enters a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed.

JP 2012-217766 A

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

To achieve this object, the gaming machine described in claim 1 has a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on a display means identification information showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus when identification information showing a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, and has a performance mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of performance modes on the display means, a variable display means capable of varying the performance mode displayed on the display means, a notification means capable of arranging a notification mode at the position where the performance mode is displayed, and a suggestion control means capable of suggesting the variable performance mode by arranging the notification mode when the plurality of performance modes are displayed.

The gaming machine of claim 2 is the gaming machine of claim 1, which has an acquisition means capable of acquiring information that can be determined by the determination means, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the presentation mode display means is capable of displaying the presentation mode when the information is stored in the storage means.

The gaming machine of claim 3 is the gaming machine of claim 2, which has a pre-determination means capable of executing a determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the variable display means is configured to be variable based on the determination result of the pre-determination means.

According to the gaming machine described in claim 1, the gaming machine has a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on a display means identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus when identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, and has a performance mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of performance modes on the display means, a variable display means capable of varying the performance mode displayed on the display means, a notification means capable of arranging a notification mode at the position where the performance mode is displayed, and a suggestion control means capable of suggesting the variable performance mode by arranging the notification mode when the plurality of performance modes are displayed.

This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of claim 2 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 1. That is, the gaming machine has an acquisition means capable of acquiring information that can be determined by the determination means, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the presentation mode display means is capable of displaying the presentation mode when the information is stored in the storage means.

This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of claim 3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 2. That is, the gaming machine has a pre-determination means capable of executing a determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the variable display means is configured to be variable based on the determination result of the pre-determination means.

This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. A front oblique view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. 13A and 13B are front oblique views of the variable winning device. FIG. FIG. An exploded front oblique view of the base plate, variable winning device, collection gutter and sorting device. An exploded rear oblique view of the base plate, variable winning device, collection gutter and sorting device. An exploded front oblique view of the variable winning device. An exploded rear oblique view of the variable winning device. FIG. FIG. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVI-XVI in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize-winning device and the distribution device taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. A cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the distribution device along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. A front view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in Figure 16. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type for special patterns, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and winnings for normal patterns. This is a diagram showing the changes over time in the operation pattern of the opening and closing plate of the variable winning device and the operation pattern of the sliding displacement member of the distribution device in the first round for each jackpot type. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a first operating unit. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a first operating unit; FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit; A front view of the first operating unit in a performance standby state. A rear view of the first operating unit in a performance standby state. 41 is a side view of the first operating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40 . A front view of the first operating unit in an intermediate performance state. A rear view of the first operating unit in an intermediate performance state. FIG. 11 is a front view of the first operating unit in the extended state. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first operating unit in the extended state. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams showing the amount and angle of displacement of a supported member accompanying rotational displacement of a rotating member; 5A and 5B are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. 11A and 11B are schematic diagrams showing changes in angle accompanying rotation of a rotating member. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a rear case and a second operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of a rear case and a second operating unit. 28A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 28B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. 33A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 30A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. 4A and 4B are front views of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inversion member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotation member. 57(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear plate member and the axial rotation member taken along line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in Figure 57(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear plate member and the axial rotation member taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in Figure 57(b). 1A to 1C are front views of the performance device. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of a third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of a third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 5 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member, the driving mode of the drive motor, and the output of the detection sensor in a time series. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in Figure 28. 11A to 11D are schematic front views of the operational units for explaining examples of combined operations of the operational units in chronological order. 11A to 11D are schematic front views of the operational units for explaining examples of combined operations of the operational units in chronological order. FIG. A front view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line LXXV-LXXV in Figure 73. A cross-sectional view of the middle member, slide displacement member, lower member, and detection sensor of the sorting device taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in Figure 75. 1A to 1D are front perspective views of the inner member of the sorting device. 1 is a top view of the middle member, the state switching device, the sliding displacement member and the lower member. FIG. 78A is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member, and lower member taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in FIG. 78, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member, and lower member taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in FIG. 78, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, sliding displacement member, and lower member taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 78. 13A and 13B are side views of the slide displacement member and a ball resting on the upper surface of the ball guide portion. 81(a) is a front view of the rotating member, (b) is a rear view of the rotating member, and (c) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81(a). FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first operating unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. 13A and 13B are rear views of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. 13 is a rear view of the guide slot, the dish-shaped lid portion, the detection sensor, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam. FIG. A front oblique view of the first decorative rotating member and the second decorative rotating member. 13A and 13B are schematic front views showing the guide slots, the rectangular box portion, and the decorative protrusion portion. 13A and 13B are schematic front views showing the guide slots, the rectangular box portion, and the decorative protrusion portion. 1 is a schematic front view showing the guide slot, the rectangular box portion, and the protruding decorative portion. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along line XCIII-XCIII in Figure 85. FIG. 13 is a front view of the second operating unit in the extended state. A cross-sectional view of the second operating unit along line XCV-XCV in Figure 94. 1 is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, a top-bottom inversion member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. FIG. 1 is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, a top-bottom inversion member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the lifting and reversing performance device. 1A is a front perspective view of an intermediate arm member, and FIG. 1B is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a third operating unit, illustrating the displacement of a metal bar and an intermediate arm member. FIG. 13 is a schematic front view of a third operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 4A is a rear view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member, and FIG. 4B is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. FIG. 13 is a front view of a third operating unit. FIG. 13 is a front view of a third operating unit. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit along line CVI-CVI in Figure 105. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line CVII-CVII in Figure 104. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the second embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15 . 17A and 17B are cross-sectional views of the sorting device according to the third embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15 . 13A and 13B are schematic top views of the third flow path component, the probability change detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member, which are schematic views showing the configuration downstream of the third flow path component in the fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component, the special rate detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member taken along line CXIa-CXIa in Figure 110(a), and (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component, the special rate detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member taken along line CXIb-CXIb in Figure 110(b). 17A and 17B are partial cross-sectional views of a sorting device according to a fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15 . A cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of a sorting device according to a seventh embodiment. A cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line CXV-CXV in Figure 114. FIG. 23 is a schematic front view showing a relationship between a guide elongated hole and a rotating member in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a schematic front view showing a relationship between a guide elongated hole and a rotating member in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of a variable winning device provided in the front-view area of the game board of a pachinko machine in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that has won in the variable winning device in the first control example. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen in a first control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when a reach is achieved during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode during the execution of a normal pattern fluctuation during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a normal winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a chance zone is set during the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the third pattern is temporarily stopped during a special variation performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the third pattern is restarted during a special variation performance executed while the special pattern 2 reserved ball displayed on the third pattern display device has been acquired in the first control example. This figure shows an example of the display mode when the third pattern is restarted in a special variable performance that is executed when the special pattern 2 reserved ball displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example has not been acquired. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the first half of the ending period of a special jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, (c) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the second half of the ending period of a special jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the game state indication effect executed during the chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode displayed by the third pattern display device in the first control example, the normal state is set internally, and a normal state is set, during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period); (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (during the normal fluctuation period) in the first control example, the chance mode is set as the presentation mode displayed by the third pattern display device, the normal state is set internally, and a (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of the operation presentation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the frame button is operated during the operation presentation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when a first special pattern change is executed during the ``Super Chance Mode'' displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when a second special pattern change is executed during the ``Super Chance Mode'' displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation presentation is executed is set as the variation presentation of the third pattern in the first control example, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation when a variation pattern in which a reach variation presentation is executed is set as the variation presentation of the third pattern in the first control example. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation during the ending period for a normal jackpot in the first control example, (b) is a timing chart showing the flow of presentation during the ending period for a special jackpot in the first control example, and (c) is a timing chart showing the flow when the ball does not flow down a specific area (V gate) during a special jackpot game in the first control example. 13A and 13B are timing charts showing the flow of the presentation mode set after the end of a big win game in the first control example. 13A and 13B are timing charts showing the flow of the content of the operation presentation during the chance mode in the first control example. A diagram showing the game flow of a pachinko machine in a first control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of various counters in the first control example. 4A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and FIG. 4B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the special chart 1 jackpot table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the special chart 2 jackpot table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of a normal table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the table for special bonuses and time reductions set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the normal special chart 2 performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the special bonus performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the continuous warning execution selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the V notification execution selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the button operation time performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving state selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the probability change state selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. FIG. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on in a first control example. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface A in the first control example, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram illustrating rear surfaces B to D in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display data table in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table in the first control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern change process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing an abnormality process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a state command receiving process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. A flowchart showing the winning command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing special prize information command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the general map-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an ending process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. A flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 performance mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 performance mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the chance mode performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and presentation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer formed on a pachinko machine in the second control example and the display screen, and (b) and (c) are figures showing an example of a display presentation executed when the display of the main pattern image layer is set to off and the display of the sub-pattern image layer is set to on in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the main sea pattern used when a sea image (sea background) is set in the second control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the main mountain image used when a mountain image (mountain background) is set in the second control example, (c) is a schematic diagram showing image data of the sub-pattern pre-stored in the character memory area in the second control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of image data corresponding to various images used for the main variable pattern in the second control example. A timing chart showing a schematic flow of the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern, sub-pattern) in the second control example. (a) is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the change pattern used in the performance example in the second control example, (b) is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the normal performance in the second control example, (c) is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the reach line preview performance in the second control example, and (d) is a timing chart that shows a schematic flow of the preview performance in which the direction of change of the sub-pattern in the second control example is different from normal. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device in a second control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display data table in a second control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing variable pattern command processing 2 executed by an MPU in a display control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a rear image change command process 2 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the second control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer formed on a pachinko machine in a modified example of the second control example and the display screen, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a triple reach performance in a modified example of the second control example, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a triple reach state is reached due to the triple reach performance in a modified example of the second control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the third control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure near a specific winning port of the variable winning device of the gaming board of a pachinko machine in the third control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that has won in the specific winning port in the third control example. A schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that enters a specific winning port in the third control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the third control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the big win control process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. A flowchart showing the winning process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a V round process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the update process during a jackpot executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a jackpot-related process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 4 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the third control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the fall lottery table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fourth control example. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the button operation time performance selection 2 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the special state selection 2 table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol jackpot determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a fall-related processing executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fourth control example. A figure showing an example of a display presentation in the second control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a modified example of the game board of a pachinko machine. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the ending screen of a jackpot game in the fifth control example. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during chance time in the fifth control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a presentation screen at the end of chance time in the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen displayed at the start of the pull-back zone in the fifth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen displayed when a time-saving win is won during the pull-back zone in the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during the extended time executed when a long time reduction is set in the fifth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the number of times the special pattern variation is executed during the long time reduction in the fifth control example reaches 9,900. A figure showing an example of a presentation screen for preparation time that is executed during the time-saving state after the chance time ends in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the background types displayed in the pull-back zone in the fifth control example and the content indicated by each background, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the types of suggestion aspects during the pull-back mode in the fifth control example and the suggestion content indicated by each suggestion aspect. A diagram showing a game flow in the fifth control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of various counters in a fifth control example. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the 1st win random number 5 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the 2nd win random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the time-saving win random number 5 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 5 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example, (b) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the 5 table for the special chart 1 jackpot in the fifth control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the 5 table for the special chart 2 jackpot in the fifth control example. 5A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the five tables for selecting a variation pattern set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example, and FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the five tables for normal and second special variation in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the five tables for special rate and time reduction in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the five tables for time reduction type selection set in the ROM of the main control device in the fifth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the fifth control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a pullback mode selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a suggested mode selection table set in the ROM of a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern determination process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 5 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. A flowchart showing a status command receiving process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the normal state presentation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing a pullback mode setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a fifth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the second special probability state presentation setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing special chart 1 performance mode setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the chance time performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a variable display screen when the result of the special pattern 1 lottery is a jackpot win or a time-saving win in the normal state in the first modified example of the fifth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the result of the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery) is a time-saving win in the normal state (low probability state for special patterns, low probability state for ordinary patterns) in the first modified example of the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during the time-saving state when the variable time of special chart 1 is set to 30 seconds in the normal state in the first variant of the fifth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the time-saving state in the first variant of the fifth control example has ended. A figure showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving win is won with special chart 2 reserved during the promotion chance zone in the first modified example of the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the time-saving random number 5a table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first variant of the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the time-saving type selection 5a table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first variant of the fifth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 5a executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modified example of the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 5a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first modified example of the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 5a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first modified example of the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during the chance time acquisition effect executed when a jackpot that grants the first time-saving state is won in the special chart 1 drawing during the normal state in the second variant of the fifth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during the chance time acquisition effect executed when a time-saving state that grants the second time-saving state is won in the special chart 1 drawing during the normal state in the second variant of the fifth control example. A figure showing an example of the fluctuation pattern when a jackpot is won and a time-saving win in the second variant of the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving random number 5b table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second modified example of the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the jackpot 5b table in the second modified example of the fifth control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving type selection 5b table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second modified example of the fifth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 5b executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second modified example of the fifth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when time reduction A is set in the sixth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when time reduction B is set in the sixth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving win is made during the time-saving state in the sixth control example, and the remaining number of time-saving wins increases, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving win is made during the time-saving state in the sixth control example, and the remaining number of time-saving wins decreases. A diagram showing the game flow in the sixth control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the 6 random number tables per time reduction set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the 6 time reduction type selection tables set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the six tables for the jackpot set in the ROM of the main control device in the sixth control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the sixth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing special chart 2 performance mode setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the mode-specific performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving B performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the sixth control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. A partially enlarged view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. A front oblique view of the V winning device in the seventh control example. A disassembled front oblique view of the V winning device in the seventh control example. This is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the seventh control example, viewed from the rear side. (a) is a schematic diagram of a plan view of the V winning opening of the V winning device in the seventh control example when the opening and closing door is closed, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a plan view of the V winning opening of the V winning device in the seventh control example when it is open. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving lottery result suggestion display is executed during the fluctuation of special chart 1 in the seventh control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a time-saving win is suggested during the fluctuation of special chart 1 in the seventh control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when indicating that the time-saving feature has not been won during the fluctuation of special chart 1 in the seventh control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a jackpot winning notification screen when a duplicate win has been won in the seventh control example. (a) is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern when both the time-saving lottery and the jackpot lottery are won in the seventh control example, (b) is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern when the time-saving lottery is won or the jackpot is not won in the seventh control example, and (c) is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern when the time-saving lottery is not won but the jackpot is won in the seventh control example. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of various counters in the seventh control example. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first winning random number 7 table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the seventh control example, (b) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the first special pattern random number 7 table in the seventh control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the second special pattern random number 7 table in the seventh control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example, (b) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 7 table in the seventh control example, (c) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 7 table in the seventh control example, and (d) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the time-saving grant 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the small win type selection table 7 set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the variation pattern 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the normal variation pattern 7 table in the seventh control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving variable pattern table 7 in the seventh control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving random number 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving type selection 7 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example, and (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the lottery result notification mode selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the seventh control example. A diagram showing the game flow in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern determination process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win start setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the small win time-saving update process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the V inlet passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a V passing process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. This is a flowchart showing the small win control process 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh control example. A flowchart showing special chart 1 performance mode setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the seventh control example. A diagram showing a modified configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the eighth control example. 13A to 13B are diagrams showing a schematic diagram of the internal structure of a sorting unit 1064 of a pachinko machine in the eighth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when special pattern 2 reserve is consecutively obtained by overflow winning during an unfavorable time-saving state displayed on the third pattern display device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during a regular pattern long win game displayed on the third pattern display device in the eighth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when suggesting the end of an unfavorable time-saving state displayed on the third pattern display device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during the ending of a normal jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the eighth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the eighth control example. 13A is a schematic diagram showing a jackpot type selection 8 table in the eighth control example, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing a time-saving random number 8 table in the eighth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of 8 tables for special rate and time reduction in the 8th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of 8 tables for time reduction type selection in the 8th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the pre-reading hold mode selection table in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the start winning process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a state command receiving process 8 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in an eighth control example. A flowchart showing the normal state presentation setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the winning command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing special prize information command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing ending processing 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the LCD performance execution management process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A flowchart showing the advance winning detection process 8 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the eighth control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 9th control example. 13(a)-(b) are enlarged views showing the right side area of the game board of a pachinko machine in a ninth control example. 13(a)-(b) are enlarged views showing the right side area of the game board of a pachinko machine in a ninth control example. 13(a)-(b) are enlarged views showing the right side area of the game board of a pachinko machine in a ninth control example. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the normal winning game when the normal winning opening pattern A is set in the 9th control example. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the normal winning game when the normal winning opening pattern B is set in the 9th control example. A schematic diagram showing a game flow indicating the transition of the game state in the ninth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when a time-saving pattern is won in the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the ninth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during heaven mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the ninth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during space mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 9th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during challenge mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 9th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the 9th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the 1st win random number 9 table in the 9th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table in the 9th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 9 table in the 9th control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal map type selection 9 table in the 9th control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the ninth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the expectation level selection table in the 9th control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 9 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a ninth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a state command process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a game status update process 9 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the ninth control example. A flowchart showing a time-saving related process 9 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a ninth control example. A flowchart showing a non-powered status management process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a ninth control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the tenth control example. An enlarged view showing the V winning device of a pachinko machine in the tenth control example. An enlarged view showing the V winning device of a pachinko machine in the tenth control example. An enlarged view showing the V winning device of a pachinko machine in the tenth control example. An enlarged view showing the V winning device of a pachinko machine in the tenth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a time-saving presentation screen after a special jackpot on special chart 1 during normal play, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during a special jackpot on special chart 2, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a final change screen during the super chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when the special pattern 2 reserve accumulates to MAX during the super chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a treasure chest opening presentation screen during super chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a final change screen during super chance mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the tenth control example. A schematic diagram showing a game flow indicating the transition of the game state in the tenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the tenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number 10 table in the tenth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 1 random number 10 table, which is part of the first winning random number 10 table in the tenth control example, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 10 table, which is part of the first winning random number 10 table in the tenth control example. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection table 10 in the 10th control example. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of a time-saving granting table in a tenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the tenth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the final change performance selection table in the tenth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the notification target selection table in the tenth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an update process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth control example. A flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 10 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 10th control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in an eleventh control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a demo screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 11th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a screen during normal right-hit play displayed on the third pattern display device in the 11th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the 11th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the 11th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 11 table in the 11th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 11 table in the 11th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 11 table in the 11th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving type selection 11 table in the 11th control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the 11th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control process 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 11 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 11th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a time-saving limit update process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the twelfth control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the ROM of the main control device in the 12th control example. A schematic diagram showing a portion of the contents of the RAM of the main control device in the 12th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the first winning random number 12 table in the 12th control example, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the second winning random number 12 table in the 12th control example, (c) is a schematic diagram showing the time-saving winning random number 12 table in the 12th control example, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the small winning random number 12 table in the 12th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table in the 12th control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot 12 table, which is part of the jackpot type selection 12 table in the 12th control example. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the Special Chart 2 Jackpot 12 Table, which is part of the Jackpot Type Selection 12 Table in the 12th control example. This is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection table 12 in the 12th control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern 12 table in the 12th control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal state fluctuation pattern table, which is part of the fluctuation pattern 12 table in the 12th control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving state fluctuation pattern table, which is part of the fluctuation pattern 12 table in the 12th control example. A schematic diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for time-saving winning fluctuation state, which is part of the fluctuation pattern 12 table in the 12th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation start process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern determination process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the game status update process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation execution process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation stop processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the forced stop processing 12 of FIG. 1 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation start process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern determination process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the small prize lottery process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern change pattern selection process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation execution process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation stop processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the forced stop processing 12 of FIG. 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. This is a flowchart showing the special chart 2 small win stop processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 12th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving limit update process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth control example. 13(a) and 13(b) are figures showing an example of a ceiling reaching suggestion display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 13th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a ceiling reaching variation performance screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 13th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a ceiling mid-performance screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 13th control example. A figure showing an example of a ceiling add-on performance screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 13th control example. A transition diagram showing the flow of transitions between each game state in the thirteenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 13th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 13th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning random number 13 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the second winning random number 13 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving winning random number 13 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the jackpot type selection table 13 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the time-saving type selection table 13 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 13th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the time-saving winning table 13 in the 13th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the ceiling table 13 in the 13th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 13th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 13th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the ceiling reaching suggestion performance selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 13th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the ceiling-reaching performance selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 13th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the special pattern determination process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the ceiling determination process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the time-saving lottery process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 13th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirteenth control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 13 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a thirteenth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a status command receiving process 13 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 13th control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the performance mode setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the normal mode performance setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 13th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a game status suggestion display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 13th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen after it has been notified that the first time-saving state has been set in the game status suggestion display in the first variant of the 13th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving random number 13a table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first variant of the 13th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving winning 13a table in the first variant of the 13th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant of the 13th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant of the 13th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the game status indication performance selection 13a table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first modified example of the 13th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 13a executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modified example of the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 13a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 13th control example. A flowchart showing the normal mode performance setting process 13a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 13th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 14th control example when entering the ceiling activation mode, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a performance screen during the ceiling activation mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 14th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 14th control example when entering the super ceiling activation mode, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 14th control example when entering the time-saving mode during the ceiling activation mode. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 14th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 14th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the 14 time-saving random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 14th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the ceiling 14 table in the 14th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM in a voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 14th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the ceiling determination process 14 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourteenth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourteenth control example. A flowchart showing a status command receiving process 14 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 14th control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example. A flowchart showing the normal mode performance setting process 14 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 14th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a heart-pounding zone entry screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 14th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a notification screen indicating that a time-saving mode will be entered immediately after entering the heart-pounding zone, displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 14th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant of the 14th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the provisions of the time-saving winning table 14a in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant of the 14th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant of the 14th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the exciting zone performance selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first modified example of the 14th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 14a executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a ceiling determination process 14a executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 14a executed by the MPU in the main control device in a first modified example of the fourteenth control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 14a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 14th control example. A flowchart showing the normal mode performance setting process 14a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 14th control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the fifteenth control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during the second special probability state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 15th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen at the end of the second special probability state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 15th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during special pattern 2 change in the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 15th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a special pattern 2 change screen during the second special probability state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 15th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 15th control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the 2nd win random number 15 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 15th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving win random number 15 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 15th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 15 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 15th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the 15 table for the special chart 1 jackpot in the 15th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the 15 table for the special chart 2 jackpot in the 15th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving type selection table 15 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 15th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 15th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 15th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the keep zone performance selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 15th control example. 15 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 15 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 15th control example. 15 is a flowchart showing a time-saving lottery process 15 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 15th control example. A flowchart showing the second special probability state presentation setting process 15 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 15th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 15 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 15th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 15 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 15th control example. 17A is a diagram illustrating the appearance of the island equipment when multiple pachinko machines connected to a data display device in the 16th embodiment are lined up in a hall, and FIG. 17B is a diagram showing an example of the display of various data on the data display unit of the data display device in the 16th embodiment. (a) is a figure showing the viewing state of the data display device during a jackpot game state in the 16th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the viewing state of the data display device when the game transitions to a time-saving state for normal patterns after the jackpot ends in the 16th control example. A figure showing the visual appearance of the data display device during the third time-saving state, which is set based on reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws in the 16th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a provocative effect of a data display device linked effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the 16th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation form of a jackpot notification effect linked to the data display device displayed on the third pattern display device in the 16th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode when a small win or a special big win is won in the 16th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the variable display mode executed at the ceiling lottery number in the 16th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode of a time-saving activation prompting effect in the normal state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 16th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode of a time-saving activation effect linked to the data display device displayed on the third pattern display device in the 16th control example. 16(a) is a diagram showing a list of hold change modes in the 16th control example, and FIG. 16(b) is a diagram showing conditions under which the hold change presentation is suppressed in the 16th control example. A diagram showing a method of transitioning between each game state in the 16th control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the 16th control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a data display device and a hall computer electrically connected to the pachinko machine in the 16th control example via an external output terminal board. A diagram showing the types of external output signals output from the external output terminal board in the sixteenth control example. A figure showing an example of the signal output mode of the external output terminal board during normal play in the 16th control example. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a signal output mode when power is turned on in the sixteenth control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 16th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 16th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning random number 16 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 16th control example, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variable pattern selection 16 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 16th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the normal 16 table in the 16th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the jackpot type selection 16 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 16th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving random number 16 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 16th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 16th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 16th control example. A diagram showing a schematic representation of the prescribed contents of the hold mode selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 16th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving suggestion performance selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing an update process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the ceiling determination process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 16 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 16(a) is a flowchart showing the outer end output setting processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error signal processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. A flowchart showing out ball detection signal processing performed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing start port signal processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the open signal processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a start-up signal output process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 16th control example. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 16 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 16th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a status command receiving process 16 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 16th control example. A flowchart showing the winning command processing 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. A flowchart showing small win related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. A flowchart showing the general map-related processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. A flowchart showing the normal mode performance setting process 16 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the data display device in the sixteenth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a display device signal receiving process executed by an MPU in the data display device in the sixteenth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU of the hall computer in the sixteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a signal reception process executed by the MPU of the hall computer in the sixteenth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing the comparison process upon power recovery executed by the MPU of the hall computer in the sixteenth embodiment. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 17th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode during time-saving state B, which is set when the ceiling number of lottery draws is reached in the 17th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode when transitioning from time-saving state B to time-saving state A in the 17th control example. A figure showing an example of the presentation mode when a jackpot is won during time-saving state B in the 17th control example. A diagram showing a method of transitioning between each game state in the 17th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 17th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 17th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 17 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the 17 table for the special chart 1 jackpot in the 17th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the 17 table for the special chart 2 jackpot in the 17th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the second winning random number 17 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variable pattern 17 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the first time-saving table in the 17th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the small win random number 17 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the small win type selection 17 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the time-saving random number 17 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the time-saving type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 17th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 17th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation start process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern determination process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the small prize lottery process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. This is a flowchart showing the first special pattern change pattern selection process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the ceiling determination process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern variation stop processing 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 off-axis stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation start process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern determination process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern change pattern selection process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the second special pattern variation stop processing 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a time-saving setting process 17 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 off-axis stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process 17 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 17th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 17 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 17th control example. A front view showing a schematic diagram of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 18th control example. A partially enlarged view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 18th control example. A front oblique view of the V winning device in the 18th control example. A disassembled front oblique view of the V winning device in the 18th control example. This is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the 18th control example, viewed from the rear side. (a) is a schematic diagram of a plan view of the V winning opening of the V winning device in the 18th control example when the opening and closing door is closed, and (b) is a schematic diagram of a plan view of the V winning opening of the V winning device in the 18th control example when the V winning opening is open. (a) is a figure showing an example of a V icon acquisition presentation screen executed during the ending period of a jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the 18th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a battle presentation screen when the V reservation is consumed on the fourth change of the special chart after the end of a jackpot game displayed on the third pattern display device in the 18th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when a V icon is activated during a battle presentation displayed on the third pattern display device in the 18th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen for a battle presentation when a V reservation is present among the reservations displayed on the third pattern display device in the 18th control example. A diagram showing a schematic configuration of various counters in the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 18th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the 1st winning random number 18 table set in the ROM of the main control unit in the 18th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the special pattern 1 random number 18 table in the 18th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the special pattern 2 random number 18 table in the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 18 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 18th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the special chart 1 jackpot type selection 18 table in the 18th control example, (c) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the special chart 2 jackpot type selection 18 table in the 18th control example, and (d) is a diagram showing the typical contents of the time-saving granting 18 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 18th control example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the small win type selection table 18 set in the ROM of the main control device in the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 18 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 18th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the normal variation pattern 18 table in the 18th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the time-saving variable pattern table 18 in the 18th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving random number 18 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 18th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the time-saving type selection 18 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 18th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the presentation mode selection 18 table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 18th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the time-saving presentation mode setting A table in the 18th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the time-saving presentation mode setting B table in the 18th control example. A diagram showing a schematic representation of the specified contents of the V icon acquisition performance setting table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 18th control example. A diagram showing the game flow in the 18th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing an update process 18 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 18th control example. This is a flowchart showing the small win time-saving update process 18 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 18th control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing 18 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 18th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process 18 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 18th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 18 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in an 18th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing 18 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example. A flowchart showing the V icon acquisition performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example. A flowchart showing the ending processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 18 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example. A flowchart showing the performance mode selection process 18 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving performance mode setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 18th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a V icon acquisition display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 18th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a V icon is activated during the special pattern change of a small win A displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 18th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen when a V icon is activated during the special pattern change of a small win B winning displayed on the third pattern display device in the first modified example of the 18th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a V icon activation cancellation presentation screen when a new V reserve is acquired during the special pattern change of a small win B winning displayed on the third pattern display device in the first modified example of the 18th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant of the 18th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant of the 18th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the V icon display mode setting table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the first variant of the 18th control example. A flowchart showing a V icon acquisition performance setting process a executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 18th control example. A flowchart showing an ending process a executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 18th control example. A flowchart showing the time-saving performance mode setting process a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first variant of the 18th control example. This is a front view of a pachinko machine in a modified example of the 16th control example, in which the upper gimmick is positioned in an extended position. (a) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode when a data display device-linked jackpot notification presentation is executed in a modified example of the 16th control example, and a jackpot is initiated with the upper role positioned in the extended position, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the presentation mode when a data display device-linked jackpot notification presentation is executed in a modified example of the 16th control example, and the timing arrives when a jackpot is actually notified. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen during the second special probability state displayed on the third pattern display device in the first variant of the 15th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation screen at the end of the second special probability state displayed on the third pattern display device in the 15th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a state transition variation discarding process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example. A flowchart showing the second special probability state presentation setting process 15a executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of a variable display mode executed by the third pattern display device when the lottery result during normal play in the 19th control example corresponds to a time-saving pattern winning special pattern drawing. (a) is a figure showing an example of an additional effect executed in the third pattern display device during chance time in the 19th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of an end waiting effect executed when the remaining number of chance times in the 19th control example is less than 10. A figure showing an example of a chance time end presentation displayed on the third pattern display device in the 19th control example. This figure shows the transition of the presentation pattern when a special pattern lottery performed 25 times before the ceiling number of lottery draws is reached in the 19th control example, and a time-saving pattern for 50 times of time-saving is won. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a variable display mode for showing the result of the first special pattern drawing performed after the ceiling number of drawing attempts is reached in the 19th control example. 17A and 17B are figures showing an example of a ceiling-raising effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the 19th control example. A figure showing an example of a ceiling-teasing effect that is executed after the time-saving state based on reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws has ended at least once in the 19th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 19th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 19th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning random number 19 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 19th control example. 19(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 19 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 19th control example, (b) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the ceiling tilt table in the 19th control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the ceiling reaching table in the 19th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the time-saving type selection 19 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 19th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario 19 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 19th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 19th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 19th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the ceiling determination process 19 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 19th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 19th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the setting value control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 19th control example. A flowchart showing the performance mode setting process 19 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 19th control example. A flowchart showing the normal mode performance setting process 19 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 19th control example. A flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 19th control example. A flowchart showing the ceiling-related performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 19th control example. (a) and (b) are figures showing an example of the variable display mode when the result of the special chart lottery executed for the first time after power-on accompanied by a RAM clear operation in the 20th control example is a small win. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 20th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 20th control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern scenario 20 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 20th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the post-win table in the 20th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the table for use after a small win in the 20th control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the table for reaching the ceiling in the 20th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 20th control example. A flowchart showing the first special pattern change pattern selection process 20 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 20th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the ceiling determination process 20 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 20th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 off-axis stop processing 20 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 20th control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 20th control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 20 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 20th control example. A flowchart showing the normal state presentation setting process 20 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 20th control example. A flowchart showing the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 20 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 20th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a presentation mode executed by the third pattern display device in the 21st control example between the end of the chance time and the consumption of all reserved balls of the second special pattern that were reserved at the end of the chance time, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a presentation mode executed by the third pattern display device in the 21st control example while the number of special pattern drawing rounds is within 20 after the end of the chance time. A figure showing an example of a presentation mode when the ceiling number of lottery draws is reached during a special mode in the 21st control example. A figure showing the transition of the presentation style after the end of the chance time in the 21st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 21st control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 21st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 21 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 21st control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the table for notifying the end of time-saving in the 21st control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the table for after the end of time-saving in the 21st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern scenario 21 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 21st control example, (b) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the table for use after a win in the 21st control example, and (c) is a diagram showing the schematic contents of the table for use after reaching the ceiling in the 21st control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the table for after the time reduction ends in the 21st control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 21st control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 21st control example. 23 is a flowchart showing an update process 21 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 21st control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the ceiling determination process 21 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 21st control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 21st control example. A flowchart showing the performance mode setting process 21 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 21st control example. A flowchart showing the ceiling-related performance setting process 21 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 21st control example. A front view of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. A rear view of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. 23A is a front view of the effect button of the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example, and FIG. 23B is a front view of the selection button of the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a case where the decorative movable part of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example is in a stored state, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a case where the decorative movable part of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example is in a movable state. A disassembled front oblique view of the V winning device in the 22nd control example. This is an operation diagram of the V winning device in the 22nd control example, viewed from the rear side. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen during special pattern change when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is stored, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display screen 1 when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is movable and the reserved color is changed. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen 2 when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is movable and the reserved color is changed, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen 3 when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is movable and the reserved color is changed. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the reel is stored after the reserved color displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is changed, and (b) is a figure showing an example of display screen 1 when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is moved and part of the reserved color is transferred to the adjacent reserved color. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display screen 2 when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example moves and part of the reserved color moves to the adjacent reserved area, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display screen when the reel is stored after the reserved color displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is changed. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example moves and the reserved pattern changes independently, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the reel is stored after the reserved color displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example changes independently. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the relationship between the color of the reserved pattern and the expected probability of winning a jackpot in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the variable pattern of the color of the reserved pattern in the 22nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a demo screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a light intensity adjustment screen (with reel) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of an adjustment end screen when the decision button displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is operated, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when special pattern variation is started during light intensity adjustment displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example. A figure showing an example of a light intensity adjustment screen during a prohibited role play displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example when the shutter closing reach begins, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example when the shutter closing reach continues. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of the fifth stage of the shutter closing reach displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of the sixth stage of the shutter closing reach displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a capsule is obtained at the third stage of the shutter closing reach displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a capsule obtained at the fifth stage of the shutter closing reach displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is released. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a branching effect is executed during a reach effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen at the end of a special movie when a button operation is performed during a branching effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example. A figure showing an example of a display screen at the end of a special movie if no button is operated during the branching performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example. 11 is a timing chart showing a schematic relationship between the special movie presentation time and the special chart change time in the 22nd control example, where (a) is a timing chart when no button operation is performed during the branching presentation in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a timing chart when a button operation is performed during the branching presentation in the 22nd control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. A diagram showing a schematic configuration of various counters in the twenty-second control example. 22(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the 22nd control example. FIG. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 22nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the first winning type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the second winning random number table in the 22nd control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the 22nd control example, (b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot variation pattern table in the 22nd control example, (c) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the miss (normal) variation pattern table in the 22nd control example, and (d) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the miss (high probability, time-saving) variation pattern table in the 22nd control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM within the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the reserve change performance lottery table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the reserve color selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the hold change scenario selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the shutter closing reach selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the operation scenario table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the special pattern change processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol jackpot determination process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing an update process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. This is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a through gate passing process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot control process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a notification process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the winning processing 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the above process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the start-up process 22 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing command determination processing 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the status command receiving process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the winning command processing 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing special prize information command processing 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the hold display setting process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the composite hold change presentation setting process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the stop command processing 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot-related processing 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the ending process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the variable display setting process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the normal state presentation mode determination process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the hold performance execution process 22 at the start of fluctuation, which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance processing 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the decision button operation process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the performance button operation processing 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 22 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a change operation to chance up mode is performed during the second half of the variable performance period when normal mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 23rd control example is set, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a change operation to chance up mode is performed during the first half of the variable performance period when normal mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example is set. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a mode is selected during a miss fluctuation displayed on the third pattern display device in the 23rd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a mode is selected during a jackpot fluctuation displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the presentation mode selection area during a miss fluctuation in the 23rd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the presentation mode selection area during a jackpot fluctuation in the 22nd control example. This figure shows an example of a presentation when the decision button for switching to chance up mode is operated during the latter half of the variation presentation period in the jackpot variation displayed on the third pattern display device in the 23rd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the reel moves during the change of the special pattern displayed on the third pattern display device in the 23rd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display screen 1 when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 23rd control example is completely closed. A figure showing an example of the display screen 2 when the reel displayed on the third pattern display device in the 23rd control example is completely closed. This is a timing chart showing the flow of setting the changing performance during the special chart change when the performance custom selection operation is not performed during the special chart change in the 23rd control example. This is a timing chart showing the relationship between the performance custom selection operation and the flow for setting the changing performance during the special chart change when a performance custom selection operation is executed during the special chart change in the 23rd control example and the performance mode is changed during the special chart change. This is a timing chart showing the relationship between the performance custom selection operation and the flow for setting the changing performance during the special chart change when executing a performance custom selection operation during the special chart change and switching from the next change in the 23rd control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 23rd control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the performance custom information table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 23rd control example. A diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the second half preview performance selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 23rd control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 23rd control example. A flowchart showing the hold performance execution process 23 at the start of fluctuation, which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. A flowchart showing the ongoing hold change presentation setting process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. A flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring and performance processing 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. A flowchart showing the performance custom selection process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the decision button operation process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. A flowchart showing the performance customization execution process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance update process 23 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 23rd control example. A rear view of the pachinko machine in the 24th control example. 24. (a) to (d) are schematic diagrams showing the procedure for changing settings in the 24th control example, and (e) to (g) are schematic diagrams showing the procedure for confirming settings in the 24th control example. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a character corresponding to the previous stopped pattern has a conversation when the special pattern starts to change in the 24th control example, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion presentation in which the next change starts after the patterns stop in a special combination (7 reach miss) in the 24th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a character corresponding to a stopped pattern is talking during a demo performance executed in the 24th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a character is talking while the voice is fixed during a demo performance executed in the 24th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a reserve color change precursor display screen displayed on the third pattern display device in the 24th control example, (b) is a figure showing an example of a reserve color change precursor display screen (when a special pattern stops) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 24th control example, (c) is a figure showing an example of a reserve shift chance performance display screen 1 (jump) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 24th control example, and (d) is a figure showing an example of a reserve shift chance performance display screen 2 (high speed) displayed on the third pattern display device in the 24th control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the audio output device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the special pattern jackpot random number table set in the ROM of the main control device of the pachinko machine in the 24th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the main control device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the voice command selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the pending action selection table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. A block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM within the audio output device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM within the audio output device of a pachinko machine in the 24th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a startup process 24 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the setting value control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th control example. A flowchart showing the start-up process 24 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 24th control example. A flowchart showing the standby processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 24th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 24 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a state command receiving process 24 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing the stop symbol type setting process 24 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a stop command process 24 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th control example. A flowchart showing the hold effect execution process 24 at the start of fluctuation, which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th control example. A flowchart showing the pending action determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the 24th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the 24th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the twenty-fourth control example. 23 is a flowchart showing an audio setting process executed by an MPU in the audio output device in a 24th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a pattern stock reach starts, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the 25th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when pattern stock is completed, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the 25th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the stocked pattern displayed on the third pattern display device in the 25th control example disappears from the screen, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the reach pattern is switched to the stocked pattern displayed on the third pattern display device in the 25th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the liquid crystal display of the third pattern display device in the 25th control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the auxiliary image layer of the third pattern display device in the 25th control example, (c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the main image layer of the third pattern display device in the 25th control example, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the sub-image layer of the third pattern display device in the 25th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the main image layer of the third pattern display device in the 25th control example is normally displayed and the transmittance of the auxiliary image layer is 100%, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the main image layer of the third pattern display device in the 25th control example is displayed at scale A and the transmittance of the auxiliary image layer is 0%. A block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 25th control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the pattern stock reach selection table set in the ROM of the sound lamp control device of a pachinko machine in the 25th control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration within the display control device of a pachinko machine in the 25th control example. A figure showing a schematic diagram of an example of a drawing list in the 25th control example. A flowchart showing the normal state presentation mode determination process 25 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the 25th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a command determination process 25 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the 25th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a processing command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the 25th control example. 23 is a flowchart showing a drawing process 25 executed by an MPU in the display control device in the 25th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a pattern stock reach starts, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the 25th control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when pattern stock is completed, as displayed on the third pattern display device in the 25th control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the stocked pattern displayed on the third pattern display device in the 25th control example moves, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a new reach line is formed from the stocked pattern displayed on the third pattern display device in the 25th control example. (a) is a diagram showing a gaming machine in a movable state of the great sword feature in a modified example of the 22nd control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when special pattern variation is started during adjustment of the light intensity displayed on the third pattern display device in the 22nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a modified example of the shutter closing reach is developed and displayed on the third display device in a modified example of the 22nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a modified example of the shutter closing reach is developed and displayed on the third pattern display device in a modified example of the 22nd control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when a branching performance of a shutter closing reach is performed, which is displayed on the third display device in a modified example of the 22nd control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display screen when the shutter is completely opened, which is displayed on the third pattern display device in a modified example of the 22nd control example.

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1 to 71, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following explanation, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (rear) side with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Figure 1. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Figure 1, the top side will be referred to as the upper (upper) side, the bottom side will be referred to as the lower (lower) side, the right side will be referred to as the right (right) side, and the left side will be referred to as the left (left) side. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see Figure 2, for example) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc. is attached to the inner frame 12 so that it can be detached from the back side. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top and extends out to the front, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks due to the built-in LEDs lighting up or blinking, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 1) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as an LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 in the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 on the left side that is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in Figure 2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, not shown in the upper half of the game area) and a windmill (not shown) on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, as well as rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 140, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and allows the player to see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, it is possible to shield various structures arranged on the outside of the center frame 86 from its front side to the rear side of the base plate 60 so that they cannot be seen by the player.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in Figure 2), which prevents a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in Figure 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, while when the ball has entered the second winning hole 140, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while the seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R special jackpot, a 4R special jackpot, and a 4R regular jackpot. The first pattern display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but also show a pattern according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "15R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R special jackpot" refers to a special jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. A "4R normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4, and is in a time-saving state for a specified number of changes (for example, 100 changes).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot increases after the jackpot has ended as an added value, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (during a probability fluctuation), in other words, a state of play in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. In this embodiment, the high probability state (during a probability fluctuation) includes a game state in which the probability of a jackpot increases for a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment), and the probability of a hit of the second pattern described below increases, making it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability fluctuation, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than during a probability fluctuation. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, but only the probability of a hit of the second pattern increases, making it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state when it is not in a special mode or time-saving mode (neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of hitting the second symbol has increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that a game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300 described later during the first round of a jackpot game, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in a high probability state for 100 fluctuations. Note that if it is not determined that a game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in a time-saving state for 100 fluctuations.

During the special rate or time-saving period, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the electric device 140a (electric device) associated with the second winning port 140 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal times. When the electric device 140a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140 than when the electric device 140a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving period, it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the winning probability of the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140 is opened and the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may be changed. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the time when the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140 is opened and the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may not be changed, and only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

In the play area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by the winning (initial winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 is fastened to the rear case 510 so as to fill the opening 511a of the rear case 510 described below, and the center frame 86 is arranged to frame the window portion of the base plate 60. In other words, when viewed from the front, the center frame 86 appears to be arranged to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81, but in reality, the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged separately in the front and rear.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display of, for example, 9 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4) to display, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom. Each symbol row is configured with a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter during a special probability or time-saving mode than during normal game mode. As a result, during special probability and time-saving mode, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning draws can be held than during normal game mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning draw, giving the player more opportunities for the electric device 140a of the second winning slot 140 to be in an open state. Therefore, during special probability and time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 140.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 140 during a special probability or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 140a opens for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during a special probability or time-saving period than during normal times, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 140a opens for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display unit 80, and are configured to allow a portion of the ball launched onto the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the through gates 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, a "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the through gate 67 can be reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second pattern reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81.

The second pattern change display may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this embodiment, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. The maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). The number of through gates 67 installed is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. The installation position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left or right of the variable display unit 80, but may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, the second pattern reserve lamp may not be turned on.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When the first winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 140 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When the second winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

The first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 are also each one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning port. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be five.

An electric device 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. This electric device 140a is configured to be able to open and close, and is normally in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the electric device 140a opens (expands), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140.

As mentioned above, during the special rate and time-saving period, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 140a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate and time-saving period, the time that the electric device 140a is open is also longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the special rate and time-saving period, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning slot 140 than during normal play.

The probability of a jackpot occurring when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 is the same as when a ball enters the second winning slot 140, regardless of whether the probability is low or high. However, the probability of a 15R special jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot occurring when a jackpot occurs is set to be higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have an electric device like the second winning slot 140, and the ball is always capable of winning.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the first winning opening 64, which does not have an electric device, by shooting the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by having the ball win at the first winning opening 64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery and aiming to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, during the special bonus period or the time-saving period, the electric device 140a associated with the second winning port 140 is likely to be opened by passing the ball through the through gate 67, making it easier to win at the second winning port 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing through the through gate 67 to open the electric device, and aiming for the ball to win at the second winning port 140 for a 15R special bonus jackpot.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since the game board 13 is configured symmetrically, it is possible to aim for the first winning slot 64 with a "right hit" and for the second winning slot 140 with a "left hit". Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not require the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This eliminates the hassle of having to change the way the ball is shot.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is provided below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state as a special game state. Also, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

The right corner of the lower side of the game board 13 is provided with an attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the outlet 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The outlets 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the specific winning hole 65a.

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various parts (gimmicks) such as windmills are also arranged on it (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 4). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a to the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65b (see Figure 11) as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include the drive motors 631, 731, 782, and 861.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the sound lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The sound lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the sound output from the sound output device 226 by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, and FIG. 6(a) and FIG. 6(b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. FIG. 6(a) illustrates the closed state of the opening and closing plate 65b, in which the opening and closing plate 65b is closed to restrict the flow of balls down to the specific winning opening 65a, and FIG. 6(b) illustrates the open state of the opening and closing plate 65b, in which the opening and closing plate 65b is open to allow the flow of balls down to the specific winning opening 65a. Note that FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of FIG. 5 and FIG. 6.

The variable winning device 65 is formed so that when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)), the upper surface of the opening and closing plate 65b is inclined downward toward the rear side so that it can receive a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b and guide it to the specific winning opening 65a.

Since the electric device 140a is located above the center of the opening and closing plate 65b (see Figure 2), the balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b are limited to balls that stray from the electric device 140a and flow down. In other words, balls do not land on the opening and closing plate 65b in the center, but mainly in the parts on the outside of the electric device 140a. In other words, the placement of balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b is limited to positions closer to the outside of the opening and closing plate 65b.

However, this does not apply to the placement of the ball after it lands on the opening and closing plate 65b. In other words, depending on how the ball flows after it lands on the opening and closing plate 65b, it may end up being placed closer to the center of the opening and closing plate 65b.

In particular, in this embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric prop 140a from the front side is curved to ensure space on the opening and closing plate 65b side (it is curved so that it juts out downward from the lower front end that faces the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) toward the rear side), so that the degree to which a ball that bounces near the left-right center of the opening and closing plate 65b collides with the front design member 141 and loses momentum can be reduced. This increases the likelihood that the ball will be positioned near the left-right center of the opening and closing plate 65b.

The center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape of the lower part of the front design member 141 may be located either forward or backward. In this embodiment, the radius of curvature in a side view is formed to be located at the lower front, making it possible to secure a larger space on the opening and closing plate 65b side. In addition, the front design member 141 is shaped so that the left and right width becomes smaller as it moves downward at the left and right ends, making it easier to secure space between the opening and closing plate 65b on the left and right sides.

When the opening and closing plate 65b is in the open state, balls that land on the opening and closing plate 65b are guided almost without exception to the specific winning opening 65a. In front of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear is arranged at an upper and lower position that can guide the ball into the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right ends of the lower surface 163a so that a ball rolling to the left and right outside by the lower surface 163a can move over with less resistance. In order to reduce the flow resistance of a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b outside the left and right of this inclined flow lower surface 163a1, a guide plate portion 163a2 is formed on the left and right outside of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-shaped portion that extends forward and inward from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163, and the front end surface is formed as an inclined surface that is shifted rearward as it moves inward to the left and right.

As a result, when a ball rolling on the opening/closing plate 65b abuts against the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided down along the slope of the inclined surface, so that the ball can be guided with little resistance to the inclined flow-down surface 163a1. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b starts to close with a ball on it, even if the ball is positioned to the left or right outside the inclined flow-down surface 163a1, the degree to which the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b is hindered can be reduced.

In other words, it is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunctions such as, for example, poor ball flow causing delays in closing the opening/closing plate 65b, or balls being swept backwards by the closing action of the opening/closing plate 65b bouncing off the rear wall of the receiving member 163 and striking the opening/closing plate 65b again, applying a load in the direction (forward) that causes the opening/closing plate 65b to open, causing the opening/closing plate 65b to open unintentionally.

When the opening and closing plate 65b moves from an open state to a closed state, the opening and closing plate 65b closes by rising up. In other words, a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning opening 65a by the movement of the opening and closing plate 65b, so that the ball does not move to the left or right of the ball resting on the opening and closing plate 65b, and almost all of the balls resting on the opening and closing plate 65b are guided to the specific winning opening 65a.

In this case, if the arrangement of the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b is on the outer left or right side, or if there are a large number of balls, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b may be delayed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the shapes of the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate portion 163a2 are designed in such a way that the flow of balls guided to the specific winning opening 65a is not stagnated, and the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be kept prompt.

In addition, instead of modifying the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b on which the ball rests in the open state is formed in a flat surface (see FIG. 6(b)). Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b first flows backward, and then flows left and right due to the effect of the shape of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, making it easier to avoid ball collisions on the opening/closing plate 65b.

In other words, even if multiple balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls will first move backward in parallel, preventing the balls from colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, compared to when the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is shaped with a left-right inclined surface like the lower surface 163a, which creates a left-right flow in the rolling balls, the possibility of the balls moving irregularly on the opening/closing plate 65b can be reduced, making it possible to prevent unintended malfunctions.

The receiving member 163 is formed with abutment surfaces 163a3 that abut against the pivot tips at both left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, thereby improving the reproducibility of the positioning of the opening/closing plate 65b. The abutment surfaces 163a3 are formed in a pair on the left and right, and are designed to match the shape of the opening/closing plate 65b so that they can make surface contact rather than point contact. This makes it easier to stabilize the positioning of the opening/closing plate 65b, and by receiving the load at the time of abutment on the surface, stress concentration can be avoided, improving durability.

In addition, an auxiliary abutment surface 163a4 is formed on the underside of the abutment surface 163a3, and is formed in a surface shape that is approximately parallel to the opposing opening and closing plate 65b with a small gap between them. The auxiliary abutment surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe in case the abutment between the abutment surface 163a3 and the opening and closing plate 65b becomes poor for some reason.

In this embodiment, a fixed member 161 that restricts the flow of the ball is disposed in front of the contact surface 163a3, and is configured so that the ball does not collide with the contact surface 163a3. However, for example, if the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface 163a3 is chipped, it may become impossible to maintain the repeatability of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front-to-rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b come into surface contact with the auxiliary contact surface 163a4, thereby maintaining the stability of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b. This improves the reproducibility of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening and closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since the contact surface portion 163a3 contacts the opening and closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal, there may be a disadvantage that loads are easily accumulated. However, since the area over which the load is distributed can be increased, the magnitude of the local load that the contact surface portion 163a3 receives due to contact with the opening and closing plate 65b can be reduced.

When the opening and closing plate 65b moves from an open state to a closed state, the game ball that is in the process of being received by the opening and closing plate 65b can be configured to be received in a manner that pushes it into the opening and closing plate 65b due to the shape of the front design member 141 described above.

In other words, if the ball comes into contact with the lower shape of the front design member 141 while being received (for example, while it is being sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b and the opening frame of the specific winning opening 65a and sliding sideways), the ball can be guided by the curved shape to flow down into the inside of the specific winning opening 65a. This makes it easier to prevent the ball that has deviated from the opening/closing plate 65b from falling down the front side of the third flow path component 336, making it easier to ensure visibility into the third flow path component 336.

When the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, balls do not land on the opening and closing plate 65b, so the placement of balls flowing down the front side of the opening and closing plate 65b when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state is limited to the outside on the left and right of the electric prop 140a.

Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the placement of the balls that flow down without being guided to the specific winning opening 65a can be limited to positions on the left and right outer side of the electric role device 140a. This ensures visibility below the electric role device 140a at positions on the left and right inner side of the left and right ends of the electric role device 140a.

Next, the configuration downstream of the specific winning port 65a (the side where the balls flow after passing through the specific winning port 65a) will be described. Figure 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and Figure 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. Note that Figures 7 and 8 show the configuration arranged on the base plate 60 with all components removed except for the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65.

As shown in FIG. 8, a collecting gutter 150 is provided at the rear of the variable winning device 65 on the rear side of the base plate 60, forming a path for directing balls that enter the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 2) to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The collecting gutter 150 has a grooved portion that forms a flow path, and the front side of the grooved portion that faces the base plate 60 is open. When this open portion is closed by the base plate 60, a path for flowing the balls to the ball discharge passage is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path section 151 that forms a flow path for balls that enter the first winning opening 64, a second flow path section 152 that forms a path for balls that enter the second winning opening 140, and a plurality of third flow path sections 153 that form flow paths on the left and right for balls that enter the general winning openings 63 located on both the left and right sides.

The first flow path section 151 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the first winning opening 64 to the lower left, and the second flow path section 152 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the second winning opening 140 to the lower right. The third flow path section 153 is configured as a flow path that extends below the general winning opening 63.

Therefore, while the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are positioned in the left-right center of the play area when viewed from the front, the flow of balls that enter the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 is directed from the left-right center to the left-right outer side by the collecting gutter 150. This allows a space to be created below the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and this space can be used to position the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 described below.

Figure 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300, and Figure 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300. Note that in Figures 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is shown, and other parts are omitted, and other components assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted, so that the base of the base plate 60 can be seen. Also, for ease of explanation, Figure 9 shows the center frame 86 assembled to the base plate 60.

The following describes the fixing of the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300. The variable winning device 65 is placed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is placed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The sorting device 300 has an insertion hole 311 at the top that is fastened to the variable winning device 65, and an insertion hole 331 at the left and right that is fastened to the collecting gutter 150. In other words, unlike the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 that are directly fixed to the base plate 60, the presence or absence of the sorting device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 in this embodiment can be used as is whether the sorting device 300 is installed or not. This allows the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 to be used in common regardless of whether the sorting device 300 is installed or not.

Next, the details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive balls from the game area through the specific winning port 65a, and the sorting device 300 constitutes a flow path along which the balls received by the variable winning device 65 flow. In this embodiment, the profits obtained by the player are controlled to change based on the detection results of the balls flowing through the flow path of the sorting device 300, and details will be described later.

11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like, a front design member 162 arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161 and fastened to the fixed member 161, a receiving member 163 arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161, fastened to the fixed member 161, and configured to be able to receive balls that have passed through the specific winning opening 65a, an intervening member 164 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened to the receiving member 163, and intervening as a connecting part with the sorting device 300, and a state switching device 165 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened to the receiving member 163, and configured to be able to switch the open/closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b depending on whether or not electricity is applied.

The fixed member 161 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and its front side is flat except for the through holes for screw insertion, the fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, the rear side of the fixed member 161 is three-dimensional, projecting toward the rear side inside the thin-walled portion that abuts the base plate 60 on the outer periphery.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin portion is formed in a horizontally elongated, approximately elliptical frame shape, and a through hole large enough to accommodate this boundary portion 161a is formed through the base plate 60. In other words, the boundary portion 161a is the portion that is inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60.

Inside the boundary 161a, a specific winning opening 65a and an extended support plate 161b are formed, which are configured as a pair of roughly T-shaped supports on the left and right, and include a horizontally elongated plate-like portion that extends rearward slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a and is parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a, and a vertically elongated plate-like portion that extends downward midway through the horizontally elongated plate-like portion.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the area behind the specific winning opening 65a and the flow path of the sorting device 300, which will be described later. The protruding support portion 161c protruding from the horizontally elongated plate portion of the extended support plate 161b, the protruding support portion 161d protruding from the vertically elongated plate portion of the extended support plate 161b, and the protruding support portion 161e protruding from the upper surface of the lower edge of the boundary portion 161a function as parts that support the sorting device 300, and will be described in detail later.

The symmetrical protrusion 161f, which is protruded symmetrically below the center of the specific winning opening 65a inside the boundary 161a, has the function of contacting the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 and guiding the balls as they flow down.

Multiple through holes 161g for inserting the fastening screws that are screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged on the inside and outside of the boundary portion 161a. Multiple fastened portions 161h having female threads for inserting the fastening screws that are inserted into the receiving member 163 are arranged on the inside of the boundary portion 161a.

The fastening portion 161i, which has a female thread for threading the fastening screw inserted into the intervening member 164, is positioned outside the boundary portion 161a at the gap (center position from left to right) of the boundary portion 161a. In other words, the fastening portion 161i is disposed at the connection portion (see FIG. 9) between the through hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for inserting the second winning opening 140 and the electric role object 140a among the through holes formed in the base plate 60.

The front design component 162 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape to ensure a uniform distance from the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1). The balls are allowed to flow down within the area between the rear side of the front design component 162 and the front side of the fixed component 161.

The rear side of the front design member 162 is provided with a number of fastening portions 162a that are arranged in positions that match the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161 and have female threads that allow the fastening screws inserted into the through holes 161g to be screwed in, and a number of extension portions 162b, 162c that extend to the rear side in a shape that covers the fastening portions 162a from above.

The extensions 162b and 162c prevent the balls flowing between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened portion 162a, thereby improving the durability of the fastened portion 162a.

Furthermore, by forming the upper surfaces of the extensions 162b and 162c as inclined surfaces, it is possible to restrict the path of the balls flowing down. That is, by forming the upper surfaces of the extensions 162b (two locations on the left and right central sides) that are extended near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right outside, it is possible to prevent balls on the extensions 162b from flowing toward the specific winning opening 65a. That is, after the balls on the extensions 162b fall downward on the left and right outsides of the extensions 162b, they flow down along the inner rail 61 (see Figure 2) toward the outlet 71.

In addition, by forming the upper surfaces of the extension parts 162c (two parts on both the left and right ends) that extend to both the left and right ends as inclined surfaces that slope downwards toward the inside of the left and right sides, the flow path of the balls flowing on the extension parts 162c can be unified with the flow path of the balls on the extension parts 162b. This makes it possible to narrow the area in which the flowing balls are arranged compared to the number of balls flowing down (the ball arrangement density can be increased), and to secure areas where visibility is not obstructed by the balls (space where no flow path is formed).

The front design component 162 shown in FIG. 11 is blank and has good visibility on the back side, but the front design component 162 does not have to be blank. For example, the front side of the front design component 162 may be decorated by attaching a sticker with a pattern or character on it, or grooves may be dug in the front design component 162 with a geometric pattern, and the geometric pattern may be made visible by shining light into the grooves. The front design component 162 may also be blank or have the above-mentioned decorations added, and then be configured to be opaque.

The receiving member 163 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material in a horizontally elongated frame (or box) shape with the front side open, and includes the above-mentioned guide plate portion 163a2, the contact surface portion 163a3, the auxiliary contact surface 163a4, the lower surface portion 163a forming a flow-down surface inside the frame, the ball passing hole 163b arranged as a through hole through which the ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, a plurality of insertion holes 163c arranged at a position matching the fastening portion 161h of the fixed member 161 and through which fastening screws fastened to the fastening portion 161h are inserted from the back side, a pair of fastening portions 163d arranged on the left and right central sides as female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted into the intervening member 164 are screwed, and a plurality of fastening portions 163e having female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted into the state switching device 165 are screwed.

The lower surface 163a is formed as a left and right inclined surface that slopes downward to the left and right outward from the left and right central portions as apexes, and is provided with an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward to the rear at a position one step lower than the left and right outer ends of the left and right inclined surfaces, so that a ball flowing down the rear end of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 can pass through the ball passage hole 163b with little resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 that engages with the back side of the receiving member 163. In other words, the passage of the ball through the ball passage hole 163b is detected by the detection sensor SE1.

The intermediate member 164 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes a main body 164a having a light refracting surface that slopes downward toward the rear, a pair of insertion holes 164b formed through the upper side of the main body 164a and capable of receiving fastening screws screwed into the fastening portion 163d of the receiving member 163, a light emitting board 164c arranged above the insertion holes 164b and on which an LED is disposed, a pair of fastening portions 164d formed at both left and right ends of the lower end of the main body 164a with female threaded portions capable of receiving fastening screws inserted into the sorting device 300, and an insertion hole 164e formed through the upper side of the main body 164a and capable of receiving fastening screws screwed into the fastening portion 161i of the fixed member 161.

The light-emitting board 164c is disposed so that the surface on which the LEDs are arranged faces diagonally upward and forward, and in the assembled state, is positioned directly above the specific winning hole 65a when viewed from the front (see FIG. 6) and directly below the second winning hole 140. With this arrangement, the light from the light-emitting board 164c easily enters the field of vision of a player who is hoping for the ball to land in the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a and is gazing diagonally downward and backward at these locations.

Therefore, by controlling the LED of the light-emitting board 164c to light up when a ball has entered the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a, the player can easily know whether or not a ball has entered the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. This allows the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 to be more firmly fixed than when the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened to each other. In addition, the arrangement of the sorting device 300, which is connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164, can be stabilized, so that the relative positional deviation between the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300 can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion parts 165a through which fastening screws are inserted into the fastening part 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, a lower case part 165b formed in a deep box shape with a plurality of openings for wiring and heat dissipation and an open upper side, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case part 165b, a sliding part 165d that engages with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c and slides together with the plunger, a rotating part 165e that is rotatably supported by the lower case part 165b in such an arrangement that the rotating tip protrudes from the front end of the lower case part 165b and rotates with the sliding displacement of the sliding part 165d, and an upper cover part 165g that is fastened and fixed to the lower case part 165b by fastening screws inserted into a plurality of insertion holes 165f.

The tip of the rotating part 165e is recessed so that the rod-shaped part can engage with it, and the transmission protrusion 65c that protrudes rightward from the right end of the opening/closing plate 65b fits into this recess and engages with it. The transmission protrusion 65c is positioned eccentrically from the metal shaft rod part 65d that forms the rotation axis for the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b. By configuring it in this way, the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be caused to occur in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating part 165e.

Figures 13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. Figure 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from above, and Figure 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from below.

As shown in Figures 13 and 14, the sorting device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 164d of the intervening member 164 can be inserted therethrough, a middle member 330 that is fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the vertical direction and has a pair of insertion holes 331 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted therethrough, a substrate 350 that is housed between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310 and has a light emitting means 351 such as an LED disposed on the front side, and a substrate 350 that is connected to the middle member 330 and the upper member 310. It is equipped with a state switching device 360 that is housed in a position between the member 310 and is configured to be able to switch states depending on whether or not electricity is applied, a sliding displacement member 370 that is arranged below the middle member 330 and slides back and forth between a front position and a rear position as the state switching device 360 switches states, and a lower member 380 that is arranged below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the sliding displacement member 370 between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 and has an insertion hole 381 formed therethrough that can insert a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150.

Before describing the details of the configuration of each part, we will provide an overview of the function of the sorting device 300. The sorting device 300 is a device that configures a flow path along which balls that pass through the ball passage hole 163b (see Figure 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flow.

The balls that pass through the ball passage hole 163b flow down through the interior of the upper member 310, the flow path configurations 334, 335, and 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the interior of the lower member 380, and the balls that flow down from the lower member 380 are discharged into the ball discharge path (not shown).

The balls flowing down inside the distribution device 300 are configured to be visible to the player, and the way they flow down is not just a visual effect that pleases the player, but also has an effect related to gaming profits, such as bringing about changes in the profits that the player can obtain.

Differences in the flow patterns of balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 are mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes through.

As a result, the player's gaze will naturally tend to be focused on the location where the ball flows from the middle member 330 to the lower member 380 (where the slide displacement member 370 is located, as described below), so this embodiment is designed to accommodate this focus.

Next, the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be described in detail. The upper member 310 is a thin-walled member that is U-shaped when viewed from above and is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 formed therethrough to be able to receive balls, a pair of colored (red in this embodiment) transparent seal members 313 that are attached as markers, a pair of upper surface portions 314 that extend from the lower edge of the openings 312 along the outer periphery to the front side, a plurality of insertion tube portions 315 in which through holes are formed through which fastening screws that are screwed into the middle member 330 can be inserted, a fastening portion 316 having a female thread through which the fastening screw inserted into the middle member 330 can be screwed, and the upper member 310. 10 from the underside, a pair of long front-rear projections 317 arranged side by side, a pair of inner left-right projections 318 arranged between the pair of long front-rear projections 317, a pair of outer left-right projections 319 arranged on the outer left-right sides of the pair of long front-rear projections 317, a pair of inner left-right projections 319 arranged on the outer left-right sides of the pair of long front-rear projections 317, and a recess 320 formed as a recess large enough to accommodate the upper part of the substrate 350.

The opening 312 is a passage-like portion (tunnel-like portion) that receives balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and allows them to flow downward, and its upper front edge is shaped as if it had been cut with an inclined surface so that it is flush with the back surface of the plate of the inclined detection sensor SE1 (see Figure 12). This allows the upper front edge of the opening 312 to come into contact with the back surface of the plate of the detection sensor SE1.

In addition, the opening 312 is formed with an opening size that does not allow the ball to enter the inside of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed from the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. This reduces the flow resistance when guiding the ball that has passed through the ball passing hole 163b to the opening 312.

The sealing member 313 functions as a member that attracts the player's attention by receiving light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350 and becoming brightly visible, but details will be given later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is sloped to match the path that the ball takes below the upper member 310. The first upper surface portion 314a, which is located on the front side of the opening 312, is formed to slope downward as it approaches the front side, and the second upper surface portion 314b, which is connected to the front end of the first upper surface portion 314a and is located on the left and right inside, is formed to slope downward as it approaches the left and right inside. The left and right second upper surface portions 314b are configured so that the left and right distance between them is longer toward the front, thereby ensuring the player's visibility when viewing the ball through the second upper surface portions 314b.

The insertion tube portion 315 has a counterbore formed on the upper surface to receive the head of the fastening screw. Therefore, even though the fastening screw is inserted from above, it is easy to prevent the player from seeing the head of the fastening screw.

The insertion tube portion 315 is positioned to match the fastening portion 332d having a female thread formed in the inner member 330. In particular, the fastening portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion tube portion 315 also serves as a support portion that supports the rotating portion 363, as will be described in detail later.

The fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 316 is positioned with the screw portion facing upward and the screw head facing downward. Therefore, while the fastening portion 316 is positioned at the front, the screw head is not easily noticeable to a player viewing from diagonally above. This makes it possible to securely fasten the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 together while avoiding the fastening screw spoiling the appearance of the sorting device 300.

The reason why the fastening portion 316 is only formed on the right side is that since the insertion tube portion 315 is already arranged in two places on the rear side, one fastening position on the front side is sufficient, and although the screw head is facing downward and is not very noticeable, omitting it if unnecessary will improve the appearance of the sorting device 300. Note that the arrangement of the fastening portion 316 is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on the left side, or it may be arranged in a pair on the left and right.

The fastening portion 316 is positioned to avoid the path of the balls flowing down and to minimize any loss in appearance of the sorting device 300, as will be described in more detail below.

The undersides of the long front-rear projections 317, the inner left-right projections 318, and the outer left-right projections 319, which form each pair, are formed as curved surfaces that use the same point as a reference point and become lower the further away from that point. The curved surfaces of the long front-rear projections 317, the inner left-right projections 318, and the outer left-right projections 319 have different shapes, and the difference in shape is intended to control the way the ball flows down.

The middle member 330 includes the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (approximately box-shaped) with a lower bottom at the rear side, a pair of front frame portions 333 formed in a frame shape (approximately box-shaped) with a lower bottom at the front side, a pair of first flow path components 334 recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame portion 333 to form a flow path for the balls, a pair of second flow path components 335 connected to the front end of the first flow path components 334 to form a flow path for the balls and recessed in front of the front frame portion 333, and a pair of third flow path components 336 connected to the left and right inner ends of the second flow path components 335 to form a flow path for the balls and recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame portion 333.

The middle member 330 also includes a discharge hole 337 that is elongated from side to side and penetrates the lower base at the rear side of the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and functions as a discharge path for the balls; a partition plate portion 338 that is elongated in the front-rear direction and divides the discharge hole 337 and the third flow path component 336 into left and right parts; and a pair of alignment protrusions 339 that protrude from the lower surface at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 as elongated rectangular protrusions.

Unlike the front part which forms a path for the balls to flow down, the rear frame part 332 does not form a path for the balls to flow down, but is mainly configured as a part supporting the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame part 332 has an arrangement through hole 332a formed in the front end of the left-right center part in the vertical direction and configured to be able to arrange the slide displacement member 370, a guide hole 332b formed in the lower bottom part as a long through hole in the left-right direction and guiding the slide displacement of the guided part 362c of the state switching device 360, a plurality of fastened parts 332c having a female threaded part formed so that a fastening screw inserted into the lower member 380 can be screwed in, and a cylindrical fastened part 332d having a female threaded part at the upper tip into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion tube part 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed in.

The front frame portion 333 has a light diffusion treatment applied to the inside of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom, which reduces visibility of the rear side of the front frame portion 333. The front frame portion 333 is formed in a frame shape that is roughly square when viewed from above, and has an insertion hole 333a formed as a countersunk hole through which a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted.

The first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 are each parts that form the flow path of the balls, and are designed to have different flow directions and inclination angles of the balls, etc., but details will be given later.

The open portion 335a, which is open on the front side at the connection position between the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, is a gap that allows the symmetrical protrusion 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable winning device 65 to enter. In other words, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is positioned to enter the inside of the flow path through the open portion 335a so that it can abut against the balls flowing down the sorting device 300.

The discharge holes 337 are divided by a partition plate 338 and are configured as a pair on the left and right, and are formed with a size that allows the ball to be discharged in at least two ways. In other words, the left and right length is at least twice the diameter of the ball. In this embodiment, multiple detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side on the lower member 380 located below the discharge holes 337, so the shape of the discharge holes 337 can be designed to match the arrangement of the ball through holes of the detection sensors SE1.

The partition plate portion 338 not only separates the third flow path component 336 as described above, but also functions as a guide portion that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, as will be described in detail later. The alignment protrusion portion 339 is fitted into the protrusion portion 383a of the lower member 380 to prevent misalignment between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, as will be described in detail later.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T shape with the lower portion 353 being longer in the left-right direction than the upper portion 352, and has a recessed portion 354 for positioning at the lower end on the left side of the lower portion 353.

The recessed portion 354 engages with a corresponding portion of the internal shape of the middle member 330 to determine the position in the left-right direction, the left-right long lower portion 353 is supported by being sandwiched from the front and rear by the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 to determine the position in the front-rear direction, and the upper portion 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310 to prevent it from falling out upwards, thereby fixing the arrangement; details of the arrangement, together with the intention of the arrangement of the light emitting means 351, will be described later.

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the inner member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361, a sliding portion 362 that engages with the tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 for linear displacement in the left-right direction and slides together with the plunger, and a rotating portion 363 that is supported rotatably by being inserted through the fastened portion 332d on the left side and rotates in accordance with the sliding displacement of the sliding portion 362.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so that the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be received from above, a protruding portion 362b that protrudes to the right from the right side surface, and a guided portion 362c that protrudes downward from the center of the front and rear of the lower side surface and is formed with an oval cross section that is long in the left-right direction.

The disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above due to the direction in which the recessed portion 362a is formed, so that the slide portion 362 can be prevented from falling off upward. Therefore, the position of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disk portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the inner member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disk portion 361a with adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is inserted into the guide hole 332b of the inner member 330 to prevent the displacement direction of the sliding portion 362 from deviating from the left-right direction. In particular, in this embodiment, it is formed long in the left-right direction, so that the position of the sliding portion 362 can be maintained by engaging the guided portion 362c with the guide hole 332b. Note that the cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be, for example, circular or rectangular.

The rotating part 363 is formed in a generally L-shape when viewed from above, and includes a support tube part 363a formed in a vertically long cylindrical shape at the connection part of the L-shape and having a through hole large enough to insert the fastened part 332d of the middle member 330, an upper cylindrical part 363b protruding upward from the short end of the L-shape in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the through hole of the protruding part 362b, and a lower cylindrical part 363c protruding downward from the long end of the L-shape in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the recessed part 378 of the sliding displacement member 370.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the rotating part 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder part 363a as a central axis. The displacement of this rotating part 363 occurs due to a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the plunger slides and the slide part 362 is displaced in the left-right direction by passing electricity through the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the upper cylindrical part 363b inserted into the through hole of the protruding part 362b is displaced, and the lower cylindrical part 363c is displaced accordingly, resulting in the displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

The sliding displacement member 370 is a member supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at a position between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and includes a thin plate portion 371 supported by being sandwiched from above and below between the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, upper protrusions 376 protruding upward from the thin plate portion 371 in a pair on the left and right, and a recessed portion 378 recessed at the protruding end of the protrusion protruding upward in the left-right center rearward of the upper protrusions 376 and formed to be able to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

The thin plate portion 371 is provided with a pair of supported holes 371a formed on the left and right sides in the rear half, a recessed portion 372 recessed from the front end in the left and right center portion to a long length in the front-to-rear direction with a left-to-right width shorter than the spacing of the upper protrusions 376, a pair of lower protrusions 373 protruding downward in a protruding shape along the edge of the recessed portion 372, a plurality of upper and lower protrusions 374 protruding in both the up and down directions in a protruding shape along the left and right edges of the rear half, and a cylindrical protrusion 375 protruding downward from the rear end in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the long guide hole 386 of the lower member 380.

The lower protrusion 373 and the upper and lower protrusions 374 are intended to slide against the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 arranged above and below, and are protrusions for reducing the contact area with the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 compared to flat contact. By reducing the contact area, the displacement resistance of the sliding displacement member 370 can be reduced, and therefore the displacement speed of the sliding displacement member 370 can be prevented from slowing down.

The upper protrusion 376 is a columnar portion that is generally trapezoidal in front view, and is positioned so as to pass through the placement through-hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332. The width length of the gap on the left and right inner sides of the upper protrusion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper protrusion 376.

In other words, the upper protrusion 376 is arranged in the gap between the left and right inner sides so as to sandwich the partition plate 338, and is configured so that misalignment in the left and right direction is suppressed by contact with the partition plate 338. This allows the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 to be well guided, and the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole that is long in the left-right direction so that it can accommodate the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 that is required to cause the sliding displacement member 370 to displace in the front-rear direction.

The protruding portion in which the recess 378 is formed is configured to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332, so that the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 can be easily inserted into the recess 378.

In this way, the shape of the placement through hole 332a is designed as a through hole whose shape includes the entire area in which the upper protruding portion 376, which is intended to be inserted, and the protruding portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed, are placed.

The lower member 380 includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 381, a plate-like portion 382 formed in a long, thin plate shape on the left and right, and a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape below the plate-like portion 382 that allows multiple detection sensors SE1 (four in this embodiment) to be arranged side by side on the left and right.

The sensor holding frame 389 is formed in a frame shape with openings on the rear side where the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and on the top and bottom sides through which the ball passes through the through-hole of the detection sensor SE1, and the other parts are closed.

The plate-shaped portion 382 has a through hole formed at a position that matches the through hole of the detection sensor SE1, just as the sensor holding frame portion 389 has a through hole formed in the up-down direction. The plate-shaped portion 382 has a protrusion portion 383 that protrudes upward in the front-rear direction at the intermediate position between the two detection sensors SE1 on the left and right inside, a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions spaced apart on the left and right, and a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions spaced apart on the left and right sides, and a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions rearward of the protrusion portion 383 and are fitted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370. It is equipped with a pair of guide protrusions 384 that protrude in an insertable position, a pair of guide protrusions 385 that are formed as long protrusions in the front-rear direction at both left and right positions outside the guide protrusions 384, a long guide hole 386 that extends in the same straight line as the protrusions 383 when viewed from above, a curved surface portion 387 that is formed in a curved surface shape that protrudes rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 that is formed through so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 332c of the inner member 330 can be inserted.

The protrusion 383 is formed as a protrusion with a left-right thickness that is slightly shorter than the left-right gap width of the recess 372 of the sliding displacement member 370, and the sliding displacement member 370 is arranged so that the recess 372 sandwiches the protrusion 383. In other words, the protrusion 383 functions as a guide that guides the forward/rearward displacement of the sliding displacement member 370.

The protrusions 383a are designed so that their left and right inner ends are in the same position as the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 are fitted into the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a in abutting engagement, so that the left and right position of the middle member 330 can be appropriately determined with respect to the lower member 380. At the same time, the back side of the front frame part of the lower member 380 (the part connecting the protrusions 383 and the protrusions 383a at the front end side) is abutted against the front side of the alignment protrusions 339, so that the front and rear position of the middle member 330 can be appropriately determined with respect to the lower member 380.

This makes it easier to avoid misalignment between the third flow path configuration portion 336, which is a component of the middle member 330, and the detection sensor SE1, which is a component of the lower member 380.

The guide protrusion 384 is formed in an oval shape that is long from side to side, and is inserted into the supported hole 371a of the sliding displacement member 370 to limit the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370. In other words, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the range in which the guide protrusion 384 is disposed inside the supported hole 371a.

This prevents the sliding displacement member 370 from colliding with the protruding portion 383, and therefore improves the durability of the protruding portion 383 compared to a configuration in which the forward displacement end is determined at the position where the sliding displacement member 370 collides with the protruding portion 383. As a result, the guiding effect of the protruding portion 383 can be maintained for a long period of time.

The guide protrusion 384 does not immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 even if it is broken, but functions as a part to prevent collision with the protrusion 383. Therefore, while the guide protrusion 384 is usually designed with a strength that allows it to be used for a set period (e.g., three years) without being broken, the strength of the guide protrusion 384 and the protrusion 383 may be designed in anticipation of the use in a state in which the protrusion 383 and the slide displacement member 370 collide after the guide protrusion 384 is broken. In other words, the life of the guide protrusion 384 may be set to less than the set period (e.g., two years), and the remaining period may be designed to withstand the strength of the protrusion 383. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in the shape can be improved.

The guide ribs 385 are arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the left-right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370, and are formed so that the thin plate portion 371 can be placed in the gap. The displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement on the left-right inner side of the guide ribs 385. This allows the sliding displacement member 370 to be displaced in the front-rear direction with little misalignment in the left-right direction.

The guide slot 386 is a slot formed with a width large enough to allow the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the sliding displacement member 370 to pass through. The direction of displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is limited to the front-rear direction by the cylindrical protrusion 375 being guided by the guide slot 386.

The curved surface portion 387 is an abutment surface for guiding the ball flowing down below the inner member 330. In this embodiment, it guides the ball that enters the outlet 71, but details will be described later.

The fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. This makes it possible to prevent the fastening screw from being conspicuously visible. The insertion hole 388 is also positioned on the left and right outer side and on the rear side of the area in which the multiple detection sensors SE1 are arranged. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 will block the view of the ball passing near the detection sensor SE1 or through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the sliding displacement member 370 is guided by a number of parts, namely the guide ridge 385 for the thin plate portion 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, the protrusion 383 for the recessed portion 372 and the lower protrusion 373, the guide long hole 386 for the cylindrical protrusion 375, the partition plate portion 338 for the upper protrusion 376, etc., and displaces in the front-rear direction. This allows the load during guiding to be shared among a number of positions, preventing the load from being applied locally and avoiding damage to the sliding displacement member 370 and the guiding portion that guides the sliding displacement member 370.

As can be seen from this, the sliding displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by at least a plurality of members, the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, the sliding displacement member 370 has at least a pair of upper protrusions 376 guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed portion 372 guided by the protrusion portion 383 of the lower member 380.

Therefore, if the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are poorly assembled and there is a large misalignment, the movement of the sliding displacement member 370 will be hindered. Here, since the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are parts that continuously configure the ball's flow path, it is preferable to keep the misalignment small, and by making the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 good, it is possible to ensure that the misalignment is small.

In other words, if the misalignment of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 will not be performed properly, and by detecting that the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 is poor, it is possible to control the system to issue an error notification because there is a possibility that the relative positioning of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor.

This prevents the player from continuing to play with the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 in a poor relative positioning, reducing the possibility of the player suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, the internal structure of the sorting device 300 will be described in detail. Here, the configuration related to the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 and the configuration entering the flow path of the balls will be mainly described.

Figure 15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300, Figure 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVI-XVI in Figure 15, Figure 17 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15, and Figure 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15.

In the figures from Fig. 15 to Fig. 18, the opening and closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state in which it is disposed in the front position. First, the details of the flow path of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be described.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)), a ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b rolls on the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passing hole 163b. The ball that passes through the ball passing hole 163b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path component 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path component 334, the subsequent second flow path component 335, and the subsequent third flow path component 336 are all configured as inclined flow paths that slope downward, and the connected flow paths are formed into a spiral shape that forms an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path component 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the front side in the front-to-rear direction, the second flow path component 335 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down in a left-to-right direction rotated 90 degrees based on the flow direction of the ball flowing down the first flow path component 334, and the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the back side in the front-to-rear direction rotated 90 degrees in the same direction as the previous rotation direction based on the flow direction of the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335.

In this way, by forming the flow path into a spiral shape with a right-angled bend, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the flow velocity of the ball increases as it moves downstream. In more detail, the ball flows down the first flow path component 334 accelerating toward the front side, but the flow direction in the subsequent second flow path component 335 does not have a front-to-rear component, so it is possible to realize a flow pattern in which the influence of the acceleration in the first flow path component 334 is suppressed. Furthermore, in the third flow path component 336 following the second flow path component 335, the ball flows backward, which is the opposite of the acceleration direction in the first flow path component 334, so it is possible to realize a flow pattern in which the influence of the acceleration in the front-to-rear direction is suppressed.

Therefore, unlike a flow pattern in which the ball flows consistently in the same direction (e.g., to the left), it is easier to prevent the ball's flow speed from becoming excessively fast downstream. In other words, it is easier to make the ball's flow speed uniform throughout the entire flow path, which has the effect of keeping the player's attention on the ball high and making it easier to prevent the player from losing sight of the ball.

For example, it is also possible not to form the second flow path component 335, but forming the second flow path component 335 makes it easier to prevent clogging and backflow of the balls. If the second flow path component 335 is not formed (if the left-right length of the second flow path component 335 is 0), that is, if the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 are connected, it becomes necessary to reverse the flow direction of the balls by 180 degrees from the flow toward the front to the flow toward the rear at the connection point. In this case, the switching angle of the flow direction of the balls is large, and in particular the speed direction needs to be reversed back and forth, making it difficult to make the balls flow smoothly, and the balls are likely to become stuck, clogged, or flow back, which may cause problems.

In contrast, as in this embodiment, if the flow direction switching angle is 90 degrees or less (90 degrees in this embodiment), the ball's speed direction does not reverse, so the ball can flow smoothly, making it easier to avoid the ball becoming stuck, clogging, or flowing back.

The flow path shape at the connection end of each flow path component 334 to 336 will be described. At the connection end of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, the above-mentioned symmetrical protrusion 161f is arranged as a part that guides the flow of the ball in a manner that bends the flow direction of the ball.

The symmetrical protrusions 161f are formed so that the portion located downstream of the ball is further back from the path of the ball than the portion located upstream of the ball. For example, the width of the opposing symmetrical protrusions 161f is longer than the width of the adjacent partition plate portions 338. In addition, the rear ends of the left and right ends of the opposing symmetrical protrusions 161f are positioned closer to the front than the flow path side of the second flow path configuration portion 335 near the open portion 335a (see FIG. 17).

This prevents the ball from being excessively decelerated or from flowing backwards when the ball collides with the symmetrical protrusion 161f.

In addition, at the connection end between the second flow path component 335 and the first flow path component 334, the side wall portion 334a is curved at the front left and right ends of the central member 330 and is formed as a portion that guides the flow of the ball by bending the flow direction of the ball.

In addition, at the upstream end of the first flow path forming part 334, a curved protrusion 334b is formed that protrudes upward from the downstream surface of the first flow path forming part 334 with a curved surface shape (see Figure 16) that descends toward the front side, and is formed as a part that guides the downstream flow of the ball in a manner that bends the downstream direction of the ball.

That is, the ball that passes through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first flow path forming part 334, and while flowing down, the ball abuts against the side wall part 334a, changing the flow direction, flows down the second flow path forming part 335, and while flowing down, the ball abuts against the symmetrical protrusion part 161f, changing the flow direction, flows down the third flow path forming part 336, and reaches the discharge hole 337.

The side wall portion 334a is formed in a shape that can be engaged with the protruding support portion 161d of the fixed member 161 and aligned. In other words, the side wall portion 334a is supported by being sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and misalignment in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 can be aligned in the left-right direction.

The longitudinal inclination angle and length ratio of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 will be described below. With regard to the longitudinal inclination angle, the first flow path component 334 has an inclination angle of approximately 7 degrees relative to the horizontal, the second flow path component 335 has an inclination angle of approximately 5 degrees relative to the horizontal, and the third flow path component 336 has an inclination angle of approximately 5 degrees relative to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path component 334, and a slightly gentler common inclination angle is set in the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

Regarding length, each flow path component 334-336 is formed so that the front frame portion 333, which is formed with a square outer shape when viewed from above, forms the inner side, and a large square having the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame portion 333 forms the outer side. Here, in this embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the large square described above is 45 mm, forming a flow path with a width of 12 mm around the perimeter.

Therefore, for a normally used 11 mm diameter sphere, the clearance with the flow path is set to 1 mm total on both sides of the sphere, so the sphere flows down with almost no misalignment in the width direction. Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see Figure 2) and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) is set at approximately 19 mm, this is a small clearance, and misalignment of the sphere as it flows down can be suppressed.

Of the parts constituting the ends of each flow path component 334-336 arranged on a square surrounding the periphery of the square-shaped front frame portion 333, only the curved protrusion 334b constituting the upstream end of the first flow path component 334 is arranged inside (on the front side) the apex of the square, so the first flow path component 334 is shorter than the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

In terms of actual measurements when viewed from above, the flow paths formed by the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 are approximately the same length (33 mm center-to-center spacing of the spheres), and this length is approximately 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path component 334 (22 mm center-to-center spacing of the spheres).

The longitudinal inclination angle and length ratio of each of the flow path components 334-336 described above explain that the time required for a ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334-336 is not constant. In other words, the time it takes for a ball to pass through the first flow path component 334, which has the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length, is shorter than the time it takes for a ball to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, which have a gentler inclination angle and a path length 1.5 times longer.

In this embodiment, by configuring it in this manner, the ball can be displaced to the front side early on when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, and the ball's visibility can be reduced by being partially hidden by the non-transparent resin part of the detection sensor SE1, switching the state to one where the ball is closer to the player and has high visibility. This makes it easier to avoid situations where the player loses sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

Furthermore, when the visibility of the ball is high, the speed at which the ball flows down can be slowed down, eliminating the need for the player to quickly move their gaze toward the ball, reducing the gaming burden on the player who is focusing on the ball (eye strain caused by eye movement).

When focusing on a ball flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, which have thus increased visibility, the amount of displacement of the ball in a front-to-back direction when viewed from the front is smaller when the ball flows down the third flow path component 336 compared to when the ball flows down the second flow path component 335 in the left-to-right direction. Therefore, the playing burden on the player focusing on the ball can be minimized when focusing on the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336.

In other words, since the lengths and inclination angles are equivalent, the time required for the ball to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path component 336 are equivalent, but since the amount of displacement of the ball when viewed from the front is different, the apparent flow speed of the ball (the displacement speed of the ball when viewed from the front) is slower for the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 than for the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335.

The only place where the ball's flow path changes is at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, where the player's burden is minimized and the player's attention is easily drawn to the ball, and in other areas the ball's flow path is the same for each of the flow path components 334 to 336. Therefore, the player's line of sight is naturally likely to be focused on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and the game burden on the player who focuses their gaze in this way can be effectively reduced.

In addition, in order to ensure the player's field of vision when focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, in this embodiment, an opening 335a is formed on the front side of the second flow path component 335 (see Figure 17), which makes it possible to prevent the flesh of the second flow path component 335 from obstructing the line of sight toward the third flow path component 336.

Furthermore, the symmetrical protrusion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a is formed only with the portion necessary for contacting and guiding the flowing ball, and the formation of shaped portions is omitted above and below it. In other words, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed as a thin plate-like portion on the top and bottom, and space is secured above and below it (see FIG. 18). Therefore, compared to when the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed with thickness on the top and bottom, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the line of sight toward the rear end of the third flow path configuration portion 336 will be obstructed by the symmetrical protrusion 161f, and visibility can be improved.

The third flow path component 336 is also configured so that balls that deviate from the opening/closing plate 65b and head toward the outlet 71 gather toward the field of view centered on the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in this embodiment, balls that enter the outlet 71 flow downward below the third flow path component 336, come into contact with the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and are discharged downward.

Assuming that the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 are viewed from the diagonally upward front, the balls entering the outlet 71 will flow down the back side of the third flow path component 336. As a result, the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 and the balls entering the outlet 71 will be viewed overlapping from the front to the back, and the total number of balls entering the field of view focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336 will be increased.

In other words, regardless of whether the ball enters the specific winning port 65a and flows down the third flow path component 336, or whether the ball does not enter the specific winning port 65a and enters the out port 71, the ball will enter a field of view that draws attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, regardless of the ease with which the balls are directed toward the specific winning port 65a, i.e., the configuration of the nails set into the base plate 60 (the so-called quality of the gauge), the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (the part that attracts the player's attention) is positioned at a position that overlaps in the front-to-rear direction with the position where most of the shot balls (excluding balls that enter the other winning ports 63, 64, 140) gather. This allows the balls flowing down to efficiently guide the player's gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

As described above, visibility has been improved in positions closer to the front side, but in this embodiment, visibility in positions closer to the back side is reduced except for the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

For example, a light diffusion surface 333b is formed on the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the inner member 330 in a shape similar to a prism to cause light diffusion. In FIG. 17, the area that appears sawtooth-like is the light diffusion surface 333b, which is formed on almost the entire inner circumference of the inner surface, from top to bottom.

When light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions, making the entire surface appear to be shining, and while it is possible to make the surface appear to be shining brilliantly, the light blocks the view, making the visibility of the area behind it poor. According to this embodiment, visibility is poor when light is irradiated from the light-emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when light is not irradiated, visibility can be improved at least compared to when light is irradiated.

On the other hand, if there is an object blocking the light, the shadow of the object will be seen as a black dot, making its position easier to determine.

Surfaces similar to the light diffusion surface 333b are also formed in other areas. For example, light diffusion surface 319a is formed on the rear side of the left and right external protrusions 319, and light diffusion surface 332e is formed on the rear side of the front part of the rear frame portion 332 (see FIG. 17).

Examples of processed surfaces formed in a similar shape include the light diffusion processed surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the plate-like portion extending to the rear side of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, which is a portion that covers the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the portion of the middle member 330 that is forward of the rear frame portion 332.

In this embodiment, due to these configurations, the flow paths formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow path components 334 to 336 have light diffusing surfaces formed on the back side, bottom side, inner surface of the spiral, and upper surface of the spiral, achieving the effect of changing visibility due to light irradiation.

When no light is irradiated onto the light diffusion surface, from the player's perspective looking at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 from the front side, the ball that has changed direction left or right from the third flow path component 336 is hidden by the front frame portion 333, making it immediately difficult to see.

Furthermore, even if a player tries to see the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 held in the sensor holding frame 389 and fallen from the player's line of sight when viewed from diagonally above, the line of sight passes through the light diffusion surface 340, and light is irradiated onto the light diffusion surface 340, making it difficult to identify the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 and fallen.

In this embodiment, as described below, the profit obtained by the player is controlled to change depending on how the ball flows down the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, in order to understand how the ball flows down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336, it becomes necessary to check the behavior of the ball at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, which can further improve attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

On the other hand, if light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, it is possible to create a state in which the shadow of the ball is easily visible as a black spot. In this way, by switching between the presence and absence of light irradiation depending on the situation, it is possible to switch between good and bad visibility of the ball. Also, depending on whether or not a ball is placed in front of the black spot, it is possible to create a situation in which the black spot is hidden by the ball, and a situation in which the black spot is visible and not hidden by the ball.

As described above, the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed near each of the flow path components 334 to 336, but are consistently formed on the side that does not come into contact with the spheres flowing down the flow paths formed by each of the flow path components 334 to 336.

This prevents the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 from being scraped off by contact with the sphere, so the shape of the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be maintained for a long period of time, and the light diffusion effect can be maintained.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the ball from coming into contact with the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340, which would hinder the ball's flow downward or slow it down. In addition, by ensuring visibility inside the flow path, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the ball from decreasing even while it is flowing down the flow path formed by each flow path component 334 to 336.

The light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the size of the prism, it is possible to create both the effect of light diffusion and the effect of decelerating the ball by colliding with it.

In the front frame portion 333 of the inner member 330, the formation of the light diffusion surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastened portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and there is a possibility that visibility will remain high without measures. Therefore, in this embodiment, the fastening screw is used to reduce visibility.

That is, the fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transparent, so that it can be used to conceal areas where it would be difficult to form the light diffusion surface 333b. When light is irradiated onto the front frame portion 333, the light diffusion surface 333b shines brilliantly, and in areas where the light diffusion surface 333b is omitted, the fastening screw reflects the light and shines, so that it is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the front frame portion 333 when viewed from the front side, including areas where the light diffusion surface 333b is omitted.

The light-diffusing surface 332e of the inner member 330 is formed on the back side of each flow path component 334-336, and in addition to providing a brilliant glow, the purpose of this is to provide a function of concealing the board 350 and the state switching device 360 that are disposed on the back side. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is disposed on the back side of the board 350 (see FIG. 17), the board 350 acts as a screen, making it easier to prevent the state switching device 360 from being seen by the player.

The substrate 350 is housed in a manner that it is supported by the rear frame portion 332 of the inner member 330, but is positioned with a gap between it and the bottom of the rear frame portion 332 at the center from left to right, and the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in that gap (see FIG. 18). In other words, the substrate 350 is positioned so that the sliding displacement member 370 is sandwiched between it and the bottom of the rear frame portion 332.

In more detail, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower portion 353 is sandwiched from the front and rear by the rear frame portion 332 at the left and right ends (see FIG. 17). At this support point, the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 has a thick portion 332f (see FIG. 16), and near the left and right center position, a gap is created due to the absence of this thick portion, and the sliding displacement member 370 can be placed in this gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the storage recess 320 of the upper member 310 and is positioned opposite the light diffusion surface 164f formed on the intervening member 164 in the front-to-rear direction.

Therefore, by irradiating light from the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper portion 352, the light diffusing surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can have a brilliantly shining effect, and further, the visibility of the area on the back side of the intervening member 164 can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper portion 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion surface 164f, and since the light diffusion surface 164f has a cross-sectional shape imitating a prism formed along the entire surface in the vertical direction, the light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as a light with a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's point of view, it can be made to appear as if light is being emitted from above and below the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the light diffusion surface 164f is positioned at the center of the left and right of the receiving member 163. However, even if it is positioned behind the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 will obstruct the view and will not be clearly visible. Therefore, if it is formed within the gap between at least one pair of detection sensors SE1, a sufficient effect can be achieved.

The lower portion 353 of the substrate 350 is positioned so that light is directed toward the sealing member 313 and the portion below it through which the balls flow, as will be described in more detail below.

Next, referring to Figures 19 and 20, we will explain the switching of the flow path of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336 and its significance. In the explanation of Figures 19 and 20, Figures 15 to 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

Figure 19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15, and Figure 20 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. In Figures 19 and 20, when shown, the opening and closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state disposed in a rear position.

Here, we will explain the four detection sensors SE1 on the left and right sides supported by the sensor holding frame 389, the flow of the balls to each detection sensor SE1, and the function of each detection sensor SE1.

The four detection sensors SE1 are arranged symmetrically in two sets, and include a special chance detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12, which share the same function. The special chance detection sensor SE11 is arranged on the inside in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged on the outside in the left-right direction.

The function of these four detection sensors SE1 is different from that of the detection sensor SE1 located behind the opening and closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 located behind the opening and closing plate 65b is a ball entry sensor that causes the payout of prize balls. In other words, when a ball that has entered a specific winning opening 65a is detected as having entered the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 for each detection) are paid out to the player by the payout control device 111 (see Figure 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389 does not function as a detection sensor that pays out prize balls, but rather as a detection sensor that detects balls entering the machine and changes the game state after the big win game ends.

As described later, in this embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 disposed in the sensor holding frame 389 is used to switch whether or not to transition to a high probability state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor to switch whether or not the next jackpot will be won.

When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the front position (see Figures 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is positioned so that the thin plate portion 371 covers the upper side of the probability change detection sensor SE11, preventing the ball from passing through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end of the third flow path configuration portion 336 is guided by the upper protrusion portion 376 of the slide displacement member to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 that faces the ball is formed in an arc shape with a concave flow path side, so that the ball can flow smoothly toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position (see Figures 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 retreats rearward from above the probability change detection sensor SE11, allowing the ball to pass through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In other words, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the position (front position or rear position) of the slide displacement member 370. Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through-hole of the special probability detection sensor SE11 during a jackpot game, the game state after that jackpot game is controlled to be the special probability state. In other words, when it is not detected that the ball has passed through the through-hole of the special probability detection sensor SE11, and it has only passed through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after that jackpot game is controlled to be the normal state (or time-saving state).

As described above, in this embodiment, two types of jackpots are prepared: a guaranteed jackpot and a normal jackpot. To achieve this, in this embodiment, different operation patterns are prepared for the sliding displacement member 370 for each type of jackpot.

In other words, in the case of a guaranteed jackpot, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operating pattern that allows the ball to easily pass through the through-hole of the guaranteed jackpot detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operating pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the through-hole of the guaranteed jackpot detection sensor SE11 and makes it easy for the ball to pass through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12; details of this control will be described later.

In this way, the placement of the sliding displacement members 370 is directly related to the profits that the player can obtain, and so the placement naturally attracts the player's attention. On the other hand, there have been quite a few instances of fraudulent attempts to illegally switch the placement of the sliding displacement members 370, and measures against this are considered important.

As a premise, the position of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360. In other words, when no current is applied to the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are positioned on the right side by a biasing spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is positioned on the front side, so that the slide displacement member 370 is maintained in the front position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left by electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the portion inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370) is displaced toward the rear side, thereby maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the rear position. This is the normal operating mode, and there is a one-to-one correspondence between the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

A person committing the above-mentioned fraudulent acts may, for example, insert a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the distribution device 300 through the ball dispensing opening or the gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see Figure 1), and press the thin metal wire against the sliding displacement member 370, pushing the sliding displacement member 370 toward the back, thereby fraudulently creating a state in which a ball can enter the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the sliding displacement member 370 is arranged such that the thin plate portion 371 is disposed below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 18), so when a thin metal wire is passed through the third flow path forming portion 336 and pressed against the sliding displacement member 370, it is difficult to press the thin plate portion 371 against the front end portion, and the thin plate portion 371 is pressed against the upper protrusion portion 376. The front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion portion 376 is curved to release the load to the left and right sides as described above, so that even if the thin metal wire is pressed against it, the load can be released to the left and right sides, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the sliding displacement member 370 is improperly displaced to the rear position.

In addition, the path taken to reach the sliding displacement member 370 is not a straight line but a spiral, and the sliding displacement member 370 itself is located far away (approximately 10 cm) from the front side to the rear side of the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1), making it difficult for the thin metal wire to reach the sliding displacement member 370 in the first place.

These configurations also have the effect of improving the design freedom of the configuration of the state switching device 360. That is, in the past, in order to deal with the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, the position of the sliding displacement member 370 was often maintained by mechanically devising (displacement regulation) the mechanism that transmits the driving force, and in such cases the configuration of the state switching device 360 was limited. In contrast, in this embodiment, by configuring the sliding displacement member 370 so that it is difficult to apply load to it in the first place, it is possible to partially omit the conditions required for the state switching device 360, and the design freedom of the state switching device 360 can be increased.

In addition, when a pressure load is applied to the slide displacement member 370 by using a thin metal wire threaded through the third flow path component 336, the thin metal wire itself will obstruct the flow of the ball down the third flow path component 336, making it difficult for the ball to reach the probability change detection sensor SE11.

As mentioned above, the profit a player can obtain varies greatly depending on whether the ball passes through the through-hole of the special bonus detection sensor SE11 or the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, so it is desirable to avoid erroneous balls as much as possible.

In conventional models, it was common to configure the system to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are permitted to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11. However, in this embodiment, no movable parts are provided to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are permitted to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11 (see Figures 19 and 20), and the system is configured to allow balls to enter the normal detection sensor SE12 as well.

Even with this configuration, if at least one of the 10 balls that flow down passes through the through hole of the special probability detection sensor SE11, the special probability state after the big win is ensured. Based on this concept, this embodiment omits the placement of the movable parts that open and close the normal detection sensor SE12, thereby reducing material costs and reducing product costs. Furthermore, not placing a movable part has the positive effect of eliminating the need for maintenance associated with breakdowns or malfunctions of the movable parts, and of extending the lifespan of the pachinko machine beyond the lifespan of the movable parts.

On the other hand, as a measure separate from the movable member, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 have been devised to guide the ball to the appropriate detection sensor SE1. In other words, the shape of the parts fixedly positioned inside the flow path (i.e., the protrusions 317, 318, 319) is used to realize a mechanism that prevents more balls than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position. This will be explained below.

First, the design of the flow path shape will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward at an angle of 5 degrees from the horizontal toward the center in the left-right direction (toward the partition plate portion 338) in the short direction (see FIG. 15).

This inclination angle is set to be the same angle and direction as the longitudinal inclination of the second flow path component 335, so that it is possible to reduce the bouncing of the ball (bouncing away from the partition plate portion 338) when the ball flows from the second flow path component 335 to the third flow path component 336.

This inclination in the short direction allows the positioning of the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 to be closer to the partition plate portion 338. Therefore, as the balls flow from the rear end of the third flow path component 336 to the detection sensor SE1 side, they can be positioned closer to the partition plate portion 338, reducing the possibility of the balls accidentally passing through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 positioned away from the partition plate portion 338) when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position.

In addition, regardless of the inclination of the short side of the lower bottom surface 336a, the flow paths formed by each flow path component 334-336 have a left-right path formed only by the second flow path component 335, and the inclination direction is toward the left-right center (toward the partition plate portion 338), so the left-right velocity occurs inward to the left and right. This also reduces the possibility of the ball erroneously passing through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 arranged away from the partition plate portion 338).

Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 will be described. The left and right inner protrusions 318 are the first to be positioned adjacent to the ball that has flowed down the third flow path component 336. The left and right inner protrusions 318 are the smallest of the protrusions 317, 318, 319, but are positioned closer to the front than the center of the detection sensor SE1 and closer to the front than the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370, so that they come into contact without fail with the ball that passes the rear end of the third flow path component 336 while sliding against the partition plate 338.

The protruding end surfaces of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are configured as curved surfaces that are concave downward when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the protrusion is formed to extend outward and downward to the left and right than the front end side of the protrusion, so that the front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, a ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and abuts against the left and right inner protrusions 318 receives a load in a direction that is a mixture of a left and right outward component and a downward component, and flows downward.

On the other hand, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are small, the load received from the left and right inner protrusions 318 alone does not determine whether the ball flows downward or outward, but rather functions solely as a momentum imparting force. Furthermore, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are positioned upstream of the slide displacement member 370, the momentum imparted to the ball occurs regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370.

The flow of the ball after it comes into contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318 will be explained in different cases. When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while coming into contact with the upper protrusion 376 and the front-rear long protrusion 317 (see Figure 18), and flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12.

The protruding end of the long front-rear protrusion 317 has the same purpose as the upper protrusion 376. That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the flow direction of the ball, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is approximately the same as the radius of curvature of the front side 376a of the upper protrusion 376. As a guideline, the upper protrusion 376 forms a curved surface that starts on the inner left and right sides and ends at a position rear of the center position of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 when viewed from above (see FIG. 17), while the long front-rear protrusion 317 forms a curved surface that starts on the ceiling surface of the flow path and ends at a position close to the end position (rear end position) of the front side 376a at the front position of the slide displacement member 370 when viewed from the left and right (see FIG. 18).

Here, the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward outward to the left and right, and the ball is forced outward to the left and right by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318, and uses that momentum to flow down in the outward left and right direction, allowing the ball to flow down smoothly.

Furthermore, left and right external protrusions 319 are formed above the ball flowing outward to the left and right, and ball bouncing is suppressed, allowing the ball to flow smoothly down the ball. Since the purpose of left and right external protrusions 319 is not to change the direction the ball flows down, but to suppress ball bouncing, its shape is significantly different from front and rear long protrusions 317, and its protruding end is formed as a curved surface with a large radius of curvature that extends from above the special rate detection sensor SE11 to above the normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in this embodiment, the left and right external protrusions 319 are disposed closer to the front than the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (i.e., the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), so when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact in the vertical direction, the center of the ball is likely to be disposed rearward of the center of the thickness of the left and right external protrusions 319. Therefore, when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact in the vertical direction, a load having a rearward component is likely to be applied to the ball, which makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing back toward the front.

These configurations make it easier to prevent balls from clogging or flowing backwards when multiple balls are flowing downstream.

When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper protrusion portion 376 are retracted rearward of the long front-rear protrusion portion 317, so the ball abuts against the long front-rear protrusion portion 317 and flows.

The surface shape of the protruding end (curved surface) of the long front-rear protrusion 317 is shaped so that the normal passes through the center of the third flow path component 336, and the center of the thickness is located directly behind the center position of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, so it is easy to apply a load to the ball that it comes into contact with that has a suppressed left-right component. This load functions as a load that flows the ball diagonally downward and forward, because the protruding tip of the long front-rear protrusion 317 is shaped like a concave curved surface (see Figure 20).

Therefore, if the ball does not go all the way to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner protrusions 318, it will be subjected to a load from the front and rear long protrusions 317 diagonally downward and flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11.

Depending on the location of impact with the front-rear long protrusions 317, there is a concern that the ball may bounce back to the front side (causing a backflow). However, in this embodiment, as described above, the ball is given momentum diagonally downward to the left and right by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318. Therefore, even if the ball bounces back to the front side, it will only collide with the rear end of the lower base of the third flow path component 336 (see Figure 20) or the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 (see Figure 19), making it easier to avoid the ball flowing back through the third flow path component 336.

What is unique about this embodiment is that even when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned at the rear and the ball flows toward the special rate detection sensor SE11, the ball is displaced outward to the left and right due to the load from the left and right inner protrusions 318, just as it is when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned at the front and the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12. The use of this will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be able to slide between a front position and a rear position. If the slide displacement member 370 performs a closing operation (movement from the rear position to the front position) while the ball is flowing down the third flow path component 336 toward the slide displacement member 370, a forward load may be applied to the ball, and a load may be applied in a direction (forward) that causes the ball to flow backward through the third flow path component 336.

To prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if the closing operation is controlled to be completed before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the slide displacement member 370 during operation can be eliminated, thereby reducing the possibility of the ball flowing back.

In addition, by forming the front surface of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 as a curved surface facing outward to the left and right, and by positioning the left and right inner protrusions 318 so that they collide with all balls, it is possible to create an action of guiding the balls that reach the rear end of the third flow path component 336 outward to the left and right. This makes it difficult for the balls to flow back.

In addition, the opening movement of the sliding displacement member 370 (movement from the front position to the rear position) is not a movement in a direction opposite to the ball, but rather a movement away from the ball, so even if the movement is performed when the ball is resting on the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370, a load that pushes the ball back toward the front is unlikely to be generated. Therefore, even if the opening movement is controlled to be performed at any timing without taking into account the position of the ball, it is not thought to make it easier for the ball to flow back.

When the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the top surface of the sliding displacement member 370 (still in the early stages of flowing outward to the left or right), the opening action of the sliding displacement member 370 applies a load to the ball in a direction that suppresses the rotation (in the direction that causes the ball to roll backwards), so the rotation of the ball can be stopped, the flow of the ball can be halted, and it becomes easier to move into free fall.

As a result, when the sliding displacement member 370 opens while the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is easier to prevent the ball from being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the momentum of its previous rolling, and it is easier to guide the ball to the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In the present embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 equipped with the above-mentioned sorting device 300, we will explain how the sorting device 300 looks from the player's point of view. Below, as an example, we will explain cases where the angle of the line of sight relative to the horizontal direction is different.

Figure 21 is a front view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, Figure 22 is a perspective view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXII in Figure 16, and Figure 23 is a perspective view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in Figure 16.

As a premise, a player operating the pachinko machine 10 can play in any posture he or she likes, except for gripping and rotating the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, a player may play the game with his or her head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a line of sight that is horizontal or inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 22), or he or she may play the game by bringing his or her head closer to the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight that is inclined downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 23). In general, the former provides a wider field of view, but makes it difficult to notice small details, while the latter provides a narrower field of view, but makes it easier to notice small details within that field of view.

Figure 21 is shown as a reference, and the following explanation will be mainly made by comparing Figures 22 and 23. For convenience, Figures 21 to 23 show the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is shown by imaginary lines. Note that the light emitting means 351 are arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), but only the left half is shown to facilitate understanding. The function of the light emitting means 351 located at the top has been described above, so here we will explain the three light emitting means 351 in the left half located in the lower portion 353.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 irradiates light towards the seal member 313. As described above, the seal member 313 is formed in a red transparent color, so when light is irradiated from the light emitting means 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. This can increase the player's attention to the seal member 313 and its surroundings. As the seal member 313 is disposed directly above the third flow path forming portion 336 (see Figure 18), it can draw attention to the third flow path forming portion 336.

The light diffusion surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351 (see FIG. 18). This prevents the light from the light emitting means 351 from being visually stretched in the vertical direction by the light diffusion surface 332e, and allows the light to be concentrated around the sealing member 313.

Although there are no limitations to the light emission control, for example, during a jackpot game, in a situation where it is desired to draw attention to the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336, it is possible to control the light to be irradiated onto the sealing member 313, thereby drawing attention to the sealing member 313 and naturally guiding the gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 located below it.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to the positions directly above the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, the light emitting means 351 is controlled so that when the ball enters the special chance detection sensor SE11, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the special chance detection sensor SE11 emits light, whereas when the ball enters the normal detection sensor SE12, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the normal detection sensor SE12 emits light, thereby notifying the player of the location where the ball has passed.

The light emitted from these light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed toward the light diffusion surface. That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right center sides is arranged opposite the light diffusion surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides is arranged opposite the light diffusion surface 319a (see FIG. 17). The light diffusion surfaces 319a and 332e are formed across the top and bottom of each part.

Therefore, the position at which the light from the light emitting means 351 is visible is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351, but is formed as a range that spreads vertically (visualized as a strip of light extending vertically). Therefore, as shown in Figures 21 to 23, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes.

The angle of the downward inclination from the horizontal in FIG. 22 (5 degrees) is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 can be seen. However, because the slide displacement member 370 displaces in the front-to-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp the changes caused by the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 from this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 23, when viewed from a direction at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is narrower, making it more difficult to confirm the change in the flow pattern of the balls at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 compared to the view in Figure 22. However, in this field of view, it is easier to grasp the displacement of the upper protrusion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 332a for placement of the inner member 330 is formed as an opening of a minimum size sufficient to pass the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370 through, so that the state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) placed inside the rear frame portion 332 can be hidden so as to be difficult to see.

During an actual jackpot game, multiple balls are guided to the specific winning port 65a during a round of play, and flow down each of the flow path components 334-336 in order. When multiple balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 at the same time, there is a possibility that the line of sight to the ball at the back will be obstructed by the ball at the front.

For example, when multiple spheres are placed in the third flow path configuration portion 336, the spheres are placed in the same position in FIG. 22. Therefore, the sphere in the front hides the sphere in the back.

In addition, when a ball normally flows toward the detection sensor SE12, it flows outward in the left-right direction from the rear end of the third flow path component 336. After it leaves the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction, visibility is reduced due to the light diffusion surface 333b of the front frame portion 333, so it is preferable to grasp the movement of the ball in the process of leaving the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction. However, if there is a ball (a ball that is slightly shifted left-right from the third flow path component 336) that flows from the downstream end position of the second flow path component 335 (position of ball P1) to the upstream end position of the third flow path component 336 (position of ball P2), the ball will hide the ball in the process of leaving the rear end of the third flow path component 336 in the left-right direction.

In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can be grasped by visually checking whether the flow direction of the ball has switched to the left or right outside at the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336, and it is sufficient to pay attention to the inside and right edge periphery of the third flow path configuration part 336. In contrast, in this embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path configuration part 336 and the second flow path configuration part 335 on the upstream side in the line of sight, it is configured so that the ball can flow down a path that includes the inside and right edge periphery of the third flow path configuration part 336 (movement from the position of ball P1 to the position of ball P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the ball flowing down the upstream side, it may be impossible to grasp whether the ball has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In addition, in the line of sight of FIG. 23, the spheres flowing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and the spheres flowing through the second flow path component 335 are clearly separated in terms of their vertical arrangement, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the upstream spheres are obscured. On the other hand, because the vertical width of the flow path visible at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is narrow, the area of the spheres visible in the direction is smaller.

In particular, as described above, the ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 flows diagonally downward to the right regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370, and then the flow path switches to either the flow path toward the special bonus detection sensor SE11 or the flow path toward the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, the area of the ball visible at the switching position is smaller than when the ball flows straight down or the flow direction of the ball switches to the right as the flow path of the ball.

Other possible switching modes include cases where the switching position is located further upstream, such as when the ball's flow path switches between flowing straight down and to the right. For example, if the left and right inner protrusions 318 are not formed and the ball heading toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 flows straight down from the rear end of the third flow path component 336, the switching position will be at least a position behind the center line of the third flow path component 336.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow path component 336, the ball falls below the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336 (falls by the vertical difference between the upper surface of the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), and in addition to the effect of part of the ball being hidden by the third flow path component 336 itself, the ball is displaced to the left and right outward from the range visible through the third flow path component 336, so that part of the ball is hidden by the front frame portion 333.

As a result, the area visible from the player's point of view of the ball that has passed the rear end of the third flow path component 336 becomes smaller, making it difficult to determine which path the ball has flowed down. This further increases the attention to the ball flowing down near the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

In this way, according to this embodiment, advantages and disadvantages are set for each of the multiple directional views (see Figures 22 and 23) described as directional views for identifying the flow direction of the balls flowing down the rear end of the third flow path configuration 336. As a result, even when it comes to the way the sorting device 300 is viewed, the player is not required to play in a one-sided manner, but can be allowed to adjust and select the viewing method he or she prefers, and a variety of play styles can be provided, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game.

Ensuring the player's visibility can be achieved in various ways, but in this embodiment, in particular, by forming a gap between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, it is possible to create a state in which the roof portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is removed, making it easier to see the third flow path forming portion 336.

The following describes the visibility in the direction of view in Figures 22 and 23 on the front side of the sorting device 300. Although not shown in Figures 22 and 23, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 (see Figure 5) are arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, and the visibility is obstructed because the light transmitted is reduced due to the thickness of the members.

Because the area obstructed by the front design member 162 is narrower, it may be easier to see the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 when viewed in the direction of Figure 23 than when viewed in the direction of Figure 22.

The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are basically flat as described above and are configured to reduce the refraction of light (see FIG. 12). This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the distribution device 300 from being impaired.

Even in areas that cannot be made flat for functional reasons, they are formed to minimize the impact on visibility. For example, the protruding support sections 161c-161e for positioning and engaging the sorting device 300 are positioned outside the line of sight of the player looking at the flow path configuration sections 334-336 (upper rear, left and right outer sides, left and right downwards) so as not to block the line of sight of the player looking diagonally downwards.

For example, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed at the center height of the ball and is thin-walled to the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). This prevents the entire ball from being hidden even if the symmetrical protrusion 161f is positioned between the ball and the player's eyes, ensuring visibility of the ball flowing down the flow path configurations 334-336.

Balls that miss the specific winning hole 65a flow down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, and flow down toward the outlet 71. The effect on visibility of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 will be explained below.

Figures 22 and 23 show an example of the arrangement of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 when the opening and closing plate 65b is open. When the opening and closing plate 65b is open, balls flowing down from above the opening and closing plate 65b land on the opening and closing plate 65b and are guided toward the specific winning port 65a, so balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 are balls that deviate to the left or right of the opening and closing plate 65b. These balls flow down between the extension parts 162b and 162c, and are guided by the inner rail 61 to flow down toward the outlet 71.

As shown in Figures 22 and 23, from the player's point of view, the position of the balls flowing on the inner rail 61 is lower than each of the flow path components 334-336, making it easier to avoid a reduction in visibility of the balls flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336 due to the balls flowing on the inner rail 61.

On the other hand, the balls flowing down the inner rail 61 flow toward the left-right center of the play area at a gentle angle, just like the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335, so like the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335, it has the effect of guiding the player's gaze to the left-right center of the play area. This effect guides the player's gaze to the outlet 71 as well as to the third flow path component 336. In other words, because the outlet 71 and the third flow path component 336 are in the same left-right position (left-right center position), the player can move their gaze up and down to guide their gaze to a state where both the outlet 71 and the third flow path component 336 are visible.

Therefore, regardless of whether the balls shot toward the play area tend to enter the specific winning port 65a efficiently (meaning fewer wasted balls during a jackpot game) or whether balls frequently stray and flow down between the extensions 162b and 162c (meaning frequent wasted balls during a jackpot game), the flowing balls can have the effect of guiding the player's gaze to the third flow path configuration portion 336.

In other words, if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the player's gaze can be guided to the third flow path component 336 as the ball flows down the second flow path component 335, and if the ball misses the specific winning opening 65a, the player's gaze can be guided to the third flow path component 336 as the ball flows down the inner rail 61.

Balls heading toward the outlet 71 are usually wasted balls and have no effect on the game, but in this embodiment, by configuring it as described above, balls heading toward the outlet 71 can have the role of guiding the player's gaze toward the third flow path configuration section 336.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball may flow along the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and pass through the front side of the second flow path component 335, potentially reducing the visibility of the second flow path component 335.

On the other hand, according to the configuration of this embodiment in which the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a are arranged above the center position of the specific winning opening 65a, and the third flow path component 336 is arranged below the center position of the specific winning opening 65a, the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a can prevent the balls from flowing down, so it is possible to prevent the balls from flowing down the front side of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the visibility of the third flow path component 336 and the area around its rear end is reduced due to balls flowing down the front side of the opening and closing plate 65b.

In this embodiment, the length of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 ensures the time it takes for a ball that enters the specific winning port 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370, but this avoids the problem of increasing the amount of space required for placement. That is, as shown in Figures 22 and 23, the placement distance between the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370, which serves as a guide for the placement of the third flow path configuration part 336, is made short from the player's line of sight.

Moreover, since the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned below and behind the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), when the player's line of sight is directed diagonally downward and rearward, which is a frequent line of sight as shown in FIG. 23, it appears as if the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned so close that its outline is embedded into the outline of the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the flow path of the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a, which is configured to be long from left to right, and passes through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 located at both left and right ends is collected below the center of the specific winning opening 65a via each of the symmetrical flow path components 334-336. This makes it possible to shorten the time it takes for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 compared to when the ball flows left and right down the left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, the structure required for the ball's flow path can be made to have a shorter left and right length the further down it is, making it easier to place it near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61.

In particular, in this embodiment, the design concept is to position the specific winning opening 65a close to the outlet 71, and instead of a structure that causes the balls to flow directly downward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path component 335, a structure is adopted in which the balls flow backward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path component 335 through the third flow path component 336, making it possible to form the outlet 71 (an opening disposed on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface portion 387) directly below the second flow path component 335. This shortens the vertical distance between the specific winning opening 65a and the outlet 71.

In this way, by shortening the vertical and horizontal widths of the specific winning opening 65a and the sliding displacement member 370 at the player's line of sight, the vertical width of the area occupied by the specific winning opening 65a and the sliding displacement member 370 can be shortened in the design of a play area where the size when viewed from the front is limited to a certain standard, thereby improving the design freedom of the play area.

For example, as in this embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a can be positioned near the bottom end of the play area, so that the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in a left-right symmetrical play area.

Next, we will explain the flow of the balls after they enter the distribution device 300, and an example of the operation pattern of the movable parts (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) that takes this flow into account.

First, as a premise, a ball that has passed through the opening 312 flows down the first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 in that order (see Figures 16 and 17). The time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334-336 can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, it is designed so that the ball passes through each of the flow path components 334-336 in approximately 0.3 seconds.

In other words, after the ball enters the specific winning port 65a, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow path component 334, 0.3 seconds to pass through the second flow path component 335, and 0.3 seconds to pass through the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, even if a ball enters the specific winning port 65a immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, the ball is configured not to reach the detection sensor SE1 located at the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336 for 0.9 seconds. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening/closing plate 65b is opened, the ball does not approach the position of the slide displacement member 370 and cannot pass through either the special detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, so the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without worrying about the ball entering the prize by mistake.

For this reason, it is possible to eliminate the need for control (which involves unnatural operation of the opening and closing plate) that briefly opens the opening and closing plate at the start of a round R in order to prevent erroneous winning into the V winning sensor, as is commonly seen in pachinko machines equipped with a V-type probability attacker. This makes the operation of the opening and closing plate that opens and closes the specific winning port a natural operation, providing an environment in which players can enjoy playing with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine equipped with the V-type attacker in the above example, a ball that enters the V-type attacker immediately after it is opened is likely to result in an erroneous winning entry, but in the variable winning device 65 of this case, as described below, a ball that enters the V-type attacker immediately after it is opened can have a favorable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the movement of the slide displacement member 370 with the ball), making it unnecessary to take measures to prevent the ball from entering the V-type attacker immediately after it is opened.

The time required for the ball to pass through can be set arbitrarily depending on the length and inclination of each flow path component 334-336, the shape of the inner wall of the flow path (whether it is smooth or uneven, etc.), etc.

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of ROM 202 in main control device 110, FIG. 24(b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the big winning type in the special pattern, and FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal pattern.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the fixed value data described above.

The first win random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first win random number counter, which is updated periodically (e.g., every 2 msec). If the value of the first win random number counter obtained based on the start winning matches any of the determination values specified in the first win random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot with a special symbol.

The first win type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24(b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment values of the first win type counter C2 are specified in correspondence with each jackpot type and the type of winning slot that triggered the selection of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is judged to be a jackpot, the value of the first win type counter C2 obtained based on the start winning is compared with the first win type selection table 202b, and the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of special pattern 1 (drawing based on the ball entering first winning slot 64), the value of first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9" is associated with jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24(b)).

When a jackpot A1 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the first operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in the operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "10 to 19" is associated with the big winning type A2 (see 202b2 in FIG. 24(b)).

When jackpot A2 is reached, four rounds of jackpot play are played in the first operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "20 to 39" is associated with the big winning B1 (see 202b3 in Figure 24 (b)).

When a jackpot B1 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the second operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "40 to 49" is associated with the big winning type B2 (see 202b4 in Figure 24 (b)).

When a jackpot B2 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the second operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "50 to 79" is associated with the big winning type C1 (see 202b5 in Figure 24 (b)).

When a jackpot C1 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in the operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99" is associated with a big winning type C2 (see 202b6 in FIG. 24(b)).

When a jackpot C2 is reached, four rounds of jackpot play are played in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

As described above, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special symbol 1 (a drawing based on a ball entering first winning slot 64), a four-round jackpot game is selected in either case. Therefore, a large number of prize balls cannot be expected compared to when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special symbol 2, which will be described later. On the other hand, a four-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than a fifteen-round jackpot game, so balls can be shot earlier in an attempt to win a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of special pattern 2 (drawing based on the ball entering the second winning slot 140), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 99" is associated with jackpot a (see 202b7 in FIG. 24(b)).

When jackpot a is reached, 15 rounds of jackpot play are played in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

As described above, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special pattern 2 (a drawing based on a ball entering second winning port 140), 15 rounds of jackpot play are selected in either case. Therefore, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special pattern 2, a larger number of prize balls can be paid out compared to if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special pattern 1, and this can increase the motivation of the player to play the game to draw for special pattern 2 (a game in which a ball is fired to enter second winning port 140).

In addition, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed to operation pattern X, there is little possibility that the player will be disadvantaged significantly even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern that has the disadvantage of slightly worsening the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 but the advantage of making it easier for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a, by setting the operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 for the jackpot in the lottery for special pattern 2 to the third operation pattern, the impact of the disadvantage can be reduced and only the advantage of being able to shorten the time required for the jackpot game can be highlighted.

In other words, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the jackpot game in the lottery for special pattern 2 will be drawn out, making it possible to realize a jackpot game that is pleasant for the player (good time efficiency in paying out prize balls).

The setting of the jackpot type for special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot type for special symbol 2 may be set in which the slide displacement member 370 is displaced and controlled by the operation pattern Y. This jackpot type may also be set at a small rate (for example, about 20%).

This can increase the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370, preventing the player from playing the jackpot game aimlessly. In other words, the player can visually confirm the displacement movement of the slide displacement member 370, and the timing of the displacement movement can make the player happy or sad, increasing the player's interest.

As described above, during the special symbol probability change, the probability of winning the normal symbol increases, the normal symbol fluctuation time becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric device 140a when the normal symbol wins becomes longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it is easier to get the ball into the second winning slot 140, so it is easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once the special symbol probability change state is reached, it is easier to get a special symbol jackpot, and the special symbol probability change state, which is more likely to become a jackpot a (a jackpot with a good profit balance) when a jackpot is reached, is more likely to be repeated, making it easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. This allows the player to play while strongly expecting to move to the special symbol probability change state, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(c)) is a data table in which winning judgment values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24(c)). Also, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 24(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning hole 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referenced to determine whether or not a normal symbol is a winning symbol. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is stipulated for each display mode.

Figure 25 shows the time-based changes in the operation pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the operation pattern of the sliding displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 in the first round for each jackpot type.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines that a jackpot has been awarded in the special winning determination process, it starts controlling the jackpot game (of the determined type) after the special winning display (pattern changing presentation) has ended. Below, we will explain the operation control of the opening and closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the sliding displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 that is performed when a jackpot game is awarded. Note that in the explanation of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate.

In this control example, the driving mode differs depending on the type of jackpot only in the first round, and the driving mode is the same from the second round onwards. Therefore, the driving mode in the first round for each type of jackpot will be explained below.

In the case of a jackpot A1 or A2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state that allows balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operating pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 0.2 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, causing the opening and closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time.

The initial opening time is set to a period longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a if game balls are continuously shot, and shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning port 65a.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

The 0.2 second opening time in the first operating pattern is set to limit the number of balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a to one on either side while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This opening time is set to prevent multiple balls from entering the specific winning opening 65a in succession (hereinafter also referred to as "successive balls entering"), and is not intended to limit the number of balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a to one. In other words, even with an opening time of 0.2 seconds, it is possible that one ball will reach each side of the specific winning opening 65a, and that all balls will enter the specific winning opening 65a at the same time.

In the case of a big win A1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening and closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the drive control is performed so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the front position to the rear position at the same time that the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific winning port 65a passes through each flow path component 334-336 (see Figure 19), passes in front of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see Figure 20).

At this time, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side is limited to one, so visibility is not reduced by other balls. Therefore, the player can easily see the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the case of a jackpot A2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening and closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced from the front position to the rear position at the same time that the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state, and after 0.8 seconds has elapsed, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced from the rear position to the front position.

As described above, the time required for the ball to pass through each flow path component 334-336 (see FIG. 17) is set to approximately 0.9 seconds, so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370.

Therefore, a ball that enters the specific winning port 65a passes through each flow path component 334-336 (see Figure 17), passes above the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see Figure 17).

At this time, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side is limited to one, so visibility is not reduced by other balls. Therefore, the player can easily see the situation in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370, 0.8 seconds, is set based on the idea that this is a time shorter than the time it takes for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336, and a time longer than the time it takes for the ball to reach the third flow path component 336.

In other words, according to this embodiment, the ball passes through the second flow path component 335 and reaches the third flow path component 336 in approximately 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning opening 65a, so even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of the 0.2 second opening time of the opening/closing plate 65b, the sliding displacement member 370 can be displaced after the ball reaches the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, as long as a ball enters the specific winning port 65a, the movement of the sliding displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball placed in the third flow path configuration part 336 regardless of the timing of the ball's entry (see FIG. 22). This makes it possible to prevent the displacement movement of the sliding displacement member 370 from being conspicuous, and increases the attention to the ball flowing down each flow path configuration part 334-336 as a ball entering the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused before the ball reaches the third flow path configuration portion 336, so there is little possibility that the ball will block the line of sight, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, because the second flow path forming portion 335 is disposed close to the front plate portion of the fixed member 161 and disposed further forward than the sliding displacement member 370, the player's gaze is likely to be drawn to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335. In other words, by drawing attention to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 (for example, by displaying "Pay attention to the flowing ball!" on the third pattern display device 81), it is possible to easily avoid the player seeing the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370.

In this embodiment, each flow path component 334-336 is configured to be separated in the center from the left to the right, so if the ball enters the specific winning port 65a on one side, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be seen without being blocked by the balls flowing down by focusing on the rear of the third flow path component 336 on the side where no balls are entering (see Figure 22).

In this way, in the case of a jackpot A1 or A2, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side is limited to one, which increases the attention to that ball and allows the player to easily see whether the ball passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of a jackpot B1 or B2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state that allows balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operating pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 1.0 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, causing the opening and closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time.

The initial opening time is set to a period longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a if game balls are continuously shot, and shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning port 65a.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

The 1.0 second opening time in the second operation pattern is set as the time during which multiple balls can enter the specific winning opening 65a on either the left or right side while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This opening time is set to allow multiple balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a in succession on either the left or right side (hereinafter also referred to as "successive balls entering").

In this control example, the interval between ball launches is set to 0.6 seconds, so even if the interval between balls flowing down does not change from when they were launched, two balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b opens once every 1.0 seconds. On the other hand, because the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, it is possible to restrict the next ball from entering each of the flow path components 334-336 before the two balls have passed through each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the case of a jackpot B1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. In the case of a jackpot B2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot B1, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a jackpot B2, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

At this time, the appearance of each flow path component 334-336 differs depending on whether there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side or two (or more). When there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, visibility is not reduced by other balls, so the player can easily see the ball passing through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two (or more) balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side, the upstream ball may be placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the downstream ball, which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball. This can improve the attention of players who want to know whether the ball will pass through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the case of a jackpot C1, jackpot C2, or jackpot a, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a, and the opening and closing plate 65b is made to operate for a long period of time up to the first operating time T1.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In this control example, the opening and closing plate 65b remains open during the first round of play R, so a situation may arise where multiple balls enter the specific winning hole 65a in succession on either the left or right side. On the other hand, the opening interval of the opening and closing plate 65b is not limited, so unlike the second operating pattern, it is possible that the next ball will enter each of the flow path components 334-336 before two balls have passed through each of the flow path components 334-336. Therefore, compared to the second operating pattern, the third operating pattern is more likely to cause a situation in which the visibility of a ball placed downstream of each of the flow path components 334-336 is reduced by a ball placed upstream.

In the case of a jackpot C1 or a, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. In addition, in the case of a jackpot C2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot C1 or a, the ball that passes through each flow path configuration unit 334-336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a jackpot C2, the ball that passes through each flow path configuration unit 334-336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

In this way, the control mode is set to keep the opening and closing plate 65b in the open state regardless of whether the ball is passed through the special detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but because the time it takes for the ball to reach the sliding displacement member 370 is managed structurally, the possibility of the sliding displacement member 370 malfunctioning due to the ball getting caught can be eliminated.

At this time, the appearance of each flow path component 334-336 differs depending on whether there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side or whether there are two balls. When there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, the visibility is not reduced by the other balls, so the player can easily see the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side, the upstream ball may be placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the downstream ball, which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball. This can improve the attention of players who want to know whether the ball will pass through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the third operating pattern, there is no restriction on the timing at which a ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a in the first round of play R, so compared to the second operating pattern, the arrangement of the balls in each flow path component 334-336 is more likely to become disorderly. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is more likely to decrease.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which balls can enter the specific winning port 65a has the effect of allowing the progress of the round game R to be carried out early. In other words, it is easier to quickly meet the round end condition (the passage of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the entry of a specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) pachinko balls), and it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being drawn out.

In particular, when a jackpot of special symbol 2 is hit, the sliding displacement member 370 is driven and controlled in operation pattern X with a 100% probability, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, it is guaranteed that the ball will pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the sliding displacement member 370 is low to begin with.

Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, but priority is given to avoiding the jackpot game from being prolonged, thereby realizing the progress of the jackpot game in a short period of time and increasing the player's interest in the jackpot game.

Regardless of the type of jackpot, when the first round of round play R ends, the timer means controls the operation of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c to keep the opening and closing plate 65b closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and starts the second round of round play R after the first interval time Int1 has elapsed.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b from a closed state to an open state to open the specific winning opening 65a, causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time. From the second round onwards, the sliding displacement member 370 is constantly maintained in the front position, so that the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 and is discharged (see Figure 17).

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls have won) is met in the second round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to a closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

After that, just like the second round, the round games R from the third round to the final round (fourth round) are repeated with a first interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening and closing plate 65b moves between the closed state and the open state to open and close the specific winning hole 65a.

When the final round R of play ends, the timer means controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c to keep the opening and closing plate 65b closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed, and the big win game ends as the time elapses.

In this control example, the short-opening displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are described as being executed only in the first round, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be executed in all rounds, or in rounds other than the first round (e.g., the third round, the eighth round, the twelfth round, etc.).

In this way, according to this control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening and closing plate 65b can be changed by changing the opening pattern (first to third operating patterns) of the opening and closing plate 65b, and the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 located downstream of each of the flow path configurations 334 to 336 and the third flow path configuration 336 can be changed. This can motivate a player who pays attention to the ball passing through the detection sensor SE1 located downstream of the third flow path configuration 336 to devise a way to launch the ball.

For example, a decrease in visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur when multiple balls are placed simultaneously in each of the flow path components 334-336, so the decrease in visibility of the detection sensor SE1 can be suppressed by intentionally increasing the interval between ball launches as necessary (for example, in the jackpot type of the second or third operation pattern). Note that in the first operation pattern, balls entering the specific winning hole 65a are restricted, so that a decrease in visibility of the detection sensor SE1 can be avoided regardless of the launch mode.

On the other hand, if the interval between ball launches is increased, the time it takes for the specified number of balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a will be extended, which may result in prolonged round game R. In other words, the player can select how to play round game R between a game mode that prioritizes visibility of detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding prolonged round game R.

For example, in order to visually confirm the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, a short period (e.g., 1.0 second) may be allowed to pass after the start of the round game R, allowing the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball is placed in the third flow path component 336 at the timing when the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 occurs (0.8 seconds after the start of the round game R in the case of operation pattern Y), and therefore it is possible to avoid the displacement action of the slide displacement member 370 being blocked by the ball.

On the other hand, if there is a delay before the balls are released, the time it takes for the specified number of balls to enter the specific winning port 65a will be extended, which may result in the round game R being prolonged. In other words, the player can select how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding prolongation of the round game R.

For example, according to this embodiment, each flow path component 334-336 and slide displacement member 370 are configured symmetrically, and balls can be inserted through the specific winning hole 65a from either the left or right side.

In other words, for example, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved by maintaining the above-mentioned launch pattern that widens the interval between ball launches or the launch pattern that allows a delay before the ball is launched when the ball lands on the left side, and launching the ball in any launch pattern when the ball lands on the right side.

Specifically, the balls aimed at the specific winning port 65a can be shot to the left and right in a shooting pattern in which at least the first ball is shot to the right, some balls (for example, the second ball) are shot to the left, and the remaining balls are shot to the right.

In this case, by focusing on the balls flowing down the left flow path rather than on the balls flowing down the right flow path of each flow path component 334-336, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the balls flowing down the left flow path pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 while avoiding having your line of sight blocked by other balls. In addition, in this case, since balls are constantly being shot toward the right side of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid an extension of the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, and it is possible to avoid the round game R becoming protracted.

The purpose of shooting the balls left and right is not to limit the number of balls that enter the left flow path to one. In particular, it is sufficient to limit the number of balls placed in each of the left flow path components 334-336 to one during the approximately 0.9 seconds it takes for a certain ball to pass through the left flow path, and during the rest of the time, it is sufficient to shoot the balls so that they enter the left and right flow paths at will.

This makes it possible to prevent balls heading toward the specific winning opening 65a from colliding with each other and spilling one out to the left or right of the specific winning opening 65a, even in cases where the open width above the specific winning opening 65a is not long as in this embodiment (for example, when the ball's entry path is limited to a small number of paths due to the arrangement of the electric device 140a or the nail arrangement (see Figure 2)). Note that although the nail arrangement in Figure 2 is asymmetrical, it may also be symmetrical.

Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 that is fastened to the rear side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is a unit that is fastened to the base plate 60 (see Figure 2) of the game board 13 from the rear side.

Figure 26 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and Figure 27 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. Note that in Figure 27, the liquid crystal display device (variable display unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side is shown as being visible through the opening 511a. Also, Figure 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of Figures 26 and 27.

The operating unit 500 includes a rear case 510 formed in a box shape with the front side open from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed to a size that corresponds to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (i.e., capable of dividing the display area of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front).

The rear case 510 is provided as a flat plate extending from the front end of the outer wall 512 along the rear surface of the game board 13 (e.g., arranged parallel to the rear surface), and includes a support plate portion 513 that provides surface support for the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2).

The support plate portion 513 has a positioning protrusion 513a that protrudes toward the front side and has a shape that can fit into a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and a number of insertion holes 513b that are drilled so that fastening screws that are fastened to the base plate 60 can be inserted through them.

The rear case 510 is positioned relative to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60, thereby fixing the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 together, thereby improving the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500.

The shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be a protrusion with an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the mating recess of the base plate 60 (circular or oval in this embodiment), or it may be a protrusion with a shape (even smaller outer shape) that increases the mating gap in consideration of workability during assembly. Furthermore, if the inner shape of the mating recess is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a will also be rectangular correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is disposed on the rear side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed inside. That is, the operation unit 500 comprises a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 disposed on the inside right part of the rear case 510, a second operation unit 700 disposed on the inside lower part of the rear case 510, and a third operation unit 800 disposed on the inside upper part of the rear case 510. In addition, on the inside left part of the rear case 510, a substrate having light emitting means such as LEDs, and a diffusion decorative plate LB1 disposed to cover the substrate from the front side, formed of a light-transmitting material, and having a light diffusion processing formed over the entire surface are disposed.

Specifically, the first operating unit 600 is disposed to the right of the opening 511a, the second operating unit 700 is disposed below the opening 511a, and the third operating unit 800 is disposed above the opening 511a, all of which are disposed on the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510. First, an overview of the operation control of the operating unit 500 will be described.

Figures 28 to 35 are front views of the operating unit 500, showing an example of the operation of the operating unit 500. Figure 28 illustrates each operating unit 600-800 in a performance standby state, Figure 29 illustrates the state in which the first operating unit 600 has changed from the performance standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state, and Figure 30 illustrates the state in which the second operating unit 700 has changed from the performance standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state.

Note that in FIG. 30, the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in a state in which the surface facing the front of the covering member 787 is different from the second operating unit 700 illustrated in FIG. 29.

In Figures 28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is shown in phantom lines. Inside, the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the rear side can be clearly seen, but outside the center frame 86, even though the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin material, the view is likely to be obstructed by the nails arranged on the base plate 60, the various winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., and the through gate 67 (see Figure 2). Therefore, for example, when arranged outside the center frame 86 as shown in Figure 28, the visibility of each operating unit 600 to 800 when viewed from the front is likely to be reduced.

The frame shape of the center frame 86 differs from that shown in FIG. 2 in order to match the configuration of the operating unit 500, but its role is the same. In addition, the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 is curved downward on the front side of the third operating unit 800, but it is not curved downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86, but a circular transparent decorative thin plate is formed on the inner frame side of the center frame 86 so as to cover the third operating unit 800 from the front. Therefore, the role of rolling a ball placed on the upper side of the center frame 86 to both the left and right is the same as that shown in FIG. 2, and the upper frame part (upper outer frame part) of the actual center frame 86 is arranged so as to straddle the upper side of the third operating unit 800 from left to right.

Figures 31 and 32 show the state in which the third operating unit 800 has changed from the standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state. In Figure 31, the first decorative member 870 faces forward, showing the individual combined state of the third operating unit 800, while in Figure 32, the second decorative member 880 faces forward, showing the combined state of the third operating unit 800.

The displacement that switches between the state of FIG. 31 and the state of FIG. 32 occurs in a displacement mode that combines linear displacement and rotational displacement, so if it is executed when the third operating unit 800 is in a performance standby state, the surrounding decorative members will collide with the decorative members 870 and 880, causing a malfunction, so it is executed when the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

In other words, in this embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state (or in a state in which it has been displaced downward from the performance standby state to an extent sufficient to avoid a collision between the decorative members 870, 880) and is in a state in which the displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is permitted in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), and is then controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) to perform a reverse displacement (switching rotation operation), as will be described in more detail below.

Figure 33 shows the third operating unit 800 in an extended state and the second operating unit 700 in an intermediate performance state displaced slightly lower than the extended state, Figure 34 shows the state in which the first operating unit 600 has displaced from the state in Figure 33 to the intermediate performance state, and Figure 35 shows the state in which the third operating unit 800 has displaced from the state in Figure 33 to a performance standby state and the first operating unit 600 has displaced to the extended state.

28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third operating unit 800 partially overlaps with the displacement trajectory of the first operating unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second operating unit 700 in a front view. Therefore, for example, when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), if the first operating unit 600 or the second operating unit 700 changes state from the performance standby state, there is a possibility of a collision.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, the state change of the first operation unit 600 from the standby state is controlled so as to be executable on condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the standby state, and the state change of the third operation unit 800 from the standby state is controlled so as to be executable on condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the standby state, thereby making it possible to prevent the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 from overlapping when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in the placement of the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 (it is possible to allow the front-to-back positions to overlap).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the state change of the second operating unit 700 to the extended state is controlled so as to be executable on the condition that the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in a performance standby state, and the position of the second operating unit 700 when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state is set to an intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), thereby preventing the second operating unit 700 from overlapping with the other operating units 600, 800 in a front view. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the positioning of each operating unit 600 to 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be tolerated).

In particular, the function of the second operating unit 700 as a performance device is improved by configuring multiple viewing states of the second operating unit 700, including a state in which it is viewed in a protruding state closer to the opening 511a, and a state in which it is viewed in a state in which it is slightly receding from the opening 511a but positioned close to the third operating unit 800.

As shown in Figures 28 to 35, the first operating unit 600 is displaced on the right side of the third pattern display device 81. The second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operating unit 600 has a box-shaped member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the box-shaped member 661 has a first performance surface 661a that faces diagonally left in a performance standby state, a second performance surface 661b formed on the back side of the first performance surface 661a, and a third performance surface 661c that is adjacent to the first performance surface 661a and the second performance surface 661b. Each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with figures, patterns, letters, etc.

When the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state for presentation, the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned to the right of the third pattern display device 81, in a location where visibility from the front side is likely to be reduced due to the positioning of the center frame 86. However, the first presentation surface 661a is oriented diagonally toward the player (the surface on the near side is tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L side with arrow F-B as the reference), so that visibility of the first presentation surface 661a at the player's line of sight when viewing the second decorative rotating member 660 from inside the frame of the opening between the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86, in a diagonal direction through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81, can be improved.

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the second decorative rotating member 660 extends in front of the third pattern display device 81, facing directly toward the player viewing the inside of the center frame 86. In this case, the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented so that the second presentation surface 661b faces directly ahead, improving the visibility of the second presentation surface 661b at the player's line of sight viewing the second decorative rotating member 660.

In this way, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch between the presentation surfaces 661a-661c that are visible to the player depending on its position, and is also configured to be able to switch its posture depending on its position in order to improve the visibility of each presentation surface 661a-661c that is visible to the player.

In other words, it is not limited to a planar change in posture parallel to the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1), but is designed to have an angle change that is intentional in relation to the player's line of sight. That is, the closer to the center of the frame of the center frame 86, the easier it is for the player's line of sight to be in the front-to-back direction and to be directly facing the display surface, so visibility can be improved by having the display surface facing forward (in the direction of arrow F), but on the other hand, the closer to the frame of the center frame 86, the easier it is for the player's line of sight to be at an angle, so visibility can be improved by making the display surface at an angle to be directly facing the line of sight.

As the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced, the protruding decorative portion 652b is displaced in conjunction with it. The protruding decorative portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front of the board, and is positioned in the upper right corner of the rear case 510 and hidden from view by the player when the first operating unit 600 is in the performance standby state (see Figure 28) and intermediate performance state (see Figure 34).

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state (see Figure 28), the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned inside the center frame 86 so that it overlaps with the right edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 from the front when viewed from the front, making it visible to the player.

In this state, the right edge of the exterior shape of the protruding decorative portion 652b is located to the right of the right edge of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by utilizing the decoration on the front side of the board of the protruding decorative portion 652b, a display effect can be created that gives the player the illusion that the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is expanding.

In more detail, the right edge of the area in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible is defined by the first operating unit 600, and when the first operating unit 600 is in a performance standby state, the left edge of the first performance surface 661a of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the right end RE1 of the area in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 is visible roughly coincide with each other.

In contrast, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the protruding decorative part 652b is positioned so that it extends beyond the right end RE1 of the area to the right. Therefore, by relating or matching the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the decoration on the front of the board of the protruding decorative part 652b, the player can visually perceive as if the display area of the third pattern display device 81 has expanded beyond the right end RE1 of the area. This makes it possible to realize an unexpected presentation.

Examples of matching the above-mentioned display and decoration include, for example, displaying polka dots on the third pattern display device 81 and decorating the front of the plate of the protruding decorative section 652b with a similar polka dot pattern, or writing a certain number on the front of the plate of the protruding decorative section 652b in the same font as the number displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 (for example, the number to notify the winner of a lottery).

Examples of associating the above-mentioned display with decoration include, for example, a case in which six of the seven colors that make up the rainbow are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the front plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b is colored with the remaining color, or a case in which a wooden stick is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with its right end aligned with the right edge of the area RE1 and the front plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b is decorated with a flame-like decoration, thereby evoking the image of a fire when the first operating unit 600 is in the protruding state.

The presentation mode of the overhang decorative portion 652b is not limited to one type, and multiple types of presentation modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the overhang decorative portion 652b. The light-emitting means for changing the brightness of the overhang decorative portion 652b will be described later.

In addition, by arranging a small liquid crystal device with a display surface on the front side instead of the protruding decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in multiple types, thereby avoiding restrictions on the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when the display area is expanded beyond the right end RE1 of the area.

The object associated with the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to a display, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on a member of the second operating unit 700 (e.g., covering member 787), or the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (decoration of the first covering portion 875, decoration of the second covering portion 885) formed on a member of the third operating unit 800 (e.g., first decorative member 870, second decorative member 880).

Figure 36 is a front perspective view of the first action unit 600, and Figure 37 is a rear perspective view of the first action unit 600. The first action unit 600 is configured in a complex displacement manner in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and the protruding decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 is displaced relative to the second decorative rotating member 660, allowing the player to visually see the different appearances before and after the displacement.

Figure 38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and Figure 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600.

As shown in Figures 38 and 39, the first operating unit 600 includes a fixed means 610 fastened to the rear case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed means 610, a drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620, a supported member 640 having one end rotatably supported on the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, a first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably arranged on the other end of the supported member 640, a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotating member 650, and a decorative fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610.

The fixing means 610 includes a base member 611 arranged facing the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 from the front to the rear, and a front cover member 612 arranged on the front side of the base member 611 and fastened to the base member 611 while creating a space between the base member 611 and the front cover member 612.

The front cover member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, a support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 on the inside of the fixing portion 614, and a guide long hole 616 formed as a long hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640.

The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape that is a mixture of straight and curved sections, the details and function of which will be described later.

The rotating member 620 includes a main body 621 formed in a long plate shape, a cylindrical portion 622 disposed at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 and fitted and supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610, a transmission long hole 623 formed in the middle of the main body 621 as a long hole extending in a linear direction, a circular through hole 624 drilled as a circular hole in the drilling direction parallel to the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 622 at the other end (upper end) of the main body 621, and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle centered on the circular through hole 624.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the cylindrical portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured so that one arm abuts against the side wall of the main body portion 621 and the other arm abuts against a protruding piece of the front cover member 612, and is configured to generate a biasing force in a direction that raises the rotating member 620 (clockwise when viewed from the front).

When the cylindrical portion 622 is supported, the support fastening portion 615 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 622, and a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread portion formed at the tip of the support fastening portion 615. This allows the rotating member 620 to be supported by the support fastening portion 615 so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission long hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed, as will be described in detail later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft protruding to the rear side through a through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, a transmission gear 633 journaled on the cylindrical portion 613b of the front cover member 612 while meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam 634 journaled on the cylindrical portion 613c of the front cover member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633.

When the cylindrical parts 613b, 613c are inserted through the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, fastening screws are screwed into the female threads formed at the tips of the cylindrical parts 613b, 613c. As a result, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are axially supported on the front cover member 612 so that they cannot fall off.

The front cover member 612 is formed with an arc-shaped hole 613d that penetrates along an arc centered on the tubular portion 613c, and a cylindrical portion 634a that protrudes cylindrically from the front side at an eccentric position of the transmission gear cam 634 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member having a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and has the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 634a and an extension portion 634b that extends in a plate shape in the outer diameter direction from an angular position that includes the cylindrical portion 634a.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d, and its front side is inserted into the transmission slot 623 of the rotating member 620. Here, the width length of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission slot 623 is designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. This makes it possible to reduce the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides through the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission slot 623.

The extension portion 634b is configured to be able to enter the detection groove of the photocoupler type detection sensor KS1, which is fastened and fixed to the front cover member 612. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) to grasp the position of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading the change in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 includes a long main body 641, a tubular portion 642 protruding from the rear side of the main body 641 with a cylindrical cross section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, a tubular portion 643 protruding parallel to the tubular portion 642, an intermediate gear 644 formed so as to be able to mesh with the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being supported by the tubular portion 643, a bottomed tubular portion 645 formed in a large-diameter tube with a perforated bottom on the rear side of the intermediate gear 644, and an extended support portion 646 extended toward the front side at the end opposite the end where the bottomed tubular portion 645 is located.

The above-mentioned configuration allows for the transmission of driving force through meshing between the gear teeth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 in response to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

When the cylindrical parts 642, 643 are inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, fastening screws are screwed into the female threads formed at the tips of the cylindrical parts 642, 643. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are axially supported on the main body part 641 of the supported member 640 so that they cannot fall off.

The bottomed tubular portion 645 has a rear side of the bottom disposed close to the front edge of the front cover member 612, and is provided with an opening 645a formed in the peripheral surface so that the intermediate gear 644 can mesh with the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 on the front side of the bottom, and an insertion hole 645b formed in a circle centered on the tubular center and through which the cylindrical support portion 651a can be inserted. Details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotating member 660, and will be described in detail later.

The first decorative rotating member 650 includes a main body member 651 that forms an orthogonal rotation axis, a front rotating member 652 that is supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, an electric decoration board 653 that is fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b of the front rotating member 652 and has a light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side, a rear rotating member 654 that is coaxial with the front rotating member 652 and fastened to the rear side, a wiring receiving member 655 that is fastened to the main body member 651 from the front side and forms a cylindrical space for wiring, a front decorative portion 656 that is arranged on the front side of the wiring receiving member 655 and fastened by screwing in a fastening screw that is inserted into the main body member 651 from the back side, and an axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 that is supported on the outside of the cylindrical portion formed by the wiring receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

The main body member 651 has a cylindrical support portion 651a that extends cylindrically from the back side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female threads 651b formed at the diameter position of the tip, and has a notch portion 651c that is cut out so as to reduce the wall portion on one side of a plane that passes through the female threads 651b.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the cutout portion 651c functions as an opening to secure an entrance for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is inserted, in order from the base end, through the center hole of the front rotating member 652, the center hole of the rear rotating member 654, the insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and the guide elongated hole 616 of the front cover member 612, and is fastened and fixed by threading a fastening screw inserted into the dish-shaped cover portion C2 into the female threaded portion 651b at the tip.

That is, the cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the collar C1 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 are supported coaxially on the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction, and are configured to be displaceable along the guide elongated hole 616.

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 has an opening C2a formed in part of its circumference, and in the assembled state, this opening C2a is positioned opposite the notch portion 651c of the main body member 651, forming a path for electrical wiring.

Some of this electrical wiring passes through the inside of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and is guided into the inside of the second decorative rotating member 660, where the terminals are connected to a connector arranged on the illumination board 662. The remaining wiring passes through the gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (the gap formed on the upper side, i.e., the side that faces the main body member 651 on the upper and lower opposite sides of the semi-cylindrical portion 655a), and is guided to the back of the protruding decorative portion 652b, where the terminals are connected to the connector on the illumination board 653.

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear end, and these gear teeth 654a are formed so that they can mesh with the intermediate gear 644. Note that the gear teeth 654a are formed along a portion of the circumference, rather than along the entire circumference, in a position sufficient for the operation described below.

The front rotating member 652 has gear teeth 652a formed as a bevel gear and a protruding decorative part 652b that protrudes radially outward. An illumination board 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the protruding decorative part 652b, and light from a light-emitting means arranged on the illumination board 653 can be used to light up or flash the protruding decorative part 652b.

The front rotating member 652 is fastened to the rear rotating member 654, so that the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate together.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is rotatably supported on a circular cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portion 651d of the main body member 651 and the semi-cylindrical portion 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and has gear teeth 657a formed as a bevel gear that can mesh with the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotating member 652. That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are interlocked, but the details of their operation will be described later. Note that the gear teeth 652a, 657a are formed along a portion of the circumference, rather than along the entire circumference, in an arrangement sufficient for the operation described later.

The second decorative rotating member 660 comprises a box-shaped member 661 fastened to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, an electric decoration board 662 fastened to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a wiring retaining plate 663 disposed between the box-shaped member 661 and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and fastened to the tip of the semi-cylindrical portion 651d, 655a.

In this embodiment, the illumination board 662 also undergoes a rotational displacement in conjunction with the rotation of the box-shaped member 661 described below. This may cause the electrical wiring passing between the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a to become twisted or disorganized when being guided into the connector of the illumination board 662. However, the function of the wiring retaining plate 663, which has a through hole for temporarily retaining the wiring, is to prevent the wiring from becoming twisted or disorganized.

In this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the illumination board 662, it is unavoidable that the electrical wiring will become twisted. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not generated by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that reverses at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, so it is possible to avoid excessive strain on the electrical wiring or the electrical wiring becoming twisted and broken.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis (the rotation axis formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a) that is parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side having the longest side.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so that it cannot fall off, with the wiring retaining plate 663 functioning as a retainer. The second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, so that the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from coming off the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The illuminated board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the board coincides with the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661. On the thickness-wise side of the illuminated board 662, the first performance surface 661a is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the front side and whose optical axis faces in the thickness direction, the second performance surface 661b is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the back side and whose optical axis faces in the thickness direction, and the third performance surface 661c is illuminated by a light-emitting device such as an LED arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second performance surface 661b) and whose optical axis faces in the width direction.

In this way, the light emitting means arranged on the illumination board 662 functions to individually illuminate each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c, but since the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c is arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second performance surface 661b), when the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c (the surface facing upwards) is illuminated in a state in which the second performance surface 661b is positioned on the front side (the extended state of the first operating unit 600), the second performance surface 661b can be illuminated by light that travels at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

In other words, unlike when LEDs are placed behind the illumination board 662, the light can be prevented from being hidden by the illumination board 662, so the light illuminating the third performance surface 661c can also illuminate the second performance surface 661b. This makes it possible to increase the variety of performance patterns that illuminate the second performance surface 661b, and improve the brightness of the second performance surface 661b during a light-emitting performance.

The decorative fixing member 670 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and has decorative letters and figures formed thereon so that they can be seen by the player, and is equipped with an illuminated board 671 that shines light diagonally forward and to the left from its back side. The decorative fixing member 670 is fixedly positioned on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player's line of sight towards the decorative fixing member 670 is always tilted diagonally to the right. In other words, by tilting the direction of the light emitted from the illuminated board 671 to the left, the light can be illuminated on the side where the player's eyes are likely to be located.

The decorative fixing member 670 has a lower edge and a right edge that are raised toward the rear side, and a front-to-rear gap is formed between the upper edge and the left edge and the front cover member 612. This front-to-rear gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 passes when tilting and displacing.

Figure 40 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in a standby state, Figure 41 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in a standby state, and Figure 42 is a side view of the first operating unit 600 as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in Figure 40. Note that the base member 611 (see Figure 38) and fastening screws are omitted from the illustration to make it easier to understand the shape.

In the standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (e.g. parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission slot 623. This makes it possible to reduce the displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to displace while sliding along the transmission slot 623. In other words, when the displacement starts, there is no assistance from inertia compared to during the displacement, and the driving force that needs to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to be large, but by configuring to reduce the displacement resistance as in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 when the displacement starts.

The same is also true for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the extended state (see FIG. 45). That is, in this embodiment, the displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (i.e., the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed so that the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a arranged in the transmission long hole 623 at both end positions of the rotating member 620 (the position for the performance waiting state and the position for the extended state) is along (e.g., parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission long hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 when the rotating member 620 starts to displace from both end positions.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with each other from both sides of the intermediate gear 644. In this embodiment, the radius R1 of the gear teeth 625 and the radius R2 of the gear teeth 654a are designed to be the same length, so the rotation angle of the gear teeth 625 relative to the intermediate gear 644 and the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 relative to the intermediate gear 644 are the same.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 can be configured to be variable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 mesh with the gear teeth 657a of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is transmitted to the second decorative rotating member 660, which is perpendicular to the rotation axis.

The rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652. In other words, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are configured to be the same (gear ratio is 1), so the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

Next, the displacement of the first operating unit 600 from the standby state will be explained in chronological order. Figure 43 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate operating state, and Figure 44 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate operating state. Figure 45 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state, and Figure 46 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state. Note that the base member 611 and fastening screws are omitted from the illustration to make it easier to understand the shape.

Between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees, and between the intermediate performance state and the extended state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 26 degrees.

In the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented so that the narrow third performance surface 661c faces the front. In the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second performance surface 661b is configured to face the front (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide slot 616 has a straight portion 616a formed on a straight line extending vertically from the upper end, and a curved portion 616b connected to the lower end of the straight portion 616a and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape).

When the first operating unit 600 is in the intermediate performance state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end of the straight section 616a, i.e., at the connection between the straight section 616a and the curved section 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end of the curved section 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of axis O1 between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state is a linear displacement along the straight line portion 616a, and the displacement of axis O1 between the intermediate performance state and the extended state is a curved displacement along the curved line portion 616b.

The first operating unit 600 is configured to be able to change state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is arranged on the base end side of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving a driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 are driven by the displacement of the rotating member 620.

Therefore, without any countermeasures, the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide slot 616 may cause a large displacement resistance between the guide slot 616 and the rotating member 620. However, in this embodiment, this is suppressed by configuring the guide slot 616 so that its longitudinal direction is aligned with the displacement direction of the rotating member 620.

For example, the displacement of the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state (Figure 41) is a displacement that tilts downward, and the guide long hole 616 is also formed to extend downward. Also, for example, the displacement of the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the extended state (see Figure 46) is a displacement that rises diagonally upward to the right, and the guide long hole 616 is also formed to extend diagonally upward to the right.

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616, it is possible to suppress the displacement resistance of the portion (and axis O1) that displaces inside the guide slot 616.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, the effect of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram showing the displacement amount and displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and FIG. 48(a) and FIG. 48(b) are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the driven side of the supported member 640 when the rotating member 620 rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. Note that the positive and negative values are shown as positive downward displacement amounts and negative upward displacement amounts, and in FIG. 48(b), the values in FIG. 48(a) are shown as bar graphs.

In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support positions of the supported member 640 as the rotating member 620 rotates is illustrated at 10 degree intervals as the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and the rotating member 620 in the extended state of the first operating unit 600 is illustrated in solid lines.

In FIG. 47, the angle θ is illustrated as the angle between the line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624 and the line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622.

The guide elongated hole 616 functions as a long hole that guides the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed. The displacement in the guide elongated hole 616 is caused by the displacement of the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640, which is connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620. Therefore, hereinafter, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the driving side of the supported member 640, and the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

The outline of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 is explained below. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 occurs as a result of the sum of the vertical displacement of the rotating tip (the driving side of the supported member 640) caused by the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 caused by the posture change of the supported member 640.

In the performance standby state, the supported member 640 is in a vertical position, and the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction (the position of the rotating arm is within a range of 45 degrees left and right from the vertical). In other words, the conditions for the displacement in the up-down direction to be small are met in two ways.

In the extended state, both of these are reversed, and the conditions for large vertical displacement are doubled. Therefore, the configuration is prone to a situation where the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement and high at the end of the downward displacement.

Next, the details of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be described. The displacement (tilting displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the extended state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

Therefore, if the guide slot 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may fall with force. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is preferable to stop the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate performance state (a midway position of the tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

In this embodiment, the guide slot 616 is shaped so that a curved section 616b is combined below a straight section 616a. This increases the displacement resistance on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced down the straight section 616a due to its own weight and enters the curved section 616b. This makes it easier to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from falling too fast beyond the position in the intermediate performance state.

The displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the linear portion 616a will be explained. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the driven side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the performance standby state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is located to the right of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate performance state, the driven side of the supported member 640 is located to the left of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 tilts and displaces without changing direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces back and forth in the vertical direction.

This allows the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 to be kept small compared to the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that while the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned on the linear portion 616a, the supported member 640 appears to the player as if it is rotating around the driven side of the supported member 640.

According to this displacement mode, a sliding displacement in the left-right direction can be generated by utilizing the run-up caused by the rotational displacement centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, so the load required for the displacement can be kept low compared to when the entire supported member 640 is caused to slide in the left-right direction from the start of the displacement. Therefore, the load required when the supported member 640 starts to operate can be reduced, and the level of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be lowered. This allows the cost of the drive motor 631 to be reduced.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is kept small, the displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured in association with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and the rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 based on the driving part of the supported member 640 is maintained counterclockwise when viewed from the rear (the direction is not switched). As a result, as described above, the direction of the change in posture of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 are maintained without being switched (reversed).

This makes it possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are moving back and forth (returning), and allows the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 to be a forceful displacement.

Even in a situation where the displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the driving part of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component and is a displacement in the direction along the direction of gravity (downward), so the load required to start displacing the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the level of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be lowered. This allows the cost of the drive motor 631 to be reduced.

The action caused by the curved portion 616b will now be described. The state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned at the connection between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned at the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the angle width range of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG. 48.

First, as a premise, there is no need to use curved portions in the guide slot 616. In other words, the guide slot 616 may be configured with only straight portions, regardless of whether or not it uses any bending portions to increase the displacement resistance in the intermediate performance state as described above.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the curved portion 616b is deliberately used to prevent the speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This is explained below.

Whether guided by the straight portion 616a or the curved portion 616b, when the driven side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 displaces downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces downward.

The difference is that when guided by the curved portion 616b, the curved portion 616b is formed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided to be displaced in a direction (rightward) opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driving side of the supported member 640, and the curved portion 616b is formed in the lower half of the curved portion 616b so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided to be displaced in a direction (leftward) that follows the displacement direction (leftward) of the driving side of the supported member 640.

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 becomes large (at the start of tilting), the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is swung left and right, ensuring a high displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640.

This makes it possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the displacement end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. In other words, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced up and down along an arbitrary path from a specific initial position to a terminal position, if the time required for displacement is the same, the result of integrating the speed in the up and down direction will be the same, so if the displacement starts slowly, the displacement speed will increase towards the end.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned on the virtual axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 47 for comparison, the displacement speed gradually increases from the start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, and reaches a maximum at the displacement end (displacement bottom end) of the supported member 640. In other words, compared to the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide long hole 616 during the period when the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the displacement bottom end, the vertical displacement amount UE1 of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period is larger.

Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis line OE1, the driven side of the supported member 640 may bounce back, which may adversely affect the performance of the first operating unit 600 if the performance is to stop the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by adopting a curved portion 616b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 increases is also allocated to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, thereby making the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 uniform.

In this case, uniformity does not only mean making the speed uniform over the entire range of displacement, but also includes limiting the range of speed. In particular, in this embodiment, during tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases at the start of entry into the curved portion 616b, and the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually decreases after entry into the lower half of the curved portion 616b begins.

In other words, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the supported member 640 from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, by reducing the speed required for the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side of the curved section 616b, i.e., the amount of displacement required per unit time, the amount of displacement required to lift the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time at the start of driving when the rotating member 620 is moved upward (raised up), can be reduced, thereby reducing the burden on the drive motor 631.

Next, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described with reference to Figure 49. Figure 49 is a schematic diagram showing the change in angle θ [degrees] accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620.

The angle θ can be regarded as the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 around the circular through hole 624, and is directly linked to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. In other words, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is determined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

In this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth 652a and the gear tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are both set to 1. Therefore, the angle θ and the rotation angle with the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are the same, and therefore the change in the angle θ can be understood as a change in the posture of the second decorative rotating member 660.

The change in angle θ is 45 degrees from the standby state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 44), and 90 degrees from the intermediate state of the first operating unit 600 to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 46).

When in the standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a position where the first performance surface 661a is tilted 45 degrees to the left (the third performance surface 661c is tilted 45 degrees to the right), so that as the angle θ changes and the state is switched between the intermediate performance state and the extended state in sequence, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third performance surface 661c faces the front (see Figure 43), and then the second performance surface 661b faces the front (see Figure 45).

The setting of the angle θ is achieved by designing the guide elongated hole 616 to determine the position of the supported member 640. In other words, in this embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is designed to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the position of the second decorative rotating member 660 according to the angle θ.

As a result, even if the detection sensor KS1 is only a sensor that detects the position of the rotating member 620, as in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 based on the output of the detection sensor KS1.

In other words, if the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operating unit 600 is in a performance standby state (see Figure 41), and the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 and the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 from that state.

Here, the amount of change in angle θ is not proportional to the amount of rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when determining the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not sufficient to obtain a numerical value by proportional calculation from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631. This also makes it possible to avoid the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 being constant even when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed. This will be explained below.

The change in angle θ is roughly the same as the change in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. That is, compared to the angle change from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state (approximately 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees), the angle change from the intermediate performance state to the extended state is roughly larger (approximately 20 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned in the upper half of the curved section 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate performance state to the extended state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved section 616b, and eventually becomes lower than the level of the angle change from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state (reduced to about 7 degrees).

In this way, by configuring the angle θ relative to the rotation of the rotating member 620 per unit angle to vary, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be similarly configured to vary. That is, in a range where the value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be small, making it easier to maintain its posture, while in a range where the value of the angle θ is large, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be large, making it easier to quickly change the surface facing the player (presentation surfaces 661a to 661c).

The above-mentioned configuration allows the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 to be accelerated or accelerated. As described above, the displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 simultaneously involves a change in position and posture associated with the displacement of the supported member 640, and a rotational displacement about the rotation axis formed at the center of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement around the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a becomes noticeably large when the driven side of the supported member 640 moves from the straight portion 616a of the guide slot 616 into the curved portion 616b.

In other words, during tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate performance state is reached, and even if the second decorative rotating member 660 moves up and down (bounces back) slightly from the position on the driven side of the supported member 640 in the intermediate performance state, the second decorative rotating member 660 can be maintained in a state in which the third performance surface 661c faces the front side (see Figure 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate performance state, the rotational speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases when the rotating member 620 rotates at a constant speed, and the change in posture in the rotational direction is clearly visible. In other words, the player can visually see that the second decorative rotating member 660 is instantly rotating and displaced.

In this embodiment, since the second presentation surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 faces the front side at the rotation end (lower displacement end) of the rotating member 620 and is viewed as a single unit when positioned closely adjacent to the decorative fixing member 670 (see Figure 28), it is desirable to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from bouncing back upward when the rotating member 620 is positioned at the lower displacement end.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by configuring the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 as described above, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform, so that it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive when the rotating member 620 is positioned at the lower displacement end, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In addition to the uniform displacement speed, the arrangement of the central portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (e.g., the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 643) is configured to be closest to the support fastening portion 615, which serves as the rotation axis of the rotating member 620. This makes it possible to prevent the rotation tip of the rotating member 620 from becoming unruly due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660, which are supported on the rotation tip side of the rotating member 620, and stabilizes the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

In addition, the lower half of the curved section 616b is configured to suitably impede displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower displacement end of the rotating member 620 in the direction of bouncing back (upper left direction) around the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620. That is, the lower half of the curved section 616b has a short side direction that slopes upward and left, and since it is possible to suppress displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in this direction, it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In other words, in this embodiment, the direction of displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in response to the displacement of the driving side of the supported member 640 is different from the direction of displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 when the driving side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of its displacement.

If there was no guide, the former would be expected to displace downward and left along the displacement direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 (the rotation direction of the rotating member 620); however, in this embodiment, by being guided by the long guide hole 616, it is slightly deflected left and right in the direction along the long guide hole 616 and displaces downward.

On the other hand, the latter is a circular orbit centered on the driven side of the supported member 640, so the displacement direction is not along the guide elongated hole 616 but along the short direction of the guide elongated hole 616. This makes it possible to suppress the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 and prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

The following describes the characteristics of the displacement of the pivoting member 620 in the rising direction. When the first operating unit 600 changes state from the extended state to the performance standby state, the pivoting member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

The load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 (i.e., the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) is mainly used to raise and displace the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decorative rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660 arranged on the supported member 640, and to rotate the second decorative rotating member 660.

In other words, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660, the less load is required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

As shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, the angle θ proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is designed to be at a minimum value when the rotating member 620 starts to rotate from the extended state of the first operating unit 600. This makes it possible to reduce the load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

At the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660, which is centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640, is positioned in a position that is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 (facing in the vertical direction).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as the inertial force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be generated as a load in which the rotating member 620 is twisted around the longitudinal axis, and the rotating member 620 can withstand this load with only slight localized elastic displacement by distributing it in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to when the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in a front view, it is easier to avoid a situation in which the rotating member 620 breaks. In addition, excessive elastic deformation of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front cover member 612, and the front cover member 612 can be configured to withstand loads that the rotating member 620 cannot withstand by elastically deforming, thereby preventing damage to the rotating member 620.

The displacement of the overhanging decorative part 652b will be explained. The overhanging decorative part 652b is a member that rotates and displaces around the axis O1, and its rotation angle corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even if the change in position of the driven side of the supported member 640 is small, such as when changing from a performance standby state to an overhanging state, the overhanging decorative part 652b will rotate if the angle θ changes.

The change in angle θ from the performance standby state to the protruding state is approximately 135 degrees, and the protruding decorative part 652b rotates approximately 45 degrees. Here, when the protruding decorative part 652b rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise from the performance standby state, it feels like it will collide with the other operating units 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see Figure 28). However, in this embodiment, the supported member 640, which is the basis for the rotation of the protruding decorative part 652b, itself changes its posture in a manner that rotates clockwise, so it is possible to avoid collision with the other operating units 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members).

In other words, by configuring the protruding decorative portion 652b to be displaceable based on the supported member 640, the space required for the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, if the overhanging decorative part 652b is a part that is fixedly positioned based on the supported member 640 when the first operating unit 600 is in the overhanging state, when the supported member 640 changes from its overhanging state position to its performance standby state position, the overhanging decorative part 652b may overhang to the upper left of the supported member 640, potentially causing a negative effect on the performance, such as colliding with another operating unit 800 or partially obscuring the overhang display on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the protruding decorative part 652b rotates and displaces in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the driving side of the supported member 640, based on the driven side of the supported member 640, so that when the supported member 640 protrudes toward the third pattern display device 81, it protrudes in tandem, and when the supported member 640 displaces to the side retreating from the third pattern display device 81, it retracts in tandem. Therefore, the position of the protruding decorative part 652b in the retracted state can be formed on the side away from the third pattern display device 81.

The rotation angle of the protruding decorative portion 652b relative to the supported member 640 from the player's point of view can be calculated from the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640. In other words, it is 45 degrees, which is the difference between the change in angle θ of approximately 135 degrees and the change in posture angle of the supported member 640 of approximately 90 degrees.

In this embodiment, the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be equal regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into angles a1, a2 below the horizontal line and angles b1, b2 above the horizontal line, the difference between the angle θ and the change in posture of the supported member 640 is calculated as ((a1+b1)-(a2+b2))-(b1-b2)=(a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the protruding decorative part 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when the rotating member 620 is rotated and displaced at a constant angular velocity, the angular velocity of rotation of the protruding decorative part 652b based on the posture of the supported member 640 is constant, even though the displacement speed of the supported member 640 is not constant.

This allows the player to visually perceive the protruding decorative portion 652b arranged on the supported member 640 as if it were being driven at a constant angular velocity by a drive means other than the drive motor 631 that drives the rotating member 620.

By configuring it in this way, the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b relative to the supported member 640 can be made to appear, from the player's point of view, as if there were sections of sliding movement and sections of rotational movement, and the displacement mode of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode, as if it were not mechanical.

This effect can be achieved by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 into separate sections where the posture change is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, and sections where the posture change is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction. In other words, the protruding decorative portion 652b rotates relative to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and from the player's point of view, the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b is influenced by the side that is dominant as the displacement of the supported member 640.

Therefore, in sections where the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the protruding decorative part 652b can be visually perceived as undergoing a rotational displacement, and in sections where the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the protruding decorative part 652b can be visually perceived as undergoing a sliding displacement.

As described above, the rotating member 620 can be rotated to form a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, and an extended state, and although a case has been described in which it is displaced from one displacement end point to the other displacement end point, the drive direction may be switched so that it is displaced in the opposite direction at a midpoint in the displacement range.

For example, after rotating the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state, the drive direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed to control the rotation to return to the performance standby state. In this case, since the rotating member 620 needs to be stopped midway down, it may be necessary to set the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 low in order to ensure an accurate stopping position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) tends to increase near the intermediate performance state compared to the performance standby state. As described above, the magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660.

Therefore, near the intermediate performance state where the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, a larger portion of the driving force is allocated to the second decorative rotating member 660, and therefore the portion allocated to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 can be relatively reduced, automatically suppressing the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

In other words, as the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, making it easier to stop the rotating member 620 near the intermediate performance state without having to set the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 low in advance.

Next, the second operating unit 700 will be described. The second operating unit 700 is an operating unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and its states are mainly switched between a performance standby state (see FIG. 28) in which it retreats below the opening 511a to ensure the field of view of the player looking at the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 28), a protruding state (see FIG. 30) in which it is positioned in front of the third pattern display device 81 and attracts attention, and an intermediate performance state (see FIG. 35) that is a state between the two.

Figure 50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700, and Figure 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700. In Figures 50 and 51, the peripheral components of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 are mainly shown in an exploded state, and the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is shown in a non-exploded state.

As shown in Figures 50 and 51, the second operating unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 fastened to the lower right corner of the rear case 510, a pivoting arm member 720 disposed between the right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510 and pivotable about the cylindrical protrusion 511b of the rear case 510, a drive transmission device 730 configured to transmit a driving force to the pivoting arm member 720, and a lifting plate member 740 to which the tip of the pivoting arm member 720 is guidably connected and which is configured to be capable of being lifted and lowered. The lifting/lowering plate member 740 is provided with a left rear plate member 750 fastened to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the rear side thereof, a set of front support members 760 that are configured as a left-right pair and fastened to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750, a blind decorative member 768 that is fastened to the rear case 510 on the front side of the metal bar 702, and a lifting/lowering reversal performance device 770 that is configured to be displaceable in a manner that combines lifting/lowering displacement and forward/rearward displacement on the lifting/lowering plate member 740 and the front support member 760.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support part 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, a gap forming part 712 that is recessed from the rear side at the left edge and forms a gap between the rear case 510, a plurality of detection sensors 713 (three in this embodiment) that are arranged to detect the position of the detection part 735 of the drive transmission device 730, a front upper inclined part 714 that is inclined in a manner that the further it goes upward at the front side of the left side and is formed so as to be able to guide the rotating cylinder part 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and a plurality of fastening parts 718 that form female threaded parts into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The detection sensors 713 are multiple photocoupler type sensors that are spaced apart so that the detection grooves are positioned at positions where the detectable parts 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 is arranged to match the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the standby state for performance, the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state, and the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch its output depending on whether the second operating unit 700 is in a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, or an extended state, and the audio lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second operating unit 700 from the output result.

The pivot arm member 720 is supported by a cylindrical protrusion 511b that protrudes cylindrically from the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 to the front side, and is formed as a long plate in a L-shape when viewed from the front. The support tube 722 protrudes cylindrically toward the rear at the bent part of the main body 721, and has an inner peripheral shape formed to a size that allows the cylindrical protrusion 511b to be inserted therethrough. The long hole 723 is formed in the long hole shape at the right end of the main body 721, and the left end of the main body 721 is formed in the long hole shape. It is provided with a cylindrical fastening portion 724 that protrudes cylindrically toward the front (in a direction parallel to the protruding direction of the cylindrical protrusion 711a) and has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, a cylindrical fastening portion 725 that protrudes cylindrically toward the rear at an intermediate position between the cylindrical fastening portion 724 and the support tube portion 722 and has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, and a torsion spring SP2 that is wrapped around the support tube portion 722 and applies a biasing force to the main body portion 721 in an upward direction (in a direction lifting the left side) between the rear case 510.

A step is formed on the left side of the main body 721 so that it is shifted toward the front side compared to the base end side of the support tube 722, and the support plate 701 is disposed in the gap formed on the rear side by the step.

The support plate 701 is a plate-like part that is fastened to the bottom wall part 511 of the rear case 510, and has an arc-shaped long hole part 701a that is drilled so as to be able to guide the cylindrical fastening part 725. A fastening screw is inserted through the long hole part 701a with a ring-shaped collar C3 sandwiched therebetween, and is screwed into the cylindrical fastening part 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is supported on the support plate 701 via the cylindrical fastening part 725 so as not to fall off.

The support plate 701 is fastened to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, so that the left side of the pivot arm member 720 is restricted from moving away from the rear case 510 toward the front side. This prevents the pivot arm member 720 from being displaced toward the front side due to a load applied to the left side of the pivot arm member 720, so that the displacement of the pivot arm member 720 can be stably supported.

The right side of the main body 721 is disposed in the gap between the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712. In other words, the forward/rearward displacement of the right side of the main body 721 is restricted by the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

The long hole portion 723 is formed in a shape in which a straight line passing through the center of the width and extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support tube portion 722. Therefore, when the load applied to the long hole portion 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, the component of the load in the rotation direction of the pivot arm member 720 is zero.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits a driving force through the long hole portion 723 of the pivot arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 fastened and fixed from the front side to the right front plate member 710, a drive gear 732 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 731, a transmission gear 733 meshed with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 meshed with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are each supported by a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 711a that protrude cylindrically from the back side of the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions. A female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusions 711a, and fastening screws that are inserted into the shaft holes of the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 can be screwed in. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are supported by the cylindrical protrusions 711a so that they cannot fall off.

The transmission support part 711 includes the cylindrical protrusion 711a described above and an arc-shaped hole 711b that is drilled in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical protrusion 711a that supports the gear cam member 734.

The gear cam member 734 includes a detectable portion 735 that protrudes toward the front side in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft portion and is formed so as to be insertable into the arc hole 711b, an extension portion 736 that extends to have a longer diameter than the gear portion, and a cylindrical protrusion portion 736a that protrudes cylindrically from the tip of the extension portion 736 toward the rear side.

The detected portion 735 is formed so that it can be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and is configured as a part that enables the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) to detect the position of the gear cam member 734 based on the output from the detection sensor 713.

The cylindrical protrusion 736a is formed so that it can be inserted into the long hole 723 of the pivot arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is transmitted to the pivot arm member 720 via the long hole 723.

A female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusion 736a, and a fastening screw that is inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed in. When this fastening screw is screwed in and fixed, the pivot arm member 720 is connected to the cylindrical protrusion 736a in an undetachable manner.

The lift plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down in response to the rotation of the pivot arm member 720, and is equipped with a guided member 741 that is arranged on the left end side and guided in the up and down direction, and a horizontally elongated member 742 that is fastened and fixed to the lower end side of the guided member 741 and is long in the left and right directions.

The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal rod 702, which is fixed to the rear case 510 with its longitudinal direction aligned vertically, can be inserted therethrough, allowing for vertical displacement along the metal rod 702. The tips of the protrusions protruding from both the left and right sides of the guided member 741 toward the rear side come into contact with the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510, thereby restricting the axial rotation of the guided member 741 and stabilizing the position of the guided member 741.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the horizontally elongated member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is also stabilized.

The horizontal member 742 includes a long hole 743 that is drilled in the shape of a long oval with a vertical width that allows the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the pivoting arm member 720 to be inserted, a cylindrical portion 744 that protrudes cylindrically toward the front side above the long hole 743, and a pair of guide portions 745 that are disposed below the bottom at positions equidistant to the left and right of the cylindrical portion 744.

The fastening screw, which is inserted through the long hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 sandwiched therebetween, is screwed into the cylindrical fastening portion 724, so that the lifting plate member 740 is supported by the rotating arm member 720 via the cylindrical fastening portion 724 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion through which the insertion tube portion 773 of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is inserted, and which supports the lifting/reversing performance device 770 in a state in which the lifting/reversing performance device 770 can be displaced forward and backward. In other words, the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is not fixed to the lifting/reversing plate member 740, but is disposed on the front side of the lifting/reversing plate member 740 in a manner in which the lifting/reversing performance device 770 can be displaced forward and backward based on the lifting/reversing plate member 740.

A coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wrap around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion tube portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction that pulls the lift plate member 740 and the lift reversal performance device 770 apart.

The guide portion 745 is made up of a pair of left and right guide portions, and includes a long plate portion 745a extending from front to back, and a rotating cylinder portion 745b rotatably supported on a pair of front and rear shaft portions that protrude outwardly to the left and right from the plate portion 745a.

The rotating cylinder section 745b rotates when the above-mentioned lifting/reversing performance device 770 moves forward and backward, and functions as a part that guides the forward and backward movement, but details will be described later.

The left rear plate member 750, like the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, has a front upper inclined portion 751 formed on the front side of the right side in a manner that the further upward it approaches the front side, and is formed so as to be able to guide the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and a number of fastening portions 752 formed with female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The concealing decorative member 768 comprises a three-dimensional decorative portion 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate is disposed on the rear side of the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a to which an LED is fixed on the front side, so that the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a can be illuminated by the light emitted from the LED.

The front support members 760 each include a fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and a receiving inclined portion 762 arranged adjacent to the left and right inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761 and inclined toward the front side as the back surface of the plate moves upward.

The fixing plate 761 is a plate that is fastened to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by inserting a fastening screw that is inserted from the front side into the insertion hole and threaded into the corresponding female thread portion.

In this fixed position, the receiving inclination portion 762 is positioned in front of the front upper inclination portions 714, 751. That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving inclination portion 762 and the front upper inclination portions 714, 751, and the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is guided along this guide path, so that the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is configured to lift and lower while displacing in the front-to-rear direction. This lifting and lowering displacement is explained below.

Figure 52(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIa-LIIa in Figure 28, and Figure 52(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operation unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIb-LIIb in Figure 28. Figures 52(a) and 52(b) show the second operation unit 700 in a standby state for performance.

Figure 53(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in Figure 33, and Figure 53(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in Figure 33. Figures 53(a) and 53(b) show intermediate performance states of the second operating unit 700.

Figure 54(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIVa-LIVa in Figure 30, and Figure 54(b) is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and center frame 86 taken along line LIVb-LIVb in Figure 30. Figures 54(a) and 54(b) show the extended state of the second operating unit 700.

The lifting and lowering displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 shown in Figures 52 to 54 occurs when the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The transmission of driving force during the lifting and lowering displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 will be described. In this description, Figures 28, 30, and 33 will be referred to as appropriate.

When the drive force transmission starts from the performance standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protrusion 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is designed to be parallel to the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, so that the displacement resistance that occurs when the gear cam member 734 starts to rotate can be suppressed. The same thing is also true in the extended state.

On the other hand, in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 30), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, so that the displacement resistance that the gear cam member 734 receives in the rotational direction from the pivot arm member 720 is maximized, making it easier to stop the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734.

As shown in Figures 52 to 54, the lifting and reversing performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is arranged on the rear side below the center frame 86, and is configured to be displaced to the front side in the front-to-rear direction as it is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is reduced by a configuration in which the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is guided by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, and by a configuration in which the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 are guided by the rotating cylinder portion 745b of the lifting and reversing plate member 740.

In other words, the pair of rotating cylinder sections 774e are designed to be aligned parallel to the inclination angles of the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 (the front upper inclined portion 751 is located on the left side not shown in FIG. 52, see FIG. 56), which are arranged symmetrically. By the rotating cylinder section 774e rolling around the center of the cylindrical section 774d, the displacement resistance of the main body member 771, which displaces along the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, can be reduced.

Furthermore, by arranging the rotating cylinder parts 745b aligned in the front-rear direction, the front rotating cylinder part 745b is designed to be positioned slightly upward, which helps to suppress tilting displacement of the main body member 771, thereby preventing the rotating cylinder part 774e from applying excessive load to the receiving inclined part 762 and the front upper inclined parts 714, 751.

In other words, in this embodiment, the performance device 780 is designed so that its center of gravity (position of the axis of rotation) is located slightly forward of the front-to-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is constantly biased in a forward tilt direction by gravity. Due to the influence of this biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are prone to displacement such that the front side drops and the rear side rises.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b that is disposed adjacent to the first horizontal plate 774b when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b descends is disposed slightly upward, and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b that is disposed adjacent to the second horizontal plate 774c when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c ascends is disposed slightly downward. Therefore, forward tilt displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b can stably roll between the first horizontal plate 774b because there is a gap between the front rotating cylinder portion 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c, and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b can stably roll between the first horizontal plate 774b and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b because there is a gap between the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b. This allows the rotating cylinder portion 745b to roll normally, and reduces the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The displacement of the lift-up/down reversing device 770 toward the front side is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the geometrical guidance described above. Therefore, the displacement resistance of the forward/backward displacement can be reduced during the upward displacement in which the lift-up/down reversing device 770 is displaced toward the front side compared to the downward displacement.

The up and down displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is performed by the driving force of the drive motor 731, which is divided into vertical displacement and front-to-rear displacement. In the vertical displacement, the burden of upward displacement is relatively large due to the need to counter gravity, but in this case, the forward-to-rear displacement can be assisted by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the driving force required to lift the lifting and reversing performance device 770 from becoming excessive.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so that it is its natural length in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 53) of the second operating unit 700. In other words, when the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 is positioned lower than the position in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction that assists the forward/backward displacement of the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 caused by the driving force of the drive motor 731, whereas when the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 is positioned higher than the position in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the forward/backward displacement of the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770.

This makes it easier to maintain the position of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 in the intermediate performance state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven from the performance standby state of the second operating unit 700 and then controlled to be stopped so as to stop the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, even if the stopping timing is slightly earlier than ideal, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 can displace the second operating unit 700 so as to move it closer to the intermediate performance state.

For example, when the stop control is performed in a similar manner, even if the stop timing is slightly later than ideal, the second operating unit 700 will descend under its own weight, and this descent due to its own weight will be suppressed by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2, so that the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate performance state and maintained in its position.

In addition, for example, when the drive motor 731 is driven and controlled from the extended state of the second operating unit 700, and the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled to stop the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, if the lifting and reversing performance device 770 passes the intermediate performance state downward, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance, making it easier to prevent a large downward displacement beyond the intermediate performance state. And even after the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is applied, so that the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate performance state.

Here, we will explain the effect of the lift-and-reverse effect device 770, which is displaced forward and backward in response to lift-and-reverse displacement. As a premise, a movable device is known that can be switched between a state in which it attracts the player's attention by displacing in and out of a frame bounded by a center frame 86, and a state in which it retreats from the player's field of vision.

Most of these movable gadgets are designed with an emphasis on how they look when placed inside the center frame 86, and when they are retracted to the outside of the center frame 86, appearance is often not taken into consideration, under the assumption that they will not attract the player's attention.

However, recently, the distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 has been increased, and the line of sight reaches the rear outer position of the center frame 86 (the rear position of the play area) at the edge of the field of vision when passing through the inside of the center frame 86 and looking at the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, if the appearance of the movable props retracted to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 is poor, it may reduce the player's interest.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, decorative surfaces are formed not only on the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also on the back side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and top and bottom sides (first secondary decorative surface 787a2 and second secondary decorative surface 787b2 in FIG. 52), and the displacement direction of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is set to a line that starts from the player side (front side) as it approaches the back side (sloping downward as it approaches the rear), that is, along the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of vision, so that each decorative surface can easily fit within the player's field of vision.

This allows each decorative surface of the covering member 787 to be comfortably within the player's field of vision. Details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but the decorations (figures, patterns, letters, pictures, etc.) formed on the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 or second main decorative surface 787b1, first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 54) that is visible to the player in the extended state (see FIG. 54) and the upper side (first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or second sub-decorative surface 787b2, first sub-decorative surface 787a2 in FIG. 52) that is visible to the player in the performance standby state (see FIG. 52) are formed as decorations that are related to each other.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first minor decorative surface 787a2 are formed as a first decoration that is related to each other, the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second minor decorative surface 787b2 are formed as a second decoration that is related to each other, and the first decoration and the second decoration are formed as decorations that are different from each other.

The decoration formed on the upper surface is positioned in the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 26) located behind it when the second operating unit 700 is in the standby state for a performance, so it is easily visible when the player moves their gaze to switch between paying attention to the ball flowing down the play area formed outside the center frame 86 (see Figure 2) and paying attention to the display performance unfolding on the third pattern display device 81.

Therefore, the content of the decoration (notification content, for example, "Chance" or "Big Win") that is visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the extended state can be visible to the player through the upper surface of the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state.

This allows the third pattern display device 81 to be displaced to a standby state for easier viewing, while the covering member 787, which is positioned so as not to be conspicuous, can continue to attract the player's attention.

In addition, as described below, the covering member 787 is configured to be rotatable so as to switch the decorative surface facing the player, so that the content of the decorative surface visible to the player in the extended state can be different.

For example, if the lifting and reversing display device 770 is placed in a display standby state before the player can see the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state (because the player misses it or the operating speed is too fast), and the content of the decorative surface can only be seen from the front side, most of the front side will be hidden by the game board 13 in the display standby state, and the player will be forced to focus on the liquid crystal display displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, reducing his or her ability to focus on the covering member 787.

On the other hand, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be seen from the top side, as in this embodiment, the player can visually check the lifting and reversing performance device 770 in the performance standby state and understand the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, "chance" or "jackpot") that were visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the extended state.

As a result, for players who miss the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state, the content notified by the state of the covering member 787 can be continuously notified by the visible decorative surface of the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state. This makes it possible to maintain high attention to the covering member 787 regardless of the state, such as the performance standby state or the extended state.

In this embodiment, the forward/rearward displacement of the lifting/reversing effect device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is configured as a displacement from a state in which it is positioned on the rear side of the rear end surface of the play area to a position forward of the rear end surface of the play area.

As shown in FIG. 52, when the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state, the front of the covering member 787 faces the back of the plate of the center frame 86, and the center frame 86 has a flow path forming portion 86a formed to protrude toward the covering member 787.

The flow path forming portion 86a is a portion that forms the rear portion of the guide flow path for guiding the ball that has flown down the lower rolling surface of the center frame 86 from the left and right entrances of the center frame 86 into the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 after reaching the lower edge of the center frame 86, to the first winning opening 64 disposed in the play area by swinging the ball backward once and then forward again (see FIG. 9). In other words, the flow path forming portion 86a positions the rear end surface BE1 of the play area rearward of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2).

Because a ball that flows down the flow path forming portion 86a has a high probability of entering the first winning port 64, the flow path forming portion 86a attracts a lot of attention, and especially when the ball flies into the inside of the center frame 86, the flow path forming portion 86a is likely to attract the player's attention. In the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), the performance device 780 is disposed directly behind the flow path forming portion 86a, making it easy to configure a state in which the performance device 780 in the performance standby state comes into the player's field of vision.

When the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state, the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52(a)), when the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53(a)), and when the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

In other words, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86, and at the same time is displaced toward the front so as to enter a front-to-rear position that is the same as the front-to-rear position of the play area. Therefore, it can be made to appear to the player that the covering member 787 has climbed onto the center frame 86 and is moving toward the front (approaching the player).

In addition, when the second operating unit 700 is raised and lowered, the performance device 780 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction, and the front-to-rear position of its front end face is configured to match (coincide) with the front-to-rear position of the second performance surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 in the extended state of the first operating unit 600.

As a result, the front-to-back positions of the second performance surface 661b (see Figure 29) of the first operating unit 600 and the performance device 780 (Figure 30) of the second operating unit 700, which are positioned close to each other when viewed from the front in the extended state, are aligned, making it easier to visually recognize them as a single unit.

On the other hand, the longitudinal position of the performance device 780 is lowered further back in the intermediate performance state and the performance standby state than in the extended state, so that the box-shaped member 661 of the first operating unit 600 and the performance device 780 can be easily viewed separately (independently) compared to the extended state.

The lifting and reversing performance device 770 includes a main body member 771 that is connected and supported by the lifting plate member 740, and a performance device 780 that is configured to be displaceable based on the main body member 771. Next, the lifting and reversing performance device 770 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 55 and 56.

Figure 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the lift-and-reverse performance device 770, and Figure 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lift-and-reverse performance device 770. Note that Figures 50 and 51 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of Figures 55 and 56.

The main body member 771 includes a lower long portion 772 formed long in the left-right direction, a cylindrical insertion tube portion 773 that protrudes from the left-right center position of the lower long portion 772 toward the back side, a pair of guide extension portions 774 that extend from both left and right ends of the lower long portion 772 to the back side, an upper long portion 775 that is formed integrally with the left-right center position of the lower long portion 772 and formed long in the left-right direction by a connecting portion that extends up and down, a plurality of guide portions 776 that are arranged on both left and right sides of the upper long portion 775 toward the back side and are configured to be able to guide the linear plate member 784 of the performance device 780 in the left-right direction, a transmission device holding plate 777 that is fastened and fixed from the back side to the left-right center of the upper long portion 775 and can support the drive transmission device, and a light-emitting performance means 778 that is fastened and fixed to the front sides of the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775.

The insertion tube portion 773 is a portion that is inserted into the inner circumference of the cylindrical portion 744 of the lifting plate member 740, and is formed with a dimensional relationship that allows it to slide on the inner circumference of the cylindrical portion 744, and the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction by the sliding. In other words, by inserting the insertion tube portion 773 into the cylindrical portion 744, it is possible to suppress the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 in the front-rear direction with respect to the lifting plate member 740.

The guide extension 774 includes a vertical plate 774a whose width faces the up-down direction, a first horizontal plate 774b connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a whose width faces the left-right direction, a second horizontal plate 774c connected to the vertical plate 774a below the first horizontal plate 774b whose width faces the left-right direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), a pair of upper and lower cylindrical portions 774d protruding outward from the left and right outer surfaces of the vertical plate 774a, and a rotating cylindrical portion 774e rotatably supported by the cylindrical portions 774d.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a longer width so that it extends more inwardly to the left and right than the widthwise ends of the first horizontal plate 774b. This widthwise extension is vertically opposed to the lower bottom of the lifting plate member 740 in the assembled state, and the mutual abutment suppresses the tilting displacement in which the guide extension portion 774 falls forward. In other words, by ensuring a width such that the second horizontal plate 774c is vertically opposed to the lower bottom of the lifting plate member 740, it is possible to suppress the tilting displacement in which the main body member 771 falls forward based on the lifting plate member 740.

The pair of cylindrical portions 774d are not aligned vertically, but the upper cylindrical portion 774d is shifted forward compared to the lower cylindrical portion 774d. This shift is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 is parallel to the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical portions 774d (see FIG. 52(a)). In other words, by arranging the pair of cylindrical portions 774d parallel to the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e can be simultaneously abutted against the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762. This allows the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e to roll stably, making it easier to avoid localized loads.

The guide portion 776 includes a plurality of cylindrical portions 776a arranged on both the left and right sides in a vertically aligned pair and having female threads formed on the inner circumference, and a plurality of anti-disengagement plate portions 776b fastened to connect the pair of left and right cylindrical portions 776a.

The fall prevention plate portion 776b has insertion holes drilled at positions corresponding to the multiple cylindrical portions 776a, and is fastened to the cylindrical portion 776a by inserting fastening screws into the insertion holes from the rear side and screwing them into the cylindrical portion 776a, and functions as a part for preventing the linear plate member 784 from falling off, but details will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b drilled in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position where the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, a cylindrical protrusion portion 777c that protrudes cylindrically from the front side below the insertion hole 777b, a pair of insertion holes 777d drilled at both upper and lower end positions so that fastening screws can be inserted, and a wiring fastener member 777e that is fastened and fixed to the back side.

The cylindrical protrusion 777c has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, and when the fastening screw is screwed into it while it is inserted into the transmission gear 781b, it supports the up-down inversion member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The through hole 777d is designed to allow the insertion of a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion 775a formed in the corresponding portion of the upper long portion 775, and the transmission device holding plate 777 is fastened and fixed to the upper long portion 775 by the fastening screw.

The wiring retaining member 777e is a part that holds and secures the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in the gap between it and the transmission device retaining plate 777, but by forming it into a shape that follows the outer frame of the transmission device retaining plate 777, it is also possible to improve the overall rigidity of the transmission device retaining plate 777.

The light-emitting means 778 is equipped with two elongated plate-shaped electric lighting boards 778a, one above the other, on the left and right sides of which light-emitting elements such as LEDs are arranged on the front side, and a light-diffusing member 778b, which is a plate member made of a light-transmitting resin material arranged on the front side of the electric lighting boards 778a and on which a light-diffusing process is performed.

The upper illumination board 778a is equipped with a pair of detection sensors 778d arranged on the back side, one above the other. The detection sensors 778d are photocoupler type detection devices, and are configured to be able to detect the position of the up-down inversion member 781 of the performance device 780 by arranging an arc-shaped protrusion 781d in the detection groove, but details will be described later.

The lower light diffusion member 778b has multiple fastening portions formed on the back side, and fastening screws are inserted from the back side into insertion holes drilled in the lower long portion 772 at corresponding positions to the fastening portions, thereby fastening and fixing the fastening screws so that they are not noticeable.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusion member 778b has through holes 778c on both the left and right sides for inserting fastening screws, and the fastening screws are inserted into the through holes 778c from the front side and screwed into the female threaded portion 775b of the upper long portion 775, thereby fastening and fixing the upper light diffusion member 778b.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, and may be noticeable without any countermeasures. However, in this embodiment, as described below, the covering member 787 is positioned to always cover the front side of the insertion hole 778c, so that the head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

Therefore, even if the head of the fastening screw is designed to face the front, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the head of the fastening screw is conspicuous and adversely affects the performance. In other words, by designing the covering member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, it is possible to increase the design freedom of the insertion direction of the fastening screw.

The performance device 780 is a device in which an outer portion is arranged around the upper long portion 775 and is configured to be displaceable, and includes an up-down inversion member 781 pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777, a drive motor 782 having a drive gear 782a fixed to a drive shaft that transmits a driving force to the transmission gear 781b of the up-down inversion member 781, a pair of intermediate arm members 783 whose one end is pivotally supported on each of the two longitudinal ends of the up-down inversion member 781, and a pair of intermediate arm members 783 whose other end is pivotally supported and whose displacement in the left-right direction is guided by the guide portion 776. It comprises a pair of linear motion plate members 784, a pair of axial rotation members 785 arranged between the linear motion plate members 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversible) on a rotation axis extending in the left-right direction, a pair of axial support members 786 that axially support the axial rotation members 785 together with the linear motion plate members 784, a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed to the left and right outer tip portions of the axial rotation members 785 with the phase fixed so that they cannot fall off, and covering members 787 arranged in front of and behind the end plate members 785d and formed with left and right lengths that cover the left and right sides of the upper long portion 775.

The upside-down member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b that protrudes in a gear-like shape from the rear side of the center of the main body plate portion 781a, a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c that protrude cylindrically from both ends of the main body plate portion 781a in the long direction toward the rear side, and an arc-shaped protrusion 781d that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b and protrudes from the front side of the main body plate portion 781a.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole in the center that extends in the front-rear direction, and the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into this circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed in from the tip side, so that the up-down inversion member 781 is axially supported on the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with it, thereby rotating the up-down inversion member 781. In other words, the up-down inversion member 781 can be rotated by energizing the drive motor 782.

The cylindrical protrusion 781c supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end of the intermediate arm member 783 where the one-side support hole 783a is formed displaces in accordance with the cylindrical protrusion 781c, which displaces as the up-down inversion member 781 rotates.

The arc-shaped protrusion 781d is formed so that it can be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light-emitting performance means 778. In other words, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d can be placed in either of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the posture of the upside-down member 781 can be determined between two postures in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and a posture in between (a posture in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is not positioned in either of the detection grooves of the pair of detection sensors 778d).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long rod shape (narrow plate shape) and includes a one-side support hole 783a drilled at one end and supported by a cylindrical protrusion 781c, a cylindrical other-side cylindrical portion 783b formed with its inner periphery penetrating at the other end opposite the one-side support hole 783a, and a bevel tooth portion 783c formed as an umbrella-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other-side cylindrical portion 783b.

A female screw is formed on the inner circumference of the cylindrical protrusion 781c, and a fastening screw is inserted into the female screw and passed through the one-side support hole 783a from the rear side. This allows the intermediate arm member 783 to be pivotally supported by the upside-down member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction, and includes a cylindrical protrusion portion 784a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, an arc-shaped plate portion 784b that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a, a pair of long hole portions 784c that are drilled in an elliptical shape extending parallel to the left-right direction on both the upper and lower sides of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a, a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged in parallel in a pair above and below at a position between the long hole portions 784c and protrude on the back side, and a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged in parallel to each other in a pair above and below at a position between the long hole portions 784c and protrude on the back side, and a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged in a pair above and below at a position between the long hole portions 784c and protrude on the back side. It is provided with a pair of protruding portions 784e formed as protruding portions extending in the front-rear direction on the opposing sides, a pair of fastening portions 784f arranged in a cylindrical shape that opens on the rear side at the end of the support plate portion 784d and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference side, a placement hole 784g formed between the cylindrical protruding portion 784a and the support plate portion 784d, a ring holding half portion 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between the pivot member 786, and a magnet holding half portion 784i formed in a square box shape so as to be able to hold a magnet Mg between the pivot member 786.

The cylindrical protrusion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, has a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other cylindrical portion 783b, and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference. That is, a fastening screw inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b from the back side is screwed into the female thread of the cylindrical protrusion 784a, so that the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 784a so that it cannot fall off.

The arc-shaped plate portion 784b is formed in an arc shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arc-shaped plate portion 784b is disposed close to the other-side cylindrical portion 783b so as to face each other radially in the assembled state, limiting the tilt displacement of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b relative to the rotation axis. This makes it possible to stabilize the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 around the other-side cylindrical portion 783b.

The long hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and a fastening screw is inserted from the back side into the insertion hole of the fall prevention plate portion 776b and screwed into the female thread formed in the cylindrical portion 776a, so that the linear plate member 784 is supported on the main body member 771 so that it cannot fall off.

In this supported state (assembled state), the linear plate member 784 is slidably displaceable along the direction in which the long hole portion 784c is formed. In other words, the linear plate member 784 is configured to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-shaped portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotation member 785 so as to suppress vertical displacement, and the protrusion portion 784e functions as a protrusion for determining the left-right arrangement of the metal rod 785a, but details will be described later.

The placement hole 784g is an opening to avoid interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785, but details will be described later.

The axial rotation members 785 are arranged in a pair on the left and right and are supported by the linear motion plate members 784. The axial rotation members 785 are made of a metal material and formed in a generally cylindrical shape. The metal rod 785a is made of a metal material and has a recessed groove portion 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 785a. The recessed groove portion 785b is a member arranged on the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a. The bevel teeth (bevel gear) are formed to mesh with the bevel teeth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783. It comprises: member 785c; end plate members 785d that are disposed on the left and right outer ends of metal rod 785a and fixed to metal rod 785a; ring-shaped metal member 785e that is disposed around the metal rod 785a of end plate member 785d in such a manner that it is elevated from end plate member 785d; and rotational position stabilization portion 785f that protrudes from the left and right inner portions of end plate member 785d and into which a metal screw is screwed and fixed in a female thread portion formed inside.

The metal rod 785a is disposed between a pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear plate member 784, and the protrusion portion 784e is disposed to enter the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured with a dimensional relationship that allows it to slide with the protrusion portion 784e, and is configured with a dimensional relationship that restricts left-right displacement with respect to the protrusion portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be slightly longer than the left-right width of the protrusion portion 784e, the diameter of the deep part of the groove of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be shorter than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e, and the diameter of the part where the recessed groove portion 785b is not formed is set to be longer than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e.

This allows the metal rod 785a to be supported on the back side of the linear plate member 784 in a manner that allows it to rotate about its axis and prevents it from displacing in the left-right direction.

The bevel tooth member 785c is positioned so that it enters the placement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. When the bevel tooth member 785c is partially inserted into the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 is assembled from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784 so that the bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c.

In this assembled state, the bevel tooth member 785c is inserted into the placement hole 784g, but since the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear plate member 784, it cannot fall off toward the front side, and its displacement toward the rear side is restricted by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner circumferential shape that corresponds to the non-circular shape (e.g., D-shaped cross section) of the tip of the metal rod 785a, and the inner circumferential shape and the tip of the metal rod 785a are formed with a dimensional relationship that allows for an interference fit, thereby being fixed in place.

The method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, it may be a method of fastening using an adhesive or the like, or a method of fastening the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a by forming a female thread at the tip of the metal rod 785a and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d into the female thread, or other methods may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half 784h of the linear plate member 784. By holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e and configuring the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d supporting the metal rod 785a to be in sliding contact with the inner periphery of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, it is possible to make the center of rotation of the end plate member 785d coincide with the axis passing through the center of rotation of the bevel tooth member 785c, and to reduce the load generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a.

The rotational position stabilization portion 785f functions as a part that attracts the metal screw to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape, and includes an insertion hole 786a drilled to allow the fastening screw to be screwed into the fastened portion 784f to be inserted therethrough, a ring holding half 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding the ring-shaped metal member 785e between the ring holding half 784h of the linear plate member 784, and a magnet holding half 786c formed in a rectangular box shape capable of holding a magnet Mg between the magnet holding half 784i of the linear plate member 784.

When the fastening screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole 786a is screwed into the fastened portion 784f to assemble the linear plate member 784 and the pivot member 786, the metal rod 785a is prevented from falling off the plate portion of the pivot member 786 to the back side, the ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

The covering members 787 are a pair of left and right components formed in a box shape with openings on the inside left and right sides, fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the axial rotation member 785, and decorations consisting of figures, patterns, letters, pictures, etc. that can be interpreted in different ways are formed on the opposite sides.

That is, the covering member 787 comprises a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface visible to the player in the protruding state (see FIG. 54), a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the reverse side thereof, a first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 formed on the side visible to the player when the first main decorative surface 787a1 is positioned on the front side and is in a performance standby state (see FIG. 52), and a second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 formed on the reverse side thereof. Note that the second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 is formed on the side visible to the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is positioned on the front side and is in a performance standby state (see FIG. 52).

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed from two front and rear members fastened to the end plate member 785d, and formed in an approximately box-like shape with the left and right inner sides open in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). It has multiple extension parts 787c extending toward each of the left and right members, and recessed parts 787d recessed between the extension parts 787c so as to retreat to the left and right outer sides.

The extensions 787c are formed so that their ends abut or are disposed close to each other when the covering members 787 are disposed close to each other (see FIG. 26). This allows the pair of left and right covering members 787 to be visually recognized as a single unit.

The recessed portion 787d is a portion for visibly opening up the circular portion located at the center of the light diffusion member 778b of the light-emitting performance means 778 and the arc plate portion at the upper center of the left and right of the upper long portion 775 when the covering member 787 is in a close arrangement state (see Figure 26), and is recessed in a shape that at least avoids interference with these portions.

The covering member 787 is formed so that its state can be switched between a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see Figures 29 and 52), and a state in which the second main decorative surface 787b1 faces the front and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 faces upward (see Figure 30) in response to the operation of the performance device 780. First, the mechanism that constitutes the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785. In FIG. 57(a), the upside-down member 781 is shown in a vertical arrangement state (also called an upright vertical arrangement state) in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and in FIG. 57(b), the upside-down member 781 is shown in a state in which it has rotated about 24 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front about the cylindrical protrusions 777c from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). Note that in FIG. 57(a) and FIG. 57(b), the end plate member 785d of the left axial rotation member 785 and the right axial rotation member 785 are omitted from the illustration in order to make it easier to understand.

In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in a state where it enters the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). In the inverted vertical arrangement state where the upside-down member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from the upright vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in a state where it enters the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d.

In other words, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to switch depending on whether the upside-down member 781 is in an upright vertical position or an inverted vertical position, and the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of the performance device 780 from the output of the detection sensor 778d.

As shown in Figures 57(a) and 57(b), when the upside-down member 781 is rotated, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of this posture change corresponds to (is proportional to) the rotation angle of the axial rotation member 785, and the amount of left-right displacement of the other cylindrical portion 783b corresponds to the amount of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 and the axial rotation member 785.

Here, we will explain the order in which rotational displacement and left-right displacement (linear displacement) occur. These displacements do not occur simultaneously and to the same extent, and there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater and arrangements in which the degree of linear displacement is greater.

First, to give an overview, the up-down inversion member 781, intermediate arm member 783, and linear plate member 784 are configured as a well-known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the up-down inversion member 781 rotates around the cylindrical protrusion 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, which is journaled on the cylindrical protrusion 781c of the up-down inversion member 781, moves in parallel along the movement axis HL1 that passes through the center of the cylindrical protrusion 777c when viewed from the front, so that the displacement direction of the linear plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is restricted. The pair of left and right linear plate members 784 simultaneously move in opposite directions along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 until it rotates approximately 24 degrees from the vertical position shown in FIG. 57(a). Length L1 is illustrated as half the width of the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 (the length between the left-right center and the left-right width ends).

In addition, due to the change in state from FIG. 57(a) to FIG. 57(b), the change in posture around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise when viewed from the front, which is less than half the 15 degrees that is the angle between adjacent teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Because the bevel tooth member 785c is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, the transmission of load (meshing transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c occurs at opposing positions in the front-to-rear direction, i.e., on the movement axis HL1 when viewed from the front.

Figure 58(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inverted member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in Figure 57(a), and Figure 58(b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inverted member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in Figure 57(b).

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press against the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 (displaced upward in FIG. 58(b)). Note that in FIG. 58(b), for ease of understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are shown as overlapping, and this overlap width is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the driving force is transmitted, causing the axial rotation member 785 to rotate and displace. While the up-down inversion member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 57(a), the right axial rotation member 785 rotates in the backward rotation direction, and the left axial rotation member 785 rotates in the forward rotation direction.

When the upside-down member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other cylindrical portion 783b, and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 rotates 180 degrees accordingly. In other words, the angle at which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates around the metal rod 785a is configured to be twice the rotation angle around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

The amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that may occur due to pressure caused by displacement from the state of FIG. 58(a) to the state of FIG. 58(b) is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear teeth, and is not enough to reliably rotate the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c. In other words, it is less than the amount of displacement until the abutting representative tooth rotates to the arrangement of the adjacent teeth (the amount of displacement required for a 30 degree rotation, since the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are arranged in 12 equal parts).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press against the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c, but in this embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are formed from a resin material, the displacement accompanied by the pressure is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, and the orientation of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 in the rotational direction is maintained from the state shown in FIG. 57(a) to the state shown in FIG. 57(b).

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and bevel tooth member 785c occurs when the driving force transmitted to the intermediate arm member 783 via the up-down inversion member 781 is opposed by the attractive force generated by the magnet Mg on the rotational position stabilization portion 785f (see FIG. 54) of the shaft rotation member 785.

That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilization portion 785f so as to restrict the right-side shaft rotating member 785 from rotating backward, and the right-side shaft rotating member 785 receives a biasing force from the magnet Mg in the forward rotation direction. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the right-side shaft rotating member 785 to the rotational displacement.

For the left-side axial rotation member 785, the rotational position stabilization portion 785f is disposed in front of the end plate member 785d, as on the right side, while the magnet Mg is disposed on the upper side, the opposite of the right side (see FIG. 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilization portion 785f, and the left-side axial rotation member 785 receives a backward biasing force from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left-side axial rotation member 785.

In this embodiment, the attractive force of the magnet Mg is designed to generate a load that exceeds the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c until the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 from the state shown in FIG. 57(a).

As a result, elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c occurs so as to absorb the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58(b). If the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c will rotate beyond the attractive force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg will be separated from the metal screw of the rotational position stabilization portion 785f, causing an extreme decrease in magnetic force. The intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, released from the attractive force of the magnet Mg, will undergo rotational displacement while elastically recovering.

As a result, when rotation starts, the elastic recovery increases the momentum of the axial rotation member 785 in the rotational direction, and the rotation speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This increase in rotation speed occurs not only in the axial rotation member 785, but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the axial rotation member 785.

This allows the movement of the covering member 787 to be adjusted without changing the drive speed of the drive motor 782, improving the performance effect of the covering member 787 while reducing the burden on the control design of the drive motor 782.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the timing at which the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 occurs due to the attractive force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts to rotate.

The rotational position stabilization parts 785f that receive the attractive force of the magnet Mg are configured as a pair, one above the other; when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front, one of the rotational position stabilization parts 785f is positioned close to the magnet Mg and receives the attractive force (see FIG. 52(b)), and when the orientation is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front, the other (see FIG. 52(b), the upper) rotational position stabilization part 785f is positioned close to the magnet Mg and receives the attractive force.

In other words, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the close arrangement state (see Figures 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg effectively acts to limit the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785. Therefore, when displacing from the close arrangement state, the magnetic force can cause the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 to be delayed regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

In other words, between the state shown in FIG. 58(a) and the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction is greater than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the up-down inversion member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in front view beyond FIG. 57(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction settles down, and rotational displacement occurs.

According to this embodiment, the slider crank mechanism is used as described above, and so the same action occurs. That is, near the vertical position, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the up-down direction, so the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation is small. Therefore, the left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 is large and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the longitudinal direction of the up-down inversion member 781 is tilted closer to the left-right direction, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c becomes smaller in the left-right direction and larger in the up-down direction, so the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 becomes smaller and the amount of rotation becomes larger. Therefore, the left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 becomes smaller and the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 becomes larger.

Therefore, in the rotational movement of the upside-down member 781, which starts from a vertically disposed state and ends in a vertically disposed state, first the degree of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases, then the degree of rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 increases, and again the degree of left-right displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases.

By generating linear displacement and rotational displacement in this order, it is possible to prevent the extension portion 787c of the covering member 787 from colliding with the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. Next, the change in the appearance of the covering member 787 will be described.

Figures 59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the performance device 780. Figures 59(a) to 59(c) show the inversion operation of the lift-and-lower inversion performance device 770 in chronological order. Figure 59(a) shows the performance device 780 in an upright vertical position with the upside-down member 781 in an upright position, Figure 59(b) shows the performance device 780 when the upside-down member 781 has been rotated 90 degrees from the vertical position, and Figure 59(c) shows the performance device 780 in an inverted vertical position with the upside-down member 781 in an inverted position.

The upside-down member 781 changes its state from the upright vertical position (see FIG. 57(a)) to the inverted vertical position by rotating 180 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front. In the inverted vertical position, the orientation of the covering member 787 is inverted 180 degrees based on the upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)). This switches the decorative surface visible to the player (see FIG. 59(c)).

The upside-down vertical position is returned to the upright vertical position (see FIG. 57(a)) by rotating the upside-down inversion member 781 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front. Therefore, the inversion operation can repeatedly switch between the state shown in FIG. 59(a) and the state shown in FIG. 59(c) each time the drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) is driven while reversing the direction so as to rotate the upside-down inversion member 781 180 degrees.

As described above, while the upside-down member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. 57(a), the axial rotation member 785 rotates 180 degrees by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 783c. Here, based on the rotation direction of the bevel tooth portion 783c, the right axial rotation member 785 rotates in the backward direction, and the left axial rotation member 785 rotates in the forward direction. In other words, the pair of axial rotation members 785 arranged on the left and right and the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d rotate in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the intermediate position, the right covering member 787 faces the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 toward the front, and the left covering member 787 faces the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 toward the front (see FIG. 59(b)).

This makes it possible to prevent the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the left covering member 787 and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the right covering member 787 from being viewed in unison during rotational displacement of the covering member 787.

Therefore, the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be intentionally made to have misaligned content on the left and right, and the content of the decorative surface can be configured to be difficult for the player to recognize, so the amount of information provided to the player by the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be reduced.

This reduces the player's focus on the covering member 787 during rotational displacement. In addition, when the rotational displacement stops, the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1), which has the effect of making it easier for the player to maintain their line of sight on the covering member 787 until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops.

The rotational displacement is performed with the second operating unit 700 in the extended state (see Figure 54), but when this rotational displacement stops and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1), the performance device 780 has risen to near the vertical center of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 30), and in this state it is unlikely that attention will be drawn to the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2).

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operating unit 700, the view of the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) will be blocked by the third operating unit 800.

On the other hand, when the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state for presentation (see FIG. 52) and the presentation device 780 is positioned below the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) becomes more easily visible to the player.

In this way, in the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) is prevented from being seen together during rotational displacement in the extended state, and prevented from facing the player, so that it does not draw attention to itself, but is formed as a side that can be noticed by the player in the performance standby state.

This allows the appearance of the second operation unit 700 to change depending on the placement, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the performance is excessively poor compared to the cost of placing the second operation unit 700 (occupying space, the burden of hiding it well).

After the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 are rotated and displaced, the rotational position stabilization portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54(b)), thereby stabilizing the position of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

In this embodiment, the metal member that is attracted to the magnet Mg is composed of a metal screw, which reduces material costs and improves maintainability compared to designing a dedicated metal member.

As described above, the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by linear displacement in the left-right direction, so the arrangement of the performance device 780 capable of performing the rotational displacement is limited. That is, when the second operating unit 700 is in the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) or the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), performing the rotational displacement causes the decorative members such as the right front plate member 710, the left rear plate member 750, and the front support member 760 arranged on the left and right, and the three-dimensional decorative part 768a fixedly arranged on the front side thereof, to collide with the covering member 787.

On the other hand, when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state (see FIG. 30), space is secured in the left-right direction, making it possible to perform rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is controlled so as to be executable on the premise that it is determined from the output of the detection sensor 713 that the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state. This allows the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 to occur normally.

The extensions 787c are arranged close to each other when the upside-down member 781 is in the vertical position, and in this position, are arranged facing the front and rear of the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotated from this position about a rotation axis extending in the left-right direction, the extensions 787c collide with the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, causing a malfunction.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extensions 787c are arranged close to each other creates the effect of allowing the pair of left and right covering members 787 to be viewed as one, and as this is a configuration necessary for the presentation, it is preferable that it can be maintained.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 in advance before rotational displacement (see FIG. 57). The linear displacement of length L1 allows the extension 787c to be retracted from the front-rear position of the connection portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, and the problem of collision between the extension 787c and the connection portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772 can be avoided.

In addition, by configuring the rotational displacement in this manner, no rotational displacement occurs (or is limited) in the length L1 while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and rotational displacement occurs in the remaining length L2, so that the amount of left-right displacement of the covering member 787 during rotation can be kept small.

This makes it possible to keep the attention of the covering member 787 low and to make the rotational displacement less noticeable compared to when the position of the covering member 787 changes significantly during rotation, and therefore allows the decorative surfaces 787a1-787b2 to be designed without regard for appearance during rotational displacement, thereby improving design freedom.

The timing at which the covering member 787 starts to rotate can be set arbitrarily by designing the attractive force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, even if a design change occurs to increase the left-right width of the connecting portion between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771, the configuration of the performance device 780 can be kept the same, but by changing the magnet Mg to a magnet with a stronger attractive force, it is possible to avoid collision between the connecting portion and the extension portion 787c, as in this embodiment.

As shown by the imaginary lines in Figure 59, the insertion hole 778c is positioned so that it is always hidden by the covering member 787. This prevents the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c from being visible to the player, and prevents the fastening screw from reducing the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the decorations (figures, patterns, designs, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same on the left and right covering members 787, so the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical to match the left and right decorations.

In other words, since the fastening screw is inserted through the insertion hole 778c, it becomes impossible to place an LED on the illumination board 787a at that position (see Figure 55). Also, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, it is easy to see it as being dark during the lighting effect.

Therefore, it is desirable to position the insertion holes 778c in the decorations on the left and right, avoiding areas that need to be brightly lit and conspicuous, and as a result, the placement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical.

It is of course permissible to arrange the insertion holes 778c symmetrically. In particular, if the decorations of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 are identical, there is no disadvantage to arranging the insertion holes 778c symmetrically, and the design of the illumination board 778a can be made easier.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is displaced linearly left and right during the inversion operation of the lift-down inversion performance device 770, and even when the vicinity of the center of the light diffusion member 778b is not surrounded by the extension portion 787c, the mechanical parts such as the up-down inversion member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear plate member 784 are hidden so as not to be visible.

In other words, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b located at the front, and the vertical width of the linear plate member 784 is designed to fit within the vertical width of the left and right long portions of the upper long portion 775 located at the front. In addition, the up-down inversion member 781 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper long portion 775 located at the front, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that its displacement trajectory fits within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b.

This allows the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the performance device 780 to be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and made invisible, thereby preventing a reduction in the performance effect due to the appearance of the performance device 780 during the reversal operation.

Returning to FIG. 26 for further explanation, the third operating unit 800 is a unit that is positioned above the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the performance standby state, is supported at the tip of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the rear case 510, and is configured to be capable of being lifted and lowered as the lifting arm members 801 are driven in the vertical direction.

Figure 60 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and Figure 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that Figures 60 and 61 show the portion that constitutes the displacement of the third operating unit 800, and omit the illustration of the decorative members 870, 880 that serve as decorative parts arranged on the outside.

60 and 61, the third operating unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by a lifting arm member 801, a fixed cylindrical member 820 having a cylindrical portion 821 fastened to the center of the held member 810, an inner rotating member 830 journaled on the cylindrical portion 821 with the cylindrical portion 821 inserted into the inner periphery, an outer rotating member 840 journaled on the main body portion 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted into the inner periphery, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and a drive transmission device 860 having a plurality of gear members housed in the held member 810 and for transmitting a drive force for displacing the inner rotating member 830, the outer rotating member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850.

The held member 810 comprises a disk-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated cover member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 includes a tube fixing portion 812 recessed in the center to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, with insertion holes for inserting fastening screws for fixing and through holes for inserting electrical wiring, a detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with its detection groove facing the side capable of receiving the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840, a motor holding portion 814 which holds the drive motor 861, a number of cylindrical protrusions 815 protruding from the front side as a cylindrical portion which axially supports the transmission gear 863 so that it cannot fall off, and a number of double cylindrical protrusions 816 protruding from the front side as a double cylindrical portion which axially supports the load response gear 865 so that it cannot fall off.

The perforated cover member 817 has a circular hole 818 drilled in the front-rear direction in the center. The circular hole 818 is designed with dimensions such that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 protrude inward from its inner peripheral edge when viewed from the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 comprises the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed on the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate-shaped illumination board 823 fastened to the circular plate portion 822 and having light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side, a light-transmitting decorative member 824 made of a light-transmitting resin material and shaped like an umbrella (or bowl) so as to be able to cover the illumination board 823 from the front side, and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 821 on the circular plate portion 822 side and configured to be able to slide with the cylindrical portion 821.

The cylindrical portion 821 has a female thread formed at the tip on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the tube fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female thread, thereby fastening and fixing the fixed cylindrical member 820 to the held member 810 so that it cannot rotate.

The cylindrical portion 821 is formed with an axial through hole on the inner circumference side, and the electrical wiring inserted into the through hole of the tube fixing portion 812 is routed through this through hole to the front side and connected to a connector arranged behind the illumination board 823.

The illumination board 823 is equipped with LEDs consisting of inner light-emitting parts 823a that are placed at the vertices of a pentagon and at a central position equidistant from those vertices, and outer light-emitting parts 823b that are placed at 15 equally spaced locations on the circumference. The inner light-emitting parts 823a are composed of LEDs whose optical axis faces the front (forward), and the outer light-emitting parts 823b are composed of LEDs whose optical axis faces radially outward (diameter direction).

The outer light-emitting unit 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As described below, the light emitted from the outer light-emitting unit 823b is irradiated onto the plated parts 871a of the first decorative members 870, which are arranged in close proximity to each other at equal intervals on the circumference, so that each first decorative member 870 is irradiated with light from three LEDs.

The outer light-emitting unit 823b is fixedly arranged on the illumination board 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to rotate around the center of the circle as an axis, but since the outer light-emitting unit 823b and the first decorative member 870 are arranged at equal intervals on the same axis of the circle, light from the same number of LEDs (three in this embodiment) can always be irradiated onto each first decorative member 870, regardless of the orientation of the first decorative member 870 in the rotational direction.

This makes it possible to suppress changes in the amount of light LD1 irradiated to the first decorative member 870 during the rotation operation.

The sliding member 825 is configured so that its inner diameter side can slide on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, while its outer diameter side can slide on the circular flange-shaped portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830.

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side and a cylindrical portion that protrudes rearward from the inner diameter end of the flange-shaped portion, but the outer diameter of this cylindrical portion is formed slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, so that it is slidably fitted inside the inner rotating member 830.

By interposing the sliding member 825 between them, direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 that is configured to be rotatable around it is prevented. In addition, by disposing the sliding member 825 on the side that has the advantage in terms of strength, that is, the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and the circular flange portion 831a side of the main body portion 831, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 or the inner rotating member 830 will be damaged or deformed due to the load generated during sliding or poor sliding (when the displacement resistance becomes unintentionally excessive).

The inner rotating member 830 comprises a cylindrical main body 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at the front end, a plurality of metal rods 832 fastened to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a at five equal circumferential positions around the main body 831 with their long lengths aligned radially, a plurality of linear motion members 833 formed so that the metal rods 832 can be inserted therethrough and configured to be linearly displaceable while being guided by the metal rods 832, and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported at the radially outer portions of the linear motion members 833.

The main body 831 includes the circular flange portion 831a described above, a number of sliding ridges 831b that extend rearward in a ridge-like manner from the circular flange portion 831a as a base end at intermediate angular positions (five locations) between adjacent metal bars 832, and a number of recesses 831c that are formed at intervals in the circumferential direction at the end opposite the circular flange portion 831a.

The sliding protrusion 831b is configured to be slidable along the inner curved surface of the main body 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and the protruding tip is formed in a semicircular cross section to reduce the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and thus reduce contact friction.

As described above, the sliding ridge 831b is positioned at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent metal bars 832, or in other words, on the opposite side of the metal bar 832 (a position shifted by 180 degrees) with respect to the central axis of the outer rotating member 840.

As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 during the switching rotation operation described below and the outer rotating member 840 on which the intermediate arm member 850 is journaled is subjected to a load that displaces it radially outward, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 can be received by the sliding protrusion portion 831b, so the contact area between the inner circumferential surface of the outer rotating member 840 and the outer circumferential surface of the inner rotating member 830 can be maintained low.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission protrusion 864a of the central ring gear 864 is inserted. By arranging the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, the relative rotation between them is disabled, and the rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be made to match.

The linear motion member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 833a, 833b that are spaced apart from each other in the linear motion direction and that protrude cylindrically toward the rear, a cylindrical shaft portion 833c that is formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 based on the cylindrical protrusions 833a, 833b and is inserted into the rotating member 834, and a recessed groove 833d that is recessed in the circumferential direction at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c.

The recessed groove 833d is located on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and functions as a displacement regulating groove that prevents the rotating member 834 from falling off in the radially outward direction by slidingly fitting the protruding portions 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 that are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 onto the outside, as will be described in detail later.

The rotating member 834 has a bevel gear-shaped bevel tooth portion 834a and a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 834b that protrude cylindrically parallel to the linear motion direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed around the entire circumference, but is formed over the 3/4 circumference (approximately 270 degrees) required for operation.

The cylindrical protrusion 834b has a female thread formed on the inner circumference, and functions to fasten the decorative members 870, 880 to the rotating member 834 by screwing in the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880, as will be described in detail below.

The outer rotating member 840 comprises a cylindrical main body 841, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) extension arms 842 extending radially outward at five equal circumferential positions around the main body 841, gear teeth 843 formed on the outer periphery along the circumference of the rear end of the main body 841, and a detection target 844 extending radially outward from the main body 841 in a position that allows it to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

The extension arm 842 has a cylindrical portion 842a that extends parallel to the central axis of the main body 841, and a female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 842a. When a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread while the cylindrical portion 842a is inserted into the base end rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported on the extension arm 842 so that it cannot fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are arranged to be able to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, and function as a part that switches between the presence and absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, as will be described in detail later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a long member and includes a base end rod portion 851 whose one end is supported by the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, a thickened portion 852 which is thickened toward the front side at the other end of the base end rod portion 851, a tip end rod portion 853 which extends parallel to the longitudinal direction of the base end rod portion 851 from the front end of the thickened portion 852, and a rotation transmission portion 854 which is formed with gear teeth at the end of the tip end rod portion 853.

The rotation transmission part 854 is a part that links with the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834, and includes a supported hole 854a that is formed with a dimensional relationship that allows the cylindrical protrusion 833a to rotate with respect to each other when inserted therethrough, a guide hole 854b that is an elongated hole drilled in an arc shape centered on the supported hole 854a and that guides the cylindrical protrusion 833b when inserted therethrough, and a bevel gear part 854c that is formed in a bevel gear shape with the supported hole 854a as the central axis and that forms a bevel gear by meshing with the bevel gear part 834a of the rotating member 834.

The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 fastened to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, a plurality of transmission gears 863 supported on the cylindrical protrusion portion 815 so as not to fall off and meshed to be able to transmit a driving force via the drive gear 862, a central ring gear 864 meshed with the transmission gear 863, a pair of load response gears 865 positioned forward of the central ring gear 864 and supported on the double cylindrical protrusion portion 816 so as not to fall off, and a torque limiter 866 supported on the double cylinder of the double cylindrical protrusion portion 816 on the back side of the load response gear 865 and whose resistance is variable according to the load in the rotational direction applied to the load response gear 865.

The central ring gear 864 is formed in an annular shape, and is designed so that the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 can be inserted into its inner periphery. The central ring gear 864 is provided with a transmission protrusion 864a that protrudes from the bottom plate portion to the front side in a position and shape that corresponds to the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830 so that the central ring gear 864 can be inserted into the recessed portion 831c, and a support ring portion 864b that protrudes from the bottom plate portion to the front side in a coaxial double ring shape that is disposed on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission protrusion 864a.

In the assembled state, with the transmission projection 864a inserted into the recess 831c, the rear end of the body 831 of the inner rotating member 830 is fitted into the gap between the support annular portions 864b with a dimensional relationship of intermediate fit or a dimensional relationship of interference fit. This allows the central annular gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 to rotate integrally.

The arrangement of the recessed portions 831c and the transmission protrusions 864a is not limited in any way. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or they may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If they are spaced equally, they can be assembled by matching the arrangement of the transmission projections 864a and the recesses 831c without having to consider the posture of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, which allows for quick assembly. In the present embodiment, where the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (the same at 72 degree intervals), it is considered that there is little impact from the posture of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 shifting during assembly, so it is effective to have them spaced equally.

If the intervals are unequal, the assembly process requires an additional step of aligning the central annular gear 864 with the inner rotating member 830 before assembly; however, the positioning of the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c can be used to align the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864.

The load response gear 865 is arranged so that it can mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840. A torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, so that the load response gear 865 can be switched between a state in which rotation is permitted and a state in which rotation is restricted (limited) depending on the magnitude of the rotational resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, and the outer rotating member 840.

In other words, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect and release the transmission of the driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In this embodiment, a device that transmits driving force in one direction (one-way torque limiter) is configured as a pair with the transmission direction reversed, and the torque limiter 866 is configured to switch the driving force transmission in both directions with good responsiveness.

Figure 62 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third action unit 800, and Figure 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third action unit 800. Note that Figures 62 and 63 show decorative parts of the third action unit 800, and omit the illustration of parts that configure the displacement.

As shown in Figures 62 and 63, the third operating unit 800 comprises the inner rotating member 830 described above, a first decorative member 870 that is fastened to the cylindrical protrusion 834b of the inner rotating member 830 and covers one side of the cylindrical protrusion 834b, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened to the cylindrical protrusion 834b and covers the cylindrical protrusion 834b from the opposite side of the first decorative member 870.

The first decorative member 870 comprises a first skeletal portion 871 that is formed so as to be fastened to the cylindrical protrusion portion 834b, and a first covering portion 875 that is formed so as to cover one side of the first skeletal portion 871.

The first skeletal portion 871 is entirely plated and is configured to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covered portion 875 is made of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, and its surface is decorated with figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc."), and when the surface is facing forward, the designs, etc. are visible to the player.

In this embodiment, each of the multiple (five) first covered portions 875 has an independent pattern or the like drawn on it. Therefore, by changing the first covered portion 875 that emits strong light through the light emission control of the illumination board 823, or by changing the arrangement of the first covered portions 875, it is possible to vary the pattern or the like that attracts the player's attention.

For example, if the third pattern display device 81 is controlled to perform a display presentation that draws the player's attention to which first covered portion 875 will stop on the third pattern display device 81 side, and at the same time the inner rotating member 830 is controlled to rotate, the first covered portion 875 on the third pattern display device 81 side can be continuously changed in accordance with the rotation, so that the player's gaze can be focused on the first covered portion 875 for the period until the rotation stops.

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeletal portion 881 that is formed so as to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protrusion portion 834b, and a second covering portion 885 that is formed to cover the other side of the second skeletal portion 881.

The second skeleton portion 881 has a retaining piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covering portion 885 so that it cannot fall off.

A metal screw is screwed into the second covering part 885 at a position (close position) where the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second covering part 885 acts, and the magnet Mg2 is attracted to this metal screw, thereby ensuring the integrity of the second covering part 885 in the combined state (particularly the combined state, see Figure 32).

The second covered portion 885 has a figure, pattern, or character design (hereinafter also referred to as "design, etc.") drawn on its surface, and when the surface is facing forward, the design, etc. is visible to the player.

In this embodiment, the patterns etc. drawn on the multiple (in this embodiment, five) second covering portions 885 are configured so that the multiple (at least two and up to five) second covering portions 885 are grouped together, and each second covering portion 885 is decorated to form part of a circular body so that when the five second covering portions 885 are combined, they are visually recognized as a "circular body" when viewed from the front.

The pattern drawn on the second covering portion 885 is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, the pattern is designed so that the content that can be grasped from the second covering portion 885 in a united state does not change significantly even if the arrangement of the second decorative member 880 in the rotation direction is different. In other words, the pattern does not have clear top, bottom, left, or right, and is designed to have an inconspicuous change in external shape even when rotated (in this embodiment, a circular shape).

Therefore, if the second covering portions 885 can be firmly integrated with each other, the presentation performance can be improved when the second covering portions 885 are visually recognized by the player. In this respect, in this embodiment, the second covering portions 885 are firmly integrated by the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 in the combined state, so that the presentation performance in the combined state when the second covering portions 885 are positioned on the front side can be improved.

In addition, in each second covering portion 885, a magnet Mg2 is disposed on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the opposite side. When the orientation of the second covering portion 885 is reversed front to back by the switching rotation operation described below, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in the front view is also reversed accordingly.

Even in this case, the metal screw that each magnet Mg2 attracts is simply replaced with a metal screw that is screwed into the adjacent second covering portion 885 on the opposite side, and since the five second covering portions 885 are arranged in a circular ring shape, there is no change in the degree of attraction when integrated.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the first covering portion 875 does not contain a magnet. This makes the strength of the integration on the first covering portion 875 side slightly weaker, but this is done to avoid any deterioration in the presentation performance.

In other words, because the first covering portions 875 are each painted with an independent pattern, the degree of integration in the combined state is weak, and even if the positioning of the first decorative member 870 shifts slightly, there is no possibility that the player will not be able to recognize the pattern. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the performance of the effects that utilize the patterns painted on the first covering portions 875.

Furthermore, because the strength of the integration on the first covering part 875 side is weakened, the arrangement of the combined first covering parts 875 can be shifted due to vibrations that occur with the lifting and lowering displacement (and then stopping) and vibrations that occur with the rotational displacement (and then stopping) as an integral rotation operation or a switching rotation operation. This makes it possible to displace the first covering part 875 in a displacement manner that was not possible with conventional machines in which the first covering part 875 is not a divided body but is composed of a single circular member, thereby improving the presentation effect of the presentation provided by the first covering part 875.

In view of the above, in the combined state in which multiple decorative members 870, 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces forward is also referred to as the individual combined state (see FIG. 31), and the state in which the second decorative member 880 faces forward is also referred to as the united state (see FIG. 32). Next, the operation for switching between the individual combined state and the united state will be described.

Figures 64(a), 64(b), 65(a) and 65(b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and Figures 66(a), 66(b), 67(a) and 67(b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

Figures 64 to 67 show in chronological order the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 caused by the driving force of the drive motor 861 (see Figure 60) being transmitted and the inner rotating member 830 rotating relative to the outer rotating member 840.

That is, the diagrams are illustrated in chronological order from rear and front views, showing how the inner rotating member 830 rotates 45 degrees at a time from the individual combined state (Figures 64(a) and 66(a)).

In addition, in Figures 64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is depicted as a virtual position line 832F, and the change in the angle of the arrangement of this virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. In addition, the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individual combined state (Figures 64 (a) and 66 (a)) is illustrated as angle θ31.

As shown in Figures 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise from the individual combined state when viewed from the front (see Figure 66) (this rotational movement is also referred to below as the "switching rotational movement"), the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is permitted, and therefore the inner rotating member 830 is permitted to rotate relative to the outer rotating member 840. In this embodiment, the position of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see Figure 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

Therefore, in Figures 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 rotates and displaces around the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

From the configuration between the above-mentioned components, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and since the cylindrical protrusion 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a, a change in the position of the supported hole 854a corresponds to a change in the position of the linear motion member 833.

As shown in Figures 64 and 65, the rotation transmission part 854 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and is displaced in the circumferential direction at the same time, so the rotating member 834 supported by the rotation transmission part 854 is also displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and is displaced in the circumferential direction at the same time. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear moving member 833 is displaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while being displaced in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes circumferential displacement, the arrangement of the linear member 833, the rotating member 834, and the decorative members 870, 880 fastened thereto are not fixed even at the radial end position, and the circumferential displacement can be maintained. Therefore, compared to a case where the displacement is completed only by radial linear displacement (for example, the reversal operation described above with the second operating unit 700), the presentation effect during the switching rotation operation can be maintained at a high level.

In contrast, in the above-mentioned reversal operation of the second operating unit 700, a rotational operation with high acceleration is generated by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58), thereby weakening the impression that the position of the covering member 787 at the outer displacement end in the linear direction (see FIG. 59(b)) is fixed.

In other words, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased, and even in a situation where a period in which the change in left-right position is small continues at the end of the left-right outward displacement (a period near the dead point of the slider crank), the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased to maintain a high dramatic effect due to the operation of the covering member 787.

Since the switching rotation operation includes radial displacement, it is possible that radial loads will be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, causing the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 to shift. However, in this embodiment, the radial loads on the intermediate arm member 850 are generated equally at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) around the rotation axis, so that the loads cancel each other out. This makes it possible to suppress deviations in the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, making it easier to perform the switching rotation operation normally.

In this way, the radial displacement (expansion/contraction displacement) in the rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 occurs while being accompanied by a circumferential rotation. Therefore, in order to avoid collisions with surrounding decorative members, the switching rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 is controlled so that it can be executed when the output of the detection sensor that determines the posture of the lifting arm member 801 indicates that the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

In addition, with the above-mentioned displacement of the rotation transmission part 854, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 fastened to the rotating member 834 are also displaced radially around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and, at the same time, displaced circumferentially.

When the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the bevel teeth portion 854c (see Figures 66 and 67) meshes with the bevel teeth portion 834a (see Figure 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 rotate around the metal rod 832 as an axis.

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32, which is the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 based on the imaginary position line 832F. In addition, the direction of rotation is set to the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the radially outer side of the imaginary position line 832F, since the angle θ32 increases as it moves away from the imaginary position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the rotating member 834 is positioned on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60).

When rotating together, the rotating member 834 is in a position where either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, so that when the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 becomes the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in this embodiment) as the maximum value of the angle θ31 due to the rotation of the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment), the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 rotates half a circle (180 degrees).

In other words, the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates around the metal rod 832 is configured to be twice the angle of rotation around the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike the action of the magnet Mg of the second operating unit 700 described above, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) does not produce an action that retards the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832.

In other words, the magnet Mg2 generates an adhesive force between itself and the adjacent second decorative member 880, and as the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 with the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, a gap is generated between the adjacent second decorative members 880, and the adhesive force can be lost.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement around the metal rod 832 begins, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and there is no effect of slowing down the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832.

This makes it possible to reduce the driving force required to rotate and displace the decorative members 870 and 880. In other words, the driving force required of the drive motor 861 can be reduced, making it possible to miniaturize the drive motor 861.

Furthermore, the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 can be started quickly and ended early, so that the player's attention to the rotational displacement around the metal rod 832 can be reduced.

The rapidity at the start of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870, 880 relative to the rotational angle of the inner rotating member 830 so that it is not constant.

For example, in the process of rotating the intermediate arm member 850, if the rotation angle of the imaginary position line 832F (the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830) from the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 is in a contracted position and can rotate together is 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), and if the imaginary position line 832F rotates a further 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 27 degrees (see FIG. 67(a)).

In other words, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate from a state in which the two can rotate together than during the rotation. This makes it possible to suppress the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate.

The driving force of the drive motor 861 is used to rotate the inner rotating member 830, turn the intermediate arm member 850, and rotate the decorative members 870, 880. However, due to the above-described configuration, the driving force required to rotate the decorative members 870, 880 can be reduced when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate from a state in which they can rotate together, so that it is possible to avoid placing an excessively large burden on the drive motor 861 when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate.

In addition, the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832 occurs while shifting in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, so the visibility of the decorative members 870, 880 during the rotational displacement can be kept low. This reduces the possibility that the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880 (for example, the connecting surface between the first covering portion 875 and the second covering portion 885) are visible, and improves the design freedom of the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880.

When performing the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps with the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 when viewed from the front. It also overlaps with the extension arm portion 842 adjacent to the extension arm portion 842 on which the cylindrical portion 842a on which it is supported is disposed. Therefore, without measures, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 will collide with the surrounding parts.

In contrast, in this embodiment, collisions are avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 back and forth for each part. That is, by positioning the tip side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 rearward of the base side rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the base side rod portion 851 and the tip side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 can be made to overlap front to back, thereby avoiding collisions during the switching rotation operation.

In addition, by arranging the base end rod portion 851 in front of the extended arm portion 842 and the tip end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 in rear of the extended arm portion 842, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged in front of and behind the extended arm portion 842 during the switching rotation operation, and collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

64 to 67 show a case where the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 relative to the outer rotating member 840 is a direction that allows the intermediate arm member 850 to rotate (counterclockwise as viewed from the front in the individual combined state, see FIG. 66). In this case, the gear teeth 843 engage with the load response gear 865, which generates resistance via the torque limiter 866, and resistance is received, limiting the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840.

On the other hand, if the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the reverse direction described above (clockwise direction when viewed from the front in the individual combined state), or if the rotation in the direction that allows the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front in the individual combined state) continues even after the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which its rotation is restricted (for example, it reaches a combined state from an individual combined state), a load that exceeds the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that restricts the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, the position maintenance of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously.

In other words, regardless of the direction of rotation, when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, if the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in a direction that continues to restrict the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decorative member 870, and the second decorative member 880 rotate together while maintaining their combined state (this rotational movement is also referred to below as the "integral rotational movement").

The integral rotation occurs when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, and in this embodiment, occurs when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are combined and positioned close to each other.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation action in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the radial expansion direction, there is no need to consider collisions with surrounding decorative members, so the integral rotation action can be performed in the performance standby state of the third operation unit 800. Therefore, in this embodiment, the integral rotation action is controlled so that it can be performed regardless of the position of the third operation unit 800.

In this embodiment, as described above, the driving force of a single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) can perform a switching rotation operation accompanied by radially expanding displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880, and a unitary rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 without radially expanding displacement. Either operation can be performed in either drive direction, but the operations have priority, and any operation cannot be instantly performed in any rotation direction.

For example, from the state shown in FIG. 64(a) and FIG. 66(a), a switching rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and an integral rotation operation can be performed by continuing the rotation in this state. Also, an integral rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front, but an integral rotation operation cannot be performed immediately by rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

In addition, for example, if the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front from the state shown in Figures 64(a) and 66(a) and the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which its rotation is restricted, and then the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (reverse) as viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation is performed again, and it is not possible to immediately perform the integral rotation operation in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front.

In this manner, the operating mode of the third operating unit 800 in this embodiment changes the relative displacement of the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 depending on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted in the rotation direction of the drive motor 861.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled so as to be able to determine whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861, and based on the determination result, it is possible to drive and control the drive motor 861 in an appropriate drive direction. An example of drive control of the drive motor 861 is described below.

Figure 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the driving state of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813 in a chronological order. As shown in Figure 68, the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) controls the third operation unit 800 to alternate between normal and reversed performances.

When performing a flip performance, an action that includes a switching rotation action is performed, and when performing a normal performance, an action that does not include a switching rotation action is performed. This is to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from colliding with the surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation action.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power outage or when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, the third operating unit 800 is extended and then the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed, and after the state of the moving parts is determined from the output of the detection sensor 813, the control for normal performance is executed. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the decorative members 870, 880 collide with surrounding decorative members, even if the state of the moving parts cannot be determined from the output of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on.

The drive directions of the drive motor 861 are shown as forward rotation and reverse rotation. Forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which a united rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state (see FIG. 66(a))), and reverse rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which a switching rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state).

First, we will explain the drive control during normal performance before the reversal performance. During this normal performance, the third operating unit 800 is in an individual combined state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotational motion of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is always a united rotational motion.

Since no switching rotational movement occurs, no collisions with surrounding decorative members occur, and the position of the third operating unit 800 can be switched to a performance standby state or an extended state at any time. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is being raised and lowered by the up and down movement of the lifting arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be controlled to rotate together at the same time as the lifting and lowering movement.

Naturally, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together when the position of the lifting arm member 801 is fixed, or the lifting arm member 801 may be raised and lowered when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 stop rotating together.

Since the drive motor 861 has a forward rotation direction only, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detectable portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. By determining this output switch, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the position of the outer rotating member 840 as the initial position, and by setting multiple types of drive time from this initial position, the outer rotating member 840 can be controlled to stop in any position.

Next, the drive control during the reversal performance will be described. First, during the reversal performance, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating forward until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched to determine that the detected part 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. By driving in reverse rotation, the third operating unit 800 executes a switching rotation operation, but during this time the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained.

If the drive motor 861 continues to be driven in the same rotation direction, a united state is reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 begin to rotate together. After the start of the united rotation, the outer rotating member 840 also begins to rotate in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so that the detected portion 844 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 have begun to rotate together due to the switch in the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation has begun, the drive motor 861 stops or only reverse rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is always an integral rotation operation. Since no switching rotation operation occurs, no collision with surrounding decorative members can occur, and the position of the third operating unit 800 can be switched to a performance standby state or an extended state at any time.

Since the drive motor 861 can only drive in reverse, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine the position of the outer rotating member 840.

When switching from a reverse performance to a normal performance, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward in advance, and the third operating unit 800 is put into an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating in the reverse direction until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched to determine that the detected part 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in the forward direction. When the drive is in the forward direction, the third operating unit 800 executes a switching rotation operation, but during this time the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained.

Next, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate together. After the start of the rotational movement, the outer rotating member 840 starts to rotate, causing the detected portion 844 to move away from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 to be switched. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 have started to rotate together due to the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation starts, the performance transitions back to normal. The restrictions on drive control during this normal performance are the same as those described for the normal performance that preceded the above-mentioned reverse performance.

In this way, according to this embodiment, a single detection sensor 813 can be used to determine the switching of the rotation mode of the third operating unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and to determine the reference rotation angle of the outer rotating member 840. Therefore, the number of detection sensors 813 required can be reduced compared to when individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be performed by switching the drive direction of the drive motor 861 to the opposite direction from a state in which the integral rotation operation continues or a state in which the rotation is stopped. In other words, regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the united combined state.

Therefore, when controlling the action presentation to switch to a united state at the timing of a jackpot announcement, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot has been announced based on the position of the first decorative member 870.

Furthermore, as described above, the decoration in the united state is designed so that what is perceived by the player does not vary significantly depending on the arrangement of the rotational direction of the second decorative member 880. In other words, even if the arrangement of the rotational direction of the decorative members 870, 880 is different at the start of the switching rotation operation, the content that is perceived by the player as the united state at the end of the switching rotation operation can be the same.

Therefore, unlike when the patterns in the united state differ depending on the arrangement in the rotation direction, the integral rotation action for adjusting the position after reaching the united state can be omitted, so the drive control until the jackpot announcement can be the same regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state.

In this way, in this embodiment, both the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation can be realized in both the forward and reverse rotation directions of the drive motor 861. Therefore, compared to a case where the operation mode is fixed between forward and reverse rotation, a wide variety of performance modes can be realized with a single drive motor 861.

Figure 69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in Figure 28. As shown in Figure 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 penetrates from the rear end, where the tube fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is located, to the front end, where the illumination board 823 is located, and electrical wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end to the front end, with terminals connected to a connector disposed on the illumination board 823. Electricity is conducted through this electrical wiring, allowing the LEDs disposed on the illumination board 823 to be controlled to emit light.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light-emitting portion 823a of the illumination board 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824a that bulges toward the front side at the center side of the translucent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a part that is visible to the player at the center of the circle on which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged when the decorative members 870, 880 are combined.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b of the illumination board 823 is irradiated to the inside of the decorative members 870, 880 (first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged in the front, and acts to illuminate the decorative members 870, 880 from the inside.

In this embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual combined state (see FIG. 69) in which the decorative member 870 is positioned at the front, and a combined state (see FIG. 32) in which the decorative member 880 is positioned at the front, so that the light LD1 can be switched between illuminating the decorative member 870 and illuminating the decorative member 880.

In the individual combined state (see FIG. 69), the light LD1 is reflected toward the front side by the plated portion 871a of the first skeleton portion 871, and the direction of the light LD1 is switched to the front side. This allows most of the light LD1 to be emitted toward the first covering portion 875, and the brightness of the first covering portion 875 when the light LD1 is emitted can be improved.

In this embodiment, the illumination board 823 is fixedly positioned, and the decorative members 870, 880 are configured to rotate around it, so the relationship between the irradiation direction of the light LD1 and the arrangement of the decorative members 870, 880 can change with the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880. For example, if the light LD1 is irradiated to the center of the plated portion 871a during rotation, the light LD1 irradiated from the same LED may be irradiated to a position shifted from the center of the plated portion 871a. Therefore, without measures, the degree of brightness of the first covering portion 875 by the light LD1 is likely to change with the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880, and it may be difficult to perform a performance in which the decorative members 870, 880 rotate together while emitting light at a constant brightness.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the shape of the plated portion 871a, which is configured to be able to reflect the light LD1, is concave, the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illumination substrate 823, and the center of the concave shape is designed to be located near the center of the first covering portion 875 when viewed from the front.

The light LD1 is positioned so that its optical axis faces the outer diameter direction of the circle on which the outer light-emitting portion 823b is positioned. As a result, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plated portion 871a and travels toward the center of the radius of curvature, illuminating the vicinity of the center of each of the first covering portions 875 of the first decorative member 870.

Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the plating portion 871a based on the outer light emitting portion 823b, the multiple lights LD1 can be reflected to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering portion 875. This allows light to be irradiated stably near the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875, so that the first covering portion 875 can be viewed with uniform brightness even during integral rotation.

Furthermore, the first framework portion 871 is a portion that is plated in the same manner as the plating process on the plating portion 871a, and has an outer plating portion 871b that is disposed outside the first covering portion 875 in a front view. The light LD1 is also reflected by the outer plating portion 871b in the same manner as the plating portion 871a, but since the outer plating portion 871b is disposed further back than the plating portion 871a, the degree of light intensity of the outer plating portion 871b can be weakened.

This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the light perceived outside the first covering portion 875 is too strong, causing the player to feel dazzled and reducing visibility inside the frame of the first covering portion 875.

The illuminated board 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but the joints are not completely blocked, so not all of the light from the outer light-emitting part 823b is irradiated to the inside.

First, between the member edge 875a of the first covering portion 875 and the member edge 885a of the second covering portion 885 arranged opposite the member edge 875a, a gap VA1 is formed to the extent that the internal structure can be seen in FIG. 69. Since the outer plating portion 871b protrudes through this gap VA1 to the outside of the frame of the first covering portion 875, the light LD1 that passes through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

In addition, a large gap VA2 is formed between the outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875, which is arranged opposite the metal rod 832, and the outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885, the gap exceeding the area required to avoid interference with the metal rod 832.

The gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of, first, avoiding collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, thereby ensuring that the length of the metal rod 832 is sufficient, and ensuring that the metal rod 832 can guide the linear displacement of the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834.

Secondly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring an assembly path for the fastening screw that is inserted into the skeletal parts 871, 881 and screwed into the cylindrical protrusion 834b of the rotating member 834 to fasten and fix the decorative members 870, 880 to the rotating member 834.

Thirdly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring a light path for the light that passes through the transparent parts of the framework 871, 881. Because the decorative members 870, 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light that passes through the gap VA and travels outward is visually recognized as light that passes through equal intervals on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle.

Therefore, by performing the integral rotational operation of the decorative members 870, 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can be rotated in the same manner. This makes it possible to perform a light-emitting effect in which the light radiating radially from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800 is visible in a rotating light-emitting state, without the need to control the lighting state of the light from the outer light-emitting portion 823b (for example, by keeping all the lights on).

In the combined state (see FIG. 32), the entire second skeletal portion 881 is made of a translucent resin material, which suppresses the reflection of light LD1 by the second skeletal portion 881.

As a result, only the light (weak light) of the light LD1 that is far from the optical axis is irradiated within the frame of the second covering portion 885, so the intensity of the light emitted by the second covering portion 885 can be weakened. On the other hand, the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, so the intensity of the light radiating out radially from the center of rotation of the third operating unit 800 can be improved.

A light diffusion decorative portion 885c is formed from a colored (in this embodiment, the color of the circular body is set to an arbitrary color) light-transmitting resin material and is arranged around the circumference of the frame of the second covering portion 885, with light diffusion processing formed on the inside. Therefore, of the light LD1, the light that is incident on the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is refracted, and acts to cause the entire light diffusion decorative portion 885c to emit surface light.

This surface emission makes it possible to homogenize the light that is viewed through the light-diffusing decorative parts 885c arranged in the circumferential direction, creating the effect that each of the light-diffusing decorative parts 885c of the five second decorative members 880 is viewed as a single unit by the player.

As mentioned above, the more firmly the second covering portions 885 can be integrated together, the better the presentation performance when the second covering portions 885 are visually recognized by the player. This integration can be achieved by making the light-diffusing decorative portion 885c visually appear as if it is continuously connected in the circumferential direction. This therefore improves the presentation performance in the combined state when the second covering portions 885 are positioned on the front side.

The outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832, and the end face 885b1 that is adjacent to (contacts) the outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875 protrudes toward the first decorative member 870 based on the plane on which the metal rod 832 is disposed.

As a result, when the third operating unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the united state (see FIG. 32), the degree to which the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 located on the rear side comes into the player's field of vision can be reduced, thereby reducing the impact on the presentation.

This makes it easier to prevent the color of the first covering part 875 from coming into view when the frame of the first covering part 875 and the frame of the second covering part 885 are colored in different colors and the second covering part 885 is positioned in front.

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state by itself in a combined state (see FIG. 32), there are more gaps around the third operating unit 800 than when the other operating units 600, 700 are both in an extended state (see FIG. 33, F9), making it easier for the line of sight to pass through when viewing the third operating unit 800 from an oblique direction. Therefore, without any measures, the side of the third operating unit 800 is visible, which can easily reduce the presentation effect.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, in the united state, the end face 885b1 of the second covering portion 885 is positioned rearward from the center of the front-to-rear width of the side surface, so that even if the side surface of the third operating unit 800 is visible when viewed from an oblique direction, most of the side surface can be seen as part of the second covering portion 885, and the degree to which the first covering portion 875 is visible can be reduced. As a result, in the united state, the second covering portion 885 can be made easier to see than the first covering portion 875, improving the presentation effect.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual combined state and the combined state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830, causing the inner rotating member 830 to rotate, while the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is stopped by the load from the torque limiter 866.

Although the sliding ridge 831b is used to reduce the contact area, if the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 will be large, and the allowable load transmission value of the torque limiter 866 will have to be increased, which tends to hinder miniaturization of the torque limiter 866.

For this reason, it is preferable to suppress the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830. To this end, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the only support points between the inner rotating member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 are the front end that contacts the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central ring gear 864, and a gap is provided in other areas. This makes it possible to reduce the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830, making it easier to reduce the displacement resistance.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened to the central ring gear 864, a stopper is considered necessary to suppress forward displacement based on the central ring gear 864, and the sliding member 825 performs the function of this stopper. In other words, the sliding member 825 can receive a load from the inner rotating member 830 in a direction pushing it forward, but the front surface of the sliding member 825 abuts against the short diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822 at the front and rear.

The short diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the back side of the circular plate portion 822 as a circular protrusion whose outer diameter is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and the protrusion portion 822b is formed in a circular shape at its outermost diameter portion, protruding from the back side with a semicircular cross section.

This protrusion 822b abuts against the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, so the contact area can be reduced compared to when the entire back surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a contacts the sliding member 825. This reduces the displacement resistance in the rotational direction of the inner rotating member 830.

In addition, since no fastening screws are used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central ring gear 864, it is possible to reduce the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that would be expected if the weight of the fastening screws were to increase.

The following describes how the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are fixed to the rotating member 834. When explaining this fixing, refer to Figures 62 and 63 as appropriate.

The first decorative member 870 can be fixed to the rotating member 834 by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 872 of the first skeletal member 871 into the female thread of the fastened portion 876 formed at the rear of the frame of the first covering portion 875 to fasten and fix the first covering portion 875 to the first skeletal member 871, and then inserting the protruding portion 873 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the first skeletal member 871 into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted outside), and screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

The second decorative member 880 can be fixed to the rotating member 834 by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeletal member 881 into the female thread of the fastened portion 886 formed at the rear of the frame of the second covering portion 885 to fasten and fix the second covering portion 885 to the second skeletal member 881, and then inserting the protruding portion 883 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the second skeletal member 881 into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted outside), and screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be configured to undergo linear or rotational displacement in response to linear or rotational displacement of the rotating member 834.

During the fixing process, the projections 873, 883 enter the recessed grooves 833d of the linear motion member 833, thereby defining the arrangement of the skeletal parts 871, 881 on the linear motion member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832), and preventing the skeletal parts 871, 881 from falling off the linear motion member 833.

The skeletal parts 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, so that the position of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 (the position of the metal rod 832 in the longitudinal direction) is similarly defined, and it is possible to prevent the rotating member 834 from falling off the linear moving member 833.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when assembling the rotating member 834 to the linear moving member 833, the portion that determines the position of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 is formed on the skeletal portions 871, 881 that are fixed to the rotating member 834, and therefore, unlike when the portion that determines the position on the linear moving member 833 is formed on the rotating member 834 itself, the labor hours for assembly and disassembly can be reduced.

In other words, for example, when disassembling, by removing the fastening screws fastening the skeletal parts 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834, not only can the restrictions on the arrangement of the skeletal parts 871 and 881 on the linear moving member 833 be released, but also the restrictions on the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 can be released. This can improve work efficiency.

The combined operations of the operational units 600 to 800 will be described with reference to Figs. 70 and 71. Figs. 70(a) to 70(d) and Figs. 71(a) to 71(d) are schematic front views of the operational unit 500 that chronologically explain examples of combined operations of the operational units 600 to 800. In the explanation of Figs. 70 and 71, Figs. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate.

In Figures 70 and 71, the decorations on each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c of the first operating unit 600, each of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operating unit 700, and each of the covering portions 875, 885 of the third operating unit 800 are illustrated in a schematic manner so as to be identifiable using letters or the like.

That is, the word "Normal" is displayed vertically on the first presentation surface 661a, the word "Activate" is displayed horizontally on the second presentation surface 661b, and the symbol "!" is displayed along the longitudinal direction on the third presentation surface 661c.

The first main decorative surface 787a1 is illustrated with the words "Start of war," the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 with the words "A crisis is an opportunity," the second main decorative surface 787b1 with the words "Attack," and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 with the words "Patience!?".

In addition, different alphanumeric characters ("I" to "V") corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covered portion 875, and five "circle" symbols are illustrated together in the second covered portion 885.

In Figure 70(a), each of the operating units 600 to 800 is placed in a standby state for performance (see Figure 28). Note that above the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is shown in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's line of sight.

In addition, in FIG. 70(b), the first operating unit 600 is in an intermediate performance state, the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate performance state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

By executing the integral rotational motion of the third operating unit 800, the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged adjacent to the second operating unit 700 can be replaced one after another. In addition, by placing the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate performance state while the integral rotational motion continues or after it has stopped, the third performance surface 661c can be protruded inside the center frame 86, making the movements of the operating units 600 to 800 more lively.

For example, when the third presentation surface 661c is visible, the presentation can be controlled to increase the likelihood of winning the lottery, thereby increasing the interest of the player who sees the operation of the first operation unit 600.

When the integral rotational movement is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second operating unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 arranged in close proximity to the second operating unit 700 can be viewed as an integrated unit.

This can increase the attention to the first decorative member 870 that is placed close to the second operation unit 700, and by starting a display effect related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 on the third pattern display device 81 while returning the third operation unit 800 to a standby state for effect, the player's gaze can be smoothly guided to the third pattern display device 81.

The first decorative member 870 to be drawn to is not limited to the first decorative member 870 arranged in close proximity to the second operating unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light-emitting unit 823b (see FIG. 60) arranged to be able to irradiate light to the first decorative member 870, it is possible to draw attention to any first decorative member 870 by turning on the LED that irradiates light LD1 toward the first decorative member 870 to be drawn to and turning off the other LEDs.

At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched while the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870.

When switching the LED lighting pattern in accordance with the integral rotational movement of the first decorative member 870, the LEDs to be lit may be switched sequentially in the rotational direction, allowing the player to visually recognize that the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotating and displacing along a coaxial circle. Alternatively, the LEDs to be lit may be fixed, and the first decorative member 870 to be irradiated with light may be switched by utilizing the fact that each first decorative member 870 reaches the position where the light is irradiated from that LED in sequence by the integral rotational movement of the first decorative member 870.

In the state shown in FIG. 70(a), the second decorative rotating member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operating unit 600 both have vertically elongated decorations, allowing them to be viewed as a single unit. In particular, the front side of the decorative fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction, similar to the first performance surface 661a in the performance standby state, enhancing the effect of being viewed as a single unit.

On the other hand, when the state shown in Figure 71 (a) is reached, in addition to the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 being displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 during the intermediate process shown in Figure 70 (b), the second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operating unit 600 has a horizontally elongated decoration, so that the sense of unity with the decorative fixing member 670 is reduced, and now it can be visually recognized as being integrated with the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700, which also has a horizontally elongated decoration.

Figure 35 shows the intermediate performance state of the second operating unit 700, but if the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state as shown in Figure 71 (a), the vertical distance between the covering member 787 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can be further reduced, enhancing the effect of them being visually perceived as a single unit.

At this time, the protruding decorative portion 652b protrudes to a visible position, and the above-mentioned effect of making the right edge of the third pattern display device 81 appear to be expanding further to the right than the right end RE1 of the area prevents the player from feeling cramped even if the second presentation surface 661b is positioned closer to the right edge.

This also allows the player to see that the second performance surface 661b is positioned toward the center of the third pattern display device 81, similar to the second main decorative surface 787b1, thereby enhancing the effect of the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second performance surface 661b being viewed as a single unit.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the protruding decorative portion 652b with content related to the decoration of the second performance surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the effect of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second performance surface 661b and the protruding decorative portion 652b being visually perceived as a single unit can be enhanced.

In Figures 70(c) and 70(d), the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in a performance standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state. The reversal operation of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in Figure 70(d), but since the second decorative rotating member 660 is not positioned on the left or right outside of the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700 when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the reversal operation of the covering member 787 (see Figure 59) can be performed even when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state.

As mentioned above, when the covering member 787 is flipped over, the different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 on the left and right are faced forward, making them non-distinguishable. However, as shown in Figure 70(d), the different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 may be combined to make the content discernible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 70(d), the player can discern the meaning of "Pinch!?", and by stopping the driving of the second action unit 700 in this state, the player can focus his/her attention on the subsequent movement of the second action unit 700, thereby focusing the player's gaze on the second action unit 700.

For example, when it is desired to notify that the lottery result is a loss, the state of FIG. 70(d) is controlled to return to FIG. 70(c), and when it is desired to notify that the lottery result is still not to be notified or that the lottery result is a big win, the state of FIG. 70(d) is controlled to continue to be inverted to the state shown in FIG. 71(a), thereby drawing the player's attention to the second operating unit 700.

In FIG. 71(a), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in an extended state, and the third operating unit 800 is in a standby state for performance. Note that above the second operating unit 700, the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 is shown in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's line of sight.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the second performance surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are positioned close to each other, and the characters written on each are both written horizontally, making it easy for the player to see them as one. Furthermore, the content has a series of meanings, including "attack activated," making it even easier for the player to see them as one.

When the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state (see FIG. 70(a)), the first performance surface 661a and the decorative fixing member 670 are positioned close to each other, and the characters written on each are both written vertically, making it easy for the player to see them as one. Furthermore, the content of the characters is related to "normal time," making it even easier for the player to see them as one.

In this way, in this embodiment, each presentation surface 661a, 661b of the first operating unit 600 is configured to be viewed as one with the side surface of a different member (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decorative fixing member 670). This can improve the presentation effect.

In Figures 71(b) to 71(d), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in a standby state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. The state shown in Figure 71(b) and the state shown in Figure 71(c) differ in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 due to the third operating unit 800 performing a unitary rotation action. On the other hand, no matter which state the switching rotation action is performed from, it can be visually recognized by the player as the same united state (see Figure 71(d)).

In other words, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front, the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870. As a result, when the operation control of the third operation unit 800 is set to notify the player of a jackpot by executing a switching rotation operation at the end of the display performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the patterns are changing, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot will be notified from the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

In other words, regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 at the end of the display performance (whether it is in the state shown in FIG. 71(b) or the state shown in FIG. 71(c)), the player's sense of anticipation as to whether or not they will win the jackpot can be maintained in the same way. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operating unit 800 can be maintained at a high level.

As described above, each of the operation units 600-800 can be formed so that the decoration is either visible alone or in combination with other units. Therefore, the decoration formed on each of the operation units 600-800 is not complete for each operation unit 600-800 alone, but is designed as a decoration that is related to each of the operation units 600-800.

Whether or not the drive control of each of the operational units 600-800 can be performed is affected by the positioning of the other units. In other words, if the drive of each of the operational units 600-800 is performed at an inappropriate time, the component operations may collide and cause a malfunction, so drive control is performed only after determining the positioning of the components of the other units.

For example, the first operating unit 600 is controlled to change to the extended state when the second operating unit 700 is in any state and the third operating unit 800 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

The change of the first operation unit 600 to the intermediate performance state is controlled so that the state of the second operation unit 700 can be any, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be any, and the rotation operation is executed when it is determined that a switching rotation operation is not occurring.

The second operating unit 700 is controlled to change to the extended state when the first operating unit 600 is in any state and the third operating unit 800 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

The change of the second operation unit 700 to the intermediate performance state is controlled so that the state of the first operation unit 600 can be any, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be any, and the rotation operation is executed when it is determined that a switching rotation operation is not occurring.

The control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and rotation is not performed or only a unitary rotational movement occurs is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state.

The control by which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and the switching rotation operation occurs is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in a performance standby state and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

As mentioned above, the drive control of each operating unit 600 to 800 is not possible at any time, but is controlled so that it is executed after determining the arrangement of the components of the other units.

Next, the details of the sorting device 300 in the first embodiment will be described. In describing the details of the sorting device 300, reference will be made as appropriate to Figures 1 to 25. First, an example of the decoration applied to the front design member 162 will be described.

Figure 72 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 300. The difference between Figure 72 and Figure 5 above is that the front design member 162 has a light-transmitting window 162d.

As shown in FIG. 72, the front design component 162 arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300 has a front panel formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and a window portion 162d is formed in the central area of the front panel as an area with higher light transmittance than the peripheral area.

In this embodiment, a light-transmitting seal member SL1, the central area of which is cut out to match the shape of the window portion 162d, is attached to the front plate of the front design member 162. With this configuration, the front-to-rear thickness of the window portion 162d is thinner than the front-to-rear thickness of the area around it where the seal member SL1 is attached, and since it is possible to vary the degree to which light transmits through the front design member 162, it is possible to increase the light transmittance of the window portion 162d.

The window portion 162d is formed with the primary objective of improving the visibility of the sorting device 300, taking into consideration that when a player looks at the sorting device 300, his or her line of sight passes through the plate portion of the front design member 162, and the secondary objective is to eliminate the dissatisfaction expressed by players that they are unable to grasp the flow pattern of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300. In other words, the window portion 162d is formed with a shape and size that takes into consideration the shape of the sorting device 300.

The means for forming the window portion 162d as a portion having higher light transmittance than the surrounding area is not limited in any way, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, a light guide plate may be placed on the plate portion of the front design member 162, or multiple groove patterns may be formed to perform the same function as a light guide plate, so that the appearance of the front design member 162 changes for each light emission pattern of the light emitting means such as LEDs, or a pattern or design may be drawn directly on the front design member 162, or the area corresponding to the window portion 162d of the front design member 162 may be formed as an opening.

The shape of the window portion 162d is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 72, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be a band shape extending left and right with the same vertical width, or it may be a shape that omits the part extending outward left and right so that the horizontal width is equal to the horizontal width of the range that protrudes upward (a pentagonal shape like home base), or it may be a shape that follows the shape of the front plate edge of the front design member 162.

Although the window portion 162d is formed as a single area, this is not limiting and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the highly light-transmitting area may be formed by a combination of multiple locations separated by lattice-like or ladder-like sections, the area may be partitioned by multiple aligned small windows, or the area may be partitioned by a disorderly arrangement of window portions. The shape of the window portion may also be variable.

The surface shape of the sealing member SL1 is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a surface shape formed with many projections and recesses, such as a surface shape formed by embossing, or the surface may have many grooves or protrusions, or it may be formed as a smooth surface.

The surface shape of the window portion 162d is preferably formed as a smooth surface, but any shape that ensures higher light transmittance than the surrounding area (corresponding to the formation area of the sealing member SL1) may be used, and various shapes may be adopted in addition to shapes similar to the surface shape of the sealing member SL1 described above.

Figure 73 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. The difference between Figure 73 and the content shown in Figure 21 above is that a light-transmitting window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162.

As shown in FIG. 73, the window portion 162d is formed in a symmetrical shape and includes a main window portion 162d1 that is short vertically and long horizontally, and a sub-window portion 162d2 that is formed above the central portion horizontally of the main window portion 162d1.

In this embodiment, the main window portion 162d1 and the sub-window portion 162d2 are formed from a colorless and transparent resin material and are maintained in a state of high light transmittance. The shape of each portion is described in detail below.

The main window portion 162d1 is designed so that the outer edge shape in a front view is sufficient to ensure visibility of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed with a vertical width equivalent to the vertical width of the spherical passages of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, and is formed into a V-shape that slopes upward toward the left and right outside in accordance with the inclination of the second flow path component 335.

This allows the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336 to be contained inside the main window portion 162d1 when viewed from the front, thereby improving the visibility of the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

The left and right ends of the main window portion 162d1 are set near the center of the left and right width of the first flow path forming portion 334 (see FIG. 17), which is formed at the same left and right positions as the ball passage hole 163b. In other words, the entire outer wall of the first flow path forming portion 334 is not visible through the main window portion 162d1, and in particular, the visibility of the side wall portion 334a is reduced.

This allows for greater freedom in designing the shape of the side wall 334a compared to when a design is required that will be visible to players, such as when an attractive shape is required.

The outer edge shape of the secondary window portion 162d2 in a front view is designed to be sufficient to ensure visibility of the sealing member 313 illuminated by the light from the light emitting means 351. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed in a rectangular shape that covers the sealing member 313.

This not only improves the visibility of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336, but also makes it easy for the player to grasp the state of the sealing member 313 illuminated by the light-emitting means 351, whose lighting timing is controlled based on the manner in which the ball flows down, providing the player with a comfortable gameplay experience.

Figure 74 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in Figure 16, and Figure 75 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along the line LXXV-LXXV in Figure 73. Figures 74 and 75 differ from the contents shown in Figures 23 and 18 above in that a light-transmitting window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162.

As shown in FIG. 74, when the sorting device 300 is viewed from above (at an angle), a portion of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 located at the front position is visible below the opening/closing plate 65b.

In contrast, when the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear position, the upper protrusion 376 is hidden behind the opening and closing plate 65b when viewed from the direction shown in FIG. 74. Therefore, as long as the upper protrusion 376 is visible, the player can easily predict whether the ball that has flowed down the third flow path component 336 will pass through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

The field of view toward the upper protrusion 376 is also well ensured by the fact that the inner surface 314b1 of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes outward to the left and right as it approaches the front side.

In other words, the second upper surface portion 314b functions as a ceiling surface that prevents balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 from bouncing up, while the inner surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface to avoid unnecessary obstruction of the view to the upper protrusion portion 376.

The fact that the inner surface 314b1 is configured as an inclined surface compensates for the disadvantage of the upper surface 314 being configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward as it approaches the front. When the upper surface 314 is configured as an inclined surface as described above, the projected area of the upper surface 314 when viewed from above (angled direction) as shown in FIG. 74 can be increased, which has the advantage of making it easier to improve the presentation effect of the presentation in which light is visible through the light diffusion processed surface 314c of the upper surface 314. However, there is a disadvantage in that the larger projected area of the upper surface 314 may increase the area over which balls flowing below it are hidden from the player's view.

In other words, while the upper surface 314 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward as it approaches the front, this is advantageous for the light effects, but may be detrimental to the visibility of the balls as they flow down.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the inner surface 314b1 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes outward to the left and right, thereby reducing the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 at the point where the ball enters the third flow path portion 336 from the second flow path portion 335, thereby improving the visibility of the ball flowing down under the upper surface portion 314.

As shown in FIG. 74, when the sorting device 300 is viewed from below (at an angle), the sealing member 313 cannot be seen from inside the secondary window 162d2. Therefore, without any measures, the player will be forced to adjust the position of their eyes or the angle of their line of sight so that the sealing member 313 is visible in order to visually check its condition, which may hinder a comfortable gameplay experience.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the straight line LL1, which serves as the optical axis of the light-emitting means 351 that directs light toward the sealing member 313, passes through the sealing member 313 and the sub-window portion 162d2, and therefore a portion of the light emitted from the light-emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 after passing through the sealing member 313. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the light-emitting means 351 on the straight line LL1 is lit or not by looking at the sub-window portion 162d2.

Since the sealing member 313 is not light-diffusing, it has a weak effect of stopping the progression of light from the light-emitting means 351, allowing the light to reach the sub-window 162d2 sufficiently. As a result, when the light-emitting means 351 is turned on, the red light of the sealing member 313 reaches the sub-window 162d2, causing the sub-window 162d2 to glow red.

This makes it easier to see the difference from the colorless and transparent state of the secondary window 162d2 before the light reaches it, making it easier for the player to know whether the light emitting means 351 is lit or not. The sealing member 313 (or the wall portion on which the sealing member 313 is arranged) may be provided with a light diffusion treatment. In this case, it is easier to make the sealing member 313 emit light evenly.

As shown in FIG. 75, the straight line LL1 is positioned (at a height position) so as not to overlap with the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration part 336. In other words, the straight line LL1 is positioned above the range in which the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration part 336 can be positioned.

In addition, the straight line LL1 is positioned so as not to overlap with the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a. In other words, the straight line LL1 is positioned below the lower surface portion 163a on which the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a rests.

Furthermore, as described above, between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, the flow of the ball is hindered by the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7), so the flow range of the ball is shifted to the left and right outside the left and right width of the front design member 141. Therefore, the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 is also prevented from overlapping with the straight line LL1.

Therefore, by arranging balls flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 (e.g., the play area), balls that have entered the specific winning port 65a, and balls flowing down the sorting device 300 (e.g., the third flow path component 336) on the straight line LL1, it is possible to avoid a situation in which light is reflected and refracted by the balls. This allows the light irradiated from the light emitting means 351 to stably reach the secondary window portion 162d2 regardless of the manner in which the balls flow down.

The placement of the sealing member 313 in this embodiment may be to the player's advantage if the sealing member 313 remains difficult to see unless the player changes his or her line of sight.

For example, in a configuration where the sealing member 313 is always within the field of view, light enters the player's eyes every time the light emitting means 351 emits light, which may be dazzling to some players. However, by positioning the light emitting means 351 so that it is difficult to see, as in this embodiment, the glare felt by the player can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the case where the light from the light emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the range where it intersects with the straight line LL1, the fixed member 161 may be provided with a light diffusion treatment to prevent the light from reaching the sub-window portion 162d2.

In this case, it can be configured so that it is difficult to know whether the light emitting means 351 is lit toward the seal member 313 unless the line of sight is changed from the state shown in FIG. 74 to look directly at the seal member 313. Therefore, even if the player does not want to know whether the ball has entered the probability change detection sensor SE11 as a gaming preference, the purpose can be achieved by maintaining the line of sight shown in FIG. 74, and the gaming burden on such a player can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the sub-window portion 162d2 is formed from a smooth surface shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sub-window portion 162d2 may be formed so that at least one of the front and back surfaces is subjected to light diffusion processing, or a bubble portion is provided inside to facilitate light diffusion.

In this case, the light that reaches the sub-window 162d2 is diffused, so that the area of the light that is visible through the sub-window 162d2 can be increased. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the sub-window 162d2 is illuminated.

So far, we have explained the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the light-emitting means 351 that direct light toward the sealing member 313, that is, the LEDs arranged on the straight line LL1. Next, we will explain the light emitted from the LEDs constituting the light-emitting means 351 that are arranged in four locations on the left and right at the bottom row.

Figure 76 is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, slide displacement member 370, lower member 380, and detection sensor SE1 of the sorting device 300 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in Figure 75. In Figure 76, the arrangement of the light emitting means 351 is shown by imaginary lines.

In the following explanation, the LEDs arranged on the inner left and right sides of the bottom row of the light-emitting means 351 will be referred to as inner light-emitting means 351c, and the LEDs arranged on the outer left and right sides of the bottom row will be referred to as outer light-emitting means 351d.

First, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the inner light-emitting means 351c is positioned inside the light diffusion surface 332e. Therefore, when light is emitted from the inner light-emitting means 351c, a light-emitting effect is produced in which the light diffusion surface 332e formed over a range extending to the left and right is illuminated.

This light emission effect is performed on the rear side of the branch point BP1 (see Figure 75, a long space that runs continuously from the rear end of the third flow path component 336) where the flow of balls branches off between the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12.

Therefore, when the inner light-emitting means 351c is lit and the ball flows through the branch point BP1, the location where the ball is positioned in front of the light-diffusing surface 332e, which emits light in a range from left to right, is visible as a shadow, and the player can easily understand how the ball has flowed by visually checking the displacement of the shadow.

The optical axis of the inner light-emitting means 351c passes through the long front-rear protrusion 317 (see FIG. 75). The optical axis does not pass through the left and right inner protrusions 318, but the arrangement allows light near the optical axis to pass through, and the protruding ends of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are curved when viewed in the front-rear and up-down directions.

As a result, a portion of the light emitted from the inner light-emitting means 351 is refracted by the curved shape of the front-to-rear long protrusion 317 and the left-to-right inner protrusion 318, and travels diagonally downward toward the front, and this light can reach the light-diffusing surface 340 (see Figure 75).

Since the light diffusion surface 340 is formed over the entire area of the lower side of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 14), the visibility of the space below the lower bottom surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be reduced by allowing light to reach the light diffusion surface 340. This makes it easier to distinguish between a sphere flowing down the inside of the third flow path forming portion 336 and an out sphere that passes through the outlet 71 (see FIG. 75) and flows down the underside of the third flow path forming portion 336.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the outer light-emitting means 351d is located outside (above) the light diffusion surface 332e and inside the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b. Therefore, when light is irradiated from the outer light-emitting means 351d, a light-emitting effect is produced in which the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated.

This light emission effect is performed above and in front of the branch point BP1 (see Figure 75, a long space that runs continuously from the rear end of the third flow path component 336) where the flow of balls branches off between the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12.

Therefore, when the outer light-emitting means 351d is lit and a ball passes through the branch point BP1, the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b above and in front of the ball will emit light, and the ball passing through the branch point BP1 will be hidden by the light diffusion surface 333b (see Figure 17), making it difficult for the player to understand how the ball passed through the branch point BP1.

In addition, the light diffusion surface 333b is formed from top to bottom, and the light diffusion surface 314c of the upper surface portion 314 is disposed above it (see FIG. 73). Therefore, in addition to making the branch point BP1 difficult to see when viewed from the front to back, the light emitted by the light diffusion surface 314c can also make the branch point BP1 difficult to see when viewed from above at an angle looking into the light diffusion surface 333b (see FIG. 74).

The light diffusion surface 333b is formed from top to bottom, and light diffusion surface 340 is disposed below it, and this light diffusion surface 340 is formed on the lower back surface of the second flow path component 335 (see FIG. 14). Therefore, apart from the effect of making it difficult to see the branch point BP1 when viewed from the front to back, the lower surface of the second flow path component 335 is illuminated, and as the ball flows down the second flow path component 335, a shadow is created by the ball blocking the light (light diffused by light diffusion surface 340), making it easier for the player to understand that the ball is flowing down.

Here, the light diffusion surface 333b is disposed in front of the branch point BP1 (see Figures 17 and 75). Therefore, depending on the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion surface 333b, a situation may occur in which the light is obscured by the sphere. However, in this embodiment, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-to-rear direction) of the outer light emitting means 351d is disposed outside (above) the range in which the sphere flows down the branch point BP1 (see Figure 76), so it is possible to avoid a situation in which the light is obscured by the sphere disposed at the branch point BP1.

Therefore, regardless of the flow pattern of the balls inside the sorting device 300, the light diffusion surface 333b can be brightly illuminated by illuminating the outer light emitting means 351d. When the light diffusion surface 333b is illuminated, the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 (see FIG. 17) located in front of it block the light, creating a shadow, making it easier for the player to grasp the flow pattern of the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335.

In this embodiment, a structure is used to smooth the flow of the balls downward as a measure to prevent the light from being blocked by the balls placed at the branch point BP1. This structure will be explained.

When the ball reaches the branch point BP1 and flows down, if the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position (see FIG. 20), it flows straight down and passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11, and if the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position (see FIG. 18), it flows down to the left and right sides along the inclination of the ball guide portion 371b and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

When the ball flows down with the sliding displacement member 370 positioned in the front position, the through-hole edge 382a of the plate-shaped part 382 supporting the left and right outer ends of the sliding displacement member 370 is arranged to connect the left and right outer edges of the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the left and right inner edges of the normal detection sensor SE12, and the upper surface is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outside. Therefore, the ball that reaches the upper surface of the through-hole edge 382a is configured to easily flow down to the left and right outside.

This makes it easier to prevent the ball, which starts to flow down the inclination of the ball guide portion 371b to the left and right, from flowing back to the left and right inward or bouncing after being bridged to the through-hole edge portion 382a, and allows the ball to flow down smoothly.

The light diffusion surface 319a is disposed inside the front-to-rear width of the branch point BP1. Therefore, a situation in which a sphere is placed on the rear side of the light diffusion surface 319a cannot occur, so the situation in which the light is obscured by the sphere is unlikely to occur regardless of the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion surface 319a.

In this way, the inner light-emitting means 351c and the outer light-emitting means 351d are not simply arranged offset to the left and right, but are designed with an intentional difference in the positional relationship between the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b arranged in different front-to-back positions in front of them and the optical axes of the light-emitting means 351c, 351d. By making the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b that the light from the light-emitting means 351c, 351d reaches different positions, the front-to-back positions at which the light reaches, is diffused, and is visible can be made different.

In the above explanation, the case where the inner light-emitting means 351c is illuminated and the case where the outer light-emitting means 351d is illuminated are explained separately, and the explanation was given on the assumption that the light-emitting means 351c, 351d on the opposite side are turned off. However, in actuality, the light emission control of each of the light-emitting means 351c, 351d is not performed one by one, and control modes such as both being turned on or both being turned off may also occur. Below, the light emission control patterns and how the internal flow path of the sorting device 300 appears at that time are explained.

Figures 77(a) to 77(d) are front perspective views of the inner member 330 of the sorting device 300. In Figures 77(a) to 77(d), in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of the lines of the light diffusing surface is omitted, and different combinations of the light emitting means 351c and 351d being turned on and off are illustrated, and the areas that are brightly lit by the light from the light emitting means 351c and 351d are illustrated with a crosshatched pattern.

That is, FIG. 77(a) illustrates a state in which both light-emitting means 351c and 351d are turned off, FIG. 77(b) illustrates an inner light-emitting state in which the inner light-emitting means 351c is turned on and the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned off, FIG. 77(c) illustrates an outer light-emitting state in which the inner light-emitting means 351c is turned off and the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned on, and FIG. 77(d) illustrates a state in which both light-emitting means 351c and 351d are turned on.

As shown in Figure 77(a), when both lights are off, the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b are not illuminated, and although visibility is ensured on the rear side, the player is given a dull impression. In particular, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the balls flowing above the third flow path component 336 and the out balls flowing down the rear (lower) side of the third flow path component 336.

When the inside is lit, as shown in FIG. 77(b), the light diffusion surface 340 on the lower side of the third flow path component 336 is illuminated, thereby maintaining high visibility of the balls flowing above the third flow path component 336 and reducing visibility of the out balls flowing down the back side (lower side) of the third flow path component 336.

Furthermore, because the light diffusion surface 332e is illuminated on the rear side of the branch point BP1, the visibility of the flow of the balls at the branch point BP1 can be improved. Moreover, the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b arranged in front of the light diffusion surface 332e are kept in an unilluminated state, so that the branch point BP1 can be prevented from being blinded by light.

In other words, when the inside is lit, the area from the third flow path configuration portion 336 to the branch point BP1 is illuminated with light, and the line of sight to see the branch point BP1 also passes through the front frame portion 333, making it easier for the player to grasp the flow pattern of the balls at the branch point BP1. Also, because the light is lit on the points that require attention in grasping the flow pattern of the balls, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will miss the points of interest, and it is possible to reduce the stress of the player while playing the game.

A light-diffusing surface 333b is formed over the entire inner surface of the front frame portion 333 (see Figure 13), making it difficult for the player to see through the front frame portion 333 to see behind them.

When looking through the front frame portion 333 to see behind, when looking in the front-to-back direction, you see through two side surfaces of the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 that are arranged opposite each other at the front and rear, so since there are many plates that need to be seen through, it is even more difficult to see the back side.

The same can be said for a player who tries to see through to the back of the front frame portion 333 with a line of sight that is inclined from the inside left and right to the outside left and right (a line of sight that is inclined from the center position on the front left and right toward the normal detection sensor SE12).

In other words, in this embodiment, the light diffusion surface 333b is formed along the inside of the rectangular tube shape, and the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 and the left and right inner side surfaces (the side surfaces facing the partition plate portion 338) are located on this inclined line of sight. Therefore, since there are many plates through which it is necessary to see through, it is even more difficult to see the rear side.

In this way, the front frame portion 333 makes it difficult to see through to the rear side of the front frame portion 333 not only when viewed from the front-to-rear direction, but also when viewed from an oblique direction.

When the outside light is on, as shown in FIG. 77(c), the light diffusion surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated, so the balls that flow outward to the left and right at the branch point BP1 are hidden by the light, reducing the visibility of the flowing balls.

On the other hand, the light diffusion surface 340 formed on the rear (lower) side of the second flow path component 335 is illuminated, improving the visibility of the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335. In other words, when the external lighting is on, improving the visibility of the balls flowing on the front side has the effect of increasing the player's attention, but the visibility of the branch point BP1 itself is reduced.

In both lighting states, as shown in FIG. 77(d), the light diffusion surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b are illuminated over a wide area. The situation in which light is lit is a combination of the inside lighting state and the outside lighting state, and the effects of both can be produced, but they do not always complement each other with advantageous effects.

For example, because the light diffusion surface 333b is illuminated, the feature that the spheres flowing to the left and right outside the branch point BP1 are hidden by light is inherited from the external lighting state. Therefore, in order to increase the visibility of the branch point BP1, it is optimal to maintain the internal lighting state.

Various control modes for turning on and off the light emitting means 351c, 351d are exemplified. For example, in a round game where there is a possibility that a ball will enter the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 76) during a jackpot game, control may be performed to configure an inner lighting state so that the player can easily notice the branch point BP1, and in other round games, control may be performed to configure an outer lighting state or both lighting states to make the overall light brighter.

Also, for example, the control may be such that both lights are switched on and both lights are switched off, regardless of the type of round of play.

The timing of lighting the light emitting means 351c, 351d is not limited to round play, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the light emitting means 351c, 351d may be controlled to light up after the reach is upright during the pattern change, or the light emitting means 351c, 351d may be controlled to light up when it is detected that a ball has entered the winning hole 63, 64, 140, 65a or the through gate 67.

Returning to Figure 75 from Figure 73, the configuration for optimizing the flow of balls near the specific winning opening 65a will be described in detail again. As shown in Figure 73, the upper surface of the extension portion 162b located on the left and right outer sides of the opening and closing plate 65b is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outer sides.

Therefore, regardless of whether the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open or closed state, balls that have deviated to the left or right outside of the opening/closing plate 65b and landed on the upper surface of the extension part 162b can be diverted to the left or right outside (the side opposite the side where the opening/closing plate 65b is located), so it is possible to prevent balls on the extension part 162b from flowing down past the front side of the specific winning opening 65a.

As a result, the majority of the balls flowing down to the outlet 71 can be made to roll on the inner rail 61, which makes it possible to prevent the balls from bouncing up (bouncing high) near the outlet 71. This makes it possible to prevent the main window portion 162d1 and the third flow path component 336 located behind it from being obscured by the bouncing up balls, thereby reducing visibility.

As shown in FIG. 74, the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b in the open/closed state is formed as a flat surface extending in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second flow path component 335 is inclined downward toward the left-right center (the partition plate portion 338 side).

Therefore, the closer to the left-right center, the longer the vertical distance between the opening/closing plate 65b and the second flow path component 335, making it easier to distinguish between a ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b and a ball flowing from the second flow path component 335 toward the third flow path component 336.

As shown in Figure 74, the opening and closing plate 65b is shaped to funnel all balls placed on the upper surface into the specific winning opening 65a without any leakage, but various design features have been implemented to prevent the flow of balls from being delayed.

For example, first, the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 is a plate-shaped portion that comes into contact with the ball flowing rearward from the upper side surfaces of the left and right ends of the opening and closing plate 65b, and guides the ball inward to the left and right. The guide plate portion 163a2 is not a plate-shaped portion that extends horizontally, but is formed as a plate-shaped portion that extends in a direction that slopes downward to the left and right inward in accordance with the vertical displacement of the ball flowing from the opening and closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163.

In other words, the front end of the guide plate portion 163a2 is formed as an inclined surface that is positioned further back as it moves inward on the left and right, and extends in a slanted direction so that the left and right inner parts where the ball that is handed over to the receiving member 163, which has a lower floor than the opening and closing plate 65b, comes into contact are positioned lower than the left and right outer ends where the ball resting on the opening and closing plate 65b comes into contact.

This makes it possible to stabilize the contact position of the ball that contacts the guide plate portion 163a2 (contact height over the entire length of the ball), and to guide the ball smoothly. In this embodiment, the position of the guide plate portion 163a2 is designed in relation to the opening/closing plate 65b and the floor surface of the receiving member 163 so that the ball can contact the guide plate portion 163a2 at the center height over the entire length of the ball.

For example, secondly, the height relationship between the rear end of the upper side of the opening/closing plate 65b (the base end side of the rotation) and the lower surface 163a of the receiving member 163 is configured to be reversed midway. That is, at the center position in the left-right direction where the height position of the lower surface 163a is the highest, the height position of the opening/closing plate 65b is lower, but the lower surface 163a slopes downward toward the left and right, and is configured to be reversed up and down at a pair of switching positions EP1 on the outside in the left-right width direction.

In this embodiment, the switching position EP1 has the property of being a position that switches the flow pattern of the balls between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163, and is designed to be a position on the same plane as the left and right inner surfaces of the front frame portion 333 (the side surfaces facing the partition plate portion 338) (directly above the front frame portion 333 in Figure 74).

In the left and right inner range of the switching position EP1 (the range between the pair of left and right switching positions EP1), the ball's rolling from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 is suppressed due to the relationship between the upper and lower positions of the ball's rolling surface, while the ball can roll from the receiving member 163 to the opening/closing plate 65b with little resistance.

For example, even if a ball bounces backward near the center position of the opening/closing plate 65b, collides with the receiving member 163 (on its inner rear surface) and bounces forward again, the ball can be prevented from climbing up from the opening/closing plate 65b onto the receiving member 163 after the ball stops bouncing and begins to roll.

The ball that rolls from the opening/closing plate 65b towards the receiving member 163 does not ride up onto the receiving member 163, but when the ball starts to come into contact with the lower surface 163a, the ball is swept outward to the left and right along the left and right inclination of the lower surface 163a.

The ball is unlikely to fall near the center of the left and right sides of the opening and closing plate 65b because the front design member 141 (see Figure 7) prevents the ball from falling, so it can be said that the ball is also unlikely to bounce. However, balls may bounce due to collisions between balls.

In the left and right outer range of switching position EP1 (the range outside the pair of left and right switching positions EP1 to the left and right (the side where ball passage hole 163b is located)), the ball is restricted from rolling from the receiving member 163 to the opening and closing plate 65b due to the relationship between the vertical positions of the ball rolling surface, while the ball can roll from the opening and closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 with little resistance. For example, even if a ball rolling on the lower surface 163a is accelerated forward due to a collision with another ball or vibration of the gaming machine, the ball can be prevented from flowing back toward the opening and closing plate 65b.

To summarize the description of the switching position EP1, the range in which the ball can roll forward from the receiving member 163 side is limited to the range between a pair of switching positions EP1, which prevents the ball from flowing back near the ball passage hole 163b and allows the ball to flow smoothly downward, thereby preventing the ball from becoming stuck.

In addition, the ball's backward rolling from the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 does not begin to flow backward and then switch to a left-right flow, but rather rolls along a diagonal straight line connecting the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 and the ball passage hole 163b.

In other words, instead of flowing along paths that intersect at right angles, such as in the front-to-back and left-to-right directions, the balls can flow along the hypotenuse that connects the ends of a front-to-back line and a left-to-right line, one end of which is located in the same position, thereby shortening the path along which the balls roll (this is equivalent to the length of the hypotenuse being shorter than the sum of the lengths of the other two sides of a right triangle).

Furthermore, compared to when balls tend to flow backwards between the left and right positions of the opening and closing plate 65b, this embodiment is configured so that balls tend to flow forwards in the range between a pair of switching positions EP1, making it easier to avoid the flow of balls becoming stagnant even when multiple balls enter the receiving member 163 at the same time.

As shown in FIG. 75, the receiving member 163 is not formed in the ranges on the left and right outside of the pair of switching positions EP1 (see FIG. 16), but has an upper surface portion 163f formed in a plate shape that slopes upward to leave a space in front of the range on the left and right center side of the pair of switching positions EP1.

The upper surface portion 163f is a device designed to lower the possibility of balls becoming stuck in the area between the pair of switching positions EP1 by raising the position of the lower surface portion 163a, and the upper surface portion 163f ensures that the vertical width of the space in which the balls are placed is sufficient.

This makes it possible to prevent ball jamming in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, and to avoid the ball becoming caught between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163 when the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to close with a ball on it.

The symmetrical protrusion 161f extends left and right in a direction that follows the inclination angle of the second flow path component 335 (a direction inclined 5 degrees from the horizontal), and is disposed at a position that abuts the ball at the center height position of the entire length of the ball rolling on the second flow path component 335 (a position 5.5 mm higher than the floor bottom of the second flow path component 335).

As a result, when the thickness of the symmetrical protrusion 161f is minimized to ensure the visibility of the branch point BP1, the ball abuts against the symmetrical protrusion 161f at a position that is off the center height of the ball, allowing the ball to roll more smoothly compared to when a load in the direction of lifting the ball or pressing the ball against the floor is applied to the ball from the symmetrical protrusion 161f.

If reduced visibility of branch point BP1 is acceptable, the thickness of symmetrical protrusion 161f can be made approximately the full length of the sphere to prevent the symmetrical protrusion 161f from contacting the sphere at a position that is off center height.

Next, the sliding displacement member 370 and its surrounding structure will be described in detail. Figure 78 is a top view of the middle member 330, state switching device 360, sliding displacement member 370, and lower member 380. In Figure 78, to facilitate understanding, the middle member 330 is shown as transparent with imaginary lines, and the sliding displacement member 370 disposed below the middle member 330 can be seen through.

The sliding displacement member 370 is a member that slides and displaces in the forward and backward directions at the branch point BP1, but its front end does not come into contact with the side of the discharge hole 337 that it faces even in the front position (see Figure 78), and a gap is maintained. The gap is formed to be short enough to prevent the ball from entering the probability change detection sensor SE11.

This achieves the goal of preventing the ball from entering the chance change detection sensor SE11 while avoiding the front end of the slide displacement member 370 being scraped or deformed by contact with the side of the discharge hole 337.

In addition, the front end of the sliding displacement member 370, i.e., the front end of the thin plate portion 371, is inclined so that the position shifts rearward as it moves outward to the left and right. This makes it easier to prevent the ball from being pinched and stuck between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side of the discharge hole 337.

In other words, even if a ball is caught between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side of the discharge hole 337, the front end of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface, so the load acting on the ball has a directional component toward the left and right outside, and the ball can be pushed outward to the left and right. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from clogging.

Next, referring to Figure 79, we will explain the innovations in guiding the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370. Because the player's profits can change depending on the positioning of the sliding displacement member 370, the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 must be reproducible (stable) and smooth.

Figure 79(a) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in Figure 78, Figure 79(b) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in Figure 78, and Figure 79(c) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the sliding displacement member 370, and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in Figure 78. In the explanation of Figure 79, Figures 13 and 14 will be referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 on the front side of the upper protrusion portion 376 is formed as an inclined surface that is positioned lower toward the left and right outer sides, and the balls can flow along this inclination. In this embodiment, in order to stabilize the flow of the balls rolling along this inclined surface, it is configured to suppress changes in the posture of the slide displacement member 370 that would change the inclination of the inclined surface.

That is, as shown in FIG. 79(a), the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370 is supported not only at both the left and right ends, but also at the lower protrusion portion 373 against the plate-like portion 382 of the lower member 380. This allows each of the pair of ball guide portions 371b, which are divided into left and right portions by the recessed portion 372, to be supported from below on both the left and right sides (supported by both ends), thereby suppressing changes in the posture of the sliding displacement member 370.

In other words, even if the load applied by the balls to the pair of left and right ball guide sections 371b is different (even if an unbalanced number of balls are placed on the balls), each ball guide section 371b is supported at both the left and right ends, so that tilting to the left and right of the ball guide sections 371b and the sliding displacement member 370 (displacement in the rotational direction around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction) can be suppressed.

In addition, the partition plate 338 is disposed on the upper side of the edge of the recessed portion 372, so that the upward displacement is restricted. In other words, the lifting movement of the sliding displacement member 370 and the tilt displacement in the backward tilt direction can be suppressed.

This makes it easier to maintain the proper posture of the sliding displacement member 370, suppresses the resistance to displacement in the forward and backward directions, and prevents malfunction of the sliding displacement member 370.

The ball guide portion 371b is a plate-like portion formed on the protruding base end side of the upper protruding portion 376, and the upper surface on which the ball can roll is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outside.

The contact between the ball guide portion 371b and the protrusion portion 383 is configured to be point contact. That is, in this embodiment, a pair of semi-spherical protrusions 372a protrude from the recessed portion 372 toward the protrusion portion 383, and when the gap is filled, the semi-spherical protrusions 372a and the protrusion portion 383 are configured to be in point contact.

As described above, the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, on which the ball can roll, is formed as an inclined surface that slopes in the left-right direction, so that the load applied to the ball guide portion 371b by the weight of the ball is resolved into an up-down component and a left-right component, and the left-right component can displace the sliding displacement member 370 in the left-right direction (a direction that intersects with the front-rear direction, which is the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370).

At this time, while it is preferable to reduce the left-right gap between the recessed portion 372 of the sliding displacement member 370 and the protruding portion 383, as this makes it easier to stabilize the left-right position of the ball guide portion 371b, it also makes it easier for contact friction to occur, which may result in functional problems.

For example, when the sliding displacement member 370 is displaced in the forward/backward direction while the ball is resting on the ball guide portion 371b, excessively large contact friction may result in poor forward/backward displacement (e.g., no displacement may occur).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the semispherical protrusion 372a and the ridge 383 are configured to make point contact, so the area over which frictional force occurs can be reduced, and contact friction can be kept small. This allows the sliding displacement member 370 to be smoothly displaced in the forward and backward directions even when the ball is resting on the ball guide portion 371b.

In particular, the forward/backward displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 when a ball is placed on the ball guide portion 371b is a displacement operation that switches the state from one in which the ball cannot enter the probability change detection sensor SE11 to one in which the ball can enter the probability change detection sensor SE11, so by executing this displacement operation well, it is possible to avoid the player suffering any disadvantages.

Furthermore, by setting the displacement speed of this displacement operation to a high speed, it is possible to produce an effect of changing the rotation of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the forward and backward directions.

Figures 80(a) and 80(b) are side views of the slide displacement member 370 and a ball resting on the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b. Figure 80(a) illustrates a state in which the ball is resting on the slide displacement member 370 in the front position, and Figure 80(b) illustrates a state in which the slide displacement member 370 has been displaced to the rear position. In Figures 80(a) and 80(b), an example of the rotation direction of the ball is illustrated by an arrow.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the ball rolls backward and reaches the slide displacement member 370 with the ball rotating in a forward direction. When the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13) is driven so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced forward or backward to the rear position while the ball is resting on the slide displacement member 370, the load applied to the ball from the slide displacement member 370 acts to reverse the ball's rotation direction (guiding direction) (backward direction).

This makes it possible to suppress the rotation of the ball, so that the ball can be easily subjected to the action of gravity, making it easier for the ball to fall straight down. Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is driven with a ball resting on it, it is possible to create a configuration in which the ball can easily flow down to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

The long front-rear projection 317 has the function of guiding the ball that has reached the branch point BP1 toward the slide displacement member 370. In other words, the long front-rear projection 317 does not only have the function of guiding the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11, but is configured as a shape that can appropriately guide the ball regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370 that is placed upstream of the probability change detection sensor SE11.

When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the rear position, the ball that abuts against the long front-rear protrusion 317 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 due to the path configuration. At this time, the curve at the end of the long front-rear protrusion 317 is made into an approximately arc shape with a long front-rear width longer than the up-down width (see Figure 18), so the abutting ball is subjected to a load whose downward component is greater than the forward component. This makes it possible to prevent the ball that abuts against the long front-rear protrusion 317 from bouncing back in the front-rear direction and flowing backward through the third flow path configuration part 336.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at the front position, the direction in which the ball flows down is left to the shape of the slide displacement member 370. In this embodiment, the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 forms a curved surface that curves outward to the left and right, so the ball is guided outward to the left and right along this curve.

When the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the forward position, if a ball moving forward and backward collides with the sliding displacement member 370 with its momentum, the sliding displacement member 370 may be pushed backwards by the load of the collision, and the state may switch to one in which the ball can pass to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the ball abuts against the front-rear long protrusion 317 before colliding with the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370, correcting the ball's speed direction downward. Therefore, the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 due to the load from the ball is mainly downward, making it easier to avoid the sliding displacement member 370 being pushed backward.

In addition, because the load applied by the ball in the direction of displacing the slide displacement member 370 rearward is reduced, the biasing force (the biasing force of the return spring of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13)) for maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the front position can be reduced, and the electromagnetic force that drives the plunger against that biasing force can be reduced. As a result, the design freedom of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 can be improved.

Even if the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position while a ball is placed at the branch point BP1, it is easy to prevent the ball from flowing back.

The left and right inner protrusions 318 come into contact with the ball forward of the front displacement end position of the upper protrusion 376, and the momentum of the ball is directed downward outward to the left and right. Furthermore, the momentum of the ball is directed downward by the front-to-rear long protrusions 317. This reduces the forward and rearward speed of the ball, stabilizing the position due to inertia caused by its own weight, and making it difficult for the ball to flow back under the load applied by the sliding displacement member 370.

Furthermore, the ball comes into contact with the upper protrusion 376 when it is lower than the height position at which it comes into contact with the front-rear long protrusion 317. However, when the ball is lowered enough to come into contact with the upper protrusion 376 (see FIG. 80(a)), the point at which the ball comes into contact is the ball guide 371b, which is located at a lower position than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336. As a result, even if the ball is displaced forward due to a load in the front-rear direction from the upper protrusion 376, a considerable amount of energy is required to get from the upper side of the ball guide 371b to the lower bottom surface 336a, so the degree of backflow of the ball can be reduced.

The front end of the upper protrusion 376 on the partition plate 338 side is formed at an acute angle, so the flat surface does not collide head-on with the ball in the front-to-rear direction (see FIG. 78). In other words, the load applied to the ball from the upper protrusion 376 is large in the left-to-right direction and small in the front-to-rear direction.

This allows the ball that comes into contact with the upper protrusion 376 to flow smoothly outward to the left and right, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the ball gets caught between the upper protrusion 376 and the front side of the discharge hole 337, causing malfunction, when the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace from the rear position to the front position with a ball placed at the branch point BP1.

Referring back to Figures 78, 79(b), and 79(c), the explanation will be given below. Since the slide displacement member 370 is configured to protrude toward the branch point BP1 (front side), there is a possibility that the slide displacement member 370 may be displaced in a forward tilt direction due to the weight of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the portion formed rearward of the upper protrusion 376, i.e., the portion formed on both the left and right sides with the upper and lower protrusions 374 extending from front to rear, has a sufficient front-to-rear width and is configured to be able to abut against the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 over that front-to-rear width. This makes it possible to prevent the sliding displacement member 370 from tilting forward.

In addition, because the upper and lower protrusions 374 are long in the front-to-rear direction, when a load is applied to tilt the sliding displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction, the load applied to the rear frame portion 332 can be prevented from concentrating at one point. This makes it possible to suppress deformation of the sliding displacement member 370 (increasing rigidity).

In addition, when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned at a front position where the ball can rest on the ball guide portion 371b, the front side of the protrusion portion (hereinafter also referred to as protrusion portion 378a) in which the recessed portion 378 is formed abuts against the rear side of the partition plate portion 338.

In other words, the front position of the slide displacement member 370 is set as a position where the front side of the protrusion 378a abuts against the rear side of the partition plate 338. For this purpose, the rear side of the partition plate 338 does not have a light diffusion surface, and the surfaces that are arranged opposite the protrusion 378a at the front and rear and can abut against each other are formed as flat surfaces. This makes it possible to stabilize the position of the slide displacement member 370 in the front position.

The lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is disposed inside the recessed portion 378, so that the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 transmitted via the lower cylindrical portion 363c is applied to the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 via the front flesh portion of the protruding portion 378a.

In this way, since the driving force is transmitted to the center of the left and right of the sliding displacement member 370, the driving force can be transmitted to the sliding displacement member 370 in a well-balanced manner. In other words, it is easy to prevent the sliding displacement member 370 from shifting in the rotational direction about the vertical axis when displacing in the forward and backward directions.

Furthermore, the front side of the protrusion 378a is pressed against the rear side of the partition plate 338, making it easier to correct the position of the slide displacement member 370 in the rotational direction around the vertical axis.

Here, when maintaining or returning the position of the sliding displacement member 370 by abutting the partition plate portion 338 with the hemispherical protrusion portion 372a, the contact area between the partition plate portion 338 and the hemispherical protrusion portion 372a is small, so the load is applied locally, which may deteriorate the durability of the hemispherical protrusion portion 372a.

In contrast, in this embodiment, even if the slide displacement member 370 has a rotational positional deviation about the vertical axis before the front surface of the protrusion 378a is pressed against the rear surface of the partition plate 338, the transmission of the driving force can eliminate the positional deviation of the slide displacement member 370 as the front surface of the protrusion 378a comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the partition plate 338, and the slide displacement member 370 can be corrected to the correct position.

The partition plate portion 338 against the protrusion portion 378a serves the purpose of aligning the sliding displacement member 370 by abutting against it when it is displaced in the forward and backward directions, and also functions as a portion that bears the load applied to the sliding displacement member 370 in the forward tilt direction.

In other words, when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position, if a load is generated in a direction that changes the posture of the sliding displacement member 370 in a forward tilt direction due to the weight of the ball resting on the ball guide portion 371b, when the protruding portion 378a begins to displace (displace in a forward tilt direction) within the allowable gap of the sliding displacement member 370, the protruding portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338.

In this case, resistance is applied in the opposite direction from the rear side of the partition plate portion 338 to the protruding portion 378a, suppressing the displacement of the protruding portion 378a, thereby suppressing the change in the posture of the sliding displacement member 370.

Next, we will explain the details of each operating unit 600, 700, and 800 that were not explained in detail. First, we will explain the rotating member 620 as a detailed explanation of the first operating unit 600.

Figure 81(a) is a front view of the rotating member 620, Figure 81(b) is a rear view of the rotating member 620, and Figure 81(c) is a side view of the rotating member 620 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXXIc in Figure 81(a).

Furthermore, FIG. 82 is a front view of the first operating unit 600, and FIG. 83 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600. In FIG. 82 and FIG. 83, the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which displaces along the guide elongated hole 616, is shown positioned at the right end of the displacement range.

As shown in Figures 81(a) to 81(c), the rotating member 620 is designed to have an asymmetric shape in relation to the load applied to the rotating member 620 when performing an operation. Details of the rotating member 620 and the action on the rotating member 620 are described below.

The main body 621 of the rotating member 620 has a first side 621a, a second side 621b, and a third side 621c as flat sides that receive a load when stopped. The first side 621a, the second side 621b, and the third side 621c are formed in order from closest to the cylindrical portion 622.

The first side surface 621a is a side surface formed on the tilting displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that can abut on the base end protrusion 617a that protrudes from the front cover member 612 toward the front side with a U-shaped cross section (the shape is designed in relation to the base end protrusion 617a). The displacement of the first side surface 621a is restricted by the base end protrusion 617a, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 45 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range).

The second side surface 621b is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that can abut on the tip side protrusion 617b that protrudes from the front cover member 612 toward the front side with a U-shaped cross section (the shape is designed in relation to the tip side protrusion 617b). The displacement of the second side surface 621b is restricted by the tip side protrusion 617b, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of the displaceable range).

The third side surface 621c is a side surface formed on the rising displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is formed in a shape that allows it to come into contact with the rectangular box portion 618, which is formed in a roughly rectangular box shape on the front side of the front cover member 612 (its shape is designed in relation to the rectangular box portion 618). The displacement of the third side surface 621c is restricted by the rectangular box portion 618, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the end position of its displaceable range).

In this way, at the displacement end of the rotating member 620, each side surface 621a to 621c of the rotating member 620 abuts against a corresponding portion of the front cover member 612, restricting the displacement. In particular, multiple abutment points are formed at the displacement end of the rising side of the rotating member 620.

The purpose of forming multiple contact points in this way is to distribute the rotational load received at the time of contact among multiple points, and to suppress deformation of the rotating member 620 in the front-to-rear direction by distributing the front-to-rear load that may occur on the rotating member 620 among multiple points.

Examples of loads in the forward and backward directions that may occur on the rotating member 620 include a load in the forward direction caused by the weight of the second decorative rotating member 660, and a torsional load caused by inertia when the second decorative rotating member 660 stops rotating (a load in the rotational direction around the longitudinal axis of the rotating member 620).

In particular, since the load in the forward falling direction is a load in the forward tilt direction with the tubular portion 622 as the fulcrum, by taking the force moment into consideration, the load generated at the abutment position where the load is received becomes smaller as the abutment position is farther away from the tubular portion 622. With the aim of reducing the load generated at the abutment position, the second side surface 621b and the third side surface 621c are formed at positions away from the tubular portion 622.

The main body 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a recessed portion 621d formed in a direction retracting from the driving motor 631 to avoid interference with the driving motor 631, and a thickened portion 621e formed by increasing the thickness of the recessed portion 621d and including the range that abuts against the base end protrusion 617a as a rotating portion centered on the cylindrical portion 622.

The base end of the rotating member 620 is narrowed by the recess 621d, so there is a possibility that it may break due to impact load without any countermeasures. However, the thickened portion 621e offsets the effect of the recess 621d on strength. This makes it easier to avoid breakage of the rotating member 620.

Furthermore, the thickened portion 621e is formed in a range that includes a portion that can come into contact with the base end protrusion 617a, thereby improving the durability of the rotating member 620 against impact loads that may occur between the rotating member 620 and the base end protrusion 617a.

Figure 84 is a front view of the first operating unit 600, and Figure 85 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600. Figures 84 and 85 show the state in which the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1.

The extension portion 634b is formed with a width (circumferential length) that is three or more times longer than the width of the detection sensor KS1 when viewed from the rear. Here, making the width of the extension portion 634b sufficiently long has a structural purpose in addition to the purpose of using it for detection.

In other words, in this embodiment, the supported member 640 is connected to the front side of the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, and the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged in front of the supported member 640. Therefore, a load can be applied to the rotating member 620 in the forward falling direction. If no countermeasure is taken, the rotating member 620 may bend and deform in the front-to-rear direction, which may cause malfunction.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the extension 634b, which is disposed opposite the back surface of the fixed means 610, is formed in a wide shape behind the cylindrical portion 634a connected to the rotating member 620. This allows the load applied from the extension 634b to the fixed means 610 via the cylindrical portion 634a in the forward tilt direction of the rotating member 620 to be received over a wide angle range of the arc-shaped hole 613d (a large area over which the load is generated can be ensured). This reduces the load received per unit area, making it possible to prevent damage to the extension 634b while suppressing the forward tilt displacement of the rotating member 620.

In this embodiment, while a structural advantage can be achieved by ensuring a long width of the extension portion 634b, the structure is designed so that even in a control mode in which the drive of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction is stopped when the end of the extension portion 634b is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 84), the rotating member 620 reaches the terminal position on the initial position side (see FIG. 40) due to a load such as inertia.

For example, first, the inertial force of each component is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to a terminal position on the initial position side. Not only the inertial force associated with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 itself, but also the inertial force associated with the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 rotated clockwise around the axis O1 as viewed from behind is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to a terminal position on the initial position side (a direction that rotates the rotating member 620 counterclockwise as viewed from behind).

For example, secondly, the center of gravity of the front rotating member 652 (which in this embodiment is the same as the center of the protruding decorative portion 652b) that is arranged to operate integrally with the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a that constitute the gear mechanism via the intermediate gear 644 is positioned at a position away from the vertical position of the axis O1 that serves as the rotation axis of the gear teeth 654a to the left and right.

Therefore, the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in a direction that rotates the gear teeth 654a. In this embodiment, the gear teeth 654a are subjected to a load in a direction that rotates counterclockwise when viewed from behind due to the weight of the front rotating member 652.

This load is transmitted in sequence to the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth portion 625, and a load in the direction of rotation counterclockwise in rear view is applied to the rotating member 620 via the gear teeth portion 625. In other words, as a load different from the inertia of the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, a load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in a direction that displaces the rotating member 620 to the terminal position on the initial position side.

In this way, due to the inertial load acting on the rotating member 620 and the load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652, a load that rotates the rotating member 620 is generated even after the power supply to the drive motor 631 is cut off.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 85, even if the drive motor 631 is controlled to be de-energized when the extension portion 634b is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 and the rotating member 620 has not yet reached the displacement end position, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 continues due to the above-mentioned load, and the rotating member 620 can be caused to reach the displacement end position on the initial position side (see FIG. 40).

Figures 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b) and 88 are rear views of the guide slot 616, the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the detection sensor KS1 and the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634.

Figures 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b) and 88 show in chronological order the rotational movement of the transmission gear cam 634 starting from the performance standby state of the first operating unit 600.

Note that Figure 86(a) corresponds to the performance standby state of the first operating unit 600, Figure 86(b) corresponds to the state shown in Figure 85, Figure 87(a) corresponds to the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600, Figure 87(b) corresponds to the state shown in Figure 83, and Figure 88 corresponds to the extended state of the first operating unit 600.

The arrangement of the electrical wiring passing through the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will now be described. The electrical wiring 618d, the end of which is fixed to a connector 618c arranged on a board housed in the rectangular box portion 618, is arranged to pass through the opening C2a and enter the second decorative rotating member 660.

The electrical wiring 618d is arranged to bypass the underside of the partition 619 that protrudes from the front cover member 612 toward the base member 611 (see FIG. 39) and enter the opening C2a. The electrical wiring 618b is configured with a length that takes into account the movement trajectory of the dish-shaped cover portion C2 that has the opening C2a, and is arranged between the connector 618c and the opening C2a so that it bends under its own weight.

The partition 619 has pillars 619a formed at both the top and bottom ends, and a plate-like portion 619b that protrudes in a long plate shape to connect the pillars 619a. The pillars 619a and the plate portion 619b abut against the front side of the base member 611.

A female screw is formed on the inside of the columnar portion 619a, and a fastening screw is screwed through an opening drilled in the base member 611 in an arrangement corresponding to the columnar portion 619a, thereby fastening and fixing the base member 611 and the front cover member 612. In other words, the partition portion 619 not only serves to restrict the position of the electrical wiring 618d, but also ensures the rigidity of the base member 611 and the front cover member 612.

Next, the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d will be described, with particular attention paid to the movement of the opening C2a. First, the description will focus on the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which begins in Figure 86(a). The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is downwardly displaced in the time sequence of Figures 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and 88.

When moving from the performance standby state (see FIG. 86(a)) to the state where the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 86(b)), the vertical arrangement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 does not change significantly, but the arrangement of the opening C2a is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from behind.

This allows the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a to be moved away from the partition 619 before the dish-shaped lid portion C2 begins to move downward in earnest, thereby preventing the electrical wiring 618d from becoming pinched between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition 619 during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

In particular, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 are closest to each other (see FIG. 87(b)), the opening C2a is oriented so as to face the side (downward) where the electrical wiring 618d is retracted from the partition portion 619.

This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from being pinched between the partition 619, so even if the dish-shaped lid C2 is designed to be positioned close to the partition 619, it is possible to avoid problems such as the electrical wiring 618d being broken.

As shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the orientation of the opening C2a is continuously rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the rear. At the lower displacement end of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the opening C2a faces the opposite side (lower side) of the connector 618c, and is intentionally configured so that downward slack occurs in the electrical wiring 618d. This makes it possible to ensure the length of the electrical wiring 618d itself while avoiding unnecessary slack in the electrical wiring at the displacement end position (for example, flapping due to slack in the front-to-rear direction).

Furthermore, the length of the electrical wiring 618d is designed to be long enough so that it does not come into contact with the extension portion 634b during operation of the first operating unit 600. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the electrical wiring 618d comes into contact with the extension portion 634b and receives a load, even without providing a partition between the extension portion 634b and the electrical wiring 618d.

In this embodiment, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is closest to the transmission gear cam 634 (see Figure 88), the extension portion 634b is positioned away from the connector 618c (positioned on the opposite side of the connector 618c with respect to the rotation axis of the transmission gear cam 634 as the reference), so a large area can be secured for positioning the electrical wiring 618d while avoiding contact with the extension portion 634b, thereby improving the design freedom of the length of the electrical wiring 618d.

Next, the following description focuses on the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which begins in Figure 88. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is upwardly displaced in the time sequence of Figure 88, Figure 87(b), Figure 87(a), Figure 86(b), and Figure 86(a).

When the dish-shaped lid C2 is displaced upward, the opening C2a does not face the partition 619 from the lower end position (see FIG. 88) until the dish-shaped lid C2 is closest to the partition 619, but faces downward. This allows the dish-shaped lid C2 to be displaced upward while ensuring downward slack in the electrical wiring 618d.

Even after the dish-shaped lid portion C2 passes the lower end of the partition portion 619, the opening C2a rotates gradually while still maintaining its downward facing state (the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a is aligned along the longitudinal direction of the partition portion 619) (see FIG. 87(a)).

Then, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is sufficiently separated from the partition portion 619, the opening C2a is rotated to a position facing the partition portion 619 (see Figures 86(a) and 86(b)), and the electrical wiring 618d is positioned so as to enter (be housed) between the partition portion 619 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from being broken by sandwiching it between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619, and also reduces the load on the electrical wiring 618d caused by the vertical displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

In other words, the position of the opening C2a is changed in accordance with the relative position of the partition 619 and the dish-shaped lid C2, thereby restricting the position of the electrical wiring 618d and preventing the electrical wiring 618d from being positioned between the dish-shaped lid C2 and the partition 619 when the gap between the dish-shaped lid C2 and the partition 619 becomes narrow, thereby suppressing the load on the electrical wiring 618d.

As a result, compared to when the electrical wiring 618d is arranged at an arbitrary position, the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be designed to be arranged close to each other, improving the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

In addition, the restriction on the placement of the electrical wiring 618d is achieved not by using a separate member such as a cable tie, but by the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2. As described above, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is a member used to fasten and fix the first decorative rotating member 650 to the main body member 651, but it is also used to restrict the placement of the electrical wiring 618d.

This eliminates the need for a dedicated member such as a cable tie to bundle the electrical wiring 618d. Furthermore, unlike cable ties, the orientation of the opening C2a can be changed so that the electrical wiring 618d can be placed on the appropriate side corresponding to the placement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, making it easier to avoid situations where the electrical wiring 618d becomes taut or bent.

In this embodiment, the opening C2a is formed as a sector-shaped opening with a central angle of approximately 110. Because the opening C2a is formed as a wide opening, the degree of freedom in the shape adopted for the portion (connection terminal, etc.) of the electrical wiring 618d that passes through the opening C2a can be improved.

Next, we will explain the arrangement structure of the electrical wiring 618d, which is arranged on the front side of the opening C2a. Figure 89 is a front perspective view of the first decorative rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660.

In Figure 89, only the parts necessary for explanation are shown, and the other parts are omitted. That is, the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the electric decoration board 662 and the wiring retaining plate 663 of the second decorative rotating member 660 are shown with solid lines, and to facilitate understanding, the box-shaped member 661 is shown with imaginary lines so that the inside can be seen.

In addition, Fig. 89 shows an example of the arrangement of electrical wiring 618d, and shows the dish-shaped lid portion C2 having an opening C2a through which the electrical wiring 618d is inserted. The electrical wiring 618d is shown branching between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 into a wiring connected to a terminal of the illumination board 653 (see Fig. 41) and a wiring connected to a terminal of the illumination board 662.

As shown in FIG. 89, the wiring retaining plate 663 is a disk-shaped member with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and includes a wiring insertion slot 663a that is drilled in the shape of a long hole through which the electrical wiring 618d can be inserted, and a pair of insertion holes 663b that are drilled on both sides of the insertion slot 663a as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, so that the wiring retaining plate 663 can prevent the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 (see FIG. 39) from falling off the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 is screwed into the female threads formed on the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. This causes the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a to be fixed together.

In this way, the wiring retaining plate 663 has both the function of preventing the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 from falling off and the function of fixing the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a together. In addition, the wiring retaining plate 663 has the function of temporarily retaining the electrical wiring 618d.

As shown in FIG. 89, the electrical wiring 618d passes through the inside of the long wiring insertion hole 663a of the wiring retaining plate 663, and is temporarily held in a manner that suppresses displacement by being clamped. In this embodiment, the rotational movement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not an operation of one or more rotations, but an operation of less than half a rotation (a rotational movement of about 135 degrees) performed in a reciprocating direction, so that the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to rotate multiple times and not cause a situation in which the electrical wiring 618d is twisted off.

The load (torsional load) applied to the electrical wiring 618d when the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates is thought to be large near the wiring insertion slot 663a where twisting is likely to occur, but in this embodiment, the wiring insertion slot 663a is formed in a long hole shape, and the electrical wiring 618d is temporarily held by being clamped in the wiring insertion slot 663a, so displacement of the electrical wiring 618d within the long hole shape is permitted.

Therefore, even if an overload in the torsional direction occurs in the electrical wiring 618d, the load can be released by displacing the electrical wiring 618d within the long wiring insertion hole 663a. This improves the durability of the electrical wiring 618d.

The relationship between the twist direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the direction of the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will be described. Since the main body member 651 rotates integrally with the rotational movement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 is twisted in the rotational direction of the main body member 651. In other words, a counterclockwise twist occurs when viewed from behind as the rotating member 620 rotates and displaces in the tilting direction.

As the pivoting member 620 is pivoted in the tilting direction, the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is also pivoted counterclockwise when viewed from the rear, thereby reducing the load on the electrical wiring 618d caused by twisting (improving the durability of the electrical wiring 618d).

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 rotates while being displaced vertically along the guide slot 616. Here, in the time series from Figure 86(a) to Figure 88, the electrical wiring 618d changes from a state in which there is a large amount of slack between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 to a state in which there is a small amount of slack.

Correspondingly, the rotation of the illumination board 662 is configured as an operation that changes the state of the electrical wiring 618d from a state in which the terminal on the illumination board 662 side of the electrical wiring 618d is located on the rear side (main body member 651 side) (see FIG. 89) to a state in which the terminal is located on the front side (wire receiving member 655 side). Therefore, the state of the electrical wiring 618d can be changed in a manner that pulls it toward the front side.

That is, in the time sequence from Figure 86 (a) to Figure 88, the state of the electrical wiring 618d inside the main body member 651 changes from a state in which the electrical wiring 618d is largely loose (a state in which the terminal on the side of the electrical wiring board 662 is located on the rear side) to a state in which the electrical wiring 618d is little loose (a state in which the terminal on the side of the electrical wiring board 662 is located on the front side).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the relationship between the amount of slack is reversed (balanced) between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the relationship inside the main body member 651. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d as the first operating unit 600 operates.

The relationship between the twist direction of the electrical wiring 618d in the portion disposed inside the main body member 651 and the twist direction of the electrical wiring 618d in the portion disposed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 will be explained.

In the time sequence of operations shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 is twisted counterclockwise when viewed from behind, while the portion of the electrical wiring 618d arranged between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 is twisted in the rotational direction of the illumination board 662 (counterclockwise when viewed from below in Figure 89 (viewed from the direction looking at the insertion hole 663b from the illumination board 662 side)). In other words, they are twisted in opposite directions.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring 618d is designed to be twisted to a minimum when the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state, and twisted to a maximum when the electrical wiring 618d is in an extended state.

As a result, in a state where a large amount of slack in the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a is unlikely to cause problems (standby state, see FIG. 86(a)), the electrical wiring 618d is deliberately left slack to reduce the load on the electrical wiring 618d, while in a state where it is preferable to reduce the slack in the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a (extended state, see FIG. 88), the twisting caused by the rotational movement of the main body member 651, the wiring receiving member 655, and the illumination board 662 is maximized to suppress slack in the electrical wiring 618d (suppress the displacement of the electrical wiring 618d).

In this way, as a means of improving the durability of the electrical wiring 618d, it is configured to switch between a state in which twisting is minimized and sufficient slack is generated, and a state in which twisting reduces slack and avoids contact between the surrounding components (e.g., extension portion 634b) and the electrical wiring 618d.

As another embodiment, in the time series of operations shown in Figures 86(a) to 88, the rotation direction of the illumination board 662 may be configured in the opposite direction (clockwise when viewed from below in Figure 89 (viewed from the direction looking at the insertion hole 663b from the illumination board 662 side)). In this case, the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d due to the rotational operation of the illumination board 662 are the same, so the twisting deformation of the electrical wiring 618d can be offset.

Next, the characteristics of the protruding decorative portion 652b in the operation of the first operating unit 600 will be described. Figures 90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b) and 92 are schematic front views showing the guide slot 616, the rectangular box portion 618 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

In Figures 90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b) and 92, the outer shapes of the guide slot 616 and rectangular box section 618 are illustrated diagrammatically, and the displacement of the protruding decorative section 652b from the standby state of the first operating unit 600 is illustrated in chronological order, with the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 omitted for ease of understanding.

Figure 90(a) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the standby state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 40), Figure 90(b) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the state in which the widthwise end of the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see Figure 84), Figure 91(a) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the intermediate operating state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 43), Figure 91(b) illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 displaced along the guide elongated hole 616 is positioned at the right end of the displacement range (see Figure 82), and Figure 92 illustrates an arrangement corresponding to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see Figure 45).

In the performance standby state (see FIG. 90(a)), the overhanging decorative portion 652b is positioned to the right so that it overlaps with the rectangular box portion 618 when viewed from above. This allows the overhanging decorative portion 652b to be positioned outside the player's field of vision (see FIG. 28). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is positioned behind the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2) in the performance standby state, which reduces the visibility of the overhanging decorative portion 652b since the line of sight is easily blocked by the outer edge member 73.

On the other hand, if the overhang decorative portion 652b is displaced downward while being positioned to the right so as to overlap with the rectangular box portion 618 when viewed from above, the overhang decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 will collide, causing a malfunction.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the posture of the overhanging decorative part 652b is changed prior to or in conjunction with the downward displacement of the overhanging decorative part 652b (see Figures 90(b) and 91(a)). This posture change occurs as a rotational movement in a direction away from the rectangular box part 618 (diagonally upward and left when viewed from the front, a rotational direction about the axis O1), making it easier to avoid collision between the overhanging decorative part 652b and the rectangular box part 618.

In this embodiment, this change in posture causes the protruding decorative portion 652b to retreat from the upper position of the rectangular box portion 618 (see Figure 91 (a)), after which the full downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the protruding decorative portion 652b begins.

The downward displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b occurs in conjunction with the downward displacement of the axis O1. During the downward displacement, the axis O1 is displaced in a direction (to the right) approaching the rectangular box part 618 along the shape of the guide long hole 616 (see Figure 91 (b)), and therefore there is a possibility that the protruding decorative part 652b may collide with the rectangular box part 618.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rectangular box portion 618 has a recessed portion 618a formed on the left side surface that is recessed along the shape of the guide elongated hole 616. In particular, the recessed portion 618a is formed at the location where the guide elongated hole 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are closest to each other, that is, at a position to the right of the right end portion of the guide elongated hole 616. In this way, the design of the shape of the rectangular box portion 618 is considered with one objective in mind, which is to avoid collision between the front rotating member 652 and the rectangular box portion 618.

Furthermore, as the axis O1 is displaced downward, the posture of the overhanging decorative part 652b continues to change, so that the overhanging decorative part 652b can be displaced in a direction retracting from the rectangular box part 618. In this embodiment, when displacing from FIG. 91(a) to FIG. 91(b), the overhanging decorative part 652b is designed so that its leftward displacement dimension XL1 (retraction distance) is equal to or greater than the rightward displacement dimension XR1 of the axis O1. This makes it possible to avoid collision between the overhanging decorative part 652b and the rectangular box part 618.

In the state shown in Figures 91(a) and 91(b), the left-right displacement of axis O1 and the left-right displacement caused by the change in posture of the protruding decorative part 652b are in opposite directions and cancel each other out, so the left-right displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b is kept small.

In contrast, in the states shown in Figures 91(b) to 92, the left-right displacement of axis O1 and the left-right displacement caused by the change in posture of the protruding decorative part 652b are in the same direction on the left and right, so that the displacements are superimposed, resulting in a larger amount of left-right displacement of the protruding decorative part 652b.

As a result, even though the posture change of the protruding decorative part 652b always involves a rotational movement around the axis O1, it appears to the player that the protruding decorative part 652b is being guided to displace up and down with a small left-right displacement (narrow displacement trajectory) from Figure 90(a) to Figure 91(b), and to make a large left-right displacement from Figure 91(b) to Figure 92.

Therefore, it is possible to create a difference between the structure (component shape) that guides the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b and the structure that is expected from the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b as seen by the player. This makes it possible to create a surprising effect.

In other words, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be made to appear to the player as if the overhanging decorative portion 652b were popping out from the right side of the rectangular box portion 618 to the left. Therefore, in an area that is narrow and where left-right displacement would be insufficient, such as the left and right sides of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 30), the player can be made to see an unexpected displacement popping out to the left and right, thereby increasing the attention to the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

For convenience, the left-right displacement of axis O1 is compared with the left-right displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, axis O1 is a rotation axis that is part of the configuration of the first operating unit 600, so the left-right displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, which is configured to be rotatable around this rotation axis, has the same meaning as the left-right displacement of axis O1. Therefore, the above explanation may be understood as a comparison between the left-right displacement of dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the left-right displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b.

Figure 93 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit 600 taken along line XCIII-XCIII in Figure 85. Figure 93 shows a cross-sectional view in a plane passing through axis O1 and the rotation axis of the intermediate gear 644. As shown in Figure 93, the rear rotating member 654 is disposed in the bottomed cylindrical portion 645 from the front side, while the intermediate gear 644 is disposed in the main body portion 641 from the rear side, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 mesh at the location where the opening 645a is formed and communicates.

As shown in FIG. 93, the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and the inner diameter of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is smaller than the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663, so that the axial displacement of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 can be restricted by the wiring retaining plate 663.

In this embodiment, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is disposed with a small gap between the step formed in the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a at the axial base end side (upper side in FIG. 93) and the wire retaining plate 663. This prevents the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 from falling off and stabilizes the positioning of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 in the central axial direction of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a.

The fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 is screwed into the female threads formed on the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. This causes the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a to be fixed together.

As shown in Figure 93, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned rearward compared to the second decorative rotating member 660, and is therefore positioned closer to the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) in the front-to-rear direction compared to the second decorative rotating member 660. In other words, it is positioned closer to the opening 511a (see Figure 26) in which the third pattern display device 81 is positioned in the front-to-rear direction.

As a result, compared to when the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b are positioned at a distance, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned so as to overlap the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 29), making it easier to create the illusion that the display area is being expanded to the right to the player.

In particular, when the protruding decorative portion 652b and the second decorative rotating member 660 are viewed simultaneously (see, for example, FIG. 29), the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned away from the third pattern display device 81 toward the front and is easily viewed independently of the display of the third pattern display device. This, in turn, accentuates the effect of making the protruding decorative portion 652b, which is positioned close to the third pattern display device 81 from the front side, appear to the player as part of the display (creating the illusion).

In other words, by providing one particularly conspicuous object (corresponding to the second decorative rotating member 660), the degree of distinction of the other components (corresponding to the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b) is reduced. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

The protruding decorative portion 652b is made from hard resin and its shape cannot be changed during construction. However, the appearance (color, brightness, etc.) of the protruding decorative portion 652b can be changed by controlling the light emission mode (color, brightness, etc.) of the light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board 653.

Therefore, by changing the light emission mode of the light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board 653 to match the video displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the protruding decorative part 652b is positioned so as to overlap with the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 29), making it easier to create the illusion that the display area is being expanded to the right for the player.

Next, the second operating unit 700 will be described in detail. Figure 94 is a front view of the second operating unit 700 in the extended state, and Figure 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along line XCV-XCV in Figure 94.

As described above, the second operating unit 700 is configured so that the vertical displacement and the forward/backward displacement occur synchronously during the sliding displacement (sliding displacement in the forward/backward direction at an angle), and is designed so that the displacement occurs smoothly so that the forward/backward displacement is not overly noticeable.

For example, in the sliding displacement of the second operating unit 700, the obliquely tilted displacement in the forward and backward directions is not composed of a single displacement, but is composed of a combination of a displacement in the up-down direction and a displacement in the forward and backward directions.

That is, first, the lifting plate member 740 connected to the pivot arm member 720 is guided by the metal bar 702 at the left end so as to move up and down in the longitudinal direction (up and down direction) of the metal bar 702. At the left end, the left side rear plate member 750 and the blind decorative member 768 are also arranged in front and behind the lifting plate member 740, preventing the lifting plate member 740 from freely moving in the front and back direction. This makes it possible to restrict the displacement direction of the lifting plate member 740 to the up and down direction.

The right side of the lifting plate member 740 is supported by the pivot arm member 720. The right end of the lifting plate member 740 is not supported by a fixed member (a member fixed to the rear case 510), but is indirectly supported by a fixed member (upper front inclined portions 714, 751 and receiving inclined portion 762) via the performance device 780 (see FIG. 54). This prevents the right end of the lifting plate member 740 from freely displacing in the front-to-rear direction, and limits the displacement direction of the lifting plate member 740 to the up-down direction.

The performance device 780 supported by the lifting plate member 740 is guided by the cylindrical portion 744 (see FIG. 50) so as to be displaced in the front-to-rear direction. In this way, to achieve a diagonally inclined sliding displacement in the front-to-rear direction, the guidance of the displacement of the lifting plate member 740 and performance device 780 as components is configured separately for the direction of gravity and the horizontal direction.

This makes it easier to configure the system to maintain low displacement resistance compared to a configuration that guides the system in the forward and backward directions at an angle.

The extension state of the second operating unit 700 illustrated in Figures 94 and 95 is a state in which it is possible to control the second operating unit 700 to perform a displacement (see Figure 57) that switches the state of the covering member 787. That is, in this embodiment, in other extension states (for example, the performance standby state of the second operating unit 700 (see Figure 28) or the intermediate performance state of the second operating unit 700 (see Figure 33)), the second operating unit 700 is controlled so as not to perform a displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787.

By controlling in this manner, even if the right side front plate member 710 and the left side rear plate member 750 are configured to be disposed at positions that overlap with the left and right positions reached by the left and right ends of the covering member 787 when a displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is performed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the covering member 787 collides with the right side front plate member 710 or the left side rear plate member 750. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the placement of the right side front plate member 710 and the left side rear plate member 750.

The following describes the ingenuity of the configuration of the performance device 780 in relation to the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787. First, the drive motor 782 (see FIG. 56) that generates the driving force for the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is located at the left-right center position of the performance device 780 (a position where the center is located directly above the center of the insertion tube portion 773 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 744).

This not only prevents the attitude of the performance device 780 from tilting left or right due to the weight of the drive motor 782, but also stabilizes the left-right balance of the driving force generated by the drive motor 782.

Furthermore, in the extended state (see FIG. 95) of the second operating unit 700 capable of performing a displacement to switch the state of the covering member 787, the left-right position of the cylindrical fastening portion 724 of the pivoting arm member 720 supporting the lifting plate member 740 is set to be equal to the left-right center position of the performance device 780 or to the right side.

In this way, while the support for the right side of the lifting plate member 740 is provided only by the pivoting arm member 720, which allows the cylindrical fastened portion 724 as a support position to be displaced in the left-right direction, when it is expected that the position or posture of the performance device 780 is likely to change, that is, when a displacement is made to switch the state of the covering member 787, the position of the cylindrical fastened portion 724 is set to be equal to the left-right center position of the performance device 780 or to a position to the right, thereby stabilizing the position or posture of the performance device 780.

Note that the control to execute the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is performed only when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state, but after the state of the covering member 787 has been switched, it is possible to control the state of the second operating unit 700 to change to a performance standby state or an intermediate performance state.

That is, for example, in order to switch the state of the covering member 787 from the standby state of the second operating unit 700 and to place the second operating unit 700 in an intermediate performance state, the second operating unit 700 is first placed in an extended state, a displacement is performed to switch the state of the covering member 787, and then the second operating unit 700 is controlled to be displaced downward to change to the intermediate performance state.

As shown in FIG. 95, the light diffusion member 778b is formed long in the left-right direction so that it overlaps with the inner ends of a pair of front support members 760 when viewed in the front-to-rear direction. This makes it possible to hide the rotating cylinder portion 774e (see FIG. 54) supported by the front support members 760 from being seen by the player, thereby preventing the player from understanding that the presentation device 780 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction by understanding the position and shape of the rotating cylinder portion 774e.

Furthermore, when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state, the light diffusion member 778b is seen overlapping in a left-right line with the fixedly positioned three-dimensional decorative portion 768a when viewed from the front (see FIG. 94). In this state, the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a are arranged along the lower edge of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front, across the left-right length of the lower edge.

A board with an LED fixed to the front side is disposed on the back side of the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a, and the light emitted from the corresponding LED can be used to create a light-emitting effect of the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a. This light-emitting effect can make the bottom edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 appear to be separated by light, or make the bottom edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 appear to be brightened by light.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, the light diffusion member 778b can be configured to function both as a member that hides the rotating cylinder portion 774e (see FIG. 54) and as a member that performs a light-emitting effect in conjunction with the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a.

As shown in FIG. 95, the horizontal member 742 is provided with a covering cover 742a that is provided behind the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a and covers the area (left side area) away from the rear of the light diffusion member 778b with a space on the front side.

The covering cover 742a is a member for concealment formed across the vertical width of the horizontal member 742, and is arranged so that electrical wiring can be passed through the gap between the covering cover 742a and the horizontal member 742. That is, the electrical wiring for supplying electricity to the performance device 780 is guided from the rear of the concealing decorative member 768 through the gap between the covering cover 742a and the horizontal member 742 to the performance device 780 side, and is connected to the drive motor 782, the illumination board 778a, the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56), etc.

At this time, in front of the electrical wiring, not only the covering cover 742a but also the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative part 768a are arranged overlapping each other, which is a configuration that easily blocks the player's line of sight and makes it easier to prevent the electrical wiring from being visible to the player.

In other words, by placing the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a, which are originally arranged for light production, in front of the path of the electrical wiring to function as a screen for the electrical wiring, the size of the covering cover 742a required to screen the electrical wiring can be kept to a minimum.

In addition, since the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a is fixed in position, it does not overlap the horizontal member 742 in the front-to-back direction when in the standby state (see FIG. 31) or in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), and therefore cannot be used to conceal electrical wiring.

Taking this into consideration, in this embodiment, the formation range of the horizontal member 742 is set to the range outside the light diffusion member 778b when viewed from the front. This makes it possible to conceal the electrical wiring with the horizontal member 742 and the light diffusion member 778, so that the electrical wiring can be prevented from being seen by the player regardless of the state of the second operating unit 700 (standby state, intermediate state, extended state).

96 and 97 are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down inversion member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear plate member 784, and the axial rotation member 785. FIG. 96 illustrates the up-down inversion member 781 in a horizontal arrangement state in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same straight line extending in the left-right direction, and FIG. 97 illustrates the up-down inversion member 781 in an inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(c)).

The pair of intermediate arm members 783 are not formed in the same shape, but have curved portions 783d that are curved upward from the lower surface when the inverted member 781 is horizontally disposed. The curved portions 783d are curved so as to protrude in a direction retracting from the drive gear 782a in order to avoid collision between the intermediate arm members 783 and the drive gear 782a when the inverted member 781 is vertically disposed.

Figure 98 is a front perspective view of the lift-and-reverse performance device 770. In Figure 98, the outer shape of the covering member 787 is shown in imaginary lines so that the inside can be seen through the covering member.

As shown in FIG. 98, the magnet Mg is placed near both the left and right ends of the pair of covering members 787, rather than on the side where the pair of covering members 787 are placed close to each other. Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg does not act to directly combine the covering members 787 together, but acts independently on each of the pair of covering members 787.

This makes it possible to prevent, for example, a malfunction of one covering member 787 from causing the other covering member 787 to malfunction as well.

In addition, for example, when the pair of covering members 787 start to move apart in the left-right direction, it is possible to prevent magnetic force from acting in the opposite direction to the left-right displacement. In other words, when the up-down inversion member 781 starts to rotate from the upright vertical position, it is possible to delay the timing at which the magnetic force acts.

This makes it possible to suppress the change in the load applied to the covering members 787 by the magnets Mg when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move apart in the left-right direction, so that it is easier to avoid situations in which the covering members 787 vibrate due to a sudden change in magnetic force or the displacement becomes unstable, causing malfunctions, when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move apart in the left-right direction, compared to when it is necessary to remove the magnet's adhesion when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move apart in the left-right direction.

As shown in Figure 98, the magnets Mg are arranged on opposite sides in the left and right directions, and the effect of this will be explained below. The rotational position stabilization parts 785f, to which the metal screws that come into contact with the magnets Mg and are loaded with magnetic force are fixed, are arranged on the same side in the front-to-back direction (the front side when the up-down inversion member 781 is in the upright vertical position, see Figure 55). Therefore, the direction of the load generated by the magnets Mg in relation to the metal screws is the same in the front-to-back direction on both the left and right sides.

In more detail, for example, when the upside-down member 781 changes from an upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)) to an inverted vertical position (see FIG. 59(c)), the covering member 787 on the left side as viewed from the front rotates in the forward direction, so that the metal screw that is located close to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side) is displaced forward, resulting in a forward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force, while the covering member 787 on the right side as viewed from the front rotates in the backward direction, so that the metal screw that is located close to the magnet Mg (located on the lower side) is displaced forward, resulting in a forward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force.

For example, when the upside-down member 781 changes from an inverted vertical position (see FIG. 59(c)) to an upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)), the covering member 787 on the left side as viewed from the front rotates backwards, so that the metal screw that is located close to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side) is displaced backwards, resulting in a rearward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force, while the covering member 787 on the right side as viewed from the front rotates forwards, so that the metal screw that is located close to the magnet Mg (located on the lower side) is displaced backwards, resulting in a rearward load on the magnet Mg as a reaction to the adhesive force.

In this way, the direction of the load generated by the magnet Mg between the rotating covering member 787 and the main body member 771 and linear plate member 784 that support the covering member 787 while maintaining its posture is configured to be the same on both the left and right sides.

Here, when a load is generated in the opposite front-to-back direction on both the left and right sides (for example, when the magnet Mg on the left side is placed in a lower position, so that the magnets Mg on both the left and right sides are placed in a lower position, and the design is changed so that the rotational position stabilization portion 785f of the left axial rotation member 785 is placed on the rear side of the magnet Mg in the upright vertical position), the mode of displacement given to the lifting and reversing performance device 770 by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled away from their adhering state becomes a mode in which the lifting and reversing performance device 770 rotates on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.

In this case, the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is likely to vibrate in the rotational direction on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction. In particular, in a configuration like this embodiment, in which the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 96) elastically deforms in the process of removing the magnet Mg from its attraction, and the covering member 787 is vigorously rotated using the elastic recovery of the bevel tooth member 785c after the magnet Mg is removed from its attraction, it is expected that the lifting/reversing performance device 770 is likely to vibrate in the rotational direction on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, it may become difficult to release the load from the lifting/reversing performance device 770, which may result in damage to the lifting/reversing performance device 770 or a decrease in the durability of the lifting/reversing performance device 770. Therefore, measures are considered necessary to stabilize the displacement of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 over the long term.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled off from their adsorbed state, the direction of the load generated between the rotating covering member 787 and the main body member 771 and linear plate member 784 that support the covering member 787 while maintaining their posture is configured to be the same in the front-to-back direction on both the left and right sides, so that the mode of displacement given to the lifting and reversing performance device 770 by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled off from their adsorbed state can be a mode in which the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is displaced in the front-to-back direction.

This can be easily offset by the displacement of the lifting and reversing device 770 (displacement having a forward and backward component), and damage to the lifting and reversing device 770 caused by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled away from their adhering state can be avoided.

In the second operating unit 700, the direction of the sliding displacement of the performance device 780 (a direction having a vertical component and a front-to-rear component, i.e., a direction in a plane perpendicular to the left-to-right direction) is perpendicular to the direction in which the displacement starts (left-to-right direction) from a state in which the covering members 787 are arranged close to each other (a vertical arrangement state of the upside-down members 781).

This makes it easier to avoid one displacement occurring due to the inertia of the other displacement. For example, when a sliding displacement of the performance device 780 is performed, it makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the covering members 787 unintentionally start to displace from a state in which they are positioned close to each other (displacement in a direction away from each other).

Next, the details of the third operating unit 800 will be described again. First, the details of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described. Figure 99(a) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850, and Figure 99(b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850.

As shown in Figures 99(a) and 99(b), the intermediate arm member 850 has a characteristic shape in which the axial position of the long rod portion changes at the thickened portion 852.

As shown in FIG. 99(a), the thickened portion 852 is disposed opposite the tip rod portion 853 of the adjacent rotating member 850, and includes a base end reinforcing portion 852a disposed opposite the tip rod portion 853, and a recessed portion 852b formed by hollowing out the front side along the axial direction.

The base end reinforcement portion 852a is hollowed out in the same way as the recessed portion 852b, but the relative hollowing amount is small, and it is designed to have a large deformation resistance. This makes it possible to avoid excessive deformation even if it comes into contact with the tip rod portion 853, which is formed on the rotating tip side of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force during rotation is likely to be large.

The recessed portion 852b acts to weaken the deformation resistance of the elastic deformation of the thickened portion 852. This ensures the flexibility of the thickened portion 852 and improves the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

A curved portion 852c is formed on both short side surfaces of the thickened portion 852. The curved portion 852c is formed from a shape that can smoothly receive the curved portion 854d formed on the rotation base end side of the rotation transmission portion 854 formed on the end of the tip side rod portion 853 of the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in the combined state.

In this embodiment, the rotation direction of the intermediate arm members 850 when adjacent intermediate arm members 850 rotate to be positioned close to each other is reversed between the individual combined state (see FIG. 66(a)) and the combined state, so which of the short side surfaces of the intermediate arm members 850 is positioned close to the curved portion 854d depends on which combined state is configured.

On this premise, since the curved portion 852c is formed on both sides, it can smoothly accept the curved portion 854d in any combined state. This allows for a smooth transition to the combined state.

In addition, by designing the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d so that they can come into surface contact with each other, it is possible to prevent excessive load from being locally generated between the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d in the combined state, thereby improving the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

The third operating unit 800 is configured to be movable up and down by the lifting arm member 801, but the direction of the lifting and lowering displacement is not necessarily perpendicular to the direction in which the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834 start to move from the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the imaginary position line 832F recognized as the displacement start direction of the rotating member 834 is set in a different direction at 72 degree intervals, so that the displacement start direction of all the rotating members 834 cannot be perpendicular to the direction of the upward and downward displacement.

Therefore, due to the load and inertia that occur when the third operating unit 800 is raised and lowered, there is a possibility that an unintended rotational motion (integral rotational motion or switching rotational motion) may occur. We will explain the measures taken to prevent this malfunction.

Figure 100 is a schematic diagram of the third operating unit 800, which shows the displacement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850.

In FIG. 100, the imaginary position line 832F of the metal rod 832 is shown to include the imaginary position line 832F that extends downward in the individual combined state, and the imaginary position line 832F that has rotated counterclockwise in front view until the angle between the imaginary position line 832F and the longitudinal direction of the intermediate arm member 850 changes by 0.5 degrees.

In other words, in Figure 100, the angle θ51 is shown as 45 degrees, and the angle θ52 is shown as 44.5 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 100, the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to allow the rotating member 834 to slide along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 while suppressing the rotational movement of the rotating member 834 at the start of the switching rotation movement.

The change in angles θ51 and θ52 in FIG. 100 refers to the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 relative to the metal rod 832, and corresponds to the angle at which meshing rotation of the bevel tooth portions 834a and 854c (see FIG. 61) occurs.

Here, backlash (gap) is essential to keep the gear teeth meshing upright, and the rotational responsiveness changes depending on how large or small this gap is set. There are various options for setting the backlash, but in this embodiment, the backlash is set to 0.5 degrees.

In other words, before the angle θ51 in the combined state changes to angle θ52, the backlash (gap) is filled and meshing rotation does not begin. Meanwhile, the rotating tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 slides radially outward of the third operating unit 800 along the virtual position line 832F.

In other words, when the switching rotation operation from the combined state (individually combined state) begins, the rotational movement of the rotating member 834 is suppressed, and mainly sliding movement occurs along the metal rod 832.

Figure 101 is a schematic front view of the third operating unit 800. In explaining Figure 101, Figure 100 is referred to as appropriate. Figure 101 illustrates the third operating unit 800 in an integrated state, and illustrates the torque limiter 866 and magnet Mg2 that generate a resistance force against the displacement of the third operating unit 800.

Here, the rotating member 834 is configured not to rotate even if the inner rotating member 830 rotates slightly relative to the outer rotating member 840 (for example, a rotation of about 5 degrees (see FIG. 100)).

As a result, even in a configuration in which magnet Mg2 is used to maintain the combined state of multiple first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880 as in this embodiment, and an attractive force is generated in the circumferential direction, the displacement of the first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880 from the combined state can be limited to linear displacement, making it easier to maintain the combination due to the magnetic force of magnet Mg2.

In other words, when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate around the metal rod 832 at the start of displacement from the combined state, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in a direction perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic force, and therefore the magnetic force is likely to disappear. In contrast, in this embodiment, the displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 at the start of displacement from the combined state is only along the plane on which the five magnets Mg2 are arranged (displacement in the sliding direction along the metal rod 832), and therefore the combined state due to the magnetic force is easily maintained.

This makes it easier to maintain the combined state of the multiple first decorative members 870 and second decorative members 880 even if the inner rotating member 830 unintentionally rotates slightly (e.g., rotates about 5 degrees) due to the influence of an unintended load or the like.

As shown in FIG. 101, the torque limiter 866 is configured such that when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied, the connection is cut and a switching rotation DR1 occurs to reduce resistance (spin), and when the torque limiter 866 is configured such that when the torque limiter 866 is configured in the reverse direction, an idling rotation AR1 occurs to reduce resistance (spin). The torque limiter 866 is configured with a pair of opposite forward and reverse rotations.

In more detail, in this embodiment, the left torque limiter 866 is configured to generate a switching rotation DR1 in which resistance is generated until the applied load reaches an allowable value when the allowable value is exceeded, and to generate an idling rotation AR1 in which the load is idling when the left torque limiter 866 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front.

The right-side torque limiter 866 is configured to generate an idling rotation AR1 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, while it generates resistance in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front until the applied load reaches an allowable value, and generates a switching rotation DR1 in the idling direction when the allowable value is exceeded.

In this way, a set of torque limiters 866 function as safety clutches in different rotation directions, making it possible to perform switch rotation operations in both directions as described above.

Furthermore, when no load in the rotational direction that exceeds the allowable value is applied, resistance in both forward and reverse directions is applied to the outer rotating member 840 via the load response gear 865 (see FIG. 61) attached to the torque limiter 866, so that the rotational movement of the outer rotating member 840 that may occur due to unintended loads (the inertial force of vertical displacement or the impact force when the door is opened or closed) can be suppressed. Therefore, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 can be maintained by a set of torque limiters 866.

As shown in FIG. 101, the magnet Mg2 is fixed to one side of the second covering portion 885 in the width direction, and is arranged concentrically when the five second covering portions 885 are combined into a ring shape. The magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force between itself and the metal screw Nj2 fixed to the adjacent second covering portion 885 arranged in close proximity.

By configuring in this manner, compared to when magnets Mg2 are disposed on both sides of a specific second covering portion 885 in the width direction (i.e., when both second covering portions 885 disposed adjacent to a specific second covering portion 885 on both sides receive a biasing force from magnets Mg2 in a direction toward the specific second covering portion 885), it is possible to prevent the gaps between the second covering portions 885 in the combined state from becoming larger at positions away from the specific second covering portion 885, and to make the gaps between all adjacent second covering portions 885 uniform.

As described above, the displacement of the second decorative member 880 from the combined state is configured as a sliding movement radially outward, and by the time the rotational movement around the metal rod 832 begins, the two members have moved apart to such an extent that the combination caused by the magnetic force is released (see FIG. 100). Since the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 acts in a direction that shortens the circumference of the concentric circle in which the second decorative member 880 is aligned (in a direction toward the center of the concentric circle), it becomes a resistance force to the sliding movement radially outward of the second decorative member 880.

In addition, because this resistance force is generated with equal magnitude from each direction dividing 360 degrees into five equal parts, the load that the third operating unit 800 receives from the magnet Mg2 can be balanced. In other words, it is easier to stabilize the positioning of the third operating unit 800 compared to when the magnetic force Mg2 acts non-uniformly.

The shape of all five second decorative members 880 is the same, and the arrangement of the magnets Mg2 is also the same, so the front-to-back positions of each magnet Mg2 are the same. This makes it possible to prevent the magnetic force of the magnets Mg2 from applying a load having a front-to-back component to the second decorative members 880, making it easier to avoid a situation in which a magnetic force is generated in the front-to-back direction when starting to move from the combined state or just before reaching the combined state, causing the second decorative members 880 to vibrate in the front-to-back direction.

Figure 102 is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. In Figure 102, the arrangement state corresponding to the individual combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 is illustrated, and for ease of understanding, the intermediate arm member 850 is illustrated with imaginary lines, and the outer rotating member 840 arranged on the rear side can be seen.

As shown in FIG. 102, in this embodiment, the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to have at least one portion that restricts rotation in one direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 102), and in most cases, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted in two portions. The configuration for restricting the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described below.

First, there is the abutment protrusion 845 that protrudes radially outward from the outer circumferential surface of the main body 841 of the outer rotating member 840. The abutment protrusion 845 is formed in a shape that tapers radially outward at the intermediate angular position between the adjacent extension arms 842, and the inside is hollowed out in a direction parallel to the axial direction of the main body 841.

This abutment protrusion 845 is positioned opposite the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotational direction of the intermediate arm member 850 and is positioned so as to be able to abut against the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850, thereby preventing over-rotation of the intermediate arm member 850.

The thickened portion 852 has a reduced deformation resistance to elastic deformation due to the recessed portion 852b (see FIG. 99(a)). Similarly, the abutting protrusion 845 is hollowed out. As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced at high speed and the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 collides with the abutting protrusion 845, the load generated at that time can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the abutting protrusion 845 and the thickened portion 852, so that damage to the abutting protrusion 845 and the thickened portion 852 can be avoided.

The abutment protrusion 845 is not disposed at all intermediate angular positions of the extension arm 842, but is omitted at the angular position where the detectable portion 844 is formed. This shifts the positions of the abutment protrusion 845 and the detectable portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction, and the removal direction of the molding die for the outer rotating member 840 can be set to the axial direction of the main body 841. This makes it possible to simplify the design of the molding die.

Thus, in this embodiment, the formation of the abutment protrusion 845 is omitted in exchange for simplification of the design of the molding die, but in this embodiment, a base end side reinforcement portion 852a is formed in the thickened portion 852 as a second configuration for restricting the rotation of the rotating arm member 850.

The base end reinforcement portion 852a is arranged opposite the tip end rod portion 853 (see FIG. 99(a)) in the rotational direction of the adjacent pivot member 850 and is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the tip end rod portion 853 when it over-rotates, thereby preventing over-rotation of the intermediate arm member 850.

The base end reinforcement portion 852a is hollowed out in the same way as the recessed portion 852b, but the relative hollowing amount is small and designed to increase deformation resistance. This makes it possible to avoid excessive deformation even if it comes into contact with the rotating tip side of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force during rotation is likely to be large.

The curved portion 852c is designed to be able to come into surface contact with the curved portion 854d, which can prevent excessive load from being locally generated between the curved portions 852c and 854d in the combined state, thereby improving the durability of the intermediate arm member 850.

In this way, when the abutment protrusions 845 are arranged opposite each other, the displacement of the pivot arm member 850 is restricted from over-rotating by a configuration that allows the curved shaped portion 852c of adjacent pivot arm members 850 to abut against the curved shaped portion 854d and the base end reinforcement portion 852a of adjacent pivot arm members 850 to abut against the tip end rod portion 853 in addition to abutting against the abutment protrusions 845.

On the other hand, even if the abutment protrusion 845 is omitted, the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d of adjacent rotating arm members 850 can be abutted against each other, or the base end reinforcement portion 852a and the tip end rod portion 853 of adjacent rotating arm members 850 can be abutted against each other, thereby preventing over-rotation of the rotating arm members 850.

These abutment configurations are configured so that the five rotating arm members 850 are related to each other (arranged in a circular manner). Therefore, at first glance, it may seem as if the load at the time of abutment is concentrated because the formation of the abutment protrusion 845 in one location is omitted and there is little configuration that restricts rotation only for the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to that omitted location, but in reality, the interaction of the five rotating arm members 850 allows the load at the time of abutment to be distributed.

This makes it possible to prevent the durability of a single pivot arm member 850 (the pivot arm member 850 corresponding to the portion where the formation of the abutment protrusion 845 is omitted) from decreasing drastically.

Furthermore, the formation of the annular plate portion 846, which extends in an annular plate shape from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 841 on a single plane along the rear end of the abutting protrusion portion 845, is omitted in the area that overlaps with the detected portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction, similar to the abutting protrusion portion 845.

The omission of the annular plate portion 846 can be explained as a trade-off for making the design of the molding die easier, as with the omission of the abutment protrusion portion 845 described above, but the effect of the annular plate portion 846 is realized by the adjacent pivot arm member 850 (the structure supporting it) even in the area where the annular plate portion 846 is omitted.

That is, the effect of the annular plate portion 846 can be explained as correcting the misalignment of the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850. That is, even if the position of the tip of the rotating arm member 850 is unintentionally misaligned front-rear when the rotating arm member 850 is displaced radially outward (see FIG. 65(a)) from the combined state (see FIG. 64(a)) and returns to the combined state, the rear side surface of the base end rod portion 851 (see FIG. 99(b)) is arranged opposite the annular plate portion 846 and is capable of abutting against it, so that the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by the abutment.

This effect cannot be achieved if the annular plate portion 846 is omitted, since there is no contact with the annular plate portion 846. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the rear side surface of the tip rod portion 853 of the rotating arm member 850 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842. Therefore, even if the position of the tip of the rotating arm member 850 is shifted forward or backward, the rear side surface of the tip rod portion 853 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842 and can abut against it, so that the forward or backward position of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by this abutment.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the extension arm portion 842 is configured to produce the same effect as the annular plate portion 846. This allows the effect of correcting the front-to-rear arrangement of the rotating arm member 850 to be produced for all of the rotating arm members 850, even while omitting the formation of part of the annular plate portion 846.

Figure 103(a) is a rear view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and Figure 103(b) is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. Figures 103(a) and 103(b) show the relative positions of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 in a combined state.

The state shown in FIG. 103(a) corresponds to a state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated from the state shown in FIG. 65(b) to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) (a state in which the switching rotation operation is completed), and the state shown in FIG. 103(b) corresponds to a state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated from the state shown in FIG. 67(b) to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) (a state in which the switching rotation operation is completed).

When comparing the combined state with the individual combined state (see Fig. 64(a) and Fig. 66(a)), there are differences such as the short side of the intermediate arm member 850 close to the outer rotating member 840 being reversed, so that the curved portion 852c that abuts against the abutment protrusion 845 is on the opposite side, and the curved portion 852c that abuts against the curved portion 854d is reversed.

To accommodate this difference, the abutment protrusion 845 is linearly symmetrical in front view with respect to the radial direction of the main body 841, and the pair of curved portions 852c and 854d are linearly symmetrical in front view with respect to the longitudinal line of the intermediate arm member 850 (the straight line connecting the pivot base end and the supported hole 854a).

Furthermore, the curved shape of the abutment protrusion 845 and the curved shape of the curved shape portion 854d are designed to be similarly curved to match the shape of the curved shape portion 852c. This allows the combination state to be configured with the same engagement relationship whether in the individual combined state or in the combined state.

In addition, in the combined state, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 is configured in a positional relationship in which it is sandwiched from both sides between the abutting protrusion 845 and the curved portion 854d. This makes it possible to prevent the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 from being displaced in either rotation direction, making it easier to maintain the state of the intermediate arm member 850 and easier to maintain the combined state.

Figures 104 and 105 are front views of the third operating unit 800. Figure 104 illustrates a state in which the decorative members 870, 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position (a state intermediate between the individual combined state and the united state), and Figure 105 illustrates the united state.

Figure 106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line CVI-CVI in Figure 105, and Figure 107 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line CVII-CVII in Figure 104. As a configuration of the third operating unit 800, the front-to-rear arrangement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be set arbitrarily.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is positioned on the front side of the metal bar 832, the player will be able to see the metal bar 832 through the intermediate arm member 850, which reduces the visibility of the metal bar 832. In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 106 and 107, the metal bar 832 is positioned on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850.

With this arrangement, the metal bar 832 as a support member functions as a shielding member that partially hides the intermediate arm member 850. This makes it possible to prevent the intermediate arm member 850, which is a functional member rather than a decorative member, from standing out, and improves the appearance of the third operating unit 800.

When exposed (see FIG. 104), the metal rod 832 also functions as a performance member that reflects light due to the gloss of its surface, improving the performance effect of the light emitted from the outer light-emitting part 823b (see FIG. 107). In other words, the metal rod 832 can be used as a reflective member for light performance.

If the intermediate arm member 850 were placed on the front side of the metal bar 832, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 would block the light entering the player's eyes. However, in this embodiment, the intermediate arm member 850 is placed on the back side of the metal bar 832, so it is possible to avoid the intermediate arm member 850 blocking the light and causing an unsightly appearance.

In this way, in this embodiment, the range in which the light effects are performed can be expanded by configuring the metal rod 832 to reflect light in the mid-switching rotation operation in which the metal rod 832 is exposed (see Figures 104 and 107). That is, the reflected light can be made visible to the player not only in the range behind the translucent decorative member 824 where the illumination board 823 (see Figure 60) is arranged, but also in the range ER1 (see Figure 104) where the metal rod 832, which is arranged to protrude radially outward from the translucent decorative member 824 when viewed from the front, is exposed and visible.

As a light receiving portion, the bulge 824a has a light diffusion shape portion 824b (see Figures 106 and 107) on its inner circumferential surface, in which a light diffusion shape is formed in a circular ring shape. The light irradiated from the inner light emitting portion 823a can be irradiated onto the light diffusion shape portion 824b, and the light diffusion shape portion 824b that receives the light shines brightly in a circular ring shape.

As a result, the light diffusion shape portion 824b is visible as a bright ring not only when the decorative members 870, 880 are combined, but also during the switching rotation operation in which the circular arrangement of the decorative members 870, 880 is released, making it easier to maintain the dramatic effect that utilizes the circular shape of the third operating unit 800.

As shown in Figures 104 and 105, the translucent decorative member 824 has not only a bulge 824a that is visible in the combined state, but also an extension 824c that extends radially outward from the bulge 824a when viewed from the front.

When the extension 824c is in the combined state, it is hidden by the decorative members 870 and 880, and therefore does not function as a decorative part, but it does have the effect of concealing the mechanism during the switching rotation operation shown in FIG. 104.

That is, as shown in Figures 104 and 107, the extension portion 824c is formed to be large enough to cover and conceal parts of the mechanism that are difficult to use for presentation, such as the main body portion 831 of the inner rotating member 830 and the extension arm portion 842 of the outer rotating member 840 (see Figure 61).

And because the decorative pattern is applied not only to the bulge 824a but also to the front side of the extension 824c, the decorative pattern can be seen in the area where the mechanism is hidden and concealed, improving the presentation effect.

An example of drive control of the third operating unit 800 will be described. First, the relationship between the lifting and lowering displacement of the third operating unit 800 caused by the lifting and lowering arm member 801 being driven and controlled, and the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 caused by the drive motor 861 being driven and controlled will be described.

According to this embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is configured to be able to perform the vertical displacement and rotational displacement independently. However, for example, due to the inertial load generated when the third operating unit 800 is vertically displaced, a rotational displacement may occur in the third operating unit 800 in conjunction with the vertical displacement. In this case, the third operating unit 800 may change its posture or the combined state of the third operating unit 800 may be released (the decorative members 870, 880 may be displaced radially outward against the attractive force of the magnet Mg2), which may reduce the presentation effect.

To avoid this, for example, the vertical displacement of the third operating unit 800 and the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 (particularly, the integral rotational movement) may be controlled to be performed simultaneously.

This allows the player to see the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 as it moves up and down as a dramatic action, preventing a decline in the dramatic effect. Furthermore, while the integral rotational action continues, a load continues to be applied in a direction that displaces the decorative members 870, 880 radially inward (see FIG. 101), so it is possible to prevent the combined state of the third operating unit 800 from being released.

In addition, even if control is not performed to simultaneously perform the lifting and lowering displacement and the rotational displacement, the third operating unit 800 may be controlled to adjust the orientation of the third operating unit 800 in advance in the rotational direction so that the orientation of the third operating unit 800 is such that the rotating arm member 850 is less likely to be displaced by the lifting and lowering displacement.

In this embodiment, a change in the detection mode of the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 by the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 68) means that the rotation mode of the inner rotating member 830 is being performed as a unitary rotation operation. Therefore, based on this premise, it is assumed that the detection mode of the detection sensor 813 and the control of the third operating unit 800 will be designed in association with each other.

This premise is based on the fact that the switching rotation operation is performed in a state where the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained (a state where the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are not interlocked). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid any state where this premise may be violated.

In this embodiment, when the inner rotating member 830 is rotationally controlled by the driving force of the drive motor 861, the resistance applied by the torque limiter 866 acts to suppress the rotation of the outer rotating member 840, thereby maintaining the position of the outer rotating member 840.

Therefore, for example, when the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 increases during the switching rotation operation, and the operating resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 increases, if the resistance exceeds the resistance applied by the torque limiter, the outer rotating member 840 and the inner rotating member 830 may work together, making it impossible to properly perform the switching rotation operation.

In contrast, this embodiment is configured to reduce resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850.

For example, the direction of displacement of the rotating tip of the intermediate arm member 850 that displaces the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834 from the combined state is along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832. In other words, since the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the rotation direction of the metal rod 832, it is possible to make it difficult for resistance to the rotation of the metal rod 832 to occur, and it is possible to keep the resistance generated between the metal rod 832 and the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 small.

When the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834 are positioned at their radially outer end positions (see FIG. 104), the displacement direction of the rotation tip side (e.g., the supported hole 854a) of the intermediate arm member 850 is aligned with the rotation direction of the metal rod 832, so that it is easy to create a state in which the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 move in parallel, especially when the speed is insufficient. In this case, the switching rotation operation is not performed properly.

In contrast, this embodiment employs a control mode in which, once the switching rotation operation has begun, driving continues at a sufficient speed until the combined state is reached. When the linear member 833 and the rotating member 834 are positioned at the outer radial end positions (see FIG. 104), the decorative members 870 and 880 are subjected to inertia such that they rotate around the metal rod 832.

Due to the effect of this inertia, the rotating member 834 fastened to the decorative members 870 and 880 rotates, and the bevel teeth portion 834a and the bevel teeth portion 854c rotate in mesh with each other, so that the rotating tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 passes through the radially outer end position and rotates radially inward (see Figures 65(b) and 67(b)).

When the intermediate arm member 850 is out of its radially outer end position, the tip of the intermediate arm member 850 is more likely to move in a direction along the metal rod 832, making it easier to reduce resistance to the rotational movement of the metal rod 832.

In this way, in this embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced by designing the relationship between the members and the drive control.

During the switching rotation operation, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained and the position of the detected part 844 does not change, so the end timing of the switching rotation operation cannot be determined by a change in the detection state of the detected part 844 by the detection sensor 813.

For example, the control to stop the drive motor 861 when the combined state is reached can be achieved by setting a drive time necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation in advance and controlling the drive to stop at that drive time; however, depending on the degree of resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850, the amount of displacement may differ even if the drive time is the same, and the drive may stop before the combined state is reached. In this case, the presentation effect may be reduced.

In response to this, instead of a control mode that stops the drive motor 861 when the combined state is reached, a control may be adopted in which it is determined that the switching rotation operation has ended and the integral rotation operation has begun when the detection state of the detected part 844 by the detection sensor 813 has changed (see FIG. 68), and the drive motor 861 is stopped after this determination. This control makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor 861 is stopped when the decorative members 870, 880 have not yet reached the combined state after the switching rotation operation has been performed.

As described above, the switching rotation operation is performed in the extended state of the third operating unit 800 as drive control, but the integral rotation operation can be performed regardless of the state of the third operating unit 800.

Since the switching rotation operation can be performed regardless of the position of the rotation direction of the third operating unit 800 as a drive control, as described above in FIG. 68, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot will be announced. In other words, the switching rotation operation can be performed not only from a state in which the detectable portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 66(a)), but also from a state in which the detectable portion 844 is not arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

However, unlike when the switching rotation operation is performed while the detectable portion 844 is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change from the end of the switching rotation operation until the detectable portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so it is necessary to devise a control mode.

For example, the switching rotation operation may be performed for a drive period that is preset as a drive period necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation, regardless of the output of the detection sensor 813, or the drive motor 861 may be controlled to continue driving until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

In the latter case, after the switching rotation operation is completed, the operation mode shifts to a united rotation operation, and the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so that it can be determined that the switching rotation operation has already ended and the decorative members 870, 880 are in a combined state.

On the other hand, if the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change even though the drive motor 861 has been driven for a time sufficient to transition from a switching rotation operation to a unitary rotation operation and for the detected portion 844 to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, it can be determined that a malfunction has occurred in the third operating unit 800 based on the output of the detection sensor 813.

In the latter case, a switching rotation operation is performed from any rotational position of the third operating unit 800, and while the united state (see FIG. 32) is maintained, driving continues until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

As described above, when the third operating unit 800 is in a united assembly state, the appearance is unlikely to change even if the rotational arrangement is different. Therefore, even if the rotational displacement of the third operating unit 800 is continued until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 in the united assembly state, it is easy to avoid a decrease in the presentation effect.

Furthermore, when controlling to return from the reverse performance shown in FIG. 68 to the normal performance, the detectable portion 844 is already positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so the period until the output of the detection sensor 813 changes after the switch rotation operation is completed can be minimized. In other words, a short drive period is sufficient for the detectable portion 844, which is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, to retreat from the detection groove, so the length required for control to return from the reverse performance to the normal performance can be minimized.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the degree of freedom of the rotational arrangement of the third operating unit 800, which initiates the switching rotation action to switch from a normal performance to a reverse performance, is improved, and while the return action may normally be prolonged, the switching rotation action from a reverse performance as a return action to a normal performance is shortened.

In other words, by performing part of the return operation to correct the difference in the rotational position of the third operating unit 800 (the rotational displacement until the detected part 844 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813) in a united state in which the appearance is unlikely to change even if the rotational position is different, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the performance effect of the third operating unit 800 during the return operation.

Furthermore, by performing part of the return operation in advance, it is possible to shorten the time required for the remaining return operation, which is the switching rotation operation.

A comprehensive explanation will be given of the configurations that are commonly adopted by multiple operating units 600, 700, and 800, including the reasons for the differences in how they are adopted.

First, as a first cross-sectional explanation, we will review the configuration of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 that are commonly used in each of the operating units 600, 700, and 800, and explain the reasons for the differences in their adoption (number of sensors, shape of the detected piece, etc.).

The detection sensor KS1 of the first operating unit 600 is a detection device for detecting the position of the first operating unit 600, and the extension portion 634b can enter the detection groove. The first operating unit 600 is equipped with only one detection sensor KS1 (see Figure 41). The multiple displacement members, namely the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, the protruding decorative portion 652b, and the second decorative rotating member 660, are configured so that the position and position of the other displacement members are determined when the position of the rotating member 620 is determined, so that the position and position of the multiple displacement members can be determined based on the detection result of the single detection sensor KS1. This makes it possible to reduce the number of detection devices.

The detection sensor 713 of the second operating unit 700 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the gear cam member 734 of the second operating unit 700, and the detection target portion 735 can enter the detection groove. There are three detection devices for the second operating unit 700 to detect the posture of the gear cam member 734 (see FIG. 50), which respectively correspond to the performance standby state, intermediate performance state, and extended state of the second operating unit 700.

The detection sensor 713 that determines the standby state is required to determine whether the device has returned to its initial position. The detection sensor 713 that determines the extension state is required to determine whether the device has reached the end position of the upward displacement, as well as to determine whether the device has performed a reversal operation of the lift-down reversal device 770 and whether it has shifted position due to the influence of unintended loads. The detection sensor 713 that determines the intermediate state is required to determine whether the device has reached the up or down position in the intermediate state, as well as to determine whether it has shifted position due to the influence of unintended loads. The reversal operation and the influence of unintended loads will be explained in order below.

First, the inversion operation will be described. The second operation unit 700 is configured to enable not only the up and down displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 that occurs in conjunction with the rotational operation of the gear cam member 734, but also the inversion operation of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 (see FIG. 59).

Since the reversal operation may cause the lifting and reversing performance device 770 to be displaced in the vertical direction, if only a single detection sensor 713 (a detection device that determines the performance standby state) is used, for example, it may not be possible to determine the vertical positional deviation in the extended state or intermediate performance state, and the performance operation may not be performed properly.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the second operating unit 700 is provided with a detection sensor 713 that corresponds to the standby state, intermediate state, and extended state. Therefore, for example, it is possible to determine that the lifting/reversing performance device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction by performing an inversion operation of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 in the extended state, and by rotating the drive motor 731 in a direction that properly corrects the attitude of the gear cam member 734 (to the extended state) based on this determination result, it is possible to properly maintain the position of the lifting/reversing performance device 770.

In this embodiment, the reversing operation is permitted only when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state (when the gear cam member 734 is at the end of the operation), so that the positional deviation during the reversing operation can be easily corrected by simply rotating the gear cam member 734 towards the end of the operation.

Next, the effect of unintended load will be described. In the second operating unit 700, in addition to the vertical displacement of the lifting plate member 740 that occurs in conjunction with the pivoting arm member 720 that rotates due to the rotational movement of the gear cam member 734, there is also a vertical displacement of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 based on the lifting plate member 740 to displace to a forward/backward position corresponding to the vertical position of the lifting plate member 740 (see Figures 52 to 54).

As a result, as the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction by the load applied in the front-to-rear width direction of the gaming machine, the up-down positions of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 and the lifting plate member 740 fluctuate, which may cause the attitude of the gear cam member 734 to change. Examples of loads applied in the front-to-rear width direction of the gaming machine include impact loads when a player hits the gaming machine, and loads when opening and closing the front frame 14.

Since the load in the front-to-rear width direction may cause the lifting/reversing performance device 770 to be displaced in the vertical direction, if only a single detection sensor 713 (a detection device that determines the performance standby state) is used, for example, it may not be possible to determine the vertical positional deviation in the extended state or intermediate performance state, and the lifting/reversing performance device 770 may not be able to be maintained in the correct position.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the second operating unit 700 is provided with a detection sensor 713 corresponding to the standby state, intermediate state, and extended state. Therefore, for example, when a load in the front-to-rear width direction is applied to the gaming machine in the intermediate state, and the vertical positions of the lifting/reversing performance device 770 and the lifting/reversing plate member 740 change, the posture of the gear cam member 734 changes in conjunction with the load, so that it is possible to determine that the lifting/reversing performance device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction, and by rotating the drive motor 731 in a direction that properly corrects the posture of the gear cam member 734 (to the intermediate state) based on this determination result, it is possible to properly maintain the position of the lifting/reversing performance device 770.

When the detected portion 735 of the gear cam member 734 is positioned on the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, and it is determined that the detected portion 735 has come off the detection sensor 713 due to an unintended load, in this embodiment, although it is not possible to determine in which direction the detected portion 735 has come off, the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven in a direction that first displaces the performance device 780 downward. This makes it possible to prevent a collision between the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800.

In this embodiment, if this drive causes the detectable part 735 to again enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, it is understood that the displacement of the detectable part 735 due to the unintended load has occurred in the direction of upward displacement of the performance device 780, and if the drive is stopped at that point, the effect caused by the unintended load can be offset.

Furthermore, if this drive causes the detectable portion 735 to enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the performance standby state without entering the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, it is understood that the displacement of the detectable portion 735 due to the unintended load has occurred on the side that displaces the performance device 780 downward. If the drive is continued so as to displace it upward again and the drive is stopped when the detectable portion 735 enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate performance state, the effect caused by the unintended load can be offset.

The detected portion 735 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 does not have a structural purpose as described for the extension portion 634b, so it is formed as a plate-like portion with a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 713. This makes it possible to improve the resolution for detecting the position of the gear cam member 734.

The detection sensor 778d is a detection device for detecting the posture of the upside-down member 781 of the second operating unit 700, and the arc-shaped protrusion 781d can enter the detection groove. There are two detection devices for the second operating unit 700 to detect the posture of the upside-down member 781 (see FIG. 56), which correspond to the upright vertical arrangement state and the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781, respectively.

The second operating unit 700 is in a combined state in which the pair of covering members 787 arranged on the left and right sides are close to each other when the upside-down member 781 is in an upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)) or in an inverted vertical position (see FIG. 59(c)).

For example, if only a single detection sensor 778d (a detection device that inverts the upright vertical arrangement state of the upright inverted member 781) is employed, it is possible to determine the deviation of the upright inverted member 781 from the upright vertical arrangement state, and it is possible to drive and control the drive motor 782 so as to maintain the combined state of the covering member 787 based on the determination result. On the other hand, since it is not possible to determine the deviation of the upright inverted member 781 from the inverted vertical arrangement state, even if the combined state of the covering member 787 in the inverted vertical arrangement state changes due to an unintended load, poor control, or the like, the change in state cannot be determined by the detection sensor 778d, and the combined state will continue to be released, which is not desirable from the perspective of presentation.

In contrast to this, according to this embodiment, a detection sensor 778d is provided that corresponds to the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781 and the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside-down member 781. Therefore, regardless of whether the upright vertical arrangement state or the inverted vertical arrangement state is present, the detection sensor 778d can determine that a state change from the combined state has occurred, and the covering member 787 can be returned to the combined state by controlling the drive motor 782 to return to the combined state based on the determination result. This can improve the presentation effect of the second operating unit 700.

The arc-shaped protrusion 781d that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d does not have a structural purpose as described for the extension 634b, so it is formed as a plate-like portion with a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 778d. This improves the resolution for detecting the position of the upside-down member 781.

The detection sensor 813 of the third operating unit 800 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840 of the third operating unit 800, and the detection groove allows the detected part 844 to enter (see FIG. 60). The third operating unit 800 has one detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840, and this single detection device is used (shared) to determine the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 itself and the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 when the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 has stopped (switching rotation operation).

The detected portion 844 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 does not have a structural purpose as described for the extension portion 634b, so it is formed as a plate-like portion with a width and length appropriate for the detection width of the detection sensor 813. This makes it possible to improve the resolution for detecting the position of the outer rotating member 840.

The detection sensor 813 is arranged for the purpose of detecting the position of the outer rotating member 840, and there is only one of them, so it is insufficient to determine the deviation of the decorative members 870, 880 from the combined state. For example, even if a displacement occurs that releases the combined state when the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in a position in which the detection target portion 844 is not positioned on the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor 813 cannot determine this.

For this reason, rather than determining whether there has been a deviation from the combined state and then controlling the return to the combined state, it is considered preferable to control the drive motor 861 to rotate for a fixed time (e.g., a short time) at fixed time intervals in a direction that returns the decorative members 870, 880 to the combined state (a direction that rotates the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front in the individual combined state (see Figure 66 (a)), and a direction that rotates the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front in the united state (see Figure 103 (b))).

With this control, even if the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 is unexpectedly released, the decorative members 870, 880 can be returned to the combined state by driving the drive motor 861 at regular time intervals, so that it is possible to prevent the combined state of the decorative members 870, 880 from being maintained in a released state for a long period of time.

As a second cross-sectional explanation, the function of magnets Mg and Mg2 will be explained. As mentioned above, in the second operating unit 700, magnet Mg functions to maintain the position of covering member 787, and in the third operating unit 800, magnet Mg2 functions to maintain the combined state of decorative members 870 and 880. Similar technologies are used, but the design concepts for the direction of the load generated by magnets Mg and Mg2 are different, which will be explained here.

The second operating unit 700 is designed so that the direction of the magnetic force generated between the magnets Mg and the metal screws arranged on the left and right sides is aligned in the front-to-back direction at both the left and right positions. In other words, the line of action of the magnetic force is designed to be parallel to a plane perpendicular to the metal rod 785a that serves as the axis of rotation of the rotating operation of the covering member 787.

In this case, compared to when the magnetic force of the magnets Mg is generated in the axial direction of the metal rods 785a, the degree (magnitude) of the magnetic force generated as resistance to the sliding displacement of the covering members 787 moving toward and away from each other can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the operating resistance of the covering members 787 when they start to operate.

On the other hand, the third operating unit 800 is designed so that the direction of the line of action of the magnetic force generated between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 arranged in the decorative member 880 is arranged on a plane parallel to the plane on which the five metal rods 832, which serve as the rotation axis of the rotational movement of the decorative member 880, are arranged (a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830).

In this case, the degree to which the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 applies a load in the direction of rotation to the decorative members 870, 880 can be reduced, making it easier to avoid malfunctions that would otherwise occur when the decorative members 870, 880 wobble in the direction of rotation due to magnetic force.

As a third cross-sectional explanation, we will explain the presentation that allows the display on the display device such as the third pattern display device 81 and the operating units 600, 700, and 800 to be viewed as a single unit.

In the first operating unit 600, the protruding decorative portion 652b is positioned so that it appears to overlap with the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 29). Therefore, for example, by displaying a position corresponding to the position of the protruding decorative portion 652b near the right edge RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make the display area and the protruding decorative portion 652b easier to see as a unified display performance.

In the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is positioned at the same height between the inner lower edge of the center frame 86 and the lower edge of the opening 511a (see Figures 26 and 52). Therefore, for example, by displaying a position corresponding to the position of the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 near the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make the display area and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 easier to view as a unified display performance.

In the third operating unit 800, each first covered portion 875 that is visible to the player in the individual combined state is decorated differently, and in the extended state, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is positioned to surround it when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the first covered portion 875 is positioned in a range close to the first covered portion 875 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make it easier to view the display area and the first covered portion 875 as a unified display performance.

In addition, if the third operating unit 800 is driven and controlled to rotate as a unit, it becomes possible to execute a roulette-like operation in which each first covered portion 875 rotates. Even in this case, for example, by moving the display so as to run parallel to the first covered portion 875 in a range close to the first covered portion 875 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to make it easier to visually recognize the display area and the first covered portion 875 as a unified display effect.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 108. In the first embodiment, the internal shapes of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 are fixed, but the sorting device 2300 of the second embodiment is equipped with a first flow path configuration part 2334 whose internal shape is variable. Note that parts that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

When describing the first flow path component 2334 as an alternative to the first flow path component 334 in the first embodiment, the configuration disposed on the right side is illustrated and described, but the configuration disposed on the left side can also be the first flow path component 2334. In addition, the configurations may be different between the left and right sides, such that only one of the left and right sides is the first flow path component 2334 and the other is the first flow path component 334.

Figure 108 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 2300 in the second embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in Figure 15. As shown in Figure 108, the first flow path component 2334 of the sorting device 2300 includes a through hole 2410 drilled in the front-rear direction at the bottom of the curved protrusion 334b, a slide member 2420 guided along the through hole 2410 so as to be able to slide back and forth, and a solenoid 2430 disposed inside the rear frame portion 332 so as to be able to generate a driving force for sliding the slide member 2420.

In FIG. 108, the front position FP of the slide member 2420 when the solenoid 2430 is in a non-energized state is shown by a solid line. When the solenoid 2430 is energized, the driving force of the solenoid 2430 causes the slide member 2420 to slide to the rear position RP.

In this embodiment, in the front arrangement FP of the slide member 2420, the upper side of the slide member 2420 is configured to protrude inward (upward) from the bottom surface 2334c, which is the bottom surface of the fixed flow path and on which the balls can roll, and in the rear arrangement RP, the upper side of the slide member 2420 is configured not to protrude inward (upward) from the bottom surface 2334c.

That is, in the front position FP of the slide member 2420, the ball abuts against the upper surface of the slide member 2420, and in the rear position RP of the slide member 2420, the slide member 2420 and the ball do not abut.

The upper surface of the slide member 2420 is formed as a plane parallel to the bottom surface 2334c. Therefore, even if the slide member 2420 slides while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334c, the effect on the flow of the ball can be kept small.

The downward flow direction of the ball rolling on the bottom surface 2334c is diagonally downward toward the front, and the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 is the front-to-back direction, so the direction of the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 is along the downward flow direction of the ball. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 affects the strength of the ball's rotation.

The ball rolls on bottom surface 2334c facing forward, so that it rotates in a forward rolling direction in the direction of travel (forward). When solenoid 2430 is de-energized (see FIG. 108), and current is applied to solenoid 2430, causing slide member 2420 to slide from front arrangement FP to rear arrangement RP, a rearward load (frictional force) is generated on the lower end of the ball rolling on the upper surface of slide member 2420. This accelerates the forward rolling rotation of the ball, increasing the degree of rotation of the ball and increasing the rolling speed of the ball.

On the other hand, when the solenoid 2430 is changed from an energized state to a non-energized state (see FIG. 108), causing the slide member 2420 to slide from the rear arrangement RP to the front arrangement FP, a forward load (frictional force) is generated on the lower end of the ball rolling on the bottom surface 2334b via the upper side surface of the slide member 2420. As a result, the forward rotation of the ball is decelerated, the degree of rotation of the ball can be reduced, and the rolling speed of the ball can be decelerated.

Furthermore, since the vertical position of the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 in the front arrangement FP is higher than the vertical position of the bottom surface 2334b, in addition to the frictional force from the slide member 2420, a load is generated in a direction that pushes the ball upward. Therefore, the vertical speed of the ball rolling downward can be reduced, and the flow speed of the ball can be decelerated.

In this way, according to this embodiment, by executing control to cause a sliding displacement of the sliding member 2420 while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334b, it is possible to change the flow speed of the ball flowing down inside the sorting device 2300. This makes it possible to variably control the time from when the ball passes through the ball passing hole 163b until it reaches the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 74).

In this embodiment, the slide member 2420 is positioned behind the second flow path component 335, making it difficult for the player to understand the state in which the ball is being affected by the slide member 2420.

In other words, the ball comes into contact with the slide member 2420 before it is introduced into the second flow path component 335, which is easily visible to the player and likely to attract attention, making it difficult for the player to grasp how the ball is being given rotation or displaced vertically. This reduces the sense of discomfort felt by the player as he or she watches the ball flow down the second flow path component 335.

In this embodiment, when the slide member 2420 is displaced while a ball is positioned above the bottom surface 2334c, a contact load is applied, whereas a ball passing above the bottom surface 2334c before or after the displacement of the slide member 2420 (when stopped) is not subjected to a contact load with the slide member 2420.

Therefore, the flow pattern (rotation, change in rotation, flow speed, change in flow speed, etc.) can be made different between the ball placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is in operation and the ball placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is stopped.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109. In the first embodiment, the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side, but in the allocation device 3300 of the third embodiment, the special rate detection sensor SE11 is moved to the rear of the normal detection sensor SE12, so that the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front and rear. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

As an example of a change in the position of the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, the explanation will be given to the right of the center, but the configuration on the left side of the left and right can be designed as desired. For example, on the left side, the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 can be arranged side by side as in the first embodiment, so that the positions of the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are different on the left and right of the sorting device 3300, or on the left side, they can be arranged side by side, as described in detail below, so that the positions of the special rate detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are symmetrical on the left and right of the sorting device 3300.

Figures 109(a) and 109(b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device 3300 in the third embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. Figure 109(a) illustrates a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see Figure 17) is de-energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the front position, and Figure 109(b) illustrates a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position.

In addition, in Figures 109(a) and 109(b), the guide path of the ball after it flows through the third flow path component 336 is shown by imaginary lines. In this way, the guide path of the ball is changed depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370.

As shown in Figures 109(a) and 109(b), the middle member 3330 of the distribution device 3300 has a rear frame portion 3332 that defines the ball guide path to the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, and is configured in a shape that is open so that balls can be received from the left side.

The sliding displacement member 3370 is configured to be able to slide between a front position and a rear position. The rear position of the sliding displacement member 3370 (see FIG. 109(b)) is set as a position where the right end of the front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 and the rear inner surface of the opening 3332g formed in the rear frame portion 3332 as the entrance of the path that guides the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11 are aligned on the left and right (or the right end of the front side surface 376a is positioned slightly forward).

By setting the position of the slide displacement member 3370 in this manner, if the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the front position, the ball that passes through the third flow path component 336 is caused to flow to the right while abutting against the front side surface 376a of the slide displacement member 3370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12; on the other hand, if the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the ball that passes through the third flow path component 336 is caused to flow to the right while abutting against the front side surface 376a of the slide displacement member 3370, and passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In other words, the flow path of the ball passing through the normal detection sensor SE12 and the flow path of the ball passing through the special chance detection sensor SE11 are both configured as flow paths that flow to the right after passing through the third flow path configuration section 336. The only difference is the forward and backward position where the ball flows to the right.

As a result, it is difficult for a player looking at the third flow path configuration portion 336 from the front to determine whether the ball has flowed to the special bonus detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

The slide displacement member 3370 includes a pair of rod-shaped guide portions 3371c extending from the front end of the thin plate portion 371 toward the front side in a rod shape, an upper front protrusion portion 3376b formed integrally with the upper protrusion portion 376, and an upper lateral protrusion portion 3376c formed integrally with the upper protrusion portion 376.

The upper surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, and is formed in a pair on the left and right sides of the center of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336. It penetrates the front side of the discharge hole 337 and is configured so that it can be stored on the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path component 336.

In other words, when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the front position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is positioned on the underside of the third flow path component 336 and does not come into contact with the ball, and when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is disposed across the front-to-rear gap between the front side surface of the discharge hole 337 and the ball guide portion 371b.

By configuring the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c in this manner, when the sliding displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the lower left and right parts of the ball can be supported by the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, and the ball can be bridged to the sliding displacement member 3370.

This makes it easier to prevent the ball from flowing down toward the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position. In other words, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c makes it easier to prevent the ball from being erroneously guided down.

In addition, the ball that has passed through the third flow path component 336 is positioned on the upper surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, which is formed flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, thereby making it possible to avoid a frontal collision between the ball and the ball guide portion 371b in the front-to-rear direction. In other words, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the ball collides head-on with the ball guide portion 371b, causing the ball to flow backward forward, or a situation in which the ball gets caught between the front surface of the ball guide portion 371b and the front surface of the discharge hole 337, causing malfunction.

The upper front protrusion 3376b is a shaped portion that is similar to the front-to-rear long protrusion 317 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment and is integrally formed with the upper protrusion 376 in the same relative position as the relative position at the front position of the sliding displacement member 370 in the first embodiment.

The upper lateral protrusion 3376c is a shaped portion that is similar to the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment and is integrally formed with the upper front protrusion 3376b in the same relative position as the front position of the sliding displacement member 370 in the first embodiment.

As a result, the action of the upper front protrusion 3376b and the upper side protrusion 3376c on the ball they come into contact with occurs as an action on the ball flowing down near the upper protrusion 376, regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370.

In other words, unlike when the front-rear long protrusion 317 and the left-right inner protrusion 318 (see FIG. 18) are fixed in position, when the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned in the rear position, the protrusions 3376b and 3376c can eliminate the effect of urging a ball that has reached the forward position of the upper protrusion 376 toward the normal detection sensor SE12.

Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 110 and 111. In the first embodiment, the special probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side, but in the allocation device 4300 of the fourth embodiment, the position of the normal detection sensor SE12 is moved to the rear of the special probability detection sensor SE11, so that the special probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front and rear. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 110(a) and 110(b) are schematic top views of the third flow path component 336, the probability change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370, which show the configuration of the downstream side of the third flow path component 336 in the fourth embodiment.

Figure 111(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component 336, the probability change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 taken along the line CXIa-CXIa in Figure 110(a), and Figure 111(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path component 336, the probability change detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12, and the slide displacement member 4370 taken along the line CXIb-CXIb in Figure 110(b). In Figure 111(b), the upper abutment portion 4373 is omitted for ease of understanding.

The sliding displacement member 4370 is configured to block either the special rate detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 so that the ball cannot pass through, and to open the other to allow the ball to pass through. It is equipped with a front sliding member 4371 that slides left and right above the special rate detection sensor SE11, and a rear sliding member 4375 that slides left and right above the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front slide member 4371 and the rear slide member 4375 slide in opposite directions to each other by the driving force of the solenoid. That is, when changing from the front open state shown in FIG. 110(a) and FIG. 111(a) to the rear open state shown in FIG. 110(b) and FIG. 111(b), the front slide member 4371 slides to the left and the rear slide member 4375 slides to the right.

The front slide member 4371 includes a slide plate 4372 that is arranged to cover the upper part of the probability change detection sensor SE11, and an upper abutment part 4373 that is formed in a shape similar to that of the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 17), and is integrally formed by a connecting part (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4372 and the upper abutment part 4373 slide and displace integrally.

The upper surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372 is flush with the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336, and is formed as an inclined plane with the same inclination in the front-to-rear direction (see FIG. 111(b)). Therefore, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the inclination of the upper surface 4372a allows the ball rolling on the upper surface 4372a to flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12. On the other hand, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the ball that has passed the lower bottom surface 336a comes into contact with the upper abutment portion 4373 and is subjected to a load, causing it to flow downward (to the lower right).

Therefore, when the front slide member 4371 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, it comes into contact with the ball at different points and is configured to change state so as to guide (flow) the ball in different directions.

The rear slide member 4375 includes a slide plate 4376 that is arranged so as to cover the upper part of the normal detection sensor SE12, and an upper abutment part 4377 that is formed in a shape similar to that of the front-rear long protrusion part 317 (see FIG. 17), and is integrally formed by a connecting part (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4376 and the upper abutment part 4377 slide and displace integrally.

The upper surface 4376a of the slide plate 4376 is an inclined plane formed from a shape that is the opposite of the upper surface 4372a (see FIG. 111(a)). Therefore, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the inclination of the upper surface 4376a allows the ball placed on the upper surface 4376a to flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the ball that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a and the upper surface 6372a comes into contact with the upper abutment portion 4377 and is subjected to a load, causing it to flow downward.

Therefore, the rear slide member 4375 is configured so that when the front open state and the rear open state change, it comes into contact with the ball at different points and changes state to guide (flow) the ball in different directions.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible for a ball that has passed backwards above the probability change detection sensor SE11 to return above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 again, thereby improving attention to the ball that has passed through the third flow path configuration portion 336.

As an example of how the ball returns to above the probability change detection sensor SE11, a solenoid may be driven to change state from the rear open state to the front open state when the ball passes backwards over the upper surface 4372a. In this case, the ball will run onto the upper surface 4376a before passing through the normal detection sensor SE12, and will flow backward along the slope of the upper surface 4376a, returning to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In this way, when the timing of the ball passing through the third flow path component 336 coincides with the timing of the slide displacement member 4370 being driven, the ball is configured to return to the side of the probability change detection sensor SE11. Therefore, compared to gaming machines configured so that a ball that passes above the probability change detection sensor SE11 downstream does not pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11, attention to the ball after passing through the third flow path component 336 and the timing of the slide displacement member 4370 being driven can be improved.

Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 112. In the first embodiment, the flow path of the balls is common up to the third flow path component 336, and the branch point BP1 is located behind the third flow path component 336. However, in the sorting device 5300 of the fifth embodiment, a slide displacement member 5370 is disposed upstream of the third flow path component 336, and the flow path of the balls changes upstream of the third flow path component 336. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 112(a) and 112(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the sorting device 5300 in the fifth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. Figure 112(a) shows a state in which the sliding displacement member 5370 is positioned on the right side and the ball is guided by the sliding displacement member 5370 to the special detection sensor SE11, while Figure 112(b) shows a state in which the sliding displacement member 5370 is positioned on the left side and the ball is guided by the sliding displacement member 5370 to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In addition, in Figures 112(a) and 112(b), the guide path of the ball after it flows through the first flow path component 334 is shown by imaginary lines. In this way, the guide path of the ball is changed depending on the arrangement of the slide displacement member 5370.

The sliding displacement member 5370 is configured to be slidably displaceable in the left-right direction by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown), and includes a thin plate portion 5371 that forms the rolling surface of the ball, and an upper protruding portion 5376 that protrudes upward from the upper surface of the thin plate portion 5371.

The thin plate portion 5371 is formed thin enough that the ball that has passed through the first flow path component 334 can ride up on it. The left side surface 5376a of the upper protrusion portion 5376 that faces the ball is formed in an arc shape with a concave flow path side, so that the ball can be smoothly guided backward.

In this embodiment, as with the sorting device 5300, the path along which the balls flow is long from front to back, and a configuration is adopted in which the visibility of balls flowing down the front side is higher than that of balls flowing down the rear side, while the sliding displacement member 5370 is positioned on the front side where the visibility of the balls is higher, making it easier for the player to distinguish the manner in which the balls flow down (path along which the balls flow down)

In this embodiment, when the slide displacement member 5370 is positioned at the right side, the entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is not particularly blocked, and the structure allows balls to enter. On the other hand, balls flowing downstream on the upstream side of the entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 flow toward the front side while flowing downstream through the first flow path configuration portion 334.

As a result, immediately after passing through the first flow path configuration portion 334, a velocity in the opposite direction, namely backward, is unlikely to occur, making it difficult for the ball to enter the entrance to the path to the normal detection sensor SE11. Therefore, in this embodiment, a component for blocking the entrance to the path to the normal detection sensor SE11 is omitted, thereby reducing material costs.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113. In the first embodiment, the left and right flow paths are separated by the partition plate portion 338, and the flow paths do not merge. However, in the sorting device 6300 of the sixth embodiment, a merged flow path 6341 extending rightward from the downstream side of the curved protrusion 334b on the left is connected to the third flow path forming portion 336 on the right. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 113 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in Figure 15. As shown in Figure 113, the flow path on the right side of the sorting device 6300 is formed from flow path components 334 to 336, similar to the first embodiment.

On the other hand, the left flow path of the sorting device 6300 is formed from a merging flow path 6341 that extends in a straight line to the right from a point on the front side of the curved protrusion 334b with a space for one ball, and this merging flow path 6341 is connected to the third flow path component 336 as the right flow path. Therefore, in this embodiment, the balls flowing down the right flow path and the balls flowing down the left flow path merge at the connection point JP1 where the flow paths are connected, and the balls may collide with each other.

The merging flow path 6341 has a raised floor 6342 at the lower end of the flow path. The raised floor 6342 is formed as a floor surface at a position higher than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path component 336. This allows a difference in height between the balls flowing from the merging flow path 6341 to the connection point JP1 and the balls flowing down the right flow path and into the third flow path component 336, thereby reducing the degree of backflow that occurs when the balls collide with each other.

The contact between the balls at the connection point JP1 can delay the flow of the balls compared to when the balls do not contact each other. This makes it possible to change the time it takes for a ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see Figure 16) to reach the branch point BP1 depending on whether the balls contact each other or not.

The operation timing of the sliding displacement member 370 is set to a constant operation from the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b, regardless of the ball's entry state, so by changing the timing at which the ball reaches the branch point BP1, it is possible to make the ball reach the branch point BP1 when the sliding displacement member 370 is in a different position.

The premise for balls to come into contact with each other is that the balls merge and that there are balls flowing down the merging flow path 6341. If the player wants to make contact between the balls, he or she can play by adjusting the firing strength so that the balls enter each of the pair of ball passing holes 163b on the left and right (see Figure 74). If the player wants to avoid contact between the balls, he or she can play by adjusting the firing strength so that the balls enter only the ball passing hole 163b on one side (the right side).

According to this embodiment, adjusting the ball launch strength is related to whether or not the ball makes contact at the connection point JP1, and is related to the state of the slide displacement member 370 at the time the ball reaches the branch point BP1, so it directly affects the player's profits. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to adjust the ball launch strength.

In addition, according to this embodiment, contact at the connection point JP1 is closely related to the formation of a series of balls. In other words, two balls that come into contact at the connection point JP1 can be made to flow down to the branch point BP1 while being placed close to each other.

Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 114 and 115. In the first embodiment, the case was described where the flow path to the branch point BP1 was only the flow path formed by the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336, but the sorting device 7300 of the seventh embodiment is configured so that the balls can flow down to the branch point BP1 without passing through the first flow path configuration part 334 and the second flow path configuration part 335. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 114 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, and Figure 115 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 7300 taken along line CXV-CXV in Figure 114. As shown in Figures 114 and 115, the sorting device 7300 has a ball passing hole 7163b formed in an opening at approximately the center in the left-right direction in addition to the ball passing hole 163b as a path through which balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a can pass.

The ball passage hole 7163b is formed as a ball passage opening for the detection sensor SE71, which has the same function as the detection sensor SE1, which is used to detect balls entering the variable winning device 65 and to detect the timing to change the state of the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state when a specified number of balls have entered.

A cylindrical flow path 7164 is disposed downstream of the ball passing hole 7163b, and extends with a rectangular cylindrical cross section in a direction that slopes downward toward the rear. The cylindrical flow path 7164 is formed large enough to allow balls to flow down inside, and its end portion extends to the upper front side of the branch point BP1. In other words, the ball that passes through the ball passing hole 7163b is configured to flow down inside the cylindrical flow path 7164 and reach the branch point BP1.

The length of time required for the ball to pass through the cylindrical flow path 7164 is set to be shorter than the length of time required for the ball to pass through the flow path components 334-336, and is set to be equal to the length of time required for the ball to pass through the first flow path component 334.

Therefore, for example, when the sorting device 7300 is driven and controlled with the above-mentioned operation pattern Y (see FIG. 25), as described above, a ball that passes through the ball passing hole 163b and passes through the flow path configuration parts 334-336 can only reach the branch point BP1 after the slide displacement member 370 has returned to its front position, whereas a ball that passes through the ball passing hole 7163b and flows down the cylindrical flow path 7164 may reach the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position.

In particular, a ball that passes through the ball passage hole 7163b immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b changes to the open state is likely to reach the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position.

In other words, even if the driving control pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is the same, the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a can be configured to pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or not depending on whether the ball passes through the ball passing hole 163b or the ball passing hole 7163b. This can improve the player's attention to the flow of the ball inside the specific winning opening 65a.

As shown in FIG. 114, the cylindrical flow path 7164 is positioned to prevent the cylindrical flow path 7164 from reducing the visibility of the branch point BP1, the sliding displacement member 370, and the flow path components 334-336 when viewed from a general viewing direction during play.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the visibility of the branch point BP1 is maintained high, while the number of flow paths through which the ball is guided to the branch point BP1 is increased, which increases the variety of the length of time it takes for the ball to reach the branch point BP1, thereby improving the player's attention to the specific winning port 65a.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116. In the first embodiment, the long guide hole 616 of the first operating unit 600 connects the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b at one location, and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connecting position to switch the displacement direction of the axis O1. In the first operating unit 8600 of the eighth embodiment, the long guide hole 8616 is connected at multiple locations (two locations), and the path of the axis O1 is bent at the connecting position to switch the displacement direction of the displacement direction O1. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 116 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 8616 and the rotating member 620 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in Figure 116, the guide elongated hole 8616 is bent twice to the left and right below the linear portion 616a.

That is, the guide slot 8616 includes a straight portion 616a, a first curved portion 8616b connected to the lower end of the straight portion 616a and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape), and a second curved portion 8616c connected to the lower end of the first curved portion 8616b and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape) whose center of curvature radius is opposite to that of the first curved portion 8616b.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the axis O1 is positioned at the lower end position of the straight portion 616a, i.e., at the connection between the straight portion 616a and the first curved portion 8616b, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched, and the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (slowed down).

In addition, when the axis O1 is positioned at the lower end of the first curved portion 8616b, i.e., at the connection between the first curved portion 8616b and the second curved portion 8616c, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched, and the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (slowed down).

In this way, since it is possible to configure multiple intermediate positions at which it is easy to stop the axis O1, it is possible to increase the variety (variations) of stopping postures of the second decorative rotating member 660 (see Figure 43) that is stopped midway by stopping the axis O1 midway.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 117. In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 of the first operating unit 600 is configured with a single path. However, in the first operating unit 9600 of the ninth embodiment, the guide slot 9616 has a first path configured with a straight portion 616a and a curved portion 616b, and a second path connected to the right side of the first path. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figure 117 is a front schematic diagram showing the relationship between the guide elongated hole 9616 and the rotating member 620 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in Figure 117, the guide elongated hole 9616 has a straight portion 616a and a curved portion 616b like the guide elongated hole 616 in the first embodiment, and also has an angle maintaining portion 9616c that extends obliquely to the right from the connection point between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, and a connection portion 9616d that extends from the right end of the angle maintaining portion 9616c toward the curved portion 616b and is connected to a midpoint of the curved portion 616b.

The angle maintaining portion 9616c is formed in the same direction as the displacement trajectory of the axis O1 when it is assumed that the axis O1 is displaced while maintaining the angle θ when the rotating member 620 is rotated in the tilting direction from a state in which the axis O1 is disposed at the connection point between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b (see Figures 43 and 44).

In this way, the angle θ is maintained while the axis O1 is displaced through the angle maintaining portion 9616c, so the rotational orientation of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is maintained in such a manner that the third performance surface 661c faces forward (see Figure 43).

In other words, when the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining portion 9616c as the rotating member 620 rotates and displaces, the rotational mode of the box-shaped member 661, which rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction, is such that the third performance surface 661c can maintain a position facing forward over the formation length (formation angle width) of the angle maintaining portion 9616c.

When the axis O1 is displaced at the connecting portion 9616d, the change in angle θ accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620 is permitted, so the box-shaped member 661 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620.

On the other hand, even if the tilt angle of the rotating member 620 is the same, the magnitude of the angle θ when the axis O1 is positioned on the curved portion 616b is different from the magnitude of the angle θ when the axis O1 is positioned on the connecting portion 9616d. Therefore, by making the path along which the axis O1 is displaced different between the left and right, it is possible to make the intermediate posture of the box-shaped member 661 that is linked to the rotation of the rotating member 620 different.

In addition, regardless of whether the path along which the axis O1 moves is to the left or right, there is only one angle θ when the axis O1 is located at the upper end of the range of possible displacement, and one angle θ when the axis O1 is located at the lower end, so the position of the box-shaped member 661 can be maintained when the axis O1 is located at the upper or lower end of the range of possible displacement (see Figures 40 and 45).

In other words, in this embodiment, when the axis O1 is positioned between the ends (midway position) of the displaceable range, it is possible to generate multiple types of arrangements of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 (see Figures 43 and 44) related to the arrangement of the axis O1, and multiple types of displacement speeds of the supported member 640 and rotation speeds of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 related to the displacement speed of the axis O1.

The guide slot 9616 is merely configured with multiple paths and does not have a mechanism for limiting the path along which the axis O1 can be displaced. This makes it possible to avoid malfunctions caused by a malfunction of the path limiting mechanism and to reduce product costs by simplifying the configuration.

On the other hand, the branching of the displacement path of the axis O1 can be controlled by the direction of the load applied to the axis O1 via the rotating member 620. This will be explained below. First, the case where the rotating member 620 is rotated and displaced in the tilting direction will be explained.

First, when the axis O1 is displaced along the left path (straight line portion 616a and curved line portion 616b), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is controlled so that the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 does not stop midway.

In this case, the axis O1 enters the curved portion 616b due to the inertia of the displacement along the direction in which the straight portion 616a extends (the up-down direction), and displaces to the lower end position of the guide slot 9616.

Secondly, when the axis O1 is displaced along the right path (angle maintaining portion 9616c and connecting portion 9616d), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is driven and controlled to stop or decelerate the rotating member 620 when the axis O1 is positioned at the connecting point of the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b, and then the drive motor 631 is driven and controlled again in the same direction.

In this case, the inertia of the displacement along the direction in which the straight portion 616a extends (the up-down direction) is reduced, so the choice of whether the axis O1 will displace along the left path or the right path is made based on the side with less displacement resistance.

Here, when the axis O1 enters the angle maintaining portion 9616c, the magnitude of the angle θ is maintained, so there is no need to transmit the driving force to the intermediate gear 644 (see FIG. 44) that rotates in mesh with the rotating member 620, or to a member downstream of the intermediate gear 644 in the transmission of the driving force. In other words, because there is less displacement resistance, the axis O1 can enter the angle maintaining portion 9616b side.

In this way, in this embodiment, in drive control of the tilting direction of the rotating member 620, the drive motor 631 can be controlled to stop midway or not, allowing the path along which the axis O1 is displaced to be selected.

When the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction, the axis O1 receives a load from the rotating member 620 in the diagonal upper right direction, so that the axis O1 is unlikely to be displaced so as to enter the connecting portion 9616d, and the axis O1 can be displaced upward along the curved portion 616b.

In this embodiment, the connection point between the connecting portion 9616d and the curved portion 616b is set at a midpoint of the curved portion 616b, so that the right side surface of the curved portion 616b is formed as a surface that slopes upward and to the left and is located to the upper right of the axis O1, which is located at the bottom end position of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, when the axis O1 is positioned at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from displacing upward (bouncing back) along a circle centered on the circular through hole 624.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is in no way limited to the above embodiment, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with some or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the balls are first caused to flow toward the front by the sorting device 300, and then flow backwards, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, it is also possible to ensure the time required for the balls to flow downward by forming multiple bends in the path or a deceleration protrusion that decelerates the balls, without forming a portion that causes the balls to flow toward the front.

In the above first embodiment, the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 is described as being curved, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and any shape can be used as long as it can block the flow of balls by contact. For example, it may be configured as an inclined flat surface, or may be formed with many small protrusions protruding from a flat surface, so that an irregular load is applied to the colliding ball.

In the above first embodiment, a ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a flows down the sorting device 300 primarily through the flow path components 334 to 336 in order, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, an opening penetrating downwards may be formed in the center of the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, allowing the ball to flow directly into the third flow path component 336 through this opening.

For example, when balls enter one at a time, they do not pass through the opening, but when multiple balls enter the specific winning opening 65a together, the balls may be configured to pass through the opening. In this case, the time it takes for the balls to reach the sliding displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a pass through the opening or not.

In the first embodiment, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning opening 65a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path configuration section 335. In this case, the order of the first flow path configuration section 334 and the second flow path configuration section 335 may be reversed. In other words, when the ball enters the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, the branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the left and right directions, or the branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the front and back directions (flowing down toward the front side).

In the first embodiment, the flow path direction and inclination of each flow path component 334-336 were described as features of the sorting device 300 alone, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when installing the pachinko machine 10 on an island, the flow path direction and inclination may be designed taking into account the "laying down" that is performed on a daily basis.

"Laying down" refers to installing the pachinko machine 10 in a tilted position in the front-to-rear direction, rather than in a vertical position. Normally, pachinko machines are installed in a position (laying down) tilted backwards by about 1 degree (four-five rin). Compared to the explanation of the sorting device 300 alone (not laying down) above, when considering an installation angle of about 1 degree, the meaning of the inclination of the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 336, which have a tilt in the front-to-rear direction, changes.

In other words, as described above, the sorting device 300 alone is designed so that the first flow path component 334 is inclined downward from the horizontal by 7 degrees to the front, and the third flow path component 336 is inclined downward from the horizontal by 5 degrees to the rear, but when the installation angle is considered, both the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 form flow paths that are inclined downward by 6 degrees. On the other hand, the second flow path component 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, so it is less affected by the installation angle and can be considered to be inclined at about 5 degrees, as described above.

In this case, the acceleration of the balls flowing down through the sorting device 300 is the same in the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336, and the acceleration is slightly smaller in the second flow path component 335. This allows the speed at which the balls flow down in the left and right directions to be slowed down, making it easier for the player to see the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335. Also, since the first flow path component 334 remains shorter than the third flow path component 336, the balls can pass through the first flow path component 334 in a shorter time than they pass through the third flow path component 336.

In this way, the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the laying of the pachinko machine 10 because it has flow paths in the front-to-rear direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each flow path component 334, 336 is made smaller than the laying angle (approximately 1 degree), the flow direction of the balls in the flow path components 334, 336 will change (reverse) depending on the quality of the laying (angle setting), so the inclination angle needs to be set to an angle larger than the laying angle.

In addition, if the flow path inside the sorting device 300 is configured to allow the balls to flow in the forward and backward directions and is visible, it may be possible to determine the degree of tilt of the pachinko machine 10 from slight differences in the flow speed of the balls flowing down the path. If it is desired to allow the degree of tilt to be determined, the sorting device 300 should be configured so that the flow path is easily visible.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, in order to prevent the degree of "rest" from being understood from slight differences in the speed at which the ball flows down, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are arranged to surround the front periphery of each flow path component 334-336, the variable winning device 65 is arranged to cover the upper side, and the light diffusion surface 340 is arranged to reduce visibility on the lower side.

In this way, the visibility of the balls flowing down each flow path component 334-336 is made poor except at the player's normal line of sight (a range of 0 degrees to approximately 30 degrees from the front). This makes it possible to avoid the degree of "rest" of the pachinko machine 10 being understood by comparing the flow speed of the balls flowing down each flow path component 334-336.

In the first embodiment, the inclination of the first flow path component 334 is greater than the inclination of the third flow path component 336, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the relationship of the inclinations may be reversed, or the inclinations may be the same.

In addition, each of the flow path configuration sections 334 to 336 has been described as a straight flow path that is bent to form a spiral flow path, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may have a meandering shape, or may have a flow path that is bent in a staircase shape.

In addition, although the flow paths are configured to be bent at right angles at the connection points of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow paths may be bent at acute angles or obtuse angles at the connection points. Also, a crane may be used as each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336.

In the above first embodiment, the third flow path component 336 is designed so that the time required for a ball to pass through it is 0.3 seconds, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the third flow path component 336 may be designed so that the time required for the ball to pass through it is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). This allows the balls flowing upstream down the third flow path component 336 to function as a screen for the balls flowing downstream down the third flow path component 336, even if the balls enter the sorting device 300 while maintaining the launch interval (0.6 seconds).

In the first embodiment, the flow time of the ball is ensured by ensuring the path length of the flow path components 334-336, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, it is also possible to provide long, alternating ridges that protrude from both inner walls of the path up to the slide displacement member 370 in a direction that intersects with the flow direction of the game ball, and to configure the ball to decelerate by colliding with these ridges. This makes it possible to ensure the flow time of the ball without increasing the path length.

The deceleration ridges may be evenly arranged over the entire range of the path up to the slide displacement member 370, or may be unevenly arranged. For example, by forming no ridges on the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 335, and forming ridges only on the third flow path component 336, the balls can be made to quickly reach the third flow path component 336 while flowing slowly down the third flow path component 336.

The protrusions may be provided in a direction such that they protrude alternately from the left and right directions toward the inside of the path along the ball's flow path, or they may be provided in a direction that protrudes upward from the bottom at a specified interval.

When protruding from the left and right, the load applied to the ball from the protrusion has a left and right component, so it is preferable to consider the placement so that this load does not erroneously guide the ball to the normal detection sensor SE12. For example, at the position closest to the sliding displacement member 370, by protruding from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inner portions, the load from the protrusions is directed not toward the normal detection sensor SE12 but toward the partition plate portion 338, making it easier to avoid the ball being erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

When protruding from below to above, the protrusion itself may function as a screen for the sliding displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the formation height and formation position taking into account the player's line of sight.

The protrusions may be formed so that they can move in and out. In this case, they may be able to block the flow of the ball when in the protruding state, and resume the flow of the ball when in the retracted state.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the slide displacement member 370 is covered by the balls flowing down the front side is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be placed in front of the sorting device 300, and the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 may be covered by this decorative member. This decorative member may be driven, or may be operated by the weight of the balls.

In addition, the case where the ball provides a screen is not limited to the case where the ball is placed on the front side. For example, if a mirror is placed on the back side of the sliding displacement member 370 and the state of the sliding displacement member 370 is visually confirmed using the reflection of the mirror, the screen function can be achieved by placing the ball between the sliding displacement member 370 and the mirror.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which the balls that reach the slide displacement member 370 are concealed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning opening 64 may be positioned behind the play area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning opening 64 may be concealed, or the other general winning openings 63 may be concealed.

In the above first embodiment, the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 are described as being formed from linear flow paths capable of guiding balls one by one, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be formed as meandering flow paths, or flow paths that branch into multiple paths, or they may be configured to have different flow path widths, with balls more likely to remain in the areas where the flow path width is large.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which a blindfolding effect is created by the balls heading toward the slide displacement member 370, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging balls that have entered the other winning holes 63, 64, 65, and 140 may be arranged in front of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, arranged so as to intersect at the front side), and the slide displacement member 370 may be blindfolded by the discharge path and the balls arranged on the discharge path.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which balls that enter the specific winning port 65a flow exclusively through the first flow path component 334 to the second flow path component 335 side (the near side), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism that distributes balls may be disposed downstream of the specific winning port 65a, and the distribution mechanism may select balls that flow to the second flow path component 335 side, so that some of the balls flow to the second flow path component 335 side.

The distribution mechanism may be one that is displaced by the weight of the balls, or may be driven by a drive device to perform a certain operation from the opening and closing of the opening and closing plate 65b, or may be controlled to operate in a certain pattern from the power-on of the pachinko machine.

When controlling the drive, for example, the balls may be controlled to flow to the second flow path component 335 side when the type of winning ball changes. For example, when a ball enters a specific winning port 65a and the number of balls that enter exceeds the count number (10 balls/round) (excess winning), the balls may be configured to flow to the second flow path component 335 side. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 side can be compared with the number of excess winning balls paid out, allowing the player to quickly grasp the additional profit that can be obtained. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

Also, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows down the distribution device 300, if a ball enters when the number of reserved special symbols 1 is four (full), the ball may be configured to flow to the second flow path configuration section 335 side. In this case, by visually checking the ball flowing on the second flow path configuration section 335 side, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols 1 is full. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

If the displacement is caused by the weight of the ball, a predetermined action may be repeated each time a ball arrives, or it may be configured to perform a different action depending on the number of arriving balls. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the balls may not flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335, and when two or more balls enter the specific winning openings 65a together, the balls may flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335. The reverse may also be possible.

Furthermore, these operating modes may be the same downstream of the detection sensors SE1 arranged in a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right.

Here, if it takes a long time for the balls to flow down from the specific winning opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370, the long ball discharge time may result in the game being drawn out. For this reason, for example, the above-mentioned distribution mechanism may be used to cause the first certain balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a to flow down the second flow path configuration part 335, and subsequent balls may be discharged without passing through the second flow path configuration part 335. This eliminates the need to wait for the count number of balls to finish flowing down the flow path configuration parts 334-336, and therefore the length between rounds can be set to be short.

In the first embodiment, the distribution device 300 is disposed below the third pattern display device 81, and the balls are directed toward the front near the bottom end of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the specific winning port 65a may be disposed above the bottom edge of the third pattern display device 81, and the flow path components 334-336 of the distribution device 300 may be disposed adjacent to the third pattern display device 81 or toward the front of the display area when viewed from the front.

In this case, the line of sight for viewing the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 can be directed toward the display area of the third pattern display device 81. In this case, by associating the amount of profit the player can obtain from the flow of the balls down the sorting device 300 with the content of the notification on the LCD display, the player can easily know whether the profit he or she has obtained is large or small by checking the display.

In addition, although a case has been described in which the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 are seen in a position shifted downward in front view with respect to the balls rolling on the third flow path component 336, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 may be configured in an arrangement relationship such that they are seen overlapping, without being shifted up or down in front view with respect to the balls rolling on the third flow path component 336. In this case, not only the balls that have entered the sorting device 300, but also the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 can function as a screen for the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336.

In the above first embodiment, the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370 is described as switching the slide displacement member 370 to the front position at a time when the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a cannot reach it, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to switch to the front position 1.2 seconds after the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the forward flow ball that reaches the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds have passed can be made to enter the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that follows the forward flow ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds has passed will enter the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

If the trailing ball is positioned to blind the forward flow ball, the player will not be able to see when the forward flow ball's flow changes (downward) toward the special chance detection sensor SE11, because the trailing ball will hide it. Furthermore, since the trailing ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, the player is likely to believe that the ball has not entered the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ball has not entered the through-hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, which improves the presentation effect of the display in gaming machines that maintain the player's sense of anticipation by displaying the time-saving state and the probability variation state in the same way.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which a ball that collides with the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not flow to the normal detection sensor SE12 side due to the load caused by the collision alone, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flow path upstream of the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured so that the speed and rotation of the ball before being guided to the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured in multiple types (for example, by arranging a crane or widening the path width to increase the freedom of the ball's flow direction), and it can be configured so that the ball can be guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 due to the load caused by the collision with the left and right inner protrusions 318 alone depending on the difference in the speed and rotation of the ball.

In the above first embodiment, the sliding displacement member 370 and each of the protruding portions 317 to 319 are formed as separate bodies, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the protruding portions 317 to 319 may be formed integrally with the sliding displacement member 370. In other words, at least one of the protruding portions 317 to 319 may protrude from the upper protruding portion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is described as operation pattern Y, which takes into account the possibility of being hidden by the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to incorporate control that causes the LED of the light-emitting means 351 to emit light when it is hidden by the ball.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed by the shape of the guide slot 616 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width length of the guide slot 616 to form an external phase of the gap, or the displacement resistance may be changed by using magnetic force or the biasing force of a coil spring.

In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 is configured to have a shape that is bent at an intermediate position, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slot may be configured to have a shape that is bent multiple times. In this case, multiple positions can be formed where the resistance to the vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

The shape of the guide slot 616 may also be designed for the purpose of varying the magnitude of the change in angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620. For example, the guide slot 616 may be formed in a shape capable of guiding the supported member 640 so as to partially form a range in which the magnitude of the angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620 can be maintained.

In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 is fixed, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a plurality of guide slots 616 may be formed through which the axis O1 can move, and the guide slot 616 through which the axis O1 is guided may be switched by a predetermined switching means (for example, another driving device or a button-type switching device that is switched by contacting the rotating member 620), or the guide slot 616 may be configured to be shape-changeable.

In the first embodiment described above, a configuration was described in which the first performance surface 661a faces diagonally forward and left when the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned to the right of the third pattern display device 81, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the performance surface may be configured to face diagonally forward and right when positioned to the left of the third pattern display device 81, or the performance surface may be configured to face diagonally forward and upward (downward) when positioned below (upper) the third pattern display device 81.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is arranged at the base end of the displacement, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and a linearly displaceable member may be arranged at the base end of the displacement. On the other hand, using the rotating member 620 instead of a linearly displaceable member functions favorably in ensuring the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 and the protruding decorative portion 652b.

For example, when a laterally sliding member is fixed to the driven side of the supported member 640, the angles that affect the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are limited to angles above the horizontal (angle a1, etc.). In contrast, when the rotating member 620 is used, not only angles above the horizontal but also angles below the horizontal (angle b1, etc.) can be used. Regardless of this advantageous effect, a linearly sliding member may be connected to the driven side of the supported member 640.

In the above first embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped, and decorations are applied to three sides that intersect at right angles, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed with a pentagonal cross section, and each side may be configured to be controlled to stop in a position facing forward.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch between displays that are easily viewed as one with the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700.

In the first embodiment, the rotation axis of the rotating member 620 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can intersect at a right angle, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 may be configured with a component in the front-to-rear direction as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the above first embodiment, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is set to make it easier to maintain the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet may be arranged near the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and this magnet may be configured to generate an adhesive force between itself and a magnet arranged on the right front plate member 710, so that this adhesive force is easily generated when the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state.

In addition, for example, the inclined portions 751, 762 may be formed in a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape, rather than being formed linearly. In addition, when using the coil spring CS2, the spring is not limited to a spring that generates a biasing force only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, and may be configured to generate a biasing force in response to the extension displacement of the coil spring CS2.

In the above first embodiment, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c are elastically deformed to maintain the position of the shaft rotating member 785 until the attractive force of the magnet Mg is exceeded, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of elastic deformation of the gear, a tolerance may be set for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support tube that supports the shaft.

In the first embodiment, the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the front side from the rear end of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may protrude forward by downward displacement. In this case, it may go beyond the upper edge of the center frame 86 from below to the front, or it may protrude forward from above the play area (for example, above the front frame 14).

In the first embodiment described above, the rotation of the covering member 787 is in the opposite direction, so that the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 are not visible together, thereby reducing the distinguishing ability, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 may rotate facing outward to the left and right, rather than facing the front side. Also, even if they rotate in the same direction, they may be configured to rotate at different rotation angles.

In the first embodiment described above, the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800 are configured to rotate (reverse) the shaft rotating member 785 and the rotating member 834 using the rotation angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in a single stroke in the metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834 and a protruding piece protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotation timing of the rotating member 834 can be determined depending on the design of the groove.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which control is performed such that it is determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation when the output of the detection sensor 813 changes from a state in which the detectable portion 844 is arranged on the detection sensor 813, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the drive direction of the drive motor 861 is reversed with the detectable portion 844 not arranged on the detection sensor 813, it may be determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation by detecting that the detectable portion 844 has entered the detection sensor 813.

In the first embodiment, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are configured to differ in places, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be disposed on both decorative members 870 and 880, or both decorative members 870 and 880 may be plated.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by providing a torque limiter 866, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that generates viscous resistance may be provided. Note that in the case of an oil damper, resistance continues to be generated at all times regardless of switching of the operating mode, so a torque limiter can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotation direction after the operating mode is switched to the integral rotation operation, making it easier to achieve high-speed rotation after switching to the integral rotation operation.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plating portion 871a has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. During the integral rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833. However, when the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the tip side (outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 during the switching rotation operation, the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 is exposed, so that the light LD1 can be reflected.

In the first embodiment described above, the lower bottom surface of the third flow path component 336 is inclined downward to the left and right inward, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the first flow path component 334 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left and right direction, or may be configured to be inclined downward to the left and right inward. The former is more effective at reducing the momentum of the ball toward the second flow path component 335 than the latter.

In addition, for example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the second flow path component 335 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) in the front-to-rear direction, or may be configured to be inclined downward toward the rear. The former is more effective at reducing the momentum of the ball toward the third flow path component 336 than the latter.

In addition, although the third flow path component 336 has been described as having a rolling surface (bottom surface) that slopes downward inward in the left-right direction, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path component 336 may be configured to be non-sloping in the left-right direction (parallel to the horizontal plane). In this case, the degree to which the balls are biased toward the partition plate portion 338 decreases, so the degree of damage to the partition plate portion 338 due to collisions and friction with the balls can be kept low.

In the first embodiment, the optical axis of the outer light-emitting means 351d is arranged outside the trajectory of the ball passing through the branching point, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the optical axis of the outer light-emitting means 351d may be configured to pass inside the trajectory of the ball passing through the branching point (by lowering the arrangement position). In this case, when the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned on, the ball passing through the branching point overlaps with the optical axis of the outer light-emitting means 351d, so that the light can be configured to be reflected to the back side, and a state in which the light does not reach the light diffusion surface 333b (dark state) can be achieved.

In other words, the outer light-emitting means 351d remains lit, and the manner in which the ball flows down at the branching point can be correlated with the brightness of the light diffusion surface 333b (and the light diffusion surfaces 314c and 340 illuminated by the light diffused from the light diffusion surface 333b). Since each of the light diffusion surfaces 314c, 333b, and 340 has a larger area (projected area) at the player's line of sight than the ball, the player can easily grasp the manner in which the ball flows down at the branching point.

In the above first embodiment, the timing for controlling the illumination of the light emitting means 351 was described as during a jackpot game, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination may be controlled due to the detection of a win in the winning slots 63, 64, 140, etc., or due to an input operation of the frame button 22, or due to the occurrence of a win exceeding a prescribed number (the number of winning balls that determines the end of a round of play in a jackpot game, the maximum number of pending changes based on balls entering the winning slots 64, 140).

In the above first embodiment, if the operation of the sliding displacement member 370 is defective, the assembly position of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is defective, and therefore, by checking the operation of the sliding displacement member 370, the quality of the assembly of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 can be determined during the manufacturing stage. However, this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a detection sensor that detects the position of the sliding displacement member 370 may be provided to detect the operation of the sliding displacement member 370 during operation. In this case, if the positional relationship between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 becomes misaligned due to repeated operation or the influence of some external force, even if this does not appear during the manufacturing stage, the occurrence of the misalignment can be determined by the malfunction of the sliding displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 that switches the direction of the ball flow at the branch point BP1 is a linear displacement in the forward and backward directions, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a rotational movement (e.g., a roulette type), or a shape that makes the ball flow irregularly (e.g., a funnel-shaped crane) may be provided so that the ball can flow in multiple directions.

In the first embodiment, the distribution device 300 is used as a device for switching whether the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be used as a device for guiding the ball to the starting winning port (winning port 64, 140), or as a device for guiding the ball to the specific winning port 65a, or as a device for guiding the ball to other winning ports or winning areas.

In the first embodiment, the sorting device 300 is placed in the lower corner of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sorting device 300 may be placed in the upper corner of the play area (e.g., above the center frame 86), or in the left or right corner (outside the left or right edges of the center frame 86), or in the center of the play area. For example, when placed in the upper corner of the play area, the line of sight of the player looking at the sorting device 300 is inclined diagonally upward from the horizontal plane, so the downstream balls can be configured to hide the upstream balls in the flow path portion that slopes downward toward the front side.

In addition, the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 may be configured to have a structure with an inclination that is reversed front to back, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged near the fixed member 161.

In the above first embodiment, the shape of the window portion 162d is described as being designed based on the shape of the flow path configuration portions 335, 336 in a front view and the arrangement of the seal member 313, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be such that the slide displacement member 370 (only) is visible from the player's line of sight (viewed diagonally downward), or the shape may be such that the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is reduced. Also, the shape may be such that the slide displacement member 370 is visible from either the front or rear position and not visible from the other.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the flow path components 334 to 336 are configured as a pair on the left and right sides so that they do not merge, which reduces the number of balls that enter one flow path (disperses the balls), making it easier to avoid ball clogging, while allowing the sliding displacement member 370 to switch the paths of any of the balls that have passed through each flow path.

In this regard, the shape of the window portion 162d may be such that only one of the pair of left and right components of the slide displacement member 370 (e.g., ball guide portion 371b, upper protrusion portion 376) is visible and the other is not. In this case, the player can predict the path of the ball on the side that is not visible, which increases the player's interest.

In the above first embodiment, the displacement direction of the sliding displacement member 370 from the state where the ball can land on the ball guiding portion 371b is set to the backward direction (the forward direction of the ball's travel direction flowing down the third flow path component 336), and the sliding suppresses the ball's forward rotation, thereby suppressing the amount of rotation just before the ball falls, making it appear to the player that the ball is temporarily stopped, but this is not necessarily limited to the above.

For example, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from a state in which the ball can rest on the ball guide portion 371b may be configured to be a forward direction (the opposite direction to the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336).

That is, the ball guide portion 371b is displaced forward, and the ball guide portion 371b enters the lower side of the third flow path component 336, thereby enabling the probability change detection sensor SE11 to be opened. The upper protrusion portion 376 is constructed separately from the ball guide portion 371b, and is positioned so that it protrudes toward the branch point BP1 side when the ball can land on the ball guide portion 371b. When the ball guide portion 371b is displaced to a state where the ball cannot land on it, the upper protrusion portion 376 displaces in the opposite direction at the same time as the displacement of the ball guide portion 371b, ensuring a passage for the ball to the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In this case, the ball's forward rotation can be accelerated by the sliding of the ball guide portion 371b against the ball as it slides, increasing the amount of rotation just before the ball falls, making it appear to the player that the ball has fallen instantly (smoothly).

In the first embodiment described above, the rotating member 620 is controlled in such a way that the power supply to the drive motor 631 is cut off when the extension portion 634b is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, taking into consideration the inertial load applied to the rotating member 620 after the power supply to the drive motor 631 is cut off, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the detection sensor KS1 detects that the extension portion 634b is placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, the drive power of the drive motor 631 may be reduced and the drive motor 631 may be rotated weakly for a short period of time before being stopped. This allows the rotating member 620 to reliably reach the displacement end position (the position for the performance standby state).

In the above first embodiment, the grooves of the front-upper inclined portions 714, 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 of the second operating unit 700 are described as being made up of straight inclined grooves, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by making the grooves have a partial curve, such as curving forward at the lower end, the displacement of the performance device 780 can be a displacement mode that combines up-down sliding displacement, forward-backward sliding displacement, and forward-backward posture displacement.

The grooves of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 may have various shapes. For example, they may be V-shaped (or inverted V-shaped) when viewed from the left and right, or may be curved in an S-shape.

In the above first embodiment, the reversing operation of the second operating unit 700 is described as being performed by delaying the start timing of the reversing operation using magnetic force, thereby displacing the members to avoid collision between each other (for example, the main body member 771 and the covering member 787, the drive motor 782 and the covering member 787), but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a design method may be used that avoids collision between the components by setting the number of gears between the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785.

In the above first embodiment, the second operating unit 700 is described as being in an extended state at the upper end position, with the tip of the pivot arm member 720 positioned at a left-right position that coincides with the left-right center of the performance device 780, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by positioning the tip of the pivot arm member 720 to the right of the left-right center of the performance device 780, a long support position distance can be ensured between the metal bar 702 supporting the left side of the lifting plate member 740 and the pivot arm member 720 supporting the right side of the lifting plate member 740. This allows the lifting plate member 740 to be stably supported.

In the above third operating unit 800, the bulge 824a is configured as a part that remains unchanged in shape and is visible to the player regardless of whether the decorative members 870, 880 are in an individual combined state or a combined state, and in both the individual combined state and the combined state, the bulge 824a is visible to the player as a part (central part). This explains the case where the bulge 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885 are designed to have shapes that minimize discomfort with each other, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a display device (segment display device or liquid crystal display device) may be disposed in a positional relationship in which the display unit is disposed in front of the bulge portion 824a. In this case, unlike when the visibility of the bulge portion 824a is changed by changing the irradiation mode (brightness or color) of the light from the inner light-emitting portion 823a, the object visible in the bulge portion 824a can be changed by switching the display mode of the display unit, thereby improving the freedom of presentation.

Also, for example, the shape of the covering portion 875, 885 of either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 may be redesigned to extend toward the center of the circular shape in the combined state, and the extended portion may be configured to cover the bulge portion 824a. In this case, in either the individual combined state or the combined state, the bulge portion 824a can be hidden so that it is not visible to the player, thereby reducing the degree of restriction on the design freedom of the bulge portion 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885.

In the first embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is described as having multiple decorative members 870, 880 that are attracted to each other by magnetic force, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the combined state may be maintained by a load caused by a concave-convex engagement, or the combined state may be maintained by the biasing force of a spring member.

In the above first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is realized by setting the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 of the third operating unit 800 to be smaller than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by adopting an operating mode that creates momentum, the switching rotation operation can be realized even when the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 is equal to or greater than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866.

As an example of an operation mode that creates momentum, rotation control in the reverse direction may be used as a preparatory operation (preparatory movement). In this case, a reaction force can be applied to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880, and a load can be generated in a direction that throws the intermediate arm member 850 radially outward from the position in the combined state. This makes it easier to release the magnetic attraction.

In the first embodiment, as a measure to suppress wobbling during the switching rotation operation of the third operating unit 800, a case was described in which the decorative members 870, 880 are configured to cause radial displacement before the reversing operation, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the magnet Mg2 is configured to be arranged so that the line of action of the magnetic force can be written on the plane on which the metal rod 832 as the rotation axis of the reversing operation is arranged, even if the reversing operation occurs before the radial displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 from the combined state, the magnetic force generated between the multiple (five) decorative members 870, 880 occurs on the same plane, so that wobbling generated in the third operating unit 800 during the switching rotation operation can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment described above, the switching rotation operation is configured in such a way that the decorative members 870, 880 are rotated 180 degrees, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be configured to be combined again with a 120-degree rotation operation. In this case, it is possible to perform an action presentation in which the side visible when viewed from the front of the decorative members 870, 880 is the same before and after the switching rotation operation, but the angle at which the covering portions 875, 885 are visible is different (for example, 60 degrees to the right before the operation and 60 degrees to the left after the operation).

In addition, the structure of the multiple intermediate arm members 850 may be configured so that, for example, the lengths are not common, or the formation range or shape of the bevel tooth portion 854c is not common, so that decorative members 870, 880 that reconfigure the combined state by a 180-degree inversion operation and decorative members 870, 880 that reconfigure the combined state by a 120-degree inversion operation coexist in the switching rotation operation. For example, of the five decorative members 870, 880, one decorative member 870, 880 may be configured to be inverted 120 degrees in the switching rotation operation, and the other (four) decorative members 870, 880 may be configured to be inverted 180 degrees in the switching rotation operation.

The angle of the reversal operation in the switching rotation operation can be set arbitrarily. It can be 180 degrees or 120 degrees as mentioned above, or it can be set to 0 degrees, 360 degrees, or any angle between 0 degrees and 360 degrees.

In the first embodiment, the torque limiters 866 are arranged in a pair, one on the left and one on the right, in asymmetric positions above the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, they may be arranged in symmetric positions, both of the pair of torque limiters 866 may be arranged on the left, right or lower side of the outer rotating member 840, or they may be arranged on opposing sides (directly opposite sides) across the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which multiple (five in the first embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 are configured with a common shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shapes of the supported holes 854a and guide holes 854b in which the linear motion members 833 that slide along the metal rod 832 are disposed may be made different, so that the start timing of the sliding displacement along the metal rod 832 differs between the linear motion members 833.

For example, by mixing an intermediate arm member 850 in which the design has been modified to form the supported hole 854a as a long hole or a hole with a large diameter, and the shape of the guide hole 854b has been correspondingly modified, it is possible to provide a difference in the timing at which the linear member 833 starts to move during the switching rotation operation.

This allows the decorative members 870, 880, which are fastened to the rotating member 834 connected to the linear member 833, to have a difference in the timing of their radial outward displacement from the combined state, so that the attracted portions of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 can be separated in the shear direction (radial direction).

In this case, the load required to remove the suction can be reduced, so the driving force required for the drive motor 862 can be reduced and the positioning of the third operating unit 800 can be stabilized.

It is not necessary that the displacement mode that causes displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) in the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 occurs every time. For example, the displacement mode that causes displacement in the shear direction may be configured to occur when a switching rotation operation is performed from the combined state (forward path), but not to occur when the combined state is reached by the switching rotation operation (return path).

For example, by configuring the design of the intermediate arm member 850 so that the displacement mode is different between the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 rotates from the combined state (the state in which the rotating tip is located on the rotating shaft side of the inner rotating member 830) to the state in which the decorative members 870, 880 are located at the outermost diameter position, and the state in which the intermediate arm part i850 rotates from the state in which the decorative members 870, 880 are located at the outermost diameter position to the combined state, it is possible to selectively generate a displacement mode that generates a displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) in the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2.

In the first embodiment, the number of detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, 813 for each operation unit 600, 700, 800 is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of one detection sensor KS1, multiple detection sensors KS1 may be configured to be arranged at positions where they can detect the extension portion 634b, and instead of three detection sensors 713, two or less or four or more detection sensors 713 may be used. Note that an example of the arrangement of the detection sensor KS1 is a position where it can detect the extension portion 634b in the intermediate performance state or the extended state of the first operation unit 600.

Also, for example, only one of the two detection sensors 778d may be used, or instead of one detection sensor 813, multiple detection sensors 813 may be arranged in positions that can detect the detected portion 844. For example, five detection sensors 813 may be arranged at equal intervals on the circumference to determine the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state of the third operating unit 800 in five different ways (five different patterns depending on the direction of rotation).

In the second embodiment above, a case was described in which the ball continues to roll regardless of the position of the slide member 2420, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 in the front position FP and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314 of the upper member 310 may be configured to be the same length as the diameter of the ball. In this case, when the slide member 2420 is in the front position FP, the ball can be sandwiched between the upper surface of the slide member 2420 and the lower surface of the upper surface portion 314, which enhances the deceleration effect of the ball and makes it easier for the ball to become stuck.

In the second embodiment described above, there is no description of forming a protrusion on the inside of the first flow path forming portion 2334, but the first flow path forming portion 2334 may be configured to have a protrusion for decelerating the ball. In this case, the height of the protrusion may be set to a height that abuts either the ball resting on the slide member 2420 in the front position FP or the ball resting on the bottom surface 2334c when the slide member 2420 is in the rear position BP, but does not abut the other. In this case, the deceleration effect of the protrusion can be generated when the slide member 2420 is in either the front position FP state or the rear position BP state.

In the above third embodiment, the sliding displacement member 3370 is described as being formed integrally with the thin plate portion 371 and the upper front protrusion portion 3376b and the upper lateral protrusion portion 3376c, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper front protrusion portion 3376b and the upper lateral protrusion portion 3376c, which are separate members, may appear and disappear in the vertical direction in accordance with the timing at which the thin plate portion 371 is positioned at the front position and the rear position, thereby forming a state in which the ball is abutted and a state in which it is not abutted.

The front-to-rear arrangement of the special chance detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 is not limited in any way, but placing the special chance detection sensor SE11 at the rear, as in this embodiment, makes it easier to avoid erroneous winning into the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In the fourth embodiment, the sliding plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373, and the sliding plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally formed, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, these may be configured as separate members and configured to operate synchronously (linked) by matching the timing. In addition, they may be configured to slide in the forward and backward directions.

In the above fourth embodiment, when the slide members 4371, 4375 slide and displace when the ball passes rearward over the upper surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372, the ball is returned to the front due to the inclination of the upper surface 4376a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional ball entry detection sensor may be arranged behind the slide plate 4372 in the front open state.

In this case, it can be configured so that only the ball that was on the slide plate 4372 when the state changed from the rear open state to the front open state is guided to the additional ball entry detection sensor. The greater the benefit that the player can obtain by the ball entering the additional ball entry detection sensor (for example, the acquisition of multiple jackpots or the acquisition of the right to move to a higher probability state, which is greater than the right obtained by the ball entering the probability change detection sensor SE11), the greater the attention paid to the ball that has passed through the third flow path configuration portion 336.

In the sixth embodiment, the flow path from the raised floor 6342 at the downstream end of the merging flow path 6341 is configured as a flow path along the left-right direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured as a curved flow path with the connection point JP1 side facing backward near the raised floor 6342. This allows both the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the raised floor 6342 and the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the second flow path configuration part 335 to have a backward velocity component, and it is possible to prevent backflow from occurring due to collision between them.

The connection point JP1 may be configured to be located at the center of the left and right of the sorting device 6300. The flow path components 334-336 may also be configured to have a structure with an inclination that is reversed front to back, and the probability change detection sensor SE11 and normal detection sensor SE12 may be configured to be located near the fixed member 161. In this case, it is easier for the balls to gather at the connection point JP1 and then flow down to the front, improving the attention to the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 6300.

In the above ninth embodiment, the guide elongated hole 9616 is configured as a branched elongated hole, and the way in which the axis O1 passes through the guide elongated hole 9616 is changed depending on how a load is applied to the axis O1. However, this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the shape of the guide elongated hole 9616 may be switched. That is, in the guide elongated hole 9616, only the straight portion 616a is always configured as a long hole, and the curved portion 616b, the angle maintaining portion 9616c, and the connecting portion 9616d may be configured to alternate between being configured as a long hole and being blocked. In this case, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced along an incorrect path, and therefore to prevent the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

For example, the long guide hole 9616 having a branch may be configured to include a switching valve that limits the displacement path of the axis O1 by blocking one of the paths. In this case, while the shape of the long guide hole 9616 is fixed, the switching valve can limit the displacement path of the axis O1, preventing the axis O1 from displacing along an incorrect path, thereby preventing the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from displacing in an unintended manner.

<First control example>
Hereinafter, a control example of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to Fig. 118 to Fig. 87, a control example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first control example. Fig. 118 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, Fig. 119 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, Fig. 120 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of a variable winning device 65 provided in the front view area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 118, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 118), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 119) having numerous ball entry ports 63, 64, 640 through which numerous nails and balls can enter is detachably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 137) that launches balls into the front area (game area) of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. The details of the numerous ball entry ports provided on the game board 13 will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 118) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls, which is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top and extends to the front, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 118), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 21). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 119) or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks by lighting or blinking the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 118), is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 119) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 in the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operation handle 51 includes a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the period of pressing, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the rotation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the rotation amount, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, so that the ball is shot into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the operation of the player. In addition, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off. In other words, in this control example, the control device has a launching means for launching the ball into the game area formed on the game board 13, and a launch strength varying means for varying the launch strength based on the rotation amount (rotation position) of the operation handle 51. This allows the player to perform the action of firing a ball using the firing means and the action of varying the firing strength of the ball, simply by operating the operating handle 51. Therefore, the operation of firing a ball toward a specific play area among the play areas formed on the game board 13 can be performed with one hand, and the player can play the game without imposing an excessive burden on him/her.

In this control example, the firing strength is varied based on the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a firing strength selection button may be provided that allows the player to select the firing strength, and the firing means may fire the ball at a firing strength that corresponds to the operation result (selection result) of the firing strength selection button.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 119, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, a general ball entrance 63, a first ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, a variable winning device 65, a normal pattern starter gate (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 118). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can see various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 118) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 119.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 118) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 137) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left of FIG. 119) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of FIG. 119) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

A first pattern display device 37 is provided on the upper left side of the return rubber 69. This first pattern display device 37 is arranged so that it is covered by the back surface (the surface opposite to the surface forming the play area) of the game board 13, which is made of transparent resin (e.g., ABS), and is configured so that the launched ball does not collide with the first pattern display device 37.

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with a plurality of LEDs and a seven-segment display as light-emitting means. The first pattern display device 37 displays according to the various controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20), and mainly displays the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this control example, the first pattern display device 37 is configured to be operable when a ball enters (wins) the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In other words, the first pattern display device 37 is a display means for showing the results of the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. In this control example, a pachinko machine 10 having two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is used, so the results of the two types of special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) are displayed on the first symbol display device 37. However, for example, if the pachinko machine 10 has only one type of special symbol (first special symbol), a display area corresponding to one type of special symbol can be provided on the first symbol display device 37.

The first symbol display device 37 also uses LEDs to indicate the current game state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, normal state, time-saving state, or probability change state) by the lighting state, whether the special symbol (first symbol) is changing (dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols to show the lottery result) by the lighting state, whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, a symbol corresponding to a jackpot that is unfavorable to the player, or a miss symbol by the lighting state, and indicates the number of reserved balls by the lighting state, and displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors using a 7-segment display device. It is also configured to be able to indicate by the lighting state that the change of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted). The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light-emitting colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by combining the light-emitting colors. In this control example, various game states are indicated by a combination of light emission colors from the light-emitting means (7-segment display device), but any configuration that allows the player to distinguish various game states will suffice. For example, various game states may be indicated by varying the length of the period when the light-emitting means is on and off (blinking pattern).

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for special symbols) is held when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (a prize is won). Then, in the lottery for the special symbols, a judgment is made as to whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery). Here, based on the judgment that a jackpot has been won, a jackpot game is executed, which is a special game state advantageous to the player.

When a jackpot game is played, the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is in an open state where it is easy to enter the ball, and a game is played in which many prize balls can be won in a short period of time by entering the specific winning port 65a. This jackpot game is played (if) after the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed as a stop (confirmed display), and the jackpot game period is set to include an opening period of a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) (a period in which a closed state is set so that it is difficult for balls to enter the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65), a round game period in which the open state is set, an interval period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) until the next round game starts after one round game period has ended, and an ending period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) after the last round game period has ended.

In this way, by setting the opening period after the lottery result of the special pattern indicating a jackpot win is displayed as a static display (confirmed display), preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction in time with the timing when the specific winning port 65a opens during the jackpot game, making it possible to play the jackpot game smoothly. In addition, this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, making it possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In addition, by setting an ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a new lottery for a special symbol from being held immediately after the last round of play ends, so that preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction for the game to be played after the jackpot game ends, allowing for a smooth switch between games.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, multiple types of jackpot games can be executed, and the number of rounds played during the jackpot game (number of rounds) and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested not only in whether or not a jackpot has been won by drawing special patterns, but also in the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time of winning.

The length of each period (opening period, round period, ending period) of the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol may be set to a different length depending on the game state set at the time of the jackpot win and the type of jackpot won. For example, if a jackpot is won in which the game content executed after the jackpot game ends is set to a different game content than the game content at the time of the jackpot win, the ending period of that jackpot game (e.g., 10 seconds) can be set to be longer than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds), and a performance can be configured to be executed that informs the player in advance of the game content executed after the jackpot game ends during that ending period. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

On the other hand, if a player wins a jackpot where the game content at the time of the jackpot win and the game content executed after the jackpot play end are the same, it is advisable to configure the ending period of that jackpot (e.g., 1 second) to be shorter than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds). This allows the player to play efficiently.

In addition, without using a configuration that actually distinguishes between the game content at the time of winning the jackpot and the game content executed after the jackpot game ends, for example, the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends can be predefined based on the type of jackpot won and the game state at the time the jackpot is won, and the ending period of each jackpot game can be predefined according to the predefined content.

A specific explanation will be given later, but the pachinko machine 10 in this control example is configured to be able to set three types of game states by combining two states with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the lottery for special symbols (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for special symbols) and two states with different probabilities of winning the lottery for normal symbols (high probability state for normal symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) which will be described later. Specifically, it is configured to be able to set a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and a probability-changing state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). Both the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are configured so that it is easier to win in a high probability state than in a low probability state, so of the multiple game states that can be set on the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the high probability state is the game state in which it is easier to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery than in other game states, and the high probability state and the time-saving state are the game states in which it is easier to win a jackpot in the normal symbol lottery than in other game states.

In addition, when the normal symbol lottery is won, a winning game (normal symbol winning game) is executed in which the special symbol lottery is easily executed. Specifically, the electric role 640 attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened, and a normal symbol winning game is executed in which a state in which it is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640 is provided. Therefore, when the probability change state and the time-saving state, that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol, are set, it becomes a game state in which it is easier to execute the special symbol lottery than other game states. Furthermore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is configured so that the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed (dynamic display period) is set to a shorter period than when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, when the variable state and time-saving state, i.e., a state with a high probability of normal symbols, are set, the special symbol lottery can be executed in a shorter period of time than in other game states, making it a game state in which it is easier to execute a new special symbol lottery.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, a specific area is provided in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during a jackpot game, and a high probability state of a special pattern can be set after the jackpot game ends only if the ball passes through the specific area during the jackpot game. Then, depending on the type of jackpot won, a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game (advantageous jackpot game) and a jackpot game in which the ball is unlikely to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game (unfavorable jackpot game) can be executed. Hereinafter, an advantageous jackpot game, i.e., a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area during the jackpot game, will be referred to as a variable jackpot game, and a jackpot in which a variable jackpot game is executed will be referred to as a variable jackpot game. In addition, disadvantageous jackpot games, i.e., jackpot games in which the ball is unlikely to pass through a specific area during the jackpot game, are referred to as normal jackpot games, and jackpots in which normal jackpot games are executed are referred to as normal jackpots.

In this control example, if the special symbol lottery does not result in a jackpot, it is determined to be a miss and no special prize is awarded to the player. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, in some cases where the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a miss rather than a jackpot as described above, a small prize game may be executed in which the player is given fewer special prizes than the jackpot described above (for example, a special prize to open the variable winning device 65 for only one round). The first symbol display device 37 not only shows whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not (whether it is a small prize or not) as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but if it is a jackpot, a pattern according to the type of jackpot is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 119, the explanation will be continued. On the lower left side of the play area formed on the surface of the playboard 13, there are arranged a plurality of left general ball entrances 63a, through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display of a special pattern executed by the first pattern display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a normal pattern (second pattern) triggered by the passage of a ball through the normal pattern start gate (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three pattern rows (Z1 to Z3) are displayed, one above, one in the middle, and one below (see FIG. 230(a)). The third patterns (decorative patterns that change in response to the changing display of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) or the second special pattern (special pattern 2)) displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 are each composed of 10 main patterns with identification information imitating the numbers "1" to "9". These third patterns are scrolled horizontally for each pattern row, so that the third patterns are variably displayed (dynamically displayed) on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 of this control example displays decoratively in response to the display of the first pattern display device 37, while the display of the game state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 20) is performed by the first pattern display device 37. Instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like.

As shown in FIG. 122(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the main pattern sz is formed using different types of characters (fish, etc.) for each identification information that resembles a number. In this way, by using characters that correspond to each identification information, the player can be visually notified of the lottery result of the special pattern, allowing the player to play in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 described later is a jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the same main patterns are lined up (for example, "777"), and the jackpot game occurs after the variable display ends. In other words, the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a pattern to indicate the lottery result of the special pattern by the main control device 110.

The main display area Dm displays three pattern rows, Z1, Z2, and Z3, at the top, middle, and bottom. The above-mentioned third patterns are displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the display changes by scrolling left and right periodically for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3.

Specifically, the upper pattern row Z1 is formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from right to left, and is configured to scroll from right to left as the pattern row changes, while the middle pattern row Z2 and the lower pattern row Z3 are formed so that the numbers are in ascending order from left to right, and are configured to scroll from right to left as the pattern row changes. Furthermore, in each pattern row, sub-patterns (blank patterns) fz that do not indicate the results of the special pattern lottery are also formed between the main patterns sz. In Figure 122(b), the blank patterns (sub-patterns) fz are displayed using patterns that resemble triangles.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), the main display area Dm has three active lines L1-L3 formed in the vertical direction, and two active lines L4, L5 formed in the diagonal direction. When each of the pattern rows Z1-Z3 is stopped and displayed, if the third pattern (main pattern sz) stops on the active line in a combination of jackpot patterns (in this control example, a combination of the same main patterns), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), in this control example, each pay line (L1-L5) is formed to include the pattern display positions of each of the pattern columns Z1-Z3, so that the lottery result of the corresponding special pattern can be difficult to understand until all of the pattern columns Z1-Z3 displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, the changing display of the third pattern executed in the main display area Dm can be interesting until the last pattern column (middle pattern column V2 in this control example) is stopped and displayed.

In this control example, among the three symbol rows (Z1 to Z3) described above, a specific symbol row (symbol row Z2), i.e., the symbol row among the multiple symbol rows in which the variable display is stopped last, is configured to have a greater number of main symbols than the other symbol rows. Specifically, the number of main symbols with a specific number (e.g., the number "4") is made greater than the other symbol rows. As a result, when the identification information imitating a specific number is in a reach state, the number of jackpot symbols (identification information imitating a specific number) passing on the pay line can be increased compared to when the other identification information is in a reach state, allowing the player to visually predict that there is a high chance of winning the jackpot.

The manner of displaying the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 is not limited to the above and is arbitrary, and the number of pattern rows, the direction of the display of the patterns in the pattern rows, the number of patterns in each pattern row, etc. can be changed as appropriate. The patterns displayed in the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above, and for example, a pattern combining an image such as a figure or a character with a number may be configured as the third pattern. Furthermore, the area in which the third pattern is displayed in a variable manner may be configured to be variable. For example, when a specific performance is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the variable display area of the third pattern may be made smaller or moved to a position that is difficult for the player to see (for example, a corner of the display screen), so that it is difficult for the player to know whether the third pattern is changing or not. In addition, the change of the third pattern may be temporarily stopped (temporarily stopped) during the period in which the special pattern is changing, and then changed again.

Furthermore, in this control example, the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the first special pattern and the display mode of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the second special pattern are configured to be the same (including differences to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing between them), but the display mode or display area of the third pattern may be made different to correspond to the type of special pattern that is varying.

Next, the contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 122(b). As shown in FIG. 122(b), a small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, and a small display area Dm2 is formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area in which identification information (fourth symbol) is displayed to indicate the lottery status of the special symbol (whether or not the lottery is being drawn (changing), and the lottery result), and is configured so that the fourth symbol (fourth symbol of special symbol 1) to indicate the lottery status of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), or the fourth symbol (fourth symbol of special symbol 2) to indicate the lottery status of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

The small display area Dm2 is an area where identification information is displayed to show the lottery status of the normal symbol (whether the lottery is in progress (changing) or not, and the lottery result), and the fourth symbol (normal symbol fourth symbol) to show the lottery status of the normal symbol (normal symbol) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, the lottery status of the special symbol and the lottery status of the normal symbol can be notified to the player. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode imitating figures such as a circle and a cross, and the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 122(b)) to indicate the state in which the special symbol is changing, and the fourth symbol is displayed in a stationary manner in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see the small display area Dm2 in FIG. 122(b)) to indicate the result of the lottery for the special symbol. However, without being limited to this, for example, a display mode using a number as the fourth symbol or a display mode showing multiple colors may be used to indicate that the special symbol is changing by a display mode that changes numbers or colors, and a display mode showing a specific symbol or color may be displayed in a stationary manner to indicate the result of the lottery for the special symbol.

In addition, in this control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the selection status of the special symbol (whether or not it is being selected (changing), and the selection result), but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to only notify whether or not the special symbol is being selected (changing). Also, as shown in FIG. 122(b), in this control example, a fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1) in which the fourth symbol is displayed to indicate the selection status of the special symbol is formed on the upper left side of the main display area Dm, and a regular fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm2) in which the regular fourth symbol is displayed to indicate the selection status of the regular symbol is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, but the position and size of this fourth symbol display area may be changed depending on the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed in the center part of the main display area Dm.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the area in which the variable presentation is performed from being restricted by the fourth pattern display area or the regular fourth pattern display area, which would reduce the presentation effect. In this case, it is also possible to remove the fourth pattern display area or the regular fourth pattern display area from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and configure it so that the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using a light-emitting means (such as an LED) provided in the variable display device unit 80.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is configured to display reserved patterns corresponding to the number of acquired rights (reserved memory) for the special pattern lottery. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when the first pattern display device 37 is performing a variable display or a winning game is being performed, that is, in a state in which a new special pattern lottery cannot be performed, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, the number of ball entrances is reserved up to a maximum of four times for each ball entrance. The reserved patterns displayed in the sub-display area Ds are displayed in the same number as the number of reserved ball entrances. In this embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls stored for balls entering the first ball entrance 64 is set to four, and the maximum number of reserved balls stored for balls entering the second ball entrance 640 is set to four, so a maximum of eight reserved patterns are displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122(b), the sub-display area Ds is divided into an active area Ds1a and a standby area Ds1b. The standby area Ds1b is an area for displaying reserved patterns in a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls of special patterns, and eight pedestals hr1 to hr8 corresponding to the maximum number of reserved balls that can be stored (8 balls) are displayed in order from the left. Then, when a reserved ball of a special pattern is acquired, the reserved pattern is displayed on the lowest-numbered pedestal among the eight pedestals hr1 to hr8 that does not display a reserved pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 122(b), four reserved balls of the first special pattern are stored in the reserved memory, and in the waiting area Ds1b, four reserved patterns (hz1 to hz4) in a display mode (white circles) corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special pattern (special pattern 1 reserved ball) are displayed on the first base hr1 to the fourth base hr4.

The active area Ds1a is a display area in which the reserved symbol that was displayed in response to the currently active special symbol change is shifted and displayed, and the active reserved symbol hz0 is displayed on the active base hr0. In other words, when a new special symbol change is started, the reserved symbol hz1 that was displayed on the base hr1 of the waiting area Ds1b is shifted to the base hr0 of the active area Ds1a and displayed. By configuring it in this way, for example, when a preview performance (for example, a performance that changes the display mode of the reserved symbol) that indicates the expectation of a jackpot win for the reserved symbol displayed in the waiting area Ds1b is performed, the player can easily tell that a special symbol change corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the preview performance was performed is being performed.

In addition, by making it possible to display the reserved pattern that corresponds to the currently running special pattern change, the effect of changing the display mode of the reserved pattern can also be performed on the reserved pattern that corresponds to the currently running special pattern change, so that the player can play the game while expecting the display mode of the reserved pattern to be changed for a longer period of time than if the reserved pattern that corresponds to the currently running special pattern change is not displayed.

In this control example, the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed in the waiting area Ds1b of the secondary display area Ds allows the player to distinguish whether the displayed reserved pattern is a reserved pattern indicating a reserved ball of the first special pattern (special pattern 1 reserved pattern) or a reserved pattern indicating a reserved ball of the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved pattern), with the special pattern 1 reserved pattern being displayed as a white circle (see FIG. 122(b)) and the special pattern 2 reserved pattern being displayed as a black circle (see FIG. 124(a)). This allows the player to grasp the current number of reserved balls for each type of special pattern, making it easier for the player to decide whether or not to continue playing to enter the ball into the first ball entrance 64 based on the display content of the reserved pattern.

As shown in FIG. 122(b), this control example is configured to display reserved patterns in a number corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to each special pattern, and to execute a special pattern lottery using reserved balls corresponding to the reserved patterns displayed on the lower numbered pedestal (the lowest numbered pedestal is pedestal hr1). In other words, the reserved patterns are displayed in the order in which they are used in the special pattern lottery, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the reserved patterns may be displayed in the order in which the reserved balls were acquired, and consumption order information may be attached to each reserved pattern to indicate the order in which they are used in the special pattern lottery. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player of which reserved pattern the reserved ball acquired at which time corresponds to which reserved pattern.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 122(b), a maximum of eight reserved patterns can be displayed side-by-side, but this is not limited to this, and the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 1 and the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 2 may be configured to be displayed separately. In this case, for example, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to obtain the reserved pattern of special pattern 2 is set, the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 1 may be displayed more prominently than the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 2, and when a game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which it is easy to obtain the reserved pattern of special pattern 2 is set, the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 2 may be displayed more prominently than the display area for the reserved pattern of special pattern 1.

In the tenth control example, as described with reference to FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be symmetrical, and the same game result is awarded when playing right-handed and when playing left-handed, so it is not displayed. However, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to set a game method in which right-handed play is more advantageous than left-handed play and a game method in which left-handed play is more advantageous than right-handed play according to the set game state, for example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to display a guide display mode to guide the player in the direction to shoot the ball (game direction). By configuring it in this way, the player can easily understand which area of the game board the ball should be shot towards just by visually checking the guide display mode displayed in the guide display area, so that a game machine that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

To explain in more detail, the guidance display area may be configured to display a "right hit" display mode for instructing the player to play right-handed games, and a "left hit" display mode for instructing the player to play left-handed games. The "right hit" display mode may be displayed during a game state in which right-handed games are advantageous to the player, such as a probability change state, a time-saving state, and during a jackpot game, and the "left hit" display mode may be displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) after the right-handed game ends. In addition, when it is detected that right-handed games are being played during a game state in which left-handed games are advantageous to the player, that is, during a normal state, the "left hit" display mode may be displayed for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds). In addition, the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 described in each of the above control examples may be appropriately displayed.

<About the performance content of the first control example>
Next, referring to Figs. 123 to 131, characteristic performance contents among various performance contents executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of this first control example will be described. First, referring to Fig. 123(a), a display screen when a reach is established in a normal state will be described. Fig. 123(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a reach state is reached in a normal state (normal state). In this control example, the third symbols to be displayed variably are displayed in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2, and when the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are displayed as a part of the combination of the third symbols indicating a jackpot win on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see Fig. 122(a)), the reach state is reached, and the effective line on which the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z2 are displayed as a part of the combination of the third symbols indicating a jackpot win is set as the reach effective line, and the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed variably. After the ready state is reached, the middle symbol row Z2 is configured to variably display each identification information (third symbol) at a slow speed that allows the player to view it (the speed at which it takes about 0.5 seconds for one main symbol (third symbol resembling a number) to move).

As described above, in this control example, the middle pattern row has 10 main patterns (one each of the main patterns numbered "1" to "3" and "5" to "9", and two main patterns numbered "4"), so when the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed in a slow-moving manner, it takes 5 seconds (0.5 x 10) to complete one revolution. The middle pattern row Z2, which is displayed in a slow-moving manner, is then displayed as it is. Alternatively, it is configured to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) based on the establishment of a specific transition condition.

Furthermore, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 123(a), even if the reach state is reached with any third pattern (in FIG. 123(a), the identification information imitating the number "9" (the third pattern imitating a crab)), the slow-speed variable display is executed so that the identification information imitating the number "1" (the third pattern imitating an octopus) is first visible in the middle pattern row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)) that is displayed in a variable manner during the reach state.

In addition, in this control example, the presentation mode of the variable presentation is configured to be variable depending on the variation mode of the middle pattern row Z2 after the reach state is reached, and is configured to be able to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) when the middle pattern row Z2 completes one revolution after the reach state is reached (5 seconds after the slow variation display is executed) or when it completes two revolutions (10 seconds after the slow variation display is executed). Therefore, as in this control example, by unifying the identification information of the middle pattern row Z2 that is first visible after the reach state is reached, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand at what point in time the presentation mode (reach mode) will be changed.

In this control example, the timing of changing to a different presentation mode (reach mode) is set to the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 makes one revolution or two revolutions after the reach state is reached, but is not limited thereto. For example, it may be configured to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) at the timing when the identification information (identical information identical to the identification information in the reach stop) that is a combination indicating a jackpot passes the reach effective line after the reach state is reached, or when the identification information shifted by one from the identification information that is a combination indicating a jackpot passes the reach effective line. In this way, by configuring to change to a different presentation mode (reach mode) based on the specific identification information corresponding to the type of identification information in the reach stop passing the reach effective line, it is possible to provide a relationship for the player between the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed in a combination that is a jackpot and the timing when it changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode). Specifically, if the system is configured so that identification information that results in a combination indicating a jackpot after the reach state is reached (identification information that is the same as the identification information that is stopped when the reach state is reached) changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode) when it passes the reach effective line, the timing when the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed stopped in a combination that results in a jackpot and the timing when it changes to a different presentation mode (reach mode) can be made to overlap for the player, so that the player can pay close attention to the changing presentation with great anticipation when the identification information that results in a combination indicating a jackpot (identification information that is the same as the identification information that is stopped when the reach state is reached) approaches the reach effective line.

As described above, in this control example, the middle symbol row Z2 is configured to be displayed in a slow-changing manner so that a specific identification state (a third symbol that resembles the number "1") is first visible no matter which third symbol is used to reach the reach state. Therefore, for example, if the third symbol combination that is ultimately stopped and displayed is a combination that is shifted by one type from the third symbol combination that results in a jackpot (one frame off reach) (if the final stop display mode is determined in advance), a new problem arises in that the period from when the reach state is reached until all the third symbols are stopped and displayed (until the final stop display mode is stopped and displayed) differs depending on the type of third symbol that results in the reach state.

Specifically, when the third symbol imitating the number "1" is reached, the middle symbol row Z2 displays the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol in a slow-speed fluctuation manner, so it takes 5.5 seconds (first lap) or 10.5 seconds (second lap) from the time the reach state is reached to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 one frame away from the reach state as the final stop display mode, and when the third symbol imitating the number "6" is reached, the middle symbol row Z2 displays the third symbol imitating the number "1" as a specific symbol in a slow-speed fluctuation manner, so it takes 8 seconds (first lap) or 13 seconds (second lap) from the time the reach state is reached to stop and display the middle symbol row Z2 one frame away from the reach state as the final stop display mode.

Therefore, in order to achieve a reach state with different types of third symbols in a fluctuation pattern in which the same fluctuation time is set, it was necessary to execute a process that calculates backwards from the timing when the third symbol stops and displays to set the timing when the reach state will occur. In other words, there was a problem in that a reach effect was reduced because the period from the fluctuation start timing to the reaching state was changed depending on the type of third symbol that was in the reach state, resulting in an inconsistent reach effect.

In contrast, in this control example, the main control unit 110 determines the variation time of the first pattern to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery when the special pattern lottery is executed, and notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the determined variation time by the variation pattern command. The voice lamp control unit 113 selects a variation display performance of a performance period that matches the variation time notified by the variation pattern command, and executes the variation display performance of the third pattern in synchronization with the variation display of the first pattern. The variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating the basic variation time and an added time command indicating the variation time to be added, and is configured to vary the type of the third pattern that is in a reach state based on the length of the variation time included in the added time command. More specifically, when a variation pattern of a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as the added time. On the other hand, if a fluctuation pattern of a 37-second fluctuation time is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the base time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the added time. In other words, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to identify that the fluctuation type is 7 seconds longer than the base time based on the notified content of the added time command. This makes it possible to set the type of third pattern that will be in a reach state simply by checking the content of the added time command.

Next, referring to FIG. 123(b) to FIG. 126, the performance contents related to the second special symbol variation (lottery) executed when the normal state is set will be described. First, referring to FIG. 123(b), the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the normal symbol variation in which a winning symbol is selected in the normal state will be described. FIG. 123(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed during the execution of the normal symbol variation in which a winning symbol is selected in the normal state. As shown in FIG. 123(b), when the normal symbol variation is executed, a variation display mode (indicated by an arrow in the figure) indicating that the normal symbol variation is being executed is displayed in the small display area Dm2. Then, a small display area Dm3 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating the electric role 640 that is opened in the normal symbol winning game is displayed therein, and a highlight display (indicated by six lines in the figure) is executed to notify the player that the small display area Dm3 has been formed. In addition, since the situation shown in FIG. 123(b) is during the execution of the normal symbol variation that has won, the icon displayed in the small display area Dm3 is in a display mode that imitates the electric role 640 in the closed state. By configuring it in this way, the player can predict that the normal symbol winning game will be executed soon, which can increase the interest of the game.

In FIG. 123(b), an example is given of a normal symbol variation in progress when the lottery result is a loss (for example, a 1/100 probability of a loss variation), but the small display area Dm3 is formed during a portion of the normal symbol variation in progress when the lottery result is a loss, and an effect (fake effect) is executed to display an icon resembling the electric roler 640. In this case, an effect mode is set in which the small display area Dm3 disappears before the normal symbol variation (loss variation) being executed stops and is displayed. By configuring in this way, an effect display in which the small display area Dm3 is formed is executed even when the normal symbol lottery result is not a loss, so that the player can play while expecting that a normal symbol winning game will be executed. Also, in FIG. 123(b), an example of a presentation suggesting the start of a normal winning game is shown by displaying an icon resembling an electric device 640 in the small display area Dm3, but this is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be used in which a comment suggesting the start of a normal winning game is displayed in a part of the sub-display area Ds or the main display area Dm.

Also, the display mode of the third symbol variation display being executed in the main display area Dm may be used to suggest the start of a normal symbol winning game. In this case, only when the special symbol variation is being executed while the normal symbol variation is being executed, the performance suggesting that the normal symbol winning game will be executed will be executed, so for example, the ball will pass through the through gate 67, which is easier to enter than the first ball entrance 64, which is the trigger for the execution of the special symbol lottery, and the result of the normal symbol lottery will not be suggested in advance to a player who is only executing the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, a special privilege (execution of a performance suggesting the result of the normal symbol lottery in advance) can be given to a player who is playing a normal game in which both the special symbol variation and the normal symbol variation are executed. Similarly, the performance using the small display area Dm3 used in this control example may be set as an execution condition that the special symbol variation is being executed, or that the game of launching the ball is being executed continuously.

In addition, the expectation level of the suggestive effect suggesting the start of a normal winning game may be configured to differ depending on the game being played. For example, when playing normally, if a suggestive effect suggesting the start of a normal winning game is executed, the normal winning game is executed almost 100% of the time, and when playing a game in which only a normal pattern lottery is executed without executing a special pattern lottery (stop-hit game), that is, when playing normally, the normal winning game is executed only about 10% of the time even if a suggestive effect suggesting the start of a normal winning game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player playing a stop-hit game to grasp the start timing of a normal winning game based on the suggested effect that is executed, and a penalty can be imposed.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, a maximum of four lottery rights for normal symbols can be reserved, and when a new lottery right (normal symbol reservation) is acquired, the result of the normal symbol lottery using the acquired lottery right can be determined in advance. A command (information) indicating the result of the preliminary determination can be output to the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, a suggestive performance that suggests that a normal symbol winning game will be played soon can be executed before the normal symbol variation that has been won is executed, that is, from the stage where a normal symbol reservation that has been acquired as a pre-determination result is a winning one. In this case, it is preferable to configure the suggestive performance to be executed in a performance mode that is more difficult for the player to understand than the suggestive performance shown in FIG. 123 (b). For example, the suggestive performance can be executed in the same performance mode as the performance that suggests the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently executed special symbol variation, or the pre-determination result for the acquired special symbol reservation, and the executed suggestive performance can be configured to notify the player only that a situation favorable to the player will soon come.

In this way, the greater the divergence between the timing of the actual execution of a normal winning game and the timing of the execution of the suggestive effect, the more difficult it becomes for the player to understand the presentation mode of the suggestive effect intended to indicate that a normal winning game will be executed, and by extension, the more difficult it becomes for the player to understand that the target of the suggestive effect is a normal winning game, thereby increasing the interest of the game when the suggestive effect is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 124(a), the contents of the presentation when a normal winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during the normal state will be described. FIG. 124(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the contents of the presentation displayed when a normal winning game (long opening winning game) is executed during normal time (in the normal state). In this control example, in the normal state in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is designed to be 1/100, and the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation executed in the low probability state of the normal pattern is designed to be 10 seconds. And, as described above with reference to FIG. 119, it is configured so that about 1/2 of the shot ball passes through the through gate 67 in both the case of right-hand play and the case of left-hand play. In addition, it is configured so that a maximum of four lottery rights for normal patterns (normal pattern reservation) can be stored.

In other words, while playing in the normal state, the normal pattern lottery is continuously executed, and the normal pattern winning is won at a rate of about once every 1000 seconds. Furthermore, when a normal pattern winning is won in the normal state, a normal pattern winning game (long opening winning) is executed in which the electric role 640 is opened for 5 seconds. Also, as shown in FIG. 119, since the electric role 640 is provided below the first ball entrance 64, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 simply by continuing the game aiming at the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 during a normal pattern winning game during a low probability state of a normal pattern that occurs with a low probability.

When a normal symbol lottery is won in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 124(a), the identification information (symbols) are displayed in the small display area Dm2 in a combination (two circles in the figure) that indicates that the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win, and the normal symbol winning game is executed. Then, the comment "Aim for the electric chute" is displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm, and an icon imitating the open electric chute (electric device 640) is displayed in the small display area Dm3. Note that the normal symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery are configured to be executed in parallel (overlapped), so the display of the third symbol change that is executed in response to the special symbol change and the display of the fourth symbol change that is executed in the small display area Dm1 continue to be executed during the normal symbol winning game.

In addition, in the waiting area Ds1b of the secondary display area Ds, the special symbol 2 reserved pattern (shown as a black circle in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved balls) acquired based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is displayed (to the left of the waiting area Ds1b) in priority to the special symbol 1 reserved pattern (shown as a white circle in the figure) indicating the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved balls) acquired. In other words, the state shown in FIG. 124(a) shows the state after four or more balls have entered the second ball entrance 640 during a normal game, and the state after the maximum number of reserved special symbols, four, has been acquired.

In this control example, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to take priority over the lottery for the first special symbol, so the lottery for the special symbol 2 reserved ball acquired later is executed with priority over the special symbol 1 reserved ball acquired earlier. By configuring it in this way, when a normal symbol winning game is executed during the normal state and multiple special symbol 2 reserved balls are acquired, it becomes possible to execute the lottery for the second special symbol consecutively with priority, so that a period during which the lottery for the second special symbol is executed can be set as an advantageous period (chance zone) that is advantageous to the player, and a dedicated presentation can be executed, providing the player with an easy-to-understand presentation.

In this control example, the waiting area Ds1b is configured to display the acquired special reserved ball 1 and special reserved ball 2 side by side (up to 8 balls are displayed). For example, if a special reserved ball display area that displays only the special reserved ball 1 and a special reserved ball display area that displays only the special reserved ball 2 are used, if a reserved ball of the second special pattern for which the special pattern lottery is executed first is not acquired, the special reserved ball display area is displayed more prominently than the special reserved ball display area, and if a reserved ball of the second special pattern is acquired, the special reserved ball display area is displayed more prominently than the special reserved ball display area. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player whether the lottery for the first special pattern or the lottery for the second special pattern will be executed next.

The display screen shown in FIG. 124(a) is configured to continue to be displayed until the end of the normal winning game in the normal state or the start of the second special symbol variation in the normal state. In other words, even during a normal winning game, if the second special symbol variation starts, the chance zone presentation described later with reference to FIG. 124(b) is executed. On the other hand, if the second special symbol variation does not start even when the end of the normal winning game is reached, for example, if a normal winning game (5 seconds) is executed while a first special symbol variation with a long variation time (for example, 60 seconds) is being executed, the words "Chance Zone Waiting" are displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm, and when the currently executed first special symbol variation ends, a waiting screen is displayed to inform the player that the second special symbol variation will start.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 124(a), when a normal symbol winning game is executed during the first special symbol variation, the third symbol variation effect (indicated by three arrows in the figure) executed in the main display area Dm in response to the first special symbol variation being executed is continuously displayed, while a part of the main display area Dm (small display area Dm3 formed in the lower right in the figure) is notified that a normal symbol winning game is being executed. In this case, it is preferable to configure the size of the display area used to display that a normal symbol winning game has been executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol variation being executed to be variable. For example, if the first special symbol variation being executed is a jackpot winning, it is preferable to form the small display area Dm3 smaller than the example shown in FIG. 124(a) or to configure it so that the small display area Dm3 is not formed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the reduction in visibility of the third symbol variation effect indicating a jackpot winning due to the formation of the small display area Dm3. In addition, when a normal winning game is started without the small display area Dm3 being formed, the player can be notified that the special pattern change (first special pattern change) being executed is a big win change, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the operating status of the electric role device 640 even in a state where the small display area Dm3 has not notified that a normal winning game has been executed. When using such a configuration, it is preferable to configure it so that the same presentation mode as a big win change is executed even in some cases where the special pattern change being executed is not a big win change (it is a miss change).

On the other hand, if the special pattern change (first special pattern change) being executed is a miss change, or if no special pattern change is being executed, the small display area Dm3 may be formed larger than the example shown in FIG. 124(a), or the entire main display area Dm may be used to display that a regular winning game has been executed.

In other words, when multiple pieces of information (lottery results and winning game status) need to be displayed overlappingly within the limited display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is sufficient to configure the display so that information that is advantageous to the player is displayed preferentially, and various display modes may be displayed based on the technical concept. In this case, the information that is advantageous to the player may differ. For example, some players consider information indicating that they have won a jackpot in a special symbol lottery to be advantageous, while other players consider a performance with a lower appearance rate to be advantageous rather than the result of the special symbol lottery to be advantageous. Therefore, it is preferable to provide an operation means that the player can operate, and an advantage degree selection means that allows the player to arbitrarily select the advantage degree of various pieces of information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 based on the operation of the operation means, and to configure the display mode corresponding to the various pieces of information displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to be set based on the advantage degree selected by the advantage degree selection means. This allows various pieces of information to be displayed in a display mode that is less likely to cause discomfort to the player.

Next, the performance contents in the chance zone where the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state will be described with reference to Fig. 124(b) to Fig. 126. Fig. 124(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance contents executed when the chance zone is set. As shown in Fig. 124(b), when the second special symbol lottery (variation) is executed during the normal state, the comment "Entering the chance zone" is displayed on the upper side of the main display area Dm. This chance zone is an advantageous period set for the period until all the reserved special symbols 2 acquired during the normal state are consumed, and is basically configured to be displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 during the period from the start of the first second special symbol lottery (variation) to the end of the last second special symbol lottery (variation). This makes it possible to easily inform the player that the current advantageous period is in progress.

In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, if a jackpot is won during the chance zone, the text "High probability of winning a chance" is displayed as a guide display mode to indicate that the chance state can be acquired with a high probability. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the pachinko machine 10 in this control example, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, but the system is configured so that the chance state is more likely to be set after the jackpot game ends if the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery than if the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, during the normal state in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, the chance zone period in which the second special symbol lottery is executed is a period in which it is easier to win a jackpot that results in a chance state than periods other than the chance zone in the normal state, so that the text "High probability of winning a chance state" is displayed as a guide display mode to indicate that the chance state can be acquired with a high probability, as shown in FIG. 124(b).

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, during this chance zone, a pseudo-change performance is executed to make it look like multiple special symbol changes have been executed during one special symbol change (second special symbol change). Therefore, the display mode (see FIG. 124(a)) showing the reserved memory number of special symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is hidden, and the reserved number of special symbols 1 (in the figure, "2" indicating that the reserved number of special symbols 1 is two) is displayed in the small display area Ds11 formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, and the reserved number of special symbols 2 (in the figure, "3" indicating that the reserved number of special symbols 2 is three) is displayed in the small display area Ds12.

As shown in FIG. 124(b), the display mode displayed in the small display area Ds11 and Ds12 is configured to be more difficult for the player to see than the display mode displayed in the waiting area Ds1b (see FIG. 124(a)) of the sub-display area Ds, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special symbols during the chance zone. Therefore, when a pseudo-variable performance is executed during the chance zone, it is possible to make the player think that multiple special symbol lotteries (variations) have actually been executed, thereby enhancing the performance effect. In this control example, the number of reserved special symbols is displayed using a part of the main display area Dm (small display areas Ds11 and Ds12), but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the number of reserved special symbols not to be notified to the player during the chance zone, or to configure the number of reserved special symbols to be notified in an area other than the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, an LED provided in the variable display unit 80). Furthermore, it is sufficient to configure the number of reserved special figures to be difficult for the player to distinguish, for example, it is possible to switch from a display mode using numbers that allows the player to easily distinguish the number of reserved special figures to a display mode that changes color to correspond to each reserved special figure number. In this case, even if the player can easily grasp the display mode for indicating the reserved special figures, it is possible to prevent the current reserved special figure number from being easily distinguished, and it is possible to achieve the same effect as this control example.

Also, as shown in FIG. 124(b), a rabbit-like character 1801 is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm, indicating that the second special symbol is currently fluctuating. As described above, the special symbol lottery (variation) and the normal symbol lottery (variation) are executed in parallel (overlap), so the period during which the normal symbol winning game is executed may overlap with the first special symbol fluctuating period (see FIG. 124(a)) or may not overlap. If the normal symbol winning game is executed during the fluctuating period of the first special symbol, the second special symbol lottery is executed after the first special symbol fluctuating period is over, and if it does not overlap with the fluctuating period of the first special symbol, the second special symbol lottery is executed immediately after the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the normal symbol winning game (during the normal symbol winning game). In other words, the timing of the second special symbol lottery will differ depending on the state of the first special symbol when a normal winning game is executed, which creates a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to accurately determine whether the currently executed special symbol change is the first special symbol change or the second special symbol change.

In contrast, in this control example, when the second special pattern change is executed, the character 1801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, so the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner whether the currently executed special pattern change is the first special pattern change or the second special pattern change.

Next, referring to Fig. 125(a) and Fig. 126, the contents of the pseudo-variable performance (special variable performance) among the variable performances executed during the chance zone will be explained. Fig. 125(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is temporarily stopped during a special variable performance, Fig. 125(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is restarted in a special variable performance executed in a state where the special symbol 2 reserved ball has been acquired, and Fig. 126 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the third symbol is restarted in a special variable performance executed in a state where the special symbol 2 reserved ball has not been acquired.

Here, the contents of the special variation presentation (pseudo variation presentation) will be explained. This special variation presentation is a variation presentation in which the third symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) during the variation period of one second special symbol variation, and then restarted, and is a pseudo variation presentation that makes the player think that multiple special symbol variations have been performed. First, a reach presentation is performed using the first half period (about 10 seconds) of the special variation presentation, and at the end of the first half period, as shown in FIG. 125(a), the third symbol is temporarily stopped (in the figure, the third symbol is displayed with a wavy line) in a combination indicating a miss (displayed as "353" in the figure). At this timing, that is, at the end of the first half period of the special variation presentation, the word "unfortunate" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, suggesting that the result of the special symbol lottery is a miss, and the player is configured to think that the second special symbol lottery of one performed during the chance zone was a miss. In other words, during the first half of the special variable performance, a special first half performance is executed in which the reach performance that gives hope for a big win is stopped (provisionally stopped) with a performance result indicating a miss.

After that, in the latter half of the special variation performance (about 30 seconds), a variation performance (special latter half performance) that restarts the temporarily stopped third pattern is executed. This special latter half performance is configured to change its performance mode depending on the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired. For example, when the reserved special symbol 2 ball is secured, the special latter half performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the second special symbol variation in the chance zone as shown in FIG. 125 (b), and when the reserved special symbol 2 ball is not secured, the special latter half performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed after the chance zone ends as shown in FIG. 126. In other words, in this control example, as a special variation performance, the type of special symbol variation executed after the currently executed second special symbol variation ends is determined based on the reserved special symbol number, and the performance mode of the special latter half performance is set in a performance mode corresponding to the determination result. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel more strongly that multiple special symbol variations have been executed during one second special symbol variation.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the special latter half performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the second special pattern change in the chance zone (see FIG. 125(b)), the number of times the third pattern is temporarily stopped during the latter half period is configured to be different according to the number of reserved special patterns 2 that have already been acquired. Although detailed explanations are omitted, when the special variation performance is executed, if neither the reserved special pattern 2 ball nor the reserved special pattern 1 ball is secured, the temporary stop display of the third pattern shown in FIG. 125(a) is not executed, and one variation performance (a variation performance in which the third pattern is not temporarily stopped even once) is executed using the entire variation period of the second special pattern change. As a result, the above-mentioned special variation performance is executed only when the reserved special pattern number is secured, so that it is more likely that multiple special pattern changes have been executed during one second special pattern change.

In addition, only when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a performance mode is set in which the number of provisional stops of the third symbol executed during the latter half period is different from the number of reserved special symbols already acquired. Therefore, for example, if the third symbol is provisionally stopped five or more times, the player can expect that the second special symbol variation being executed has won the jackpot. As described above, in this control example, since it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between a case in which the third symbol is provisionally stopped and a case in which it is stopped, it is difficult to accurately determine the number of provisional stops. Therefore, it is possible to mix the number of provisional stop displays and the number of stop displays to make the player think that the provisional stop display has been performed five or more times, or to make the player think that some of the provisional stop displays are stopped displays, and that the number of provisional stop displays has not reached five even though the provisional stop display has actually been performed five or more times, thereby providing the player with the fun of predicting the performance result.

Note that other configurations may be used as the presentation mode of the special variation presentation. For example, a display mode indicating the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation may be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to allow the player to easily grasp the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation, or at least a part of the presentation mode of the special variation presentation (e.g., background color, third pattern effect, etc.) may be gradually changed depending on the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped during one second special pattern variation. Also, a display mode indicating the number of times the third pattern has been temporarily stopped (e.g., 1st time, 2nd time) may be temporarily displayed at the timing when the temporarily stopped third pattern is redisplayed.

As shown in FIG. 126, if the special variation effect is executed without securing the reserved ball for special symbol 2, the words "Chance Zone Ended" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a display mode indicating that the chance zone has ended, and the variation display of the third symbol executed in the primary display area Dm becomes a variation display corresponding to the first special symbol variation (a variation display in which the third symbol varies horizontally) as a special latter half effect. Therefore, after making the player believe that the chance zone has ended, the result of the special variation effect, i.e., the lottery result for the second special symbol, is stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, the above-mentioned special variation effect is executed in some of the second special symbol variations during the normal state, and in the rest, one variation effect is executed for one second special symbol variation. Therefore, when multiple (up to four) special symbol 2 reserved balls are acquired during a normal symbol win game, it is possible to prevent the special variation effect from being executed for an unnecessarily long time.

Next, referring to FIG. 127, the contents of the presentation executed during the jackpot ending period in this control example will be described. FIG. 127(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the first half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game, FIG. 127(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the first half of the ending period of a special jackpot game, FIG. 127(c) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game, and FIG. 127(d) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed during the second half of the ending period of a special jackpot game.

In this control example, if the jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won during a normal state is a jackpot game (high probability jackpot game) in which a high probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is easily set, the jackpot ending period is set longer than in the case of a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which a high probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is not easily set. Specifically, the jackpot ending period is set to 17 seconds for a high probability jackpot game, and 15 seconds for a normal jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner during the ending period (before the high probability state is set) that the game content will change significantly through the jackpot game (transition from the normal state to the high probability state). In addition, the content of the game to be executed after the jackpot game can be notified to the player by using a long ending period.

In addition, as described above, in this control example, even if a special jackpot game is being played, the special jackpot state is not set unless the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 is made to flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 120). Therefore, if the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v during a special jackpot game, the special jackpot state is not set after the special jackpot game ends, and the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, just like in a normal jackpot game.

In this case, if a notification effect indicating that a probability variable state will be set is executed during the ending period of a probability variable jackpot game, the content of the notification effect will differ from the actual game state that will be set, causing dissatisfaction for the player. Furthermore, if the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the ending period of a probability variable jackpot game (17 seconds) is switched to the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the ending period of a normal jackpot game (15 seconds), the length of the actual ending period and the length of the presentation period of the notification effect will differ, resulting in a notification effect that feels strange to the player.

In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to a uniform period (7 seconds) regardless of the type of jackpot game. The presentation mode of the notification presentation executed in the second half period is determined according to the game state set after the jackpot game ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127, when a normal jackpot game is executed, the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period is to display the words "Chance mode 100 times" for the first half period (8 seconds) to indicate that a time-saving state will be set (see FIG. 127(a)), and then, for the second half period (7 seconds), if a jackpot is won during the time-saving state (if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery), a notification effect is executed in which the words "Win and super chance get during chance mode" are displayed as a game guide mode to indicate that a probability variable state is likely to be set (see FIG. 127(c)).

On the other hand, when a sure-win game is being played, the notification effect executed during the sure-win ending period is to display the words "Super Chance Mode 100 Times" (see FIG. 127(b)) during the first half period (10 seconds) to indicate that a sure-win state will be set, and then, to display the words "Be careful not to forget to take your card" (see FIG. 127(d)) during the second half period (7 seconds) as a warning that is not directly related to the game content.

In this control example, the presentation mode of the notification effect executed during the jackpot ending period described above is configured to be set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game is executed. This eliminates the need to execute the process to determine the presentation mode of the notification effect every time during the jackpot game, when various control processes are executed, thereby reducing the processing load of the control processes executed during the jackpot game.

Here, we will explain the case where, even though a guaranteed jackpot game has been played, the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game. In this case, among the display modes shown in FIG. 127(b), a process is executed to make the word "Super" invisible, and a process is executed to switch the notification effect executed in the latter half (7 seconds) of the jackpot ending period to the notification effect executed in the latter half (7 seconds) of the normal jackpot game ending period (see FIG. 127(c)).

More specifically, the display mode shown in FIG. 127(a) is different between the display layer on which the word "Super" is displayed and the display layer on which the word "100 chance modes" is displayed, and the display instruction for the display layer on which the word "Super" is displayed can be switched based on the result of determining whether or not the ball was able to flow down to a specific gate during a jackpot game. This makes it possible to execute a notification effect corresponding to the result of determining whether or not the ball was able to flow down to a specific gate during a jackpot game by simple control processing. Furthermore, since the presentation mode is switched during the latter half of the jackpot ending period, which is set to the same length, the presentation mode of the notification effect can be switched without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

In this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is different depending on the jackpot type, but the length of the jackpot ending period may be the same for all jackpot types. In this control example, the latter half of the jackpot ending period is set as a period of the same length for all jackpot types, but the length of the jackpot ending period may be the same for all jackpot types. In addition, if there are three or more jackpot types, it is not necessary to set the same period for all of the jackpot types. For example, the first half of the jackpot period for jackpot type A and jackpot type B may be the same length, and the second half of the jackpot period for jackpot type B and jackpot type C may be the same length.

In addition, in this control example, the ending period is set to a different length depending on the type of jackpot won, but the invention is not limited to this and the length of the ending period may be changed depending on the game result during the jackpot game.

Next, the contents of the effects executed during the chance mode will be described with reference to Figures 128 to 130. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that the high probability state of the normal pattern is set 100 times after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, the high probability state of the special pattern is set 50 times after the end of the jackpot game. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, it is configured so that it can be set to execute a V notification effect that notifies the player that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and to not execute a V notification effect.

If the V notification effect is executed during a jackpot game, a presentation mode (special chance mode) is set to notify the player that a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) has been set after the jackpot game ends, and if the V notification effect is not executed during a jackpot game, that is, if the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, or if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v but the V notification effect is not executed, a presentation mode (chance mode) is set in which it is difficult for the player to know whether or not a high probability state has been set after the jackpot game ends.

When the chance mode is set as the presentation mode, the words "Chance mode in progress" are displayed above the main display area Dm, and a remaining period notification mode is displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds to indicate the period until the high probability state of the normal pattern ends (see FIG. 128(a)). The example shown in FIG. 128(a) shows a state in which the 20th special pattern variation has been performed since the chance mode was set, and the words "80 times" are displayed as the remaining period notification mode, indicating that the chance mode will end if 80 more special pattern variations are performed.

In this way, when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the current game state is a high probability state or a time-saving state from the various display modes displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player can play while expecting that the current game state is a game state (high probability state) that is advantageous to the player.

Also, only if the V notification effect is not executed during a jackpot game, the chance mode can be set as the presentation mode even if the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. This prevents the player from being confused by the chance mode being set after the jackpot game ends, even though the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, i.e., the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. In addition, if the V notification effect is executed to notify that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, the super chance mode is set as the presentation mode to indicate that the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

In this control example, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game but the V notification display is not executed, the chance mode is set as the display mode after the jackpot game ends. However, without being limited to this, the present invention may be configured to set the super chance mode in some cases where the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game but the V notification display is not executed. In this case, for example, at the end of the jackpot game (after it becomes impossible (difficult) to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the current jackpot game), it is preferable to determine whether the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the current jackpot game and whether the V notification effect was executed, and in some cases (when a specific lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery) where the determination result indicates that the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v and the determination result indicates that the V notification effect was not executed, a display mode (FIG. 127(b) and FIG. 127(d)) indicating that a special probability state is set during the ending period of the jackpot game is displayed, and the super chance mode is set as the presentation mode after the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring it in this way, even if the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, the possibility of the Super Chance Mode being set remains, so the player can continue playing with a sense of anticipation until the jackpot game ends.

As explained above, in this control example, when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode to be set after the end of a big win game, the game state may be set to either the time-saving state or the probability variable state. Regardless of which game state is set, the remaining period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern will continue is displayed. In other words, the gaming machine is configured to be able to set a first advantageous gaming state (high probability state) and a second advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) as advantageous gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state as gaming states that are set after the end of a jackpot game, the first advantageous gaming state continues for a predetermined first period (the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol variation is executed 50 times), and the second advantageous gaming state continues for a second period (the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times) that is longer than the above-mentioned first period, and is configured to set the second advantageous gaming state until the second period has elapsed after the first advantageous gaming state is set after the end of a jackpot game when the first period has elapsed, and is configured to set the normal state when the second period has elapsed, and is configured to be able to execute a remaining period notification to indicate the remaining period until the advantageous gaming state ends (second period) regardless of whether the high probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily notify the player of the period during which a favorable game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state will continue. Furthermore, in this control example, when the remaining period of the second period (remaining period of the chance mode) is set, a game state indication effect for informing the player whether the current game state is a probability bonus state or a time-saving state can be executed using the remaining period notification notification mode (display mode).

Here, referring to FIG. 128(b), the contents of the game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode will be described. FIG. 128(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the game state suggestion effect executed during the chance mode. As shown in FIG. 128(b), when a chance mode is set in a state where a certain notification condition is met, a game state suggestion effect (displayed in a white display mode in FIG. 128(b)) in which the display mode of the remaining period notification displayed in the small display area Ds2 is changed is executed. Then, the comment "Big win expectation UP" is displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting which game state is set among the advantageous game states while notifying the player of the period until the advantageous game state advantageous to the player ends. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in this control example, the same display mode as that shown in FIG. 128(b) can be displayed when the currently executing special pattern change is a jackpot change, or when the acquired reserved ball for special pattern 2 contains information about winning a jackpot, during the period in the chance mode when a high probability state can be set (within the period after the end of the jackpot game until 50 special pattern changes have been executed).

By configuring it in this way, during the chance mode, which indicates the period during which a favorable game state advantageous to the player will continue, various information more advantageous to the player (information indicating that a high probability state has been set, information regarding a jackpot win) can be displayed using the same display format, providing an easy-to-understand presentation for the player. Also, even if a time-saving state is actually set, a display format that is likely to be displayed when a high probability state has been set based on a jackpot win can be displayed, making the player believe that a high probability state has been set at a rate higher than the design value, which has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to play.

Note that the control example described above may be configured to use a different technical concept to execute the effects during the chance mode. For example, when the chance mode is set during the high probability state, if a jackpot is won or if the acquired reserved ball for special chart 2 contains information about winning a jackpot, a suggestive effect may be executed to indicate that the currently set game state is a time-saving state (for example, an effect in which the display mode of the remaining time notification is displayed in a different display mode (kanji numeral display mode) from that shown in Fig. 128(a) and (b). This allows the player to think that he or she has won a jackpot during a time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the high probability state in an advantageous game state, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play. In addition, the percentage of the game history in which the high probability state is set can be made to appear lower than it actually is, allowing the player to play with a higher expectation that the high probability state will be set in the next jackpot game.

As described above with reference to Figs. 128(a) and (b), in this first control example, the display mode of the remaining period notification mode for indicating the duration (remaining period) of the chance mode is changed to suggest the currently set game state to the player, so that a player who is carefully watching the remaining period of the chance mode can easily understand the game state suggestion effect that suggests the currently set game state. However, the game state suggestion effect may be executed using a mode other than the remaining period notification mode. For example, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to display a first display mode (e.g., the word "chance") that is more likely to be displayed when the probability variable state is set than when the time-saving state is set, or a second display mode (e.g., the word "pinch") that is more likely to be displayed when the time-saving state is set than when the probability variable state is set, or the display mode of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may be changed to execute the game state suggestion effect.

In this first control example, both the high probability state of the special pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern are configured to end when the number of times the special pattern variation is executed reaches a predetermined number of times, so as shown in Figures 128 (a) and (b), the display mode of the remaining period notification that notifies the remaining period for which the chance mode will continue (the remaining period for which the high probability state of the special pattern or the high probability state of the normal pattern may continue) is used to suggest the current game state. However, for example, the above-mentioned chance mode configuration may also be used in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured so that the high probability state of the special pattern will continue until the next jackpot game is executed. In this case, when a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set as the duration of the chance mode, the remaining period until the high probability state of the normal symbols ends (the period until the time-saving state ends) is notified by a remaining period notification, and when the remaining period notified by the remaining period notification has elapsed, if the time-saving state is set, a presentation is executed to notify that the normal state has been transitioned to, and if a probability variable state is set, a presentation can be executed in which the word "Congratulations" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the high probability state of the special symbols will continue until the next big win is played, that is, a display mode indicating that the remaining period for which the probability variable state will continue is the period until the next big win, and the word "Congratulations" may be displayed if a predetermined notification condition is met during the period in which the chance mode is set.

In other words, instead of the remaining period notification mode (see FIG. 128(a)) that is updated from time to time in accordance with the remaining period of the chance mode, which is updated each time a special symbol lottery is executed, a display mode that only indicates that the remaining period of the chance mode exists, that is, a remaining period notification mode that does not indicate the remaining number of times that the special symbol can be drawn during the chance mode, such as the remaining period notification mode shown in FIG. 128(a), may be used, or a remaining period notification mode that can roughly notify the remaining period of the chance mode by varying the display mode (for example, varying the display color) in accordance with the remaining period of the chance mode may be used. Furthermore, a configuration may be made in which multiple remaining period notification modes can be displayed, and the display modes of the multiple displayed remaining period notification modes can be combined to allow the player to grasp the remaining period of the chance mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 129 and FIG. 130, the contents of the effects executed when the player operates the operation means during the chance mode will be described. In this control example, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 (see FIG. 119), various effects (operation effects) can be executed based on the operation contents and operation timing. Although detailed explanations are omitted, the operation effects are configured to execute an operation effect that changes the background image displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, an instruction notification is executed to have the player operate the frame button 22 as part of the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and when the player operates the frame button 22, an operation effect that executes an effect in a different mode from when the player does not operate the frame button 22, and an operation effect for livening up the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, etc. are executed. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play games other than the action of firing balls, and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early.

Here, among the above-mentioned operation effects, the contents of various operation effects executed during the chance mode will be explained. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, but in this control example, when a favorable game state (time-saving state, probability change state) is set, a different change time can be selected according to the number of special symbol changes since the favorable game state was set. Specifically, the period from the first to the twentieth time that the number of special symbol changes since the favorable game state was set is the first period (high-speed change period) in which a short change time (e.g., 5 seconds) is likely to be selected, the period from the 21st to the 49th time is the second period in which a change time longer than the first period (e.g., 10 to 30 seconds) is likely to be set, and only the 50th time is the specific period in which a specific change time (e.g., 20 seconds) is set, and the period from the 51st to the 100th time is the third period in which a change time similar to that of the second period (e.g., 10 to 30 seconds) is likely to be set.

In other words, during the specified period (first period) after the chance mode is set, i.e., during the specified period after the end of a jackpot game, special symbol variations are likely to be performed in a short variation time, so if a jackpot is won during this first period, it is possible to make it easier to play multiple jackpot games at short intervals. This makes it possible for the player to think that the next jackpot game was played as part of the previous jackpot game, which increases the player's interest in the game.

In the second and third periods described above, it is configured so that special symbol fluctuations with shorter fluctuation times are more likely to be executed than when the normal state is set, and special symbol fluctuations with longer fluctuation times are more likely to be executed than in the first period. This makes it possible to ensure a period during the chance mode during one special symbol fluctuation during which a suggestive effect is executed to suggest whether the currently set game state is a time-saving state or a high probability state. Also, in the specific period (the 50th special symbol fluctuation after the advantageous game state is set), a special symbol fluctuation of a specific fluctuation time (20 seconds) is always executed, and a suggestive effect of 20 seconds is executed to suggest to the player whether or not the high probability state has been set (is set).

In this way, by allowing the selection of different change times depending on the number of times the special pattern changes are performed, it is possible to execute the performance for each change using an appropriate period of time.

Figure 129(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display content displayed during a period other than the high-speed fluctuation period (normal fluctuation period) when the chance mode is set as the presentation mode and the normal state is set internally, and Figure 129(b) is a schematic diagram showing the presentation mode when the frame button 22 is operated during the display presentation shown in Figure 129(a). In this control example, during the normal fluctuation period in the chance mode, the player can arbitrarily select the background image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, and by the player pressing (operating) the frame button 22, the sea background (sea mode) and the mountain background (mountain mode) are displayed alternately.

As shown in FIG. 129(a), when the background image can be switched, an icon HR10 resembling a framed button 22 is displayed at the bottom right of the main display area Dm in a display mode indicating that it is operable (in the figure, an arrow is displayed pointing in the direction of button depression), and the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds displays the words "sea mode", indicating that sea mode is currently set. When the player operates the framed button 22 in this state, the display switches from "sea mode" to "mountain mode", as shown in FIG. 129(b).

Next, referring to FIG. 130, the contents of the operation presentation during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode will be explained. In this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period (the period from when the time-saving state and the probability change state are set to when the 20th special pattern fluctuation ends), the background image is not switched (is difficult to switch). In other words, during the high-speed fluctuation period in which a short fluctuation time (5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation time for one special pattern fluctuation, if the background image is switched, the display mode displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 will change frequently, making it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special pattern lottery. Therefore, the background image is not switched (is difficult to switch). However, if all the player's operations on the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period are invalidated, there is a problem that the player's motivation to play will decrease.

Therefore, in this control example, when the player operates the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, a different effect is executed instead of switching the background image. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(a), during the high-speed fluctuation period in the chance mode, the words "Special Mode" are displayed in the small display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, and the player is notified that the current high-speed fluctuation period is in progress. During this "Special Mode", regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, a special symbol fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is executed, and the third symbol fluctuation effect is also executed in a "Special Mode"-only fluctuation effect. Also, during the "Special Mode", the icon HR10 is displayed in the lower right corner of the main display area Dm, and when the player presses the frame button 22, a game state suggestion effect is executed in which the display mode of the remaining time notification displayed in the small display area Ds2 is changed, as shown in FIG. 130(b).

In this way, even if the player performs the same operation (pressing the frame button 22), the content of the operation effect to be executed can be varied depending on the timing of the operation, which can motivate the player to play by operating the frame button 22 at various times. Also, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 129(a) or FIG. 130(a), the same guide display (icon HR10) is used to guide the player to operate (press) the frame button 22, and when the player performs the same operation (pressing the frame button 22), the content of the operation effect to be executed is varied depending on the timing of the operation. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to know what kind of operation effect will be executed until the player actually operates (presses) the frame button 22, which can motivate the player to operate the frame button 22 more.

Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 18, but in this control example, multiple operation effects can be executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period, and the rate at which each operation effect is selected varies depending on the set game state. In other words, it is possible to predict whether the currently set game state is a sure-win state or a time-saving state based on the appearance rate of each operation effect executed during the high-speed fluctuation period. Therefore, even if the same operation effect is executed repeatedly during the high-speed fluctuation period, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

Furthermore, in this control example, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, only when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the background image is switched when the frame button 22 is pressed. Specifically, when the reserved ball (special pattern 2 reserved ball) of the second special pattern acquired during the high-speed fluctuation period contains information on winning the jackpot, the special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserved ball containing the information on winning the jackpot and the special pattern change executed before the special pattern change (the special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserved ball acquired before the special pattern 2 reserved ball containing the information on winning the jackpot) are configured to be executable, and when the player presses the frame button 22 in a state where the conditions for executing the special pattern change are satisfied, the background image is switched from the currently displayed background image (e.g., sea mode) to a dedicated special background image (e.g., space mode). In other words, if the background image display is switched based on the player pressing the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, the player is encouraged to actively press the frame button 22 as the expectation of winning the jackpot increases.

In addition, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, the background image can be switched by performing a special operation (long press) on the frame button 22. This special operation (long press) is determined to have been performed when the player presses the frame button 22 continuously for two seconds, and the period until the operation is determined to have been performed is longer than that of a normal operation (press) on the frame button 22. Therefore, since this operation is difficult to perform frequently compared to a normal operation (press), even if the background image switching display is configured to be executable, it is possible to suppress the background image from being switched frequently. Note that in this control example, a long press operation is used as a special operation with a longer operation time than a normal operation, but this is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the frame button 22, an operation means having multiple operation units (e.g., a cross key) may be provided as the operation means, and a special operation performed by operating the multiple operation units in a predetermined order may be specified.

Next, referring to FIG. 131, the effects executed during the "Super Chance Mode" in which the player is notified that a special probability state has been set will be described. FIG. 131(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects executed when a first special symbol variation is executed during the "Super Chance Mode", and FIG. 131(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects executed when a second special symbol variation is executed during the "Super Chance Mode".

In this control example, when a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed. Then, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the high probability state is set with a high probability (a high probability jackpot game that can easily cause the ball to flow down to a specific gate during a jackpot game is always executed). Then, the high probability state is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery has been executed a predetermined number of times (50 times).

In other words, once the high probability state is set, as long as a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery before the specified number of special pattern lotteries (50 times) have been performed (the jackpot probability in the high probability state for special patterns is 1/50), the high probability state can be looped with high probability. This makes it possible for a player playing during the high probability state to play with enthusiasm in the hope of winning the jackpot in the second special pattern lottery as soon as possible.

On the other hand, even if the probability variable state is set, for example, if a probability variable jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends, that is, if the special pattern 2 reserved ball is not acquired and the special pattern 1 reserved ball is acquired in the state in which the probability variable state is set, the first special pattern lottery is executed. In this control example, as described above, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is executed 100% of the time, whereas when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the probability variable jackpot game is executed 50% of the time, and the normal jackpot game is executed the remaining 50% of the time. In other words, even if the probability variable state is set, if a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, it may not be possible to loop the probability variable state.

In this way, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the high probability state, and the player quickly determines that the jackpot is a jackpot type (normal jackpot) for which a normal jackpot game is executed, the player's motivation to play may decrease. Therefore, in this control example, as a variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol variation executed during the high probability state, a double reach effect is easily executed, which is a variation effect in which the third symbol (identification information with an odd number) corresponding to the high probability jackpot and the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to the normal jackpot are simultaneously in a reach state. More specifically, if a normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state, the above-mentioned double reach effect is always executed (see FIG. 131(a)).

This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a reach effect in which only the third symbol (identification information with an even number) corresponding to a normal jackpot is in reach when a normal jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the special symbol fluctuation period, and to prevent players from predicting in advance that they will win a normal jackpot during the period in which the special symbols are fluctuating.

Also, as shown in FIG. 131(a), in this control example, during "Super Chance Mode", small display areas Ds11 and Ds12 are formed in the same way as during the above-mentioned "Chance Mode", making it difficult for the player to grasp the number of reserved special symbols. And, the words "Super Chance Mode" are displayed above the main display area Dm as a display mode to inform the player that they are currently in a special chance state.

Here, in the super chance mode, when the double reach shown in FIG. 131(a) (a variable presentation in which the third symbol (identification information with the number 1) corresponding to a sure jackpot and the third symbol (identification information with the number 2) corresponding to a normal jackpot are simultaneously in a reach state) is executed, there is a risk that the player will easily understand that the special symbol change being executed is the first special symbol change, so in this control example, the double reach presentation shown in FIG. 131(a) can also be executed in the variable presentation executed in response to the second special symbol change. In other words, the double reach presentation using the third symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot can be executed in the variable presentation corresponding to the second special symbol lottery in which a sure jackpot game is always executed when a jackpot is won.

By configuring it in this way, even if the double reach effect shown in Figure 127 (a) is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily distinguish whether the special pattern change being executed is the first special pattern change or the second special pattern change.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a double reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the selection of the second special symbol, an effect is executed in which the type of third symbol that reaches the reach state when the middle symbol row Z2 completes one revolution is changed to the third symbol (identification information with the number 1 and identification information with the number 9) corresponding to a sure-variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. 131(b) (promotion effect to a sure-variable double reach).

By configuring it in this way, if the currently running special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, the player can be notified in advance that a guaranteed jackpot game will be played. Also, even if a double reach effect is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, the player can be made to play while expecting that it will be upgraded to a guaranteed double reach midway through.

In this control example, a variable condition is set to be satisfied when the change pattern of the middle symbol Z2 becomes a predetermined pattern (one lap has passed) as a variable condition for changing (promoting) the ongoing double reach effect to a sure-win double reach effect. However, without being limited to this, for example, a variable condition may be set to be satisfied when the third symbol corresponding to the reach state (the third symbol that is the combination that results in a jackpot) as the third symbol displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 passes through the reach effective line, or a variable condition may be set to be satisfied when the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player is a specific operation result.

In addition, in this control example, the type of the third symbol in the reach state is changed when the variable condition is satisfied, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the number of third symbols in the reach state may be increased. More specifically, from the double reach state shown in FIG. 131(a), the blank symbols (shown as triangles in the figure) may be erased, and "3.2.1" is displayed from the left as the upper symbol row Z1, and "1.2.3" is displayed from the left as the lower symbol row Z3, in order to execute a triple reach effect. Even in this case, the triple reach effect can increase the number of reaches of the third symbol corresponding to the special jackpot compared to the double reach effect, so that the player can be visually notified that there is a high possibility of winning the special jackpot in this special symbol lottery.

In addition, the above-mentioned technical concept may be applied to the variable presentation executed during the normal state. For example, when a variable condition is established during a normal single reach presentation in which only the third symbol (identification information with an even number attached) corresponding to a normal jackpot is in the reach state, the type of third symbol in the reach state may be switched to the type of third symbol corresponding to a sure-variable jackpot, or the number of third symbols in the reach state may be increased. This allows the player to play while expecting a more favorable presentation result to be provided until the variable presentation ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 132, the relationship between the special symbol variation pattern selected in this control example and the performance mode to be executed will be explained. FIG. 132(a) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the performance when a variation pattern in which a non-reach variation performance is executed is set as the variation performance of the third symbol, and FIG. 132(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the performance when a variation pattern in which a reach variation performance is executed is set as the variation performance of the third symbol.

A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 25, but in this control example, a fluctuation pattern that combines the basic time and the added time is defined as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery. The period that corresponds to the basic time is configured as a common fluctuation pattern, and the period that corresponds to the added time is configured as a specific fluctuation pattern.

In other words, in this control example, the third pattern change presentation executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to show the result of the special pattern lottery is configured to vary the period from when the reach state is displayed until the third pattern is stopped and displayed depending on the type of third pattern that will be in the reach state. The third pattern that corresponds to the time set as the added time is set as the third pattern that will be in the reach state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to standardize the third pattern change presentation (the third pattern change presentation that is executed in accordance with the basic time) that is executed during the specified period from when the third pattern starts to change.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132(a), in the case of a non-reach variation presentation, since no additional time is set, a common variation pattern corresponding to the basic time (8 seconds) is set, and the upper pattern row Z1 is displayed stationary when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the third pattern variation presentation (for example, when 5 seconds have elapsed), and one second later the lower pattern row Z3 is displayed stationary in a display mode in which a reach state does not occur on the active line, and two seconds later the middle pattern row Z2 is displayed stationary in a display mode in which the lottery result is a miss. After that, after a one-second display period (determination time), the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is displayed as a definite result.

As shown in FIG. 132(b), when a reach variation presentation is executed, a basic time (30 seconds) is set, and the presentation mode from when the reach state is reached until 5 seconds have elapsed is set as the common variation pattern for 30 seconds. In other words, the presentation mode from when the reach state is reached until the middle symbol row Z2 completes one revolution is set as the common variation pattern. After that, the presentation mode (reach pattern, stopping symbol) according to the added time is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 133, the presentation mode of the ending presentation executed during the ending period of the jackpot game will be explained. FIG. 133(a) shows the flow of presentation during the ending period for a normal jackpot, and FIG. 133(b) shows the flow of presentation during the ending period for a special jackpot, and FIG. 133(c) shows the flow when the ball does not flow down a specific area (V gate) during a special jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 133, in this control example, the ending period (ED period) is different for normal jackpots and special jackpots, with the ED period set to 15 seconds for normal jackpots and 17 seconds for special jackpots. The ending performance is then divided into a first half period and a second half period (see Figure 127).

In this control example, the presentation mode for the ending period is set at the start of the jackpot game, and whether or not a V has been won during the jackpot period (whether or not the ball has flowed down to a specific gate) is determined at the start of the ending period (ED period), and the ending display mode is switched based on the result of this determination.

First, referring to FIG. 133(a), the content of the presentation during the ending period of a jackpot game when a normal jackpot game is played will be described. In this control example, in order to prevent the various processes executed during a jackpot game from becoming complicated and the processing load during the jackpot game from increasing, the presentation mode of the presentation (ending display presentation) executed during the ending period of the jackpot game is determined before the round game (game in which prize balls can be obtained) during the jackpot game is executed (before the start of the jackpot game or during the opening period of the jackpot game).

When a normal jackpot game is played, the display mode of the ending performance (see Figs. 127(a) and (c)) is set to indicate to the player that a "chance mode" will be set (a time-saving state will be set) after the jackpot game ends before the opening period of the jackpot game ends. In a normal jackpot game, since the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, a previously set ending performance is executed as the ending performance of the jackpot game.

Next, referring to Figures 133(b) and 133(c), the contents of the presentation during the ending period of the jackpot game when a jackpot game with a high probability of occurring will be explained. When a jackpot game with a high probability of occurring is played, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute a V notification presentation during the jackpot game before the opening period of the jackpot game ends, and the presentation mode of the ending presentation is determined based on the result of the determination. Specifically, when a round game (V round game) in which the ball is likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed, a guide notification to guide the player to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v and a V passing notification to notify the player that the ball has actually passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v are executed. If it is determined that the V notification effect is executed, a display mode (see Figs. 127(b) and (d)) is set as an ending effect to inform the player that a "super chance mode" will be set (a probability variable state is set) after the end of the big win game. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V notification effect is not executed, a display mode (see Fig. 127(c) in which the display of "super" is deleted from the display mode of Fig. 127(b)) is set as an ending effect to inform the player that a "chance mode" will be set after the end of the big win game.

When the V notification performance is executed, a guide notification is executed in which the comment "Aim for V" and a schematic diagram showing the position of the specific area (V gate) 65v in the variable winning device 65 are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in time with the start of the V round (first round) game. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, a V passing notification is executed in which the comment "V acquired!!" is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) despite the execution of the guide notification, an emphasis guide notification is executed to more emphasize the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v to the player. Then, if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v before the V round game ends, the above-mentioned V passing notification is executed, and if the V round game ends without the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the words "Too bad you didn't get a V!" are displayed.

After that, when the ending period of the jackpot game arrives, a judgment is made as to whether or not to replace the display mode of the ending performance that has been set in advance, based on the actual game results of the V round game. Here, as described above, when it is determined that the V notification performance is to be executed at the start of the jackpot game, a display mode indicating that the "Super Chance Mode" is set as the ending performance (see Fig. 127 (b) and (d)) is set in advance, so if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, the ending performance is executed without switching the display mode of the ending performance. On the other hand, if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, a time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, so a process (replacement process) is executed to switch the display mode of the ending performance to a display mode indicating that the "Chance Mode" is set, and the ending performance is executed in the display mode after the replacement (the display mode in Fig. 127 (b) with the display of "Super" deleted, see Fig. 127 (c)).

In addition, if the V notification effect is not executed, the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game, as in the normal jackpot game, and the jackpot game is executed in which it is not possible to know from the various effects displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 that the V round game is being executed and that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. Then, regardless of whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V round game, the ending effect is executed in a preset display mode. This makes it possible to provide a state in which a "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game, even though a probability variable state is actually set.

Furthermore, when the "chance mode" is set while the probability variable state is set, the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game (during the probability variable jackpot game), so that it is difficult to know in advance that the probability variable state will be set by the effect during the jackpot game. In this control example, when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game where the V notification effect is not executed, the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends, even though the probability variable state is actually set. However, without being limited to this, for example, even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v while the V notification effect is being executed, the V passing notification may not be executed at a predetermined rate, and even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the "chance mode" may be set after the jackpot game ends if the V passing notification is not executed. In this case, it is also preferable to configure the V notification effect to be executable even when the normal jackpot game is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily create an event in which the V-pass notification is not executed even though the V notification effect has been executed, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable about the "chance mode" being set after the end of a jackpot game in which the V notification effect has been executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 134, the flow of the presentation mode set after the end of the jackpot game will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example, after the end of the jackpot game, a high probability state of the normal pattern is set for a predetermined first specific period (the period until the special pattern variation is executed 100 times). Then, if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, a high probability state of the special pattern is set for a predetermined second specific period (the period until the special pattern variation is executed 50 times) after the end of the jackpot game. Then, if the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a time-saving state (low probability state of the special pattern, high probability state of the normal pattern), the "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode (see FIG. 134(b)). In addition, if the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), the presentation mode set after the end of the jackpot game is different depending on the presentation content during the jackpot game (depending on the presence or absence of a V notification presentation). As shown in FIG. 134(a), if it is notified that a high probability state will be set during the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game), that is, if the display mode of entering the "Super Chance Mode" (see FIG. 127(b)) is displayed as the ending presentation, the "Super Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode (see display a in FIG. 134(a)). If it is not notified that a high probability state will be set during the jackpot game (during the ending period of the jackpot game), that is, if the display mode of entering the "Chance Mode" (see FIG. 127(a)) is displayed as the ending presentation, the "Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode (see display b in FIG. 134(a)).

As shown in display a in Figure 134(a), when "Super Chance Mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game, the "Super Chance Mode" will continue until the high probability state ends, and when the game state transitions from the high probability state to a time-saving state, the display will switch to "Chance Mode". In this case, while the "Super Chance Mode" is set, as shown in Figure 131(a), the period until the high probability state ends (up to 50 times) is displayed as the remaining period in the small display area Ds2. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player of the period during which the game state most advantageous to him will continue. In addition to the display contents shown in FIG. 131(a), a pre-notification effect may be configured to be executed to notify the player in advance that the time-saving state will be set 50 times after the high probability state ends. For example, when the remaining period mode (in FIG. 131(a), "49 times" is displayed in white) indicating the remaining period of the high probability state displayed in the small display area Ds2 becomes less than a predetermined period (for example, "10 times" or less), the remaining period mode indicating the number of times (50 times) that the time-saving state will continue to be set later may be displayed in a different display mode (for example, "50 times" is displayed in black) from the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the high probability state. This allows the player to be notified in advance that a game state (time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the normal state will be set even after the high probability state ends.

Also, when the "Super Chance Mode" is set, the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the high probability state and the remaining period mode (100 times) indicating the remaining period of the time-saving state may be displayed, and each time a special symbol variation is executed, each remaining period mode may be subtracted by 1. Alternatively, the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the high probability state and the remaining period mode (50 times) indicating the remaining period of the time-saving state that is set after the high probability state ends may be displayed, and the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the high probability state may be subtracted first, and when the remaining period of the high probability state becomes 0 and the time-saving state is entered, the remaining period mode indicating the remaining period of the time-saving state may be subtracted. Even in this configuration, it is possible to notify a player playing in the high probability state in advance that a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state will be set after the high probability state ends.

Next, the effects during the chance mode will be explained using display b in FIG. 134(a) and FIG. 134(b). In this control example, the chance mode is set as the effect mode in some cases when the high probability state is set and when the time-saving state is set. Then, during the chance mode, as described above with reference to FIG. 128, a game state suggestion effect is executed that changes the notification mode of the remaining time notification. This game state suggestion effect is set so that it appears more frequently in the chance mode during the high probability state than in the chance mode during the time-saving state.

Next, the contents of the operation presentation during the chance mode will be described with reference to FIG. 135. In this control example, the presentation mode of the operation presentation (the presentation performed based on the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player) during the chance mode is configured to be variable according to the operation timing and operation method of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player, and the set game state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135(a), during the chance mode when the time-saving state is set, when the button PUSH "normal push" is executed as the operation method, during the high-speed change period until the special pattern change is executed 20 times, the operation presentation of "reach suggestion" which suggests whether the change presentation being executed will be in a reach state during the third pattern change, or "state suggestion" which suggests the currently set game state is configured to be executable, and thereafter (after the number of times the special pattern changes 21 times or later), the operation presentation of "background mode transition" which transitions the background mode is configured to be executable. In addition, as an operation method, when a button is pressed and held for a long time, "long press", during the high-speed change period until the 20th special pattern change is performed, a "background mode transition" operation effect that changes the background mode can be executed, and during the period from 21 to 50 special pattern changes (second period), a "state suggestion" operation effect that suggests the currently set game state can be executed, and thereafter (after the 51st special pattern change), a "past state suggestion" operation effect can be executed to suggest the game state that was set in the past (at the time when the "chance mode" was set (after the end of the jackpot game)).

As shown in FIG. 135(b), during the chance mode when the probability bonus state is set, if the button push "normal push" is executed as an operation method, during the high-speed fluctuation period until the special symbol fluctuation is executed 20 times, the operation effect of "reach suggestion" which suggests whether the fluctuation effect being executed will be in a reach state during the third symbol fluctuation, "state suggestion" which suggests the currently set game state, or "background mode transition" which transitions the background mode can be executed, and during the period from 21 to 50 times of the special symbol fluctuation (second period), the operation effect of "background mode transition" or "state suggestion" can be executed, and thereafter (after the special symbol fluctuation is 51 times or later), the operation effect of "background mode transition" can be executed. In addition, if the button is pressed and held "long press" as an operation method, the operation effect of "background mode transition" which transitions the background mode can be executed regardless of the number of times of the special symbol fluctuation.

As explained above, in this control example, when the time-saving state is set or when the probability bonus state is set, a "chance mode" can be set as a presentation mode, and the duration of the chance mode (100 time-savings) is divided into multiple periods according to the number of special pattern variations executed during the chance mode, and the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed when the player operates the operation means (frame button 22) is configured to differ for each set game state and period. As a result, when the chance mode is set, it becomes possible for the player to predict the currently set game state based on the content of the operation presentation executed by the operation presentation, and therefore it is possible to execute a game that motivates the player to operate the operation means.

As explained above, in this control example, the predetermined period after the end of a jackpot game is the high-speed fluctuation period, and even if a "normal press" operation is performed on the frame button 22, the operation presentation of "transition to background mode" is less likely to be executed than in other periods. However, the high-speed fluctuation period (the period during which transition to background mode is less likely to occur) may be set at other times. For example, the period until the end of one special pattern fluctuation executed after the end of a jackpot game may be set as the normal time-saving fluctuation period, and the period from the execution of the second special pattern fluctuation after the end of a jackpot game to the execution of the twentieth special pattern fluctuation may be set as the high-speed fluctuation period.

By configuring it in this way, for example, during the first special pattern changing period after the end of a jackpot game, a comment such as "You won't be able to change the background mode from the next change! Choose your desired background now" can be displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a notice mode to notify the player that a high-speed changing period will be set, preventing the player from suddenly entering a period during which the background mode cannot be changed (high-speed changing period), preventing the player from playing in the desired background mode, and reducing their motivation to play. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the device to display comments such as "Chance mode may be in a high-speed state! Don't give up!" and "When the display mode of the remaining number of times changes, it's your chance!" as a guide mode to explain the game content of the "chance mode" to the player during the one special pattern changing period after the end of a jackpot game.

In addition, in the case where the high-speed fluctuation period is set from the first special pattern fluctuation after the end of the jackpot, as in this first control example, the background mode during the "chance mode" can be selected during the playing period of the jackpot game executed before the high-speed fluctuation period is set (for example, during the ending period of the jackpot game), and when the "chance mode" is set, the player can be notified that the background mode cannot be changed for a specified period (high-speed fluctuation period).

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will continue. The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this control example, a "circle" symbol), a winning game (normal winning game) is executed in which the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is in an operating state (open state) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change (regular symbol change time) is different depending on the probability state (low probability state, high probability state) of the regular symbol that is set. When the low probability state (normal state) of the regular symbol is set, the regular symbol change time is set to 10 seconds, and when the high probability state (probability change state, time-saving state) of the regular symbol is set, the regular symbol change time is set to 3 seconds. This makes it possible to greatly deviate the frequency at which a regular symbol winning game is executed in the low probability state of the regular symbol from the frequency at which a regular symbol winning game is executed in the high probability state of the regular symbol. In other words, by shortening the regular symbol change time in the high probability state of the regular symbol compared to the low probability state of the regular symbol, the number of regular symbol lotteries (regular symbol lotteries) that can be executed per unit time can be increased, and further, it is possible to make it easier to win in the regular symbol lottery that is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to play a normal winning game when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, while making it easier to play a normal winning game when a high probability state for normal symbols is set.

In this control example, the normal symbol fluctuation time and winning probability are set to be more favorable to the player in the high probability state of the normal symbol than in the low probability state of the normal symbol, but this is not limited to this, and only one of them may be configured to be more favorable to the player. For example, regardless of the probability state of the normal symbol, the same normal symbol fluctuation time (e.g., 3 seconds) may be set, and only the winning probability may be different. This prevents, for example, a pachinko machine 10 configured so that the time it takes for the normal symbol variation display (normal symbol variation time) is longer during the normal state than during the time-saving state in order to make it difficult to play a normal symbol winning game during a low probability state for normal symbols (normal state), when the game state transitions from the normal state (low probability state for normal symbols) in which a normal symbol winning game (normal symbol winning game) is difficult to play to the time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) in which a normal symbol winning game is easy to play, from transitioning to the time-saving state during the execution of a long period of normal symbol variation (normal symbol winning game that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state) during the normal state, resulting in a long period during which a normal symbol lottery is not executed during the time-saving state being set, despite the time-saving state being set.

As described above with reference to Figure 2, the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has various devices arranged in the game area of the game board 13, and the game board 13 is configured so that there is no difference (is unlikely to be any difference) in the game value obtained by the player whether a game is played in which the ball flows down to the left area formed to the left of the variable display unit 80 (left-hand play) or a game in which the ball flows down to the right-hand area (right-hand play). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, various devices are arranged symmetrically with respect to the perpendicular line at the center of the game board 13. In the lower area of the variable display unit 80, there are a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter and trigger a lottery for a first special symbol, a second ball entrance 640 located below the first ball entrance 64 and through which a ball can enter and trigger a lottery for a second special symbol, an electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 and opened in a normal winning game that is executed when a normal symbol lottery is won, and a variable winning device 65 located below the second ball entrance 640 and opened in a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery.

A ball shot by left-handed play flows down the left side area and half of the balls pass through the through gate 67 provided in the left side area. Both balls that pass through the through gate 67 and balls that do not pass through the through gate 67 flow down toward the first ball entrance 64 provided in the lower area by nails planted in the game board 13. Here, balls that flow straight down between the nails enter one of the two general ball entrances 63. In this control example, it is configured so that about 1/50 of the balls that flow down the left side area enter one of the two general ball entrances 63, and if a ball enters the general ball entrance 63, 10 prize balls (bonus) are awarded.

The first ball entrance 64 is configured so that one ball can enter the first ball entrance 64 at a rate of 1 in 15 balls, and when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, four balls are paid out as prize balls. The second ball entrance 640 is configured so that when the electric device 640 is closed (shown in white in FIG. 2), almost no balls enter the first ball entrance 640, and when the electric device 640 is open (shown in black in FIG. 2), one ball enters the first ball entrance 640 at a rate of about one in two balls that are launched in left-handed play and flow down the left side area, and when a ball enters the first ball entrance 640, one ball is paid out as a prize ball. The variable winning device 65 is configured so that almost no balls enter the first ball entrance 640 when a jackpot game is not being played, and when a jackpot game is being played, two balls enter the first ball entrance 640 at a rate of about two in three balls, and when a ball enters the first ball entrance 640, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

Here, we will explain the variable winning device 65. This variable winning device 65 is a variable ball entry means that is opened during a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and is configured so that a high probability state for the special symbol can be set after the jackpot game ends when a ball that enters the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game passes through a specific area (V-gate) provided in the internal area of the variable winning device 65.

Depending on the type of jackpot won, it is possible to execute a jackpot game in which the ball that enters the variable winning device 65 easily passes through the specific area (V gate) (high probability jackpot game) and a jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass through (normal jackpot game). In this control example, a jackpot game in which the ball that enters the variable winning device 65 easily passes through the specific area (V gate), i.e., a jackpot (game) in which the ball can easily flow down to the specific area (V gate) if normal play is performed during the jackpot game, is referred to as a high probability jackpot (game), and a jackpot game in which the ball that enters the variable winning device 65 has difficulty passing through the specific gate, i.e., a jackpot (game) in which it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area (V gate) even if normal play is performed during the jackpot game, is referred to as a normal jackpot (game).

As described above, even if a guaranteed jackpot game is played, if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) during the jackpot game, the high probability state (guaranteed state) of the special pattern will not be set after the jackpot game ends. In other words, in this control example, the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is not determined at the time when the jackpot game is played. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, the round game (V round game) that is the easiest to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) is played in the round game played in the first round of the jackpot game. Therefore, the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends cannot be determined until this V round game ends. In this way, by configuring the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends based on the game result during the jackpot game, the player can play to win various benefits (prize balls, high probability state of special patterns) in the jackpot game, which can increase the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when using the above-mentioned configuration, it is not possible to set in advance (for example, at the start of the jackpot game) the presentation mode of the notification effect for notifying the player of the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends (for example, the presentation mode of the jackpot ending period), and the presentation mode of the notification effect must be set during the jackpot game, when control processing related to ball output and control processing related to display are executed closely, resulting in a problem that the control processing of the pachinko machine 10 becomes complicated.

In contrast, in this control example, when a guaranteed jackpot game is played, a presentation mode indicating that a guaranteed jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the presentation mode of the notification effect, and a determination is made as to whether or not to switch the presentation mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) just before the notification effect is played (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), and if the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate), the notification effect of the presentation mode set in advance is executed, and only if the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate), the presentation mode of the notification effect is switched. In this way, when normal play is performed during a jackpot game, the presentation mode of the notification effect is set in advance assuming a game state that is likely to be set after the jackpot game ends, and the presentation mode of the notification effect is switched only if it is determined that an unexpected game state will be set, thereby reducing the frequency with which control processing is executed to set the presentation mode of the notification effect during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the special jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and the special jackpot game, which is advantageous to the player, is configured to have a longer ending period than the normal jackpot game. This makes it possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends (during the jackpot game) before the special jackpot state is actually set. On the other hand, if the special jackpot state is not set after the jackpot game ends, informing the player of this for a long period of time would only cause discomfort to the player, so the ending period is configured to be shorter.

In this way, if the length of the jackpot ending period is made different between the special jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, when the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V gate) during the special jackpot game, simply executing a process to switch the presentation mode of the jackpot ending period to the presentation mode executed during the ending period of the normal jackpot game would result in a problem that an unnatural notification presentation would be executed during the ending period because the lengths of the ending periods are different. Also, if a dedicated presentation mode that is set only when the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V gate) during the special jackpot game is prepared in advance, image data (presentation data) for that presentation mode must be stored in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 in advance, which increases the storage capacity.

In contrast, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half and a second half, and the length of the second half is set to the same length regardless of the type of jackpot (high probability jackpot, normal jackpot), and if the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V-gate) during a high probability jackpot game, only the presentation mode corresponding to the second half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the presentation mode set for the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game. This makes it possible to execute a notification presentation that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable, without providing a dedicated presentation mode that is used only when the ball cannot be made to flow down to the specific area (V-gate) during a high probability jackpot game.

In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to a common length regardless of the type of jackpot, so that the presentation mode of the notification presentation executed when the ball cannot flow down to a specific area (V gate) during a guaranteed jackpot game is switched and set. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is possible to configure it so that a notification presentation executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period can be executed by executing a notification presentation from the final round period of the jackpot game, or it is possible to configure it so that a round presentation executed during the final round period of the jackpot game is continuously executed for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set, and then a notification presentation is executed to execute a notification presentation for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is sufficient to configure the amount of bonuses that a player can obtain between left-handed play and right-handed play so that there is no large discrepancy between left-handed play and right-handed play. For example, the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the left side area can be made smaller than the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the right side area, and the proportion of balls entering the first ball entrance port 64 can be made higher in left-handed play than in right-handed play, making it more difficult to obtain prize balls in left-handed play than in right-handed play, but making it easier to execute the first special pattern lottery, and making it easier to obtain prize balls in right-handed play than in left-handed play, but making it more difficult to execute the first special pattern lottery. When configured in this way, during the normal state, i.e., while playing a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the player can play in any manner of his choice, and in a game in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (play in a time-saving state or a special probability state), right-handed play can be more advantageous to the player than left-handed play.

Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is attached to both the left side area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80 and the right side area (right side area) of the variable display unit 80, and the through gate 67 in the left side area is configured to allow 1/2 of the balls flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 to pass through. The through gate 67 in the right side area is configured to allow 1/2 of the balls flowing down the right side area of the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is held. After this winning lottery for the second symbol, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, a "×" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reserved lamp 84 described above. There is one second symbol reserved lamp 84 for each of the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this control example, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of a ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to one time, but may be set to two or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of normal pattern start ports (through gates) 67 that are assembled is not limited to one, but may be multiple (e.g., two). In addition, the assembly position of the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the left of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the right of the variable display device unit 80. In addition, in this control example, most of the balls flowing down the left area of the game board 13 when played from the left are configured to pass through the through gate 67, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that only some of the balls pass through the through gate 67.

Returning to FIG. 2 for further explanation, a variable winning device 65 with an opening width of approximately 50 mm is disposed below the variable display unit 80 (below the electric device 640) so that both balls launched by left-handed play and flowing down the left side area, and balls launched by right-handed play and flowing down the right side area, can win. In this way, by providing a variable winning device 65 with a wide opening width, both balls that flow down the left side of the electric device 640 when played from the left, and balls that flow down the right side of the electric device 640 when played from the right, can win in the variable winning device 65.

Now, referring to FIG. 120, the specific configuration of the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 120(a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 120(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of a ball that has won in the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 120(a), a guide member 65d is provided inside the variable winning device 65, and the ball that has flowed down over the open/close door 65b and won in the specific winning port 65a is configured to flow down in the left and right directions.

Specifically, a ball that flows down the left area and enters the specific winning port 65a from the left side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the left guide flow path 65d1 on the left slope of the guide member 65d and is guided to the first opening 65a1. Furthermore, a ball that flows down the right area and enters the specific winning port 65a from the right side of the variable winning device 65 flows down the right guide flow path 65d2 on the right slope of the guide member 65d and is guided to the second opening 65a2.

Below the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2, a ball detection sensor (65s1, 65s2) is provided to detect a ball that has won the variable winning device 65. When the ball detection sensor detects a ball, a payout control is executed to pay out 15 balls as prize balls. In this way, by providing an opening (first opening 65a1) through which a ball that has flowed down the left area and won the variable winning device 65 can pass, and an opening (second opening 65b1) through which a ball that has flowed down the right area and won the variable winning device 65 can pass, and by providing a ball detection sensor for each opening, it is possible to play the game without any difference whether the player plays left-handed or right-handed during a jackpot game.

Next, referring to FIG. 120(b), the flow of the ball that enters the specific winning port 65a will be described. As shown in FIG. 120(b), the ball that passes through the first opening 65a1 passes through the first ball detection sensor 65s1, flows down the first flow path 65e1 and the second flow path 65e2 on the guide path 65e, and then flows down either the third flow path 65e3 or the fourth flow path 65e4 depending on the switching state of the switching valve 65y.

The downstream end of the third flow path 65e3 is provided with an outlet 65h1, and the balls that flow down the third flow path 65e3 enter the outlet 65h and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Although not shown, a ball detection sensor is provided in the discharge path through which the balls that enter the outlet 65h1 flow down, and is configured to be able to count the number of balls that enter the outlet 65h1.

A specific area (V gate) 65v is provided in the fourth flow path 65e4, and an outlet 65h2 is provided at the downstream end through which balls that have passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v enter. The specific area (V gate) is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the passing ball, and if it is detected that a ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v within a specified period during a jackpot game, the detection result is stored, and when the jackpot game ends, the stored result is referenced to set the game state after the jackpot game ends.

Here, the operation of the switching valve 65y during a jackpot game will be explained. The switching valve 65y is a variable member driven by a V solenoid 209a (see FIG. 137), not shown, and is configured to maintain a closed state (see FIG. 120(b)) for allowing balls that have flowed down the second flow path 65e2 to flow down to the third flow path 65e3 when the V solenoid 209a is not energized (off state), and to maintain an open state for allowing balls that have flowed down the second flow path 65e2 to flow down to the fourth flow path 65e4 when the V solenoid 209a is energized (on state).

This V solenoid 209a is normally in an OFF state, and is controlled to be ON only for a predetermined period during a jackpot game. Specifically, it is controlled to be ON when a specific round game (first round game) among the multiple round games executed during a jackpot game is started, and to be OFF when the specific round game (first round game) ends, or when the play time of the specific round game has elapsed a predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds). In other words, the switching valve 65y is configured to be switched as part of the jackpot control executed during a jackpot game.

This configuration allows the ball to enter the variable winning device 65 only when a jackpot game is being played (when jackpot control is being played), and also allows the ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 to flow down to the specific area (V gate) 65v. In addition, the bonus (setting of a high probability state for a special symbol) that is awarded based on the ball passing through the specific area (V gate) 65v is configured to be awarded at the end of the jackpot game (processing executed at the end of the jackpot game), so that even if fraudulent activity is committed by passing a ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v at any time other than during a jackpot game, the bonus will not be awarded to the player.

In this control example, the jackpot control process executed during the jackpot game is configured to execute a switching control for switching the switching valve 65y according to a predetermined rule based on the timing when a specific round game is started, but the switching control may be configured to be executed based on other triggers. For example, the switching control may be executed when the jackpot game starts, or when the opening period of the jackpot game ends, or when the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game is measured and the measurement result becomes a specific number. In addition, when the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 becomes a specific number, the number of balls in the entire jackpot game may be the discrimination target, or the number of balls in each round game may be the discrimination target. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing during the jackpot game a state in which it is easy to pass the balls to the specific area (V gate) is set.

Furthermore, the length of the opening period set when a jackpot game is executed and the opening and closing pattern of the opening and closing door 65b may be configured to differ for each type of jackpot. By configuring in this way, even if the same switching control is executed on the switching valve 65y regardless of the type of jackpot, it is possible to execute a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to reach the specific area (V-gate) 65v during the period in which a state in which it is easy for the ball to pass through to the specific area (V-gate) and a jackpot game in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through can be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 121, the configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described. FIG. 121 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example. As shown in FIG. 121, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each function, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc., as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 21). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 137). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

<Regarding the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 136, the flow of the game in this control example will be described. Fig. 136 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example. As shown in Fig. 136, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be able to set three types of game states as game states: a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and is configured to set the normal state in the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the pachinko machine 10, or the state after the power is turned on with the RAM erase switch 122 operated (pressed)).

During the normal state, a game is played that mainly involves the selection of a first special symbol, which is executed by inserting a ball into the first ball entrance 64. In the normal state, in which a low probability state for the special symbol is set, the probability of winning a jackpot for the special symbol is set to 1/200, and when a jackpot is won, either "jackpot A" (selection rate 1/2) or "jackpot B" (selection rate 1/2) is selected as the jackpot type. When "jackpot A" is selected, a jackpot game (high probability jackpot game) in which it is easy to pass the ball into the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game is played, and when "jackpot B" is selected, a jackpot game (normal jackpot game) in which it is difficult to pass the ball into the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game is played.

If the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends. This high probability state ends when the number of times the special symbol lottery (variable) has been performed reaches 50 times, or when a jackpot is won, and the game state transitions to another game state. Specifically, if the number of times the special symbol lottery has been performed reaches 50 times while the high probability state is set, the game state transitions from the high probability state to a time-saving state before the 51st special symbol lottery is performed. In this control example, the process of transitioning the gaming state from the probability variable state to the time-saving state is configured to be executed when the special pattern variation corresponding to the 50th special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, but the 51st special pattern lottery need not be executed in a state in which a high probability state for the special pattern is set. For example, the gaming state may be transitioned immediately after the 50th special pattern lottery is executed (at the start of the 50th special pattern variation), or immediately before the 51st special pattern lottery is executed (at a timing when the execution conditions for the 51st special pattern lottery are met but the special pattern lottery has not been executed).

The special probability state is a state with a high probability of winning normal symbols, so the electric device 640 is more likely to open when a normal symbol is hit than in the normal state, which is a state with a low probability of winning normal symbols, and play is mainly based on the selection of the second special symbol. In the special probability state, where a high probability state of the special symbol is set, the probability of a jackpot for the special symbol is set to 1/50, and if a jackpot is won in the selection of the second special symbol, one of the following jackpot types will be selected: "jackpot C" (selection rate 3/10), "jackpot D" (selection rate 4/10), or "jackpot E" (selection rate 3/10).

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which 4 rounds of probability variable jackpot play are played, "Jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which 7 rounds of probability variable jackpot play are played, and "Jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which 16 rounds of probability variable jackpot play are played. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, probability variable jackpot play will always be played. Therefore, in terms of the probability of playing probability variable jackpot play, the second special pattern lottery is a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery.

In addition, details will be described later with reference to FIG. 141, but in this control example, if a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, 7 rounds of play are always executed, and if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, an average of 8.8 rounds of play (4 rounds is 30%, 7 rounds is 40%, and 16 rounds is 30%) are executed. Therefore, in terms of the average number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game, the second special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery. Note that, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, there is a possibility that 4 rounds of play will be executed, so the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game will be the smallest when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery. Therefore, in terms of the minimum number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game, the first special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery.

Next, the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) will be explained. If the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state wins "jackpot B", if the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the high probability state exceeds 50, or if the ball cannot pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the high probability jackpot game, the time-saving state is set. This time-saving state is configured to disappear until the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous jackpot game reaches 100, or if a jackpot is won before reaching 100. In other words, if the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game (if jackpot B is won), the time-saving state is set for the period from the end of the jackpot game to the execution of 100 special symbol variations (the number of time-saving times is set to 100). On the other hand, if the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the high probability state exceeds 50, the number of time-saving times is set to 50 after the high probability state ends.

During this time-saving state, the game state is set to a high probability state for normal symbols, similar to the above-mentioned probability state, so the electric device 640 is more likely to open, and the game state is one in which the second special symbol lottery is primarily executed. Also, the lottery probability for the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state is the same as in the normal state. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the special symbol lottery is executed with the same jackpot probability as in the normal state. In other words, in terms of the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery, the time-saving state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the special symbol lottery is executed with a lower probability of winning than in the high probability state, and the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery is the same as in the high probability state. In other words, in terms of the probability of winning the jackpot through the special symbol lottery, the time-saving state is a game state that is less favorable to the player than the high probability state. Note that in this control example, the high probability state and the time-saving state are configured so that the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery is the same, but this is not limited to this. For example, the change time of the second special symbol lottery executed during the high probability state and the change time of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state may be different, and for example, the special symbol change may be executed in a shorter change time during the high probability state than during the normal state.

<Electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 137. Fig. 137 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing special symbols, drawing normal symbols, setting the display on the first symbol display device 37, setting the display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display on the third symbol display device 81. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, referring to FIG. 138, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 are described. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to draw special symbols, draw normal symbols, set the display on the first symbol display device 37, set the display on the second symbol display device 83, and set the display on the third symbol display device 81.

The first winning random number counter C1 used to draw the special symbols and to set the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 uses the following: the first winning type counter C1 used to draw the special symbols, the first winning type counter C2 used to select the big winning type of the special symbols, the stop type selection counter (C3) used to select the stop type of a miss in the special symbols, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern.

The second winning random number counter C4 is used to select the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the normal symbol fluctuation pattern are used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and they are loop counters that return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 156), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 167), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to balls entering the first ball opening 64 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4), and a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to balls entering the second ball entrance 640 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4). The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 64.

When the conditions for starting the special pattern (conditions for changing) are met, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, or the various values stored in the reserved first area of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, which contain information about the special pattern corresponding to the special pattern type for which the next lottery will be executed, are shifted to the special pattern execution area, and the special pattern change based on the various stored values begins.

In this control example, a configuration is used in which there are two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), but this is not limited to this, and there may be only one type of special symbol. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area for the corresponding special symbol type are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and special symbol variation based on the various stored values is initiated. By configuring in this way, even in a pachinko machine 10 that uses multiple special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be smoothly executed.

Furthermore, as in this control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has multiple special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), it may be configured so that the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) may be configured to have a special symbol execution area. This makes it possible to execute the next special symbol variation promptly when the start conditions for each special symbol are met.

In addition, in this control example, the lottery results for the special symbols are configured to be either a big win or a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in some cases where the lottery results for the special symbols are misses, the player may win a small win that can be awarded a smaller bonus than when the big win is won (a bonus different from when the big win is won). By configuring in this way, even if the big win is not won, an opportunity to award a bonus to the player can be provided, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In this case, a small win type counter can be provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the value of the small win type counter obtained can be configured to be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and can be configured to be referenced when the lottery for the special symbols is executed.

In addition, if the special pattern lottery allows a small jackpot to be won, the game state transition content based on winning a big jackpot and the game state transition content based on winning a small jackpot may be configured to be different. For example, when a big jackpot is won, the game state may be transitioned to the normal state at the start of the big jackpot game, and a new game state may be set after the big jackpot game ends based on the set big jackpot type. When a small jackpot is won, the game state at the time of winning the small jackpot is maintained and a small jackpot game is executed, and the game state does not transition even after the small jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the presence or absence of a transition in the game state and the content of the transition depending on the type of winning (big win, small win), providing a wide variety of games.

In addition, in this embodiment, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b that corresponds to the ball entering (passing through) the through gate 67, which is made up of four reserved areas (first reserved areas), and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.

When the normal symbol start condition (change condition) is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the normal symbol change based on the various stored values is initiated.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 138. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one in sequence within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 999) and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 999 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 999). In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 39) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 167).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), for example, and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the first winning random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and a jackpot for the special pattern is determined when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table 202a.

Now, the first winning random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 140(a). FIG. 140(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202a. This first winning random number table 202a is a table that defines the random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a jackpot in the lottery for special symbols.

Specifically, the first win random number table 202a specifies different values for determining a jackpot depending on the game state (probability state of the special symbol). As shown in FIG. 140(a), for a game state in which the special symbol has a low probability of winning (normal state, time-saving state), the first win random number counter C1 has a value of "0 to 4" as the jackpot determination value, and the other values ("5 to 999") are specified as the loss determination value. Also, for a game state in which the special symbol has a high probability of winning (high probability state), the first win random number counter C1 has a value of "0 to 19" as the jackpot determination value, and the other values ("20 to 999") are specified as the loss determination value. In other words, since the update range of the first winning random number table 202a is 1000 numbers from "0 to 999," the probability of a jackpot being determined in a low probability state for special symbols is 1/200 (5 out of 1000), and the probability of a jackpot being determined in a high probability state for special symbols is 1/50 (20 out of 1000).

In this control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state, but the invention is not limited to this and the probability of winning a jackpot may be the same regardless of the game state, or three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability for special symbols may be different for up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, or simply, the special symbol state may be set to three or more types, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, in this control example, two types of lottery results, "big win" and "loss", are determined as the lottery results for the special symbols. In addition, a "small win" may be determined as a third lottery result as a type of "loss". When this "small win" is won, a small win game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a period (one round) shorter than that of the "big win". By configuring in this way, a small amount of bonus (prize balls) can be awarded to the player when the big win is not won. Note that when the "small win" is a type of "loss", it is possible to award the player with prize balls from the small win game, but since the big win has not been won, it is preferable to configure the process of changing the game state (setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) not to be executed. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the bonus awarded to the player based on the big win and the bonus awarded to the player based on the small win.

As described above, if it is configured so that a "small win" can be won as a result of the special pattern lottery, the first win random number table 202a can be configured to specify the value of the first win random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small win". By configuring it in this way, the big win lottery and small win lottery for the special pattern can be executed in the same process, so the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced compared to when the big win lottery and small win lottery are executed in different processes. In addition, it is possible to prevent a big win and a small win from being won in the same special pattern lottery.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. In this embodiment, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to refer to the first win type selection table 202c to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 141.

Figure 141 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the jackpot type selection table 202d. As shown in Figure 141 (a), this jackpot type selection table 202d has a special jackpot 1 table 202d1 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, and a special jackpot 2 table 202d2 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol.

First, the contents of the special 1 jackpot table 202d1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 141(b). FIG. 141(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special 1 jackpot table 202d1. As described above, the special 1 jackpot table 202d1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, and different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the acquired first jackpot type counter C2.

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (update range "0-99") is set to "0-49" and "jackpot A" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "50" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot A", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the special win type counter C2, 50 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot A." Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

As shown in FIG. 241(b), when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 99", "jackpot B" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7, a normal jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special probability counter 203ja is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, for "jackpot B", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "15 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 50 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot B." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot B" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

In other words, the two jackpot types (jackpot A, jackpot B) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery have the same number of rounds of jackpot play, but differ in the ease with which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot play, and are configured so that a jackpot play is executed in which it is easier for the ball to flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot play with "jackpot A" than with "jackpot B." Therefore, "jackpot A" is a more advantageous jackpot type than "jackpot B."

Next, the contents stipulated in the special 2 jackpot table 202d2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 241(c). FIG. 241(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special 2 jackpot table 202d2. This special 2 jackpot table 202d2 is a data table that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery and the jackpot type is selected.

As shown in FIG. 241(c), the special symbol 2 jackpot table 202d2 in this first control example specifies three jackpot types for the second special symbol (special symbol 2): "jackpot C" to "jackpot E."

Specifically, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the special jackpot type counter C2 is set to a value in the range of "0 to 29" and "jackpot C" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 4, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "50" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot C", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the special win type counter C2, 30 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot C." Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C" will be determined is 30% (30/100).

As shown in FIG. 241(c), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "30 to 69" as the jackpot type "jackpot D". This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "50" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot D", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 40 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot D." Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C" will be determined is 40% (40/100).

As shown in FIG. 241(c), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "70 to 99" and "jackpot E" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 16, a certain jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the value of the certain jackpot counter 203i is set to "50" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the certain jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the certain jackpot counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in the "jackpot E", it is specified that the ending period of the jackpot game is set to "17 seconds".

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 30 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot E", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot E" will be determined is 30% (30/100).

In other words, the three jackpot types (jackpot C, jackpot D, jackpot E) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery all result in a guaranteed jackpot game, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game differs, with "jackpot E," which results in the most rounds of game, being the most advantageous jackpot type for the player, and "jackpot A" being the least advantageous jackpot type for the player.

As explained above, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a guaranteed jackpot game will be played, making it a more advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state set after the jackpot game ends, compared to the first special pattern lottery, which has a 50% chance of playing a guaranteed jackpot game. Also, in terms of the number of rounds played during a jackpot game, i.e., the number of prize balls that can be won during a jackpot game, the second special pattern lottery has a higher maximum number that can be won, and the second special pattern lottery has a lower minimum number that can be won. Also, the second special pattern lottery has a higher average number of prize balls that can be won.

Therefore, in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained under the minimum conditions, the first special symbol lottery is more advantageous, and in other respects, the second special symbol lottery is more advantageous. Note that, in this control example, the jackpot types shown in FIG. 241 are specified, but this is not limited to this, and various jackpot types may be set based on the same technical ideas as the jackpot types that can be set in each of the control examples described above.

In this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the same number of rounds of jackpot play is executed for all jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to allow a different number of rounds of play to be executed depending on the jackpot type selected. In addition, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol, the time-saving state is set for the same period (100 times of time-saving) after the jackpot play ends for all jackpots, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that the time-saving state is not set for some jackpot wins (some of the jackpot types that are set), or the number of time-saving times (time-saving end conditions) is different depending on the jackpot type. Furthermore, depending on the jackpot type selected, there may be a jackpot type in which the time-saving state is set at the end of the jackpot play, and a jackpot type in which the normal state is set.

Returning to FIG. 138 for further explanation, the dynamic type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The dynamic type counter CS1 determines the rough display mode (variation time) of the so-called short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, super reach, etc. Specifically, the display mode is determined by the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 167) described later is executed, and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. In addition, a variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 142) that stores random number values that determine one variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 142(a), the variation pattern selection table 202b defines a normal table 202b1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and a special probability/time-saving table 202b2 used when the special probability state or time-saving state is set. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the data table used to select the variation pattern is different depending on the game state, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected can be different depending on the game state.

Next, the detailed contents of each table defined in the variation pattern selection table 202b will be explained with reference to Fig. 142(b) and Fig. 143. Fig. 142(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal table 202b1. This normal table 202b1 is a data table that is referenced when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and is defined so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot than when it is a miss, and different variation patterns are defined depending on the type of special symbol drawn and the result of the special symbol lottery that was executed.

First, the normal table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 142(b). FIG. 142(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal table 202b1. In the normal table 202b1, various variation patterns are defined in correspondence with the results of the lottery for the special symbols, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, when the type of the special symbol (pattern type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the result of the hit/miss determination is a big hit, and the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", a normal (reach) with a variation time of 33 to 42 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a combination command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an added time of 3 to 12 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Although detailed explanation will be omitted, in this control example, the added time is set in more detail in units of 0.5 seconds depending on the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. For example, when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0", the added time is "3 seconds", when it is "1", the added time is "3.5 seconds", when it is "2", the added time is "4 seconds", when it is "3", the added time is "4.5 seconds", when it is "3", the added time is "5 seconds", when it is "4", when it is "5.5 seconds", when it is "5", when it is "6 seconds", when it is "6". When it is "6", the added time is "6.5 seconds". , if the number is "7", the additional time is "7 seconds", if the number is "8", the additional time is "7.5 seconds", if the number is "9-11", the additional time is "8 seconds", if the number is "12", the additional time is "8.5 seconds", if the number is "13", the additional time is "9 seconds", if the number is "14", the additional time is "9.5 seconds", if the number is "15", the additional time is "10 seconds", if the number is "16", the additional time is "10.5 seconds", if the number is "17", the additional time is "11 seconds", if the number is "18", the additional time is "11.5 seconds", and if the number is "19", the additional time is "12 seconds".

When a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (30 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating the added time are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, a variation pattern (normal reach) is set based on the information contained in the basic command, and a reach pattern (type of third pattern) is set based on the information contained in the addition command. As a result, even if the type of third pattern in the middle pattern row Z2 that is first visible to the player when a reach state is reached is configured to always be a specific third pattern (a third pattern with the number 1 in this control example), a reach performance can be executed with various types of third patterns without varying the period from when the variation performance is executed to when the reach state is reached.

In addition, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", a Super (Reach) with a variation time of 43 to 52 seconds is specified as the variation pattern. When this Super is decided, a combination command indicating a base time of 30 seconds and an added time of either 13 to 22 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. In this control example, the added time is configured to be set in more detail in 0.5 second increments depending on the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, and as the content is the same as the normal pattern described above, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

In this control example, the presentation mode of the reach presentation can be changed according to the information (number of seconds) included in the addition command. Specifically, if the number of seconds included in the addition command is between 3 and 12 seconds, a normal reach presentation (a presentation in which the middle symbol column Z2 moves around one revolution and then stops) is executed, whereas if the number of seconds is between 13 and 22 seconds, a super reach presentation (a presentation in which the middle symbol column Z2 moves around two revolutions and then stops) is executed.

By configuring in this manner, for example, in a case where a variable performance is executed in the same performance mode during an initial specified period, and then a variable performance in which the performance mode branches is executed, it is possible to set the period during which the same performance mode is executed based on a basic command (a command including information indicating a basic time), and set the variable performance after the branching based on an addition command (a command including information indicating an added time). Therefore, for example, even if the overall variable time is the same, different variable performances can be easily set on the audio lamp control device 113 side by simply changing the proportion of the variable time that is accounted for by the basic time and the proportion indicated by the added time.

In this control example, the basic time (30 seconds) when a normal reach is executed and the basic time (30 seconds) when a super reach is executed are the same, and the presentation style of the reach presentation is changed according to the length of the variable time set as the added time, but without being limited to this, the basic time for a normal reach may be set to 30 seconds and the basic time for a super reach to 40 seconds, and the added time may be selected from the range of "3 to 12 seconds" just to determine the type of third pattern.

Next, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", SP (reach) with a variation time of 90 seconds is specified as the variation pattern. When this SP is determined, a combination command indicating a base time of 55 seconds and an added time of 35 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Here, when SP is determined, a performance is executed in which the variation performance of the third pattern that has once reached the reach state is switched to another variation performance, so even if the type of the third pattern in the middle pattern column Z2 that is first visible to the player when the reach state is reached is always configured to be a specific third pattern (in this control example, the third pattern with the number 1 added), the display order of the third pattern in the middle pattern column Z2 can be changed in the middle of the variation to correspond to the third pattern that will finally stop without giving the player a sense of incongruity, so there is no need to set the type of the third pattern that will reach the reach state by changing the added time, as in the above-mentioned normal and super.

Similarly, when the symbol type is special symbol 1 and the hit/miss judgment result is a miss, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", a miss with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this miss is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 8 seconds and an added time of 0 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Here, if a miss is determined, a fluctuation performance of the third symbol is executed in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a miss without entering a reach state. Therefore, there is no need to set the added time.

In addition, when the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", a variation pattern of a variation time of 33 to 52 seconds is specified as a reach miss. When this reach miss is determined, a combination command indicating a base time of 30 seconds and an added time of 3 to 22 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. In this control example, the added time is configured to be set in more detail in 0.5 second units according to the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, and since the content is the same as the normal pattern described above, a detailed description is omitted. In other words, even if the lottery result is a miss, the same variation pattern command as when the lottery result is a win is set. In addition, when the lottery result is a miss, it is necessary to set the type of the third pattern to be stopped and displayed so that the third pattern to be finally stopped and displayed is a combination other than that of a jackpot, so that the voice lamp control device 113 executes a correction process so that the third pattern is set to a third pattern that is shifted by one from the setting content of the third pattern type based on the addition command referenced when a win is obtained. This makes it easy to set a presentation mode in which, when a reach miss presentation is executed, the third symbol is displayed stopped near the third symbol that is a jackpot combination (miss stop display).

On the other hand, if the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot, and if the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99", a special reach with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 10 seconds and an added time of 30 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Also, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "100 to 198", a special reach with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this special reach is determined, a command combination indicating a base time of 10 seconds and an added time of 0 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command.

Here, in this control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, as described above with reference to Fig. 124(b) to Fig. 126, the variation performance in the chance zone is executed. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating a basic time (10 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating an additional time (30 seconds) are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern (special variation) is set based on the information included in the basic command, and the special reach is set based on the information included in the addition command. More specifically, when a basic command indicating a basic time of 10 seconds is notified as the variation pattern command of the second special symbol in the normal state, the performance mode of the special variation performance in which the third symbol varies vertically is set as shown in Fig. 124(b). Then, the performance mode in which the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state (temporary stop display) at the timing when the basic time has elapsed is set as shown in Fig. 125(a). Then, when an addition command indicating an additional time of 0 seconds is received (when the variation pattern is a special miss), the third symbol is displayed as it is and the variation performance is ended.

On the other hand, if an addition command indicating an addition time of 30 seconds is received (if the fluctuation pattern is a special reach), a fluctuation effect is set in which the temporarily stopped third symbol is restarted, as shown in Figure 125 (b) and Figure 126.

Next, the contents of the probability variable/time-saving table 202b2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the probability variable/time-saving table 202b2. This probability variable/time-saving table 202b2 is a data table that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern when the probability variable state or time-saving state is set, and each variation pattern is stipulated so that a different variation pattern is selected depending on the type of special symbol, the number of variations (the number of times the special symbol has changed since the end of the jackpot game), the result of the special symbol lottery, and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1.

Here, in this control example, a high probability state (high probability state or time-saving state) for normal symbols is always set after the end of a jackpot game. The high probability state for normal symbols that has been set is configured to continue until a time-saving end condition is met. In this control example, the time-saving end conditions are a first time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times that special symbol variations have been executed since the high probability state for normal symbols was set reaches 100, and a second time-saving end condition that is met when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed when the high probability state for normal symbols is set. When either of the time-saving end conditions is met, a transition from the high probability state for normal symbols to the low probability state for normal symbols occurs.

During this high probability state of normal symbols (high probability state, time-saving state), it is set up so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than during the low probability state of normal symbols (normal state). This makes it possible to increase the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed per unit time, providing players with an efficient game (lottery game for special symbols).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 143, during the period in which the number of times the special symbol changes from the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to "1 to 20 times", regardless of the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol lottery, and the value of the acquired change type counter CS1, a change pattern with a change time of "5 seconds" (short change) is selected. In other words, the predetermined period from the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the period until the special symbol changes 20 times) becomes a high-speed change period (first period) in which the special symbol lottery is executed with a change time shorter than other periods. By setting this high-speed change period, it is possible to make the next jackpot game easier to execute in a short period of time after the end of the jackpot game, so that the player can think that the next jackpot game has been executed in relation to the first jackpot game, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, during this high-speed change period, a change pattern with a change time of "5 seconds" is always selected, so it is possible to easily set the performance period of the performance (continuous performance) that spans multiple special symbol lotteries.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability state for normal symbols), it is highly likely that the reserved ball for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved ball) will not have been acquired at the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on the jackpot win, so a special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is likely to be executed using the reserved ball for the first special symbol that has already been acquired (special symbol 1 reserved ball). If a jackpot is won in the normal state where a probability bonus state or time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) is set, it is highly likely that the reserved ball for the special symbol 2 will have been acquired at the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on the jackpot win, so a special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is likely to be executed using the reserved ball for the special symbol 2.

In this way, immediately after the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, a special pattern lottery for any pattern type (first special pattern, second special pattern) can be executed, so as shown in FIG. 143, the same variation pattern is selected regardless of the pattern type for a predetermined period of time after the high probability state of the normal pattern is set (the period until 20 special pattern variations have been executed). This allows the same special pattern variation to be executed regardless of which pattern type a special pattern lottery is executed, making it easier to set the performance period for a performance (continuous performance) that spans multiple special pattern lotteries.

As described above with reference to FIG. 119, this control example is configured so that when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, both the balls shot by left-handed play and the balls shot by right-handed play reach the second ball entrance 640 at a rate of one in two balls, so that the special pattern lottery can be executed without interruption just by continuing to execute the game of shooting balls during the high probability state of the normal pattern. Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the period until the high-speed fluctuation period ends, that is, 100 seconds, which is the period until the 20th special pattern fluctuation ends (5 seconds x 20 times), is set in advance as the high-speed fluctuation period, and a continuous performance of 100 seconds can be easily executed as a continuous performance spanning 20 special pattern lotteries. In this case, only when a jackpot is won during the high-speed fluctuation period, a switching process for switching the performance mode of the continuous performance already set can be executed, and the process for executing the performance during the high-speed fluctuation period can be simplified.

In addition, a determination means may be provided to determine whether or not to temporarily stop the 100-second continuous performance set during the high-speed fluctuation period, and if it is determined that the period from when the currently executing special pattern fluctuation is stopped and the next special pattern fluctuation is executed is longer than a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second), that is, if it is determined that the special pattern fluctuation has been interrupted, a process to temporarily stop the currently executing continuous performance may be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the continuous performance from progressing ahead even if the player leaves the seat during the high-speed fluctuation period. In addition, an operation means (e.g., frame button 22) that can be operated by the player may be provided, and if a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means, a process to temporarily stop the currently executing continuous performance may be executed.

In this control example, the same fluctuation time (5 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected during the high-speed fluctuation period, but this is not limited to this, and a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time other than 5 seconds is set may be selected. In this case, it is preferable to make it easier to set a fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot win than when the jackpot win is not won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily lengthen the period from when the presentation mode of the previously set 100-second continuous presentation is switched to when the special pattern indicating a jackpot win is stopped and displayed, so that the jackpot win can be announced in a presentation mode that allows the player to fully understand the lottery results, improving the presentation effect.

In addition, instead of setting the continuous performance mode all at once for the time (100 seconds) expected as the high-speed fluctuation period, the high-speed fluctuation period (100 seconds) can be divided into multiple periods, and, for example, the first continuous performance to be executed during the first high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds) can be set at the start timing of the high-speed fluctuation period (first high-speed fluctuation period), and the second continuous performance to be executed during the second high-speed fluctuation period (50 seconds) can be set at the start timing of the second high-speed fluctuation period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a performance mode (the performance mode for the latter half of the continuous performance period) that is not executed when a jackpot is won in the first half of the high-speed fluctuation period is set in advance.

Furthermore, it is not necessary to execute the continuous performance for the entire high-speed fluctuation period, and the continuous performance may be executed only during a specific first period of the high-speed fluctuation period (for example, the period from the 10th to the 20th fluctuation of the special pattern fluctuations (total of 20) executed during the high-speed fluctuation period).

Returning to FIG. 143, the explanation continues. If the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates after the end of the big win game) is "21 times to 49 times (second period)", and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, in the entire range, a fluctuation pattern (win) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected, and if the lottery result is "miss", a fluctuation pattern (long miss) with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 179", and a fluctuation pattern (short miss) with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is selected for the range of "180 to 198".

In this control example, when a high probability state (high probability state, time-saving state) of a normal pattern is set, the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed, and during the second period in which 21 or more special pattern variations have been executed since the high probability state of a normal pattern was set, the second special pattern lottery is likely to be executed as long as the game is continued. However, as described above in FIG. 119, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has a game board 13 structure that allows balls to enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 regardless of whether the game is played from the left or right, so that, for example, if the game is interrupted during the high probability state or time-saving state, the first special pattern lottery may be executed after the game is resumed.

As described above, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, unlike when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, there is a possibility (50% chance of winning) that a normal jackpot game will be played, and when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in a game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly played, the lottery result will be unfavorable to the player among the jackpot wins. In addition, in this control example, in the variable performance (variable performance using the third symbol) performed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, in addition to the presence or absence of a jackpot win, the type of jackpot can also be suggested to the player. For example, when the main symbol sz with an odd number is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win, it suggests a jackpot win in which a high probability jackpot game will be played, and when the main symbol sz with an even number is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win, it suggests a jackpot win in which a normal jackpot game will be played.

Therefore, in the case where a reach state (a state in which a part of the main pattern sz, which is a combination indicating a jackpot winning in which a normal jackpot game is played, is displayed as a stopped state and the remaining pattern row is displayed as a moving state) is created with the even-numbered main pattern sz in the variable performance executed during the probability change state or the time-saving state, the player is made to think that he/she won an unfavorable jackpot from the point before the special pattern change is displayed as a stopped state, and the player's motivation to play is reduced. Therefore, in this control example, in the case where a jackpot winning in which a normal jackpot game is played is won in the first special pattern lottery in the game state (probability change state, time-saving state) in which the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed, a variable performance (double reach performance) is always executed in which both the main pattern sz with an odd number and the main pattern sz with an even number are in a reach state, as shown in FIG. 131(a). This prevents the player from thinking that they have won an unfavorable jackpot before the special symbol variation stops and is displayed.

To execute this double reach effect, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the second period, a variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds" is selected. If the above-mentioned double reach effect, which is a variation effect executed during the probability change state or the time-saving state, were executed only when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the player would know that the first special symbol has won the jackpot at the time the double reach effect was executed. Therefore, in this control example, a variation pattern (30-second variation time) for executing the double reach effect is selected for some cases (approximately 80%) where the first special symbol lottery is a miss, some cases (approximately 25%) where the second special symbol lottery is a miss, and some cases (approximately 5%) where the second special symbol lottery is a miss.

By configuring it in this way, when a double reach effect is executed during a sure chance state or a time-saving state, it becomes difficult to tell whether the corresponding special symbol drawing is for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and it also becomes difficult to tell whether the drawing result is a jackpot or not, allowing the player to play with a sense of anticipation until the result of the double reach effect is displayed.

Furthermore, since the double reach effect is also configured to be executed for the second special symbol lottery, which always results in a guaranteed jackpot game being executed if a jackpot is won, it is easier to create an effect indicating that a jackpot has been won for which a guaranteed jackpot game is executed for the entire double reach effect (an effect in which the main symbols sz with odd numbers stop in a combination indicating a jackpot win) compared to when the double reach effect is executed only for the first special symbol lottery. This increases the expectation for a guaranteed jackpot game when the double reach effect is executed.

Returning to FIG. 143, the explanation will continue. When the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol will fluctuate after the end of the big win game) is "50 times (specific period)", a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "20 seconds" (medium fluctuation) is selected, regardless of the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In this control example, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v in the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game, a high probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends. As the conditions for ending the high probability state of the special pattern, a first high probability end condition is established when the number of times the special pattern variation is executed reaches 50 times, and a second high probability end condition is established when a jackpot with a special pattern is won while the high probability state of the special pattern is set. When either of the high probability end conditions is established, the game is configured to transition from the high probability state of the special pattern to a low probability state of the special pattern.

In other words, depending on the results of the jackpot game during play, after the jackpot game ends, a guaranteed bonus state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be set until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 50, and then a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be set until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 50, or a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be set until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches 100 after the jackpot game ends.

The display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to execute a game state indication effect to indicate to the player the currently set game state. For example, when a V notification effect is executed to notify the player that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a notification effect (super chance mode effect) is executed to notify the player that the current game state is in a special probability state, and when the presentation mode during a jackpot game is set so that a V notification effect is not executed even if the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, a common effect (chance mode effect) is executed to make it difficult to tell whether the current game state is in a special probability state.

When the Super Chance Mode effect is being executed, the special symbol fluctuation 50 times (specific period) will end the special symbol fluctuation state, so an effect is executed that indicates that the special symbol fluctuation state will end and that the chance mode (time-saving) will then be set, using the "20-second" fluctuation time set for the 50th special symbol fluctuation. Also, when the chance mode is being executed, an effect is executed that indicates whether or not the special symbol fluctuation state was set during the specific period.

In this way, when executing an information notification effect that notifies the player of information other than the lottery result of the special pattern (information to inform the player that the game state is changing or information to suggest the game state that was previously set) using the special pattern change period to show the lottery result of the special pattern during a specific period, by fixing the change time of the selected special pattern change, it is possible to reduce the variation in the presentation style (including the presentation time) of the information notification effect to notify the player of information other than the lottery result of the special pattern.

In this control example, the execution period of the special pattern change (the 50th special pattern change after the end of the jackpot) that ends the high probability state is set as the specific period, and the change time of the special pattern change is fixed at "20 seconds", but it is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set the execution period of the 45th to 52nd special pattern changes after the end of the jackpot as the specific period (the period for which a fixed change time is selected) including before and after the special pattern change that ends the high probability state, and to configure it so that the information notification performance can be executed using the change time of the special pattern change executed during that specific period.

The presentation mode of the information notification presentation may be changed depending on the result of the special pattern lottery carried out during the specific period described above. For example, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, the presentation mode may be changed to one that does not notify information indicating that the special probability state is ending, or, regardless of the game state that is actually set, the presentation mode may be changed to one that indicates that the game state previously set (the game state set after the end of the previous jackpot game) is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a time-saving state).

In addition, the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during a specific period may be varied depending on the results of the special symbol lottery. For example, the timing of the execution of the information notification effect may be delayed if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery compared to if a jackpot is not won. This makes it possible to interest players not only in the content of the information notification effect but also in the execution timing, thereby enhancing the effect of the presentation.

Also, as in the above example, if the timing at which the information notification effect is executed during a specific period is varied depending on the result of a special pattern lottery, the information notification effect may be set to be executed at a specific timing in advance, and if the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the specific period is a predetermined result (e.g., a jackpot), the timing at which the information notification effect is executed may be varied from the specific timing described above, or the timing at which the information notification effect is executed may not be set in advance, and one execution timing may be determined from among multiple execution timings depending on the result of a special pattern lottery executed during a specific period.

Next, when the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates after the end of the jackpot game) is "51 times to 100 times (third period)", and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 198", that is, in the entire range, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (win) is selected, and when the lottery result is "miss", a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long miss) is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 179", and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "60 seconds" (second super fluctuation) is selected for the range of "180 to 198".

This third period is a period during which the game state is in a time-saving state. In other words, even if a probability-changing state is set after the end of a jackpot game, this is a period during which the probability-changing end condition is met and the time-saving state is set. During this third period, as with the second period described above, the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, but the first special symbol lottery is executed depending on the game method executed. Since executing the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than executing the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery executed during this third period is configured to be more likely to select a variation pattern with a long variation time. As a result, even if the first special symbol lottery is executed during the third period of the time-saving state, the first special symbol variation is executed with a variation pattern with a long variation time, making it easier to obtain reserved balls for the second special symbol during that time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the first special symbol lottery from being executed frequently during the time-saving state.

In addition, during this third period, the double reach effect (see Figure 131) is executed in the same way as during the second period described above, so that the variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds" is selected in the case of a jackpot win in the first special pattern lottery, some of the miss wins, and some of the jackpot wins and miss wins in the second special pattern lottery.

Next, we will explain the content of the various variation patterns stipulated for the second special symbol lottery when the special probability state or time-saving state is set.

As shown in FIG. 143, when the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the number of changes (the number of times the special symbol changes after the end of the jackpot game) is "1 to 20 times (first period)", a change pattern with a change time of "5 seconds" (short change) is selected, regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) and the acquired value of the change type counter CS1. In other words, during the first period, the same change pattern (5-second change) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is executed and when the second special symbol lottery is executed.

Next, if the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuations are executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "21 times to 49 times (second period)" and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", it is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" (second short fluctuation) is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 149", and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "150 to 198". If the lottery result is "lose", it is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" (second short fluctuation) is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 191", and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "192 to 198".

During the second period, which is a high probability state (probability state, time-saving state) of normal symbols in which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, a "10-second" variation pattern is selected except for the variation pattern in which the above-mentioned double reach performance is executed (a variation pattern in which a variation time of 30 seconds is set). In other words, the second special symbol variation is configured to end in a short period of time in a state in which a ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640, and the second special symbol lottery is executed efficiently. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a large number of balls enter the second ball entrance 640 when the special symbol 2 reserved balls are stored up to the upper limit, allowing the player to play in a comfortable manner.

In this control example, the short-term fluctuation time is set to "10 seconds," but this fluctuation time may be set to be even shorter. In this case, it is preferable to set a time (e.g., 3 seconds) longer than the interval (approximately 1.2 seconds) that it takes for a ball launched into the game board 13 to reach the second ball entrance 640. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 decreases even though the player is continuously launching balls, resulting in the first special symbol lottery, which is set as a lower priority than the second special symbol lottery, being executed.

Next, when the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuations are executed after the end of the jackpot game) is "50 times (specific period)", regardless of the lottery result (the lottery result of the special symbol) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "20 seconds" (medium fluctuation) is selected. The fluctuation pattern set during this specific period is the same as the fluctuation pattern selected in response to the first special symbol lottery described above, so a detailed explanation of it will be omitted.

Next, if the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the number of fluctuations (the number of times the special symbol fluctuates after the end of the big win game) is "51 times to 100 times (third period)", and the lottery result (lottery result of the special symbol) is "win", it is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" (second short fluctuation) is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 149", and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "150 to 198", and if the lottery result is "lose", it is stipulated that a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" (short fluctuation) is selected for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 191", and a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of "30 seconds" (long fluctuation) is selected for the range of "192 to 198".

As explained above, in this first control example, the variation pattern selection table 202b has a normal table 202b1 and a special chance/time-saving table 202b2, and is configured so that the data table referenced when selecting a variation pattern varies depending on the set game state. This makes it possible to vary the type of variation pattern selected depending on the set game state, and to show the player the results of the special pattern lottery in a variety of variation patterns, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the same data table (probability change/time-saving table 202b2) is referenced to select the variation pattern when the game state is set to the probability change state and when the time-saving state is set. Therefore, when the "chance mode" is set, which is a presentation mode that makes it difficult for the player to know whether the time-saving state or the probability change state is set, the type of variation pattern selected in response to the special pattern lottery executed can be used to prevent the player from understanding the set game state. Note that in this control example, the data table referenced when selecting the variation pattern during the probability change state and the data table referenced when selecting the variation pattern during the time-saving state are the same, but this is not limited to the above, and different data tables may be referenced.

In this case, it is advisable to provide a data table for high probability variation, which is referenced when selecting a variation pattern during the high probability variation state, and a data table for time-saving variation, which is referenced when selecting a variation pattern during the time-saving state, and provide a specific variation pattern that is specified only in one of the data tables as a type of variation pattern that is selected with a small probability (for example, 5%). This allows the player to grasp the currently set game state based on the type of variation pattern selected only when a specific variation pattern is selected.

In addition, the probability of each variation pattern being selected may be different between the data table for the probability variation mode and the data table for the time-saving mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the currently set game state by analyzing the bias in the variation patterns selected for the special symbol lottery performed during the "chance mode."

As described above, in this control example, the data table referenced when selecting the variation pattern is different depending on the game state that is set. However, the data table referenced may be selected based on conditions other than the game state. For example, when a time-saving state is set after a jackpot game ends, the data table referenced when selecting a variation pattern during the same time-saving state may be different based on the game state that was set when the previous jackpot was won, the jackpot type (stop display mode of the special pattern) that was set when the previous jackpot was won, the display mode of the third pattern stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and whether or not the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65V during the jackpot game (whether or not a V was won).

In this case, when setting a command (variation pattern command) indicating the selected variation pattern, it is advisable to configure it so that a command containing information indicating the type of the referenced data table (variation pattern selection table) is set. This makes it possible for the voice lamp control device 113, when receiving a variation pattern command, to determine the circumstances under which the current game state was set, in addition to the type of variation pattern currently set. Therefore, based on the received variation pattern command, it can determine that, for example, even though a guaranteed jackpot game was played, the ball was not able to enter the V and a time-saving state was set, and a dedicated presentation mode (for example, a "regret mode") can be set.

Returning to FIG. 138 for further explanation, the second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 299). When the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by a second winning random number table 202c stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning that is set by the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. In addition, this second winning random number table 202c is divided into two types, one for when the probability of a winning normal symbol is low and one for when the probability of a winning normal symbol is high, with each type containing a different number of random numbers that result in a big win. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that result in a win different, the probability of a winning normal symbol is changed between when the probability of a winning normal symbol is low and when the probability of a winning normal symbol is high.

The contents stipulated in this second winning random number table 202c will be explained with reference to FIG. 140(b). FIG. 140(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the second winning random number table 202c. As shown in FIG. 140(b), when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, a normal winning is stipulated when the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is a value of "0 to 2", and when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, a normal winning is stipulated when the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 149".

In other words, in this control example, when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the lottery for normal symbols is set to a low probability. As a result, in this embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed play) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state for normal symbols, and the time-saving state, which is a high probability state for normal symbols, it is possible to make it difficult to win a normal symbol win during the normal state, making it difficult for a normal symbol win game to be executed during the normal state and for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability (1/2) of winning in the lottery for normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to execute a normal symbol win game based on a win of a normal symbol during the time-saving state.

In addition, in this control example, different lengths of fluctuation time are set as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation to indicate the result of the normal pattern lottery depending on the set game state, and a longer fluctuation time (e.g., 10 seconds) is set when a low probability state of the normal pattern is set than when a high probability state of the normal pattern is set. In this way, by varying the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery and the length of the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation depending on the game state, it is possible to easily set a game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which it is easy to win the normal pattern lottery and enter the second ball entrance 640.

Furthermore, in this control example, if a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where a low probability state for normal symbols is set is won, a normal symbol winning game can be executed in which the electric device 640 is opened in an operating mode (long opening) that allows multiple balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win the normal symbol lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640, so that no matter what game state is set, the possibility of the second special symbol lottery being executed can be left open for the player, improving the interest of the game.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and is updated once for each timer interrupt processing (see Figure 156) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see Figure 167).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control device 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the displays on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Returning to Fig. 137, the explanation will continue. The ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined in correspondence with the various counters shown in Fig. 138. Now, with reference to Fig. 139(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. Fig. 139(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 139(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment has at least a first win random number table 202a, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, a second win random number table 202c, and a big win type selection table 202d. Note that the first win random number table 202a, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, the second win random number table 202c, and the big win type selection table 202d have been described above when explaining the various counters shown in FIG. 138, so their explanation will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 137, the explanation will continue. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 138, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on due to the recovery from the power outage; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 167) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 166) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 165) as the power outage processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 139(b), the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a game status storage area 203g, a time-saving counter 203h, a special chance counter 203i, a jackpot start flag 203j, a jackpot in progress flag 203k, a special chance setting flag 203m, a special chance passing counter 203n, a winning number counter 203o, a remaining ball timer flag 203p, a remaining ball timer 203q, a special chance active flag 203r, a special chance active timer 203s, a discharge number counter 203t, and a miscellaneous memory area 203z.

The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a is a memory area for storing various counter values obtained based on balls entering the first ball entry port 64 (initial winning), up to the upper limit number (four in this control example).

The second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is a storage area for storing various counter values obtained based on balls entering the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning), up to the upper limit number (four in this control example).

The special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is a memory area in which various counter values for starting the display of the special symbol variation are stored, and when the special symbol stops varying, if various counter values are stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the various counter values are shifted and stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area. In this control example, since the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed in priority to the first special symbol lottery, if various counter values are stored in both the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the various counter values stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the special symbol reserved ball execution area and stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) store the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) upon detection of the start winning. When the MPU 201 detects that a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), it obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3, and CS1 from the counter buffer and stores them in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Also, when it detects that a ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), it obtains the values of the counters C1 to C3, and CS1 from the counter buffer and stores them in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start executing the special pattern variation (lottery), in order to execute processes such as the jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first pattern display device 37 or the third pattern display device 81, it shifts the data corresponding to one of the start winnings (the values of counters C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b described above to this special pattern reserved ball execution area. Note that in this embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c is a storage area in which the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained from the counter buffer (see FIG. 138) is stored when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (start winning). When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (start winning) during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), it obtains the value of the second winning random number counter C4 from the counter buffer and stores it in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c. The normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c has four reserved areas so that data (counter C4 value) corresponding to one start winning can be stored (reserved) up to four times. The data of the reserved balls is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c in the order in which they passed through the through gate 67 (start winning), starting from the reserved area with the earliest data to be consumed.

In addition, when the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) detects that it is time to start the execution of the normal symbol variable display performance based on the start winning, each counter value is stored, and it is a memory for storing data (counter C4 value) to be referenced in processing such as the normal symbol winning lottery and the setting of the display (variable pattern) of the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is time to start the execution of the normal pattern variable display performance, it shifts the data corresponding to one start winning among the data corresponding to each start winning (the value of the second winning random number counter C4) stored in the above-mentioned normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c to this normal pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) in order to execute processes such as the winning lottery and the display settings of the second pattern display device 83. In this embodiment, shifting refers to moving data stored in one area to another area.

The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performance (variable display performance performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to a maximum of four times based on the winning of the first ball entrance 64 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) that is executed periodically every 2 milliseconds. The first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the maximum value of four. Meanwhile, the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by one each time a variable display performance is executed.

The value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a first special pattern reserved ball count command output from the main control device 110 when the counter value is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning). The first special pattern reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time an initial winning is detected and the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is incremented by one.

The second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performance (variable display performance performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 up to a maximum of four times based on the winning of the second ball entrance 640 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) that is executed periodically every 2 milliseconds. The second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power is turned on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added to the counter up to a maximum value of four. On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by one each time a variable display performance is executed.

The value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e (i.e., the number of reserved balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a second special pattern reserved ball count command output from the main control device 110 when the counter value is stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b based on a ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning). The second special pattern reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time an initial winning is detected and the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is incremented by one.

When the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer are stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown), the MPU 201 refers to the data stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area (not shown) in the special pattern jackpot determination process (see S301 in FIG. 158), and performs a jackpot lottery based on the reference data, and determines the fluctuation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result. In the first pattern display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, a fluctuation display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type.

The variation pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the special pattern variation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 performs a variation display performance based on the variation pattern and stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display performed by the second pattern display device 83 up to one time based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 (hereinafter referred to as "initial winning") detected in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) that is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. This normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that stores the total number of reserved balls stored based on the ball passing through the through gate 67. The initial value is set to zero by the initial setting processing of the RAM 203 after power-on (see S1701 in FIG. 166). Then, each time a start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, one is added up to the maximum value (see S904 in FIG. 164). On the other hand, the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a variable display of a normal pattern is executed (see S805 in FIG. 163).

The game status storage area 203g is a storage area for temporarily storing the currently set game status, and stores the game status corresponding to the game status (setting status of the time-saving counter 203h, setting status of the special probability counter 203i) that will be set after the end of the big win game. Specifically, when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 and the value of the special probability counter 203i is 0, the normal status is stored; when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 and the value of the special probability counter 203i is 0, the time-saving status is stored; and when the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 and the value of the special probability counter 203i is greater than 0, the special probability status is stored.

Furthermore, when a jackpot game is being played, the system is configured to store a winning game state (jackpot state) indicating that a jackpot game is being played, and type information indicating the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being played. In addition, the system is configured to store regular winning game in-play information indicating that a regular winning game is being played.

Then, a status command is set based on the information stored (memorized) in the game status storage area 203g, and the status command is output to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives the output status command and temporarily stores it in the slave status setting area 223g.

The information stored in this game status storage area 203g is configured to be able to be retained even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and is configured to set a status command corresponding to the information stored in the game status storage area 203g during the start-up process (see FIG. 166) that is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

This allows the audio and lamp control device 113 to determine the current game status even if the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or other reason.

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter for indicating the state in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set, and is set to a value corresponding to the state in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set. After the end of a jackpot game, a value corresponding to the type of jackpot that was won is set in this time-saving counter 203h (see S2103 in FIG. 170). When a jackpot game is won, the counter is cleared to 0. As a result, a high probability state for normal symbols is not set during a jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player during a jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted based on the special pattern lottery (variation). When the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0, the high probability state of the normal pattern ends and a transition to a low probability state of the normal pattern occurs. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the high probability state of the normal pattern may be configured to continue until the next jackpot game is played (until a jackpot is won). In this case, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be configured to be set to "10000".

In addition, in this embodiment, the condition for terminating the high probability state of the normal pattern and the condition for decrementing the value of the time-saving counter 203h are set only as a condition for decrementing the value of the time-saving counter 203h based on the number of times the special pattern is drawn (varied). However, without being limited to this, for example, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be configured to be decremented when a termination condition that can be established depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control unit 110 is established. Specifically, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be configured to be decremented when the lottery result of each pattern lottery executed in a state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special miss win), or when the result of the normal pattern lottery is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special normal win win).

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by one at a time, but the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be decremented multiple times (for example, by 2) in a lump depending on the type of termination condition that has been met, or the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be decremented so that it becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the time-saving counter 203h. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state will continue, and to make the player interested in playing during the time-saving state.

Furthermore, the conditions for terminating the time-saving state may be varied depending on the fulfillment of the conditions for setting the time-saving state (jackpot type). This allows players to not only play a jackpot game, but also to become interested in the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot game that has been played, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The probability change counter 203i is a counter for indicating a state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set, and a value corresponding to the state in which a high probability state of a special symbol is set is set. A value is set in this probability change counter 203i after the end of a jackpot game based on the ball passing through a specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game (see S2102 in FIG. 170). If a jackpot game is won, the counter is cleared to 0. As a result, a high probability state of a special symbol is not set during a jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player during the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the value of the probability counter 203i is set, and the value of the probability counter 203i is subtracted based on the special symbol lottery (variation). When the value of the probability counter 203i becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol ends and a transition to a low probability state of the special symbol occurs. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the high probability state of the special symbol may be configured to continue until the next jackpot game is played (until a jackpot is won). In this case, the value of the probability counter 203i may be configured to be set to "10000".

In addition, in this embodiment, the condition for terminating the high probability state of the special symbol and the condition for decrementing the value of the probability counter 203i are set only as a condition for decrementing the value of the probability counter 203i based on the number of times the special symbol is drawn (varied), but this is not limited thereto. For example, the value of the probability counter 203i may be decremented when a termination condition that can be established depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is established. Specifically, the value of the probability counter 203i may be decremented when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special miss win), or when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a special normal win win).

Furthermore, the value set in the probability change counter 203i may be different based on the type of jackpot that was won and the passing status of the ball into the specific area (V gate) 65v. Similarly to the above-mentioned content of subtracting the value of the time-saving counter 203h, the value of the probability change counter 203i may be configured to be subtracted based on conditions other than the number of times the special pattern changes. When the subtraction condition for subtracting the value of the probability change counter 203i is established, the value of the probability change counter 203i may be configured to be subtracted multiple times at once. This makes it difficult for the player to know how long the high probability state of the special pattern will continue, so that the player can keep an eye on the results of the special pattern lottery that is executed during the high probability state of the special pattern without getting bored.

In addition, in this control example, the condition for terminating the probability change state, that is, the condition for decrementing the value of the probability change counter 203i, is set only as a condition for decrementing the value of the probability change counter 203i based on the number of times the special symbol lottery (variation) is performed. However, without being limited to this, for example, when a termination condition that can be established depending on the processing contents of various processes executed by the main control device 110 is established, the value of the probability change counter 203i may be configured to be decremented. Specifically, when the lottery result of each symbol lottery executed in a state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set is a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a special miss win), or when the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is a predetermined lottery result (e.g., a special normal win), the value of the probability change counter 203i may be configured to be decremented, or the value of the probability change counter 203i may be configured to be decremented based on the ball entering a specific ball entrance (e.g., the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, etc.).

In addition, in this control example, the value of the special probability counter 203i is decremented by one, but it may be configured to decrement multiple values of the special probability counter 203i at once (for example, 2) depending on the type of termination condition that is met, or it may be configured to decrement the value of the special probability counter 203i so that it becomes "0" regardless of the current value of the special probability counter 203i. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the special probability state will continue, and to make the player interested in playing during the special probability state.

Furthermore, the conditions for ending the high probability state may be varied depending on the content of the conditions for setting the high probability state (jackpot type). This allows the player to not only play a jackpot game, but also to become interested in the jackpot type corresponding to the played jackpot game, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

The jackpot start flag 203j is a flag that indicates whether or not to start a jackpot. If this jackpot start flag 203j is on, it means that it is time to start a jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not time to start a jackpot. This jackpot start flag 203j is set on when it is time to end the variable display that indicates a jackpot. In addition, the jackpot start flag 203j is set off when the start of a jackpot is set (see S1903 in FIG. 168).

The jackpot flag 203k is a flag that indicates whether or not a jackpot game (special game state) is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203k is on, it means that a jackpot game is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a jackpot game is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203k is set to on when a jackpot game (special game state) starts after a special symbol is selected as a jackpot (see S1903 in FIG. 168). It is also set to off when the jackpot game (special game state) ends (see S2105 in FIG. 170). Then, in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 157), the jackpot flag 203k is referenced to determine whether or not a jackpot game is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 157).

The probability change setting flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not the game state is to be changed to the probability change state after a jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is to be set to the probability change state is determined by whether or not a ball has entered (flowed down) into a specific area (V gate) 65v (see FIG. 120) provided in the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game. Here, when it is detected that a ball has entered (flowed down) into this specific area (V gate) 65v (passing through the probability change switch provided in the specific area (V gate) 65v), the probability change setting flag 203m is set to ON (see S2215 in FIG. 171). On the other hand, this probability change setting flag 203m is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot game (see S2105 in FIG. 170). In addition, this probability change setting flag 203m is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is turned back on (when the power is turned on). It is also set to off when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized.

If the special chance setting flag 203m is set to on when the power is turned on, it may be configured to determine whether the special chance setting flag 203m was passed before the power was turned off, and if it is determined that the special chance setting flag 203m was passed, the special chance setting flag 203m may be set to on and the game may be restored. In this case, whether the special chance setting flag was passed before the power was turned off can be determined by whether the special chance passing counter 203n, which will be described later, is greater than 0. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine fraud such as rewriting only the special chance setting flag 203m to on and turning the power back on while the power is off, thereby reducing damage to the game establishment.

The special chance passing counter 203n is a counter for counting the number of balls that have passed through the special chance switch (flowed down a specific area) during one round during a jackpot game (one round of a jackpot in this embodiment). The sum of the special chance passing counter 203n and the discharge number counter 203t described later can be used to determine whether all balls that have won in the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged. The special chance passing counter 203n is updated by adding one each time a ball passes through the special chance switch (flows down a specific area). After executing a process to determine whether the number of balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 matches the number of balls discharged, the counter is reset to the initial value "0". The special chance passing counter 203n is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, the counter is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203o is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won in the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round of a big win game, and is updated by incrementing by one when a win in the specific winning port 65a is detected. On the other hand, when one round is completed, it is reset to the initial value "0" after determining whether the number of balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203o) matches the number of balls dispensed (the total value of the dispense number counter 203t and the special chance passing counter 203n). The value of this winning number counter 203o is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203p is a flag that indicates whether or not it is the ball discharge period after one round has ended and the specific winning port 65a has closed. When this remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to on, it means that it is the ball discharge period. While this remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to on, the remaining ball timer 203q, which will be described later, is incremented by one and updated. The remaining ball timer 203q is a counter for determining the time since the specific winning port 65a was closed, and is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203q is a counter for determining whether the time required for the winning balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed when a preset round ends and the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is closed. In this embodiment, the time required for the winning balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in this embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203q in advance. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203q (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), a determination is made as to whether the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 and the number of balls discharged match. If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification is issued to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game balls are stuck in the variable winning device 65.

If the number of winning balls and the number of balls dispensed do not match, a dedicated flag may be set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the special probability setting flag 203m may not be set to ON even if the game ball passes through the special probability switch. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the special probability state from being improperly granted.

The high probability valid flag 203r is a flag for determining whether or not the passage (entry) of a game ball that passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v is valid after the switching valve 65y has been switched to a configuration that does not allow balls to be allocated to the specific area (V gate) 65v. When this high probability valid flag 203r is set to on, it indicates that it is a normal period for game balls to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v.

The special chance valid timer 203s is a counter for counting the time since the special chance valid flag 203r described above is set to ON. This special chance valid timer 203s can determine the period required for a ball to pass through the special chance switch normally after the switching valve 65y is switched to a configuration in which the ball cannot flow down the specific area (V gate) 65v. In this embodiment, the time required for a game ball that has reached the switching valve 65y to pass through the special chance switch is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit of the special chance valid timer 203s is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v after that, it is determined to be illegal and is not determined to have passed.

This makes it possible to prevent damage caused by fraud, such as illegally putting a gaming ball into a specific area (V gate) 65v (V area) and passing through the special probability switch, or using a piano wire or the like to push the gaming ball up from below the special probability switch and pass it through, or using radio waves or the like to cause the magnetic sensor to erroneously detect that the ball has passed through.

The dispensed ball counter 203t is a counter for counting the number of game balls dispensed from the variable winning device 65 in one round. This dispensed ball counter 203t is reset to an initial value of 0 after it is determined that the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 matches the number of dispensed balls.

Other memory area 203z stores other data necessary for playing the game, counters, flags, etc.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating the driving parts for performance provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 according to commands sent from this voice and lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a device drive command may be sent to the other device 228 to drive a device for effects (not shown), a voice output command may be set to cause the voice output device 226 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22, or a lamp output command may be set to cause the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be explained. As shown in FIG. 144(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a normal special chart 2 performance selection table 222b, a special chance performance selection table 222c, a continuous preview execution selection table 222d, a V notification execution selection table 222e, and a button operation performance selection table 222f.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, the variation patterns of each variation pattern type (complete miss, reach miss, various reaches, etc.) are set in a counter value for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/lose judgment result, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to general information such as the variation time and type of variation pattern. This prevents the same variation display mode from being displayed frequently, and suppresses the problem of players getting bored early on.

In this control example, a variation effect (see FIG. 123) is executed in which the third pattern is displayed by scrolling horizontally on the third pattern display device 81 in response to the special pattern variation being executed. In this variation effect, a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/loss determination result, and the acquired counter value for selection, so that the player can play (special pattern game) while predicting whether the current special pattern variation will result in a jackpot win by visually checking the variation effect executed on the third pattern display device 81.

The normal special symbol 2 effect selection table 222b is a data table that is referenced when selecting the effect mode of the third symbol when a variation pattern with an additional time of 30 seconds is selected from among the second special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set, and different effect modes (effect contents) are specified according to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (win/lose determination result), the number of reserved special symbols 2, the number of reserved special symbols 1, and the value of the effect counter 223f.

In this control example, when the normal state is set and a win is won in the normal symbol lottery, the electric device 640 opens for 5 seconds to play a normal symbol winning game. The system is configured so that the second special symbol lottery can be played by inserting a ball into the second ball entrance 640 during the normal symbol winning game. In other words, in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to play the second special symbol lottery, if a predetermined execution condition is met (if a normal symbol winning game is won), it is configured so that it is easier to obtain the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved ball) (easier to insert a ball into the second ball entrance 640) for a predetermined period (during the normal symbol winning game period).

In the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, as shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 142(b)), a variation pattern with a variation time of "10 seconds" and a variation pattern with a variation time of "40 seconds" can be selected, and when the second special symbol lottery in which the variation pattern with a variation time of "40 seconds" is set is executed, the presentation mode of the variation presentation is set by referring to the normal special symbol 2 presentation selection table 222b.

Now, referring to FIG. 145, the contents of the normal special symbol 2 performance selection table 222b will be explained. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing the contents of the normal special symbol 2 performance selection table 222b. This normal special symbol 2 performance selection table 222b is a data table that is referenced when selecting the performance mode of the third symbol variation performance when a variation pattern with an additional time of 30 seconds is selected from among the second special symbol variations executed while the normal state is set, and different performance modes (performance contents) are specified according to the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery (win/lose judgment result), the number of reserved special symbols 2, the number of reserved special symbols 1, and the value of the performance counter 223f.

As shown in the normal table 202b1 (see FIG. 142(b)), in this control example, when the second special symbol variation is executed during the normal state, a common miss reach effect is executed in correspondence with the base time (10 seconds) (see FIG. 125(a)), and then, a pseudo-variation effect (see FIGS. 125(b) to 126) is executed during the added time (30 seconds) as the effect content (effect mode) selected by referring to the normal special symbol 2 effect selection table 222b.

Specifically, if the lottery result is a jackpot and the number of reserved special charts 2 is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to a range of "0 to 79" with a fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 3 effect" and a range of "80 to 99" with a fluctuation pattern of "special pseudo 2 effect." If the number of reserved special charts 2 is 2, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to a range of "0 to 99" with a fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 2 effect." If the number of reserved special charts 2 is 1, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is set to a range of "0 to 89" with a fluctuation pattern of "pseudo 1 effect" and a range of "90 to 99" with a fluctuation pattern of "special pseudo 4 effect."

In addition, if the lottery result is a jackpot and the number of reserved special charts 2 is 0, a "special end effect" will be set if the number of reserved special charts 1 is 1 to 4, and a "pseudo none effect" will be set if the number of reserved special charts 1 is 0.

If the lottery result is a miss, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 3, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo 3 effect", if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 2, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo 2 effect", if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 1, the value of the effect counter 223f obtained regardless of the number of reserved special charts 1 is in the range of "0 to 99", and the fluctuation pattern is "pseudo 1 effect", and if the number of reserved special charts 2 is 0, "no pseudo effect" is specified.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when setting the presentation mode of the pseudo-variable presentation of the second special symbol, the presence or absence of the reserved number of special symbols 2 and the reserved number of special symbols 1 is determined, and the pseudo-variable presentation is executed in a presentation mode corresponding to the special symbol lottery to be executed next. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier to think that the pseudo-variable presentation executed during one special symbol variation period is a variation presentation corresponding to the next special symbol variation.

Furthermore, since the number of pseudo fluctuations (the number of temporary stops of the third symbol) executed in the pseudo fluctuation performance is configured to correspond to the number of reserved special symbols 2 already acquired, it is possible to make the player believe that all of the reserved special symbols 2 acquired during the normal symbol winning game executed in the normal state have been used. Therefore, when a pseudo fluctuation performance in which a jackpot is won is executed, it is possible to make the player believe that he or she has won a jackpot as a result of acquiring many reserved special symbols 2 during the normal symbol winning game executed in the normal state. Also, when a pseudo fluctuation performance in which a miss is won is executed, it is possible to make the player believe that all of the reserved special symbols 2 have been used up, and then a fluctuation performance using the reserved special symbols 2 is executed (as the chance zone continues), so it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance.

In addition, this control example has pseudo-variation effects (special pseudo 2 effect, pseudo 4 effect) that are set only when a jackpot is won, so players can be interested in the number of pseudo-variations executed in the pseudo-variation effects and the number of reserved special charts 2.

Next, the contents of the special probability variation performance selection table 222c will be explained with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special probability variation performance selection table 222c. This special probability variation performance selection table 222c is a data table that is referenced when setting a variation performance when a variation pattern with a base time of 30 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed during the special probability variation state (time-saving state), i.e., during the high probability state of the normal symbol. This special probability variation performance selection table 222c is referenced when setting the presentation mode of the variation performance for the special symbol variation to be executed, and is set in the "Super Chance Mode" which is a presentation mode that notifies the player that the special probability variation state is in progress (S5005: Yes in FIG. 183) in the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 183) executed in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and the variation time (basic variation time) of the variation pattern to be executed this time is "30 seconds". It is referenced when the time period for the currently executed variation pattern (basic variation time) is "30 seconds" (S5114 in FIG. 184: Yes) (S5112 in FIG. 184: Yes) and the variation time (basic variation time) is "30 seconds" (S5114 in FIG. 184: Yes) during the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184) executed in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182).

In this control example, when the first special pattern lottery is executed in a high probability state for normal patterns, in order to prevent a situation from occurring in which the player realizes that he or she has won a jackpot that can only be won in the first special pattern lottery (a jackpot that results in a normal jackpot game being played) before the lottery result of the first special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a double reach effect is executed in which both the third pattern (third pattern with an even number) indicating a jackpot that results in a normal jackpot game being played, and the third pattern (third pattern with an odd number) indicating a jackpot that results in a special jackpot game being played, are in a reach state.

Furthermore, in order to make it difficult for the player to know that the special symbol lottery being executed is the first special symbol lottery when the above-mentioned double reach effect is executed in the high probability state of the normal symbol or the time-saving state, the above-mentioned double reach effect is also executed in the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, which always executes the high probability jackpot game when a jackpot is won. In addition, the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation executed in the state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set are both configured to be able to select a variation pattern with a variation time of "30 seconds", and the double reach effect is executed when this "30 seconds" variation pattern is selected. In this way, regardless of the type of special symbol, the same variation time (30 seconds) is set and the double reach effect is executed as the same variation effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the type of the special symbol variation being executed by the variable effect being executed, and by sharing the performance data used for the variable effect, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the performance data used for various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 146, the special chance performance selection table 222c specifies different performance modes depending on the symbol type (special symbol type), the lottery result (the result of the special symbol lottery), and the value of the performance counter 223f. Specifically, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the lottery result is a special chance jackpot (jackpot A), a "special chance single reach" is specified for the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 49" and a "double reach" is specified for the range of "50 to 99." When it is a normal jackpot (jackpot B), a "double reach" is specified, and when it is a miss, a "non-reach" is specified.

In addition, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is a jackpot, a "special double reach" is set in the range of "0 to 49" on the performance counter 223f, and a "double reach" is set in the range of "50 to 99". If the result is a miss, a "double reach" is set in the range of "0 to 4" on the performance counter 223f, a "double reach" is set in the range of "5 to 10", and a "non-reach" is set in the range of "11 to 99".

By configuring it in this way, whether the first special symbol lottery is executed in the probability bonus state or the second special symbol lottery is executed, a "double reach" (a reach effect in which two or more third symbols, including the third symbol corresponding to a normal win, are in a reach state, as shown in FIG. 131(a)) will be executed, making it difficult for the player to tell which third symbol change effect is being executed corresponding to which special symbol lottery when a "double reach" is executed.

When "special double reach" is set, the "double reach" presentation mode is set first, and then a reach presentation is executed in which the presentation mode changes to the "probable double reach" shown in FIG. 131(b). Therefore, even if a "double reach" is executed in response to the first special symbol lottery, the player can play the game while hoping that it will be upgraded to a "probable double reach" midway through. Note that in this "special double reach," the timing at which the presentation mode of the reach presentation changes is when the middle symbol row Z2 has completed one or two revolutions, but this is not limited to this, and the presentation mode may be changed based on the timing at which the player operates the operation button 22.

When the second special symbol change is executed during normal state, if a change pattern (special miss) with a change time of "10 seconds (base time 10 seconds, added time 0 seconds)" is selected, the miss reach presentation shown in FIG. 125(a) is executed, and then the third symbol is displayed still in a display mode indicating a miss. On the other hand, if a change pattern (special win) with a change time of "10 seconds (base time 10 seconds, added time 0 seconds)" is selected, then after the symbol changes for 10 seconds, the third symbol is displayed still in a display mode indicating a jackpot win (for example, "777").

In this way, by providing a special variation pattern in which a number of variation effects are executed in a single special pattern variation period, and a normal variation pattern in which one variation effect is executed in a single special pattern variation period, as variation effects corresponding to the second special pattern variation executed during the normal state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell when a new second special pattern variation has been executed, allowing the player to play while hoping that the chance zone will continue.

In addition, the more variable effects (including simulated effects) that are executed during the chance zone, the higher the chance of winning the jackpot, so players can play while hoping that the chance zone will continue for a long time.

In addition, in this control example, the normal variation pattern variation time (10 seconds) is set to be the same as the pseudo variation time (10 seconds) of one execution of the special variation pattern that executes multiple pseudo variation effects during one special pattern variation period. For example, when a second special pattern variation executed in the normal variation pattern is executed after a second special pattern variation executed in the special variation pattern, a 10-second variation effect is repeatedly executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether a pseudo variation effect is being repeatedly executed as a special variation pattern or whether a special variation pattern and a normal variation pattern are being executed consecutively. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing a new second special pattern variation is executed, so that the player can play while hoping that the chance zone will continue.

In this control example, when a variation pattern with a variation time of "40" seconds is selected as the second special symbol variation during the normal state, the variation performance of the special variation pattern is executed. However, without being limited to this, a variation time other than "40 seconds" may be selected as the variation time corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the normal state. Also, in this control example, the pseudo variation time, which is part of the variation performance of the special variation pattern, is basically fixed at 10 seconds, and when the expectation of a jackpot is high, the pseudo variation performance is more likely to be executed for a length other than 10 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to have the player play while expecting that the execution period of one variation performance will be longer.

Returning to FIG. 144(a), we will continue the explanation. The continuous preview execution selection table 222d is a data table that is referenced when determining whether or not to establish the execution conditions for a continuous preview performance that is executed across multiple periods of special pattern variation, based on the winning information (whether or not a jackpot has been won) contained in the winning information command received from the main control device 110. When the execution conditions for the continuous preview performance are established here, a special effective time is set that determines whether operation of the frame button 22 is valid. Then, if the frame button 22 is operated within the special effective time, the continuous preview performance is executed.

When this continuous preview performance is executed, the background mode changes to a different background mode (sky mode) from the normal background mode (sea mode, mountain mode), and a continuous performance is executed using the period until the result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the winning information for which the execution condition is satisfied is displayed. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, during the high speed fluctuation period (the period from when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set to when the 20th special pattern fluctuation is executed), the background mode is configured to be less likely to change based on the operation of the frame button 22 compared to other periods. Even during such a high speed fluctuation period, the background mode can be changed by operating the frame button 22, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.

Also, unlike normal background mode transitions, it is possible to execute a background mode transition that increases the expectation of winning the jackpot, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. Furthermore, during high-speed variation periods, the variation time of the special pattern variation is likely to be shorter than in other periods, so if the background mode is transitioned as in other periods, there is a risk of missing the results of the important special pattern lottery, and so the system is configured to make it difficult to transition to background mode. However, when transitioning to background mode based on the execution of continuous preview performances, continuous preview performances are executed using the variation time of multiple special pattern variations, so the results of the continuous preview performances are not displayed immediately after the background mode transition. Therefore, even if a background mode transition is executed, a performance that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the frame button 22 is operated during the high-speed fluctuation period, an effect (operation effect) other than the background mode transition can be executed, and the configuration is such that the player is encouraged to operate the frame button 22 even during the high-speed fluctuation period, thereby preventing early boredom with the game. Among these, the background mode transition is executed based on the establishment of the execution conditions for the continuous preview effect, so that an unexpected effect can be provided to the player, increasing the interest of the game.

Now, referring to FIG. 147(a), the contents of the continuous preview execution selection table 222d will be described. FIG. 147(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the continuous preview execution selection table 222d. As shown in FIG. 147(a), the continuous preview execution selection table 222d specifies whether or not the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are met in correspondence with the lottery result (lottery result of the special pattern) included in the received winning information, the number of reserved special patterns 2 (the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern), and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a "jackpot", the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 79", "continuous preview available" is set, where the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are met, and in the range of "80 to 198", "continuous preview not available" is set, where the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are not met. Also, when the number of reserved special charts 2 is "4", the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "continuous preview available" is set, where the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are met, and in the range of "150 to 198", "continuous preview not available" is set, where the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are not met.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is a "miss", the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 194", "no consecutive notice" is specified, where the execution conditions for the consecutive notice performance are not met, and in the range of "195 to 198", "consecutive notice" is specified, where the execution conditions for the consecutive notice performance are met. Also, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is "4", and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "no consecutive notice" is specified, where the execution conditions for the consecutive notice performance are not met, and in the range of "190 to 198", "consecutive notice" is specified, where the execution conditions for the consecutive notice performance are met.

As described above, in this control example, the more the number of reserved special symbols 2, the easier it is to establish the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance, and further, the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are more likely to be established when the lottery result for the special symbol is a jackpot than when it is a miss. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player eager to play (a game in which the ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640) in order to execute the continuous preview performance, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. In addition, it is configured so that the more the number of reserved special symbols 2, the higher the expectation of a jackpot when the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are established. Therefore, in order to execute the continuous preview performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, it is possible to make the player eager to play (a game in which the ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640), and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In this control example, when a winning information command (winning information command for a special symbol) is received from the main control device 110, the continuous preview execution selection table 222d is referenced to determine (determine) only whether the execution conditions for the continuous preview performance are met. Even if the execution conditions for the continuous preview performance are met, the continuous preview performance is not executed at that point, and is executed when the frame button 22 is operated within a specific period after the execution conditions are met. As a result, when multiple balls enter the second ball entrance 640 during one special symbol variation period and multiple winning information commands are received, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the winning information that is the subject of the execution conditions being met. Therefore, when the continuous preview performance is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the continuous preview performance will continue, and it is possible to prevent the performance content of the continuous preview performance from becoming monotonous.

As described above, this control example is configured not to notify (suggest) the player that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance have been met, but this is not limited to this and it may be configured to execute a notification (suggestion) performance to notify (suggest) the player that the conditions for execution have been met. For example, it may be configured to notify (suggest) the player that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance have been met by displaying the word "Waiting" in the secondary display area Ds. By configuring it in this way, when a notification (suggestion) performance is executed, the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22 to execute the consecutive preview performance, which can increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 129(a), an icon HR10 resembling a frame button 22 is displayed at the lower right of the main display area Dm as a valid period notification mode capable of notifying the player that a valid period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 by the player has been set (that the valid period is in progress), but it is configured so that it is not possible (or difficult) to determine from the display mode of the icon HR10 whether a special valid time has been set, which is set when the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are met, or whether a normal valid time has been set. With this configuration, the player is motivated to operate the frame button 22 to execute the continuous preview performance, since the player does not know whether the continuous preview performance or the normal operation performance will be executed until he or she operates the frame button 22.

Unlike the configuration of this control example, the display mode of the icon HR10 may be configured to allow the player to determine whether the currently set effective period is the special effective period or the normal effective period, or the timing at which the icon HR10 is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may be configured to allow the player to determine whether the currently set effective period is the special effective period or the normal effective period. In addition, the period during which the special effective period is set may be different from the period during which the normal effective period is set (for example, 3 seconds after the special pattern variation begins), and the player may not be notified (suggested) that the special effective period has been set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the frame button 22 should be operated to execute the continuous notice performance, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22. Similarly, in the case where the display mode is configured not to notify (suggest) that the special effective period is set, only the performance that notifies (suggests) that the execution conditions for the continuous notice performance have been established (for example, displaying the characters "Waiting" in the sub-display area Ds) may be executable. This makes it possible to prevent the frame button 22 from being operated unnecessarily when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are not met. In addition, when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are met and the frame button 22 is operated outside of the special effective time, a notification display may be displayed to inform the player that the special effective time is currently outside (for example, a display of "Not now" in the secondary display area Ds), or a guide display may be displayed to inform the player of the special effective time (for example, a display of "Please press again in 2 seconds" in the secondary display area Ds).

In addition, in this control example, when a winning information command containing winning information for the second special symbol is received, processing is performed to establish the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance by referring to the consecutive preview performance table 222d, but without being limited to this, it may also be configured so that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are established when a winning information command containing winning information for the first special symbol is received.

Returning to FIG. 144, the explanation will be given. The V notification execution selection table 222e is a data table that is referenced when deciding whether or not to execute a V notification performance during a jackpot game. In this control example, a specific area (V gate) 65v is provided in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during a jackpot game, and when a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, a high probability state (probability state) of a special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends. Then, depending on the type of jackpot game to be executed, a jackpot game in which the ball is more likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game (probability jackpot game) and a jackpot game in which the ball is less likely to pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game than the probability jackpot game (normal jackpot game) are executable.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(b), a switching valve 65y is provided in the variable winning device 65, and depending on the position of the switching valve 65y, the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 is allocated to a third flow path 65e3 that is impossible (difficult) to pass through the specific area (V-gate) 65v, and a fourth flow path 65e4 that can pass through the specific area (V-gate) 65v. This switching valve 65y is controlled so that it is switched to a position that allows the ball to be allocated to the fourth flow path 65e4 only during the first round of play when a guaranteed big win game is executed.

The V notification effect is an effect that can execute the following for a player playing a jackpot game: a V guidance effect that informs a player playing a jackpot game of the period (V period) during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v and the game method for aiming at the specific area (V gate) 65v; a V period effect that informs the player that the current time is a V period; a V success effect that informs the player that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period; and a V failure effect that informs the player that the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period. By executing this V notification effect, when a high probability jackpot game is played, the player can easily play a game to pass the ball through the specific area (V gate) 65v, and since the player is informed that the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that a high probability state will be set after the jackpot game ends.

Here, in this control example, after a normal jackpot game is executed, a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and when the time-saving state is set, a "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode (see FIG. 134). Furthermore, the "chance mode" is also set in some cases where a probability variable state is set after the end of a jackpot game. This allows the player to play while expecting a probability variable state, since the possibility of a probability variable state being set internally can be left even when a "chance mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game. However, if a V notification presentation is executed during a jackpot game, it is easy to know whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the jackpot game, and as a result, if the "chance mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game, even if the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v, the player may have a mistrust that the probability variable state has disappeared. In particular, in a pachinko machine 10 like this control example, where the condition for ending the special variable state is met when the special symbol variation is executed 50 times, the special variable state ends without winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, so there is a strong risk that the player will think that the special variable state was not set even though the ball passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v.

Therefore, in this control example, a process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a V notification effect during a jackpot game, and the presence or absence of a V notification effect during a jackpot game is determined based on the result of that process. Then, during a jackpot game in which a V notification effect is not executed, if the ball passes through a specific area (V gate) 65v (if a special probability state is set after the jackpot game ends), a "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether a special probability state is set internally, so that a player playing the "chance mode" can be allowed to play while hoping that a special probability state is set, without causing distrust to the player.

Now, referring to FIG. 147(b), the contents of the V notification execution selection table 222e will be explained. FIG. 147(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the V notification execution selection table 222e. This V notification execution selection table 222e is referenced when determining whether or not to execute a V notification presentation during the current jackpot game (S4704 in FIG. 180) when it is determined that it is time to start a special jackpot game (S4701 in FIG. 180: Yes) in the jackpot-related processing (see S4218 in FIG. 180) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 174) of the sound lamp control device 113.

As shown in FIG. 147(b), the V notification execution selection table 222e specifies whether or not to execute a V notification effect (the result of the determination as to whether or not to execute a V notification effect) in accordance with the jackpot type (the jackpot type that won the jackpot) corresponding to the jackpot game being executed this time and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Specifically, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "V notification yes" indicating that the V notification effect will be executed is specified, and when the acquired value is in the range of "150 to 198", "V notification no" indicating that the V notification effect will not be executed is specified. In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C, D, E", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "V notification yes" is specified, and when the acquired value is in the range of "190 to 198", "V notification no" is specified.

When a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set, in which a special jackpot game is executed, the V notification effect is executed about 75% of the time. Here, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, 50% of the time it will be a special jackpot game ("jackpot A"), and the remaining 50% of the time it will be a normal jackpot game ("jackpot B"). Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, the V notification effect is executed during the jackpot game in about 37.5% of cases, and the V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game in about 62.5% of cases. Also, it is configured so that the probability of a special jackpot game being executed among the cases where the V notification effect is not executed is about 20%.

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery and the jackpot type "jackpot C, D, E" is set, which executes a jackpot game with a high probability of being played, the V notification effect is executed about 90% of the time. Here, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, it is configured to always be a jackpot game with a high probability of being played ("jackpot C, D, E"). Therefore, in reality, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a jackpot game without a V notification effect is executed about 10% of the time. In this way, by providing a case where the V notification effect is not executed even for a jackpot win in the second special pattern lottery, which always executes a jackpot game with a high probability of being played, the percentage of times when the game state is a high probability state can be increased when the V notification effect is not executed, i.e., when the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, the ratio of V notification effects being executed is different between winning a jackpot ("jackpot A") in which a special jackpot game is executed in the first special symbol lottery and winning a jackpot ("jackpot C, D, E") in which a special jackpot game is executed in the second special symbol lottery. Specifically, the first special symbol lottery, which makes it difficult to execute a special jackpot game, is configured to make it more difficult to execute a V notification effect when a special jackpot game is executed, compared to the second special symbol lottery, which makes it easier to execute a special jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the frequency with which a V notification effect is not executed during the jackpot game can be increased, making it easier for the player to have a sense of expectation even when a "chance mode" is set after the end of a jackpot game based on the first special symbol lottery, in which a normal jackpot game can be executed.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 147(b), the execution rate of the V notification effect is varied depending on the type of jackpot, but the execution rate of the V notification effect may also be varied depending on other factors. For example, the execution rate of the V notification effect may be varied depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the execution rate of the V notification effect may be varied depending on the number of times a jackpot is won without transitioning to the normal state (the so-called number of consecutive wins), or the execution rate of the V notification effect may be varied depending on the operation result of the player operating the frame button 22. By varying the execution rate of the V notification effect depending on various conditions in this way, multiple apparent probability rates (the rate at which the V notification effect is executed in all jackpot wins) can be set, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this control example, the above-mentioned V notification effect is configured to be executable only when a guaranteed jackpot game is executed, that is, when a jackpot game in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v is executed, but it is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be executable even when a normal jackpot game is executed. In this case, it is sufficient to configure it to execute the V notification effect in accordance with the timing when the V period (the period in which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v) is set in the guaranteed jackpot game (the timing when the round game of the first round is executed), and finally execute the V failure effect that notifies that the ball did not pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v during the V period. Furthermore, if the V failure effect is executed despite the normal game during the jackpot game, for example, it may be configured to execute the V failure effect even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v in the guaranteed jackpot game, and set the "chance mode" after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this control example, a pattern can be set in which the V notification effect is not executed during the guaranteed jackpot game whether the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the V notification effect is always executed when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, which always executes the guaranteed jackpot game when a jackpot is won.

Returning to FIG. 144(a), the explanation will be continued. The button operation time effect selection table 222f is a data table that is referenced when determining the effect mode of the operation effect executed based on the player's operation of the frame button 22, which is the operating means, when the "chance mode" is set as the effect mode, and is referenced (see S5315 in FIG. 186) when it is determined that a valid operation has been executed on the frame button 22 during the chance mode in the frame button input monitoring/effect process (see S4107 in FIG. 186) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113. In this way, by varying the effect mode of the operation effect executed when the player operates the frame button 22 by referring to the button operation time effect selection table 222f, it is possible to provide the player with a wide variety of operation effects.

Now, with reference to FIG. 148(a), the contents of the button operation effect selection table 222f will be explained. FIG. 148(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the button operation effect selection table 222f. As shown in FIG. 148(a), the button operation effect selection table 222f defines a time-saving state selection table 222f1 that is referenced when the time-saving state is set, and a special probability state selection table 223f2 that is referenced when the special probability state is set.

In this control example, the "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode when the time-saving state is set and in some cases when the probability variable state is set. A common variation presentation is executed during the "chance mode" regardless of the set game state. Furthermore, the same variation pattern table (probability variable/time-saving table 202b2) is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time) when the probability variable state is set and when the time-saving state is set. This makes it difficult to know whether the currently set game state is the probability variable state or the time-saving state from the special pattern variation executed during the "chance mode" and the variation presentation of the third pattern executed in response to the special pattern variation, so that the player can play while expecting that the current game state is the probability variable state.

However, if a player playing the "Chance mode" is not provided with information suggesting the currently set game state, there is a problem that the player will quickly become bored with playing in the "Chance mode". Therefore, in this control example, multiple types of operation effects are configured to be executable during the "Chance mode", and the execution rate of each operation effect is configured to vary depending on the set game state. In other words, the types of operation effects that can be executed are the same, but by varying the rate at which each operation effect is selected, it is possible to predict the current game state based on the multiple operation effects that are actually executed. This provides the player with the fun of predicting the game state.

The presentation mode of the operation presentation executed when the normal state is set, the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed during the "Super Chance Mode" which is a presentation mode that notifies that a special state is set, and the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed as part of the variable presentation are also configured to determine and execute one of multiple types of presentation modes, but detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the time-saving state selection table 223f1 defined in the operation effect selection table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 148(b). FIG. 148(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving state selection table 223f1. This time-saving state selection table 223f1 is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the operation effect during the "chance mode" in which the time-saving state is set, and defines different presentation modes of the operation effect depending on the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated, the type of operation method performed by the player on the frame button 22, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 148(b), when the operation timing is during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "none" indicates that the operation effect is not executed, in the range of "150 to 189", "reach suggestion" indicates an effect that suggests whether the ongoing fluctuation effect will be in a reach state during the third pattern fluctuation, and in the range of "190 to 198", "state suggestion" indicates an effect to suggest the currently set game state. Also, when the operation method is "long push", "background mode transition" indicates that the background mode will be transitioned to the range of "0 to 198" is specified for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

In this control example, multiple operation methods are set that the player can execute with the frame button 22, including a "normal press" that is determined when the frame button 22 is pressed for less than two seconds, and a "long press" that is determined when the frame button 22 is pressed for two seconds or more. Different operation effects are executed depending on the operation method used by the player. This allows the player to execute various operation effects by selecting the operation method of their choice. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In this control example, the above-mentioned two types of operation methods are used as the operation methods that the player can operate, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an operation means other than the frame button 22 (e.g., a second frame button) and a different operation presentation may be selected depending on the type of frame button pressed by the player. Alternatively, a plurality of operation methods may be set in accordance with the order of operations performed on a plurality of operation means within a predetermined period of time (e.g., two seconds). Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a "normal press" is determined when the player presses the frame button 22, and then, if the pressed state continues for a predetermined period of time (e.g., two seconds), an additional determination is made that it is a "long press," thereby executing an operation presentation dedicated to a "long press."

Furthermore, as operation means that can be operated by the player, in addition to the configuration of the frame button 22 that the player can press, operation means consisting of a lever member that the player can tilt up, down, left, right, and so on, or a rotating member that the player can rotate, may be provided. Also, instead of the player directly operating a member, an operation means (such as a touch sensor) may be provided that can determine that a predetermined operation has been performed by providing a proximity sensor with a predetermined detection area and having the proximity sensor detect a hand that has entered the detection area, and any operation means that allows the player to perform a predetermined operation at will and allows the player to select different operation methods depending on the content of the operation may be provided.

In addition, in this control example, a configuration having two types of operation methods, "normal press" and "long press", has been described, but this is not limited to this, and three or more types of operation methods may be provided, or only one type of operation method may be provided. Here, if only one type of operation method is provided, it may be configured so that different operation presentations are executed depending on the interval at which the operation is executed. This makes it possible to allow the player to select from a variety of operation presentations, even if there is only one type of operation method itself.

Returning to FIG. 148(b), we will continue to explain the contents of the time-saving state selection table 223f1. When the operation timing is during the normal time-saving fluctuation period (second period), the operation method is "normal press", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode will be switched to is specified. Also, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "state suggestion" indicating a presentation to suggest the currently set game state is specified.

If the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol change), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, if the operation timing is within the normal time-saving change period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode will be switched to is specified. Also, if the operation method is "long push", "past state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the game state that was set in the past (at the time when "chance mode" was set (after the end of the jackpot game)) is specified in the range of the acquired value of the effect counter 223f "0 to 198".

Next, referring to FIG. 149, the contents of the probability variable state selection table 223f2 defined in the operation time effect selection table 222f will be explained. FIG. 149 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the probability variable state selection table 223f2. This probability variable state selection table 223f2 is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the operation effect during the "chance mode" in which the probability variable state is set, and it defines different presentation modes of the operation effect depending on the timing when the frame button 22 is operated, the type of operation method performed by the player on the frame button 22, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 149, when the operation timing is during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 119", "none" indicates that the operation effect is not executed, in the range of "120 to 139", "reach suggestion" indicates an effect that suggests whether the ongoing fluctuation effect will be in a reach state during the third pattern fluctuation, in the range of "140 to 189", "state suggestion" indicates an effect to suggest the currently set game state, and in the range of "190 to 198", "background mode transition" indicates that the background mode will be transitioned. Also, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicates that the background mode will be transitioned.

In addition, when the operation timing is within the normal time-saving variable period (second period), the operation method is "normal press", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 169", "background mode transition" indicating a transition to background mode is specified, and in the range of "170 to 198", "state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the currently set game state is specified. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the currently set game state is specified.

If the operation timing is within a specific period (during the 50th special symbol change), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, if the operation timing is within the normal time-saving change period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode will be switched to is specified. Also, if the operation method is "long push", "past state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the game state that was set in the past (at the time when "chance mode" was set (after the end of the jackpot game)) is specified in the range of the acquired value of the effect counter 223f "0 to 198".

As explained above, when the "Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode after the end of a big win game, the presentation mode of the operation presentation is selected by referring to different data tables for the time-saving state and the probability of a special state, and the ratio at which each presentation mode is selected varies depending on the set game state. This makes it possible for the player to predict the currently set game state based on the presentation mode of the operation presentation to be executed, which makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22.

In addition, among multiple game states (probability bonus state, time-saving state) in which a "chance mode" can be set as a presentation mode at a specific operation timing, a presentation mode (advantageous presentation mode) that is likely to be executed when a favorable game state (probability bonus state) that is advantageous to the player is set is provided, for example, with a "state suggestion" operation presentation executed by a "normal press" during the "first period." This allows the player to play while building up a sense of expectation that a favorable game state has been set when the "state suggestion" operation presentation is executed by a "normal press" during the "first period."

Furthermore, since the operation effect can be executed multiple times during the "first period", the more times the operation effect is executed in the advantageous performance mode described above during the "first period", the higher the expectation that an advantageous game state will be set, which makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22.

In addition, at a specific operation timing, among multiple game states (probable bonus state, time-saving state) in which the "chance mode" can be set as the presentation mode, a presentation mode (confirmed presentation mode) is executed only when an advantageous game state (probable bonus state) that is advantageous to the player is set. For example, an operation presentation of "background mode transition" executed by "normal press" during the "first period" is set as a presentation mode (confirmed presentation mode), so that when the operation presentation of "background mode transition" is executed by "normal press" during the "first period", it is possible to know that an advantageous game state has been set.

In addition, as the advantageous presentation mode and the confirmed presentation mode described above, presentation modes that can be selected under other conditions (for example, "normal press" during the "second period") are used. More specifically, the "state suggestion" presentation mode is configured so that when it is executed by "normal press" during the "first period", the expectation that a special state is set is high, and when it is executed by "normal press" during the "second period", the expectation that a time-saving state is set is high. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of playing while analyzing which presentation mode was used to execute the operation presentation during which period when the "chance mode" is set.

Above, with reference to Figures 148 and 149, the contents of the presentation modes of the operation presentation that can be selected when the player operates the operating means (frame button 22), and the contents of the data table (button operation presentation selection table 222f) that is referenced when making the selection have been explained. In this first control example, however, a different data table is referenced depending on the set game state. Each data table specifies the same presentation mode with a different selection ratio. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the current game state from the presentation mode of the executed operation presentation alone, and by executing multiple operation presentations, it is possible to grasp the current game state by grasping the selection ratio of each presentation mode. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play by executing the operation presentation multiple times.

In this control example, different data tables are referenced depending on the set game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to reference different data tables and select the presentation mode of the operation presentation based on the currently set game state and the currently set presentation mode. In this way, when a probability variable state is set, different operation presentations can be executed when the presentation mode is set to "super chance mode" and when it is set to "chance mode."

Here, when "Super Chance Mode" is set as the presentation mode, for example, there is no need to execute a "State Suggestion" presentation mode that suggests that the current game state has been set. Instead, it is better to specify a "Reach Suggestion" presentation mode or a "Preview Suggestion" presentation mode that suggests whether or not the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b contains information indicating a specific lottery result (a big win or a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of more than a predetermined time is set). This makes it possible to motivate the player to execute the operation presentation even when "Super Chance Mode" is set.

Furthermore, the type of data table (button operation time effect selection table 222f) for selecting the effect mode of the operation effect may be configured to differ depending on the game state when the jackpot is won, the type of jackpot (stop display mode of the special pattern), the stop display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, or the presence or absence of a V win during the jackpot game.

In this case, for example, when the time-saving state is set as the game state and the "chance mode" is set as the presentation mode, the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed during the "chance mode" can be made different between the case where the "chance mode" is set after the end of a normal jackpot game and the case where the ball cannot enter the V during a special jackpot game and the "chance mode" is set after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, during the "chance mode" in which the time-saving state is set after the end of a special jackpot game, it is preferable to specify a presentation mode of "past jackpot type suggestion" that suggests that the previous jackpot game was a special jackpot game. This makes it possible to make the player think that a special jackpot state is set even though the time-saving state is actually set. In addition, it is also possible to specify a presentation mode of "past game history notification" that notifies the player that a V was not entered even though the previous jackpot game was a special jackpot game. This makes it easier to change the content of the game to be executed in the future.

Next, referring to FIG. 144(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 144(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a command memory area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a special symbol change start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a performance counter 223f, a subordinate state setting area 223g, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h, a special performance in progress flag 223i, a V winning flag 223j, a V performance execution flag 223k, a V notification flag 223m, a time reduction counter 223n, a special continuous notice flag 223o, a performance mode memory area 223p, a continuous notice in progress flag 223q, a SW effective time counter 223r, a special effective time counter 223s, an operation counter 223t, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The command memory area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 are temporarily stored until the processing for those commands is executed. In detail, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area 223a is read out from among the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes that command and performs processing according to that command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four reserved areas (first area to fourth area) for special symbols, and the winning information contained in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 is stored in each of these areas, starting from the first area. The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the audio lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results for the reserved balls, etc., before the balls start to change.

In this control example, a maximum of four reserved balls of the first special pattern and a maximum of four reserved balls of the second special pattern can be reserved and stored, so that four reserved areas for the first special pattern and four reserved areas for the second special pattern are formed in the winning information storage area 223b. In this control example, the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern are not performed simultaneously, and when a new special pattern drawing is performed while there are reserved balls of the first special pattern and reserved balls of the second special pattern, the oldest stored winning information (the winning information stored in the first area) in the reserved area of the second special pattern is moved to the execution area. Then, each winning information stored in the second area to the fourth area is shifted to the reserved area with the next lower number. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that the drawing of the second special pattern is performed with priority over the drawing of the first special pattern.

...

The special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting a value corresponding to the reserved ball number command sent from the main control unit 110, and has a first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c1 for counting the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern, and a second special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c2 for counting the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern. In other words, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special pattern is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control unit 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls for each special pattern based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls using the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is increased by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern is decreased in the main control unit 110 to perform a new lottery for the first special pattern, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball number command (reserved ball number command for special pattern 1) indicating the value of the reserved ball number counter 203d after the addition or subtraction to the voice lamp control unit 113. Also, when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is increased by a ball entering the second ball entrance 640, or when the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern is decreased in the main control unit 110 to perform a new lottery for the second special pattern, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball number command (reserved ball number command for special pattern 2) indicating the value of the reserved ball number counter 203e after the addition or subtraction to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command (special pattern 1 reserved ball number command, special pattern 2 reserved ball number command) transmitted from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d or the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command and stores it in the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c (first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c1, second special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c2). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c is used to display the reserved patterns. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c, and transmits a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c.

When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of the image so that the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number equal to the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the sub-display area Ds1 (see FIG. 122 (b)) of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223d is changed in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the values of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the execution of the special pattern lottery is pending.

The special pattern change start flag 223d is initially set to off when the power is turned on, and is set to on when a special pattern change pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is received to notify the change pattern of the special pattern. On the other hand, it is turned off when the change display setting is made in the third pattern display device 81. The special pattern change start flag 223d has a first special pattern change start flag 223d1 corresponding to the first special pattern, and a second special pattern change start flag 223d2 corresponding to the second special pattern, and is set to on or off according to the type of special pattern indicated by the special pattern change pattern command sent from the main control unit 110.

The special symbol stop type selection flag 223e is set to on when a stop type command that notifies the special symbol variable stop type output from the main control unit 110 is received. On the other hand, it is turned off when the variable display setting is made in the third symbol display device 81. In addition, this special symbol stop type selection flag 223e has a first special symbol stop type selection flag 223e1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a second special symbol stop type selection flag 223e2 corresponding to the second special symbol, and is set to on or off according to the type of special symbol included in the stop type command (special symbol stop type command) sent from the main control unit 110.

The performance counter 223f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various performances, etc., and is repeatedly updated in the range of "0 to 198". It is updated by adding 1 each time the main process is executed. Although detailed explanation is omitted, this performance counter 223f is composed of multiple counters, each of which is specified to have a different update rule. Each counter is configured to perform a counter update process each time the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. When multiple types of variation pattern selection or various performance selection processes are executed within the execution interval of the main process, the performance counter 223f is configured to obtain different counter values and execute the process. This makes it possible to suppress the selection of various performances, etc. using the same value of the performance counter 223f, even if a process using the value of the performance counter 223f is executed multiple times at the same timing (within the same cycle of the main process).

In the slave state setting area 223g, data corresponding to the state command output from the master control device 110 is set. The current game state can also be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 by the data set in the slave state setting area 223g. The state setting command is also output from the master control device 110 when the power is turned on, and the backed-up game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, the slave state setting area 223g has a current game state storage area that stores the currently set game state, and a past game state storage area that stores the game state that was set before the current game state was set, and is configured to be able to calculate the process through which the current game state was set. As a result, for example, when a time-saving state is set, it is possible to determine whether the time-saving state was set after the end of a jackpot game, or whether a probability variable state was set after the end of a jackpot game and then the time-saving state was set when the probability variable end condition was established, and to execute a performance based on the determination result (a past state suggestion performance to suggest the past game state to the player). In addition, the secondary state setting area 223g is configured to store game states such as the normal state, the probability change state, and the time-saving state, as well as the jackpot game state and the normal jackpot game state.

The normal symbol reserved ball count counter 223h is a counter for counting a value corresponding to the normal symbol reserved ball count command sent from the main control unit 110, and its value is added or subtracted in synchronization with the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f for counting the number of reserved balls of normal symbols stored in the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. Note that the details are omitted here because the only difference between the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c described above is that the target has been changed from special symbols to normal symbols, and the rest is the same.

The special effect flag 223i is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol change is executed during the normal state, and is set to ON when the conditions for executing the second special symbol change during the normal state are met. Specifically, it is set to ON when the second special symbol change is executed during the normal state, or when the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired while the first special symbol change is being executed. And, it is set to OFF when the first special symbol change is executed while the special effect flag 223i is set to ON, that is, when the special symbol 2 reservation is 0. In this control example, a "chance zone" effect (see FIG. 124(b)) is executed to indicate the period during which the special effect flag 223i is set to ON.

The V winning flag 223j is a flag for indicating that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v during a jackpot game, and is set to ON when the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate) 65v. Specifically, when a V winning command is set in the main control device 110 (see S2216 in FIG. 171), the V winning command is transmitted. Then, when it is determined that a V winning command has been received (S4407: Yes in FIG. 177) in the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177) executed in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the voice lamp control device 113, the V winning flag 223j is set to ON.

This V winning flag 112j is referenced (S4801 in FIG. 181) in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), and it is determined whether the ball passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v (won a V win) during the current jackpot game. Then, if it is determined that the flag is set to ON in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) (S4801 in FIG. 181: Yes), it is set to OFF.

In this control example, a V notification effect can be executed as an effect for passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65v (V winning) during a jackpot game, and the effect mode executed at the time of V winning (at the end of a V round) and at the end of a jackpot game can be changed depending on whether or not a V winning has occurred. Furthermore, the effect mode at the time of V winning and the effect mode at the end of a jackpot game can be changed depending on whether or not a V notification effect has been executed. In this way, in order to enable the effect that is variably set based on the presence or absence of a V winning to be executed at a timing (at the end) different from the time of a V winning, the presence or absence of a V winning can be determined based on the setting status of the V winning flag 112j.

The V performance execution flag 223k is a flag for indicating that a V notification performance will be executed during a jackpot game, and is set to ON when it is determined that a V notification performance will be executed during a jackpot game. Specifically, in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), if it is determined that a jackpot start command has been received (S4701 in FIG. 180: Yes) and the current jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot (S4703 in FIG. 180: No), the V notification execution selection table 222e is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V notification performance. Then, if it is determined that a V notification performance will be executed (S4705 in FIG. 180: Yes), it is set to ON (see S4706 in FIG. 180).

Then, in the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) executed in the jackpot-related process (see S4218 in FIG. 180), if the V winning flag 112j is not set on, i.e., if no V winning occurs during jackpot play, it is referenced (S4802 in FIG. 181), and if it is determined that it is set on (S4802 in FIG. 181: Yes), a process is executed to switch the presentation mode of the ending presentation (S4804 in FIG. 181), and then it is set to off (S1804 in FIG. 181).

In this control example, when a guaranteed jackpot game is played, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a V notification effect during the jackpot game, and when a decision is made to execute a V notification effect, a presentation mode (see Figs. 127(b) and (d)) is set as the presentation mode during the ending period at that time to indicate that a guaranteed jackpot state will be set. In other words, when a V notification effect is executed during a guaranteed jackpot game, the player is notified of this when a V wins, so a presentation mode (see Figs. 127(b) and (d)) is set to indicate to the player that a guaranteed jackpot state will be set even in the ending presentation executed during the ending period. Therefore, if a V win is not achieved during a jackpot game, a process is executed to switch the presentation mode of the ending presentation to a presentation mode (see Figs. 127(a) and (c)) to indicate that a time-saving state will be set.

On the other hand, if the V notification effect is not executed during a guaranteed jackpot game, even if a V is won, the player is not notified of this fact, and the effect mode for the ending effect is preset to indicate that a time-saving state will be set (see Figures 127 (a) and (c)). Therefore, even if a V is not won during a jackpot game, there is no need to execute a process to switch the effect mode for the ending effect.

The time-saving counter 223n is a counter for measuring the period during which the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and is set to a predetermined value ("100" in this control example) when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of a jackpot game). When a special symbol variation is executed while the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the time-saving counter 223n becomes "0", it is determined that a transition has occurred to a low probability state of normal symbols. In addition, the system is configured to determine the detailed period during the high probability state of normal symbols based on the value of the time-saving counter 223n.

The special consecutive preview flag 223o is a flag for indicating that the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are met during the high-speed fluctuation period (first period) in which the "chance mode" is set as the performance mode, and is set to ON when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are met. When this special consecutive preview flag 223o is set to ON, a special effective period is set in which operations on the operating means can be effectively identified, and if a specific operation is performed on the operating means during that special effective period, the consecutive preview performance is executed.

Specifically, in the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177), which is part of the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175) of the voice lamp control device 113, when a special symbol winning information command (a winning information command corresponding to a special symbol) is received, the special symbol winning information command process (see S4406 in FIG. 178) is executed. If it is determined that the current period is a high-speed fluctuation period (the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 75) (S4502 in FIG. 178: Yes), and if it is determined that a continuous preview performance is to be executed by referring to the continuous preview execution selection table 222d (S4506 in FIG. 178: Yes), it is set to on (S4507 in FIG. 178).

Then, in the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184) for selecting the variation presentation corresponding to the second special symbol variation, the chance mode presentation setting process (see S5116 in FIG. 185) which is executed when "chance mode" is set, references the setting status of the special consecutive notice flag 223o (S5210 in FIG. 185), and if it is set to on, a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the special effective time timer 223s as the special effective period during which operation on the frame button 22 can be effectively determined (S5211 in FIG. 181), and then it is set to off.

In this way, a special effective period is set in which operations on the operating means are determined to be valid only when the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are met, and the consecutive preview performance can be executed only when the player executes a specific operation on the operating means within the special effective period, which makes it possible to motivate the player to play in order to execute the consecutive preview performance. In addition, by varying the notification mode of the notification performance that notifies the player of multiple pieces of information for executing the consecutive preview performance (information indicating whether the conditions for executing the consecutive preview performance are met, information indicating the period during which the special effective period is set (the set period), and information indicating the operation content performed on the operating means to execute the consecutive preview performance), the difficulty of executing the consecutive preview performance can be easily variably adjusted.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are more likely to be met when (or when) a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery. This can motivate the player to play the game and execute the continuous preview performance. In addition, when the conditions for executing the continuous preview performance are met and the player executes a specific operation on the operating means outside of the special effective period, it is preferable to configure the system so that a notification effect is executed to inform the player of the timing when the special effective period will be set. This can motivate the player to operate the operating means, and can prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

The performance mode memory area 223p is a memory area in which various performance modes set during the high probability state of normal symbols are stored, and different performance modes are stored according to the value of the time-saving counter 223n. When determining the current performance mode, the stored performance mode is read out. Specifically, in the chance mode performance setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185), the value of the time-saving counter 223n is read out (S5201 in FIG. 185), and the performance mode (high-speed period (high-speed fluctuation period), normal first period (first period), normal second period (second period)) corresponding to the read value is set and stored. When the high probability state of normal symbols transitions to a low probability state, the stored information is cleared.

The continuous preview in progress flag 223q is a flag for indicating that a continuous preview performance is set as the variable performance of the third pattern, and is set to ON when the continuous preview performance is being executed. Then, in the chance mode performance setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185), the setting status is determined (S5208 in FIG. 185), and if it is set to ON (S5208 in FIG. 185: Yes), the performance mode corresponding to the continuous preview performance is determined. Then, when the continuous preview performance has ended, it is set to OFF. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a different performance mode that does not correspond to the continuous preview performance from being set in a new variable performance executed during the continuous preview performance.

The SW valid time timer 223r is a timer for measuring the valid operation period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22 set within the variable display period of the third pattern, and is configured so that when the valid operation period is set, a value corresponding to the length of the valid operation period is set, and the value is subtracted as time passes. Then, if the player operates the frame button 22 during the valid operation period, the value is cleared to 0. In this way, by setting the valid operation period for validly determining the operation of the frame button 22, it is possible to prevent excessive execution of the effects (operation effects) that are executed when the operating means (frame button 22) is operated.

In this control example, only the frame button 22 is provided as the operation means that the player can operate. However, if multiple operation means, such as a second operation means, are provided in addition to the frame button 22 (first operation means), different operation valid periods may be set for each operation means. In that case, by providing a SW valid time timer 223r for each operation means, it is possible to set overlapping operation valid periods for each operation means.

The special effective time timer 223s is a timer for measuring the operation effective period (special operation effective period) for validly determining an operation on the frame button 22, which is set only when the chance mode effect setting process (see S5012 in FIG. 185) is executed with the special continuous notice flag 223o set to ON. When the special operation effective period is set, a value corresponding to the length of the special operation effective period is set, and the value is subtracted as time passes. Then, in the frame button input monitoring and effect process (see S4107 in FIG. 186), it is determined whether or not it is within the special operation effective period (S5306 in FIG. 186), and if it is determined that it is within the effective period (S5306 in FIG. 186: Yes), the operation of the frame button 22 is treated as valid. In this control example, different operation effects are executed when the frame button 22 is operated during the normal operation effective period (the period when the value of the SW effective time timer 223r is greater than 0) and when the frame button 22 is operated during the special operation effective period (the period when the value of the special effective time timer 223s is greater than 0). Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated during the special operation effective period, a continuous preview effect spanning a plurality of special pattern change periods from the next special pattern change to the end of the target special pattern change is executed. When the continuous preview effect is executed, the background mode is switched to a dedicated background mode (heaven mode). Therefore, during the period when the background mode transition is suppressed by the normal operation of the frame button 22, the player can be made to have a higher expectation of winning the jackpot just by executing the background mode transition.

The operation counter 223t is a counter for measuring the period during which the player presses the frame button 22, and the counter value is updated over time while the player is measuring and pressing the frame button 22. Based on the value measured by this operation counter 223t, the type of operation performed by the player on the frame button 22 is determined (see S5313 in FIG. 186).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Returning to FIG. 137 for further explanation, the display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The voice lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC stabilized falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 121) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this first control example will be described with reference to Fig. 150 to Fig. 155. Fig. 150 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is also connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with different lottery probabilities for a special jackpot or different numbers of prize balls paid out for one special jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

Below, we will first explain the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236, and then explain the work RAM 233.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command is set in the command pointer 231a.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the various fixed value data used in the control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the occurrence of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory generally has the problem of slow read speed, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on multiple pages, data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output. Also, when reading non-contiguous data, it takes a long time each time the data is read. Thus, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take a long time to read the commands that make up the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, this may deteriorate the processing performance of the display control device 114.

In this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As described below, the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands that make up the control program without delay. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated presentations.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, which are connected to the image controller 237.

This character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 that stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 that stores data for images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The NAND flash memory has the characteristic of being able to obtain a large storage capacity in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character memory area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control programs and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. This reduces the number of parts in the display control device 114, reducing manufacturing costs and preventing an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads out the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc., and outputs the data to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also performs known data address conversion so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, including error bits. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Furthermore, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the bad data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the bad data blocks, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can easily access the character ROM 234 without having to consider the address positions of the bad data blocks, which differ in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b determines whether one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If the data is not set, the buffer RAM 234c reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily sets it in the buffer RAM 234c. The ROM controller 234b then performs a known error correction process and outputs the data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is made up of two banks, and one page's worth of data from the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. This allows the ROM controller 234b to, for example, output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page's worth of data, including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237, from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or image controller 237. This improves the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 when reading it out.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (e.g., 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. This NOR ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program memory area 234d1 that stores, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 executes this boot program first after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program memory area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e., one page of the NAND type flash memory 234a) of this boot program. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads out from the buffer RAM 234c the instruction code at the corresponding address from the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this control example, the reason why not all of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but rather a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the command that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to NAND flash memories in that when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND type flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the command code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND type flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. And, because of the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, by storing a predetermined number of commands from the command to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the NOR type ROM 234d, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (command code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the command code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start up the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if a control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

Now, the boot program is programmed to transfer the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., the control programs excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and the fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 in a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). Then, the MPU 231 first transfers and stores the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c in which the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released.

Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the address of the internal bus being specified as "0000H", the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, since there is no need to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, after the system reset is released, when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control programs from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads out the control programs transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed to set the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

This remaining boot program executes a process of transferring all the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) from the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a that corresponds to the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) that is executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S6001 in FIG. 187) is completed is set.

The MPU 231 executes the remaining boot program, and all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instructions to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234, MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of character ROM 234 associated with the shortened time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (see FIG. 155) sent from the MPU 231, and displays the drawn image in one of the first and second frame buffers 236b and 236c, which will be described later, while outputting the image information for one frame previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process for this one frame of an image and the display process for this one frame of an image in parallel within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes drawing processing of the next frame of image and also executes processing to display the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at image drawing and display processing intervals (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing and display processing are completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also performs processing to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Images are drawn using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Generally, NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described below, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As described below, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image. However, when drawing the image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise be caused by providing the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a consisting of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (starting address of the source storage) and the end address (last address of the source storage) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the last address of the source storage.

In accordance with the various information in this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specified address in the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a long period of time to be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, which makes it impossible to use the video RAMs 235 and 236 for the image drawing process, and as a result, prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

In addition, since the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used to hold image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without being overwritten while the power is on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, as well as a power-on variable image area 235b and a third design area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that displays the lottery results performed in the main control device 110 by a variable presentation when the player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the special ball entry port 64.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 187).

Now, referring to Figure 151, the image that changes when the power is turned on will be described. Figure 151 is an explanatory diagram that explains the image that is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the display control device 114 is transferring image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on.

Immediately after power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b, and then transfers the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the power-on main image shown in FIG. 151(a) using the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a.

At this time, when the display control device 114 receives a display pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a pattern command from the main control device 110, which is a command to start the change, the display control device 114 alternately displays a power-on change image with a "○" pattern in the lower right position on the display screen of the power-on main image as shown in FIG. 151(b) and a power-on change image with a "×" pattern in the same position as the "○" pattern as shown in FIG. 151(c) during the change period. Then, the display control device 114 judges the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 from the display pattern command and stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the change pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, and if it is a "jackpot for special patterns", the image shown in FIG. 151(b) is displayed for a certain period after the change performance stops, and if it is a "miss for special patterns", the image shown in FIG. 151(c) is displayed for a certain period after the change performance stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, since players can recognize that some processing is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, they can wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped while the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operational checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Furthermore, by using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of operational checks from deteriorating.

In addition, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the special ball entrance 64, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw a power-on variable image using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is always resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, and to alternately display the images shown in Figures 151 (b) and (c) on the third pattern display device 81. This allows a simple variable presentation to be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, the player can be sure that a lottery has been drawn by the simple variable presentation, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, so if a ball is detected entering the special ball entrance 64 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variable performance can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 150, the explanation will continue. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, referring to FIG. 152, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be explained. FIG. 152 is an explanatory diagram for explaining four types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, with FIG. 152(a) showing rear A corresponding to the "town stage" and FIG. 152(b) showing rears B to D corresponding to the "forest stage", "river stage", and "sky stage".

As shown in FIG. 152, the back images corresponding to each of the backs A to D are prepared in the character ROM 234, and are all longer horizontally than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A to D (hereafter referred to as "scrolling images") are all configured so that the back surface images continue at positions a and c. The images between positions c and d and between positions a and a' are configured with images that cover the horizontal width of the display area, and after the images between positions c and d are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, when the images between positions a and a' are displayed as the display area on the third pattern display device 81, the back surface images are scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

When the change of the back type is decided based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "town stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 first sets the corresponding back image between position a and position a' as the initial position of the display area, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Then, over time, the display area is moved from left to right relative to the scrolling image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, when the display area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the image from position a to position a'. Thus, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth connection as if they flow to the left.

On the other hand, the rear image on rear side E is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... over time. Specifically, on rear side E, an image of a mountain towering over the island, an image of a sandy beach at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with their positions fixed. On the other hand, the color tone of the image of the sky above the mountain changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the "Island Stage", an orange sky indicating a morning glow is displayed as the initial back image of back E. Then, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to a vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has passed, a vivid blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from vivid blue to black, and after a predetermined time has passed, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, over time, the color tone of the sky gradually turns from black to white, and then changes to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has passed, a repeating back image returning to the back image indicating a morning glow is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c for each rear image will be described. As shown in FIG. 152(a), the entire range of rear image A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, i.e., all image data corresponding to positions a to d, is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Usually, the game is played without changing the stage while the initial stage, the "city stage," is displayed, so by keeping all image data of rear image A corresponding to the frequently displayed "city stage" resident in the rear image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. This reduces the processing load on the display control device 114.

On the other hand, for back side B, which corresponds to the "forest stage", back side C, which corresponds to the "river stage", and back side D, which corresponds to the "sky stage", only a portion of the back side, i.e., image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, is stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as shown in FIG. 152(b). Also, image data corresponding to back side E, which corresponds to the island stage, is stored in the back side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 during the start-up process after power is turned on, and remains resident.

To instantly change the rear image, it would be ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235, but doing so would require a very large capacity RAM to be used for the resident video RAM 235, which could lead to increased costs.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed to the range from position a to position a', and image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b, including the initial position, is stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, when a change of stage is decided by lottery at the start of the change, the initial positions of the backs B to D can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and the display can be made to scroll or change color over time. Also, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the backs B to D, the increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and the increase in cost can be suppressed.

The range of positions a to b for the backs B to D is set so that, after the image at the initial position is displayed, while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled from left to right using image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. This allows the image data from position b' to position d to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled, so that after the range from position a to position b is scrolled using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the range from position b' to position d can be scrolled without delay using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 to display it on the third pattern display device 81.

Similarly, for rear surface E, the range of image data is set so that after the image in the initial position is displayed, the image data for the remaining image can be transferred from character ROM 234 to normal RAM 236 while the image is being displayed using image data resident in rear surface image area 235c of resident video RAM 235. This allows image data corresponding to the remaining image to be transferred to normal video RAM 236 while the image is being displayed, so that after the image is displayed using image data resident in rear surface image area 235c of resident video RAM 235, the remaining images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 sequentially over time using image data corresponding to the rear surface image stored in normal video RAM 236 without delay.

In addition, for rear sides B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to rear images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 150) of the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to rear images from being overwritten by other image data, so that the rear images can be displayed reliably.

In addition, in the rear side B to D, the image data stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 overlap with each other, with the image data corresponding to the image between position b' and position b being stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear side image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the image from position b' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, so that the rear side image is scrolled and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with a smooth connection.

Furthermore, the MPU 231 uses image data from the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between positions c and d is displayed as a display area on the third pattern display device 81. Next, the MPU 231 uses image data from the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between positions a and a' is displayed as a display area on the third pattern display device 81. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image between positions a and c by repeatedly scrolling in a smooth connection, as if flowing to the left.

Returning to FIG. 150, the explanation will be continued. The third pattern area 235d is an area for storing the third pattern used in the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81. That is, the third pattern area 235d stores image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns numbered "0" to "9" which are the third patterns. As a result, when performing a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable performance can be started quickly on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation from occurring in which the variable performance is not immediately started on the third pattern display device 81 after a ball has entered the special ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, even though the variable performance has been started on the first pattern display device 37.

In addition, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to main patterns that are not numbered "0" to "9", such as main patterns consisting of a rear pattern such as a wooden box, and main patterns consisting of a rear pattern and additional patterns imitating characters such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet, are also stored. These image data are used for a demo performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with a start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable performance stopped. As a result, when a demo performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, a main pattern without a number is displayed as the third pattern in the demo performance. Therefore, a player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in a demo state by visually recognizing the main pattern without a number from the display image of the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, in this control example, the third pattern is configured to be displayed in a different display manner depending on the background mode (back image) that is set. Therefore, each time the background mode is switched, the display image data of the third pattern corresponding to the background mode after the switch is stored in the third pattern area 235d. This eliminates the need to store image data for all third patterns corresponding to all background modes in the third pattern area 235d, thereby reducing memory capacity.

In this control example, since the player can switch the background mode by operating the operating means (frame button 22), there are cases where the background mode is changed multiple times in a short period of time. Therefore, in this control example, the image data corresponding to the previous background mode is not erased from the third pattern area 235d for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the background mode is switched. This makes it possible to prevent the process of storing image data in the third pattern area 235d from being cumbersomely executed even if an event occurs in which the background mode is frequently switched. Also, the third pattern storage area 235d may be configured to store image data of multiple third patterns corresponding to multiple background modes in advance.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a "boy", an "old man", and a "girl" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these are resident in the character design area 235e. When the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads the image data that is resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character design can be changed instantly even if a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error together with the type of error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 can instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so that even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into multiple sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a specific sub-area in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the type of image data should be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads out the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the specified specific sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an instruction to draw an image and an instruction to transfer image data simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of an image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of an image in that frame buffer, and while displaying an image in one of the frame buffers, reads out one frame of image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of an image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can display one frame of image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out one frame of image previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and display the one frame of image that has been read out on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of a DRAM. This work RAM 233 has at least a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a rear image change flag 233w, a rear image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The data table storage area 233b is an area that stores a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance that is displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a transfer data table that specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance that is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

Here, we will explain the details of the various data tables. First, a display data table is prepared for each presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110. For example, display data tables corresponding to variable presentations, opening presentations, round presentations, ending presentations, and demo presentations are prepared.

The variable performance is an effect that is started in the third pattern display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command that indicates the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating a miss is finally stopped and displayed, whereas if the stop type of the variable performance is either jackpot A or jackpot B, the stop pattern indicating the respective jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is intended to inform the player that the pachinko machine 10 will transition to a special game state and that the large opening, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened, and the round effect is intended to inform the player of the number of rounds that will be played. The ending effect is intended to inform the player that the special game state has ended.

As described above, the demo effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, but the next variable effect associated with a start winning does not start. The third symbol, consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the opening performance, round performance, ending performance, and demo performance. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for variable performance, will have one table per variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Now, with reference to Figure 153, the display data table will be described in detail. Figure 153 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time, corresponding to an address expressed as one unit of time (20 milliseconds in this control example) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame's worth of image, and also specify drawing information for the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, according to the sprite type.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to that magnification ratio is specified. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when a sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through it. The alpha blending information is information used to specify a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information used to specify the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information used to specify the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing information for each sprite is specified for each address as the drawing content for one frame, which is specified for each address: one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and text. Information about effects and characters is specified as one or more pieces according to the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of rear image. This rear type contains information specifying whether to display one of rears A to E corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "town stage," "forest stage," "river stage," "sky stage," or "island stage"), or whether to display a rear image different from rears A to E. In addition, when specifying that a rear image different from rears A to E is to be displayed, the rear type also contains information specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

When the MPU 231 determines that one of the back faces A to E is to be displayed based on the back face type, it determines the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among back faces A to E as the drawing target, and also determines the range of back face images to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it determines that a back face image different from back faces A to E is to be displayed, it determines the back face image to be displayed from the back face type.

In this control example, a case will be described in which only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image in the display data table, but instead, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to that rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the back surface type and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored, rather than information indicating the elapsed time.

For the third patterns (Pattern 1, Pattern 2, ...), pattern type offset information is recorded as pattern type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern. The reason offset information is determined rather than the type of third pattern directly is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a specified time has elapsed records the offset information from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third symbol, and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers assigned to each third symbol, so that the third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance is set to be the time during which the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed. While the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed, the third pattern is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player cannot be aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 153) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be specified by that display data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and a drawing list (see FIG. 155) is created, which will be described later. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to instruct the drawing of the image. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 can change the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

If, as in conventional pachinko machines, a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, a large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing the program, which becomes more complex and expansive as the variety of performance images increases, and this may limit the processing power of the display control device 114 and result in a limit to the diversification of controllable performance images. In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed simply by replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, so a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

The reason why the display data table is prepared in accordance with each performance mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the performance mode to be displayed, and the drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is because the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning in the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above. In this way, the configuration of preparing a display data table in accordance with each performance mode, setting a display data table buffer according to the performance mode to be displayed, and creating a drawing list frame by frame according to the set data table can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each performance, and as described above, the transfer data information and the transfer timing are specified for transferring image data of sprites used in the performance specified in the display data table that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If all image data for sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, then no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and describes the transfer data information of the image data of the sprite (hereinafter referred to as the "image data to be transferred") that should start being transferred at the time indicated by that address (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in Figure 154 correspond to this). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified in the transfer data table in correspondence with the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, null data is specified, which means that there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (this corresponds to address "0002H" in Figure 154).

The transfer data information includes the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

The first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, just like the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 154) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is contained.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc., and if a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table exists, it reads the transfer data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 155) described later is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 154, when pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and sends the drawing list after the addition to image controller 237. On the other hand, when pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data that should start transferring, and the transfer data information is not added to the generated drawing list, and the drawing list is sent to image controller 237.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, it is possible to ensure that image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, the image data stored in the image storage area 236a can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in that display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This makes it possible to manage and control the transfer of image data for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should start being transferred at the time indicated by the address, is specified in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, the timing of the start of transfer can be specified so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in Figures 151 (a) to (c). This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see Figure 187) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S6005 in Figure 187). Then, when all resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S7605 in Figure 199 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 189(b)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 189(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 189(b)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 190 to 195) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 196 to 198) are executed so that various images are displayed in response to commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

The simple image display flag 233c is also referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during V interrupt processing (see S7501 in FIG. 199(a)). If the simple image display flag 233c is on, resident target image data exists that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 199(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 200) is executed to transfer the image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113, selects a display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 155) that describes the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (see FIG. 155) for each frame that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that if all the image data of the sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared, and the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, if the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is specified (i.e., if no null data is specified), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to a drawing list (see FIG. 155) described below that specifies the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. As described above, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specified address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when a specified sprite is drawn in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address from which the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, during the display setting process (see S6303 in FIG. 189(b)) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, a pointer update process (see S7205 in FIG. 198) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 155) described below, and also obtains transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used to draw a sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. This makes it possible to read images required for display from the character ROM 234 without delay in advance and transfer them to the normal video RAM 236, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. In addition, by writing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Now, referring to FIG. 155, the details of the drawing list will be described. FIG. 155 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in FIG. 155, it describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, such as the back image used in one frame's image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), the character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, composition processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter specification information in a manner specified by the information, and then performs various processing on the standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read from the various video RAMs, and draws the image obtained by performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, as specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address for the sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type identified from the contents of other images. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data for that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed in the foreground, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the following order: third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the backmost side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the frontmost side.

In addition, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in transfer data table buffer 233e, MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the source start address and source end address in character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the destination start address of the sub-area provided in image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, image controller 237 reads image data from a specified area of character ROM 234 (area indicated by the source start address and source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a specified sub-area (destination address) provided in image storage area 236a of normal video RAM 236.

The timing counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When the MPU 231 stores a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, it sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on that display data table. This time data is the presentation time divided by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this control example).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of image are completed, each time the display setting process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) is executed by the MPU 231, the timing counter 233h is decremented by one (see S7207 in FIG. 196). As a result, when the value of the timing counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the presentation.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is a flag indicating the storage state, for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, indicating whether the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" for all sprites, indicating that they are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred that corresponds to a sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 200) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on," indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the one sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off."

When the MPU 231 transfers image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, it refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and determines whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 200). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, it sets a transfer instruction for that image data (see S7714 in FIG. 200) and causes the image controller 237 to transfer that image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. This prevents unnecessary transfers from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 is expanded (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"); if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Information on this specified drawing target buffer is then sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 201).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which the image drawn based on the drawing list is expanded onto the designated drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 executes a display process in which the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading out previously expanded drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, and transferring the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent. In addition, the drawing list is sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see S6306 in FIG. 189(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The rear image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. If this rear image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of rear image is changed, and if it is off, it means that no change is made. The rear image change flag 233w is set to on when a rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 195(a)). In addition, this rear image change flag 233w is referenced in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 200), and is set to off when the rear image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 200). This makes it possible to display a rear image corresponding to the rear image change command or the performance mode change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The rear image discrimination flag 233x is a flag that indicates the rear image type that is set. This flag is, for example, composed of one byte, and each bit corresponds to each rear image type. If any bit of this rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the rear image type corresponding to the on bit is set as the current rear image type. For example, if the 0th bit of the rear image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that rear image A is set. When a rear image change command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the bit of this rear image discrimination flag 233x that corresponds to the rear image notified by the command is set to on (see S7002 in FIG. 195(a)). At this time, all other bits are set to off. This rear image discrimination flag 233x makes it easy to identify the currently set rear image type.

The demo display flag 233y is a flag that indicates whether or not a demo is being performed. When the demo display flag 233y is on, it means that a demo is being performed, and when it is off, it means that a demo is not being performed. In the display setting process (see FIG. 196), the demo display flag 233y is set on when a demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S7221 in FIG. 196), and is set off when a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S6505 in FIG. 191(a), S6705 in FIG. 192(a), S6805 in FIG. 192(b), and S6905 in FIG. 193). The demo display flag 233y makes it easy to determine whether or not a demo is currently being performed.

The confirmation display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmation display effect is being performed. Here, the confirmation display effect indicates an effect in which the stopped pattern is displayed (confirmed display) for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the variable pattern. If the confirmation display flag 233z is on, it means that the confirmation display effect is being performed, and if it is off, it means that the confirmation display effect is not being performed. The confirmation display flag 233z is set on when the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d during the display setting process (see FIG. 196) (S7214 in FIG. 196), and is set off when a display data table other than the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (see S6505 in FIG. 191(a), S6705 in FIG. 192(a), S6805 in FIG. 192(b), and S6905 in FIG. 193). This confirmation display flag 233z makes it easy to determine whether or not a confirmation display effect is currently being performed.

<Regarding control processing executed by the main control device in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Figures 156 to 172. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly divided into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

As described above, in this first control example, when both the lottery right for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved) and the lottery right for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) are stored, the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed. In addition, by passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65V arranged in the variable winning device 65 while the jackpot game is being executed, a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, as an end condition for terminating the probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, in addition to the end condition that is established when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, an end condition that is established when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) is set.

Figure 156 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the second win random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the second win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (999, 99, and 999, respectively, in this control example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a special pattern change process is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and also sets the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81. After that, a start winning process is executed in response to the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64 (start winning) or the entry of a ball into the second ball entry port 640 (start winning) (S105). Details of the special pattern change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figures 157 to 162.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (S106), is executed, and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 163 and FIG. 164. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 157, the special symbol change process (S104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change process (S104). The special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 157) performs various judgments (win/lose judgments) and determinations of the special symbol based on each acquired counter value, controls the first symbol display device 37 to be able to display the variable display in the variable display mode determined by a predetermined control, sets various commands to execute the variable display performance of the third and fourth symbols in the third symbol display device 81, and controls to stop and display in a display mode that shows the judgment result (win/lose judgment result). The special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 157) will be described below.

In this special symbol variation process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently being hit (a jackpot game is in progress) (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203k is on. If the result of the determination is that a special symbol jackpot is currently being hit (a jackpot game is in progress) (S201: Yes), this process is terminated.

In the process of S201, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in a jackpot (a jackpot game is in progress) (S201: No), it is determined whether the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202). If the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (change) can be executed, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved variable display times based on the lottery of the first special symbol N1) and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved variable display times based on the lottery of the second special symbol N2) are obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on, and then the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d obtained in the process of S203 is greater than 0 (S210).

In the process of S210, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S210: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S210, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (i.e., 1 or more) (S210: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S212). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process described later executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S212, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted in the same manner as the process of S207 (S213), and the process proceeds to the process of S208. In the process of S208, which is executed after the process of S207 or S213, a special symbol jackpot determination process is executed (S208), and then a special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (S209), after which the process ends. Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208) and the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158 and FIG. 159.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S214). If the change time has not elapsed (S214: No), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (S215), and then this process is terminated. In the process of S215, the value of the change time counter for measuring the change time of the special pattern is updated, and the display of the first pattern display device 81 is updated corresponding to the updated value of the change time counter. In this change time counter, a value indicating the change time corresponding to the change pattern selected in the special pattern change pattern selection process (S209) is set at the start timing of the special pattern change, and thereafter, it is updated (decremented) each time the process of S215 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S214 that the change time has elapsed (S214: Yes), that is, if the value of the change time counter updated in the process of S215 is 0, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is set (S216). The stop symbols are set in advance by the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209). When this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209) is executed, a lottery for special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special symbol jackpot has been awarded is determined based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if a special symbol jackpot has been awarded, one of the jackpots A to E is determined based on the value of the first winning type counter C2.

In this control example, in the case of jackpot A, the blue LED is turned on in the first pattern display device 37, in the case of jackpot B, the red LED is turned on, in the case of jackpot C, the green LED is turned on, and in the case of jackpot D, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, in the case of a miss, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S216 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 starts, it is determined whether the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process is a special symbol jackpot (S217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S217: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S218), the time reduction counter 203h and the probability change counter 203i are cleared (set to 0) (S219), and the process proceeds to S220. When the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON by the process of S218, if the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 113) of the main process executed by the main control device 110 is executed, the process branches to S1901: Yes and an opening command is set (S1902). As a result, the jackpot performance is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S217, if the current lottery result is a miss for the special symbol (S217: No), the processes of S218 and S219 are skipped, and the update process is executed (S221), and then the process proceeds to S220.

The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during external output processing (S1801) of the main processing executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the status command, it acquires the game status contained in the status command. This allows the status grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 to match the actual status of the pachinko machine 10. In the processing of S220, a special chart confirmation command is set (S220), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 158, the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 157), will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process (S208).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S301). Then, based on the first jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 140(a)), it is determined whether the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 matches the jackpot determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (S302).

After completing the process of S302, it is next determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot (S303), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (S303: Yes), the lottery result of the special pattern is set to a jackpot (S304), and the jackpot special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the obtained value of the win type counter C2 (S305), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S303 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S303: No), a losing special pattern is set on the first pattern display device 37 (S306), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 159, the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 157), will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158), it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, i.e., whether a special symbol jackpot has been set (S401).

If it is determined in the process of S401 that a jackpot with a special symbol is set (S401: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection table 202d (see Figs. 141(a)-(c)) and the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (S402). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (S403), and the variation pattern selection table 202d corresponding to the current game state (normal state, latent state, high probability state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read (S404).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S403 and the variation pattern selection table 202d read in the process of S404 (S405), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S405 (S406). The special pattern variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation time of the special pattern, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110 (see S1801 in FIG. 167).

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the stopping pattern of the special symbol is set (S407), the start of the special symbol fluctuation is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S408), a value indicating the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is set to the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S409), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S407 includes information indicating the type of the stopping pattern indicating the result of this special symbol fluctuation, that is, a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main process (FIG. 167) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss (S401: No), the process of S402 is skipped and the process proceeds to S403.

Next, referring to FIG. 160, the contents of the update process (S221) executed in the special symbol change process (see S104 in FIG. 15) will be explained. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the update process (S221). This update process (S221) is a process that is executed when the change time of the special symbol change has elapsed (when the change stops), and processes are executed to update the remaining period of the period during which the high probability change state is set to continue and to update the remaining period of the period during which the time-saving state is set to continue.

When the update process (S221) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the special chance counter 203i is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is one with a high probability of a special symbol (S501). If it is determined that the value of the special chance counter 203i is greater than 0 (S501: Yes), the value of the special chance counter 203i is decremented by 1 (updated) (S502). Next, it is determined whether the updated value of the special chance counter 203i is 0 (S503). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S503: Yes), a time-saving state is set in the game status storage area 203g (S504), and the process proceeds to S505. Also, if it is determined in the process of S501 that the value of the probability change counter 203i is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S501: No), the current state is not one with a high probability of a special symbol, so the process skips the above-mentioned processes of S502 to S504 for updating the value of the probability change counter 203i and moves to the process of S505.

In addition, in the process of S503, if the value of the special chance counter 203i is not 0, i.e., the value of the special chance counter 203i is greater than 0 and the special chance state (high probability state of special symbols) continues (S503: No), the process of S504 is skipped and the process proceeds to S505.

In the process of S505, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, and if it is determined that it is greater than 0, i.e., if the current state is a high probability state of a normal pattern (S505: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S506), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h after the decrement is 0 (S507). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 in the process of S507, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S508), and the value of the probability change counter 203i, the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and a state command indicating the current game state are set (S509), and this process ends. Furthermore, if it is determined in the process of S505 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S505: No), or if it is determined in the process of S507 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (S507: No), the process proceeds directly to the process of S509.

Next, referring to FIG. 161, the start winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 156) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161) is a process that determines whether a ball has entered either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (start winning), and if a start winning has occurred, stores the acquired counter values in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, up to the reserved upper limit number (maximum of four in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640).

In addition, when the counter values acquired based on the reserved balls are stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, respectively, a process (so-called pre-reading process) is executed to predict the win/loss judgment result and the selected variation pattern in advance based on the counter values stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. The start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161) will be explained below.

In the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, which is the first starting port (start winning) (S601). Here, the ball's entry into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (a start winning has occurred) (S601: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is obtained (S602), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (S603).

In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls at the first ball entrance 64 is currently less than the upper limit of four (i.e., whether the number of reserved balls has not yet reached the upper limit). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than four (S603: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d is incremented by one (S604), and a reserved ball count command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of reserved balls at the first ball entrance 64 (the number of reserved lottery rights for the first special symbol) (S605).

Then, the various counter values (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, variable type counter CS1) are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and each is reserved (stored) in the corresponding reserved ball number memory area of the first special pattern reserved ball execution area of RAM203 (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

In addition, if the process of S601 determines that a ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (S601: No), or if the process of S603 determines that the number of reserved balls at the first ball entrance 64 is currently at the upper limit (S603: No), the process of incrementing the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is skipped and the process proceeds to S607.

Next, the processes from S607 to S612 differ only in that the processes performed for the entry of a ball into the first starting hole (first ball entry hole 64) in the processes from S601 to S606 are the same as those performed for the entry of a ball into the second ball entry hole 640, and therefore a detailed explanation will be omitted.

After executing steps S601 to S612, the pre-reading process is executed (S613) and this process ends.

This pre-reading process (S613) will be described later with reference to FIG. 162, but a process is executed to determine the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. from each counter value newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. In this control example, the process is configured to execute the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a new start winning occurs, the process may be configured to execute the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. for all reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b.

In addition, in this control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, that is, when the right to draw a special pattern is newly acquired, the content of the lottery right for the special pattern (winning information) is determined in advance, but this is not limited to this, and the content of the lottery right for the special pattern (winning information) may be determined in advance, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67 or depending on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern.

As described above, in this control example, when the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d or the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is added, the pre-reading process (S613) is executed based on the added winning information (winning information). However, without being limited to this, for example, when the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is determined to be the upper limit number (4) in the process of S603 (S603: No), that is, when a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64 when the reserved ball number of the special pattern has reached the upper limit, the pre-reading process (S613) may be executed. This allows the player to continue playing in order to execute the pre-reading process even when the reserved ball number of the special pattern has reached the upper limit. In addition, since added value can be added when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls with a special pattern has reached the upper limit, it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls with a special pattern has reached the upper limit.

Next, referring to FIG. 162, we will explain the look-ahead process (S613), which is one process of the start winning process (S105 in FIG. 161). FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S613).

In the pre-read process (S613 in FIG. 162), first, various counter values, such as the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1, are read from the storage area newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b (S701). Then, the read data is stored in the empty storage area in the pre-read reserved storage area that has the smallest winning order (S702).

Next, the result of the hit/miss judgment is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the read-ahead reserved memory area. Note that here, both the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a low probability state and the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a high probability state are determined. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) and the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information, making it difficult to predict the game state (probability state of the special pattern) that will be set at the time when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot or not (S703). If it is determined that the result is a jackpot (S703: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the jackpot type and fluctuation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S704), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S703 is that it is not a jackpot (S703: No), a winning command is set that includes information that can identify a miss win and a variation pattern based on the various counter values that have been read (S705), and then this process ends.

The winning command set in the processing of S704 or S705 is set to include, in addition to the information indicating the winning/losing judgment result described above (information that has a different meaning depending on the winning/losing judgment result), information indicating the values of the various counter values read out by the processing of S701 as common information. The winning command set in this processing is then output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S1801) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 167).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command, it can execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from normal) based on various information contained in the winning command, or a preview pattern or the like is displayed before the change starts to suggest to the player the result of the winning or losing judgment.

In this control example, since there is only one probability state for the special pattern (low probability state for the special pattern), the information to be set in the winning command (win/lose judgment result) can be set regardless of the game state. However, for example, in a gaming machine that has multiple probability states for the special pattern (high probability state for the special pattern, low probability state for the special pattern), the winning/lose judgment result for the high probability state of the special pattern and the winning/lose judgment result for the low probability state of the special pattern can be distinguished, and the winning command can be set based on the results of each judgment. Alternatively, a judgment value (value of the first win random number counter C1) that is judged to be a jackpot whether the special pattern is in a high probability state or a low probability state can be specified, and the winning command indicating a jackpot for the special pattern can be set only when that judgment value is read.

By configuring it in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the audio lamp control device 113 only if it is determined in advance that a specific jackpot has been reached, so that a sense of anticipation of a jackpot can be created for special pattern changes that do not involve a pre-reading performance.

Furthermore, the game state when the lottery for the special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be accurately determined, and a win/lose judgment may be performed based on the game state. In this case, the determination is possible by configuring the selection of the fluctuation pattern to be selected to be constant regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation, rather than varying the selection of the fluctuation pattern depending on the number of reserved balls. When performing a look-ahead, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the order of fluctuation until the reserved balls start to fluctuate based on the reserved and memorized information.

In addition, in this control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, a read-ahead process is executed based on the winning information, and a win/lose judgment is predicted in advance during the read-ahead process. However, without being limited to this, in the read-ahead process of the main control unit 110, information indicating the contents (counter values) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be set as a winning command, and the winning/lose judgment result may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control unit 113 side.

By configuring in this way, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can be configured to execute a process to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and if it is determined that a look-ahead performance should be executed, to analyze the information contained in the winning command received from the main control device 110 (prediction of the winning/losing determination result). As a result, if the look-ahead performance is not executed, specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the winning/losing determination result) is not executed, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary control from being executed in the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to prevent a problem in which a player illegally obtains the results of a look-ahead process that was executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 163, the normal symbol change process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change process (S106). The normal symbol change process (S106) is a process for controlling the change display of the second symbol (normal symbol) and the opening time of the electric role 640a, and is a process for executing various processes related to the normal symbol change (lottery) (process for executing the normal symbol change, process for setting the change mode (change time) of the normal symbol change to be executed, process for updating the normal symbol change being executed, process for stopping the normal symbol change, and process for determining the game content of the normal symbol winning game to be executed when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win).

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 163), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S801). The normal symbol (second symbol) winning period includes the period from when the second symbol display device 83 displays a win (when the winning symbol is displayed stationary) to when the electric roler 640a is being controlled to open and close (until the winning game ends). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S801: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (S801: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern on the second pattern display device 83 is displaying a changing pattern (S802). If it is determined that the normal pattern is not displaying a changing pattern, that is, if it is determined that a new normal pattern change (lottery) can be executed (S802: No), then the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203f is obtained (S803), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (S804).

If it is determined in the process of S804 that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203f is 0 (S804: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203f is greater than 0 (S804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S805). In other words, if it is determined in the process of S804 that the condition for executing a new normal pattern variation (winning information to be used for the normal pattern variation is reserved and stored) is met, the value of the normal pattern reserved balls counter 203f is decremented by 1 to execute the normal pattern variation using the reserved and stored winning information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S806). In the process of S806, the data stored in normal symbol reserved 1 to normal symbol reserved 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted from normal symbol reserved 1 to the execution area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (S807).

Next, it is determined whether the time-saving counter 203h is on, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols (S808). If it is determined that the time-saving counter 203h is set to on (S808: Yes), a win/lose determination result (lottery result) is obtained based on the win determination value of the second win random number table 202c (see FIG. 140(b)) for high probability (S809), and processing proceeds to S811. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving counter 203h is off (S808: No), a win/lose determination result is obtained based on the win determination value of the second win random number table 202c (see FIG. 140(b)) for low probability (S810), and processing proceeds to S811.

In the process of S811, it is determined whether the current normal pattern change (lottery) is a win (S811), and if it is determined to be a win (S811: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode when a win occurs, is set (S812), and the process proceeds to S814. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S811 that the current normal pattern change (lottery) is not a win (a loss), the display mode of "×", which is the display mode when a loss occurs, is set (S813), and the process proceeds to S814.

In the process of S814, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) by referring to the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S814). If it is determined that the game state is in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (S814: Yes), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S815) and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is not in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (S814: No), the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 10 seconds (S816) and this process is terminated.

In this control example, as described above, the normal pattern fluctuation time is varied depending on the probability state of the normal pattern that is set, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to always set the fluctuation time to 3 seconds regardless of the set game state. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state switches, specifically at the timing of the end of the jackpot game when the game state switches from the normal state (low probability state of normal pattern) where a long fluctuation time is generally likely to be set to the time-saving state (high probability state of normal pattern) where a short fluctuation time is likely to be set, a normal pattern fluctuation with a long fluctuation time is executed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the normal pattern lottery is not executed during the time-saving state even though the time-saving state is set.

The method of setting the normal symbol fluctuation time is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and the fluctuation time may be varied according to the game state, the number of reserved normal symbol balls, or the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this control example, the normal symbol fluctuation time may be variably set based on the set probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203f (number of reserved normal symbols). Furthermore, the ease of ball entry into the second ball entry port 640 may be varied depending on the set normal symbol fluctuation time.

In this way, by configuring the ease of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 to be variable depending on the length of time the normal pattern is set to change, the ease of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 can be easily changed depending on the game status, creating a variety of gameplay features.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S802 that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not being displayed in a changing manner (S802: No), it is determined whether the time for changing the normal pattern being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (S817), and if it is determined that the time for changing has not elapsed (S817: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S817 that the variation time has elapsed (S817: Yes), the second pattern display device 83 is set to display a stopped display (S818). In the process of S818, if the current normal pattern lottery is a winning combination, the second pattern display device 83 is set to display a "○" pattern stopped (illuminated). On the other hand, if the normal pattern lottery is a losing combination, the second pattern display device 83 is set to display a "X" pattern stopped (illuminated). In other words, a setting is made to display the display mode set in the process of S812 or S813 described above stopped.

When the stop display is set by processing S818, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stop (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by processing S812 or processing S813.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the current lottery for the normal symbol is a win (S819). If it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is not a win (a miss) (S819: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a win (S819: Yes), it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) by referring to the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S820), and if it is determined that the current game state is in the time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) (S820: Yes), the game content for the normal symbol winning game is set to the opening time of the electric roler 640a for 1 second x 2 times (opening operation) (S823), and the process proceeds to S822.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S820 that the game is not in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (S820: No), the game content for the normal symbol winning game is set to the opening time of the electric device 640a for 5 seconds x 1 time (opening operation) (S821), and the process proceeds to S822.

In the process of S822, the start of opening and closing control of the electric role object 640a is set based on the scenario set in the process of S821 or S823 (S822), and this process ends.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a in this control example will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the winning/losing determination of the normal symbol is performed based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing when the winning/losing determination of the normal symbol is made (the timing when the processing of S808 to S811 is performed), and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol that is set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set (the timing when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed in the processing of S817).

That is, in this control example, the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbol and the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol are configured to be executed independently, and further, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol. Therefore, depending on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol that is executed in parallel while the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbol is being executed, there may be cases where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is a hit or miss, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a.

In such a situation, for example, if the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern set at the timing of the normal pattern hit/fail judgment, there is a problem that the electric role 640a will open long (an opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set) when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Therefore, in this control example, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern at the timing for setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is determined, and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the determination result. This makes it possible to open the electric role 640a in an opening pattern that corresponds to the set game state.

In this control example, the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern is performed based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a that is moved in the winning game of the normal pattern. However, without being limited to this, for example, only when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a that is moved in the winning game of the normal pattern, the electric role 640a may be configured to open long, or the opening pattern of the electric role 640a may be configured to be set based on the game state set at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, various information (result of the normal pattern lottery, normal pattern change time, normal pattern winning scenario, etc.) determined in the normal pattern change process (see S106 in FIG. 108) is set as a command indicating the content of each information, and output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S1801 in FIG. 167) of the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 167).

Next, the contents of the through gate passing process (S107) will be explained with reference to FIG. 164. FIG. 164 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passing process (see S164). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), and is a process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67, and, if the ball has passed through, acquiring the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area. In addition, it is a process for acquiring the lottery result (winning/losing judgment result) in advance using the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C5 before the actual winning/losing judgment is executed (before the winning/losing judgment (see S811) is executed in the normal pattern variation process (see S106 in FIG. 163)).

In the through gate passing process (S107), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 (S901: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is obtained (S902), and it is then determined whether the obtained value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is not greater than 4 (whether the number of reserved balls for normal patterns has reached the upper limit) (S903).

In the process of S903, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is greater than 4 (the upper limit value of 4) (S903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f is not greater than 4 (S903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f (S904), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c (S905), the lottery result is obtained in advance based on the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 140(b)) (S906), a winning information command for normal patterns including the normal winning judgment result (preliminary judgment result obtained in the process of S906) is set (S907), and this process ends.

The winning information command for the normal symbol set in the process of S907 is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the same process as the winning information command indicating the preliminary determination result of the special symbol set in each of the control examples described above. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine in advance the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery corresponding to the lottery right for the normal symbol that is reserved and to execute a performance based on the preliminary determination result.

Specifically, in a state where the chance zone is set, that is, in a state where the second special symbol lottery is being executed based on the execution of a normal symbol winning game during the normal state, if the received normal symbol winning information command contains information indicating a win of the normal symbol, it is possible to execute an effect that continues the chance zone until the next normal symbol winning game is executed. In this case, even if all the second special symbol lotteries are completed and the first special symbol lottery is executed before the next normal symbol winning game is executed, it is preferable to configure the variable effect executed in response to the first special symbol lottery to be set to a performance mode corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (for example, a performance mode in which the third symbol is changed in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 124(b)), rather than a performance mode corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (for example, a performance mode in which the third symbol is changed in the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 122(b)). By configuring in this way, when multiple normal symbol winning games are executed within a predetermined period in the normal state, the chance zone can be set for a long period of time, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, if the chance zone does not end despite the second special symbol lottery being executed a predetermined number of times after the chance zone is set, the player can understand that the next regular winning game will be executed soon, so the player can be interested in the number of second special symbol lotteries executed during the chance zone. In addition, in this control example, a pseudo-variable effect is executed in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped multiple times as a variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol lottery executed during the chance zone. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of times the second special symbol lottery has been executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting when the chance zone will end or whether the chance zone is in an extended period.

Next, the NMI interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 165. FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information on the occurrence of a power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the information on the occurrence of the power outage in the RAM 203 as the setting of the information on the occurrence of the power outage (S1601), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout/firing control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 166, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on to the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing this start-up process.

This startup process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the startup process (Fig. 166), first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705), and if it is not stored (S1705: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S1712.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1706). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S1712. Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on and RAM data is to be initialized, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S1713, S1714) is executed.

Similarly, if power failure occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), RAM 203 initialization processing (S1713, S1714) is executed. In the RAM initialization processing (S1713, S1714), the used area of RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1713), and then the initial value of RAM 203 is set (S1714). After execution of RAM 203 initialization processing, the process proceeds to S1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power outage information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1707: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S1708) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power was cut off (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, a performance permission command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit various performances to be executed (S1710). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 167, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned startup processing will be described. FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is roughly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process (see FIG. 167), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special pattern change process (see FIG. 157) or the start winning process (see FIG. 161) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process (S1801 in FIG. 167), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and are used as information for setting various effects (changing effects, decorative effects, etc.) displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the big win control process (see FIG. 158) are sent to the voice and lamp control device 113. Furthermore, various commands set in other control processes are sent to the voice and lamp control device 113. In addition, when a ball is to be fired, a ball firing signal is sent to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1802). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1803), and then, if a jackpot state of a special pattern is reached, a command is set to execute a jackpot performance in the sound lamp control device 113, and jackpot control processing is executed to open the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 (S1804).

Details of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be described later with reference to Figures 168 to 172, but in this jackpot control process (S1804), the specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter referred to as the winning hole, etc.) is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a). Then, when either of these conditions is met, the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) is closed. The opening and closing of this winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. Note that in this control example, the jackpot control process (S1804) is executed in the main process, but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (S1806). In the electric role opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric role is set by the process of S822 in the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), the opening/closing control of the electric role is started. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric role continues until the end of the period set by the processes of S821 and S823 in the normal pattern change process.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B (S1807). In the first pattern display update process, when a change pattern is set by the special pattern change pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159), the change display according to the change pattern is started in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B. In this control example, for example, if the currently lit LED of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process, when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the special pattern change pattern selection process (S209 in FIG. 159) ends, the change display being performed in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B is terminated, and the stopped pattern is displayed (illuminated) in a stopped state in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B in the display mode set in S407 of the special pattern change pattern selection process (see S209 in FIG. 159).

Furthermore, in this control example, when one special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (jackpot symbol), the other special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a miss (miss symbol), and the stop display for this purpose is also executed.

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device (S1808). In the second pattern display update process, when the second pattern change time is set by the process of S815 and S816 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), the second pattern display device starts a change display. As a result, the second pattern display device performs a change display in which the "○" pattern and the "×" pattern as the second pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second pattern display update process (S1808), when the stop display of the second pattern display device is set by the process of S818 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), the change display being executed in the second pattern display device is terminated, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) on the second pattern display device in a display mode set by the process of S812 or S813 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163).

After that, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1809), and if information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S1809: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1810), and if the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1810: Yes), the process proceeds to S1801, and each process from S1801 onwards described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1810: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1811, S1812) until the specified time is reached, i.e., within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process.

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 999 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as in the processing of S1811 (S1812). Note that in this processing of S1812, the value of the general fluctuation type counter CS2 is also updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1801 to S1808 changes depending on the game state, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first win random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second win random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the normal variation type counter CS2 can also be randomly updated. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the process contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special and normal patterns, and it is possible to suppress the execution of fraudulent play targeting the timing at which the judgment value corresponding to a win is obtained.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the process of S1809 (S1809: Yes), the power is interrupted due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 165 is executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S1813 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S1813), and a power off command indicating that the power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S1814). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S1815), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1816), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of S1809 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the game state performed in S1801 to S1808, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1811 and S1812 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from the power interruption state, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S1801, just as in the case of initialization in the start-up processing. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power interruption, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting processing (FIG. 166, S1701), so that the processing can be started from the processing of S1801. Therefore, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804) will be explained with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process (S1804). This jackpot control process (S1804) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main control device 110, and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning port 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process (S1804), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203j is on or not (S1901). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is on (S1901: Yes), the opening command for the jackpot is set (S1902), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to off, and the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to on (S1903), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is off in the process of S1901 (S1901: No), it is next determined whether or not the special pattern jackpot is currently in progress (i.e., whether the jackpot in progress flag 203k is on) (S1904). If it is determined that the jackpot is not currently in progress (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is off) in the process of S1904 (S1904: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1904 that the current jackpot is in progress (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is on) (S1904: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is time to start a new round (S1905).

If it is determined in the process of S1905 that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed to set the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a according to the number of rounds (S1906), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 114.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1905 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1905: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (S1907). Here, in this control example, when the final round of the jackpot has ended, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (S1907: Yes), an ending command is set (S1908) and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, an ending performance indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third pattern display device 81.

In this first control example, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, a process is executed to determine the type of jackpot using the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 141(a)) (S402 in FIG. 159), and an ending period corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set. Therefore, in the process of S1908, a display ending command corresponding to the length of the ending period determined corresponding to the jackpot type is set. Note that, instead of setting the length of the ending period when a jackpot is won as in this first control example, the length of the ending period of the jackpot game may be determined depending on whether or not a V win occurs during the jackpot game (whether or not the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65V)).

Specifically, in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), when it is determined that the ending period has started (the final round has ended), it is determined whether a V has been won during this jackpot game (whether the special probability setting flag 203m is set on), and if it is determined that the special probability setting flag 203m is set on, it sets the ending period of the jackpot game to 17 seconds in order to display a 17-second ending (see FIG. 127(b) and (d)) indicating that a special probability state has been set, and if it is determined that the special probability setting flag 203m is not set on, it sets the ending period of the jackpot game to 15 seconds in order to display a 15-second ending (see FIG. 127(a) and (c)) indicating that a time-saving state has been set.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that can vary the game state set after the end of a jackpot game depending on the game results during the jackpot game, it is possible to set an ending period that corresponds to the game state that is actually set.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the ending period of the jackpot game is made different depending on the game result during the jackpot game, the ending period of the jackpot game can be determined at any time between the determination of the game result during the jackpot game and the start of the ending period. For example, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 of this first control example, after the first round of round play ends (after the round play in which the ball can enter a specific area (V gate 65V) ends), it may be determined whether or not a V has been entered, and based on the result of this determination, the ending period of the jackpot game may be set during the period in which the round games from the second round to the final round are being played.

In addition, in the above example, the length of the ending period is set based on whether or not a V is won during the jackpot game. Alternatively, for example, the ending period of the jackpot game can be set in advance based on the type of jackpot that is won, as in this first control example. Specifically, an ending period of 17 seconds is set in advance when a special jackpot is won, and 15 seconds is set in advance when a normal jackpot is won. If it becomes necessary to change the length of the ending period based on the game results during the jackpot game, that is, if a special jackpot game is played but a V cannot be won during the jackpot game, the length of the preset ending period can be changed. By configuring in this way, the frequency with which the length of the ending period is set during the jackpot game can be reduced.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1907 that the timing is not the start timing of the currently executed ending period (S1907: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1909). Here, the end timing of the jackpot refers to the case where the execution period of the ending performance has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S1909 that the timing is the end timing of the jackpot (S1909: Yes), a jackpot end process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends is executed (S1910), and this process is terminated. Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 170. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1909 that the timing is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1909: No), a winning process for performing control according to the winning into the specific winning port 65a is executed (S1911), an abnormality process for determining whether the ball that entered the specific winning port 65a was discharged normally is executed (S1912), and then this process is terminated. Details of the winning process and abnormality process will be described later with reference to Figures 171 and 172.

Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1906) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1906). This jackpot operation setting process (S1906) is executed during the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 169) is started, it is first determined whether it is time to start one round (S2001). If it is determined in the process of S2001 that it is time to start one round (S2001: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the switching valve 65y (V solenoid 209a) is set (S2002), and the opening pattern of the specific winning port 65a corresponding to the type of jackpot is set (S2003).

Although detailed explanations will be omitted here, in this control example, among the round games executed multiple times during one jackpot game, the content of the round game executed in a specific round number (first round) is made different depending on the jackpot type. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (variable jackpot), a round game is executed as the first round of round game in which the switching valve 65y is operated to make it easier for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of the ball flowing down to the specific area (V gate 65V) only during a specific period of time during a jackpot game that is executed over a long period of time, so that the player can play during the jackpot game without losing concentration.

In this control example, when the first round of the high probability jackpot game is executed, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be able to execute a V notification effect in which the characters "Aim for V" are displayed as a notification mode to inform the player that it is a chance period for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). This makes it possible to easily inform the player of a specific period during the jackpot game that is executed over a long period in which it is easy for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). Furthermore, based on the detection means detecting that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V), the characters "VGET" are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as a notification mode to inform the player that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V). This makes it possible to easily inform the player that the conditions for setting the high probability state after the jackpot game is completed are met.

The notification mode of the above-mentioned guidance notification may be varied depending on whether a condition is met. For example, the color of the text "Aim for V" may be varied based on the elapsed time of a specific period in which the ball is likely to flow down to a specific gate, or the remaining time, or the size of the display area may be varied, or the text may be changed to something more emphatic (for example, "Aim for V quickly"). This makes it possible to prevent situations in which the player does not fire the ball in a situation in which it is likely to flow down to a specific area (V gate 65V).

In addition, in this control example, a switching valve 65y is provided as a V-type device for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the variable winning device 65, and the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y can be changed to set a period in which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific gate and a period in which it is difficult to do so. However, without being limited to this, for example, the switching valve 65y may be configured to operate with a common operation pattern from the start of the jackpot game, and the timing at which the specific winning port 65a becomes open may be changed depending on the type of jackpot, so that a period in which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) and a period in which it is difficult to do so may be set. This makes it possible to standardize the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y, so that even if the operation content of the switching valve 65y is understood, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the current jackpot game is a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to pass through to the specific area (V gate 65V). In addition, because the operation of the switching valve 65y can be unified, the load on the V solenoid 209a can be reduced, and failure of the V component (switching valve 65y) can be suppressed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2001 that the current round is not the first round (S2001: No), the processes of S2002 and S2003 are skipped, the opening of the normal specific winning port 65a is set (S2004), and the process proceeds to S2005. In the process of S2005, a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set (S2005), and the process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1801) of the main process executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third pattern display device 81. This makes it possible to update the display content of the third pattern display device 81 according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 169), the specific winning port 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the specific area (V gate 65V) can be set to allow the ball to pass through in the first round. As a result, in jackpots A, C to E, the player can simply shoot the ball in the first round and the ball will almost certainly pass through the specific area (V gate 65V), so a special probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S1910) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S1910). This jackpot end process (S1910) is executed in the jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168), and as described above, is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end process (S1910), first it is determined whether the special chance setting flag 203m is on (S2101). If it is determined in the process of S2101 that the special chance setting flag 203m is on (S2101: Yes), this means that the ball passed through the V-gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot, so the value of the special chance counter 203i is set to 50 (S2102) and processing proceeds to S2103. On the other hand, if the special chance setting flag 203m is off in the process of S2101 (S2101: No), processing skips S2102 and proceeds to processing S2103.

In the process of S2103, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 (S2103), and then a state command is set based on the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the value of the probability change counter 203i (S2104). The state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1801) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, it updates the slave state setting area 223g according to the game state notified by the state command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to accurately grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the jackpot flag 203k and the probability change setting flag 203m are set to OFF (S2105), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 170), the game state after the jackpot end can be accurately set depending on whether or not the ball passed through the V-gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot game.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1911) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S1911). This winning process (S1911) is executed as part of the big win control process (see FIG. 168), and as described above, is a process for carrying out control in response to a win at a specific winning port 65a.

In this winning process (S1911), first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the valid round period (S2201). Here, the valid round period is the period during which a round of play is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning port 65a is opened until the end of the interval period. In the process of S2201, if the current time is not the valid round period (S2201: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that the current time is the valid round period (S2201: Yes), it is then determined whether a win at the specific winning port 65a has been detected (S2202), and if a win at the specific winning port 65a has been detected (S2202: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203o is updated by adding 1 (S2203), a winning command indicating that a win at the specific winning port 65a has been detected is set (S2204), and the process proceeds to S2205. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2202 that a win at the specific winning port 65a has not been detected (S2202: No), the processes of S2203 and S2204 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2205.

In the process of S2205, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203o is 10 or more (S2205), and if the value of the winning number counter 203o is 10 or more (S2205: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. On the other hand, in the process of S2205, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203o is 9 or less (S2205: No), it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds) has elapsed (S2206), and if the round time has elapsed (S2206: Yes), the process proceeds to S2207. In the process of S2206, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of each round of play of the current jackpot. In this control example, the end conditions for the round game are met by the same round time elapse and number of winnings regardless of the type of jackpot or number of rounds, but this is not limited to the above, and the end conditions for the round game may be different depending on the type of jackpot, or the end conditions for the round game may be different depending on the number of rounds played.

In the process of S2207, the specific winning port 65a is set to be closed (S2207), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning port 65a has been set to be closed is set (S2208). Next, it is determined whether the current closing of the specific winning port 65a is due to the end of one round (S2209), and if it is determined that the current closing is due to the end of one round (S2209: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is set to OFF (S2210), and the process proceeds to S2211. On the other hand, in the process of S2209, if it is determined that the current closing of the specific winning port 65a is due to the end of a round other than the first round (S2209: No), since the flow path solenoid (probable win solenoid) 2665k is not set to ON, the process of S2210 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2212.

In the process of S2211, the remaining ball timer flag 203p, the special chance active flag 203r, and the round end flag 203 are set to ON (S2211), and the process proceeds to S2212. Also, if the value of the winning number counter 203o is determined to be 9 or less in the process of S2205 (S2205: No), and if it is determined in the process of S2206 that the round time has not elapsed (S2206: No), the processes of S2207 to S2211 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2212.

In the process of S2212, it is determined whether the round end flag 203 is on (S2212), and if the round end flag 203 is off (S2212: No), the process proceeds to S2213. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2212 that the round end flag 203 is on (S2212: Yes), it is then determined whether the special chance active flag 203r is on (S2217). In the process of S2217, if the special chance active flag 203r is off (S2217: No), the process ends as is.

On the other hand, if the special chance valid flag 203r is on (S2217: No), 1 is added to the value of the special chance valid timer 203s (S2218), and then it is determined whether the value of the special chance valid timer 203s is the upper limit (S2219). If the value of the special chance valid timer 203s is not the upper limit (S2219: No), the process proceeds to S2213, where the ball passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) is monitored and the special chance setting flag 203m is updated. As a result, if the special chance valid timer 203s is not the upper limit, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V), so the special chance state can be set taking into account the time it takes for the ball to clear. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the special chance state from being granted by illegally passing the ball through the specific area (V gate 65V).

On the other hand, if the value of the special chance active timer 203s is the upper limit (S2219: Yes), the special chance active flag 203r and the round end flag 203 are set to off (S2220), the value of the special chance active timer 203s is reset (S2221), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S2213, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213), and if the ball has not passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball has passed through the specific area (V gate 65V) (S2213: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special chance passing counter 203n (S2214), the special chance setting flag 203m is set to ON (S2215), a V winning command is set (S2216), and this process ends.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1912). This abnormality processing (S1912) is a process executed during the big win control process (see FIG. 168), and as described above, is a process for determining whether the ball that entered the specific winning port 65a was discharged normally.

In the abnormality processing (S1912), first, it is determined whether the current time is the valid period for the round (S2301), and if it is not the valid period for the round (S2301: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is the valid period for the round (S2301: Yes), it is then determined whether the ball has passed through the discharge port 65h1 (S2302). In the processing of this S2302, it is determined whether the ball discharge port switch (not shown) capable of detecting a ball that has passed through the discharge port 65h1 (see FIG. 120(b)) has detected the passage of the ball.

If it is determined in the process of S2302 that the ball has passed through the discharge outlet 65h1 (S2302: Yes), the value of the discharge number counter 203t is incremented by 1 (S2303), and the process proceeds to S2304. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2302 that the ball has not passed through the discharge outlet 65h1 (S2302: No), the process skips S2303 and proceeds to S2304.

In the process of S2304, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203p is on (S2304). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203p is off (S2304: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203p is on (S2304: Yes), since it is during the ball removal period, the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is updated by adding 1 (S2305). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit value (S2306), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is not the upper limit value (S2306: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is the upper limit (S2306: Yes), it then determines whether the number of dispensed balls (the sum of the value of the special chance passing counter 203n and the value of the dispensed ball number counter 203t) matches the number of winning balls (the value of the winning ball number counter 203o) (S2307).

If it is determined in the process of S2307 that the number of dispensed balls does not match the number of winning balls (S2307: No), an error command is set (S2308) and the process proceeds to S2309. When the error command is received by the voice and lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, the text "Number of winning balls does not match" is displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. This makes it possible to suppress fraudulent behavior in which balls are illegally allowed to flow into the fourth flow path 65e and pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) while the fourth flow path 65e4 (see FIG. 120(b)) is closed (the period during which the switching valve 65y is closed).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2307 that the number of dispensed balls matches the number of winning balls (S2307: Yes), the process of S2308 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2309. In the process of S2309, the remaining ball timer flag 203p is set to OFF (S2309), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203q is reset (S2310). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203o, the dispensed number counter 203t, and the special chance passing counter 203n are each reset (S2311), and this process ends.

By executing this abnormality processing (see Figure 172), it is possible to detect and notify early on of malfunctions that may cause balls that have entered the specific winning port 65a to be unable to be discharged normally, such as due to ball clogging inside the variable winning device 65.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 173 to Fig. 186, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, referring to FIG. 173, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the execution of the power-off processing of S4117 (see FIG. 174) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 174, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives information on the occurrence of a power outage from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 174), it executes the power-off processing of S4117. Before the execution of such a power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S4117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S4117 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S4003).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S4006. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process proceeds to S4004, and initialization of RAM 223 begins. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process proceeds to S4008.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes) and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power cut process of S4117 is completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No) and the process proceeds to S4008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S4002: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S4117 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct, since the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S4004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S4008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 119). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S4117 is executed, so the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S4117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared (S4009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), interrupt permission is set (S4011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off and S4008 is reached, the process goes from S4004 to S4006 and reaches S4008 because the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or the process was started because only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), S4009, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4010, where the initial value of RAM 223 is set (S4010).

The reason why the clearing process of S4009 is skipped is that when the process proceeds from S4004 to S4006 and then to S4008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S4004, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up process is started, the data in the working area of RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that control of voice lamp control device 113 can continue.

Next, referring to FIG. 174, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the start of the main processing or since the processing of S4101 was executed last time (S4101). If 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S4101: No), the processing of S4102 to S4111 is not performed and the processing proceeds to S4112. The reason for determining whether or not 1 millisecond has passed in the processing of S4101 is that, while S4102 to S4111 are processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S4112 and the variable display setting processing of S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S4112 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control unit 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of S4112 at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable display performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination processing.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, a command output process is executed to send various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4103 to S4113 to the display control device 114 (S4102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S4108 described later (S4103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process is a process for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the notification by the power-on notification process is not performed and the process proceeds to S4105.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then a process for updating the display of the number of reserved balls is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, settings are made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the settings are sent as commands to the display control device 114.

After that, the frame button input monitoring/effect process is executed (S4107). This frame button input monitoring/effect process monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and sets up a corresponding effect when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated. Details of this frame button input monitoring/effect process (S4107) will be described later with reference to FIG. 186.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, then the lamp editing process is executed (S4108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S4109, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (S4110), and then the performance update process is executed (S4111). After executing the process of S4111, the process moves to S4112. In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing/output process of S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81.

After processing of S4111, a command determination process (S4112) is executed to perform processing according to the command received from the main control unit 110, and the process proceeds to S4113. Details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 175.

In the processing of S4113, in order to display a variable display performance on the third pattern display device 81, a variable display setting process is executed, which is a process of generating a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 and setting the command to be sent to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 182.

After the processing of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). Information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 110. If information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of S4114 (S4114: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (S4116), and the power outage processing is executed (S4117). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (S4118), and the processing then loops infinitely. In the power outage processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. The stored information on the occurrence of a power outage is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S4115: No), the process returns to the process of S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if the RAM is determined to be destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a store clerk or the like to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, referring to FIG. 175, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. The command determination process (S4112) will be described in detail below.

When the command determination process (S4112) is executed, first, it is determined whether a status command has been received (S4201), and if it is determined that a status command has been received (S4201: Yes), a status command reception process (S4202) is executed and this process is terminated. This status command reception process (S4202) receives a status command indicating the current game state, sets a mode presentation mode corresponding to the game state, and sets a display command for displaying the corresponding presentation mode (for example, a back image) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when a status command indicating a probability change state is received, a display command corresponding to the super chance mode shown in FIG. 131 is set, and when a status command indicating a time-saving state is received, a display command corresponding to the chance mode shown in FIG. 128 is set. Details of the game state that is actually set and the switching control of the presentation mode in the mode presentation to be executed will be described later. Details of this status command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 176.

If it is determined in the processing of S4201 that a status command has not been received (S4201: No), it is then determined whether a special chart fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4203). If it is determined that a special chart fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4203: Yes), the special chart fluctuation start flag 223d corresponding to the received special chart fluctuation pattern command is set to on (S4204), and the fluctuation pattern command is extracted from the received command (S4205). Then, this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S4203 that a special chart change pattern command has not been received (S4203: No), it is then determined whether a special chart stop type command has been received (S4206). If it is determined that a special chart stop type command has been received (S4206: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e (first special chart stop type flag 223e1, second special chart stop type flag 223e2) corresponding to the received special chart stop type command is set to on (S4207), and the stop type is extracted from the received command (S4208). Then, this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S4206 that the special symbol stop type command has not been received (S4206: No), then it is determined whether a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4209). If it is determined that a reserved ball number command has been received (S4209: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received reserved ball number command, and the corresponding value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223h (S4210). Specifically, when a reserved ball number command for a special symbol is received, the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 included in the reserved ball number command (i.e., the reserved ball number of the special symbol variable display) are extracted, and the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value.

In addition, when a reserved ball count command for a normal pattern is received, the value of the reserved ball count counter 203f for normal patterns in the main control unit 110 contained in the reserved ball count command (i.e., the number of reserved balls for the variable display of normal patterns) is extracted, and the value of the reserved ball count counter 223h for normal patterns provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is updated to match the extracted counter value.

The reserved ball count command is sent from the main control unit 110 when a ball enters the various ball entry ports (first ball entry port 64, second ball entry port 640, through gate 67) (initial entry) and the values of the various reserved ball count counters are incremented, or when various variable start processes are executed and the values of the various reserved ball count counters are decremented. Therefore, at the time of initial entry or each time the variable display is set, the values of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c and the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 223h of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to the values of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d, the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e, and the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203f of the main control unit 110 by the processing of S4210.

Therefore, even if the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 223c in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 becomes misaligned with the values of the various reserved ball counters 203d, 203e, 203d of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., if a reserved ball number command is notified at the time of initial winning or when the variable display is set, that is, when the various reserved ball numbers are changed, the value of the special pattern reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the values of the various reserved ball counters of the main control device 110, the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d, the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e, and the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203f.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S4209 that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S4209: No), it is determined whether a winning command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S4211). If it is determined in the process of S4211 that a winning command has been received (S4211: Yes), the winning command process is executed (S4212) and this process is terminated. This winning command process (S4212) analyzes the pattern type (special pattern, normal pattern) corresponding to the winning information contained in the received winning information command, stores (stores) the analysis result in the corresponding memory area (winning information storage area 223b in RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113), and performs a process to execute a performance (pre-reading performance) based on the received winning information. The details of the winning command process (S4212) will be described later with reference to FIG. 177.

If it is determined in the process of S4211 that a winning command has not been received (S4211: No), it is then determined whether a pattern determination command has been received (S4213). If it is determined that a pattern determination command has been received (S4213: Yes), the stop display of the third pattern is set (S4214), and this process ends. If it is determined that a stop command has not been received (S4213: No), it is then determined whether a normal map-related command has been received (S4215). If it is determined that a normal map-related command has been received (S4215: Yes), normal map-related processing is executed (S4216), and then this process ends. Note that a detailed explanation of executing normal map-related processing (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 124.

If it is determined in the processing of S4215 that a normal game-related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received (S4217). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (S4217: Yes), jackpot-related processing is executed (S4218), and then this processing is terminated. Note that a detailed explanation of the jackpot-related processing (S4218) will be given later with reference to FIG. 180. On the other hand, if it is determined that a jackpot-related command has not been received (S4217: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4219), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 176, the status command receiving process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing this status command receiving process (S4202). This status command receiving process (S4202) is executed within the command determination process (see FIG. 175) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and executes processing to set different display modes displayed on the third pattern display device 81 depending on the set game status. Details of the status command receiving process (S4202) will be described below.

When the status command reception process (S4202) is executed, it is first determined whether the currently set game status will be changed (S4301). Here, it is determined whether the game status set in the slave status setting area 223g differs from the game status indicated by the currently received status command. In the process of S4301, if it is determined that there is no change in the game status (S4301: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that there is a change in the game status (S4301: Yes), it is determined whether the changed game status is normal (S4302).

If it is determined in the process of S4302 that the game state after the change is normal (if the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: Yes), a display command indicating normal mode is set (S4303), and the process proceeds to S4304.

In the process of S4302, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the currently received state command is not a command indicating the normal state) (S4302: No), then it is determined whether the game state after the change is the time-shortened state (S4306), and if it is determined that the game state is the time-shortened state (if the currently received state command is a command indicating the time-shortened state) (S4306: Yes), the value of the time-shortened counter 223n is set to 100 (S4307), a display command indicating the chance mode is set (S4308), and the process proceeds to S4304.

If it is determined in the processing of S4306 that the game state is not in a time-saving state (S4306: No), then it is determined whether or not the V notification flag 223m is on (S4309). If the V notification flag 223m is off (S4309: No), the processing proceeds to S4308 described above. If the V notification flag 223m is on (S4309: Yes), the V notification flag 223m is set to off (S4310), a display command indicating the super chance mode is set (S4311), and the processing proceeds to S4304.

In the process of S4304, the game status set in the current status area of the slave status setting area 223g is set in the past status area (S4304), the game status corresponding to the information indicated by the received status command is set in the current status area of the slave status setting area 223g (S4305), and this process is terminated.

Here, the display control device 114 is notified of the commands set in the processing of S4308 and S4311, and the variable performance display during the normal state is executed. Thus, in this control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set the type (mode, background) of various display modes to be displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 based on the state command output from the main control device 110, and to output a command indicating the type to the display control device 114.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to, for example, eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable performance display for each game state set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In other words, by simply outputting to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variable pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, it is possible to set display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variable pattern based on the type command and common command received on the display control device 114 side. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113.

As described above, when the display control device 114 is configured to set the display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by combining multiple commands received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the display data after setting to the voice lamp control device 113, and a discrimination means is provided to discriminate whether the confirmation information received on the voice lamp control device 113 is appropriate. If the discrimination result is determined to be inappropriate, a simplified display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the display data already set are rewritten to the simplified display data.

By configuring in this way, when the voice lamp control device 113 does not set appropriate display data for various commands received from the main control device 110, it is possible to set simplified display data showing appropriate information and display a variable performance display based on the simplified display data. This makes it possible to prevent a variable performance display with content different from the actual game result (the lottery result of the special pattern) from being executed, which reduces the player's motivation to play. In addition, as the above-mentioned simplified display data, for example, display data that displays a special mode that does not correspond to any game state (for example, a mode with a black background) or display data that executes a variable display of the fourth pattern, which has a smaller amount of data than the display data used for normal variable performance display, can be used.

In this control example, the above-mentioned configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to set a display variation pattern command based on the current game state and the received variation pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 177, the contents of the winning command processing (see S4212) executed in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 175) will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command processing (S4212). This winning command processing (S4212) is processing executed when a winning command (winning information command) is received from the main control device 110 when the right to draw a special symbol is acquired, a regular symbol winning information command is set when the right to draw a regular symbol is acquired, or a V winning command is received when the ball flows down (passes through) a specific gate (high probability switch) during a jackpot game.

When the winning command process (S4212) is executed, first, the information of the received winning command (winning information command) is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (S4401), and it is determined whether the currently received command is a winning information command for a normal symbol (S4402). If it is determined that it is a winning information command for a normal symbol (S4402: Yes), it is determined whether the received command contains winning information (winning information for a normal symbol) (S4403). If it is determined that there is winning information (S4403: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state for a normal symbol (S4404).

If it is determined that the current state is not a high probability state for normal symbols, that is, the normal state (S4404: No), the player has acquired the right to draw a normal symbol lottery that will win a normal symbol during the normal state, and there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set, so a display command is set to suggest the long opening of the electric chute (S4405) and the process proceeds to S4406. When the display command is set in the process of S4405, it is notified to the display control device 114 with the same control content as the various display commands set in the control process of the other sound lamp control devices, and a suggestion effect is executed (for example, an effect that teases whether or not a small display area Dm3 will be formed in the main display area Dm of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81) that suggests that a normal symbol hit game will be played during the normal state and the electric role 640a will be long-opened (opened for 5 seconds).

In this control example, the above-mentioned suggestive effects are executed only when the player acquires the right to draw a normal pattern lottery that will result in a normal winning combination during normal play. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also preferable to execute the above-mentioned suggestive effects when it is determined that the normal winning information command contains winning information indicating a specific losing win. This makes it possible to set whether a normal winning combination will be executed when the suggestive effect is executed, or not, allowing the player to play while predicting the game content that will be executed in the future.

In addition, in this control example, the suggestive effect is executed when the player acquires the right to draw a normal pattern lottery that will win a normal pattern during the normal state. In addition to this configuration, a pre-game state process may be executed to determine whether the game state is normal or not at the time when the game actually plays a normal pattern, that is, the time when the game corresponding to the normal pattern winning information command indicating a normal pattern win is executed (the time when the game plays a normal pattern), based on the pre-determination result of the special pattern lottery being executed or the special pattern lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and if it is determined to be normal, the suggestive effect described above is executed. This makes it possible to more accurately indicate that a chance zone will be set.

Returning to FIG. 177 for further explanation, if it is determined in the process of S4402 that a winning information command for normal maps has not been received (S4402: No), if it is determined in the process of S4403 that there is no winning information (S4403: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4404 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S4404: Yes), the process also moves to the process of S4406.

In the process of S4406, the special prize information command process is executed (S4406), and the process proceeds to S4407. Details of this special prize information command process (S4406) will be described later with reference to FIG. 178.

In the processing of S4407, it is determined whether the command received this time is a V winning command (a command (see S2216) that is set when the ball flows down to the sure win switch (specific gate) during the winning processing (see S1911 in FIG. 171)) (S4407), and if it is a V winning command (S4407: Yes), the V winning flag 223j is set to on (S4408) and processing proceeds to S4409. Also, if it is determined in processing of S4407 that a V winning command has not been received (S4407: No), processing proceeds to S4413.

In the process of S4409, it is determined whether or not the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4409). If the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4409: Yes), the V performance execution flag 223k is set to off (S4410), a display command for notifying a V winning is set (S4411), the V notification flag 223m is set to on (S4412), and the process proceeds to S4413. Also, in the process of S4409, if the V performance execution flag 223k is off (S4409: No), the process proceeds to S4413.

In the processing of S4413, other processing is executed (S4413), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 178, the contents of the special prize information command processing (S4406) executed in the prize command processing (S4212 in FIG. 177) will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special prize information command processing (S4406).

When the special winning information command process (S4406) is executed, first, the current game state is extracted based on the information set in the slave state setting area 223g (S4501), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 75 (S4502). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 75 (S4502: Yes), it is then determined whether the special consecutive notice flag 223o is on (S4503). If it is determined that the special consecutive notice flag 223o is off (S4503: No), the consecutive notice execution selection table 222d (Fig. 147 (a)) is used to select the presence or absence of consecutive notice (S4504), and then it is determined whether consecutive notices are being executed (S4505). If it is determined that consecutive notices are being executed (S4505: Yes), the special consecutive notice flag 223o is set to on (S4506), and the process proceeds to S4507.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S4502 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 75 or less (S4502: No), if it is determined in the process of S4503 that the special consecutive notice flag 223o is on (S4503: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4505 that a consecutive notice is not being executed (S4505: No), the process proceeds to S4507.

In the process of S4507, a display command is set based on the information contained in the received special prize information command (S4507), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 179, the contents of the normal symbol related processing (S4216) executed in the command determination processing (see S4112 in FIG. 175) will be described. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol related processing (S4216). This normal symbol related processing (S4216) is processing that is executed when a normal symbol variation pattern command indicating that a normal symbol lottery has been executed from the main control device 110, a normal symbol win start command indicating that a normal symbol win game has started, or a normal symbol win end command indicating that a normal symbol win game has ended is received.

When the normal map related process (S4216) is executed, first, it is determined whether a normal map variation pattern command has been received (S4601), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4601: Yes), a display normal map variation start command is set (S4602), and then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0, i.e., whether the normal pattern is in a high probability state (S4603). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4603: Yes), this process is terminated as it is, and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4603: No), it is determined whether the normal map variation pattern command received this time is a normal map variation pattern command corresponding to the normal pattern lottery that has won the normal map (S4604), and if it is determined that the normal map has not won (S4604: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a normal winning has been won (S4604: Yes), since this is a normal winning variation that results in a long opening winning, a display command indicating that a long opening is waiting is set (S4605), and this process ends. By setting the display command in the process of S4605, the display mode shown in FIG. 123(b) is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. This allows the player to easily predict that there is a high possibility that a chance zone will be set soon.

In this control example, a process is used to display the display mode shown in FIG. 123(b) (the display mode forming the small display area Dm3) based on whether or not the normal pattern variation is a winning variation. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to display the display mode shown in FIG. 123(b) (the display mode forming the small display area Dm3) for a specific normal pattern miss variation (for example, a part of a normal pattern miss variation in which the same variation time as the normal pattern win variation is set).

The size of the display area of the small display area Dm3 may be varied depending on the content of the variation effect (third pattern variation effect) corresponding to the currently executed special pattern variation. For example, when a variation effect with a high expectation of a jackpot (e.g., a reach effect) is being executed in the third pattern variation effect, the display content may be varied so that the display area of the small display area Dm3 is smaller than when a variation effect with a high expectation of a jackpot (e.g., a reach effect) is not being executed. In this way, by variably controlling the display content by providing a relationship between the variation effect suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation effect suggesting the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery, which are executed independently, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by being provided with too much game information, and to provide an easy-to-understand game.

Returning to FIG. 179, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S4601 that the normal pattern variation command has not been received (S4601: No), then it is determined whether the normal pattern win start command has been received (S466). If it is determined that the normal pattern win start command has been received (S4606: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4607). If it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S4607: No), a display command indicating that a long opening is in progress is set (S4608), and this process is terminated. By setting the display command in the process of S4608, the display mode shown in FIG. 124(a) is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. This allows the player to easily understand that a long opening win is being executed. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4607 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4607: Yes), the process of S4608 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In the process of S4606, if it is determined that a normal winning start command has not been received (S4606: No), it is determined whether a normal winning end command has been received (S4609). If it is determined that a normal winning end command has been received (S4609: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4610). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 0 (S4610: No), it is then determined whether the value of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 223h is 1 or greater (S4611). If it is determined that it is 1 or greater (S4611: Yes), it is determined whether the special effect in progress flag 223i is set on (S4612). If it is determined that it is not set on (S4612: No), a display command indicating entry into the chance zone is set (S4613), the special effect in progress flag 223i is set off (S4614), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the process of steps S4610 to S4612 determines that the determination result is other than the above-mentioned determination results, the process ends.

Next, the contents of the jackpot-related process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. 180. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related process (S4218). The jackpot-related process (S4218) performs processing to cause the third pattern display device 81 to execute a presentation display corresponding to the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won, and when a jackpot is won, processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process (S4218), first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot start command (S4701). If it is determined to be a jackpot start command (S4701: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S4702). The jackpot start command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the jackpot start command for display, it displays an effect suggesting the start of a jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot game is a normal jackpot (game) (S4703), and if it is determined to be a normal jackpot (S4703: Yes), an ending display mode indicating that a chance mode has been entered (time-saving state is set) is set (S4708), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a normal jackpot (S4703: No), that is, if it is determined to be a sure-win jackpot, the V notification execution selection table 222e (FIG. 147(b)) is used to select whether or not to execute a V notification effect (S4704), and then it is determined whether or not there is a V notification effect (S4705). If it is determined that there is a V notification effect (S4705: Yes), the V effect execution flag 223k is set to ON (S4706), an ending display mode indicating that a super chance mode has been entered (sure-win state is set) is set (S4707), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4705 that there is no V notification effect (S4705: No), the processing proceeds to the processing of S4708 described above.

In other words, in this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 141, different lengths of ending periods are set according to the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability jackpot), and the ending display mode (see FIG. 133) corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed this time is set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game starts. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to execute display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period when various controls (variable display control of jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control to display information indicating the number of prize balls acquired or control to display information indicating the number of rounds being played) and prize ball payout control for paying out prize balls according to the number of balls won into the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game) are frequently executed, so the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In this control example, the process for setting the ending display mode is executed at the start of the jackpot game, but it is not limited to this. The ending display mode may be set during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol when it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed, or may be configured to be set using the remaining period of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113, which is executed during a period of the jackpot game period when there is little control processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4701 that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4701: No), it is next determined whether a round number command has been received (S4709). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (S4709: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the round number (S4710), and it is determined whether the current round number is 1 round (V round) (S4711). If it is determined that there is 1 round (V round) (S4711: Yes), it is determined whether the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4712). If it is determined that the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4712: Yes), a display command is set to notify of a V win (S4713), and this processing ends. Furthermore, if the process of S4711 determines that the current round number is not 1 round (V round), i.e., that a round of play other than the first round will begin (S4711: No), or if the process of S4712 determines that the V performance execution flag 223k is off (S4712: No), this process is also terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S4709 that the number of rounds command has not been received (S4709: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (S4714), and if it is determined that it has been received (S4714: Yes), ending processing is executed (S4715) and this processing ends. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4786 that the ending command has not been received (S4714: No), this processing ends as it is.

Next, the ending process (S4715) will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process (S4715). This ending process (S4715) is executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received in the jackpot-related process described above (see S4218 in FIG. 180), and executes processing to finally determine the ending display mode to be executed during the ending period.

When the ending process (S4715) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V winning flag 223j is set to ON (S4801), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4801: Yes), the V winning flag 223j is set to OFF (S4805), and the execution of the ending display corresponding to the ending display mode that has already been set is set (S4804), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of S4801 that the V winning flag 223j is not set to ON (S4801: No), it is determined whether the V performance execution flag 223k is ON (S4802), and if it is determined that the V performance execution flag 223k is OFF (S4802: No), the process proceeds directly to the process of S4804.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4802 that the V performance execution flag 223k is on (S4802: Yes), a display switching command is set to switch the display mode for the latter half (7 seconds) of the ending period (S4803), and the processing proceeds to S4804.

When the display switching command is set in the processing of S4803, the display control device 114 is notified, and processing is executed to switch the display mode for the latter half of the ending period, which was previously set in response to the setting of the high probability state (see FIG. 236(d)), to the display mode corresponding to the setting of the time-saving state (see FIG. 236(c)). In this control example, the display period for the display mode that is switched based on this display switching command is constant (7 seconds), so the display mode can be easily switched.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113) will be explained with reference to FIG. 182. FIG. 1827 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variable display setting process (S4113), first, it is determined whether the special chart 1 variable start flag 223d1 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4901). Then, if it is determined that the special chart 1 variable start flag 223d1 is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4901: No), since the variable pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S4905. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 1 variable start flag 223d1 is on (S4901: Yes), the special chart 1 variable start flag 223d1 is set to off (S4902), and then the special chart 1 performance mode setting process is executed to generate a display variable pattern command based on the acquired variable pattern type for notifying the display control device 114 (S4903), and the data corresponding to the first special pattern in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4904), and the process proceeds to S4905. Details of the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S4903) will be described later with reference to FIG. 183.

In the process of S4905, it is determined whether the special pattern 2 change start flag 223d2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4905). If it is determined that the special pattern 2 change start flag 223d2 is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4905: No), the change pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S4909. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 change start flag 223d2 is on (S4905: Yes), the special pattern 2 change start flag 223d2 is set to off (S4906), and then the special pattern 2 performance mode setting process is executed (S4907), the data corresponding to the second special pattern among the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S4908), and the process proceeds to S4909. Details of the special pattern 2 performance mode setting process (S4907) will be described later with reference to FIG. 184.

In the process of S4909, it is determined whether the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4909). Then, if it is determined that the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4909: No), since the change pattern command has not been received from the main control unit 110, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 is on (S4909: Yes), the special chart 1 stop type selection flag 223e1 or the special chart 2 stop type selection flag 223e2 that is set to on is set to off (S4910), and then the display special chart 1 or special chart 2 stop type command is set based on the stop type extracted from the command (S4911), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (S4903) will be explained with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (S4903). This special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process (S4903) is executed when setting the variable presentation of the first special symbol in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the set game state.

When the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S4903) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5001). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5001: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5002), a display command is set to show the value of the time-saving counter 223n after the decrement (S5003), and the process proceeds to S5004. If it is determined in the process of S5001 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 0 (S5001: No), the processes of S5002 and S5003 are skipped and the process proceeds to S5004.

In the process of S5004, the presentation mode stored in the presentation mode storage area 223p is read (S5004), and then it is determined whether or not it is the super chance mode (S5005). If it is determined that it is the super chance mode (S5005: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S5006), and it is determined whether the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds (S5007). If it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S5007: Yes), the presentation mode (presentation content) is determined based on the probability variation selection table 222c (see FIG. 29) (S5008), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S5009), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic variation time is not 30 seconds (S5007: No), the process proceeds to S5011.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5005 that the mode is not the super chance mode (S5005: No), then it is determined whether or not the mode is the chance mode (S5010). If it is determined that the mode is not the chance mode (S5010: No), the performance mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5011), and the process proceeds to the processing of S5009 described above. If it is determined in the processing of S5010 that the mode is the chance mode (S5010: Yes), the chance mode performance setting process is executed (S5012), and the process proceeds to the processing of S5009. Details of the chance mode performance setting process (S5012) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

Next, the contents of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907) will be explained with reference to FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907). This special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907) is executed when setting the variable presentation of the second special symbol in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the set game state.

When the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907) is executed, first it is determined whether the current game state is normal (S5101), and if it is determined to be normal (S5101: Yes), a display command indicating entry into the chance zone is set (S5102), then the special presentation in progress flag 223i is set to on (S5103), the presentation mode is determined based on the normal special chart 2 presentation selection table 222b (see FIG. 145) (S5104), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S5105), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5101 that the state is not normal (S5101: No), it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5106), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5106: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S5107), a display command is set to show the value of the time-saving counter 223n after the decrement (S5108), and the process proceeds to S5109. If it is determined in the process of S5106 that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 0 (S5106: No), the processes of S5107 and S5108 are skipped and the process proceeds to S5109.

In the process of S5109, the presentation mode stored in the presentation mode storage area 223p is read (S5109), and then it is determined whether or not it is the super chance mode (S5110). If it is determined that it is the super chance mode (S5110: Yes), the variation time (basic time) included in the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is extracted (S5111), and it is determined whether or not the basic variation time (basic time) is 30 seconds (S5112). If it is determined that the basic variation time is 30 seconds (S5112: Yes), the presentation mode (presentation content) is determined based on the probability variation selection table 222c (see FIG. 146) (S5113), the above-mentioned process of S5105 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the basic variation time is not 30 seconds (S5112: No), the process proceeds to S5115.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5110 that the mode is not the super chance mode (S5110: No), the chance mode performance setting processing is executed (S5114 (S5012)), and the process proceeds to S5115. Details of the chance mode performance setting processing (S5114 (S5012)) will be described later with reference to FIG. 185.

In the process of S5115, the presentation mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5115), the process of S5105 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 185, the chance mode performance setting process (S5012 (S5114)) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the chance mode performance setting process (S5012 (S5114)) executed in the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (see S4903 in FIG. 183) and the special chart 2 performance mode setting process (see S4907 in FIG. 184).

In the chance mode performance setting process (S5012 (S5114)), first, the value of the time-saving counter 223n is read (S5201), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n read is 99 or not (S5202). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 99 (S5202: Yes), a high-speed period is set in the performance mode memory area 223p (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5202, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is not 99 (S5202: No), it is then determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n read is 79 or not (S5204). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 79 (S5204: Yes), a normal first period is set in the performance mode memory area 223p (S5205), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5204, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is not 79 (S5204: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223n that was read is 49 (S5206). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is 49 (S5206: Yes), the normal second period is set in the performance mode memory area 223p (S5207), and the process proceeds to S5208. In the process of S5206, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223n is not 49 (S5206: No), the process of S5207 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5208.

In the process of S5208, it is determined whether the continuous notice in progress flag 223q is on (S5208). If it is determined that the continuous notice in progress flag 223q is on (S5208: Yes), the continuous performance mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variable pattern command is determined (S5209), and the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5208, if it is determined that the continuous notice in progress flag 223q is off (S5208: No), it is determined whether the special continuous notice flag 223o is on (S5210). If it is determined that the special continuous notice flag 223o is on (S5210: Yes), a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set to the special effective time timer (S5211), the special continuous notice flag 223o is set to off (S5212), and the process proceeds to S5213. Even if it is determined in the processing of S5210 that the special consecutive notice flag 223o is off (S5210: No), the processing proceeds to S5213.

In the process of S5213, the presentation mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S5213), and the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5214, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S5214), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 186, the frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S4107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S4107). This frame button input monitoring and presentation process (S4107) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display command based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to execute a presentation (operation presentation) according to the player's operation to enhance the presentation effect in the third pattern display device 81.

In this control example, the frame button 22 can be operated by a player in a plurality of operation methods. Specifically, the frame button 22 can be distinguished between a "normal press" in which the frame button 22 is pressed for a short time (less than 2 seconds) and a "long press" in which the frame button 22 is pressed for a long time (more than 2 seconds). Different operation effects can be executed according to the distinguished operation content. This allows the player to operate the frame button 22 in a variety of operation methods to execute various operation effects, so that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early. In this control example, two types of operation methods are used as distinguishable operation methods, but this is not limited to this, and one type of operation method or three or more types may be provided. In this control example, the operation means that the player can operate is one type of the frame button 22, but this is not limited to this, and multiple operation means that the player can operate may be provided. The distinguishable operation methods may be determined not only by operations on individual operation means, but also by a combination of operation contents executed on multiple operation means. In addition, when multiple operating means are provided (for example, a first operating means and a second operating means), the system may be configured to determine that the same operation has been performed (the same operation method) when a first operation is performed on the first operating means and when a second operation is performed on the second operating means. By configuring in this way, for example, when the position of the first operating means and the position of the second operating means are separated, the player can select the operating means that is easy to operate and enjoy operating the game.

In the frame button input monitoring and performance process (S4107 in FIG. 186), first, it is determined whether the SW effective time is greater than 0, i.e., whether the SW effective time is set (whether the value of the SW effective time counter 223r is greater than 0) (S5301). Note that this SW effective time is set corresponding to each variation pattern when a variation pattern performance using the frame button 22 is selected. If it is determined that the SW effective time is set (S5301: Yes), a value corresponding to the elapsed time is subtracted from the value of the SW effective time counter 223r (S5302), and the process proceeds to S5303. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the value of the SW effective time counter 223r is 0 (S5301: No), the process of S5302 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5303.

In the process of S5303, it is determined whether the value of the special effective time timer is greater than 0 (S5303). If it is determined that the value of the special effective time timer is greater than 0 (S5303: Yes), the value of the special effective time timer is subtracted (S5304) and the process proceeds to S5305. If it is determined that the value of the special effective time timer is 0 (S5303: No), the process of S5304 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5305.

In the process of S5305, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 223t is greater than 0 (S5305). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 223t is 0 (S5305: No), it is then determined whether it is within the valid time (S5306). If it is determined that it is within the valid time (S5306: Yes), it is then determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S5307: Yes), a value corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the value of the operation counter 223t (S5308), and the process proceeds to S5309. If it is determined that it is not within the valid time in the process of S5306 (S5306: No) or if it is determined that the frame button 22 has not been pressed in the process of S5307 (S5307: No), the process of S5308 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5305 that the value of the operating counter 223t is 1 or more (S5305: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310). If it is determined that the frame button 22 is being pressed (S5310: Yes), the value of the operating counter 223t is decremented (S5312), and it is determined whether or not the decremented value of the operating counter 223t is 0 (S5313). If it is determined that the decremented value of the operating counter 223t is 0 (S5313: Yes), the processing proceeds to S5314. If it is determined that the decremented value of the operating counter 223t is not 0 (S5313: No), the processing proceeds to S5309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5310 that the frame button 22 is not being pressed (S5310: No), the value of the operation counter 223t is cleared (S5311), and the processing proceeds to S5314.

In the process of S5314, it is determined whether or not the current state is chance mode (S5314). If it is determined that the current state is chance mode (S5314: Yes), the effect to be executed is selected using the button operation effect selection table 222f (see FIG. 148) (S5315), and the process proceeds to S5309.

If it is determined in the process of S5314 that the current mode is not the chance mode (S5314: No), a button effect corresponding to the current operation method and the effect being executed is set (S5316), and the process proceeds to S5309. In the process of S5309, other button processing (such as changing the background) is executed.

Although omitted in the frame button input monitoring/performance process (S4107) described above with reference to FIG. 186, in this control example, the SW effective time and special effective time are configured so that the remaining period becomes 0 at the time when operation of the frame button 22 is accepted. In other words, the number of times that the operation performance is executed during the period in which each effective time is set is configured to be one. This makes it possible to prevent the operation performance from being executed excessively.

The processing of the SW effective time and the remaining special effective time is not limited to this, and for example, if a valid time of 10 seconds is set, and operation of the frame button 22 is accepted within a predetermined period (for example, within 1 second) after the valid time is set, a new valid time may be set during the special pattern change period (S5310: No, S5313: Yes in FIG. 186). By configuring in this way, the number of operation effects executed during one special pattern change period can be varied depending on the timing at which the player operates the frame button 22.

<Regarding control process of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Fig. 187 to Fig. 201. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to FIG. 187, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute the initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following flow. When the power supply unit 115 supplies power to the display control unit 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231, using its hardware configuration, sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. The MPU 231 then fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

If all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 will consume a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This increases the time it takes to start up the MPU 231, resulting in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, are stored in NOR ROM 234d. Since NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, when address "0000H" is specified from MPU 231 via bus line 240 after system reset is released, character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in first program storage area 234d1 of NOR ROM 234d in buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to MPU 231. Therefore, since MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H" in a short time after specifying address "0000H", main processing can be started in MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Now, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 188. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S6001) executed during the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

However, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will deteriorate even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, in this boot process, a process is executed in which the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the operation of the hardware of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (S6101). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program memory area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S6102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND type flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S6102, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in accordance with the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a (S6103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 187) to be executed after the end of this boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 187) (S6105), thereby completing the execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, and the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and makes it easy to execute diversified and complex performances using the auxiliary performance unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 associated with this shortening of the time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 188, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 are configured to include all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 may be part of the boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. The boot program transferred here may transfer a predetermined amount of control programs including all remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of S6101 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the process of transferring a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated multiple times, including the processes of S6101 and S6102, and then the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In addition, in this control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all of the boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without executing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and therefore reduces the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. This allows the MPU 231 to start controlling the auxiliary performance unit, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 187. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and for the I/O devices, etc. Also, processes such as clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 are performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, during an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235.

When the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction is complete, image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231 indicating the end of transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended. Note that when image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction, it may write transfer end information indicating the end of transfer to a register or a partial area of built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. MPU 231 may then read information from this register or partial area of built-in memory at any time and detect the writing of transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6003, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored, the data size of the image data, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is then retained so that it is not overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a resident image transfer setting process is executed in which the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process described below (see FIG. 199(a)) (see S7502 in FIG. 199(a)).

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during that time, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 189(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6309 in FIG. 189(b)) are executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the display control device 114 is displaying the power-on main image on the third pattern display device 81, it can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so they can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operation checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the efficiency of operation checks can be prevented from deteriorating due to the use of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234.

In addition, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 transfers the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power is turned on. Therefore, if the player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a ball enters the special ball entrance 64 (initial winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given by the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, i.e., if a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image can be displayed immediately during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, the power-on main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the transfer takes time, so the power-on main image continues to be displayed for a long time after power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, a simple variable performance can be performed using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, so that the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the processing of S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by the processing of S6006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to FIG. 189(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 189(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 189(b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 189(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is identified, a drawing list of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing process and display process of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, we will first explain the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing, and then explain the details of each process with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 189(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S6301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (S6301: No), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so in order to display a normal performance image on the third pattern display device 81 instead of the power-on image, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. If a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable performance, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that state is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 190 to 195.

In the display setting process (S6303), the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically identified based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) or the like. In addition, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 196 to 198.

After the display setting process (S6303) is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which was specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simplified display setting process (S6309), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and even when a continuous preview command or a back image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the forwarding setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 199 and 200.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, a drawing list as shown in FIG. 155 is generated from the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305), and this drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process in accordance with the drawing list (S6306). Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 201.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (S6307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S6307 is a stop pattern counter (not shown) for determining the stop pattern. The value of this stop pattern counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (jackpot A, jackpot B, front and rear miss reach, reach other than front and rear miss, complete miss) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S6301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed to cause the power-on image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the processing proceeds to S6304.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figures 190 to 195. First, Figure 190 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

As shown in FIG. 190, in this command determination process, first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag is set to ON (S6402) to notify the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed in the ON state, and then the type of each command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the variation pattern command processing (S6405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 191(a). FIG. 191(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation presentation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, the main control unit 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, so two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are never received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display fluctuation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S6501, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a change presentation having a shorter change time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110, the next display change pattern command will be received from the main control device 110 while a change presentation according to the set change display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a different change display will suddenly begin, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d as in this control example, even if the main control unit 110 has actually instructed a change presentation with a longer change time than the set display data table, as described below, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed after the change presentation according to the display data table buffer 233d has ended and until the next display pattern command is received from the main control unit 110, so that the player can continue to watch the change of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S6505), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When this variable pattern command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501, and specifies the contents of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the processing of S6502 extracts the transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process, the timing counter 233h, in which the time data is set by the process of S6503, is used to time the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table has ended, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control unit 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 190. If it is determined in the processing of S6404 that there is no variation pattern command for display (S6404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a stop type command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6406), and if there is a stop type command for display (S6406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S6407), and processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 191(b). FIG. 191(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command process (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (one of big win A-G, small win A-C, reach miss, or complete miss) is determined (S6601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) is executed, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set on (S6603), and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is described as type information for identifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In the above-mentioned task processing (S6304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of S6602 is identified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by S6603, and the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to this identified third pattern is stored is identified. The image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that the main control device 110 always judges the start of fluctuations at least a few seconds apart, so it will never receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display stop type commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display stop type command. In the process of S6601, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be a complete miss, and the stop type table is determined. As a result, the stop pattern corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" were set, the third pattern display device 81 would display a stopping pattern corresponding to a "special pattern jackpot" even if the actual result was a "miss for the special pattern," which could lead the player to mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine 10 had a "special pattern jackpot," thereby reducing the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, by setting a stopping pattern corresponding to a complete miss as in this control example, if the actual result was a "special pattern jackpot," the pachinko machine 10 would be a "special pattern jackpot" even if the third pattern display device 81 displayed a stopping pattern that was a complete miss, which would delight the player.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S6406 that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6408). If there is an opening command for display (S6408: Yes), the opening command processing is executed (S6409) and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 192(a). FIG. 192(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command processing executes processing corresponding to the opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Then, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the timing counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6705), the opening command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S6408, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S6408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a round number command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and if there is a round number command for display (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 192(b). FIG. 192(b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing executes processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6802).

Then, based on the number of rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6801, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6805), the number of rounds command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 190 for further explanation, if it is determined in the processing of S6410 that there is no round number command for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and if there is an ending command for display (S6412: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S6413), and processing returns to S6401.

Now, with reference to FIG. 193, the details of the ending command processing (S6413) will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing executes processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending performance indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6901). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6905), ending command processing is terminated, and processing returns to command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S6412, if it is determined that there is no ending command for display (S6412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a fluctuation stop command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and if there is a fluctuation stop command for display (S6414: Yes), fluctuation stop command processing is executed (S6415), and the processing returns to S6401.

Now, referring to FIG. 194(a), the details of the fluctuation stop command processing (S6415) will be described. FIG. 194(a) is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop command processing. This fluctuation stop command processing executes processing corresponding to the display fluctuation stop command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This display fluctuation stop command indicates a display stop command (normal stop command) output from the voice lamp control device 113 at the end timing of the display fluctuation pattern command set in the fluctuation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4112 in FIG. 182), i.e., at the end timing of the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) set in the process of setting the fluctuation pattern of each special pattern in the main control device 110 (the timing when the main control device 110 sets the stop command).

In the fluctuation stop command processing, first, the fluctuation stop data table indicated by the display fluctuation stop command is determined, and the determined fluctuation stop data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6932).

Next, based on the fluctuation stop data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6931, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6934). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6935), the fluctuation stop command processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S6414, if it is determined that there is no fluctuation stop command (S6414: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display notification command among the unprocessed commands (S6416). If there is a display notification command (S6416: Yes), notification command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, the notification command processing (S6417) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 194(b). FIG. 194(b) is a flowchart showing the notification command processing. This notification command processing executes processing corresponding to the notification command (for display) received from the voice lamp control device 113.

This notification command is a process that is executed when the display control device 114 receives a display notification command output to the display control device 114 from among the various notification commands that are set when the voice lamp control device 113 receives commands to indicate various abnormal conditions set by the main control device 110.

In notification command processing, first, a display (notification) data table corresponding to the notification mode indicated by the notification command is determined, and the determined display (notification) data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S6952).

Next, based on the display (notification) data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6951, time data representing the performance time is set in the timing counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6954). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to off (S6955), the notification command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

In this control example, the display control device 114 is configured to determine only the display command indicating that the notification target is the third pattern display device 81 (display device) among the various notification commands set by the voice lamp control device 113, but without being limited to this, it may also be configured to receive related commands other than display commands, such as light emission commands, voice output commands, and role-driving commands, and output the related commands to the corresponding control device with the addition of information indicating the data content (display mode) set by the processing of the display control device 114.

Returning to FIG. 190, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S6416, if it is determined that there is no display notification command (S6416: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418). If there is a rear image change command (S6418: Yes), rear image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the processing returns to S6401.

Here, the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 195(a). FIG. 195(a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing executes processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag 233w, which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the rear image change resulting from receiving a rear image change command in the on state, is set to on (S7001). Then, of the bits of the rear image discrimination flag 233x provided for each rear image type (back A, B), the bit corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to on, and the bits corresponding to the other rear image types are set to off (S7002), after which the rear image change command process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag 233w set by the process of S7001 is on, the changed rear image type is identified from the rear image discrimination flag 233x set by the process of S7002.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified in the display data table that either back surface A or B is to be displayed based on the back surface type of the back surface image specified in the display data table, the type of back surface image to be displayed at that time is identified from the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set by S7002, and further, the range of the back surface image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM in which image data corresponding to that range of the back surface image is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are identified.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This change in the rear image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 190. If it is determined in the processing of S6418 that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and if there is an error command (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the processing returns to S6401.

Now, with reference to FIG. 195(b), the error command processing (S6421) will be described in detail. FIG. 195(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag is set to ON, which indicates that an error has occurred when in the ON state (S7101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S7102), the error command processing is terminated, and the process returns to command judgment processing.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S7102, and a process is executed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S7102 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing players and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 190. If it is determined in the processing of S6416 that there is no error command (S6420: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to the processing of S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after the processing of each command has been executed, it is again determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), the processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S6308), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)), is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, i.e., the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 191(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 191(b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, while other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to those commands.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 191(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S6501, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S6502, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to Figs. 196 to 198. Fig. 196 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

As shown in FIG. 196, in this display setting process, first it is determined whether the new command flag is on or not (S7201). If the new command flag is not on, i.e., it is off (S7201: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the processes of S7202 to S7204 are skipped and the process moves to S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by the processes of S7203 to S7204.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Now, with reference to FIG. 197, the warning image setting process will be described in detail. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is for expanding image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying warning images of errors corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to on on the third pattern display device 81 is expanded (S7301).

In the task processing (S6304), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is identified based on this expanded warning image data, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after processing S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S7302) and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 196. After the warning image setting process (S7204), or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., is off (S7203: No), then the process proceeds to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address from which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, in principle, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Also, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is written at address "0000H" and the actual data of each table is specified from address "0001H" onwards. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the actual data can be read from each data table in order starting from address "0001H".

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S7401, it is then determined whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S7402). As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S7403), and if it is a demo display data table (S7403: Yes), time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timing counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S7405), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third pattern display device 81 can be made to repeatedly display demo performances.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S7406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to FIG. 196, the explanation will continue. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In the task process (S6304), based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S7206 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the value of the timing counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 233h after decrement is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the timing counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), this means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on (S7209).

As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S7209: No), the confirmation display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the confirmation display, so first, the confirmation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7210), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the confirmation display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after the confirmation display flag, which indicates that the confirmation display is being performed in the on state, is set on (S7214), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S7215), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In this way, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the final display performance of the stopped patterns in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting a separate program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so a wide variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the processing of S7215 is used to identify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is recorded until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change based on the data table. In the task processing (S6304), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is identified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by S7215 until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S7216). Then, if the demo display flag is off (S7216: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less as the confirmation display performance ends, and therefore, after a certain time has elapsed since the end of the confirmation display performance, processing is performed to cause the third pattern display device 81 to display a demo performance.

First, the demo display data table is obtained and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and the demo display flag, which indicates that a demo performance is being performed when it is on, is set to on (S7221), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if a display variable pattern command indicating the start of the next variable performance is not received after the final display performance has ended, the drawing content can be set so that a demo performance is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In the processing of S7216, if the demo display flag is on (S7216: Yes), this means that a demo performance is performed after the final display performance has ended, and that the demo performance has ended, so the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, various settings are made so that the demo performance will start again, as described above, by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S6309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189 (b)). However, in the simple display setting processing, after the performance time of the power-on variable image has ended, a process is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that one of the images of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time.

Next, with reference to Figs. 199 and 200, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, Fig. 199(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. This sets a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 199(b).

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S7501 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, i.e., it is off (S7501: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 200.

Next, referring to FIG. 199(b), we will explain the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 199(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601). If a transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In this process of S7602, after an instruction to transfer image data has been sent to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has been completed. Then, if it is determined by the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S7602: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, and therefore the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S7602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S7603. Also, if the result of processing in S7601 indicates that a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the processing of S7603, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information on the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the transfer destination (an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

If all resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S7603 (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605) and this processing is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 189(b)), instead of the simple command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 189(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 189(b)), the command determination processing (see FIG. 190 to FIG. 195) and the display setting processing (see FIG. 196 to FIG. 198) are executed, so that the drawing of the normal image is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 200) (see S7501: No in FIG. 199(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and power-on variable image that have already been transferred during the main processing. The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process remains resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as the back image, the third pattern, the character pattern, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time to displaying some image on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 200, we will explain the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S7703), and further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that image data to be transferred is present in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

In addition, in the processing of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but is Null data (S7702: No), the processing of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S7705. In the processing of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S7705), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S7706).

In the processing of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing has ended. Then, if it is determined by the processing of S7706 that the transfer processing has not ended (S7706: No), image transfer processing is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer processing has ended (S7706: Yes), the processing proceeds to S7707. Also, if the result of the processing of S7705 shows that an image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S7705: No), the processing proceeds to S7707.

In the processing of S7707, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on or not (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), image data that should be transferred is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S7708), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), it is then determined whether the background image change flag 233w is on or not (S7709). Then, if the background image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), image data that should be transferred is not present, so the normal image transfer setting processing ends.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), this means that the rear image has been changed, so the rear image change flag 233w is set to off (S7710), and then, of the rear image discrimination flags 233x provided for each rear image type, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x that is on is identified, and this image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag 233x that is on is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained (S7712), and the process proceeds to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). This determination in the process of S7713 is made by referencing the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the result of the processing of S7713 is that the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being transferred unnecessarily from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing burden on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S7713 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of the image to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is complete, it transmits a transfer end signal to the MPU 231.

After processing of S7714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on," and by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, a process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236. Also, if the rear image is changed based on receipt of a rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, image data used for that rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this control example, in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 for the image data to be transferred according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

In this case, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

Next, referring to FIG. 201, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, a drawing list (FIG. 155) is generated (S7801) from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, filter specification information), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of that sprite is stored are identified for each sprite, and the parameters required for that sprite determined in the task process are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites that should be placed furthest behind the sprites that should be placed in the foreground in one frame of image, and a drawing list is generated by describing, in the rearranged sprite order, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprites are stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprites as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. Also, if a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address (start address of the storage source) and the end address (end address of the storage source) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, so the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are sent to the image controller (S7802). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn, and if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands them by overwriting them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and the image data stored from the source start address to the source end address are read out of character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a, and then, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a is transferred sequentially to the area of normal video RAM 236 indicated by the destination start address. The image data stored in this normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by MPU 231, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image expanded in the frame buffer. Also, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being expanded, an image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the processing of S7802, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S7803). Then, the drawing process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 189(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image are completed. As a result, when the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of image at a certain timing, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame of image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, each time every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

As explained above, in this first control example, the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are configured not to be executed in overlap (parallel), and the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol. And, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to be executed in which the lottery for the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol. Furthermore, the ease of executing the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to vary depending on the set game state. Specifically, in order to make it easier to obtain the lottery right for the second special symbol when a high probability state of the normal symbol is set (time-saving state, probability-changing state) than when a low probability state of the normal symbol is set (normal state), the lottery right for the second special symbol is configured to be obtained when a ball enters the ball entrance (second ball entrance 640) accompanied by an electric device 640a that is opened in a winning game (normal winning game) executed when a normal symbol is hit. In other words, when playing in the normal state, which is the initial game state, the lottery for the first special symbol is configured to be executed more easily than the lottery for the second special symbol, and the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set upon winning a jackpot in the lottery for the first special symbol, and when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the lottery for the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the lottery for the first special symbol, is executed. By configuring it in this way, the degree of advantage given to the player can be made to differ greatly depending on the game state that is set, so that the player can be motivated to play in the hope that a game state that is highly advantageous to the player will be set.

In addition, if a normal symbol lottery, which is executed when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, is won, a normal symbol winning game in which the electric device 640 is opened for 5 seconds can be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a period during which it is easier to temporarily execute the second special symbol lottery even in the normal state, which is a game state that is unfavorable to the player, so that a player playing in the normal state can execute a game aiming to win the special symbol lottery jackpot and a game aiming to win the normal symbol lottery, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game early on.

Furthermore, in this control example, the presentation mode of the special symbol 2 variable performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is configured to be variable based on the number of lottery rights for the stored second special symbol, that is, the number of special symbol 2 reserved. Specifically, as the presentation mode of the special symbol 2 variable performance executed when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot, a pseudo-miss variable performance indicating that the lottery result is a miss is executed in the first half of the variable performance, and a pseudo-win variable performance indicating that the lottery result is a jackpot is executed by restarting the third symbol stopped (provisionally stopped) in the pseudo-miss variable performance in the second half of the variable performance, and the number of times that the third symbol temporarily stops (provisionally stops) in the pseudo-win variable performance is configured to be variable in response to the number of special symbol 2 reserved. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a variable performance in which the third symbol is pseudo-stopped multiple times until the third symbol is stopped (confirmed) in a combination indicating that the result of the second special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In other words, it is possible to make the player believe that they have won the jackpot after multiple second special pattern draws.

As a result, even if a jackpot is won with the special symbol 2 reserve used in the first second special symbol lottery among multiple special symbol 2 reserves acquired during normal symbol play, the player can be made to believe that the jackpot was won because multiple special symbol 2 reserves were acquired during normal symbol play, which makes it possible for the player to play with more enthusiasm to acquire the special symbol 2 reserve during normal symbol play.

In addition, when the number of reserved special symbols 2 is 0 when the jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the above-mentioned pseudo winning variation performance is configured to execute a variation performance that imitates the variation performance displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the first special symbol lottery is executed (the performance mode of the special symbol 1 variation performance executed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in response to the first special symbol lottery). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special symbol 2 variation performance from being repeated in a pseudo manner when the reserved special symbol 2 has not been acquired, making it difficult for the player to recognize that a pseudo variation performance is being executed. In addition, after the pseudo variation performance that imitates the special symbol 1 variation performance is executed, the third symbol is stopped (confirmed) in a combination that indicates that the jackpot has been won in the second special symbol lottery, so it is possible to execute a variation performance that is unexpected for the player.

In this control example, when a special jackpot game is played, a presentation mode indicating that a special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot game ends is set in advance (at the start of the jackpot game) as the presentation mode of the notification effect, and just before the notification effect is played (for example, at the start of the jackpot ending period), a determination is made as to whether or not to switch the presentation mode of the notification effect based on the result of the ball flowing down to a specific gate, and if the ball is flowing down the specific gate, the notification effect of the presentation mode set in advance is played, and only when the ball is not flowing down the specific gate, the presentation mode of the notification effect is switched.

Furthermore, in this control example, the length of the jackpot ending period is made different for a special jackpot and a normal jackpot, and a special jackpot that is more advantageous to the player is set to have a longer ending period than a normal jackpot. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that a special jackpot state will be set after the jackpot play ends before the special jackpot state is actually set. On the other hand, if a special jackpot state is not set after the jackpot play ends, informing the player of this for a long period of time would only cause discomfort to the player, so the ending period is made shorter.

In this way, when the length of the jackpot ending period is different between a special jackpot and a normal jackpot, if the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game, simply executing a process to switch the presentation mode of the jackpot ending period to the presentation mode executed during the ending period of a normal jackpot game causes a problem that an unnatural notification presentation is executed during the ending period because the length of the ending period is different. Also, if a special presentation mode that is set only when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game is prepared in advance, image data (presentation data) for that presentation mode must be stored in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, which increases the storage capacity.

In contrast, in this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to the same length regardless of the type of jackpot, and if the ball cannot be made to flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game, only the presentation mode corresponding to the second half of the jackpot ending period is switched to the presentation mode set for the second half of the ending period of a normal jackpot game. This makes it possible to execute a notification presentation that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable, without providing a dedicated presentation mode that is used only when the ball cannot be made to flow down to a specific gate during a special jackpot game.

In this control example, the jackpot ending period is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the length of the second half period is set to the same length regardless of the type of jackpot, so that the presentation mode of the notification presentation that is executed when the ball cannot flow down to a specific gate during a guaranteed jackpot game is switched and set. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is possible to configure it so that a notification presentation that is executed for a period longer than the actual jackpot ending period can be executed by executing a notification presentation from the final round period of the jackpot game, or it is possible to configure it so that a round presentation that is executed during the final round period of the jackpot game is continuously executed for a predetermined period after the jackpot ending period is set, and then a notification presentation is executed to execute a notification presentation for a period shorter than the actual jackpot ending period.

This V winning device 2650 is configured in the same manner as the V winning device 2650 of the eighth control example described above (see Figures 194 to 196), and therefore the same reference numerals are used and detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, the configuration of the right area of the variable display unit 80 and the rate at which balls that flow down the right area enter the through gate 67, the general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, and the V winning device 2650 are the same as those of the left area described above, and therefore detailed description thereof is omitted. As described above, in this control example, regardless of the set game state, and therefore regardless of whether a jackpot game is being played or not, the same privilege is awarded whether the player plays a right-handed game or a left-handed game. Therefore, the player can play in any game method that suits his mood.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 230, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured symmetrically, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is sufficient to configure the game board 13 so that the amount of bonuses that a player can obtain does not differ significantly between left-handed play and right-handed play. For example, the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the left side area can be made smaller than the number of general ball entrance ports 63 provided in the right side area, and the proportion of balls entering the first ball entrance port 64 can be made higher in left-handed play than in right-handed play, making it more difficult to obtain prize balls in left-handed play than in right-handed play, but making it easier to execute the first special pattern lottery, and making it easier to obtain prize balls in right-handed play than in left-handed play, but making it more difficult to execute the first special pattern lottery. When configured in this way, during the normal state, i.e., while playing a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the player can play in any manner of his choice, and in a game in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (play in a time-saving state or a special probability state), right-handed play can be more advantageous to the player than left-handed play.

In each of the above control examples, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control unit 110 (i.e., when it increases or decreases, respectively), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control unit 110. In addition, the voice lamp control unit 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110. This reduces the number of times the main control unit 110 transmits reserved number commands to the voice lamp control unit 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control unit 113 receives reserved number commands, respectively, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control unit 110 and the voice lamp control unit 113.

In each of the above control examples, the first ball entrance 64 is set to a maximum of four entries, and the through gate 67 is set to a maximum of one passage, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this and may be set to three or less, or five or more (e.g., eight). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable manner based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37 to notify the number of reserved balls.

As shown in the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be a display in which the pattern is moved vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern. In addition, the display mode of the dynamic display of the third pattern to indicate the lottery result of the special pattern and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative pattern to indicate the lottery result of the normal pattern may be configured to be set using common image data held by the display control device 114, for example, so that the player cannot easily distinguish between them.

In each of the above control examples, the third pattern display for showing the player the lottery results for each pattern is performed by one display means (third pattern display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main pattern that is highlighted to the player among the third patterns, and for displaying the secondary patterns. In addition, the display means may be configured as a configuration other than a liquid crystal display.

In each of the above control examples, a left-hand hit game that targets the left area of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a game state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. However, the target area of the game board 13 may be different depending on the game state. For example, a left-hand hit game that targets the left area of the game board 13 may be executed in the normal state, and a right-hand hit game that targets the right area of the game board 13 may be executed in the time-saving state. Also, a left-hand hit game may be executed during the time-saving state, and a right-hand hit game may be executed during the normal state.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned control examples, a left-hand hit game that targets the left area of the game board 13 is executed regardless of which game state is set or whether a jackpot game is set, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to execute a right-hand hit game when a time-saving state is set or during a jackpot game, and execute a left-hand hit game only during a normal state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to easily understand whether or not the state is favorable to the player depending on the game method to be executed (right-hand hit game, left-hand hit game).

In each of the above-mentioned control examples, a frame button 22 is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player, and when the player presses it, it is determined that the operating means has been operated; however, other configurations may also be used, such as an operating means configured in the shape of a lever that can determine when the player tilts it left and right or forward and backward, a touch sensor type operating means that can determine when the player has operated it by contacting or approaching it, or a wireless type operating means that can determine when it has been operated by emitting a specified radio wave. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used as a performance operation means for varying the performance mode of the performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation, but it is sufficient if the performance mode of various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 can be varied based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 may be electrically connected to the display control device 114, or a control device may be provided that can input an output signal from the operation means (frame button 22) and generate a performance setting signal that can be output to the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. By configuring in this way, even if multiple performance operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the multiple performance operation means can be centrally managed, so that the performance mode can be smoothly set in response to the player's operation of the performance operation means.

Furthermore, in the first control example described above, when a favorable game state (high probability state, time-saving state) is set after the end of a jackpot game, a high-speed fluctuation period during which a short fluctuation time is selected can be set for a predetermined period (until 20 special symbol fluctuations have been performed), and during that high-speed fluctuation period, the background mode transition effect is not (is unlikely to be) executed when the frame button 22 is operated. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect during a period during which a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected, making it difficult for the player to grasp the stopped display mode of the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, from occurring.

In addition, in the first control example, when the first operation is performed on the frame button 22 during the high-speed fluctuation period, i.e., when the normal state is set, an operation that executes a background mode transition effect ("normal press") is performed, an operation effect with a different presentation mode from the background mode transition effect is executed. This makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the frame button 22 even during the high-speed fluctuation period, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in this first control example, even during the high-speed fluctuation period, a background mode transition effect can be executed by executing a second operation ("long press") other than the first operation ("normal press") described above. With this configuration, a background mode transition effect can be provided to a player who attempts to execute a background mode transition effect while knowing that the stopped display mode of the third pattern will become difficult to grasp. In this first control example, the period required to determine that the second operation has been executed is longer than the period required to determine that the first operation has been executed. This reduces the frequency with which the background mode transition effect is executed, thereby preventing the stopped display mode of the third pattern from becoming excessively difficult to grasp.

In addition, as in this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is not met, the first operation process is executed by performing a first operation on the operating means, but when a predetermined condition is met, the first operation process is not executed (is difficult to execute) even if the first operation is performed on the operating means. This technical idea may be used in other technologies. For example, a volume adjustment process that adjusts the volume of the sound output from the pachinko machine 10, or a brightness adjustment process that adjusts the brightness of a liquid crystal display when a liquid crystal display is used as the third pattern display device 81, may be applied as the above-mentioned first operation process, and the first operation process may be made executable when a predetermined condition is not met (for example, when a special pattern variation is not being executed), and made difficult to execute when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a special pattern variation is being executed).

In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined conditions may be configured to be not only the presence or absence of special pattern changes, but also conditions that are met when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, or conditions that are met during a jackpot game.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, if a predetermined condition is met and the above-mentioned first operation is executed, it is preferable to configure the machine to execute a second operation process different from the first operation process (for example, a process to notify the player that the first operation process will not be executed). This allows the player to easily understand that the first operation process will not be executed. However, without being limited to this, the machine may also be configured to execute a different operation presentation that is not related to the first operation process.

In addition, even if the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied, it is preferable to configure the above-mentioned first operation processing to be executed by executing a second operation different from the first operation, as in this control example. Also, in this first control example, the first operation and the second operation are configured to be executable by differentiating the operation method for one operation means (frame button 22), but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the pachinko machine 10 to have multiple operation means, to make the first operation executable by operating the first operation means (for example, the frame button 22), and to make the second operation executable by operating the second operation means (for example, a frame button provided other than the frame button 22). Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure the second operation to be more difficult to execute than the first operation, for example, to arrange the first operation means on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 where the player can always operate it, and arrange the second operation means on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 121) where the player has difficulty operating it.

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned first operating means and second operating means are provided, the first valid operation determination period for determining whether an operation on the first operating means is valid and the second valid operation determination period for determining whether an operation on the second operating means is valid may be set to the same period, or different periods may be set. When the valid operation determination periods are set to the same period, the process of determining the valid periods can be simplified. When different periods are set, the period for determining whether an operation is valid differs depending on the type of operating means to be operated, so that the player can be motivated to play by operating various operating means at various times.

The first control example described above is configured to be able to set a normal state and multiple advantageous game states (high probability state, time-saving state) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and when one of the advantageous game states is set, the player is notified of the period (remaining period) until the next time the normal state is set, rather than the period until the set game state ends.

Here, conventionally, when a favorable game state (for example, a sure-win state or a time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, there are devices that notify the player of the period during which that favorable game state will continue (the number of times the special pattern will change). Specifically, there are devices that display "100 times" as the remaining period display mode indicating the period during which the favorable game state will continue, and subtract 1 from the value of the remaining period display mode each time a special pattern lottery is executed. This allows the player to easily grasp how many more times the special pattern lottery can be executed during the currently set favorable game state.

In addition, some recent gaming machines allow players to set multiple types of advantageous game states that are advantageous to them, and some allow players to set advantageous game states to normal advantageous game states (e.g., time-saving state) and the most advantageous game state (e.g., special state) that is even more advantageous than the first advantageous game state.

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, when the game state transitions from the most advantageous game state to the normal advantageous game state, the player is notified of the remaining period display mode to indicate the period for which the most advantageous game state will continue, and then, when the normal advantageous game state is set, the player is notified using the remaining period display mode to indicate the period for which the normal advantageous game state will continue.

In other words, when the most advantageous game state is set, it is possible to allow the player to understand the period (remaining period) for which the most advantageous game state will continue, but the player cannot understand what type of game state will be set after the most advantageous game state ends, or how long the game state set after the most advantageous game state ends will continue.

As a result, when the most advantageous gaming state ends, the player cannot know whether a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the most advantageous gaming state will be set, or whether a gaming state that is less advantageous to the player than the most advantageous gaming state (for example, a normal state) will be set, which creates a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to know what they should aim for while playing in the most advantageous gaming state.

In contrast, as described above, in this control example, when multiple types of advantageous game states are set in succession, the advantageous game state remaining period display mode is configured to be displayed for the period until the multiple types of advantageous game states end, that is, the period until the normal state is next set. By configuring it in this way, when different types of advantageous game states are set in succession, the advantageous state remaining period display mode is displayed to straddle the advantageous game states that are set in succession, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in this first control example, when the remaining period of one advantageous game state period spanning multiple consecutively set advantageous game states (high probability game state, time-saving game state) is being notified, a presentation can be executed that makes it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the currently set game state is a high probability game state or a time-saving game state. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult to understand the game state that is set during the advantageous game state period, the player can play while hoping that a more advantageous game state has been set.

In this first control example, when the remaining period of one advantageous game state period spanning multiple consecutively set advantageous game states (high probability state, time-saving state) is notified, a suggestive effect that can suggest the currently set game state or a game state that was previously set can be executed. This makes it possible to interest the player in the content of the suggestive effect executed during the game state period.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the operation presentation can be executed in multiple presentation modes during the advantageous game state period, and the selection ratio of each presentation mode is varied according to the set game state. Therefore, the player can predict the current game state based on the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed during the advantageous game state period, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. Also, since the selection ratio of each presentation mode is simply varied according to the set game state, the prediction accuracy can be improved as the number of operation presentations executed during the advantageous game state period is increased. Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means (frame button 22). In this control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 149, when the frame button 22 is operated during the "chance mode" and "reach suggestion" is selected as the presentation mode of the operation presentation, a "reach suggestion" presentation is executed to suggest to the player whether the special pattern change being executed will be in a reach state, and if so, the reach line or reach pattern. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to determine whether there is winning information that will be in a reach state among the winning information related to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and to notify the player that a second special pattern change that will be in a reach state will be executed based on the determination result before the second special pattern change is executed. In this way, the presentation effect can be further enhanced by expanding the presentation target of the operation presentation to not only the special pattern change being executed but also to the reserved special pattern change (special pattern change to be executed in the future).

In the first control example described above, the player operates the frame button 22 to switch to the background mode or to execute a presentation showing the result of the special symbol lottery. However, as a function that can be executed by the player operating the operating means, for example, a volume adjustment function that adjusts the volume output from the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 137) of the pachinko machine 10, or a brightness adjustment function that adjusts the brightness on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 formed by a liquid crystal display may be used. As with the background mode transition described above, the volume adjustment function and brightness adjustment function may also be configured to be less likely to be executed when a predetermined condition is met, specifically, when a period (high-speed change period) in which a short change time is likely to be selected as the change time for the special symbol change is set, than when other periods are set.

In the first control example described above, the background mode transition can be executed even while the high-speed fluctuation period is set, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured so that the background mode transition is not executed at all. Also, in the first control example described above, a first period is provided in which a specific presentation mode (background mode transition) is likely to be executed as an operation presentation executed by operating the operating means, and a second period is provided in which the operation presentation is less likely to be executed than the first period, but it may be configured so that three or more periods can be set in which the ratio at which the operation presentation is executed in a specific presentation mode differs.

<Second control example>
Next, the second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 202 to Fig. 210. The second control example is different from the first control example described above in that the configuration for displaying various images on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 and the control contents are different. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description is omitted.

In the first control example described above, each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 described above with reference to FIG. 122(b) was configured to be displayed on one image layer. In contrast, the second control example differs in that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz that make up each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are configured to be displayed on different image layers. And, by controlling the display of the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz displayed on different image layers in synchronization, it is possible to variably display each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in the same way as the first control example described above.

Here, conventionally, there have been machines that change the display of a third symbol as identification information to show the result of a special symbol lottery. Also, there have been machines that execute various effects (changing effects) while the third symbol is being changed, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing the player to play while hoping for a jackpot win.

Some common gaming machines execute a pattern change display using multiple (e.g., three) pattern rows formed by multiple tertiary symbols (e.g., tertiary symbols numbered 1 to 9), and execute an effect that increases the likelihood of a big win (e.g., a reach effect) when a predetermined tertiary symbol is stopped and displayed in the remaining pattern rows except for the first pattern row. However, in conventional gaming machines, a change display is executed in which only the change speed of the change display is changed, without changing the order of the symbols that form the pattern row. Therefore, there was a problem in that it was not possible to enhance the effect of the change display using the change display of the pattern row.

It has also been proposed to increase the variety of the variable display by placing identification information (sub-patterns) other than identification information (main pattern) for showing the results of the special pattern lottery in one pattern row. However, even with this configuration, there is a problem in that the effect of the variable display cannot be improved by simply varying the variable display speed of the pattern row formed by the main pattern and sub-pattern.

Furthermore, some machines prepare multiple pattern rows with different arrangements and types of main and sub-patterns in advance, and when a specific variable performance is executed, the pattern row itself is changed to enhance the effect of the variable performance. However, since it is necessary to execute control to change and display different pattern rows according to the variable performance executed, there is a problem that the display control becomes complicated.

In contrast, in this control example, the pattern string display is configured to be executed using multiple image layers. Specifically, the main and sub-patterns that make up the pattern string are configured to be displayed on separate image layers. Then, during normal times, the main and sub-patterns are synchronized and displayed in a variable manner, so that the various patterns that make up the pattern string are displayed in a specific arrangement (see FIG. 122(b)), while the variable display contents of the main and sub-patterns are made different, so that the pattern string can be displayed in a manner other than the specific pattern arrangement.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily display the third symbols in a variable manner other than the specific pattern arrangement while using image data of the third symbols (main and sub-symbols) that form a specific symbol row, thereby improving the presentation effect.

Now, referring to FIG. 202, the display contents displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 202(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer and the display screen formed in the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example, FIG. 202(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect executed when the display of the main symbol image layer sr is set to OFF and the display of the sub-symbol image layer fr is set to ON, and FIG. 202(c) is a diagram showing an example of the result of the display effect of FIG. 202(b).

As shown in FIG. 202(a), in this second control example, the main pattern image layer sr, on which the main pattern sz is displayed, and the sub-pattern image layer fr, on which the sub-pattern fz is displayed, are formed to overlap, and the main pattern image layer sr is configured to be positioned in front of the sub-pattern image layer fr (closer to the player's line of sight). Note that in FIG. 202(a), only the main pattern image layer sr and the sub-pattern fz are shown, but in reality, each image layer (layer) that displays various images displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is superimposed.

Specifically, as described in the drawing list described above with reference to FIG. 155, each image layer is formed corresponding to each sprite, such as the background image used in one frame image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern). In addition, in areas where display images overlap, the display image displayed on the image layer in the foreground is given priority for visibility.

In this second control example configured in this manner, when the main pattern sz displayed on the main pattern image layer sr and the sub-pattern fz displayed on the sub-pattern image layer fr are both displayed in a variable manner, the main pattern sz is displayed in priority to the sub-pattern fz, so that the identification information (main pattern sz) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is hidden by the identification information (sub-pattern fz) that does not indicate the result of the special pattern lottery, making it difficult for the player to see the result of the special pattern lottery. In addition, since there is no need to control the variable display so that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz do not overlap in order to make it easier for the player to see the result of the special pattern lottery, the variable display control can be simplified and the variable display of the main pattern sz can be executed by making maximum use of the limited display area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 202(a), the main pattern layer sr is arranged in front of the sub-pattern layer fr, and the main pattern sz is displayed in priority over the sub-pattern fz. However, this is not limited to this, and the sub-pattern layer fr may be arranged in front of the main pattern layer sr, so that the sub-pattern fz is displayed in priority over the main pattern sz. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the display state of the main pattern sz while each pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is being displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special pattern lottery until the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is displayed in a stopped manner, so that the third pattern variable performance that keeps players excited until the end can be executed.

Next, referring to Figures 202(b) and 202(c), the variable presentation executed by the display control for each pattern image layer will be explained. As described above, in this control example, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz that make up the pattern row can be displayed independently. Furthermore, the display image set for each image layer can be set to be displayed or not. In other words, while internally executing the display control for each image layer, the display or non-display (on, off) can be set for the image layer itself.

Figure 202 (b) shows an example of a display screen when the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to OFF and the display of the sub-pattern layer fr is set to ON, and only the sub-pattern fz of each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Then, the sub-pattern fz is displayed stationary in the sub-display area Ds, and the words "Reach line notice start" are displayed, indicating that a reach line notice performance has been executed to notify the player of the reach line that will be effective in this third pattern change, by stopping and displaying the sub-pattern fz before the main pattern sz is displayed. After that, the performance result according to the stopping position of the sub-pattern fz is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 202(c), the sub-symbol fz is displayed as a diamond shape, and the words "Double Reach Confirmed" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a presentation result indicating that the winning state will be reached on the winning lines L4 and L5 (see FIG. 122). Then, when this reach line notice presentation ends, the display of the main symbol layer sr is set to ON, and a variable presentation is performed to suggest to the player what type of main symbol sz will be that will be reached on the winning lines L4 and L5 (see FIG. 122), and then a double reach presentation (see FIG. 131) is performed.

In this way, in this second control example, it is possible to execute the variable display of the main pattern sz and the variable display of the sub-pattern fz differently, so that the sub-pattern fz is first variable displayed to inform the player of the location where the main pattern sz is stopped, and then the main pattern sz is variable displayed to inform the type of main pattern sz that will be in a reach state. Therefore, the performance results of the third pattern variable performance, which shows the result of the special pattern lottery, can be shown to the player in stages, providing an easy-to-understand performance.

In the reach line preview performance described with reference to Figs. 202(b) and (c), only the stop display position of the main pattern sz is notified to the player in advance by the stop display position of the sub-pattern fz. In addition to this, for example, the arrangement of the stopped and displayed sub-pattern fz may be configured to indicate the type of the stopped and displayed main pattern sz, that is, the result of the special pattern lottery. Specifically, for example, when the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed in all areas other than the area that forms the pay line L2 (see Fig. 122(a)) as the result of the reach line preview performance, it is preferable to configure it so that a specific combination of main patterns sz (for example, the combination "3.4.1" from the top) is stopped and displayed on the pay line L2 (see Fig. 122(a)).

When a specific combination of main symbols sz is displayed in a stopped state, the display of the third symbols may be restarted to execute a change effect that increases the likelihood of winning a jackpot (a so-called pseudo consecutive change effect), or a winning game (a jackpot game or a small jackpot game) may be executed. By configuring it in this way, when a reach line advance notice effect is executed, the player can be made more interested in the result of the effect.

Furthermore, in the case where a reach line preview performance in which only the sub-pattern fz is displayed first is executed, in order to make it easy for the player to understand whether the current reach line preview performance is a performance that notifies the player in advance of only the stop display position of the main pattern sz or also the type of the main pattern sz that will be stopped and displayed, for example, after the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 202(c)), the performance result of the current reach line preview performance can be notified by the type of display form (for example, a graphic display that connects each of the sub-patterns fz with a line) formed using each of the stopped and displayed sub-patterns fz. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 202(c) (a state in which the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed in a diamond shape), if a diamond shape is displayed, the performance result of the current reach line preview performance indicates in advance the stop position of the main pattern sz, and if a heart shape that connects the four sub-patterns fz is displayed, the player can be notified that the performance indicates in advance that a specific main pattern sz will be stopped and displayed.

In this way, by executing an effect (advance notification of the effect result) using the sub-pattern fz that is stopped and displayed between the time when the sub-pattern fz is stopped and the time when the main pattern sz is stopped and displayed, the result of the variable effect (variable effect using the third pattern) for showing the result of the special pattern lottery can be shown to the player in a more gradual manner, so that the player can continue to be interested in the variable effect being executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 203, the contents of the various designs pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 will be described. In this control example, similar to the first control example described above, a back image for an ocean background and a back image for a mountain background can be set as the back image. Specifically, when a background mode transition is executed based on the player operating the frame button 22, the currently set back image (e.g., an ocean background) is switched to a back image that is not currently set (e.g., a mountain background).

Furthermore, this second control example is configured to change the display mode of the third pattern (main pattern sz) depending on the type of rear image that is set (displayed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to variably display the main pattern sz in a display mode that depends on the type of rear image, thereby enhancing the presentation effect when the rear image is switched.

Here, the contents of the image data of the main pattern sz displayed corresponding to the back image will be explained with reference to Fig. 203(a) and Fig. 203(b). Fig. 203(a) is a schematic diagram showing the image data of the main pattern for the sea used when the sea image (sea background) is set, and Fig. 203(b) is a schematic diagram showing the image data of the main image for the mountain used when the mountain image (mountain background) is set. Each of these image data is pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 or when the background mode transition is executed, the corresponding image data is read out from the character memory area 234a2 and stored in the third pattern area 235d or the third pattern row area 235g of the resident video RAM 235. The process of reading out image data corresponding to each symbol and storing it in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 is the same as in the first control example described above, so a detailed description of this will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 203(a), image data corresponding to the marine main pattern sz stores image data (D1-D9) showing main patterns with numbers "1-9" added to nine types of patterns (octopus, porcupine fish, turtle, shark, shrimp, anglerfish, dugong, angelfish, crab). This main pattern image data D1-D9 is pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 in correspondence with the order in which it is actually displayed. Therefore, when reading out image data corresponding to the main pattern, it is sufficient to read out the image data in order starting from D1 and store it in the third pattern area 235d.

In addition, in this second control example, the pattern row Z1 and the pattern row Z3 (see FIG. 122(a)), i.e., the pattern row that is displayed in a stopped state when the reel state is reached, are formed of nine main patterns (main patterns corresponding to image data D1 to D9), while the pattern row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)), i.e., the pattern row that is displayed in a variable manner during the reel state, is configured to be formed of ten main patterns. Specifically, the pattern row Z2 is configured to be formed of ten main patterns, which are the nine main patterns (main patterns corresponding to image data D1 to D9) that form the above-mentioned pattern row Z1, plus a modified main pattern (main pattern corresponding to image data DA) with the number 4 added to the shark pattern. The pattern row Z2 is configured to be displayed in a variable manner so that the main pattern sz with the number 9 added passes, followed by the main pattern sz with the number 4 added, and then the main pattern sz with the number 1 added passes. This allows a specific type of main pattern sz (in this control example, a main pattern with the number 4) to pass multiple times before the variable display of the pattern row completes one revolution, so that if a ready-to-win state is established for that specific type of main pattern sz, it is possible to visually suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot (the probability that the main pattern sz that is the combination for a jackpot will be stopped and displayed on the winning line in the ready-to-win state). This allows the player to pay attention to which type of main pattern sz will establish the ready-to-win state, enhancing the presentation effect.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 203(b), image data corresponding to the mountain main pattern sz stores image data (D1-D9) showing main patterns with numbers "1-9" added to nine types of pattern patterns (elephant, lion, dugong, rhinoceros, peacock, bear, wild boar, mouse, snake). This main pattern image data D1-D9 is pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 in correspondence with the order in which it is actually displayed. Therefore, when reading out image data corresponding to the main pattern, it is sufficient to read out the image data in order starting from image data D1 and store it in the third pattern area 235d.

As in the case where the sea background is displayed, the pattern row Z1 and the pattern row Z3 (see FIG. 122(a)), i.e., the pattern row that is stopped and displayed when the game is in a reach state, are formed of nine main patterns (main patterns corresponding to image data D1 to D9), whereas the pattern row Z2 (see FIG. 122(a)), i.e., the pattern row that is displayed variably during the reach state, is configured to be formed of ten main patterns. Specifically, the pattern row Z2 is configured to be formed of ten main patterns, which are the nine main patterns (main patterns corresponding to image data D1 to D9) that form the above-mentioned pattern row Z1, plus a modified main pattern (main pattern corresponding to image data DA) with the number 4 added to the rhinoceros pattern. The pattern row Z2 is configured to be displayed variably so that the main pattern sz with the number 9 passes, followed by the main pattern sz with the number 4, and then the main pattern sz with the number 1 passes. This allows a specific type of main pattern sz (in this control example, a main pattern with the number 4) to pass multiple times before the variable display of the pattern row completes one revolution, so that if a ready-to-win state is established for that specific type of main pattern sz, it is possible to visually suggest to the player that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot (the probability that the main pattern sz that is the combination for a jackpot will be stopped and displayed on the winning line in the ready-to-win state). This allows the player to pay attention to which type of main pattern sz will establish the ready-to-win state, enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, in this second control example, the image data corresponding to the main pattern sz described above is read from the character memory area 234a2 and stored in the third pattern row area 235g as pattern row data for displaying the pattern row. In other words, the main pattern row image data (image data in which each main pattern sz is displayed at intervals skipping the display position of the sub-pattern fz) corresponding to the main pattern among the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is generated for each pattern row and stored in the third pattern row area 235g. Then, the main pattern sz is variably displayed on the main pattern image layer sr using this main pattern row image data. By configuring in this way, the amount of image data used for display control can be reduced compared to variably displaying image data for each pattern unit, thereby reducing the processing load of the display control.

As described above, in this second control example, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz of each pattern forming the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are configured to be able to be displayed in a variable manner independently. Therefore, even if the multiple main patterns sz of each pattern row are formed from a single image data (main pattern row image data) and displayed in a variable manner, various variable displays can be executed by varying the variable display mode of the sub-pattern fz. Therefore, even if the number of image data used for display control is reduced, it is possible to prevent the performance effect from being reduced.

Furthermore, for the main pattern sz, which is identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern among the third patterns forming each pattern row, variable display is performed on a pattern row basis using the main pattern row image data, and for the sub-pattern fz, which is identification information that does not indicate the lottery result of the special pattern, variable display is performed on a pattern row basis. Therefore, various variable performances can be performed by varying the content of the variable display of the sub-pattern fz without changing the content of the variable display of the main pattern sz, which indicates the lottery result of the special pattern. In other words, in diversifying the variable display performance of the third pattern, the main pattern sz, whose display mode of the stop display is predetermined, can perform various variable performances by varying the content of the variable display of the sub-pattern fz while executing a predetermined variable display. Therefore, the variable display performance of the third pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern can be easily and reliably performed with a wide variety of content.

In this second control example, all the main patterns sz that form the pattern row are configured to have one image data (main pattern row image data), but this is not limited to this. Of all the main patterns sz (main patterns sz numbered 1 to 9), normal main pattern row image data that generates only the pattern rows of some of the main patterns sz (for example, normal main patterns sz numbered with even numbers) and special probability main pattern row image data that generates only the pattern rows of the remaining main patterns sz (for example, special probability main patterns sz numbered with odd numbers) may be stored in the third pattern row area 235g, and the stored image data may be used to variably display the main patterns sz on the main pattern image layer sr.

In this case, for example, when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot, that is, when a combination indicating a jackpot is displayed using odd-numbered main patterns sz, it is possible to vary the content of the variable display using normal main pattern row image data while only the variable display using the variable main pattern row image data is executed as a predetermined variable display. Specifically, the variable display using normal main pattern row image data may be executed faster than the variable display using the variable main pattern row image data, so that the player can only see the odd-numbered main pattern sz. This makes it possible to notify the player that the third pattern change this time is a state in which only the variable main pattern sz is displayed, and only the variable main pattern sz is displayed, that is, the normal pattern (main pattern with an even number) is not displayed, and the player cannot win a normal jackpot.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the image data forming the main pattern sz is generated separately into normal main pattern row image data and special probability main pattern row image data, the normal main pattern image layer (layer) that displays the normal main pattern using the normal main pattern row image data and the special probability main pattern image layer (layer) that displays the special probability main pattern using the special probability main pattern row image data may be configured to be different, and depending on the result of the special pattern lottery, it may be configured to determine whether or not to display the main pattern sz displayed on the normal main pattern image layer or the special probability main pattern layer (whether or not to enable (turn on) the display of each image layer). Furthermore, as in the first control example described above, it may be configured to execute variable display control using image data for each pattern unit without generating pattern row image data that forms the pattern row.

Next, the contents of the image data of the sub-symbol fz will be described with reference to FIG. 203(c). FIG. 203(c) is a schematic diagram showing the image data of the sub-symbol fz pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2. This image data is pre-stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 or when the background mode transition is executed, the corresponding image data is read from the character memory area 234a2 and stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235. Note that the contents of the process of reading image data corresponding to each symbol and the process of storing it in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 are the same as those in the first control example described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 203(c), the character memory area 234a2 of this second control example stores at least image data SD1 of a normal sub-pattern fz (see FIG. 122(b)) imitating a triangular mark, image data SD2 of a sub-pattern fz for a preview performance imitating bubbles, and image data SD3 of a special sub-pattern fz imitating the number 16 as image data of the sub-pattern fz. Note that although omitted in FIG. 202(c), the sub-pattern fz for the preview performance is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode, and the sub-pattern fz for the preview performance imitating bubbles shown in FIG. 202(c) is the sub-pattern fz used when the sea background is set. Therefore, the character memory area 234a2 also stores image data (not shown) of a sub-pattern fz for a preview performance imitating leaves (not shown) as a sub-pattern fz used when the mountain background is set.

Here, in this second control example, among the third patterns variably displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, only the sub-pattern fz that does not indicate the result of the special pattern lottery is configured to be displayed on the sub-pattern image layer fr, and the sub-pattern fz can be displayed variably on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 independently of the main pattern sz variably displayed in a predetermined variability pattern (variability time, stop display position) on the main pattern image layer sr. Therefore, various variability effects using the sub-pattern fz can be easily executed without changing the variability display content of the main pattern sz. In addition, when various variability effects using the sub-pattern fz are executed, even if a part of it is displayed overlapping with the main pattern sz, the main pattern image layer sr is arranged to be displayed preferentially over the sub-pattern image layer fr, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult for the player to see the main pattern sz.

In this second control example, in addition to the reach line preview effect described with reference to Fig. 202(b) and Fig. 202(c), various other preview effects can be executed as a variation effect using the sub-pattern fz. For example, a preview effect at the start of variation in which the sub-pattern fz is switched to a display mode for a preview effect using image data SD2 and the main pattern sz is displayed to change in the opposite direction (rightward) to the direction of change (for example, leftward) of the main pattern sz when the third pattern starts to change, or a jackpot type suggestion effect in which a part of the sub-pattern fz is switched to a special display mode using image data SD3 and a jackpot type suggestion effect that suggests a jackpot type according to the number and arrangement of the sub-pattern fz (sub-pattern fz that resembles the number 16) of the special display mode that is stopped and displayed when the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) stops changing can be executed.

In this way, by making it possible to execute various variable effects using identification information (sub-pattern fz) that is different from the identification information (main pattern sz) that indicates the result of the special pattern lottery and that can be variably displayed during the period in which the identification information (main pattern sz) that indicates the result of the special pattern lottery is being variably displayed, it is possible to have the player pay attention to the variably displayed sub-pattern fz as well.

In addition, in this second control example, unlike the variable display control of the main pattern sz, the variable display control of the sub-pattern fz is configured to be executed on a pattern basis, so that it is possible to easily execute control to switch the display mode of only some of the multiple sub-patterns fz formed in each pattern row Z1 to Z3 (for example, only the vicinity of the main pattern sz that is finally stopped and displayed) to a display mode for variable performance. Also, normally, it is possible to display two or more sub-patterns fz displayed between the main patterns sz, or to prevent only some of the sub-patterns fz from being displayed.

The timing for changing the display mode of the sub-symbol fz may be the timing when the special symbol variation starts, or the timing when the special symbol indicating a big win is displayed in a stopped state.

Finally, referring to FIG. 203(d), the contents of each image data used for the variable main pattern in this second control example will be explained. FIG. 203(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of image data corresponding to various images used for the variable main pattern. This variable main pattern refers to the 10th main pattern provided in pattern row Z2, i.e., the pattern row that is variably displayed during a reach state, and is the main pattern for which image data DA is used among the main pattern display data stored in the character memory area 234a2.

Conventionally, there are machines that display a variable representation (third symbol) to indicate the result of a special symbol lottery, and when a specific symbol is displayed in a static form, indicate that the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In this case, a variable performance is executed to induce the player to wonder whether the statically displayed symbol will be the specific symbol. Generally, a variable performance is executed using multiple symbol rows in which multiple types of symbol are formed in a specific order. Specifically, a variable performance is executed using multiple symbol rows in which multiple symbol pieces (for example, main symbol sz) with the numbers 1 to 9 are formed in a specific order.

In a gaming machine configured in this way, in order to enhance the presentation effect of the third pattern variation, a variation presentation is executed in which the display mode of the third pattern during the variation display is varied. However, when varying the identification information (third pattern) during the variation display, if the numbers 1 to 9 attached to the identification information, i.e., the specific information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, are changed, for example, even if the variation display is executed using nine third patterns each having the numbers 1 to 9, if the third pattern having the number 5 attached is switched to the third pattern having the number 6 attached during the variation, the third pattern having the number 6 attached will disappear, and there is a risk that the player will become suspicious that the result of the special pattern lottery has been changed during the variation display of the third pattern.

For example, if a variable display is performed using nine third symbols numbered 1 to 9, and then a new third symbol numbered 6 is added midway, switching to a variable display using a total of ten third symbols, it is necessary to execute display control to deal with the increase in the number of third symbols being displayed midway, which could make the control content more difficult.

In contrast, in this control example, pattern row Z2 is formed by 10 main patterns, including each main pattern numbered 1 to 9 and a change main pattern. This makes it possible to change the display mode of the main patterns without changing the number of main patterns that form the pattern row, while leaving the various patterns numbered 1 to 9. Furthermore, even if the display mode of the change main patterns is changed to various display modes, the number of main patterns that form pattern row Z2 does not change, so display control of pattern row Z2 can be easily executed.

As shown in Fig. 203(d), the character memory area 234a2 of this second control example stores at least image data DA1 of a normal main pattern sz with the number 4, image data DA2 of a normal main pattern sz with the number 7, image data DA3 of a V main pattern sz imitating the letter V, image data DA4 of a special main pattern sz imitating the number 16, and image data DA4 of a regrettable main pattern sz imitating a cross mark, as image data of the change main pattern. Although omitted in Fig. 202(d), the normal main pattern sz is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the set background mode, and the normal main pattern sz imitating a "shark" and the normal main pattern sz imitating a "dugong" shown in Fig. 202(d) are main patterns sz used when the ocean background is set. Therefore, the character memory area 234a2 also stores in advance image data (not shown) of a normal main pattern sz (not shown) that resembles a "rhino" or a "wild boar" as the normal main pattern sz used when a mountain background is set.

Here, in the variable display performance of the third pattern under normal circumstances, the change main pattern using image data DA1 is configured to be displayed in pattern row Z2, and in some cases when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, or in a very small number of cases when a losing win is won in the special pattern lottery, the change main pattern using image data DA2 is configured to be displayed in pattern row Z2. That is, during normal play, the altered main pattern sz resembling a "shark" with the number 4 attached is displayed in a variable manner, so that five main patterns (main patterns with even numbers) suggesting a normal jackpot win and five main patterns (main patterns with odd numbers) indicating a guaranteed jackpot win are displayed, for a total of 10 main patterns to form the pattern row Z2. However, in some cases where a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, or in a very small number of cases where a jackpot is won but not won in the special pattern lottery, the altered main pattern sz resembling a "dugong" with the number 7 attached is displayed in a variable manner, so that four main patterns (main patterns with even numbers) suggesting a normal jackpot win and six main patterns (main patterns with odd numbers) indicating a guaranteed jackpot win are displayed, for a total of 10 main patterns to form the pattern row Z2.

This makes the player feel hopeful that he or she may have won a jackpot (high probability jackpot) that is favorable to the player in the currently running special pattern lottery. The condition for using the main alteration pattern sz that resembles a "dugong" with the number 7 should be that it is more likely to be established when the special pattern lottery results in a jackpot than when it is otherwise (a miss), and it may be configured so that it is not used when the special pattern lottery results in a miss. It may also be configured so that, among the jackpot wins in the special pattern lottery, it is more likely to be used when a high probability jackpot is won than when a normal jackpot is won. This makes it possible to associate the apparent number of each type of main pattern (even and odd numbers) with the probability of winning a high probability jackpot, providing an easy-to-understand game.

The V main pattern sz shown in image data DA3 is a display mode that is not displayed under normal circumstances, and is displayed as a change main pattern when a special condition is met during the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern). This V main pattern sz is used as a general-purpose main pattern that becomes a combination indicating a jackpot win when it is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the reach state, regardless of the type of main pattern sz that becomes the reach state. By using the general-purpose main pattern in this way, for example, even if the main pattern that becomes a combination that will result in a jackpot win passes over the effective line of the reach state, it can be expected that the third pattern (main pattern) will be stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot win without waiting for the pattern row Z2 to go around again.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the third symbol variable display performance, when a double reach state is reached with the normal main symbol (main symbol sz with an even number) and the probability variable main symbol (main symbol sz with an odd number), if the V main symbol is displayed stationary on the effective line of each overlapping reach state, it is preferable to configure it so that the main symbol that is advantageous to the player indicates that a jackpot has been won. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful even if the V main symbol is displayed in a variable manner when a double reach state is reached. Furthermore, in this control example, the V main symbol is used as a general-purpose main symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a combination indicating a jackpot is displayed using the V main symbol, the V main symbol may be used as a symbol indicating a duplicate jackpot, indicating that in addition to the jackpot game being executed this time, the right to execute at least one more jackpot game has already been acquired (there is winning information indicating a jackpot win in the reserved special symbol that is stored), or the V main symbol may be configured to indicate that the right to execute multiple jackpot games has already been acquired simply by displaying it in a variable manner. By configuring it in this way, when the V main symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the player can play the game with a greater sense of expectation.

Next, the special main pattern sz shown in the image data DA4 and the unfortunate main pattern sz shown in the image data DA5 are not used during the variable display of the third pattern, but are used in the promotion effect that can be executed after the main pattern sz is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win. Here, in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, an advantageous jackpot game (probable jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable jackpot game (normal jackpot game) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous jackpot game are executable. For example, when a probable jackpot is won, in a part (or all) of the cases where a jackpot is won with a combination using a normal main pattern sz (main pattern sz with an even number) that suggests that a normal jackpot game will be executed, a promotion effect is executable to change the type of the main pattern sz that is stopped and displayed to a probable main pattern sz (main pattern sz with an odd number).

During this promotion effect, the main pattern sz is not used to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery (jackpot, miss), but rather to indicate whether the currently won jackpot is a guaranteed jackpot or a normal jackpot. Therefore, the special main pattern sz shown in the image data DA4 indicating a guaranteed jackpot, or the unfortunate main pattern sz shown in the image data DA5 indicating a normal jackpot, is set as the change main pattern. In this way, by changing the display mode of the change main pattern in accordance with the timing at which the content to be notified to the player changes using the main pattern sz, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that is easy to understand.

In this second control example, the type of main pattern sz displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot win by the promotion effect is promoted from the normal main pattern sz to the guaranteed bonus main pattern sz. However, without being limited to this, for example, the number of rounds (number of rounds) played during a jackpot game may be promoted from a main pattern indicating a small number of rounds to a main pattern indicating a larger number of rounds. In this case, multiple image data may be prepared as the change main pattern in a display mode that suggests the number of rounds that may be played, and the display mode of the change main pattern may be determined using the corresponding image data according to the type of jackpot that has actually been won.

In addition, in this control example, the main pattern column image data of the pattern column Z2 is generated using nine main patterns sz numbered 1 to 9 and the above-mentioned change main pattern sz, and stored in the third pattern column area 235g. However, this is not limited to this, and the change main pattern sz may be stored in the third pattern column area 235d without being included in the main pattern column image data, and variable display control may be performed on a pattern basis in the same way as the sub-pattern fz. By configuring in this way, the display mode of the change main pattern sz in the pattern column Z2 that has been set once can be easily changed.

Also, a change main pattern image layer sr1 on which the change main pattern sz is displayed may be arranged separately from the main pattern image layer sr on which the main pattern sz is displayed, and the change main pattern image layer sr1 may be used to display the change main pattern sz. In this case, since the change main pattern sz is displayed only in the pattern row Z2, it is preferable to arrange the change main pattern image layer sr1 in a position where it is displayed with lower priority than the main pattern image layer sr and with higher priority than the sub-pattern image layer fr. This prevents the change main pattern sz from being hidden by the sub-pattern fz, and allows the change main pattern sz to be displayed without interfering with the display of the main pattern sz.

The image data described above with reference to Figures 203(a) to (d) is part of the image data showing the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) stored in the character memory area 234a2, and in fact other image data is also stored. For example, each of the image data stored as main pattern display data stores image data corresponding to a display mode showing a different action (e.g., a display mode in which the target creature is surprised or happy), and when the result of the special pattern lottery is a specific lottery result (e.g., a jackpot), the display mode of the stopped and displayed third pattern (main pattern sz) can be changed by replacing the image data.

Specifically, when the third symbol indicating a jackpot is displayed (when the "Dugong" with the number 7 is displayed in the normal display mode), the display is switched to a special display mode in which the "Dugong" with the number 7 has a surprised expression. This makes it possible to notify the player that he or she has won the jackpot by the display mode of the third symbol. In addition, the image data corresponding to this special display mode may be used for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.2 seconds) after the third symbol variation begins, and an effect may be executed to suggest to the player that he or she has won the jackpot in the special symbol lottery immediately after the third symbol variation begins.

Next, referring to FIG. 204, the flow of the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) in this second control example will be explained. FIG. 204 is a diagram that shows a schematic diagram of the relationship between the variable display performance of the third pattern and the display contents of the pattern row displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. In FIG. 204, a variable pattern with a variable time of 60 seconds, which indicates a jackpot win, is used as an example of the third pattern variable performance.

As shown in FIG. 204, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command indicating the start of special pattern variation, it determines the variation display mode of the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz based on the currently received variation pattern (command). Specifically, in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113, it determines whether or not there will be a preview performance, whether or not there will be a reach performance, and the stop pattern, and sets the corresponding display command. After that, in the command output process (see S4102 in FIG. 174) executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) of the voice lamp control device 113, it sends the set display command to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), the display control device 114 executes a command determination process (see S6302 in FIG. 190) in a variable pattern command process 2 (see S6455 in FIG. 209) to analyze the received display command (variable pattern command), determine a variable display table based on the analysis result, read image data (main pattern row image data) of the main pattern row using the main pattern sz corresponding to the currently set background mode from the third pattern row area 235g, read image data corresponding to the sub-pattern fz corresponding to the currently set background mode from the third pattern row area 235g, generate a display image, and display it on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

The normal variation period is set for 10 seconds after the third symbol variation performance is executed. This normal variation period is the period during which all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a varying manner, and is set as the period during which the player can execute a background mode transition by operating the frame button 22. If a background mode transition is executed during this normal variation period, control is executed to switch each of the main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz, which are displayed in a display mode corresponding to the background mode, to a display mode corresponding to the post-transition background mode.

After that, when the pattern row Z1 and the pattern row Z3 are displayed in a stopped state and reach is reached, a reach variation period of 40 seconds is set, and a reach performance is executed that suggests (tells) whether the lottery result of the special pattern this time is a jackpot. During this reach variation period, the background mode transition is not executed, and when the frame button 22 is operated, a decorative performance is executed in which the light emission state of various decorative LEDs mounted on the pachinko machine 10 is changed. In addition, in a part of the reach performance, an operation performance is executed in which an effective period (SW effective period) that effectively determines the operation of the frame button 22 is set, and when the frame button 22 is operated within the set effective period, a performance that is not executed when the frame button 22 is not operated is executed. Specifically, when the frame button 22 is operated, a definite notification that notifies the player that the special pattern lottery this time has been a jackpot win, and a suggestive notification that indicates that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot win are executable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate a player who wants to quickly grasp the lottery result of the special pattern to operate the frame button 22. In addition, because there are effects that cannot be seen unless the frame button 22 is operated during the operation effects, players who want to see a variety of effects are motivated to operate the frame button 22.

As described above, the background mode transition is not executed during the reach fluctuation period, so that the background mode is not switched during the reach effect that suggests (teasing) that the result of the current special symbol lottery is a jackpot, and the display mode of the third symbol is also switched accordingly, which can prevent the reach effect from being difficult for the player to understand. In addition, since the operation effect is executed during the reach fluctuation period when the background mode transition is not executed, it is possible to make the player actively operate the frame button 22, even if it is configured to be possible to set a fluctuation effect (so-called hidden operation effect) that does not notify the player of the SW valid period set in the operation effect.

In this case, it is advisable to set a notification mode on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to notify the player that a period in which background mode transition is not being executed (for example, displaying a comment such as "The background mode will not change even if you press the button during a reach"), or to set a notification mode to notify the player that a hidden operation effect is being executed (for example, displaying a comment such as "If you press the button at any point during a reach, a special effect will be executed"). This allows the player to execute the operation effect with peace of mind.

Then, at the timing when the reach fluctuation period ends, among the combinations of main patterns sz that indicate a jackpot win, the third pattern is stopped and displayed with a combination of normal main patterns sz (main patterns sz with even numbers), and then a promotion effect is executed to promote the normal main patterns sz that have won the jackpot to a probability variable main pattern (main patterns sz with odd numbers). When this promotion effect is executed, it is determined whether the current jackpot win is a probability variable jackpot or not, and based on the result of the determination, the display mode of the sub-pattern fz and the display mode of the change main pattern sz among the main patterns sz are determined. Then, the promotion effect using the pattern row for the promotion effect is executed using the promotion fluctuation period (10 seconds).

Here, as the pattern sequence for the promotion effect, for example, if the display mode of the change main pattern sz is a display mode using image data DA4 (see FIG. 203(d)) and the display mode of the sub-pattern fz is a display mode using image data SD3 (see FIG. 203(c)), in addition to the normal high probability main pattern sz (main pattern sz with an odd number), many patterns indicating that the player has won an advantageous jackpot that is advantageous to the player can be displayed, so that the player can be visually notified that there is a high possibility of being promoted to a high probability jackpot with this promotion effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 205, the content of the variable performance executed in this second control example will be explained. FIG. 205 shows an example of the variable performance of the third pattern executed for the same variable pattern command, where FIG. 202(a) is a diagram that shows the flow of the variable pattern used in the example, FIG. 202(b) is a diagram that shows the flow of the normal performance, FIG. 202(c) is a diagram that shows the flow of the reach line notice performance (see FIG. 202(b)), and FIG. 202(d) is a diagram that shows the flow of the notice performance in which the variable direction of the sub-pattern fz is different from normal.

As shown in FIG. 205(a), when the main control device 110 sets a variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds, the voice lamp control device 113 sets a display variation pattern command for executing a reach performance. Furthermore, various advance notice performances using the sub-pattern fz are executed using the period until the reach performance is executed. As described above, in this second control example, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz that form each pattern row are configured to be independently variable and displayable, so that various variation performances (advance notice performances) can be executed by varying only the variation pattern of the sub-pattern fz while displaying the main pattern sz in a specific variation pattern according to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110.

Specifically, in the performance A shown in FIG. 205(b), similar to the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above, a third pattern change display (see FIG. 202(a)) is executed in which the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are synchronized, showing the normal pattern in which a reach state is reached. In this way, by controlling the display to synchronize the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz, which are displayed in a changing manner independently, it is possible to give the appearance that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed in a changing manner as one pattern row.

Next, in the performance B shown in FIG. 205(c), the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to off (set to hidden) for a predetermined period (15 seconds) from the start of the third pattern change, during which a reach line notice performance is executed that stops the display of the change in the sub-pattern fz. In other words, the same display control as in 205(a) described above is executed for the main pattern sz, but since the main pattern layer sr is set to hidden in the first half of the normal change period (15 seconds), the player cannot see the change in the main pattern sz.

Then, the sub-pattern fz is displayed in a variable manner during the first half of the normal fluctuation period (15 seconds) (see FIG. 202(b)), and the sub-pattern fz is displayed in a static manner at the end of the first half of the normal fluctuation period (15 seconds), thereby displaying the position where the main pattern sz is displayed in a static manner in the current third pattern fluctuation display (see FIG. 202(c)). After that, when the second half of the normal fluctuation period (15 seconds) begins, the display of the main pattern layer sr is set to on (set to display), and the main pattern sz is displayed in a variable manner during the second half of the normal fluctuation period (15 seconds), and the reach state is reached 30 seconds after the fluctuation starts, just like in FIG. 205(b).

In other words, when the effect B shown in FIG. 205(c) is executed, that is, when the reach line notice effect is executed, the position where the main pattern sz is stopped and displayed can be notified to the player before the main pattern sz is stopped and displayed, so it becomes possible to know in advance (15 seconds after the start of the third pattern change) whether the current third pattern change display will be a double reach, a single reach, or not a reach. Therefore, compared to the normal pattern (see FIG. 205(b)) in which it takes 30 seconds to know whether it will be a reach or not, if the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed in a position where the main pattern sz cannot be in a reach state, the period during which the player has excessive expectations can be shortened.

In addition, when the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main pattern sz can be in a reach state, the player can enjoy the remaining variation time while anticipating which main pattern sz will be in a reach state. Note that in this second control example, when the sub-pattern fz is stopped and displayed at a position where the main pattern sz can be in a reach state, it is configured to always be in a reach state, so the player can easily determine whether or not the current third pattern variation will be in a reach state based on the timing of the stop display of the sub-pattern fz.

Finally, in the performance C shown in FIG. 205(d), a normal display is executed for the main pattern sz as in the performance A described above, and a different performance from performance A is executed for the sub-pattern fz only for a predetermined period (3 seconds) from the start of the change. Specifically, a display mode using image data SD2 (see FIG. 203(c)) is set as the display mode for the sub-pattern fz displayed at the start of the change, and a sub-pattern reverse change display is executed to change the sub-pattern fz in the opposite direction (rightward) to the change display direction of the main pattern (leftward), and then a change display using the normal sub-pattern fz is executed in synchronization with the change display of the main pattern sz.

As shown in the presentation pattern C, by making the direction of change display of the main pattern sz and the direction of change display of the sub-pattern fz different at the timing when the third pattern change display starts, a surprising presentation can be presented to the player; in other words, for a player who recognizes that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are formed in the same pattern row and only change and display in the same direction, the sub-pattern fz is displayed changeably in an unexpected manner, providing a surprising presentation.

As explained above, in this second control example, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are configured to be independently variable and can be displayed, the variable display mode of the main pattern sz is set in response to a variable pattern command that is set based on the lottery result of the special pattern, and various variable performances can be executed by varying only the variable display mode of the sub-pattern fz without varying the variable display mode of the main pattern sz. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the variable display result of the main pattern sz differs from the lottery result of the special pattern.

In addition, when the sub-pattern fz is displayed first, for example, the sub-pattern fz may be enlarged and displayed so that the sub-pattern fz covers the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and during that time, the display position of the main pattern sz and the pattern type may be changed.

<Electrical configuration of the display control device in the second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 206 to Fig. 208. Fig. 206 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The pachinko machine 10 of this second control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above in that the contents of the image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114 have been changed, and a third pattern row area 235g has been added to the resident video RAM 235. Other than that, it is the same as the first control example described above. The same components are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

As described above with reference to FIG. 203, the character storage area 234a2 of this second control example differs from the character storage area 234a2 of the first control example in that the image data D1-D9 of the main pattern display data corresponding to each background mode, the image data SD1-SD3 of the sub-pattern display data, and the image data DA1-DA5 of the change main pattern display data are stored in the character storage area 234a2, but the other image data stored therein are the same. Note that the details of the image data newly stored in this second control example have been described above with reference to FIG. 203, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The third pattern column area 235g is a storage area for reading out multiple image data of the main pattern sz stored in the character memory area 234a2, generating one image data (main pattern column image data) as a pattern column in advance, and storing the generated main pattern column image data. When the main pattern sz is to be displayed variably on the main pattern image layer sr, the main pattern column image data stored in this third pattern column area 235g is read out, and the main pattern sz is variably displayed by variably setting the display position coordinates based on the drawing contents specified in the display data table. By configuring in this way, the number of image data used when displaying the main pattern sz variably can be reduced compared to when image data generated on a main pattern sz basis is used, thereby reducing the processing load of the display control.

Next, referring to FIG. 207, the contents of the display data table used in the pachinko machine 10 of this second control example will be described. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed at that time in correspondence with an address expressed as one unit of time (20 milliseconds in this control example) during which one frame of image is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. The pachinko machine 10 of this second control example differs from the display data table in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 153) in that the drawing contents for the third symbol (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) are different, but otherwise is the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 207, the drawing contents of the display data table specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame of image, and also specify drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as the display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, depending on the sprite type.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for specifying the type of rear image. This rear type contains information specifying whether to display either rear A or B corresponding to the background mode selected by the player (either "sea mode" or "mountain mode"), or whether to display a rear image different from rears A and B. In addition, when specifying that a rear image different from rears A and B is to be displayed, the rear type also contains information specifying which rear image is to be displayed.

When the MPU 231 determines that either back face A or B is to be displayed based on the back face type, it determines the back face image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery out of back faces A and B as the drawing target, and also determines the range of the back face image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it determines that a back face image different from back faces A and B is to be displayed, it determines the back face image to be displayed from the back face type.

In this control example, a case will be described in which only the rear surface type is specified as the drawing content of the rear surface image in the display data table, but instead, the rear surface type and position information indicating which range of the rear surface image corresponding to that rear surface type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the back surface type and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored, rather than information indicating the elapsed time.

Next, the types of sprites for displaying the third symbols (main symbol sz, sub-symbol fz) on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. First, the sub-symbols (sub-symbol 1, sub-symbol 2, ...) are set with display position coordinates indicating the stop position of each sub-symbol fz stopped and displayed in the previous variable performance. This allows the variable performance to start from the stop position of the sub-symbol fz in the previous variable performance. As shown in FIG. 202(a), unlike the main symbol sz, the sub-symbol fz does not have a unique number, and all sub-symbols fz are displayed in a common display mode. Therefore, by simply setting the display position coordinates indicating the position of each sub-symbol fz stopped and displayed in the previous variable performance, the variable performance can be easily started from the stop position of the sub-symbol fz in the previous variable performance.

...

In the former case, the sub-pattern fz is displayed in the display mode to be used in the current variable performance before the variable performance starts, i.e., when the sub-pattern fz is stopped, so the player can understand the content of the variable performance to be executed in advance, enhancing the performance effect. In the latter case, the display mode of the sub-pattern fz can be changed at a timing that is difficult for the player to notice, so the display mode of the sub-pattern fz can be changed smoothly without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, among the types of sprites for displaying the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) on the third pattern display device 81, the sprite for displaying the main pattern sz will be described. The main pattern columns (main pattern column 1, main pattern column 2, ...) store pattern column type offset information as pattern column type information for specifying the main pattern sz of the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference in the numbers attached to each main pattern sz. The reason for specifying the offset information rather than directly specifying the type of the main pattern sz is that the display of the main pattern sz in the variable performance changes depending on the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance and the stopped pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the change until a predetermined time has passed describes the offset information from the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stopped pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

Since each main pattern sz is assigned a unique number, the variable pattern in the previous variable performance and the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 are managed by the number assigned to the main pattern sz. Also, by expressing the offset information as the difference between the numbers assigned to each main pattern sz, the main pattern sz to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance is set to be the time during which the main pattern sz is displayed in a rapidly varying manner. While the main pattern sz is displayed in a rapidly varying manner, the main pattern sz is not visible to the player. During that time, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers of the main pattern sz is interrupted, the player can be prevented from noticing the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

Furthermore, in this second control example, the image data of each main pattern sz displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be one image data (main pattern row image data) for each pattern row. For example, for each main pattern sz with the numbers 1 to 9 attached that are variably displayed in the pattern row Z1, the main pattern sz with the number 3 attached is the head of the image data, and then the main pattern row image data is generated with a predetermined interval (the interval at which the sub-patterns fz are displayed) so that the numbers attached to the main patterns sz are in the order of "3 → 2 → 1 → 9 → 8 → 7 → 6 → 5 → 4" and stored in the third pattern row area 235g. Then, by varying the display position coordinates of the main pattern row image data based on the passage of time, an image in which only the main patterns sz that form the pattern row Z1 are variably displayed is displayed on the main pattern image layer sr. The size (coordinate range) of the display area formed on the main pattern layer sr is set to a size that does not allow all images contained in the main pattern row image data to be displayed, and is set to a size that allows a maximum of three main patterns sz to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 202(a).

Therefore, based on the offset information included in the pattern row type offset information, the type of main pattern sz to be displayed on the main pattern image layer sr is specified, the display range of the main pattern row image data is determined corresponding to the position where the specified main pattern sz should be displayed, and the display of each main pattern sz is executed in that display range. In this way, when executing a variable display without changing the arrangement relationship of the main pattern sz, as in the first control example described above, image data is provided for each main pattern sz, and the pattern type of each main pattern sz to be displayed when starting the current variable performance is specified based on the offset information of the stop pattern of the main pattern sz in the previous variable performance, and then, depending on the content of the variable performance to be executed, the display control process is more easily reduced when a pattern row image data in which multiple main patterns sz are specified in a predetermined order and with a predetermined interval is generated, and the variable performance is executed using the pattern row image data, rather than setting the display position (display position coordinates) of the image data of each main pattern sz synchronously and variably according to the content of the variable performance to be executed.

When the display control method of the second control example is used, it is difficult to change the arrangement of the main patterns sz or to change the spacing between the main patterns sz. In that case, it is better to execute display control to variably display each main pattern sz using image data corresponding to each main pattern sz as in the first control example described above. In addition, the configuration of the first control example described above and the configuration of the second control example may be combined to use image data in units of patterns only for a specific main pattern sz, and to use main pattern row image data for multiple main patterns other than the specific main pattern. In this case, it is easy to execute control to change the image data used for a specific main pattern or to change the degree of change in the display position (variable display speed), and it is possible to reduce the processing load of the display control when variably displaying multiple main patterns sz for multiple main patterns sz that are always displayed with synchronized variable display content without executing special display control.

In this second control example, in which one image data (main pattern row image data) is generated for each pattern row, different drawing contents are set for each of pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 (for each pattern row), and for pattern row Z2, for each main pattern sz with the variably displayed numbers 1 to 9, the main pattern sz with the number 4 attached is at the beginning of the image data, and then main pattern row image data is generated with a predetermined interval (the interval at which the sub-patterns fz are displayed) so that the numbers attached to the main patterns sz are in the order "4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9 → 1 → 2 → 3", and stored in the third pattern row area 235g. In addition, for the pattern row Z3, for each main pattern sz with the variably displayed numbers 1 to 9, the main pattern sz with the number 1 is at the beginning of the image data, and then the numbers attached to the main patterns sz are in the order "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 7 → 8 → 9", so that main pattern row image data is generated with a predetermined interval (the interval at which the sub-patterns fz are displayed) and stored in the third pattern row area 235g.

By controlling the display so that all of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed variably to the left using the main pattern column image data corresponding to each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 configured in this way, only the main pattern sz displayed in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 is displayed variably on the main pattern image layer sr. As described above, the type of main pattern sz located at the beginning of the main pattern column image data is different for each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. As a result, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (initial state), the main patterns sz numbered "3.4.1" are displayed stationary from the top at the center position of the third pattern display device 81, i.e., on the pay line L2 (see FIG. 122(a)). In other words, by configuring the numbers attached to the main patterns sz at the beginning of each main pattern string image data to be different, in the initial state where no variable pattern command has been received from the main control device 110, it is possible to display combinations of main patterns sz that are different from the combination that will result in a jackpot simply by setting the initial display so that the beginning of the main pattern string image data forming each of the pattern strings Z1 to Z3 is on the active line L2, simplifying the display control in the initial state.

Next, the contents of the drawing list in this second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 208. FIG. 208 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. This drawing list differs from the drawing list of the first control example described above (see FIG. 155) in that the type of sprite for displaying the third pattern has been changed, but is otherwise the same. Detailed descriptions of the same contents will be omitted.

The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in FIG. 208, it describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, such as the background image, sub-pattern (sub-pattern 1, sub-pattern 2, ...), main pattern row (main pattern row 1, main pattern row 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern) used in one frame's image. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data for the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 237 retrieves the image data for that sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address.

In other words, the drawing instruction contents for the image of the sub-pattern fz include information indicating the resident video RAM 235 as the type of RAM in which the image data is stored, and an address indicating the image data to be used for the current drawing instruction from among the multiple image data SD1 to SD3 (see FIG. 203 (c)) corresponding to the sub-pattern fz stored in the third pattern area 235d. Also, the drawing instruction contents for the image of the main pattern sz include information indicating the resident video RAM 235 as the type of RAM in which the image data is stored, and an address indicating the image data to be used for the current drawing instruction from among the multiple image data (main pattern row image data) corresponding to the main pattern row stored in the third pattern row area 235g.

<Regarding the control process in the second control example>
Next, the control process contents in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 209 and Fig. 210. This second control example differs from the above-mentioned first control example in that the control process contents executed by the display control device 114 are different. In addition, the type contents of the performance mode of the variable performance set by the voice lamp control device 113 are also different. The rest of the contents are the same, and the same contents are assigned the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In this second control example, the content of the variable performance mode of the third pattern set by the voice lamp control device 113 is different, and specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 205, it is configured to be possible to set a display command for executing various variable performances only for the sub-pattern fz of the third pattern. However, the method of setting the display command corresponding to the variable performance is the same as the variable display setting process of the first control example described above (see S4113 in FIG. 182), and since only the specific setting content is different, a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the content of the various variable performances executed for the sub-pattern fz executed in this second control example has been described above with reference to FIG. 205, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the control process executed by the display control device 114 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the variable pattern command process 2 (S6455). This variable pattern command process 2 (S6455) executes a process corresponding to the display variable pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113, and differs from the variable pattern command process executed by the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above (see S6405 in FIG. 191) in that a process is added to determine the type of the change main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz used during the current variable performance and store them in various storage areas of the resident video RAM 235. Since the other process contents are the same, the same reference numerals are used for the same process contents and detailed description thereof is omitted.

In the variable pattern command process 2 (S6455), first, the selected variable pattern command (display variable pattern command) is analyzed (S6501), and it is determined whether the current variable pattern command is a variable pattern command for indicating a big win (a variable pattern command selected when a big win is won in the special pattern lottery executed by the main control device 110) (S6551). If it is determined that the current variable pattern command is a big win (S6551: Yes), it is then determined whether the current variable pattern command for display contains information indicating the performance mode of the promotion performance (S6552), and if it is determined that the information indicating the performance mode of the promotion performance is contained (S6552: Yes), a change main pattern corresponding to the command is determined as the change main pattern of the promotion-only pattern row, and stored in the third pattern row area, and the process proceeds to S6554. Also, if in the process of S6551 it is determined that the current fluctuation is not a big win fluctuation, or if in the process of S6552 it is determined that the promotion effect will not be executed, then the process proceeds to S6554, where based on the information analyzed in the process of S6501 it is determined whether the currently received fluctuation pattern contains information for executing a preview effect (see FIG. 205) using the sub-pattern fz, and if it is determined that the preview effect of the sub-pattern fz will be executed (S6554 in FIG. 209: Yes), the display mode of the sub-pattern fz to be used in the current sub-pattern preview effect is determined, and image data corresponding to the determined display mode is read from the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 and stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 (S6555).

Then, a variation display data table corresponding to the received variation pattern command is determined, a display variation pattern for 0 is set, and the process of S6502 to S6505 is executed, which is the same as the variation pattern command process (see S6405 in FIG. 191) executed by the display control device 114 in the first control example described above, and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the rear image change command process 2 (S6469) will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the contents of the rear image change command process 2. This rear image change command process 2 (S6469) differs from the above-mentioned rear image change command process (see S6419 in FIG. 195(a)) in that when the rear image change flag 233w is set to on, a process is added to determine the type of third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) corresponding to the changed rear image (background mode) and store it in the third pattern area 235d and the third pattern row area 235g. Since the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used for the same processes and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the rear image change command process 2 (S6469) is executed, first, the rear image change flag 233w is set to ON (S7001), the type of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) corresponding to the changed rear image (background mode) is determined, and image data corresponding to the determined type is stored in the third pattern area 235d and the third pattern row area 235g (S7002). After that, the rear image discrimination flag 223x corresponding to the changed rear image type is set to ON (S7051), and this process is terminated.

<Modification of the second control example>
Next, a modified example of the second control example described above will be explained with reference to Fig. 211. In the second control example described above, the main pattern sz constituting the third pattern is displayed (drawn) on the main pattern image layer sr, and the sub-pattern fz is displayed (drawn) on the sub-pattern image layer fr. By synchronizing the display contents of the main pattern image layer sr and the display contents of the sub-pattern image layer fr, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed in a regular, variable manner while remaining in a specific order. Furthermore, by variably setting only the display control contents for the sub-pattern fz, various variable performances can be performed without varying the variable display contents for the main pattern sz for showing the result of the special pattern lottery.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) is displayed (drawn) on one image layer, as in the first control example described above, and further, it differs in that it is configured to provide multiple (two) image layers for displaying (drawing) the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz). And it differs in that it is configured to be able to execute a special variable performance by varying the display control content of the third pattern displayed on the two image layers (third pattern image A, third pattern image B). The rest of the content is the same as the second control example described above, and a detailed description of the same content will be omitted.

Figure 211(a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the display image layer formed on a pachinko machine 10 in a modified example of this second control example and the display screen, Figure 211(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a triple reach performance, and Figure 202(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a triple reach state is reached due to the triple reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 211(a), in a modified example of the second control example, the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern image layer B are overlapped as the image layers on which the third pattern is displayed, and the third pattern image layer A is configured to be positioned in front of the third pattern image layer B (closer from the player's line of sight). Note that while only the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern image layer B are labeled in FIG. 211(a), in reality, each image layer (layer) displaying various images displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is superimposed.

Then, by synchronizing the variable display of the third pattern for the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern image layer B, it is possible to execute a variable display that appears to be identical to the variable display of the third pattern shown with reference to Figure 125 (b) in the first control example described above.

In this modified example configured in this manner, as in the second control example described above, the third pattern displayed on the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern displayed on the third pattern image layer B can be independently controlled for variable display, so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 211(b), when the third pattern displayed on the third pattern image layer B is in a single reach for "9", it is possible to continue the third pattern variation on the third pattern image layer A. In this state, depending on the result of the third pattern variation on the third pattern image layer A, the number of third patterns in a reach state increases, and the words "Reach! Promotion Chance" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

As shown in FIG. 211(c), when a double reach of "1" and "9" is achieved in the third pattern displayed on the third pattern layer A, it appears as a "triple reach" where three third patterns are in a reach state. In this way, by displaying the third patterns in overlapping and variable form using multiple layers, it is possible to easily execute a variable presentation that requires display control to change the order of the pattern rows of each third pattern when displaying the third patterns in a variable form on one layer, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In this way, when the third pattern variation display is made different for multiple third pattern image layers, for example, the third pattern displayed on the image layer on the side that is displayed with priority (third pattern image layer A) can be the true third pattern for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, and the third pattern displayed on the image layer on the non-priority side (third pattern image layer B) can be the decorative third pattern, and the variation pattern of the third pattern on the third pattern image layer A can be determined based on the variation pattern set based on the result of the special pattern lottery (variation pattern set by the main control device 110), and the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the variation performance content of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern image layer B based on the determined variation pattern of the third pattern on the third pattern image layer A (based on whether or not a jackpot has been won and the type of reach). It is also advisable to configure the display control so that different variable display controls are executed between the third pattern image layer A and the third pattern image layer B when a jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery, compared to when the jackpot has not been won.

In addition, in this modified example, a change presentation in which the change display of the third pattern image layer A and the change display of the third pattern image layer B are completely different has been described, but this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to execute a change presentation in which the change start timing is shifted by 0.2 seconds, and then during the high speed change of the third pattern, a change presentation in which the change display content is synchronized is executed. In this way, by making the change display of the third pattern image layer A and the change display of the third pattern image layer B different for only a part of the change presentation, a slight sense of discomfort can be given to the player, allowing the player to make a better selection of the change display.

As explained above, in the second control example and the modified example of the second control example described above, various display controls are performed on each of the third patterns (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, which are composed of patterns including a main pattern sz having identification information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery. However, patterns other than the patterns (third patterns) of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be provided as long as they are dynamically displayed so that the display areas overlap on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

For example, during the execution of the third pattern change, a special pattern not included in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 may be dynamically displayed in a display area that overlaps with the display area of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3. Also, the above-mentioned special pattern may be dynamically displayed during the period in which the third pattern change is being executed, and may be configured to start dynamically displaying the special pattern during the execution of the third pattern change, or to stop displaying or hide the special pattern during the execution of the third pattern change.

Even in this configuration, the variable display mode (variation pattern) of the main symbol sz can be determined based on the results of the special symbol lottery, and it is possible to set a variation pattern for the special symbol for presentation, similar to the sub-symbol fz described above. Furthermore, since the above-mentioned special symbol is not a symbol in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, unlike the sub-symbol fz, the player will not feel uncomfortable even if it is not displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 at the start or stop timing of the third symbol variation. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the types of variation patterns that can be set more than the sub-symbol fz, and the presentation effect can be further improved.

The dynamic display mode of the special pattern may be configured to be different from the dynamic display mode of the third pattern described above. For example, if the dynamic display direction of the third pattern is to the left (to the left from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)), the dynamic display direction of the special pattern may be configured to be a different direction from the dynamic display direction of the third pattern (for example, to the right from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)). This makes it possible to easily notify the player that the dynamic display of the special pattern has been executed, even if the special pattern is dynamically displayed in a display area overlapping with the display area of the third pattern variable display during the period in which the third pattern variable display is being executed.

In the above example, the dynamic display direction of the special pattern is the exact opposite direction to the dynamic display direction of the third pattern, but it is sufficient if the dynamic display direction is different. For example, instead of the left-right direction, it may be an up-down direction (a direction moving up and down from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)), a front-back direction (a direction moving from the back side to the front side, or from the front side to the back side from the viewpoint of FIG. 202(a)), or a diagonal direction (a direction moving diagonally with an angle of less than 90 degrees shifted from the movement line indicating the movement direction). Furthermore, in the above example, a pattern in which the dynamic display direction of the third pattern and the dynamic display direction of the special pattern are different in order to clearly notify that the variable display of the special pattern has been executed during the third pattern change has been described, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to clearly notify that the variable display of the special pattern has been executed during the third pattern change by making the size of the dynamically displayed third pattern and the size of the special pattern different. Furthermore, it may be configured to dynamically display the special symbol before the third symbol change is executed, or to dynamically display the special symbol after the third symbol change is statically displayed (including a display state in which the symbol is swaying to an extent that is difficult for the player to distinguish).

On the other hand, as a technical idea opposite to the above example, the dynamic display direction and size of each pattern (third pattern, special pattern) may be configured to be the same in order to notify in an unnoticeable manner that the dynamic display of the special pattern has been executed during the third pattern change. By configuring it in this way, it is not possible to know that the dynamic display of the special pattern has been executed unless the player pays close attention to the various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, so that players who want to know that the dynamic display of the special pattern has been executed can continue to be interested in the various variable displays executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

As mentioned above, unlike the third symbol, the special symbol does not have to be displayed all the time, and therefore does not indicate the result of the lottery for the special symbol according to the display mode when it is stopped like the third symbol. For example, the dynamic display of the special symbol may be started to notify the player that there is a high possibility that the lottery result for the special symbol is a jackpot. In this way, by varying the timing at which information indicating the lottery result for the special symbol is provided (dynamic display start timing, stopped display timing) according to the type of dynamically displayed symbol, the timing at which the player should pay attention can be varied according to the various dynamically displayed symbols, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, when a special pattern is used that indicates a high possibility of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery by starting the dynamic display in this way, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to display at least a part of the special pattern as a standby display mode that suggests that the dynamic display will be executed. For example, when a special pattern in a display mode in which multiple fish are in a school is used as the special pattern, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to display only the fish displayed near the front of the special pattern in the moving direction side. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to play while hoping that the dynamic display of the special pattern will start. In this case, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to display not all of the display mode indicating the special pattern, but a part of it. This makes it possible to suppress the misconception that the special pattern is already being dynamically displayed when the special pattern is displayed as a standby display mode.

In the second control example described above, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz forming the third pattern are configured to be displayed on different image layers, and the display control contents executed for each image layer are made different to make the variable display mode of the main pattern sz and the variable display mode of the sub-pattern fz different. In addition to this, for example, a first sub-pattern image layer and a second sub-pattern image layer may be provided as image layers capable of displaying the sub-pattern fz, and the sub-pattern fz displayed on the first sub-pattern image layer and the sub-pattern fz displayed on the second sub-pattern image layer may be configured to be displayed overlapping each other, or only one of them may be displayed. In addition, the display control may be performed so that the stop display positions of the sub-pattern fz displayed on multiple display layers are made different, and then the reach line notice performance shown in FIG. 202(b) is executed to further limit the position where the main pattern sz is stopped.

In the second control example described above, the display image layers for displaying one pattern (main pattern sz) and the other patterns (sub-pattern fz) that make up each pattern row Z1 to Z3 are different, and display control can be performed on each display image layer, making it possible to perform various variable effects. However, as long as different display controls can be performed for each type of pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) that forms the pattern row of the third pattern that is variably displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, they may be displayed on the same display image layer. In this case, when the display objects displayed as a result of each display control overlap, it is necessary to specify in advance which display object is to be displayed, which makes the display control process more complicated, but it is possible to achieve the same effect as each of the effects described in the second control example above.

In addition, even when a configuration is used in which the results of multiple display controls are displayed on the same display layer, the various display control processes described in the above-mentioned second control example may be executed for various patterns including patterns other than the multiple pattern types (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) that make up pattern row Z1 to Z3, i.e., patterns other than the third pattern that are dynamically displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in response to the display of the changing special pattern (for example, decorative patterns that are dynamically displayed for a specified period during the special pattern change to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is highly likely to be a specific result (a jackpot win)).

In the second control example described above, when a background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect, the display mode of the main pattern sz is switched to a display mode corresponding to the switched background mode. However, when a background mode transition effect is executed, not only the display mode of the main pattern sz but also the display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be switched. In this case, image data corresponding to each background mode is stored as image data of the sub-pattern fz stored in the character memory area 234a2, and when the background mode is switched, image data corresponding to the switched background mode is read out and stored in the third pattern area 235d.

In addition, when a background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect, the result of the ongoing special symbol lottery may be determined, and the type of sub-symbol fz to be displayed after the background mode is switched may be determined based on the determination result. Specifically, a display mode imitating the number 16 or a display mode imitating a "V" may be provided as a type of sub-symbol fz that is more likely to be determined when the ongoing special symbol lottery results in a jackpot win than when the jackpot win is not won. By configuring in this way, the result of the special symbol lottery can be easily predicted by executing the background mode transition effect and switching the background mode before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, so that the player can be encouraged to actively execute the operation effect.

Furthermore, the possibility that the result of the special pattern lottery will be a jackpot winning may be varied depending on the combination of the background mode that is set and the type of sub-pattern fz that is displayed. For example, when the type of sub-pattern fz (display mode for sea mode) that is normally used in the first presentation mode (sea mode) is used in the second presentation mode (mountain mode), it may be configured to indicate that there is a high possibility that the special pattern lottery being held will be a jackpot winning. In this way, by executing a presentation that combines the background mode and the type of sub-pattern fz, a variety of presentations can be executed without increasing the number of types of sub-pattern fz.

In addition, in this control example, when a background mode transition effect is executed as an operation effect, a process is executed to change the display mode of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz). In addition, the number and positions of the valid lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 122(a)) formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 may also be changed.

Furthermore, when the reach line preview effect shown in Figs. 202(a) and (b) is executed and the sub-pattern fz is displayed frozen (see Fig. 202(b)), the stopped display position of the main pattern sz notified in the reach line preview effect may be changed. In this case, the stopped display position of the main pattern sz may be changed more easily when the result of the ongoing special pattern lottery is a jackpot win than when it is not a jackpot win, or conversely, the stopped display position of the main pattern sz may be changed more easily when it is not a jackpot win than when it is a jackpot win.

<Third control example>
Next, the third control example will be described with reference to Fig. 212 to Fig. 222. In the above-mentioned first control example, a specific area (V gate 65v) is formed in the variable winning device 65 that is opened during a big win game, and when the game ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v) during a big win game, a high probability state is set after the big win game ends.

As shown in Figure 120, balls that enter the wide (opening width 50 mm) large prize opening 65a are collected in one place using the first flow path 65e1 and the fifth flow path 65e5, and are then allowed to flow down the second flow path 65e2, allowing them to reach the V-gate 65v. However, in the configuration of the variable winning device 65 in the first control example described above, the timing at which a ball can reach the V-gate 65 differs from the timing at which a ball enters the variable winning device 65 from the timing at which the ball can enter the variable winning device 65 in the case where a ball that has entered from the left side of the variable winning device 65 (upstream side of the first flow path 65e1), i.e., a ball shot by left-handed play flows down the left area and then enters the variable winning device 65, and the timing at which a ball can reach the V-gate 65 in the case where a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 in the case where a ball shot by right-handed play flows down the right area and then enters the variable winning device 65, so that when a sure-variable jackpot game is played, whether left-handed play or right-handed play is performed, the switching valve 65y needs to be positioned for a long period of time in a state in which the ball can flow down the fourth flow path 65e4 so that the ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 can reach the V-gate 65v. Furthermore, by lengthening the period during which a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 can pass through the V gate 65v, it is also necessary to lengthen the period (V valid period) during which it is effective to determine whether the ball has passed through the V gate 65v (specific area), which creates the problem that it becomes difficult to detect fraudulent behavior during jackpot play, i.e., the act of passing the ball through the V gate 65V (specific area) through fraudulent play.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example is configured so that the time it takes for a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 to pass through the specific area is approximately the same in cases where a ball shot by left-handed play flows down the left area and then enters the variable winning device 65, and in cases where a ball shot by right-handed play flows down the right area and then enters the variable winning device 65. This configuration makes it possible to shorten the length of the period (V valid period) during which it is effective to determine whether a ball has passed through the specific area, making it easier to discover fraudulent behavior during jackpot play, i.e., the act of passing a ball through the V gate 65V (specific area) through fraudulent play.

As described above, this third control example differs from the first control example described above in that the configuration within the variable winning device 65 has been changed and the content of the switching control of the switching valve 65y provided within the variable winning device 65 has been changed, but the rest of the content is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example will be described with reference to Fig. 212. Fig. 212 is a front view showing a schematic of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example. As shown in Fig. 212, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example differs from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above (see Fig. 119) in that the arrangement of the nail members planted in the lower area of the electric role 640 is different. Specifically, in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above, nails are planted so that balls that have flowed down the left area or the right area can win evenly in the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, whereas in the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this third control example, multiple nail members are planted in a V-shape below the electric device 640 so that balls that have flowed down the left area can easily win on the left side of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, and balls that have flowed down the right area can easily win on the right side of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65.

In other words, in this third control example, a variable winning device 65 is provided with a specific winning opening 65a with a wide opening width so that both balls that flow down the left side area when played from the left and balls that flow down the right side area when played from the right can win, and an electric device 640 is provided above the center of the variable winning device 65 as a winning prevention member to prevent balls from winning near the center of the specific winning opening 65a in the opening width direction, and multiple nail members are planted in a V-shape as guide members to guide balls to win near both ends of the specific winning opening 65a in the opening width direction.

This configuration can promote ball entry near both ends of the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, regardless of whether right-handed play or left-handed play is performed during a jackpot game. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 213, but the variable winning device 65 of this third control example is configured so that its internal structure is symmetrical (symmetrical when the opening width direction of the specific winning opening 65a is viewed left and right), and by making the entry position of the ball into the specific winning opening 65a a symmetrical position, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of errors in the time it takes for a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a to pass through each area (e.g., a specific area) within the variable winning device 65.

Next, referring to FIG. 213, the internal structure of the variable winning device 65 in the pachinko machine 10 of the third control example will be described. FIG. 213(a) is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the variable winning device 65 near the specific winning hole 65a, and FIG. 213(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow path of the ball that wins the specific winning hole 65a.

The variable winning device 65 of this third control example is also configured in the same way as the variable winning device 65 of the first control example described above (see FIG. 120), so that the balls received by the opening and closing door 65b, which is in an open state during a big win game state, are guided by the guide member 65d to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2 provided at both ends of the specific winning port 65a. Then, the balls that flow down the first opening 65a1 pass through the ball detection sensor 65s1 (see FIG. 213(b)), and a payout control is executed in which 15 balls are paid out as prize balls. Similarly, the balls that flow down the second opening 65a2 pass through the ball detection sensor 65s2 (see FIG. 213(b)), and a payout control is executed in which 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

As described above with reference to FIG. 212, in this third control example, the ball is configured to be less likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a from near the center, so that the balls received by the open opening door 65b can be smoothly guided to the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2. This prevents the number of winning balls before flowing down the first opening 65a1 or the second opening 65a2 from increasing, which can lead to ball clogging, and also prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a winning ball is not paid out despite having entered the specific winning opening 65a (the ball does not pass through the ball detection sensors 65s1, 65s2).

As shown in Figure 213 (b), the variable winning device 65 of this third control example is significantly different from the variable winning device 65 used in the first embodiment described above (see Figure 120 (b)) in that the path along which a ball that enters a specific winning port 65a (a ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or the ball detection sensor 65s2) is guided to the discharge port 65 is configured symmetrically.

First, the ball that passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 flows down the first flow path 65r1 toward the switching valve 65y, and as shown in FIG. 213(b), when the switching valve 65y is in a closed state (a state in which the V-gate 65V protrudes to block the flow path in which it is arranged), the ball flows down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y and is guided to the first discharge port 65h1. The time (ta) required for the ball to flow down the first flow path 65r1 is configured to be about 2 seconds. Similarly, the ball that passed through the ball detection sensor 65s2 flows down the second flow path 65r2 toward the switching valve 65y, and as shown in FIG. 213(b), when the switching valve 65y is in a closed state (a state in which the V-gate 65V protrudes to block the flow path in which it is arranged), the ball flows down the upper surface of the switching valve 65y and is guided to the second discharge port 65h2. The time (tb) required for the ball to flow down the second flow path 65r2 is also configured to be approximately 2 seconds, the same as the time ta mentioned above.

In other words, in this third control example, a ball that enters near the left end of the specific winning port 65a when played from the left and passes through the first opening 65a1, and a ball that enters near the right end of the specific winning port 65a when played from the right and passes through the second opening 65a2, are configured to flow down through the same position over a period of time before reaching the switching valve 65y.

When the switching valve 65y is closed (submerged so that the ball can pass through the flow path in which the V-gate 65V is disposed), as shown in FIG. 214, the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 65r1 passes through the submerged switching valve 65y (shown by a dotted line in FIG. 214), passes through the first V-gate 65v1, and flows into the third outlet 65h3. The ball that has flowed down the second flow path 65r2 also passes through the submerged switching valve 65y, passes through the second V-gate 65V2, and flows into the fourth outlet 65h4.

In this third control example, when the number of balls entering the variable winning device 65 (the cumulative number of balls detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2) reaches a predetermined number, the switching valve 65y is switched from a closed state (see FIG. 213(b)) to an open state (see FIG. 214). The time required for the number of balls entering the variable winning device 65 to reach a predetermined number and for the switching valve 65y to open (about 0.5 seconds) is shorter than the time required for the predetermined number of balls to pass through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or the ball detection sensor 65s2 and reach the switching valve 65y (about 2 seconds). Therefore, the above-mentioned predetermined number of balls are configured to be able to pass through the V-gate 65V as is. Therefore, when the switching valve 65y is in the open state, the balls can be reliably allowed to flow down to a specific area (V-gate 65V).

The structure of the variable winning device 65 in this third control example is the same as the structure of the sorting device 300 (see FIG. 13) in the first embodiment described above, but for ease of explanation, it is shown in a simplified diagram as shown in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214. Therefore, the detailed configuration of the variable winning device 65 in this third control example is of course the same as that of the first embodiment described above, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

<Electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the third control example will be described with reference to Fig. 215 and Fig. 216. The third control example differs from the first control example described above in that the contents of the big win control executed during the big win game are different, and the various processing contents based on the difference are different, but the rest is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions are omitted. Specifically, the difference is that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are partially changed, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are partially changed, but the rest of the configuration is the same.

Now, with reference to FIG. 215, the configuration of the RAM 203 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this third control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. 215, the RAM 203 in this third control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 139(b)) in that a V period timer 203ca has been added, but otherwise is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The V period timer 203ca is for measuring the period during which the switching valve 65y is in an open state so that the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65v), and is set to a predetermined time (5 seconds) when the conditions for allowing the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65v) are met. The value of the V period timer 203ca is updated in the jackpot update process (see S1954 in FIG. 220) executed in the jackpot control process 3 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) of the main process (see FIG. 167) of the main control device 110, and the switching valve 65y is switched to the closed state when the V period has elapsed (the value of the V period timer 203ca becomes 0).

In this third control example, when it is determined that the number of balls entering the specific winning port 65a (the number of balls detected by the ball detection sensors 65s1, 65s2) is a predetermined number (2) during a specific round play (the first round play) during a guaranteed jackpot play, the V condition that allows the balls to pass through to the specific area (V gate 65v) is met, and the switching valve 65y is switched to an open state for a predetermined period (5 seconds).

In other words, the switching valve 65y is not controlled based on the time that has elapsed since the start of the jackpot game, but is controlled based on the number of balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the open state period of the switching valve 65y ends during a period in which the balls were not able to enter the variable winning device 65 despite the jackpot game being played normally, and the balls cannot pass through to the specific area (V-gate 65v).

Furthermore, in this third control example, the period (approximately 0.5 seconds) required for the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state after the V condition is satisfied is shorter than the period (approximately 2 seconds) required for a ball that satisfies the V condition for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state, i.e., the ball that has passed through the ball detection sensor 65s1 or 65s2 for the specified number (2nd ball) to reach the switching valve 65y, and at least a ball that satisfies the V condition is configured to be able to pass through the specific area (V gate 65v). By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably pass the ball through the specific area (V gate 65v) when the V condition is satisfied.

In this control example, the V condition is satisfied and the state in which the switching valve 65y is switched to the open state is continued for a predetermined period (5 seconds). That is, the end condition for terminating the open state of the switching valve 65y is only the period lapse end condition that is satisfied when a predetermined period has passed, but it is not limited to this. For example, a V passage end condition that is satisfied when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65v) may be set, or a round end condition that is satisfied when the end condition of the V round game (first round round game) is satisfied, or when a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds required for a ball that has entered the variable winning device 65 during the V round to reach any of the outlets 65h) has passed since the end condition of the V round game is satisfied may be set. In this way, various end conditions may be set, and the open state of the switching valve 65y may be switched to the closed state when any of the end conditions is satisfied first. This makes it possible to minimize the period during which the switching valve 65y is open, thereby preventing the ball from passing through the specific area (V-gate 65v) unnecessarily. This reduces the possibility that the ball will collide with the ball detection sensor installed in the V-gate 65v and physically destroy the ball detection sensor.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this third control example will be described with reference to FIG. 216. FIG. 216 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the third control example. As shown in FIG. 216, the RAM 223 in this third control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 144(b)) in that a V timer 223ca has been added, but otherwise is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The V timer 223ca is a timer for measuring the elapsed time after the period during which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate 65v) (period during which a V win is possible) is set, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a V period command set by the main control device 110 when the period during which a V win is possible, a value corresponding to a predetermined period (3 seconds) is set. The value of the V timer 223ca continues to be updated (decremented) until the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65v), and when the value becomes 0 (when the predetermined period has passed), an emphasized guidance announcement is issued that emphasizes the guidance for a V win.

In other words, the period during which a V win is possible is set to a maximum of 5 seconds, and the emphasized notification is configured to be executed when 3 seconds have passed since the period during which a V win is possible is set. Here, as described above, normally, the ball that has satisfied the V condition is configured to directly enter the V win, and the time required for the ball that has satisfied the V condition to enter the V win is configured to be approximately 2 seconds. In other words, when the value of the V timer 223ca reaches 0, it is considered that the ball that has satisfied the V condition has not entered the V win. Therefore, since it is necessary to aim for a V win using an additional ball, the emphasized notification is configured to be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a V win cannot be achieved due to the game content of the player, even though the period during which a V win is possible has been set.

In this control example, the emphasis guide notification is executed based on the time elapsed since the V condition was satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the emphasis guide standby notification may be executed when it is detected that the ball that satisfied the V condition has passed through an area that does not have a specific area (V gate 65v) (for example, a flow path having an outlet 65h1 (see FIG. 213(b))). In addition, in this control example, the emphasis guide notification is executed as described above when it is detected that the ball that triggered the switching valve 65y to be switched to the open state has not passed through the specific area (V gate 65v). Alternatively, the emphasis guide notification may be executed to notify the outside that an abnormality (for example, a ball jam) has occurred in the flow path inside the variable winning device 65.

In addition, in this control example, when the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2 detect the entry of a predetermined number of balls (the second ball), the switching control is executed to immediately switch the switching valve 65y to the open state. In this case, the ball (the first winning ball) that entered the variable winning device 65 before the predetermined number of balls (the second ball) may be guided to the switching valve 65y in the open state and pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). Therefore, when the entry of the predetermined number of balls (the second ball) is detected, a waiting time (about 1.5 seconds) may be set taking into account the time (about 2 seconds) until the second winning ball reaches the switching valve 65y, and the switching valve 65y may be controlled to switch to the open state after the waiting time has elapsed. This makes it easier to pass only the ball that triggered the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state to the specific area (V gate 65V).

Furthermore, in this control example, the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65v) during one jackpot play, setting a high probability state for the special symbol after the jackpot play ends, and the bonus given to the player (provision of a high probability state for the special symbol) does not change even if multiple balls pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot play. In addition, for example, when using a pachinko machine 10 in which the bonus given to the player varies depending on the number of balls that pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during a jackpot play, it is possible to prevent excessive balls from passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) by setting the above-mentioned waiting time.

When using a pachinko machine 10 in which the contents of the bonus given to the player are varied according to the number of balls that pass through a specific area (V gate 65V) during a jackpot game, for example, the number of winning balls (V winning condition) that triggers the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state may be varied according to the type of jackpot won, the waiting time from when the winning number of balls that triggers the switching valve 65y to switch to the open state enters the variable winning device 65 until the switching valve 65y is switched to the open state may be varied, or the condition for switching the switching valve 65y from the open state to the closed state (V ending condition) may be varied.

Specifically, in order to make it easier for multiple balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot game, it is preferable to set a small number of balls as the V winning condition, so that a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player can be advantageous to the player. This can shorten the period from when the jackpot game is executed until the V winning condition is established, so that a long jackpot game can be executed while the V winning condition is established, and it can be easier for multiple balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). The waiting time may also be shortened. This can make it possible for balls that entered the variable winning device 65 before the ball that established the V winning condition (balls flowing down the first flow path 65r1 and the second flow path 65r2) to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). Furthermore, the V ending condition may be configured to be established based on the elapsed time regardless of the number of balls passing through the specific area (V gate 65V). By configuring it in this way, when a big win that gives the player an advantage is executed, the player can play with enthusiasm, trying to get as many balls as possible to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V).

On the other hand, for jackpot games that are disadvantageous to the player, in order to make it difficult for multiple balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during one jackpot game, it is advisable to set a large number of balls as the V entry condition, set a long waiting time, or set the V end condition to be met when one ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V), or to be met after a period of time has elapsed that makes it difficult for a ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) (for example, 0.1 seconds have elapsed).

By configuring in this way, the expectation that the ball will pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) during a jackpot game can be greatly varied depending on the type of jackpot game being played. Furthermore, it is preferable to provide a normal flow path and a special flow path that can cause the ball to flow down toward the switching valve 65y in a shorter period of time than the normal flow path as ball flow paths within the variable winning device 65. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a delaying means (e.g., a crane) in the special flow path that delays the flow of the balls, so that the balls discharged from the special flow path are more likely to be discharged in a chain than the balls discharged from the normal flow path.

In this case, if the timing when the switching valve 65y opens coincides with the timing when the balls are discharged from the special flow path, it is possible to make it easier for many balls to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). Furthermore, in this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the player can select whether the balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 are made to flow more easily down the normal flow path or the special flow path. For example, when a left-handed game is played, it is preferable to configure the system so that the balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 are made to flow more easily down the normal flow path than the special flow path, and when a right-handed game is played, it is preferable to configure the system so that the balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 are made to flow more easily down the special flow path than the normal flow path. In this case, during the jackpot game, a game guide display may be executed using the display surface of the third symbol display device to inform the player that the left-hand hit game is a stable game in which it is easy to pass one ball into the specific area (V gate 65V), and that the right-hand hit game is a challenge game in which it is difficult to pass a ball into the specific area (V gate 65V), but if the timing is right, a large number of balls can pass into the specific area (V gate 65V). In addition, a storage means may be provided to store whether the left-hand hit game or the right-hand hit game was executed in the past jackpot game, specifically, to determine which of the ball detection sensors 65s1 and 65s2 detected more balls during the jackpot game, and to determine the game method during the jackpot game based on the determination result and store the result, and a history display may be executed to display the game method stored in the storage means and the game result during the jackpot game (the number of balls passing into the specific area (V gate 65V)) as a past history.

This allows the player to enjoy the fun of selecting the game method to be executed during the big win game. In the above control example, the bonus granted when passing through the specific area (V gate 65V) is a high probability state of a special pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, the right to a lottery that is likely to result in a lottery that is advantageous to the player may be granted, or a second big win game different from the big win game may be granted. In this case, it is preferable to provide a grant right storage means that can store the rights to which the above-mentioned bonus is granted up to a predetermined number. This makes it possible to reliably grant bonuses under the condition of a predetermined number, even if multiple grant rights are acquired in a short period of time. In addition, in this control example, the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 during the big win game is described, but this is not limited to this. For example, in some cases where the lottery result is other than a big win in the lottery of a special pattern, a small win that opens the variable winning device 65 for a short period of time may be set, and the above-mentioned configuration may be used for the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 during the small win game that is executed when the small win is won. In addition, the above-mentioned configuration may be used for a variable ball entry means (e.g., the electric device 640) that allows the ball to enter a winning game that is executed when a winning normal symbol is selected in the lottery.

In addition, in this control example, all balls that pass through the switching valve 65y in the open state are configured to be able to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V), but this is not limited thereto, and a distribution member may be provided so that some of the balls that pass through the switching valve 65y in the open state can pass through the specific area (V gate 65V). In addition, in this control example, the switching valve 65y that switches the flow path through which the balls flow down among the multiple flow paths is used as a variable means that can be changed between a first state in which it is easy to pass the ball to the specific area (V gate 65V) and a second state in which it is difficult to pass the ball, but the configuration of the variable means is not limited thereto, and for example, a variable means that can be changed between a retention position in which the ball is retained for a predetermined period and an open position in which the ball is not retained, and that retains the ball for a predetermined period to make it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area (V gate 65V) within a period that effectively determines the passage of the ball to the specific area (V gate 65V) may be provided. In addition, multiple variable means may be provided in the variable winning device 65.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the third control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 217 to Fig. 220, the control process contents of the main control device in this third control example will be described. In this third control example, the difference from the first control example described above is that the big win control process (see S1804 in Fig. 168) is replaced with the big win control process 3 (see S1854 in Fig. 217), and the winning process (see S1911 in Fig. 171) is replaced with the winning process 3 (see S1953 in Fig. 218), but otherwise it is the same. The same control process contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, the contents of jackpot control process 3 (S1854) will be explained with reference to FIG. 217. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot control process 3 (S1854). This jackpot control process 3 (S1854) differs from the above-mentioned jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168) in that the control contents executed at the start of a jackpot and the control contents executed when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game have been changed, and further, a control content that updates the value of the V period timer 203ca during a jackpot game has been added. The rest of the contents are the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the jackpot control process 3 (S1854) is executed, first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S1901), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S1901: Yes), then an opening command is set (S1902), the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF, and the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON (S1903), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the jackpot start flag 203j is not set to ON (S1901: No), then it is determined whether the jackpot is currently being played (whether the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON) (S1904), and if it is determined that the jackpot is not being played (S1904: No), this process ends as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of S1904 that a jackpot is being played (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON) (S1904: Yes), it is then determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1905). If it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes), the specific winning port 65a is set to open (S1951), a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set (S1952), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1905 that it is not the time to start a new round (S1905: No), the process of S1907 to S1910 is executed, which is the same as the jackpot control process of the first control example described above (see S1804 in FIG. 168), and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S1909 that it is not the time to end the jackpot (S1909: No), then the winning process 3 is executed (S1953), and then the abnormality process is executed (S1912), and then the jackpot update process is executed (S1954), and this process ends.

Next, the contents of winning process 3 (S1953) executed in jackpot control process 3 (see S1854 in FIG. 217) will be explained with reference to FIG. 218. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the contents of winning process 3 (S1953). This winning process 3 (S1953) differs from the winning process of the first control example described above (S1911 in FIG. 171) in that the control process contents during the V round (one round) in which the switching valve 65y can be in the open state are different, but otherwise it is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations of the contents will be omitted.

When the winning process 3 (S1953) is executed, first, the processes S2201 to S2204 are executed, which are the same as the winning process of the first control example described above (S1911 in FIG. 171). If the process of S2204 is completed, or if the process of S2202 determines that the ball has not entered the specific winning hole 65a (S2202: No), then the V round process is executed (S2251). Details of this V round process (S2251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 219, but when the first round of round play (V round play) is executed, a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the switching valve 65y.

After the V round processing (S2251) is completed, the processing of S2205 to S2208 and S2211 to S2221, which are the same as the winning processing described above (see S1911 in FIG. 171), is executed, and then this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the V round processing (S2251) executed in the winning processing 3 (see S1953 in FIG. 218) will be explained with reference to FIG. 219. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V round processing (S2251).

When the V round process (S2251) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time is one round (V round) (S2401), and if it is determined that the current time is not one round (S2401: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is one round (S2401: Yes), it is next determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203o is "2", that is, whether the number of winning balls into the variable winning device 65 during the first round of round play is "2" (S2402), and if it is determined that it is "2" (S2402: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is set to ON (S2403), a V period command indicating the period during which a V winning is possible (the period during which a ball can be guided to a specific area (V gate 65V)) is set (S2404), and a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set to the V period timer 203ca (S2405), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2402 that the value of the winning number counter 203o is not "2" (S2402: No), this processing ends.

As explained above, in this control example, when the number of balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 during a specific round of play executed during a jackpot game meets a predetermined condition (when the number of winning balls becomes two), a control process is executed to switch the switching valve 65y to an open state so that the balls can easily pass through the specific area (V-gate 65v). This makes it possible to prevent the switching valve 65y from switching to an open state when no balls have entered the variable winning device 65 during a jackpot game.

In this control example, only a specific round (first round) during a jackpot game is configured to be a V round in which the switching valve 65y can be switched to an open state, but this is not limited to this, and multiple rounds may be configured to be set as V rounds in which the switching valve 65y can be switched to an open state. In this case, in the V round process (S2251), the number of rounds of a newly executed round game is determined, and it is determined whether the round game of the determined number of rounds is a V round.

Then, when a V round is determined, the state of the switching valve 65y can be controlled based on the value of the winning number counter 203o during that V round. In this case, the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to ON (the condition for switching the switching valve 65y to the open state) can be different for each of the multiple V rounds.

In addition, when a V-round game is being played, a notification means may be provided that notifies the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 of the game content until the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to ON is met. For example, when a V-round game is started, a V-round notification indicating that the current round game is a V-round and a required number of wins notification indicating the number of wins required until the condition for setting the V solenoid 209a to ON is met may be executed. This makes it possible to motivate the player to play by trying to get the ball to pass through a specific area.

Next, the contents of the jackpot update process (S1954) will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a flow chart that shows a schematic of the contents of the jackpot update process (S1954). In this jackpot update process (S1954), processing is executed to update the value of the V period timer 203ca that is set during jackpot play.

When the jackpot update process (S1954) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the V period timer 203ca is greater than 0, i.e., whether the V solenoid 209a is set to ON (S1961). If it is determined that the value of the V period timer 203ca is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S1961: No), this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S1961 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is greater than 0 (S1961: Yes), then the value of the V period timer is updated (S1962), and it is determined whether the updated value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S1963). If it is determined that the value is not 0 (S1963: No), it is not the time to turn off the solenoid 209a, so this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1963 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S1963: Yes), the V solenoid 209a is set to OFF (S1964), a command indicating the end of the V period is set (S1965), and this processing ends.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the third control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 221 and Fig. 222, the control process contents of the voice lamp control device in this third control example will be described. In this third control example, the difference from the first control example described above is that the big win related process 3 (see S4258 in Fig. 221) is executed instead of the big win related process (see S4218 in Fig. 180), and the performance update process 3 (see S4151 in Fig. 222) is executed instead of the performance update process (see S4111 in Fig. 174), but otherwise it is the same. The same control process contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 221, the contents of jackpot-related process 3 (S4258) will be explained. This jackpot-related process 3 (S4258) differs from the jackpot-related process (S4218) of the first control example described above in that it adds control process contents that are executed when a V period command is received from the main control unit 110, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

When jackpot-related process 3 (S4258) is executed, first, the same processes of S4701 to S1713 as those of the jackpot-related process described above (see S4218 in FIG. 180) are executed. Then, in the process of S4709, if it is determined that the round count command has not been received (S4709: No), it is next determined whether a V period command has been received (S4751). If it is determined that a V period command has been received (S4752: Yes), a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the V timer 223ca, and this process is terminated.

Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4751 that a V period command has not been received (S4751: No), the processing of S4714 to S1715, which is the same as the jackpot-related processing described above (see S4218 in FIG. 180), is then executed, and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the effect update process 3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 222. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect update process 3. This effect update process 3 is configured to be able to execute a process for updating the value of the V timer 223ca set during a jackpot game, and a process for setting the effect mode when the value of the V timer 223ca becomes 0.

As shown in FIG. 222, when performance update process 3 is executed, first it is determined whether the value of V timer 223ca is greater than 0 (S5401). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S5401: Yes), then the value of V period timer 203ca is updated (S5402), and it is determined whether the updated value of V period timer 203ca is 0 (S5403).

If it is determined in the processing of S5403 that the value of the V period timer 203ca is 0 (S5403: Yes), it is then determined whether the V performance execution flag 223k is set to ON (S5404). In other words, if a V notification performance is being executed during the currently executing jackpot game, a display command is set to highlight the V winning notification (S5405), and the number of updates for various other counters and timers is executed, and this processing ends.

As explained above, in this third control example, the variable winning device 65 is placed at a location where a win is possible whether playing with a right-hand or left-hand shot, and further, regardless of which playing method is used to shoot the ball, the system is configured so that there is no significant difference in the time from when the ball wins to when it reaches the switching valve 65y. Therefore, during a jackpot game, the period (V effective period) for effectively detecting that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate 65v) is not set unnecessarily long, and the jackpot game can be played smoothly. Also, by shortening the V effective period, it is easier to monitor the act of passing the ball into a specific area through fraudulent play.

In addition, since the switching control of the switching valve 65y is configured to be executed based on the number of winnings in the variable winning device 65, it is possible to prevent the switching valve 65y from being opened in a state where the balls cannot win the variable winning device 65 due to ball clogging that occurs during a jackpot game. In this control example, the number of winning balls is measured on a round-by-round basis, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined measurement result, the switching valve 65y is configured to be opened for a predetermined period within the round game period. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to execute control to switch the switching valve 65y to the open state when the cumulative value of the number of winnings since the start of a jackpot game, the cumulative value of the number of winnings since a predetermined measurement condition is established during a jackpot game, or the cumulative value of the number of winnings in multiple jackpot games reaches a predetermined measurement result.

In addition, the maximum length of time that the switching valve 65y is open does not need to be limited to the period until the end of a round of play, but may be configured so that the switching valve 65y remains open, for example, spanning over to the next round of play to be executed.

In addition, in this third control example, as shown in FIG. 213(b), one switching valve 65y is configured to block both the first V gate 65v1 and the second V gate 65V2, but this is not limited to this. Two switching valves 65y may be provided to block each V gate, and for example, when the ball detection sensor 65s1 detects a predetermined number of winning balls, only the switching valve covering the first V gate 65V1 may be opened, and when the ball detection sensor 65s2 detects a predetermined number of winning balls, only the switching valve covering the second V gate 65V2 may be opened. This makes it possible to reduce the range of switching valves that are open, thereby preventing balls from passing through the V gate 65V unnecessarily.

<Fourth control example>
Next, the fourth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 223 to Fig. 231. This fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed, and the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Also, the fourth control example differs in that the control contents executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed. The rest of the contents are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same contents, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the first control example described above, after the end of a jackpot game, a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) or a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be set as an advantageous game state favorable to the player. If the high probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game, the high probability state continues until 50 special symbol lotteries have been performed, and then the time-saving state is set until 50 special symbol lotteries have been performed, that is, until the number of special symbol lotteries since the end of the jackpot game reaches 100. On the other hand, if the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game, the time-saving state is configured to continue until 100 special symbols have been performed.

In other words, in the first control example described above, no matter which advantageous game state (high probability state, time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the advantageous game state is configured to continue until the special pattern lottery is executed 100 times, unless a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery. Then, when an advantageous game state (high probability state, time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the player is notified of the period until the advantageous game state ends, that is, the period until the normal state that is disadvantageous to the player is set (see FIG. 128(a)).

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that has multiple advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state, it is possible to make the player aware of the period until an unfavorable game state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set, rather than the period until the currently set advantageous game state (high probability state or time-saving state) ends. Therefore, compared to a case in which the player is notified of the period until the currently set advantageous game state (e.g., high probability state) ends, that is, the period until the high probability state ends and the time-saving state ends, it is possible to make the player aware in advance of the period during which the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player will continue, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

Furthermore, in the first control example described above, the period during which the more favorable of the multiple favorable game states (high probability state, time-saving state) continues is predetermined to be the period during which 50 special symbol lotteries are executed, and during the period from the end of the jackpot game until 50 special symbol lotteries are executed, a suggestion effect can be executed that can suggest to the player whether the currently set game state is a high probability state or a time-saving state (see FIG. 128(b)). As a result, in a pachinko machine 10 that notifies the player of the period until the next unfavorable game state is set when a favorable game state is set, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting which of the multiple favorable game states the currently set game state is.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of this fourth control example, when a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set after a jackpot game ends, a lottery (so-called fall lottery) can be executed to transition the high probability state of the special symbols to a low probability state, and when the fall lottery is won, the game state is transitioned from the high probability state to a time-saving state. In other words, in the above-mentioned first control example, when a high probability state is set, the high probability state is configured to continue until 50 special symbol lotteries have been executed, but in this fourth control example, if the fall lottery is won before 50 special symbol lotteries have been executed, the high probability state is configured to end at that point.

By configuring it in this way, even if the player understands that a special probability state has been set by the suggestive effects executed during the period when a favorable game state has been set, it is difficult for the player to understand how long the special probability state will continue, so that the player can pay closer attention to the content of the suggestive effects being executed.

In addition, in this fourth control example, the suggestive effects executed during the period in which the advantageous game state is set are configured to suggest not only the currently set game state, but also the timing when the special state ends due to winning the drop lottery.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the fourth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fourth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 223 to Fig. 226. The fourth control example is significantly different from the first control example described above in that a lottery (falling lottery) for shifting a high probability state of a special symbol to a low probability state can be executed, and is different in that a configuration for executing the falling lottery is added.

First, referring to FIG. 223, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this fourth control example will be described. FIG. 223 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 223, the ROM 202 in this fourth control example differs from the ROM 202 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 139(a)) in that part of the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d has been changed and a new drop lottery table 202da has been added, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be described, focusing mainly on the differences from the first control example. In this fourth control example, the contents of the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special pattern (special pattern 2) are different from those in the first control example described above. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 224(a), but the value set in the time-saving counter 203h is different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type selected, that is, the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. This makes it possible to vary the length of the period during which the advantageous game state (probability change state or time-saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game continues. Therefore, when the advantageous game state is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the length of the period during which the advantageous game state continues. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the notification performance for notifying the player of the period during which the advantageous game state continues (the remaining period until the disadvantageous game state is set).

Now, referring to FIG. 224(a), we will explain the contents of the special symbol 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd, which is referenced to select the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) in this control example. FIG. 224(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special symbol 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2.

As shown in FIG. 224(a), the special chart 2 jackpot 2 table 202dd2 specifies jackpot types that have different values for the time-saving counter 203h set after the jackpot game ends, depending on the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter c2 and the game state at the time of the win. In other words, the length of time that the advantageous game state (high probability state or time-saving state) that is set after the jackpot game ends varies depending on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won.

Specifically, for the jackpot type, when the acquired first jackpot type counter C2 value is in the range of "0 to 29", if the game state at the time of winning is normal or time-saving, the time-saving counter 203h is set to "50", and when the game state is high probability, the time-saving counter 203i is set to "100". For the jackpot type, when the acquired first jackpot type counter C2 value is in the range of "30 to 69", if the game state at the time of winning is normal or time-saving, the time-saving counter 203h is set to "50", and when the game state is high probability, the time-saving counter 203i is set to "100". However, if the probability of winning is high, the time-saving counter 203h is set to "90" and the probability of winning counter 203i is set to "50" as a "jackpot D." If the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "70 to 99," the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" if the game state at the time of winning is normal or the time-saving state, and if the probability of winning is high, the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100" and the probability of winning counter 203i is set to "50."

The details of the round game that is executed in response to each jackpot type, the value set in the probability change counter 203i defined in the special chart 2 jackpot table 202dd2, and the ending period (S) are the same as those in the special chart 2 jackpot table 202d2 described above, so a detailed description of them will be omitted.

As explained above, in this fourth control example, the duration of the time-saving state is varied depending on the jackpot type selected when the jackpot was won and the game state when the jackpot was won. For example, when jackpot D is selected as the jackpot type, if the jackpot was won in the time-saving state, "100" is set in the time-saving counter 203h, and if the jackpot was won in the probability variable state, "90" is set. Therefore, after the jackpot game that is executed when jackpot D is selected ends, the player can know whether the game state at the time of the previous jackpot win was in the probability variable state or the time-saving state depending on the display mode of the remaining period notification mode displayed in the small display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81.

By configuring it in this way, the pachinko machine 10 has multiple types of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and in the pachinko machine 10 that executes a notification effect that can notify the player only that an advantageous game state has been set, without specifically notifying the player of the currently set game state, if the player wins a jackpot during an advantageous game state, the player can subsequently ascertain in which game state the jackpot was won. This allows the player to predict future games based on past game results, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 224(a), the value set in the time-saving counter 203h is varied according to the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, so that the player can predict the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot based on the display content of the remaining time notification mode (mode of notifying the remaining time until the end of the favorable game state) displayed after the end of the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, for example, even if a different value is set in the time-saving counter 203h, the display mode of the remaining time notification mode displayed after the end of the jackpot game may be made common (for example, displaying "70"), and when the number of times that the special pattern lottery is executed during the favorable game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the display mode of the remaining time notification mode may be variably displayed in accordance with the actual value of the time-saving counter 203h.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to allow the player to grasp the game state that was set when the previous jackpot was won after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, during an advantageous game state, the player can be made to simultaneously play a game aiming to win a jackpot and a game to grasp the game state that was set in the past, and this makes it possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game during the advantageous game state.

In addition, in this control example, the value set in the time-saving counter 203h is varied according to the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, and the display content of the remaining time notification mode (mode of notifying the remaining time until the end of the advantageous game state) displayed after the end of the jackpot game allows the player to predict the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot. However, the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot may be suggested at other times as long as the timing allows the player to grasp the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot after the fact. For example, the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot may be notified to the player by a jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game. In this case, a presentation may be executed that directly notifies the player of the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot, or a presentation may be executed that suggests the duration of the advantageous game state that will be set after the end of the jackpot game.

Returning to FIG. 223, the explanation will continue. The fall lottery table 202da is a data table in which the judgment value of the fall lottery counter Cd1, which will be described later, is stored. If the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 obtained when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (at the time of initial entry) matches any of the judgment values specified in the fall lottery table 202da, it is set to transition to a low probability state of the special pattern (to fall).

Here, the contents of the fall lottery table 202da will be explained with reference to FIG. 224(b). FIG. 224(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the fall lottery table 202da. As shown in FIG. 224(b), the fall lottery table 202da specifies two judgment values, "0, 1", as judgment values that are judged as a fall in the special symbol's high probability state. Here, the fall lottery counter Cd1 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 999". Of the 1000 possible values of the fall lottery counter Cd1, there are two judgment values that are judged as a fall, so the probability of falling (transitioning to a low probability state of the special symbol) in the special symbol's high probability state is 1/500.

In addition, in the fall lottery table 202da in this control example, only the judgment value for judging whether or not a fall will occur in the special symbol's high probability state (judgment value for the special symbol's high probability state) is specified, and no judgment value for the special symbol's low probability state is specified. This is because it is a waste of processing to judge whether or not to transition to the special symbol's low probability state when the special symbol's low probability state is already in effect.

In this control example, the drop lottery table 202da is compared with the drop lottery counter Cd1, which is updated periodically, to determine whether or not to transition (drop) from the special symbol high probability state to the special symbol low probability state. In other words, the timing of transition from the high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), which is the most advantageous state for the player among the advantageous game states, to the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), which is one of the advantageous game states but is more disadvantageous to the player than the high probability state, can be made random. This allows the player to play while expecting the high probability state to continue as long as possible.

In this control example, after the jackpot game ends, the maximum duration (50 times) of the high probability state of the special symbol is determined by the value of the probability change counter 203i, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to continue for a period longer than the maximum duration (50 times). In other words, based on the lottery result of the fall lottery, no matter when the high probability state of the special symbol transitions (falls) to a low probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, the game state transitions from the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) to the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol), so the timing of winning the fall lottery is not known to the player based on the frequency of playing the normal symbol win game.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, during a favorable game state (high probability state of normal symbols), it is difficult for the player to know whether the current game state is a probability variable state or a time-saving state, so it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the content of the suggestive effects that retroactively suggest the game state that was set at the time of winning the jackpot.

In this control example, whether or not there will be a transition (fall) from a high probability state of a special pattern to a low probability state of a special pattern was determined by lottery (determination), but a transition to another state may also be determined by lottery (determination). For example, whether or not there will be a transition from a high probability state of a normal pattern to a low probability state of a normal pattern may be determined by a lottery executed for each change. This makes it possible to randomize how long the advantageous game state will continue, so that players can play in the hope that the advantageous game state will continue for each change. Also, for example, it may be possible to configure it so that it is possible to determine by lottery whether or not there will be a transition from a low probability state of a special pattern to a high probability state of a special pattern.

In addition, in this control example, the above-mentioned falling lottery is configured to be executed every time a special pattern lottery is performed, but this is not limited thereto. For example, the ease of executing the falling lottery may be varied depending on the type of special pattern for which the special pattern lottery is executed. For example, the falling lottery may be configured to be executed more easily when a second special pattern lottery, which is mainly executed during a high probability state of normal patterns, is performed than when a first special pattern lottery is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a high probability state of special patterns transitions to a low probability state due to a falling lottery executed based on the first special pattern lottery being performed, making it difficult for the player to play advantageously.

In addition, a number of times determination means for determining the number of times the fall lottery is executed at the execution timing of the fall lottery may be provided, and the number of times the fall lottery is executed when the execution trigger of the fall lottery is established may be configured to be different. In this case, it is preferable to design the range of the number of times determined by the number of times determination means to be "0 to 5", and the average value to be 1 time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to separate the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed from the number of times the fall lottery is executed, so that it is more difficult to understand at what timing the high probability state of the special pattern transitions to a low probability state. In this case, it is preferable to provide a suggestion means capable of suggesting the number of times determined by the number of times determination means (the number of times the fall lottery is executed), and to suggest to the player a period in which it is easy to fall (a period in which multiple times are determined by the number of times determination means) and a period in which it is difficult to fall (a period in which 0 times are determined by the number of times determination means). In this way, it is possible to play while predicting the presence or absence of a fall based on the contents of the suggestion by the suggestion means.

Furthermore, in this control example, the execution of the special pattern lottery is used as the trigger for executing the fall lottery, but this is not limited to this. For example, the fall lottery may be configured to be executed when the normal pattern lottery is executed, or the fall lottery may be configured to be executed when the ball enters a specific winning hole (for example, the general ball entry hole 63) provided on the game board 13.

Next, referring to FIG. 225, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example will be described. As described above, this fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that it has a fall lottery function. It also differs in that the various performance contents set by the voice lamp control device 113 are configured to be able to execute performances based on the results of the fall lottery. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same contents are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions are omitted.

Figure 225(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example, and Figure 225(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth control example.

First, the configuration of ROM 222 will be described with reference to FIG. 225(a). As shown in FIG. 2254(a), this fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that it provides button operation performance selection 2 table 222df instead of button operation performance selection table 222f (see FIG. 148), but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the button operation effect selection 2 table 222df will be explained with reference to FIG. 226(a). FIG. 226(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the button operation effect selection 2 table 222df. As shown in FIG. 226(a), this fourth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the data table referenced when the special probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game has been changed from the special probability state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) to the special probability state selection 2 table 222df2, but otherwise is the same.

Here, the contents stipulated in the probability variable state selection 2 table 222df2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 226(b). FIG. 226(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the probability variable state selection 2 table 222df2. This probability variable state selection 2 table 222df2, like the probability variable state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) described above, is a data table that is referenced when selecting the presentation mode to be executed as the operation presentation when the probability variable state is set after the end of the big win game, and differs from the probability variable state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) in that the lottery result of the fall lottery has been added to the factors for selecting the presentation mode of the operation presentation, that a presentation mode that can suggest information based on the lottery result of the fall lottery can be selected, and that the selection ratio of each presentation mode has been partially changed. The rest of the contents are the same, and detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

In the probability change state selection 2 table 222df2, as in the probability change state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) described above, the timing and operation method when the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means), the acquired value of the performance counter 223f, and the setting status of the short fall flag 223da, which is set based on the lottery result of the fall lottery, are specified as the performance mode to be executed as an operation performance. The details of this short fall flag 223da will be described later, but it is a flag that indicates that the duration of the probability change state is a predetermined period (for example, the number of special pattern lotteries is 20 or less) due to winning the fall lottery, and is set to ON if the probability change state ends in a short period of time.

The area in the probability variable state selection 2 table 222df2 that is referenced when the short fall flag 223da is set to off has the same contents as those in the probability variable state selection table 223f2 (see FIG. 149) described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Here, we will specifically explain the contents of the areas that are referenced when the short fall flag 223da is set to on.

When the short fall flag 223da is set to on, during the first period (period when the number of special pattern changes is 1 to 20) in which the operation timing is a high-speed change period, the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "none" indicating that the operation effect is not executed, in the range of "150 to 189", "reach suggestion" indicating an effect that suggests whether the active change effect will be in a reach state during the third pattern change, in the range of "140 to 189", "state suggestion" indicating an effect to suggest the currently set game state, and in the range of "190 to 198", "state suggestion" indicating an effect to suggest the currently set game state. In addition, when the operation method is "long push", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode is transitioned is specified.

In addition, when the operation timing is within the normal time-saving variable period (second period), the operation method is "normal press", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "background mode transition" indicating a transition to background mode is specified, and in the range of "190 to 198", "state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the currently set game state is specified. In addition, when the operation method is "long press", the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", and "state suggestion" indicating an effect suggesting the currently set game state is specified.

And, when the operation timing is in a specific period (during the 50th special pattern change), the operation effect is not executed regardless of the operation method and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. Finally, when the operation timing is in the normal time-saving change period (third period), the operation method is "normal push", and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "background mode transition" indicating that the background mode will be switched to, and in the range of "190 to 198", "early fall notification" indicating an effect to notify that the probability change state was set after the previous big win game ended, but the fall lottery was won early and the game was switched to the time-saving state, is specified. Also, when the operation method is "long push", "past state suggestion" indicating an effect to suggest the game state that was set in the past (at the time when the "chance mode" was set (after the big win game ended)) is specified in the range of "0 to 198" of the acquired effect counter 223f.

As with the first control example described above, the various operation effects in this fourth control example may be based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, rather than on the lottery results for the special pattern variation executed this time. For example, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b may be used to determine in advance the timing of winning the drop lottery, and the operation effects may be configured to be executable based on the determination results. Specifically, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read in the order in which the special pattern lottery is executed, and it is determined whether the information indicating the value of the drop lottery counter cd1 included in each winning information indicates a value that wins the drop lottery. In this case, information corresponding to the value of the drop lottery counter cd1 that wins the drop lottery may be stored in advance in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the determination may be performed based on the stored information and the information indicating the value of the drop lottery counter cd1 included in the winning information.

In this control example, where the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b has the winning order of the special symbol lottery decided, that is, the second special symbol lottery is executed in priority to the first special symbol lottery, if there is no winning information for the second special symbol lottery that will win the drop lottery, a process is executed to calculate the remaining change time of the currently running special symbol change and the change time of the special symbol change corresponding to each of the winning information of the second special symbol lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b, and the period during which the drop lottery cannot be won, that is, the period during which the probability change state continues (the most advantageous period), is determined. Then, a most advantageous period suggestion presentation mode that notifies the player of the determined most advantageous period can be executed as an operation presentation.

By configuring in this way, the period during which the player will not win the drop lottery can be suggested (informed) to the player, allowing the player to play with peace of mind. In addition, the display mode of this most advantageous period suggestion can be configured to display at least a portion of the total time of each variation time resulting as the most advantageous period. This allows the player to understand at least the duration of the most advantageous period. In addition, by displaying the most advantageous period as a time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many times the special pattern lottery can be executed during the most advantageous period, so that even in a pachinko machine 10 in which a variation pattern with a longer variation time is set to have a higher possibility of winning the jackpot, a novel gameplay can be provided in which the player is made to expect that a short variation time will be set as the variation pattern of the special pattern variation.

As described above, when the operation performance is executed based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the operation performance may be executed immediately after the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means), or the operation performance may be executed at the timing when the player operates the frame button 22 (operation means) and the special pattern variation is newly started in the state where the performance mode of the operation performance is determined. In this case, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player that the operation of the frame button 22 (operation means) by the player has been accepted, and a notification means for notifying that a waiting period until the operation performance is executed is in progress. This can prevent the player from feeling suspicious about the fact that the operation performance is not executed despite the operation of the frame button 22. In addition, in the performance that notifies the player of the most advantageous period, the most advantageous period may be displayed not in time as described above, but in the number of times that the special pattern variation is executed. In addition, if it is determined that the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b contains winning information indicating that the drop-out lottery will be won, the system may be configured to calculate the period until the drop-out lottery is won and the high probability state of the special pattern transitions to a low probability state, and to execute a presentation suggesting that the drop-out lottery will be won or a presentation suggesting the remaining period until the high probability state of the special pattern ends.

<Regarding the control process in the fourth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 227 to Fig. 229, the control process contents executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this fourth control example that are different from the first control example described above will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this fourth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above in that it has a falling lottery function as described above and that the duration of the game state set after the end of the big win game has been changed, and the control contents relating to these differences are different. Specifically, the control contents of the main control device in the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example described above are different in that the special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S258 in FIG. 227) is executed instead of the special symbol jackpot determination process (see S208 in FIG. 158), the pre-reading process 4 (see S653 in FIG. 228) is executed instead of the pre-reading process (see S613 in FIG. 162), and the jackpot end process 4 (see S1960 in FIG. 229) is executed instead of the jackpot end process (see S1910 in FIG. 170), but are otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S258) will be explained with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S258). When this special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S258) is executed, the same process of S301 as the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158) is executed, and then it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203i is greater than 0 (S351). Here, if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203i is not greater than 0, that is, the special symbol is not in a high probability state (S351: No), the same processes of S302 to S307 as the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158) are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S351, if it is determined that the value of the probability bonus counter 203i is greater than 0, i.e., that there is a high probability of a special symbol (S351: Yes), then the acquired value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 is compared with the value specified in the fall lottery table 202da (S352), and it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won (S353).

If it is determined that the drop lottery has been won (S353: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203i is reset to 0 (S354), a drop command is set to indicate that the high probability state of the special symbol has transitioned to a low probability state (S355), and the same processes of S302 to S307 as the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158) are executed, and this process ends. In this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed with the low probability state of the special symbol set. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S353 that the drop lottery has not been won (S353: No), the processes of S353 to S355 are skipped, and the same processes of S302 to S307 as the special symbol jackpot determination process described above (see S208 in FIG. 158) are executed, and this process ends. In this case, the special symbol lottery (S302) is executed with the high probability state of the special symbol set.

As explained above, in this fourth control example, when the conditions for executing the special pattern lottery are met (when special pattern jackpot determination process 4 (see S258 in Figure 227) has been executed), the drop-out lottery is executed before the special pattern lottery is actually executed. By configuring it in this way, the special pattern lottery can be executed immediately in response to the result of the drop-out lottery, providing players with a fair game.

The timing of the fall lottery and the timing of the special symbol lottery may be configured to be different from that of this control example. For example, the fall lottery may be configured to be executed after the special symbol lottery is executed. In this case, the special symbol lottery is executed in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and the fall lottery is executed immediately thereafter. Therefore, by the time the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the high probability state of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (by the time the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed), an event occurs in which the fall lottery is won and the low probability state of the special symbol is set. When such a state occurs, for example, it is preferable to configure the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 to execute a fall notification effect to indicate that the currently executed special symbol variation is the last variation in which the special symbol lottery was executed in the high probability state, and that the next special symbol lottery will be executed in the low probability state of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, the player can pay more attention to the result of the special symbol variation being executed.

In addition, in this control example, when the drop lottery is won, a process is executed to transition the high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state before the next special symbol lottery is executed, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the drop lottery is won, the number of times the high probability state of the special symbol continues may be subtracted by 2 or more (the value of the probability change counter 203i is subtracted by 2 or more), or the remaining number of times that the special symbol lottery may be executed during the high probability state of the special symbol is set to a predetermined number (for example, 2 times). Even in such a case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the most advantageous game state (probability change state) will continue due to winning the drop lottery, so that the player can play with a sense of tension.

In this control example, if the drop-out lottery is not won, i.e., if the high probability state of the special pattern continues, no effect is executed to suggest or inform the player of this, making it difficult for the player to understand the period during which the high probability state of the special pattern continues (the period during which it continues); however, without being limited to this, the system may be configured to inform the player of some cases in which the drop-out lottery is not won. In this case, for example, the fall lottery table 202da may be configured to specify not only the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 that is determined to be a win (fall), but also a value that is determined to be a specific miss (for example, 998, 999), and when the value is determined to be such, a command indicating a specific miss may be set to execute an effect to indicate to the player that the result of the fall lottery is a specific miss. Alternatively, a command may be set to indicate that the result of the fall lottery is a miss, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command indicating that the result of the fall lottery is a miss, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to execute an effect indicating that the result of the fall lottery is a miss, and if it is determined that an effect should be executed based on the lottery, a miss effect may be executed.

Next, the contents of pre-reading process 4 (S653) in this fourth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 228. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the contents of pre-reading process 4 (S653). This pre-reading process 4 (S653) differs from the pre-reading process (see S613 in FIG. 162) executed in the first control example described above in that the types of counters read out in the process of reading out the various counters stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage areas (first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) are different, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

When pre-reading process 4 (S653) is executed, the first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, fall selection counter Cd1, and change type counter CS1 newly stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area (first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) are read (S751), and then the same processes of S702 to S705 as those executed in the pre-reading process executed in the first control example described above (see S613 in FIG. 162) are executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this fourth control example, in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 161), when a new lottery right for a special pattern (special pattern reserved) is acquired (when new winning information is stored in the special pattern reserved ball storage area), the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 is also read out in the pre-read process 4 (S653) that is executed, and a winning command including the acquired value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 is set and can be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. This makes it possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to determine whether the acquired special pattern reserved balls contain information indicating the value of the fall lottery counter Cd1 that will win the fall lottery. Therefore, it is possible to execute a suggestive performance that suggests the period until the fall lottery is won.

Next, the contents of jackpot end process 4 (S1960) will be explained with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot end process 4 (S1960). This jackpot end process 4 (S1960) differs from the jackpot end process of the first control example described above (see S1910 in FIG. 170) in that the processing contents for setting the value of the time-saving counter 203h are different, but the rest of the contents are the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations are omitted.

When jackpot end process 4 (S1960) is executed, first, the same processes of S2101 and S2102 as those of the jackpot end process of the first control example described above (see S1910 in FIG. 170) are executed, then the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and a value corresponding to the jackpot type are set in the time-saving counter 203h (S2153), a state command is set based on the currently set value of the special probability counter 203i and the value of the time-saving counter 203h (S2104), the jackpot in progress flag 203k and the special probability setting flag 203m are set to off (S2105), and this process ends.

The processing content of S2153 will now be described in detail. In this control example, the game status storage area 203g is configured to be able to temporarily store the current game status, the game status set at the time of the previous jackpot win, and the jackpot type to be selected in the event of a jackpot win. When the processing of S2153 is executed, the game status at the time of the jackpot win and the jackpot type stored in the game status storage area 203g are read out, and the value specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d is set in the time-saving counter 203h.

In this control example, the value to be set in the time-saving counter 203h is determined when the jackpot end process 4 is executed, i.e., when all rounds of play during the jackpot game are completed. By configuring it in this way, the value to be set in the time-saving counter 203h can be varied depending on whether or not a setting condition that can be satisfied during a round of play in a jackpot game, for example, a setting condition that is satisfied when a specific area (V gate 65V) is passed during a round game (V round game), is satisfied.

Regardless of the configuration used in this control example, for example, when the jackpot game starts or when the type of jackpot that has been won is selected, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be determined based on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, and a value according to the determined content may be set in the jackpot end process 4 (see S1960). By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to hold information indicating the game state at the time of winning the jackpot during the jackpot game period, so that the memory capacity can be reduced.

Next, referring to Figures 230 and 231, the control processing contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fourth control example are described below with respect to those executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. This fourth control example is significantly different from the first control example described above in that a fall lottery is executed, and the control processing contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 also differ in that processing related to the fall lottery is executed.

Specifically, the difference is that command determination process 4 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) is executed instead of command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 175). Since the other contents are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions are omitted.

First, the contents of command determination process 4 (S4162) will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 4 (S4162). As shown in FIG. 230, this command determination process 4 (S4162) differs from the command determination process of the first control example described above (see S4112 in FIG. 175) in that if it is determined that a jackpot-related command has not been received (S4217: No), then it is determined whether a fall command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4251), and if it is determined that a fall command has been received (S4251: Yes), the fall-related process (S4252) is executed. Note that if it is determined in the process of S4251 that a fall command has not been received (S4251: No), or after the fall-related process (S4252) has been executed, the process of S4219 is executed, which is the same as the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 175) of the first control example described above, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 231, the contents of the fall-related process (S4252) executed in command determination process 4 (see S4162 in FIG. 230) will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall-related process (S4252). This fall-related process (S4252) is a process executed when a fall command (see S355 in FIG. 227) is received, which is set when it is determined that the fall lottery has been won in the fall lottery executed by the main control device 110 (see S352, S353 in FIG. 227), and is intended to execute a process for determining the timing at which the fall command was received (the timing at which the high probability state of the special pattern ended).

When the fall-related process (S4252) is executed, first, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is read (S5501), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 80 or more (S5502). The value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times (the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the high probability state of normal symbols) set after the end of the jackpot game, and is decremented by one each time a special symbol lottery is executed. For example, if the number of time-saving times is set to 100 after the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won before the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 20. In other words, in the process of S5502, it is determined whether or not the fall lottery has been won early despite the high probability state of special symbols being set.

If it is determined in the process of S5502 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 80 or more (S5502: Yes), the short fall flag 223da is set to ON (S5503), the time-saving state is set in the slave state setting area 223g (S5504), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5502 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 80 or more (S5502: No), the process of S5503 is skipped, the process of S5504 is executed, and this process ends.

By setting the short fall flag 223da on in the processing of S5503, the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing (see S4107 in FIG. 186) determines that the frame button 22 has been operated during chance mode, and when selecting the presentation mode by referring to the probability change state selection 2 table 222df2 (FIG. 226(b)), a different data table than when the short fall flag 223da is set off is referenced to select the presentation mode. This allows the player to know the result of the fall lottery after the fact based on the presentation mode of the operation presentation executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

<Example of the second control>
Next, referring to Fig. 232, among the third pattern variation performances executed in the above-mentioned second control example, the reverse variation display performance (see Fig. 205(d)) which is a performance in which the variation direction of the sub-pattern fz is different from the variation direction of the main pattern sz will be described. Fig. 232 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed during the reverse variation display performance.

As described above, in the second control example, the main pattern sz, which includes identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern, and the sub-pattern fz, which is different from the main pattern sz, are configured to be independently displayable and controllable. For example, as shown in FIG. 202(b), the sub-pattern fz is displayed before the main pattern sz is displayed, and then the sub-pattern fz is displayed before the main pattern sz is displayed stationary, thereby enabling a reach line notice effect to be executed that notifies the player of only the stationary display position of the main pattern sz. In addition, as shown in FIG. 205(d), a reverse display effect is configured to be executed in which the sub-pattern fz is displayed stationary for a predetermined period (3 seconds) in a direction different from the direction of the main pattern sz in accordance with the start timing of the special pattern change.

The contents of this reverse variable display effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 232. First, a variable pattern command for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is sent from the main control device 110. Then, when the variable pattern command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, a process for determining the performance mode of the variable performance executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 (variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182)) is executed to determine the performance mode (variable pattern) for the main pattern sz. This makes it possible to reliably set the performance mode of the main pattern sz, which is the identification information (identification pattern) for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern, based on the result of the special pattern lottery executed by the main control device 110. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main pattern sz for indicating a lottery result different from the result of the special pattern lottery actually executed from being stopped and displayed.

After that, a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz based on the presentation mode of the main pattern sz determined by the sound lamp control device 113. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a presentation mode that results in a reach state has been set as the presentation mode for the main pattern sz, and if it is determined that a presentation mode that results in a reach state has been set, a process is executed to select the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz. Note that, if a presentation mode that results in a reach state has not been set as the presentation mode for the main pattern sz, a variation pattern corresponding to the presentation mode set for the main pattern sz is set for the sub-pattern fz. This allows the sub-pattern fz to be displayed in a variably synchronized manner with the main pattern sz, which is displayed in a variably manner in a presentation mode (variable pattern) set based on the lottery result of the special pattern. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed in a variably manner as if they were a pattern row arranged in a specific order.

In the above example, when the performance mode for the main pattern sz is in a reach state, the process for selecting the performance mode of the sub-pattern fz is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a performance mode that is a specific reach state (e.g., a super reach state) is set among the reach states, the process for selecting the performance mode of the sub-pattern fz may be executed. In some cases where the performance mode set for the main pattern sz is in a non-reach state, the process for selecting the performance mode of the sub-pattern fz may be executed. In other words, when the performance mode of the main pattern sz is set in a performance mode that indicates that the result of the special pattern lottery is likely to be a jackpot, it is sufficient to configure the process for selecting the performance mode of the sub-pattern fz to be easy to execute. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot just by setting (executing) a performance mode different from the normal performance mode (the performance mode synchronized with the performance mode of the main pattern sz) as the sub-pattern fz.

In the above example, when the process of selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is not executed, the presentation mode (synchronous presentation mode) corresponding to the presentation mode of the main pattern sz is set for the sub-pattern fz, and the presentation is configured to be synchronized with the presentation of the main pattern sz. As a result, the sub-pattern fz is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 to follow the display of the main pattern sz, so that the same display as the display of the third pattern in the first control example described above (see FIG. 122(b)) is executed. Therefore, the player can be made to think that the multiple main patterns sz and the multiple sub-patterns fz are displayed as a pattern sequence in a predetermined order (1 (main pattern sz) → triangle mark (sub-pattern fz) → 2 (main pattern sz) → ...) as shown in FIG. 122(b).

Therefore, when the presentation mode of the main pattern sz and the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz are set differently, a presentation that is unexpected for the player can be provided, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. Also, since the process for setting the presentation mode for the main pattern sz and the process for setting the presentation mode for the sub-pattern fz are set differently, the process for displaying the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz in a non-synchronized pattern can be easily executed. In other words, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to set the presentation mode (variation pattern) for all tertiary symbols (main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz) as in the first control example described above, when setting a presentation mode (variation pattern) in which only the variable display mode of the sub-symbol fz is varied, it is necessary to set a presentation mode (variation pattern) in which only the variable display mode of the sub-symbol fz is varied for all tertiary symbols (main symbol sz and sub-symbol fz); however, by configuring the presentation mode for the main symbol sz and the presentation mode for the sub-symbol fz to be independently configurable as in the second control example, it is only necessary to variably set the presentation mode for the sub-symbol fz, and the processing for setting the presentation mode for the tertiary symbols can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 232, the explanation will be continued. When the process of selecting the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is executed, first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special pattern is a jackpot or not, and the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is selected by referring to the determination result using a sub-pattern presentation selection table (not shown). Here, the sub-pattern presentation selection table (not shown) specifies the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz at a predetermined ratio in correspondence with the result of the special pattern lottery and the presentation mode set for the main pattern sz. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special pattern is a "jackpot" and "double reach" is set as the presentation mode of the main pattern sz, it is specified that "reach line notice presentation" is selected 60% of the time, "reverse variable display presentation" is selected 20% of the time, and "no sub-pattern presentation" is selected 20% of the time.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot" and "single reach" is set as the presentation mode of the main symbol sz, there is a 20% chance that a "reach line notice presentation" will be selected, a 20% chance that a "reverse fluctuation display presentation" will be selected, and a 60% chance that "no secondary symbol presentation" will be selected.

Furthermore, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a "miss" and "double reach" is set as the presentation mode of the main pattern sz, then it is stipulated that "reverse fluctuation display presentation" will be selected 40% of the time, and "no sub-pattern presentation" will be selected 60% of the time, and if "single reach" is set as the presentation mode of the main pattern sz, then it is stipulated that "reach line notice presentation" will be selected 5% of the time, "reverse fluctuation display presentation" will be selected 5% of the time, and "no sub-pattern presentation" will be selected 90% of the time.

When the "reverse variable display effect" is selected using the sub-symbol effect selection table (not shown) thus defined, a display mode selection process is then executed to select the display mode of the sub-symbol fz. In this display mode selection process, a process is executed to select the display mode of the sub-symbol fz to be used in the current third symbol variable effect (the performance mode of the sub-symbol fz), and the display mode of the sub-symbol fz is selected according to the result of the special symbol lottery and the set jackpot type. The display mode of the sub-symbol fz that can be selected here is the display mode stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, which was described with reference to FIG. 203(c) in the second control example described above.

In other words, in the display mode selection process executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a display sub-pattern mode command (display command) for specifying the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is set, and when the display control device 114 receives the set display sub-pattern mode command (display command), a process is executed to read out the corresponding image data from the character memory area 234a2.

In the display mode selection process, as shown in FIG. 203(c), for example, one of the display modes SD1 of the "triangle mark" which is the normal display mode of the sub-pattern fz, the display mode SD2 imitating "bubbles" which indicates a high probability of winning, and the display mode SD3 imitating the "number 16" which indicates that a favorable jackpot game (16 rounds) advantageous to the player will be played if the jackpot is won is selected. The display mode SD2 is easier to select when the result of the current special pattern lottery is a jackpot than when the result is not a jackpot (miss). Furthermore, the display mode SD3 is easier to select when a favorable jackpot game is played based on the result of the current special pattern lottery than when a favorable jackpot game is not played (when a jackpot is not won, or when a jackpot is won but a jackpot game other than the favorable jackpot game is played).

This configuration has the effect of making the player interested in both the presentation mode set for the sub-pattern fz and the display mode set for the sub-pattern fz, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Figure 232 shows a state in which the "reverse variable display effect" is executed as the effect mode of the sub-pattern fz, and the display mode SD2 imitating "bubbles" is set as the display mode of the sub-pattern fz, and the "reverse variable display effect" is executed in which the main pattern sz is displayed to vary leftward from the viewpoint of Figure 232, and the sub-pattern fz is displayed to vary rightward from the viewpoint of Figure 232. In this way, the main pattern sz and the sub-pattern fz are displayed to vary in opposite directions as the variable display of the third pattern (main pattern sz, sub-pattern fz) on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, so that a variable effect with a sense of surprise can be provided to the player. Furthermore, as an effect mode using the sub-pattern fz, the sub-pattern fz is displayed to vary in a variable display direction different from the variable display direction of the main pattern sz, so that the player can be easily informed that the effect mode of the sub-pattern fz is different from the normal effect mode.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 232, all of the sub-symbols fz displayed on the display surface are displayed in the display mode SD2 that imitates a "bubble" selected by the above-mentioned display mode selection process, but this is not limited to this, and only the display mode of one of the multiple sub-symbols fz may be changed. In this case, it may be configured so that only the display mode of the sub-symbol fz arranged near the main symbol sz that is finally stopped and displayed can be easily changed to the display mode selected by the above-mentioned display mode selection process. This makes it easier to predict the stopped display mode of the main symbol sz based on the display mode of the sub-symbol fz.

In addition, the display screen shown in FIG. 232 shows an example in which all sub-patterns fz displayed on the display surface are the same size, but the size (magnification ratio), rotation angle, translucency value, etc. of the sub-patterns fz may be set to be different. In this case, it is sufficient to change the values specified in the display data table (see FIG. 207) for displaying each sub-pattern fz.

In addition, FIG. 232 shows an example in which the display mode of the sub-pattern fz switches from the normal "triangle mark" display mode SD1 to a display mode imitating a "bubble" SD2 at the timing when the third pattern change starts, and a reverse change display performance is executed, but this is not limited to the above. The display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be switched in the period from when the previous third pattern change is stopped and displayed until the current third pattern change starts, as a timing before the third pattern change starts, or the display mode of the sub-pattern fz may be switched in the period from when the current third pattern change starts until it stops.

When the process of switching the display mode of the sub-pattern fz is executed during the period from when the previous third pattern change is stopped to when the current third pattern change is started, for example, it may be configured to analyze whether it is included in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b by a pre-reading process, and to change the display mode of the sub-pattern fz that is stopped when the next special pattern lottery (change) to be executed results in a specific lottery result (for example, a big win). In this case, the display mode used for the variation performance of the sub-pattern fz to be executed next is determined before the performance mode of the main pattern sz to indicate the lottery result of the next special pattern lottery (change) to be executed is set. In this way, by using the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the timing of notifying the player of each mode used for the performance mode of the third pattern change to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery can be made different, so that the player can be interested in the third pattern change performance to be executed.

In addition, when a process for switching the display mode of the sub-pattern fz is executed during the period from when the current third pattern change starts to when it stops, the sub-pattern fz may be displayed in the display mode before the switch at the time when the third pattern change starts, or the sub-pattern fz may be configured to be displayed after the process for switching the display mode is executed.

<Switching control of the switching valve executed during a big win game>
In each of the above-mentioned control examples, as explained using the jackpot operation setting process (see S1906 in FIG. 169) and the V round process (see S2251 in FIG. 219), when it is determined that a specific round game (V round game) has started, the control process for the switching valve 65y (see FIG. 120(b) or FIG. 213(b)) is executed. In other words, the specific round game (V round game) is executed only when the jackpot game to be executed is a sure-variable jackpot game, and the specific round (V round game) is not executed when the jackpot game is a normal jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it was possible to suppress the ball from entering the V (passing through to the specific area (V gate 65V)) during the normal jackpot game, but since it is necessary to change the content of the control process for the switching valve 65y depending on the type of jackpot game to be executed, there was a problem that the processing load during the jackpot game was increased.

Therefore, a control process other than the control process contents for the switching valve 65y used in each of the above control examples may be used. For example, a V-round game is also executed in a normal jackpot game, but the conditions for ending the V-round game may be different from those in a guaranteed jackpot game, so that balls cannot enter the variable winning device 65 during the V-round game. In addition, as in the fourth control example in which the above-mentioned V-round process (see S2251 in FIG. 219) is executed, when the switching valve 65y is controlled based on the number of winning balls after the V-round game is executed, the number of winning balls for controlling the switching valve 65y in a normal jackpot game may be set to a number greater than the number of winning balls for ending the V-round game (for example, 10 balls), so that the switching control of the switching valve 65y is not executed.

The control contents (switching conditions) of the switching valve 65y may be set to be the same for both the special jackpot game and the normal jackpot game, and even if the ball passes through the specific area (V gate 65V) during the normal jackpot game, the passage may not be processed effectively. In other words, even if the ball passes through the specific area during the normal jackpot game, the high probability state of the special symbol may not be set during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, regardless of the type of jackpot game, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the jackpot game (since the opening period of the jackpot game has been set), switching control is executed so that the switching valve 65y is in an open state for a predetermined period of time, and the opening pattern of the opening/closing door 65b during the jackpot game is configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot game, thereby making it possible to configure the probability of winning a V prize different for each type of jackpot game.

In the second control example and the modified example of the second control example described above, both the presentation mode (variation pattern) of the main pattern sz and the presentation mode (variation pattern) of the sub-pattern fz are configured to be set (selected) by the voice lamp control device 113, but without being limited to this, the presentation mode (variation pattern) may be configured to be set by the display control device 114. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that only the presentation mode of the main pattern sz, which indicates the result of the special pattern lottery, is set by the voice lamp control device 113, and the presentation mode of the sub-pattern fz is set by the display control device 114.

The second control example and a modified example of the second control example have been explained above, but when setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation that dynamically displays various patterns executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, it is sufficient that the presentation mode is set independently for each type of dynamically displayed pattern and the display control is executed independently, and a configuration other than that shown in the above-mentioned control example may be used.

For example, multiple display layers for displaying the sub-pattern fz may be provided, and the sub-pattern fz may be overlapped and variably displayed, as in the modified example of the second control example described above with reference to FIG. 211.

In addition, multiple display layers are provided, and display priorities are set for each layer. When the display modes displayed on the display layers overlap on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the display mode displayed on the layer with the highest priority is displayed so that it is visible to the player. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, a display layer without a priority may be provided, and the display modes displayed on multiple display layers may be displayed overlappingly on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. In this case, for example, when executing the "reverse variable display performance" referred to in FIG. 232, the display may be controlled (semi-transparency value and magnification rate of each sub-pattern are set) so that an overlapping sub-pattern is displayed in which a sub-pattern fz imitating a "bubble" is displayed within the sub-pattern fz of a "triangle mark", and the display may be displayed in a display mode that suggests in advance that the display mode of the sub-pattern fz will change from a "triangle mark" to a "bubble".

As explained above, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, the game state can be set to a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and two types of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state can be set to a special probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). Furthermore, the time-saving state is set after the special probability state ends.

When an advantageous game state is set, the system is configured to notify the player of the period until the next normal state is set; for example, when a high probability state is set, the period until the time-saving state that is set after the high probability state ends and the normal state is set, is the duration of the advantageous game state. By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified of the period until the advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player ends, rather than the period until the currently set game state ends, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

In addition, when a period during which multiple advantageous game states continue in succession is notified as the duration of one advantageous game state, the content and frequency of the various effects executed by the third pattern display device 81 are configured to allow the player to grasp the detailed game state that is currently set. By configuring it in this way, the player can predict the current game state while being aware of the period until the normal state is set, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, of the multiple advantageous game states, the most advantageous game state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player is set first, and then the normal advantageous game state (time-saving state) that is less advantageous than the most advantageous game state (high probability state) is set; however, any configuration is acceptable as long as multiple advantageous game states can be set in succession, and for example, in addition to the normal state, high probability state, and time-saving state, a potential state (high probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns) is also set as game states, and in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that the potential state is more advantageous to the player than the high probability state, the game states in which the special pattern or normal pattern has a high probability state (high probability state, time-saving state, potential state) are advantageous game states that are advantageous to the player. The value of the probability-change counter 203i, which indicates the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues, is configured to be set to be greater than the value of the time-saving counter 203h, which indicates the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues.

In the pachinko machine 10 thus configured, for example, by configuring the value of the probability change counter 203i to be "100" and the value of the time-saving counter 203h to be "50" as a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game, the probability change state is set as the advantageous game state after the end of the jackpot game, and then the potential probability state is set. Even in such a case, as in the first control example and the fourth control example described above, it is preferable to notify the period during which multiple advantageous game states continue in succession, that is, the period until the potential probability state set after the probability change state ends, as the duration of one advantageous game state. Also, in this case, it is preferable to configure the device to be capable of executing a transition suggestion performance that can suggest to the player whether or not the currently set game state may transition to another game state during the duration of the advantageous game state. This allows the player to understand only that there is a possibility of transitioning to another game state during the advantageous game state, and therefore provides the player with the fun of predicting the content of the game to be executed during the advantageous game state. Furthermore, if there is a possibility that the currently set game state will transition to another game state during the duration of the advantageous game state, the system may be configured to execute an advantageous transition suggestion display that can suggest whether the game state after the transition will be more advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the system may be configured to execute a suggestion display that suggests the timing at which the game state will transition during the advantageous game state. By configuring the system in this way, the player can enjoy playing during the period until the normal state is set while still knowing the period.

In the first and fourth control examples described above, the advantageous game state is ended when a jackpot is won during an advantageous game state. However, the most advantageous game state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player is set first among the multiple advantageous game states, and then the normal advantageous game state (time-saving state) that is less advantageous to the player than the most advantageous game state (high probability state) is set. Therefore, winning a jackpot during an advantageous game state is not disadvantageous to the player. However, in a pachinko machine 10 configured such that the normal advantageous game state (high probability state) that is more advantageous to the player is set first among the multiple advantageous game states, and then the most advantageous game state (latent probability state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal advantageous game state (high probability state) is set, it may be more advantageous for the player to have the most advantageous game state set without winning a jackpot than to have a jackpot win during the normal advantageous game state.

Therefore, it is preferable to configure the system so that a period effect is executed that allows the player to distinguish between periods in which winning a jackpot as a result of the special pattern lottery executed during a favorable game state is advantageous to the player and periods in which it is disadvantageous to the player. This allows the player to pay close attention to the results of the special pattern lottery based on the content identified by the period effect, thereby improving the interest of the game. Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 has a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player if set during a normal favorable game state and a jackpot type that is not disadvantageous to the player even if set during a normal favorable game state as the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, it may be configured to execute an effect that suggests whether or not the jackpot is advantageous to the player based on the content of the period effect and the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won. This allows the player to be interested not only in the game of aiming to win a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, but also in the timing of winning the jackpot and the jackpot type that is set when the jackpot is won.

In the first control example described above, one of multiple (two) types of advantageous game states (high probability state, time-saving state) is set after the jackpot game ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that a normal state can be set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to have the player play in the hope that an advantageous game state will be set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in the first control example described above, a presentation mode (super chance mode) that notifies the player that a high probability state has been set after the end of the jackpot game, and a presentation mode (chance mode) that notifies the player that a favorable game state (high probability state or time-saving state) that is more favorable to the player than the normal state has been set after the end of the jackpot game are set according to the presentation result of the jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game. This makes it possible to prevent meaningless presentations from being executed in which a chance mode is set after the end of the jackpot game, despite the notification that a high probability state will be set after the end of the jackpot game being displayed in the jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game.

For the technology of the first control example configured in this way, for example, a presentation mode selection means is provided that allows the player to arbitrarily select the presentation mode to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and by making any presentation mode selectable in advance by the presentation mode selection means, the presentation mode of the jackpot game presentation executed during the jackpot game and the presentation mode to be set after the end of the jackpot game may be set in accordance with the content selected by the presentation mode selection means. Specifically, the presentation mode selection means is configured to select between a "full notification mode" that notifies the game state to be actually set and a "chance notification mode" that notifies only that a favorable game state has been set as the presentation mode to be set after the end of the jackpot game, and the player can select either presentation mode by operating the operation means (frame button 22) during the period when the special symbol lottery is not being executed on the pachinko machine 10.

A storage means is provided for temporarily storing the presentation mode selected by the player, and information for identifying the presentation mode stored in the storage means is displayed on a portion of the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (e.g., the sub-display area Ds), so that the currently set presentation mode is always identifiable by the player. Then, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the presentation mode stored in the storage means is read out. For example, when the "complete notification mode" is stored in the storage means, a V notification effect is executed as a jackpot game effect to inform the player that the ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65v (V winning) during the jackpot game, and when the ball actually passes through the specific area (V gate) 65v, an ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that a high probability state will be set after the jackpot game ends (see Figs. 127(b) and 127(d)). When the ball does not pass through the specific area, an ending screen is displayed in a display mode indicating that a time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends (see Figs. 127(a) and 127(c)). When a high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, a "super chance mode" (see Fig. 131(a)) indicating that the current game state is a high probability state is set, and when a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, a "chance mode" (see Fig. 128(a)) indicating that the current game state is a time-saving state is set. By configuring it in this way, the player can be reliably notified of the game state that will be set, and whether or not a V win has occurred, which is the trigger for determining the game state.

On the other hand, if the "chance notification mode" is stored in the storage means, the V notification effect described above is not executed as a jackpot game effect, and the "chance mode" is set after the jackpot game ends regardless of the game state to be set. By configuring in this way, the player can play without being notified of the game state to be set and the presence or absence of a V win, which is the trigger for determining the game state. If the presentation mode selection means has not selected a presentation mode, the "initial mode" is stored in the storage means, as in the initial state of the pachinko machine 10, and as in the first control example described above, whether or not to execute a V notification effect during a jackpot game is determined by lottery, a jackpot game effect based on the lottery result is executed, and the presentation mode after the jackpot game ends is set based on the presentation result of the jackpot game effect.

This configuration allows players to seamlessly choose the presentation mode they desire, preventing them from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Furthermore, as a means for selecting various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10, a performance frequency selection means may be provided that allows the player to arbitrarily select the selection ratio of various performance modes (see FIG. 148) that are selected for the operation effects executed when the chance mode is selected. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a performance frequency selection means that allows the player to select the selection ratio so that the selection ratio of various performance modes selected when the probability bonus state is set and when the time-saving state is set can be greatly deviated or the difference in the selection ratio can be made small. Even when such a configuration is used, any performance mode desired by the player can be provided without any sense of discomfort, preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early on.

In the above-described first to fourth control examples, a pachinko machine 10 has been described that is configured so that a high probability state (high probability state) of a special symbol is set after the end of a jackpot game when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate 65V) provided in the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. In this way, as a configuration that can provide a player with a special game different from the bonus game based on the ball passing through a specific area while a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is being executed, For example, if a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, which is a lottery result different from the big prize, a second bonus game (small prize game) different from the bonus game (jackpot game) can be played, and a specific area can be provided through which a ball can pass that enters the variable ball entry means (which may be variable entry device 65, or another entry device may be provided separately) that opens during the second bonus game, and if the ball passes through the specific area during the second bonus game, a bonus game (jackpot game) can be played after the second bonus game (small prize game) has ended.

As a configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in each of the above-mentioned control examples, as shown in FIG. 233, regardless of which game state is set, a game ball can be entered into the first ball entrance 64, which can trigger the execution of a first special pattern lottery, by performing a left-handed play, and a game ball can be entered into the second ball entrance 640, which can trigger the execution of a second special pattern lottery, by performing a right-handed play.

<Fifth control example>
Next, the fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 234 to Fig. 270. The fifth control example differs from the first control example described above in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 have been partially changed, and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. Also, the fifth control example differs in that the control contents executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. The rest of the contents are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same contents, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the first control example described above, the game state can be set to a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), or a probability-change state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and the probability state of each symbol (special symbols, normal symbols) can be shifted from a low probability state to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game described above and when other end conditions (for example, an end condition that is met when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed reaches a predetermined number of times) are met, the probability state of each symbol (special symbols, normal symbols) can be shifted from a high probability state to a low probability state.

In other words, the system was configured so that unless a jackpot was won in the special pattern lottery, the opportunity to shift the probability state of each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) from a low probability state to a high probability state would not be established. In the first control example configured in this way, the jackpot game in which many prize balls can be awarded to the player and the setting of a high probability state (high probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) in which a lottery advantageous to the player is likely to be executed are both executed based on winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, so that a variety of benefits can be awarded to players who win a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, and players can be motivated to play with the aim of winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery.

However, in the first control example described above, the probability state of each symbol can be shifted to a high probability state only when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. This causes a problem in that players who have not won a jackpot in the special symbol lottery are not given the bonus, and players who have not won a jackpot for a long period of time lose their motivation to play.

In contrast to this, in this fifth control example, a trigger other than a jackpot win in the special pattern lottery is provided as a trigger for transitioning the probability state of the normal pattern from a low probability state to a high probability state, and the system is configured so that a trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established in some lottery results (misses) in which the result of the special pattern lottery is different from a jackpot win.

In other words, even players who do not win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery can be given a bonus that is different from the jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, in one special pattern lottery, the lottery result in which the jackpot game is executed and the lottery result in which the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) is set can be provided to the player separately, making it easier to diversify the types of lottery results that are advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in this fifth control example, the ease with which a trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols is established varies depending on the game state that is set. Specifically, when the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the game state, it is configured to be possible to determine whether or not a time-saving win (whether or not a trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols is established) in addition to whether or not a jackpot has been won when a special symbol lottery is executed, and when a game state other than the normal state is set, it is configured to be possible to determine only whether or not a jackpot has been won when a special symbol lottery is executed.

By configuring it in this way, when the normal state is set, the triggers for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern are set to be the triggers that can be established when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery and the triggers that can be established when a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery, and in game states other than the normal state, the triggers for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern are set to be the triggers that can be established when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery. In other words, the normal state, where it is possible to determine whether or not a time-saving win has been won, is configured to have more triggers set for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern than game states other than the normal state.

As a result, the normal state, in which each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) is set to a low probability state and which is the game state in which it is most difficult to win in each symbol lottery (a game state that is disadvantageous to the player), makes it easier to set a high probability state for the normal symbol than other game states, and can increase the motivation of players playing in the normal state.

In addition, in this fifth control example, the game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set is configured to make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery than the game state (normal state, second high probability state) in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved) is configured to be memorizable (reserved and memorizable) up to a predetermined number (4). And, the game is configured to make it easier to win the time-saving lottery in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery.

In other words, when the game state transitions from any game state (probability bonus state, time-saving state) in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set to the normal state (when the game state transitions from an advantageous to an unfavorable game state for the player), the game is configured to make it easier to win the time-saving state if a second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state after the transition based on the execution right for the second special symbol lottery that was reserved and stored during the high probability state for normal symbols before the transition.

By configuring it in this way, even if the game state has shifted from favorable to unfavorable to the player, the player can be made to execute a special symbol lottery for a predetermined period of time that makes it easier for the player to return to a favorable game state, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing significantly when the normal state, which is a game state that is unfavorable to the player, is set. Also, in order to execute more second special symbol lotteries during the normal state, it is possible to motivate the player to play to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 until the last moment when the high probability state of the normal symbol ends, in order to end the high probability state of the normal symbol when the upper limit (4) of the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (reserved special symbol 2) has been acquired.

In the first control example described above, the high probability state of the normal symbol was set only based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, after the jackpot game ends, a high probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) or a time-saving state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) can be set as an advantageous game state favorable to the player. If the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state continues until 50 special symbol lotteries are performed, and then the time-saving state is set until 50 special symbol lotteries are performed, that is, until the number of special symbol lotteries since the jackpot game ends reaches 100. On the other hand, if the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving state is configured to continue until 100 special symbols are performed.

In contrast to this, as described above, in the fifth control example, in addition to when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the high probability state of the normal pattern can be set when a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery, and the ease of establishing the end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern is different between the high probability state of the normal pattern (first time-saving) that is set based on winning a jackpot and the high probability state of the normal pattern (second time-saving) that is set based on winning the time-saving win.

Specifically, the number of time-saving times set as the end condition for the second time-saving is configured to be greater than the number of time-saving times set as the end condition for the first time-saving. In this way, when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set, it is possible to set a high probability state for a normal pattern with a different degree of advantage depending on the setting trigger (the trigger for setting the high probability state for a normal pattern). This makes it possible to interest the player not only in whether or not a high probability state for a normal pattern is set, but also in the game process of what trigger sets the high probability state for a normal pattern, making it easier for the player to continue playing.

In this fifth control example, the ease of achieving the time-saving end condition (number of time-saving times) is varied in order to vary the degree of advantage of the bonus given to the player in the high probability state of normal patterns, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to vary the ease of obtaining the reserved memory for the second special pattern lottery (opening pattern of the electric role 640a) between when the first time-saving is set and when the second time-saving is set, or to vary the degree of advantage of the bonus given when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery during the high probability state of normal patterns (for example, the number of prize balls given during jackpot play or the type of game state set after the jackpot play ends).

First, referring to FIG. 234, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 234 is a front view of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 234, the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example is significantly different from the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 119) in that the through gate 67 provided in the left area of the game board 13 (the area to the left of the variable display unit 80) has been removed, and the second ball entrance 640 to which the electric role 640a is attached and the variable winning device 65 that allows the game ball to win at least when a jackpot game is executed are arranged in different positions. Also, it is different in that the internal configuration of the variable winning device 65 has been changed. The rest of the contents are the same as those in the first control example described above, and the same elements are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 234, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the through gate 67, which is the ball entry port for establishing the chance to draw a lottery for a normal symbol, is arranged only in the right area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to draw a lottery for a normal symbol while playing a left-handed game in which the game ball is shot toward the left area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 and the game ball enters the first ball entry port (winning port) 64.

The first ball entrance 64 is disposed below the variable display unit 80. The variable display unit 80 is disposed so as to divide the game area on the game board 13 into left and right, with a left flow path (left area) through which game balls can flow formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80, and a right flow path (right area) through which game balls can flow formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. Game balls that flow down the left flow path (area) do not flow down the right flow path (area), and game balls that flow down the right flow path (area) do not flow down the left flow path (area).

Below the variable display unit 80, a lower area (common area) is formed in which both the game balls that have flowed down the left flow path (area) and the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path (area) can flow down, and an outlet 66 is provided at the bottom of the lower area (the bottom of the game board 13). The first ball entrance 64 is located at a position where both the game balls that have flowed down the left flow path and the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path can enter. In addition, it is possible to configure it so that only the game balls that flow down the left flow path can enter the first ball entrance 64, different from the configuration of the fifth control example. By configuring it in this way, when a right-hand hit game is performed in which the game ball flows down to the right area, for example, when a game is performed in which the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 by a right-hand hit game, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the first special pattern lottery is executed.

The second ball entrance 640 is located at a position where game balls that have flowed down the right flow path can enter more easily than game balls that have flowed down the left flow path. The second ball entrance 640 has a horizontally long rectangular opening formed in the game board 13, a flow path through which game balls can flow down, and a photosensor that detects game balls that have entered the opening is provided. An electric device 640a is provided on the front side of the opening as a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing plate that can close the opening, and an opening solenoid (not shown) is provided to drive the opening and closing to the front side with the opening and closing plate as an axis. The opening of the second ball entrance 640 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter or it is difficult to enter. When a normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening solenoid is driven to tilt the electric device 640a downward toward the front, temporarily creating an open state that makes it easier for the ball to enter the opening of the second ball entrance 640, and the device operates to repeat this open state and the normal closed state a predetermined number of times determined by the game state.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (special symbol lottery) is held when a winning ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. In the special symbol lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery) and whether or not a time-saving win has been won to set a high probability state for normal symbols (time-saving lottery), and is configured to determine the type of jackpot if a jackpot has been won (if a jackpot has been won), and to determine the type of time-saving win if a time-saving win has been won.

In this fifth control example, different jackpot types are defined for the first special symbol that triggers a lottery when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second special symbol that triggers a lottery when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and a 16R sure-win jackpot (jackpot A5) and a 6R sure-win jackpot (jackpot B5) are defined for the first special symbol. Also, a 16R sure-win jackpot (jackpot A5), a 6R sure-win jackpot (jackpot C5), and a 6R sure-win jackpot (jackpot D5) are defined for the second special symbol. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only show whether the lottery result is a jackpot as the stopping symbol after the fluctuation ends, but also show a symbol according to the jackpot type if it is a jackpot.

Here, "16R Probability Jackpot (Jackpot A5)" refers to a type of jackpot in which a maximum of 16 rounds of jackpot play is played, and a probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot play ends. In this fifth control example, different periods can be set as the period during which the high probability state of the special symbols continues (special symbol high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbols continues (normal symbol high probability period). For jackpot A5, the special symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 60 times until the 60th special symbol change stops, and the normal symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 60 times until the 60th special symbol change stops.

In other words, for the jackpot A5, the same conditions (60th special symbol change stop) are stipulated for the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period. Therefore, when the jackpot type is set to A5, a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the 60th special symbol change is stopped and displayed during the high probability state, both the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period end and the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set. By configuring it in this way, the game state transitions directly from the game state in which the high probability state for normal symbols is set to the normal state, making it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery based on the lottery right for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) acquired during the high probability state for normal symbols in the normal state.

"6R Probable Jackpot (Jackpot B5)" is a type of jackpot in which a maximum of 6 rounds of jackpot play is played, and a probable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot play ends. The end condition for this jackpot B5 to end the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period is the same as that of the above-mentioned jackpot A5 (the condition that is met when the 60th special symbol variation is stopped and displayed). In other words, jackpot B5 is a jackpot type that differs from jackpot A5 only in the number of rounds (number of rounds) played during the jackpot play.

As described above, in the fifth control example, in the normal state, which is a state in which the probability of a normal symbol is low, it is configured so that it is difficult to make the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640, so that a left-handed play is performed in the normal state to make the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 and to execute the first special symbol lottery. Then, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, either jackpot A or jackpot B is set as the jackpot type. In other words, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, which is mainly executed in the normal state, a jackpot game with a different number of rounds according to the set jackpot type is executed, and a probability variable state with the same end condition is set after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring in this way, regardless of which jackpot type is set, the player can play under the same conditions after the jackpot game ends. In the fifth control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, a jackpot type that differs only in the number of rounds of the jackpot game can be set, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure the type of game state that is set after the jackpot game ends to be different depending on the jackpot type that is set, or to configure the end conditions for the same game state to be different. In addition, it is also possible to configure the content of the jackpot game (number of rounds, etc.) and the content of the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends (game state type, end conditions) to be different.

In this case, the types of the first benefit (a jackpot game) and the second benefit (a high probability state of a normal symbol) that are granted to a player based on a jackpot win of a special symbol may be predefined from a jackpot type corresponding to a combination in which the first and second benefits are most advantageous to the player to a jackpot type corresponding to a combination in which the first and second benefits are most disadvantageous to the player, and one of the jackpot types may be set when a jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage of the benefit that can be granted after winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery can be made to differ greatly based on the jackpot type that is set, so that the player can be interested in the jackpot types that are set. In order to prevent a large difference in the advantageous degree of the bonus given based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, for example, a jackpot type that combines a first bonus with a low advantageous degree and a second bonus with a high advantageous degree, or a jackpot type that combines a first bonus with a high advantageous degree and a second bonus with a low advantageous degree, that is, a jackpot type other than the jackpot type in which the advantageous degrees of the first bonus and the second bonus defined for the jackpot type are both high or low, may be predefined, and one of the multiple defined jackpot types may be set.

"6R Probability Jackpot (Jackpot C5)" is a type of jackpot in which a maximum of 6 rounds of jackpot play is played, and a probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot play ends. In this fifth control example, different periods can be set as the period during which the high probability state of the special symbols continues (special symbol high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbols continues (normal symbol high probability period). For jackpot C5, the special symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 60 times until the 60th special symbol change stops, and the normal symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 56 times until the 56th special symbol change stops.

In other words, the jackpot C5 specifies different end conditions for ending the special high probability period (high probability end condition) and the normal high probability period (time-saving end condition), and is configured so that the time-saving end condition is met before the high probability end condition is met. Therefore, when the jackpot type is set to jackpot C5, the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the 56th special pattern change is stopped and displayed during the high probability state, the normal high probability period ends before the special high probability period, and the second high probability state (high probability state of special pattern, low probability state of normal pattern) is set. Then, when the fourth special pattern change is stopped and displayed after the second high probability state is set (a total of 60 times after the jackpot game ends), the time-saving end condition is met, and the game state transitions to set the normal state.

Here, the period when the probability variable state is set is a game state in which it is easy to acquire the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved) because a high probability state of normal patterns is set, and is a game period during which the player is made to play with a right hand, whereas the period when the second probability variable state is set is a game state in which it is difficult to acquire the special pattern 2 reserved, as in the normal state, because a low probability state of normal patterns is set. Therefore, it is a game period during which the player is made to play with a left hand. In other words, when the probability variable state transitions to the second probability variable state, the second special pattern lottery based on the special pattern 2 reserved acquired during the probability variable state will be executed during the second probability variable state. In this fifth control example, the second special symbol drawing is executed with priority over the first special symbol drawing, and a maximum of four reserved special symbols 2 can be stored. Therefore, even if the player transitions from the special symbol state to the second special symbol state after the maximum number (four) of reserved special symbols 2 has been acquired, four second special symbol drawing will be executed until the second special symbol state ends (until the high probability of special symbol period ends), and the number of reserved special symbols 2 stored at the time the game state transitions from the second special symbol state to the normal state will be zero.

In other words, when jackpot C is set as the jackpot type, a normal pattern high probability period (probability change state) is set after the jackpot game ends, during which the second special pattern lottery is mainly executed, but a game is executed in which it is difficult to execute the second special pattern lottery based on the reserved special pattern 2 acquired during the normal pattern high probability period in the normal state. Therefore, compared to jackpot B, which is the same jackpot type in that the same jackpot game is executed and a probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, this is a jackpot type that is less favorable than jackpot B in terms of the ease of executing the second special pattern lottery when the special pattern high probability period and normal pattern high probability period end and the normal state is set.

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this fifth control example, the same presentation mode (pullback mode) is set when the high probability state ends and the second high probability state is set, and when the high probability state ends and the normal state is set. In other words, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the second high probability state or the normal state is set after the high probability state ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the second special pattern lottery executed after the normal high probability period ends was executed during the normal state or the second high probability state, and therefore it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the executed second special pattern lottery can win the time-saving lottery (whether the time-saving lottery is being executed).

Therefore, even if the second probability change state is set, players can play while hoping for a time-saving win.

In addition, in this fifth control example, after the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the normal symbol high probability period (period during which the high probability state of normal symbols continues) ends before the special symbol high probability period (period during which the high probability state of special symbols continues), and the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is entered. Specifically, the special symbol 2 reserved in the probability variable state is entered into the second probability variable state. The period from the end of the normal high probability period to the end of the special high probability period (period during which the second probability variable state continues) is set to the period during which the special pattern variation is executed four times so that all of the special pattern variations are consumed during the period (high probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state in which the special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery) based on the acquired reserved special pattern 2 is executed is different depending on the game state (normal state, second probability variable state, etc.) that is set after the probability variable state. In other words, a configuration that can vary the number of times the special pattern lottery that can be executed in a favorable game state (normal state) that is advantageous to the player can be used as the game state in which the special pattern lottery is executed based on the acquired reserved special pattern.

For example, a jackpot type may be set in which the end condition for the normal high probability period is 58 special pattern changes and the end condition for the normal high probability period is 60 special pattern changes, so that a part of the reserved special pattern 2 acquired during the high probability state is consumed during the second high probability state (high probability state of special pattern, low probability state of normal pattern) and the remaining reserved special pattern 2 is consumed during the normal state. In this case, if the high probability period ends with the maximum number of reserved special pattern 2 acquired during the high probability state and the second high probability state is entered, two reserved special pattern 2 will be consumed during the second high probability state, and the second special pattern lottery based on the remaining two reserved special pattern 2 can be executed in the normal state. In this way, when each end condition is specified so that the high probability period ends before the high probability period when the high probability state is set, the number of times the second special pattern lottery can be executed in the normal state can be changed simply by changing the difference between each end condition.

In addition, in this fifth control example, when there is both a reserved memory of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved) and a reserved memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved), the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed in priority over the first special symbol lottery. Therefore, as described above, the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reserved acquired during the probability change state is executed in priority regardless of whether or not there is a special symbol 1 reserved (whether or not there is a special symbol 1 reserved acquired before the special symbol 2 reserved). When the game state in which it is easy to acquire the special symbol 2 reserved (high probability state of normal symbols) ends, that is, immediately after the game state in which it is difficult to acquire the special symbol 2 reserved (low probability state of normal symbols) is set, the number of special symbols 2 reserved decreases, but this is not limited to this. The first special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 1 reserved and the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reserved may be configured to be executed according to the order in which each special symbol reserved was acquired.

"6R Probability Jackpot (Jackpot D5)" is a type of jackpot in which a maximum of 6 rounds of jackpot play is played, and a probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the jackpot play ends. In this fifth control example, different periods can be set as the period during which the high probability state of the special symbols continues (special symbol high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbols continues (normal symbol high probability period). For jackpot D5, the special symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 60 times until the 60th special symbol change stops, and the normal symbol high probability period is set as the period during which the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes 65 times until the 65th special symbol change stops.

In other words, the jackpot D5 specifies different end conditions for ending the special high probability period (high probability end condition) and the normal high probability period (time-saving end condition), and is configured so that the high probability end condition is met before the time-saving end condition is met. Therefore, when the jackpot type is set to jackpot D5, the high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the 60th special pattern variation is stopped and displayed during the high probability state, the special high probability period ends before the normal high probability period, and the time-saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) is set. Then, when the 5th special pattern variation is stopped and displayed after the time-saving state is set (a total of 65 times after the jackpot game ends), the time-saving end condition is met, and the game state transitions to set the normal state.

The period during which the time-saving state is set is a high probability state for normal symbols, just like the probability state, so it is a game state in which it is easy to acquire the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reservation), and is a game period during which the player is made to play with a right hand. In other words, when the probability state transitions to the time-saving state, the player is made to continue to play with a right hand and play to acquire the special symbol 2 reservation. In this fifth control example, the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, and since the system is configured to be able to store up to four special symbol 2 reservations, the number of special symbol 2 reservations stored at the time of transition from the time-saving state to the normal state after the maximum number of special symbol 2 reservations (four) have been acquired will be four.

In other words, when jackpot D5 is set as the jackpot type, a normal symbol high probability period (probability change state) is set after the jackpot game ends, during which the second special symbol lottery is mainly executed, and a game that makes it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery in the normal state based on the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the normal symbol high probability period is executed, just like jackpot B5. Therefore, the same jackpot game is executed, and the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, and then the special symbol high probability period and normal symbol high probability period end, and in terms of the ease of executing the second special symbol lottery in the normal state set, it is as advantageous as jackpot B5.

In the time-saving state, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is set to a lower probability (1/300) compared to the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, so the time-saving state is a game state in which it is more difficult to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery than in the probability of winning a jackpot. Therefore, in the jackpot B5 that transitions from the probability of winning a jackpot to the normal state, during the final period of the special symbol change that is executed during the probability of winning a jackpot, a performance (change performance) to indicate whether or not a jackpot has been won in the change and a notification (notification performance) to encourage players to acquire the maximum number of reserved special symbols 2 during the probability of winning a jackpot must be executed in duplicate, and there is a problem in that performances with different purposes are executed in duplicate, resulting in the execution of a performance that is difficult for players to understand.

In contrast, if the end conditions of the special pattern high probability period and the normal pattern high probability period are specified so that the probability state transitions to the time-saving state and then transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state, as in the case of the jackpot D5, only the effect (change effect) for indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won in the change can be executed during the final change period of the special pattern executed during the probability state, so that the player can easily focus on the special pattern lottery executed during the high probability state of the special pattern (special pattern high probability period), that is, the change effect for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery with a high expectation of winning the jackpot. Then, by executing a guide notification (notification effect) to encourage the player to acquire the special pattern 2 reservation up to the upper limit during the final change of the time-saving state, it is possible to make it difficult for the period during which the change effect for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery with a high expectation of winning the jackpot to be executed and the period during which the notification effect for encouraging the player to acquire the special pattern 2 reservation up to the upper limit to overlap during the normal pattern high probability period.

Therefore, the jackpot D5 is an advantageous jackpot type compared to the jackpot B5 in terms of the clarity of the effects that are executed.

During the high probability state of the normal symbol (normal symbol high probability period), not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time for which the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol). When the electric device 640a is in an open state (open state), it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than when the electric device 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the time-saving state, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the number of times the special symbol lottery is held can be increased.

In the time-saving state, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role 640a opens in one hit may be increased compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning the second pattern may not be changed, and at least one of the time the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens in one hit may be changed. In the time-saving state, the time the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens in one hit may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second pattern may be changed to be increased compared to the normal state.

In the game area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes (ball entry holes) 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 (start winning), and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the normal pattern start hole (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 242), so that, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device 83 displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entry 640 is activated (released) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the second symbol to change is set to be shorter during the time-saving mode than during the normal game mode. As a result, during the time-saving mode, the second symbol changes and is displayed in a short time, so that the winning lottery (the number of times the second symbol changes and is displayed) can be held more than during the normal game mode. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric device 640a of the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, during the time-saving mode, it is possible to make it easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. In addition, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, four balls are paid out to the player as prize balls to the upper tray 17, so that it is easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. This allows the player to play while suppressing the reduction in the number of balls he or she has, and allows the lottery for special symbols to be held during the time-saving mode while suppressing the investment for lending additional balls.

Note that if the state is made such that it is easier for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during time-saving by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during time-saving than during normal play, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is attached to the game board in the area of the right flow path of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow some of the balls that are launched onto the game board and flow down the left side of the game board to pass through. When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, an "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second symbol reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second symbol reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in this control example, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of normal pattern start ports (through gates) 67 that are assembled is not limited to one, but may be multiple (e.g., two). In addition, the assembly position of the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, the left of the variable display unit 80. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the second pattern reserved lamp may not be lit.

A first ball entrance 64 is provided below the variable display unit 80, through which a ball can enter. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first prize entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. In this embodiment, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol start gate (through gate) 67, no prize ball is paid out, but the invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls, such as one ball.

The first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are also prize entrances through which four balls are paid out when a ball enters the prize entrance. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be different, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

An electric device 640a is attached to the second ball entrance 640. This electric device 640a is configured to be able to open and close, and is usually in a closed state, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67, the electric device 640a opens, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

As mentioned above, during the time-saving mode, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate and time-saving mode, the time that the electric device 640a is open is longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the time-saving mode, it is possible to create an environment in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 than during normal play.

Here, the probability of winning the jackpot when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, in the second special symbol lottery executed when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a time-saving state can be granted as a bonus other than winning the jackpot in a specific game state (normal state). In other words, in some cases where the result of the second special symbol lottery is other than winning the jackpot (miss), a bonus of setting the time-saving state can be granted after the special symbol fluctuation is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the second special symbol lottery executes a special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery executed when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64.

In other words, the player can play the game while hoping that a high probability state of normal symbols will be set, which will make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery.

Next, referring to Figures 235 to 239, the content of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this fifth control example will be explained. This fifth control example is significantly different from the first control example described above in that, in addition to winning the jackpot, a time-saving win is also provided as a result of the special pattern lottery, and here, the effects related to the time-saving win will be mainly explained. Note that a detailed explanation of the elements (display modes) that are the same as those in the first control example described above will be omitted.

235(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 235(a), when a jackpot game is executed, a rabbit-like character 801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an effect is executed to congratulate the player on the award (jackpot game). During a jackpot game, the third symbol indicating that a jackpot has been won is continuously displayed as a stopped symbol in the small display area Dm1 formed in the upper right of the main display area Dm, and in the example shown in FIG. 235(a), the third symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol in the display mode of "777". This small display area Dm1 is an area in which the third symbol that is displayed in a variable manner in response to the first special symbol is displayed, and while the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner indicating that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Also, to the left of the main display area Dm1, there are formed a small display area Dm4 in which a guide notification mode is displayed to guide the player on how to play during a jackpot game, a small display area Dm5 in which a round number notification mode is displayed to notify the player of the current round number (number of rounds played), and a small display area Dm6 in which acquisition information is displayed to show a value corresponding to the number of winning balls acquired in games that are continuously played without going through the normal state. In the example shown in FIG. 235(a), the words "Right Hit" are displayed in the small display area Dm4, "2 Rounds" in the small display area Dm5, and "140P" in the small display area Dm6.

In other words, the display guides the player to play right-hand during a jackpot play, notifies the player that the second round of the jackpot play is currently being played, and shows that the number of prize balls won in this jackpot play is 140. In this way, by configuring the display to display information about a jackpot play, the playing method during the jackpot play, and information about the prizes won, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game experience.

Then, when all the rounds during the jackpot game are over and the ending period of the jackpot game is set, an ending screen is displayed to suggest to the player in advance the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends, as shown in FIG. 235(b). FIG. 235(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. The example shown in FIG. 235(b) shows a display screen that notifies the player that a performance corresponding to a probability change state (chance time) will be set after the jackpot game ends, and that the period of the chance time will be 56 times (56 special pattern changes). Then, in the center of the main display area Dm1, a display mode in which the character 801 continues to run from left to right is displayed as a display mode to notify the player in advance of the performance content executed during the chance time.

In this way, by using a portion of the time before the high probability state is actually set (during the jackpot game) to inform the player that the high probability state will be set after the jackpot game ends, the duration of the set high probability state, and an explanation of the performance content that will be executed during the high probability state, it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy for the player to understand, as it is possible to allow the player to understand in advance the content of the game that will be executed in the future.

Next, the contents of the chance time effect executed during the probability change state will be explained with reference to FIG. 236. FIG. 236(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during chance time, and FIG. 236(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the final change of chance time. During chance time, the character 801 continues to run in the main display area Dm1, and an effect is executed in which a big win is announced by catching the V icon 801v displayed on the screen. As described above, during the probability change state, a high probability state of normal patterns is set, so a game in which a right-hand hit game is used to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 and a second special pattern lottery is executed (right-hand hit game), which is an advantageous game method for the player.

Therefore, "Right Hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm4 to guide players to play with a right hit. Then, a remaining period notification mode is displayed in the small display area Dm7 to indicate the period until the chance time ends. In FIG. 236(a), the words "50 remaining" are displayed as a display mode to indicate that there are 50 remaining special pattern variations that can be performed before the chance time ends.

Here, Chance Time is an effect that is executed in response to the probability variable state, and the timing at which Chance Time ends is the timing at which the probability variable state ends. Here, in this fifth control example, depending on the type of probability variable jackpot in which the probability variable state is set after the end of the jackpot game, after the probability variable state ends, there are cases where a normal state is set (jackpot A5, B5), a second probability variable state is set (jackpot C5), or a time-saving state is set (jackpot D5). Regardless of which type of jackpot is set, the effect screen at the end of Chance Time shown in FIG. 236(b) is displayed during the special pattern change that ends the probability variable state (final special pattern change in the probability variable state).

The example shown in FIG. 236(b) shows an example of a presentation screen at the end of the chance time when the second probability state or normal state, that is, the high probability state of the normal pattern transitions to a low probability state with the end of the probability state, is entered after the probability state ends. In the main display area Dm1, a comment "Enter pullback mode after the chance time ends" is displayed to indicate that the low probability state of the normal pattern is set. Then, as a game guidance mode encouraging players to acquire the maximum number of reserved special pattern 2 during the period when the high probability state of the normal pattern continues, that is, during the period when it is easy to acquire reserved special pattern 2, a comment "Hit to the right to accumulate reserved numbers" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and a small display area Dm9 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm to show the number of reserved special pattern 2 that has already been acquired.

In the small display area Dm9, reserved icons that can inform the player of the upper limit of the special chart 2 reserved that can be acquired and the number of reserved special charts 2 that have been acquired are displayed, and the first reserved icon h1 is displayed corresponding to the first reserved special chart 2, the second reserved icon h2 is displayed corresponding to the second reserved special chart 2, the third reserved icon h3 is displayed corresponding to the third reserved special chart 2, and the fourth reserved icon h4 is displayed corresponding to the fourth reserved special chart 2. In FIG. 236(b), since three reserved special charts 2 have been acquired, the first reserved icon h1, the second reserved icon h2, and the third reserved icon h3 are displayed in a display mode (black in the figure) to indicate that they have been acquired, and the fourth reserved icon h4 is displayed in a display mode (white in the figure) to indicate that they have not been acquired. This makes it possible to easily inform the player whether or not the upper limit of reserved special charts 2 has been acquired.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, when all four reserved icons displayed in the small display area Dm9 have been acquired, that is, when the maximum number (four) of reserved special symbols 2 has been acquired during the final variation of the special symbol in the probability variation state, no new reserved special symbols 2 can be acquired even if the player continues playing right-handed, and since this is the final variation of the special symbol in the probability variation state, the reserved special symbols 2 are not consumed during the probability variation state. Therefore, even if the player continues playing right-handed, a display mode (e.g., "MAX") is displayed in the small display area Dm9 to indicate that the maximum number of reserved special symbols 2 has been acquired, and the text "Right hit" displayed in the small display area Dm4 is displayed in a different display mode from the display mode before the maximum number of reserved special symbols 2 was acquired, and a display mode (e.g., the text size is reduced) that indicates the low need for right-handed play is displayed. This makes it difficult for the player to continue playing right-handed in vain.

The pull-back mode is an effect that is set in response to the period during which the second special symbol lottery is executed in a low probability state for normal symbols (normal state, second probability state). In this fifth control example, it is configured so that the time-saving win can be achieved in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). In other words, during the pull-back mode, not only the jackpot win but also the special symbol lottery with the possibility of winning the time-saving win is executed, thereby increasing the possibility of the time-saving state (high probability state for normal symbols) being set.

Next, referring to FIG. 237, the content of the effects executed during the pullback mode will be explained. FIG. 237(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the pullback mode starts, and FIG. 237(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a time-saving win occurs during the pullback mode.

When the pull-back mode is set, as shown in FIG. 237(a), treasure chests 810a to 810d are displayed in a number corresponding to the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired, and an effect is executed in which the treasure chests are opened in accordance with the change in the second special symbol. Then, an effect is executed in which a display mode showing the lottery result of the corresponding second special symbol appears from within the treasure chest.

When the pull-back mode begins, the secondary display area Ds displays the following comments to explain the effects during the pull-back mode: "If 'V' comes out of the treasure chest, you win the jackpot; if 'Time' comes out, you get a time-saving bonus" and "Open the treasure chest."

In the fifth control example, the change time of the second special symbol change executed during the pull-back mode is configured to be determined regardless of the number of second special symbol changes executed during the pull-back mode, and an effect of opening one treasure chest is executed for the change period of one second special symbol change, but this is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to configure it so that an effect of opening one treasure chest can be executed using the change times of all second special symbol changes executed during the pull-back mode, and if the lottery result of even one of the second special symbol changes executed during the pull-back mode is a jackpot or time-saving win, an effect to show the lottery result can be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the number of changes of the second special symbol changes executed during the pull-back mode.

In addition, in this fifth control example, the pull-back mode is set when either the normal state in which the time-saving lottery is actually executed, or the second special probability state in which the time-saving lottery is not executed is set, that is, when the game transitions from the special probability state to a game state in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set (normal state, second special probability state). In other words, in the pull-back mode when the second special probability state is set, a performance in which "time" does not appear from the treasure chest is executed as a performance result.

In this way, by configuring the game to execute the same presentation (pull-back mode) in a game state in which a time-saving lottery can be executed and in a game state in which a time-saving lottery cannot be executed (is difficult), it is possible to set in advance a pull-back mode in which a presentation result indicating a time-saving win is likely to be displayed and a pull-back mode in which a presentation result indicating a time-saving win is unlikely to be displayed as the presentation result of the pull-back mode. In this case, it is possible to suggest to the player whether the pull-back mode currently set is a pull-back mode in which a presentation result indicating a time-saving win is likely to be displayed (advantageous pull-back mode) or a pull-back mode in which a presentation result indicating a time-saving win is unlikely to be displayed (unfavorable pull-back mode).

In this fifth control example, the type of background displayed during the pull-back mode can be used to suggest to the player whether the pull-back mode being executed this time is an advantageous pull-back mode or not, and the display screen shown in FIG. 237(a) displays a background image that resembles "heaven" as the background type to suggest that the advantageous pull-back mode is highly likely.

In other words, in this fifth control example, the background type of the pull-back mode can be determined according to the set game state without reading ahead (pre-determining) the results of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved special pattern 2 that has already been acquired. By configuring it in this way, no matter what background type of background image is displayed, it is possible to make it easier to keep the possibility of winning the time-saving win or the jackpot, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

If the time-saving bonus is won during the pull-back mode, the effect shown in FIG. 237(b) is executed. FIG. 237(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content displayed when the time-saving bonus is won in the third second special symbol drawing during the pull-back mode, where a treasure box 810a and a treasure box 810b are displayed with a cross mark as a history display mode to indicate that the second special symbol variation has already been performed twice, and an effect is executed in which a display mode appears from a treasure box 810c indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol variation being performed (the third second special symbol variation) is a time-saving bonus, and "Time" x 10000" is displayed as a display mode to indicate that the lottery result is a time-saving bonus and the number of time-saving bonuses granted is "10000 times", that is, in effect, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) will be granted until the next big win is won. Additionally, the bottom right side of the main display area Dm can clearly display the remaining number of second special pattern lotteries that can be performed during the pullback mode, including the second special pattern variation that is currently being performed.

Next, the content of the performance that is executed when the time-saving win is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the pull-back mode will be explained. In this fifth control example, the system is configured so that the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues (normal symbol high probability period) is more likely to be set longer (the normal symbol high probability period is less likely to end) when the time-saving win is won in the special symbol lottery compared to when the probability variable state is set based on winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery. Specifically, in some cases of winning the time-saving win, the system is configured to be able to set a time-saving state (long time-saving) in which the normal symbol high probability period continues until the number of times the special symbol fluctuation has been executed reaches 10,000 without winning a jackpot.

Then, if the time-saving is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during the pull-back mode and the long time-saving is set, the presentation screen shown in FIG. 238(a) is displayed. FIG. 238(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the extended time executed when the long time-saving is set. When the long time-saving is set, the jackpot is almost always won in the special symbol lottery before the number of times the special symbol fluctuation is executed reaches 10,000 times, so as shown in FIG. 238(a), when the long time-saving is set, "infinite (shown as a symbol in the figure)" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a remaining period notification mode to indicate the remaining period of the normal symbol high probability period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues.

This configuration allows the player to play during the time-saving state without worrying about the remaining period of the normal high probability period, and it also eliminates the need to provide an area in the small display area Dm7 capable of displaying a five-digit number, allowing the small display area Dm7 to be made smaller, allowing the display area of the main display area Dm to be effectively used for other effects. In addition, the secondary display area Ds displays the comment "Keep hitting to the right until the next jackpot" as a notification to inform the player that the time-saving state (normal high probability period) will continue until the next jackpot is won.

When a long time-saving feature is set, the time-saving state will almost always continue until the next big win, based on probability. However, if the number of special symbol changes exceeds 10,000 times without a big win after the long time-saving feature is set, the high probability period of normal symbols will end, and the content displayed on the display screen will differ from the actual gameplay, causing distrust among players. Therefore, if the number of special symbol changes executed after the long time-saving feature is set exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 9,850 times), the display screen during the long time-saving feature is configured to be different.

Figure 238 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the number of times that special pattern variations have been performed during the long time reduction has reached 9900 times. As shown in Figure 238 (b), when the number of times that special pattern variations have been performed since the long time reduction was set exceeds a predetermined number of times, "100 times remaining" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a remaining period notification mode to indicate the remaining period of the normal high probability period, and a performance mode in which the character 801 runs with a tired expression is displayed in the main display area Dm. By configuring in this way, even if a normal high probability period in which the time reduction state can actually continue until the next big win is set, if a situation occurs in which the normal high probability period may actually end, the specific remaining period can be notified to the player, and a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

Next, referring to FIG. 239, the contents of the presentation when the time-saving state is set after the chance time ends will be explained. FIG. 239 is a diagram showing an example of a preparation time presentation screen executed during the time-saving state after the chance time ends. As described above, when the type of the special jackpot is set to jackpot D5, the special jackpot state transitions to the time-saving state, and the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state. During the time-saving state, the preparation time presentation is executed. This preparation time is a presentation executed during the period in which the time-saving state is set, and during the period of the final special pattern change in the time-saving state, a mode is displayed that encourages the player to acquire the special pattern 2 reservation up to the upper limit, similar to the final special pattern change in the special jackpot state shown in FIG. 236(b) described above.

Next, the content of the background types displayed during the pull back mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 240(a). FIG. 240(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the background types displayed during the pull back mode and the content indicated by each background.

As shown in FIG. 240(a), in this fifth control example, four background types (heaven, night, evening, day) can be displayed as background types during the pull-back mode. And, depending on the type of background displayed, the player can be suggested the expectation of a special prize (jackpot, time-saving win) during this pull-back mode.

A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 250, but in this fifth control example, when setting the pull-back mode (when transitioning from the special probability state to the second special probability state or the normal state), one of four mode types can be determined based on the number of reserved special charts 2 that have been acquired, the type of game state after the transition, and whether or not a jackpot or time-saving win has been won in the reserved state, and the background type corresponding to the determined mode type can be displayed as the background during the pull-back mode.

The mode types during the pullback mode are defined so that the expectation of the bonus is different, and there are four mode types from mode A, which is the most advantageous to the player, to mode D, which is the least advantageous to the player. "Mode A" is a mode in which the possibility of winning a jackpot or time-saving win during the pullback mode is extremely high, and "heaven" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, when a background imitating heaven is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, it is possible to easily make the player understand that there is a high possibility that some bonus will be granted by the time the pullback mode ends. Next, "Mode B" is a mode in which there is the second highest possibility of winning a jackpot or time-saving win during the pullback mode, and "night" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, when a background imitating night is displayed as the background during the pullback mode, it is possible to easily make the player understand that there is a second highest possibility of winning some bonus by the time the pullback mode ends. "Mode C" is a mode in which there is the third highest possibility of winning a jackpot or time-saving win during the pullback mode, and "evening" is defined as the corresponding background type. In other words, when a background simulating evening is displayed as the background during the pull-back mode, it is possible to make the player more easily understand that there is a slightly higher possibility that some kind of bonus will be awarded before the pull-back mode ends. Finally, "Mode D" is a mode in which there is a low possibility of winning the jackpot or time-saving win during the pull-back mode, and "daytime" is specified as the corresponding background type. In other words, when a background simulating daytime is displayed as the background during the pull-back mode, it is possible to make the player more easily understand that there is a low possibility that some kind of bonus will be awarded before the pull-back mode ends.

In addition, in this fifth control example, if the number of reserved special symbols 2 at the time of entering the pull-back mode is not the upper limit, the high mode mode type is not selected. Furthermore, if the number of reserved special symbols 2 at the time of entering the pull-back mode is not the upper limit, the mode type is determined without determining whether or not a time-saving lottery is executed in the second special pattern lottery executed during the pull-back mode. In other words, in order to make it easier to predict the mode type of the pull-back mode, it is necessary to transition to the pull-back mode when the upper limit number of reserved special symbols 2 has been acquired.

By configuring it this way, players can be motivated to play in an attempt to obtain up to the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 when in a special bonus state or a time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 240(b), the suggestion modes for indicating the lottery results of the second special symbol variation executed during the pull-back mode will be described. FIG. 240(b) is a diagram showing the types of suggestion modes during the pull-back mode and the relationship between the suggestion contents indicated by each suggestion mode. As shown in FIG. 240(b), as the suggestion modes during the pull-back mode, suggestion modes (Suggestion A to Suggestion D) that change the display mode of the treasure chest (see FIG. 237) or change the display mode of the character 801 until the treasure chest is opened are set with reference to the suggestion mode selection table 222db (see FIG. 251) described later.

Specifically, the suggestion types can be set to "Suggestion A" or "Suggestion B" depending on the expected probability of winning the jackpot or time-saving bonus during the corresponding fluctuation, and the suggestion types can be set to "Suggestion C" or "Suggestion D" depending on the set game state.

When "Suggestion A" is selected, a treasure chest of a different color (gold) than usual is displayed as the display mode of the treasure chest 810c displayed during the pullback mode (see FIG. 237(b)). When a gold treasure chest corresponding to this "Suggestion A" is displayed, it suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that the player has won the jackpot or time-saving feature during the corresponding variation. When "Suggestion B" is selected, a larger treasure chest than usual is displayed as the display mode of the treasure chest 810c displayed during the pullback mode (see FIG. 237(b)). When a gold treasure chest corresponding to this "Suggestion B" is displayed, it suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that the player has won the jackpot or time-saving feature during the corresponding variation. Note that the configuration is such that there is a higher possibility of winning the jackpot or time-saving feature when "Suggestion A" is selected than when "Suggestion B" is selected.

When "Suggestion C" and "Suggestion D" are selected, the character 801 displayed during the pullback mode (see FIG. 237(b)) is displayed with an ornament, and the character 801 is displayed in a different manner from normal. The currently set game state is suggested to the player according to the type of ornament displayed.

When "Suggestion C" is selected, as shown in FIG. 237(b), an ornament 801w resembling an angel's halo is displayed on the character 801, suggesting to the player that the currently set game state is likely to be normal, and when "Suggestion D" is selected, an icon resembling the word "chance" is displayed above the character 801's head, suggesting to the player that the game state is likely to be normal. Note that the system is configured so that the normal state is more likely to be set when "Suggestion C" is selected than when "Suggestion D" is selected.

In this way, in this fifth control example, the mode type of the pull-back mode is determined according to the game situation at the time the pull-back mode is set, and the suggestive mode for the special symbol variation executed during the pull-back mode is determined. By determining the mode type and the suggestive mode type in a combined manner, it becomes possible for the player to more accurately predict the current game situation. This makes it possible to arouse interest in the various presentation modes being executed for the player.

<Game flow in the fifth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 241, the game flow in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 241 is a diagram showing the game flow in the fifth control example, that is, the flow of transition of the game state. As shown in FIG. 241, in the fifth control example, the game state can be set to the normal state (special pattern 1 normal, special pattern 2 normal), time-saving state (first time-saving, second time-saving), probability variable state, and second probability variable state, and various game states can be set according to the result of the jackpot judgment in the special pattern lottery and the result of the time-saving winning judgment.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 242 to Fig. 251. Fig. 242 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. Note that, among the electrical configuration in this fifth control example, the description of the same contents as the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned first control example (see Fig. 137) will be omitted.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing a jackpot, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing special symbols, drawing normal symbols, setting the display in the first symbol display device 37, setting the display in the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display in the third symbol display device 81. Various counters for controlling these processes are provided in the RAM 203. Here, referring to FIG. 243, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram showing the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to draw special symbols, draw normal symbols, set the display in the first symbol display device 37, set the display in the second symbol display device 83, and set the display in the third symbol display device 81.

The first winning random number counter C1 used to draw the special symbols and the settings for the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 use the following: the first winning type counter C2 used to select the type of big win for the special symbol; the stop type selection counter (C3) used to select the type of stop for a miss in the special symbol; the initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1; the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern; and the time-saving type selection counter CC1 used to select the time-saving type when a time-saving win is won.

The second winning random number counter C4 is used to select the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the normal symbol fluctuation pattern are used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and they are loop counters that return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 156), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 167), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to balls entering the first ball opening 64 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4), and a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to balls entering the second ball entrance 640 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4). The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 and the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the variable type counter CS1, and the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640.

When the conditions for starting the special pattern (variation conditions) are met, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the various values stored in the reserved first area of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b that contain information about the special pattern corresponding to the special pattern type for which the next lottery will be executed are shifted to the special pattern execution area, and the special pattern variation based on the various stored values begins.

In this control example, a configuration is used in which there are two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), but this is not limited to this, and there may be only one type of special symbol. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area for the corresponding special symbol type are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and special symbol variation based on the various stored values is initiated. By configuring in this way, even in a pachinko machine 10 that uses multiple special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be smoothly executed.

Furthermore, as in this control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has multiple special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), it may be configured so that the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) may be configured to have a special symbol execution area. This makes it possible to execute the next special symbol variation promptly when the start conditions for each special symbol are met.

In the fifth control example, the jackpot winning judgment value and the time-saving winning judgment value are different so that the time-saving winning can be achieved when the jackpot is not won as a result of the special pattern lottery, but this is not limited to this, and the jackpot winning judgment value and the time-saving winning judgment value may be configured to overlap at least in part. By configuring in this way, the lottery results of only winning the jackpot, only winning the time-saving winning, and overlapping winning of both the jackpot winning and the time-saving winning can be provided to the player depending on the acquired judgment value (the value of the first win random number counter C1). In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that a more advantageous benefit is given to the player in the case of overlapping winning than in the case of winning only one of the two, and for example, it is preferable to configure the time-saving state set based on overlapping winning to be more difficult to end than the time-saving state set based on the other winning.

By configuring it in this way, players can play in the hope of winning multiple times.

In addition, in this control example, in addition to the lottery results of the special symbol being a big win or a miss, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss, it is configured to be possible to set a time-saving state (a state with a high probability of a normal symbol) without executing a winning game. However, without being limited to this, for example, in some cases where the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss, it may be possible to win a small prize that can be awarded to the player with a smaller bonus than when the big win is won (a bonus different from when the big win is won). By configuring in this way, even if the big win is not won, it is possible to provide an opportunity to award a bonus to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. In this case, a small prize type counter is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the value of the acquired small prize type counter can be configured to be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and can be configured to be referenced when the lottery for the special symbol is executed.

In addition, if the special pattern lottery allows a small jackpot to be won, the game state transition content based on winning a big jackpot and the game state transition content based on winning a small jackpot may be configured to be different. For example, when a big jackpot is won, the game state may be transitioned to the normal state at the start of the big jackpot game, and a new game state may be set after the big jackpot game ends based on the set big jackpot type. When a small jackpot is won, the game state at the time of winning the small jackpot is maintained and a small jackpot game is executed, and the game state does not transition even after the small jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, the presence or absence of a transition in the game state and the content of the transition can be varied depending on the type of win (big win, small win), so it is possible to provide a wide variety of games. In addition, it may be configured so that one special pattern lottery can have four possible results: a big win, a small win, a time-saving win, and a miss, and the bonus that can be won in the special pattern lottery may be different depending on the type of special pattern.

In this case, for example, a jackpot win and a time-saving win can be specified as the bonuses that can be awarded when a first special pattern lottery is executed, and a jackpot win and a small bonus win can be specified as the bonuses that can be awarded when a second special pattern lottery is executed. In addition, when the same game state is set, the player can select the type of special pattern lottery to be executed by selecting the direction in which the game ball is fired (by selecting left-handed play or right-handed play). By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for the player to select the type of bonus (additional bonus) other than a jackpot win.

In addition, in this embodiment, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b that corresponds to the ball entering (passing through) the through gate 67, which is made up of four reserved areas (first reserved areas), and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.

When the normal symbol start condition (change condition) is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b are shifted to the normal symbol execution area, and the normal symbol change based on the various stored values is initiated.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 243. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 899) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 899 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 899). In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 899. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 110 is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 167).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the first winning random number 5 table 202da stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and a jackpot for the special pattern is determined when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number 5 table 202da. In addition, the value of the random number that will result in a time-saving win in the special pattern lottery is set by the time-saving win random number 5 table 202de stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and if the value of the first win random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that will result in a time-saving win set by the time-saving win random number 5 table 202da, it is determined that a time-saving win has occurred.

Now, referring to FIG. 245(a), the first winning random number 5 table 202da will be described. FIG. 245(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 5 table 202da. This first winning random number 5 table 202da is a table that defines the random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a jackpot in the lottery for special symbols.

Specifically, the first hit random number 5 table 202da specifies different judgment values for determining a jackpot depending on the game state (probability state of the special symbol). As shown in FIG. 245(a), for the low probability state of the special symbol as the game state (normal state, time-saving state), the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is specified as "0 to 2" as the jackpot judgment value, and the other values ("3 to 899") are specified as the miss judgment value. Also, for the high probability state of the special symbol as the game state (probability state), the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is specified as "0 to 14" as the jackpot judgment value, and the other values ("15 to 899") are specified as the miss judgment value. In other words, the update range of the 1st Win Random Number 5 table 202da is 900 numbers from "0 to 899", so in the low probability state of the special pattern, the probability of a jackpot being determined is 1/300 (3 out of 900), and in the high probability state of the special pattern, the probability of a jackpot being determined is 1/60 (15 out of 900).

In this control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state, but the invention is not limited to this and the probability of winning a jackpot may be the same regardless of the game state, or three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability for special symbols may be different for up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, or simply, the special symbol state may be set to three or more types, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

Furthermore, in this control example, in addition to the two types of lottery results of "jackpot" and "miss", a "time-saving win" is also determined as a result of the lottery for the special symbols. Here, the time-saving win random number 5 table 202de will be explained with reference to FIG. 245(c). FIG. 245(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving win random number 5 table 202de. This time-saving win random number 5 table 202de is a table that stipulates the random number value (determination value) that is used to determine a time-saving win in the lottery for the special symbols.

Specifically, the time-saving random number 5 table 202de specifies different judgment values for determining a time-saving win depending on the special symbol type and the game state. As shown in FIG. 245(a), for the first special symbol as a special symbol type, no judgment value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) corresponding to a time-saving win is specified. Also, for the second special symbol as a special symbol type, a judgment value corresponding to a time-saving win is specified only when the game state is a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and no judgment value corresponding to a time-saving win is specified when the game state is other than the normal state (high probability state, second high probability state, time-saving state).

For the second special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set as the game state, the value of the first winning random number counter C1, "51 to 200", is specified as the time-saving winning judgment value, and the other values ("3 to 50, 201 to 899") are specified as the loss judgment value. Note that, as will be described in detail later, this time-saving winning random number 5 table 202de is referenced when the result of the jackpot judgment executed with reference to the first winning random number 5 table 202da is "loss", so it is referenced when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is a value other than the value of the first winning random number counter C1 ("0 to 2") that is determined to be a jackpot.

Therefore, the update range of the 1st Winning Random Number 5 table 202da is 900 numbers from "0 to 899", so in the low probability state of the special pattern, the probability of being determined as a jackpot is 1/300 (3 out of 900), and the probability of being determined as a time-saving win is 1/6 (150 out of 900).

In other words, the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state has a 3/900 chance of winning the jackpot, a 150/900 chance of winning the time-saving feature, and a 747/900 chance of losing, making it a special symbol lottery that is less likely to result in a loss (more likely to award a special prize) compared to the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state (897/900 chance of losing).

In this control example, the determination of whether or not the time-saving win has been made is made only in a specific game state (normal state) and in a special pattern lottery of a specific special pattern type (second special pattern), but this is not limited to this and the determination of whether or not the time-saving win has been made may be made for any special pattern type. Furthermore, the determination of whether or not the time-saving win has been made may be made even when a game state other than the normal state is set, and for example, the determination of whether or not the time-saving win has been made may be made in the second special pattern lottery that is executed in a state in which a low probability state (second special state) for normal patterns is set. By configuring in this way, the determination of whether or not the time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) can always be made in the second special pattern lottery that is executed during the pull-back mode (see FIG. 237).

In this case, it is a good idea to set different probabilities of winning the time-saving lottery performed during the normal state and the time-saving lottery performed during the second special probability state, and configure it so that it is easier to win the time-saving lottery when the normal state is set than when the second special probability state is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the time-saving lottery in the normal state (low probability state for special patterns) where the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is lower than in the second special probability state (high probability state for special patterns), and therefore to prevent players from playing games that are excessively disadvantageous to them.

In addition, without being limited to this, the second probability variable state may be configured to have a higher probability of winning the time-saving feature than the normal state. In this case, the probability of winning the time-saving feature can also be increased in a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery is set to a high probability (high probability state of special patterns), so the special pattern lottery performed during the second probability variable state can have a higher probability of resulting in a lottery result that grants some kind of special benefit (jackpot, time-saving feature) (probability of not winning a losing feature) than a special pattern lottery performed during the probability variable state.

Furthermore, in this fifth control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed only when a specific game state is in effect and a specific special symbol lottery is executed, so the probability of winning the time-saving lottery is always fixed. However, if the time-saving lottery is configured to be executed under different conditions (special symbol type, game state), the probability of winning the time-saving lottery may be configured to differ according to the trigger for the time-saving lottery.

In addition to the trigger for the time-saving lottery, the probability of winning the time-saving lottery may be increased, for example, when the number of times that the special pattern changes without changing the game state exceeds a predetermined number of times.

In addition, a "small win" may be determined as a type of "loss" as the third lottery result. If the "small win" is won, a small win game in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for a period (one round) shorter than that of the "big win 5" may be executed. By configuring in this way, a small amount of bonus (prize balls) can be awarded to the player when the big win is not won. Note that, when a "small win" is a type of "loss", it is possible to award prize balls to the player through the small win game, but since the big win has not been won, it is preferable to configure the process of changing the game state (setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) not to be executed. This allows a clear difference between the bonus awarded to the player based on the big win and the bonus awarded to the player based on the small win.

In addition, in this control example, three types of lottery results, "big win", "loss" and "time-saving win", are determined as the lottery results for the special symbols. In addition, a "small win" may be determined as a fourth lottery result as a type of "loss". When this "small win" is won, a small win game is executed in which the variable winning device 650 is opened for a period (one round) shorter than that of the "big win". By configuring in this way, a small amount of bonus (prize balls) can be awarded to the player when the big win is not won. Note that when a "small win" is a type of "loss", it is possible to award the player with prize balls from the small win game, but since the big win has not been won, it is preferable to configure the process of changing the game state (setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) not to be executed. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the bonus awarded to the player based on the big win and the bonus awarded to the player based on the small win.

As described above, if it is configured so that a "small win" can be won as a result of the special pattern lottery, the first win random number table 202a can be configured to specify the value of the first win random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small win". By configuring it in this way, the big win lottery and small win lottery for the special pattern can be executed in the same process, so the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced compared to when the big win lottery and small win lottery are executed in different processes. In addition, it is possible to prevent a big win and a small win from being won in the same special pattern lottery.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. In this embodiment, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won, by referring to the first win type selection 5 table 202dc. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd will be explained with reference to FIG. 246(a).

Figure 246 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd. As shown in Figure 246 (a), this jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd has a special 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol, and a special 2 jackpot 5 table 202dd2 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol.

First, the contents of the special 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 246(b). FIG. 246(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1. As described above, the special 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, and different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the acquired first jackpot type counter C2. The detailed contents defined in each data table have been described above and will be omitted here.

Returning to FIG. 243, the explanation continues. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the rough display mode (variation time) of so-called short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, super reach, etc. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing (see FIG. 167) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. In addition, the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db (see FIG. 247), which stores random number values that determine one of the variation times of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1, is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db will be explained with reference to FIG. 247. FIG. 247(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db. As shown in FIG. 247(a), the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db defines the normal/second probability variation 5 table 202db1, which is used when the normal state or the second probability variation state is set as the game state, and the probability variation/time-saving 5 table 202db2, which is used when the probability variation state or the time-saving state is set. Details will be described later, but in this control example, the data table used to select the variation pattern is different depending on the game state, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected depending on the game state can be different.

Next, the detailed contents of each table stipulated in the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db will be explained with reference to FIG. 247(b) and FIG. 248(a). FIG. 247(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the normal/second probability change 5 table 202db1. This normal/second probability change 5 table 202db1 is a data table referenced when the game state is set to the normal state or the second probability change state, that is, the low probability state of the normal pattern, and is stipulated so that a variation pattern with a longer variation time is more likely to be selected when the lottery result of the special pattern is a big win than when it is a miss, and different variation patterns are stipulated according to the type of special pattern for which the lottery was executed and the result of the special pattern lottery executed. Also, when the lottery result of the special pattern is a time-saving win (part of a miss), it is stipulated so that the same variation time as when the lottery result of the special pattern is a big win is more likely to be selected than when the lottery result of the special pattern is a miss (other than a time-saving win).

First, referring to FIG. 247(b), the normal/second probability change 5 table 202db1 will be described. FIG. 247(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal/second probability change 5 table 202db1. In the normal/second probability change 5 table 202db1, various variation patterns are defined in accordance with the lottery results of the special symbols, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is assigned to each of the variation patterns. Specifically, when the type of the special symbol (pattern type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit/miss judgment result is a big hit, and the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", a normal (reach) with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this normal is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Furthermore, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 169", a Super (reach) fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified. Furthermore, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", a SP (reach) fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is specified. In other words, even if the fluctuation time is the same as 30 seconds, different fluctuation patterns can be selected depending on the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1. In this way, by configuring the main control device 110 to be able to select different fluctuation patterns for the same fluctuation time, the process for determining the fluctuation performance on the voice lamp control device 113 side that receives the command indicating the fluctuation pattern can be simplified.

In addition, depending on the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, an additional time may be added in addition to the basic time. In the case where an additional time is added, the total time obtained by adding the basic time and the additional time is set as the variation time, and a command indicating the basic time and a command indicating the additional time are output. In this case, when determining the additional time to be added, the value of the variation type selection counter CS1 may be used, or the value of a dedicated counter used to select the additional time may be obtained. Then, when a command (basic command) indicating the selected basic time (e.g., 30 seconds) and a command (addition command) indicating the additional time are notified to the voice lamp control device 113, a variation pattern (normal reach) may be set based on the information included in the basic command, and a reach pattern (type of third pattern) may be set based on the information included in the addition command. As a result, even if the type of third symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 that becomes visible to the player first when a reach state is reached is configured to always be a specific third symbol (in this control example, a third symbol with the number 1), the reach state can be executed with various types of third symbols without varying the period from when the variable effect is executed to when the reach state is reached.

Similarly, if the symbol type is special symbol 1 and the win/loss judgment result is a miss, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 179", a miss with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern, and if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "180 to 198", a miss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern.

On the other hand, if the type of special symbol (symbol type) is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the result of the win/loss judgment is a jackpot, and if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 149", a Super (reach) with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this Super is determined, a command indicating a base time of 30 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Also, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "150 to 198", a SP (reach) with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern.

If the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss (time-saving), that is, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a time-saving win and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 169", a Super (reach) with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern. When this Super is determined, a command indicating a basic time of 30 seconds is output as the fluctuation pattern command. Also, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "170 to 198", a SP (reach) with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern.

If the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 19", the fluctuation pattern is stipulated as a reach miss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds. Also, if the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is "20 to 198", the fluctuation pattern is stipulated as a miss with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds.

Next, the contents of the 5 table for special probability and time saving 202db2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 248(a). FIG. 248(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the 5 table for special probability and time saving 202db2. The 5 table for special probability and time saving 202db2 is a data table that is referenced when selecting a variation pattern when a special probability state or time saving state is set, and each variation pattern is defined so that a different variation pattern is selected depending on the set game state, the type of special symbol, the number of variations (the number of times the special symbol has changed since the end of the jackpot game), the result of the special symbol lottery, and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1.

Here, in this fifth control example, a high probability state (probability change state) of normal symbols is always set after the end of a jackpot game. The high probability state of normal symbols that has been set is configured to continue until a time-saving end condition is met. In this fifth control example, the time-saving end conditions are a first time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times that special symbol variations have been executed since the high probability state of normal symbols was set reaches a predetermined number, and a second time-saving end condition that is met when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed while the high probability state of normal symbols is set. When either of the time-saving end conditions is met, a transition is made from the high probability state of normal symbols to the low probability state of normal symbols.

The number of times the special pattern change is performed (time-saving times), which is set as the first time-saving end condition, is varied depending on the type of jackpot. For example, if jackpot A5 or B5 is set as the type of jackpot, the first time-saving end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern change is performed reaches 60 (time-saving times 60), if jackpot C5 is set, the first time-saving end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern change is performed reaches 56 (time-saving times 56), and if jackpot D5 is set, the first time-saving end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern change is performed reaches 65 (time-saving times 65).

In addition, in this fifth control example, in some cases where the special pattern lottery does not result in a jackpot (miss), a time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) can be set (time-saving winning is possible), and the first time-saving end condition is made different depending on the time-saving type that is set when the time-saving win is won. For example, when time-saving type A is set, the first time-saving end condition is met (time-saving number of times 10,000) when the special pattern fluctuation has been performed 10,000 times, and when time-saving type B is set, the first time-saving end condition is met (time-saving number of times 100) when the special pattern fluctuation has been performed 100 times.

Even when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, different variation patterns are selected depending on the game state and time-saving type. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily execute a variation presentation that corresponds to the set game state and time-saving type.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 248(a), when the time-saving type is "time-saving after jackpot", that is, when a high probability state of normal symbols is set based on winning a jackpot, during the period when the number of special symbol variations is "1 to 60", regardless of the type of special symbol, a variation pattern with a variation time of "15 seconds" (middle variation) is selected for a winning lottery result (win/lose judgment result) regardless of the value of the variation type selection counter CS1. Also, for a losing lottery result (win/lose judgment result), a variation pattern with a variation time of "5 seconds" (short variation) is specified for the range of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 value of "0 to 189", and a variation pattern with a variation time of "15 seconds" (middle variation) is specified for the range of "190 to 198".

In addition, during the period when the number of special symbol changes is between 61 and 65, a change pattern (special change) with a change time of "5 seconds" is specified, regardless of the type of special symbol, the lottery result, or the acquired value of the change type selection counter CS1.

Here, the period when the number of times the special symbol changes is "61 to 65 times" is referenced when the jackpot type is set to jackpot D5, that is, when a 5-spin time-saving state is set after the high probability state ends. During this time-saving state, the preparation time (see Figure 239) is performed, and a constant variation time (5 seconds) is always set regardless of the win/loss judgment result. Therefore, since the entire preparation time period can be fixed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the remaining time until the pull-back mode is set.

The display screen during preparation time has been described above with reference to FIG. 239, but in addition to the display mode shown in FIG. 239, it may be configured to be able to notify the remaining period (number of seconds) of the preparation time. For example, when the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired meets the conditions for ending the preparation time (time-saving state), it is good to configure it so that the display screen displays the remaining number of times that the special symbols can be changed during the time-saving state plus 5 seconds. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the timing when the preparation time ends and the pull-back mode is set.

Furthermore, if the remaining period of the preparation time is configured to be notifiable, it may be configured to execute an effect that can suggest to the player in advance the period of the notified remaining period that corresponds to the final change of the special symbol during the time-saving state, that is, the period during which it is confirmed that the acquired reserved special symbol 2 will not be consumed again during the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the period during which the final change of the special symbol during the preparation time will be executed.

On the other hand, when the set time-saving type is "Time-saving A" and the pattern type (special pattern type) is special pattern 1 (first special pattern), regardless of the number of changes (number of special pattern changes), the lottery result (special pattern lottery result), and the acquired value of the change type selection counter CS1, a change pattern with a change time of "20 seconds" (long change) is specified, and when the pattern type is special pattern 2 (second special pattern), during the period when the number of special pattern changes is "1 to 99 times", a change pattern with a change time of "15 seconds" (middle change) is selected for the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) regardless of the value of the change type selection counter CS1. Also, for the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) of a loss, a change pattern with a change time of "5 seconds" (short change) is specified for the acquired change type selection counter CS1 value range of "0 to 189", and a change pattern with a change time of "15 seconds" (middle change) is specified for the range of "190 to 198". And for the number of times of special pattern fluctuation "100 times", a fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "10 seconds" is prescribed, regardless of the lottery result (special pattern lottery result) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1. Furthermore, for the number of times of special pattern fluctuation "101 times to 200 times", a fluctuation pattern (ultra-short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "2 seconds" is prescribed, regardless of the lottery result (special pattern lottery result) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1, and for the number of times of special pattern fluctuation "201 times to 10,000 times", a fluctuation pattern (special short fluctuation) with a fluctuation time of "0.5 seconds" is prescribed, regardless of the lottery result (special pattern lottery result) and the acquired value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1.

In addition, when the set time-saving type is "Time-saving B" and the pattern type (special pattern type) is special pattern 1 (first special pattern), a "20-second" change pattern (long change) is specified regardless of the change count (special pattern change count), the lottery result (special pattern lottery result), and the acquired value of the change type selection counter CS1. In addition, when the pattern type is special pattern 2 (second special pattern), during the period when the special pattern change count is "1 to 99 times," a "15-second" change pattern (middle change) is selected for the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) regardless of the value of the change type selection counter CS1. In addition, for the lottery result (win/lose judgment result) of a loss, a "5-second" change pattern (short change) is specified for the acquired change type selection counter CS1 value range of "0 to 189," and a "15-second" change pattern (middle change) is specified for the value of "190 to 198." And when the number of times the special symbol changes is "100 times," a change pattern (special change) with a change time of "10 seconds" is specified, regardless of the lottery result (special symbol lottery result) or the acquired value of the change type selection counter CS1.

As described above, in this fifth control example, when the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special pattern lottery (when the time-saving state is set without playing the jackpot), the change pattern is selected with the same content until the special pattern change is executed 100 times, regardless of the type of time-saving state that is set. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the type of time-saving state that is set based on the change pattern of the special pattern change executed during the time-saving state. Furthermore, for the 100th special pattern change, a change pattern with a change time of 10 seconds is selected, regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery. Here, in this fifth control example, when the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving type can be set to time-saving A or time-saving B, and when time-saving A is set, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, and when time-saving B is set, the number of time-saving times is set to 100.

When the time-saving state is set based on winning the special pattern lottery, the fluctuation period of the 100th special pattern fluctuation is used to execute a performance (continuation performance) to indicate whether the time-saving state will end (whether the time-saving type is time-saving type A or time-saving type B). In other words, no matter which type of time-saving is set and no matter which lottery result is obtained for that fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern of a fixed number of seconds (10 seconds) is selected, making it easier to execute the continuation performance.

When time-saving A is set, the time-saving state will continue until a maximum of 10,000 special symbol lotteries have been performed, but since a low probability state for special symbols is set during the time-saving state, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is the same as in the normal state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, in which it is easier to perform a special symbol lottery than in the normal state, there are cases where the special symbol lottery continues to be performed without winning a jackpot. In this case, during the time-saving state, it is possible to frequently enter game balls into the second ball entrance 640 by playing from the right and win prize balls, so it is unlikely that the player's balls will decrease significantly, but there is a risk that the time until the next jackpot will be extended, and a player with a limited playing time will be forced to give up playing during the time-saving state.

Therefore, in this fifth control example, the more times the special pattern lotteries are executed during the time-saving state, the more likely it is that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time will be selected. This configuration makes it possible to improve the time efficiency of play when many special pattern lotteries are executed during the time-saving state without winning a jackpot. In addition, since the system is configured so that the shortened variation time is less likely to be selected during the period from when the time-saving state is set until a predetermined number (100) of special pattern lotteries are executed, it is possible to prevent multiple jackpot games from being executed in a short period of time, resulting in an excessive number of prize balls being provided to the player in a short period of time.

Returning to FIG. 243, the explanation will be continued. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 299). When the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 156), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67 and is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Note that the configuration of the second winning random number table 202c is the same as that of the first control example described above, and therefore a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The time-saving type selection counter CC1 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a time-saving win is won in the special symbol lottery, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In this control example, the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 is used to select the time-saving type when a time-saving win is won, by referring to the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df. Here, the contents of the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df will be explained with reference to FIG. 248(b).

Figure 248 (b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df. In this time-saving type selection 5 table 202df, different time-saving types are defined for the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1. Specifically, the time-saving type "time-saving A" is defined for the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in the range "0 to 89", and the time-saving type "time-saving B" is defined for the range "90 to 99".

Here, when "time-saving A" is set as the time-saving type, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 10,000, and when "time-saving B" is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100. In other words, time-saving A is a time-saving state with 10,000 time-saving times, and time-saving B is a time-saving state with 100 time-saving times.

Returning to Fig. 242, we will continue the explanation. ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined in correspondence with the various counters shown in Fig. 243. Here, with reference to Fig. 244(a), we will explain the contents of ROM 202 of main control device 110 in pachinko machine 10 of this fifth control example. Fig. 244(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of ROM 202 of main control device 110 in pachinko machine 10 in this control example.

As shown in FIG. 244(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example has at least the first win random number 5 table 202da, the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 202db, the second win random number 5 table 202dc, the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd, the time-saving random number 5 table 202de, and the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df. Note that the first win random number table 202a, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b, the second win random number table 202c, the jackpot type selection table 202d, the time-saving random number 5 table 202de, and the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df have been described above when explaining the various counters shown in FIG. 243, so their explanation will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 242, the explanation will continue. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 243, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on due to the recovery from the power outage; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 167) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 166) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 165) as the power outage processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 244(b), the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a game status storage area 203g, a time-saving counter 203h, a probability-change counter 203i, a jackpot start flag 203j, a jackpot in progress flag 203k, and a miscellaneous memory area 203z. Note that the contents of the above-mentioned storage areas, counters, and flags are the same as those in the first control example described above, and therefore the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include various drive motors for operating the driving parts for performance provided in the pachinko machine 10.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 according to commands sent from this voice and lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player, a device drive command may be sent to the other device 228 to drive a device for effects (not shown), a voice output command may be set to cause the voice output device 226 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22, or a lamp output command may be set to cause the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

Here, the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example will be explained. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example differs from the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 144(a)) in that the normal special chart 2 performance selection table 222b, the special chance performance selection table 222c, the continuous notice execution selection table 222d, the V notification execution selection table 222e, and the button operation performance selection table 222f have been deleted, and the pullback mode selection table 222da and the suggestion mode selection table 222db have been added, but otherwise they are the same. The same symbols are used for the same elements, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The pullback mode selection table 222da is a data table referenced when selecting a mode type in the pullback mode, which is a presentation mode executed in response to a game state (normal state, second special probability state) that is set when a termination condition (time-saving termination condition) that terminates the high probability state of the normal pattern is satisfied while the special probability state (high probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) is set. Four types of mode types (backgrounds) are specified in response to the number of reserved special patterns 2 (reserved memory number of second special patterns) when the time-saving termination condition is satisfied in the special probability state, the value of the time-saving lottery counter 223db, the presence or absence of a jackpot in the reserved pattern (in the special pattern 2 reserved pattern), the presence or absence of a time-saving win in the reserved pattern (in the special pattern 2 reserved pattern), and the value of the presentation counter 223f.

Specifically, if the number of reserved special figures 2 is "4", that is, the maximum number of reserved special figures 2 is acquired, the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db is "4", and the reserved jackpot is "yes", regardless of whether or not the reserved jackpot has won the time-saving lottery, "mode A" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 49", and "mode B" is specified for the range of "50 to 99". Also, if the reserved jackpot is "no" and the reserved jackpot has won the time-saving lottery, "mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 79", and "mode A" is specified for the range of "80 to 99". If the reserved jackpot has "no" and the reserved jackpot has won the time-saving lottery, "mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 19", "mode C" is specified for the range of "20 to 59", and "mode D" is specified for the range of "60 to 99".

In addition, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is "4", that is, the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 has been acquired, the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db is "0", and there is a jackpot in the reserved lottery, "Mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 59", and "Mode C" is specified for the range of "60 to 99", regardless of whether there is a time-saving win in the reserved lottery. If there is no jackpot in the reserved lottery, "Mode C" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 79", and "Mode B" is specified for the range of "80 to 99", regardless of whether there is a time-saving win in the reserved lottery.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is "1 to 3", that is, when the upper limit number of reserved special figures 2 has not been acquired, regardless of the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db, if there is a jackpot in the reserved jackpot, "mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 19", "mode C" is specified for the range of "20 to 59", and "mode D" is specified for the range of "60 to 99", regardless of whether there is a time-saving win in the reserved jackpot. If there is no jackpot in the reserved jackpot, if there is a time-saving win in the reserved jackpot, "mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 49", and "mode D" is specified for the range of "50 to 99". If there is no time-saving win in the reserved jackpot, "mode B" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 19", and "mode D" is specified for the range of "20 to 99".

The detailed contents have been described above with reference to FIG. 240(b), so a detailed explanation will be omitted, but the four types of mode types (mode A to mode D) selected with reference to the pull-back mode selection table 222da are specified so that they have different expectations of granting a bonus to the player, with mode A being the most advantageous mode type to the player (highest expectation of granting a bonus (jackpot, time-saving win) during pull-back mode), mode B being the next most advantageous mode type, followed by mode C and mode D, in that order, and the contents of the pull-back mode selection table 222da are specified so that each mode type is selected so that the expectation of granting a bonus decreases in that order.

Furthermore, the mode type selected is configured to vary greatly depending on the number of reserved special charts 2 at the time when the special bonus state ends. If the number of reserved special charts 2 at the time when the special bonus state ends is not the upper limit number, the mode type that is most advantageous to the player (mode A) is not selected (is less likely to be selected), regardless of the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db or the results of the pre-reading of the reserved special charts 2 (whether or not there is a jackpot or time-saving win).

By configuring it in this way, the player can be encouraged to actively play from the right so that the number of reserved special symbols 2 reaches the upper limit in an attempt to predict the result of the second special symbol lottery that is executed during the pull-back mode.

The suggestion mode selection table 222db is a data table that is referenced when selecting the suggestion mode to be displayed in the variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol variation executed during the pull-back mode, and different types of suggestion modes are defined corresponding to the set mode type, the lottery result of the variation, and the value of the effect counter 223f.

Next, referring to FIG. 249(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 249(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a command memory area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c, a special symbol change start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a performance counter 223f, a slave state setting area 223g, a normal symbol reserved ball count counter 223h, a time-saving counter 223da, a time-saving lottery count counter 223db, a mode type storage area 223dc, a long time-saving flag 223dd, an initial setting flag 223de, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The contents of the command memory area 223a, the winning information storage area 223b, the special symbol reserved ball count counter 223c, the special symbol change start flag 223d, the stop type selection flag 223e, the performance counter 223f, the slave state setting area 223g, and the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 223h are the same as those of the first control example described above, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The time-saving counter 223da is a counter for measuring the period during which the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and is set to a predetermined value when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of a big win game, or after the display of the stopped special symbol variation that won the time-saving state). When the special symbol variation is executed while the value of the time-saving counter 223da is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the time-saving counter 223da becomes "0", it is determined that a transition has been made to a low probability state of normal symbols. In addition, the detailed period during the high probability state of normal symbols is determined based on the value of the time-saving counter 223da.

The time-saving lottery count counter 223db is a counter for measuring the number of second special symbol lotteries that can be executed during the normal state, among the second special symbol lotteries executed during the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state, second probability variable state), i.e., the number of second special symbol lotteries that can win the time-saving lottery, and its value is set based on the number of reserved special symbols 2 acquired when the probability state of the normal symbol shifts from a high probability state to a low probability state, and the game state (normal state, second probability variable state) that is set when the normal symbol shifts from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Specifically, when a state command is received indicating a transition from a high probability state (high probability state, time-saving state) of a normal pattern to a normal state (S9102: No in FIG. 264), or when a state command is received indicating a transition from a high probability state to a second high probability state (S9402: Yes in FIG. 267), the number of times that the second special pattern lottery will be performed (or may be performed) during the normal state is specified based on the acquired reserved special pattern 2, and the value indicating the specified number is set as the value of the time-saving lottery counter 223db. The value is then referenced when selecting the mode type of the pullback mode by referring to the pullback mode selection table 222da.

In addition, when the second special pattern lottery is executed during the pull-back mode, the value of the time-saving lottery counter 223db is read out, and if it is determined that a value greater than 1 is set, the value is decremented by 1 each time the second special pattern lottery is executed (see S9607 in FIG. 269).

In other words, in this fifth control example, when the special symbol 2 reserved acquired during the high probability state of the normal symbol is executed after the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the same type of presentation is executed regardless of the set game state. In other words, the game state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set is the normal state in which a special symbol lottery that may result in a time-saving win is executed, and the second probability state in which a special symbol lottery that may not result in a time-saving win is executed, so that it is difficult for the player to easily determine whether or not the game state is in which a time-saving win may be displayed as the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery being executed. By configuring in this way, even if the second probability state in which a special symbol lottery that may not result in a time-saving win is executed is set, the player can play while hoping for a time-saving win.

Furthermore, the number of times a special symbol lottery that may actually win the time-saving feature is executed is determined, and the mode type of the pull-back mode can be selected based on the determination result. By configuring it in this way, while the same type (pull-back mode) of presentation is executed in the normal state where a special symbol lottery that may win the time-saving feature is executed and the second probability variable state where a special symbol lottery that may not win the time-saving feature is executed, it is possible to provide an element (mode type) that allows the player to predict which game state is set, so that a player who wants to quickly determine whether the currently set game state is one that may win the time-saving feature can focus on the content of the presentation being executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

The mode type storage area 223dc is a storage area for storing the mode type selected by referring to the pull-back mode selection table 222da. The information (mode type) stored in this mode type storage area 223dc is read out when determining the presentation mode of the variation presentation corresponding to the second special pattern variation executed during the pull-back mode. Then, when the pull-back mode ends, the stored information is cleared.

The long time-saving flag 223dd is a flag for indicating that a long-term (10,000 special pattern variations) time-saving state has been set, and is set to on when a long-term time-saving state (time-saving type "time-saving A") has been set, and is set to off when the time-saving state ends. The setting status of this long time-saving flag 223dd is referenced when determining the display mode for indicating the remaining number of time-savings (remaining period of the high probability state of normal patterns). Specifically, when determining the special symbol 2 presentation mode corresponding to the second special symbol change executed during the time-saving state (S9613 in FIG. 269: Yes), it is determined whether the long time-saving flag 223dd is set to on (S9615 in FIG. 269), and if the long time-saving flag 223dd is not set to on (S9615 in FIG. 269: No), a display command is set to subtract the remaining number of times displayed in the small display area Dm7 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (S9614 in FIG. 269).

On the other hand, if the long time-saving flag 223dd is set to on (S9615 in FIG. 269: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is less than 150 (S9616 in FIG. 269). If it is determined that the value is not less than 150 (S9616 in FIG. 269: No), then as shown in FIG. 238(a), "infinite" is displayed in the small display area Dm7, and the process of subtracting and displaying the remaining number of time-saving plays is skipped. If it is determined that the value is less than 150 (S9616 in FIG. 269: Yes), the presentation mode for switching the display mode of the small display area Dm7 from "infinite" to "149" is determined (S9617 in FIG. 269).

The initial setting flag 223de is a flag for indicating that the first second special pattern drawing has been performed among the second special pattern drawing performed during the pull-back mode, and is set on after the special pattern 2 presentation mode corresponding to the first second special pattern change performed during the pull-back mode has been determined (see S9605 in FIG. 269). It is referenced when setting the special pattern 2 presentation mode corresponding to the second special pattern change performed during the pull-back mode, and if it is determined that the initial setting flag 223de is set on (S9602 in FIG. 269: Yes), the process for setting the first special pattern 2 presentation mode (S9603, S9604 in FIG. 269) is skipped.

<Regarding the control process in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example>
Next, the contents of various control processes in the pachinko machine 10 of this fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 252 to Fig. 270. This fifth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned first control example in that a part of the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and a part of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed, but the rest is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to Fig. 252 to Fig. 261, the control process executed by the main control device 110 in this fifth control example will be described. In this fifth control example, in comparison with the first control example described above, instead of the special symbol change process (see S104 in Fig. 157), the special symbol change process 5 (see S251 in Fig. 253) is performed instead of the special symbol big win determination process (S208 in Fig. 158), instead of the special symbol change pattern selection process (S209 in Fig. 159), the special symbol change pattern selection process 5 (S252 in Fig. 255), instead of the update process (S221 in Fig. 160), the update process 5 (S253 in Fig. 256), instead of the start winning process (S105 in Fig. 161), the start winning process 5 (S195 in Fig. 258). The difference is that pre-reading process 5 (S653 in FIG. 259) is executed instead of pre-reading process (S613 in FIG. 162), jackpot control process 5 (see S1894 in FIG. 260) is executed instead of jackpot control process (S1804 in FIG. 168), and jackpot end process 5 (see S8403 in FIG. 261) is executed instead of jackpot end process (see S1910 in FIG. 170), but otherwise it is the same. Detailed explanations of the same processing contents will be omitted.

First, the processing contents of special pattern change process 5 (S104 in FIG. 252) will be described with reference to FIG. 252. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special pattern change process 5 (S104). This special pattern change process 5 (S104) differs from the above-mentioned special pattern change process (see S104 in FIG. 157) in that part of the processing executed when starting the special pattern change and part of the processing executed when the change time for the special pattern change has elapsed have been changed.

Specifically, when special symbol variation process 5 (S104) is executed, the same processes of S201 to S207 and S210 to S213 as those of the special symbol variation process described above (see S104 in FIG. 157) are executed. Then, when the process of S207 or the process of S213 is completed, special symbol determination process 5 (S251) is executed, and then special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252) is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, if it is determined that the time for the special symbol change has elapsed (S214: Yes), the process of S216 to S220 is executed, which is the same as the special symbol change process described above (see S104 in FIG. 157), and this process is terminated. In addition, if it is determined in the process of S217 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S217: No), update process 5 is executed (S253), and then time-saving setting process 5 is executed (S254), and the process proceeds to S220.

Next, the processing contents of special pattern determination process 5 (S251) will be explained with reference to FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special pattern determination process 5 (S251). This special pattern determination process 5 (S251) is executed in place of the special pattern jackpot determination process (S208 in FIG. 158) of the first control example described above, and in addition to determining the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, a determination of whether or not a time-saving win has occurred (time-saving lottery process 5) is executed.

When the special symbol determination process 5 (S251) is executed, first, data on the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is obtained (S8001), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number 5 table 202da (S8002), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S8003: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a jackpot (S8004), and the jackpot symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (S8005), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (S8003: No), the time-saving lottery process 5 is executed (S8006), and this process ends.

Here, time-saving lottery process 5 (S8006) is a process for executing a judgment of whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won in the current special pattern lottery. In other words, in this fifth control example, in the special pattern lottery, a judgment of whether or not the jackpot has been won is first executed (S8003), and if a jackpot has been won, the special pattern lottery is ended without executing a judgment of whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won, and the judgment of whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won is executed only if a jackpot has not been won. By configuring it in this way, multiple benefits (a jackpot win for a special pattern, a time-saving lottery win) are not awarded to a player in one special pattern lottery, so it is possible to prevent the player from being given an overly advantageous game.

Next, the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 5 (S8006) will be described with reference to FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 5 (S8006). In this time-saving lottery process 5 (S8006), it is determined whether the current game situation is a game situation in which a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) can be executed, and if it is determined that it can be executed, a process is performed to execute the time-saving winning judgment.

When the time-saving lottery process 5 (S8006) is executed, it is first determined whether the current target (lottery target) is special symbol 2 (second special symbol) (S8101). If it is determined that it is special symbol 2 (S8101; Yes), the current game status stored in the game status storage area is read (S8102), and it is determined whether the game status read is the normal status (S8103).

In the process of S8103, if it is determined that the state is normal (S8103: Yes), the lottery result (time-saving win determination result) is obtained based on the time-saving win random number 5 table 202de (S8104), and it is determined whether or not the time-saving win has occurred (S8105). If it is determined that the time-saving win has occurred (S8105: Yes), the time-saving pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained win type counter (first win type counter C2) (S8106), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8101 that the current target is not Special Pattern 2 (it is the first special pattern) (S8101: No), if it is determined in the process of S8103 that the current game state is not the normal state (S8103: No), or if it is determined in the process of S8105 that the time-saving win has not been won (S8105: No), the losing pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (S8107), and this process ends.

In other words, in this fifth control example, the execution conditions for executing a time-saving winning determination in a special pattern lottery are that the special pattern lottery has not resulted in a jackpot win, that it is the second special pattern lottery, and that the normal state is set. In this way, by setting conditions for executing a time-saving winning determination, it is possible to create cases where only a jackpot determination is executed, and cases where both a jackpot determination and a time-saving winning determination are executed, depending on the execution status of the special pattern lottery. Therefore, it is possible to vary the probability that a player will be granted a special benefit (jackpot or time-saving) in one special pattern lottery depending on the situation.

In addition, in this fifth control example, a game state such as a high probability state or a time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, is configured to end and transition to the normal state when the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 60 times). In other words, when the special pattern lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot, it is possible to make it easier to meet the execution conditions for the time-saving winning judgment. Therefore, when the special pattern lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning a jackpot, it is possible to increase the probability that a player will be granted a privilege (jackpot or time-saving) in one special pattern lottery compared to before the predetermined number of times it was executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an extreme decrease in the motivation of players who have not won a jackpot for a predetermined period of time.

Next, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252) will be described with reference to FIG. 255. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252). In this special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (S252), first, in the special symbol determination process 5 (S251 in FIG. 253), it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether a jackpot of the special symbol is set (S8201). In the processing of S8201, if it is determined that a jackpot of the special symbol is set (S8201: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd and the value of the acquired first jackpot type counter C2 (S8202). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special pattern execution area is obtained (S8203), and the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db corresponding to the current game state (normal state, second probability variable state, probability variable state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203g is read (S8204).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S8203 and the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db read in the process of S8204 (S8205), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205 (S8206). The special pattern variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation time of the special pattern, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the stopping pattern of the special symbol is set (S8207), the start of the special symbol fluctuation is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S8208), a value indicating the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is set to the value of a special symbol fluctuation time counter (not shown) (S8209), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of stopping pattern indicating the result of this special symbol fluctuation, that is, a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not result in a reach, and is output to the audio lamp control device 113 by external output processing of the main processing of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss (S8201: No), then it is determined whether the time-saving lottery result (time-saving winning determination result) is a time-saving winning (S8209), and if it is determined that the time-saving winning is a win (S8209: Yes), the time-saving type is determined by referring to the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df (S8210), and the process proceeds to S8203. Also, if it is determined in the process of S8209 that the time-saving winning is not a win (S8209: No), the process skips S8210 and proceeds to S8203.

Next, the processing contents of update process 5 (S253) will be described with reference to FIG. 256. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of update process 5 (S253). In this update process 5 (S253), the same processing as the update process described above (see S221 in FIG. 160) is executed, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 5 (S254) will be described with reference to FIG. 257. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 5 (S254). In this time-saving setting process 5 (S254), a process for setting the time-saving state when the time-saving winning decision is made is executed. When the time-saving setting process 5 (S254) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a time-saving winning (S8351), and if it is determined that the time-saving winning is made (S8351: Yes), a value corresponding to the determined time-saving type is set in the time-saving counter 203h (S8352), the time-saving state is set in the game state storage area (S8353), and a state command indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the time-saving type game state (information indicating the time-saving state and information indicating the set time-saving type) is set (S8354), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8351 that the time-saving option has not been won (S8351: No), this process ends.

In other words, in this fifth control example, the time-saving state is set at different times depending on the time-saving winning trigger. If the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set when the special pattern stops changing, and if the time-saving state is set based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set when the jackpot game ends, not when the special pattern stops changing.

By configuring it in this way, the timing at which the time-saving state is set can be varied, providing players with a game that they will not tire of.

Next, the processing contents of start winning process 5 (S195) will be explained with reference to FIG. 258. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of start winning process 5 (S195). This start winning process 5 (S195) differs from the start winning process described above (see S105 in FIG. 161) only in that the value of time-saving type selection counter CC1 is added to the types of counter values stored in each special pattern reserved ball storage area (S651, S652) and in that pre-read process 5 (S653) is executed; the processing contents are otherwise the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, the processing contents of pre-reading process 5 (S653) will be explained with reference to FIG. 259. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of pre-reading process 5 (S653). When this pre-reading process 5 (S653) is executed, first, the various counter values, namely the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the time-saving type selection counter CC1, are read from the storage area newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b (S750). Then, the read data is stored in the empty storage area in the pre-reading reserved storage area with the smallest winning order (S702).

Next, the result of the hit/miss judgment is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the read-ahead reserved memory area. Note that here, both the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a low probability state and the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a high probability state are determined. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) and the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information, making it difficult to predict the game state (probability state of the special pattern) that will be set at the time when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot or not (S703). If it is determined that the result is a jackpot (S703: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the jackpot type and fluctuation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S751), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S703 is that it is not a jackpot (S703: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a time-saving win (S752), and if it is determined that it is not a time-saving win (S752: No), a winning command is set that includes information that can identify a miss win and a fluctuation pattern based on the various counter values that have been read (S705), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S752 that a time-saving win has been made (S752: Yes), it is determined whether the pending fluctuation is in a normal state (S753), and if it is determined that it is in a normal state (S753: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the time-saving win and the fluctuation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S754), and this processing ends.

The winning command set in the processing of S704, S705, or S754 is set to include, in addition to the information indicating the winning/losing judgment result described above (information that has a different meaning depending on the winning/losing judgment result), information indicating the various counter values read out by the processing of S701 as common information. The winning command set in this processing is then output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S1801) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 167).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command, it can execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which it changes the display mode of the reserved balls (for example, by changing the color of the reserved balls to a color different from normal) based on various information contained in the winning command, or it displays a preview pattern or the like before the change starts to suggest to the player the result of the winning/losing judgment (whether or not they have won the jackpot or the time-saving winning option).

In this control example, since there is only one probability state for the special pattern (low probability state for the special pattern), the information to be set in the winning command (win/lose judgment result) can be set regardless of the game state. However, for example, in a gaming machine that has multiple probability states for the special pattern (high probability state for the special pattern, low probability state for the special pattern), the winning/lose judgment result for the high probability state of the special pattern and the winning/lose judgment result for the low probability state of the special pattern can be distinguished, and the winning command can be set based on the results of each judgment. Alternatively, a judgment value (value of the first win random number counter C1) that is judged to be a jackpot whether the special pattern is in a high probability state or a low probability state can be specified, and the winning command indicating a jackpot for the special pattern can be set only when that judgment value is read.

By configuring it in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot or time-saving win is output to the voice lamp control device 113 only if it is determined in advance that a specific jackpot or time-saving win has occurred, so it is possible to create a sense of anticipation of a jackpot win even with special pattern changes that do not involve a pre-reading performance.

Furthermore, the game state when the lottery for the special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be accurately determined, and a win/lose judgment may be performed based on the game state. In this case, the determination is possible by configuring the selection of the fluctuation pattern to be selected to be constant regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation, rather than varying the selection of the fluctuation pattern depending on the number of reserved balls. When performing a look-ahead, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the order of fluctuation until the reserved balls start to fluctuate based on the reserved and memorized information.

In addition, in this control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, a read-ahead process is executed based on the winning information, and a win/lose judgment is predicted in advance during the read-ahead process. However, without being limited to this, in the read-ahead process of the main control unit 110, information indicating the contents (counter values) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be set as a winning command, and the winning/lose judgment result may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control unit 113 side.

By configuring in this way, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can be configured to execute a process to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and if it is determined that a look-ahead performance should be executed, to analyze the information contained in the winning command received from the main control device 110 (prediction of the winning/losing determination result). As a result, if the look-ahead performance is not executed, specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the winning/losing determination result) is not executed, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary control from being executed in the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to prevent a problem in which a player illegally obtains the results of a look-ahead process that was executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 260, the processing contents of the jackpot control process 5 (S1894) will be described. FIG. 260 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the jackpot control process 5 (S1894). This jackpot control process 5 (S1894) differs from the above-mentioned jackpot control process (see S1804 in FIG. 168) in that when it is determined that it is time to start a new round (S1905: Yes), the process to be executed is to set the opening of a specific winning port (S8401) and set a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started (S8402), and when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot (S1909: Yes), jackpot end process 5 (S8403) is executed. Since the rest of the process is the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 261, the processing contents of the jackpot end processing 5 (S8403) executed in the jackpot control processing 5 (see S1894 in FIG. 260) will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the jackpot end processing 5 (S8403). When this jackpot end processing 5 (S8403) is executed, the currently executing jackpot type is identified (S8501), the value (time-saving end condition) corresponding to the identified jackpot type is set in the special counter 203i and the time-saving counter 203h (S8502), the game status corresponding to the value of the special counter 203i and the time-saving counter 203h is set in the game status storage area (S8503), the value of the special counter 203i that has been set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and the state command indicating the game status are set (S8504), the jackpot flag is set to OFF (S8505), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to Fig. 262 to Fig. 270, the control process contents executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifth control example will be described. In this fifth control example, the command determination process (see S4112 in Fig. 175) is replaced with a command determination process 5 (S4182 in Fig. 262), the state command reception process (see S4202 in Fig. 176) is replaced with a state command reception process 5 (S4282 in Fig. 263), the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (see S4903 in Fig. 183) is replaced with a special chart 2 performance mode setting process (see S4907 in Fig. 184), and the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in Fig. 269) is executed instead of the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (see S4983 in Fig. 268), which is the same as the first control example described above. The same processing content will be given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

Figure 262 is a flowchart showing command determination process 5 (S4182 in Figure 262). As shown in Figure 262, command determination process 5 (S4182 in Figure 262) differs from the command determination process described above (see S4112 in Figure 175) in that it replaces status command reception process with status command reception process 5 (S4282), but is otherwise the same.

Figure 263 is a flowchart showing status command reception process 5 (S4282). As shown in Figure 263, in this status command reception process 5 (S4282), a process is executed to determine the newly set game state based on the status command received from the main control device 110, and to set various effects based on the determination result.

In state command reception process 5 (S4282), it is first determined whether there has been a change in the game state (S9001). If it is determined that there has been no change in the game state (S9001: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9001 that there has been a change in the game state (S9001: Yes), the information set in the slave state setting area 223g is shifted, and the game state corresponding to the command currently received from the master control device 110 is set in the slave state setting area 223g (S9002).

Next, it is determined whether the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003). If it is determined that the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003: Yes), a normal state presentation setting process is executed (S9004), and this process ends. A detailed explanation of the normal state presentation setting process (S9004) will be described later with reference to FIG. 264. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9003 that the currently received command is not a command indicating a change to the normal state (S9003: No), the process proceeds to S9005.

In the process of S9005, it is determined whether the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the time-saving state (S9005). If it is determined that the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the time-saving state (S9005: Yes), the time-saving state presentation setting process is executed (S906), and this process ends. A detailed explanation of the time-saving state presentation setting process (S9006) will be described later with reference to FIG. 266. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9005 that the currently received command is not a command indicating a change to the time-saving state (S9005: No), the process proceeds to S9007.

In the process of S9007, it is determined whether the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the second high probability state (S9007). If it is determined that the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the second high probability state (S9007: Yes), the second high probability state presentation setting process is executed (S9008), and this process ends. A detailed explanation of the second high probability state presentation setting process (S9008) will be described later with reference to FIG. 267. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9007 that the currently received command is not a command indicating a change to the second high probability state (S9007: No), the process proceeds to S9009.

In the process of S9009, it is determined whether the currently received command is a command indicating a change to the high probability state (S9009). If it is determined that the command indicates a change to the high probability state (S9009: Yes), the number of time-saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the time-saving counter 203da (S9010), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9009 that the currently received command is not a command indicating a change to the high probability state (S9009: No), this process ends as it is.

Figure 264 is a flow chart showing the normal state presentation setting process (S9004). This normal state presentation setting process (S9004) is executed when a state command indicating the normal state is received in state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in Figure 263). In this normal state presentation setting process (S9004), as shown in Figure 264, different presentation modes are set depending on whether the game state before the normal state was set was the second high probability state or not. If the game state is not the second high probability state, that is, if it is determined that the game state has transitioned from the high probability state or the time-saving state to the normal state, a pull-back mode setting process is executed to set the presentation mode corresponding to the pull-back mode (pull-back zone).

In the normal state presentation setting process (S9004), first, the game state before the change is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9101). Next, it is determined whether the game state before the change read in the process of S9101 is the second high probability state (S9102). If it is determined that the game state before the change is the second high probability state (S9102: Yes), a display command for the presentation mode corresponding to the first normal mode is set (S9103), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9102 that the game state before the change read is not the second high probability state (S9104: No), the pullback mode setting process is executed (S9104), and this process is terminated. A detailed explanation of the pullback mode setting process (S9104) will be described later with reference to FIG. 265.

Figure 265 is a flowchart showing the pull-back mode setting process (S9104). In this pull-back mode setting process (S9104), as shown in Figure 265, various processes are executed to set display commands for showing the display mode (presentation mode) related to the presentation screen shown in Figure 237.

In the pullback mode setting process (S9104), first, the game state before the change is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9201). Next, it is determined whether there is a reserved ball for the second special symbol (S9202). If it is determined that there is a reserved ball for the second special symbol (S9202: Yes), the number of times the second special symbol will be drawn during the normal state is identified (S9203). Next, the value of the number of times the second special symbol will be drawn during the normal state identified in the process of S9203 is set in the time-saving lottery count counter 223db (S9204).

Next, using the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol, the value of the time-saving lottery counter 223db, and the reserved special symbol 2 information, the mode type is determined by referring to the pullback mode selection table 222da (see FIG. 250) (S9205), the mode type determined in the process of S9205 is stored in the mode type storage area 223dc (S9206), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9202 that there are no reserved balls for the second special symbol (S9202: No), a display command for the presentation mode corresponding to the first normal mode is set (S9207), and this process ends.

Fig. 266 is a flow chart showing the time-saving state presentation setting process (S9006). This time-saving state presentation setting process (S9006) is executed when a state command indicating the time-saving state is received in state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in Fig. 263). In this time-saving state presentation setting process (S9006), as shown in Fig. 266, if the game state before the time-saving state is set is a special state, a process is executed to set the display mode (presentation mode) corresponding to the preparation time (see Fig. 239), and if it is a normal state, a process is executed to set the display mode to indicate that the time-saving state has been entered or the display mode (presentation mode) corresponding to the extended time corresponding to the long time-saving state (see Fig. 238).

In the time-saving state presentation setting process (S9006), first, the game state before the change is executed from the slave state setting area 223g (S9301). Next, it is determined whether the game state before the change read in the process of S9301 is a high probability state (S9302). If it is determined that the game state before the change is a high probability state (S9302: Yes), a display command is set to show the corresponding presentation mode during the preparation time (S9303), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state before the change read in the processing of S9301 is not a special state (S9302: No), it is determined whether the game state before the change is a normal state (S9304). If it is determined that the game state before the change is not a normal state (S9304: No), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state before the change is a normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of time-saving times included in the received command is set as the value of the time-saving counter 223da (S9305), and it is determined whether the type of time-saving time set this time is time-saving A (S9306).

In the process of S9306, if it is determined that the time-saving type to be set this time is time-saving A (S9306: Yes), the long time-saving flag 223dd is set to ON (S9307), a command is set to indicate the presentation mode corresponding to the extended time (S9308), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving type to be set this time is not time-saving A (S9306: No), this process ends.

Figure 267 is a flowchart showing the second high probability state presentation setting process (S9008). This second high probability state presentation setting process (S9008) is executed when a state command indicating the second high probability state is received in state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in Figure 263). In this second high probability state presentation setting process (S9008), as shown in Figure 267, different presentation modes are set depending on whether the game state before the second high probability state is set is a high probability state or not, and if it is a high probability state, a pull-back mode setting process is executed to set a presentation mode corresponding to the pull-back mode (pull-back zone).

In the second probability variable state presentation setting process (S9008), first, the game state before the change is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9401). Next, it is determined whether the game state before the change read in the process of S9401 is a probability variable state (S9402). If it is determined that the game state before the change is a probability variable state (S9402: Yes), the pullback mode setting process (see S9104 in FIG. 265) is executed (S9403), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9402 that the game state before the change is not a probability variable state (S9402: No), this process is terminated.

Figure 268 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5 (S4983). In this special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5 (S4983), a process is executed to set the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol variation to be executed.

In the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 5 (S4983), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223da is decremented by 1 (S9502), a display command is set to indicate the value of the time-saving counter 223da after the decrement (S9503), and the process proceeds to S9504. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9501 that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is not greater than 0 (S9501: No), the processes of S9502 to S9503 are skipped and the process proceeds to S9504. In the process of S9504, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S9504), and this process ends.

Figure 269 is a flowchart showing the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 5 (S4987). In this special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 5 (S4987), as shown in Figure 269, processing is executed to set various presentation modes depending on the game state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed.

In the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 5 (S4987), first, it is determined whether the current game state is normal or the second special symbol state (S9601). If it is determined that the current game state is normal or the second special symbol state (S9601: Yes), it is determined whether the initial setting flag 223de is on (S9602). If it is determined that the initial setting flag 223de is not on (S9602: No), the number of times the second special symbol will be drawn during the pullback zone is determined based on the value of the time-saving drawing count counter 223db (S9603), and the presentation mode corresponding to the determined number of times the second special symbol will be drawn is determined (S9604).

Next, the initial setting flag 223de is set to ON (S9605), and the process proceeds to S9606. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9602 that the initial setting flag 223de is ON (S9602: Yes), the process skips the processes of S9603 to S9605 and proceeds to S9606.

In the process of S9606, the suggested mode is determined by referring to the suggested mode selection table 222db (see FIG. 251) (S9606). Next, the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db is decremented by 1 (S9607), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db after the decrement is 0 (S9608). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db after the decrement is 0 (S9608: Yes), the presentation mode corresponding to the final fluctuation of the pullback zone is determined (S9609), and the initial setting flag 223de is set to OFF (S9610). Then, a display command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (S9611), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9608 that the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db after subtraction is not 0 (S9608: No), the processes of S9609 to S9610 are skipped, the process of S9611 described above is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9601 that the game is not in the normal state or the second probability bonus state (S9601: No), the value of the time-saving counter 223da is decremented by 1 (S9612). Next, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (S9613). If it is determined that the current game state is not in the time-saving state, that is, if it is in the probability bonus state (S9613: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the value of the time-saving counter 223da after the decrement (S9614), a chance time performance setting process is executed (S9619), the process of S9611 described above is executed, and this process is terminated. A detailed explanation of the chance time performance setting process (S9619) will be described later with reference to FIG. 270.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9613 that the time-saving state is in effect (S9613: Yes), it is determined whether the long time-saving flag 223dd is on (S9615). If it is determined that the long time-saving flag 223dd is not on (S9615: No), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S9614. On the other hand, if it is determined that the long time-saving flag 223dd is on (S9615: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is less than 150 (S9616).

If it is determined in the process of S9616 that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is less than 150 (S9616: Yes), the presentation mode for indicating the remaining number of time-saving times is determined (S9617), and the process proceeds to the above-mentioned S9614. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9616 that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is not less than 150 (S9616: No), a display command is set indicating that the time-saving state will continue until the next big win (S9618), and the process proceeds to the chance time presentation setting process (S9619).

Figure 270 is a flowchart showing the chance time performance setting process (S9619). This chance time performance setting process (S9619) is a process for setting the performance mode of the variable performance executed when a high probability state for normal symbols is set in the special symbol 2 performance mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in Figure 269), and as shown in Figure 270, a process for updating the display mode of the remaining period display is executed.

In the chance time performance setting process (S9619), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da subtracted in the process of S9612 of the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) is 0 (S9701). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da after subtraction is 0 (S9701: Yes), a performance mode including a guidance mode for accumulating special chart 2 reserves is determined (S9702), and then it is determined whether the long time-saving flag 223dd is on (S9703).

If it is determined in the process of S9703 that the long time-saving flag 223dd is on (S9703: Yes), the long time-saving flag 223dd is set to off (S9704), the presentation mode corresponding to the variable pattern command is determined (S9705), and this process ends. On the other hand, if in the process of S9701 the value of the time-saving counter 223da after subtraction is not 0 (S9701: No), or in the process of S9703 it is determined that the long time-saving flag 223db is not on (S9703: No), the process of S9705 described above is executed, and this process ends.

<First Modification of Fifth Control Example>
Next, the first modified example of the fifth control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. 271 to FIG. 277. In the fifth control example described above, the time-saving winning is possible only in the second special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set. In contrast, the first modified example is different in that the time-saving winning is possible in the first special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set. The other configurations are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same contents will be omitted.

In the fifth control example described above, a game is played in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where a high probability state (high probability state, time-saving state) for normal symbols is set, and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reservation) can be acquired during the high probability state for normal symbols. Then, when the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation acquired during the high probability state for normal symbols is executed in the normal state where a low probability state for normal symbols is set, in addition to the jackpot lottery, the time-saving lottery is also executed. This makes it possible for a player who has experienced a game during a high probability state for normal symbols (advantageous game) that is advantageous to the player to execute a game (pull-back game) that is more likely to return to advantageous game after the advantageous game ends.

However, in the fifth control example described above, unless a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) executed in the normal state and a game (advantageous game) in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set is executed, the player cannot benefit from the time-saving lottery, resulting in a problem that the player may become bored with the game without benefiting from the time-saving lottery.

In contrast, this first variant is configured so that it is possible to win the time-saving lottery even in the first special pattern lottery that is executed in the normal state, making it easier for players to benefit from the time-saving lottery.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols that is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special symbol lottery is configured to tend to have a longer period during which the high probability state for normal symbols continues (normal symbol high probability period) than the high probability state (probable bonus state, time-saving state) for normal symbols that is set based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In other words, when the time-saving state is won in the special symbol lottery, the player is configured to be granted a privilege that makes it easier for the normal symbol high probability period to continue until the next jackpot is won.

In contrast to this, in this first modified example, if a time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a short-term time-saving state (for example, one time of time-saving) can be set, and during the period in which this short-term time-saving state is set (normal symbol high probability period), a game can be played to acquire the right to play the second special symbol lottery. In other words, in this first modified example, the pull-back game in the fifth control example described above is configured to be played without winning a jackpot. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily play the second special symbol lottery in the normal state without winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery that is played in the normal state.

In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, in this first modified example, multiple variation times can be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state. In this first modified example, when the time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first special symbol is displayed frozen in a display mode (time-saving symbol) for indicating the time-saving win after a predetermined variation time has changed, and then the time-saving state (one time of time-saving) is set, and the time-saving state continues until the special symbol variation executed next is displayed frozen.

In other words, the length of time that the time-saving state lasts is determined according to the time that the special symbol changes during the time-saving state. Therefore, the longer the time that the special symbol changes during the time-saving state, the easier it is to acquire many reserved special symbols 2 during the time-saving state, making it a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

<About the performance content of the first modified example of the fifth control example>
With reference to Figures 271 to 273, we will explain the characteristic presentation content executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the fifth control example.

First, in the fifth control example described above, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues after the end of the jackpot game (special symbol high probability period) and the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol continues (normal symbol high probability period) are set for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the 60th special symbol change stops after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has changed 60 times), and during the normal symbol high probability period, it is possible to acquire the right to draw the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved). When the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period end and the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set, the time-saving judgment is executed only if the result of the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 lottery) executed based on the special symbol 2 reserved acquired during the normal symbol high probability period is not a jackpot win, and if the time-saving judgment results in a win in the time-saving state, the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set.

Note that special symbol 2 reservation means that when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is already changing, the right to select the second special symbol is reserved, and up to a maximum of four selection rights are reserved (reserved memory).

In the fifth control example, when the normal state is set, the probability of winning a normal symbol is low, so it is more difficult to win the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol lottery) compared to the time-saving state, and it is difficult to play a normal symbol winning game (normal symbol winning game) in which the electric device 640a is in the open state, so it is configured to be difficult to get a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. In the normal state, the special symbol 2 lottery is only executed if, as described above, a special symbol 2 reservation is obtained during the normal symbol high probability period set after the end of the jackpot game, and the normal state is set after the special symbol high probability period and the normal symbol high probability period end, and a special symbol 2 reservation exists.

Therefore, in order to set a state (e.g., time-saving state) that is more favorable than the normal state, a player must win the jackpot at least once. A player who does not win the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery), which is executed when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64, will end up playing in the unfavorable normal state for a long period of time, which could reduce the player's motivation to play.

In contrast, in the first variant of the fifth control example, in the normal state, a time-saving judgment is performed even if the result of the special symbol 1 lottery is not a jackpot win, and if a time-saving win is found, the time-saving state is set for a predetermined period (for example, the period from when the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) changes once until the special symbol stops changing), and it is possible to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 during the time-saving state; in other words, it is configured so that it is possible to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 even if the jackpot win is not won, which is different from the fifth control example.

Specifically, if the result of the special symbol 1 lottery is not a big win, a time-saving judgment is executed, and the probability of winning the time-saving in this case is set to a lower probability than the probability of winning the time-saving with the second special symbol (for example, the probability of winning the time-saving with the second special symbol is 1/6, and the probability of winning the time-saving with the first special symbol is 1/200). In addition, the number of time-saving times granted when the time-saving with the first special symbol is won (the period during which the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) continues) is set to a number less than when the time-saving with the second special symbol is won (for example, when the time-saving with the second special symbol is won, the period during which the special symbol changes 10,000 times and the 10,000th time the special symbol changes and stops, and when the time-saving with the first special symbol is won, the period during which the special symbol changes once and the special symbol changes and stops changing).

Here, if the probability of winning the time-saving lottery in the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) during the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) is, for example, 1/200, even if the lottery right for the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved) is acquired up to the upper limit number (up to 4 in the embodiment) during the normal pattern high probability period, the probability of winning the time-saving lottery at least once in four special pattern 2 lotteries is about 2%, and when the special pattern high probability period and normal pattern high probability period end and the normal state is set, the player hardly expects that the advantageous state will be set again by winning the time-saving lottery in the special pattern 2 lottery based on the special pattern 2 reserved, so it is difficult to make the player think that the special pattern 2 lottery during the normal state is a special period, and there is a risk that the player will not play with enthusiasm to win the special pattern 2 reserved until the last moment when the normal pattern high probability period ends.

Therefore, it is desirable that the probability of winning the time-saving special drawing 2 lottery during the normal state is set to a probability (for example, 1/6) that can be fully expected to win the time-saving special drawing 2 lottery based on the acquired special drawing 2 reserves when the maximum number of special drawing 2 reserves (up to 4 in this embodiment) are acquired during the normal drawing high probability period. By configuring it in this way, the probability of winning the time-saving special drawing 2 lottery at least once in four special drawing 2 lotteries is about 50%, and even if the special drawing high probability period and normal drawing high probability period end and the normal state is set, it is possible to make the player expect that the advantageous state will be set again by winning the time-saving special drawing 2 lottery based on the special drawing 2 reserves, and by making the player think that the special drawing 2 lottery during the normal state is a special period, the player can be motivated to play in order to win as many special drawing 2 reserves as possible until the last moment when the normal drawing high probability period ends.

In contrast, if the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the first special symbol drawing (special symbol 1 drawing) during the normal state is set to the same probability as the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the special symbol 2 drawing during the normal state, or set to a higher probability than the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the special symbol 2 drawing, there is a risk that the time-saving feature will be won frequently in the normal state, making it easier for the time-saving feature to be set, which may give an excessive advantage to the player.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the special drawing 1 during the normal state is set lower than the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the special drawing 2 during the normal state.

Moreover, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when the time-saving feature is selected in the special pattern 1 lottery, the time-saving feature is set to one time, i.e., the special pattern is changed once, and the time-saving feature is set for the period until the special pattern stops changing.

For example, if the time-saving number of times is granted two or more times, if the player plays correctly, it is possible to obtain the maximum number of reserved special charts 2. However, in this configuration, if the time-saving number is won in the special chart 1 lottery, the player can obtain the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 every time. Therefore, the ease of winning the time-saving number is always constant, and there is a risk that the play during the time-saving state, which is set based on winning the time-saving number in the special chart 1 lottery, will become monotonous, in which the player simply obtains the maximum number of reserved special charts 2.

In contrast, if the number of time-saving turns granted when the time-saving turn is won in the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is 1, it is possible to vary the number of lottery rights for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) that a player can obtain during the time-saving state by combining the special symbol change time when the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the normal symbol change time, or the opening pattern of the electric roler 640a that is opened as a bonus for winning the normal symbol lottery. This makes it possible to vary the ease of winning the time-saving turn without varying the probability of winning the time-saving turn depending on the number of special symbol 2 reserved turns that can be obtained, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this way, the time-saving judgment is also performed for the special symbol 1 lottery during the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and if the time-saving state is won, the time-saving state in which the special symbol 2 reserved can be acquired is set, so that even if the player is unable to win a jackpot for an extended period of time, they will have the opportunity to acquire the special symbol 2 reserved, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing due to the normal state continuing for an extended period of time that is unfavorable to the player.

As described above, in the first variant of the fifth control example, a time-saving determination is also performed during the special chart 1 lottery during the normal state, and since the game state is changed after the time-saving win, the player's playing method also changes, so it is necessary to clearly notify the player that they have won the time-saving win.

In addition, the game content differs between the time-saving state set when the time-saving win is won in the special symbol 1 lottery during the normal state and the time-saving state set when the time-saving win is won in the second special pattern lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) during the normal state (in the time-saving state set by winning the time-saving win in the special symbol 1 lottery, the player acquires many special symbol 2 reserves and aims to win the time-saving win in the special symbol 2 lottery during the normal state, which is executed based on the acquired special symbol 2 reserves, while in the time-saving state set when the time-saving win is won in the special symbol 2 lottery, the player aims to win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery), so that players do not get confused. It is necessary to make the display mode during the time-saving state different so that players can easily understand which special symbol lottery the time-saving win is based on.

Based on the above, we will explain a performance example in the first variant of this fifth control example with reference to Figures 271 to 273.

Figure 271 (a) is an example of a variable display screen when the result of the special chart 1 lottery in the normal state is a jackpot win or a time-saving win. As shown in Figure 271 (a), when the result of the special chart 1 lottery in the normal state is a jackpot win or a time-saving win, a rabbit character 801 and a treasure chest 810e are displayed in the main display area Dm, and the secondary display area Ds displays "If a 'V' comes out of the treasure chest, you've won! If a 'time' comes out, you've got the time-saving win! Open the treasure chest." In other words, when Figure 271 (a) is displayed, the player is not able to tell whether they have won a jackpot or a time-saving win.

By configuring it in this way, when the treasure chest 810e is displayed, it is possible to make the player expect that he or she will win either the jackpot or the time-saving win, and by having the player predict whether he or she will win the jackpot or the time-saving win during the period until the treasure chest 810e opens, it is possible to increase the excitement of the game.

Figure 271 (b) is an example of a display screen when the result of the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is a time-saving win. In the main display area Dm, the treasure chest 810e shown in Figure 271 (a) opens, and a ball tm1 with "Time x 1" written on it appears, and the secondary display area Ds displays "GET 1 time time-saving" to notify the player that they have won the time-saving win.

If the result of the special chart 1 lottery is a jackpot win, a treasure chest 810e opens in the main display area Dm in FIG. 271(b), and a ball with the letter "V" appears from inside. The secondary display area displays "Congratulations! Jackpot!" to notify the player that they have won the jackpot.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand whether the game state that is set after the changing first special symbol stops is a jackpot game state or a time-saving state (a low probability state for special symbols, a high probability state for normal symbols).

In the embodiment, the effects in Fig. 271(a) and (b) are executed when a jackpot or time-saving win is won, but the effects in Fig. 271(a) and (b) may be executed in some cases when the result of the special drawing 1 is a miss in either case, in which case a display mode indicating a miss is displayed in Fig. 271(b) (for example, the treasure chest 810e is empty and "Sorry" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds).

In this case, the display mode of the treasure chest 810e displayed in FIG. 271(a) may be changed to indicate the likelihood of winning the jackpot or the time-saving prize (for example, when a blue treasure chest 810e is displayed, it indicates a high probability of a miss win, and when a gold treasure chest 810e is displayed, it indicates a high probability of winning either of these).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the results of the special chart 1 lottery continue to be a miss in any judgment for a long period of time, and the player becomes bored with the game because the performance is not executed.

Although details will be described later, the small display area Dm10 is a display area for displaying the number of lottery rights (special chart 1 reserve) for the first special pattern that have been acquired, and in FIG. 271(b), reserves h5 and h6 are displayed in black, and reserves h7 and h8 are displayed in white, indicating that there are special chart 1 reserves corresponding to the number of reserves displayed in black (FIG. 271(b) indicates that there are two special chart 1 reserves). In other words, the embodiment is an example of a performance that is executed when a time-saving win is won in the special chart 1 lottery during the normal state when a special chart 1 reserve exists.

Here, gaming machines are generally configured such that when an advantageous state (e.g., time-saving state) is set, a shorter fluctuation time is likely to be set for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol. By configuring it in this way, the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is primarily executed when an advantageous state (e.g., time-saving state) is set, and by shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the lottery result is a miss, it is possible to prevent play in an advantageous state from becoming protracted, allowing the player to play comfortably.

However, in the first variant of this fifth control example, when there is no reserved special symbol 1 and a time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) during the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), when the time-saving win is notified as shown in Figure 271 (b), since the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the player begins a game (right-hand hit game) in which he fires a game ball toward the second ball entrance 640 in the right area of the game machine's panel, and based on the game ball entering the second ball entrance 640, the second special symbol begins to change. In other words, when the time-saving state is set, the second special symbol, which is likely to have a shorter change time than the first special symbol, will begin to change, and when the second special symbol stops changing, the time-saving state will end, making it highly likely that the player will not be able to acquire the maximum number of lottery rights for the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2), which puts the player at a disadvantage.

In addition, if the configuration is such that a longer variation time is likely to be set for the second special symbol than for the first special symbol in the time-saving state, and the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving win in the special symbol 1 lottery, it becomes easier to acquire the upper limit of special symbol 2 reserves by varying the second special symbol, so there is a risk that a player may engage in dishonest play by firing game balls one at a time during play in the normal state so as not to acquire the lottery right for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserve).

Therefore, if the time-saving win is won in the special chart 1 lottery when there is no special chart 1 reserved, the change in the first special pattern that won the time-saving win may be stopped without announcing that the time-saving win has been won (for example, a display may be displayed indicating that the treasure chest 810e is empty), and the next time the change in the special pattern begins based on a game ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the large second ball entrance 640, a performance during the time-saving state (see FIG. 272(a)) may be executed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the time-saving feature is won in the special chart 1 lottery when there is no special chart 1 reserved, the player will not know whether or not he or she has won the time-saving feature, and will continue playing by putting the game ball into the first ball entry port 64 (left-handed play), making it easier to execute a change due to the first special symbol during the time-saving feature state that is set based on the time-saving feature being won in the special chart 1 lottery.

In addition, in order to change the first special symbol during the time-saving state that is set based on winning the time-saving lottery in the special symbol 1 drawing, a starting hole that can change the first special symbol may be provided above the second ball entry hole 640 in the right area of the face of the game machine.

Referring to Figures 272(a) and (b), the following describes the effects that are executed when the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special chart 1 lottery during the normal state.

Details will be given later, but in the first variant of the fifth control example, if a time-saving win occurs in the special symbol 1 lottery during normal mode, the time-saving mode is set for the period from when the fluctuation of the first special symbol that won the time-saving win stops until the fluctuation of the next special symbol 1 that is executed ends.

As mentioned above, when the time-saving state is set, the probability of winning a normal symbol increases, and compared to the normal state, it is easier to play a normal symbol winning game in which the electric device 640a is in the open state, so it is easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the player can obtain the special symbol 2 reservation.

The number of reserved special symbols 2 that a player can obtain during the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) can be varied by the combination of the change time of the special symbols, the change time of the normal symbols, and the opening pattern of the electric device 640a when a normal symbol is hit.

For example, when the time-saving state is set, the change time of the first special symbol is set to 30 seconds, the change time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds, and the electric device 640a opens 1 second x 2 times as a normal symbol win, so the electric device 640a will open a maximum of 12 times, allowing the player to acquire the right to draw the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) up to the maximum number of reserved memorization times (4 times in this embodiment).

On the other hand, when the time-saving state is set, the change time of the first special symbol is set to 5 seconds, the change time of the normal symbol is 4 seconds, and the electric device 640a opens once per second for a normal symbol, the game ball can only enter the second ball entrance 640 once at most, so the player can only obtain one reserved special symbol 2.

Then, when the special symbols stop changing and the time-saving state ends, a second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) is executed based on the reserved special symbol 2 that the player acquired during the time-saving state.

In the embodiment, the probability of winning the time-saving bonus for the second special symbol in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is higher than the probability of winning the time-saving bonus for the first special symbol (1/6 in the embodiment), and the number of time-saving bonuses granted when the time-saving bonus is won is also higher (10,000 in the embodiment).

In other words, the more reserved special symbols 2 that are acquired during the time-saving mode, the more times the player can receive the special symbol 2 lottery, so the longer the special symbol fluctuation time when the time-saving mode is set, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, when the time-saving state is set, the time for the special symbol to change, the time for the normal symbol to change, or the opening pattern of the electric device 640a when a normal symbol is hit may be set to a fixed value.

Figure 272 (a) shows the display screen during the time-saving mode when the first special symbol that won the time-saving mode in the normal mode stops, and the change time of the next first special symbol to be executed is set to 30 seconds, the change time of the normal symbol is set to 2 seconds, and the opening pattern of the electric role device 640a is set to 1 second x 1 time.

The first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the small display area Dm1, and a display indicating that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner in the small display area Dm8 makes it easy for the player to understand which special symbol is changing.

In response to the time-saving state being set, the small display area Dm4 displays "Hit right" to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the second ball entrance 640 in the right area of the game machine's face, and the secondary display area Ds displays "Hit right to accumulate reserved balls!", allowing even first-time players to play in a way that suits the game state.

In the main display area Dm, the message "Collect capsules within the time limit while charging!" is displayed in the center, and an effect (charge effect) is executed in which the rabbit character 801 acquires a capsule.

The capsule is a display to notify that a game ball has entered the second ball entrance 640. When a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the reserved symbol in the small display area Dm9 lights up in black, one capsule is displayed. Here, the small display area Dm9 is a display area to show the number of reserved special symbols 2 that the player has acquired by having the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640. If there is no lottery right for the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2), reserved symbols h1 to h4 are displayed in white. If the player has acquired a reserved special symbol 2, the reserved symbols h1 to h4 are lit up in black order, starting from the youngest symbol, and when the reserved memory reaches the upper limit, all reserved symbols h1 to h4 are lit up in black.

The small display area Dm10 is a display area for showing the number of lottery rights (special symbol 1 reserve) for the first special symbol that the player has acquired by inserting a game ball into the first ball entrance 64. If there is no special symbol 1 reserve, reserves h5 to h8 are displayed in white. If the player acquires a special symbol 1 reserve, reserves h5 to h8 are lit in black in ascending order, starting with reserve h5. When the player acquires the maximum number of special symbol 1 reserves (four in this embodiment), all reserves h5 to h8 are lit in black.

In other words, the example shown in FIG. 272(a) shows that one reserved special symbol 1 and one reserved special symbol 2 have been acquired. This configuration makes it easier for the player to understand the upper limit of the reserved number of each special symbol and the current reserved acquisition status of the special symbols, and when the reserved number of each special symbol has been acquired up to the upper limit, the lottery right for each special symbol is not reserved even if the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, so that the player can easily decide whether or not to continue playing to get the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 depending on the reserved acquisition status.

When reserved balls h1 to h3 are displayed in black in the small display area Dm9 and reserved ball h4 is displayed in black due to a game ball entering the second ball entrance 640, in other words, when the maximum number of reserved special balls 2, 4, is stored, the main display area Dm displays "MAX Acquisition Completed!" to inform the player that the maximum number of reserved special balls 2 has been acquired. This configuration makes it easy for the player to understand that the maximum number of reserved special balls 2 has been acquired, which reassures the player.

The small display area Dm5 displays the remaining time until the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), that is, the remaining time of the changing special symbols, and the small display area Dm11 displays "Capsule upper limit acquisition expectation MAX". The content displayed in the small display area Dm11 corresponds to the number of reserved special symbols 2 that can be acquired during the time-saving state. In the example shown in FIG. 272(a), the change time of the first special symbol is set to 30 seconds, the change time of the normal symbol is set to 2 seconds, and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a is set to 1 second x 1 time, so as described above, the reserved special symbols 2 can be acquired up to the upper limit of 4, and therefore "Capsule upper limit acquisition expectation MAX" is displayed. In contrast, if the change time of the first special symbol is set to 5 seconds, the change time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds, and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a is set to 1 second x 2 times, only one reserved special symbol 2 can be acquired at most, so "Capsule upper limit acquisition expectation LOW" is displayed.

This configuration allows the player to enjoy predicting the number of reserved special symbols 2 that they can obtain during the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) from the display contents of the small display area Dm11, and when a short change time is set as the change time for special symbols, it becomes possible to have the player quickly launch the game ball, preventing the player from missing out on playing in the time-saving state due to a delayed launch of the game ball even though the time-saving state has been set.

The display of the capsule upper limit expectation level may be any display that indicates whether it is high or low; for example, the expectation level may be indicated by the number of stars.

In the embodiment, when the time-saving win is won in the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery) during the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns), the lottery right for the first special pattern (special pattern 1 reservation) exists, and the change of the first special pattern is executed based on the special pattern 1 reservation during the time-saving state. However, if the special pattern 1 reservation does not exist at the time of the time-saving win, the charge performance starts when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 next time and the change of either the first special pattern or the second special pattern starts. The time-saving state is set when the change of the first special pattern that won the time-saving win stops, regardless of whether the special pattern 1 reservation exists or not.

Figure 272 (b) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when the special pattern stops changing and the time-saving state ends.

The first special symbol is displayed in a static manner in the small display area Dm1, and "0 seconds remaining" is displayed in the small display area Dm5, indicating that the time-saving period has ended.

In the small display area Dm9, reserved symbols h1 to h4 are lit up in black, and the words "Total 4 GET" and capsules cp1 to cp4 are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, informing the player that they have acquired four lottery rights for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved). Capsules cp1 to cp4 correspond to reserved symbols 1 to 4, respectively, and for example, as a result of determining in advance the reserved symbol information for reserved symbol h2 (the second reserved symbol 2 acquired during the charge performance) (pre-reading result), if there is a high expectation of winning the time-saving feature, capsule cp2 is displayed in a different manner (black capsule) from the other capsules.

This can heighten the player's sense of anticipation that there is a reserve within the special chart 2 reserve that has a high possibility of winning the time-saving feature, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the central part of the main display area Dm displays "Charge ended, promotion chance zone entered!", and the secondary display area Ds displays "Chance to get "Time" during promotion chance zone!", indicating that the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) will be held after the time-saving state ends.

In addition, if you do not get a capsule during the above-mentioned charge performance, i.e. if you do not get any Special Chart 2 reserved, after the charge performance ends, you will not enter the promotion chance zone and will transition to normal mode.

In the embodiment, in the small display area Dm9 and the small display area Dm10, even if there is no special pattern 1 reserve or special pattern 2 reserve, reserves h1 to h8 are displayed in white, indicating that up to four items can be reserved in each case. However, this is not limited to this, and if there is no special pattern 1 reserve or special pattern 2 reserve, nothing may be displayed in the small display area Dm9 or the small display area Dm10, and the reserved pattern may be displayed when a special pattern reserve is obtained.

This configuration makes it difficult for players to know how many lottery rights for each special symbol they can reserve, and even if they have acquired the maximum number of reserved rights, they can continue firing game balls without realizing that they have acquired the maximum number of reserved rights.

In the embodiment, the display screen of FIG. 272(b) is displayed when the variation of the special pattern that is set to the time-saving state (low probability state of special pattern, high probability state of normal pattern) stops, but it is not limited to this, and the display screen of FIG. 272(b) may be displayed when the lottery right for the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved) is acquired up to the upper limit when there is remaining time left until the variation of the special pattern stops. In this case, the display mode of the capsule changes when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, and the probability of winning the jackpot of the special pattern 2 reserved or the probability of winning the time-saving state may be indicated.

By configuring it in this way, a player who has acquired the maximum number of reserved special symbols 2 while there is still a lot of time left for the special symbols to change can be made to expect that if they put a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, the display state of the capsule may change, making it possible for the player to continue playing by putting a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 until the last moment when the special symbols stop changing.

In the embodiment, the capsules cp1 to cp4 corresponding to reserves h1 to h4 are displayed, respectively. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one capsule may be displayed whether one or four special symbol 2 reserves are acquired. In other words, in the promotion chance zone described below, the result of the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) based on reserves 1 to 4 is notified by opening one capsule. By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to know how many special symbol 2 reserves they have acquired during the charge performance, and the player can enjoy the promotion chance zone performance without worrying about the number of special symbol 2 reserves they have acquired.

When configured in this way, it is desirable to prevent the player from knowing that they have acquired a special reserved figure 2 during the charge performance when they have acquired a special reserved figure 2. For example, when a special reserved figure 2 is acquired, the capsule is not displayed, and the small display area Dm9 is not displayed, making it impossible for the player to know the acquisition status of the special reserved figure 2. Only when the maximum number of special reserved figures 2 has been acquired, can the main display area Dm be configured to display "MAX acquisition completed."

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult to understand the acquisition status of the reserved special chart 2, which reduces the player's dissatisfaction due to not being able to acquire the reserved special chart 2 as desired during the charge performance.

Figure 273 is an example of a display screen that is displayed when you win the time-saving special drawing lottery based on the special drawing 2 reservation during the promotion chance zone.

The small display area Dm1 shows a display indicating that the first special symbol is not changing, and the small display area Dm8 shows a display indicating that the second special symbol has won the time-saving bonus.

In addition, because the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, the "Hit to the left" display is displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the first ball entrance 64, preventing the player from playing in the wrong way.

In the center of the main display area Dm, there is displayed a capsule cp1 marked "Completed" indicating that it has already been opened, a diamond dy1 marked "Time x 10000" indicating that the result of the special pattern 2 lottery based on the lottery right for the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved) was a time-saving win, an opened capsule cp2, and capsules cp3 and cp4 that have not yet been opened.

In the example of Figure 273, out of the four Special Pattern 2 reserves acquired during the charge performance, the second special pattern lottery (Special Pattern 2 lottery) based on the first Special Pattern 2 reserve acquired did not result in a jackpot or time-saving bonus, but the Special Pattern 2 lottery based on the second Special Pattern 2 reserve acquired resulted in a time-saving bonus.

The small display area Dm5 displays "3 more times", indicating that there are 3 more times the second special pattern will change based on the reserved special pattern 2, and the display of the remaining number of times is updated when the display of the changes in the second special pattern begins. For example, when the display of the changes in the second special pattern based on the first reserved special pattern 2 begins, "4 more times" is displayed, and when the display of the changes based on the second reserved special pattern 2 begins, "3 more times" is displayed.

In addition, when a new variation of the second special pattern is started based on the reserved special pattern 2, the display in the small display area Dm9 changes from black to white for the reserved display h1, and if reserved h2 is black, that is, if there is another reserved special pattern 2, the display shifts to reserved h1, which becomes black, and reserved h2 becomes white. At that time, if reserved h3 and reserved h4 are black, they are shifted to reserved h2 and reserved h3, respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 273, the variation of the second special pattern based on the reserved special pattern 2 has been executed twice, so the two reserved h3 and reserved h4 are displayed in white.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand how many more times the second special pattern will change based on the reserved special pattern 2.

In addition, FIG. 273 describes an example of a presentation when a time-saving win is made in a Special Chart 2 lottery based on a Special Chart 2 reservation. However, when a jackpot is won in a Special Chart 2 lottery based on a Special Chart 2 reservation, the contents of the capsule may be displayed in a different manner (for example, a ball marked "V") to notify the player of the jackpot win, or the capsule itself may be displayed in a different manner (for example, a red capsule).

In addition, if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery based on the reserved special drawing 2 is a miss in either case, the capsule may be configured to be empty when opened, or a display indicating a miss (for example, a piece of paper with the word "unfortunate" written on it) may be displayed inside the capsule.

In the embodiment, when the result of determining in advance the reserved information of the special chart 2 reserved (pre-reading result) indicates that there is a high possibility of winning the time-saving feature, the capsule corresponding to the special chart 2 reserved which has a high possibility of winning the time-saving feature is displayed in a different display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, if the result of pre-reading the reserved information of the third acquired Special Chart 2 reserved indicates a high possibility of winning the time-saving feature, a piece of paper with "Big Chance Next Time!" written on it may appear from inside the capsule during the capsule opening performance based on the second acquired Special Chart 2 reserved, suggesting to the player that there is a high possibility of winning the jackpot or winning the time-saving feature in the Special Chart 2 drawing based on the next lottery right for the second special pattern (Special Chart 2 reserved) (i.e., the third acquired Special Chart 2 reserved); alternatively, the display mode of the capsule with "Done" written on it that is displayed after the capsule opening performance based on the second acquired Special Chart 2 reserved has ended may be a different display mode (for example, a capsule with "Big Chance Next Time" written on it).

By configuring it in this way, when a capsule with a different display mode is displayed in the promotion chance zone, it is possible to create anticipation that information regarding the next special symbol 2 reserve to be executed will be displayed in the variation of the second special symbol based on the special symbol 2 reserve executed before the special symbol 2 reserve corresponding to that capsule, and it is possible to create interest in the opening performance of a capsule displayed in the normal display mode.

In the promotion chance zone, the special symbol 2 reserves are consumed in the order they were acquired (starting from h1, starting from the youngest), and the capsules corresponding to the consumed special symbol 2 reserves are opened in order (starting from capsule CP1, starting from the youngest). However, this is not limited to this, and the consumed special symbol 2 reserves and the opened capsules may not correspond to each other. For example, if the result of the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) based on the first acquired special symbol 2 reserve is a time-saving win, if capsule CP4 is selected instead of capsule CP1, it is possible to make the player interested in not only the display mode of the capsules but also the order in which the capsules are opened, further increasing the fun of the game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this first modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 274. In this first modified example, the difference from the above-mentioned fifth control example is that the time-saving type can be won in the first special symbol lottery, and that the time-saving type set when the time-saving type is won in the first special symbol lottery is different from the time-saving type set when the time-saving type is won in the second special symbol lottery. Also, the difference is that the variation time of the first special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state is different. The other configurations are the same, and the same contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

Figure 274 (a) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 5a table 202dae. As shown in Figure 274 (a), the time-saving random number 5a table 202dae differs from the time-saving random number 5 table 202de of the fifth control example described above in that it stipulates the judgment value for the time-saving win in the normal state (low probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns) even for the first special pattern, but is otherwise the same.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol and the set game state is a low probability state (normal state) of special symbols and normal symbols, the hit determination value for the acquired first hit random number counter C1 to be in the range of "51 to 54" for the time-saving win is stipulated.

In other words, since the range of possible values of the first winning random number counter C1 is 900, the probability of winning the time-saving feature in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is 4/900.

Next, the contents of the time-saving type selection 5a table 202daf will be explained with reference to FIG. 274(b). FIG. 274(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving type selection 5a table 202daf. The time-saving type selection 5a table 202daf differs from the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df in the fifth control example described above in that it adds a time-saving type that is set when a time-saving type is won in the first special pattern lottery, but is otherwise the same. A detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, when the special symbol type (special symbol type) is the first special symbol, the time-saving type "Time-saving C" is specified regardless of the value of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1. When this time-saving C is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 1. In other words, a time-saving state in which the time-saving count is 1 is set.

<Regarding the control process in the first modified example of the fifth control example>
Next, the processing contents of the control processing in this first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 275 to Fig. 277. This first modified example differs from the above-mentioned fifth control example in that a part of the processing contents executed by the main control device 110 and a part of the processing contents executed by the voice lamp control device 113 are changed, and the rest is the same. Here, the differences from the above-mentioned fifth control example will be described.

Figure 275 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving lottery process 5a (S8021). In this time-saving lottery process 5a (S8021), the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) are different from those of the time-saving lottery process 5 (S8001) of the fifth control example described above. In other words, in the fifth control example described above, the control process was executed so that the condition for executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment can be established only when the type of the special pattern lottery being executed is the second special pattern (see S8101), whereas in this first modified example, the condition for executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment can be established regardless of the special pattern type. In other words, it is different from the time-saving lottery process 5 (S8001) of the fifth control example described above in that the processing of S8101 is deleted. The other processing contents are the same. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning/losing judgment even in the first special pattern lottery.

Fig. 276 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving state presentation setting process 5a (S9026). This time-saving state presentation setting process 5a (S9026) differs from the time-saving state presentation setting process 5 of the above-mentioned fifth control example (see S9006 in Fig. 266) in that the processing contents (S9321, S9322) for when the time-saving type (time-saving C) that is set when the time-saving is won in the first special symbol lottery is set are added, but the rest are the same and therefore will not be described.

When the time-saving state presentation setting process 5a (S9026) is executed, the same processes of S9301 to S9308 as the time-saving state presentation setting process 5 of the fifth control example described above (see S9006 in FIG. 266) are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9306 that the time-saving type is not time-saving A (S9306: No), it is next determined whether the time-saving type is time-saving C (S9321), and if it is determined that it is time-saving C (S9321: Yes), a display command is set (S9322) to show the presentation mode corresponding to the charge time (see FIG. 272), and this process ends.

Figure 277 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5a (S4993). This special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5a (S4993) differs from special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5 (S4983 in Figure 268) in the above-mentioned fifth control example in that the process for setting the performance mode when the time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery is different from the process for setting the performance mode of the first special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state.

When the special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 5a (S4993) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S9501: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223da is decremented by 1 (S9502), the time-saving type is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9521), it is determined whether the read time-saving type is time-saving C (S9522), and if it is time-saving C, the time-saving performance mode corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time of this special symbol is determined (S9523), a display fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S9524), and this process ends.

In other words, the display mode that informs the player of the remaining time-saving period displayed in the small display area Dm5 shown in FIG. 272(a) is displayed according to the time-saving presentation mode determined in S9523. This makes it possible to inform the player of the remaining time for which the time-saving state will continue in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S9522 that the time-saving type is not C (S9522: No), this is a case where the first special pattern variation is executed with another time-saving type set, so a display command is set to show the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db after subtraction (S9525), and processing proceeds to S9524.

On the other hand, in the process of S9501, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving lottery count counter 223db is 0, that is, if it is determined that the current state is not the time-saving state (S9501: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a time-saving winning change (S9526), and if it is determined that there is a time-saving winning change (S9526: Yes), the presentation mode for indicating the time-saving winning is determined (S9527), and processing proceeds to S9524. Here, the presentation mode determined in the process of S9527 is used to execute the time-saving winning change presentation shown in FIG. 271(b).

<Second modified example of the fifth control example>
A second modified example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 278 to Fig. 282. In the fifth control example described above, a high probability state (first time reduction) of a normal pattern can be set based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery, and a high probability state (second time reduction) of a normal pattern can be set based on winning a time reduction in a special pattern lottery. This makes it possible to set a high probability state of a normal pattern with multiple triggers, and by increasing the variety of games, it is possible to improve the interest of players in the game.

In this second modified example, in order to further increase interest, the contents of the bonus granted when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery executed when a high probability state for normal patterns is set are configured to differ depending on the trigger (first time reduction or second time reduction) that set the high probability state for normal patterns. In other words, the contents of the bonus granted when the same jackpot type is set is different for when a jackpot is won during the first time reduction and when a jackpot is won during the second time reduction. By configuring it in this way, when a high probability state (time reduction state) for normal patterns is set, it is possible to make the player interested in what trigger set the time reduction state, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this second modified example, a jackpot game with a small number of rounds and a short play time per round (2R jackpot) can be executed as the jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving state is set after the 2R jackpot game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice the difference in the content of the game executed between when the time-saving state is set based on winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, i.e., when the first time-saving state is set, and when the time-saving state is set without executing a jackpot game, i.e., when the second time-saving state is set.

In addition, in this second modified example, the variation effect executed in the process of setting the first time reduction and the variation effect executed in the process of setting the second time reduction are configured to be executable in the same presentation mode. Specifically, the first period from when the special pattern variation to indicate that a jackpot win (a 2R jackpot win) for which the first time reduction is set is started until the special pattern variation is stopped and the 2R jackpot game ends, and the second period, which is the variation time of the special pattern variation to indicate that a time reduction win for which the second time reduction is set is set, are set to be approximately the same period, and the presentation is executed in a common presentation mode using the periods.

By configuring it in this way, when the first time-saving state is set and when the second time-saving state is set, a common presentation style can be executed in the period from when the special pattern variation starts to when the time-saving state is set, making it difficult for the player to understand which trigger set the time-saving state.

<Regarding the content of the performance in the second modified example of the fifth control example>
With reference to Figures 278 and 279, the characteristic presentation content executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second modified example of the fifth control example will be described.

In the fifth control example described above, although there is a difference between the number of time-saving times granted after the end of a jackpot game (the number of times that special pattern lotteries can be executed during a high probability state for normal patterns) and the number of time-saving times granted by winning a time-saving game, if the type of jackpot is the same, the bonus granted (for example, the number of time-saving times granted after the end of a jackpot game) is the same when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery during a time-saving state set based on winning a jackpot (low probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) and when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery during a time-saving state set based on winning a time-saving game.

As a result, regardless of whether the time-saving mode was set as a result of winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving mode, there was no difference in the ratio of jackpot types when a jackpot was won during the time-saving mode, or in the bonuses awarded even for the same jackpot type, which could result in monotonous gameplay.

In contrast, the second variant of the fifth control example differs from the fifth control example in that the ratio of jackpot types and the bonuses awarded are different even for the same jackpot type when a jackpot is won during a time-saving state that is set based on a jackpot win and when a jackpot is won during a time-saving state that is set based on a jackpot win.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the proportion of jackpot types that grant advantageous benefits to players (for example, jackpots with a large number of rounds of jackpot play) depending on the trigger that sets the time-saving state, and to vary the benefits granted even for the same jackpot type, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Specifically, in the second modified example of the fifth control example, in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a jackpot determination and a time-saving determination are executed in the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) and the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery), and it is possible to set the first time-saving state based on winning a jackpot, and to set the second time-saving state based on winning a time-saving state. And, for example, if jackpot A is won when the first time-saving state is set, a maximum of 100 time-saving times are granted after the jackpot game ends, but if jackpot A is won when the second time-saving state is set, a maximum of 10,000 time-saving times are granted after the jackpot game ends.

In this way, the benefits given to the player when a jackpot is won differ depending on whether the game state set when a jackpot is won is the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state. When the second time-saving state is set, it is easier to receive advantageous benefits based on winning a jackpot (for example, a greater number of time-saving periods awarded after the end of a jackpot game) than when the first time-saving state is set, so players will play in the hope that the second time-saving state will be set rather than the first time-saving state.

As will be described later, in the second modified example of the fifth control example, there are a 16R sure-variant jackpot in which prize balls can be acquired during the jackpot game and a sure-variant state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, and a 2R time-limited jackpot in which it is difficult to acquire prize balls during the jackpot game and a first time-limited state is set after the jackpot game ends.

For this reason, if the jackpot type selected upon winning the jackpot is a 2R time-saving jackpot, the player will not be able to obtain any prize balls despite winning the jackpot, and the first time-saving state, which is less favorable than the second time-saving state, will be set, which may reduce the player's motivation to play if they win the 2R jackpot.

Therefore, in the second variant of the fifth control example, the presentation executed when a 2R time-saving big win that sets the first time-saving state is won is the same as when a time-saving win that sets the second time-saving state is won, making it difficult for the player to distinguish whether a 2R time-saving big win or a time-saving win has been won.

By configuring it in this way, even if a player wins a 2R time-saving jackpot, which is less favorable than a 16R guaranteed jackpot, it is possible to make the player hope that it is a time-saving jackpot, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play when winning a 2R time-saving jackpot.

Figure 278(a) is an example of a chance time acquisition effect that is executed when a jackpot that grants the first time-saving state is won in the first special pattern drawing (special pattern 1 drawing) during the normal state.

Two number "2"s are displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, with a symbol saying "Chance Time" between them, and the sub-display area Ds displays "GET CHANCE TIME!!", indicating that the game will move on to Chance Time.

Here, Chance Time refers to the presentation mode that is displayed during the period from when the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set until the time-saving state ends. Note that regardless of whether the first or second time-saving state is set, the presentation mode displayed will be Chance Time. Therefore, the configuration is such that the player cannot tell which time-saving state is currently set from the presentation mode displayed.

The effect executed during chance time may be used to suggest the time-saving state that has been set. For example, multiple background images may be prepared to be displayed during chance time, and a specific background image may be more likely to be set when the second time-saving state is set than when the first time-saving state is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to get the player to pay attention to the display mode during chance time in order to guess the type of time-saving state, thereby increasing the interest of the game during chance time.

The small display area Dm1 shows a display mode indicating that the first special symbol has won the 2R time-saving big win. Here, in FIG. 278(a), the display in the small display area Dm1 is large enough for the player to see, but it is preferable to configure it so that it is not visible to the player (for example, not displaying the small display area Dm1), and configuring it so that it is not visible to the player makes it even more difficult for the player to tell whether they have won the 2R time-saving big win or the time-saving win.

Then, since the jackpot game is executed based on the fact that the first special symbol has won the 2R time-saving jackpot, the small display area Dm4 displays "Right Hit" to inform the player that the jackpot game is in progress, in which the game ball is shot toward a specific winning hole 65a in the right area of the game board of the gaming machine.

Here, if a 2R time-saving jackpot is won, the opening and closing plate 65b will open and close twice at high speed during the jackpot period in the jackpot game. On the other hand, if a time-saving jackpot is won, the jackpot game is not executed and the opening and closing plate 65b will remain closed. In other words, the player can tell whether a 2R time-saving jackpot or a time-saving jackpot has been won by checking the operation status of the opening and closing plate 65b. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to prevent this, the screen is made to glow brightly during the chance time acquisition performance, so that the player focuses on the third pattern display device 81 and does not focus on the opening and closing plate 65b.

In the embodiment, the screen is brightly illuminated to distract the player from the opening and closing panel 65b, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the player is drawn to the button by implementing an effect that causes the player to operate a button, or to have a small variable winning device that operates only when a jackpot game based on a 2R time-saving jackpot is played, placed in a position that is less noticeable than the variable winning device 65.

Figure 278 (b) is an example of a chance time acquisition effect that is executed when the time-saving feature is won with the first special symbol in the normal state.

The difference from when you win the 2R time-saving big win is that a display mode is displayed in the small display area Dm1 to indicate that you have won the time-saving win, but the rest of the display is the same as the display screen that appears when you win the 2R time-saving big win.

In addition, even if the first special symbol that has won the time-saving feature stops changing, the small display area Dm4 displays "Hit to the right." This is because the time-saving feature is set, and the display is intended to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the second ball entrance 640 in the right area of the game machine's panel.

In this way, by making the display format for the chance time acquisition performance when a 2R time-saving big win is won and when a time-saving big win is won the same, making it difficult for the player to tell which one they have won, it is possible to make the player expect that they have won the time-saving big win even if they win the 2R time-saving big win, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play if the result of the special pattern lottery is a 2R time-saving big win.

Here, if a 2R time-saving jackpot is won, the jackpot game is executed during the chance time acquisition effect, but if a time-saving jackpot is won, the jackpot game is not executed. Therefore, if the special pattern stops changing at the same timing, the period from when the chance time acquisition effect is displayed to when the chance time starts will be longer for a 2R time-saving jackpot than for a time-saving jackpot, by the period during which the jackpot game is executed, and there is a risk that the player will be able to tell whether they have won a 2R time-saving jackpot or a time-saving jackpot based on the length of time the chance time acquisition effect is displayed.

Therefore, in the second variation of the fifth control example, the period (determined period) from when the chance time acquisition effect starts to when the special symbol actually stops changing is different depending on whether a 2R time-saving jackpot is won or when a time-saving jackpot is won.

Referring to Figure 279, we will explain the change patterns of the special symbols when a jackpot is won and when a time-saving bonus is won.

As shown in Fig. 279(a) and (b), the presentation mode from the start of the special symbol variation to the end of the chance time acquisition presentation is the same. However, in Fig. 279(a), the special symbol variation stops one second after the chance time acquisition presentation starts, and a four-second jackpot game is played, whereas in Fig. 279(b), the special symbol variation stops about five seconds after the chance time acquisition presentation starts.

In this way, by setting the period (determined period) from when the chance time winning effect starts until the special pattern actually stops changing when a time-saving jackpot is won longer than when a 2R time-saving jackpot is won, the display time of the chance time winning effect does not change between when a jackpot game is played while the chance time winning effect is displayed and when a jackpot game is not played while the chance time winning effect is displayed, making it difficult for a player to tell whether they have won a 2R time-saving jackpot or a time-saving jackpot based on the length of time the chance time winning effect is displayed.

In the embodiment, different confirmation periods are set for when the 2R time-saving big win is won and when the time-saving win is won, and the display time of the chance time acquisition effect is set to the same, but this is not limited to the above.

For example, the confirmation period can be the same for winning the 2R time-saving jackpot and for winning the time-saving jackpot, and when the time-saving jackpot is won, a waiting period can be set in which the special symbols stop changing and the next special symbols do not start changing for a certain period of time, making the display time for the chance time winning effect the same.

In the embodiment, the configuration is such that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between winning the 2R time-saving jackpot and winning the time-saving jackpot, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when the special symbol that won the time-saving jackpot is changing, if there is a lottery right for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved), and the result of a prior judgment based on the reserved information of the special symbol 1 reserved (pre-read result) is a jackpot, the display mode of the chance time acquisition effect executed on the changing special symbol may be a special display mode (for example, the "chance time" symbol is displayed in rainbow colors), suggesting to the player that he will win the jackpot after winning the time-saving jackpot.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second modified example of the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second modified example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 280 and Fig. 281. Fig. 280(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 5b table 202dbe. As shown in Fig. 280(a), the time-saving random number 5b table 202dbe is different from the time-saving random number 5 table 202de of the fifth control example described above in that it sets a prescribed value that is determined to be a time-saving winning in the first special pattern lottery, and is otherwise the same.

Figure 280 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot 5b table 202dbd1. As shown in Figure 280 (b), the jackpot 5b table 202dbd1 specifies the contents of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd in the fifth control example described above to be commonly referenced for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and specifies the jackpot type and the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the probability change counter 203i corresponding to each jackpot type according to the game state at the time of winning the jackpot and the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2.

As described above, in this second modified example, a high probability state (first time reduction) for normal symbols can be set based on winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and a high probability state (second time reduction) for normal symbols can be set based on winning the time reduction in the special symbol lottery. As shown in FIG. 280(b), in the jackpot 5b table 202dbd1, the number of time reductions (value set in the time reduction counter 203h) set after the end of a jackpot game is different depending on whether the first time reduction is set as the type of high probability state for normal symbols or the second time reduction is set.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 280(b), in this second modified example, the jackpot type that is selected when a jackpot is won can be selected as jackpot B5b, which involves two rounds of jackpot play and a time-saving play state that is set after the jackpot play ends. Here, when jackpot B5b is selected as the jackpot type, the effects described above with reference to FIG. 278 and FIG. 279 are executed, that is, a specific effect that makes it difficult for the player to tell whether the first time-saving play or the second time-saving play has been set.

In other words, it is possible to set the same game state (time-saving state) as when the second time-saving mode is set, and it is also possible to execute a jackpot game with a short jackpot game period. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the first time-saving mode or the second time-saving mode has been set.

Figure 281 shows the contents of the time-saving type selection 5b table 202dbf. The time-saving type selection 5b table 202dbf differs from the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df in the fifth control example described above in that the time-saving type specified in accordance with the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 is different, but is otherwise the same.

As shown in FIG. 281, in this second modified example, the time-saving end condition when the second time-saving is set (the value set in the time-saving counter 203h) is configured to be the same as the time-saving end condition when the first time-saving is set (see FIG. 280(b)). Specifically, the time-saving type is configured to be selected so that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to one of "50", "200", or "10000".

By configuring it in this way, for example, if a high probability state for normal symbols is set after a specific performance is executed, and the number of times the special symbols change reaches 50 times, causing the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols to transition to a low probability state (normal state), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state was set up until that point.

<Regarding the control process in the second modified example of the fifth control example>
Next, the control process contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 282. FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 5b (S9056). In this time-saving state presentation setting process 5b (S9056), the time-saving state presentation setting process (see S9006 in FIG. 266) in the above-mentioned fifth control example is different in that the control process contents executed when it is determined that the game state has transitioned from the normal state to the time-saving state are different. Specifically, at the time when it is determined that the time-saving state has been won, it is determined in advance whether there is a jackpot win in the special chart 2 reservation (S9352), and when it is determined that there is a special chart 2 reservation including a jackpot win, the special time-saving mode is executed.

In the time-saving state presentation setting process 5b (S9056), first, the game state before the change is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9301). Next, it is determined whether the game state before the change read in the process of S9301 is a high probability state (S9302). If it is determined that the game state before the change is a high probability state (S9302: Yes), a display command is set to show the corresponding presentation mode during the preparation time (S9303), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S9302, if it is determined that the game state before the change was not a special state (S9302: No), then it is determined whether the game state before the change was a normal state (S9303). If it is determined that the game state before the change was a normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of time-saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the time-saving counter 223da (S9305). Then, it is determined whether the time-saving state set this time is a time-saving state that was set as a result of winning a time-saving win (S9351).

In the process of S9351, if it is determined that the time-saving state is set due to a time-saving winning event (S9351: Yes), it is then determined whether there is a winning jackpot among the reserved symbols of the second special pattern (S9352). If it is determined that there is a winning jackpot among the reserved symbols (S9352: Yes), a display command is set to show the presentation mode corresponding to the special time-saving mode (S9353), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9351 that the time-saving mode has not been won in this lottery (S9351: No), or if it is determined in the process of S9352 that there is no winning jackpot among the reserved symbols of the second special pattern (S9352: No), a display command is set to show the presentation mode corresponding to the time-saving mode (S9354), and this process ends.

<Sixth control example>
Next, the sixth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 283 to Fig. 293. In the fifth control example and each modified example described above, the time-saving winning is possible in the special symbol lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set. In contrast, the sixth control example is significantly different in that the time-saving winning is possible in the special symbol lottery even in the state where a game state other than the normal state is set.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if a new time-saving win occurs while the time-saving state is set, it is possible to update the remaining period for which the time-saving state will continue. This makes it difficult for players to know how long the time-saving state will continue.

In addition, when updating the remaining period for which the time-saving state will continue, it is configured so that the period for which the time-saving state will continue can be updated to be longer than the current remaining period (favorable update) or shorter (unfavorable update). In other words, depending on the timing of winning the time-saving state in the time-saving lottery and the number of time-saving times (length of time period) that is set when the time-saving state is won, winning the time-saving state can be a favorable or unfavorable benefit to the player. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide innovative gameplay that combines gameplay in which a time-saving state is expected to be won and gameplay in which a time-saving state is not expected to be won.

Furthermore, in this sixth control example, the more consecutive time-saving wins without winning the jackpot, the easier it becomes for the player to be set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Specifically, multiple time-saving types that differ in the degree of advantage to the player are defined, and the more time-saving wins are made during the time-saving state, the easier it becomes to set an advantageous time-saving type. By configuring it in this way, the longer the period without winning the jackpot, the easier it becomes to grant a player an advantageous bonus.

In addition, when the most advantageous time-saving type for the player is set, it is configured so that it is easier for the player to transition to a time-saving type that is less advantageous than when a time-saving type that is less advantageous than the most advantageous time-saving type is set. In other words, there are multiple stages of time-saving types with different degrees of advantageousness, and time-saving types with gradually increasing degrees of advantageousness are set based on the time-saving win, so that when the highest stage of time-saving type is reached, it is easier for the player to fall down to the lowest stage of time-saving type. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a time-saving type that is advantageous for the player from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

<About the content of the sixth control example>
Here, the characteristic performance contents in this sixth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 283 and Fig. 284. Fig. 283(a) is a diagram showing a display screen when a time-saving prize is won in a normal state and time-saving A is set as the time-saving type, and Fig. 283(b) is a diagram showing a display screen when a time-saving prize is won in a state where time-saving A is set and time-saving B is set.

Figure 284 (a) shows an example of a display screen when a time-saving option is won during the time-saving state and the number of remaining time-saving options (short period of time remaining) increases, and Figure 284 (b) shows an example of a display screen when a time-saving option is won during the time-saving state and the number of remaining time-saving options (short period of time remaining) decreases.

As shown in FIG. 283, in this sixth control example, the special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state is also configured to be able to execute the time-saving winning judgment, so an effect is executed to show the result of the special symbol lottery during the time-saving state (an effect in which an icon showing the lottery result appears from the bag 863). In this case, for example, the current remaining number of time-saving times during the time-saving state and the newly won type of time-saving time are distinguished, and if the number of time-saving times set corresponding to the newly won type of time-saving time is greater than the current remaining number of time-saving times (see Dm7), an effect is executed to show that the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving state increases, as shown in FIG. 284(a), and if the number of time-saving times set corresponding to the newly won type of time-saving time is less than the current remaining number of time-saving times (see Dm7), an effect is executed to show that the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving state decreases, as shown in FIG. 284(b).

In addition, in this sixth control example, if a time-saving win is won during the time-saving state, a time-saving state (time-saving B) in which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be met is set more easily (more easily set than when a time-saving win is won in the normal state). And, if a time-saving win is also won while time-saving B is set, it is configured so that an advantageous time-saving state in which the time-saving state continues until the next big win is won (the number of time-saving wins is set to 10,000) is more likely to be granted.

When time-saving mode B is set, as shown in FIG. 283(b), a display mode that can inform the player that the time-saving mode is set is displayed in a different display mode from the state when time-saving mode A is set.

<Game flow in the sixth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 285, the game flow in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 285 is a diagram showing the game flow in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 285, the fifth control example is different from the fifth control example in that the time-saving winning judgment can be executed in a game state other than the normal state, the time-saving winning probability is made different depending on the game state in which the time-saving winning judgment is executed, and a plurality of time-saving types (time-saving A, time-saving B) are provided as time-saving states, which have different degrees of advantage of the bonus when the jackpot is won.

<Electrical configuration in the sixth control example>
Fig. 286(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 6 table 202ee. As shown in Fig. 286(a), the time-saving random number 6 table 202ee differs from the time-saving random number 5 table 202de of the above-mentioned fifth control example in that it prescribes a judgment value for determining a time-saving winning in the first special pattern lottery, prescribes a judgment value for a time-saving winning in a game state other than the normal state, and differs in the range for determining a time-saving winning (time-saving winning probability) depending on the game state.

By configuring it in this way, the probability of winning the time-saving feature can be made to differ depending on the game state that is set and the type of special pattern lottery that is executed.

Figure 286 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving type selection 6 table 202ef. As shown in Figure 286 (b), the time-saving type selection 6 table 202ef specifies, in comparison with the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df described above, that the value of the time-saving counter 203h, i.e., the number of time-saving times, set for each time-saving type is different depending on the game state at the time of winning.

This configuration can make the player curious about which game state is set.

Figure 287 is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot 6 table 202ed. As shown in Figure 287, in the jackpot 6 table 202ed, the value of the time-saving counter 203h set for each time-saving type, i.e., the number of time-saving times, is set differently depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, in contrast to the jackpot 5 table 202dd described above. Specifically, the number of time-saving times set after the end of the jackpot game is different when the time-saving B, which is the same game state (time-saving state), is set and when the time-saving A is set, it is configured so that when the time-saving B is set, that is, when a time-saving state that is likely to be set when a time-saving win is won during the time-saving state is set, a time-saving state with a large number of time-saving times is more likely to be set. In this sixth control example, the value of the time-saving counter 203h set for each type of time-saving is set to a different value, i.e., the number of time-saving times, depending on the game state when the jackpot is won. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed may be configured to differ depending on the game state when the jackpot is won.

Figure 288 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example. As shown in Figure 288, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this sixth control example differs from the fifth control example in that a time-saving mode storage area 223ea has been added, but is otherwise the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

The time-saving mode storage area 223ea is a storage area for storing the set time-saving mode, and stores the time-saving mode set in the time-saving state presentation setting process 6 (see S9076 in FIG. 290) (S9372 in FIG. 290). This is then referenced when setting the presentation mode of the special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state, and the variation presentation is executed in the presentation mode corresponding to the read-out time-saving mode.

<Regarding the control process in the sixth control example>
Next, the control process contents executed in this sixth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 289 to Fig. 293. Fig. 289 is a flow chart showing the process contents of the time-saving lottery process 6 (S8056). This time-saving lottery process 6 (S8056) is different from the above-mentioned time-saving lottery process 5 (S8016) in that the process for determining whether the execution condition of the time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) is established or not is changed. In other words, as shown in Fig. 289, the time-saving winning or losing is executed in most of the special pattern lotteries executed.

In the time-saving lottery process 6 (S8056), first, the lottery result is obtained based on the time-saving random number 6 table 202ee (see FIG. 286(a)) (S8154). Next, it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a time-saving win (S8105). If it is determined that the obtained lottery result is a time-saving win (S8105: Yes), the time-saving special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the obtained value of the time-saving type counter CC1 (S8106), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8105 that the obtained lottery result is not a time-saving win (S8105: No), the special losing pattern is set on the first pattern display device 37 (S8107), and this process is terminated.

Next, FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the contents of time-saving state presentation setting process 6 (S9076). This time-saving state presentation setting process 6 (S9076) differs from time-saving state presentation setting process 5 (S9056 in FIG. 282) in the fifth control example described above in that a process is executed to store the time-saving type included in the currently received state command in the time-saving mode storage area 223ea, but is otherwise the same, so a detailed description will be omitted.

Next, FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 6 (S4997). This special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 6 (S4997) is a process for setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the second special symbol variation, and differs from the special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) in the fifth control example described above in that it executes a mode-specific presentation setting process (S9651) for determining the presentation mode during the time-saving state, but is otherwise the same, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the mode-specific performance setting process (S9651) will be explained with reference to FIG. 292. FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the mode-specific performance setting process (S9651). In this mode-specific performance setting process (S9651), processing is executed to determine the performance aspects of the various performances described above with reference to FIG. 283 and FIG. 284.

In the mode-specific performance setting process (S9651), first, the current time-saving mode is read from the time-saving mode storage area 223ea (S9801). Next, it is determined whether the current time-saving mode read from the time-saving mode storage area 223ea is time-saving A (S9802). If it is determined that the current time-saving mode is time-saving A (S9802: Yes), it is determined whether the current lottery is a lottery for winning the time-saving mode (S9803).

If it is determined that the lottery is for a win in the time-saving option (S9803: Yes), a difference is calculated based on the number of time-saving options awarded based on this lottery and the value of the time-saving counter 223da (S9804). Next, it is determined whether the remaining number of time-saving options will decrease based on the calculated difference (S9805). If it is determined that the number of time-saving options will not decrease, i.e., that the number of time-saving options will increase (S9805: No), a display command is set to indicate that the remaining number of time-saving options will increase (S9806), and the process proceeds to S9809.

On the other hand, in the process of S9805, if it is determined that the remaining number of time-saving options will be reduced based on the difference (S9805: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the remaining number of time-saving options will be reduced (S9807), and the process proceeds to S9809. On the other hand, in the process of S9803, if it is determined that the current lottery is not a lottery for winning the time-saving option (S9803: No), the processes of S9804 to S9807 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S9809.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9802 that the current time-saving mode read out is not time-saving mode A (S9802: No), the process for setting the effect during time-saving mode B is executed (S9808). A detailed explanation of the process for setting the effect during time-saving mode B (S9808) will be described later with reference to FIG. 293. Next, a comparison is executed between the current time-saving mode read out and the game state set based on the lottery result (S9809), and it is determined whether or not the time-saving mode has been switched (S9810). If it is determined that the time-saving mode has been switched out (S9810: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the time-saving mode switch is determined (S9811), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9810 that the time-saving mode has not been switched out (S9810: No), the process of S9811 is skipped, and this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the processing contents of the time-saving B effect setting process (S9808) will be explained with reference to FIG. 293. FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving B effect setting process (S9808). As shown in FIG. 293, the time-saving B effect setting process (S9808) determines the type of time-saving effect that is set when a time-saving effect is won during time-saving B, and if a type other than time-saving B, i.e. time-saving A, is set, a process is executed to set the effect mode to indicate that the time-saving state will end immediately (S9853).

In the process of setting the effects during time-saving B (S9808), first, it is determined whether the current drawing is a drawing that will result in a time-saving win (S9851). If it is determined that the drawing is a drawing that will result in a time-saving win (S9851: Yes), it is determined whether the drawing is a drawing that will result in a time-saving win B (S9852). If it is determined that the drawing is not a drawing that will result in a time-saving win B (S9852: No), a presentation mode to indicate the end of the time-saving win is determined (S9853), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the drawing is a drawing that will result in a time-saving win B (S9852: Yes), a presentation mode that corresponds to the continuation of the time-saving win until the next big win is determined (S9855), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9851 that the current lottery is not a lottery for winning the time-saving feature (S9851: No), it is determined whether the lottery is a lottery for winning the jackpot (S9854). If it is determined that the lottery is a lottery for winning the jackpot (S9854: Yes), the process of S9855 described above is executed and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery is not a lottery for winning the jackpot (S9854: No), this process ends as it is.

<Seventh control example>
Next, the contents of the seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 294 to Fig. 328. The seventh control example is different from the fifth control example described above in that it is configured to be able to win a small prize in some cases where the result of the special symbol lottery is not a big prize (is a miss), and it is configured to be able to play a big prize game by making a game ball enter a specific area during a small prize game that is executed based on the small prize winning.

In addition, the fifth control example described above was configured to determine whether or not a time-saving win has occurred only if the jackpot has not been won in the special pattern drawing, whereas the seventh control example is configured to allow for both a jackpot win and a time-saving win to be determined in a single special pattern drawing.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won is made before the determination of whether or not a time-saving win has been made, and if a time-saving win has been made, the time-saving state is set at the timing when the special pattern variation that has won the time-saving win is stopped and displayed. In contrast, in the seventh control example, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won is made before the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won is made in the special pattern lottery, and with the time-saving state set, the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery is made, and the time-saving state can be ended at the timing when the special pattern variation that shows the result of the special pattern lottery is executed.

Specifically, when the time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, as described above, the time-saving state is set for a short period including the timing when the jackpot determination is executed in the special symbol lottery. In other words, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a function (time-saving period setting function) that allows the time-saving win in the special symbol lottery is set in order to play a game (a game that is easy to execute the special symbol lottery) that is advantageous to the player toward the next jackpot win for a predetermined period (up to 10,000 times) without going through the jackpot game, whereas in this seventh control example, in addition to the above-mentioned time-saving period setting function, a function (special lottery function) is set that allows the jackpot determination of the special symbol lottery in the time-saving state to be executed during the game (left-handed play) executed in the normal state by configuring the timing when the jackpot determination is executed by the special symbol lottery to be in the time-saving state without making it easy to execute the special symbol lottery in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute the jackpot determination for the special pattern lottery during the time-saving state while making it difficult for the player to realize that they have won the time-saving special pattern lottery, so it is possible to notify the player of the unexpected lottery result as the result of the special pattern lottery.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the bonus granted when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery is different between when a jackpot is won in the normal state and when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state, and it is configured so that a bonus that is more advantageous to the player is granted when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state than in the normal state (for example, a jackpot game with more rounds). In other words, in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, when a player wins both the time-saving state and the jackpot, a bonus that is more advantageous is granted than when a player wins only a jackpot.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the presentation mode of the variable presentation for showing the result of the special pattern lottery can be set to a suggestion mode (announcement mode) that can indicate whether or not a time-saving win has been won, and a suggestion mode (announcement mode) that can indicate whether or not a jackpot has been won.

In other words, by grasping the presentation mode of the variable presentation being executed, it is possible to allow the player to predict the result of the jackpot determination executed for the currently executing special pattern lottery and the result of the time-saving winning determination. Furthermore, as a variable presentation, the timing of notifying the presence or absence of a time-saving winning is configured to be different from the timing of notifying the presence or absence of a jackpot winning. By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a determination to grant multiple different benefits for one special pattern lottery, it is possible to grasp the suggestion mode for suggesting other judgment results while grasping (predicting) at least one judgment result.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when the result of the effect (time-saving effect) including a suggestive aspect that can suggest whether or not the time-saving effect will be won is an effect result including a suggestive aspect that suggests that the time-saving effect will not be won, than when the time-saving effect is not executed. In this way, in a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which multiple bonuses with different awarding judgments can be awarded in one special pattern lottery, when a judgment result suggestive effect that can suggest the result of the awarding judgment for one bonus is executed, the result of the judgment result suggestive effect suggests that one bonus will not be awarded, so that the expectation of awarding another bonus is higher than when the judgment result suggestive effect is not executed. This makes it possible to notify the player that a bonus is more likely to be awarded at the time the judgment result suggestive effect is executed, compared to when the judgment result suggestive effect is not executed.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 of this seventh control example, but the same reference numerals will be used to designate the same contents as the above-mentioned control examples, and detailed descriptions will be omitted.

First, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 294 to Fig. 299. Fig. 294 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, Fig. 295 is an enlarged view of the lower right area of the game board 13 in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, and Figs. 296 to 299 are schematic diagrams showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example.

294, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first ball winning port 64, a second ball winning port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., to a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first ball winning port 64, the second ball winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61, also made of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62, is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 242) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left of FIG. 294) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of FIG. 294) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of Fig. 294), the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 242), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In the seventh control example, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the first pattern display device 37a is activated, while when the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640, the first pattern display device 37b is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in time-saving or normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbols correspond to a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which the time-saving mode is set as the game mode after the jackpot game ends) or a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the normal mode is set as the game mode after the jackpot game ends) or a miss, and indicate the number of reserved balls by their lighting states. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can suggest various game modes of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery), and if it judges that a jackpot has been won, it also judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that are judged here include a 15R time-saving jackpot (15R time-saving jackpot) in which the jackpot game has 15 rounds and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, a 5R time-saving jackpot (5R time-saving jackpot) in which the jackpot game has 5 rounds and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, and a 5R normal jackpot (5R time-saving jackpot) in which the jackpot game has 5 rounds and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended.

In addition, in some cases where the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a miss rather than a jackpot as described above, a small prize is prepared which gives the player fewer benefits than the jackpot described above (for example, a benefit of opening the V winning device 650 for only one round). The first pattern display device 37a, 37b not only shows whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not (or whether it is a small prize or not) as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but if it is a jackpot, a pattern according to the type of jackpot is displayed.

Here, a "15R time-saving jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "5R time-saving jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5. Also, a "5R normal jackpot" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a normal state without transitioning to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5.

In other words, this pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide one of the following jackpot games when a special symbol jackpot is won: a "15R time-saving jackpot" that can provide the player with the most bonuses, a "5R time-saving jackpot" that can provide the next most bonuses, and a "5R normal jackpot" that can provide the player with the fewest bonuses of all jackpot games. This allows the player to play in the hope that, even if a jackpot is won in the lottery for a special symbol, the jackpot game that provides the most bonuses will be provided out of the jackpot games that have different bonuses that can be provided.

In the seventh control example, the size of the bonus given to the player is defined according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends, but this is not limited to this, and the size of the bonus given to the player may be defined using conditions other than those mentioned above, or the content of the jackpot game may simply be changed so that different bonuses are given without defining the size of the bonus.

The "time-saving state" is a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is the same as in the normal state, but the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, as an added value (benefit) given to the player after the jackpot ends. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, in the seventh control example, the change time of the second symbol is made shorter than in the normal state, and the operation mode of the electric device 640a that is operated when the lottery result of the second symbol is a hit is set so that the period during which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. Note that other configurations may be used to set a game state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and only a part of the above-mentioned settings may be used, or the hit probability of the second symbol may be set higher than in the normal state in addition to the above-mentioned contents.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the first special pattern lottery, which may be triggered when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the second special pattern lottery, which may be triggered when a gaming ball enters the second ball entrance 640, are configured to be capable of winning the time-saving feature in addition to winning the big prize and small prize described above. Specifically, the seventh control example is configured to determine whether or not a time-saving feature has been won in the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery) that is executed when the normal state (low probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns) is set.

Here, if the time-saving is won, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set before the big win determination is performed in the special symbol lottery, and a process (update process 7) is executed to determine whether or not to end the time-saving state at the timing when the special symbol variation to show the result of the special symbol lottery starts. For example, in the case of a time-saving state where the number of time-saving times is set to 1 (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1), the remaining number of time-saving times (the value of the time-saving counter 203h) is updated (decremented) in update process 7 executed at the timing when the special symbol variation to show the result of the special symbol lottery in which the time-saving is won starts, and it is determined that the time-saving state is to be ended. On the other hand, in the case of a time-saving state where a value of multiple times (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of time-saving times, the time-saving state continues until the time-saving end condition is met based on the result of the update of the remaining number of time-saving times executed by update process 7.

In other words, by using the timing for setting the time-saving state and the timing for ending the time-saving state used in this seventh control example, it is possible to set the time-saving state only for the jackpot determination timing of the special pattern lottery (excluding the special pattern change period), or to set the time-saving state including the special pattern change period, depending on the number of time-saving times that are set.

In addition, as a method of achieving the same effect, a different processing timing may be set. For example, as in the fifth control example described above, the time-saving state may be set at the timing when the special symbol variation that has won the time-saving state is stopped, and the time-saving state update process (processing to determine whether or not to end the time-saving state) may be executed before the next special symbol variation begins. Even in this case, by varying the number of time-saving times that are set, it is possible to set the time-saving state so that it includes the special symbol variation period, or to set the time-saving state so that it does not include the special symbol variation period. In this case, if the special symbol variation with the time-saving state set is stopped and the next special symbol lottery does not begin with the time-saving state set, the time-saving state will continue because the time-saving end condition cannot be met.

In this case, it is advisable to determine whether the player has acquired the right to execute the next special pattern lottery (special pattern reserve) by the time the special pattern variation that won the time-saving feature is stopped (before the time-saving feature is set), and to notify the player that the time-saving feature has been won only if it is determined that the special pattern reserve has been acquired, that is, if the next special pattern variation will start immediately after the time-saving feature is set and the time-saving feature can end. By configuring the player in this way, it is possible to prevent a player who knows that they have won the time-saving feature from playing right-handed and causing the second special pattern lottery to be executed without causing the first special pattern lottery to be executed.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the seventh control example, the condition for terminating the "time-saving state" is configured such that, for the time-saving state granted based on winning the big prize in the special symbol lottery, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state when either of the following termination conditions is met: the number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol have changed (the total number of times they have changed) reaches a first predetermined number (100 times) (first termination condition), or the number of times the small prize has been won (the small prize game has been executed) in the special symbol lottery reaches a second predetermined number (for example, 1 time) (second termination condition). In this way, by providing multiple termination conditions for transitioning the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state and transitioning from the time-saving state to the normal state when any of the multiple termination conditions is met, it becomes possible to set multiple timings for the time-saving state to end, and the player can play while feeling excited about how long the time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, will continue.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, multiple small prize types (e.g., small prize A, B) are prepared as small prizes that can be won in the special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery), and the number of times the second ending condition is met is set differently for each small prize type. By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult to predict whether the time-saving state will end based only on the number of small prizes won during the time-saving state, so the player can be made to feel tense at all times while playing the time-saving game.

On the other hand, in this seventh control example, when a time-saving state (second time-saving state) is set based on winning the special pattern lottery, an end condition is set that is different from when a time-saving state (first time-saving state) is set based on winning the jackpot, and specifically, the number of time-saving states is set to "1." In other words, the first time-saving state that is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special pattern lottery utilizes the time-saving state as a special lottery function for executing only the jackpot determination of the special pattern lottery in the time-saving state.

In the seventh control example, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during a small win game, and a big win (so-called two-type win) is determined when the ball passes through the specific area during a small win game (when the V switch 650e3 provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, which is the specific area, detects the ball) (see FIG. 298). In addition, although details will be described later, the expectation of the ball passing through the specific area during a small win game (V winning expectation) is configured to differ depending on the type of small win that is won. And, the number of times the second end condition set for each small win type is met (number of small wins) is configured to be less for the small win type in which a small win game with a high V winning expectation is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to associate the expectation of winning a V to obtain a two-type win when a small win is won during time-saving play with the anxiety that the time-saving mode may end, making the player more motivated to play.

In the seventh control example, the number of times the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change is set to the first predetermined number (100 times) as described above as the end condition (first end condition), but other end conditions may be set for the number of times the special symbols change. For example, the end condition for the time-saving state may be established when the number of times only the first special symbol changes reaches a third predetermined number (e.g., 50 times) or when the number of times only the second special symbol changes reaches a fourth predetermined number (e.g., 80 times). Also, only some of the many end conditions described above may be used, or they may be combined as appropriate.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 63. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 (start winning), and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball into the normal pattern start hole (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 242), so that, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed (see FIG. 122). Each symbol row is composed of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of the seventh control example performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, while the display of the game state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b.

In other words, the third pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the third pattern display device 81 in correspondence with the period (dynamic display period) during which the first pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode according to the lottery result of the special pattern in correspondence with the timing at which the first pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the lottery result of the special pattern on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b.

In other words, when the discrimination condition (a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) is met, the discrimination means discriminates (a lottery for a special symbol is executed), and the identification information (third symbol) is dynamically displayed (variably displayed) until a predetermined dynamic display period has elapsed, after which the identification information (third symbol) is displayed stationary in a display mode (combination of symbols) that indicates the discrimination result of the discrimination means (the lottery result for the special symbol). This allows the player to understand the lottery result for the special symbol by understanding the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

The third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may have a display mode corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery, and may be a display mode corresponding to a part of the special pattern lottery result (for example, only the result of the win/loss judgment such as a big win or a miss, or a time-saving win), or may be a display mode corresponding to the details of the special pattern lottery result (for example, the type of big win that was won). In addition, if there are four types of lottery results (for example, a big win, a small win, a miss, or a time-saving win) as the lottery result of the special pattern, the display mode of the third pattern may be a display mode indicating that the lottery result of the special pattern is one of two specific types (for example, a big win or a small win) out of the three types of lottery results described above. In addition, if a double win is won by a judgment that allows double wins (for example, a stable big win, a time-saving judgment), a display mode for indicating a double win may be used, and if the content of the game executed based on the double win is the same as the content of the game executed based only on the big win, the same display mode may be used.

In addition, instead of the display device used in the seventh control example, the third pattern display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel, or multiple display devices may be provided on the pachinko machine 10.

In this seventh control example, when the second pattern (normal pattern) is won during the time-saving state, the period during which the electric device 640a is operated (the period during which the electric device 640a is protruded to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is longer than when the second pattern (normal pattern) is won during the normal state. This makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state.

The configuration for making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state is not limited to the above, and may be configured to increase the probability of winning the second symbol, or to increase the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win. In addition, if the time-saving state is made easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the operating pattern of the electric device 640a, the time it takes for the second symbol to change may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change is set shorter during the time-saving state than during normal play, the probability of winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, in the case where the time required for the second symbol to be displayed is varied according to the set game state, and the opening time and number of times of the electric role 640a are varied, the time for displaying the second symbol to be displayed may be determined according to the game state set at the time when the display of the second symbol to be displayed is started, and the opening time and number of times of the electric role 640a may be determined according to the game state set at the time when the display of the second symbol to be displayed is stopped and the second symbol indicating a win is displayed (the winning game of the second symbol, i.e., the timing when the electric role 640a is operated). By configuring in this way, for example, when the second symbol that started to be displayed during the time-saving state is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a win during the normal state, the electric role 640a can be operated with the operation pattern corresponding to the normal state. Therefore, the set game state and the operation pattern of the electric role to be executed can be more accurately associated.

The relationship between the game state, the time the second symbol changes, and the operation pattern of the electric device 640a may be specified other than as described above. For example, if it is determined that the time-saving state is set as the game state at either the timing when the second symbol starts changing or the timing when the electric device 640a starts operating, the operation pattern of the electric device 640a may be configured to set an operation pattern that is advantageous to the player (an operation pattern executed during the time-saving state).

A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 294, nails are planted on the game board 13 so that the first ball entry port 64 is easier to enter in a game in which the ball flows down the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called left-handed game) than in a game in which the ball flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed to enter the ball into the first ball entry port 64.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided to the right of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device 37b.

The first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are also each one of the winning holes through which five balls are paid out when a ball enters the hole. In the seventh control example, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is the same as the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. However, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be different, for example, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

In addition, in the seventh control example, switches (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) that detect the ball that triggers the lottery for the special pattern (lottery trigger for the big win) are provided in the ball entrance, so that the lottery trigger for the special pattern can be obtained and prize balls can be obtained. However, other configurations may be used, for example, an area (gate) through which the ball can pass may be provided, and when a switch (detection means) that detects the ball passing through the area (gate) detects the passage of the ball, the lottery trigger for the special pattern may be obtained. In this case, it is preferable to provide a ball entrance that allows at least a portion of the balls that pass through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery for the special pattern to enter, and that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, five) when the ball enters. By configuring in this way, the number of times the lottery trigger for the special pattern is obtained and the number of times the prize balls are obtained can be made different, so that a variety of playability can be provided.

The second ball entrance 640 is provided with an electric device 640a. This electric device 640a is configured to be variable between a protruding state (permitted state) protruding from the game board 13 toward the player (the player in front of the game board 13 in FIG. 294) and a waiting state (restricted state) waiting on the game board 13 side. Normally (when the second symbol is not selected), the electric device 640a is in the waiting state (restricted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the second symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is triggered by the ball passing through the normal symbol starter hole (through gate) 67, that is, when the second symbol is selected as a winning symbol, the electric device 640a is in the protruding state (permitted state), making it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be explained. In the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 294, the variable display unit 80 is disposed in the approximate center of the play area of the play board 13, and the play area is divided into the left side (left-hitting area) and the right side (right-hitting area) of the variable display unit 80, and the player can adjust the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 to direct the shot ball to either the right-hitting area or the left-hitting area. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operating handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-hitting area of the play area will be referred to as a left-hitting game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-hitting area will be referred to as a right-hitting game.

In the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 294, the second ball entrance 640, the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 that triggers the lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric device 640a are arranged in the right-hand hitting area, and the game is configured so that right-hand hitting is performed when the time-saving state is set as the game state.

To prevent the ball shot in left-handed play from entering the second ball entrance 640, a nail is planted under the variable display unit 80, and the ball is configured to not enter the second ball entrance 640 during left-handed play. By configuring it in this way, a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 to change the first special pattern can be played in left-handed play, and a game in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 to change the second special pattern can be played in right-handed play, and different playability can be appropriately provided depending on the playing method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 294, a V winning device 650 is disposed in the right hitting area, the upper surface of which is inclined downward to the left (the lower left direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 294), and the various mechanisms are disposed so that the ball that flows down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric role 640a.

When the electric device 640a is in a standby state, the ball passes through the standby electric device 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when the electric device 640a is in a protruding state, the ball that reaches the electric device 640a flows down toward the lower right (lower right direction when viewed from the front in FIG. 2). When the ball reaches the right end of the electric device 640a, it enters the second ball entry port 640, and when the electric device 640a is changed to the standby state before it reaches the right end of the electric device 640a, it enters the general winning port 63 arranged below the electric device 640a.

Furthermore, this pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 to cover the above-mentioned electric device 640a, second ball entrance 640, and general winning entrance 63. This cover member 655 has a cut processing on the surface to diffusely reflect the incident light. By providing this cover member 655, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the inside of the cover member 655 during play due to various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of playing right-handed by timing the operation of the electric device 640a.

In addition, when no game is being played (when the gaming machine is powered off), the amount of light incident on the cover member is reduced, making it easy to see inside the cover member 655 and facilitating maintenance of the pachinko machine 10. When using a configuration in which the visibility of the interior is variable using the cover member 655 in this way, the light emitting means can be shared by making the light emitting means that emits light for decorative purposes available as described above, and the number of parts that make up the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, but a dedicated light emitting means for making the interior of the cover member 655 difficult to see may also be provided.

Also, it is sufficient to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see for a predetermined period of time including the period during which the electric role 640a is operating. For example, when it is determined that the electric role 640a will be operated (i.e. when a winning normal symbol is selected by lottery), the light emitting means may be controlled so that text (e.g., "Open") informing that the electric role 640a will be operating is displayed on the surface of the cover member 655, and the displayed text may make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. This allows the player to know that the electric role 640a will be operating, while making it difficult for him or her to know the detailed timing of the operation.

Now, referring to FIG. 295, the configuration of the right-hitting area of this pachinko machine 10 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 295, of the balls shot by right-hitting play, those that pass through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric device 640a is arranged. To explain more specifically, the electric device 640a has a length of 50 mm, and is composed of a plate-like member whose upper surface allows the balls to flow down, and is arranged on the game board 13 so that it slopes downward toward the lower right (the lower right direction when viewed from the front of FIG. 295). Then, the ball that passes through the through gate 67 flows down into area a (see FIG. 295) which is within a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric device 640a.

When the ball reaches area a, if the electric device 640a is in the waiting state, it passes through the electric device 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, if the electric device 640a is in the protruding position, the ball flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a toward the right end position. Then, when the ball reaches area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric device 640a) and the electric device 640a is changed to the waiting state, the ball is configured to flow down toward the general winning port 63 provided below the electric device 640a. Finally, when the ball reaches area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric device 640a), the ball is configured to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, in this seventh control example, the period during which the electric device 640a operates continuously in the game state (normal symbol probability state) is different. When the electric device 640a operates in the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) set as the game state, the electric device 640a changes to a waiting state before the ball flowing down on the electric device 640a in the protruding state reaches area b (see FIG. 295). When the time-saving state is set, the electric device 640a is configured to be in the protruding position for a period sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric device 640a to reach area c (see FIG. 295).

Specifically, the operating period of the electric role 640a (the period during which it is continuously positioned in the protruding state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the time-saving state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. The electric role 640a is configured so that the flow period for the ball to flow down the area shown in FIG. 295 (the range from area a to area c) is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds (0.8 seconds in the seventh control example). By configuring it in this way, even if a right-handed play is performed during the normal state, a normal pattern is won, and the ball flows down the top surface of the electric role 640a in operation, the operation of the electric role 640a ends before the ball flowing down the top surface of the electric role 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, so it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery for the second special pattern from being drawn in the normal state.

In addition, during the time-saving state, the electric device 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) it takes for a ball to flow down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reach the second ball entrance 640, making it easier for the ball that flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a, which is in the induction state (protruding state), to reach the second ball entrance 640, and making it easier to draw the second special pattern.

Furthermore, during the time-saving state, for example, a ball that reaches the electric device 640a 1.5 seconds after the electric device 640a is activated flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a, and the operation of the electric device 640a ends when the ball reaches area b (2 seconds have passed since the electric device 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 3, such a ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric device 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed play is performed during the time-saving state, the ball can be guided to a different ball entry hole (the second ball entry hole 640 or the general winning hole 63) depending on the timing of the operation of the electric device 640a and the timing of the ball arriving at the electric device 640a, so that the player can continue to play right-handed games during the time-saving state.

As described above, the number of prize balls awarded for a ball entering the general winning port 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls awarded for a ball entering the second winning port 640 is 5. Therefore, if a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be drawn, a ball entering the second winning port 640 can give a player a more advantageous bonus (i.e., a lottery for special symbol 2 and 5 prize balls) than a ball entering the general winning port 63. If a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) cannot be drawn (special symbol changing), a ball entering the general winning port 63 can give a player a more advantageous bonus (i.e., 10 prize balls) than a ball entering the second winning port 640.

This allows the ball entry port into which the player wishes to enter (the ball entry port through which many bonuses can be obtained) to be changed depending on the game situation (whether or not the special symbol changes), allowing the player to enjoy right-hand play during the time-saving state. Also, in order to have balls enter both the second ball entry port 640 and the general winning port 63 during one operation of the electric device 640a, right-hand play must be continued, which increases the operation of the game.

In the seventh control example, the operating period of the electric device 640a during the time-saving state is set to a period (2 seconds) that is sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640, so that the ball is reliably admitted into the second ball entrance 640 when the electric device 640a operates. However, in addition to this, for example, the operating period of the electric device 640a during the time-saving state may be configured to be slightly longer (for example, 0.9 seconds) than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to suppress the action of stopping the ball's release after the ball has passed through the through gate 67 during the time-saving state, and then restarting the release of the ball after confirming that the electric device 640a has operated (the so-called stop-hit). This allows right-hitting play to continue during the time-saving state, improving game operation.

Returning to Figure 294, we will continue with the explanation. As described above with reference to Figure 295, the ball released by right-handed play first reaches the V winning device 650. Next, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be explained. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which the ball can win and a closed state in which it is difficult to win, and is configured to be variable to an open state in which the ball can win at a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a by operating the opening/closing door 650f1 when the lottery result of the second special pattern is a "small win."

In addition, in some cases where a "big win" of a special pattern is won, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 may be configured to operate in the same way as when a "small win" is won as described above. This makes it difficult to know whether a "big win" or a "small win" of a special pattern has been won when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates.

Now, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 295 to 299. First, as shown in Fig. 295, when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in a closed state closing the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, the ball is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 in the closed state, and a ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is in a closed state flows down the opening and closing door 650f1 toward the lower left side (the lower left side when viewed from the front in Fig. 295) and is discharged toward the through gate 67. On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is in an open state (i.e., during a small win game), the ball enters the V winning device 650.

In the seventh control example, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during a small winning game is configured to be 0.1 seconds x 12 times, and the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens enters the V winning device 650. The ball that enters the V winning device 650 is configured to flow down in an aligned manner toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 298 (a)) while flowing down the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652. By configuring in this way, the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 can be made to flow down smoothly regardless of the position of the opening and closing door 650f1 from which the ball enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650.

In the seventh control example, the period during which the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously open is set to 0.1 seconds, but any other period may be set as long as the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 during the opening period of the opening and closing door 650f1 can win the V winning device 650. Also, in the seventh control example, the number of times that the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small win game is set to 12 times, but any other number of times may be set.

Details will be described later, but in the seventh control example, the period from when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once to when it is opened again (interval between openings) is set to 5 seconds after the fifth and tenth openings during a small win game, and is set to 0.5 seconds at other times. This is to make it easier for a ball to enter the V winning device 650 during a small win game. Specifically, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the time the fifth opening operation is completed during a small win game, a game guide display that emphasizes right-hand play and encourages the player to play during the interval between openings after the fifth opening operation is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The interval between openings is set longer than usual so that the ball can enter the V winning device 650 even when right-hand play is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The same control process is also executed when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the end of the 10th opening operation during a small winning game.

This configuration makes it easier for players who are not playing appropriately during small win games (players who are not playing with the right hand) to play appropriately. In this way, during a specific game (small win game) in which multiple opening actions are performed, some inter-opening interval periods are set longer than others, and if it is determined that the player is not playing appropriately, a game guide display can be displayed to encourage proper gameplay, allowing players who are playing incorrectly to play with peace of mind.

In the seventh control example, a longer special inter-open interval period is set after the fifth and tenth opening operations during a small win game. In this way, by providing multiple times for the player to display the game guide display during one small win game, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play appropriately. In addition, when providing multiple times for the game guide display, it is recommended to set at least the notification timing for the second transition to a timing that a player playing normally cannot reach. That is, although details will be described later, in the seventh control example, by continuously playing right-hand during a small win game, at least one ball can enter in one opening operation of the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Therefore, if a normal game (continuous right-hand play) is played, the number of winning balls (10 balls) that is the end condition of the small win game will be reached during the tenth opening operation, and the small win game will end.

In other words, the inter-open interval period that is executed after the 10th opening action during a small win game is a timing that cannot be reached if the player is playing normally (continuous right-hitting game). Therefore, by using this timing to set the timing for displaying the game guide display, an unnecessarily long special inter-open interval period will not be executed for a player playing normally (continuous right-hitting game), and the small win game can be played smoothly.

In addition, when the first special inter-opening interval period is set to the timing (after the end of the fifth opening operation) that is reached even if normal play (continuous right-hand play) is performed as in the seventh control example, it is preferable to determine whether the V switch 650e3 detects a ball at the timing when the first special inter-opening interval period starts (the timing when the fifth opening operation ends) or at the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the first special inter-opening interval period (the timing when the period required for the ball that entered during the fifth opening operation to be discharged from the V winning device 650 has elapsed), and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball, a notification effect to notify that fact is displayed during the first special inter-opening interval period, and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect a ball, a game guide display is displayed as described above. This allows the special inter-opening interval period set during small winning play to be used effectively according to the game content.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to configure the game guide display to be displayed even if the V switch 650e3 has already detected a ball. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the small win game ends without a predetermined number (10 balls) of balls entering the V winning device 650 during the small win game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 296. FIG. 296 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 296, the V winning device 650 includes an opening forming member 650b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, a base member 650c combined with the back side of the opening forming member 650b to screw the V winning device 650 to the game board 13, an LED board 650d arranged on the back side of the base member 650c and having a plurality of LEDs arranged thereon to light up the LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a back cover body 650e that holds the LED board 650d between the base member 650c, and an opening/closing door 650f1 for opening and closing a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. It is composed of an opening and closing unit 650f, a flow path cover body 650g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, a switching member 650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that engages with the switching member 650h, a back cover body 650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 650g, a flow path solenoid 650k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 650j and operates the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m that covers the flow path solenoid 650k from the back side and fixes it to the back cover body 650j with a screw.

Figure 297 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. Figure 297 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and Figure 297 (b) is a Lb-Lb cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. As shown in Figure 297 (b), the V winning device 650 has a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning port (V winning port) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and has a bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that passes through the opening is guided to the left direction of Figure 297 (b). At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the entry of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that passes through this detection port 650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the rear cover body 650e shown in Figure 297 (a).

As shown in FIG. 297(b), the opening of the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a can be changed between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter (it is difficult to enter) by an opening/closing door 650f1 made of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll over the top of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to be retreated to the inside of the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) and retreated from within the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a.

By configuring it this way, right-hand play can be continued during time-saving play, big win play, and small win play, reducing the effort required to change the play method depending on the game status. This makes it easier to play.

In addition, when the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so the game ball can be efficiently made to win inside the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a. This makes it possible to shorten the time required for a small win game, and improve the efficiency of the game.

Figure 297(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in Figure 297(b). As shown in Figure 297(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the sorting flow path side of the rear cover body 650e.

Next, referring to FIG. 298, we will explain the configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the rear cover body 650e are distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2 described below.

Figure 298 (a) is a rear view of the rear cover body 650e showing the state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game balls are sorted to the special discharge flow path 650e2. As shown in Figure 298 (a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guide piece 650h2 that guides the game balls, and is pivotally supported on the flow path cover body 650g from the rear side. Here, the flow path cover body 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and is configured so that the guide piece 650h can be rotatably positioned in the sorting flow path from the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g.

As shown in FIG. 298(a), the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 650e2. The game ball that passes through the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by the V switch 650e3, which is composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball and is provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, and is discharged outside the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, the details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, when the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 described above during the small win game, the big win game is set after the small win game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting the big win game. In addition, the switching member 650h is configured to connect either the flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) through which the ball that entered the V winning device 650 during the small win can pass through the V switch 650e3, or the flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) that cannot (is difficult to pass through) the V switch 650e3, and by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to on, the flow path is switched so that the ball that entered the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 (see FIG. 298(b)).

The pachinko machine 10 used in the seventh control example is configured such that the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off during normal play, and balls that have won the V winning device 650 flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. When a small jackpot is won, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to on according to the contents of the opening scenario table 202g described later with reference to FIG. 25, so that the balls that have won the V winning device 650 can flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide a state that is maintained for a long period of time, that is, a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained so that balls that have won the V winning device 650 flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 (see FIG. 298(a)), thereby reducing the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, the game state set after the small win game is changed depending on the flow route of the game ball that entered the V winning device 650 during the small win game, so the player's interest can be increased even during the small win game. The time required for the ball to pass from the opening (specific winning port) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is configured to be at least 1 second. By configuring it in this way, even if the ball flow route is switched by the switching member 650h after detecting that the opening and closing door 650f1 is opened even if the small win has not been won, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2.

In addition, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 consisting of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a ball is provided. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, if all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have not been discharged at the end timing of the small win game (the timing when the small win ending period executed after the end condition of the small win game (when a predetermined number (10) of wins have been made in the V winning device 650, or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 has ended) has elapsed), it is preferable to determine that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and to notify the outside of the abnormality or to stop the game so that the big win game or normal game does not start. This makes it possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10, causing a secondary abnormality to occur.

In this way, the game ball that enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on that, prize balls (10 prize balls for one winning ball in the seventh control example) can be paid out as a bonus to the player. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, it is possible to determine whether or not it passes through the V switch 650e3, and it is possible to determine whether or not a jackpot game is executed after the small jackpot game ends. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning port (specific area) for awarding a jackpot game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, a small win game is executed in which the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON for different periods and timings depending on the small win type (small win A, B) that is set when a small win is won. By configuring in this way, the expectation of the ball passing through the V switch 650e3 during a small win game (V winning expectation) can be made to differ depending on the content of the small win game executed when a small win is won. Therefore, the player can play while expecting not only to win a small win, but also to play a small win game with a high V winning expectation.

Next, referring to FIG. 299, the structure of the ball flow underside of the opening and closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 299(a) is a schematic diagram showing a plan view of the state in which the opening and closing door 650f1 closes the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 299(a), the opening and closing door 650f1 of the seventh control example is configured so that a ball that reaches the upper surface of the V winning device 650 flows from the right upper surface 650y1 of the V winning device 650 through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 along the slope of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 294), down the left upper surface 650y2, and flows out toward the variable winning device 65.

The upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 is provided with a first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc as delay members for delaying the flow of the balls, and is configured so that the flow period during which the balls flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 is 0.6 seconds. This flow period (0.6 seconds) is configured to be longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by small win play. By configuring it in this way, it is configured so that the balls flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 will definitely win when the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is opened by small win play.

In the state shown in FIG. 299(a), when a small winning game is executed and the opening and closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shown in FIG. 299(b) is transitioned to. FIG. 299(b) is a schematic diagram showing a plan view of the state in which the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 299(b), when the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the open state, it moves to retreat inside the game board 13, and the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is in an open state so that the ball flowing down the upper right surface 650y1 can win in the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 also wins in the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a because the opening and closing door 650f1 is positioned in the retreat position.

In addition, the V winning device 650 is provided with a first regulating member 651 and a second regulating member 652 to ensure smooth flow of the ball after winning, regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a (see Figure 294), and is configured so that balls that enter the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a on the upstream side of the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 are aligned in a row via the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 before flowing down towards the detection port 650a1, which is a passageway width for one ball. By providing the first and second restricting members 651 and 652 in this way, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided below the first restricting member, it is possible to prevent the ball that enters the game with force from the opening and closing door 650f1 from directly colliding with the detection port 650a1, thereby suppressing the failure of the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1. In addition, it is possible to ensure a flow path (a flow path that flows down over the first and second restricting members 651 and 652) for aligning the balls before they pass through the detection port 650a1, which has a passage width for one ball, thereby suppressing the occurrence of ball clogging in the V winning device 650 and the occurrence of a situation that interferes with the game.

As explained above, in the seventh control example, the flow period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) is longer than the interval between openings (0.5 seconds) of the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) that operates in the bonus game (small prize game) that is awarded when the discrimination result of the discrimination means (the result of the lottery for the special symbol) is a predetermined discrimination result (small prize), so that the ball flowing down the variable member during the interval between openings (the timing when the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed) during the small prize game can be reliably made to win the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing.

In addition, the number of opening operations (12) in one small win game is set to be greater than the number of winning balls (10 balls) required to end the small win game, so that a predetermined number (10 balls) can be won during a small win game even if only the balls flowing down the variable member enter the V winning device 650 during the small win game. Therefore, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short, a sufficient number of winning balls can be secured. In addition, by setting one opening period long, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of balls from entering the V winning device 650 during a small win game.

<About the content of the performance in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example>
With reference to Figures 300 to 302, the characteristic presentation contents executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described.

In the fifth control example described above, if the lottery (special pattern lottery) executed when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 results in a miss in the jackpot determination (jackpot lottery), a time-saving win determination (time-saving lottery) is executed to set a high probability state for normal patterns, so that if a jackpot is won, the time-saving win will not occur.

In contrast, the seventh control example differs from the fifth control example in that the special pattern lottery is configured so that a jackpot win and a time-saving win can overlap.

Specifically, in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving lottery is executed before the jackpot lottery is executed in the first special symbol lottery, and if the time-saving lottery is won, the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the jackpot lottery is executed during the period in which the time-saving state is set, and the time-saving state ends when the jackpot lottery ends and the first special symbol starts to change. In other words, the period in which the time-saving state is set due to the time-saving lottery being won is only the period in which the jackpot lottery is executed.

The ratio of the jackpot type that is determined when a jackpot is won differs between when the normal state is set and when the time-saving state is set; for example, when a jackpot is won during a period when the normal state is set, the ratio of a 15R jackpot (a jackpot with a maximum of 15 rounds) being determined is 10%, whereas when a jackpot is won during a period when the time-saving state is set, the ratio of a 15R jackpot being determined is 50%. In other words, when a jackpot is won during a period when the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving state, the probability of a 15R jackpot being determined is higher than when a jackpot is won during a period when the normal state is set, so it is advantageous for the player when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap.

In this embodiment, the time-saving state that is set when the time-saving win is won lasts only for a short period of time from when the time-saving win is won until the first special symbol next starts to change, so the player cannot play a game in which the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (right-hand play). However, in the time-saving state that is set based on the big win, the player can play a right-hand play.

If a player is informed that they have won the time-saving mode when they have not won the jackpot, the player may become confused as to whether the game state that is set for the player after the changing special symbol stops is the normal state or the time-saving mode, and the player may mistakenly believe that the time-saving mode is set and erroneously play with the right hand.

On the other hand, if a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, even if the player is confused as to whether the normal state or the time-saving state will be set after the changing special pattern stops due to the notification that the time-saving win has been won, the player can be made aware that a jackpot game will be executed after the special pattern stops, by being notified that a jackpot win has been won.

Therefore, in the seventh control example, if a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap in the special pattern lottery, the player is notified or suggested to have won the time-saving win, but if a time-saving win occurs but the jackpot does not occur, the player is not notified or suggested to have won the time-saving win.

By configuring it this way, if a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, it becomes possible for the player to determine which game state was set when the jackpot was won. On the other hand, if a time-saving win is won but the jackpot is not won, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the game state that is set after the changing special pattern stops, which can lead to the player playing in the wrong way.

Referring to Figures 300 and 301, we will explain the display screen when the time-saving lottery result is indicated while the first special pattern is changing.

Figure 300 (a) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when a time-saving lottery result suggestion effect (an effect to suggest the result of the time-saving lottery) is executed while the first special symbol is changing. In this embodiment, when the result of the time-saving lottery executed in the special symbol lottery is to be notified to the player, a "fortune-telling time effect" is executed. The fortune-telling time effect is an effect that suggests to the player whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won, depending on the contents of the capsule cp5 displayed in the main display area Dm. In the main display area Dm, the closed capsule cp5 is displayed with the message "Does this change mean the time-saving lottery has been won?", allowing the player to recognize that the fortune-telling time effect is an effect that suggests whether or not the first special symbol that is changing has won the time-saving lottery, depending on the contents of the capsule cp5.

Here, the fortune time effect is not executed every time the first special symbol changes, and the fortune time effect may not be executed even if the time-saving feature is won. In other words, if the fortune time effect is not executed, the player cannot tell whether the changing first special symbol has won the time-saving feature or not, but if the fortune time effect is executed, the player can tell whether the changing first special symbol has won the time-saving feature or not.

Figure 300 (b) is an example of a display screen indicating that a time-saving win has been won while the first special pattern is changing. In the main display area Dm, a capsule cp5 is opened, and an effect is executed in which a piece of paper k1 with a "circle" written on it appears from inside. The piece of paper k1 is a display mode for indicating that the first special pattern that is changing has won the time-saving win, allowing the player to recognize that they have won the time-saving win.

In addition, during the fluctuation of the first special pattern in the normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns), the player is only suggested to have won the time-saving feature if the time-saving feature and the jackpot are both won. If the result of the jackpot lottery (the judgment of whether or not there is a jackpot executed in the special pattern lottery) is a miss, the player is not suggested to have won the time-saving feature even if there is a time-saving feature (i.e., the fortune-telling time performance is not executed). Therefore, when paper k1 is displayed during the fortune-telling time performance, indicating that the time-saving feature has been won, the player can recognize that the jackpot has been won before the third pattern, which is displayed in a manner indicating that the jackpot has been won, is displayed.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, the percentage of jackpot types when a jackpot is won differs between when the normal state is set and when the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set; when a jackpot is won during the normal state, the percentage of 15R jackpots (jackpots with a maximum of 15 rounds) is determined is 10%, whereas when a jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the percentage of 15R jackpots is determined is 50%.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when paper k1 is displayed during the fortune time performance, indicating that a time-saving win has been won, a "Super chance arrival performance" is executed in which the main display area Dm displays "Super chance arrival! If you win with this change, you have a great chance of winning a 15R jackpot!", suggesting to the player that there is a high possibility that the first special pattern that is changing will win a 15R jackpot, and making the player hopeful that he or she will win a 15R jackpot during the period from when the fortune time performance ends until the results of the jackpot lottery are announced, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Figure 301 (a) is an example of a display screen that indicates that the time-saving feature was not won while the first special symbol was changing. Unlike when the time-saving feature was won, a presentation is executed in which a piece of paper k2 with an "X" written on it appears from inside capsule CP5 during the fortune-telling time presentation. Paper k2 is a display mode that indicates that the time-saving feature was not won by the first special symbol that is changing, and this allows the player to recognize that the time-saving feature was not won.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, the player is only informed that he or she has not won the time-saving feature if the player wins jackpot A (a 15R time-saving jackpot) or if the jackpot lottery result is a miss.

Here, in this embodiment, three jackpot types are defined as the jackpot type of the first special symbol in the normal state (low probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol), and "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 15 rounds and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set after the jackpot game ends, "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 5 rounds and a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 5 rounds and a normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. In other words, jackpot A is the most advantageous jackpot type because it is given to the player more rounds of jackpot play than jackpots B and C, and unlike jackpot C, it is set to a time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state after the jackpot game ends.

Therefore, when paper k2 is displayed during the fortune time performance, indicating that the player has not won the time-saving feature, an "all or nothing performance" is executed in which the main display area Dm displays "All or nothing! Jackpot A? or no?", suggesting to the player that there is a high possibility that the most favorable jackpot A has been won, and making the player more interested in the game by making the player hopeful that he or she has won jackpot A during the period from the end of the fortune time performance to the announcement of the result of the jackpot lottery (the jackpot win or loss determination executed in the special pattern lottery).

Figure 301 (b) is an example of a jackpot winning notification screen when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap. In the small display area Dm1, the first special symbol is displayed stationary in a display mode indicating that a jackpot has been won, and in the main display area Dm, a rabbit character 801 opens a treasure chest 810f, and an effect is executed in which a ball tm2 with the letter "V" written on it appears from inside the treasure chest 810f. The ball tm2 is a display mode for notifying the player that the first special symbol has won a jackpot, and the display of the ball tm2 allows the player to recognize that he or she has won a jackpot.

In addition, the main display area Dm continues to display the super chance arrival effect shown in FIG. 300(b), which reads "Super chance arrival! If you hit this fluctuation, you have a great chance of a 15R jackpot!" even when the result of the jackpot lottery is announced.

If the player does not win the time-saving bonus but wins jackpot B or C, the rabbit character 801 opens the treasure chest 810f and ball tm2 appears in a state where neither the Super Chance Arrival effect nor the All or Nothing effect is displayed in the main display area Dm of FIG. 301(b). On the other hand, if the player does not win the time-saving bonus but wins jackpot A and the All or Nothing effect is executed during the fortune time effect described above, the All or Nothing effect continues to be displayed in the main display area Dm on the jackpot winning notification screen of FIG. 301(b), and the player can recognize that he or she has won jackpot A by seeing ball tm2.

After the jackpot winning notification screen of FIG. 301(b) is displayed, a presentation is executed to notify the determined jackpot type (not shown).

If the first special symbol that is changing does not win the time-saving feature and does not win the jackpot, the fortune time effect is executed, and if an all or nothing effect is executed in the fortune time effect, in which "All or nothing! Jackpot A? or Miss?" is displayed in the main display area Dm, the all or nothing effect continues to be displayed in the main display area Dm in FIG. 301(b). In this case, an effect is executed in which a ball with "Too bad" written on it appears from the treasure chest 810f, informing the player that the jackpot was not won.

In the embodiment, the fortune time effect is configured to suggest the result of the time-saving lottery (determining whether or not the time-saving lottery will be won in order to set a high probability state for normal symbols in the special symbol lottery), but this is not limited to this, and the player may be able to recognize the result of the time-saving lottery by displaying a specific character or background image.

In addition, for example, in the super chance arrival presentation shown in FIG. 300(a), the main display area Dm may be configured to display "Super chance arrival! If the jackpot pattern stops during the super chance display, there is a great chance of a 15R jackpot!", and if the super chance arrival presentation continues to be displayed until the jackpot winning notification screen appears, a 15R jackpot is confirmed, and if the super chance arrival presentation ends before the jackpot winning notification screen is displayed, in other words, if the super chance arrival presentation is not displayed in FIG. 301(b), the player may be informed that the possibility of a 15R jackpot is low.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player play while expecting the Super Chance Arrival effect to continue to be displayed during the period from when the Super Chance Arrival effect is executed to when the jackpot winning notification screen is displayed, which increases the player's interest in the game and also prevents the player from feeling distrustful if a jackpot win is notified while the Super Chance Arrival effect is displayed, but the jackpot type is not a 15R jackpot.

In FIG. 301(b), the type of jackpot may be indicated by the display mode of ball tm2. For example, if the color of ball tm2 is rainbow colored, it may indicate jackpot A (15R jackpot with time reduction), and if it is blue, it may indicate jackpot C (5R jackpot without time reduction).

Next, with reference to FIG. 302, the notification patterns when the time-saving lottery and the jackpot lottery are won will be described. FIG. 302 is a timing chart showing an example of a notification pattern when the time-saving lottery (a determination of whether or not a time-saving lottery has been won to set a high probability state for normal symbols executed in the special symbol lottery) or the jackpot lottery (a determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won executed in the special symbol lottery) is won.

Figure 302 (a) is an example of a notification pattern when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, where during the pre-reach performance period, a fortune-telling time performance (see Figure 300 (a)) is executed, and the player is informed that they have won the time-saving win by displaying paper k1 (see Figure 300 (b)), which is a display mode for suggesting that they have won the time-saving win, and the "super chance arrival performance" (see Figure 300 (b)), which is a display mode for suggesting that they have won the time-saving win, is displayed, and after the reach performance period, a jackpot win notification screen is displayed, thereby notifying the player that they have won the jackpot. Therefore, when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, the player will be able to recognize that they have won the time-saving win and the jackpot win.

Figure 302(b) is an example of a notification pattern when the time-saving lottery is won but the jackpot is not won; in this case, unlike the case of Figure 302(a), the fortune-telling time performance (see Figure 300(a)) is not executed during the pre-reach performance period, so the player is unable to know the results of the time-saving lottery, and the player is notified that he or she has not won the jackpot by the third symbol being displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has not been won after the reach performance. Therefore, if the time-saving lottery is won but the jackpot is not won, the player is unable to know the results of the time-saving lottery and can only recognize that he or she has not won the jackpot.

Figure 302(c) shows the notification pattern when the player does not win the time-saving feature but wins the jackpot. As mentioned above, except for some cases when jackpot A is won, the fortune time effect (Figure 300(a)) is not executed during the pre-reach performance period, so as with 302(b), the player is not informed of the result of the time-saving lottery, and is only notified that the player has won the jackpot when the third symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won after the reach performance. Therefore, if the player wins the jackpot but does not win the time-saving feature, the player is not informed of the result of the time-saving lottery and can only recognize that he or she has won the jackpot.

By configuring it this way, if a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, it becomes possible for the player to determine which game state was set when the jackpot was won. On the other hand, if a time-saving win is won but the jackpot is not won, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the game state that is set after the changing special pattern stops, which can lead to the player playing in the wrong way.

In the embodiment, the effect suggesting a win in the time-saving feature is executed during the pre-reach performance period, but this is not limited to this. For example, the effect suggesting a win in the time-saving feature (the effect to suggest that a win in the time-saving feature has been won) may be executed during the reach performance period, or the effect suggesting a win in the time-saving feature may be executed during the period when the jackpot winning notification screen is displayed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the time-saving winning indication effect does not occur during the pre-reach performance period, there is a possibility that the time-saving winning indication effect will be executed on the screen that notifies the player that a jackpot has been won. Therefore, even if the time-saving winning indication effect does not appear during the pre-reach performance period, the player can enjoy the changing display of the first special pattern while hoping for a time-saving winning without being disappointed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the embodiment, if the player wins the time-saving feature but does not win the jackpot, the player is not notified of the time-saving feature win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player may be notified of the time-saving feature win even if the player wins the time-saving feature but does not win the jackpot. For example, in the embodiment, the super chance arrival performance (see FIG. 300(b)) is executed only when the time-saving feature win and the jackpot win overlap, so the player knows that the jackpot win has been won before the jackpot win is announced when the super chance arrival performance (see FIG. 300(b)) occurs. However, by executing the super chance arrival performance (see FIG. 300(b)) in some cases where the player wins the time-saving feature but does not win the jackpot, the player is not confirmed to have won the jackpot even when the super chance arrival performance (see FIG. 300(b)) occurs, and the player can enjoy predicting the result of the jackpot lottery until the last moment when the result of the jackpot lottery is announced, which can improve the interest of the game.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example>
Next, the counters of the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 303. Note that the counters used in the above control examples differ in that the update range of the counters is partially different, but the basic configuration is the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first win random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 999) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 999 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 999). In particular, when the first win random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first win random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in the seventh control example), for example, and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the first winning random number 7 table 202fa stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number 7 table 202fa, it is determined that a jackpot for the special pattern has occurred.

The first winning random number 7 table 202fa is provided with two types: a first special pattern random number 7 table 202fa1 for the first special pattern, and a second special pattern random number 7 table 202fa2 for the second special pattern. The number of random numbers that will result in a big win is the same, but the number of random numbers that will result in a small win is set to be different (see FIG. 305). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that will result in a small win different, the player's expectation of receiving a special prize (a big win or a small win) can be made different between the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern. The first special pattern random number 7 table 202fa1 and the second special pattern random number 7 table 202fa2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Now, referring to FIG. 305, the first winning random number 7 table 202fa will be described. FIG. 305(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 7 table 202fa, FIG. 305(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first special pattern random number 7 table 202fa1, and FIG. 305(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the second special pattern random number 7 table 202fa2. This first winning random number 7 table 202fa is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a big win and a random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a small win are set in the drawing of the first special pattern or the second special pattern.

Specifically, when a lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 is referenced. As shown in FIG. 305(b), the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 specifies that the values of the random number counter C1 between "0 and 4" are the jackpot determination values, and other values are specified as non-jackpot determination values (i.e., misses). Then, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any of "0 to 4," it is determined to be a jackpot.

When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 is referenced. As shown in FIG. 305(c), the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 specifies that the value of the random number counter C1 is "0 to 4" as the jackpot determination value, "5 to 144" as the small jackpot determination value, and "145 to 999" as the other value (i.e., miss). Then, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a jackpot, and if the value is any of "5 to 144", it is determined to be a small jackpot.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is reached, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the seventh control example), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. In addition, in a state where the lottery (change) of the special symbol can be executed (i.e., a state other than during the change of the special symbol and during the big win game or small win game), the value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area is not a random number that is determined to be a big win or small win for a special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that is determined to be a miss for a special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a miss for a special pattern.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area is a random number that results in a jackpot with a special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a jackpot with a special pattern. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn, there are five random number values that result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and the random number values "0 to 4" are stored in the first special symbol random number 7 table 202fa1 and the second special symbol random number 7 table 202fa2 of the first winning random number 7 table 202fa as described above. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, the total number of random number values that result in a jackpot is 5 out of a total of 1000, so the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is "1/200".

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the seventh control example, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to refer to the first win type selection table 202b to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb will be explained with reference to FIG. 306.

Figure 306 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb. As shown in Figure 306 (a), the seventh control example has a special jackpot type selection table 202fb1 used when determining the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired at the time of drawing the first special pattern (special pattern 1), and a special jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used when determining the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired at the time of drawing the second special pattern (special pattern 2). As a result, the jackpot type when a jackpot is won by drawing the special pattern 1 can be made different from the jackpot type when a jackpot is won by drawing the special pattern 2, or the ratio at which each of the multiple types of jackpot types is selected can be made different, so that a game using the first special pattern (special pattern 1) and a game using the second special pattern (special pattern 2) can be provided to the player with different playability, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 306(b), the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 used when drawing the first special symbol (special symbol 1) will be explained. FIG. 306(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1. As shown in FIG. 306(b), when the normal state is set as the game state, the jackpot type in the first jackpot type counter C2 is "jackpot A" if the random number value is any of "0 to 9", "jackpot B" if the random number value is any of "10 to 49", and "jackpot C" if the random number value is any of "50 to 99". When the time-saving state is set as the game state, if the random number value in the first winning type counter C2 is any of "0-9", the jackpot type is "jackpot D", if it is any of "10-49", the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and if it is any of "50-99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B".

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 15 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. In addition to the large number of rounds, the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, so "Jackpot A" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, there are 10 random number values that select "Jackpot A", so the probability that "Jackpot A" will be selected when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 10%.

"Jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 5 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Although the number of rounds is fewer than the above-mentioned "Jackpot A," "Jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, since the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, 40 random number values are used to select "Jackpot B," so the probability that "Jackpot B" will be selected when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 40%.

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 5, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state (non-time-saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the jackpot, "Jackpot C" is a disadvantageous jackpot type for players. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, 50 random number values will select "Jackpot C", so the probability that "Jackpot C" will be selected when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 50%.

"Jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 15 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. In addition to the large number of rounds, the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, so "Jackpot D" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Furthermore, compared to the above-mentioned "Jackpot A," "Jackpot D" is configured to set a time-saving state that is difficult to end. Therefore, it is a more advantageous jackpot type for the player than "Jackpot A," in which the same jackpot game is executed and the same game state is set after the jackpot game ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) which is set to the normal state, there is a 10% chance that a 15-round jackpot game will be selected, and a 90% chance that a 5-round jackpot game will be selected. In addition, there is a 50% chance that a jackpot will be selected in which the game state after the jackpot game ends will transition to a time-saving state.

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) executed while the time-saving state is set, 15 rounds of jackpot play are selected 50% of the time, and 5 rounds of jackpot play are selected 50% of the time. Also, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot play executed based on the winning jackpot.

In other words, winning a jackpot in the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than winning a jackpot in the normal state in terms of the content of the jackpot game and the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, as for the game state at the time of winning a jackpot, the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 306(c), the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used when drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2) will be explained. FIG. 306(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 306(c), when the random number value in the first jackpot type counter C2 is any value between "0 and 99," the jackpot type becomes "jackpot D." In other words, when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the jackpot type "jackpot D," which is the most advantageous for the player, is always selected.

In the seventh control example, the number of types of jackpots is four, but it is not limited to this, and it may be one type, or five or more types. Also, it may be configured so that different jackpot types are selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol even if the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is the same. By configuring in this way, for example, when a jackpot is hit with the second special symbol, by setting a jackpot type that is executed more rounds, it is possible to make the player more excited about a hit with the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make a hit in a high probability game state more advantageous for the player, and to improve the entertainment value of the game during the high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to strongly motivate the player to move to the high probability state, and to make the player play for a longer period of time.

Also, the types of jackpot types selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (allocation rate) of each jackpot type may be the same, and only the range of the first jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type may be different. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts of obtaining the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 by targeting a specific counter value from being carried out with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The small win type counter C5 determines the type of small win when a special pattern small win occurs and determines the display mode of the first pattern display device 37. It is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small win type counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the seventh control example), and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and is stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in a state in which the lottery (change) of the special pattern can be executed (i.e., a state other than during the change of the special pattern and during the big win game or small win game).

The value of the small win type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. If the result of the big win lottery for the second special symbol is a small win, a small win type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) for determining the type of small win to be executed is set in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the contents of the small win type selection 7 table 202ff will be explained with reference to FIG. 307. FIG. 307 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the small win type selection 7 table 202ff. As shown in FIG. 307, the small win type selection 7 table 202ff stipulates that two types of small wins, A and B, are selected as the small win types of the second special pattern according to the value of the small win type counter C5. Specifically, when the acquired value of the small win type counter C5 is "0 to 89", the small win type is "small win A (jackpot A when V passes)", and when it is any of "90 to 99", the small win type is "small win B (jackpot B when V passes)".

Here, for each small win type (small win A, B), when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 during the small win game, the type of the big win game that is executed after the small win game ends is set. In the case of small win A, the big win A (15R time-saving big win) is set, and after the small win A is executed, the big win in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state is executed, and then the time-saving state (the period until the special pattern changes 100 times, or until the small win A is won once, or until the small win B is won three times) is set. In addition, in the case of small win B, the big win B (5R time-saving big win) is set, and after the small win B is executed, the big win in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state is executed, and then the time-saving state (the period until the special pattern changes 100 times, or until the small win A is won once, or until the small win B is won three times) is set.

In this way, the content of the big win game that is executed after the small win game ends and the game state that is set after the big win game can be changed depending on the type of small win selected. Specifically, small win A is set as the most advantageous small win for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is large (15R) and a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set after the big win game ends, while small win B is set as the number of rounds executed in the big win game is small (5R) and is less advantageous than the above-mentioned small win A, but a time-saving state is set after the big win game.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the seventh control example, the time-saving state can be ended with a time-saving end condition that is established based on the result of the second special pattern lottery (such as the number of times small prize A is won or the number of times small prize B is won), or a time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the special patterns (first special pattern and second special pattern) change. By configuring it in this way, if a jackpot is won with one or more reserved balls for the first special pattern and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the time-saving state will not end even if the first special pattern (special pattern 1) changes after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) changes and a small win (small win A, small win B) that can execute a big win game is won, the time-saving end condition is met based on the number of times the special symbol changes, and the time-saving state can be ended before the time-saving end condition is met, so that it is possible to suppress the repeated execution of a game in which the game ball is not allowed to pass through a specific area during a small win game until a favorable small win (small win A) is won during the time-saving state until the second end condition is met.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd will be explained with reference to FIG. 308(a). FIG. 308(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. As shown in FIG. 308(a), the variation pattern 7 table 202fd defines the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and the time-saving variation pattern 7 table 202fd2 used when the time-saving state is set. Details will be described later, but in the seventh control example, the data table used to select the variation pattern is different depending on the game state, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected depending on the game state can be different.

Figure 308 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1 provided in the variation pattern 7 table 202fd. As shown in Figure 308 (b), the normal variation pattern 7 table 202fd1 defines the pattern type, lottery result, and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 in association with the variation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 308(b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is "miss", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified to correspond to a short miss with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds in the range of "0 to 139", to correspond to a false miss with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds in the range of "140 to 149", to correspond to various normal reaches with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds in the range of "150 to 179", and to correspond to a super reach a with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds in the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is "jackpot", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", various normal reaches with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are associated with it, the range of "30 to 189" is associated with it, super reaches with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds are associated with it, and the range of "190 to 198" is associated with it, special reaches with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds are associated with it.

Next, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is set to a long miss with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds, and if the lottery result is a "big win or small win," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is set to a long miss with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds.

In this way, depending on the result of the lottery for the special pattern, one of the change patterns with a change time between 7 seconds and 180 seconds is set, and by sending a command indicating this change pattern to the voice lamp control device 113, a change performance corresponding to the change time is executed by the third pattern display device 81.

Here, in the seventh control example, as described above, when a right-hand hit game is performed in a state in which the normal state is set as the game state, the ball does not enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, during the normal state, a game in which a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64, that is, a game in which a lottery for a first special symbol is performed, is performed. In the normal state configured in this way, a lottery for a second special symbol is performed when a player illegally enters a ball into the second ball entrance 640, so a variation pattern having a long variation time is selected for the variation of the second special symbol in the normal state. This makes it possible to suppress a situation in which a lottery for a second special symbol is illegally performed in a short period of time. In addition, when it is determined that a lottery (variation) for a second special symbol has been performed during the normal state, it may be configured to notify the outside that a lottery (variation) for a second special symbol has been illegally performed using the period (180 seconds) until the lottery result is displayed. In addition, if the second special symbol is drawn (varied) illegally, the system may be configured to forcibly create and display a losing drawing (variation) result as the result of the illegally drawn (varied) second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 308(b), the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected in the normal fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd1 is specified so that when the pattern type is special pattern 1 and the lottery result is a miss, the order of most likely to be selected is 7 seconds (selection rate of about 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), 80 seconds (selection rate of about 10%), and 20 seconds (selection rate of about 5%). Also, when the lottery result is a jackpot, the order of most likely to be selected is 80 seconds (selection rate of about 80%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), and 140 seconds (selection rate of about 5%).

In this way, there is a correlation between the lottery result of the special symbol and the selected fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), and the ratio of fluctuation times (fluctuation patterns) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and the ratio of fluctuation times (fluctuation patterns) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot when a specific fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is selected. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict whether or not they will win a jackpot based on the selected fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern).

In the seventh control example, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the type of jackpot that is won, but this is not limited to the above, and different variation pattern tables may be used when the jackpot type indicates a jackpot that is advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot A) and when the jackpot type indicates other jackpots (jackpot B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is won so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating other jackpots is won. This makes it possible to get the player interested in the variation time of the special symbol, since the longer the variation time set in the variation pattern that is executed, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to be for the player.

Also, the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating a normal jackpot is won may be configured to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time more easily than the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating a guaranteed jackpot is won. This makes it possible to provide the player with an unexpected game result when a jackpot is won with a short variation time, and keeps the player excited until the end even when a short variation time is selected.

Next, the contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd2 provided in the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd will be explained with reference to FIG. 309. FIG. 309 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd2. As shown in FIG. 309, the time-saving fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd2 defines the symbol type, the number of fluctuations, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in association with the fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 309, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations is 1-4, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a short miss with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified for the entire range, and when the lottery result is a "jackpot," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a short win with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified for the entire range. When the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations is 5 or more, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a miss with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the entire range, and when the lottery result is a "jackpot," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a win with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds is specified for the entire range. In addition, if the pattern type is the second special pattern (special pattern 2), the number of fluctuations is 1 or more, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is set to a medium miss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds; if the lottery result is a "small win," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 160," a short and small win with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and a range of "161 to 198," a medium and small win with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds; and if the lottery result is a "jackpot," a medium and large win with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set.

Returning to FIG. 303, the explanation continues. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 239). Also, when the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In the seventh control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the second pattern reserved ball execution area of RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by the second winning random number 7 table 202fc stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning set by the second winning random number 7 table 202fc, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. Note that in the seventh control example, the probability of winning a normal symbol is configured to always be constant regardless of the game state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.

For example, the second winning random number 7 table 202fc may be provided with two types: one for when the probability of a normal pattern is low (the period when the normal pattern is in its normal state), and one for when the probability of a normal pattern winning is higher than the low probability (the period when the normal pattern is in its time-saving state). In this case, the number of winning random numbers contained in each is set to be different. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of a win can be changed between when the normal pattern has a low probability and when the normal pattern has a high probability.

When the ball passes through the normal start hole 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained and it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state. If the game state is in the time-saving state, the second pattern display device 83 displays a variable normal pattern for three seconds. On the other hand, if the game state is not in the time-saving state, the second pattern display device 83 displays a variable normal pattern for 30 seconds.

If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "○" pattern is displayed as the stopped pattern (second pattern). Then, it is determined whether the game state at the time when the second pattern is displayed (determined display) as a stopped pattern is in a time-saving state, and if the time when the second pattern is displayed (determined display) as a stopped pattern is in a time-saving state and the time when the variable start of the second pattern is also in a time-saving state, the operation of the electric role 640a is controlled (long opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in other cases, the operation of the electric role 640a is controlled (short opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The opening time and number of times of the second ball entrance 640 may be set arbitrarily.

In this way, the normal symbol variation time and the operation of the electric device 640a when a winning combination is selected (opening period and number of times the second ball entrance 640 is opened) are configured to be variable depending on the set game state. When the game state when the normal symbol starts to vary is in the time-saving state, the time of the variation display becomes very short (30 seconds → 3 seconds) compared to the normal state. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second symbol that starts to vary during the time-saving state is a win and the time-saving state is also set at the time when the electric device 640a starts to operate, the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long (0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times) compared to other cases, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. A table (not shown) that stores random numbers that determine whether the normal symbol is a win or not from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202.

In the seventh control example, the time for the second symbol to change and the operation of the electric device 640a are set differently depending on the game state when the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to change and the game state when the electric device 640a starts to operate based on the winning of the normal symbol. However, other configurations may be used. For example, a discrimination means may be provided that determines that the time-saving state is continuously set from the time when the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to change to the time when the electric device 640a starts to operate, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means may be used to set the time for the second symbol to change and the operation of the electric device 640a.

As described above, in the seventh control example, in order to execute the operation (long opening) of the electric role 640a that is advantageous to the player, the time-saving state must be set at both the start of the normal pattern change and the start of the operation of the electric role 640a. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that started changing at the timing when the normal state was set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating a win at the timing when the time-saving state was set, or when the second pattern that started changing at the timing when the time-saving state was set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating a win at the timing when the normal state was set, the change of the second pattern executed based on the lottery of one second pattern and the operation of the electric role 640a span multiple game states, it is possible to suppress the execution of the operation control (long opening) of the electric role 640a that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of main process 7 (see Figure 325).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Next, referring to FIG. 304(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 304(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least the first win random number 7 table 202fa, the big win type selection 7 table 202fb, the second win random number 7 table 202fc, the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd, the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe, the small win type selection 7 table 202ff, the release scenario 7 table 202fg, the time-saving win random number 7 table 202fh, and the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi as part of the fixed value data.

Incidentally, among the fixed value data stored in ROM 202, the first win random number 7 table 202fa, the big win type selection 7 table 202fb, the second win random number 7 table 202fc, the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd, and the small win type selection 7 table 202ff have already been explained in detail, so explanations will be omitted.

The time-saving granting 7 table 202fe is a data table that is referenced when multiple time-saving end conditions that end the time-saving state are set differently for each type of jackpot that has been won. It is referenced when the jackpot game ends (the ending period of the jackpot game ends) (S1612: Yes in FIG. 326), and different times of time-saving (time-saving end conditions) are set depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, the contents stipulated in the time-saving 7 table 202fe will be explained with reference to FIG. 306(d). FIG. 306(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving 7 table 202fe. The seventh control example has jackpot types (jackpot A, B, D) in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and a jackpot type (jackpot C) in which a time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends (a normal state is set), and as shown in FIG. 306(d), multiple time-saving end conditions are stipulated corresponding to each jackpot type.

The seventh control example has a first time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the special pattern changes, a second time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the small prize A is won in the special pattern lottery, and a third time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the small prize B is won in the special pattern lottery.

As shown in FIG. 306(d), the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe specifies values to be set in various counters corresponding to each of a number of time-saving end conditions, and the value set as the first time-saving end condition described above is set in the time-saving counter 203h, the value set as the second time-saving end condition is set in the small win A counter 203fg, and the value set as the third time-saving end condition is set in the small win B counter 203fh.

Specifically, in the case of jackpot types A and B, the time-saving end condition is stipulated to be set to "100" in the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition), "1" in the small win A counter 203fg, and "3" in the small win B counter 203fh. In the case of jackpot D, the time-saving end condition is stipulated to be set to "100" in the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition), "2" in the small win A counter 203fg, and "10" in the small win B counter 203fh.

As described above, in the seventh control example, when the jackpot type is jackpot C, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so the values to be set for the various counters described above are not specified for jackpot C in the time-saving granting 7 table 202fe. In this way, by making the end conditions of the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends different for each jackpot type won, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the specific time-saving content even if the player is notified in advance that the time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends, so that the player can play with heightened motivation to play until the end (until the time-saving state ends).

In the seventh control example, the time-saving state is configured to end when a jackpot with a special symbol is won in addition to the time-saving end state set using the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe. The time-saving end condition established based on winning the jackpot does not differ depending on the type of jackpot set, so it is omitted from the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe. However, the time-saving end condition described above (the time-saving end condition established based on winning the jackpot with a special symbol) may also be configured to specify a value in the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe.

Furthermore, in this seventh control example, the time-saving state (second time-saving) is set even if the time-saving prize is won in the special pattern lottery, but the time-saving end condition set for the second time-saving will be explained with reference to the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi described later. Note that in this seventh control example, the time-saving end condition for the time-saving state (second time-saving) that is set based on the time-saving prize being won is set with reference to the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi, not the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe, but the invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving end condition corresponding to the second time-saving prize may be specified in the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe.

In addition, in the seventh control example, a configuration having the above-mentioned first to third time-saving end conditions is used as the multiple time-saving end conditions, but other conditions may be set as the time-saving end conditions. For example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the first special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times), a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 80 times), or a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the V winning device has been activated due to a small win (the sum of the values of the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10 times) may be set.

Furthermore, it is also possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established based on other factors, rather than on the number of times the special symbol changes or the lottery results. For example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the normal symbol changes or the number of times the normal symbol has been won (the number of times the electric device 640a has been activated) reaches a predetermined number, or a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of balls that have entered a specific ball entry port (for example, the general winning port 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 balls), etc., may be set in advance.

As described above, by setting multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, and configuring the time-saving state to end when any of the time-saving end conditions is set, it becomes difficult for the player to know in advance how long the time-saving state will continue, and this makes it possible to prevent monotonous gameplay.

In addition, the seventh control example uses control that ends the time-saving state when any one of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, but it may also be configured to be satisfied when a predetermined number (e.g., two) of multiple time-saving end conditions are satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to provide a number-of-time-saving end conditions satisfaction determination means that determines the number of satisfied time-saving end conditions, and a condition-achievement determination means that determines whether the number of satisfied conditions determined by the number-of-time-saving end conditions satisfaction determination means has reached a predetermined number (e.g., two), and to end the time-saving state (set the normal state) when it is determined by the condition-achievement determination means that the number of satisfied conditions has reached the predetermined number (e.g., two).

In addition, a content discrimination means may be provided that discriminates the content of the time-saving end condition that is first established, and a discrimination criterion number variable means may be provided that varies a predetermined number (e.g., two) that serves as the discrimination criterion for the condition achievement discrimination means based on the discrimination result of the content discrimination means. This makes it possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is first established, so that the player can be motivated to play even after the time-saving state has been set.

In addition to the above, a predetermined period measurement means for measuring a predetermined period after the time-saving state is set (for example, until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10) and a result determination means for determining the measurement result of the predetermined period measurement means may be provided, and if the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, a time-saving end delay means for delaying the end of the time-saving state until the predetermined period has elapsed even if the above-mentioned time-saving end condition is established may be provided, or an end condition invalidation means for invalidating the established time-saving end condition when the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period may be provided. Also, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is established or updating (subtracting) the values of various counters set corresponding to each time-saving end condition may not be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the time-saving state from ending immediately after it is set, and the timing for ending the time-saving state can be set in a complex manner. In addition, when using a process for ending the time-saving state based on the establishment of multiple time-saving end conditions as described above, it is preferable to set multiple time-saving end conditions as a priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 100 times) and a non-priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of small wins reaches 3 times), and to configure the time-saving state to end immediately when the priority time-saving end condition is established, and to end the time-saving state when only multiple non-priority time-saving end conditions are established. By setting the priority time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessive time-saving state.

The opening scenario 7 table 202fg is a data table that stores opening scenarios that are scenarios for the opening patterns (patterns that operate the various solenoids provided in each winning device) of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 in a winning game (jackpot game, small winning game) that is executed when a jackpot or small winning is won by a lottery of special patterns, and the contents of the opening scenario are specified according to the jackpot type set for the jackpot won or the small winning type set for the small winning.

In this way, by varying the winning device (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) that opens depending on the winning result (big win or small win) and the type of win (big win type, small win type) and the content of the opening operation (opening scenario), the degree of advantage of the bonus game can be set in multiple stages, so that even after winning a big win or small win, the player can enjoy wondering which type of win he or she won.

In the opening scenario 7 table 202fg, the start interval period during the winning game (the period from the start of the winning game to the first opening operation of the winning device) corresponding to the winning type (big win type, small win type), the opening operation mode of the winning device (the type of winning device that is opened, the number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), the total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), the round interval period (the period during which the winning device is closed between round games), the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games to the end of the winning game (the period until the start of a new special pattern variation is allowed)), and the on/off switching operation mode of the flow path solenoid 650k for switching the flow path so that the ball that has won the V winning device 650 flows down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 or the special discharge flow path 650e2 are respectively specified.

Specifically, the winning type corresponds to jackpot A, and the start interval period is set to "2 seconds", the opening operation mode of the winning device is set to "15 rounds", the opening operation mode of the "variable winning device 65" is set to "continuously open for 29 seconds" as one round play, the round interval period is set to "1 second", and the end interval period is set to "4 seconds". Therefore, when a jackpot type of jackpot A is won, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds is executed, and a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, a time-saving state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends, is set, so that jackpot A is a jackpot that grants the most advantageous privilege to the player.

Next, for the winning types corresponding to jackpots B and C, the start interval period is set to "2 seconds", the opening operation mode of the winning device is set to "5 rounds", the opening operation mode of the "variable winning device 65" is set to "continuously open for 29 seconds" as one round play, the round interval period is set to "1 second", and the end interval period is set to "4 seconds". Therefore, if a jackpot type corresponding to jackpots B and C is won, a jackpot game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds is executed, and the player is paid out about 1/3 of the prize balls in the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot A. In addition, in the case of jackpot type B, a time-saving state is set, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends, and in the case of jackpot C, a time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so that jackpot B is a jackpot that is less advantageous than jackpot A and gives a more advantageous bonus than jackpot C.

The winning type corresponds to the big win D, and the start interval period is "1 second", the opening operation mode of the winning device is "V winning device 650" opening in the "1st round" and "variable winning device 65" opening in the "2nd to 15th rounds", and as one round of play, the first round is "opened 12 times at 0.1 seconds with an interval of 0.5 seconds between each opening", and the 2nd to 15th rounds are "opened continuously for 29 seconds", the round interval period is "10 seconds" after the end of the 1st round and "1 second" otherwise, and the end interval period is "4 seconds".

In other words, the contents stipulated for the start interval period of the big win D and the period until the second round is executed (the round game content of the first round (opening/closing operation mode), and the inter-round interval period after the end of the first round) are configured to be the same as the contents stipulated for the small win game described below. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the winning game being executed this time is a big win game or a small win game until the timing when the first round ends (or, in the case of a small win game, until the timing when the small win game ends). This makes it possible to provide an unexpected winning game to a player who has won a small win and thought that a small win game is being executed.

In the seventh control example, the jackpot D is the jackpot type that is always selected when the jackpot is won by the second special symbol, and the lottery for the second special symbol is set so that most of the time a small jackpot is won (see FIG. 305(c)). Therefore, a time-saving state is set as the game state, and during the period when the second special symbol mainly changes, some kind of winning game starts after the special symbol changes are stopped. In this case, whether a jackpot or a small jackpot is won, the winning game starts with the same opening action, making it difficult for the player to know which win (jackpot or small jackpot) he or she has won.

In addition, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to be lower than that of winning a small jackpot, and a time-saving state is set to be granted after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot D. Therefore, since a player who wins a jackpot will not be provided with a less favorable benefit than if they had won a small jackpot, it is possible to make a surprising game (a jackpot game corresponding to jackpot D) an advantageous game for the player, which can excite the player even more.

When the big win D is won and when various small wins are won, the same presentation mode is executed as the variable display (variable presentation) displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and in order to make it difficult for the player to distinguish the lottery result from the display mode of the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b that show the lottery result of the special pattern, the timing of the stop display of the special pattern and the timing of the stop display of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may be made different, or the timing of the stop display of the special pattern and the timing of the stop display of the third pattern may be synchronized, but the display mode or display area may be changed to make it more difficult for the player to distinguish the display of the third pattern at or around that stop display timing than during other periods, or the pattern for presentation displayed in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 may be switched from the third pattern to a normal pattern for presentation corresponding to the variable display of the normal pattern at the timing of the stop display of the special pattern.

In addition, the winning device (V winning device 650) that opens when a winning game is executed and the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b are arranged separately, and an effect display is executed on the third symbol display device 81 to draw the player's attention to the V winning device 650 at the timing when the special symbols are stopped and displayed (the timing when the player is notified that he/she has won one of the winning symbols), or, as in the seventh control example, the display area of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is made smaller than that of the third symbol display device 81, so that the first symbol is more difficult to see than the third symbol. This makes it difficult to distinguish whether the lottery result for this special symbol is a big win or a small win based on the stopped display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b, and allows the player to continue to expect that they have won a big win even during a winning game.

The contents stipulated for the win types corresponding to small win A and B include not only the small win game (1 round game), but also the opening scenario of the big win game (2 to 15 round game) that continues after the small win game ends when the V switch 650e3 detects a ball during the small win game. This makes it possible to reliably match the small win game content of the selected small win type with the big win game content that can be executed after the small win game ends, so that appropriate play can be provided.

Specifically, for the small win type A, the start interval period is set to "1 second" for the small win game, the opening operation mode of the winning device "V winning device 650" is opened "1 round", one round game is "12 times of 0.1 second opening", and the interval period between openings is "0.5 seconds except after the 5th and 10th openings (inter-opening interval 1), and 5 seconds after the 5th and 10th openings (inter-opening interval 2)".

The "variable winning device 65" opens in the "2nd to 15th rounds" as a big win game that can be executed after the small win game has ended, and one round of play is "continuously open for 29 seconds." The interval between rounds is "10 seconds" after the first round has ended, and "1 second" otherwise, with a start interval of "2 seconds" and an end interval of "8 seconds."

In addition, for the small win type B, the start interval period is set to "1 second" for the small win game, the opening operation mode of the winning device "V winning device 650" is opened "1 round", one round game is "12 times of 0.1 second opening", and the interval period between openings is "0.5 seconds except after the 5th and 10th openings (inter-opening interval 1), and 5 seconds after the 5th and 10th openings (inter-opening interval 2)".

The "variable winning device 65" opens in the "second to fifth rounds" as a big win game that can be executed after the small win game has ended, and one round of play is "continuously open for 29 seconds." The interval between rounds is "10 seconds" after the first round has ended, and "1 second" otherwise, with a start interval of "2 seconds" and an end interval of "8 seconds."

In other words, the big win game that can be executed after the small win game corresponding to small win B is completed is set to have fewer rounds than the big win game corresponding to small win A described above. Also, when the small win type is small win B, a time-saving state that is an advantageous game state for the player is set after the corresponding big win game is completed, so small win B is a small win that confers a less advantageous benefit than small win A.

Time-saving random number 7 table 202fh is a data table in which the value (judgment value) of the first winning random number counter C1, which is judged to be a time-saving win in the lottery for the first special pattern or the second special pattern, is specified in correspondence with the game state. Here, the contents of time-saving random number 7 table 202fh will be explained with reference to FIG. 310(a). FIG. 310(a) is a diagram showing the contents specified in time-saving random number 7 table 202fh.

Specifically, regardless of the type of special symbol, when the game state is normal (low probability state for special symbols and normal symbols), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is set to a range of "3, 4, 140 to 287" as the judgment value for a time-saving win, and for other game states, no judgment value for a time-saving win is set.

Here, in this seventh control example, the jackpot winning judgment and the time-saving winning judgment can be executed in a single special pattern lottery. Also, the small prize winning judgment and the time-saving winning judgment can be executed in a overlapping manner. Therefore, for example, if the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "3, 4", a jackpot is judged in the jackpot judgment executed using the first winning random number 7 table 202fa (see FIG. 305(a)), and a time-saving winning judgment is judged in the time-saving winning judgment executed using the time-saving random number 7 table 202fh (see FIG. 310(a)), so that a jackpot and a time-saving winning are won in a overlapping manner. Similarly, if the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "140 to 144," a small win is determined in the small win determination performed using the special pattern 2 random number 7 table 202fa2 (see FIG. 305(c)), and a time-saving win is determined in the time-saving win determination performed using the time-saving win random number 7 table 202fh (see FIG. 310(a)), resulting in a double win of both the small win and the time-saving win.

As described above, in the seventh control example, the jackpot (small jackpot) determination is performed after the time-saving winning determination is performed, so in the case of a double win, the jackpot (small jackpot) is won in the time-saving state. Therefore, a more advantageous bonus can be awarded to the player compared to winning the jackpot (small jackpot) without winning the time-saving state.

In this seventh control example, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in one special pattern lottery is used to determine whether or not there is a big win (small win) and whether or not there is a time-saving win, and if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained is the winning determination value in either determination, a double win is possible; however, this is not limited to this, and for example, when the right to execute a special pattern lottery is acquired, the value of the random number counter for determining a big win (small win) and the value of the random number counter for determining a time-saving win may be obtained separately, and the obtained values may be used to determine whether or not there is a big win (small win) and whether or not there is a time-saving win.

The time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi is a data table that is referenced when setting the time-saving end conditions for the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set when the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving type is specified in accordance with the value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1.

Here, the contents of the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi will be explained with reference to FIG. 310(b). FIG. 310(b) is a diagram showing the contents specified in the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi. As shown in FIG. 310(b), the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi specifies a time-saving type corresponding to the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1, and specifies a time-saving end condition corresponding to the specified time-saving type.

Specifically, time-saving A is specified as the time-saving type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1. Then, a time-saving end condition is specified in which "1" is set to the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition) as the time-saving end condition corresponding to time-saving A. In other words, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is set when the process of updating the value of the special pattern time-saving counter 203h is executed once. Therefore, if the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set at the time of winning the time-saving state, and then a jackpot determination is performed in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving state is set until the special pattern variation to show the result of the special pattern lottery begins.

In other words, if the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern lottery, it is possible to set a time-saving feature only for the purpose of making the jackpot determination in the special pattern lottery during the time-saving feature (making a special lottery) during the time-saving feature. Therefore, if the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern lottery, it is possible for only the jackpot determination to be made during the time-saving feature without the player realizing that they have won the time-saving feature, so that if the player wins the jackpot, an unexpected bonus (the jackpot gameplay content, the time-saving feature after the jackpot game ends) can be given to the player.

As shown in FIG. 310(b), in this seventh control example, when a time-saving prize is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving prize type A is always set as the time-saving prize type, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, a time-saving prize type different from time-saving prize A may be selectable depending on the value of the acquired time-saving prize type selection counter CC1. In this case, for example, the time-saving prize type A is specified as the time-saving prize type for the range of the acquired time-saving prize type selection counter CC1 from "0 to 94", and the time-saving prize type Z different from time-saving prize A is specified as the time-saving prize type for the range of "95 to 99", and a time-saving prize end condition for setting the time-saving prize counter 203h (first time-saving prize end condition) to "100" is specified as the time-saving prize end condition corresponding to time-saving prize Z.

By configuring it in this way, in some cases where a time-saving win is made in the special symbol lottery, it is possible to set a time-saving state for continuing to execute the second special symbol lottery, rather than a time-saving state for executing a special lottery, providing players with a more unexpected experience.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 304(b). Fig. 304(b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 304(b), the RAM 203 in the seventh control example has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a game status storage area 203g, a time-saving counter 203h, a big win start flag 203j, a big win in progress flag 203k, a small win type storage area 203fa, a small win start flag 203fb, a small win in progress flag 203fc, a V-pass big win type storage area 203fd, a V flag 203fe, a V-pass flag 203ff, a small win A counter 203fg, a small win B counter 203fh, and other memory areas 203z.

In other words, the difference is that a small win type storage area 203fa, a small win start flag 203fb, a small win mid-game flag 203fc, a V-pass big win type storage area 203fd, a V flag 203fe, a V-pass flag 203ff, a small win A counter 203fg, and a small win B counter 203fh have been added to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 244(b)) of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above, but otherwise it is the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The small win type storage area 203fa is a storage area for temporarily storing the small win type set for the small win that has been won. When it is determined that a small win has been won (S10306 in FIG. 317: Yes), the acquired small win type is temporarily stored (S10310 in FIG. 317). Then, when the number of V winning devices 650 opened during the small win game reaches a predetermined number (S11707 in FIG. 327: Yes) and it is determined that the V flag 203fe is not set to on (S11708 in FIG. 327: No), the stored small win type is referenced (S11709 in FIG. 327), and an instruction command corresponding to the referenced small win type is set. Although detailed explanation is omitted, the information (information for indicating the small win type) stored in the small win type storage area 203fa is configured to be cleared when the small win game ends.

The small win start flag 203fb is a flag that indicates that it is the start timing of a small win game. It is set to ON when the variation of the special symbol that is determined to be a small win is stopped (S10404 in FIG. 320). When it is determined that the small win start flag 203fb is ON and it is identified that it is the start timing of a small win game, it is set to OFF (S11703 in FIG. 327). This small win start flag 203fb is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared, and is configured to be maintained in the event of a power outage or the like by backing up the state immediately before the power outage or the like.

The small win in progress flag 203fc is a flag that indicates that a small win is in progress. It is set to ON when the variation of the special symbol that is determined to be a small win is stopped (S10404 in FIG. 320). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end time of the small win (when it is determined that the play of the set number of rounds of the small win has ended), it is set to OFF (S11720 in FIG. 327). This small win in progress flag 203fc is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared, and is configured to be maintained in the event of a power outage or the like by backing up the state immediately before the power outage or the like.

The V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is a storage area in which data is stored for determining the jackpot type that is set when a ball that has entered the V winning device 650 is detected by the V switch 650e3 during a small win game. When the variation of the special pattern that is determined to be a small win stops, the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd stores a data value corresponding to the jackpot type that corresponds to the determined small win type (S10402 in FIG. 320). When a ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 and is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag 203fe corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is set to ON. At the end of the small win game, the data value stored in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is cleared. This V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is a flag that is set to off in the initial state, such as when the RAM is cleared, and is configured to be retained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage, etc., if a power outage occurs.

When a ball flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 in the V winning device 650 during a small win game and the ball is detected by the V switch 650e3, the V flag 203fe is set to ON, which corresponds to the type of big win corresponding to the type of small win game being played. At the end of the small win game, it is determined whether this V flag 203fe is ON (S11716 in FIG. 327), and if it is determined that the V flag 203fe is ON (S11716 in FIG. 327: Yes), the type of big win to be played is determined from the flag that is set to ON, and the start of the corresponding big win game is set (S11718 in FIG. 327). This V flag 203fe is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is configured to be maintained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage, etc., in the event of a power outage, etc.

The V passing flag 203ff is a flag used to determine whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON during a small win game, and is set to ON when the V flag 203fe is set to ON. In the seventh control example, most of the balls that enter the V winning device 650 during a small win game are configured to flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2, and the V passing flag 203ff is set to ON in the V passing process (see FIG. 323) corresponding to the ball that first enters the special discharge flow path 650e2 (S11207 in FIG. 323).

Then, in the V passing process (see FIG. 323), it is determined whether the V passing flag 203ff is set to on (S11201 in FIG. 323), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S11201 in FIG. 323: Yes), the process of S11202 to S11208 of the V passing process (see FIG. 323) is skipped. As a result, even if the V switch 650e3 detects multiple balls during one small win game, only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected ball is executed. This simplifies the process executed during the small win game, and prevents the V passing command from being sent multiple times to the voice lamp control device 113, which causes V passing management on the voice lamp control device 113 side to become complicated.

The time-saving counter 203h is a counter for measuring the number of times the special pattern changes until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is met, and when it is determined in the jackpot control process (S11504 in FIG. 326) that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (end timing of the jackpot) (S11612 in FIG. 326: Yes), the value (100) specified in the time-saving granting 7 table 202fe is set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

Then, the counter value is referred to in the update process 7 (S8253 in FIG. 319) executed in the special pattern change process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) (S10601 in FIG. 319), and if it is determined that the counter value is greater than 0 (S10601 in FIG. 319: Yes), the counter value is decremented by 1. If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203k after the decrement is 0 (S10604 in FIG. 319: Yes), the time-saving end condition is met, and the normal state is set as the game state (S10605 in FIG. 319). In addition, in the seventh control example, multiple time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is met (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of small wins is met), the counter value is set (reset) to 0 (S10505 in FIG. 321). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (first time-saving end condition) that references the value of the time-saving counter 203h is satisfied among the multiple time-saving end conditions, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of decrementing the value of the time-saving counter 203h continues even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

The small win A counter 203fg is a counter for measuring the number of times a small win with small win A set as the small win type is won until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is met. When it is determined in the big win control process 7 (S11504 in FIG. 326) that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (end timing of the big win) (S11612 in FIG. 326: Yes), the value (1) specified in the time-saving granting 7 table 202fe is set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

And, when the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405 in FIG. 321) executed in the small win start setting process (S10223 in FIG. 320) of the special symbol change process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) determines that the small win type of the small win won this time is small win A (S10502 in FIG. 321: Yes), the counter value is decremented by 1. When the value of the small win A counter 203fg after decrement is determined to be 0 (S10504 in FIG. 321: Yes), the time-saving end condition is established, and the normal state is set as the game state (S10507 in FIG. 321). In addition, in the seventh control example, multiple time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is established (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of special symbol changes is established), the counter value is set to 0 (reset) (S10606 in FIG. 319). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) that references the value of the small win A counter 203m is satisfied among the multiple time-saving end conditions, the value of the small win A counter 203m is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the small win A counter 203m continues even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

The small win B counter 203fh is a counter for measuring the number of times a small win with small win B set as the small win type is won until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is met. When it is determined in the big win control process (S11504 in FIG. 326) that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (end timing of the big win) (S11612 in FIG. 326: Yes), the value (3) specified in the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe is set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

And, when it is determined that the type of the small win that was won this time is small win B in the small win time-saving update process (S10405 in FIG. 321) executed in the small win start setting process (S10223 in FIG. 320) of the special pattern change process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) (S10510 in FIG. 321: Yes), the counter value is decremented by 1. When it is determined that the value of the small win B counter 203fh after decrement is 0 (S10512 in FIG. 321: Yes), the time-saving end condition is established, and the normal state is set as the game state (S10507 in FIG. 321). In addition, in the seventh control example, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is established (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of special pattern changes is established), the counter value is set to 0 (reset) (S10606 in FIG. 319). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition (third time-saving end condition) that references the value of the small win B counter 203fh is satisfied among the multiple time-saving end conditions, the value of the small win B counter 203fh is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of decrementing the value of the small win B counter 203fh continues even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

Next, referring to FIG. 311(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this seventh control example will be described. FIG. 311(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 311(a), the ROM 222 of this seventh control example differs from the ROM 222 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(a)) in that the pullback mode selection table 222da and the suggestion mode selection table 222db have been deleted and a lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa has been added. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

The lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is a data table referenced when determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed in response to the variation time of the special pattern variation, and one mode is selected from multiple modes as a mode for suggesting (informing) the result of the special pattern lottery (the judgment result of the jackpot judgment and the judgment result of the time-saving win judgment). This lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa is referenced in the special pattern 1 presentation mode setting process 7 (see S14893 in FIG. 328) for setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation (special pattern 1 variable presentation) for showing the result of the first special pattern lottery (see S19502 in FIG. 328).

Now, referring to FIG. 312, the contents defined in the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa will be explained. FIG. 312 is a diagram showing a schematic of the contents defined in the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa. As shown in FIG. 312, the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa defines different lottery result notification modes corresponding to the game state at the time of the jackpot determination, the jackpot determination result, and the acquired value of the presentation counter 223f, and the presentation mode for showing the result of the special pattern lottery is set using the selected notification mode.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of the jackpot determination is the normal state, that is, when the time-saving win determination in the special symbol lottery does not result in a win in the time-saving win determination, and the jackpot determination result is "jackpot A (15R jackpot)", "time-saving win suggestion + jackpot win notification" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 64", "time-saving non-win suggestion + jackpot non-win notification" is specified for the range of "65 to 79", and "jackpot win notification" is specified for the range of "80 to 99". Also, when the jackpot determination result is "jackpot B, C (5R jackpot)", "time-saving win suggestion + jackpot win notification" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 4", and "jackpot win notification" is specified for the range of "5 to 99". If the jackpot determination result is a "miss," a "jackpot non-winning notification" is specified for the acquired value of the effect counter 223f in the range of "0 to 98," and a "time-saving non-winning suggestion + jackpot non-winning notification" is specified for a value of "99."

On the other hand, when the game state at the time of the jackpot determination is the time-saving state, that is, when the time-saving win is won in the time-saving win determination in the special pattern lottery, and the jackpot determination result is "jackpot A, D (15R jackpot)", "time-saving win suggestion + jackpot win notification" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 89", and "jackpot win notification" is specified for the range of "90 to 99". Also, when the jackpot determination result is "jackpot B, C (5R jackpot)", "time-saving win suggestion + jackpot win notification" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 79", and "jackpot win notification" is specified for the range of "80 to 99". When the jackpot determination result is "miss", "time-saving win suggestion + jackpot non-win notification" is specified for the acquired value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 9", and "jackpot non-win notification" is specified for the value of "10 to 99".

Next, referring to FIG. 311(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 311(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a first special symbol reserved ball count counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, a performance counter 223e, a game status storage area 223f, a time-saving information update area 223g, a provisional win determination flag 223h, a provisional time-saving information update area 223i, a provisional time-saving end flag 223j, a time-saving lower limit flag 223k, a quasi-end condition flag 223m, a fluctuation flag before the end of the time-saving 223n, a status performance counter 223o, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of the reserved balls before the fluctuation begins. When the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the winning information based on the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 is stored in this winning information storage area 223a in order from the first area. Note that the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 is set when the pre-read process 5 (S653 in FIG. 259) of the main control device 110 is executed, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S11501 in FIG. 325) executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) of the main control device 110.

Each piece of winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted one by one (the winning information stored in the second area is moved to the first area) (see S4904, S4908 in FIG. 182) each time the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to reliably know when the special pattern variation corresponding to the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 will be executed.

In addition, since the winning information (special symbol pre-reading information) sent by the winning information command can be shifted to the execution area (the area corresponding to the special symbol change currently being executed), for example, when executing an effect (so-called pre-reading continuous effect) that uses the period from the start of the next special symbol change to the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the winning information command based on the reception of the winning information command, the winning information corresponding to the winning information command can be held until the above-mentioned pre-reading continuous effect ends.

In the seventh control example, the winning information storage area 223a is configured to have the first to fourth areas in addition to the execution area, since it is configured to be able to hold and store up to four pieces of winning information (information that can be obtained when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64). However, if, for example, it is also configured to be able to hold and store up to four pieces of winning information (winning information related to the second special pattern) that can be obtained when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the winning information storage area 223a can be configured to have four areas (holding information areas) for the first special pattern and four areas (holding information areas) for the second special pattern in addition to the execution area.

The first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b, like the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control unit 110, is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable performance (variable display) performed by the first pattern display device 37 (and the third pattern display device 81) that is reserved in the main control unit 110. In other words, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special pattern is set based on the reserved ball count command output from the main control unit 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern with the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is increased by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the variable display of a special pattern is executed in the main control unit 110 and the number of reserved balls is decreased, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d after the increase or decrease is sent to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command and stores it in the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b (see S4182 in FIG. 262). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that it can update the value in synchronization with the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d of the main control device 110.

The value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball count pattern on the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b, and transmits a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of an image so that the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, i.e., the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable display is pending.

The information contained in the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device may be information indicating the actual number of reserved balls, i.e., the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203a, or information indicating that the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203a has been incremented or decremented by 1. When sending information indicating that the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 203a has been incremented or decremented by 1 as the reserved ball count command, a calculation means may be provided that calculates and manages the current number of reserved balls based on the information contained in the reserved ball count command received by the voice lamp control device 113.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S4204 in FIG. 262), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set (see S4902, S4906 in FIG. 182). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the external output process (S11501 in FIG. 325) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 221. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern variation display device 81 displays the third pattern variation in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command sent from the main control unit 110 is received (see S4207 in FIG. 262), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S4910 in FIG. 182). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type for display is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) (S4911 in FIG. 182).

The performance counter 223e is a counter used in a lottery to determine the performance contents of various performances executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and although not shown in the figure, it is updated each time main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. In the seventh control example, the performance counter 223e has multiple loop counters (for example, counters that are repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99), and is configured to update the values of each counter without synchronization.

Specifically, for example, multiple counters are provided with different values that are updated each time main process 7 (see FIG. 325) is executed, and the updated values of each counter are not synchronized. Furthermore, a different value may be calculated by calculating the value of each counter, and the calculated value may be used as a value to be used in a lottery to determine the content of various effects.

The game status storage area 223f is an area for storing the game status corresponding to a status command when the status command regarding the game status is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (game status) stored in this game status storage area 223f, the current game status can be identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

In the seventh control example, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 erases data when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and therefore, when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the information indicating the current game state stored in the game state storage area 223f is also erased. However, in the seventh control example, a state command is set in the start-up process (main control device) 7 (see FIG. 324) of the main control device 110 executed after the power supply is turned on (S11412 in FIG. 324), so that information indicating the game state set before the power supply is cut off is stored in the game state storage area 223f immediately after the power supply is restored. Therefore, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the game state can always be identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Also, when the game state is variably set in the main control device 110, a state command indicating the game state after the variably set is set (S10509 in FIG. 321, S10607 in FIG. 319, S11616 in FIG. 326, etc.).

The time-saving information update area 223g is a data area for storing the end conditions of the time-saving state and the progress status for each end condition (the number of times the events subject to the end conditions (for example, the change of the special pattern, the winning of a small win, or the winning of a big win) have been executed). The state (situation) display mode Dm3a displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is selected based on the information stored in this time-saving information update area 223a (the end conditions of the time-saving state and the progress status). This time-saving information update area 223g sets the end conditions for terminating the current time-saving state when it receives a time-saving related command including time-saving setting information from the main control device 110, that is, a time-saving setting information command that is determined to be the end timing of the ending performance (S11612 in FIG. 326) in the big win control process 7 (S11504 in FIG. 326) of the main control device 110 and is set when the end conditions of the time-saving state are set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

Then, in the time-saving update process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2216 in FIG. 60), if it is determined that update information for updating the time-saving information (variation information indicating that a special pattern variation has been performed, or small win information indicating that a small win has been won) has been received (S2604 in FIG. 60: Yes, S2615 in FIG. 60: Yes), the current time-saving status is updated to correspond to the received update information.

To explain the data area in the time-saving information update area 223g in detail, the time-saving information update area 223g is configured to temporarily store information corresponding to each item that can be a condition for ending the time-saving state (for example, the number of times the first special pattern changes, the number of times the second special pattern changes, the total number of changes obtained by adding up the number of times the first special pattern changes and the number of times the second special pattern changes, the number of wins for each small win type (small win A, B) (the number of times the V winning device 600 starts operating), the number of small wins (the total number of wins obtained by adding up the number of wins for each small win type), etc.), and is configured to store, for each item, time-saving setting information (the number of times the condition for ending the time-saving state is met) and update information for each item during the period in which the time-saving state is continuously set (information indicating the number of times it was actually executed).

In the seventh control example, the information stored in this time-saving information update area 223g is used to determine which of a plurality of termination conditions is more likely to be met than the other termination conditions, and to determine the number of remaining executions until each termination condition is met. Furthermore, the time-saving setting information and update information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g may be used to calculate, for example, the ratio of the value indicated by the update information to the value indicating the termination condition of each item included in the time-saving setting information, and the degree of time-saving progress may be displayed as a numerical value (for example, a percentage).

In the seventh control example, the information stored in the time-saving information update area 223g is configured to store update information (information indicating the number of times already performed (number of variations, number of wins)), but without being limited to this, it is also possible to calculate the number of times remaining until the end condition of the time-saving state is met, and store information indicating the calculated remaining number of times in the time-saving information update area 223g.

As described above, in the seventh control example, the time-saving setting information and the update information are stored separately, but this is not limited thereto, and for example, the information stored as the time-saving setting information may be directly updated. By configuring in this way, the capacity of the time-saving information update area 223g can be reduced.

The provisional win determination flag 223h is a flag for indicating that the winning information (reserved winning information) before the lottery (variation) of the special pattern is executed includes winning information for winning the jackpot, and by being set to on, it indicates that the reserved winning information includes winning information for winning the jackpot. This provisional win determination flag 223h is set to on when it is determined that the winning information of the winning information command received from the main control unit 110 contains winning information in the winning information related process executed when the winning information command acquired in the pre-reading process 5 of the main control unit 110 is received by the voice lamp control unit 113. Then, it is configured to be referenced in the winning information related process, and if it is determined that it is set to on, various determination processes for the winning information command received thereafter are skipped. It is also referenced in the performance setting process executed in the variable display setting process, and if it is determined that it is set to on, it is configured to skip the process for setting the display status display command indicating the status display mode.

As explained above, if the winning information contained in the received winning information command or the winning information reserved and stored at the end of the jackpot includes winning information for a jackpot, the system is configured not to determine whether the winning information included in the winning information command newly received thereafter includes winning information for a jackpot, or to determine whether the currently set game state end condition is met. In other words, if it is determined that the time-saving state will end due to a jackpot win, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time-saving state will end based on winning information acquired thereafter, so the system is configured to skip this unnecessary process. This reduces the processing load of the process executed by the voice lamp control device 113.

In the seventh control example, the system is configured to execute a process to determine the contents of the winning information when a new winning information command is received and when the big win game ends. However, at other times, for example, after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power outage or the like, the start-up process (main control device) 7 (see FIG. 324) of the main control device 110 may be configured to set a return time winning information command to indicate each piece of winning information stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, and send all of them to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the return time winning information command, it may execute a process to determine the contents of the winning information described above.

In the seventh control example, when a new winning information command is received or when the jackpot game ends, the process of determining the contents of the winning information is always executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the contents of the winning information may not be determined when a predetermined prohibition condition is met. In this case, the predetermined prohibition condition may be, for example, a performance mode prohibition condition that is met when the pachinko machine 10 has multiple performance modes and one of the performance modes is set, a stuck-in prohibition condition that is met when a non-jackpot (miss) is consecutively obtained a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) as a result of the special pattern lottery, a continuous performance prohibition condition that is met while a continuous performance that is executed across multiple special pattern variations is being executed based on the jackpot lottery result (win/lose judgment result) included in the winning information, or a multiple-occurrence prohibition condition that is met during a predetermined period after the continuous performance ends (for example, the period until the special pattern variation is executed twice).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set periods during which an effect (so-called look-ahead effect) according to the contents determined in advance based on the winning information can be executed and periods during which it cannot be executed, so that the player can maintain their sense of anticipation of a big win even if the look-ahead effect is not executed. Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that the frequency with which the contents of the winning information are determined is reduced when the above-mentioned prohibition conditions are met, and to configure the system so that the frequency with which the contents of the winning information are determined is increased rather than necessarily determining the contents of the winning information when the prohibition conditions are not met. Furthermore, it is preferable to configure the system so that the player cannot know whether the above-mentioned prohibition conditions are met or not.

The provisional time-saving information update area 223i is a data area for temporarily storing time-saving information (provisional time-saving information) that has been updated in advance in accordance with the winning information included in the winning information command. In the seventh control example, the provisional time-saving information stored in the provisional time-saving information update area 223i is referenced to make it possible to determine in advance the timing at which the time-saving state will end.

As explained above, when the time-saving end condition is met based on the winning information contained in the received winning information command, the system is configured not to determine whether the winning information contained in the winning information command newly received thereafter contains winning information for winning a jackpot, or to determine whether the currently set game state end condition is met. In other words, when it is determined that the time-saving state will end due to winning a jackpot, it is not necessary to determine whether the currently set time-saving state will end based on the winning information acquired thereafter, so the system is configured to skip this unnecessary process. This reduces the processing load of the process executed by the voice lamp control device 113.

The time-saving lower limit flag 223k is a flag for indicating that the number of times the special pattern changes has reached a predetermined number, for an end condition that is established based on the number of times the special pattern changes, and by being set to on, indicates that the number of times the special pattern changes during the time-saving state has reached a predetermined number.

In this way, by providing a flag that is set to ON depending on the progress until the time-saving end condition is met, and configuring the presentation style to vary depending on the setting status of the flag, it becomes possible for the player to predict the timing when the time-saving end condition will be met. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect of the presentation that suggests the timing when the time-saving state will end.

In the seventh control example, the progress until the time-saving end condition is met is determined in two stages, but more stages may be provided. In this case, for example, a flag (counter) that can identify the state every time the special pattern is changed 10 times while the time-saving state is set is provided, and the presentation mode can be changed according to the flag (counter).

The semi-end condition flag 223m is a flag that indicates that the number of times the special pattern has changed has reached a predetermined number, for the end condition that is established based on winning a small prize by drawing a special pattern, and by being set to on, indicates that the number of times the special pattern has changed during the time-saving state has reached a predetermined number.

The fluctuation flag 223n before the time-saving end is a flag for indicating that a fluctuation before the time-saving state ends (the time-saving end condition is satisfied) will be executed, and by being set to on, it indicates that the fluctuation immediately before the time-saving state ends will be executed. Specifically, it is set to on when there is only one period (number of fluctuations) remaining until the time-saving end condition, which is set based on the number of times the special pattern fluctuates, is satisfied among the multiple time-saving state end conditions that are set. By executing the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 182) while this fluctuation flag 223n before the time-saving end is set to on, it becomes possible to determine that the fluctuation is the final fluctuation of the time-saving state, and a performance corresponding to the final fluctuation of the time-saving state can be executed.

In the seventh control example, the time-saving end before change flag 223n is set to determine whether the change before the time-saving end is completed (executed). In addition, for example, a configuration is provided that can reserve and store the winning information of the second special pattern, and a pre-reading process 5 (see FIG. 259) is executed for the reserved and stored winning information, a winning command indicating the result of the pre-reading process is received, and the winning information of the second special pattern that wins the small prize is determined in advance based on the winning command received. Then, based on the result of the pre-determination, a configuration may be added in which the time-saving end before change flag 223n is turned on when a change before the special pattern change that wins the small prize that establishes the end condition of the time-saving state is executed. This makes it possible to reliably determine the special pattern change that is one before the time-saving end condition is established in a gaming machine that has multiple time-saving end conditions.

The status effect counter 223o is a counter used for various lotteries that are used when setting the effect modes of various effects executed by the voice lamp control device 113, and although not shown in the figure, it is updated by one each time the main processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The status effect counter 223o is composed of the same loop counter as the effect counter 223e described above. Note that detailed configuration is omitted as it is the same as the effect counter 223e described above.

In this way, when a specific display mode is selected according to a specific regularity (win/lose determination result, setting status of various flags), the display mode selected based on a randomly updated value (value of state presentation counter 223o) can be further divided into more detailed categories, thereby diversifying the display modes and preventing the player from easily understanding the current game state (update status of the time-saving state) based on the selected display mode (display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81).

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, referring to FIG. 313, the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 313 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example. As shown in FIG. 313, in the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example, as described above, in the normal state (normal state), a left-handed play is performed and a special 1 (special pattern 1) game is performed, aiming at the first ball entrance 64. Here, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the first special pattern lottery is executed, a judgment is first made as to whether or not the time-saving win has been made. Then, if it is judged that the time-saving win has not been made in the judgment of the time-saving win, a jackpot judgment is made for the first special pattern lottery while the game state remains in the normal state. Then, when a jackpot of the first special pattern is won in the normal state, a different game state is entered after the jackpot ends depending on the type of jackpot that has been won.

Specifically, if the type of jackpot won is jackpot C (50% of the total), the normal state will be set again after the jackpot ends, and if the type of jackpot won is jackpot A or jackpot B, the game will transition to a time-saving game state (time-saving state), which is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in the normal state, a ball is inserted into the second ball entrance 640 to execute the lottery for the second special symbol, and if a jackpot is won, the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends. As described above with reference to FIG. 295, the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example is configured so that a ball does not (is difficult to) enter the second ball entrance 640 even if a right-hand hit game is performed during the normal state (normal game), so the act of executing the lottery for the second special symbol in the normal state is considered as a fraudulent act, and this is a measure to prevent a player who has committed a fraudulent act from playing an advantageous game. As will be described later, in the seventh control example, the lottery for the second special symbol is configured to allow a player to play a lottery (game) that is more advantageous to the player than the lottery for the first special symbol during the time-saving state, so there was a risk of a player committing a fraudulent act and drawing the second special symbol. Therefore, by taking the measures described above, it is possible to prevent fraudulent attempts to draw the second special symbol.

Furthermore, the seventh control example does not have a configuration for retaining and storing winning information for the second special symbol (winning information obtained when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640), so, for example, during the time-saving state (when the electric device 640a is likely to be operated to the protruding position), the winning information for the second special symbol is not retained and stored, and a lottery (variation) for the second special symbol is not executed during the normal state based on the retained winning information. This makes it possible to reliably prevent a lottery (variation) for the second special symbol from being executed when the normal state is set as the game state during normal play.

On the other hand, if the time-saving feature is selected in the first special symbol lottery that is executed while the normal state is set (if the time-saving feature is selected as the result of the time-saving feature selection judgment), the jackpot determination is executed in the time-saving feature. If the jackpot is selected in the jackpot determination executed in this state, the time-saving feature is set at 100% after the jackpot play ends. Also, if the time-saving feature is selected as the result of the time-saving feature selection executed in the first special symbol lottery, the time-saving feature ends when the first special symbol variation that indicates the result of the first special symbol lottery begins, and the normal state is set, so play in the normal state (left-handed play) continues.

When the time-saving state is set based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set so that it continues for the period during which the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 by the opening (protruding) action of the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, so that a right-hand hit game is played and a special 2 game is executed, aiming for the second ball entrance 640.

Here, if a small win is won (140/1000 chance of winning) by the drawing of the second special symbol, the V winning device 650 is opened for the small win game, and the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 detects the ball (the ball passes through a specific area), starting the big win game. In the seventh control example, if a big win game is set (executed) via a small win game, the game state is always set to a time-saving state after the big win game ends. This configuration makes it possible to eliminate discomfort for a player who wins a big win via a small win game.

In the seventh control example, the small prize type (small prize A, B) that is set when a small prize is won by drawing the second special pattern is set so that a small prize game is executed in which the probability that the ball will pass through a specific area during the small prize game (the probability that the V switch 650e3 will detect the ball) differs.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the end conditions (time-saving end conditions) for terminating the time-saving state set based on winning the big prize are set as follows: a fluctuation count end condition (first time-saving end condition) that is met when the number of fluctuations (number of draws) of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) reaches a specified number of fluctuations (100 times), and an operation count end condition (second time-saving end condition) that is met when the number of wins of the small prize (the number of operations of the V winning device 650 operated based on winning the small prize) as a result of the drawing of the special pattern (second special pattern) reaches a specified number of operations.

The second time-saving end condition is further configured to be set according to the type of small win (the small win game to be executed) that is set when a small win is won.

In addition, in a state (situation) in which the time-saving state is set, if a player wins a jackpot lottery for a special symbol (wins a single type) or wins a small jackpot in a special symbol lottery and, during a small jackpot game (small jackpot game according to the type of small jackpot) corresponding to the small jackpot won, the ball passes through a specific area and a jackpot is won (wins a double type) before the first time-saving end condition or the second time-saving end condition described above is met, the time-saving state will be set repeatedly.

On the other hand, in a state (situation) in which the time-saving state is set, if either the first time-saving end condition (end condition according to the number of times the special pattern changes) or the second time-saving end condition (end condition according to winning a small prize (operation of the V winning device 650)) described above is met before winning one type or two types of prizes, the game state will transition (set) from the time-saving state to the normal state.

The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example configured in this way can provide the player with both the possibility of ending the time-saving state (possibility of the second time-saving end condition being met) and the possibility of winning a double prize, if a small prize is won in the lottery for the second special symbol that is executed when the time-saving state is set. This can increase the player's interest in the game that is executed during the time-saving state (the lottery for the second special symbol), and improve the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, as shown in FIG. 313, when the time-saving state is set and a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving a result that is disadvantageous to the player in the "first special symbol fluctuation (lottery) during the time-saving state" that can be executed when the normal state is set as the game state, that is, when left-handed play is being performed and the number of reserved balls (reserved memory number) for the first special symbol is the upper limit (4), a jackpot is won, and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, even if the jackpot is won.

<Regarding control processing executed by main control device 110 in the seventh control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Fig. 314 to Fig. 327. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process 7 that is executed after the start-up process, a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in the seventh control example), and an NMI interrupt process that is started by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be explained first, and then the start-up process (main control device) 7 and the main process 7 will be explained. Note that, among the control processes executed by the main control device 110 in this seventh control example, the same process contents as those of the fifth control process described above will be assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Figure 314 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S10101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S10102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in the seventh control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the seventh control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the values (not shown) of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second win random number counter C4, the small win type counter C5, and the time-saving type selection counter CC1 are updated (S10103). Specifically, the values (not shown) of the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second win random number counter C4, the small win type counter C5, and the time-saving type selection counter CC1 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach their maximum values (999, 99, 99, 239, and 99, respectively, in the seventh control example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 and CC1 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

Next, the special pattern change process 7 is executed (S10104), which is a process for displaying on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b and also sets the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81. After that, the start winning process associated with a win (start winning) in the first ball entry port 64 is executed (S10105). Details of the special pattern change process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 315.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal pattern change process, which is a process for displaying on the second pattern display device 83, is executed (S10106), and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start opening (through gate) 67 is executed (S10107). The details of the start winning process (S10105), the normal pattern change process (S10106), and the through gate passing process (S10107) are the same as the start winning process, the normal pattern change process, and the through gate passing process in the fifth control example described above, so detailed explanations are omitted. After the through gate passing process (S10107), the V entrance passing process associated with the ball entering the V winning device 650 is executed (S10108). Then, the V passing process associated with the entry into the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650 is executed (S10109). Details of the V inlet passing process and the V passing process will be described later with reference to Figures 322 and 323.

Then, the launch control process is executed (S10110), and further, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S10111), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch has not been operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 315, the special pattern change process 7 (S10104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 315 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change process 7 (S10104). This special pattern change process 7 (S10104) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and is a process for controlling the change display of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, and the change display of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process 7 (S10104), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S10201). The special symbol jackpot period includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and includes the period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), the period during which the jackpot game is in progress (round game period), and the grace period (ending period) until the round game period ends and the next lottery (variation) of a new special symbol begins.

To determine whether or not a jackpot is currently being won, specifically, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON. If it is determined that a jackpot with a special symbol is currently being won (the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON) (S10201: Yes), this process ends.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot, i.e., if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not set to on (set to off) (S10201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S10202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is not changing (S10202: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e are obtained (S10203).

Then, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (S10204). If the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S10204: Yes), that is, if the reserved ball of the second special pattern that starts the fluctuation (lottery) is secured, the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted (S10205), and a reserved ball number command (special pattern 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S10206). After the special pattern 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S10206, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S10207). After that, the time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208), the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209), and the special symbol change pattern selection process 7 (S10210) are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S10204: No), then since there are currently no reserved balls of the second special pattern that would initiate the fluctuation (lottery), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10211).

If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is 0 (S10211: No), this process for executing the special pattern variation is terminated since there are currently no reserved balls of the first special pattern that would initiate the variation (lottery).

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S10211: Yes), that is, if the reserved ball of the first special symbol that starts the variation (lottery) is secured, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted (S10212), and a reserved ball number command (special symbol 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10213). After the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S10213, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10214). After that, the processes of the time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208), the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209), and the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210) are executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S10202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is changing (S10202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b has elapsed (S10211). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S10215: No), that is, if the current time is during the change period of the special pattern, the display of the first pattern display device is updated (S10216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10215, if the change time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S10215: Yes), a display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b is set (S10217). The setting of the stop display is performed in advance by the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (S10252) described later with reference to FIG. 318. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the seventh control example, the stop display set in the process of S10217 is configured to be displayed on the first pattern display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). By continuously displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stopped pattern for a predetermined period in this way, unlike when the changing pattern is displayed for an instant, the player can be sure to recognize the content of the first pattern that is stopped and displayed.

In the seventh control example, the predetermined period (fixed period) during which the stopped state of the first symbol is displayed is set to 0.5 seconds, but other configurations may be used. For example, if a flashing display is performed in which the lit state and the off state are repeated to indicate that the first symbol is changing, then the fixed period can be set to a period longer than the period of one lit display when the flashing display is performed (for example, 0.2 seconds). By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily determine whether the first symbol is changing or stopped (fixed).

After the process of S10217 is completed, when the variable display of the special symbol being executed in the first symbol display device 37a, 37b starts, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol (the current determination result) performed by the special symbol determination process 7 (see S10209 in FIG. 317) is a jackpot for the special symbol (S10218). If it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot for the special symbol (S10218: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j and the jackpot in progress flag 203k are set to ON (S10219), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S10220), and the process proceeds to S10221. In the process of S10221, a special symbol determination command is set (S10221), and the process ends.

In other words, in the seventh control example, as explained in the process of S10220, when a special symbol is won as a jackpot, the time-saving state is configured to end at a timing between the end of the variation of the special symbol (the end of the final display of the first symbol) and the start of the jackpot game. The timing for ending the time-saving state based on the winning of a special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing, and as in the seventh control example described above, the time-saving state may end at the start of the variation of the special symbol that won the jackpot, or at the timing when the special symbol is displayed stationary (the timing when the final display starts). In addition, the time-saving state may end at the start of the jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot, or a predetermined period after the start of the jackpot game (for example, the start of the round game when the variable winning device 65 is opened), or at the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, the timing for ending the time-saving state based on winning a jackpot with a special symbol (the timing for establishing the time-saving end condition that is established when a jackpot with a special symbol is won) may be configured to be preset to only one of the multiple timings mentioned above, or the time-saving state may be configured to end at a different timing depending on the type of jackpot won.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the time-saving state is ended when the special symbol starts to change, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the time-saving state has ended (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes has reached a specified number (100 times)) and the normal state has been set, or whether the time-saving state has ended because a jackpot was won during the time-saving state. This allows the player to focus on the content of the presentation display (changing display) of the third symbol that corresponds to the special symbol change that is executed when the time-saving state ends, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, by setting different times for the time-saving end conditions to be met for each of the multiple jackpot types (time to end the time-saving state when a jackpot is won), it is possible to prevent the player from understanding the lottery result (discrimination result) of the special symbol based on the time-saving state end timing. Note that, as part of the times for the time-saving end conditions to be met that are set for each of the multiple jackpot types, a time-saving end timing dedicated to the jackpot may be set that notifies the player that the lottery result (discrimination result) of the special symbol this time is a jackpot when the player identifies the time when the time-saving state has ended, in other words, the time-saving state ends only when the time-saving end condition that is met due to winning a jackpot is met.

By configuring it in this way, you can know when the time-saving state ends and quickly find out that you've won the jackpot, lengthening the period during which you can feel superior. To further enhance this effect, it's a good idea to configure the end of the time-saving state for the jackpot described above to be set in the first half of the fluctuation period from when the special pattern fluctuation is executed to when the special pattern fluctuation ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10218 that the current lottery result is not a big win (S10218: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S10222). If it is determined in the process of S10222 that the current lottery result is a small win (S10222: Yes), the small win start setting process 7 is executed (S10223) and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10222 that the current lottery result is not a small win (S10222: No), the small win start setting process 7 (S10223) is skipped and this process ends.

As explained above, the special symbol change process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315) of the seventh control example is configured to determine whether the selection (change) conditions for the second special symbol are met (processing of S10204 in FIG. 315) in priority over whether the selection (change) conditions for the first special symbol are met. This is because the second special symbol, which is a special symbol advantageous to the player, is changeable (easy to change) when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and is non-changeable (hard to change) when the normal state is set, making it a special symbol that is more difficult to change (draw) than the first special symbol.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, if the conditions for selecting (changing) the first special pattern and the conditions for selecting (changing) the second special pattern are met simultaneously (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) of the main control unit 110), the first special pattern will begin to change in preference to the second special pattern, which is more difficult to change (select), causing discomfort to the player. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, the lottery (variation) for the second special symbol is configured to make it easier for the player to win a lottery result that is favorable to the player (to make it easier to win a small prize) than the lottery (variation) for the first special symbol. Therefore, if the lottery (variation) conditions for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) conditions for the second special symbol are met simultaneously (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) of the main control device 110), the first special symbol will start to change in preference to the second special symbol, which is less likely to change (draw), causing a problem of greater discomfort.

In contrast, in the seventh control example, when executing the process to start the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the selection (variation) conditions of the special symbol (the second special symbol in the seventh control example) that has a higher added value for the player (the probability of winning a small prize is higher than that of the first special symbol, and it is difficult to actually execute the selection (variation)) are determined with priority (first), so the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be prevented.

Next, the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208) will be described with reference to FIG. 316. FIG. 316 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208). As shown in FIG. 316, time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208) differs from time-saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254) in the fifth control example described above in that the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery and the data table referenced when determining the lottery result of the time-saving lottery (whether or not a time-saving lottery has been won) are different, but otherwise it is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is normal (S18103), and if it is determined that it is not normal (time-saving state) (S18103: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is normal (S18103: Yes), the lottery result (time-saving winning judgment result) is obtained based on the time-saving random number 7 table 202fh (S18104), and it is determined whether the time-saving win has been won (S18105). If it is determined that the time-saving win has been won (S18105: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 1 based on the contents specified in the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi (S18106), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined that the time-saving win has not been won in the process of S18105 (S18105: No), this process is terminated.

As explained above, in this seventh control example, the condition for executing the time-saving winning judgment is that the special pattern lottery is executed in the normal state, regardless of the type of special pattern. The pachinko machine 10 in this seventh control example is configured to be able to set two game states: the normal state and the time-saving state. In other words, in the seventh control example, the system is configured so that the time-saving winning judgment is executed in all special pattern lotteries that are executed when the time-saving state is not set. This allows the player to play while always having the possibility of the time-saving state being set.

As mentioned above, in this seventh control example, if a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state that is set based on the time-saving win is set only during the period in which the jackpot determination is performed in the special pattern lottery. This makes it difficult for the player to know whether or not they have won the time-saving win unless they win the jackpot.

Next, the processing contents of special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) will be explained with reference to FIG. 317. FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special symbol determination process 7 (S10209). Special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) is a process executed after time-saving lottery process 7 (see S10208 in FIG. 316) is executed in the above-mentioned special symbol change process 7 (see S10104 in FIG. 315), and a process for determining a big win (small win) in the special symbol lottery is executed.

As shown in FIG. 317, this special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) differs from special symbol determination process 5 (see S251 in FIG. 253) in the fifth control example described above in that it adds a process that is executed when a small win is determined, but is otherwise identical. Detailed explanations of the same content will be omitted. Note that in FIG. 317, for ease of explanation, different symbols are used for the same processing content as the special symbol determination process 5 described above (see S251 in FIG. 253), but the processing content is the same for processes with the same description.

When the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) is executed, first, data on the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is obtained (S10301), the lottery result (jackpot (small jackpot) determination result) is obtained based on the first winning random number 7 table 202fh (S10302), and it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a jackpot win (S10303). If it is determined that it is a jackpot win (S10303: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a jackpot win (S10304), and the jackpot pattern of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (S10305), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10303 that the big prize has not been won (S10303: No), then it is determined whether a small prize has been won (S10306). If it is determined that a small prize has been won (S10306: Yes), the result of the special pattern lottery is set to a small prize (S10307), and the small prize pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired prize type counter (first prize type counter C2) (S10308), and this process ends.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the process of S10305 and the process of S10308 are configured to set different winning patterns depending on whether or not the time-saving feature has been won in the special pattern lottery. In other words, the first pattern display device 37 is configured to be able to set a display mode that combines the presence or absence of a time-saving feature win and a winning feature (a big win or a small win) as the display mode of the special pattern to show the lottery result of the special pattern lottery.

Next, referring to FIG. 318, the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (S10210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 318 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (S10210). As shown in FIG. 318, the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (S10210) is configured to execute the update process 7 (S8253) before setting the start of the special pattern change. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to end the time-saving state before the special pattern change starts.

Furthermore, in this seventh control example, update process 7 (S8253) is configured to be executed between the selection of the special pattern variation pattern to show the result of the special pattern lottery and the actual start of the special pattern variation. Therefore, since the special pattern variation pattern to show the result of the special pattern lottery can be selected in accordance with the game state at the time the special pattern lottery is executed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the current game state based on the executed special pattern variation pattern, even if the game state changes as a result of execution of update process 7 (S8253).

In addition, even if a special pattern change is executed after the time-saving state ends, if a special pattern lottery corresponding to that special pattern change is executed during the time-saving state, the change pattern of the special pattern change can be determined using a data table referenced during the time-saving state. Therefore, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 that has a bonus that can only be granted based on a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state, a special effect to indicate that the bonus will be granted can be smoothly executed simply by defining a special effect corresponding to the change pattern of the special pattern change selected during the time-saving state.

In addition, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to execute update process 7 (S8253) before the process of S8252 in FIG. 318 is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to end the time-saving state before the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, so for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to select different variation patterns for the normal state and the time-saving state, it is possible to prevent a determination as to whether or not a jackpot determination for a special symbol lottery has been executed during the time-saving state based on the selected variation pattern.

When the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210) is executed, it is first determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, i.e., whether a special symbol jackpot has been set (S8201). If it is determined in the process of S8201 that a special symbol jackpot has been set (S8201: Yes), the jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb (see FIG. 306(a)) (S8251), and the process proceeds to S8203.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is not a big win (S8201: No), it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a small win, i.e., whether or not a small win for the special symbol is set (S8209). If it is determined in the process of S8209 that a small win for the special symbol is set (S8209: Yes), the type of small win is determined by referring to the small win type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) (S8254), and the process proceeds to S8203.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S8209 that a small win of the special symbol is not set, that is, a miss of the special symbol is set (S8209), the process of S8254 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8203.

In the process of S8203, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special pattern execution area is obtained (S8203). Next, the current game state (normal state, time-saving state) is identified based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, and the data table corresponding to the identified game state is read from the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (S8252).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S8203 and the data table contained in the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 308(a)) read in the process of S8252 (S8205), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205 (S8206). The special pattern variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation time of the special pattern, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the special symbol stop pattern is set (S8207), and update process 7 is executed (S8253). A detailed explanation of update process 7 (S8253) will be described later with reference to FIG. 319. Then, the start of the special symbol fluctuation is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S8208), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of the stopping pattern indicating the result of this special symbol fluctuation, that is, a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

Next, referring to FIG. 319, the processing contents of update process 7 (S8253) executed in special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (see S10210 in FIG. 318) will be explained. FIG. 319 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of update process 7 (S8253). In this update process 7 (S8253), similar to update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 256) in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a process for updating information relating to the termination condition for terminating the gaming state (time-saving state), a process for determining whether the updated information satisfies the termination condition, and a process for terminating the gaming state (time-saving state) when it is determined that the termination condition is satisfied are executed.

As shown in FIG. 319, in this seventh control example, the game state can be set to either a normal state or a time-saving state, so in update process 7 (S8253), information relating to the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is updated, and processing based on the updated information is executed. In other words, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented, a determination is made as to whether the time-saving end condition has been met, and a process is executed to end the time-saving state based on the determination result (a process to clear the values of various counters referenced when determining whether the time-saving end condition has been met).

This update process 7 (S8253) is executed within the special pattern change process 7 (see FIG. 315) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and is a process for updating the number of time-saving cycles and setting the game status to the normal status.

When update process 7 (S8253) is executed, first it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., whether the time-saving period is currently in progress (S10601). In the process of S10601, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0), i.e., the time-saving period is not in progress (S10601: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., the time-saving period is in progress (S10601: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S10602), and the process proceeds to S10603.

In the process of S10603, a remaining time-saving count command is set indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203h changed by the calculation (subtracted by 1) (S10603). The remaining time-saving count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S11501) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) described later.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604: Yes), the game state is set to the normal state (S10605), and the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh are set to 0 (S10606). Next, a state command indicating that the current game state is the normal state is set (S10607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S10604 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (S10604: No), this processing is terminated and the process returns to the special pattern change processing 7 (see FIG. 315).

As explained above, in the seventh control example, the existence of the time-saving end condition (change count end condition) based on the number of times the special pattern changes is determined by the update process 7 (see FIG. 319), and the existence of the time-saving end condition (win count end condition) based on the number of times the special pattern has been small won is determined by the small win time-saving update process 7 (see FIG. 321). In any of the processes, if any of the multiple time-saving end conditions set in the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters for indicating the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to the other time-saving end conditions are all set to a value (0) for indicating the state in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, regardless of which time-saving end condition is satisfied, the processing contents for terminating the time-saving state can be unified.

In the seventh control example, in order to indicate the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to each time-saving end condition, various counters are set to values indicating each time-saving end condition when the time-saving state is set, and when the time-saving information corresponding to each time-saving end condition is determined, the values of the various counters are subtracted, and when the subtracted value becomes 0, it is determined that the corresponding time-saving end condition is established. However, it is also possible to set the values of various counters to 0 when the time-saving state is set, and when the corresponding time-saving information is determined, the counter value is incremented by 1, and when it is determined that the counter value after the increment is a value indicating the time-saving end condition, the time-saving state is terminated. In other words, it is sufficient to provide a configuration that includes a means for determining whether the time-saving end condition is established and an update means for updating the time-saving information corresponding to each time-saving end condition (such as the number of times the special pattern changes or the number of times a small jackpot is won) when the time-saving state is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 320, the small win start setting process 7 (S10223) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing the small win start setting process 7 (S10223). This small win start setting process 7 (S10223) is a process executed within the special pattern change process 7 (see FIG. 315) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and sets the start of the small win game based on the small win type (small win A, B), and executes a process for updating the time-saving information according to the small win that has been won (update process for the win count end condition).

When the small win game starts, this pachinko machine 10 changes the V winning device 650 to an open state where a ball can (easily) win a prize, and when the ball that wins the V winning device 650 passes through a specific area (V winning switch (V switch) 650e3), the big win game is executed (set) after the small win game ends.

In other words, the game state in which the small win game is executed is configured to be an advantageous state in which the ball can enter the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and an advantageous state in which the possibility of executing a big win game is higher than in the normal game state. Note that, as will be described in detail later, in the seventh control example, a different small win game is executed according to the small win type (small win A, B) that is set when a small win is won, and the possibility of the ball passing through a specific area during a small win game differs depending on each small win type.

By configuring it in this way, the possibility (expectation) of a big win game (two types of win) being played (set) can be changed depending on the small win game that is played, so players can be interested not only in whether or not they will win a small win, but also in the type of small win they win, which can increase the excitement of the game.

When the small win start setting process 7 (S10223) is executed, first, an opening scenario corresponding to the small win type is set (S10401). After that, a jackpot type corresponding to the small win type is set in the V-passing jackpot type storage area 203fd (S10402). More specifically, based on the small win type and the small win type selection table 202ff, the V-passing jackpot type (a jackpot game that is set (executed) when the ball passes through a specific area during a small win game) is determined. As described above, if the small win type is A, it is determined to be a jackpot A (a jackpot with 15 rounds of time reduction), and if the small win type is B, it is determined to be a jackpot B (a jackpot with 5 rounds of time reduction) (see FIG. 307). In other words, in the seventh control example, the content of the jackpot (two types) that is set (executed) when the ball passes through a specific area during a small jackpot game, and the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot (one type) is won by drawing a special pattern, are the same jackpot game, so that when a two types jackpot is won (when the ball passes through a specific area), the jackpot type (jackpot A or B) that is set for the one type jackpot is set according to the type of small jackpot that was executed.

In this way, when a 2-kind win is obtained, a jackpot type is set and a process is executed to start the jackpot game based on the set jackpot type. This makes it possible to standardize the process related to the jackpot game when a 1-kind win is obtained and when a 2-kind win is obtained, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control unit 110.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the seventh control example, it may be possible to set a jackpot game that can be executed only when a 1-type jackpot is won, or only when a 2-type jackpot is won, or it may be configured to execute different jackpot game processes for a 1-type jackpot and a 2-type jackpot.

Returning to FIG. 320, the explanation will be continued. After the process of S10402 is completed, the start of the small win is set based on the small win type (S10403), and the small win start flag 203fb and the small win in progress flag 203fc are set to ON (S10404). After that, the small win time-saving update process 7 is executed (S10405), and this process ends. This small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405) is for executing a process for updating the time-saving information corresponding to the winning count end condition, which is the end condition of the time-saving state that can be established when a small win is won, and a process for transitioning the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state when the winning count end condition is established by updating the time-saving information, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 321.

Now, referring to FIG. 321, we will explain the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 321 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405). This small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405) is a process executed in the small win start setting process 7 (see FIG. 320) of the special pattern change process 7 (see FIG. 315) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and is a process that updates the time-saving information based on the small win that has been won, and updates the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state when the time-saving end condition is met.

In the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (S10501). That is, it is determined whether the current state is the time-saving state. In the process of S10501, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S10501: No), since the small win has been won in a game state other than the time-saving state, this process is skipped in its entirety to update the time-saving information, and this process is terminated. In addition, since the seventh control example is configured so that the small win cannot be won (the lottery (variation) of the second special pattern is not executed) except in a state in which the time-saving state is set, if it is determined in the process of S10501 that the time-saving state is not set, an error command for executing an error notification (abnormal notification) may be set.

On the other hand, in the process of S10501, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, that is, that the time-saving state is set (S10501: Yes), it is next determined whether the small win type of the small win that has been won this time is "small win A" (S10502). Here, in the process of S10502, the small win type stored in the small win type storage area 203fa in the process of S10310 of the special pattern determination process 7 (see FIG. 317) is read out and determined.

In the process of S10502, if it is determined that the type of the current small win is "small win A" (S10502: Yes), the value of the small win A counter 203fg is decremented by 1 (S10503), and it is determined whether the value of the small win A counter 203fg after the decrement is 0 (S10504). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S10504: Yes), this means that the time-saving end condition (the win count end condition corresponding to small win A) has been met with the current small win, so the value of the time-saving counter 203h, which measured the period until the variable count end condition is met, is set to 0 (S10505), and the values of the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh, which measured the various win count end conditions, are each set to 0 (S10506), and the game state is set to the normal state (S10507).

By executing the above-mentioned processes of S10505 to S10507, when one of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of the counters for measuring the period until the other time-saving end conditions are satisfied can be set to values indicating that the time-saving end conditions have been satisfied. This makes it possible to reliably prevent the execution of processes for updating the time-saving information (processes for updating the values of the small win A counter 203fg, the small win B counter 203fh, and the time-saving counter 203h) after the time-saving end condition is satisfied (after the normal state is set as the game state). This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary processes from being executed, thereby reducing the processing load on the main control device 110.

In the seventh control example, when any of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters for updating the time-saving information corresponding to each of the multiple time-saving end conditions are simply set to 0 (a value indicating that the time-saving end condition is satisfied). Therefore, after the time-saving state ends, it is not possible to determine which time-saving end condition was satisfied to end the previous time-saving state. However, for example, a storage means capable of storing the satisfied time-saving end conditions may be provided, and the type of time-saving end condition satisfied in the past and the number of times it was satisfied may be determined.

By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to determine the time-saving end condition that is likely to be met based on the calculation result calculated from the design value and the actual number of times it is met, and to suggest (notify) the player of the time-saving end condition that is likely to be met based on the determined content. Furthermore, it is possible to configure it so that the update status of the time-saving information corresponding to other time-saving end conditions when one time-saving end condition is met (for example, the values of the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh at the time when the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0) can be stored, and the time-saving end condition that is most difficult to meet, that is, the time-saving end condition that has the largest value of time-saving information at the time when one time-saving end condition is met among the multiple time-saving end conditions, can be determined.

After completing the processing of S10507, a remaining time-saving count command corresponding to the subtracted value of each small win counter is set (S10508), a status command indicating the current game status is set (S10509), and this processing ends. Here, the commands set in S10508 and S10509 are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S11501) of main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) described below. The voice lamp control device 113 manages time-saving information based on the received remaining time-saving count command, and sets a status display mode to indicate (indicate) the time-saving status (the period until the time-saving status ends). It also grasps the current game status based on the received status command.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10504 that the value of the small win A counter 203fg is not 0 (S10504: No), the time-saving state will not end due to the current small win, so the process skips the processes of S10505 to S10507 for ending the time-saving state and moves to the process of S10508.

Returning to the above-mentioned process of S10502, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S10502, if it is determined that the type of the small prize won this time is not "small prize A" (it is "small prize B") (S10502: No), it is then determined whether the type of the small prize won this time is "small prize B" (S10510). If it is determined that it is "small prize B" (S10510: Yes), the value of the small prize B counter 203fh is decremented by 1 (S10511), and then it is determined whether the decremented value of the small prize B counter 203fh is 0 (S10512).

If it is determined in the process of S10512 that the value of the small win B counter 203fh is 0 (S10512: Yes), this means that the time-saving end condition (the win count end condition corresponding to the small win B) has been met with the current small win, so the process proceeds to the process of S10505 described above, and the process for ending the time-saving state is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10512 that the value of the small win B counter 203fh is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S10512: No), the time-saving state will not end due to the current small win, so the process skips the processes of S10505 to S10507 for ending the time-saving state and moves to the process of S10508.

In the process of S10510, if the type of the small win that has been won this time is not "small win B" (S10510: No), the process skips the processes of S10505 to S10507 for ending the time-saving state and moves to the process of S10508, since the time-saving state will not end due to the small win this time.

As explained above, in the seventh control example, when the variation time of the special symbol that won the small win has elapsed, the counter value corresponding to the small win is subtracted, and it is determined whether or not the time-saving end condition (win count end condition) that is established based on the small win is established. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to end the time-saving state based on the win count end condition before the small win game is played. Therefore, regardless of whether the time-saving end condition, the variation count end condition or the win count end condition, is established, it is possible to prevent a large difference in the timing to end the time-saving state.

Specifically, in the seventh control example, if the fluctuation count end condition, i.e., the time-saving end condition based on the number of times the special pattern fluctuates, is met, the time-saving state is configured to end at the timing when the final display of the special pattern (first pattern) ends, and if the winning count end condition, i.e., the time-saving end condition based on the number of times a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, is met, the time-saving state is configured to end at the set start timing of the small prize game after the final display of the special pattern (first pattern).

In other words, regardless of which time-saving end condition is met, the time-saving state ends immediately after the corresponding special symbol stops changing. This makes it difficult for the player to tell which time-saving end condition was met to end the currently set time-saving state. In order for the player to determine whether the time-saving state has ended, for example, it is necessary to identify the length of the normal symbol (second symbol) change time and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a. However, by setting the time-saving state to end when the small win start is set (just before the small win game starts) as in the seventh control example, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time-saving state has ended immediately after the small win game starts.

In the seventh control example, the time-saving state is configured to end at approximately the same timing (a concept including a time difference that is difficult for a player to distinguish) when either the variable count end condition or the winning count end condition is met among the multiple time-saving end conditions. However, other configurations may be used. For example, the time-saving state may be ended immediately after the special pattern (first pattern) is confirmed and displayed when the variable count end condition is met, and the time-saving state may be ended after the small win game that is executed after the special pattern (first pattern) is confirmed and displayed when the winning count end condition is met. By configuring in this way, the time-saving state can be set for the period during which the small win game is being played.

Therefore, during the small win game, the player cannot determine whether the time-saving state has ended due to the current small win win, and it is difficult to know whether the time-saving state has ended until the small win game ends (until the game result of whether or not a 2-type win has been won is announced). Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 having a gameplay that allows a 2-type win to be won during a small win game, as in the 7th control example, by configuring the machine to notify the player whether or not the time-saving state has ended after the small win game ends, the player will play while predicting whether the current small win game is based on a small win that ends the time-saving state, and this makes it possible to always aim for a 2-type win in the small win game that is executed during the time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 322, the V entrance passing process (S10108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 322 is a flowchart showing the V entrance passing process (S10108) executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

In the V entrance passage process (S10108), first it is determined whether the ball passage sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 is on (S11101). If it is determined in the process of S11101 that the ball passage sensor 650c1 is not on (S11101: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11101 that the ball passage sensor 650c1 is on (S11101: Yes), it is determined whether the V winning entrance 650a is in an open period (S11102).

If it is determined in the process of S11102 that the V winning port 650a is open (S11102: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S11103) and this process is terminated. The V entrance passage command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S11501) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the balls that have passed through the V entrance and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute a performance based on the V entrance passage. This makes it possible to execute a performance during a small win game based on a ball entering the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 313).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning port 650a is not open (S11102: No), this means that the ball has entered the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small win game, so an error command is set (S11104). After that, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to ON (S11105), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 323, the V passing process (S10109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing the V passing process (S10109). This V passing process (S10109) is a process executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

In the V passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the V passing flag 203ff is on (S11201). If it is determined in the process of S11201 that the V passing flag 203ff is on (S11201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11201 that the V passing flag 203ff is not on (S11201: No), it is determined whether or not there has been a V passing (S11202). In other words, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning switch (V switch) 650e3 of the V winning device 650. If it is determined in the process of S11202 that there has been no V passing (S11202: No), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined in the processing of S11202 that a V pass has occurred (S11202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V pass valid period is in progress (S11203). If it is determined that the V pass valid period is in progress (S11203: Yes), the V pass jackpot type value stored in the V pass jackpot type storage area 203fd is obtained (S11204), and the V flag 203fe indicating the obtained V pass jackpot type is set to on (S11205). Then, a V pass command is set (S11206).

Next, the V passing flag 203ff is set to ON (S11207). After that, the time reduction counter 203h is set to 0 (S11208), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11203 that the V-pass valid period is not in progress (S11203: No), an error command is set (S11209) and this processing is terminated. If the game ball passes through the V-entry switch (V switch) 650e3 when the V-pass valid period is not in progress, this is considered to be an instance where the ball has illegally entered the V-entry switch 650e3. In this case, an error command is set in the processing of S11209, and an error output is executed, making it possible to discover any illegal activity.

Next, referring to FIG. 324, the start-up process (main control device) 7 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 324 is a flowchart showing this start-up process (main control device) 7. This start-up process (main control device) 7 is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial settings associated with power-on are executed (S11401). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in the seventh control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S11402). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S11403).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S11404), and if it is turned on (S11404: Yes), processing proceeds to S11415. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S11404: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S11405), and if it is not stored (S11405: No), there is a possibility that processing at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, and in this case too, processing proceeds to S11415.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S11405: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S11406). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S11407: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, processing also proceeds to S11415. Note that, as will be described later in the processing of S11515 in FIG. 325, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 has been saved correctly.

In the processing of S11415, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S11415). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (S11416, S11417).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S11416, S11417) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S11416, S11417) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (S11416, S11417), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S11416), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S11417). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to S11410.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S11404: No), power outage information is stored (S11405: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S11407: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (S11408) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power was cut off (S11409), and processing proceeds to S11410. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S11410, a performance permission command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the execution of various performances is permitted for the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Next, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is read (S11411), and a state command based on the read value is set (S11412). Then, the flow path solenoid 209a is set to off (S11413). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S11414), and the process proceeds to main process 7, which will be described later.

Next, referring to FIG. 325, we will explain main processing 7, which is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up processing (main control device) 7. FIG. 325 is a flowchart showing this main processing 7. In this main processing 7, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, each process from S11501 to S11508 is executed as a regular process with a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update processes of S11511 and S11512 are executed in the remaining time.

In the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S11501). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S10101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the special pattern 1 reserved ball number command set in the special pattern variation process 7 (see FIG. 315) or the start winning process (see FIG. 161) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process (S11501), a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. necessary for the third pattern display device 81 to display the variation of the third pattern are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the opening command (S11602), the number of rounds command (S11607), and the ending command set in the big win control process 7 (Fig. 326, S11504) are sent to the sound lamp control device 113 (S11611). In addition, when a ball is to be launched, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S11502). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (198 in the seventh control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

After updating the variable type counter CS1 (S11502), the prize ball counting signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S11503), and then, if a jackpot state of a special pattern is reached, a jackpot control process is executed to execute a jackpot performance and to open or close the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) (S11504). In the jackpot control process 7 (S11504), the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650). Then, when any of these conditions is met, the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The opening and closing of the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is repeated a predetermined number of rounds. Note that in the seventh control example, the big win control process 7 (S11504) is executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

Next, when the special symbol is in the small win state, various effects according to the small win are executed, and the small win control process 7 is executed to open or close the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) (S11505). In the small win control process 7 (S11505), the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) has elapsed or whether the specified number of balls have entered the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650). When any of these conditions are met, the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. In the seventh control example, the small win control process 7 (S11505) is executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314).

Next, an electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (S11506). In the electric role opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric role is set by the process of S822 in the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), the opening/closing control of the electric role is started. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric role continues until the opening time and the number of openings set by the process of S821 or the process of S823 in the normal pattern change process are completed.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b (see FIG. 2) (S11507). In the first pattern display update process (S11507), when a change pattern is set by the process of S8206 of the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (see FIG. 318), the change display according to the change pattern is started in the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b. In the seventh control example, for example, if the currently lit LED of the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that main process 7 (see Figure 325) is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process (S11507), when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the process of S8206 of the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (see FIG. 318) has ended, the change display being performed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b (see FIG. 294) is terminated, and the stopped pattern (first pattern) is displayed as stopped (lit up) on the first pattern display device 37a, 37b in the display mode set by the process of S10305 or S10308 of the special pattern determination process 7 (see FIG. 317).

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device 83 (S11508). In the second pattern display update process (S11508), when the second pattern change time is set by the process of S815 or S816 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), a change display is started in the second pattern display device 83. As a result, the second pattern display device 83 performs a change display in which a "○" pattern and an "X" pattern are alternately lit as the second pattern. In addition, in the second pattern display update process (S11508), when a stopped display is set on the second pattern display device 83 by the process of S818 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163), the change display being performed on the second pattern display device 83 is terminated, and the stopped pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stopped pattern (illuminated display) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S812 or S813 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 163).

Then, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S11509). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S11509: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not cut off. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process 7 has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the seventh control example) has elapsed since the start of this main process 7 (S11510). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S11510: Yes), the process proceeds to S11501, and each process from S11501 onwards described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process 7 (S11510: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated until the specified time has elapsed, i.e., within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process 7 (S11511, S11512).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S11511). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when each counter value reaches its maximum value (999, 239 in the seventh control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated using the same method as the processing of S11502 (S11512).

Here, the execution time of each process from S11501 to S11508 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the next execution timing of main process 7 is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time (S11511), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the process of S11509 (S11509: Yes), the power is interrupted due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 165 is executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S11513 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S11513), and a power off command indicating that the power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S11514). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S11515), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S11516), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of S11509 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the game state performed in S11501 to S11508, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S11511 and S11512 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from a power interruption state, the processing can be started from the processing of S11501 after the start-up processing (main control unit) 7 is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of S11501, just as in the case of initialization in the start-up processing (main control unit) 7. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power interruption, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting processing (S11401), so that the processing can be started from S11501. This reduces the control burden on the main control device 110 and allows the main control device 110 to perform accurate control without malfunctioning or going out of control.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 326, the jackpot control process 7 (S11504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 326 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process 7 (S11504). This jackpot control process 7 (S11504) is executed within the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the corresponding winning port (the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 or the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650) when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process 7 (Fig. 326, S11504), first, it is determined whether it is the timing to start a jackpot with a special symbol (S11601). Specifically, this is determined by analyzing the setting status of the jackpot start flag 203j. This jackpot start flag 203j is set to ON (S10216) when the start of a jackpot is set by the processing of S10215 of the special symbol variation process 7 (see Fig. 315). In the processing of S11601, if it is determined that it is the timing to start a jackpot (if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203j is ON) (S11601: Yes), an opening command is set (S11602), and then the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF (S11603), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11601 that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (the jackpot start flag 203j is set to OFF) (S11601: No), then it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is in progress (S11604). The special symbol jackpot includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game) and the period during which the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON after the special symbol jackpot game ends, and corresponds to this period. If it is determined in the process of S11604 that it is not the start timing of the special symbol jackpot (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is OFF) (S11604: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S11604 that a special symbol jackpot is occurring (the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set to ON) (S11604: Yes), a determination process (S11605 to S11612) is executed to determine whether it is time to execute various processes that are executed at multiple times during the jackpot.

If it is determined in the process of S11604 that a jackpot is currently being played (S11604: Yes), it is then determined whether it is time to start a new round (S11605). In this process of S11605, it is determined whether the current timing is the start timing of a new round based on the opening scenario set corresponding to the current jackpot game. If it is determined in the process of S11605 that it is time to start a new round (S11605: Yes), the corresponding winning hole (the specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202fg (S11606), and a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set (S11607). After the round number command is set, this process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S11501) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sends a display round number command corresponding to the number of rounds to the display control device 114. When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round presentation is started in the third pattern display device 81.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the jackpot continues (for example, when the number of special pattern variations (number of lotteries) between the execution of multiple jackpot games is less than 50 times, or during a period in which a time-saving state is set repeatedly between jackpot games), the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to accumulate and display the number of rounds of the jackpot games that are continuously executed. In other words, the voice lamp control device 113 has a period setting means for setting a period (consecutive win period) during which it is determined that the jackpot is continuously executed based on the state command or variation pattern command sent from the main control device 110, a round number accumulation means for adding the number of rounds (number of rounds) of the new jackpot game to the number of rounds (number of rounds) of the previously executed jackpot game when a new jackpot game is executed during the period set by the period setting means, and a round number accumulation display control means for transmitting a display round number command corresponding to the accumulated round number accumulated by the round number accumulation means to the display control device 114 and displaying it on the third pattern display device 81 during the jackpot game. This allows the player to recognize that the jackpot has continued for a long time, which increases the player's interest.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11605 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S11605: No), then it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of V winning device 650) has been met (S11608). Specifically, it is determined that the closing condition has been met when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of V winning device 650) was opened, or when a predetermined number of balls (e.g., 10 balls in total) have entered the variable winning device 65 or V winning device 650.

In the process of S11608, if it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning port (specific winning port 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning port 650a of V winning device 650) is met (S11608: Yes), the corresponding winning port (specific winning port 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning port 650a of V winning device 650) is closed (S11609), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning port (specific winning port 65a of variable winning device 65 or V winning port 650a of V winning device 650) is not met (S11608: No), it is next determined whether the current timing is the start timing of the ending performance (S11610). The timing to start the ending performance is determined when 15 rounds (the final round of play that is preset for this jackpot game) have ended, the opening and closing door 650f1 is closed, and the waiting time (3 seconds in the seventh control example), which is the ball discharge time, has elapsed.

If it is determined in the processing of S11610 that it is the timing to start the ending performance (S11610: Yes), an ending command is set (S11611) and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output processing (S11501) of main processing 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the ending performance is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11610 that it is not the timing to start the ending performance (S11610: No), then in the process of S11612, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the ending performance (S11612). If it is determined in the process of S11612 that it is not the timing to end the ending performance (S11612: No), then this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S11612 that it is time for the ending presentation to end (S11612: Yes), it is then determined whether the jackpot type currently being executed is jackpot A to jackpot D (S11613). In the process of S11613, the jackpot type stored in a storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores the jackpot type to be set is read out.

Next, based on the read jackpot type, the time-saving end condition is set using the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe (S11614). Specifically, if the jackpot type is jackpot A (15R time-saving jackpot) or jackpot B (5R time-saving jackpot), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, the small jackpot A counter 203fg is set to 1, and the small jackpot B counter 203fh is set to 3. Also, if the jackpot type is jackpot D (15R time-saving jackpot), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100, the small jackpot A counter 203fg is set to 2, and the small jackpot B counter 203fh is set to 10.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (5R non-time-saving jackpot), the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends, so the time-saving counter 203h, small win A counter 203fg, and small win B counter 203fh are not set to any value (time-saving end condition). After the above-mentioned processing of S11614 is completed, a time-saving setting information command is set to indicate information corresponding to the values of the various counters indicating the time-saving end condition set in the processing of S11614 (S11615).

The time-saving setting information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S11501) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the time-saving setting information command, it sets time-saving information indicating the time-saving end conditions of the current time-saving state in the time-saving information update area 223g and the temporary time-saving information update area 223i. Based on the time-saving information set here and the update information of the time-saving state that is updated based on the fluctuation (lottery) of the special pattern, it determines the remaining number of times (remaining conditions) of the time-saving state, and various performance modes are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the remaining number of times.

After completing the processing of S11615, the system next sets a state command corresponding to the game state that will be set after the jackpot (S11616), sets the end of the jackpot (S11617), sets the jackpot in progress flag 203k to off (S11618), and ends this processing.

As explained above, the seventh control example is configured so that the end conditions for the time-saving state can be set differently depending on the type of jackpot that is set when a jackpot is won. Furthermore, the seventh control example is configured so that a time-saving end condition that is less likely to be established as the end condition for the time-saving state (time-saving end condition) is set when a jackpot is won by drawing a lottery for the second special symbol compared to when a jackpot is won by drawing a lottery for the first special symbol.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide added value to the player when they win one type instead of two types during right-hand play while the time-saving state is set.

In the seventh control example, the same time-saving end condition is set for the jackpot type (jackpot A, B) that is set when a jackpot is won by drawing the first special pattern, but this is not limited thereto. For example, it may be configured to set a time-saving end condition that is more difficult to achieve when the jackpot type is jackpot A. Also, some of the multiple time-saving end conditions may be set to be more easily achieved when the jackpot is A, and the others may be set to be more easily achieved when the jackpot is B.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 306(d), in the seventh control example, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is configured to set a fluctuation count end condition related to the number of times the special pattern fluctuates (an end condition based on the value of the time-saving counter 203h) and a winning count end condition related to the number of times a small prize has been won as a result of the special pattern lottery (an end condition based on the value of each small prize counter).

In addition, the system is configured so that the winning count end conditions are set to end conditions corresponding to multiple small win types that are set when a small win is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which small win type the small win game will be played and how much time is left until the time-saving state ends before the number of times the special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (100 times).

In the seventh control example, only the number of times the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) change is set to "100 times" as the change count end condition, but a different change count end condition may be set depending on the type of big win. In addition, as the change count end condition, a first special symbol change measurement means may be provided that measures only the number of times the first special symbol changes, and a first special symbol change end condition that is established when the measurement result of the first special symbol change measurement means becomes a predetermined result, or a second special symbol change measurement means may be provided that measures only the number of times the second special symbol changes, and a second special symbol change end condition that is established when the measurement result of the second special symbol change measurement means becomes a predetermined result may be set.

Furthermore, in the seventh control example, the end condition is set based on the measurement results of the counters (small win A counter 203fg, small win B counter 203fh) corresponding to each small win type as the winning count end condition, but this is not limited to this, and the time-saving end condition may be set based simply on the total number of times a small win has been won, or a means may be provided that totals and measures the number of times a small win game with a predetermined number (two) of small win types set out of multiple (three or more) small win types has been played, and the end condition may be set based on the measurement results of that means.

In addition, in the seventh control example, the time-saving end condition is set for all small win types that can be set when a small win is won, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to set small win type Z as a small win type for which the time-saving end condition cannot be met no matter how many times it is set when a small win is won. This makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the time-saving state is approaching its end due to the current small win, even if the player knows that he or she has won a small win during the time-saving state.

In addition, when the above-mentioned small win type Z is set, it is preferable to configure it so that a small win game with the same content as the small win game for which the winning count end condition is set is executed. By configuring it in this way, even if the game content of the small win game executed during the time-saving state is identified, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the time-saving state is approaching the end due to the current small win game.

In this way, by determining that a small prize has been won, or by determining the game content of the small prize game that is executed based on the small prize being won, in other words, by determining the game content of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to make the player very interested in the presentation that suggests (informs) the progress of the time-saving state (whether it is approaching the end or not), by making it difficult to grasp the progress. Note that the control content of the presentation executed by the third pattern display device 81 in the seventh control example will be explained in detail in the explanation of the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 described later.

Next, the small win control process 7 (S11505) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 327. FIG. 327 is a flowchart showing this small win control process 7 (S11505). This small win control process 7 (S11505) is executed within the main process 7 (see FIG. 325), and is a process for executing various effects according to the small win and opening or closing the corresponding winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) when the pachinko machine 10 is in a small win state with a special pattern.

In the small win control process 7 (Fig. 327, S11505), first, it is determined whether a small win of a special pattern will start (S11701). Specifically, if the small win start flag 203fb is set to ON by the process of S10404 of the small win start setting process 7 (see Fig. 320), it is determined that a small win of a special pattern will start. In the process of S11701, if a small win of a special pattern will start (S11701: Yes), an opening command is set (S11702). Then, the small win start flag 203fb is set to OFF (S11703), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S11701, if a small win of a special pattern has not started (S11701: No), it is determined whether or not a small win of a special pattern is in progress (S11704). The period during which a small win of a special pattern is in progress includes the period during which the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 display a small win of a special pattern (including during play of a small win of a special pattern) and during a specified time after play of a small win of a special pattern ends. The determination in S11704 is made by analyzing whether the small win flag 303fc is set to on. In the process of S11704, if it is determined that a small win of a special pattern is not in progress (S11704: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11704 that a small win of a special pattern is occurring (S11704: Yes), the process of S11705 is executed. In the process of S11705, it is determined whether it is the timing to open the V winning hole (S11705). If it is determined in the process of S11705 that it is the timing to open the V winning hole (S11705: Yes), the corresponding winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario table 202fg (S11706), and it is determined whether this is the 5th or 10th opening timing (S11707).

If it is determined in the process of S11707 that this is not the fifth or tenth opening timing (S11707: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11707 that this is the fifth or tenth opening timing (S11707: Yes), then in the process of S11708, it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to ON (S11708), and if it is determined that it is not ON (OFF) (S11708: No), the small win type stored in the small win type storage area 203fa is read (S11709), and then an instruction command corresponding to the read small win type is set (S11710).

The instruction command set in the processing of S11710 is, for example, an instruction command for changing the display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 depending on the type of small win, that is, a small win in which the ball is likely to pass through a specific area during small win play (e.g., small win A) and a small win in which the ball is unlikely to pass through a specific area during small win play (e.g., small win B).

Returning to FIG. 327, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S11705, if it is determined that it is not the time to open the V winning opening 650a (S11705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the V winning opening 650a has been met, i.e., whether it is the time to close the V winning opening 650a (S11711). If it is determined that it is the time to close the V winning opening 650a (S11711: Yes), the V winning opening 650a is closed (S11712), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11711 that the current timing is not the closing timing of the V winning port 650a (S11711: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending performance (S11713). If it is determined in the process of S11713 that it is the timing to start the ending performance (S11713: Yes), an ending command is set (S11714) and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S11501) of the main process (see FIG. 325) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending performance is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S11713 that it is not the timing to start the ending performance (S11713: No), then in the process of S11715, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the ending performance (S11715). If it is determined in the process of S11715 that it is not the timing to end the ending performance (S11715: No), then this process is terminated.

In the processing of S11715, if it is determined that it is the timing for the ending presentation to end (S11715: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set on (S11716), and if it is determined that it is set on (S11716: Yes), an opening scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203fe is set (S11717), the jackpot start flag 203j and the jackpot mid-flag 203k are set on (S11718), the V flag 203fe is set off (S11719), the V pass flag 203ff is set off (S11720), the small jackpot mid-flag 203fc is set off (S11721), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 328, the control process executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this seventh control example will be described. FIG. 328 is a flow chart showing the process of special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 7 (S14983). In this special symbol 1 performance mode setting process 7 (S14983), a process is executed (see S19502) that uses the performance mode determined by referring to the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa in order to set the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol lottery during the time-saving state.

When the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 7 (S14983) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state (S19501). If it is determined that the current game state is in the time-saving state (S19501: Yes), the lottery result notification mode selection table 222fa (see FIG. 312) is referenced to determine the notification mode (S19502). Then, a display variation pattern command indicating the performance mode determined in the process of S19502 is set (S19503), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S19501 that the current game state is not in the time-saving state (S19501: No), the process of S19502 is skipped, the process of S19503 described above is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this seventh control example, in one special pattern drawing, it is possible to judge whether a jackpot has been won and whether the time-saving feature has been won, and in the event that both a jackpot and a time-saving feature are won, a special benefit that is advantageous to the player can be granted. In this respect, the seventh control example has a different technical concept from the other control examples, but the technical concept unique to this seventh control example may also be applied to the pachinko machine 10 described in the other control examples. In addition, it may also be possible to judge whether a time-saving feature has been won even when a game state other than the normal state is set.

In addition, in this seventh control example, when processing related to the special pattern lottery is executed, a process for determining whether a time-saving win has been won can be executed before the process for determining whether a jackpot has been won, and when a time-saving win has been won, the time-saving state is set before the determination of whether a jackpot has been won is executed, and the time-saving state is terminated between the determination of whether a jackpot has been won and the start of the special pattern variation to show the result of that determination. In other words, the time-saving state can be set only for the purpose of changing the game state when the determination of whether a jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery is executed.

By configuring it in this way, the time-saving state can be used for purposes other than those set for the purpose of making it easier to execute special symbol lotteries, as is the case with conventional pachinko machines 10, and a variety of games can be offered to players.

In addition, as a configuration that allows the time-saving state to be set solely for the purpose of changing the game state when the jackpot winning judgment is made in the special pattern lottery, a configuration other than that described in this seventh control example may be used. For example, the time-saving state may be set at the timing when the special pattern fluctuation that indicates the result of the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, and the time-saving state may be ended after the jackpot winning judgment is made in the next special pattern lottery.

In this case, if the right to execute the special pattern lottery (special pattern reserved) has been acquired, the period during which the time-saving state is set will be instantaneous, so similar to the seventh control example, it will be possible to set the time-saving state for the purpose of changing the game state when the determination of whether or not a jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery is made. On the other hand, if the special pattern reserved has not been acquired, the time-saving state will continue until the next special pattern lottery is executed, so it will be possible to set a period during which it is easy to execute the special pattern lottery. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to execute the next special pattern lottery only for players who are unable to execute the special pattern lottery smoothly.

In addition, in this seventh control example, it is configured so that a jackpot and a time-saving win can be won in a single special pattern drawing, and if a double win occurs, a bonus that is more advantageous to the player can be given than if there were no double wins. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure so that if a double win occurs, a bonus that is less advantageous to the player can be given than if there were no double wins.

In addition, as a judgment for the possibility of multiple wins, not only a judgment for a jackpot win or a judgment for a time-saving win, but also a judgment for the establishment of a time-saving end condition or a judgment for a drop-out lottery win may be used. In other words, multiple types of judgments can be made executable based on the establishment of a specific execution trigger, and when the combination of the results of the multiple types of judgments becomes a predetermined combination, a different bonus can be awarded than when the combination becomes a different combination.

<Modification of the game board configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, a modified example of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 329. In the fifth to seventh control examples described above, the game board 13 has a left-handed play for making the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 in the normal state, and a right-handed play for making the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640, which is easier to enter when the time-saving state is set. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 has been described that has a playability of switching between a game for making the first special symbol lottery and a game for making the second special symbol lottery depending on the game state.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 329, in the normal state, a left-hand hit game is performed to cause the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, making it possible to execute a first special pattern lottery, and a right-hand hit game is performed to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 1641, making it possible to execute a second special pattern lottery. With this configuration, when the same game state is set, the player can select a game method (left-hand hit game, right-hand hit game) (by adjusting the firing strength by operating the operating handle 21) to execute a special pattern lottery for any special pattern type, thereby increasing the player's motivation to participate in the game.

Next, we will explain the innovative gameplay that uses the game board 13 shown in Figure 329.

<Gameplay 1>
In the pachinko machine 10 having the playability used in the seventh control example described above, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are configured to select the jackpot at the same selection rate, and in addition, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be capable of determining whether or not a time-saving win has been won in addition to a jackpot win, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to be capable of determining whether or not a small win has been won in addition to a jackpot win. When a time-saving state is set based on a time-saving win, the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 1640, and a right-hitting game is executed, and a game in which a small win leads to a jackpot game is executed is configured to be executable.

By configuring it in this way, in the normal state, it becomes possible for the player to select between a game (first game) in which the aim is to set a time-saving state by winning a jackpot with the first special symbol, or a game (second game) in which the aim is to set a time-saving state by winning a jackpot with the second special symbol, or a game (second game) in which the aim is to set a time-saving state by winning a jackpot with the second special symbol, or a game (second game) in which the aim is to set a time-saving state by winning a small jackpot with the second special symbol, by playing with the right hand.

In this case, for example, the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set when the time-saving state is won is configured to make it easier for the time-saving end condition to be met, and in about 50% of cases when the second time-saving state is set, a big win game is played via a small win during the second time-saving state, and the probability of winning the time-saving state in the first special pattern lottery is configured to be higher than the probability of winning the small win in the second special pattern lottery.

By configuring it in this way, the player can select whether to play the first game or the second game according to his/her preference in order to execute a game process in which a jackpot game is executed via winning a small jackpot in the second special pattern lottery. In this case, it is advisable to specify the rate at which game balls enter each ball entry port, the probability of winning the time-saving feature, the probability of winning a small jackpot, and the probability of executing a jackpot game when a small jackpot is won, so that the ratio of the number of winning prize balls when a specified number of game balls are fired is equal when playing left-handed game in a normal state and when playing right-handed game. This makes it possible to provide a fair game to the player regardless of which game is played.

Furthermore, in this case, it is advisable to configure the time required for the ratio of the number of winning balls obtained when a specified number of game balls are released to become equal between the first game and the second game, or to configure the deviation of the number of winning balls obtained to be different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that suits the tastes of the player.

<Other gameplay features: Depending on the type of time-saving feature, you can set a time-saving state that is more unfavorable than the normal state or a time-saving state that is more favorable>
As in the fifth control example described above, a time-saving state (first time-saving) that is set via winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, and a time-saving state (second time-saving) that is set via winning a time-saving state (second time-saving) can be set, and when the second time-saving state is won, a second time-saving state A that is advantageous to the player and a second time-saving state B that is disadvantageous to the player can be set as the type of time-saving state that is set.

When the second time-saving A is set, as in the fifth control example described above, a time-saving state is set in which the electric device 640 opens so that the special symbol lottery is more likely to be performed than in the normal state. On the other hand, when the second time-saving B is set, the electric device 640 is controlled to open so that game balls can only enter the second ball entrance 640 at the same ball entrance rate as in the normal state.

When the second time-saving B is set, that is, in a game state other than the normal state, the time-saving winning judgment is not executed. By configuring in this way, when the normal state is set, a game is played in which a jackpot winning judgment and a time-saving winning judgment are executed in the special pattern lottery, and when the second time-saving B is set, a game is played in which only a jackpot winning judgment is executed in the special pattern lottery. In other words, since the time-saving winning judgment is not executed in the normal state, the game is played in a way that is disadvantageous to the player in the second time-saving B.

Then, a different number of times to select special symbols (for example, 10 times, 50 times, 100 times) can be set as a time-saving end condition for the second time-saving B.

Furthermore, the selection ratios of the lottery results in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state are set to a 1/200 probability of winning the jackpot and a 199/200 probability of winning the time-saving option. If the time-saving option is won, the ratio of the second time-saving option A being selected is set to 10%, and the ratio of the second time-saving option B being selected is set to 90%. In other words, when the special pattern lottery is executed in the normal state, if the lottery result is anything other than a jackpot, the time-saving option will always be selected.

By configuring it in this way, the timing for the special symbol lottery to be executed in the normal state is when the conditions for ending the second time-saving B are met after the big win and the normal state is set, i.e., the special symbol lottery executed in a specific cycle. This makes it possible to execute a special symbol lottery (a special symbol lottery in the normal state) that is advantageous to the player periodically (each time the conditions for ending the second time-saving B are met).

In addition, by configuring the second time-saving B to end under different conditions, the number of times that the special symbol lottery is to be performed can be set, and the period during which the special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player is performed can be varied, providing the player with an element of surprise.

In this case, when using a pachinko machine 10 that can execute both the first and second special pattern lotteries in the normal state, such as the configuration of the game board 13 described above with reference to Figure 329, it is advisable to configure the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery in the normal state so that the probability of winning the time-saving feature is different, the selection ratio of the time-saving feature type that is set when the time-saving feature is won is different, or the content of the time-saving feature end condition when the second time-saving feature B is set is different.

By configuring it in this way, the probability that the second time-saving A advantageous to the player will be set can be varied depending on which type of special pattern is used in the periodically executed special pattern lottery advantageous to the player (special pattern lottery in the normal state).

In addition, the time-saving end condition for the second time-saving B may be set to be established when the result of the special pattern lottery is a specific judgment result (for example, a small win) rather than based on the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed, and the result of the special pattern lottery may be a small win that is different from a big win or a time-saving win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which, when the second time-saving B is set, the second time-saving B is ended as soon as possible so that the special pattern lottery can be executed in the normal state, aiming to win a small win.

<Gameplay 2: Combination of simultaneous fluctuation gaming machine and time-saving winning>
In a gaming machine configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) draw a first special pattern and draw a second special pattern, and when both special patterns win a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed based on the drawing result of the special pattern on the side where the special pattern variation has stopped first (determined display of special pattern), and at the point where the special pattern variation has stopped first (determined display of special pattern), depending on the type of jackpot, the other special pattern variation is forcibly displayed as stopped in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is a miss, the machine is configured to be able to execute a time-saving winning judgment in both the first special pattern drawing and the second special pattern drawing.

Then, as in the fifth control example described above, a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) is executed before the start of each special symbol change, and if the time-saving winning is selected, the time-saving state is set when the special symbol change stops. In this case, if the time-saving winning is selected in the first special symbol lottery, the time-saving state that becomes the first benefit is set, and if the time-saving winning is selected in the second special symbol lottery, the time-saving state that becomes the second benefit different from the first benefit is set.

Furthermore, in the case where the second special symbol drawing is executed while the first special symbol is changing and the time-saving feature is winning, a time-saving state can be set in which a third benefit that is more advantageous than the first and second benefits is awarded if the time-saving feature is won. By configuring in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to draw the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously (in parallel), it is possible to set a time-saving state in which different benefits are awarded depending on the timing of the time-saving feature being won in each special symbol drawing.

The bonus that is awarded may be, for example, a third bonus in which the time-saving end condition is more difficult to achieve than the first or second bonus, or a third bonus in which the special pattern lottery is easier to execute than the first or second bonus.

Furthermore, the timing at which the time-saving state of the third bonus is set may be the timing at which the first special pattern change is stopped among the special pattern changes being executed in parallel, or the timing at which the last special pattern change is stopped. Also, regardless of whether it is before or after the timing of the stop display, it may be the timing at which the first special pattern change is stopped, or the timing at which the last special pattern change is stopped. It may also be the timing at which a specific special pattern type is stopped.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that can simultaneously (parallelly) draw multiple types of special symbols, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player wins a jackpot in each of the special symbol draws and is simultaneously awarded excessive bonuses (jackpot games).

Furthermore, even if a player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player in one special pattern lottery, it is possible for the player to win a jackpot that is advantageous to the player in the other special pattern lottery by the time the winning result is frozen (confirmed) display. In this case, it is advisable to execute a variable presentation that suggests to the player that he or she has won an unfavorable jackpot, using the variable time until the special pattern lottery result is frozen and displayed. This makes the player think that he or she has won an unfavorable jackpot, which can motivate the player to execute the other special pattern lottery during that variable time.

In addition, the reel may be configured so that a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be set when a jackpot that is advantageous to the player is won than when a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won. This allows a favorable win to be won in the lottery for the other special symbol while one of the special symbols that has won an unfavorable win is fluctuating, and the winning result can be displayed as a stop (confirmed display) before the winning result of the unfavorable win.

<About gaming machines that can set the number of time-saving times (the number of times that the special symbol lottery can be executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol) to infinite>
In the first to fourth control examples described above, in some cases where a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, a high probability state for normal patterns (time-saving state) can be set for the period until 100 special pattern lotteries have been executed after the end of the jackpot game. However, the period for which the time-saving state continues is not limited to until 100 special pattern lotteries have been executed, but may be until 100 or more special pattern lotteries have been executed, or may be indefinite (until the next jackpot is won).

For example, in the first control example described above, the special pattern change count is set as the end condition for ending the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, and one special pattern change count can be set from a plurality of change counts including at least a first change count and a second change count different from the first change count, with the first change count being 100, the second change count being 200, the third change count being 300, the fourth change count being 500, and the fifth change count being 10,000 (effectively until the next jackpot is won).

The presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is that "100 times remaining" is displayed regardless of which ending condition is set at the time the time-saving state is set, and if a number of fluctuations of 100 or more (e.g., the fourth number of fluctuations) is set, a presentation is executed in which a predetermined number is added to the value of the remaining number of fluctuations displayed at a predetermined timing (e.g., "+30 times").

By configuring it in this way, even if the super chance mode (a limited-time state of high probability of a special symbol (probable change state) until 50 special symbol lotteries have been performed) is not set after the end of the jackpot game, if the period until 10,000 special symbol variations are performed is set as the period for which the time-saving state will continue, the state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second winning slot 640 will continue for a longer period of time than if the probable change state was set. This makes it possible to perform more jackpot lotteries for special symbols while maintaining the number of game balls acquired, and increases the possibility of winning a jackpot. Therefore, even if the chance mode (time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to play by making the player expect a long-term time-saving state to be set, and it is possible to make the player interested in how long the time-saving state will continue, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the game ball passes through a specific area during a jackpot game, a special probability state is set, and if the ball does not pass through a specific area, a time-saving state is set. This allows the player to choose whether to play in a special probability state in which the time-saving count is 100 times, during which a high probability state for special symbols is set but the high probability state for normal symbols continues, or in a time-saving state in which a low probability state for special symbols is set but the high probability state for normal symbols continues, with the possibility of a maximum of 10,000 time-saving counts being awarded.

<Regarding gaming machines with a configuration (so-called ST specification) in which a high probability state (high probability state) of special symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game until the end condition is met>
In a gaming machine configured such that when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, a special probability state (high probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns) is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the number of times the special patterns change after the special probability state is set reaches a specific number (for example, 100 times), the end condition for the special probability state is met (so-called ST specification), multiple end conditions may be specified and one of them may be set.

For example, the special pattern change count that is set as the end condition for ending the special variable state that is set after the end of a jackpot game can be set to one of a plurality of change counts that includes at least a first change count and a second change count that is different from the first change count, with the first change count being 100, the second change count being 200, the third change count being 300, the fourth change count being 500, and the fifth change count being 10,000 (effectively until the next jackpot is won).

Then, the presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is that "100 times remaining" is displayed regardless of which end condition is set at the time the special state is set, and if the number of fluctuations is set to 100 or more (for example, the fourth number of fluctuations) as the end condition, a presentation is executed in which a predetermined number is added to the value of the remaining number of fluctuations displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, "+30 times").

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to know how long the special state will continue, so even if the remaining time (remaining number of changes of the special pattern) until the displayed special state ends is short, it is possible to make the player expect an additional effect to occur, and the player can play while feeling a sense of expectation that the special state may continue until the very last moment when it ends.

The above-mentioned configuration may also be applied to gaming machines (so-called type 1 and type 2 mixed machines) that award a jackpot when a special pattern is selected as a jackpot or when a gaming ball enters a specific area.

<Regarding gaming machines with a function (limit function) that sets an upper limit on the period during which high probability states can be set consecutively>
In addition, the above-mentioned configuration that allows the setting of an infinite number of time-saving times may also be applied to a gaming machine that has a function (limit function) that sets an upper limit on the period during which a high probability state can be set continuously.

The limit function here refers to a threshold value that executes a process to set a low probability state (low probability state) of a special or normal symbol after the end of a jackpot game, even if a jackpot of a type in which a high probability state (high probability state) of a special or normal symbol can be set after the end of a jackpot game is won.

For example, if a player wins a type of jackpot (high probability jackpot) that sets a high probability state (high probability state) for a special symbol after the end of a jackpot game in a low probability state, and the high probability limit is set to three times, if the player wins high probability jackpots three times in a row after the high probability state is set, the high probability limit will be reached with the third high probability jackpot win, and a low probability state for the special symbol will be set after the end of the jackpot game.

The probability variable limit count is a value that is set when a jackpot is won in a low probability state for a special symbol, and the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game played based on that jackpot ends. In the probability variable state, a jackpot that sets the probability variable state is won after the jackpot game ends, and the value is updated at the end of the jackpot game played based on that jackpot, and the updated value is used to determine whether the probability variable limit has been reached.

In a conventional gaming machine with a special symbol limit, for example, when a special symbol jackpot is won, the distribution of jackpot types is 90% for special symbol jackpots and 10% for normal jackpots, and the special symbol limit is set to three times, if a special symbol jackpot is won in a low probability state, and the special symbol state is set after the jackpot play ends, and then three consecutive special symbol jackpots are won, the special symbol limit is reached with the third special symbol jackpot, and a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 100 special symbol lottery draws have been performed) after the third jackpot play ends, and if the predetermined period has passed without a special symbol jackpot being won, the state transitions to the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols).

In addition, even if a regular jackpot is won before the special jackpot limit is reached, a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set for a predetermined period of time after the jackpot play ends (for example, until 100 special symbol lotteries have been performed), and if the predetermined period has passed without a special symbol being won, the state will transition to the normal state. Note that if a special jackpot is won in the time-saving state, a new special jackpot limit of 3 times is set.

In other words, in conventional gaming machines with a special chance limit, if a player wins a normal jackpot, the special chance limit is released, but if the player does not win a special chance within a limited period of time (for example, the period until 100 special chance lottery draws have been performed), the game will return to the normal state. Therefore, from the player's perspective, a normal jackpot is a less favorable jackpot than a special chance jackpot, and if there are two consecutive special chance jackpots after the special chance state is set, the game state set after the jackpot game ends is the same regardless of whether the next jackpot is a special chance jackpot or a normal jackpot. This could lead to a decrease in the player's motivation to play in the special chance state when there is only one chance remaining until the special chance limit is reached.

In response to this, by setting a normal jackpot that grants an infinite number of time-saving attempts (until the next jackpot is won), a low probability state of a special pattern is set in which the special jackpot limit is released when a normal jackpot is won after the special jackpot state is set, but since the time-saving state continues until the next jackpot, in a special jackpot state where there is only one attempt left until the special jackpot limit is reached, it is more advantageous for the player to win a normal jackpot than a special jackpot, and by making the player hope for a normal jackpot even in a special jackpot state where there is only one attempt left until the special jackpot limit is reached, a decrease in motivation to play can be prevented and interest in the game can be increased.

When a normal jackpot that grants an infinite number of time-saving plays is won is won, a special effect different from that when a special jackpot is won (for example, an effect in which the number of remaining plays until the displayed special limit is reached is rewound) may be executed.

<About the configuration capable of executing a double jackpot loop in a gaming machine that does not have a configuration capable of simultaneously (parallelly) executing the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol (so-called simultaneous variable method)>
In gaming machines that do not have a configuration capable of simultaneously (in parallel) executing a variable display based on the drawing of a first special pattern and a variable display based on the drawing of a second special pattern (so-called simultaneous variation method), gaming machines that have two types of jackpots (so-called variable probability loop machines) are commonly known: a variable probability jackpot in which a high probability state (variable probability state) for special and normal patterns is set after the end of a jackpot game until the next jackpot is won, and a normal jackpot in which a low probability state for special patterns and a high probability state (time-saving state) for normal patterns is set for a predetermined period after the end of a jackpot game (for example, until the special pattern drawing is performed 100 times).

In conventional probability loop machines, if a probability jackpot is won, the probability jackpot state is set after the jackpot game ends, and one more jackpot is guaranteed. However, if a normal jackpot is won after a probability jackpot is won, the normal state is set unless a jackpot is won during the time-saving state that is set for a specified period, so it is not possible to guarantee two more jackpot wins without changing the probability jackpot rate.

However, by configuring the game so that the aforementioned number of time-saving times can be set to an infinite number (until the next jackpot is won), it is possible to guarantee two more jackpot wins if a jackpot with a special jackpot is won without changing the probability of winning a special jackpot.

Specifically, if a regular jackpot is won while the special state is set, a time-saving state with an infinite number of times (until the next jackpot is won) is set, and if a regular jackpot is won while the normal state or time-saving state is set, a time-saving state with a period shorter than the infinite number of times (for example, until the special pattern lottery is performed 20 times) is set.

By configuring it in this way, if the probability variable state is set after the end of a jackpot game, one more jackpot is guaranteed regardless of the type of jackpot the next jackpot won, so winning one probability variable jackpot guarantees two more jackpots. Therefore, winning a probability variable jackpot allows the player to obtain many prize balls, which makes it possible for the player to play with enthusiasm in the hope of winning a probability variable jackpot.

<About the configuration that does not reset the time-saving state even if you win the jackpot when the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) is set>
In conventional gaming machines, a typical configuration is to set a time-saving state for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 100 special pattern lotteries have been performed) after a jackpot game ends, and if a jackpot game starts based on a jackpot being won during the time-saving state, the set time-saving state ends, and a new time-saving state for a predetermined period of time is set after the jackpot game ends (the time-saving state is reset).

To further increase interest in gaming machines with this configuration, if the time-saving mode is set, the time-saving mode is not reset even if a jackpot is won. This allows players to enjoy seeing how many jackpots they can win within a specified period of time, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Specifically, when a jackpot is won (first win) in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the number of special symbol changes set as the end condition for ending the time-saving state is configured to be able to set one of a number of change numbers including at least a first change number and a second change number different from the first change number, with the first change number being 100, the second change number being 300, the third change number being 500, and the fourth change number being 10,000 (effectively until the next jackpot is won).

For example, if the third number of changes is set as the end condition, and a jackpot is won with the special pattern change executed for the 20th time, the time-saving state will not end (will not be reset) when the jackpot play begins, so the number of remaining changes until the end condition for the time-saving state is met after the jackpot play ends will be 480.

In this way, the time-saving state set based on the first win does not end when a jackpot is won during the time-saving state, and the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the first win continues even after the newly executed jackpot game ends. This makes it possible to vary the number of jackpot wins that a player can obtain during the time-saving state depending on the number of fluctuations, which is the end condition of the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the first win, and provides an innovative gameplay.

The conditions for terminating the time-saving state include when the number of fluctuations set as the termination condition becomes 0 (i.e., when a specified number of special pattern fluctuations are executed during the time-saving state) and when the number of jackpot wins during the time-saving state reaches a specific number. For example, if the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game and a third jackpot is won after the time-saving state is set, the time-saving state may be terminated at the start of a jackpot game and a new time-saving state may be set after the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which players aim for consecutive wins in order to maintain a state that is more advantageous than the normal state (for example, a time-saving state), further increasing the interest of the game.

<Regarding gaming machines with a configuration in which the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set to be more advantageous to the player than the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols)>
At least four game states can be set: a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), a first special probability state, and a second special probability state.In a gaming machine configured such that the second special probability state is at least more advantageous to the player than the first special probability state in terms of the degree of advantage to the player in each game state, a time-saving lottery (a determination as to whether or not to set a time-saving state in the special symbol lottery) may be executed in the above-mentioned special symbol lottery.

Specifically, the difference in the probability of winning a jackpot between the low probability state and the high probability state of the special pattern is set small (for example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability state of the special pattern is 1/50.1, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability state is 1/50), and when a jackpot is won with the first special pattern, the probability of the first special jackpot (a type of jackpot in which the first special jackpot state is set after the jackpot play ends) is set to 95%, and the probability of the time-saving jackpot (a type of jackpot in which the time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends) is set to 5%, and prize balls cannot be obtained during the jackpot play.

The first special symbol drawing is primarily performed in the normal state, time-saving state, and first special probability state, and the second special symbol drawing is performed only in the second special probability state.

Then, only if the big jackpot is not won in the second special pattern lottery, a small jackpot lottery (determining whether or not a small jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery) is held, and if a small jackpot is won, the player can win prize balls through the small jackpot game that is held.

If the special symbol lottery does not result in a big win in the normal state, a time-saving lottery will be held, and if the time-saving lottery is won, the time-saving state will be set for a specified period of time (for example, the period until the special symbol variation is performed 20 times).

In addition, if the first special jackpot is won in the normal state, the first special jackpot state is set after the jackpot game ends. Here, in the first special jackpot state, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot is won, but the high probability state of the normal symbol is set to a low probability state when the end condition is met, and the number of special symbol changes set as the end condition is configured to be able to set one of multiple change numbers including at least the first change number and a second change number different from the first change number, for example, the first change number is 1, the second change number is 50, the third change number is 100, the fourth change number is 200, and the fifth change number is 300.

By configuring it in this way, if the conditions for ending the high probability state of normal symbols are met in the first high probability state, a high probability state of special symbols and a low probability state of normal symbols, in other words, a second high probability state that is advantageous to the player, is set, so that the player can be offered an innovative game in which the aim is for the high probability state of normal symbols to end without winning a jackpot in the first high probability state.

When a jackpot is won with the second special symbol, the probability of a second guaranteed jackpot (a jackpot in which the second guaranteed jackpot state is set after the jackpot game ends) is 95%, and the probability of a time-saving jackpot is 5%.

If the time-saving state is set and the first special symbol wins the jackpot, the second probability bonus state will be set 100%.

It is also possible to set an upper limit to the period during which the high probability state of normal symbols can be set consecutively (time-saving limit). For example, the time-saving limit is set to 10 times, and by winning the first special jackpot 10 times, the second special jackpot state is set after the end of the 10th jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a novel game in which a more advantageous game state is set by winning consecutive jackpots, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

The first special symbol lottery may also be configured to execute a small prize lottery, and when a small prize is won, the small prize type may be determined from among a number of small prize types, including a small prize type in which the second probability variable state is set at least after the end of the small prize game. By configuring it in this way, the opportunities to transition to the second probability variable state increase, further increasing the interest of the game.

When the first probability variable state is set, a presentation may be executed that indicates to the player the number of times the special symbol will remain to change until the end condition of the high probability state of the normal symbol that has been set is met. For example, when the fifth number of changes (300 changes) is set as the end condition, the third symbol display device 81 may display "Collect 300 points," and one point may be accumulated for each change of the special symbol, and when 300 points have been accumulated, the second probability variable state may be set. In this case, if a jackpot is won in the first probability variable state, the points acquired are reset (i.e., returned to 0).

In addition, even if the first number of changes (one change) is set as the end condition, the third pattern display device 81 may display "Collect 300 points" and 300 points may be acquired when one change of the special pattern is completed, or the number of points awarded for one change of the special pattern may be varied depending on the number of changes of the end condition that is set.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which number of changes is set as the end condition for the high probability state of the normal pattern, so the player can have fun predicting which number of changes is set from the number of points awarded, which can increase the interest of the game.

<Summary of technical concepts>
Next, each technical idea described in each of the above-mentioned control examples will be briefly explained. First, regarding the technical idea that the probability of obtaining an advantageous privilege by the special drawing lottery increases when the number of times the special drawing lottery using the special drawing lottery reserved acquired during the time reduction exceeds a predetermined number of times, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned fifth control example, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the pachinko machine 10 has a means for acquiring the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (acquisition means capable of acquiring information) and has a means for reserving and storing the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special drawing lottery reserved) up to the upper limit number (4 pieces) (storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means). Then, based on the reserved and stored right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special drawing lottery reserved) (discrimination means capable of executing a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means), a jackpot game (specific game) is executed based on the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery being a jackpot win (first discrimination result). Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern, which makes it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, continues until the end condition (time-saving end condition) for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern is established. In addition, in the second special pattern lottery, a time-saving winning judgment can be executed separately from the jackpot winning judgment, and if it is determined that the time-saving winning has been won in the time-saving winning judgment (if it is determined that the second judgment result is true), the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern can be set without executing the jackpot game. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a plurality of game states are configured to be set, but among them, the time-saving winning judgment can be executed only in the state in which the normal state (specific period) is set.

By configuring it in this way, when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set based on winning a jackpot in the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state for a normal pattern is set at the end of the jackpot game, not when the special pattern variation stops, and when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set based on winning a time-saving game in the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state for a normal pattern is set at the stop of the special pattern variation. Thus, the timing at which the high probability state for a normal pattern is set can be made to differ depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state.

In addition, since it is possible to provide a period during which the time-saving winning judgment can be performed (period during which the normal state is set) and a period during which it cannot be performed (period during which the normal state is not set), it is possible to make the player interested in the period during which the special pattern lottery is performed. Note that in the fifth control example described above, it is configured so that the time-saving winning judgment is performed only in the normal state, but it is sufficient to provide a period during which the time-saving winning judgment can be performed and a period during which it is not performed. For example, it is also possible to configure so that the time-saving winning judgment can be performed in a game state in which a low probability state of a normal pattern is set (normal state, second probability state), and not to perform the time-saving winning judgment in a game state in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set (time-saving state, probability state).

Furthermore, rather than switching whether or not to execute the time-saving win judgment depending on the set game state, the probability of winning the time-saving win judgment may be made to differ depending on the game state. For example, when the normal state is set, the time-saving win judgment has a 1/6 probability of winning the time-saving win, and in other game states, the probability of winning the time-saving win may be configured to be 1/200. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set game states in which it is easy to win the time-saving win and game states in which it is difficult to win the time-saving win, so that, similar to the technical idea described above, it is possible to get the player interested in the effect, i.e., the period during which the special pattern lottery is executed.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, a first ball entry port 64 (a first ball entry means through which a game ball can enter) through which a game ball can enter and trigger the execution of a first special symbol lottery is provided, and a second ball entry port 640 (a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means) through which a game ball can enter and trigger the execution of a second special symbol lottery is provided, and the time-saving winning determination is configured to be possible only in the second special symbol lottery.

In other words, in the first special pattern lottery, no time-saving winning judgment is performed regardless of the game state set, and in the second special pattern lottery, the time-saving winning judgment can be performed during a specific period (normal state). By configuring it in this way, the amount of value that is later granted to the player can be significantly different between the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, and further between the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640.

In the fifth control example described above, the first special symbol lottery does not execute the time-saving winning judgment, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to execute the time-saving winning judgment in a specific period (normal state), but this is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving winning judgment may be executed only for the second special symbol lottery in the first specific period (normal state), and the time-saving winning judgment may be executed only for the first special symbol lottery in a second specific period (second probability change state) different from the first specific period. By configuring in this way, depending on the set period, it is possible to create a situation in which the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 is more likely to give a player a value advantageous to the player than the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and a situation in which the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is more likely to give a player a value advantageous to the player than the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64. This makes it possible to motivate players to play games that are more likely to award them advantageous value.

Furthermore, in this case, as in the modified example shown in FIG. 329, it is advisable to configure the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 so that the rate at which game balls enter the first ball entrance 64 is similar to the rate at which game balls enter the second ball entrance 640, regardless of which game state is set. By configuring it in this way, the player can select which ball entrance to enter the game ball at his/her discretion, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as described in each control example, the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set based on winning the time-saving state by the time-saving state winning judgment (first time-saving state) is more likely to be set as a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, i.e., a time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be established, than the time-saving state (first time-saving state) that is set based on winning the jackpot. In other words, the system is configured to vary the degree of advantage of the set time-saving state depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state. This makes it possible to vary the period (time-saving end condition) during which the time-saving state (specific setting) is set depending on the determined judgment result (setting trigger), which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing interest.

In this case, it is advisable to provide a case where the second time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state, depending on the game state before the time-saving state is set, and a case where the first time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the situation under which the time-saving state is set.

More specifically, for example, the system may be configured so that a more advantageous time-saving state is more likely to occur when the number of times special symbol lotteries have been executed since the end of the previous big win game (number of times they have been stuck) exceeds a predetermined number, compared to when this number has not been exceeded.

Next, in the seventh control example described above, it is configured so that a jackpot win and a time-saving win can be won in one special pattern lottery (see FIG. 315). This allows a jackpot win (first discrimination result) and a time-saving win (second discrimination result) to be discriminated in a overlapping manner, so that various lottery results can be expected in one special pattern lottery, such as a jackpot win, a time-saving win, or both a jackpot win and a time-saving win. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player is executed than when there are no overlapping wins (see FIG. 306(b)). Therefore, since it is easy to execute a specific type of game that is advantageous to the player by discriminating in overlapping, there is an effect that the game can be diversified by granting the player a bonus corresponding to various discrimination results.

In addition, a configuration other than that of the seventh control example described above may be used to provide a more advantageous benefit to the player in the case of a duplicate win than in the case of no duplicate wins. For example, the game state set after the jackpot game ends may be configured so that a more advantageous game state (e.g., a special bonus state, a time-saving state, etc.) can be set in the case of a duplicate win than in the case of no duplicate wins.

In addition, in the seventh control example described above, after a time-saving winning judgment (a judgment as to whether or not the result is the second judgment result) is made, a jackpot judgment (a judgment as to whether or not the result is the first judgment result) is made, and if a time-saving winning is made in one special pattern lottery, the jackpot judgment in that special pattern lottery can be made in the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the degree of advantage of the bonus game that is executed when there is a double win different from the degree of advantage of the bonus game that is executed when there is no double win.

Next, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, the type of bonus (the number of time-saving times granted after the end of the jackpot game) granted to the player when the jackpot is won in the high probability state of the normal pattern (first time-saving) set based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery and the high probability state of the normal pattern (second time-saving) set based on winning the time-saving in the special pattern lottery is different (see FIG. 280 (b)). Therefore, since the selection ratio (the content of the jackpot game and the number of time-saving times granted) in the type of bonus game is variable according to the setting type (first time-saving, second time-saving), the bonus granted to the player can be different even in the high probability state of the same normal pattern (second game state), and there is an effect that the game can be diversified without setting many game states, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, the number of time-saving periods granted differs depending on the setting type (first time-saving period and second time-saving period), but this is not limited to this, and the content of the jackpot game to be executed (for example, the number of rounds played) may be configured to differ.

Furthermore, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, when the second time reduction is set rather than the first time reduction, that is, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set without a jackpot game being played, it is configured so that the high probability state for normal symbols, in which the end condition is less likely to be established, is more likely to be set. In other words, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set without winning a prize ball during a jackpot game, that is, when the second time reduction, which provides fewer benefits before the high probability state for normal symbols is set than the first time reduction, can prolong the high probability state for normal symbols, which has the effect of allowing benefits to be awarded fairly to players.

Furthermore, in the second variant of the fifth control example described above, similar to the fifth control example and the first variant of the fifth control example described above, the time-saving winning judgment (determination of the second discrimination result) is configured to be executable only in the normal state. In other words, the execution of the time-saving winning judgment is restricted in states other than the normal state. Therefore, since the time-saving winning judgment is not executed according to the game state, there is an effect of making the player more interested in the game state that has been set, and making the player look forward to the game state being set in which the second discrimination result can be determined.

In addition, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, a presentation mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery can be set so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the first or second time reduction has been set (see Figs. 278 and 279). In other words, when the first time reduction is set, a specific presentation (see Fig. 278(a)) is executed for the first period which is the sum of the special symbol change time and the subsequent jackpot game period, and when the second time reduction is set, a specific presentation (see Fig. 278(b)) is executed for the second period which is the special symbol change time (including the fixed time).

More specifically, the variable time and the jackpot game period are predefined in accordance with each special symbol lottery result so that the first period and the second period described above are approximately the same, and the performance periods of the specific effects are the same. By configuring in this way, as the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a performance indicating a high probability state of a normal symbol is executed after a specific effect with the same performance period and performance mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is watching the effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to determine which setting trigger set the high probability state of a normal symbol.

Next, in the sixth control example described above, the system is configured so that the time-saving winning judgment can be executed even during the time-saving state (second game state), and if a time-saving winning occurs during the time-saving state (second game state), it is possible to set a time-saving state (second game state) of a time-saving type in which the time-saving ending condition is unlikely to be met (the number of time-saving events is large or the probability of winning the time-saving event is high).

As a result, the longer the period for which the time-saving state is set, the more likely it is that a time-saving state of a type for which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be met will be set, making it easier to play bonus games.

In the sixth control example described above, as shown in FIG. 286(a), the probability of winning the time-saving bonus is different depending on the set game state, but the probability of winning the time-saving bonus may be set to the same. In addition, although the probability of winning the time-saving bonus is different depending on the game state, the probability of winning the time-saving bonus may also be different depending on the number of special pattern draws since the previous big win game was played. In this case, it is preferable to configure the probability of winning the time-saving bonus to be higher when the number of special pattern draws since the previous big win game is played exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 200 times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grant a special bonus of winning the time-saving bonus, which is different from the big win game, to a player who has not won a big win in a special pattern draw for a long time. It goes without saying that this technical concept can be applied to other control examples.

The gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 329 includes a first discrimination means (first special symbol lottery) capable of executing a first discrimination, a first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit (a big win game) based on the result of the first discrimination executed by the first discrimination means being a first discrimination result (a big win), and a second benefit (a high probability state of a normal symbol) based on the result of the first discrimination being a second discrimination result (a time-saving win) different from the first discrimination result, a second discrimination means (second special symbol lottery) capable of executing a second discrimination different from the first discrimination, and and a second benefit granting means for granting a first benefit based on the result of the second discrimination performed by the first discrimination means being a third discrimination result (winning a big win), and a third benefit (playing a small win) different from the first benefit and the second benefit based on the result of the second discrimination being a fourth discrimination result (winning a small win) different from the third discrimination result, so that the third benefit is not granted based on the first discrimination performed by the first discrimination means, and the second benefit is not granted based on the second discrimination performed by the second discrimination means.

As a result, different benefits can be awarded when the first judgment is made and when the second judgment is made, which has the effect of encouraging the player to play in order to make different judgments, and preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

In the gaming machine relating to the above-mentioned <Gameplayability 2>, the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern can be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and if both special patterns result in a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed based on the drawing result of the special pattern on the side whose special pattern variation stopped first (determined display of special pattern), and at the point when the special pattern variation stops first (determined display of special pattern), depending on the type of jackpot, the other special pattern variation is forcibly displayed as stopped in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is a miss, and the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute a time-saving winning judgment in both the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern. Then, between the time when the first discrimination means determines that the first condition is met (a time-saving win has been won) and the time when the first state setting means sets the first advantageous state (a time-saving state for the first benefit), a third advantageous state (a time-saving state for the third benefit) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state can be set based on the fact that the second discrimination means determines that the second condition is met (a time-saving win has been won). Thus, in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to simultaneously (concurrently) draw the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to set a time-saving state in which a different benefit is awarded depending on the timing of the time-saving win in each special symbol draw.

In the above-mentioned <Other game characteristics>, in a gaming machine having a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a first discrimination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, the game state setting means determines whether or not the result of discrimination by the discrimination means (special symbol lottery) executed in a state in which the first game state (normal state) is set is the first discrimination result. A second game state (second time-saving B) can be set based on a second discrimination result (winning second time-saving B) different from the first game state, a first game state can be set based on an end condition (time-saving end condition) being established in a state in which the second game state is set, and a third game state (second time-saving A) that is more advantageous to the player than the second game state can be set based on a result of discrimination by the discrimination means executed in a state in which the first game state is set being a third discrimination result (winning second time-saving A) different from the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result. Also, the discrimination means can execute discrimination so that the probability of the discrimination result being the third discrimination result (selection rate 10%) is lower than the probability of the discrimination result being the second discrimination result (selection rate 90%).

Furthermore, as the termination condition (second time-saving termination condition of second time-saving B), at least a first termination condition can be set that can be established based on the number of determinations (number of special symbol selections) made by the determination means when the second game state is set reaching a predetermined number. In addition, a second termination condition can be set that can be established based on the result of the determination made by the determination means being a specific determination result (a small jackpot win).

In this case, the type setting means is capable of setting at least a first setting (normal time-saving state) that can set the second game state after the bonus game execution means ends, and a second setting that can set the second game state (time-saving state) without executing the bonus game based on the result of the judgment executed by the judgment means being a second judgment result (winning second time-saving B) that is different from the first judgment result, as the setting type for setting the second game state by the game state setting means, and the game state setting means is capable of setting an advantageous second game state (normal time-saving state) that is more advantageous than the first game state (normal state) and an unfavorable second game state (second time-saving B) that is less advantageous than the first game state, according to the setting type (time-saving type) set by the type setting means.

<Eighth control example>
Next, the eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 330 to FIG. 335. The fifth control example described above was configured to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during a low probability state (normal state) of a normal pattern, and to make it easy for a game ball to enter the second ball entrance means 640 during a high probability state (time-saving state) of a normal pattern. Furthermore, it was configured to execute a judgment of a time-saving winning (time-saving lottery) in the second special pattern lottery executed in the normal state. In addition, it was configured to be possible to store (reserve) the lottery right of the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reservation) up to a predetermined number (4 pieces) as an upper limit.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example configured in this manner, when the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols ends while the reserved special symbol 2 is stored in the reserved memory, and a low probability state (normal state) for normal symbols is set, the second special symbol lottery based on the reserved special symbol 2 stored in the reserved memory is executed in the low probability state (normal state) for normal symbols, and if the time-saving state is won in the second special symbol lottery executed during that normal state, the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols is set again.

In other words, by configuring the period from when the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols ends and the low probability state (normal state) for normal symbols is set until a predetermined period (the period during which the second special symbol lottery based on the reserved special symbol 2 is being executed) has elapsed as a period (pull-back period) during which the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols is likely to be set, it is possible to encourage players to play with enthusiasm even after the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols has ended.

In contrast, the eighth control example is configured to be able to execute a time-saving winning judgment (time-saving lottery) in both the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, is configured to have a high probability of winning the time-saving lottery (most of the time-saving winnings are negative), and differs in that the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set based on the time-saving winning is configured to be a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state.

In addition, in this eighth control example, the game board 13 is configured to make it easier for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery to be executed alternately, and the end condition for the second time reduction described above is set to be established when one type of special symbol lottery is executed consecutively.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this eighth control example configured in this way, if the special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set does not result in a jackpot win (jackpot probability 1/300), the second time-saving period is set by winning the time-saving period with a high probability (298/300). Then, the special symbol lottery is executed in the second time-saving period until the condition for ending the second time-saving period is met.

In addition, the second time-saving end condition is configured to be set as a first time-saving end condition that is established when the total number of special pattern lotteries executed during the second time-saving period reaches a specific number (100 times), and a second time-saving end condition that is established when the special pattern lotteries are executed in a predetermined order, and the second time-saving end condition is configured to be established before the first time-saving end condition is established.

Therefore, when the second time-saving period is set, the player can be motivated to play in order to achieve the second time-saving end condition in order to end the second time-saving period as soon as possible.

In addition, the degree of advantage given to the player is varied depending on the type of special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, so that it is easier to set an advantageous gaming state after the end of the jackpot game if the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state than if the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery executed in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of special pattern lottery that will be held after the second time-saving period ends.

Now, with reference to Figure 331, the configuration of sorting unit 1064 will be described. Figures 331(a)-(b) are diagrams showing the internal structure of sorting unit 1064. In reality, a cover body is placed on the front side of this, and this cover body is made of a material whose interior is visible, and the surface of the spiral pattern is colored in such a way that it is impossible or difficult to see inside, making it difficult to see inside.

At the top of the distribution unit 1064, a pass-through opening 1064b through which game balls can enter is provided, and a transparent ball entry sensor 1064a is disposed to detect when a game ball has passed through the pass-through opening 1064b. Game balls that pass through the pass-through opening 1064b are alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first ball entry opening 64a and the second ball entry opening 1641 disposed below.

The sorting member 900 receives the game ball that has entered the passage opening in the storage section 900a or 900c of the sorting member 900. When the game ball is received in the storage section 900a, the weight of the game ball causes the sorting member 900 to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 331(a)), and guides the game ball to the first ball entrance opening 64a. Here, the sorting member 900 is configured to be able to rotate approximately 90 degrees left and right, and a magnet 900b is provided on the boundary wall between the storage sections 900a and 900b.

A base-side magnet 901 is disposed on the base body provided on the rear side of the sorting unit 1064 at a position on the center line of the passage opening where the magnet 901b of the sorting member 900 passes. The magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 and the base-side magnet 901 are configured to have mutually repelling polarities. In detail, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured so that a magnetic pole (south pole or north pole) is generated at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is disposed and fixed so that the tip faces the sorting member 900 side.

The magnet 900b is also a rod-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that its tip faces the base-side magnet 901. When the sorting member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the storage sections 900a and 900b is directly above (on the center line of the gap between the passage openings that allows approximately one game ball to enter), the base-side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other (with their tips facing each other). Here, the magnets are arranged so that they have the same polarity (for example, north and north poles), so they repel each other and the sorting member 900 does not stop in a position where the boundary wall faces directly above, but rather remains in a position rotated to the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet 900b is positioned on the center line of the passage opening (upper position), the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 repel each other, causing the sorting member 900 to rotate to the left or right, so that either the storage section 900a or the storage section 900b faces the side that receives the game balls entering the sorting unit 640 (the upper side of the gaming machine). This prevents the entering game ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the storage sections 900a and 900b, causing ball clogging.

In addition, the repulsion between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 can prevent the sorting member 900 from rotating to the right (the storage unit 900a facing upward) after the storage unit 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first ball entrance 64a. As a result, after guiding the game ball to the first ball entrance 64a, the storage unit 900b faces upward, and the next game ball that enters the sorting unit 640 is received by the storage unit 900b, and the sorting member 900 rotates about 90 degrees to the right due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the second ball entrance 1641. In this way, the sorting member 900 can alternately guide the game ball that enters the sorting unit 640 to the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 1641. Therefore, game balls can be evenly distributed between the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 1641, and a lottery game resulting from a win through the first ball entrance 64a (hereinafter, the first lottery game) and a lottery game resulting from a win through the second ball entrance 1641 (hereinafter, the second lottery game), which will be described later, can be efficiently executed.

The right-side second ball entrance 1640 is an entrance that, like the second ball entrance 1641, starts the lottery for the second special symbol when a game ball enters it. The second special symbol has four reserved balls in total between the second ball entrance 1641 and the right-side second ball entrance 1640.

The passing opening 1064b (large enough for one game ball to pass through) of the sorting unit 1064 can accept game balls that have passed through the right side of the variable display unit 80 as well as game balls that have passed through the left side, while the second right-side ball entrance 1640 is configured to only accept game balls that have passed through the right side.

Here, FIG. 331(a) shows a case where the sorting member 900 is rotated to a position where the storage section 900a faces upward and is stopped. In this case, when a game ball passes through the passage opening 1064b, the game ball is stored in the storage section 900a, and the weight of the game ball rotates the sorting member 900 counterclockwise, and the game ball is guided to the first ball entrance 64a while being guided to the guide section 900z1.

After the game balls are distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first ball entrance 64a, the distribution member 900 is stopped at a position where the storage section 900c faces upward, as shown in FIG. 331(b). After that, when the game ball passes through the passage opening 1064b, it is stored in the storage section 900c and the game ball is distributed to the second ball entrance 1641. Thus, the game balls can be alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 64a and the second ball entrance 1641.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 331(b), among the game balls that enter through the passage port 1061b of the sorting unit 1064, those that cannot be properly guided by the sorting member 900 to the first ball inlet 64a or the second ball inlet 1641 flow down the ball discharge path formed between the outer wall portion of the sorting unit 1064 and each ball inlet, and are discharged to the outside of the sorting unit 1064.

By configuring it in this manner, even if, for example, a game ball that flows forcefully into the passage port 1061b of the sorting unit 1064 collides with the sorting member 900 and flows down inside the sorting unit 1064 without being guided by the guiding sections 900z1 and 900z2, it is possible to prevent balls from becoming clogged inside the sorting unit 1064.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the position (rotational state) of the sorting member 900 is configured to be identifiable by a rotation sensor (not shown). Specifically, a rotation sensor capable of detecting the amount of rotation of the rotation shaft 900d of the sorting member 900 is provided, and the position of the sorting member 900 can be identified based on the detection result of the rotation sensor. Based on the position of the sorting member 900 identified based on the detection result of the rotation sensor, it is then possible to determine which ball entry port (first ball entry port 64a, second ball entry port 1061) the game ball that enters the passage port 1061b will be guided to next.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute notification effects to inform the player whether or not it is possible to consecutively acquire the same type of reserved special chart, and guidance effects to allow the player to consecutively acquire the same type of reserved special chart, making it easy for the player to play in order to achieve the second time-saving end condition.

In the fifth control example, the position of the sorting member 900 is determined using a rotation sensor, but the position of the sorting member 900 may be determined each time based on the ball-entering port through which the ball entered. Specifically, the sorting member 900 is determined to have the storage section 900c facing upwards based on the ball entering the first ball-entering port 64a, and the sorting member 900 is determined to have the storage section 900a facing upwards based on the ball entering the second ball-entering port 1641. By configuring in this way, the position of the sorting member 900 can be determined without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. Even if the sorting member 900 rotates due to vibration or the like, the position of the sorting member 900 can be correctly determined by updating and determining the position each time a ball enters the ball-entering port.

As described above with reference to FIG. 331, in the fifth control example, under normal circumstances, the game balls that flow into the distribution unit 1064 are alternately guided to the first ball inlet 64a and the second ball inlet 1641. When a new special chart reservation cannot be obtained based on the game balls entering each inlet, the same type of special chart reservation can be continuously obtained by changing the position of the distribution member 900 without obtaining a special chart reservation by having the game ball enter the distribution unit 1064. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, some of the game balls that flow into the distribution unit 1064 may be configured to enter the first ball inlet 64a or the second ball inlet 2164 without being accommodated in the distribution member 900.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to acquire the special symbol reserve (special symbol 1 reserve) corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserve) alternately using the sorting member 900, and to acquire the special symbol reserve without using the sorting member 900, and to acquire the special symbol reserve in an irregular order using the special symbol reserve and the special symbol reserve. This makes it easier to establish the second time-saving end condition.

Returning to FIG. 330, the explanation will continue. In the right area of the game board 13, there is provided a right second ball entrance 1640 and an electric device 1640a as a variable means that can be changed between an open state where a game ball can be inserted into the right second ball entrance 1640 and a closed state where it is more difficult to insert the game ball than in the open state.

This electric device 1640a, like the electric device 640a in the fifth control example described above, is configured to be variable from a closed state to an open state according to a predetermined variable pattern by a winning game (normal winning game) that is executed when a winning symbol is obtained in a normal symbol lottery that is executed based on the game ball passing through the through gate 67. Note that the technology related to the normal symbol lottery and the content of the control process for the electric device 1640a that is executed based on a winning symbol in the normal symbol lottery are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example used in the fifth control example described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In other words, in this eighth control example, similar to the first control example described above, when a normal symbol lottery is won, a normal symbol winning game (long opening winning game) in which it is easier to get the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640, and a normal symbol winning game (normal opening winning game) in which it is more difficult to get the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640 than the long opening winning game, can be executed. In either the game state in which a low probability state for normal symbols is set, or the game state in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set, a long opening winning game can be executed.

By configuring it in this way, when an unfavorable time-saving state that is unfavorable to the player is set as the game state among the time-saving states, a normal symbol lottery is won and a long opening winning game is executed, making it possible to cause multiple game balls to enter the right second ball entrance 1640. As a result, in this eighth embodiment in which a special symbol lottery is executed according to the order in which the game balls enter, it becomes possible to execute the same type of special symbol (second special symbol) consecutively, making it easier to establish the time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) for ending the unfavorable time-saving state.

Therefore, by winning the normal pattern lottery and playing the long opening winning game, the player can be given the privilege of efficiently executing the special game pattern lottery, as well as the privilege of ending the disadvantageous time-saving state, which makes it possible for the player to become interested in the results of the normal pattern lottery.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this eighth control example, the time-saving state is configured to be executable in two states: a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player (advantageous time-saving state), and a time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player (unfavorable time-saving state). In terms of the efficiency of execution of the special symbol lottery, the advantageous time-saving state is configured to be executed more efficiently than the unfavorable time-saving state. More specifically, when the unfavorable time-saving state is set, the expectation of being able to get the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640 during a normal winning game that is executed based on a winning normal symbol lottery is configured to be about the same as in the normal state.

Furthermore, in terms of the bonuses granted in the event of a jackpot win in the special pattern lottery (the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game ends), the system is configured so that a bonus more favorable to the player is granted (is more likely to be granted) in the advantageous time-saving state than in the unfavorable time-saving state. More specifically, the bonus granted in the event of a jackpot win during an unfavorable time-saving state is configured so that a bonus more unfavorable to the player is granted (is more likely to be granted) than in the event of a jackpot win during the normal state.

Therefore, of the three game states, the normal state, the advantageous time-saving state, and the unfavorable time-saving state, the advantageous time-saving state is the game state that is most advantageous to the player, followed by the normal state, which is the game state that is most advantageous to the player, and the unfavorable time-saving state which is the game state that is most disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in this eighth control example, the contents of the time-saving end condition for ending the advantageous time-saving state (advantageous time-saving end condition) are different from the contents of the time-saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving end condition). Specifically, for both the advantageous time-saving end condition and the disadvantageous time-saving end condition, a first time-saving end condition is specified that is established based on the number of special pattern lotteries executed after the time-saving state is set, and for the disadvantageous time-saving end condition, a second time-saving end condition is specified that is established based on the execution order of the special pattern lotteries executed during the time-saving state.

As described above, in the eighth control example, the allocation unit 1064 is configured to make it easier for game balls to enter the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 1641 alternately, so that the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are normally performed alternately. Here, for example, if a long opening winning game is performed based on a winning normal symbol lottery, a game is performed by hitting the right side to cause the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640, so that it is possible to create an event in which the second special symbol lottery is performed consecutively.

In the eighth control example, the second time-saving end condition that is established based on the execution order of the special symbol lotteries executed during the time-saving state can be set to a second time-saving end condition that is established based on the same type of special symbol lottery being executed consecutively. Therefore, a player in an unfavorable time-saving state can be made to play in the hope of executing a long opening winning game in order to establish the second time-saving end condition.

In addition, in order to continuously draw the same type of special symbol, it is possible to play a game in which game balls flow into the allocation unit 1064 without playing a long opening winning game, for example, in a state in which new reserved special symbols cannot be acquired, that is, in a state in which the upper limit of reserved special symbols has been reserved and stored. For example, it is possible to play a game in which the position of the allocation member 900 is changed by further flowing game balls into the allocation unit 1064 in a state in which it is difficult to execute a new special symbol change, for example, in a state in which a left-hand hit game is played during a big winning game and the upper limit of reserved special symbols 1 and 2 has been acquired.

In the eighth control example, during a jackpot game, the position of the sorting member 900 is identified, and a guide effect (see FIG. 333(b)) can be executed to create a state in which special reserved symbols corresponding to the same type of special symbol can be consecutively acquired based on the acquisition status (acquisition order) of the reserved special symbols 1 and 2. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which, during a jackpot game in which a right-hand play is executed, a left-hand play can be executed based on the content of the guide effect that is executed, allowing the player to execute an advantageous game.

<About the performance content in the eighth control example>
Here, with reference to Figures 332 to 333, the content of the presentation executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this eighth control example will be described.

In this eighth control example, the game states can be set to a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and a chance state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols).Furthermore, the time-saving states can be set to an advantageous time-saving state (a time-saving state set after the end of a jackpot game, and a time-saving state set with a low probability when a time-saving win is won) and an unfavorable time-saving state (a time-saving state set with a high probability when a time-saving win is won).

The unfavorable time-saving state is actually a state of high probability of normal symbols, but is configured to make it more difficult for game balls to enter the right second ball entrance 1640 compared to the favorable time-saving state, and is a time-saving state in which game balls can only enter the right second ball entrance 1640 to the same extent as in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols). Therefore, even if a time-saving state is set, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, it is configured so that a game in which game balls flow into the distribution unit 1064 by playing left-handed, rather than playing right-handed to enter the right second ball entrance 1640, as in the case of the normal state.

When a special symbol jackpot is won in the normal state, a more advantageous bonus (for example, more rounds of jackpot play) is awarded than when a special symbol jackpot is won in the unfavorable time-saving state. Therefore, the unfavorable time-saving state is a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state. On the other hand, the favorable time-saving state is configured so that a normal symbol jackpot game is executed so that it is relatively easy to get the game ball into the right second ball entrance 1640, and right-hitting play is configured to be advantageous to the player. Therefore, the game states that are most advantageous to the player are the unfavorable time-saving state, the normal state, and the favorable time-saving state, in that order.

Although details will be described later, the disadvantageous time-saving state is a game state that can be set after the variable display ends when the time-saving lottery executed in the special pattern lottery wins the time-saving lottery, and in this eighth control example, the time-saving lottery is configured to win with a high probability (299/300). The condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state differs depending on the type of special pattern that won the disadvantageous time-saving lottery, and when the disadvantageous time-saving lottery is won with the first special pattern, the disadvantageous time-saving state ends when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed once (i.e., when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed consecutively), or when the variable display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern are executed a total of 100 times. On the other hand, if the disadvantageous time-saving effect is won with the second special symbol, the disadvantageous time-saving effect is ended when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once (i.e., when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed consecutively), or when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed a total of 100 times.

As described above, in the gaming machine 13 in this control example, the game ball that enters the distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 330) is alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) to the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) and the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331) located below it, and if the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) is won, a lottery for the first special symbol is executed, and if the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331) is won, a lottery for the second special symbol is executed. The lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game balls entered the corresponding ball entrances. For example, if the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) and then the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331) are won in that order, the first special symbol drawing will be performed, followed by the second special symbol drawing. In this way, it is configured so that it is difficult for either the variable display for showing the drawing result of the first special symbol or the variable display for showing the drawing result of the second special symbol to be performed consecutively.

Here, an example of a case where the variable display of any special symbol type is executed consecutively in this control example will be described. As described above, in the gaming machine 13, the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) distributes the gaming balls to the first ball entrance 64a (see FIG. 331) and the second ball entrance 1641 (see FIG. 331), and up to four pieces of winning information for each special symbol are reserved. And, when the number of reserved special symbols has reached the upper limit (four in this control example), if a gaming ball newly enters the corresponding ball entrance, the winning information is not reserved (hereinafter referred to as an overflow winning). Then, when the number of reserved special symbols for both symbols reaches the upper limit (in this control example, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols are 8 in total), if a game ball enters the distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 330), the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) distributes the game ball to an entrance different from the entrance corresponding to the special symbol type of the 8th reserved symbol, but the winning information is not reserved because it is an overflow winning. Note that the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) changes its position by distributing the game ball, so it is possible to distribute the game ball that enters the next distribution unit 1064 (see FIG. 331) to the entrance corresponding to the special symbol type of the 8th reserved symbol, and it is possible to continuously execute the variable display of the same special symbol type as the 8th reserved symbol, thereby ending the disadvantageous time-saving state. This configuration can motivate players to shoot game balls in order to accumulate reserves in order to end the unfavorable time-saving state.

In this control example, the winning information of the first special pattern and the second special pattern is configured to reserve up to four balls, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four and may be set to three or less (e.g., two) or five or more reserved balls (e.g., eight). Also, instead of displaying the reserved patterns in the small display area Dm19, the number of reserved balls may be displayed as numbers in part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be displayed in different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) according to the number of reserved balls. Also, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls.

Figure 332 (a) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when the second special symbol reservation is consecutively obtained by overflow winning in the disadvantageous time-saving state. When the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, the number of remaining changes until the chance change is displayed in the small display area Dm12, and is updated by subtracting one each time the change display of each special symbol is executed. Note that the chance change in this control example refers to the change display of the special symbol to show the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. In this way, the configuration allows the player to tell whether the current game state is the normal state or the disadvantageous time-saving state, making it easier for the player to decide whether to continue playing or not depending on the number of remaining changes until the chance change.

The first special symbol is displayed stationary in the small display area Dm1, and the second special symbol is displayed in a changing state in the small display area Dm2, allowing the player to easily tell which special symbol is changing.

The reserved special symbols are displayed in the small display area Dm19, with a circle filled with diagonal lines indicating the reserved first special symbol and a circle filled with black indicating the reserved second special symbol. The display screen shown in FIG. 332(a) indicates that the reserved number of first special symbols is three and the reserved number of second special symbols is four, and reserved symbols hr6 and hr7 are reserved symbols indicating the winning information of the second special symbol, so the variable display of the second special symbol is executed continuously. As described above, when the variable display of one special symbol is executed continuously, the disadvantageous time-saving state ends, and the disadvantageous time-saving state ends due to the stop of the variation of the special symbol based on reserved symbol hr7, and after the variation of the special symbol based on reserved symbol hr7 stops, the variable display of the special symbol executed next is a chance variation.

Here, if the display shown in the small display area Dm12 is subtracted by 1 each time a special pattern change display is executed, when a special pattern change display based on the reserved pattern hr7 is executed, "73 more chance changes" will be displayed, and the number of remaining changes until the chance change is actually executed will not match the number of remaining changes displayed in the small display area Dm12, which may cause the player to distrust the game information.

In this control example, the system predicts that the conditions for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state as shown in FIG. 332(a) will be met, and when the number of remaining changes until the chance change displayed in the small display area Dm12 does not match the number of remaining changes until the chance change is executed (i.e., the normal state is set), a presentation is executed in the small display area Dm17 that shortens the number of remaining changes until the chance change displayed in the small display area Dm12, thereby matching the number of remaining changes until the chance change is actually executed with the number of remaining changes displayed in the small display area Dm12, and providing correct game information.

In addition, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 332(a), the word "Lucky" is displayed above the reserved symbols hr6 and hr7 to give the player advance notice that the conditions for ending the unfavorable time-saving state will be met. This configuration makes it easier for the player to recognize which reserved symbols will cause a chance fluctuation, making it easier for the player to understand which fluctuations they should pay attention to.

In this control example, the number of remaining variations until the chance variation is displayed in the small display area Dm12, and is subtracted by one each time a special pattern variation display is executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a configuration in which points are accumulated and a chance variation is executed when a specific number of points (e.g., 100 points) is accumulated may be used. In this case, one point is added each time a special pattern variation display is executed, and if the same type of special pattern variation display is executed consecutively, the points can be accumulated up to the MAX, creating a presentation that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In this control example, the disadvantageous time-saving state ends after the variable display of the same special pattern is executed consecutively, and the variable display of the next special pattern executed is a chance change, but this is not limited to this. When the variable display of the same special pattern is executed consecutively, the disadvantageous time-saving state may end at the start of the variable display of the next special pattern executed, and a chance change may be executed.

Figure 332 (b) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when a normal symbol is won and the electric device 1640a (see Figure 330) associated with the right-side second ball entrance 1640 (see Figure 330) is long open for the normal symbol winning game. A display mode indicating that a normal symbol has been won is displayed in the small display area Dm11, and when the normal symbol winning game is executed, "Hit right" is displayed in the small display area Dm4 to guide the player on how to play the normal symbol winning game, a display is displayed in the small display area dm18 indicating that the electric device 1640a (see Figure 330) associated with the right-side second ball entrance 1640 (see Figure 330) is open, and "Hit right and aim for the electric chute" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. This allows the player to easily understand that the game involves firing the game ball toward the second ball entrance 1640 on the right side (see FIG. 330), and allows the player to play in a way that suits the game situation.

Here, when the game ball enters the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), the winning information of the second special symbol is reserved. In the case of FIG. 332(b), the last reserved symbol hr5 displayed in the small display area Dm19 is the reserved symbol of the second special symbol, so when the game ball enters the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed continuously, and the disadvantageous time-saving state can be ended. Therefore, in order to inform the player that it is advantageous to have the game ball enter the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), "Chance to get chance variation" is displayed in the main display area Dm. By configuring in this way, it is possible to strongly encourage the game ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), and it is possible to make the player eager to play.

In addition, if three reserved second special symbols are already stored and the last reserved symbol displayed in the small display area Dm19 (for example, reserved symbol hr6) is a reserved symbol of the first special symbol, only one winning information of the second special symbol is reserved even if multiple game balls enter the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), so the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be executed continuously. Therefore, if the end condition of the disadvantageous time-saving state cannot be established even if a game ball enters the right second ball entrance 1640 (see FIG. 330), a different display mode (for example, a display such as "Chance to save reserved symbols") may be displayed in the main display area Dm. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide appropriate game information to the player, and the reliability of the game information can be increased.

Figure 333 (a) is an example of a display screen that is displayed when suggesting that the disadvantageous time-saving state will end. The main display area Dm12 displays "3 more chances until chance change", indicating that the first special pattern and the second special pattern have been displayed a total of 98 times since the disadvantageous time-saving state was set. In other words, when the display of the special pattern based on the reserved pattern hr2 ends, the display of the first special pattern and the second special pattern will be displayed a total of 100 times, and the condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state is met. In this case, the drawing of the special pattern based on the reserved pattern hr3 will be performed in the normal state, so in order to suggest that the drawing of the special pattern will be performed in the normal state, the reserved pattern hr3 is displayed in a different display mode (a reserved pattern with a star pattern displayed in a white circle) from the reserved pattern corresponding to the winning information of the first special pattern and the reserved pattern corresponding to the winning information of the second special pattern, and "Attention" is displayed above the reserved pattern hr3. By configuring it in this way, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display of the special pattern based on the reserved pattern hr3 is a chance variation, and the player's anticipation for the variable display of the special pattern executed based on the reserved pattern hr3 can be increased during the period until the variable display based on the reserved pattern hr3 is executed.

The main display area Dm also displays "This chance variation may be a lucky variation," which suggests the result of a pre-read of the winning information for reserved pattern hr3, and in this case suggests that there is a high possibility that the lottery result for the special pattern based on reserved pattern hr3 will be a big win. This can further heighten the player's sense of anticipation for the variation display of the special pattern executed based on reserved pattern hr3.

In this control example, the main display area Dm indicates the results of the foreseeing of the reserved pattern hr3, and the display mode of the reserved pattern hr3 displayed in the small display area Dm19 indicates that a lottery for a special pattern based on the reserved pattern hr3 will be executed in the normal state, but this is not limited to the above. The display mode of the reserved pattern hr3 may also indicate the results of the foreseeing, and for example, the color of the reserved pattern may be changed to notify the likelihood of winning the jackpot.

Figure 333 (b) is an example of a display screen that is displayed during the ending period of a jackpot game based on winning a regular jackpot. A display mode indicating that a regular jackpot has been won is displayed in the small display area Dm, and the word "Ending" is displayed in the small display area Dm5 to inform the player that the jackpot game is in the ending period.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, it is configured so that winning the jackpot with the first special symbol is more advantageous to the player than winning the jackpot with the second special symbol. Then, when the jackpot game following a normal jackpot win ends, the first special symbol lottery after the jackpot game ends is executed in the normal state. Therefore, by displaying "Lucky, normal variation starts with special symbol 1" in the sub-display area Ds, the player is notified in advance that the first special symbol lottery to be executed after the jackpot game ends will be executed with the first special symbol that is advantageous to the player, and the player can also be interested in the display of the special symbol variation after the jackpot game ends. Note that if the first special symbol lottery after the jackpot game ends is executed with the second special symbol, a different display mode (for example, a display mode that does not display "Lucky") is displayed.

During a jackpot game, the display of special symbols is not changed, so it is a period during which players can easily accumulate reserved balls. As described above, when the reserved number of each special symbol reaches the upper limit and a game ball enters the distribution unit 1640 (see FIG. 330), the winning information is not reserved, but the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) can be changed. In this control example, the position of the distribution member 900 is configured to be identifiable by a rotation sensor 990 (not shown). Therefore, in this control example, the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol hr8 and the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) are identified, and the player is notified of whether it would be advantageous to change the position of the distribution member due to an overflow winning.

Specifically, when the next winning information becomes available for reservation, if the winning information of the same special symbol type as the special symbol type corresponding to the reserved symbol displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 is not available for reservation, that is, if the winning information of the same special symbol type can be made available for reservation by changing the position of the distribution member 900 due to an overflow winning, as shown in FIG. 333(b), "Get a big chance if you put one ball in the navel before the big win ends" is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and a schematic diagram corresponding to the current position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) is displayed in the small display area Dm18, thereby executing an effect that encourages the player to put a game ball into the distribution unit 1640 (see FIG. 330). By configuring in this way, the player can enjoy a game in which game balls are fired even during the ending period of the big win.

When the next winning information becomes available for reservation, if the winning information of the same special pattern type as the special pattern type corresponding to the reserved pattern displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 is available for reservation, the position of the distribution member 900 (see FIG. 331) will change due to the overflow winning, and the winning information of the same special pattern type will no longer be available for reservation, so the message "Get a big chance if you land a ball in the center before the big win ends" will not be displayed in the center of the main display area Dm.

When the next winning information becomes available for reservation, if the winning information of the same special pattern type as the special pattern type corresponding to the reserved pattern displayed at the end of the small display area dm19 is available for reservation, a display mode that notifies the player that an overflow winning is unfavorable may be displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. This configuration makes it easier for the player to determine whether an overflow winning is favorable or unfavorable.

In this control example, the rotation sensor 990 is used to determine the position of the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331), but the position of the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) may be determined each time based on the ball-entering opening through which the ball enters. Specifically, the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) is determined to be in a state in which the storage section 900c (see FIG. 331) faces upwards based on the ball entering the first ball-entering opening 64a (see FIG. 331). By configuring in this way, the position of the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) can be determined without providing a dedicated sensor or the like. Even if the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) rotates due to vibration or the like, the position of the sorting member 900 (see FIG. 331) can be correctly determined by updating and determining the position each time a ball enters the ball-entering opening.

<Electrical configuration in the eighth control example>
Next, the contents of the electrical configuration in this eighth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 334 to Fig. 338. This eighth control example differs from the above-mentioned fifth control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, and a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed. Note that detailed description of the same contents as those in the above-mentioned fifth control example will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 334(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this eighth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this eighth control example differs from the ROM 202 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned fifth control example (see FIG. 244(a)) in that it has a fluctuation pattern selection 8 table 202gb instead of the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 202db, a jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd instead of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd, a time-saving random number 8 table 202ge instead of the time-saving random number 5 table 202de, and a time-saving type selection 8 table 202gf instead of the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df.

The jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd is a data table that is referenced when selecting the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, similar to the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd described above. In the above-mentioned fifth control example, there was the special pattern 1 jackpot 5 table 202dd1 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, and the special pattern 2 jackpot 5 table 202dd2 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery. However, in this eighth control example, the jackpot type is selected with the same allocation content regardless of the special pattern type, so the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd is referenced when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery.

Here, the detailed contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd will be explained with reference to FIG. 335(a). FIG. 335(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd in a schematic manner. As shown in FIG. 335(a), the jackpot type selection 8 table 202gd specifies the jackpot type (jackpot A8, jackpot B8) in association with the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot and the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2.

Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is normal (regular state), "jackpot A8" is defined for the range of the acquired first win type counter C2 value of "0 to 94", and "jackpot B8" is defined for the range of "95 to 99". Also, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than normal (regular state), that is, in the time-saving state or the probability variable state, "jackpot A8" is defined for the range of the acquired first win type counter C2 value of "0 to 49", and "jackpot B8" is defined for the range of "50 to 99".

The jackpot type "jackpot A8" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 16, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "60" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "60" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the random number value (counter value) associated with "jackpot A8" is 95 (0-94) in the normal state, so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, the probability that "jackpot A8" will be determined is 95% (95/100). On the other hand, the number is 50 (0-49) in other than the normal state, so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in a game state other than the normal state, the probability that "jackpot A8" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

The jackpot type "jackpot B8" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 6, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "60" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "60" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203i is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, the random number value (counter value) associated with "jackpot B8" is 5 (95-99) in the normal state, so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state, the probability that "jackpot B8" will be determined is 5% (5/100). On the other hand, the number is 50 (50-99) in other than the normal state, so if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in a game state other than the normal state, the probability that "jackpot B8" will be determined is 50% (50/100).

In other words, in this eighth control example, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, the selection ratio of the jackpot type set according to the set game state is varied, and it is configured so that when a jackpot is won during a normal state, the jackpot type (jackpot A8) that is advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected than when a jackpot is won outside the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, players can play in the hope that many special symbol lotteries will be executed during the normal state.

Next, the time-saving random number 8 table 202ge will be explained. This time-saving random number 8 table 202ge is a data table that is referenced in the time-saving judgment that is executed when the result of the special pattern lottery is other than a jackpot win (miss), and is used to determine whether or not a time-saving win has occurred.

Now, referring to FIG. 335(b), the contents of the time-saving random number 8 table 202ge will be explained. FIG. 335(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 8 table 202ge. As shown in FIG. 335(b), the time-saving random number 8 table 202ge stipulates the value (range) of the first winning random number counter C1 that is determined to be a time-saving win in correspondence with the special symbol type (special symbol type) and the game state.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is the first special symbol lottery and the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the range of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 value of "3 to 899" is specified as the judgment value of the time-saving winning. Also, when the game state is other than the normal state, the judgment value of the time-saving winning is not specified (shown as "-" in the figure). Similarly, when the special symbol type is the second special symbol lottery and the game state is the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the range of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 value of "3 to 899" is specified as the judgment value of the time-saving winning. Also, when the game state is other than the normal state, the judgment value of the time-saving winning is not specified (shown as "-" in the figure).

Here, in this eighth control example, the determination of whether or not a time-saving win has been made in the special pattern lottery (time-saving lottery) is made to be executed if the jackpot has not been won in the special pattern lottery, i.e., if the jackpot has been won but not won in the jackpot lottery, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1, which is determined to have won a jackpot in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, is set to a range of "0 to 2" (see first winning random number 5 table 202da), the system is configured to always win the time-saving win if the jackpot has not been won in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state.

As described above, in this eighth control example, the contents of the time-saving random number 8 table 202ge are regulated so that if a loser wins in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, a time-saving win is always won. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the range of the judgment value for the time-saving win to be regulated so that it is part of the loser wins in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute the special pattern lotteries continuously without winning the time-saving win.

In addition, in this eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 335(b), the judgment value for winning the time-saving mode is the same regardless of the special pattern type, but this is not limited to this, and different judgment values may be specified depending on the special pattern type. For example, it may be configured so that it is more difficult to win the time-saving mode when the first special pattern lottery is executed during the normal state than when the second special pattern lottery is executed. In this way, by making the probability of winning the time-saving mode different depending on the type of special pattern lottery executed during the normal state, it is possible to easily make the number of special pattern lotteries executed consecutively during the normal state different depending on the type of special pattern lottery executed, so that the player can be interested in which special pattern type of special pattern lottery was executed (will be executed) during the normal state.

When the probability of winning the time-saving feature is made different depending on the type of special pattern lottery executed during the normal state, it is preferable to configure the special pattern type (for example, the first special pattern) for which a special pattern lottery advantageous to the player is executed during the normal state (which is more likely to grant a beneficial bonus to the player when a jackpot is won) to be less likely to win the time-saving feature among multiple special pattern types. By configuring it in this way, the first special pattern lottery is executed during the normal state, so that if the lottery result is a jackpot, a beneficial bonus to the player is more likely to be granted, and if the result is not a jackpot, it is easier to execute the special pattern lottery again in the normal state, making it possible to select a special pattern type that is more advantageous to the player.

In addition, as in the eighth control example, when the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are basically configured to be easily executed alternately, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed so that the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is more difficult to win the time-saving lottery than the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, it may be configured so that the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state is more difficult to win the time-saving lottery than the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state. By configuring in this way, even if the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to make it easier to execute the first special symbol lottery while continuing the normal state. By configuring in this way, for example, when the disadvantageous time-saving state is ended and the normal state that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous time-saving state is set, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by setting the disadvantageous time-saving state again just by executing the second special symbol lottery that is disadvantageous to the player once.

Also, as shown in FIG. 335(b), in this eighth control example, the determination of whether or not a time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) is performed only when the normal state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination of whether or not a time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) may be performed even when another game state is set.

For example, it is possible to configure the system so that even when an unfavorable time-saving state (a time-saving state that is set when a time-saving win is won for a specific type of time-saving win) that is disadvantageous to the player is set, the system can be configured so that a time-saving win judgment (time-saving lottery) can be executed, and when a time-saving win is won during an unfavorable time-saving state, a shortened time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is immediately met can be set. By configuring the system in this way, a player playing during an unfavorable time-saving state can be made to play in parallel with a game that aims to meet the time-saving end condition and a game that aims to win a time-saving win in order to end the unfavorable time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving win is won during an unfavorable time-saving state, the game may be configured to transition to a time-saving state (favorable time-saving state) that is set after the end of a big win game, or the game may be configured to be able to determine whether a time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) during a favorable time-saving state, and to transition to an unfavorable time-saving state if a time-saving win is won during a favorable time-saving state.

In this way, by configuring it so that it is possible to judge whether a time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) when a time-saving state has already been set, and by configuring it so that if a time-saving win has been made, it is possible to transition to a time-saving state with a different degree of advantage from the set time-saving state, it is possible to set a period during which it is better to win a time-saving win (a period during which an unfavorable time-saving state is set) and a period during which it is better not to win a time-saving win (a period during which an advantageous time-saving state is set). Note that in this eighth control example, since it is configured so that winning a time-saving win during a normal state makes it easier to set an unfavorable time-saving state than an advantageous time-saving state, the period during which the normal state is set is a period during which it is better not to win a time-saving win.

In this case, for example, the content of the presentation to suggest to the player the result of the time-saving winning can be configured to differ depending on the set game state in addition to the result of the time-saving winning; if the time-saving winning occurs during a period in which it is better to win the time-saving winning (a period in which an unfavorable time-saving winning state is set), a presentation mode that congratulates the player can be set, and if the time-saving winning occurs during a period in which it is better not to win the time-saving winning state (a period in which an advantageous time-saving winning state is set), a presentation mode that disappoints the player can be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the presentation in a presentation mode that corresponds to the degree of advantage of the player for the same time-saving winning result, and it is possible to provide the player with a game that is easy to understand.

Returning to Fig. 334(a), the explanation will continue. The variation pattern selection 8 table 202gb is a data table in which the variation pattern of the special symbol variation executed to show the result of the special symbol lottery is specified, similar to the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db in the fifth control example described above, and differs in that the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gb for special symbol variation and time-saving 8 (see Fig. 336(a)) is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db2 for special symbol variation and time-saving 8 (see Fig. 248(a)) as the data table to be referenced when the special symbol variation or time-saving mode is set as the gaming mode, but is otherwise the same. Detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the detailed contents of the 8 tables 202db2 for special bonuses and time-saving will be explained with reference to FIG. 336(a). FIG. 336(a) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the 8 tables 202db2 for special bonuses and time-saving. As shown in FIG. 336(a), the 8 tables 202db2 for special bonuses and time-saving differ in that different patterns of fluctuation of the fluctuation time are stipulated according to the number of reserved special charts (number of reserved special charts 1, number of reserved special charts 2) that have been acquired.

As shown in FIG. 336(a), in this eighth control example, as in each of the control examples described above, different fluctuation patterns of fluctuation time are defined according to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, but the illustration of the fluctuation patterns defined for each range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is omitted.

Specifically, when the time-saving type is "time-saving after jackpot (high probability state of normal symbols set after jackpot play ends)," various variation patterns are defined in accordance with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved number (0-4), the special symbol 2 reserved number (0-4), and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, and the special symbol variation is executed with a variation time of "5-90 seconds" according to the selected variation pattern. Although detailed explanations are omitted, as with each of the control examples described above, various variation patterns are defined in association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the result of the special symbol lottery so that a variation pattern corresponding to a longer variation time (90 seconds) is more likely to be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win than when the result is not a jackpot win.

In addition, various fluctuation patterns are defined in association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the value of the number of reserved special drawings so that a fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a shorter fluctuation time (e.g., 5 seconds) is more likely to be selected when the number of reserved special drawings is large than when the number is small.

Next, when the time-saving type is "Time-saving A8", if the number of reserved special charts 1 is "0-2" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "0-2", various fluctuation patterns corresponding to fluctuation times of "5-90 seconds" are specified, and if the number of reserved special charts 1 is "0-2" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3, 4", various short fluctuation patterns corresponding to fluctuation times of "5-60 seconds" are specified. Also, if the number of reserved special charts 1 is "3" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "0-2", various short fluctuation patterns corresponding to fluctuation times of "5-60 seconds" are specified, and if the number of reserved special charts 1 is "3" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3, 4", a short fluctuation pattern corresponding to a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is specified.

Furthermore, when the number of reserved special charts 1 is "4" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "0 to 2", various short fluctuation patterns corresponding to a fluctuation time of "5 to 60 seconds" are specified, and when the number of reserved special charts 1 is "3" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "3, 4", a short fluctuation pattern corresponding to a fluctuation time of "5 seconds" is specified.

Here, in this eighth control example, the special pattern lottery is executed in accordance with the order in which the game balls enter the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 1641, and the right second ball entrance 1640 (winning order), and the variation pattern is selected based on the number of reserved special charts 1 and 2 that have been acquired, so that a variation pattern with a short variation time is more likely to be selected when the number of reserved special charts is large than when the number is small. By configuring it in this way, it is easier to execute the special pattern lottery with a short variation time when a large number of reserved special charts have been acquired, making it less likely that a situation will occur in which the number of reserved special charts 1 and 2 both reach their upper limit.

By configuring it in this way, game balls are allowed to flow into the distribution unit 1064 when both the number of reserved special charts 1 and the number of reserved special charts 2 have reached their upper limit, and by varying the position of the distribution member 900, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which the same type of reserved special chart is obtained consecutively.

In addition, even if the number of reserved special charts is close to the upper limit, a variation pattern with a low probability (e.g., 1/100) and a relatively long variation time may be selectable. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a period during which it is easy for game balls to flow into the allocation unit 1064 when the number of reserved special charts has temporarily reached the upper limit.

Next, when the time-saving type is "Time-saving B8", various fluctuation patterns are defined in accordance with the values of the number of reserved special symbols 1 (0-4), the number of reserved special symbols 2 (0-4), and the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the special symbol fluctuation is executed with a fluctuation time of "5-60 seconds" according to the selected fluctuation pattern. Although detailed explanations are omitted, as with each of the control examples described above, various short fluctuation patterns are defined in accordance with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the result of the special symbol lottery so that a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a longer fluctuation time (90 seconds) is more likely to be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win than when the result is not a jackpot win.

The time-saving type selection 8 table 202gf is a data table that is referenced when selecting the type of time-saving to be set when a time-saving prize is awarded, and is provided in place of the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df (see FIG. 248(b)) in the fifth control example described above.

Here, the detailed contents of the time-saving type selection 8 table 202gf will be explained with reference to FIG. 336(b). FIG. 336(b) shows the contents defined in the time-saving type selection 8 table 202gf.

As shown in Figure 336 (b), this eighth control example is configured so that the time-saving option can be won in either the first or second special pattern lottery (see Figure 335 (a)), and the selection ratio for the time-saving option type is configured to be different when the time-saving option is won in the first special pattern lottery and when the time-saving option is won in the second special pattern lottery.

Specifically, when the pattern type is "Special pattern 1 (first special pattern)," the time-saving type "Time-saving A8a" is specified for the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in the range of "0 to 95," and the time-saving type "Time-saving B8" is specified for the range of "96 to 99." When the pattern type is "Special pattern 2 (second special pattern)," the time-saving type "Time-saving A8b" is specified for the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in the range of "0 to 98," and the time-saving type "Time-saving B8" is specified for the value of "99."

Here, in this eighth control example, when "time-saving A8 (time-saving A8a, time-saving A8b)" is set as the time-saving type, an unfavorable time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state is set, and when "time-saving B8" is set, an advantageous time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set. Note that the various control contents in the unfavorable time-saving state, that is, the control contents for executing the game in the high probability state of the normal pattern so as to be more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state, will not be described in detail because the various technologies described in each control example above are adopted. For example, the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery is higher than in the normal state, but the opening pattern of the normal pattern winning game to be executed is executed in an opening pattern that makes it difficult to ball the game ball into the right second ball entrance 1640, or the normal pattern fluctuation time is configured to be longer than in the normal state.

In addition, the definition of an unfavorable time-saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state includes not only the technical idea of making the special symbol lottery more difficult to execute than the normal state, which is disadvantageous to the player, but also the technical idea of making the bonus granted based on the executed special symbol lottery disadvantageous to the player, even if the ease of executing the special symbol lottery is the same or even if it is slightly more difficult in the normal state.

When "Time-saving A8a" is set, that is, 95% of the time when the time-saving is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, an unfavorable time-saving state is set. Then, as the end conditions of the unfavorable time-saving state, a first time-saving end condition is set that is met when the number of special pattern drawings executed during the time-saving state reaches 100, and a second time-saving end condition is set that is met when the special pattern drawing executed after the time-saving state is set is a special drawing 1 lottery. In other words, it is configured so that the second time-saving end condition is met when two special drawing 1 reservations are obtained in succession, that is, when the special drawing 1 lottery is executed in succession.

By configuring it in this way, if the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern 1 drawing and an unfavorable time-saving state is set, if the type of special pattern drawing to be executed after the special pattern 1 drawing that won the time-saving feature is the special pattern 1 drawing, the unfavorable time-saving state can be ended by the first special pattern drawing executed during the unfavorable time-saving state, and the normal state can be set. Therefore, the player can play with the aim of achieving the second time-saving end condition before the first time-saving end condition is achieved.

In addition, in this eighth control example, the second time-saving end condition is configured to be met depending on the type of the first special symbol lottery executed during the disadvantageous time-saving state, but other contents may be specified as the second time-saving end condition as long as they can be met depending on the execution order of the special symbol lottery executed before the first time-saving end condition is met.

For example, a second time-saving end condition may be specified that is met when multiple special symbol draws are executed according to a predetermined rule during the disadvantageous time-saving state, or a second time-saving end condition may be specified that is met when the results of multiple consecutive special symbol draws or each variation pattern of special symbol variations showing the results of multiple consecutive special symbol draws meet a predetermined rule. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the second time-saving end condition is met and the disadvantageous time-saving state ends.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 336(b), in this eighth control example, it is configured so that if the time-saving effect is won in the lottery for special symbol 1 (first special symbol), it is easier to set a favorable time-saving state that is advantageous to the player (it is easier to select time-saving effect B8) than if the time-saving effect is won in the lottery for special symbol 2 (second special symbol). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to get the player interested in the types of special symbol lotteries that are executed in the normal state.

Figure 334(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this eighth control example. As shown in Figure 334(b), it differs from the RAM 203 in the fifth control example described above (see Figure 244(b)) in that a change execution flag 203ga, a change order storage area 203gb, and a time-saving reduction flag 203gc have been added. Everything else is the same, and the same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The change execution flag 203ga is a flag that indicates whether the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changed with priority. This flag is an area that is backed up even in the event of a power outage, and in the initial state after the RAM is cleared, etc., the first special symbol is set with priority.

The variable order storage area 203gb is an area that stores the winning order for each reserved data (reserved patterns) stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. Eight memory areas are set in this variable order storage area 203gb, and the order is stored in the previous memory area in the order in which they were won. The memory areas are also shifted based on the start of the special pattern variation.

The time-saving reduction flag 203gc is a flag for indicating that it is a period in which it is possible to shorten an unfavorable time-saving state (a time-saving state in which the time-saving type "time-saving A8" is set), which is a time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player, and is set to ON when it is a period in which it is possible to shorten an unfavorable time-saving state. While this time-saving reduction flag 203gc is set to ON, processing is executed to determine whether or not a condition for shortening the unfavorable time-saving state (a second time-saving end condition) is met.

Next, referring to Figures 337 and 338, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the fifth control example described above. Note that detailed descriptions of the same contents as the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 337(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described. FIG. 337(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic configuration defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 337(a), the ROM 222 in this eighth control example differs from the ROM 222 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(a)) in that a read-ahead hold mode selection table 222ga has been added.

The look-ahead reserved mode selection table 222ga is a data table that is referenced when selecting the display mode of the reserved pattern in the look-ahead reserved performance (see FIG. 333(a)) that is executed as a performance (look-ahead performance) to show the look-ahead result for the acquired special reserved pattern. In this eighth control example, by executing the look-ahead process, it is configured to be possible to identify the special reserved pattern that corresponds to the special pattern lottery that is executed during the normal state, and it is configured to be possible to execute the look-ahead reserved performance for that special reserved pattern.

Here, the detailed contents of the pre-reading reserved mode selection table 222ga will be explained with reference to FIG. 338. FIG. 338 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the pre-reading reserved mode selection table 222ga. As shown in FIG. 338, the pre-reading reserved mode selection table 222ga defines parameters so that the display mode of the reserved pattern is determined based on the special pattern type corresponding to the special pattern reservation that is the target of the pre-reading reserved performance, the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) corresponding to that special pattern reservation, and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, if the special symbol type is "Special symbol 1 (first special symbol)" and the pre-read result is "Big win", the display mode of the reserved symbol is specified as "2 stars" for the range of "0 to 79" of the acquired performance counter 223f, and "3 stars" for the range of "80 to 99". If the pre-read result is "Time-saving B8", the display mode of the reserved symbol is specified as "2 stars" for the range of "0 to 49" of the acquired performance counter 223f, and "1 star" for the range of "50 to 99". If the pre-read result is "Time-saving A8a" or "Miss", the display mode of the reserved symbol is specified as "1 star" for the range of "0 to 99" of the acquired performance counter 223f.

In other words, the display mode of the reserved symbols that are the subject of the look-ahead reserved effect is configured so that the more stars are displayed, the more likely it is that a look-ahead reserved effect will be executed that suggests to the player that a special symbol lottery that will be advantageous to the player will be executed in the normal state.

In the eighth control example, the display command is set so that the display mode selected using the look-ahead reserved mode selection table 222ga becomes the display mode of the reserved pattern to be read as is, and the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed from the normal display mode to the display mode showing the performance result of the look-ahead reserved performance. However, without being limited to this, the display mode selected with reference to FIG. 338 may be temporarily stored as the final performance result of the look-ahead reserved performance, and the look-ahead reserved performance may be configured to gradually change the display mode of the special reserved pattern to be read as the final performance result stored as the look-ahead reserved performance. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the display mode of the special reserved pattern to be read as the ...

This configuration makes it possible to motivate players to always play in an attempt to acquire as many reserved special figures as possible. In addition, since it is possible to easily vary the results of the pre-reading reserved performance based on the number of reserved special figures that have been acquired at the time the pre-reading reserved performance is executed, it is possible to easily execute a wide variety of pre-reading reserved performances without, for example, determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading reserved performance depending on the number of reserved special figures that have been acquired, or varying the content of the performance results of the pre-reading reserved performance.

When the special symbol type is "Special symbol 2 (second special symbol)" and the pre-read result is "Big win", "2 stars" is specified as the display mode of the reserved symbol for the range of "0 to 99" of the acquired performance counter 223f, when the pre-read result is "Time-saving B8", "2 stars" is specified as the display mode of the reserved symbol for the range of "0 to 29" of the acquired performance counter 223f, and "1 star" is specified as the display mode of the reserved symbol for the range of "30 to 99" of the acquired performance counter 223f, and when the pre-read result is "Time-saving A8b" or "Miss", "1 star" is specified as the display mode of the reserved symbol for the range of "0 to 99" of the acquired performance counter 223f.

In this eighth control example, as described above with reference to Figures 335(a) and 336(b), of the special pattern lotteries executed in the normal state, the first special pattern lottery is configured to be a special pattern lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery, and as shown in Figure 338, the pre-reading reserved performance is also configured to be more likely to result in a performance result that is more advantageous to the player (a display mode with a larger number of stars) when the target special pattern reserve is special pattern 1 reserve than when it is special pattern 2 reserve.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to predict the results of the pre-reading hold performance in more detail by referring to the performance results of the pre-reading hold performance and the type of special reserved drawing that is the target of the performance.

In the eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 333, the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 reserve and the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserve are displayed in different display modes so that the player can understand the type of the reserved special pattern that has been acquired. However, without being limited to this, the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern 1 reserve and the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern 2 reserve may be displayed in the same display mode, or in a display mode with a difference that is difficult for the player to see. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the second time-saving end condition will be established, and to make it difficult for the player to predict the result of the pre-reading based on the display mode of the pre-reading reserve performance. Therefore, the player can continue to be interested in the game until the special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved special pattern that is the target of the pre-reading reserve performance is actually executed.

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, the pre-reading hold effect can be executed only for the special reserved symbol corresponding to the special pattern lottery executed during the normal state, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to execute an effect equivalent to the pre-reading hold effect (pseudo pre-reading hold effect) for the special reserved symbol corresponding to the special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state).

When this pseudo-preview reserved performance is executed, the display mode is determined for the specific reserved pattern in the same way as the preview reserved performance, and as shown in FIG. 333(a), a pseudo-preview reserved performance is executed in which the display mode of the specific reserved pattern is changed. Then, when a special pattern lottery corresponding to the specific reserved pattern that is the target of the pseudo-preview reserved performance is executed, it is preferable to configure it so that the performance result of the pseudo-preview reserved performance is displayed as the performance executed during the special pattern change period to inform the player that the pseudo-preview reserved performance has been executed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the disadvantageous time-saving state continues for a long time, it is possible to provide the player with an enjoyable game by executing a pseudo look-ahead hold effect equivalent to the look-ahead hold effect. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that the reserved pattern corresponding to the special reserved pattern whose look-ahead result is a jackpot win is more likely to be the target of the pseudo look-ahead hold effect than the reserved pattern corresponding to the special reserved pattern whose look-ahead result is not a jackpot win. This increases the possibility of winning the jackpot even when the result of the pseudo look-ahead hold effect is displayed to notify the player that the pseudo look-ahead hold effect has been executed, thereby preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing significantly.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this eighth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 337(b). FIG. 337(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this eighth control example.

As shown in FIG. 337(b), the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this eighth control example differs from the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(b)) in that an allocation status storage area 223ga, a reserved status storage area 223gb, and an unfavorable time-saving flag 223gc have been added. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The distribution state storage area 223ga is a storage area that stores information indicating the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 provided in the distribution unit 1064. This distribution state storage area 223ga stores information for specifying whether the next game ball that flows into the distribution unit 1064 will enter the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 1641.

In this eighth control example, as shown in FIG. 331(a), a ball entry sensor 1064a is provided as a detection means for detecting game balls that have passed through the passage opening 1064b of the distribution unit 1064, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to distinguish the detection result of the ball entry sensor 1064a. Then, based on the winning command output from the main control device 110 and the detection result of the ball entry sensor 1064a, the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 is configured to be able to be identified, and an image icon corresponding to the identification result is configured to be able to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 (see display area Dm18 in FIG. 333(b)).

This makes it easier for the player to understand which ball inlet (first ball inlet 64, second ball inlet 1641) the game ball will be guided to the next time it flows into the distribution unit 1064.

Therefore, for example, by executing a left-handed play during a jackpot game to cause multiple game balls to flow into the distribution unit 1064, and determining which ball entry port (first ball entry port 64, second ball entry port 1641) the game ball that next flows into the distribution unit 1064 will enter from the state of the image icon displayed according to the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900, it is possible to easily create a distribution state in which the game ball is guided to a ball entry port that can acquire the right to draw for the same special pattern type as the special pattern type corresponding to the last special pattern reservation that has already been acquired (the special pattern reservation whose winning information is stored in the eighth memory area of the winning information storage area 223b).

In this eighth control example, the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900 can be determined based on the detection result of the ball entry sensor 1064a and the information included in the winning command, but this is not limited to this, and a detection means can be provided that can directly detect the position (distribution state) of the distribution member 900.

The reserved status storage area 223gb is a storage area for temporarily storing the reserved status set by the pre-read reserved performance, and the reserved status (display status) selected by referring to the pre-read reserved status selection table 222ga is stored together with information for identifying the corresponding special reserved status. The stored information is then read out in the reserved number display update process (see S4106 in FIG. 346) executed in the main process (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, the system is configured to restrict the execution of new pre-reading reserved effects during the period when information is stored in the reserved state storage area 223gb. In other words, during the period when the pre-reading reserved effect is being executed, the time-saving state will end and the normal state will be set before all the acquired reserved special figures are consumed. Therefore, if it is predicted that the game state will change based on the special figure lottery to be executed thereafter, the pre-reading result and the actual game state change will likely differ, making it difficult to execute a highly reliable performance for the player. Therefore, during the execution of the pre-reading reserved effect, the system is configured not to execute the process of identifying the transition content of the game state based on the pre-reading result of the reserved special figures after the reserved special figure that is the target of the pre-reading reserved effect being executed. This reduces the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113.

The disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is a flag for indicating that an unfavorable time-saving state is set among the time-saving states, and is set to ON when the time-saving type "time-saving A8a" or "time-saving A8b" is set. Then, in the winning command processing 8 (see S4292 in FIG. 351), when a winning information command for normal figures indicating that a long-opening winning game is to be executed is received, the setting status of the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is determined (S4451 in FIG. 351), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4451 in FIG. 351: Yes), a display command corresponding to the performance for suggesting that a normal long-opening winning game (electric chute long opening) will be executed is set (S4405 in FIG. 351). As a result, as shown in FIG. 332, it is possible to easily inform the player that the second time-saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state is likely to be established. Then, if it is determined that a state command indicating that the disadvantageous time-saving state has ended has been received (S9051 in FIG. 348: Yes), it is set to OFF (S9052 in FIG. 348).

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eighth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 339 to Fig. 345, the control process contents of the main control device 110 in this eighth control example will be described, focusing on the points that are different from the above-mentioned fifth control example. The pachinko machine 10 of this eighth control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned fifth control example in the contents of the process that determines the execution order of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the process that judges whether or not the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is established, and the process that is executed when the game ball starts winning.

Specifically, the difference is that special symbol change process 8 (see S10154 in FIG. 339) is executed instead of special symbol change process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252), and start winning process 8 (see S10195 in FIG. 344) is executed instead of start winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258). All other processing contents are the same, and detailed explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of special pattern change process 8 (S10154) will be explained with reference to FIG. 339. FIG. 339 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special pattern change process 8 (S10154). As shown in FIG. 339, special pattern change process 8 (S10154) differs from the above-mentioned special pattern change process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) in that the processing contents executed to start a new special pattern change are different from the processing contents executed when an ongoing special pattern change is stopped, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations are omitted.

When special symbol change process 8 (S10154) is executed, first, the same processes S201 to S203 as those of special symbol change process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) described above are executed. Then, change execution determination process 8 (S10251) is executed. Details of this change execution determination process 8 (S10251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 340, but a process is executed to determine the type of special symbol change to be newly executed.

After completing the processing of S10251, it is next determined whether the type of special pattern change to be newly executed is special pattern 2 (second special pattern) (S10252), and if it is determined that it is special pattern 2 (S10252: Yes), the same processing of S205 to S207, S251, and S252 as in the above-mentioned special pattern change processing 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) is executed, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10252 that it is not special pattern 2 (S10252: No), then it is determined whether the type of the newly executed special pattern change is special pattern 1 (first special pattern) (S10253), and if it is determined that it is special pattern 1 (S10253: Yes), the same processes of S211 to S213, S251, S252 as those of the above-mentioned special pattern change process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) are executed, and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in the process of S10253 that it is not special pattern 1 (S10253: No), this process ends as it is.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S202 that the pattern is changing (S202: Yes), the processing is the same as the special pattern change processing 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) described above, but instead of update processing 5 (S253 in FIG. 252), update processing 8 (S10254) is executed, and instead of time-saving setting processing 5 (S254 in FIG. 252), time-saving setting processing 8 (S10255) is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 340, a detailed explanation will be given of the change execution determination process 8 (S10251) executed in the special pattern change process 8 (see S10154 in FIG. 339). FIG. 340 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the change execution determination process 8 (S10251). This change execution determination process 8 (S10251) is a process for determining whether the special pattern change performed by the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 is to be executed based on the values of various counters stored in either the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b.

In the change execution determination process 8 (S10251), first, the change execution flag 203ga is set to 0 to perform initialization (S10271), and data in the change order storage area 203gb is obtained (S10272). After that, the data in the change order storage area 203gb is shifted (S10273). In the process of S310273, the data stored in the first to eighth areas of the change order storage area 203gb is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → reserved third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → fifth area, seventh area → reserved sixth area, eighth area → reserved seventh area, and so on. After the data is shifted, it is determined whether the data in the execution area is special chart 1 (1) (S10274).

If it is determined in the processing of S10274 that the data in the execution area is special pattern 1 (1) (S10274: Yes), the change execution flag 203ga is set to change execution (1) in special pattern 1 (S10275), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the special pattern change processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the data in the execution area is not special pattern 1 (1) (S10274: No), it is determined whether the data in the execution area is special pattern 2 (2) (S10276). If it is determined in the processing of S10276 that the data in the execution area is special pattern 2 (2) (S10276: Yes), the change execution flag 203gb is set to change execution in special pattern 2 (S10277), this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the special pattern change processing.

If it is determined in the processing of S10276 that the data in the execution area is not special symbol 2 (2) (S10276: No), since there are no reserved balls to execute the change, the change execution flag 203gb remains in the initial state, this processing is terminated, and the process returns to the special symbol change processing.

As described above, by executing the change execution determination process 8 (S10251), the various reserved memories (special reserved patterns) stored in the change order storage area 203gb can be changed to special patterns in the order in which they were stored.

Next, the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076) will be explained with reference to FIG. 341. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076). This time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076) is executed in place of time-saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254) executed in special pattern determination process 5 (see S251 in FIG. 253) of special pattern change process 8 (see S10154 in FIG. 339), and differs in that the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving lottery has been won) are changed to correspond to the game specifications.

Specifically, when time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076) is executed, regardless of the type of special pattern change executed this time (without executing the process of S8101 for determining the type of special pattern change executed in time-saving lottery process 5 (see FIG. 254)), the same processes of S8103 to S8106 as those of the above-mentioned time-saving lottery process 5 (see S8101 in FIG. 254) are executed, and this process is terminated.

In other words, as described above with reference to FIG. 335(b), this eighth control example is configured to execute a time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving win has been made) when the normal state is set, regardless of the type of special pattern, so in time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076), regardless of the type of special pattern variation that is newly executed, only the game state at the time of the newly executed special pattern variation is determined to determine whether or not to execute a time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving win has been made).

In this way, time-saving lottery process 8 (S8076) is configured to execute a process for determining whether the execution conditions (time-saving lottery execution conditions) for the time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving lottery has been won) are met, and a process for executing the time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving lottery has been won) if the time-saving lottery execution conditions are met. However, the content of the process for determining whether the time-saving lottery execution conditions are met can be changed as appropriate depending on the gaming specifications of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if the time-saving lottery is configured to be executed not only in the normal state but also when a specific gaming state (such as an unfavorable time-saving state) is set, a process for determining whether the unfavorable time-saving flag 223gc is set to on can be added to the process of S8103.

Next, the processing contents of update process 8 (S273) will be explained with reference to FIG. 342. FIG. 342 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of update process 8 (S273). This update process 8 (S273) differs from update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 256) in the fifth control example described above in that a new process has been added as a process for determining whether the time-saving end condition has been met.

Specifically, when update process 8 (S273) is executed, first, it is determined whether the time-saving reduction flag 203gc is set to ON (S8351), and if it is determined that the time-saving reduction flag 203gc is set to ON (S8351: Yes), the time-saving reduction flag 203gc is set to OFF (S8352), and then it is determined whether the time-saving end condition is met (S8353), and if it is determined that the time-saving end condition is met (S8353: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is reset to 0 (S8354), and a command indicating time-saving reduction is determined (S8355), and then the same processes of S8301 to S8306 as those of update process 5 described above (see S253 in FIG. 342) are executed, and the values of the special probability counter 203i and the time-saving counter 203h, the game state after updating the various values, and a state command indicating whether or not time-saving reduction is performed are set (S8356), and this process is terminated.

In addition, if the time-saving flag 203gc is not set to on in the process of S8351 (S8351: No), or if it is determined in the process of S8353 that the time-saving end condition is not met (S8353: No), the process proceeds directly to the process of S8301, and the processes of S8301 to S8306, which are the same as the above-mentioned update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 342), are executed, and the values of the special chance counter 203i and the time-saving counter 203h, the game status after updating the various values, and a status command indicating whether or not the time-saving has been shortened are set (S8356), and this process ends.

As shown in update process 8 (S273), in this eighth control example, when the time-saving reduction flag 203gc is set to on, that is, when an unfavorable time-saving state in which the time-saving type "time-saving A8" is set is set, a special time-saving end condition can be satisfied only for a predetermined period of time after the unfavorable time-saving state is set, and it is possible to determine whether or not a time-saving end condition that can be satisfied within that limited period of time has been satisfied.

Specifically, when a time-saving lottery is won and an unfavorable time-saving state is set, the time-saving end condition is met when a special pattern variation of the same type as the special pattern type that won the time-saving lottery is executed as the first special pattern variation since the time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) was set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to shorten and end the unfavorable time-saving state, which makes it more motivating for the player to play.

Next, the processing contents of time-saving setting process 8 (S10255) will be explained with reference to FIG. 343. FIG. 343 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving setting process 8 (S10255). This time-saving setting process 8 (S10255) differs from the above-mentioned time-saving setting process 5 (see S254 in FIG. 257) in that a process (S8371) of setting the time-saving flag 203gc to ON when a time-saving lottery is won is added, but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and their explanation will be omitted.

Specifically, after executing the processes of S8351 and S8352, which are the same as the time-saving setting process 5 described above (see S254 in FIG. 257), the time-saving flag 203gc is set to ON (S8371), and then the processes of S8353 and S8354 are executed, and this process is terminated.

By configuring it in this way, the time-saving flag 203gc is set to on only when the time-saving state is set and only when the player wins the time-saving lottery (only when the player wins the time-saving lottery), so it is possible to prevent the process of determining whether or not the time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) for shortening the time-saving state in update process 8 (see S273 in FIG. 342) has been met (which is executed during the time-saving state (play time-saving state) that is set based on winning the jackpot and in which the time-saving type "time-saving A8" is not set).

As shown in FIG. 343, in this eighth control example, the time-saving reduction flag 203gc is always set to ON when a time-saving selection is made, but this is not limited thereto, and the time-saving reduction flag 203gc may be set to ON when it is determined that an unfavorable time-saving state (time-saving type "time-saving A8") has been set and an unfavorable time-saving state (time-saving type "time-saving A8") has been set.

Next, the processing contents of start entry process 8 (S10195) will be explained with reference to FIG. 344. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of start entry process 8 (S10195). This start entry process 8 (S10195) differs from the above-mentioned start winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258) in that a process for storing information in the variable order storage area 203gb has been added, and the processing contents of the look-ahead process have been changed. All other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations will be omitted.

Specifically, when the start winning process 8 (S10195) is executed, the same processes as S601 to S651 as those of the start winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258) described above are executed, and after the process of S651 is completed, the special symbol 1 (1) is set in the first area of the variable order storage area 203gb (S671), and the process proceeds to S607. In addition, in the process of S671, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referenced, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is set as the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is set as the first area. By determining the value set in this change order storage area 203gb using the change execution determination process 8 (S10251) described above, even if there are two types of changes at the start port, one that changes the first special pattern and one that changes the second special pattern, as in this eighth control example, the changes can be started in the order in which the winning symbols enter the start port.

Next, the same processes of S607 to S652 as those of the start winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258) are executed. After the process of S652 is completed, the special symbol 2 (2) is set in the first area of the variable order storage area 203gb (S672), the pre-reading process 8 is executed (S673), and this process is terminated. In the process of S672, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d or the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203e is referenced, and if the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is set as the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is set as the first area. By determining the value set in this change order storage area 203gb using the change execution determination process 8 (S10251) described above, even if there are two types of changes at the start port, one that changes the first special pattern and one that changes the second special pattern, as in this eighth control example, the changes can be started in the order in which the winning symbols enter the start port.

Next, the processing contents of pre-reading process 8 (S673) will be explained with reference to FIG. 345. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of pre-reading process 8 (S673). This pre-reading process 8 (S673) differs from pre-reading process 5 (see S653 in FIG. 259) in the fifth control example described above in that it is configured to identify the game state when a special pattern lottery corresponding to the pre-read winning information is executed, and to set a winning command including the identified information (information indicating the game state at the time of the pending change); otherwise, it is the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, referring to Figs. 346 to 355, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be described. This eighth control example differs from the above-mentioned fifth control example in that the processes executed in the main processing (see Fig. 346) of the voice lamp control device 113 are LCD performance execution management processing 8 (S4181 in Fig. 354), advance winning detection processing 8 (S4182 in Fig. 355), command determination processing 8 (S4183 in Fig. 347), and variable display setting processing 8. The rest of the processing contents are the same, and detailed explanations of the same processing contents will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 346, the processing contents of the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eighth control example will be explained. FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the main processing. As shown in FIG. 346, in this tenth control example, processing is executed that is different from the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned fifth control example in that liquid crystal performance execution management processing 8 (S4181 in FIG. 354), advance winning detection processing 8 (S4182 in FIG. 355), command determination processing 8 (see S4183 in FIG. 347), and variable display setting processing 8 are executed. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 347, the processing contents of command determination process 8 (S4183) will be described. FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of command determination process 8 (S4183). In this command determination process 8 (S4183), the difference from command determination process 5 (see S4182 in FIG. 262) of the fifth control example described above is that state command reception process 8 (see S4291 in FIG. 348) is executed instead of state command reception process 5 (S4282), winning command process 8 (see S4292 in FIG. 351) is executed instead of winning command process (see S4212), and big win related process 8 (S4293) is executed instead of big win related process (S4218), but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

Next, the processing contents of the status command reception process 8 (S4291) will be described with reference to FIG. 348. FIG. 348 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the status command reception process 8 (S4291). As shown in FIG. 348, the status command reception process 8 (S4291) differs from the status command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above in that the processing contents executed when it is determined that the game state has been changed to the normal state based on the information included in the status command received from the main control device 110 (S9003: Yes) are different from the processing contents executed when it is determined that the game state has been changed to the time-shortened state based on the information included in the status command received from the main control device 110 (S9005: Yes). The other processing contents are the same, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the state command receiving process 8 (S4291) is executed, the same processes as the state command receiving process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above are executed from S9001 to S9003. Then, in the process of S9003, if it is determined that the game state has been changed to the normal state (S9003: Yes), it is next determined whether the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is set to on (S9051), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S9051: Yes), the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is set to off (S9052), the normal state presentation setting process 8 is executed (S9053), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9051, if it is determined that the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is not set to on (S9051: No), the process of S9052 is skipped and this process is terminated. The details of normal state presentation setting process 8 (S9053) will be described later with reference to FIG. 349.

If it is determined in the process of S9003 that the game state has not been changed to the normal state (S9003: No), then it is determined whether the game state has been changed to the time-saving state (S9005). If it is determined that the game state has not been changed (S9005: No), the process of S9007 to S9010 is executed, which is the same as the state command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9005 that the state has been changed to the time-saving state, the time-saving state presentation setting process 8 is executed (S9054), and then this process ends. The contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 8 (S9054) will be described later with reference to FIG. 350.

Next, referring to FIG. 349, the processing contents of normal state presentation setting processing 8 (S9053) executed in state command receiving processing 8 (S4291 in FIG. 348) will be explained. FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of normal state presentation setting processing 8 (S9053). This normal state presentation setting processing 8 (S9053) differs from the above-mentioned normal state presentation setting processing (S9004 in FIG. 264) in that processing contents for when a disadvantageous time-saving state is transitioned to the normal state are added, but the processing contents are otherwise the same. Identical processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the normal state presentation setting process 8 (S9053) is executed, first, the game state set before the currently set game state (the game state before the change) is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S9101), and it is determined whether the game state before the change is an unfavorable time-saving state (S9151). If it is determined in the process of S9151 that it is an unfavorable time-saving state (S9151: Yes), a display command for the presentation mode corresponding to the chance variation is set (S9152), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9151 that it is not an unfavorable time-saving state (S9151: No), the same processes of S9102 to S9104 as those in the normal state presentation setting process described above (see S9004 in FIG. 264) are executed, and this process is terminated.

By setting a display command for the presentation mode in the processing of S9152, the background image of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed in a display mode indicating that the normal state has been set based on the fact that the conditions for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state have been met. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that the next special pattern change to be executed is a special pattern change (lottery) executed in the normal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 350, the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting processing 8 (S9054) executed in the state command receiving processing 8 (S4291 in FIG. 348) will be explained. FIG. 350 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting processing 8 (S9054). This time-saving state presentation setting processing 8 (S9054) differs from the above-mentioned time-saving state presentation setting processing (see S900 in FIG. 266) in that the processing contents when transitioning from the normal state to the time-saving state are changed, but the processing contents are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the time-saving state presentation setting process 8 (S9054) is executed, first, the same processes of S9301 to S9304 as the time-saving state presentation setting process (see S900 in FIG. 266) are executed. Then, in the process of S9304, if it is determined that the game state before the change is a normal state (S9304: Yes), the number of time-saving times included in the command received this time is set to the value of the time-saving counter 223da (S9305), and then it is determined whether the time-saving type of the time-saving state set this time is time-saving A8 (S9381), and if it is determined that it is time-saving A8 (S9381: Yes), the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is set to ON (S9382), a display command is set to show the presentation mode corresponding to the disadvantageous time-saving state (S9383), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9381 that the time-saving type of the currently set time-saving state is not time-saving A8 (S9382: Yes), the processes of S9382 and S9383 are skipped and this process ends.

Next, the processing contents of winning command processing 8 (S4292) will be explained with reference to FIG. 351. FIG. 351 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of winning command processing 8 (S4292). This winning command processing 8 (S4292) differs from the above-mentioned winning command processing (see S4212 in FIG. 177) in that the processing contents when a regular winning information command is received and the processing contents when a special winning information command is received have been changed. The processing contents other than that are the same, and a detailed explanation of the contents will be omitted.

When the winning command process 8 (S4292) is executed, first, the processes S4401 to S4403 are executed, which are the same as the winning command process described above (see S4212 in FIG. 177). Then, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that there is winning information, that is, if it is determined that the winning information command for normal symbols received this time contains winning information indicating that a winning will occur in the normal symbol lottery (S4403; Yes), it is next determined whether the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is set to ON (S4451), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S4451: Yes), a display command is set to indicate the opening of the long electric chute (S4405).

In other words, in this eighth control example, if the winning information for normal symbols acquired while the disadvantageous time-saving state is set includes information indicating that a normal long-open winning game will be played (specific normal winning information), a presentation is executed to suggest to the player that a normal long-open winning game (long electric chute opening) will occur. By configuring in this way, a player playing in the disadvantageous time-saving state can be notified of the arrival of an opportunity to play consecutive games in which it is possible to play the same type of special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) before the normal long-open winning game is actually played, so that the player can play while hoping that the disadvantageous time-saving state will end (be shortened).

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is configured to differentiate between the game method (left-hand play) executed when an unfavorable time-saving state is set and the game method (right-hand play) executed during a normal long-open hit game, as in the eighth control example, it is possible to notify the player that a normal long-open hit game will be executed before the normal long-open hit game is actually executed, thereby setting a grace period for the player to change the game method, making it easier for the player to execute a game corresponding to the normal long-open hit game.

In addition, in this eighth control example, a performance is executed to suggest a normal long opening win (long electric chute opening) based on receiving a winning information command related to a normal pattern. In other words, it is configured to be possible to suggest to the player that a normal long opening win game will be executed before the normal pattern lottery that will win the normal long opening win is executed, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure it to be possible to suggest to the player that a normal long opening win game will be executed by using the period from when the normal pattern lottery that will win the normal long opening win is executed to when the lottery result is stopped and displayed (normal winning period).

Furthermore, each time a winning information command for a normal symbol is received, it is determined whether the command contains information indicating that a normal long opening win game will be played. If it is determined that the command contains information indicating that a normal long opening win game will be played, a calculation means capable of calculating the period until the normal long opening win game is played may be provided, and the period during which a performance is played to indicate to the player that a normal long opening win game will be played may be determined based on the period calculated by the calculation means. In this case, for example, if the normal winning period is shorter than a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds), the performance may be configured to be executable from a stage before the normal winning variation is played, for example, from the stage at which a winning information command for a normal symbol indicating that a normal long opening win game will be played is received.

Next, referring to FIG. 352, the processing contents of special symbol winning information command processing 8 (S4451) executed in winning command processing 8 (see S4292 in FIG. 351) will be described. FIG. 352 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of special symbol winning information command processing 8 (S4451). This special symbol winning information command processing 8 (S4451) is processing that is executed when a winning information command related to a special symbol is received, and based on information included in the winning information command, for example information indicating a win, processing is executed to set the presentation mode of a presentation (pre-reading presentation) that suggests to the player the information included in the winning information command before the special symbol lottery corresponding to that winning information is executed.

In this eighth control example, by executing this special symbol winning information command process 8 (S4451), it is possible to change the display mode of the reserved symbol in response to information for indicating a win, which is included in the winning information command, or to change the display mode of the reserved symbol in response to information for indicating the type of special symbol, which is included in the winning information command.

Furthermore, in this eighth control example, in order to enable the player to know which special reserved symbol corresponds to the special symbol lottery executed in a specific game state (normal state), when a winning information command related to a special symbol is received, the game state when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the received winning information command is executed can be determined in advance.

By configuring it in this way, the player can check the display mode of the reserved special symbol displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, allowing the player to predict the game state when the special symbol lottery corresponding to the reserved special symbol is executed.

Specifically, when special winning information command processing 8 (S4451) is executed, first, the current game status is extracted (identified) based on the information set in the slave status setting area 223g (S4501), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S4551). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S4551: Yes), it is then determined whether the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is set to ON (S4552). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S4552: Yes), that is, if the currently received winning information command is a winning information command received during an disadvantageous time-saving state, it predicts whether the time-saving end condition for terminating the disadvantageous time-saving state is met (S4553), and based on the result of whether the time-saving end condition is met predicted in the processing of S4553, it is determined whether the time-saving end condition is met (whether the special pattern lottery corresponding to the currently received winning information command is a special pattern lottery executed in a normal state) (S4554).

If it is determined in the process of S4554 that the special symbol lottery is to be executed in the normal state (S4554: Yes), the display mode (number of stars) of the corresponding reserved symbol is determined by referring to the pre-read reserved symbol selection table 222ga (S4555), and information for indicating the determined reserved symbol (display mode of the reserved symbol) is stored in the reserved symbol storage area 223gb (S4556). Then, a display command (including a display command for indicating the display mode determined in the process of S4555) is set based on the information contained in the received special symbol winning information command (S4507), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4551 that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is not greater than 0 (S4551: No), if it is determined in the process of S4552 that the disadvantageous time-saving flag 223gc is not set to on (S4552: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4554 that the time-saving end condition is not met (S4554: No), the process proceeds directly to the process of S4507.

Next, the jackpot-related process 8 (S4293) executed in the command determination process 8 (see S4183 in FIG. 347) will be described. This jackpot-related process 8 (S4293) differs from the jackpot-related process described above (see S4218 in FIG. 180) in that ending process 8 (S4293) is executed instead of the ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 180) that is executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4714: Yes in FIG. 180); otherwise, the same process is executed. Here, the process contents executed in ending process 8 (S4293) will be described with reference to FIG. 353. FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing the process contents of ending process 8 (S4293).

Ending process 8 (S4293) differs from the above-mentioned ending process (see S4715 in FIG. 181) in that a process is added to set the presentation mode of the next variable special symbol type notification presentation to notify the player of the type of special symbol lottery to be executed for the first time after the end of the big win game (after the end of the small win game).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 353, when Ending Process 8 (S4293) is executed, the same processes of S4801 to S4803 as those of the Ending Process described above (see S4715 in FIG. 181) are executed, and then the special symbol type (special pattern type) for the next variation is read out based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S4851), and a display command is set to show the read out special symbol type (S4852). Then, the execution of the ending display is set (S4804), and this process ends.

By setting a display command for indicating the special symbol type read out in the process of S4852, it is possible to display a display mode for indicating to the player the special symbol type of the special symbol lottery executed for the first time after the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 333(b). Also, if it is determined in the process of S4851 that no information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a, that is, if no special symbol reserve has been obtained, the special symbol type of the special symbol lottery executed for the first time after the end of the jackpot game cannot be notified to the player based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, so the process for displaying the display mode for indicating to the player the special symbol type of the special symbol lottery executed for the first time after the end of the jackpot game on the ending screen is skipped.

In addition, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to predict the special symbol type of the next special symbol lottery to be executed based on the processing result of advance winning detection process 8 (see S4182 in FIG. 355) described later, and set a display command to display the display mode based on the prediction result.

Next, the processing contents of LCD performance execution management process 8 (S4181) will be explained with reference to FIG. 354. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of LCD performance execution management process 8 (S4181). In this LCD performance execution management process 8 (S4181), a process is executed to update the value of a variable time counter (not shown) in which a value synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110 is set, and a process is executed to determine the performance mode corresponding to the updated value.

When LCD performance execution management process 8 (S4181) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the variable time counter is greater than 0 (S55401). If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S55401: Yes), the value of the variable time counter is updated (S5402), the performance mode corresponding to the updated counter value is set (determined) (S55402), other update processes related to the performance are executed (S5407), a display command is set to show the performance mode based on the update result (S5408), and this process is terminated.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a suggestive effect to inform the player of the current game state) when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the special pattern change has been executed. In this case, it is preferable to configure the trigger for executing the suggestive effect so that it can be set regardless of the currently set change time of the special pattern change, and to configure the suggestive effect to be executed only if the currently set change time of the special pattern change is longer than the elapsed time that triggers the execution of the suggestive effect. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not a suggestive effect will be executed depending on the change pattern that has been set.

Furthermore, the display area in which the suggestive effect is executed may be configured to overlap with the display area in which the variable effect is executed, so that a situation in which the content of the suggestive effect is visible to the player and a situation in which it is difficult to see (not visible) can be created depending on the presentation mode of the variable effect being executed at the time when the trigger for executing the suggestive effect is established and the suggestive effect is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to determine whether or not a suggestive effect visible to the player will be executed depending on the change time of the special pattern change being executed and the content of the variable effect being executed.

In addition, FIG. 354 shows the processing contents of LCD performance execution management process 8 (S4181) as updating the value of a fluctuation time counter set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation, and setting (determining) the performance mode corresponding to the updated value, but it is also possible to provide a counter that can be set to a value corresponding to the passage of time other than the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation, and to configure it so that the performance mode corresponding to the updated content of the counter can be set (determined).

For example, a process may be executed to update the value of a counter capable of measuring the elapsed time since the start of a jackpot game, or a process to update the value of a counter capable of measuring the elapsed time since a specific presentation is executed, and a process may be executed to set (determine) the presentation mode corresponding to the update result. Also, the LCD presentation execution management process 8 (S4181) may be configured to update the values of various counters, determine whether the update result satisfies the execution conditions, and execute only the process of setting a flag to ON to indicate that the execution conditions have been met if the execution conditions have been met, and to be able to execute a process to execute a specific presentation in other processes (for example, a variable display setting process) on the condition that the flag to indicate that the execution conditions have been met is set to ON.

Next, referring to FIG. 355, the processing contents of the advance winning detection process 8 (S4182) will be described. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the advance winning detection process 8 (S4182). This advance winning detection process 8 (S4182) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 346) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, when a ball is detected by the ball sensor 1064a, a process is executed to predict whether the ball entrance into which the detected game ball can enter is the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 1641, and a process is executed to identify the state (position) of the distribution member 900 to indicate which ball entrance the game ball that will enter the distribution device 1064 next can enter if the ball actually enters either ball entrance.

In the advance winning detection process 8 (S4182), first, the ball entrance sensor 1064a determines whether the ball has entered the distribution device 1064 (S9901). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the distribution device 1064 (S9901: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball has entered the distribution device 1064 (S9901: Yes), it predicts whether the game ball will enter the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 1641 (S9902). As a method of predicting the ball entrance destination, a sensor (not shown) that detects the inclination mounted on the axis of the distribution member 900 is used to calculate the direction of the distribution member 900 from the inclination. Note that the detection of the direction of the distribution member 900 for predicting the ball entrance destination does not have to be done by a sensor that detects the inclination, and may be done by using, for example, a magnet and a hall sensor. In addition, as described above, since the orientation of the sorting member 900 alternates between left and right, the prize destination can be predicted based on the number of prizes won, in which case a sensor may not be required.

Next, it is determined whether the ball is predicted to enter the first ball entrance 64 by the processing of S9902 (S9903), and if it is predicted that the ball will not enter the first ball entrance 64 (S9903: No), the processing proceeds to S9905. On the other hand, if the ball is predicted to enter the first ball entrance 64 (S9903: Yes), second ball entrance side information indicating that the next game ball that enters the allocation device 1064 may (is highly likely to) enter the second ball entrance 1641 is stored in the allocation status storage area 223ga (S9904), and the processing proceeds to S9905.

In the process of S9905, it is determined whether or not the process of S9902 predicted that the ball would enter the second ball entrance 1641 (S9905), and if it predicted that the ball would not enter the second ball entrance 1641 (S9905: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it predicted that the ball would enter the second ball entrance 1641 (S9902: Yes), first ball entrance side information indicating that the next game ball that enters the allocation device 1064 may (is highly likely to) enter the first ball entrance 64 is stored in the allocation status storage area 223ga (S9906), and this process ends.

As explained above, in this eighth control example, the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state determines whether or not a time-saving win will occur, and is configured to provide a high probability of winning the time-saving win. This provides a novel gameplay experience in which the special symbol lottery is less likely to be executed in the normal state.

In addition, when the time-saving win is determined, either an unfavorable time-saving state that is less favorable than the normal state or a favorable time-saving state that is more favorable than the normal state is set. When an unfavorable time-saving state is set, the special symbol lottery for the normal state is not executed until the time-saving end condition is met. The time-saving end condition can be set to a time-saving end condition that is met when the special symbol lottery is executed in a specific order, and a time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed reaches a predetermined number.

Therefore, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, the more special pattern lotteries are executed, the easier it becomes for the time-saving end conditions to be met, making it easier for players playing during an unfavorable time-saving state to continue playing.

In this eighth control example, the variable count end condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed reaches 100 times can be set as the time-saving end condition for ending the disadvantageous time-saving state. However, without being limited to this, for example, the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed (time-saving number of times) that is set as the variable count end condition can be configured to differ depending on the type of time-saving that is set.

In this case, for example, the time-saving type can be set to time-saving AA8, time-saving BB8, or time-saving CC8, and the time-saving number of times "100 times" can be set as the variable count end condition for time-saving AA8, and the time-saving number of times "200 times" can be set as the variable count end condition for time-saving BB8. It is better to set the time-saving number of times "300 times" as the variable count end condition for time-saving CC8. By configuring in this way, the duration of the disadvantageous time-saving state can be made different depending on the time-saving type that is set.

In this case, the remaining number of time-saving times displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be configured to initially display the remaining number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving times set to "100," and the display of the remaining number of time-saving times can be increased according to the progress of play in the disadvantageous time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine when the disadvantageous time-saving state will end.

In this eighth control example, if an unfavorable time-saving effect is won in the second special pattern lottery, a special pattern lottery that is less favorable than the normal state is executed in the first special pattern lottery until the unfavorable time-saving state ends. In other words, it is configured so that a penalty can be imposed on other special pattern lotteries depending on the result of one special pattern lottery.

<Ninth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to Figs. 356 to 375. The pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example, like the fifth control example described above, is configured to execute a jackpot game when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and to set a high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends by a game ball entering (passing) a specific area (V-gate) provided in the game area (an area in the variable winning device (attacker) 3650 that is opened during the jackpot game). Also, like the fifth control example described above, it is configured to be able to execute a judgment of a time-saving symbol win when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state is a miss.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example, when a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery in the normal state, the most advantageous game state for the player (second time-saving state) is set. By configuring in this way, a game in which a player playing in the normal state wins a jackpot in the special pattern lottery and aims to transition to a probability-changing state that is more advantageous than the normal state while winning prize balls from the jackpot game, and a game in which a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery in the normal state and aims to set the most advantageous game state for the player (second time-saving state) can be executed in parallel, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, the trigger for transitioning to the game state that is most advantageous to the player (the second time-saving state) is set only when the player wins the time-saving state, and the determination of whether or not a time-saving state has been won (the time-saving lottery) is performed only in the normal state. Therefore, if a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set, the game state cannot be transitioned from the special state to the second time-saving state.

In addition, in this ninth control example, in order to make the second time-saving state a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the high probability state, the type of special pattern lottery that is likely to be executed during the high probability state is configured to be different from the type of special pattern lottery that is likely to be executed during the time-saving state.

Specifically, during the probability variation state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery. Also, during the time-saving state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery. And, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed as a special symbol lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set the high probability state and the time-saving state as game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal state, and furthermore, it is possible to set a second time-saving state as a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the high probability state.

The pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above in that the configuration of the game board 13 has been changed, that part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed, that part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed, and that the content of various control processes has been changed. Note that a description of the same content as in the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

<Regarding the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to Figures 356 to 361. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth control example is significantly different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above in that various non-electrically operated ports are provided inside the normal electric role 3071 (the game area where the game ball can flow down (it is easy to flow down) when the normal electric role 3071 is in the open state), and that various non-electric roles that are operated by the game ball that entered the various non-electrically operated ports are provided, and that a ball entry port that allows the ball to enter by the operation of various non-electric roles is provided.

A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 356, but the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example is provided with a non-electric device (non-electric special symbol 1 device 3064a) associated with the ball entry means (first ball entry port 3064 on the right) that can acquire the right to play the first special symbol lottery (reserved special symbol 1), and a non-electric device (non-electric device 3065a) associated with the ball entry means (second ball entry port 3065) that can acquire the right to play the second special symbol lottery (reserved special symbol 2), and each non-electric device is configured to operate when a game ball enters the corresponding non-electric operating port (non-electric special symbol 1 port 3073a, non-electric special symbol 2 port 3073b) provided inside the normal electric device 3071.

Then, depending on the type of normal winning game that is likely to be executed when the game state is set to a high probability state (time-saving state, probability-changing state) for normal patterns, it is possible to execute a first normal winning game in which the game ball that flows into the inside of the normal electric device 3071 during a normal winning game is likely to enter the special pattern 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a, and a second normal winning game in which the game ball is likely to enter the special pattern 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, it is configured so that when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, it is easier to execute a normal symbol winning game (it is easier to get the game ball to enter the inside of the normal electric device 3071 during a normal symbol winning game) than when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, and as a normal symbol winning game to be executed when a normal symbol lottery is won, a time-saving state (first time-saving state) in which a first normal symbol winning game is more likely to be executed than a second normal symbol winning game, and a time-saving state (second time-saving state) in which a second normal symbol winning game is more likely to be executed than a first normal symbol winning game can be determined according to the game state set when a normal symbol winning game is won.

By configuring it in this way, the type of special pattern lottery that is likely to be executed during the high probability state of the normal pattern can be made different depending on the type of game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set.

In addition, in this ninth control example, the lottery is configured so that when the second special pattern lottery is executed, the lottery is more advantageous to the player than when the first special pattern lottery is executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute games with different degrees of advantage for the player depending on the game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so that the player can be interested not only in whether or not the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, but also in the type of game state that has been set.

In addition, in this ninth control example, when the time-saving state is set as the game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, the second special pattern lottery is likely to be executed, and when the probability variable state is set, the first special pattern lottery is likely to be executed. In addition, in some cases in which the time-saving state is set (when the second time-saving state is set), a condition that is difficult to achieve (time-saving count 10,000 times) is set as the time-saving end condition for ending the second time-saving state. In other words, when the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is essentially configured to continue until the next jackpot game is executed. Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, which is likely to be executed during the second time-saving state, the second time-saving state is configured to be set with a high probability (90%) after the jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, even in the time-saving state where the probability of winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery is lower than in the high probability state, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play aiming for the next jackpot without ending the current game state, and it is also possible to make the bonus awarded to the player when a jackpot is won more advantageously than in the high probability state.

Now, with reference to FIG. 356, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 356 is a front view showing a schematic of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 356, the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 234) in that the configuration of the lower area and the right side area of the game board 13 are different. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same components are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 356, the lower area of the game board 13 formed below the variable display unit 80 is provided with a first ball entrance 64 through which the right to play the first special symbol lottery can be acquired. The right area of the game board 13 formed to the right of the variable display unit 80 is provided with an operating device 3070, a non-electric special symbol 1 device 3064a, a non-electric special symbol 2 device 3065a, and a through gate 67.

The operating device 3070 has a flow path formed therein through which game balls can flow down, and has a special figure 1 non-electrically operated opening 3073a and a special figure 2 non-electrically operated opening 3073b through which game balls that have flowed down the flow path can enter. A normal electric device 3071 is attached to the opening for allowing game balls to flow into the inside of the operating device 3070.

The normal electric device 3071 is opened by a normal winning game that is executed when a normal symbol lottery (a lottery executed based on the game ball passing through the through gate 67) is won. Note that the contents of the opening control process for the normal electric device 3071 based on the normal symbol lottery and the normal winning game are the same as the contents of the opening control process for the normal electric device 640a in the fifth control example described above, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

The non-electrically operated opening 3073a is connected to the non-electrically operated device 3064a by an operating mechanism (not shown). When a game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening 3073a while the non-electrically operated device 3064a is closed, the weight of the game ball activates the operating mechanism, and the non-electrically operated device 3064a is mechanically opened. In other words, the non-electrically operated opening 3073a is a means for opening the non-electrically operated device 3064a.

Similarly, the non-electrically operated opening 3073b is connected to the non-electrically operated device 3065a by an operating mechanism (not shown). When a game ball enters the non-electrically operated opening 3073b while the non-electrically operated device 3065a is closed, the weight of the game ball activates the operating mechanism, and the non-electrically operated device 3065a is mechanically opened. In other words, the non-electrically operated opening 3073b is a means for opening the non-electrically operated device 3065a.

A detailed explanation of the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a and special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a, which can be operated based on the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070, will be given later with reference to Figures 357 to 359.

As mentioned above, the non-electrical parts (special figure 1 non-electrical part 3064a and special figure 2 non-electrical part 3065a) are configured to open and close by mechanical action based on the weight of the game ball, not by electrical control. Therefore, unlike electrical parts that are electrically controlled to open and close (for example, normal electrical part 3071 and opening and closing door 3650f of variable winning device 3650), the opening and closing control is not performed by main control device 110 of pachinko machine 10, and the opening and closing status is not managed by main control device 110, etc.

Therefore, in this ninth control example, a detection sensor (not shown) is provided to detect the actual operating status of each non-electrical device (non-electrical device 3064a in special drawing 1, non-electrical device 3065a in special drawing 2), and the operating status (open/closed status) of each non-electrical device (non-electrical device 3064a in special drawing 1, non-electrical device 3065a in special drawing 2) is configured to be detectable.

Then, based on the detection result of the detection sensor, the player is notified by the special figure 1 non-electrical notification lamp 3064b or the special figure 2 non-electrical notification lamp 3065b that the special figure 1 non-electrical device 3064a is operating (open) or that the special figure 2 non-electrical device 3065a is operating (open). This makes it possible to notify the player of the operating status of each non-electrical device in an easy-to-understand manner.

In the ninth control example, the special pattern 1 non-electrical notification lamp 3064b and the special pattern 2 non-electrical notification lamp 3065b are configured to notify the player whether the corresponding non-electric role is operating (open), but notification means capable of notifying other situations may be provided, for example, notification means capable of notifying (suggesting) the player whether the situation is such that the special pattern 1 non-electrical role 3064a or the special pattern 2 non-electrical role 3065a is likely to operate. In this case, for example, based on the normal pattern winning type set when a winning normal pattern lottery is won, it is good to provide a notification means for notifying (suggesting) the player which non-electric role is likely to be activated (which non-electrical operating hole is likely to receive the game ball) in the normal pattern winning game to be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the type of non-electric device to be activated (released) at a timing before the special non-electric device is actually activated, for example, during the first period from when the normal pattern lottery is executed to when the result of the normal winning lottery is stopped and displayed, the second period from when the result of the normal winning lottery is stopped and displayed to when the normal winning game is executed, the third period from when the normal winning game is executed to when the game ball flows into the operating device 3070, the fourth period from when the normal winning game is executed to when the game ball enters the non-electric operating port, the fifth period from when the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 to when the game ball enters the non-electric operating port, and the sixth period from when the game ball enters the non-electric operating port to when the non-electric device is activated, or during a combined period in which multiple periods are selected and combined. Therefore, based on the content suggested by the notification means, the player can understand (predict) the content of the game to be executed later, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when an alert is issued by the alert means during any period (corresponding to the first, second, or third period described above) from when the winning lottery is executed until the game balls flow into the operating device 3070, the player can choose whether or not to allow the game balls to flow into the operating device 3070 based on the content of the alert from the alert means. In other words, when a favorable game state (e.g., time-saving state) that makes it easy to open a non-electric role is set, if a game ball is inserted into a ball-entry means (e.g., the right first ball-entry opening 3064) that allows ball entry when any one of the non-electric roles (e.g., the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a) is in operation (when the first special pattern lottery is executed), the favorable game state ends, but if a game ball is inserted into a ball-entry means (the second ball-entry opening 3065) that allows ball entry when another non-electric role (e.g., the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a) is in operation (when the second special pattern lottery is executed), the favorable game state does not end, and by configuring the above-mentioned notification means to be able to notify, it becomes possible to allow the player to select whether or not to continue the favorable game state. In other words, by allowing the player to select a game method (whether or not to launch a game ball), the result of the game that is executed later can be greatly different. This can increase players' motivation to play in order to achieve more advantageous gameplay.

Furthermore, in this case, when the game ball enters one ball entry means, a game that is more advantageous to the player is executed than when the game ball enters another ball entry means, but it becomes easier to end the advantageous game state, and when the game ball enters another ball entry means, a game that is less advantageous to the player is executed than when the game ball enters one ball entry means, but it becomes harder to end the advantageous game state. It is advisable to predetermine the contents of the privilege (e.g., a special pattern lottery) that is granted when the game ball enters each ball entry means and the conditions for ending the advantageous game state.

Here, a specific explanation of the detection sensors for detecting the operating status of each non-electric device is given. Detection means (proximity sensors) are provided at locations where it can detect that the operating mechanism (operating mechanism for Special Figure 1 3074, operating mechanism for Special Figure 2 3075), which is activated when a game ball enters the non-electric operating port (non-electric operating port for Special Figure 1 3073a, non-electric operating port for Special Figure 2 3073b) and comes into contact with it, is in the operating position (the position where the non-electric device is activated (released)). When the detection means detects that the operating mechanism is in the operating position (when the discrimination means discriminates based on the detection signal output from the detection means), it is possible to identify that the non-electric device is released.

In addition, as a method for managing the operating status of each non-electric role, a method other than the method of detecting the operating status of the actual non-electric role 3065a as described above may be used. For example, a detection means for detecting the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 during a normal winning game may be provided, and based on the detection result by the detection means and the normal winning type, it may be determined which non-electric operating port (special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b) the game ball entered, and the operating status of each non-electric role may be specified based on the determination result. In this case, it is preferable to configure the device to specify the operating status of each non-electric role by determining whether the closing condition of each non-electric role is established based on the specified operating status of the non-electric role and the acquired winning information. By configuring in this way, it is no longer necessary to provide a dedicated detection means just for managing the operating status of the non-electric role, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In this case, it is advisable to provide a management process that detects the entry of a game ball into a ball entry means that is different in ease of entry when the non-electric device is operating and when it is not, compares the detection result with the contents specified as the operating status of the non-electric device, and determines whether the specified contents are normal or not.

Next, with reference to Figures 357 to 359, the detailed contents of the various components formed in the right area of the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example will be described. Figure 357 (a) is an enlarged view of the right area of the game board 13 shown in Figure 356. As shown in Figure 357 (a), a game ball flow path is formed in the vertical direction in the right area of the game board 13, and game balls launched toward the right area (game balls launched by right-handed play) flow down the game ball flow path and ultimately into the outlet 66.

A number of nails are planted vertically (up and down from the viewpoint of FIG. 357) in this game ball flow path, and these planted nails divide the game ball flow path into a left side flow path (a flow path formed between the nails and the variable display unit 80) and a right side flow path (a flow path formed to the right of the nails).

As shown in FIG. 357(a), the nails dividing the ball flow path into a left flow path and a right flow path are planted to form a passing area through which the ball can pass, so that the ball flowing down the left flow path can flow into the right flow path, and the ball flowing down the right flow path can flow into the left flow path.

The actuator 3070 is provided on the left side of the game ball flow path, i.e., at a position where game balls flowing down the left side flow path are easier to flow into than game balls flowing down the right side flow path, and the non-electric device 3064a of special figure 1 and the non-electric device 3065a of special figure 2 are provided on the right side of the game ball flow path, i.e., at a position where game balls flowing down the right side flow path are easier to flow into than game balls flowing down the left side flow path.

By forming a left flow path and a right flow path in this way, multiple paths can be created for the game balls launched by right-handed play to flow down. For example, when multiple devices (operating device 3070, special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a, special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a, etc.) installed in the right area are in a state where balls can enter (open state), game balls will only enter the devices installed upstream of the right area, making it difficult for game balls to enter the devices installed downstream, thereby preventing a situation in which game progress is delayed.

Here, the detailed configuration of the operating device 3070 will be explained. When a normal symbol lottery is won (when a normal symbol winning game is executed), the operating device 3070 becomes ready for a game ball to enter (i.e., the normal electric device 3071 is opened), and when a game ball enters one of the two non-electric operating ports (special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b) provided inside the operating device 3070, the corresponding non-electric device (special symbol 1 non-electric device 3064a, special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a) opens.

The game ball that flows into the inside of the operating device 3070 flows down the first flow path 3070a and reaches the movable piece 3072. This movable piece 3072 is variably controlled in a predetermined opening and closing pattern when a normal winning game is being played, and is configured to be variable between an open position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path 3070a can flow into the second flow path 3070b, and a closed position where the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path 300a can be received and flowed down toward the third flow path 3070c. Note that when a normal winning game is not being played (non-normal winning game state), the movable piece 3072 is configured to be in the closed position.

In other words, this movable piece 3072 is a means for allowing the inflow of game balls into the second flow path 3070b when a predetermined condition is met (when a normal winning game is executed). In this ninth control example, the opening operation content of the normal electric device 3071 in the normal winning game executed when a winning normal symbol lottery is won is configured to be different depending on the type of normal winning symbol. Specifically, the length of the period (opening period) from when the normal winning game is executed to when the normal electric device 3071 is opened is made different. Meanwhile, the movable piece 3072 is configured to be variably controlled in a predetermined variable pattern after the normal winning game is executed, regardless of the type of normal winning symbol.

The length of the opening period is varied depending on the type of normal winning, and the length of time required from when a normal winning game is executed until the game ball reaches the movable piece 3072 is varied, making it possible to play a normal winning game in which the game ball that reaches the movable piece 3072 is likely to be guided to the second flow path 3070b, and a normal winning game in which the game ball that reaches the movable piece 3072 is likely to be guided to the third flow path 3070c.

The second flow path 8070b is provided downstream with a special non-electrically operated port 3073a, and all game balls that flow down the second flow path 8070b enter the special non-electrically operated port 3073a. The special non-electrically operated port 3073a is connected to the special non-electrically operated device 3064a via a special non-electrically operated mechanism 3074, and when a game ball enters the special non-electrically operated port 3073a, the game ball comes into contact with the operating mechanism 3074, and the weight of the game ball activates the operating mechanism 3074, changing the special non-electrically operated device 3064a from the closed state to the open state.

When the non-electric special feature 3064a is in the open state, the operating mechanism 3074 is operated in the open state, so that the game ball that enters the non-electric special feature 3064a does not come into contact with the operating mechanism 3074. In other words, the non-electric special feature 3064a is a means for changing the non-electric special feature 3064a from the closed state to the open state, and is a means for changing the non-electric special feature 3064a without using an electrical drive source.

The special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is a non-electric device attached to the right first ball entrance 3064, and is configured to be variable between an open state in which a game ball can be inserted into the right first ball entrance 3064, and a closed state in which it is more difficult to insert a game ball than in the open state. This special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is changed from the closed state to the open state by the operation of the operating mechanism 3074 based on the entry of a game ball into the special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a. Then, after being changed to the open state, it is changed from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of two game balls into the right first ball entrance 3064.

Specifically, a holding means (not shown) capable of temporarily holding a ball that enters the right first ball entrance 3064 is provided inside the right first ball entrance 3064, and when two game balls are held in the holding means, the held game balls flow out due to their own weight into a discharge path for discharging the game balls to the outside of the gaming machine, and a closing mechanism (not shown) is provided so that the game balls discharged into the discharge path come into contact with it.

When the game ball comes into contact with this closing mechanism, the closing mechanism is activated, and the non-electric device 3064a in the special drawing 1, which was in the open state, is changed to the closed state.

As explained above, the non-electric device 3064a in Special Figure 1 is configured to change mechanically using the weight of the game balls flowing downstream, without using electrical control, whether it is changed from a closed state to an open state or from an open state to a closed state.

A special figure 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b is provided downstream of the third flow path 3070c, and all game balls that flow down the third flow path 8070c are configured to enter the special figure 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b. The special figure 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b is connected to the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a via the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075, and when a game ball enters the special figure 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b, the game ball that entered contacts the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075, and the weight of the game ball activates the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075, changing the special figure 2 non-electrically operated device 3065a, which is in a closed state, to an open state.

When the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a is in the open state, the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075 is operating in the open state, so that the game ball that enters the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b does not come into contact with the special figure 2 operating mechanism 3075. In other words, the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b is a means for changing the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a, which is in the closed state, to the open state, and is a means for changing the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a without using an electrical drive source.

The special figure 2 non-electric device 3064b is a non-electric device attached to the second ball entrance 3065, and is configured to be variable between an open state in which a game ball can be inserted into the second ball entrance 3065, and a closed state in which it is more difficult to insert a game ball than in the open state. This special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a is changed from the closed state to the open state by the special figure 2 operation mechanism 3075 being operated based on the entry of a game ball into the special figure 2 non-electric operation port 3073b. Then, after being changed to the open state, it is changed from the open state to the closed state based on the entry of two game balls into the second ball entrance 3065.

Specifically, a holding means (not shown) capable of temporarily holding balls that enter the second ball entrance 3065 is provided inside the second ball entrance 3065, and when two game balls are held in the holding means, the held game balls flow out due to their own weight into a discharge path for discharging the game balls to the outside of the gaming machine, and a closing mechanism (not shown) is provided so that the game balls discharged into the discharge path come into contact with the discharge path.

When the game ball comes into contact with this closing mechanism, the closing mechanism is activated, and the non-electric special device 3065a in the open state is changed to a closed state.

As explained above, the non-electric device 3065a in Special Figure 2 is configured to change mechanically using the weight of the game balls flowing downstream, without using electrical control, whether it is changed from a closed state to an open state or from an open state to a closed state.

Next, referring to FIG. 357(b), the flow of the game ball during a normal winning game will be explained. FIG. 357(b) is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game ball when the game ball enters the special game 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a during a normal winning game.

As shown in FIG. 357(b), when a normal winning game is executed, the normal electric device 3071 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. Then, when the normal electric device 3071 is changed to the open state, the game ball guided by the open normal electric device 3071 (see FIG. 357(b)) passes through the movable piece 3072 located in the open position and enters the special device 1 non-electric operation port 3073a. When the game ball enters the special device 1 non-electric operation port 3073a, the special device 1 operation mechanism 3074 is activated, and the special device 1 non-electric device 3064a becomes open (see the solid line in FIG. 357(b)).

When the special non-electric device 3064a is changed to the open state, the special non-electric device 3064a is changed to a position that blocks the right-side flow path, so that most of the game balls that are launched by right-handed play and flow down the right-side flow path 3060 enter the right first ball entrance 3064.

As shown in FIG. 357(b), in this ninth control example, the normal electric device 3071 is provided on the left flow path, and the special 1 non-electric device 3064a is provided on the right flow path. Furthermore, since the normal electric device 3071 is provided upstream of the special 1 non-electric device 3064a, the rate at which game balls flow into the normal electric device 3071 does not change depending on the variable state of the special 1 non-electric device 3064a. Therefore, by changing the special 1 non-electric device 3064a to the open state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which game balls during a normal hit cannot flow into the operating device 3070 and the game cannot proceed smoothly.

In addition, even if a normal winning game that allows the game ball to enter the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b is executed while the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is changed to the open state, the game ball can be reliably entered into the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b because the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a does not restrict the game ball from entering the operating device 3070.

In addition, in this ninth control example, since the game balls flowing down the right area 3060 are configured to flow down two paths (left path and right path), even if the normal electric device 3071 installed upstream is in an open state, the game balls flowing down the right path can be easily made to reach the special electric device 3064a installed downstream. In other words, when both the normal electric device 3071 and the special electric device 3064a are in an open state, the game balls flowing down the right area 3060 can be easily made to reach either device for a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which the game balls flow down one path.

When two game balls enter the non-electric device 3064a of Special Figure 1, which is in the open state, the closing condition of the non-electric device 3064a is met, as shown in Figure 358 (a), and the non-electric device 3064a is changed from the open state to the closed state.

As described above, in the ninth control example, even when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in an open state, the game ball can be inserted into the operating device 3070. For example, a game ball may enter the special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a while the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in an open state. In this case, even if a game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a continues to be in an open state because the special figure 1 operating mechanism 3074 is not activated by the entered game ball. In addition, the value of the number of balls that is the closing condition of the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a in the open state also continues as it is. In other words, even if a new game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a while the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in an open state, no special privilege is given to the player.

By configuring it in this way, when the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is changed to the open state, the player can be motivated to try to get a specified number of game balls (2 balls) into the right first ball entry port 3064 to which the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is attached until the next game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric operation port 3073a.

As described above, in the ninth control example, when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed to the open state, the game ball can be inserted into the operating device 3070. However, without being limited to this, for example, the operating device 3070 (normal electric role 3071) may be arranged downstream of the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and in a position that is more difficult to reach when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in the open state than when it is in the closed state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of game balls that enter the operating device 3070 during the period when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in the open state compared to the period when it is not in the open state.

Next, referring to FIG. 358(a), the ball flow of the game ball launched by right-hand play when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is in the open state will be explained. FIG. 358(a) is a diagram that shows the flow when the game ball enters the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a in the open state. As shown in FIG. 358(a), when the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed (operated) to the open state, the game ball is easily entered into the right first ball entrance 3064, and when the game ball enters the right first ball entrance 3064, a closing mechanism (not shown) connected to the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is activated, and the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a is changed (operated) to the closed state.

Next, referring to FIG. 358(b), the operation of the various mechanisms when a game ball enters the special chart 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b will be explained. FIG. 358(b) is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when a game ball enters the special chart 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b during a normal winning game.

As shown in FIG. 358(b), when a normal winning game is executed, the normal electric device 3071 is opened in a predetermined opening pattern. Then, when the normal electric device 3071 is changed to the open state, the game ball guided by the open normal electric device 3071 (see FIG. 358(b)) flows down the upper surface of the movable piece 3072 located in the closed position, flows down the third flow path 3070c, and enters the special device 2 non-electric operation port 3073b. When the game ball enters the special device 2 non-electric operation port 3073b, the special device 2 operation mechanism 3075 is activated, and the special device 2 non-electric device 3065a becomes open (see the solid line in FIG. 358(b)).

When the special non-electric device 3065a is changed to the open state, the special non-electric device 3065a is changed to a position that blocks the right-side flow path, so that most of the game balls that are launched by right-handed play and flow down the right-side area 3060 flow down the right-side flow path enter the second ball entrance 3065.

As shown in FIG. 358(b), in this ninth control example, the normal electric device 3071 is provided on the left flow path, and the special 2 non-electric device 3065a is provided on the right flow path. Furthermore, since the normal electric device 3071 is provided upstream of the special 2 non-electric device 3065a, the rate at which game balls flow into the normal electric device 3071 does not change depending on the variable state of the special 2 non-electric device 3065a. Therefore, by changing the special 2 non-electric device 3065a to the open state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which game balls during a normal hit cannot flow into the operating device 3070 and the game cannot proceed smoothly.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is disposed above the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a, so that, for example, when the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a is in the open state and the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is changed (activated) to the open state, the game ball released by right-handed play is preferentially introduced into the right first ball entrance 3064 rather than the second ball entrance 3065.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the second special pattern lottery, which is a lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery, from being executed excessively, i.e., it is possible to prevent an excessive number of game balls from entering the second ball entrance 3065. Furthermore, as long as the right first ball entrance 3064 is open, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 3065, so it is easier to maintain the open state of the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a for a long period of time. For example, when the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a is changed (activated) to the open state just before the time-saving state ends, the game is played so that the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is in the open state before the game ball enters the second ball entrance 3065, and the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a is changed (activated) to the open state, so that the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a can be maintained in the open state even after the time-saving state ends.

This allows the player to play with enthusiasm in order to make the game situation (the opening and closing status of the non-electric device 3065a in Special Figure 2) favorable to the player when the time-saving state ends.

Next, the game content of the normal winning game in this ninth control example will be explained with reference to Fig. 360 and Fig. 361. Fig. 360 is a diagram showing the flow of the normal winning game when normal winning opening pattern A (an opening pattern that is likely to be set during the first time-saving state) is set, and Fig. 361 is a diagram showing the flow of the normal winning game when normal winning opening pattern B (an opening pattern that is likely to be set during the second time-saving state) is set.

In this ninth control example, the operation content of the normal symbol winning game is changed according to the normal symbol winning type (game state at the time of winning) that is set when the normal symbol lottery is won, so that the timing of the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 during the normal symbol winning game is changed. Then, according to the timing of the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070, a normal symbol winning game (a normal symbol winning game with a normal symbol winning opening pattern A set) in which the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 is more likely to enter the special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a than the special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, and a normal symbol winning game (a normal symbol winning game with a normal symbol winning opening pattern B set) in which the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070 is more likely to enter the special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b than the special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a are configured to be executable.

Furthermore, when the time-saving state is set as the game state, the normal winning type can be set to a time-saving type (first time-saving state) in which normal winning opening pattern A is more likely to be set than normal winning opening pattern B, and a time-saving type (second time-saving state) in which normal winning opening pattern B is more likely to be set than normal winning opening pattern A.

By configuring in this way, when a time-saving state is set that can make it easier for the game ball to enter the operating device 3070 than in the normal state (the period during which the normal electric device 3071 is in the open state during normal play per unit time can be made longer than in the normal state), it is possible to set a first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) in which the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery, and a second time-saving state (favorable time-saving state) in which the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery.

The normal winning game is composed of the period from when the normal winning game is executed until the normal electric role 3071 is changed to the open state (opening period), the period when the normal electric role 3071 is in the open state (opening period), and the period when the end condition for ending the open state of the normal electric role 3071 is met and the normal winning game is ended after changing from the open state to the closed state (ending period). A predetermined time (predetermined condition) is determined and specified for each period, and the opening operation of the normal electric role 3071 is executed according to the specified content. Furthermore, the movable control is executed to move the movable piece 3072 (see FIG. 780) provided in the operating device 3070 in a predetermined moving pattern.

First, referring to FIG. 360, the flow of the normal map winning game that is executed when normal map winning opening pattern A is set will be explained. Specifically, in the normal map winning game that is executed when normal map winning opening pattern A is set, as shown in FIG. 360, a normal map winning game with an opening period (OP period) of 3 seconds, an opening period of 2.5 seconds, and an ending period (ED period) of 1 second is executed as the normal map winning game. Then, for the movable piece 3072, after the open period in which the movable piece 3072 is in an open state has elapsed for 0.5 seconds, a movable control is executed in which the movable piece 3072 is in a closed state for 1.5 seconds.

In other words, in a normal winning game of the normal winning opening pattern A, the opening period of the normal electric device 3071 is set after a period (a period between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds after the normal winning game is executed) during which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can be guided to the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b (the movable piece 3072 is in a closed state) has elapsed. Therefore, when a normal winning game of the normal winning opening pattern A is executed, all (almost all) of the game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 during the opening period in which the normal electric device 3071 is in an open state will pass through the open movable piece 3072 and enter the special winning 1 non-electric operating port 3073a. When a game ball enters the special symbol 1 non-electric operation port 3073a, the special symbol 1 non-electric device 3064a operates to the open state, so the normal symbol winning game of the normal symbol winning opening pattern A becomes a normal symbol winning game that makes it easy to execute the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, in this ninth control example, as a termination condition for terminating the open state of the normal electric role 3071, in addition to the time termination condition that is established when a predetermined time (2.5 seconds) has elapsed, a ball entry termination condition that is established when the number of game balls that have flowed into the operating device 3070 (game balls that have passed through the normal electric role 3071 in the open state) exceeds two is also set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent many game balls from flowing into the operating device 3070 during one normal game, so that it is possible to prevent, for example, game balls from clogging the operating device 3070 or the movable piece 3072 from becoming more susceptible to malfunction (breakage) due to an increase in the number of game balls that collide with the movable piece 3072.

Furthermore, when game balls are continuously shot, a maximum of 100 game balls can be shot in 60 seconds. Therefore, by continuously playing right-hand shots during normal winning games, the ball entry end condition is more likely to be met before the time end condition. Therefore, when right-hand shots that continuously shoot game balls are played, it is possible to end the normal winning game earlier. Therefore, for example, in a time-saving state in which a time-saving type (time-saving B) that is more likely to be executed in a normal winning game with normal winning opening pattern A than in a normal winning game with normal winning opening pattern B described later, more normal pattern lotteries are executed before the time-saving end condition for terminating the time-saving state is met, and game balls can be continuously shot to the player in order to execute the second special pattern lottery as many times as possible, thereby improving the operation of the game.

In addition, if the special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a is activated to the open state immediately before the time-saving end condition is met, it is possible to make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery after the time-saving end condition is met and the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state, so that the player can play until just before the time-saving end condition is met in the hope that a normal symbol winning game of the normal symbol winning opening pattern B will be executed, which makes it possible to enter the game ball into the second non-electric operating port 3073b in order to activate the special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a to the open state.

Next, the flow of the normal map winning game that is executed when the normal map winning opening pattern B is set will be explained. Specifically, in the normal map winning game that is executed when the normal map winning opening pattern B is set, as shown in FIG. 361, a normal map winning game is executed with an opening period (OP period) of 0.5 seconds, an opening period of 2.5 seconds, and an ending period (ED period) of 1 second. Then, for the movable piece 3072, after the opening period in which the movable piece 3072 is in an open state has elapsed for 0.5 seconds, a movable control is executed in which the movable piece 3072 is in a closed state for 1.5 seconds.

In other words, in a normal winning game of the normal winning opening pattern B, the opening period of the normal electric device 3071 is set during the period (the period between 0.5 seconds and 2 seconds after the normal winning game is executed) during which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can be guided to the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b (the movable piece 3072 is in a closed state). Therefore, when a normal winning game of the normal winning opening pattern B is executed and the normal electric device 3071 is in an open state, all (almost all) of the game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 during the opening period flow down the upper surface of the movable piece 3072 in the closed state and enter the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b. When a game ball enters the special symbol 2 non-electric operation port 3073b, the special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a operates to the open state, so the normal symbol winning game of the normal symbol winning opening pattern B becomes a normal symbol winning game that makes it easy to execute the second special symbol lottery.

As explained above, in this ninth control example, the length of the opening period in a normal winning game is varied according to the type of normal winning game, so that the type of special non-electric operating port into which the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 during a normal winning game can enter (is easy to enter) is varied. In this case, even if the content of the normal winning game other than the length of the opening period of the normal winning game is made common to the type of normal winning game, it is possible to reliably vary the type of special non-electric operating port into which the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 during a normal winning game can enter (is easy to enter), so that when a time-saving state is set, it is possible to easily execute a lottery for different types of special patterns, and this novel gameplay can be achieved while reducing the processing load of the pachinko machine 10.

The configuration for realizing the innovative gameplay of making it easier to execute different types of special pattern lotteries when the time-saving state is set is not limited to this. For example, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3071 in a normal winning game can be changed depending on the type of normal winning, so that the type of special non-electric operating port into which the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 can enter (is easy to enter) can be changed, or the moving pattern of the movable piece 3072 can be changed depending on the type of normal winning, so that the type of special non-electric operating port into which the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 can enter (is easy to enter) can be changed.

In addition, in this ninth control example, the game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 are configured to enter one of the special non-electric operating ports, but this is not limited to this, and for example, a discharge port may be provided to discharge the game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 back into the game area, or a prize opening may be provided from which a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) are paid out when a game ball enters the operating device 3070, and some of the game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 enter the prize opening without entering the special non-electric operating port.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a pattern in which none of the special non-electric devices are activated to the open state even if a game ball flows into the operating device 3070 during a normal winning game. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being given a certain relationship in which any of the special non-electric devices are activated to the open state when a normal winning game is played, and therefore prevents the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

As mentioned above, due to the nature of the non-electric device, there is no effect if a game ball enters the non-electric special device when the non-electric special device is in the open state. This may cause players to lose interest in playing the normal winning game when the non-electric special device is in the open state. However, by providing the above-mentioned winning port and a flow path that can allow game balls to enter the winning port inside the operating device 3070, the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 not only operates (changes) the non-electric special device to the open state, but also has the potential to award prize balls, so that players can become interested in playing the normal winning game when the non-electric special device is in the open state.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the special non-electric device so that the game ball that can enter the corresponding special non-electric operating port can easily enter the above-mentioned winning port when the special non-electric device is in the open state, compared to when the special non-electric device is in the closed state. For example, the special non-electric operating port can be configured so that the game ball can pass through (for example, a gear configuration), and when the special non-electric device is in the closed state, the game ball that entered the special non-electric operating port can abut against the operating mechanism, activating the operating mechanism, and the game ball can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and when the special non-electric device is in the open state, the game ball that entered the special non-electric operating port can flow down toward the winning port without abutting against the operating mechanism. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily win more prize balls during a normal game when the special non-electric device is in the open state than when the special non-electric device is in the closed state.

As a result, the normal winning game when the special non-electric device is open can be made an advantageous game for the player in terms of winning balls, so that the player can play in the hope that the normal winning game will be executed regardless of the open/closed state of the special non-electric device, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

First, the contents of normal winning opening pattern A will be explained with reference to FIG. 360. As shown in FIG. 360, when a normal winning game is executed, measurement of the opening period begins and the scenario for variably controlling the movable piece 3072 is updated.

The variable control of the movable piece 3072 is always constant regardless of the type of normal win, and a scenario is specified in which the movable piece 3072 is positioned in the closed position for 1.5 seconds after 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the normal win game. In other words, the scenario is specified so that the 1.5-second closed period is set to a predetermined timing (0.5 seconds after the normal win game is executed) each time a normal win game is executed.

And for the normal map winning opening pattern A, the period from when the normal map winning game is executed until the normal electric role 3071 is changed to the open state (opening period) is 3 seconds, then the period during which the normal electric role 3071 is changed to the open state (opening period) is 2.5 seconds, and the period from when the opening period has elapsed until the normal map winning game ends (ending period) is 1 second. In other words, when the normal map winning opening pattern A is set, the scenario for the normal map winning game is specified so that the game period for the normal map winning game is a maximum of 6.5 seconds.

The above-mentioned open period (2.5 seconds) in the normal game is configured to be able to end under conditions other than the passage of time. Specifically, when the number of game balls flowing into the operating device 3070 during the open period reaches a predetermined number (2 balls) (when the winning number ending condition is met), the open period is configured to end without waiting for the time of the open period to elapse. In other words, when a normal game is played, the number of game balls flowing into the area (inside the operating device 3070) where game balls are more likely to enter than when a normal game is not played (the number of balls entering) reaches a predetermined number, so that the normal game can be ended. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an upper limit on the amount of bonuses that can be given to a player for one normal game, and it is possible to prevent excessive bonuses from being given to a player.

In addition, by ending the normal symbol game by satisfying the winning number ending condition, the game period of the normal symbol game can be made shorter than when the normal symbol game is ended based on the passage of time, and as a result, it is possible to increase the number of times that the normal symbol is drawn per unit time. Therefore, for example, in a time-saving state in which the normal symbol opening pattern A that allows the game ball to enter the special symbol 1 non-electric operation port 3073a is likely to be set, the player can continue playing with the aim of executing the second special symbol lottery as many times as possible (executing a normal symbol game that allows the game ball to enter the special symbol 2 non-electric operation port 3073b) before the time-saving state ends, which makes it easier to improve the operation of the game.

In particular, in the time-saving state where the normal winning opening pattern A is likely to be set, when the number of reserved memories of the first special symbol (reserved special symbol 1) has reached the upper limit (4), that is, when no more game balls are inserted into the right first ball entrance 3064, a new reserved special symbol 1 cannot be acquired (stored), so that no more game balls are wasted. In this state, however, the action of temporarily interrupting the game of firing game balls (right-hitting game) is generally performed in order to prevent the firing of unnecessary game balls, but in the pachinko machine 10 in this ninth control example, the player can be made to select the action of continuing to play in order to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2). Therefore, a novel gameplay can be provided in which the player can select between a game in which game balls are not used wastefully and a game in which game balls are used wastefully in order to be granted an advantageous privilege.

As shown in FIG. 360, when the normal winning opening pattern A is set, the opening period is set to 3 seconds, so the closing period of the movable piece 3072 ends before the opening period has elapsed. Therefore, when a normal winning game with the normal winning opening pattern A set is played, the normal electric device 3071 is opened, and the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 flows down the first flow path 3070a and the second flow path 3070b and enters the special 1 non-electric operating port 3073a (see FIG. 357(b)).

Next, referring to FIG. 361, the flow of the normal winning game when normal winning opening pattern B is set will be explained. In this ninth control example, the only thing that differs between normal winning opening pattern A and normal winning opening pattern B is the length of the opening period of the normal winning game, and otherwise the same normal winning game is played. A detailed explanation of the same content will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 361, the normal winning opening pattern B has a 0.5 second opening period for the normal winning game, so that the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 during the period when the movable piece 3072 is in the closed position can reach the movable piece 3072.

As explained above, in this ninth control example, the lottery is configured to be executed so that the second special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery, and the non-electrically operated opening (non-electrically operated opening for special pattern 1 3073a, non-electrically operated opening for special pattern 2 3073b) into which the game ball is more likely to enter during a normal winning game is configured to be different depending on the normal winning type that is set when a normal winning game is won.

The game is configured so that the play period of the regular winning game (regular winning game in which regular winning opening pattern B is set) in which the game ball can enter the special winning 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b, which is the execution machine for the second special pattern lottery advantageous to the player, is shorter.

By configuring it in this way, when the time-saving state type B, which is a time-saving state type that makes it easier to get the game ball into the special chart 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b, is set as the type of time-saving state, it is possible to efficiently play a regular winning game, allowing the player to smoothly play during the time-saving state.

On the other hand, when the type of time-saving state is set to time-saving A, which makes it easier to play a normal winning game (a normal winning game in which a normal winning opening pattern A is set) in which the game ball can enter the special winning game 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a, which is the execution machine for the first special pattern lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, the opening period of the normal winning game becomes longer, and the period required for one normal winning game becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the number of times that a normal winning game is played (the number of times that a normal pattern lottery is played) during the time-saving state.

In addition, when the normal winning opening pattern A is set, the normal winning electric device 3071 is configured to open after the period during which the game ball can enter the special winning opening 3073b has elapsed, so that it is possible to prevent a game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 during a normal winning game with the normal winning opening pattern A from entering the special winning opening 3073b.

In other words, by varying the degree of overlap between the period during which game balls can flow into the operating device 3070 (open period of the normal electric device 3071) and the period during which the movable piece 3072 is in the closed position (closed period of the movable piece 3072) according to the set normal winning opening pattern, a method is possible to set a normal winning game (advantageous normal winning game) in which it is possible to get the game ball to enter the special chart 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, and a normal winning game (unfavorable normal winning game) in which it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the special chart 2 non-electric operating port 3073b. In addition to the method used in the ninth control example, that is, the method of varying the length of the opening period of a normal winning game depending on the type of normal winning game, with a normal winning game with a short opening period set being a favorable normal winning game and a normal winning game with a long opening period set being an unfavorable normal winning game, it may be configured so that a normal winning game with a short opening period set is an unfavorable normal winning game and a normal winning game with a long opening period set is an advantageous normal winning game.

However, in this case, the movable piece 3072 will be positioned in the closed position at a timing chronologically later than the timing at which game balls flow into the operating device 3070 due to a win on the non-favourable figure. For example, if a game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 during a win on the non-favourable figure remains in the play area within the operating device 3070, there is a risk that the game ball will reach the movable piece 3072 after it has been positioned in the closed position.

In contrast, in the method used in the ninth control example, the closed period during which the movable piece 3072 is in the closed position ends before the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 due to a win on the non-favourable figure, so even if the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 due to a win on the non-favourable figure remains in the play area within the operating device 3070, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to carry out fraudulent acts such as intentionally causing game balls that flow into the operating device 3070 due to a win on the non-favourable figure to remain in the operating device 3070.

As described above with reference to Figures 360 and 361, in this ninth control example, a normal winning opening pattern A in which the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 during a normal winning game cannot reliably enter the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, and a normal winning opening pattern B in which the game ball reliably enters the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b can be set. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when the same normal winning opening pattern is set, the game ball can or cannot enter the special winning 2 non-electric operating port 3073b depending on the timing at which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 and the time it takes for the game ball that flows into the operating device 3070 to reach the movable piece 3072.

In this case, for example, when a game ball is caused to flow into the operating device 3070 during a part of the opening period (2.5 seconds) of the normal electric role 3071 during a normal winning game (the first 0.5 seconds or the last 0.5 seconds), the game ball can be configured to reach the movable piece 3072 located in the closed position. By configuring it in this way, whether or not the game ball enters the special game 2 non-electric operating port 3073b is determined depending on the timing of the game ball flowing into the operating device 3070, so the player can be interested in the timing at which the game ball will enter the operating device 3070.

In addition, as another configuration, for example, a plurality of flow paths through which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can flow down may be formed inside the operating device 3070, and the time required for the game ball to reach the movable piece 3072 may be varied depending on the flow path through which the game ball flows down, so that the game ball can reach the movable piece 3072 located in the closed position if the time required for the game ball to reach the movable piece 3072 after flowing into the operating device 3070 is within a predetermined period, or the game ball can reach the movable piece 3072 located in the closed position if the time required for the game ball to reach the movable piece 3072 after flowing into the operating device 3070 is equal to or longer than a predetermined period. By configuring in this way, the player can be interested in the behavior of the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 until it reaches the movable piece 3072.

As described above, in this ninth control example, the type of special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed is configured to differ depending on the type of game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. However, without being limited to this, the type of special symbol lottery that is likely to be executed may be configured to differ depending on the type of normal symbol win that is set when a normal symbol win occurs during the high probability state of the normal symbol (time-saving state).

In addition, in this ninth control example, the type of non-electrically operated opening into which the game ball can enter is determined in accordance with the opening pattern of the normal winning game being executed, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the type of non-electrically operated opening into which the game ball can easily enter to be different depending on the opening pattern of the normal winning game being executed. In other words, it is possible to configure it so that the game ball can enter any non-electrically operated opening regardless of the opening pattern in which the normal winning game is executed, and to configure the ease of entry into each non-electrically operated opening to be variable in accordance with the opening pattern of the normal winning game.

<Regarding transition of game state in the ninth control example>
Next, the transition of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 362. Fig. 362 is a game flow showing the transition of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example.

In this ninth control example, three game states can be set: a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and a probability-changing state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols).Furthermore, depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state (time-saving setting trigger), a first time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is relatively easy to be met, and a second time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is relatively difficult to be met can be set.Specifically, the second time-saving state, which is advantageous to the player, is more likely to be set when the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving state in the time-saving state winning judgment (time-saving lottery) than when the time-saving state is set based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

This allows players to be interested not only in whether or not the time-saving state is set, but also in what time-saving setting trigger the time-saving state is set based on.

First, the game content in the normal state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 362, the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example has a first ball entrance 64 provided in a position where a game ball that has flowed down the game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 can enter the game area (left hitting area) where a game ball launched by left hitting game can flow down, and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first special symbol lottery is executed. On the other hand, even if a right hitting game is performed in the normal state, in the normal state where a low probability state of a normal symbol is set, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is low (1/240), and it is difficult to cause the game ball to flow into the operating device 3070, so it is difficult to cause the game ball to enter the right first ball entrance 3064 or the second ball entrance 3065. Therefore, in the normal state, left hitting game is an advantageous game for the player.

In the first special symbol lottery, a jackpot lottery (jackpot winning judgment) is executed with a probability of winning the jackpot at 27/8192, and a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) is executed with a probability of winning the time-saving lottery at 1/8192. Here, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, jackpot A or jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, and when jackpot A (selection rate 70%) is set, a special state (space mode) is set after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, when jackpot B (selection rate 30%) is set, a first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the probability change state (space mode), a high probability state for normal symbols is set, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is high (239/240), so it is easy to play a game in which the game ball flows into the actuator 3070 by playing from the right, and the game ball enters one of the non-electrically operated ports, resulting in the game being entered into the right first ball entry port 3064 or the second ball entry port 3065. Therefore, during the probability change state (space mode), playing from the right is an advantageous game for the player.

During the high probability state (space mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to easily enter the special pattern 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, so the first special pattern lottery is basically executed. If a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, as described above, the jackpot type is set to jackpot A or jackpot B, so if jackpot A (selection rate 70%) is set, the high probability state (space mode) is set again after the jackpot game ends, and if jackpot B (selection rate 30%) is set, the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the first time-saving state (challenge mode), a high probability state for normal symbols is set, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is high (239/240), so similar to the special probability state described above, it becomes a state in which it is easy to execute a game in which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 by playing from the right, and the game ball enters one of the non-electric operating ports, thereby entering the right first ball entry port 3064 or the second ball entry port 3065. Therefore, during the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), right-hitting play is an advantageous game for the player.

During the first time-saving state (challenge mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to easily enter the special pattern 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, so the second special symbol lottery is basically executed. If a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type is set to jackpot A or jackpot C, and if jackpot A (selection rate 10%) is set, the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if jackpot C (selection rate 90%) is set, the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

During the second time-saving state (heaven mode), a high probability state for normal symbols is set, similar to the first time-saving state (challenge mode) described above, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery is high (239/240). As a result, similar to the above-mentioned probability-changing state, it becomes a state in which it is easy to execute a game in which the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 by right-hand hitting and enters one of the non-electric operating ports, thereby entering the right first ball entrance 3064 or the second ball entrance 3065. Therefore, during the first time-saving state (time-saving A mode), right-hand hitting is an advantageous game for the player.

During the second time-saving state (heaven mode), the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 is configured to easily enter the special pattern 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, so the second special symbol lottery is basically executed. If a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type is set to jackpot A or jackpot C, and if jackpot A (selection rate 10%) is set, the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if jackpot C (selection rate 90%) is set, the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set after the jackpot game ends.

Here, in this ninth control example, the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are configured to differ in the ease with which the time-saving end condition is met, and the first time-saving state is configured to be more easily met than the second time-saving state. Specifically, the first time-saving state is configured to have a time-saving end condition that is met when the total number of lotteries, which is the sum of the number of times the first special pattern lottery is performed and the number of times the second special pattern lottery is performed, reaches 10, as the time-saving end condition for terminating the time-saving state, and if the time-saving end condition is met without a jackpot game being performed, the game state transitions to the normal state.

On the other hand, the second time-saving state has a time-saving end condition that is established when the total number of draws, which is the sum of the number of times the first special pattern draw is performed and the number of times the second special pattern draw is performed, reaches 10,000, and if the time-saving end condition is established without a jackpot game being played, the game state transitions to the normal state. In this eighth control example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special pattern draw is configured to be approximately 27/8192, so when the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state will essentially continue until the next jackpot is won.

<About the performance content in the 9th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 363 and Fig. 364, among various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this ninth control example, characteristic effects will be described. Specifically, the contents of the time-saving winning effect for indicating the time-saving winning during the normal state and the contents of the effect mode screen corresponding to each game state will be described. Note that the same elements as those in each of the above-mentioned embodiments will be given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 363(a), the content of the presentation when the time-saving symbol is hit (time-saving win) in the normal state will be explained. FIG. 363(a) is a diagram showing an example of what is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time-saving symbol is hit (time-saving win) in the normal state.

In this ninth control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed only during the normal state. Specifically, if the result of the special pattern lottery executed during the normal state is not a jackpot (is a miss), it is possible to determine whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won, and the time-saving lottery is won with a low probability of 1/8192 when the special pattern lottery is executed. If the time-saving lottery is won, the time-saving state (second time-saving state) is set after the special pattern fluctuation is stopped to show the result of the target special pattern lottery. Here, in this ninth control example, the second time-saving state is configured to be the most advantageous game state for the player, so that a player playing during the normal state can aim to win the time-saving lottery while also aiming to win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery.

If the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern lottery, an image of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 going black is displayed, as shown in FIG. 363(a). In this eighth control example, as in each of the control examples described above, the presence or absence of a time-saving feature win is not taken into consideration when determining (selecting) the variation pattern of the special pattern variation. Specifically, the variation pattern is determined so that the result of the special pattern lottery corresponds to a miss, regardless of whether or not the time-saving feature is won.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for players to predict whether or not they will win the time-saving feature based on the variation pattern of the special symbol variation that is executed. Also, as with each of the control examples described above, if the result of the special symbol lottery in the normal state is a miss, a variation pattern with a different variation time is selected, so that the variation pattern of the special symbol variation that wins the time-saving feature will also be set to a different variation time.

Furthermore, as in this ninth control example, by configuring the display to continue to display a specific image (blackout image) as a variation effect corresponding to the special pattern variation indicating that a time-saving win has been won until a command to stop the special pattern is received, even if a variation pattern with a different variation time is selected, the process of determining the variation effect corresponding to the time-saving win as the variation effect set by the voice lamp control device 113 can be simplified.

In this ninth control example, the display screen shown in FIG. 363(a) is always displayed as the variable effect corresponding to the time-saving win (the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the special pattern is changing), thereby reducing the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113. However, without being limited to this, for example, as the variable effect corresponding to the time-saving win, a variable effect (variable effect to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss) based on a variable pattern command (variable pattern command indicating a miss win) output from the main control device 110 may be set, and a blackout image may be displayed from a specific timing during the execution period of the set variable effect (for example, the timing when 5 seconds have passed since the variable effect was executed, the timing when the performance mode of the variable effect progresses (reach display timing), or the timing when the third pattern is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a miss).

By configuring it in this way, while the variable presentation is being executed to indicate that the special pattern lottery result is a miss, that is, during the period when the player's motivation to play is likely to decrease, the player can be notified that he or she will be granted the most advantageous benefit (a time-saving win). This makes it possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing even while the variable presentation is being executed, which is likely to result in a miss in the special pattern lottery result.

In addition, as a method of inserting an effect indicating a time-saving win during the execution of a normal variable effect, other than the method of inserting an effect indicating a time-saving win at a specific, predetermined timing as described above, for example, when an operation effect is executed that has the player operate the frame button 22, an effect indicating a time-saving win may be inserted as part of the result of that operation effect. By configuring it in this way, an effect can be executed to notify the player of whether or not a time-saving win has been won based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22), making it possible to motivate the player to operate the operation means.

Next, the content of the presentation during the second time-saving state (heaven mode) will be explained with reference to FIG. 363(b). FIG. 363(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the second time-saving state (heaven mode).

As shown in FIG. 363(b), when the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is set, a background image of heaven is displayed as the background image of the main display area Dm. Then, in the small display area Dm31, the words "Continuation rate 90%" are displayed as a guide to indicate the probability (continuation rate) that the second time-saving state (heaven mode) will be set again if a jackpot is won. Then, in the sub-display area, the comment "Even if it ends, you'll end up in space" is displayed as a guide to explain the game content if the second time-saving state (heaven mode) is not set (does not continue) after a jackpot is won.

In addition, in the small display area Dm32 formed to the left of the main display area Dm, the presentation modes (heaven, space, normal) corresponding to each game state are displayed in an order corresponding to the degree of advantage to the player. In this ninth control example, the more advantageous the game state is to the player, the farther from the ground (higher altitude) the background of the presentation mode is configured to be, and the heaven mode is configured to be set for the most advantageous game state to the player (second time-saving state), and the space mode is configured to be set for the next most advantageous game state to the player (high probability state).

In this way, by associating the appearance of multiple presentation modes with the degree of advantage to the player, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually determine whether the presentation mode displayed to the player is advantageous or not. In addition, the guidance appearance displayed in the small display area Dm32 makes it easier for the player to visually grasp the full range of presentation modes that can be set (switched to), the currently set presentation mode, and the degree of advantage of each presentation mode, so that the player can easily determine whether it is better to continue with the currently set presentation mode or to switch to a more advantageous presentation mode, making it easier to provide the player with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

As shown in FIG. 363(b), during the second time-saving state (heaven mode), the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, and in reality, the condition for ending the time-saving time is met when 10,000 special pattern lotteries have been performed without a jackpot being won in the special pattern lottery, and the game is configured to transition to the normal state. However, since the rate at which 10,000 special pattern lotteries are performed without a jackpot being won in the special pattern lottery is very small, the number of times special pattern lotteries will be performed (remaining number of time-saving times) until the condition for ending the time-saving time is met is not displayed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to believe that the second time-saving state (heaven mode) will continue until the next big win is won. Furthermore, in the unlikely event that the number of remaining time-saving times in the second time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to configure it so that a warning effect is executed that displays a warning image to inform the player that there is a risk that the second time-saving state will end, and the number of remaining time-saving times. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the second time-saving state from ending without any warning, causing confusion to the player.

Next, the contents of the display screen during the high probability state (space mode) will be explained with reference to FIG. 364(a). FIG. 364(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed on the display screen during the high probability state (space mode). As shown in FIG. 364(a), during the high probability state, the system is configured so that the first special symbol lottery is easily executed by right-hitting play, and therefore a display mode (shown by three arrows in the figure) is displayed in the small display area Dm1 to indicate that the first special symbol variation is being executed. A background image that imitates space is displayed as the background image of the main display area Dm, and the words "space mode" are displayed as a guide mode to indicate the current presentation mode.

Then, in the small display area Dm31, the characters "Continuation rate 70%" are displayed as a guide mode to indicate the probability (continuation rate) that the probability of the special symbol lottery being set again after the big win game ends. In addition, in the small display area Dm32, a display mode is displayed to inform the player that the current game state is a probability of the special symbol lottery in an easy-to-understand manner. The game state in which the space mode is set, that is, the probability of the special symbol lottery being set, is configured so that the probability of the special symbol lottery being set is high (1/60), and the probability of the special symbol lottery being set continues until the next big win is won. In other words, when the probability of the special symbol lottery being set (space mode) is set, a game advantageous to the player (a game in which it is easy to execute the special symbol lottery) will continue to be executed until the next big win game is executed, as in the case where the second time-saving state (heaven mode) described above is set, so that the game state is advantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 364(b), the content of the presentation executed when the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set will be described. FIG. 364(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the first time-saving state (challenge mode). As shown in FIG. 364(b), when the first time-saving state (challenge mode) is set, a presentation is executed to gradually increase the altitude (altitude) using the rocket 1851. Then, a display mode is displayed in the small display area Dm8 to indicate the remaining number of times for the second special symbol lottery (10 times) executed during the first time-saving state, and the comment "Deliver it to heaven" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, and a presentation corresponding to a game aimed at winning a jackpot is executed by the second special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state.

In other words, during the first time-saving state, a variation effect is executed in which the degree of ascent of the rocket 1851 is varied based on the result of the second special symbol lottery, and if a jackpot is won, an effect is executed in which the rocket 1851 reaches heaven. Then, if the lottery result of the second special symbol variation that satisfies the condition for ending the time-saving state of the first time-saving state, i.e., the final time-saving variation, is a miss, an effect is executed in which the rocket 1851 breaks down and falls to the normal background (for example, the ground), and the player is informed that the normal state will be set after the first time-saving state ends.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol drawing executed during the first time-saving state, an effect is executed in which the rocket 1851 wanders through space and transitions to space mode. By configuring it in this way, during challenge mode, the effect can be continuously executed for a period spanning the period in which multiple special symbol drawing are executed, so that an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be provided.

<Electrical configuration in the ninth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 365 to Fig. 375. The ninth control example differs from the pachinko machine of the fifth control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 have been changed, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to Figs. 365 to 367. Fig. 365(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this ninth control example. As shown in Fig. 365(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in this ninth control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the fifth control example described above (see Fig. 244(a)) in that the first win random number 9 table 202ha is provided instead of the first win random number 5 table 202da, the big win type selection 9 table 202hb is provided instead of the first win type selection 5 table 202db, and the normal win type selection 9 table 202hf and the time-saving win random number table 202he are added.

The normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf is a data table that is referenced to determine the normal winning type when a winning (normal winning) occurs in the lottery for a normal symbol. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 367(b), but when a winning occurs in the lottery for a normal symbol, this normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf is referenced to determine the game state at the time of the winning and the normal winning type that corresponds to the value of the acquired normal winning type counter C6. The contents specified in this normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf will be described later with reference to FIG. 367.

Here, the regular winning type counter C6 is a counter whose value is periodically updated by the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, just like other counters (such as the first winning random number counter C1). Specifically, each time the timer interrupt process is executed, the value of the regular winning type counter C6 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (99 in this embodiment), it is cleared to the minimum value of 0. In other words, the value of the regular winning type counter C6 is updated while looping through the range of "0 to 99". The updated value is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. When a regular winning is won, the regular winning type counter C6 stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203 is read out and referenced when determining the regular winning type.

Next, the first win random number 9 table 202ha in this ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 365(b). FIG. 365(b) shows the contents of the first win random number 9 table 202ha in this ninth control example.

As shown in FIG. 365(b), the first win random number 9 table 202ha differs from the above-mentioned first win random number 5 table 202da (see FIG. 245(a)) in that the range of values of the first win random number counter C1 that are determined to be a jackpot win is different. In addition, in this ninth control example, the range of possible values of the first win random number counter C1 is different. Specifically, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, the range of possible values of the first win random number counter C1 is specified as 900 values from "0 to 899", but in this ninth control example, it is specified as 8192 values from "0 to 8191". By configuring in this manner, it is possible to specify a lower probability of judgment result in various judgments that are determined by referring to the value of the first win random number counter C1. In this ninth control example, only the range of possible values of the first win random number counter C1 is different, and the process for updating the value of the first win random number counter C1 and the configuration for storing the updated value are the same, so detailed explanations are omitted.

Specifically, when the probability state of the special symbol is "low probability," the lottery result is defined as "jackpot" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1 in the range of "0 to 26," and as "miss" for the range of "27 to 8191." When the probability state of the special symbol is "high probability," the lottery result is defined as "jackpot" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1 in the range of "0 to 136," and as "miss" for the range of "137 to 8191."

In other words, when the probability state of the special symbol is "low probability," the first random win counter C1 has 8192 possible values, of which 27 are determined to be jackpots, so the probability of winning the jackpot is 27/8192 (approximately 1/300). On the other hand, when the probability state of the special symbol is "high probability," the first random win counter C1 has 8192 possible values, of which 137 are determined to be jackpots, so the probability of winning the jackpot is 137/8192 (approximately 1/60).

Next, referring to FIG. 366(a), the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 366(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb. As shown in FIG. 366(a), the jackpot type selection 9 table 202hb has two types of jackpot types, A9 and B9, corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1), and two types of jackpot types, A9 and C9, corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2).

As shown in FIG. 366(a), for the type of special symbol, Special Symbol 1 (first special symbol), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 69" is associated with "jackpot A9", which is specified. This "jackpot A9" is a jackpot type (9-round winning jackpot) with 9 rounds and a winning state set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 70 are "jackpot A9", so the probability of "jackpot A9" being determined when a jackpot is drawn for the first special symbol is 70% (70/100).

As shown in FIG. 366(a), for the first special symbol, the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from 70 to 99 is specified as corresponding to "jackpot B9". This "jackpot B9" is a jackpot type (9-round first time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 and the first time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 30 counter values that become "jackpot B9", so the probability that "jackpot B9" will be determined when a jackpot is drawn for the first special symbol is 30% (30/100).

In addition, for the special pattern type, special pattern 2 (second special pattern), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9" is associated with "jackpot A9", which is specified. This "jackpot A9" is a jackpot type (9-round guaranteed jackpot) with 9 rounds and a guaranteed jackpot state set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 10 counter values that are "jackpot A9", so the probability that "jackpot A9" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special pattern is 10% (10/100).

As shown in FIG. 366(a), for the second special symbol, the value range of the first winning type counter C2 from 10 to 99 is associated with "jackpot C9", which is stipulated. This "jackpot C9" is a jackpot type (9-round second time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 9 and the second time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 90 are "jackpot C9", so the probability that "jackpot C9" will be determined when a jackpot is drawn for the second special symbol is 90% (90/100).

Next, the detailed contents of the time-saving random number 9 table 202he will be explained with reference to FIG. 366(b). FIG. 366(b) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 9 table 202he. This time-saving random number 9 table 202he differs from the time-saving random number 5 table 202ge in the fifth control example described above in that it has a different value for the first winning random number counter C1 that can win the time-saving prize, and it stipulates a value for the first winning random number counter C1 that can also win the time-saving prize in the second special pattern lottery, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

Specifically, when the normal state is set, a judgment value is specified for judging a time-saving win when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "8192" in both the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery. In other words, in this ninth control example, the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state is configured to have a probability of 1/8192 for a time-saving win. Note that when a time-saving win is won, the second time-saving type (time-saving B) is always set, so after a time-saving win is won, the state transitions to the second time-saving state (heaven mode).

Next, the details of the normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf will be explained with reference to FIG. 367. FIG. 367 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf. This normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf is a data table that is referenced when determining the normal winning type that is set when a winning normal symbol lottery is won, and different normal winning types (normal winning A, normal winning B) are defined in correspondence with the set game state and the acquired value of the normal winning type counter C6.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 367, when the game state is "high probability" or "first time reduction" and the acquired value of the normal winning type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 99", "normal winning type A" is determined as the normal winning type, and when the game state is "second time reduction" and the acquired value of the normal winning type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 99", "normal winning type B" is determined as the normal winning type.

Now, the details of the normal winning type will be explained. In this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3071 in a normal winning game is different when a low probability state of a normal pattern is set and when a high probability state of a normal pattern is set, and the period during which the normal electric device 3071 is in an open state in one normal winning game is shorter when a low probability state of a normal pattern is set than when a high probability state of a normal pattern is set. This makes it easier to get a game ball into the operating device 3070 in a high probability state of a normal pattern than in a low probability state of a normal pattern.

As described above, the inside of the operating device 3070 is provided with the special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a for operating the special symbol 1 non-electric device 3064a associated with the right first ball entrance 3064 from a closed state to an open state, and the special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b for operating the special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a associated with the second ball entrance 3065 from a closed state to an open state. Therefore, a state in which it is easy for game balls to flow into the operating device 3070 (high probability state of normal symbols) is a game state in which it is easier to execute the lottery for special symbols than a state in which it is difficult for game balls to flow into the operating device 3070 (low probability state of normal symbols), resulting in a game state that is advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, in the time-saving state in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set, different time-saving types can be set, and the selection ratio of the normal symbol winning type, which is determined when a normal symbol lottery is won, is configured to differ depending on the time-saving type that has been set. In this ninth control example, as shown in FIG. 367(b), "Normal symbol winning A" and "Normal symbol winning B" are selectable as normal symbol winning types.

The length of the period (opening period) from when a normal winning game is executed to when the normal electric device 3071 opens is made different between when "normal winning A" is determined as the normal winning type and when "normal winning B" is determined. This is done without changing the length of the period during which the normal electric device 3071 opens during one normal winning game. In other words, regardless of which normal winning type is determined, a normal winning game that is more likely to cause game balls to flow into the operating device 3070 than a normal winning game that is executed in a normal state (a state with a low probability of a normal pattern) is executed, but the timing of the game balls flowing into the operating device 3070 is configured to be different depending on the determined normal winning type. By varying the inflow timing, it is possible to execute a normal winning game in which the game balls flowing into the operating device 3070 are more likely to enter the special pattern 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, and a normal winning game in which the game balls flowing into the operating device 3070 are more likely to enter the special pattern 2 non-electric operating port 3073b.

Specifically, when "normal hit A" is set as the normal hit type, the opening period of the normal hit game is set so that the movable piece 3072 is likely to be in an open state during the period in which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can reach the movable piece 3072, and when "normal hit B" is set, the opening period of the normal hit game is set so that the movable piece 3072 is likely to be in a closed state during the period in which the game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 can reach the movable piece 3072.

In addition, in this ninth control example, as described above with reference to Figures 360 and 361, as a normal winning game, a normal winning game (normal winning game of normal winning A) in which a game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 enters the special chart 1 non-electric operating port 3073a, and a normal winning game (normal winning game of normal winning B) in which a game ball that has flowed into the operating device 3070 enters the special chart 2 non-electric operating port 3073b are configured to be executable, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, a normal winning game During the opening period in which the normal electric device 3071 is in the open state, if the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 during the first period, the game ball can enter the special figure 2 non-electric operating port 3073b, and if the game ball flows into the operating device 3070 during a second period different from the first period, the game ball can enter the special figure 1 non-electric operating port 3073a. A normal winning game (for example, a normal winning type "normal winning C") may be executed.

By configuring it in this way, the non-electrically operated port (specially 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a, specially 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b) into which the game ball can enter is not determined according to the set normal winning type, but rather the non-electrically operated port (specially 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a, specially 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b) into which the game ball can enter is determined according to the flow-down situation of the game ball (the timing of the game ball entering the operating device 3070, the flow-down speed and flow-down path within the operating device 3070, etc.), making it difficult for the player to understand which special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery, second special pattern lottery) is more likely to be executed until the game ball enters which non-electrically operated port (specially 1 non-electrically operated port 3073a, specially 2 non-electrically operated port 3073b).

In this ninth control example, as shown in FIG. 367, the contents of the normal winning type selection 9 table 202hf are stipulated so that the normal winning type is reliably different depending on the set game state, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the normal winning type B to be selectable even when the second time-saving state is not set, to the extent that the normal winning type B is more likely to be selected when the second time-saving state is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which the second special pattern lottery is suddenly executed in a high probability state of normal patterns in which the first special pattern lottery is mainly executed, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with an element of surprise in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 368, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 368 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 368, the configuration of the RAM 203 in this ninth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 244(b)) in that a special chart 2 variation count counter 203pa has been added. The rest of the configuration is the same as the configuration of the RAM 203 in the fifth control example described above, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The jackpot type storage area 203eb is a memory area for temporarily storing data indicating the type of jackpot that has been won when a jackpot has been won. When a jackpot is won by drawing a special pattern, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in this jackpot type storage area 203eb. The data stored in this jackpot type storage area 203eb is retained until the end of the jackpot that was won, and is used to set the game state after the end of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. Note that the detailed contents of the jackpot type storage area 203eb are the same as those described above in the ninth embodiment, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 369(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 369(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 369(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in this ninth control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the fifth control example described above only in that an expectation selection table 222pa is added. This expectation selection table 222pa is a data table referenced to determine the presentation mode (expectation suggested by the presentation) of the mode type suggestion presentation (see FIG. 791(b)) for suggesting to the player whether the "time-saving A1" in which the second special symbol selection is relatively difficult to perform or the "time-saving A2" in which the second special symbol selection is relatively easy to perform is set in the time-saving type "time-saving A", that is, in the state in which the time-saving state in which the first special symbol selection is mainly performed is set.

As described above, in this ninth control example, "time-saving A" can be set as a time-saving state in which the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery. Furthermore, as "time-saving A", either "time-saving A1" in which the second special symbol lottery is relatively difficult to execute, or "time-saving A2" in which it is relatively easy to execute, can be set. When "time-saving A" is set, a common mode presentation (time-saving A mode) is executed regardless of which time-saving type (time-saving A1, time-saving A2) is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a player who has had the time-saving A mode presentation executed with the fun of predicting whether the set time-saving type is "time-saving A1" or "time-saving A2." In addition, because the mode suggestion presentation is configured to be executable while the time-saving A mode presentation is being executed, it is possible to provide the player with an element for predicting the time-saving type (time-saving A1, time-saving A2) that is actually set while the time-saving A mode presentation is being executed.

Here, the details of the expectation selection table 222pa will be described with reference to FIG. 369(b). FIG. 369(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the expectation selection table 222pa. As shown in FIG. 369(b), the expectation selection table 222pa specifies the type of expectation (the expectation for which the time-saving type A2 is set) and the range of the value of the performance selection counter 223ea in correspondence with each other for each time-saving type. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 369(b), for the time-saving type "time-saving A1" (a time-saving type among time-saving A with a relatively low probability of executing the second special symbol selection), the value of the performance selection counter 223ea is specified in the range of "0 to 4" in correspondence with a performance mode for high expectation, in the range of "5 to 49" in correspondence with a performance mode for medium expectation, and in the range of "50 to 99" in correspondence with a performance mode for low expectation.

The performance selection counter 223ea can take 100 values from 0 to 99, so when the time-saving type is A1, the probability that the performance modes for high expectation, medium expectation, and low expectation are determined is 5% (5/100), 45% (45/100), and 50% (50/100), respectively.

As shown in FIG. 369(b), for the time-saving type "Time-saving A2" (a time-saving type among time-saving A types with a relatively high probability of executing the second special symbol lottery), a high expectation level presentation mode is defined in association with the value of the performance lottery counter 223ea in the range of "0 to 19", a medium expectation level presentation mode (not shown) is defined in association with the range of "20 to 79", and a low expectation level presentation mode is defined in association with the range of "80 to 99".

The performance selection counter 223eka can take 100 values from "0 to 99", so the percentages at which the performance modes for high expectation, medium expectation, and low expectation are determined when the time-saving A2 is selected are 20% (20/100), 60% (60/100), and 20% (20/100), respectively. From these provisions, it can be said that the performance modes for high expectation are more likely to be selected when the time-saving A2 is set, but are more difficult to select when the time-saving A1 is set. In addition, the performance modes for medium expectation are selected at a relatively high rate when either the time-saving A1 or the time-saving A2 is set, and the performance modes for low expectation are less likely to be selected when the time-saving A2 is set, but are more likely to be selected when the time-saving A1 is selected. Therefore, when a high expectation performance mode is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time-saving type is likely to be time-saving A2, while when a low expectation performance mode is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time-saving type is likely to be time-saving A1. Also, when a medium expectation performance mode is executed, it is possible to suggest that the set time-saving type may be either time-saving A1 or time-saving A2. This allows the player to predict the expectation of the second special symbol lottery being executed during the time-saving state according to the expectation level suggested by the performance mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 370, the configuration of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this ninth control example will be described. FIG. 370 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 370, the RAM 223 in this ninth control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the fifth control example described above in that a performance selection counter 223ha, a remaining time reduction counter 223hb, a special chart 1 non-electrical open flag 223hc, a special chart 2 non-electrical open flag 223hd, and an initial fluctuation standby flag 223he have been added.

The performance selection counter 223ha is a counter used to select one performance mode (expectation level type) from the expectation level selection table 222pa described above. The value of this performance selection counter 223ha is updated within the range of "0 to 99". When selecting a performance mode (expectation level type) for a special small win performance, a random number value (counter value) specified in the expectation level selection table 222pa is compared with the value of this performance selection counter 223ha, and one corresponding performance mode (expectation level type) is selected. This performance selection counter 223ha is updated every 1 ms, for example, in the main process 17 (see FIG. 807).

The remaining time-saving count counter 223hb is a counter for measuring the number of remaining time-saving times during the time-saving state.

The special chart 1 non-electric open flag 223hc is a flag for indicating that the special chart 1 non-electric device 3064a is in operation. It is a flag that is set to on when the special chart 1 non-electric device 3064a is in the open state (operating), and is set to off when the special chart 1 non-electric device 3064a is in the closed state (not operating).

The special chart 2 non-electric open flag 223hd is a flag for indicating that the special chart 2 non-electric device 3065a is in operation. It is a flag that is set to on when the special chart 2 non-electric device 3065a is in the open state (operating) and is set to off when the special chart 2 non-electric device 3065a is in the closed state (not operating).

The initial change waiting flag 223he is a flag for indicating the period from the end of the jackpot game until the first special pattern change is executed, and is set to ON when the jackpot game ends. Then, it is set to OFF when the first special pattern change is executed after the end of the jackpot game. In other words, it is a flag that is set to ON from the end of the jackpot game until the first special pattern change is executed.

This initial change waiting flag 223he is referenced when determining the period for which the game instruction screen displayed at the end of a jackpot game will continue to be displayed.

In this control example, the initial change standby flag 223he is set to OFF when the first special pattern lottery is executed after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the type of special pattern executed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the time-saving type of the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game is "time-saving A", the period during which the initial change standby flag 223he is set to ON may be set to the period until the first first special pattern change is executed, and if the time-saving type is "time-saving B", the period during which the initial change standby flag 223he is set to ON may be set to the period until the first second special pattern change is executed. In other words, the special pattern change type for setting the initial change standby flag 223he to OFF may be configured to be different depending on the time-saving type of the time-saving state to be set, and the initial change standby flag 223he may be configured to be set to ON until the special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern type mainly executed depending on the time-saving type to be set is executed.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 9th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 371 to Fig. 375, characteristic contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this ninth control example will be described. Note that detailed description of the same contents as the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above will be omitted. Also, among the control processing that is the same as the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example described above, some control processing is given different symbols for convenience of explanation, but detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

Figure 371 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination process 9 (S54112). This command determination process 9 (S54112) differs from the command determination process described above in that if it is determined that a status command has been received (S4309: Yes), then status command process 9 is executed (S54301), and if it is determined that a time-saving related command has been received (54303: Yes), then time-saving related process 9 is executed (S54304). All other aspects are the same.

Now, the contents of status command processing 9 (S54301) will be explained with reference to FIG. 372. FIG. 372 is a flowchart showing the contents of status command processing 9 (S54301). This status command processing 9 (S54301) is processing that is executed when a status command is included in the commands received from the main control device 110, and it executes processing for setting the presentation mode based on the game state set by the main control device 110, and processing for setting the remaining number of time-saving operations (time-saving end conditions) when a time-saving state is set.

When the state command process 9 (S54301) is executed, first, it is determined whether a command indicating the game state has been received (S54351), and if it is determined that it has been received (S54351: Yes), the game state update process 9 is executed (S54352), and the process proceeds to S54353. Also, if it is determined that it has not been received (S54351: No), next, it is determined whether a command indicating the setting of the number of time-saving times has been received (S54353), and if it is determined that it has been received (S54353: Yes), the time-saving type stored in the game state storage area 223i is read (S54354), and it is determined whether the read time-saving type is "time-saving A" (S54355), and if it is determined that it is "time-saving A" (S54355: Yes), the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223pa is set to "10000", and the process proceeds to S54358. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time reduction is not "time reduction A" (it is "time reduction B") (S54355: No), the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223hb is set to 10 (S54357), and the process proceeds to S54358.

In other words, the remaining number of time-saving times (time-saving end condition) corresponding to the time-saving type is set in the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223hb (S54356, S54357). Here, the set value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223hb is displayed as the remaining number of time-saving times in the small area Dm6 displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 when the time-saving state is set. Note that in this ninth control example, the remaining time-saving number counter 223hb is configured to be set to a value of "10000" as the time-saving end condition for the second time-saving state. In other words, the time-saving end condition is configured to be set when no jackpot is won in 10,000 special pattern lotteries.

In this case, the special pattern lottery in the time-saving state has a probability of 27/8192 for winning the jackpot, so in effect, the jackpot will almost certainly be won before the time-saving end condition is met. Therefore, when the second time-saving state is set, the process of updating and displaying the remaining number of time-saving times on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is not executed until the value of the remaining time-saving times counter 223hb reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 100), and instead the character "∞" is continuously displayed.

By configuring it in this way, during periods when the player is not interested in the number of remaining time-saving times in the time-saving state (periods when many time-saving times remain), it is possible to eliminate the need to execute a process to update the display mode indicating the number of remaining time-saving times each time a special pattern lottery is executed, thereby reducing the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113.

In this case, after a jackpot is won, the number of times the special symbol lottery was performed in the current second time-saving state may be displayed to the player as part of the result display. This configuration makes it easier for the player to analyze the game they actually performed.

In this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that can set a high probability state for normal symbols by varying the type of special symbol lottery that is mainly executed, by configuring the element for achieving the time-saving end condition that is mainly likely to be achieved to be set to the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223hb, the process for updating and displaying the remaining number of times of time-saving can be performed based on the update content for the value of the remaining time-saving number counter 223hb, and the process for updating the display mode indicating the remaining number of times of time-saving can be simplified.

In the processing of S54358, processing corresponding to other information contained in the status command is executed (S54358), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of game status update process 9 (S54352) will be explained with reference to FIG. 373. FIG. 373 is a flowchart showing the contents of game status update process 9 (S54352). This game status update process 9 (S54352) is executed when a command indicating a game status is received in state command process 9 (see S54301 in FIG. 372), and processing is executed based on the game status before the transition and the game status after the transition.

When game status update process 9 (S54352) is executed, first, information indicating the current game status is stored in the game status storage area 223i based on the currently received status command (S4401), and it is determined whether a transition to the normal status has occurred (S54401). In the process of S54401, if it is determined that a transition to the normal status has occurred, i.e., if it is determined that the currently received status command contains a command indicating the normal status (S54401: Yes), the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223hb is cleared to 0 (S54402).

Next, it is determined whether there is a reserved special pattern 2 (reserved memory of the second special pattern) (S54404), and if it is determined that there is no reserved special pattern 2 (S54404: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S54404 that there is a reserved special chart 2 (S54404: Yes), a display command is set to show the number of pullback effects corresponding to the number of reserved special charts 2 (S54405), and this processing ends.

In other words, in the processing from S54404 to S54405, if special symbol 2 reservation has been acquired at the end of "Time-saving A (Time-saving A mode)", in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed, processing is executed to execute a special effect (pull-back effect) for the second special symbol lottery, which is executed with priority after the transition to the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that a special state is occurring while the pull-back effect is being performed.

If it is determined in the process of S54401 that the transition is not to the normal state (S54401: No), then it is determined whether the transition is to the time-saving state (S54406), and if it is determined that the transition is not to the time-saving state (S54406: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the transition is to a time-saving state (S54406: Yes), the initial fluctuation standby flag 223he is set to on (S54407), a display command corresponding to the time-saving type is set (S54408), and this process ends.

In other words, in the above-mentioned processing of S54407 and S54408, when the jackpot game ends and the time-saving state is set, processing is executed to continue displaying the game explanation screen that was displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game even after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the contents of time-saving related process 9 (S54304) will be explained with reference to FIG. 374. FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing the contents of time-saving related process 9 (S54304). In this time-saving related process 9 (S54304), a process is executed to determine the presentation mode based on a special pattern lottery executed during the time-saving state.

When time-saving related process 9 (S54304) is executed, first, the current time-saving type is read from the game status storage area 223i (S54601). Next, it is determined whether the current time-saving type is "Time-saving A" (S54602), and if it is determined that the current time-saving type is "Time-saving A" (S54602: Yes), it is determined whether the received command is a command related to special pattern 2 variation (related to the execution of the second special pattern variation) (S54603).

If it is determined in the process of S54603 that the change is related to the special chart 2 change (S54603: Yes), then the value of the subordinate special chart 2 change count counter 223pb is incremented by 1 (S54604), and it is determined whether the value of the subordinate special chart 2 change count counter 203pb after the increment is greater than 5 (S54605). If it is determined in the process of S54505 that the value is greater than 5 (S545605: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the number of special chart 2 changes has exceeded the upper limit (S54606), and the process proceeds to S54609.

When a display command is set in the processing of S54606, a display mode is set to celebrate the fact that more second special pattern lotteries have been performed in a time-saving state in which time-saving A, in which it is difficult to perform a second special pattern lottery, has been set than the time-saving end condition set for time-saving B, which is "five times the second special pattern lottery has been performed."

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S54602 that the time-saving type read this time is not "Time-saving A" (S54602: No), this process ends.

In the process of S54609, the value of the remaining time reduction counter 223hb is updated based on the received information (S54609), a display command is set to show the updated value of the remaining time reduction counter 223hb (S54610), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of the non-electric status management process (S54102) will be explained with reference to FIG. 375. FIG. 375 is a flowchart showing the contents of the non-electric status management process (S54102). In this non-electric status management process (S54102), a process is executed to manage the operating status of the special figure 1 non-electric role 3064a and the special figure 2 non-electric role 3065a based on a detection signal output from a detection means provided in the pachinko machine 10.

Conventionally, there has been a pachinko machine that is provided with a ball entry means that can execute a lottery (for example, a special symbol lottery) when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and a variable means (for example, a normal electric device) that can be changed between a first position (open state) where the game ball can be entered into the ball entry means, and a second position (closed state) where it is more difficult to enter the game ball than the first position, and that is configured to execute a game of entering the ball into the ball entry means by varying the variable means in response to a winning game (for example, a normal symbol winning game that is executed when a winning game is won in the normal symbol lottery).

Furthermore, there are pachinko machines that are configured to be able to set advantageous game states in which a winning game is likely to be executed or the period during which the variable means is likely to be positioned at the first position during one winning game is likely to be long, that is, advantageous game states (e.g., time-saving states) that make it easier for game balls to enter the ball entry means.

In conventional pachinko machines configured in this way, when a favorable game state is set, it is easier to get the game ball to enter the ball entry means compared to when a game state other than the favorable game state (for example, the normal state) is set, so the player can be motivated to play while hoping that a favorable game state will be set.

However, in conventional pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the ball entry means, only one type of lottery is executed. If the contents of the lottery are excessively advantageous to the player, the player will be provided with an excessively advantageous game when an advantageous game state is set. On the other hand, if the contents of the lottery are not very advantageous to the player, it becomes difficult for the player to play with enthusiasm in the hope of setting an advantageous game state.

It is also possible to set the lottery content to be more advantageous to the player and to use specifications that lower the frequency with which an advantageous game state is set, i.e., the frequency with which a game state is set that allows the player to easily get the game ball into the ball entry means, but in this case, the playing period required until the advantageous game state is set becomes longer, and there is a problem that players who are playing in a game state other than the advantageous game state become bored with the game before the advantageous game state is set.

In contrast to this, in the present ninth control example, when a game ball enters a ball entry means that has become easier for the game ball to enter due to the setting of an advantageous game state, multiple types of lotteries are more likely to be executed. The degree of advantage to the player is made different for the multiple types of lotteries that are more likely to be executed.

More specifically, it is configured so that depending on the behavior (flow result) of the game ball that entered the ball entry means, it is possible to execute (make it easier to execute) a first special pattern lottery with a low degree of advantage, or a second special pattern lottery with a high degree of advantage. By configuring it in this way, a favorable game state (time-saving state) is set to provide a player with a predetermined period of time during which it is easier to execute a special pattern lottery, but by switching the type of special pattern lottery that is executed (made easier to execute) during that period, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage of the bonus granted to the player during the favorable game state (time-saving state), and therefore it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an overly advantageous game.

Furthermore, as described above in detail with reference to FIG. 356, in this ninth control example, within an area (within the operating device 3070) where game balls are likely to enter during a normal winning game that is executed when a winning normal symbol lottery is won, there are provided a special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a which triggers the operation of the special symbol 1 non-electric device 3064a, and a special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b which triggers the operation of the special symbol 2 non-electric device 3065a, and the game ball is configured to be distributed to either the special symbol 1 non-electric operating port 3073a or the special symbol 2 non-electric operating port 3073b according to the operation pattern of the normal winning game.

When the game ball enters the special pattern 1 non-electric operation port 3073a, the special pattern 1 non-electric device 3064a is activated, making it easier for the game ball to enter the right first ball entrance 3064, which is the trigger for the execution of the first special pattern lottery, and when the game ball enters the special pattern 2 non-electric operation port 3073b, the special pattern 2 non-electric device 3065a is activated, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 3065, which is the trigger for the execution of the second special pattern lottery. Furthermore, it is configured so that the second special pattern lottery is more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery, and it is configured so that when both the special pattern 1 non-electric device 3064a and the special pattern 2 non-electric device 3065a are activated, it becomes difficult for the game ball to reach the second ball entrance 3065.

Specifically, the non-electric special device 3064a in operation is configured to block the flow path through which the game ball can reach the second ball entrance 3065. Therefore, when the non-electric special device 3064a in operation and the non-electric special device 3065a in operation, the game ball is more likely to enter the first ball entrance 3064 than the second ball entrance 3065.

Furthermore, in this ninth control example, a termination condition for terminating the advantageous gaming state is set to be satisfied when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed during the advantageous gaming state reaches a predetermined number. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult to execute a game in which only the second special symbol lottery is executed during the advantageous gaming state.

In addition, in this ninth control example, the through gate 67, the normal electric device 3071, the special figure 1 non-electric device 3064a, and the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a are arranged in the right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, so that, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to launch a game ball toward the through gate 67 and the normal electric device 3071 without the game ball reaching each non-electric device. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game by preventing the game ball from entering the right first ball entrance 3064 until a state is reached in which the game ball can enter the second ball entrance 3065 where a lottery advantageous to the player is executed (a state in which the special figure 2 non-electric device 3065a is operating).

In other words, when a game ball is shot toward any of the devices among the through gate 67, the normal electric device 3071, the special device 1 non-electric device 3064a, and the special device 2 non-electric device 3065a, the game ball can enter the other devices. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from performing a game in which the game ball enters only a specific device.

In this ninth control example, the through gate 67, the normal electric device 3071, the special 1 non-electric device 3064a, and the special 2 non-electric device 3065a are all located in the right area of the game board 13, but this is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that at least a plurality of the above-mentioned various devices are arranged in a position where the game ball that has flowed down the same flow path can enter.

<Tenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 376 to Fig. 395. The tenth control example, like the seventh control example described above, is configured to allow a small prize to be won in some cases where the result of the special symbol lottery is not a big prize (miss), and has a gameplay (so-called one-type two-type) in which a big prize game can be played by making a game ball enter a specific area during a small prize game that is executed based on the small prize winning. And, when a time-saving state is set, a time-saving state in which it is easy to acquire a reserved memory of the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2) and a time-saving state in which it is difficult to acquire the reserved memory are configured to be set.

The pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above in that it is configured to be able to store a predetermined number (four) of reserved special charts 2 up to an upper limit, and in that the game state that is set after a jackpot game is executed based on a jackpot win in each game state, or after a jackpot game is executed based on a small jackpot win, is different. It also differs in that the content of the presentation executed during the time-saving state is changed. Below, the differences between this tenth control example and the seventh control example described above will be mainly explained. Note that detailed explanations of the same content as the seventh control example described above will be omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example (including each of the modified examples) described above is configured to be able to set at least the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) as game states, and is configured to open the electric role 640a by the normal symbol winning game (winning game executed when a winning symbol is selected in the normal symbol lottery) executed during the time-saving state, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640.

If the special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery), which is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entry port (winning port) 640, results in a lottery result other than a big win (for example, a small win), a small win game is executed, and if the game ball passes through a specific area during the small win game (if information indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area is stored at the end of the small win game), a big win game is executed. In addition, by configuring the chance of selecting the second special symbol to be reserved and stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4), the chance of selecting the second special symbol is reserved and stored during the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), so that the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed even after the high probability state of normal symbols ends (even after transition to the low probability state of normal symbols). Therefore, for example, even when the time-saving state ends and the game state transitions to the normal state, it is possible to allow the player to play in the normal state (the normal state in which the chance of selecting the second special symbol is reserved and stored), which is more advantageous than normal. Therefore, for a player whose time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, has ended, a state in which the possibility of executing a jackpot game can be increased more than usual can be maintained, and a significant decrease in the player's motivation to play can be suppressed.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 in each of the control examples described above, in order to end the time-saving state for a player who is playing normally during the time-saving state with the player having acquired a chance to select the second special symbol, the probability of winning a normal symbol during the time-saving state is increased and a game with a normal symbol is played with a longer period during which the variable means is opened. Therefore, when the time-saving state ends, the number of chances to select the second special symbol that have already been acquired (number of reserved special symbols 2) always remains the same, which creates a problem in that it is not possible to provide the player with an element of surprise in the game.

In addition, in cases where the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired is always the same when the time-saving state ends, in order to prevent the player from playing a game that is excessively advantageous to the player, it is necessary to pre-set the rate at which the time-saving state is set low, including the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed after the time-saving state ends, or to pre-set the probability of winning a small jackpot in the second special symbol lottery low. This makes it difficult for players to play during the time-saving state, which causes a problem of players losing their motivation to play.

In contrast to this, in the tenth control example, the time-saving state can be set to a time-saving state in which it is easy to obtain a reserved special chart 2 (advantageous time-saving state), and a time-saving state in which it is difficult to obtain a reserved special chart 2 (unfavorable time-saving state). By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily vary the number of reserved special charts 2 at the time when the time-saving state ends depending on the type of the set time-saving state. Therefore, even if the rate at which the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game is increased, it is possible to prevent the player from playing an excessively advantageous game, making it easier for the player to play during the time-saving state, and increasing the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, in this tenth control example, if a jackpot game is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery, an unfavorable time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, and if a jackpot game is executed based on winning a small jackpot in a special pattern lottery, an advantageous time-saving state can be set after the jackpot game ends.

In other words, the advantageous degree of the time-saving state that is set after the end of a jackpot game is set to differ depending on the trigger for the jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in which trigger caused the jackpot game to be executed.

In the tenth control example, as described above, the setting ratio between the advantageous time-saving state and the disadvantageous time-saving state is configured to be different depending on the effective trigger of the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, for example, the setting ratio between the advantageous time-saving state and the disadvantageous time-saving state may be configured to be different depending on the game state at the time when the jackpot game is executed (the game state at the time of winning the jackpot). In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure so that the ratio of the advantageous time-saving state being set is higher when the jackpot game is executed in a state where the time-saving state is set than when the jackpot game is executed in a state where the normal state is set as the game state. As a result, in the game state that is most disadvantageous to the player, even if the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, the disadvantageous time-saving state is likely to be set, so the time-saving state is likely to end. However, if the jackpot game is executed during the time-saving state and the time-saving state is set again, the advantageous time-saving state is likely to be set, so it is possible to make it easier to loop the time-saving state through the jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, the player can be allowed to play games with different degrees of advantage in stages, so that the player can be motivated to play the game with the highest degree of advantage. In the tenth control example, as in each of the above-mentioned control examples, the second special pattern lottery is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first special pattern lottery, so that the time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that is likely to end when the special pattern 2 reservation is acquired is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) that is likely to end when the special pattern 2 reservation is not acquired. However, without being limited to this, for example, the first special pattern lottery may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery, and the time-saving state that is likely to end when the special pattern 2 reservation is not acquired may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state that is likely to end when the special pattern 2 reservation is acquired.

In the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above-mentioned control examples, the number of special symbol variations that ends the time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, can be set to a different number depending on the type of jackpot, making it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state will continue. This allows the player to play while hoping that the time-saving state will continue for a longer period of time.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of each of the above-mentioned control examples, the time-saving state is terminated at the timing when the special pattern change (the special pattern change that satisfies the time-saving end condition) stops during the special pattern change that ends the time-saving state.

In contrast, in the tenth control example, when the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is satisfied, the time-saving state is ended at the start timing of the corresponding special pattern change. Furthermore, as the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, a time-saving end condition that is satisfied by executing the second special pattern change once can be set. In other words, when the time-saving end condition that is satisfied by executing the second special pattern change once is set, the time-saving state continues until the first second special pattern change is executed during the time-saving state, and when the first second special pattern change is executed, for example, when the time-saving state is set in a state where the player does not have the right to draw the second special pattern (special pattern 2 reserved), the time-saving state is ended when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state and the second special pattern lottery is executed.

By configuring it in this way, when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to reliably execute the second special symbol lottery, and to shorten the period for acquiring the reserved special symbol 2 during the time-saving state. In other words, in this tenth control example, the time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is set to be established by executing the second special symbol variation once becomes an unfavorable time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in this tenth control example, a time-saving end condition that is established by the second special symbol variation being executed twice can also be set as a time-saving end condition for terminating the time-saving state. In this case, it is possible to continue the time-saving state until the second second special symbol variation is started, so the period during which the first second special symbol variation occurs is a period in which it is easy to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. In other words, in this tenth control example, the time-saving state in which a time-saving end condition that is established by the second special symbol variation being executed twice is set becomes an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

As described above, in the tenth control example, the time-saving state is ended at the start timing of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, and the time-saving end condition that can be satisfied at the first special pattern change during the time-saving state is set, making it possible to set a time-saving state in which it is difficult to obtain the special pattern 2 reservation (unfavorable time-saving state). However, without being limited to this, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to end the time-saving state at the stop timing of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, as in each of the control examples described above, a short change pattern in which a short change time (e.g., 0.1 seconds) is set and a long change pattern in which a long change time (e.g., 60 seconds) is set may be selected as the change pattern of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to switch between an advantageous time-saving state and an unfavorable time-saving state depending on the selected fluctuation pattern. In other words, when the same time-saving end condition is set as the time-saving end condition of the time-saving state, the ease of acquiring the special chart 2 reservation can be varied depending on the set fluctuation pattern.

Furthermore, in this case, different types of time-saving states can be set according to the game state at the time of winning the big win (or small win), and the selection ratio between the above-mentioned short fluctuation pattern and long fluctuation pattern can be varied depending on the type of time-saving state that is set, or a period during which the short fluctuation pattern is likely to be selected and a period during which the long fluctuation pattern is likely to be selected can be set based on the number of special pattern lotteries that have been executed since the end of the previous big win game.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to switch between an advantageous time-saving state and an unfavorable time-saving state during the period from when one time-saving state is set until the time-saving state ends, so that the player can play while expecting to play in the advantageous time-saving state until the very last moment when the time-saving state ends.

In addition, by combining the technology of this tenth control example with the technology of each of the control examples described above, it may be possible to configure it so that it is possible to end the time-saving state at various times, such as the start timing or stop timing of the special pattern variation executed in the time-saving state. In this way, by configuring it so that the timing of actually ending the time-saving state can be varied when the time-saving end condition is met, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know when the time-saving state will end, thereby providing an element of surprise in the game.

<Configuration of the game board 13 in the tenth control example>
First, referring to Figures 376 to 380, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example differs from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example (see Figure 294) in the above-mentioned seventh control example in that the position and structure of the V winning device 650 that is opened during a small winning game have been changed, the positions of the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 have been changed, the structure of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 has been changed, and the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 has been changed, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 376, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) and a windmill for guiding balls, as well as rails 61, 62, a general ball entry port 63, a first ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal pattern start port (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., to a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion of the board is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1).

The first pattern display device 37 is provided with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display device 37 displays according to the various controls performed by the main control device 110, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In this control example, the first pattern display device 37 is configured to operate when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (wins). In other words, the first pattern display device 37 is a display means for displaying the lottery result of the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64. The first pattern display device 37 is also configured to operate when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (wins). In other words, the first pattern display device 37 is also a display means for displaying the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) that is executed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. In this control example, a pachinko machine 10 with two types of special symbols is used, but this is not limited to this, and a pachinko machine 10 with one type of special symbol may also be used.

The first symbol display device 37 also uses LEDs to indicate the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, normal state, time-saving state, etc.) by the lighting state, whether the special symbol (first symbol) is changing (dynamic display for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols to show the lottery result) by the lighting state, whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a win that is advantageous to the player, a symbol corresponding to a win that is unfavorable to the player, or a miss symbol by the lighting state, and indicates the number of reserved balls by the lighting state, and displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors using a 7-segment display device. It is also configured to be able to indicate by the lighting state that the change of the special symbol is temporarily stopped (interrupted). The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light emission colors (for example, red, green, blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by combining the light emission colors. In this embodiment, the light emitting means (7-segment display device) is configured to indicate various game states by combining light emitting colors, but any configuration that allows the player to distinguish various game states will suffice. For example, the light emitting means may be configured to indicate various game states by varying the length of the period when it is lit and the period when it is off (blinking pattern).

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery (lottery for a special symbol) is held when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (a prize is won). In the lottery for the special symbol, a win/lose determination is made as to whether or not a small prize has been won (a winning lottery). If it is determined that a small prize has been won, a small prize game, which is a special game advantageous to the player, is executed.

During the small win game, the V winning device 650 is opened according to a predetermined content (scenario), providing a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the V winning device 650. If a ball that entered the V winning device 650 during this small win game enters a specific area (V winning port 1650) described below, the big win game is executed after the small win game ends. During this big win game, the variable winning device 65 is opened according to a predetermined content (scenario), providing a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the variable winning device 65.

In this control example, the system is configured so that the total number of prize balls that a player can acquire during a jackpot game is greater than that during a small jackpot game. In other words, in terms of the number of prize balls acquired by the player, a jackpot game is a bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than a small jackpot game. Note that the system may also be configured so that the total number of prize balls that a player can acquire during a small jackpot game is greater than that during a jackpot game. In this way, by configuring the system so that bonuses with different degrees of advantage can be awarded depending on the bonus game being executed, the player can enjoy playing the game while wondering which bonus game will be executed.

In addition, in this control example, when a jackpot game is executed, a game state (e.g., a normal state) different from the game state before the jackpot game is executed is set, and after the jackpot game ends, a new game state can be set based on information related to the executed jackpot game (e.g., the small win type (jackpot type) and the game state at the time of winning (small win)). On the other hand, when a small win game is executed, the game state before the small win game is executed continues during the small win game and continues after the small win game ends. In other words, during a jackpot game that is highly advantageous to the player (large number of winning balls), the normal state, which is a game state disadvantageous to the player, is set to prevent the player from receiving excessive benefits during the jackpot game, whereas when a small win game that is less advantageous than the jackpot game is executed, the game state is not changed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the game state from being changed when a small win game with a low degree of advantage is executed. Note that, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure it so that a game state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player is set during a small win game, as in the case of a big win game, or to determine the game state after the end of a small win game based on the type of small win won. Also, the game state to be set after the winning game is completed may be determined based on the game results during the winning game (during the big win game, during the small win game). In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the ball that entered the variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650 (variable ball entry means), which makes it easier to enter the ball during the winning game (bonus game), passed through a specific area provided in the variable ball entry means, and to vary the type of game state to be set after the winning game is completed based on the result of the determination. For example, it is preferable to set a game state that is more advantageous to the player when the ball passes through a specific area than when the ball does not pass through the specific area, or to set a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player when the ball passes through a specific area than when the ball does not pass through the specific area. This makes it possible to play during the winning game with the aim of setting a favorable game state after the winning game is completed, and to allow the player to play with enthusiasm.

In addition, if a winning game is executed in a state where a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set, and an event in which a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set continues a predetermined number of times (e.g., five times) after the winning game ends, a game state disadvantageous to the player (normal state) may be forcibly set after the winning game ends. This can prevent a situation in which a game state advantageous to the player continues excessively.

When a jackpot game is played, the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is in an open state, making it easy for balls to enter the specific winning port 65a, and a game is played in which many prize balls can be won in a short period of time by entering the specific winning port 65a. This jackpot game is played (if) after the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed (confirmed) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds), and a jackpot game period is set consisting of an opening period of a predetermined time (e.g., 1 second) (a period in which a closed state is set to make it difficult for balls to enter the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65), a round game period in which the open state is set, an interval period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) until the next round game starts after one round game period has ended, and an ending period in which a closed state is set for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) after the last round game period has ended.

In this way, by setting the opening period to coincide with the start of the jackpot game, preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction in time with the timing at which the specific winning port 65a opens during the jackpot game, allowing the jackpot game to be played smoothly. In addition, this opening period can be used as a period for informing the player of the game content of the current jackpot game, providing an easy-to-understand game experience.

In addition, by setting an ending period as the final period of the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a new lottery for a special symbol from being held immediately after the last round of play ends, so that preparations can be made to launch the ball in any direction for the game to be played after the jackpot game ends, allowing for a smooth switch between games.

In this control example, a jackpot game can be executed after a small win game ends based on the ball entering a specific area (V winning port 1650) during the small win game. Therefore, by setting an ending period as the final period of the small win game, a preparation period can be set to switch from the game executed during the small win game (left-hand hit game) to the game executed during the jackpot game (right-hand hit game), allowing the player to smoothly switch games.

The length of each period of the jackpot game (opening period, round period, ending period) may be set to a different length depending on the game state set at the time of the special symbol lottery (when a small jackpot is won), the timing when the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, the start of the small jackpot game, the end of the small jackpot game, the start of the jackpot game, or the end of the jackpot game, or the type of jackpot won. For example, if a jackpot is won in which the game content (play method) to be executed after the jackpot game ends is set to a different game content (play method) from the game content (play method) before the jackpot game, the ending period of that jackpot game (e.g., 10 seconds) can be set to be longer than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds), and a performance can be configured to be executed in which the game content to be executed after the jackpot game ends is notified to the player during the ending period in advance. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

On the other hand, when a jackpot game is executed in which the game content (play method) before the start of the jackpot game is the same as the game content (play method) executed after the jackpot game ends, it is advisable to configure the ending period of that jackpot game (e.g., 1 second) to be shorter than the ending periods of other jackpot games (e.g., 2 seconds). This allows the player to play efficiently.

In addition, without using a configuration that actually distinguishes between the game content (play method) before the jackpot game and the game content (play method) executed after the jackpot game ends, for example, the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends can be predefined based on the type of jackpot game that is executed (small jackpot type) and the game state that is set before the jackpot game, and the length of the ending period of each jackpot game can be set according to the predefined content.

In this tenth control example, the game state is configured to be set to either the "normal state" or the "time-saving state." The normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is a game state in which the jackpot probability for special symbols is set to (30/1000) and the hit probability for normal symbols is set to a low probability (3/300), while the time-saving state is a game state in which the jackpot probability for special symbols is set to (30/1000) and the hit probability for normal symbols is set to a high probability (150/300).

In this control example, after the time-saving state is set, if a specific end condition (time-saving end condition) is met, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state, and the number of time-saving times described above indicates the time-saving end condition. In other words, one time of time-saving indicates that the time-saving end condition is met when a special pattern lottery is executed once without a jackpot game being executed after the time-saving state is set.

Furthermore, in this tenth control example, it is configured to be possible to determine whether the time-saving end condition is met at the timing when the special pattern variation starts. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine how long the time-saving state will continue.

In this embodiment, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is set as a condition related to the number of times the special pattern is drawn during the time-saving state (time-saving count). However, other configurations may be used as the time-saving end condition. For example, a time-saving end condition may be set that is met when the number of times the special pattern draw results in a specific draw result (specific miss) reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3 times), that is met when a predetermined time (e.g., 100 seconds) has elapsed since the time-saving state was set, or that is met when the number of balls that enter a specific ball entry port (e.g., general ball entry port 63a) during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 5 balls).

The timing for determining whether the time-saving end condition has been met may be different from the timing for terminating the time-saving state. For example, at the timing for starting the special pattern variation, it may be determined whether the time-saving end condition has been met by the current special pattern variation, and if it is determined that the time-saving end condition has been met, the time-saving state may be terminated before the special pattern variation begins, or the time-saving state may be terminated at a predetermined timing within the period from when the special pattern variation begins to when it stops (including the timing when the special pattern variation stops), depending on whether a specific condition is met. This makes it possible to unify the timing for executing the process for determining whether the time-saving end condition has been met, thereby simplifying the control process for terminating the time-saving state.

The above-mentioned specific condition (factor for determining the timing to end the time-saving state when the time-saving end condition is met) can be set based on the type of game state (normal state or time-saving state) set at the time when the special pattern lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game (the special pattern lottery that won the small jackpot) was executed, the set small jackpot type, or the type of jackpot game. For example, even if the same small jackpot type (jackpot type) is set when the game state at the time of the small jackpot win is the normal state and when it is the time-saving state, and the same time-saving end condition is set, the timing to end the time-saving state can be configured to be different.

The pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example, like the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above, is configured so that when the variable display in the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a "circle" symbol), a winning game (a normal symbol winning game) is executed in which the electric device 640a attached to the normal electric winning device 640 is in an operating state (open state) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change and be displayed (regular symbol change time) is set to different lengths depending on the probability state of the regular symbol (low probability state, high probability state), and is configured so that in the low probability state of the regular symbol, a regular symbol change time of 10 seconds is set, and in the high probability state of the regular symbol, a regular symbol change time of 1 second is set. This makes it possible to prevent regular symbol winning games from being played frequently during the low probability state of the regular symbol (normal state).

Note that a configuration different from the tenth control example may be used, and for example, the same normal symbol variation time (for example, 1 second) may always be set regardless of the probability state of the normal symbol. By configuring in this way, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that the time required for the normal symbol variation display (normal symbol variation time) is longer during the normal state than during the time-saving state in order to make it difficult to execute a normal symbol winning game during a low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state), when the game state transitions from the normal state (low probability state of the normal symbol) in which a winning game of the normal symbol (a winning game of the normal symbol) is difficult to execute to the time-saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) in which a winning game of the normal symbol is easy to execute, it is possible to prevent the transition to the time-saving state during the execution of a long-term normal symbol variation (a winning game of the normal symbol that is more disadvantageous to the player than during the time-saving state) executed during the normal state, and the period during which the normal symbol lottery is not executed during the time-saving state being set for a long time, even though the time-saving state is set.

In this case, since the normal symbol lottery will be executed at most once per second during the low probability state of normal symbols, it will be easier to win a normal symbol during the low probability state of normal symbols (normal state), so the probability of winning a normal symbol during the low probability state of normal symbols (normal state) can be set low.

In this control example, the game content (opening operation pattern of the electric device 640a) of the normal winning game is configured to be different between the normal state and the time-saving state. In other words, the normal winning game executed during the time-saving state is configured to be a more advantageous game for the player, that is, to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, than the normal winning game executed during the normal state. Specifically, when the normal state is set, a normal winning game (normal normal winning game) with a 0.1 second opening period is executed after a 4.1 second opening period (closing period of the electric device 640a), and when the time-saving state is set, a normal winning game (time-saving normal winning game) with a 3 second opening period is executed after a 1 second opening period (closing period of the electric device 640a).

Next, the configuration of the electric role 640a will be described with reference to FIG. 376. The electric role 640a in this tenth control example is configured to be able to be displaced between an embedded state (restricted state) where it is embedded in the game board 13, and a protruding state (guiding state) where it protrudes from the game board 13, and is configured to be in the embedded state (closed state) when a normal winning game is not being played. Then, when a normal winning game is played, it is displaced to the protruding state (guiding state) for a predetermined period (maximum of 3 seconds) based on a predetermined variable pattern.

Here, we will explain the terminology used to refer to the displacement state of the electric device 640a. The closed state of the electric device 640a is a term used to indicate a state in which the flow path (flow path formed on the electric device 640a) for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 is closed, i.e., the electric device 640a is embedded in the game board 13. As a functional expression, the term restricted state (a state in which the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640 is restricted) may also be used.

The open state of the electric device 640a is a term used to indicate a state in which the flow path (the flow path formed on the electric device 640a) for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 is open, i.e., the electric device 640a protrudes from the game board 13. As a functional expression, the term "guiding state" (a state in which the ball can be guided to the second ball entrance 640) is sometimes used.

As shown in FIG. 376, when the electric device 640a is in the guided state, the electric device 640a is arranged so that most of the balls launched by left-handed play flow into the flow path formed on the upper surface of the electric device 640a in the guided state. The flow path formed on the upper surface of the electric device 640a has a ball flow lower surface that slopes downward toward the second ball entrance 640, and balls that reach the upper surface of the electric device 640a flow down to the second ball entrance 640.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, the game with a normal ball is ended when one ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during a normal ball game. Therefore, the maximum number of balls that can enter the second ball entrance 640 during one normal ball game is one.

As described above with reference to FIG. 376, this control example is configured so that the playing method that is advantageous to the player is the same (left-hand play) whether the game state is set to the normal state or the time-saving state. In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the lottery trigger for the normal symbol is established even in the normal state (the ball passes through the through gate 67), and the lottery for the normal symbol is executed. Then, if the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a winning win, the electric device 640a installed in the playing area that the ball shot by the left-hand play can reach is controlled to open, so there is a risk that the ball will enter the second ball entrance 640 during the execution of the normal winning game.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured so that even if a normal winning game is executed during the normal state, the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 during the normal winning game. Specifically, it is configured so that it takes about 1 second for the ball to flow down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reach the second ball entrance 640, while the period during which the electric device 640a is in an induction state due to a normal winning game during the normal state is configured so that it is 0.2 seconds.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that has a configuration in which the game is played in the same way in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) and in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), that is, in a pachinko machine 10 in which it is possible to win a normal symbol game even in the normal state, it is possible to prevent a ball from entering the second ball entrance 640 during the normal state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is attached to the game board 13 in the area to the left (left area) of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow most (approximately 100%) of the balls that are launched onto the game board and flow down the left area of the game board 13 to pass through. When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a lottery is held to determine whether the second symbol will win. After this lottery to determine whether the second symbol will win, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the lottery results in a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the lottery results in a miss, a "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of one time in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the second symbol reserved lamp 84 described above. There is one second symbol reserved lamp 84 for each of the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 376, the explanation will continue. To the left of the variable display unit 80 (to the left from the viewpoint of FIG. 376), a V winning device 650 is provided so that a ball shot by left-handed play and flowing down the left area can win a prize. Here, referring to FIG. 377 to FIG. 380, the specific configuration of the V winning device 650 and the flow of balls that win in the V winning device 650 will be explained. In this control example, when a small prize is won in the special pattern lottery, a small prize game is executed in which the V winning device 650 is opened. Then, a big prize game (V big prize game) is executed by a ball winning the V winning port 1650 provided in the V winning device 650.

This control example is configured so that a jackpot game is executed based on the ball passing (winning) a specific area (V winning port 1650) during a small jackpot game that is executed when a small jackpot is won without winning a jackpot through the special pattern lottery. In this way, by gradually achieving the first condition (winning a small jackpot) and the second condition (passing through the specific area), a bonus game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player is executed, providing the player with a game that they will never tire of.

In addition, the system may be configured so that a jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol. In this case, in addition to the trigger for playing a jackpot game (special symbol jackpot game) that occurs when a jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol, there will be a trigger for playing a jackpot game (V jackpot game) that occurs when a ball enters a specific winning hole (V winning hole 1650). In this way, by providing multiple triggers for playing a jackpot game, it is possible to provide players with a game that they will never tire of.

First, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 377. The V winning device 650 is provided with an opening/closing door 650a that can be changed between an open state in which it is easier for a ball to win inside the V winning device 650, and a closed state in which it is more difficult for a ball to win than in the open state. This opening/closing door 650a is provided in a position (see FIG. 376) that can be reached by a ball flowing down the left side area of the game board 13, and is changed to the open state when a small win game is executed.

In the V winning device 650, a first flow path 650b through which the ball that has passed through the open/close door 650a flows down is formed in the space between the first partition 650k1 and the second partition 650k2, and a storage valve 660a is provided at a position where the ball that has flowed down the first flow path 650b (flow period 0.5 seconds) reaches. A storage section capable of storing one ball is formed on the upper surface of this storage valve 660a, and the ball that first wins the V winning device 650 during a small win game is temporarily stored in the storage section. In addition, a storage sensor 650s is provided above the storage valve 660a, and is configured to be able to detect that a ball is stored in the storage section. Furthermore, a ball detection sensor 650s2 for detecting balls that have entered the V winning device 650 is provided upstream of the first flow path 650b, and based on the detection of a ball by the ball detection sensor 650s2, the number of balls that have entered the V winning device 650 during the small win game is counted, and prize ball payout control for the winning balls is executed. In this way, by providing the ball detection sensor 650s2 at a position where the ball that entered the V winning device 650 flows down immediately after it enters, it is possible to prevent a situation in which more than the specified number of balls enter the V winning device 650, and to immediately award prize balls during the small win game to the player.

In addition, a second flow path 650c is formed to communicate with the first flow path 650b, and a first outlet 1163a is provided downstream of the second flow path 650c. As shown in FIG. 377, the second flow path 650c is configured so that the balls that flow down the first flow path 650b do not flow directly into the second flow path 650c, but rather, when the balls are stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a, the subsequent balls that flow down the first flow path 650b come into contact with the balls stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a and are guided to the second flow path 650c. The first outlet 1163a, located downstream of the second flow path 650c, is a ball inlet for discharging the entered ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. The ball flows down the second flow path 650c (flow period 0.1 seconds), and the ball that enters the first outlet 1163a flows down a ball discharge path (not shown) and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the storage valve 660a is configured to be variably operated between a storage state in which balls can be stored and a release state in which it is more difficult to store balls than in the storage state, depending on the progress of the small win game (corresponding to the operation scenario in which the small win game is executed). When this storage valve 660a is in the release state, the first flow path 650b and the third flow path 650d are connected, and balls that have flowed down the first flow path 650b or balls that have been stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a flow down the third flow path 650d. This third flow path 650d is a flow path formed in a straight line in the vertical direction with a width of about 15 mm, formed in the space between the lower end side of the first partition wall 650k1 and the third partition wall 650k3.

A first movable valve 660b is disposed at a position facing the downstream side of the third flow path 650d. This first movable valve 660b is configured to be movable in a predetermined movable pattern when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 between a guide position (protruding position) where it can receive a ball that has flowed down the third flow path 650d and a passing position (submerged position) where it cannot receive a ball that has flowed down the third flow path 650d. Specifically, it is configured to be movable in response to the operation of the first movable valve solenoid 209d, which is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110 and is driven and controlled by the main control device 110. When the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to on (when electricity is applied), the first movable valve 660b moves to a passing position (a position buried in the game board 13) in which it retreats from within the V winning device 650, and when the first movable valve solenoid 209d is set to off (when electricity is cut off), the first movable valve 660b moves to a guide position (a position protruding from the game board 13) in which it protrudes into the V winning device 650.

The first movable valve 660b located in the induction position (protruding position) is configured so that a ball can flow down its upper surface, and as shown in FIG. 377, the downstream end side of the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b is configured to be inclined downward toward the fourth flow path 650e. Therefore, when the first movable valve 660b is located in the induction position (protruding position), a ball that flows down the third flow path 65d (flowing down period 0.2 seconds) flows down the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b toward the fourth flow path 650e. A second outlet 1163b is provided downstream of the fourth flow path 650e, and the ball that flows down the fourth flow path 650e (flowing down period 0.2 seconds) enters the second outlet 1163b. This second outlet 1163b, like the first outlet 1163a described above, is a ball inlet for discharging balls that enter the slot to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and balls that enter the second outlet 1163b flow down a ball discharge path (not shown) and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, when the first movable valve 660b is in the passing position, the third flow path 650d and the fifth flow path 650f are connected, and the ball that flows down the third flow path 650d (flowing down period 0.2 seconds) flows into the fifth flow path 650f (flowing down period 0.1 seconds). And, the V winning hole 1650 is provided downstream of the fifth flow path 650f. The V winning hole 1650 is a winning hole that can be a trigger for executing a jackpot game, and when a ball enters the V winning hole 1650 while a jackpot game is not being executed, the winning information is stored (the right to execute the jackpot game is acquired), and the jackpot game is executed after the small jackpot game being executed ends.

As shown in FIG. 377, the first outlet 1163a and the second outlet 1163b are provided in the V winning device 650. By configuring in this manner, when the storage valve 660a is in a storage state, the ball that has won the V winning device 650 can be reliably prevented from flowing into the flow paths (the third flow path 650d, the fourth flow path 650e, and the fifth flow path 650f) through which the ball can pass when the storage valve 660a is in a release state. In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this control example, for example, the first outlet 1163a may be eliminated, the second flow path 650c and the fourth flow path 650e may be connected, and the storage valve 660a may be in a storage state, and the ball that has flowed down the second flow path 650c may enter the second outlet 1163b. In this case, the third partition 650k3, which is provided vertically in a straight line in Fig. 377, can be tilted downward and to the right as viewed from the perspective of Fig. 377 from the upper end side to the lower end side, that is, the extension line of the partition 650k3 toward the lower end side is to the right of the fourth partition 650k4 (the right side as viewed from the perspective of Fig. 377). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the balls that flow down the second flow path 650c from flowing into the fifth flow path 650f.

In this way, in this control example, a jackpot game is executed when the ball enters the V winning port 1650 during a small jackpot game. Hereinafter, when explaining jackpot games by dividing the execution triggers, the jackpot game executed when the ball enters the V winning port 1650 is also referred to as a V jackpot game.

As described above, the V winning device 650 of this control example is configured so that when a small jackpot game is played, it becomes an open state in which a ball can win a prize, and only one ball stored in the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d, and whether or not the ball will win in the V winning port 1650 is determined depending on the operating status of the first movable valve 660b when the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 650d reaches the first movable valve 660b.

In the tenth control example, the first movable valve 660b is configured to operate so that when a game ball is made to enter the V entry device 650 during a small win game, the game ball can reliably enter the V entry port 1650; however, without being limited to this, the movable content of the first movable valve 660b may be specified so that when a game ball is made to enter the V entry device 650 during a small win game, the game ball may or may not enter the V entry port 1650. For example, the first movable valve 660b may be configured to be constantly movable in a movable pattern in which the time at the induction position (the time when the ball cannot enter the V entry port 1650) is 6 seconds, and the time at the passage position (the time when the ball can enter the V entry port 1650) is 1 second. This allows the rate at which balls that flow down the third flow path 650d enter the V winning hole 1650 to be approximately 1/6.

Next, referring to FIG. 378 to FIG. 380, the contents of the ball flow that has won the V winning device 650 during the execution of the small winning game in the modified example that is configured to be able to execute a small winning game in which the game ball can enter the V winning port 1650 and a small winning game in which the game ball cannot enter the V winning port 1650, unlike the present tenth control example, will be explained. In the following explanation, even if multiple balls are entered into the V winning device 650 in one small winning game, the operation of the storage valve 660a is controlled so that the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 650d is one. First, referring to FIG. 378, the ball flow during the first half period of the small winning game (the period when the storage valve 660a is in a storage state) will be explained. FIG. 378 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow in the V winning device 650 when the storage valve 660a is in a storage state during the small winning game. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the storage valve 660a is configured to be controlled so that it is in a storage state from the time the small win game is executed until the V winning device 650 is closed. Then, when multiple balls enter the V winning device 650 while the storage valve 660a is in a storage state, the first winning ball P1 is stored in a storage section formed in the storage valve 660a, and the second winning ball P2 comes into contact with the ball P1 stored in the storage valve 660a, flows down the second flow path 650c, and enters the outlet 1163a.

In this way, when the storage valve 660a is in a storage state, all winning balls (e.g., ball P2) other than ball P1 stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a are configured to enter the outlet 1163a, so multiple balls do not remain inside the V winning device 650. Also, the storage state of the storage valve 660a is released after the V opening and closing door 650a of the V winning device 650 is closed (after operational control is executed to close the door), so it is possible to ensure that the number of balls flowing down the third flow path 650d during one play per device is limited to one.

By configuring it in this way, the ease with which the ball can enter the V winning port 1650 does not change depending on the timing of the ball entering the V winning device 650 during small win play or the number of wins, so fair play can be provided to all players.

In addition, without being limited to this, the ease of balls entering the V winning port 1650 may be variable depending on the number of winning balls entering the V winning device 650 during small prize play. For example, six storage sections capable of storing balls that have entered the V winning device 650 are provided, and a distribution member (such as a crane) is provided that distributes the balls that have entered the V winning device 650 to one of the six storage sections. Then, of the six storage sections, only balls stored in a specific storage section can enter the V winning port 1650 when the storage state of the storage section is released, and balls stored in storage sections other than the specific storage section (up to five balls) are configured to enter the second outlet 1163b when the storage state of each storage section is released. In addition, when the next ball is distributed by the distribution member toward a storage section in which balls are already stored, a flow path is provided that connects each storage section so that the next ball collides with the ball already stored there and is stored in another adjacent storage section.

By configuring it in this way, the winning ratio into the V winning port 1650 can be varied depending on the number of winning balls that enter the V winning device 650 during small win play, which makes it possible for the player to play with enthusiasm.

Even with this configuration, the actual winning ratio for the V winning port 1650 can be varied by varying the number of times the storage state of the storage section that allows the balls to flow down to the outlet during one small win game is released depending on the type of small win.

Next, referring to FIG. 379, the ball flow (later period of the game with a winning combination) when the storage valve 660a transitions from the storage state to the release state will be described. FIG. 379 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the storage valve 660a transitions from the storage state to the release state during a small winning game. As shown in FIG. 379, after the V opening and closing door 650a is closed and a new ball cannot enter the V winning device 650, when the storage valve 660a transitions to the release state (shown by a dotted line in the figure), the ball P1 (see FIG. 378) stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d. In the state shown in FIG. 379, the first movable valve 660b is in the induction position, so the ball P1 rolls down the downward slope formed on the upper surface of the first movable valve 660b, flows down the fourth flow path 650e, and enters the second outlet 1163b.

On the other hand, the ball flow when the ball P1 (see FIG. 378) stored in the storage section of the storage valve 660a flows down the third flow path 650d and reaches the first movable valve 660b, and the first movable valve 660b is in the passing position, will be explained with reference to FIG. 380. FIG. 380 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the storage valve 660a transitions from the storage state to the release state during a small winning game. As shown in FIG. 380, if the first movable valve 660b is in the passing position when the ball that has flowed down the third flow path 650d reaches the first movable valve 660b, the ball flows down the fifth flow path 660f and enters the V winning hole 1650.

In addition, in this tenth control example, as described above with reference to Figures 376 to 380, the player is configured to play left-handed games both in the game for getting the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 in the normal state and in the game for getting the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 in the time-saving state, and further, the player is configured to play left-handed games even during small win games and to play right-handed games only during big win games, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the player to play in different ways in the normal state and the time-saving state, as in each of the control examples described above.

<About the performance content in the 10th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 381 to Fig. 383, the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example will be described. In this tenth control example, when the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired during the time-saving state reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), the number of times that the player can play a jackpot game (a jackpot game based on a small jackpot win) can be notified to the player based on the information indicating the result of the pre-reading for the reserved special figures 2.

Specifically, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, it is stipulated that a big win or a small win will always be won, and it is configured so that the game ball can be passed reliably into the specific area by playing normally during the small win game that is executed based on the small win being won.

In other words, in this tenth control example, a game that acquires the right to play a jackpot game is executed for the number of reserved special figures 2 that have already been acquired. For example, if four reserved special figures 2 have been acquired, four more jackpot games can be played. In addition, in this tenth control example, the game state that is set after the end of the jackpot game can be set to a normal state or a time-saving state, and further, the time-saving state can be set to an unfavorable time-saving state in which it is difficult to acquire reserved special figures 2, and an advantageous time-saving state in which it is easier to acquire reserved special figures 2 than in the unfavorable time-saving state.

When a predetermined condition (the number of reserved special symbols 2 reaches the upper limit) is met during the time-saving state, the system determines whether or not a favorable time-saving state will be set after the end of the jackpot game based on the results of a look-ahead of the reserved special symbols 2 that have already been acquired, and is configured to notify the player of the number of rights available to play the jackpot game based on the results of this determination.

In this way, by predicting the game state that will be set after the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on the result of the special pattern lottery that corresponds to the acquired special pattern 2 reserve in addition to the number of reserved special patterns 2 that have been acquired, and configuring it so that the number of times that a jackpot game can be executed (number of possible jackpots) can be notified, it becomes possible to notify the number of possible jackpots that is greater than the number of reserved special patterns 2 that have been acquired.

Furthermore, in this tenth control example, the number of times that the player is notified as the number of times a jackpot can be executed is configured to vary based on the game state at the time when the special chart 2 reserve reaches the upper limit and the results of the look-ahead. In other words, it is possible to notify the player of a number of times other than the maximum number as the number of times a jackpot can be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from completely understanding the content of the game that will be executed later based on the notified number of times a jackpot can be executed, which can reduce the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in this tenth control example, during the final fluctuation period of the time-saving state in which the special chart 2 reserve can be acquired, even if the maximum number of special chart 2 reserves has not been acquired, the presentation mode of the guidance presentation for acquiring the special chart 2 reserve can be changed based on the lottery results of the final fluctuation and the results of the advance reading of the special chart 2 reserves that have already been acquired, and a presentation different from the guidance presentation can be executed.

Here, among conventional pachinko machines 10, there are pachinko machines 10 that have the same gameplay as the tenth control example, in the final variation period of the special pattern in the time-saving state in which it is easy to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 (final variation period of the time-saving state), a guide effect is executed to guide the player to obtain the upper limit of the reserved special symbol 2, thereby allowing the player to play in a way that makes the most of the benefit given to the player during the time-saving state (a benefit that makes it easier to obtain the reserved special symbol 2).

However, in the conventional pachinko machine 10 described above, for example, the guidance presentation is executed regardless of the result of the lottery for the final time-saving fluctuation or the result of the second special pattern lottery executed after the final time-saving fluctuation (the second special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved special pattern 2 executed during the normal state). Therefore, even if the number of reserved special patterns 2 is not acquired up to the upper limit during this final time-saving fluctuation period, a time-saving state in which the reserved special pattern 2 can be acquired again may be set based on the result of the second special pattern lottery executed thereafter. In such a case, the player is forced to play a game that unnecessarily fires game balls, and the player is not guided to the appropriate game.

In contrast to this, in the tenth control example, when determining the presentation mode to be executed during the final time-saving fluctuation period, a determination is made as to whether or not a time-saving state in which the reserved special symbol 2 can be acquired again after the final time-saving fluctuation period has elapsed is made based on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the final time-saving fluctuation period and the pre-reading result corresponding to the reserved special symbol 2 that has already been acquired, and whether or not a guidance presentation is executed is determined based on the result of this determination.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to implement guidance presentations that prevent players from playing games that unnecessarily reach the upper limit for the number of reserved special charts 2.

In addition, in this tenth control example, the presentation mode of the guidance presentation is configured to be variable depending on the content of the game that can be executed after the time-saving final variation period has elapsed (the difficulty of acquiring the reserved special chart 2). For example, when the lottery result of the time-saving final variation is a small prize win and the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the small prize win, the guidance presentation is configured to emphasize the guidance mode for acquiring the reserved special chart 2 to the player, rather than when the lottery result of the time-saving final variation is a small prize win and the time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) is set after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the small prize win in which it is difficult to acquire the reserved special chart 2.

In this way, by configuring the guidance display to vary in strength during the final time-saving fluctuation period, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game that is disadvantageous to the player if the player does not obtain the reserved special chart 2 during a period in which it would be disadvantageous to the player if the reserved special chart 2 were not obtained, and the period ends without the player obtaining the reserved special chart 2, compared to when a monotonous guidance display is always executed.

In this tenth control example, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to set a time-saving state in which it is difficult to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 (unfavorable time-saving state), or a time-saving state in which it is easy to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 (favorable time-saving state).

Specifically, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is configured to end at the timing when the first second special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state starts, and when a favorable time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is configured to end at the timing when the second second special symbol variation executed during the time-saving state starts. By configuring in this way, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, a time-saving state is set in which the second special symbol lottery is executed only once without obtaining the special symbol 2 reservation, and when a favorable time-saving state is set, a time-saving state in which the maximum number of special symbol 2 reservations can be obtained is set.

First, referring to FIG. 381(a), the content of the presentation when a time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game will be described. FIG. 381(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the first second special pattern change in the time-saving state (first win state) that is set after winning a jackpot in the special pattern 1 lottery. As shown in FIG. 381(a), a time-saving presentation is executed to show whether the lottery result of the second special pattern change being executed is a lottery result in which an unfavorable time-saving state is set (unfavorable lottery result) or a lottery result in which an advantageous time-saving state is set (favorable lottery result).

In the example shown in FIG. 381(a), icon 1800a imitating a "V" is displayed as a display mode corresponding to an unfavorable lottery result, and icon 1800b imitating "V x 5" is displayed as a display mode corresponding to a favorable lottery result. When icon 1800b is selected, "Super Chance Mode" is displayed as a notification mode to notify the player that they will move to the Super Chance Mode, and the comment "5 consecutive wins for V x 5" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a notification mode to notify the player that they will acquire five jackpot play rights (5 consecutive wins possible) when icon 1800b is selected.

Next, the content of the presentation during a jackpot game that is executed based on the results of the second special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state will be explained with reference to FIG. 381(b). FIG. 381(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed during a special symbol 2 jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 381(b), a notification presentation is executed on the ending screen of the jackpot game to notify the player in advance of the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 382(a), the contents of the presentation during the advantageous time-saving state will be explained. FIG. 382(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during the super chance mode, which indicates that the advantageous time-saving state is in place. As shown in FIG. 382(a), the super chance mode is configured so that the time-saving state continues until multiple second special symbol variations are executed, and so that the special symbol 2 reservation can be acquired during the variation period of the second special symbol variation. Therefore, the secondary display area Ds displays a comment saying "Hit to the right to collect Vs" to indicate that the current situation is such that the special symbol 2 reservation can be easily acquired, and to encourage the player to acquire the special symbol 2 reservation.

Then, in the small display area Dm9, V icons are displayed that increase or decrease according to the number of reserved special charts 2 that have already been acquired. These V icons are configured to be able to display up to the same number as the reserved special charts 2, and each time a reserved special chart 2 is acquired, the first V icon hr1 to the fourth V icon hr4 are displayed in that order. In the example shown in FIG. 382(a), two reserved special charts 2 have been acquired, so the first V icon hr1 and the second V icon hr2 are displayed.

After that, when the player acquires the maximum number of reserved special charts 2, as shown in FIG. 382(b), an icon hx resembling "MAX" is displayed in the information in the small display area Dm9 as an upper limit notification mode to indicate that the maximum number of reserved special charts 2 has been acquired, and an effect in which a treasure chest 1810 appears in the center of the main display area Dm is executed, and the words "Treasure chest appears" are displayed. Then, the words "What's inside?" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a guide mode to explain to the player the progress of the effect currently being executed. This makes it possible to clearly notify the player that an effect in which a treasure chest 1810 is opened will be executed next.

Next, as shown in FIG. 383(a), when the treasure chest 1810 is opened, an effect is executed in which contents 1810a appear from within the treasure chest 1810, and the display manner of the contents 1810a indicates the number of rights to play a jackpot game that the player has currently acquired. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 383(a), the result of the pre-reading of the fourth special symbol 2 reservation is a small jackpot win in which a favorable time-saving state is set, so the contents 1810a are displayed in the display mode "V x 10" to notify that the right to play 10 jackpot games has been acquired, including a jackpot game (1 time) based on the result of the second special symbol lottery currently being executed, a jackpot game (4 times) based on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the acquired special symbol 2 reservation, a jackpot game (1 time) based on the result of the second special symbol lottery executed after the end of the jackpot game based on the result of the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the fourth special symbol 2 reservation, and a jackpot game (4 times) corresponding to the special symbol 2 reservation that can be acquired during the fluctuation.

By configuring in this manner, in this tenth control example, it is possible to predict not only the number of jackpot play rights that have already been acquired, but also the game content after the end of the jackpot play that can be executed based on the acquired jackpot play rights, and then notify the player of information regarding the jackpot play rights that can be acquired, so it is possible to notify the player in advance of the number of jackpot play rights that are greater than the number of reserved special chart 2s (4) that can be reserved and stored at one time. This makes it difficult for the player to predict how the right to play a jackpot game will arise (whether it can be acquired), and provides an exciting game.

In addition, in this tenth control example, if a proper play (right-hand play) is performed during a small win game, it is possible to execute a jackpot game, so it is possible to provide the player with the same number of jackpot games as the number of jackpot play rights notified to the player in advance. However, if, for example, a proper play (right-hand play) is not performed during a small win game, and the game ball cannot enter a specific area during the small win game, and a jackpot game is not executed, it is preferable to configure the system to execute an effect that reduces the number of jackpot play rights notified in advance.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily notify the player that the number of jackpot games to be played has been reduced depending on the content of the game played. In this case, it is advisable to configure it so that information can be notified to allow the player to understand how the number of rights to play jackpot games has been reduced (the rights to play have been lost). This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the number of rights to play jackpot games is reduced again when there are still rights to play jackpot games remaining.

In this tenth control example, if a proper play (right-hit play) is performed during a small win game, it is possible to execute a jackpot game in almost all cases, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with the same number of jackpot play rights as the number of jackpot play rights notified to the player in advance. Therefore, the system is configured to notify the player in advance of all of the calculated number of jackpot play rights, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to predict not only the number of jackpot play rights already acquired, but also the game content after the end of the jackpot game that can be executed based on the acquired jackpot play rights, and then calculate the number of jackpot play rights that the player can acquire, and notify the player in advance of part of the calculation result.

As a result, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that a jackpot game is executed with approximately half the probability of a small jackpot game being executed, if the machine is configured to notify the player in advance of half the number calculated as the number of jackpot game execution rights that the player may obtain, it is possible to execute an update process to increase or decrease the pre-notified number of jackpot game execution rights based on the number of small jackpot games and the number of jackpot games actually executed, making it easier for the player to predict the number of jackpot games that may be executed and increasing the reliability of the information used in the prediction.

Returning to FIG. 383(b), the explanation will be continued. FIG. 383(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during the final variation period of the second special pattern in the super chance mode, which indicates that the advantageous time-saving state is in effect. In this tenth control example, the period in which the advantageous time-saving state is set is configured to make it easier to make the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 than the period in which the advantageous time-saving state is not set. During the second special pattern variation period (final variation period) in which the end condition of the advantageous time-saving state is established, as shown in FIG. 382(a), a guide announcement is configured to be executable to encourage the player to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640. However, when the special pattern variation that is the final variation period is executed, if there is a special pattern 2 reservation corresponding to a winning that sets the advantageous time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game among the special pattern 2 reservations that have already been acquired, the above-mentioned guide announcement is not executed, and a performance mode for congratulating the player is set as shown in FIG. 383(b).

In other words, during the special pattern variation period when the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is met, if the specific condition is met even if the maximum number of reserved special 2 symbols has not been acquired, a notification to encourage the player to acquire the maximum number of reserved special 2 symbols is not executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from playing games that are unnecessarily aimed at acquiring the maximum number of reserved special 2 symbols.

<Regarding transition of game state in the tenth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 384, the transition contents of the game state in this tenth control example will be described. FIG. 384 is a game flow showing the transition contents of the game state. As shown in FIG. 384, in this tenth control example, as in the seventh control example described above, the game state can be set to a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and even if any game state is set, the player can execute a left-handed game.

The initial state of the pachinko machine 10 is set to a normal state (first normal state) in which neither the reserved special symbol 1 nor the reserved special symbol 2 has been acquired. In this first normal state, a game is played by hitting the ball from the left to make the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64. In this first normal state, a low probability state for the special symbol is set, so a first special symbol lottery is executed, which has a probability of winning the jackpot of 30/1000.

If a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot type is set to "jackpot A." After the jackpot game in which the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set ends, a time-saving state is set.

In the tenth control example, the time-saving state can be set to provide different degrees of play for the player, and a second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) can be set. More specifically, the degree of play in the time-saving state is varied by varying the ease of acquiring the special chart 2 reservation during the period in which the time-saving state is set, and when the second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, it is configured to be easy to insert multiple game balls into the second ball entrance 640 during that short period. On the other hand, when the first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) is set, it is configured to be difficult to insert multiple game balls into the second ball entrance 640 during that short period.

In other words, when the first time-saving state (unfavorable time-saving state) is set and when the second time-saving state (favorable time-saving state) is set, the ease of acquiring the reserved balls in the special chart 2 during the time-saving state is set is changed to change the degree of advantage to the player.

The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to be able to set the game state to a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) and a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). Since the normal state is set to a low probability state for normal symbols, it is difficult to win a normal symbol, and even if a normal symbol is won, the operation period of the electric role 640a is short, making it difficult (or impossible) to make the ball enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, the game is mainly played by hitting the ball into the first ball entrance 64 by hitting it from the left and executing the first special symbol lottery.

When the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, a first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is executed, which has a probability of winning a jackpot at 30/1000. If a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, the jackpot type is set to jackpot A, and the first time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, the contents of the time-saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of this tenth control example will be explained. As shown in FIG. 384, this control example is configured so that a first time-saving state and a second time-saving state can be set as the time-saving state. Here, the difference between the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state will be explained. Both the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are time-saving states in which a low probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols are set, and the probability of winning the special symbol lottery and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery are the same. Furthermore, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol variation to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery is also the same.

The only difference is the timing at which the time-saving state ends (transitions to the normal state); in the first time-saving state, if the second special pattern lottery is performed once, the time-saving state ends at the start of the second special pattern variation, and in the second time-saving state, if the second special pattern lottery is performed twice, the time-saving state ends at the start of the second special pattern variation.

In other words, the second time-saving state can be set longer by the period of the second special symbol fluctuation than the first time-saving state, so it can be said to be a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in this control example, the number of balls that can enter the second ball entrance 640 during one play per normal symbol is configured to be one, and the time-saving end condition is established when the second special symbol fluctuation is executed once. Therefore, when the first time-saving state is set, the time-saving state is more likely to end without acquiring the reserved memory of the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2). On the other hand, when the second time-saving state is set, the time-saving state continues during the period of the second special symbol fluctuation, so it is more likely to end with the reserved memory of the second special symbol (reserved special symbol 2). In other words, even in terms of the acquisition status of reserved special symbol 2 at the time when the time-saving state ends, the second time-saving state can be said to be a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state.

The details will be described later, but if a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the first time-saving state, a small prize game that can set the second time-saving state at a rate of 5% is selected. That is, in the normal state, it is easier to transition to the first time-saving state than the second time-saving state, and in the first time-saving state, it is easier to transition to the second time-saving state with a higher probability than in the normal state. Therefore, for a player playing in the normal state, it is possible to gradually transition between game states (normal state, first time-saving state) with different transition rates to the second time-saving state that are most advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the second time-saving state is set. In addition, when a game state that is easier to transition to the second time-saving state than the normal state is transitioned to, it is difficult to stop playing, so it is easy to improve the operation of the game.

In the first time-saving state, the ball is passed through the through gate 67 by left-handed play, a normal pattern lottery is executed, and a game in which the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640 during a normal pattern winning game is executed. Then, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second special pattern lottery is executed, which wins a small prize with a probability of 970/1000 and a big prize with a probability of 30/1000. During this first time-saving state, the time-saving end condition is established based on the second special pattern lottery being executed once, and the time-saving state is configured to end at the start of the special pattern change (second special pattern change) to show the result of the second special pattern lottery in which the time-saving end condition is established. As a result, it becomes easier for the time-saving state to end without acquiring the special pattern 2 reservation, so after the time-saving state is set, the game state becomes one in which the second special pattern lottery can be executed only once.

In this tenth control example, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the time-saving state, it is configured to always result in a big win or a small win, and when a small win game is executed, if the game is executed normally, it is possible to reliably acquire the right to play a big win game (entry of a game ball into the V winning port 1650). In other words, the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed and the number of times the big win game is executed can be the same. Therefore, the game is played with the aim of setting the second time-saving state in which it is possible to acquire a special symbol 2 reservation rather than the first time-saving state.

When a small prize is won in the special chart 2 lottery during the time-saving state, the small prize types that are set have different selection rates, with the selection rate of small prize A, which sets the first time-saving state after the big win game ends, being 80%, the selection rate of small prize B, which sets the normal state after the big win game ends, being 15%, and the selection rate of small prize C, which sets the second time-saving state after the big win game ends, being 5%.

In other words, when the first time-saving state is set, the game that executes the second special symbol lottery can be continued until the small win B, which sets the normal state after the big win game ends, is selected.

In addition, if a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery executed in the first time-saving state, a small prize game that can set the second time-saving state with a probability of 5% is selected. In other words, in the normal state, it is easier to transition to the first time-saving state than the second time-saving state, and in the first time-saving state, it is easier to transition to the second time-saving state with a higher probability than in the normal state. Therefore, for a player playing in the normal state, it is possible to gradually transition between game states (normal state, first time-saving state) with different transition rates to the second time-saving state that are most advantageous to the player, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game before the second time-saving state is set. In addition, when a game state that is easier to transition to the second time-saving state than the normal state is transitioned to, it is difficult to stop playing, so it is easy to improve the operation of the game.

During the second time-saving state, when the second lottery for the second special symbol is executed for the first time-saving state described above, the time-saving end condition is met, and the time-saving state ends at the start timing of the second special symbol change when the time-saving end condition is met. In other words, since the time-saving state can be set during the period of the second special symbol change until the time-saving end condition is met, it is possible to acquire the special symbol 2 reservation during that period of change, and it is possible to easily end the time-saving state when the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired. Therefore, the second time-saving state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state.

The game state transition based on the results of the second special symbol lottery executed during the second time-saving state is the same as the first time-saving state described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. Then, when the second time-saving state ends, that is, when the second special symbol variation is stopped and the time-saving end condition is met, if the special symbol 2 reservation has not been acquired, the game state will transition to the first normal state, just like when the first time-saving state described above ends.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol variation is stopped and the time-saving end condition is met, if the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired, the game transitions to the second normal state in which the second special symbol lottery is executed while the normal state is set as the game state. In this second normal state, the super chance mode is continuously set.

When the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state, a special symbol lottery is executed with the same probability (970/1000) of winning a small prize as during the time-saving state. The small prize type is selected at the same selection rate as the second special symbol lottery during the time-saving state. In other words, if many special symbol 2 reserves have been acquired, it is possible to easily return to the time-saving state with a high probability, even if the normal state is set after the end of the big win game.

In the tenth control example, the selection ratio of the small win type in the normal state and the selection ratio of the small win type in the time-saving state are set to be the same, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that a small win type that is more advantageous to the player is more easily selected in one game state than in the other game state. For example, it is preferable to configure so that a small win type (small win C) that is more advantageous to the player is more easily selected when the normal state is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the second special pattern lottery performed during the normal state more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery performed during the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of ending the time-saving state when the special pattern 2 reservation is obtained, and it is possible to easily increase the difference in the degree of advantage between the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the tenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 385 to Fig. 390. The pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example described above in that the ROM 202 and part of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the ROM 222 and part of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed, but otherwise are the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 385, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in this tenth control example will be described. FIG. 385(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 385(a), the ROM 202 of this control example differs from the ROM 202 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(a)) in that the first win random number 7 table 202fa is replaced by the first win random number 10 table 202ia, the small win type selection 7 table 202ff is replaced by the small win type selection 10 table 202if, the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe is replaced by the time-saving grant 10 table 202ie, and the small win scenario 10 table 202ii is newly added, and otherwise it is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. For ease of explanation, some of the various configurations shown in the ROM 202 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(a)) are omitted in FIG. 385(a), but the illustration is omitted except for configurations that are difficult to apply.

The first random winning number 10 table 202ia differs from the first random winning number 7 table 202fa (see FIG. 305(a)) described above in that the specified value for determining a big win and the specified value for determining a small win are different, but otherwise they are the same. A detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the contents stipulated in the first winning random number 10 table 202ia will be explained with reference to FIG. 386. FIG. 386(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number 10 table 202ia. As shown in FIG. 386(a), the first winning random number 10 table 202ia has a special pattern 1 random number 10 table 202ia1 that is referenced when drawing a winning lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern 1), and a special pattern 2 random number 10 table 202ia2 that is referenced when drawing a winning lottery for the second special pattern (special pattern 2).

Next, the contents defined in the special pattern 1 random number 10 table 202ia1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 386(b). FIG. 386(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special pattern 1 random number 10 table 202ia1. As shown in FIG. 386(b), a "jackpot" is defined for the range of "0 to 29" out of the possible range of "0 to 999" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1. That is, in this tenth control example, the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery for the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 3/100 (30/1000).

Next, the contents defined in the special pattern 2 random number 10 table 202ia2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 386(c). FIG. 386(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special pattern 2 random number 10 table 202ia2. As shown in FIG. 386(c), out of the possible range of "0-999" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1, a "big win" is defined for the range "0-29", and a "small win" is defined for the value "30-999". That is, in this tenth control example, the probability of winning a big win in the lottery for special pattern 2 is approximately 3/100 (30/1000), and the probability of winning a small win is 97/100 (970/1000).

In this tenth control example, the type and number of judgment values that are judged to be a small prize winner are fixed regardless of the game state, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure it so that a high probability state (high probability state of special pattern) in which the probability of winning a small prize is high and a low probability state (low probability state of special pattern) in which the probability is low are set according to the game state. Also, in this tenth control example, it is configured so that only the second special pattern lottery can be judged to be a small prize winner, but the contents of the special pattern 1 random number 10 table 202ia1 can be specified so that the first special pattern lottery can also be a small prize winner, and in this case, the probability of winning a small prize in the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery can be the same or different.

The small prize type selection 10 table 202if is a data table that is referenced when selecting the type of small prize that will be set if a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery). This small prize type selection 10 table 202if differs from the small prize type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) of the seventh control example described above in that the content of the small prize type that is specified has been changed, but is otherwise the same. A detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 387, the small win type selection 10 table 202if will be explained. FIG. 387 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 10 table 202if. In this tenth control example, the advantageous degree of the time-saving state after the end of a big win game that is executed based on the establishment of an execution condition during a small win game is varied depending on the small win type that is set. More specifically, it is configured so that an advantageous time-saving state or an unfavorable time-saving state can be set depending on the small win type that is set.

Specifically, the small win type of the first special symbol is set to be selected from the three types of small win A, small win B, and small win C described above depending on the value of the small win type counter C5, and for the acquired small win type counter C5 value range of "0 to 79", "small win A (5R jackpot A when V passes)" is specified, for the range of "80 to 94", "small win B (5R jackpot B when V passes)" is specified, and for the range of "95 to 99", "small win C (5R jackpot C without time reduction when V passes)" is specified.

Here, for each small win type, a type of big win game (big win type) is set that will be executed after the game ball enters the V winning port 1650 during the small win game. For "small win A", "big win A" is set as the big win type, for "small win B", "big win B" is set, and for "small win C", "big win C" is set.

In this tenth control example, regardless of whether any of the jackpot types "jackpot A" to "jackpot C" is set, a jackpot game (five rounds) is executed in which five rounds of play in which the variable winning device 65 is opened are executed as the jackpot game, and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 388, but the system is configured so that different time-saving end conditions are set as the time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state depending on the jackpot type that is set.

In other words, it is configured to provide bonus games (jackpot games, games during the time-saving state) with different conditions for ending the time-saving mode depending on the type of small jackpot that is set when a small jackpot is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the type of jackpot based on the content of the jackpot game executed based on the winning of a small jackpot, and thus preventing the player from predicting in advance whether the time-saving state that will be set later will be a favorable or unfavorable time-saving state.

In this tenth control example, the content of the jackpot game executed based on a small jackpot win is configured to be the same (5 round (R) jackpot game) regardless of the small jackpot type, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to be possible to execute a jackpot game with different content depending on the small jackpot type. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that a jackpot game with the same jackpot game content is executed for at least some of the jackpot types in which an unfavorable time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player is set and for at least some of the jackpot types in which an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a jackpot game that makes it difficult for the player to determine whether the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends is a favorable time-saving state or an unfavorable time-saving state while the jackpot game is being played, and a jackpot game that makes it easy for the player to determine while the jackpot game is being played that the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends is a favorable time-saving state (a jackpot game that can only be executed for a jackpot type in which a favorable time-saving state is set), which makes it possible to arouse the player's interest in what kind of jackpot game will be played.

The time-saving 10 table 202ie is a data table in which the end conditions (time-saving end conditions) of the time-saving state to be set at the end of a jackpot game are predefined, and the time-saving grant contents (time-saving end conditions) corresponding to each jackpot type are defined. This time-saving 10 table 202ie is a data table referenced when setting multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, and is referenced when a jackpot game ends (the ending period of a jackpot game ends), and different times of time-saving (time-saving end conditions) are set depending on the jackpot type.

Here, the contents stipulated in the time-saving 10 table 202ie will be explained with reference to FIG. 388. FIG. 388 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving 10 table 202ie. In this control example, it is possible to set a first time-saving end condition (a value set in the time-saving counter 203h) that is established based on the combined number of first and second special pattern variations, and a second time-saving end condition (a value set in the special pattern 2 variation count counter) that is established based on the number of second special pattern variations.

Specifically, for "Big Win A" which is set when a big win is won in the special pattern lottery or when the small win type "small win A" is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10" as the first time-saving end condition, and the value of the special pattern 2 change count counter 203ia is set to "1" as the second time-saving end condition. In other words, when the time-saving state corresponding to "Big Win A" is set, the first time-saving end condition is established when the total number of times the first special pattern change is performed and the second special pattern change is performed reaches 10 times, and the time-saving state in which the second time-saving end condition is established is set when the number of times the second special pattern change is performed reaches 1 time. As described above, in this tenth control example, since the time-saving state is configured to end at the start timing of the special pattern change at which the time-saving end condition is established, when the time-saving state corresponding to "Big Win A" is set, the time-saving state ends at the start timing of the first second special pattern change after the time-saving state is set. This results in an unfavorable time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the tenth control example, a second time-saving end condition that can be satisfied first when playing normally during the time-saving state, and a first time-saving end condition that is more difficult to satisfy than the second time-saving end condition are set. The value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10" as the first time-saving end condition. This value of "10" is specified to be a value greater than the upper limit of the special pattern 1 reservation "4". Therefore, even if the time-saving state is set with the upper limit of the special pattern 1 reservation stored, and all the special pattern 1 reservations are consumed before the second special pattern variation is performed, the time-saving state will not end. In addition, if an action of only performing the first special pattern lottery is performed during the time-saving state, the time-saving state can be ended when the number of first special pattern variations reaches 10, so that it is possible to suppress the continuation of abnormal play. In this control example, the same value is set as the first time-saving end condition for all jackpot types for which the time-saving state is set, but this is not limited to this and different values may be set.

For the "Big Win B" that is set when the small win type "Small Win B" is set, the first time-saving end condition is set to "0" in the time-saving counter 203h, and the second time-saving end condition is set to "0" in the special symbol 2 variation counter 203ia. In other words, when "Big Win B" is set, the normal state is set after the big win game ends. As mentioned above, in this tenth control example, the time-saving state is set to make it easier for the player to play a game (second special symbol lottery) that is advantageous to the player than when the normal state is set, so "Big Win B" is the big win type that is most disadvantageous to the player.

For the "big win C" that is set when the small win type "small win C" is set, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "10" as the first time-saving end condition, and the value of the special pattern 2 change count counter 203ia is set to "2" as the second time-saving end condition. In other words, when the time-saving state corresponding to "big win C" is set, the first time-saving end condition is established when the total number of times the first special pattern change is performed and the second special pattern change is performed reaches 10 times, and the time-saving state in which the second time-saving end condition is established is set when the number of times the second special pattern change is performed reaches 2 times. As described above, in this tenth control example, since the time-saving state is configured to end at the start timing of the special pattern change that establishes the time-saving end condition, when the time-saving state corresponding to "big win C" is set, the time-saving state ends at the start timing of the second special pattern change after the time-saving state is set. In other words, the time-saving state continues for the duration of the first second special symbol change after the time-saving state is set, and this is a period in which it becomes easier to get the game ball into the second ball entry port 640 by hitting a normal symbol. This creates an advantageous time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this control example, a configuration having the above-mentioned first time-saving end condition and second time-saving end condition is used as the multiple time-saving end conditions, but other conditions may be set as the time-saving end condition. For example, a time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times the first special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times), a time-saving end condition that is met when the number of times the second special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 80 times), or a time-saving end condition that is met when a small jackpot is won and the number of times the V winning device 650 is activated reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10 times) may be set.

Furthermore, it is also possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established based on other factors, rather than on the number of times the special symbol changes or the lottery results. For example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the normal symbol changes or the number of times the normal symbol has been won (the number of times the electric device 640a has been activated) reaches a predetermined number, or a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of balls that have entered a specific ball entry port (for example, the general winning port 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 balls), etc., may be set in advance.

As described above, by setting multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, and configuring the time-saving state to end when any of the time-saving end conditions is set, it becomes difficult for the player to know in advance how long the time-saving state will continue, and this makes it possible to prevent monotonous gameplay.

Furthermore, the time-saving end condition may be configured to be established when a predetermined number (e.g., two) of multiple time-saving end conditions are established. In this case, it is preferable to provide a number-of-established determination means for determining the number of established time-saving end conditions, and a condition-attainment determination means for determining whether the number of established conditions determined by the number-of-established determination means has reached a predetermined number (e.g., two), and to end the time-saving state (set to the normal state) when it is determined by the condition-attainment determination means that the number of established conditions has reached the predetermined number (e.g., two).

In addition, a content discrimination means may be provided that discriminates the content of the time-saving end condition that is first established, and a discrimination criterion number variable means may be provided that varies a predetermined number (e.g., two) that serves as the discrimination criterion for the condition achievement discrimination means based on the discrimination result of the content discrimination means. This makes it possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is first established, so that the player can be motivated to play even after the time-saving state has been set.

In addition to the above, a predetermined period measuring means for measuring a predetermined period after the time-saving state is set (for example, until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10) and a result determining means for determining the measurement result of the predetermined period measuring means may be provided, and if the result determining means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, a time-saving end delay means for delaying the end of the time-saving state until the predetermined period has elapsed even if the above-mentioned time-saving end condition is established may be provided, or an end condition invalidating means for invalidating the established time-saving end condition when the result determining means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period may be provided. Also, while the result determining means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is established or updating (subtracting) the values of various counters set corresponding to each time-saving end condition may not be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the time-saving state from ending immediately after it is set, and the timing for ending the time-saving state can be set in a complex manner. In addition, when using a process for ending the time-saving state based on the establishment of multiple time-saving end conditions as described above, it is preferable to set multiple time-saving end conditions as a priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 100 times) and a non-priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of small wins reaches 3 times), and to configure the time-saving state to end immediately when the priority time-saving end condition is established, and to end the time-saving state when only multiple non-priority time-saving end conditions are established. By setting the priority time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessive time-saving state.

Returning to FIG. 385(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 possessed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this tenth control example will be explained. FIG. 385(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 possessed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 385(b), this tenth control example differs from the RAM 203 in the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(b)) in that a special chart 2 variation count counter 203ia has been added, but otherwise is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The game status storage area 203g is a memory area in which information indicating the game status contained in the status command received from the main control device 110 is stored, as in each of the control examples described above, and is configured to be able to determine not only the set game status (normal status, time-saving status) based on the information stored in the game status storage area 203g, but also the type of game status (unfavorable time-saving status (first time-saving status), favorable time-saving status (second time-saving status)).

The special pattern 2 variation counter 203ia is a counter that is referenced when determining whether the number of variations of the second special pattern variation executed during the time-saving state satisfies the second time-saving end condition, and a value corresponding to the second time-saving end condition is set when the time-saving state is set. Then, each time a control process is executed to start the second special pattern variation during the time-saving state, the value is subtracted, and it is determined whether the value after subtraction satisfies the second time-saving end condition (is 0).

By configuring it in this way, even if the content of the second time-saving end condition is made different depending on the type of time-saving state to be set, it is only necessary to change the content of the value to be set in the special chart 2 variation count counter 203ia when setting the time-saving state, and the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 389(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example will be described. FIG. 389(a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 389(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example differs from the ROM 222 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 311(a)) in that the lottery result notification mode selection table 202fa has been deleted and that a final variable performance selection table 222ia and a notification target selection table 222ib have been provided. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same contents are denoted with the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

The final variation effect selection table 222ia is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the variation effect (final variation effect) that is executed during the final variation of the second special pattern variation executed during the time-saving state (special pattern 2 time-saving final variation), and is referenced when determining the variation effect pattern of the special pattern 2 variation that is one before the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is met.

As described above, in this tenth control example, the timing for ending the time-saving state is the timing for starting the special pattern change, so the period of special pattern change just before the time-saving end condition is met is the player's last chance to acquire the reserved special pattern 2. Therefore, in this tenth control example, the period of special pattern change just before the time-saving end condition is met is the final time-saving change period, and the final change performance is executed during that final time-saving change period.

Specifically, the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the value of the special chart 2 variation count counter 203ia are updated by the update process 10 (see FIG. 393) executed by the main control unit 110, and a remaining time-saving count command indicating the updated value of the special chart 2 variation count counter 203ia is set (see S10603 in FIG. 393). The remaining time-saving count command output from the main control unit 110 is then received by the voice lamp control unit 113, so that the remaining information (remaining time-saving count) until the time-saving end condition is met for the time-saving state currently set on the voice lamp control unit 113 side can be specified.

Here, if it is determined that the remaining number of time-saving times is 1, that is, that the time-saving end condition will be met by the special pattern change that is executed next to the special pattern change that corresponds to the currently received remaining time-saving number command, specifically, if information indicating "1" is received as the remaining time-saving number command as the value of the time-saving counter 203h or the value of the special pattern 2 change number counter 203ia, the change period of the corresponding special pattern change (final time-saving change) is identified as the final time-saving change period, and the presentation mode of the final time-saving change presentation is determined for that final time-saving change period.

By configuring it in this way, even if the process to end the time-saving state is executed at the start of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is met, it is easier to ensure a period of time to execute an effect (reservation acquisition effect) that encourages the player to acquire the special pattern 2 reservation.

In addition, in this tenth control example, the time-saving state is ended at the start timing of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied. Therefore, during the period of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the game state (normal state) is entered in which it is difficult to obtain the special pattern 2 reservation. Therefore, the time-saving final change presentation is executed during the special pattern change period immediately before the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied. However, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 in which the stop timing of the special pattern change is specified as the timing for ending the time-saving state, the period of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is satisfied is specified as the time-saving final change period, and the presentation mode of the time-saving final change presentation can be determined for that period of the special pattern change.

The presentation period of the time-saving final change presentation only needs to overlap with at least a portion of the period corresponding to the above-mentioned time-saving final change period. The time-saving final change presentation may be configured to have a presentation period that is only a portion of the time-saving final change period, or the time-saving final change presentation may be configured to span a portion of the time-saving final change period and a period that is different from the time-saving final change period.

Here, the contents stipulated in the final variation performance selection table 222ia will be explained with reference to FIG. 390. FIG. 390 is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the final variation performance selection table 222ia. In this tenth control example, as shown in FIG. 382(a) or FIG. 383(b), a performance mode that can give different information to the player as the time-saving final variation performance is configurable. For example, during the period when the time-saving final variation performance is being executed, a performance mode corresponding to a reserved acquisition performance (see FIG. 382(a)) that encourages the acquisition of a special chart 2 reserved, and a performance mode corresponding to a congratulatory performance (see FIG. 383(b)) that notifies the player that the acquired special chart 2 reserved contains information that can give the player an advantageous privilege are configurable.

As shown in FIG. 390(a), in this final variation effect selection table 222ia, the performance mode of the final variation effect is specified in correspondence with the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the special pattern variation that executes the time-saving final variation effect, the number of reserved special patterns 2 (the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b1 for special pattern 2) when determining the variation effect of the special pattern variation that executes the time-saving final variation effect, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223e.

Specifically, if the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the special pattern change that executes the time-saving final change performance is a "big win" or a "small win C," and the special pattern 2 reserved number (the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b1) when determining the special pattern change performance that executes the time-saving final change performance is "1 to 3," the value of the acquired performance counter 223e is in the range of "0 to 69," and the performance mode is "goal" (see FIG. 383 (b)) in the range of "70 to 99." "Save Weak" (see FIG. 382(a)) is specified as the mode, and when the special symbol 2 reserved number (value of special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223b1) is "0" when determining the special symbol variation in which the time-saving final variation performance is executed, "Save Weak" (see FIG. 382(a)) is specified as the performance mode for the acquired performance counter 223e value in the range of "0 to 69", and "Goal" (see FIG. 383(b)) is specified as the performance mode for the range of "70 to 99".

In addition, if the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the special pattern change that executes the time-saving final change performance is "small win A" and the special pattern 2 reserved number (value of special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b1) when determining the special pattern change performance that executes the time-saving final change performance is "0 to 3", the performance mode is specified as "weak save" (see Figure 382 (a)) for the range of the acquired performance counter 223e value "0 to 69", and as "strong save" for the range of "70 to 99".

Furthermore, if the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the special pattern change that executes the time-saving final change performance is "small win B" and the special pattern 2 reserved number (value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b1) when determining the special pattern change that executes the time-saving final change performance is "1 to 3", the performance mode is "Strong Save" for the range of the acquired performance counter 223e value "0 to 69", and the performance mode is "Weak Save" for the range of "70 to 99" (see FIG. 382(a)). If the special pattern 2 reserved number (value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b1) when determining the special pattern change that executes the time-saving final change performance is "0", the performance mode is "Strong Save" for the range of the acquired performance counter 223e value "0 to 99".

Here, in this tenth control example, when "small win C" is set as the small win type, the second time-saving state (advantageous time-saving state) is set after the end of the big win game that is executed based on the small win. In other words, when "small win C" is won, a time-saving state having a period during which the special chart 2 reservation can be acquired is set later. Therefore, as the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation presentation, a presentation mode corresponding to a congratulatory presentation ("goal") that does not prompt the player to acquire the special chart 2 reservation during the presentation period of the time-saving final variation presentation can be set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent players from being encouraged to unnecessarily fire game balls in an attempt to acquire a reserved special chart 2 during the final time-saving fluctuation period, which indicates the end of the time-saving state. Furthermore, the ratio at which the presentation mode corresponding to the congratulatory presentation ("goal") is set is varied according to the number of reserved special charts 2 that have already been acquired, so that the presentation mode corresponding to the congratulatory presentation ("goal") is more likely to be set when the number of reserved special charts 2 that have already been acquired is large than when it is small.

In other words, when a game ball is released to acquire a reserved special chart 2 during the final variation performance period, the player is configured to be less likely to receive the reserved award when there are fewer bonuses available to the player (when there are fewer reserved special charts 2 that can be newly acquired). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to further prevent players from being encouraged to play games that involve unnecessary release of game balls in order to acquire reserved special charts 2.

Furthermore, in this tenth control example, even if there is a high possibility that the advantageous time-saving state will be set again (a state in which small win C has been won), the reserved acquisition effect is executed with a low probability, so it is possible to prevent the player from reliably understanding the future game content due to the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation effect.

On the other hand, in this tenth control example, when "small win B" is set as the small win type, the time-saving state is not set (the normal state is set) after the end of the big win game that is executed based on the small win. In other words, when "small win B" is won, a period in which the special chart 2 reservation can be acquired later is not set. Therefore, as the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation presentation, a presentation mode that encourages the player to acquire the special chart 2 reservation during the presentation period of the time-saving final variation presentation can be set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to reliably acquire the special 2 reserved figure during the last period in which the special 2 reserved figure can be acquired. In addition, in this tenth control example, as the presentation mode of the reserved acquisition presentation to encourage the player to acquire the special 2 reserved figure, a weak presentation mode ("Weak Save") that encourages the acquisition of the special 2 reserved figure and a strong presentation mode ("Strong Save") that strongly encourages the acquisition of the special 2 reserved figure more than the weak presentation mode can be set, and the proportion of the strong presentation mode set as the presentation mode of the reserved acquisition presentation is configured to differ between when an unfavorable time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (when a small prize A is won) and when a normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game (when a small prize B is won).

In other words, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, it is difficult to acquire a new reserved special symbol 2, but for example, when an unfavorable time-saving state is set without acquiring any reserved special symbol 2, a new second special symbol lottery can be executed once. In other words, when the normal state is set after the end of a big win game, and when an unfavorable time-saving state is set, both are game states in which it is difficult to acquire a new reserved special symbol 2, but the unfavorable time-saving state is a game state in which it is easier to execute a new second special symbol lottery. And since a new second special symbol lottery is executed, there is a possibility that a favorable time-saving state will be set based on the lottery result, and therefore, the "small win C" in which the unfavorable time-saving state is set is more likely to later be set as a favorable time-saving state than the "small win B" in which the normal state is set.

Therefore, in this tenth control example, the configuration is such that it is easier to set a presentation mode (Strong Save) that strongly encourages the player to acquire the reserved special chart 2 when small prize B is won than when small prize A is won.

Here, in conventional pachinko machines 10, in the final period during which it is possible to acquire the reserved special symbol 2 in the time-saving state (final time-saving fluctuation period), a performance (reservation acquisition performance) is executed that unconditionally encourages the player to acquire the reserved special symbol 2. However, depending on the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the final time-saving fluctuation period, there are cases where there is no merit to acquiring the reserved special symbol 2 during the final time-saving fluctuation period, and only the demerit of needlessly firing game balls occurs.

The same reserved symbol acquisition effect is executed in both situations where it would be better to actually acquire the reserved special symbol 2 (for example, the time-saving state ends as it is, making it impossible to acquire a new reserved special symbol 2) and situations where there is little benefit to acquiring the reserved special symbol 2 (for example, a situation where the ongoing special symbol lottery results in a big jackpot (or a small jackpot), and after the big jackpot game based on the lottery result ends, a time-saving state is set in which it is easy to acquire the reserved special symbol 2 again). This could lead to a problem whereby players' motivation to acquire a new reserved special symbol 2 gradually decreases when the reserved symbol acquisition effect is executed.

In response to this, in the tenth control example, the presentation mode for the reserve acquisition presentation can be set to different presentation modes that vary the degree to which the player is encouraged to acquire the special chart 2 reserve, and is configured so that in situations where it would be better to actually acquire the special chart 2 reserve (for example, a situation where the time-saving state ends as it is and it becomes impossible to acquire a new special chart 2 reserve), it is easy to set a presentation mode that strongly encourages the player to acquire the special chart 2 reserve (Strong Save).

By configuring it in this way, players who see the reserved acquisition performance, which is performed in a different presentation mode from the normally executed reserved acquisition performance and in a presentation mode that strongly encourages the acquisition of the special reserved chart 2, can be motivated to play in order to acquire the special reserved chart 2.

As an example of a presentation mode that strongly encourages the player to acquire the special chart 2 reservation, the display area of the small display area Dm4 may be enlarged to display the word "Hit left" in a larger size, or the comment displayed in the secondary display area Ds may be changed from "Hit left to collect V" to "Make sure to hit left" to strongly encourage the player to release the game ball. In other words, the display mode of the information provided to the player in the normal reserve acquisition presentation may be changed to strongly encourage the player to release the game ball. Alternatively, a presentation mode may be set in which new information that is not provided to the player on the display screen shown in FIG. 382(a) (the display screen for the normal reserve acquisition presentation) (for example, information indicating that when the current special chart variation period ends, no period will be set in which the special chart 2 reservation can be acquired) can be provided to the player. In addition, the game may be configured to clearly inform the player that it would be better to actually acquire the reserved special figure 2 (for example, the time-saving state will end and it will no longer be possible to acquire the reserved special figure 2) by executing additional effects using sounds output from the pachinko machine 10 or light-emitting means (such as LEDs) provided on the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this tenth control example, as shown in FIG. 390(a), the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation presentation is determined based on the result of the special pattern lottery (win/lose judgment result) corresponding to the special pattern variation that executes the time-saving final variation presentation and the number of special pattern 2 reserved that has been acquired, but the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation presentation may be determined based on other information, for example, the presentation mode may be determined based on information regarding the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) for the special pattern 2 reserved that has been acquired.

In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not a favorable time-saving state will be set later based on the result of the special symbol lottery (win/lose judgment result) and the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) for the reserved special symbol 2 that has already been acquired, and to determine the presentation mode of the time-saving final variation presentation based on the judgment result. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a time-saving final variation presentation with higher accuracy.

The notification target selection table 222ib is a data table referenced when determining the presentation mode (number of notifications) of the notification effect (see FIG. 383(a)) for notifying the player of the number of jackpot play rights that have been acquired (including the number of jackpot play rights that will be acquired), and is referenced when the conditions for executing the notification effect are met and information for determining the presentation mode of the notification effect is identified (see S20108 in FIG. 394).

Here, the contents defined in the notification target selection table 222ib will be explained with reference to FIG. 390(b). FIG. 390(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the notification target selection table 222ib. As shown in FIG. 390(b), the notification target selection table 222ib specifies different reserved memory information to be the target of the notification performance (notification target) based on the result of reading the reserved memory information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (the position (memory area) where the reserved memory information corresponding to the small win type "small win C" for which an advantageous time-saving state is set is stored, and the number of reserved memory information corresponding to "small win C").

As described above, the winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first area to fourth area) for the special symbols, and each of these areas is configured to store the winning information included in the winning information command output from the main control device 110 as reserved memory information in order starting from the first area. In other words, the winning information storage area 223a is configured to store reserved memory information in the order in which the second special symbol lottery is executed as reserved memory information corresponding to the second special symbol.

Therefore, by reading out the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a, it is possible to determine the number of reserved memory information that will win the small prize C and the order in which the lottery for the second special pattern based on the reserved memory information that will win the small prize C will be executed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, the first area (area 1) of the winning information storage area 223a stores reserved memory information corresponding to the second special symbol lottery to be executed next, followed by the second area (area 2), the third area (area 3), and the fourth area (area 4) in that order. In this tenth control example, the special symbol lottery is configured to be executed in the order in which the winning information was acquired, so that the reserved memory information stored in the first area (area 1) is the first reserved memory information stored, and the reserved memory information stored in the fourth area (area 2) is the last reserved memory information stored.

As shown in FIG. 390(b), the notification target selection table 222ib is configured to determine the small win C reservation to be notified in association with the final small win C reservation storage position and the number of small win C reservations in the reservation. The final small win C reservation storage position is determined by identifying the reservation memory information that wins the small win C among the reservation memory information corresponding to the multiple second special patterns stored in the winning information storage area 223a, and indicating the reservation area (first area to fourth area) in which the reservation memory information that was stored most recently among the identified reservation memory information is stored.

In other words, when the final small prize C reserved storage position is "1", it indicates that reserved memory information (small prize C reserved) for winning the small prize C is stored only in the first area (area 1) of the reserved areas of the winning information storage area 223a, and when the final small prize C reserved storage position is "2", it indicates that the area in which the small prize C reserved was last stored is the second area (area 2) of the reserved areas of the winning information storage area 223a. Note that the final small prize C reserved storage position only specifies the position of the last small prize C reserved stored, and when the final small prize C reserved storage position is "2", there are cases where the small prize C reserved is stored in the first area (area 1) and cases where it is not stored.

Similarly, when the final small win C reserved storage position is "3", it indicates that the area in the winning information storage area 223a where the small win C reserved was last stored is the third area (area 3). Note that the final small win C reserved storage position only specifies the position of the last small win C reserved stored, and when the final small win C reserved storage position is "3", there are cases where the small win C reserved is stored in the first area (area 1) or the second area (area 2), and cases where it is not stored.

In addition, when the final small prize C reserved storage position is "4", it indicates that the area in which the small prize C reserved was last stored among the reserved areas in the winning information storage area 223a is the fourth area (area 4). Note that the final small prize C reserved storage position only specifies the position of the last small prize C reserved stored, and when the final small prize C reserved storage position is "4", there are cases where a small prize C reserved is stored in each of the first area (area 1), second area (area 2), and third area (area 3), and cases where it is not stored.

As described above, the final small prize C reserved storage position only specifies the position of the last stored small prize C reserved, and does not specify the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired (the total number of reserved memory information corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the winning information storage area 223a). Therefore, whether the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired is "1" or "4," if the small prize C reserved is stored only in the first area (area 1) of the reserved area, the final small prize C reserved storage position is specified as "1."

The reserved small prize C number indicates the number of reserved memory information corresponding to the reserved small prize C (reserved memory information that wins the small prize C) among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a. When the reserved small prize C number is "1", there is one reserved memory information corresponding to the reserved small prize C among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a. When the reserved small prize C number is "2", there are two reserved memory information corresponding to the reserved small prize C among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a. When the reserved small prize C number is "3", there are three reserved memory information corresponding to the reserved small prize C among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a. When the reserved small prize C number is "4", there are four reserved memory information corresponding to the reserved small prize C among the reserved memory information corresponding to the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, referring to FIG. 390(b), the contents stipulated in the notification target selection table 222ib will be specifically explained. As shown in FIG. 390(b), when the final small win C reserve storage position is "1", "area 1 (first area)" is stipulated as the small win C reserve to be notified without specifying the number of small win C reserves in the reserve. In other words, when the final small win C reserve storage position is "1", since there are no other small win C reserves, the small win C reserve stored in "area 1 (first area)" is determined to be the one to be notified by the notification performance.

In addition, when the final small win C reserved storage location is "2" and the number of reserved small win Cs in the reserve is "1", that is, when the small win C reserve is stored only in the "second area (area 2)" of the reserve areas, "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the small win C reserve to be notified. In this case, since no small win C reserve is stored in "area 1 (first area)", the number of rights to play a big win game calculated based on the reserved memory information stored in "area 1 (first area)" is determined as the number of notifications for the notification effect, rather than the number of rights to play a big win game that is based on the assumption that a small win C will be won.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute a notification effect that deviates between the number of rights to play a jackpot game notified by the notification effect and the number of rights to play a jackpot game that has actually been acquired (including the number of rights to play a jackpot game that is expected to be acquired), providing the player with an unexpected effect.

When the number of reserved small win Cs in the reserve is "2", "Area 2 (second area)" is specified as the reserved small win C to be notified. In this case, since the reserved small win Cs are stored in "Area 2 (second area)", it is possible to set the maximum number of rights to play the current big win game as the number to be notified in the notification effect.

Next, for a final small win C reserved storage location of "3", if the number of reserved small win Cs in the reserve is "1", i.e., if the small win C reserve is stored only in the "third area (area 3)" of the reserve areas, "area 3 (third area)" is specified as the small win C reserve to be notified. In this case, since the last stored small win C reserve is stored in "area 3 (third area)", it is possible to set the current maximum number of rights to play big win games as the announcement number for the announcement effect.

In addition, when the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "2", "area 2 (second area)" is specified as the reserved small prize C to be notified. In this case, there are cases where a reserved small prize C is not stored in "area 2 (second area)" and cases where a reserved small prize C is stored. To explain in detail, since the last reserved small prize C storage position is "3", it is confirmed that a reserved small prize C is stored in "area 3 (third area)" of the reserved areas. And, since the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "2", the reserved small prize C is stored in either "area 2 (second area)" where reserved memory information is stored before "area 3 (third area)" or "area 1 (first area)".

Here, when the small win C reservation is stored in "area 2 (second area)", the small win C reservation is stored in "area 2 (second area)" that is the target of the notification, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 2 (second area)" (the notification number including the number of rights to play the big win game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. On the other hand, when the small win C reservation is stored in "area 1 (first area)", the small win C reservation is not stored in "area 2 (second area)" that is the target of the notification, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information (small win A, small win B, or big win) stored in "area 2 (second area)" is set as the notification number of the notification effect.

In addition, when the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "3", "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the reserved small prize C to be notified. In this case, the reserved small prize C is definitely stored in "area 1 (first area)". To explain in detail, since the final reserved small prize C storage position is "3", it is confirmed that the reserved small prize C is stored in "area 3 (third area)" among the reserved areas. And, since the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "3", only the state where two reserved small prize Cs are stored in "area 2 (second area)" or "area 1 (first area)" where reserved memory information is stored before "area 3 (third area)" applies, so the reserved small prize C is definitely stored in "area 1 (first area)". In this case, since the small win C reservation is stored in the "area 1 (first area)" to be notified, the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 1 (first area)" (the notification number including the number of execution rights of the jackpot game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. In this case, the small win C reservation is stored in an area after "area 1 (first area)", and the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 3 (third area)" is the maximum number of execution rights of the jackpot game that can be notified by the notification effect at the current time. In this way, by configuring the notification effect to be able to notify a number different from the maximum number that can be notified as the number of execution rights of the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the number of jackpot games that will actually be executed (the number of consecutive wins).

Similarly, when the last small win C reserved storage location is "4" and the number of reserved small win Cs is "1", that is, when small win C reserveds are stored only in "fourth area (area 4)" of the reserved areas, "area 4 (fourth area)" is specified as the small win C reserved to be notified. In this case, since the last stored small win C reserved is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)", it is possible to set the current maximum number of rights to play big win games as the notification number for the notification effect.

In addition, when the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "2", "area 3 (third area)" is specified as the reserved small prize C to be notified. In this case, there are cases where a reserved small prize C is not stored in "area 3 (third area)" and cases where a reserved small prize C is stored. To explain in detail, since the last reserved small prize C storage position is "4", it is determined that a reserved small prize C is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" among the reserved areas. And, since the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "2", the reserved small prize C is stored in either "area 3 (third area)", "area 2 (second area)", or "area 1 (first area)", which has reserved memory information stored before "area 4 (fourth area)".

Here, if the small win C reservation is stored in "area 3 (third area)", the small win C reservation is stored in "area 3 (third area)" to be notified, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 3 (third area)" (the notification number including the number of rights to play the big win game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. On the other hand, if the small win C reservation is stored in "area 1 (first area)" or "area 2 (second area)", the small win C reservation is not stored in "area 3 (third area)" to be notified, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information (small win A, small win B, or big win) stored in "area 3 (third area)" is set as the notification number of the notification effect.

When the number of reserved small win Cs in the reserve is "3", "area 2 (second area)" is specified as the reserved small win C to be notified. In this case, there are cases where a reserved small win C is not stored in "area 2 (second area)" and cases where a reserved small win C is stored. To explain in detail, since the last reserved small win C storage position is "4", it is determined that a reserved small win C is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" among the reserved areas. And, since the number of reserved small win Cs in the reserve is "3", it means that a reserved small win C is stored in two areas out of "area 3 (third area)", "area 2 (second area)" and "area 1 (first area)" where reserved memory information is stored before "area 4 (fourth area)".

Here, if the small win C reservation is at least stored in "Area 2 (second area)", the small win C reservation is stored in "Area 2 (second area)" to be notified, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "Area 2 (second area)" (the notification number including the number of execution rights to play the big win game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. On the other hand, if the small win C reservation is stored in "Area 1 (first area)" and "Area 3 (third area)", the small win C reservation is not stored in "Area 2 (second area)" to be notified, so the notification number based on the reservation memory information (small win A, small win B, or big win) stored in "Area 2 (second area)" is set as the notification number of the notification effect.

In addition, when the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "4", "area 1 (first area)" is specified as the reserved small prize C to be notified. In this case, the reserved small prize C is definitely stored in "area 1 (first area)". To explain in detail, since the final reserved small prize C storage position is "4", it is confirmed that the reserved small prize C is stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" among the reserved areas. And, since the number of reserved small prize Cs in the reserve is "4", only the state where three reserved small prize Cs are stored in "area 3 (third area)", "area 2 (second area)", and "area 1 (first area)", which have reserved memory information stored before "area 4 (fourth area)", applies, so the reserved small prize C is definitely stored in "area 1 (first area)". In this case, since the small win C reservation is stored in the "area 1 (first area)" to be notified, the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 1 (first area)" (the notification number including the number of execution rights of the jackpot game that can be acquired during the advantageous time-saving state set based on the small win C winning) is set as the notification number of the notification effect. In this case, the small win C reservation is stored in an area after "area 1 (first area)", and the notification number based on the reservation memory information stored in "area 4 (fourth area)" is the maximum number of execution rights of the jackpot game that can be notified by the notification effect at the current time. In this way, by configuring the notification effect to be able to notify a number different from the maximum number that can be notified as the number of execution rights of the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the number of jackpot games that will actually be executed (the number of consecutive wins).

Next, referring to FIG. 389(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example will be described. FIG. 389(b) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the tenth control example. As shown in FIG. 389(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example differs from the RAM 223 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 311(b)) in that it is provided with a status storage area 223ia, a time-saving final fluctuation flag 223ib, and an execution flag 223ic. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same contents are given the same symbols and their description will be omitted.

The tenth control example is also different from the seventh control example in that the types of information stored in the winning information storage area 223a are increased. Specifically, the tenth control example is configured to be able to execute a notification effect for notifying the player of at least a portion of the number of rights to play a jackpot game that has already been acquired, and is configured to notify the number of rights to play a jackpot game based on reserved memory information determined by referring to the notification target selection table 222ia. The winning information storage area 223a is configured to store information indicating that the reserved memory information determined by referring to the notification target selection table 222ia is the subject of notification.

By configuring it in this way, even if the second special pattern lottery is executed and the storage area of the reserved memory information stored in the winning information storage area 223a shifts, it is possible to easily determine which reserved memory information is the subject of notification.

In this tenth control example, when a notification effect is executed to notify the player of the number of rights to play a jackpot game, a new notification effect is not executed until a special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved special pattern 2 that is the subject of the notification effect is executed, so that the player believes that all of the rights to play a jackpot game that have already been acquired (including those to be acquired) have been notified by the notification effect.

In this way, in order to control so that a new notification effect is not executed until a special pattern lottery corresponding to the reserved special pattern 2 that is the target of the notification effect is executed, the system is configured to determine whether the reserved memory information stored in the winning information storage area 223a contains information indicating the target of the notification effect. This makes it easy to determine the end timing of the notification effect.

In addition, in this tenth control example, the system is configured to restrict the execution of a new notification effect during the execution period of the notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to allow a new notification effect to be executed. In this case, for example, when the number of execution rights for a jackpot game that have already been acquired (including those to be acquired) and that have not been notified by a notification effect exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5), it is determined that an additional execution condition has been met, and a new notification effect can be executed regardless of whether a notification effect is being executed or not.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the number of execution rights for jackpot games that are not notified by the notification effect from increasing, which can cause the player to lose interest in the notification effect and reduce the effect of the presentation. In addition to the condition that is met based on the number of execution rights for jackpot games that have been acquired (including those to be acquired) that have not been notified by the notification effect, the additional execution condition may be, for example, a condition that is met when it is determined that the information contained in the reserved memory information contains a predetermined number (e.g., two pieces) of specific information (e.g., information indicating that a jackpot game advantageous to the player will be executed, or information indicating that the game state set after the end of the jackpot game will be a game state advantageous to the player).

Furthermore, the notification mode for notifying the player of the number of rights to play the jackpot game that has been acquired (including those to be acquired) through the notification effect can be selected by the player. For example, when the player selects the first notification mode, all of the rights to play the jackpot game that has been acquired (including those to be acquired) are notified to the player. When the player selects the second notification mode, as in the tenth control example, a portion of the number of rights to play is randomly selected and notified to the player. When the player selects the third notification mode, only the minimum number of rights to play, that is, the result of whether or not the player has the number of rights to play the jackpot game that has been acquired (including those to be acquired), may be notified to the player. In this case, when the first notification mode is selected, a new notification effect is executed so that the number of rights to play the jackpot game that has been acquired (including those to be acquired) that is notified through the notification effect increases by acquiring a new special chart 2 reservation.

The status storage area 223ia is a storage area for temporarily storing information contained in a status command output from the main control device 110. By reading out the information stored in this information storage area 223a, the currently set game status and its type (advantageous time-saving status, unfavorable time-saving status) can be identified on the voice lamp control device 113 side. Furthermore, the information storage area 223a is provided with a storage area capable of storing information relating to the currently set game status, and a past storage area capable of storing information relating to game statuses that were previously set. The past memory area has a memory region (first past memory area to third past memory area) that can store information about up to three previous game states, and when a state command indicating a change in game state is received from the main control device 110, information corresponding to the received state command is stored in the memory area, information previously stored in the memory area is shifted to the first past memory area, information stored in the first past memory area is shifted to the second past memory area, information stored in the second past memory area is shifted to the third past memory area, and information stored in the third past memory area is erased.

In this way, by configuring the game state that was previously set to be temporarily stored, it is possible to execute effects that correspond to the transitions between game states multiple times, or effects that correspond to game states that were previously set, so a wide variety of effects can be provided to the player.

The time-saving final change flag 223ib is a flag for indicating the special pattern change period for executing the time-saving final change performance, and is set to on when a special pattern change corresponding to the special pattern change period for executing the time-saving final change performance is executed.

In this tenth control example, the time-saving state is configured to end at the start timing of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is met, so during the period of the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is met, the game state (normal state) is one in which it is difficult to obtain the special pattern 2 reservation, so the time-saving final change flag 223ib is set to ON when the special pattern change immediately before the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is met is executed, and is set to OFF when the special pattern change immediately before the special pattern change when the time-saving end condition is met is stopped and displayed.

The executed flag 223ic is a flag to indicate that a notification effect is being executed, and is set to ON when the notification effect is executed. It is set to OFF when a special pattern change corresponding to the pending memory information that is the subject of the notification effect is executed (when a corresponding special pattern change change effect is set). In this tenth control example, it is configured so that a new notification effect is not executed while the executed flag 223ic is set to ON.

<Regarding control process of main control device 110 in tenth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 391 to FIG. 393, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in this tenth control example will be described. In this tenth control example, the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 315) is replaced with a special symbol variation process 10 (see FIG. 391), the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (see FIG. 318) is replaced with a special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (see FIG. 392), and the update process 7 (see FIG. 319) is replaced with an update process 10 (see FIG. 393), but the rest is the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted. Note that, for the parts where detailed description of the same elements as those described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment is omitted, the contents described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment are applied. Furthermore, the technical ideas described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and in each embodiment are naturally applied to this tenth control example, and the modified examples and additional examples described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and in each embodiment are naturally applied to this tenth control example.

First, referring to FIG. 391, the special pattern change process 10 (S10154) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 391 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change process 10 (S10154). This special pattern change process 10 (S10154) is executed during timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 314), and is a process for controlling the change display of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the change display of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81.

In this special symbol variation process 10 (S10154), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S10201). The special symbol jackpot period includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 display a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and includes the period indicating the start of the jackpot game (opening period), the period during which the jackpot game is in progress (round game period), and the grace period (ending period) until the round game period ends and the next lottery (variation) of a new special symbol begins.

To determine whether or not a jackpot is currently being won, specifically, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON. If it is determined that a jackpot with a special symbol is currently being won (the jackpot flag 203k is set to ON) (S10201: Yes), this process ends.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot, i.e., if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203k is not set to on (set to off) (S10201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is changing (S10202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b is not changing (S10202: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e are obtained (S10203).

Then, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (S10204). If the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S10204: Yes), that is, if the reserved ball of the second special pattern that starts the fluctuation (lottery) is secured, the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted (S10205), and a reserved ball number command (special pattern 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S10206). After the special pattern 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S10206, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S10207). After that, the time-saving lottery process 7 (S10208), the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209), and the special symbol change pattern selection process 10 (S10251) are executed, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S10204: No), then since there are currently no reserved balls of the second special pattern that would initiate the fluctuation (lottery), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10211).

If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is 0 (S10211: No), this process for executing the special pattern variation is terminated since there are currently no reserved balls of the first special pattern that would initiate the variation (lottery).

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S10211: Yes), that is, if the reserved ball of the first special symbol that starts the fluctuation (lottery) is secured, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted (S10212), and a reserved ball number command (special symbol 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10213). After the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S10213, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10214). After that, the process of the special symbol determination process 7 (S10209) and the process of the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 10 (S10251) are executed, and this process is terminated.

In the process of S10202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is changing (S10202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b has elapsed (S10211). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S10215: No), that is, if the current time is during the change period of the special pattern, the display of the first pattern display device is updated (S10216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S10215, if the change time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S10215: Yes), a display mode (stop display) corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37a, 37b is set (S10217). The setting of the stop display is performed in advance by the special pattern change pattern selection process 7 (S10252) described later with reference to FIG. 392. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the tenth control example, the stop display set in the process of S10217 is configured to be displayed on the first pattern display device for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds). By continuously displaying the display mode (stop display) of the stopped pattern for a predetermined period in this way, unlike when the changing pattern is displayed for an instant, the player can be sure to recognize the content of the first pattern that is stopped and displayed.

In the tenth control example, 0.5 seconds is set as the predetermined period (fixed period) during which the stopped state of the first pattern described above is displayed, but other configurations may be used. For example, if a flashing display is performed in which the lit state and the off state are repeated to indicate that the first pattern is changing, then a period longer than the period of one lit display when the flashing display is performed (for example, 0.2 seconds) can be set as the fixed period described above. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to easily determine whether the first pattern is changing or stopped (fixed).

After the process of S10217 is completed, when the variable display of the special symbol being executed in the first symbol display device 37a, 37b starts, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol (the current determination result) performed by the special symbol determination process 7 (see S10209 in FIG. 317) is a jackpot for the special symbol (S10218). If it is determined that the current lottery result is a jackpot for the special symbol (S10218: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203j and the jackpot in progress flag 203k are set to ON (S10219), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 0 (S10220), and the process proceeds to S10221. In the process of S10221, a special symbol determination command is set (S10221), and the process ends.

In other words, in the tenth control example, as explained in the process of S10220, when a special symbol is won as a jackpot, the time-saving state is configured to end at a timing between the end of the variation of the special symbol (the end of the final display of the first symbol) and the start of the jackpot game. The timing for ending the time-saving state based on the winning of a special symbol jackpot may be a predetermined timing, and as in the tenth control example described above, the time-saving state may end, for example, at the start of the variation of the special symbol that won the jackpot, other than after the final display of the special symbol (first symbol), or at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing when the final display starts). In addition, the time-saving state may end at the start of the jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot, or a predetermined period after the start of the jackpot game (for example, the start of the round game when the variable winning device 65 is opened), or at the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, the timing for ending the time-saving state based on winning a jackpot with a special symbol (the timing for establishing the time-saving end condition that is established when a jackpot with a special symbol is won) may be configured to be preset to only one of the multiple timings mentioned above, or the time-saving state may be configured to end at a different timing depending on the type of jackpot won.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the time-saving state is ended when the special symbol starts to change, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the time-saving state has ended (for example, the number of times the special symbol changes has reached a specified number (100 times)) and the normal state has been set, or whether the time-saving state has ended because a jackpot was won during the time-saving state. This allows the player to focus on the content of the presentation display (changing display) of the third symbol that corresponds to the special symbol change that is executed when the time-saving state ends, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, by setting different times for the time-saving end conditions to be met for each of the multiple jackpot types (time to end the time-saving state when a jackpot is won), it is possible to prevent the player from understanding the lottery result (discrimination result) of the special symbol based on the time-saving state end timing. Note that, as part of the times for the time-saving end conditions to be met that are set for each of the multiple jackpot types, a time-saving end timing dedicated to the jackpot may be set that notifies the player that the lottery result (discrimination result) of the special symbol this time is a jackpot when the player identifies the time when the time-saving state has ended, in other words, the time-saving state ends only when the time-saving end condition that is met due to winning a jackpot is met.

By configuring it in this way, you can know when the time-saving state ends and quickly find out that you've won the jackpot, lengthening the period during which you can feel superior. To further enhance this effect, it's a good idea to configure the end of the time-saving state for the jackpot described above to be set in the first half of the fluctuation period from when the special pattern fluctuation is executed to when the special pattern fluctuation ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10218 that the current lottery result is not a big win (S10218: No), it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small win (S10222). If it is determined in the process of S10222 that the current lottery result is a small win (S10222: Yes), the small win start setting process 7 is executed (S10223) and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10222 that the current lottery result is not a small win (S10222: No), the small win start setting process 7 (S10223) is skipped and this process ends.

As explained above, the special symbol variation process 10 (S10104 in FIG. 391) of the tenth control example is configured to determine whether the selection (variation) conditions for the second special symbol are met (processing of S10204 in FIG. 391) in priority over whether the selection (variation) conditions for the first special symbol are met. This is because the second special symbol, which is a special symbol advantageous to the player, is variable (easy to vary) when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and is non-variable (hard to vary) when the normal state is set, making it a special symbol that is more difficult to vary (draw) than the first special symbol.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, if the conditions for selecting (changing) the first special pattern and the conditions for selecting (changing) the second special pattern are met simultaneously (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) of the main control unit 110), the first special pattern will begin to change in preference to the second special pattern, which is more difficult to change (select), causing discomfort to the player. Furthermore, in the tenth control example, the lottery (variation) for the second special symbol is configured to make it easier for the player to win a lottery result that is favorable to the player (to make it easier to win a small prize) than the lottery (variation) for the first special symbol. Therefore, if the lottery (variation) conditions for the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) conditions for the second special symbol are met simultaneously (including an error of 2 milliseconds, which is the processing period of the timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) of the main control device 110), the first special symbol begins to vary in preference to the second special symbol, which is less likely to vary (draw), causing a problem of greater discomfort.

In contrast, in the tenth control example, when executing the process to start the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the selection (variation) conditions of the special symbol (the second special symbol in the tenth control example) that has a higher added value for the player (the probability of winning a small prize is higher than that of the first special symbol, and it is difficult to actually execute the selection (variation)) are determined with priority (first), so the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem can be prevented.

Next, referring to FIG. 392, the special symbol change pattern selection process 10 (S10251) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 392 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol change pattern selection process 10 (S10251). As shown in FIG. 392, the special symbol change pattern selection process 10 (S10251) is configured to execute the update process 10 (S8272) before setting the start of the special symbol change. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to end the time-saving state before the special symbol change starts.

When the special symbol variation pattern selection process 10 (S10251) is executed, it is first determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, i.e., whether a special symbol jackpot has been set (S8201). If it is determined in the process of S8201 that a special symbol jackpot has been set (S8201: Yes), the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot A (S8271), and the process proceeds to S8203.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8201 that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is not a big win (S8201: No), it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a small win, i.e., whether or not a small win for the special symbol is set (S8209). If it is determined in the process of S8209 that a small win for the special symbol is set (S8209: Yes), the type of small win is determined by referring to the small win type selection 10 table 202if (see FIG. 387) (S8273), and the process proceeds to S8203.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S8209 that a small win of the special pattern is not set, i.e., a miss of the special pattern is set (S8209: No), the process of S8273 is skipped and the process proceeds to S8203.

In the process of S8203, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special pattern execution area is obtained (S8203). Next, the current game state is identified based on the information stored in the game state storage area 203g, and the data table corresponding to the identified game state is read from the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (S8252).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of S8203 and the data table contained in the variation pattern selection 7 table 202fd (see FIG. 308(a)) read in the process of S8252 (S8205), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of S8205 (S8206). The special pattern variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation time of the special pattern, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the special symbol stop pattern is set (S8207), and update process 10 is executed (S8272). A detailed explanation of update process 10 (S8272) will be described later with reference to FIG. 393. Then, the start of the special symbol change is set in the first symbol display device 37 (S8208), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of S8207 includes information indicating the type of the stop pattern indicating the result of this special symbol change, that is, a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main process of the main control device 110.

In addition, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to execute update process 10 (S8272) before the process of S8252 in FIG. 392 is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to end the time-saving state before the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, so for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to select different variation patterns for the normal state and the time-saving state, it is possible to prevent a determination as to whether or not a jackpot determination for a special symbol lottery has been executed during the time-saving state based on the selected variation pattern.

Figure 319 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of update process 10 (S8272). In this update process 10 (S8272), as shown in Figure 319, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is subtracted, a determination is made as to whether the time-saving end condition has been met, and a process is executed to end the time-saving state based on the determination result (a process to clear the values of various counters referenced when determining whether the time-saving end condition has been met).

When update process 10 (S8272) is executed, first it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., whether the time-saving period is currently in progress (S10601). In the process of S10601, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not greater than 0 (is 0), i.e., the time-saving period is not in progress (S10601: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0, i.e., the time-saving period is in progress (S10601: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (S10602), and the process proceeds to S10603.

In the process of S10603, a remaining time-saving count command is set (S10603) indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203h changed by the calculation (subtracted by 1). The remaining time-saving count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S11501) of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (S10604: Yes), the game status is set to the normal status (S10605), and then a status command indicating that the current game status is the normal status is set (S10607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S10604 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (S10604: No), this processing is terminated and the process returns to the special symbol variation pattern selection processing 10 (see FIG. 392).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 10th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 394 to FIG. 395, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this tenth control example will be described. This tenth control example is different from the seventh control example described above in that the reserved ball number command process 10 (see FIG. 394) and the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 10 (see FIG. 395) are executed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted. In addition, for the parts where the detailed description of the same elements as those described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment is omitted, the contents described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment are applied. In addition, the technical ideas described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment are naturally applied to this tenth control example, and the modified examples and additional examples described in each of the above-mentioned control examples and each embodiment are also naturally applied to this tenth control example.

First, referring to FIG. 394, the reserved ball number command process 10 (S20101) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be explained. FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved ball number command process 10 (S20101).

When the reserved ball count command process 10 (S20101) is executed, it is first determined whether the executed flag 223ic is on (S20102). If it is determined that the executed flag 223ic is on (S20102: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the executed flag 223ic is not on (S20102: No), the reserved information is extracted from the command currently received from the main control device 110, and the corresponding value is stored in the corresponding special pattern reserved ball count counter (special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203b or special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203b1) (S20103).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b1 is 4 (S20104). If it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b1 is not 4 (S20104: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203b1 is 4 (S20104: Yes), the reserved memory information of the second special pattern is read from the winning information storage area 223a (S20105). Then, it is determined whether the reserved memory information read out contains reserved memory information corresponding to the small win C (S20106). If it is determined that the reserved memory information read out does not contain information corresponding to the small win C (S20106: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S20106, if it is determined that there is information corresponding to a small win C from the reserved memory information read in the process of S20105 (S20106: Yes), it is determined whether the current game state is in the second time-saving state (S20107). If it is determined that the current game state is in the second time-saving state (S20107: Yes), the reserved small win C to be notified is determined from the notification target selection table 222ib (see FIG. 390(b)) (S20108), and the process proceeds to S20109. On the other hand, in the process of S20107, if it is determined that the current game state is not in the second probability change state (S20107: No), the last obtained reserved small win C is determined to be the target for notification (S20112), and the process proceeds to S20109.

In the process of S20109, the display mode showing the consecutive win count corresponding to the storage position of the reserved small win C determined in the process of S20108 or S20112 is determined (S20109), and the notification target information is added to the winning information storage area 223a (S20110). Then, the execution completion flag 223ic is set to ON (S20111), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 395, the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 10 (S14994) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 10 (S14994).

When the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 10 (S14994) is executed, it is first determined whether the game state is in the time-saving state (S19551). If it is determined that the game state is not in the time-saving state (S19551: No), the processes of S19552 to S19555 are skipped and the process moves to S19556. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is in the time-saving state (S19551: Yes), it is determined whether the current change is the final change in the time-saving state (S19552). If it is determined that the current change is not the final change in the time-saving state (S19552: No), the processes of S19553 to S19555 are skipped and the process moves to S19556.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S19552 that the current change is the final change of the time-saving state (S19552: Yes), the time-saving state is read from the state storage area 223ia (S19554). Then, it is determined whether the read time-saving state is the second time-saving state (S19554). The effect mode is determined by referring to the read final change effect selection table (see FIG. 390(a)) (S19555), and the processing proceeds to S19556. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read game state is not the second time-saving state (S19554: No), the processing of S19555 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S19556.

Next, it is determined whether the executed flag 223ic is on (S19556). If it is determined that the executed flag 223ic is on (S19556: Yes), it is determined whether the current target variation is subject to notification (S19557). If it is determined that the current target variation is subject to notification (S19557: Yes), the executed flag 223ic is set to off (S19558), a display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S19559), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S19556 that the execution flag 223ic is not on (S19556: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S19557 that the current target change is not subject to notification (S19557: No), the processing of S19559 described above is executed and this processing ends.

<Eleventh control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 396 to Fig. 405. The pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example is configured to be able to win a small prize in some cases where the result of the special symbol lottery is not a big prize (is a miss), as in the above-mentioned seventh control example, and has a playability (so-called one-type two-type) in which a big prize game can be executed by making a game ball enter a specific area during a small prize game executed based on the small prize winning.

The pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example is significantly different from the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above in that the player is allowed to choose between a game (left-hand play) for executing a first special symbol lottery and a game (right-hand play) for executing a second special symbol lottery in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and that the playability of the time-saving state is different between when the time-saving state is set based on the result of the first special symbol lottery and when the time-saving state is set based on the result of the second special symbol lottery.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above, the game board 13 is configured so that the first special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special symbol lottery during the normal state, so that the left-handed play aiming to get the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, which triggers the execution of the first special symbol lottery, is the most advantageous play method for the player during the normal state. When the time-saving state is set, the game board 13 is configured so that the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special symbol lottery during the time-saving state, so that the right-handed play aiming to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, which triggers the execution of the second special symbol lottery, is the most advantageous play method for the player.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above is configured so that a game method that is advantageous to the player is predefined according to the set game state, and the player plays in accordance with that game method. This configuration makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game, but there is a problem in that the player becomes bored with the game because the player is forced to play in a predefined game method.

In response to this, the pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example is configured so that, when the normal state is set, the player can select between a game aiming to execute the first special symbol lottery (left-hand play) and a game aiming to execute the second special symbol lottery (right-hand play). By configuring it in this way, the player can be allowed to select the game method, making it possible to play in a variety of game methods. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

In addition, in this eleventh control example, when a left-handed play is performed in a normal state, which causes a first special symbol lottery to be executed, and when a right-handed play is performed in a normal state, which causes a second special symbol lottery to be executed, the expected value of the number of game balls (number of prize balls) that can be acquired is approximately the same, but the process of acquiring the number of game balls (number of prize balls) equal to that expected value is different. To put it simply, when a left-handed play is executed, it is relatively difficult to set a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, but once a time-saving state is set, it becomes easier for that time-saving state to continue, and when a right-handed play is executed, it becomes easier to set a time-saving state and harder for that time-saving state to continue than when a left-handed play is executed.

This configuration allows the player to choose the game that suits his/her convenience, which helps prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

First, referring to FIG. 396, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 396 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 396, the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh control example differs from the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 294) in that the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 (the area to the right of the variable display unit 80 where the game ball launched by right-hand play flows down) is different, and an indicator (display mode) for showing the player the game method is attached to the upper side of the game area formed on the game board 13. Note that the same components as those in the seventh control example described above are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 396, the upper area (above the variable display unit 80) of the game area (area through which the launched game ball can pass) formed on the game board 13 is marked with a turtle-like pattern k1 and a shark-like pattern k2, which correspond to the game methods (left-hand play and right-hand play). Pattern k1 corresponds to left-hand play, and is marked in the upper left position of the variable display unit 80, which allows the player to play left-hand play by launching the game ball aiming at pattern k1.

On the other hand, mode k2 corresponds to right-hand play, and is located in the upper right corner of the variable display unit 80, which allows the player to play right-hand play by shooting the game ball aiming at mode k2. This configuration allows the player to adjust the playing method by following the trajectory of the actual game ball that is shot, rather than by the operation content (amount of rotation) of the operating handle 22, and therefore provides the player with an easy-to-understand game.

It is also possible to use other methods for informing the player of the game method being played. For example, a detection means capable of detecting a game ball may be provided in the left side area (the game area formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80) of the game areas formed on the game board 13, where a game ball launched by a left-handed game can flow down, and a notification means may be provided that notifies the player that a left-handed game is being played based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. Alternatively, a detection means capable of detecting a game ball may be provided in the right side area (the game area formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80) where a game ball launched by a right-handed game can flow down, and a notification means may be provided that notifies the player that a right-handed game is being played based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.

Next, the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 396. In this eleventh control example, a second ball entry port 1640 and a right second ball entry port 1641 are provided in the right area of the game board 13 as ball entry ports (starting ball entry ports) for executing the second special symbol lottery.

The second ball entrance 1640 is provided with an electric device 1640a that opens and closes in a winning game (normal winning game) that is executed based on a winning normal symbol lottery, and is configured to be able to create a state where it is easy to enter the game ball (high probability state of normal symbol) and a state where it is difficult to enter the game ball (low probability state of normal symbol) depending on the set game state. Note that the contents of the normal symbol lottery and the operation control contents of the electric device 1640a that opens and closes in a winning game (normal winning game) that is executed based on a winning normal symbol lottery are the same as the contents of the electric device control explained in each control example above, so detailed explanations are omitted.

On the other hand, the right second ball entrance 1641 is arranged so that game balls shot by right-handed play can enter at a constant rate regardless of the set game state, and in this eleventh control example, the right second ball entrance 1641 is arranged so that the rate at which game balls shot by left-handed play enter the first ball entrance 64 is approximately the same. By configuring it in this way, the first special pattern lottery performed by left-handed play in the normal state and the second special pattern lottery performed by right-handed play can be performed at approximately the same frequency, so that no matter which game method the player selects, the player can play without feeling uncomfortable.

When the time-saving state is set, right-hand play is used to make it easier to get the ball into the second ball entrance 1640 by playing right-hand, and a normal symbol lottery based on the high probability state of the normal symbol and a normal symbol winning game that opens and closes the electric device 1640a are executed, so that right-hand play is an advantageous playing method for the player during the time-saving state. Note that the details of the normal symbol lottery based on the high probability state of the normal symbol and the normal symbol winning game that opens and closes the electric device 1640a are the same as those in the seventh control example described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Furthermore, in the lower right area of the game board 13, there are disposed a V winning device 1650 which opens during a small win game, and a variable winning device 1065 which opens during a big win game. This V winning device 1650 has the same contents as the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 294) in the seventh control example described above, and the variable winning device 1650 has the same contents as the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 294) in the seventh control example described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eleventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example will be described with reference to Figures 398 to 401. The pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh control example described above in that the ROM 202 and part of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the ROM 222 and part of the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 are changed, but otherwise is the same. The same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 398, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 in this eleventh control example will be described. FIG. 398(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 395(a), the ROM 202 of this control example differs from the ROM 202 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(a)) in that the 1st win random number 7 table 202fa is replaced by the 1st win random number 11 table 202ja, the small win type selection 7 table 202ff is replaced by the small win type selection 11 table 202jf, the time-saving random number 7 table 202fh is replaced by the time-saving random number 11 table 202jh, and the time-saving type selection 7 table 202fi is replaced by the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ii, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. For ease of explanation, some of the various configurations shown in the ROM 202 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(a)) are omitted in FIG. 385(a), but the illustration is omitted except for configurations that are difficult to apply.

The first winning random number 11 table 202ja differs from the first winning random number 7 table 202fa (see FIG. 305(a)) described above in that it has a special pattern 2 random number 11 table 202ja2 instead of the special pattern 2 random number 7 table 202fa2 that is referenced when the second special pattern is selected, but is otherwise identical. A detailed explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the contents stipulated in the special pattern 2 random number 11 table 202ja2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 399(a). FIG. 399(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 random number 11 table 202ja2. As shown in FIG. 399(a), the special pattern 2 random number 11 table 202ja2 is a data table that is referenced when a winning lottery for the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is performed.

Specifically, of the possible range of the value of the first winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 999", a "big win" is defined for the range "0 to 4", and a "small win" is defined for the value "5 to 54". In other words, in this 11th control example, the probability of winning a big win in the lottery for special chart 2 is approximately 1/200 (5/1000), and the probability of winning a small win is 1/20 (50/1000).

The small prize type selection 11 table 202jf is a data table that is referenced when selecting the type of small prize that will be set if a small prize is won in the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery). This small prize type selection 11 table 202jf differs from the small prize type selection 7 table 202ff (see FIG. 307) of the seventh control example described above in that the selection ratio of the specified small prize type has been changed, but is otherwise the same. A detailed explanation of the same elements will be omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 399(b), the small win type selection 11 table 202jf will be explained. FIG. 399(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 11 table 202jf. A "small win A (jackpot A when V passes)" is defined for the range of the acquired small win type counter C5 value "0 to 4", and a "small win B (jackpot B when V passes)" is defined for the range of "5 to 99".

Time-saving random number 11 table 202jh is a data table referenced in the time-saving winning judgment (time-saving lottery) executed in the special pattern lottery, and differs from the above-mentioned time-saving random number 7 table 202fh (see FIG. 310(a)) in that the judgment value corresponding to the time-saving winning is different, but otherwise it is the same. Explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Here, the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 11 table 202jh will be explained with reference to FIG. 400. FIG. 400 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 11 table 202jh. As shown in FIG. 400(a), the time-saving random number 11 table 202jh stipulates the judgment value for the time-saving winning judgment only for the normal game state (low probability state of special and normal patterns), and the judgment value for the time-saving winning is stipulated for the range of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 from "900 to 949". In other words, since the number of judgment values that are judged to be time-saving winnings is 50 for the 1000 possible values of the first winning random number counter C1, the probability of winning the time-saving winning during the normal state is 1/20 (50/1000). Note that, as shown in FIG. 400(a), time-saving winning is not possible in game states other than the normal state. However, without being limited to this, the game may be configured so that the time-saving feature can be won with a low probability (for example, 1/1000) even in game states other than the normal state.

The time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji is a data table that is referenced when setting the time-saving end conditions for the time-saving state that is set when the time-saving is won in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving type is specified in correspondence with the value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1. In this 11th control example, it is configured so that different time-saving types are selected when the time-saving is won in the first special pattern lottery and when the time-saving is won in the second special pattern lottery.

Here, the contents of the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji will be explained with reference to FIG. 400(b). FIG. 400(b) is a diagram showing the contents specified in the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji. As shown in FIG. 400(b), the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji specifies the type of special pattern that won the time-saving and the value of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1, and specifies the time-saving end condition corresponding to the specified time-saving type, and whether or not a time-saving limit is set.

Specifically, if the time-saving type is won in the first special symbol lottery, time-saving A11 is specified as the time-saving type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1. Then, as the time-saving end condition corresponding to time-saving A, the time-saving end condition is specified in which the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition) is set to "200" and the time-saving limit is set to "none." In other words, the time-saving end condition is set to end the time-saving state when the process of updating the value of the special symbol time-saving counter 203h has been executed 200 times.

On the other hand, if the time-saving type is won in the second special symbol lottery, time-saving B11 is specified as the time-saving type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1. Then, as a time-saving end condition corresponding to time-saving B, a time-saving end condition is specified in which the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition) is set to "200" and the time-saving limit is set to "Yes." In other words, the time-saving end condition is set to end the time-saving state when the process of updating the value of the special symbol time-saving counter 203h is executed 200 times, and when the number of times the time-saving state is set consecutively reaches a predetermined number (10 times), the time-saving limit is reached and the normal state is set.

Therefore, if the time-saving lottery is won in the special pattern lottery, the first special pattern lottery, which does not have a time-saving limit set, is configured to be able to set a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than the second special pattern lottery. This makes it difficult for the player to choose between playing left-handed to execute a jackpot lottery and a time-saving lottery that is advantageous to the player, or playing right-handed to execute a jackpot lottery, a small jackpot lottery, and a time-saving lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, providing the player with the fun of choosing a play method.

Returning to FIG. 398(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 possessed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example will be explained. FIG. 398(b) is a diagram that shows a schematic of the contents defined in the RAM 203 possessed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 398(b), this eleventh control example is the same as the RAM 203 in the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 304(b)) except that a time-saving limit count counter 203ja has been added. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The time-saving limit counter 203ja is a counter for measuring the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern is set in succession. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in this eleventh control example is configured to be able to measure the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern is set in succession (the number of normal consecutive settings) without setting the low probability state of the normal pattern except during a jackpot game, and is configured to be able to execute a process (time-saving limit process) that forcibly sets the low probability state of the normal pattern even if the condition for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established when the number of normal consecutive settings reaches a predetermined number (10 times) (when the time-saving limit is reached), thereby suppressing the excessive consecutive setting of a game state (first probability change state) that is advantageous to the player.

When the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is selected by the second special pattern lottery while the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, the initial value is set to "10" (see S18182 in FIG. 402). The counter value is decremented each time the normal consecutive count is updated (see S13104 in FIG. 405), and the counter value after decrement is referenced in the process of determining whether the time-saving limit has been reached (see S13107 in FIG. 405). When the time-saving limit is reached or the type of jackpot currently being executed is one that sets the low probability state of the normal pattern, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is cleared to 0.

The information indicating the value of this time-saving limit counter 203ja is set as a status command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113 during the jackpot end process.

As described above, in this eleventh control example, the value of the time-saving limit counter 203ja for measuring the number of normal consecutive settings is set to the number of normal consecutive settings until the time-saving limit is reached, and the counter value is subtracted each time the normal consecutive setting number is subtracted. However, without being limited to this, the value of the time-saving limit counter 203ja may be set to "1" when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, and thereafter, the value of the time-saving limit counter 203ja may be incremented by 1 each time the normal consecutive setting number is updated, and it may be determined whether the value of the time-saving limit counter 203ja after the increment is a value indicating that the time-saving limit has been reached (for example, 10), and if the result of this determination indicates that the time-saving limit has been reached, the time-saving limit process may be executed.

When configured in this way, for example, even if the condition for establishing (reaching) the time-saving limit is changed when a second special condition (e.g., winning a jackpot of a specific jackpot type) is established within a period during which a high probability state of a special pattern is continuously set, it is possible to determine whether the time-saving limit has been reached simply by comparing the established condition (reaching condition) after the change with the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja.

When the special condition in the above example is established, the condition for the time-saving limit may be changed to be more difficult to establish than before the change, or may be changed to be easier to establish than before the change. In addition, when the condition for the time-saving limit is changed, it may be configured to immediately determine whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja satisfies the condition for the time-saving limit. Even if the condition for the time-saving limit is changed, it may be configured to determine whether the condition for the time-saving limit count counter 203ja satisfies the condition for the time-saving limit. In particular, in the latter case, the high probability state of the normal pattern is prevented from immediately ending when the condition for the time-saving limit is changed, and the special pattern lottery is guaranteed to win the jackpot at least once during the period when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so that the player's motivation to play can be prevented from decreasing.

In this eleventh control example, as the trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern, a trigger for setting a value in the time-saving limit count counter 203ja (a trigger for setting the time-saving limit) and a trigger for not setting it (a trigger for not setting the time-saving limit) are provided. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in what trigger sets the time-saving state.

Furthermore, in this eleventh control example, even if a high probability state (time-saving state) of a normal pattern is set after the end of a jackpot game, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is updated (decremented) or not updated (decremented) depending on the trigger of the jackpot game. Specifically, when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is not updated even if a time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game played based on the jackpot win, and when a small jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is updated (decremented) when a time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game played based on the small jackpot win.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it more disadvantageous to the player when an opportunity that is difficult to achieve as an opportunity to execute a jackpot game (winning a jackpot) is more disadvantageous to the player than an opportunity that is easy to achieve (winning a small jackpot). This makes it possible to make the player eager to play while aiming to win a jackpot during the time-saving state in which a small jackpot is more likely to be won. It is also possible to provide the player with a novel gameplay experience in which the player aims to achieve an opportunity to execute a jackpot game that is difficult to achieve during the period until an opportunity to execute a jackpot game that is easy to achieve has been executed a predetermined number of times (10 times), and ultimately hopes that an opportunity to execute a jackpot game that is easy to achieve will not be achieved.

In this eleventh control example, a bonus is given in the event that an unlikely opportunity for triggering a jackpot game (winning a jackpot) occurs, in which the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is not updated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when an unlikely opportunity for triggering a jackpot game (winning a jackpot) occurs, the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja may be increased or reset to its initial value.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eleventh control example will be described with reference to FIG. 401. FIG. 401 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the eleventh control example. As shown in FIG. 401, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this eleventh control example differs from the RAM 223 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 311 (b)) in that it is provided with a remaining time reduction counter 223ja and a time reduction limit flag 223jb. The rest of the configuration is the same, and the same contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

The remaining time-saving count counter 223ja is a counter that is set to a value corresponding to the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja set in the main control device 110, and is intended to indicate the period until the time-saving limit is reached (the remaining number of times that the normal high probability state can be set consecutively).

This remaining time reduction counter 223ja is set to a value (10) corresponding to a command that includes information about the type of time reduction that sets the time reduction limit in the limit information update process that is executed when a limit-related command is received in the status command process executed in the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the already set value is decremented by 1 when a time reduction limit count command is received.

The value of this remaining time reduction counter 223ja is referenced when executing the process to determine the presentation mode for each game state. Then, in the state command process of the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined that a command indicating that a low probability state for normal patterns has been set has been received in the game state update process executed when a game state command is received, the value is cleared (set) to 0.

The time-saving limit flag 223jb is a flag for indicating that the time-saving limit has been reached, and is set to on when a time-saving limit reached command is received in the limit information update process, which is executed when a limit-related command is received in the status command process executed in the command determination process, to indicate that the time-saving limit has been reached.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the eleventh control example>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this eleventh control example will be described with reference to Fig. 402 to Fig. 405. This eleventh control example is significantly different from the seventh control example described above in that it is configured to be able to set an upper limit to the period during which a game state (time-saving state) advantageous to the player continues across big win games.

First, the contents of time-saving lottery process 11 (S10288) will be described with reference to FIG. 402. FIG. 402 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 11 (S10288). As shown in FIG. 402, time-saving lottery process 11 (S10288) adds a process to time-saving lottery process 7 (see S10208 in FIG. 316) described above, in which if it is determined that a time-saving win has been made (S18105: Yes), it determines whether the current time-saving win is a time-saving win in the second special pattern lottery (S18181), and if it is determined that the time-saving win is a time-saving win in the second special pattern lottery (S18181: Yes), it sets the value of time-saving limit count counter 203ja to "10" (S18182).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set the time-saving limit only when the time-saving lottery is won in the normal state and the special pattern type that wins the time-saving lottery is the second special pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 403, the processing contents of the jackpot control process 11 (S11574) will be explained. FIG. 403 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the jackpot control process 11 (S11574). This jackpot control process 11 (S11574) differs from the jackpot control process in each of the control examples described above in that jackpot end process 11 (S11651) is executed at the end timing of the ending performance, but otherwise is the same, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 404, the processing contents of jackpot end process 11 (S11651) will be explained. FIG. 404 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of jackpot end process 11 (S11651). This jackpot end process 11 (S11651) is executed when the jackpot game ends, and executes processing for updating the time-saving limit, and processing for determining the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends and setting the game state according to the determined contents.

When the jackpot end process 11 (S11651) is executed, first, the time-saving limit update process is executed (S13001). The details of this time-saving limit update process (S13001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 405. Next, information indicating the game state to be set after the jackpot end is stored in the game state storage area (S13002), the number of time-saving times corresponding to the type of jackpot being executed is determined (S13003), the determined number of time-saving times is set in the time-saving counter 203h (S13004), a time-saving setting information command corresponding to the setting contents is set (S13005), a state command corresponding to the game state after the jackpot and the value of the time-saving limit number counter 203ja is set (S13006), and this process ends.

Next, the details of the time-saving limit update process (S13001), which is one process within the jackpot end 11 process (see S11651 in FIG. 404), will be described. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving limit update process (S13001). In this time-saving limit update process (S13001), a process is executed to set a high probability state for normal symbols based on the type of jackpot or time-saving type that has been won, and a process is executed to set an upper limit value for which a high probability state for normal symbols can be set consecutively, and to update the remaining number of times for the set upper limit value.

In the time-saving limit update process (S13001), first, the jackpot type of the currently active special symbol is read (S13101). Next, it is determined whether the currently active jackpot type read in the process of S13101 is a jackpot type in which a high probability state (time-saving state) of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot ends (S13102). If it is determined that the jackpot type is a jackpot type in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot ends (S13102: Yes), it is determined whether the current jackpot game is a jackpot game based on a small jackpot win (S13103).

In the process of S13103, the trigger for executing a jackpot game is determined by information based on the past game status stored in the game status storage area 203g. If the process of S13103 determines that the jackpot game is based on a small jackpot win (S13103: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S13104). If the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is not greater than 0, that is, if it is determined that the probability state of the normal pattern at the time of the jackpot win is a low probability state (S13104: No), the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203 is not set to a value that can consecutively set the high probability state of the normal pattern, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S13104, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S13104: Yes), the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is decremented by 1 (S13106), and then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after the decrement is 0 or not (S13107). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after the decrement is 0 (S13107: Yes), the upper limit value that can be set for the high probability state of consecutive normal patterns has been reached, so the time-saving limit reaching flag is set to ON (S13108), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S13107, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after the decrement is not 0 (S13107: No), this process is terminated as it is.

As explained above, in this eleventh control example, when the normal state is set, the player is allowed to select between a game aiming to execute a first special symbol lottery (left-hand play) and a game aiming to execute a second special symbol lottery (right-hand play). By configuring in this way, the player can be allowed to select the game method, making it possible to play in a variety of game methods. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

In addition, in this eleventh control example, when a left-handed play is performed in a normal state, which causes a first special symbol lottery to be executed, and when a right-handed play is performed in a normal state, which causes a second special symbol lottery to be executed, the expected value of the number of game balls (number of prize balls) that can be acquired is approximately the same, but the process of acquiring the number of game balls (number of prize balls) equal to that expected value is different. To put it simply, when a left-handed play is executed, it is relatively difficult to set a time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, but once a time-saving state is set, it becomes easier for that time-saving state to continue, and when a right-handed play is executed, it becomes easier to set a time-saving state and harder for that time-saving state to continue than when a left-handed play is executed.

This configuration allows the player to choose the game that suits his/her convenience, which helps prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

Furthermore, in this eleventh control example, when left-hand play is performed in the normal state, the player is allowed to play a game aiming to win a jackpot in the special pattern lottery and a game aiming to win the time-saving feature, and when right-hand play is performed, the player is allowed to play a game aiming to win a jackpot, a small jackpot, or a time-saving feature in the special pattern lottery. In other words, in terms of ease of playing a jackpot game, right-hand play is configured to make it easier for the player to play a jackpot game than left-hand play. On the other hand, it is configured to be possible to set a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player when the time-saving feature is won in the first special pattern lottery performed by left-hand play than when the time-saving feature is won in the second special pattern lottery performed by right-hand play. By configuring in this way, the player can be provided with the fun of choosing a play method.

In this eleventh control example, an upper limit (time-saving limit) can be set on the number of times the high probability state of normal symbols is set in succession. This makes it possible to prevent excessive succession of game states advantageous to the player. Furthermore, in this eleventh control example, a determination is made as to whether or not to set a time-saving limit depending on the trigger for setting the high probability state of normal symbols. In other words, it is possible to create cases where a time-saving limit is set and cases where it is not set, depending on the trigger for setting the high probability state of normal symbols. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play in the hope that a time-saving state will be set without a time-saving limit being set.

In addition, even when the time-saving limit is set, it is possible to create cases where the number of times the high probability state of normal symbols is set consecutively is updated or not updated depending on the trigger for executing a jackpot game. This allows the player to play in the hope that a jackpot game will be executed without updating the number of times remaining until the time-saving limit is reached.

In this eleventh control example, a configuration is used that allows an upper limit (time-saving limit) to be set on the number of times that a high probability state of a normal pattern is set consecutively, but a different configuration may be used as a function to prevent a game state advantageous to the player from being set consecutively. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 is capable of setting a high probability state of a special pattern, it may be configured to allow an upper limit (probability limit) to be set on the number of times that a high probability state of a special pattern is set consecutively.

Furthermore, the upper limit for the number of times the "high probability state of special symbols" is set in succession (number of times of consecutive special symbol settings) and the upper limit for the number of times the "high probability state of normal symbols" is set in succession (number of times of consecutive regular symbol settings) may be configured to be updated and managed separately. For example, in a state in which it has been decided that the "first probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols)" which is a game state advantageous to the player will be set, if the number of consecutive special symbol settings reaches the upper limit (if the probability limit is reached), a "time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols)" in which the "high probability state of special symbols" is changed to a "low probability state of special symbols" may be set, and if the number of consecutive regular symbol settings reaches the upper limit (if the time-saving limit is reached), a "second probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols)" in which the "high probability state of normal symbols" is changed to a "low probability state of normal symbols" may be set.

Furthermore, the number of times that the high probability state of the special symbol can be set consecutively (number of times of consecutive special symbol settings) is configured to be greater than the number of times that the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set consecutively (number of times of consecutive normal symbol settings). In addition, during the special symbol high probability period during which the high probability state of the special symbol is set consecutively, the system may be configured so that more prize balls can be awarded to the player in the first period during which the first probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) is set than in the second period during which the second probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set.

By configuring it in this way, if a jackpot is won while the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set and the first probability state is set, the first period will first be set until the time-saving limit is reached, and then the second period will be set.

As a result, it is possible to execute a first game, which can award many prize balls to a player, for a first period, and then execute a second game, which is difficult to award prize balls to, for a second period. This makes it possible to prevent the first game from being executed excessively in succession, resulting in an excessive number of prize balls being awarded to a player.

Furthermore, the length of the first period during which the first game can be played can be the period from when the first probability variable state is set until the time-saving limit is reached (until the second probability variable state is set) (10 jackpot wins), and the length of the second period during which the second game can be played can be the period from when the second probability variable state is set until the probability variable limit is reached (30 jackpot wins). In this way, by configuring the lengths of the first period and second period set within the special probability period to be configurable based on the number of jackpot wins, it becomes possible to manage the length of the period during which the special probability period is set.

More specifically, during the first period in which the first probability variable state is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol lottery that is mainly executed is always constant (1 second) regardless of the result of the second special symbol lottery, and the content of the jackpot game (number of rounds) executed when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery is always constant (10 rounds). In other words, the length of the first period may be configured not to differ depending on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation executed or the content of the jackpot game executed.

By configuring it in this way, the first period can be set to a length that corresponds to the period until 10 jackpot wins (number of times the special pattern changes) occur in a state with a high probability of a special pattern (jackpot probability of 30/1000).

In addition, during the second period in which the second probability variable state is set, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol lottery that is primarily executed is always constant (0.1 seconds) regardless of the result of the first special symbol lottery, and the content of the jackpot game (number of rounds played) that is executed when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is always constant (2 rounds). In other words, the length of the second period may be configured not to differ depending on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation that is executed or the content of the jackpot game that is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set the second period to a length corresponding to the period until 30 jackpot wins (number of times the special pattern changes) occur when the special pattern has a high probability of occurring (jackpot probability of 30/1000).

Furthermore, the system may be configured so that the number of balls dispensed is increased by allowing a player to be awarded many prize balls during a first period, which is a portion of the special high probability period, and the number of balls dispensed is reduced during a second period, which is the other period of the special high probability period, thereby suppressing the increase or decrease in the number of balls dispensed.

By configuring in this way, even if the appropriate increase in ball output that can be awarded during the specific period in which the special chart high probability period is set is configured to be biased toward the first period, in other words, even if an excessively large number of balls are awarded to the player when only the first period is considered, the increase in ball output during the entire special chart high probability period can be considered to be an appropriate increase in ball output, so that it is possible to perform a surprising ball output increase game for the player while preventing excessive balls from being awarded to the player as a result.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), the first probability state is more likely to be set after the jackpot game ends than if a jackpot is won in the second probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). In other words, it may be possible to set a game state in which it is difficult to win a jackpot, but which is likely to transition to the first game state that is most advantageous to the player if a jackpot is won, and a game state in which it is easy to win a jackpot, but which is unlikely to transition to the first game state that is most advantageous to the player if a jackpot is won.

By configuring it in this way, the game objectives that the player is expected to aim for can be varied depending on the game state that is set, which makes it easier to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

When the first probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game may be configured to be different depending on whether the probability limit is reached first, the time-saving limit is reached first, or the probability limit and time-saving limit are reached simultaneously.

By configuring it in this way, even if the same type of jackpot (for example, a first special jackpot that sets the first special state) is won, different game states can be set depending on the status of each limit being reached, making it easier to provide players with a variety of games.

In addition, by using the above-mentioned configuration, even if the rate at which the same game state (e.g., the first special probability state) is set after the end of a jackpot game is increased (will always be set) when none of the limits have been reached, it is possible to prevent a game state with a high set rate (e.g., the first special probability state) from being set continuously for a long period of time, making the game monotonous and reducing motivation to play.

Furthermore, it may be configured so that a special state (special mode) advantageous to the player can be set when the probability variable limit and the time-saving limit are reached simultaneously. In other words, in the first probability variable state in which the high probability state of the special symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol are set, if the normal state is set based on the probability variable limit and the time-saving limit being reached simultaneously, a normal state (special normal state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is set. By configuring in this way, even if a trigger (each limit) that forcibly shifts the probability state of each symbol from a high probability state to a low probability state is established, if a special condition is established, it is possible to transition to a game state advantageous to the player.

This allows the player to simultaneously play a game in which the player hopes that the probability-changing limit or time-saving limit will not be reached and a game in which the player hopes that the limit will be reached at the same time, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As mentioned above, when there are elements (limits) other than the jackpot type that was won that determine the game state (game situation) that will be set after the jackpot game ends, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to know in advance which of the various game states will be set after the jackpot game ends after the jackpot game of the same jackpot type is played.

In response to this, the presentation may be configured to differ based on the set game state, the number of remaining turns (remaining number of jackpots) until the special limit is reached, and the number of remaining turns (remaining number of jackpots) until the time-saving limit is reached.

This configuration makes it possible to predict future gameplay based on the content of the effects being executed, making it easier to provide players with an easy-to-understand gameplay.

In addition, in some cases where a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, which is mainly executed when the second probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, the first probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be set after the jackpot play ends, but without being limited to this, it may be configured so that if a jackpot is won when the second probability variable state is set, the second probability variable state is always set after the jackpot play ends.

By configuring it in this way, if the second probability variable state is set during the special pattern high probability period when the high probability state of the special pattern is continuously set, that is, if a jackpot type is set in which the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot play ends when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, or if the time-saving limit is reached due to the first probability variable state being set consecutively and the second probability variable state is forcibly set after the jackpot play ends (if the second probability variable state is set by the probability variable limit processing), the period until the probability variable limit is reached can be reliably set to the second probability variable state. Therefore, after a favorable play state (first probability variable state) that is favorable to the player is set, it is possible to easily and reliably set an unfavorable play state (second probability variable state) for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, in this case, the type of jackpot that is set when a jackpot is won during the second high probability state may be configured to differ depending on the trigger for setting the second high probability state. For example, it may be configured so that when the second high probability state is set by high probability limit processing, it is easier to set a jackpot type that sets the second high probability state after the jackpot game ends than when the second high probability state is set based on the jackpot type.

By configuring it in this way, if a jackpot is won while the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, and a high probability state for special symbols is set after the jackpot play ends, the first probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), which is an advantageous play state that is advantageous to the player, will not be set until the probability limit is reached, and an excessively disadvantageous play to the player can be prevented from being played.

Furthermore, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, a high probability state for the special symbol is always set after the jackpot game ends, but this is not limited to this, and a low probability state for the special symbol may be set in some cases when a jackpot is won. Also, in this first embodiment, a plurality of game states are settable, and games with different degrees of advantage can be played depending on the set game state. Specifically, the game states are configured so that the first probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is the game state that is most advantageous to the player, followed by the normal state in which a special state (special mode) is set (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), the second probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), and the normal state. However, this is not limited to this, and the game content executed in each game state may be different to vary the degree of advantage given to the player in each game state.

<Twelfth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 12th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 406 to Fig. 438. In the above-mentioned 11th control example, during the period when one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the jackpot lottery for the other special symbol is not executed. In contrast, the 12th control example is different in that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variable specification).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute lottery games with more special symbols within a given time, and the probability that the player will be awarded a jackpot within the given time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play efficiently.

In addition, in the 11th control example described above, the time-saving lottery was executed only in the first special symbol lottery, but in this 12th control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, and the player is granted a more advantageous benefit if one of the special symbols wins the time-saving lottery during the period from when the time-saving lottery is won for the first special symbol or the second special symbol until the variable display of that special symbol stops, compared to when only one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins the time-saving lottery.

Details will be given later, but in this twelfth control example, if the first or second special symbol wins the time-saving bonus in the normal state, the time-saving A state is set. On the other hand, if the first special symbol wins the time-saving bonus in the normal state, a long (300 seconds) fluctuation time is set (time-saving winning fluctuation state), and if the second special symbol wins the time-saving bonus within the period until the fluctuation of the first special symbol ends (i.e., until the first special symbol, which indicates a time-saving bonus, is displayed stationary), the time-saving B state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving A state, is set.

By configuring it in this way, if one special symbol wins the time-saving feature, the other special symbol will also win the time-saving feature, giving the player a special advantage. Therefore, when one special symbol wins the time-saving feature and the special symbol changes to indicate that a time-saving feature has been won, the player will be made to want to win the other special symbol as well, which makes it possible to motivate the player to play and increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, even if a jackpot of a jackpot type that can set a time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) after the jackpot play ends, the system is configured to execute a process to set the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) after the jackpot play ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage by continuing a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player for a long period of time, and to prevent the player's gambling spirit from increasing.

In addition, in a gaming machine with simultaneous variation specifications, when a jackpot (or small jackpot) is won in one of the special symbol lotteries, the specification is generally such that only one of the following is executed: the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily stopped (interrupted); however, in this twelfth control example, the configuration is such that whether the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped is determined depending on the jackpot type (or small jackpot type). In other words, a jackpot type that forcibly stops (discards) the variable display of the other special symbol and a jackpot type that temporarily stops (interrupts) the variable display of the other special symbol are specified.

By configuring it in this way, when a game state advantageous to the player is set, and a game state disadvantageous to the player may be set by the stopped display of one special symbol, it is possible to prevent the setting of an unfavorable game state when a jackpot of a jackpot type that allows the variation of the other special symbols to be discarded, but if a jackpot of a jackpot type that interrupts the other special symbols is won, the situation in which an unfavorable game state may be set continues. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the variation of the other special symbols could be discarded, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

Here, an overview of the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example will be described. The probability of a big win for the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example is 1/50, which is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The probability of winning the time-saving mode is also 1/50, which is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The probability of a small win is also 1/50, but the small win lottery is only held for the second special symbol.

The details will be described later, but the jackpot type determined when a jackpot is won is determined by different tables (see Figures 410 and 411) for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a jackpot is won with the first special symbol, a 100% jackpot A (5R time-saving A jackpot) is determined regardless of the game state. On the other hand, when a jackpot is won with the second special symbol, the jackpot type is determined according to the game state, as shown in Figure 411. As shown in Figure 411, when a jackpot is won with the second special symbol in the normal state, a 100% jackpot A is set. In other words, in the normal state, the jackpot type determined when a jackpot is won with the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the same.

In addition, a small prize lottery is also held for the second special symbol, and if the small prize is won and the game ball enters the specific area 1650 during the small prize game, it will result in a big prize B or C, which are more advantageous than a big prize A, so it can be said that the second special symbol is a special symbol that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the change time of the first special symbol and the change time of the second special symbol are different in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbol) and the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbol), and in the normal state, the change time of the first special symbol is set shorter than the change time of the second special symbol, so the first special symbol is more likely to stop first. In the time-saving state, the change time of the second special symbol is set shorter than the change time of the first special symbol, so the second special symbol is more likely to stop first.

By configuring it in this way, in the normal state, the number of times the second special symbol lottery is executed is reduced, preventing the player from gaining an excessive advantage, and in the time-saving state, it is possible to prevent the first special symbol from stopping before the second special symbol, which would put the player in a relatively disadvantageous gaming state, making it possible to provide a well-balanced game experience.

In addition, in the normal state, the change time of the second special symbol may be set to be shorter than the change time of the first special symbol, and in the time-saving state, the change time of the first special symbol may be set to be shorter than the change time of the second special symbol.

Here, the game state set in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example will be described. In this twelfth control example, a normal state (a state with a low probability of normal symbols) and a time-saving state (a state with a high probability of normal symbols) can be set as game states. There are two types of time-saving states: a time-saving state A, which ends when the special symbols have changed five times since the time-saving state was set, and a time-saving state B, which ends when the special symbols have changed 10,000 times since the time-saving state was set. When the time-saving state A is set, the probability of winning a big win (probability of winning a big win: 1/50) or a small win (probability of winning a small win: 1/50) in five special symbol lotteries is low at about 18%, while when the time-saving state B is set, the chance of winning a big win or a small win is almost 100%, so the time-saving state B is a more advantageous type of time-saving state for players than the time-saving state A.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, when the first or second special symbol wins the jackpot in the normal state, the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends is only the time-saving A state. Also, when only the first or second special symbol wins the time-saving, the game state that is set is only the time-saving A state, and the time-saving B state is not set.

In this twelfth control example, as shown in FIG. 414, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving winning state in the normal state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (300 seconds). Then, as shown in FIG. 416, during the long-time fluctuation of the first special symbol (time-saving winning fluctuation state), an extremely short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. This makes it possible to execute the second special symbol lottery more often in the time-saving winning fluctuation state compared to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 411, if the second special symbol wins the jackpot during the time-saving winning variable state, a 100% jackpot B (10R time-saving B jackpot) is determined, and the time-saving B state is set after the jackpot game ends. Also, if the second special symbol wins the time-saving winning variable state, the time-saving B state is set.

By configuring it in this way, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving feature, as many second special symbol lotteries as possible are executed within the period until the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, making it possible to motivate the player to play in order to set the time-saving B state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, in the time-saving winning variable state, if the time-saving B state is set due to a big win (or small win) of the second special symbol or a time-saving winning, the variable display of the first special symbol that won the time-saving will continue, and if the first special symbol is displayed stationary, the set time-saving B state will be discarded and a new time-saving A state will be set. In other words, the time-saving B state will only continue for the period until the first special symbol is displayed stationary.

On the other hand, if the variable display of the first special symbol that has won the time-saving mode can be discarded, it becomes possible to play in the time-saving mode B until the time-saving limit described below is reached, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained. Note that the time-saving limit refers to a threshold value that causes the execution of a process to set a non-time-saving mode after the jackpot play ends, even if a jackpot of a type that can set a time-saving mode after the jackpot play ends is won.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, even in the same time-saving B state, it is possible to provide the player with different gameplay aspects, namely a game aiming to discard the first special symbol and a game aiming to win a large number of prize balls by making consecutive wins until the time-saving limit is reached, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the time-saving winning change state is set when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win, but this is not limited to the above, and the time-saving winning change state may also be set when the second special symbol wins the time-saving win. In this case, by configuring the time-saving winning change to vary depending on the type of special symbol, it is possible to provide a relatively advantageous time-saving winning change state and a relatively disadvantageous time-saving winning change state for the player depending on the type of special symbol, which can increase the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the type of time-saving state that is set when only one of the first and second special symbols wins the time-saving feature is the time-saving A state, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set different types of time-saving states when only the first special symbol wins the time-saving feature and when only the second special symbol wins the time-saving feature. For example, when the second special symbol wins the time-saving feature, it is also possible to set the time-saving C state (for example, the number of time-saving times is 100), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving A state but less advantageous to the player than the time-saving B state.

Next, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this twelfth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 406. FIG. 406 is a front view showing a schematic of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this twelfth control example. As shown in FIG. 406, the pachinko machine 10 in this twelfth control example has the same configuration as the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned eleventh control example (see FIG. 396), and therefore a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the twelfth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this twelfth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 407 to Fig. 416. This twelfth control example differs from the above-mentioned eleventh control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is changed. The rest is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 407, the ROM 202 possessed by the main control device 110 in this 12th control example is different from the ROM 202 possessed by the main control device 110 in the above-mentioned first embodiment in that the 1st win random number 11 table 202ja is replaced with the 1st win random number 12 table 202ka, the jackpot type selection 7 table 202fb is replaced with the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb, the 2nd win random number 7 table 202fc is replaced with the 2nd win random number 12 table 202kc, and the 2nd win random number 12 table 202kc is replaced with the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd. The difference is that the round number 12 table 202kd is replaced with the small prize type selection 11 table 202jf, the small prize type selection 12 table 202kf is replaced with the time-saving random number 11 table 202jh, the time-saving star random number 12 table 202kh is replaced with the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji and the time-saving type selection 12 table 202ki is used, the time-saving grant 7 table 202fe and the time-saving type selection 11 table 202ji have been deleted, and the small prize random number 12 table 202ke has been added, but otherwise it is the same. The same components are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 408. FIG. 408 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. It differs from the above-mentioned eleventh control example in that it adds a special chart 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka, a special chart 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb, a special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203kc, a special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203kd, a special chart 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke, a special chart 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf, a time-saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg, and a time-saving limit reached flag 203kh. The rest of the configuration is the same as the above-mentioned eleventh control example, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special symbol 1 change time timer 203ka and the special symbol 2 change time timer 203kb are timers for timing the change time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. When the change pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is selected, the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern is set. Whether or not the change time of each special symbol has ended is determined based on the timing results of the special symbol 1 change time timer 203ka and the special symbol 2 change time timer 203kb (see Y701 in FIG. 424 and Y901 in FIG. 433).

The special chart 1 temporary stop flag 2030kc is a flag that indicates the period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of special chart 1 is stopped. When it is set to on, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, and when it is set from the on state to the off state, the update (subtraction) of the variable time that was stopped is resumed.

This special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON when the variation of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) whose lottery result is a jackpot other than the jackpot D is stopped (Y903 in FIG. 433), and is referred to in the first special pattern variation execution process 12 (see FIG. 235) and the first special pattern variation stop process 12 (see FIG. 424, Y708). If it is set to ON as a result of the reference, a process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display device corresponding to the special pattern 1 in the same way as during variation. In other words, while the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 2030bc is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variation time is stopped, but the first pattern display device is in a state where the variation display is continuously executed. As a result, it is possible to notify that the variation of the special pattern 1 has not been forcibly stopped by setting the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc to ON. Then, if it is determined that the flag is set to ON in the first special symbol variation execution process 12 (see FIG. 423) (Y2801 in FIG. 423: Yes), the flag is set to OFF (Y2803 in FIG. 423). Although detailed explanations and illustrations are omitted, the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON by executing the same process as in the case of a big win even when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is a small win.

The special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is a flag that indicates the period during which the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special chart 2 is stopped. When it is set to on, the update (subtraction) of the variable time is stopped, and when it is set from the on state to the off state, the update (subtraction) of the variable time that was stopped is resumed.

This special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON when the variation of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) that is the winning lottery result is stopped (Y703 in FIG. 424), and is referenced in the second special pattern variation in progress process 12 (see FIG. 432) and the second special pattern variation stop process 12 (see FIG. 43). Note that the contents referenced in this process are the same as the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc described above, so a description thereof will be omitted. Then, if it is determined that it is set to ON in the second special pattern variation in progress process 12 (see FIG. 432) (Y2901 in FIG. 432: Yes), it is set to OFF (Y2903 in FIG. 432).

The special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is a flag indicating that it is time to forcibly stop the first special symbol that is changing. This special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is set to ON when the change of the big win D or small win B is stopped for the second special symbol (see Y905 in FIG. 433 and Y932 in FIG. 435). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is ON while the first special symbol is changing, it is set to OFF (see Y722 in FIG. 425). This makes it possible to forcibly stop the first special symbol in accordance with the timing when the change of the big win D or small win B of the second special symbol stops first.

The special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is a flag that indicates that it is time to forcibly stop the second special pattern that is changing. This special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is set to ON when the first special pattern wins the time-saving feature and the change display starts (Y405 in FIG. 421). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when it is determined that the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is ON while the second special pattern is changing (Y632 in FIG. 434). This makes it possible to forcibly stop the second special pattern in line with the timing when the first special pattern wins the time-saving feature and the change starts.

The time-saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is a flag indicating that the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning mode is being displayed in a fluctuating manner (i.e., the time-saving winning fluctuation state is in a fluctuating manner). This time-saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is set to ON when the result of the first special symbol lottery is a time-saving winning mode (see Y403 in FIG. 421). On the other hand, it is set to OFF when the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning mode is displayed in a stopped manner and the time-saving A state is set (see Y8352 in FIG. 426), or when the second special symbol wins the big win D or small win B and the fluctuation of the first special symbol is canceled (see Y726 in FIG. 425). This allows the time-saving winning fluctuation state to be set in the period from when the first special symbol wins the time-saving winning mode to when the fluctuation of the first special symbol ends.

The time-saving limit reached flag 203kh is a flag for indicating that the number of times that the high probability state of the normal pattern has been set consecutively (number of consecutive normal pattern settings) has reached an upper limit, and is set to on when the number of consecutive normal pattern settings has reached an upper limit and the high probability state of the normal pattern is forcibly changed to a low probability state.

Next, the contents stipulated in the 1st winning random number 12 table 202ka will be explained with reference to FIG. 409(a). FIG. 409(a) is a diagram showing a schematic of the contents stipulated in the 1st winning random number 12 table 202ka. In this 12th control example, as shown in FIG. 409(a), the probability of winning the jackpot is the same for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 18/900 (i.e., 1/50).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the jackpot probability is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but this is not limited to this, and the jackpot probability may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the jackpot probability is not variable in any game state, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to set a high probability state of a special pattern (so-called high probability state) after the jackpot game ends when a specific jackpot type is determined.

Next, referring to FIG. 409(b), the contents of the second winning random number 12 table 202kc defined in the ROM 202 will be described. FIG. 409(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number 12 table 202kc in a schematic manner. The second winning random number 12 table 202kc is a data table in which the winning judgment value of the normal pattern is stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal pattern, "0 to 2" is specified as the judgment value for the winning of the normal pattern. Also, in the high probability state of the normal pattern, "0 to 149" is specified as the judgment value for the winning of the normal pattern. In the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning hole 67 and the second winning random number 12 table 202kc are referenced to determine whether or not the normal pattern is a winning pattern.

Now, referring to FIG. 406, in the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, when a winning normal symbol lottery is won, the electric device 1640a arranged in the right area of the game board 13 opens, allowing the ball to enter the right second ball entrance 1640.

Therefore, when the high probability state (time-saving state) of the normal pattern is set, the electric device 1640a opens more easily, and the game ball enters the right second ball entrance 1640 more easily, so the second special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state.

Next, the contents of the time-saving random number 12 table 202kh will be explained with reference to FIG. 409(c). FIG. 409(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 12 table 202kh. As shown in FIG. 409(c), in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the time-saving lottery is executed for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The probability of winning the time-saving lottery for each special symbol is the same, and is 18/900 (1/50). Note that the time-saving lottery is executed only in the normal state, and is configured not to be executed in the time-saving state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have the same probability of winning the time-saving feature, but this is not limited to this, and the second special symbol may be configured to have a higher or lower probability of winning the time-saving feature than the first special symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the time-saving lottery is executed only in the normal state, but this is not limited thereto, and the time-saving lottery may be executed even in the time-saving state.

Next, the contents of the small prize random number 12 table 202ke will be described with reference to 409(d). Fig. 409(d) is a diagram showing the contents of the small prize random number 12 table 202ke. As shown in Fig. 409(d), in the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, the small prize lottery is executed only for the second special symbol. The probability of winning the small prize is 18/900 (1/50).

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this twelfth control example is configured to execute a small prize lottery for the second special symbol, but this is not limited to this, and the small prize lottery may also be executed for the first special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the probability of winning the jackpot, the probability of winning the time-saving mode, and the probability of winning the small jackpot are all 1/50, but this is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the jackpot, the probability of winning the time-saving mode, and the probability of winning the small jackpot may all be configured to be different probabilities. For example, the probability of winning the jackpot may be 1/300, the probability of winning the time-saving mode 1/30, and the probability of winning the small jackpot 1/100.

Next, the contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb will be explained with reference to FIG. 410(a). FIG. 410(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb. The jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb specifies the special chart 1 jackpot 12 table 202kb1 and the special chart 2 jackpot 12 table 202kb2.

Figure 410(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 1 jackpot 12 table 202kb1 defined in the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb. As shown in Figure 410(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, when the first special symbol wins the jackpot, 100% jackpot A is selected. Jackpot A is a jackpot type in which 5 rounds of jackpot play are executed and the time-saving A state is set after the jackpot play ends. After the jackpot play of jackpot A ends, the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 5 times.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the jackpot type for the first special symbol is one type, but this is not limited to this, and multiple types of jackpot types may be set. Also, the jackpot type selected may be different depending on the game state.

Figure 411 is a diagram showing the contents of the special symbol 2 jackpot 12 table 202kb2 defined in the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb. When a jackpot is won with the second special symbol, the jackpot type is selected according to the game state set at the time of the jackpot win, the number of times the second special symbol has changed since the game state was changed, and the value of the first jackpot type counter CS2. The count of the number of changes is also reset, for example, when a jackpot is won in the time-saving B state and the time-saving B state is set again after the jackpot play ends.

First, when the game state is in the normal state, there are a non-time-saving winning change state and a time-saving winning change state. The non-time-saving winning change state is a state in which the time-saving winning change state flag 20kg is off, that is, the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning is not displayed. The time-saving winning change state is a state in which the time-saving winning change state flag 203kg is on, that is, the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning is being displayed. In the normal non-time-saving winning change state, regardless of the number of times the second special symbol changes, a 100% jackpot A (5R time-saving A jackpot) is selected, and the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 5 after the jackpot game ends. In the normal time-saving winning change state, regardless of the number of times the second special symbol changes, a 100% jackpot B (10R time-saving B jackpot) is selected, and the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 10000 after the jackpot game ends.

In this way, in the normal state, the bonus given to the player differs depending on whether the time-saving winning variable state flag 203kg is on when the jackpot is won, preventing players who play games that only involve the second special symbol lottery from gaining an excessive advantage.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, in the normal state, regardless of the number of times the second special symbol changes, the jackpot A (or jackpot B) is selected 100%. However, this is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be selected from among multiple jackpot types according to the number of times the jackpot changes. For example, in the normal state, non-time-saving winning change state, either jackpot A or jackpot B may be selected, and from the 0th to 50th spins, jackpot A is more likely to be selected than jackpot B, and from the 51st spin onwards, jackpot B is more likely to be selected than jackpot A. By configuring in this way, even if a losing win continues in the normal state, the jackpot type advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected, so that a decrease in the player's motivation to play can be suppressed.

Also, the type of jackpot that is likely to be selected during a specific period may be variable, such as jackpot A being more likely to be selected than jackpot B from 0 to 50 spins, jackpot B being more likely to be selected than jackpot A from 51 to 100 spins, and jackpot A being more likely to be selected than jackpot B from 101 to 150 spins. By configuring it in this way, periods that are advantageous to the player are periodically created, making it possible for the player to be interested in the number of times the second special symbol changes, and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Next, there are time-saving states A and B, and in time-saving state A, regardless of the number of times the second special symbol changes, there is a 50% chance that jackpot B (10R time-saving B jackpot) will be selected, and a 50% chance that jackpot C (5R time-saving B jackpot) will be selected. In time-saving state B, the type of jackpot selected varies depending on the number of times the second special symbol changes, and from spin 0 to spin 50, a 100% chance that a jackpot (10R time-saving B jackpot) will be selected, and from spin 51 onwards, there is a 50% chance that a jackpot B (10R time-saving B jackpot) will be selected, and a 50% chance that a jackpot D (10R time-saving B jackpot) will be selected. Both jackpot B and jackpot D are types of jackpots that involve 10 rounds of jackpot play and a time-saving B state after the jackpot play ends, but they are different jackpot types in that if jackpot B is won, a process is executed to temporarily stop (interrupt) the first special symbol that is changing, and if jackpot D is won, a process is executed to forcibly stop (discard) the first special symbol that is changing. In other words, if the second special symbol is won a certain number of times, it becomes easier to discard the changing display of the first special symbol.

By configuring it in this way, even if the second special symbol continues to win but not win while the first special symbol that has been selected for the time-saving feature is being displayed in a changing state and there is little time left for the first special symbol to change, it becomes more likely that the change in the first special symbol can be discarded, which can increase the player's motivation to play when the second special symbol continues to win but not win.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the type of jackpot likely to be selected is variable depending on the number of times the second special symbol changes only in the time-saving B state, but this is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot likely to be selected may also be variable depending on the number of times the second special symbol changes in the time-saving A state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the jackpot B is selected 100% of the time from 0 to 50 spins, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured so that different jackpot types can be won even from 0 to 50 spins. For example, the jackpot B may be selected 80% of the time and the jackpot D may be selected 20% of the time. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player play while expecting that he or she may win the jackpot D and cancel the variable display of the first special pattern even during the period when the time-saving B state has just been set, and the fun of playing the game can be improved.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, the type of jackpot that is likely to be selected is switched between "0 to 50 spins" and "51 spins and after." However, this is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot that is likely to be selected in a specific period may be changed, such as, for example, jackpot B is more likely to be selected than jackpot D from 0 to 50 spins, jackpot D is more likely to be selected than jackpot B from 51 to 100 spins, and jackpot B is more likely to be selected than jackpot D from 101 to 150 spins. By configuring in this way, periods that are advantageous to the player are periodically generated, making it possible for the player to be interested in the number of times the second special symbol changes, and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Next, the contents of the small win type selection 12 table 202kf will be explained with reference to FIG. 412. FIG. 412 is a diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 12 table 202kf. As shown in FIG. 412, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, two types of small win types are specified. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the small win lottery is executed only for the second special pattern.

Small win A is a type of small win that is selected 80% of the time when a small win is won, and if the specific area 1650a is passed (V passing) during a small win game, a big win C (5R time-saving B big win) is awarded. Details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, depending on the type of small win, the display of the first special symbol changes during execution may be forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily stopped (interrupted), and when a small win A is executed, a process of temporarily stopping (interrupting) the display of the first special symbol changes during execution is performed.

On the other hand, small win B is a type of small win that is selected 20% of the time when a small win is won, and if a V is passed during a small win game, a big win B (10R time-saving B big win) is awarded. When small win B is executed, a process is executed to forcibly stop (discard) the fluctuation of the first special pattern that is being executed. Note that, although there are two types of small wins in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, this is not limited to this, and three or more types of small wins may be provided.

Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd will be explained with reference to FIG. 413. FIG. 413 is a diagram showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd. The fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd specifies a fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd1 for normal state, a fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2 for time-saving state, and a fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd3 for time-saving winning fluctuation state, and each fluctuation pattern table is referenced according to the game state.

Figure 414 is a diagram showing the contents of the normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1, which is defined in the variation pattern 12 table 202kd. In the normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1, the variation pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Specifically, for a pattern type of "first special pattern," if the win/loss judgment result is "miss," a "short miss" with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds (7,000 milliseconds) is specified when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 139," a "false miss" with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds (20,000 milliseconds) is specified when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "140 to 149," "various normal reaches" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds (40,000 milliseconds) are specified when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "150 to 179," and a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds) is specified when the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "180 to 189." In addition, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a "win", a "normal reach" with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds (40,000 milliseconds) is specified in the range of "0 to 29" for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a "super reach" with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds) is specified in the range of "30 to 189" for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and a "special reach" with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds (140,000 milliseconds) is specified in the range of "190 to 198" for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a "time-saving win", a "long time-saving win" with a fluctuation time of 300 seconds is specified in the range of "0 to 198" for the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

On the other hand, for the "second special pattern" symbol type, if the result of the win/loss judgment is a "miss", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0-198" and a "long miss" with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (600,000 milliseconds), if the result of the win/loss judgment is a "time-saving win", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0-198" and a "time-saving win" with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (600,000 milliseconds), and if the result of the win/loss judgment is a "big win, small win", the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0-198" and a "long win" with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds (600,000 milliseconds).

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example is configured so that in the normal state, a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be set for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. This is because the small prize lottery is executed only for the second special symbol, and when a small prize is won, the time-saving B state, which is the most advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, by lengthening the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the game efficiency is reduced, and it is prevented that players who play in a game in which only the second special symbol lottery is executed are excessively advantageous.

In addition, if the result of the lottery for the first special symbol is a "time-saving win", a "long time-saving win" is set. During the long time-saving win fluctuation, the time-saving win fluctuation state is reached, and until the first special symbol for which the long time-saving win is set is stopped (or discarded), the time-saving win fluctuation state pattern table 202kd3 is referenced, and the fluctuation of the second special symbol becomes a short fluctuation (0.5 seconds), so multiple second special symbol lotteries can be executed. Note that even if a big win (or a small win) is won during the long time-saving win fluctuation (during the time-saving win fluctuation state), and the time-saving state is set based on the time-saving win, the time-saving win fluctuation state pattern table 202kd3 is referenced for the period during which the long time-saving win fluctuation continues.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth control example, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win, a 100% "long time-saving win" is set, but this is not limited to the above, and a selection may be made from a number of variation patterns based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. For example, a "long time-saving win" with a variation time of 300 seconds may be selected at 50%, a "short time-saving win" with a variation time of 200 seconds may be selected at 30%, and a "super time-saving win" with a variation time of 500 seconds may be selected at 20%. By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the time-saving win variation state depending on the variation time of the selected first special symbol, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the time-saving winning variable state is set only when the first special symbol is selected for the time-saving win, but this is not limited to the above, and the time-saving winning variable state may also be set when the second special symbol is selected for the time-saving win. In this case, by configuring the variable time when the time-saving win is selected to differ depending on the type of special symbol (for example, the variable time is 300 seconds for the first special symbol and 600 seconds for the second special symbol), it becomes possible to set a time-saving winning variable state that is favorable to the player and a time-saving winning variable state that is relatively unfavorable to the player depending on which special symbol is selected for the time-saving win, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Figure 415 is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2, which is defined in the fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd. In the time-saving state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2, the fluctuation pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

The time-saving state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2 is a fluctuation pattern 12 table that is referenced when the time-saving state is set as the game state, and is common to the time-saving A state and the time-saving B state. As described above, when a long time-saving winning fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed, the time-saving winning fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd3 is referenced, not the time-saving state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2.

As shown in FIG. 415, in the time-saving state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd2, the first special symbol is a long fluctuation (600 seconds), and the second special symbol is a short fluctuation (3 to 5 seconds). As described above, if the first special symbol wins a jackpot while the time-saving state B is set, the time-saving state A, which is less favorable to the player than the time-saving state B, is set. Therefore, by configuring the fluctuation of the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed first, it is made easier to continuously set the time-saving state B, which is more favorable to the player.

Figure 416 is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving winning variable state 12 variable pattern table 202kd3, which is defined in the variable pattern 12 table 202kd. In the time-saving winning variable state 12 variable pattern table 202kd3, the variable pattern is set based on the symbol type of the special symbol, the lottery result, and the value of the variable type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 416, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, when the time-saving winning variation state is set, a short variation (0.5 seconds) is set regardless of the result of the lottery for the second special symbol. In the time-saving winning variation state, the game ends when the first special symbol that has won the time-saving winning is displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, in order to increase the game efficiency in the time-saving winning variation state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened, and it is configured to be possible to execute many lotteries for the second special symbol.

In addition, in the time-saving winning change state, the first special symbol is already changing, and when the change of the first special symbol ends, the time-saving winning change state also ends, so the change pattern of the first special symbol is not set in the time-saving winning change state. Therefore, the time-saving winning change state change pattern 12 table 202kd3 is configured to select only the change pattern of the second special symbol.

As mentioned above, even if the game state is normal or time-saving, when the first special symbol is in a long time-saving winning fluctuation state (when the time-saving winning fluctuation state flag 203kg is set to on), the time-saving winning fluctuation state fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd3 is referenced when selecting a fluctuation pattern.

<Regarding control process of main control device in twelfth control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 12th control example will be described with reference to Figs. 416 to 437. The control process of the main control device 110 in this 12th control example differs from the control process of the main control device 110 in the above-mentioned 5th control example in that the special symbol variation process 5 (see Fig. 252) is replaced with the special symbol variation process 12 (see Fig. 416), the game state update process 12 (see Fig. 422) is replaced with the update process 5 (see Fig. 256), and the big win control process 5 (see Fig. 260) is replaced with the big win control process 12 (see Fig. 435), and the other processes are the same. Note that the same processes are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

As described above, the twelfth control example is significantly different from the fifth control example described above in that the first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as special pattern 1) and the second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as special pattern 2) are configured to be able to be changed simultaneously (in parallel).

First, referring to FIG. 417, the contents of the special symbol variation process 12 (Y104) in this 12th control example will be described. FIG. 416 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process 12 (Y104). When the special symbol variation process 12 (Y104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current situation is a big win or a small win (Y231). If it is determined that the current situation is a big win or a small win (Y231: Yes), it is next determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on (Y232). In this Y232 process, it is determined whether the subtraction of the special symbol variation time of the other special symbol that is currently varying is suspended due to one special symbol being stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win. In the process of Y232, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on (Y232: Yes), the display of the first pattern display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special pattern is updated (Y233), that is, a process is executed to continue the change display of the first pattern display device 37 for the special pattern for which the subtraction of the change time has been interrupted, and this process is terminated. This makes it possible to inform the player that the special pattern change has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of Y231, if it is determined that a big win or a small win is currently occurring (Y231: No), it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 1 change time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (i.e., whether the special pattern 1 is changing) (Y234), and if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 1 change time timer 203ka is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y234: No), the same process as the first special pattern change start process 12 (Y237) is executed, and then it proceeds to Y238, which executes change processing related to the special pattern 2.

If it is determined in the process of Y234 that the value of the special pattern 1 change time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (Y234: Yes), the first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235) is executed. This first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235) executes the process during the special pattern 1 change, and a detailed explanation of this will be given later with reference to FIG. 422.

When the first special symbol change in progress process 12 (Y235) is completed, the first special symbol change stop process 12 (Y236) is then executed, and then the process proceeds to Y238.

In the processing of Y238 to Y241, the same processing as Y234 to Y237 executed for special pattern 1 is executed. When the processing of Y238 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (i.e., whether the special pattern 2 is changing) (Y238), and if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is not greater than 0 (is 0) (Y238: No), the second special pattern change start processing 12 (Y239) is executed, and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y238, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (Y238: Yes), the second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240) is executed. This second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240) executes the process during the special pattern 2 change, and a detailed explanation of this will be given later with reference to FIG. 431.

After the second special symbol change execution process 12 (Y240) is completed, the second special symbol change stop process 12 (Y241) is then executed, and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 418, we will explain the first special symbol change start process 12 (Y237), which is one process of the special symbol change process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104). FIG. 237 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol change start process 12 (Y237).

In the first special symbol variation start process 12 (Fig. 417, Y237), it is first determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is on (Y301). In the process of Y301, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag is on (Y301: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y301, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag is not on (Y301: No), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is obtained (Y302), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter is greater than 0 (Y303). In the process of Y303, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is greater than 0 (Y303: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by 1 (Y304), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d after the decrement is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 (Y305).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (Y2001) of the main process (see FIG. 119) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c in the RAM 230. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c according to the reserved ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d in the main control device 110.

When the process of Y305 is completed, the data in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (Y306). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on.

After the process of Y306 is completed, the first special symbol determination process 12 is then executed (Y307). This first special symbol determination process 12 (Fig. 418, Y307) will be described in detail later, but it is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot has been won, based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 that has been shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and based on the set game state. Note that the game state update process 12 (Y309) may be executed before the process of Y307, and by configuring it in this way, the special symbol lottery will be executed after the game state is updated.

When the process of Y307 is completed, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 is then executed (Fig. 420, Y308). Details will be described later, but this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y308) is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the first special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y308) is completed, the game status update process 12 is then executed (Y309). This game status update process 12 (Fig. 421, Y309), the details of which will be described later, is a process for updating the state of the pachinko machine 10 by updating the values of various counters (time-saving counter 203h) that indicate the state of the pachinko machine 10. When the process of Y309 is completed, the special symbol 1 standby flag 2030i is set to OFF, and a special symbol 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y310), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y303, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball count counter 203d is 0 (Y303: No), it is determined whether the special symbol 1 standby flag 2030i is on (Y311), and if it is determined that it is on (Y311: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of Y311, if it is determined that it is off (i.e., not on) (Y311: No), the special symbol 1 standby flag 2030i is set to on (Y312), a special symbol 1 standby command indicating on is set (Y313), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of the first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307) will be explained with reference to FIG. 419. FIG. 419 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307). This first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307) is executed in place of the special symbol determination process 5 (S251 in FIG. 253) of the fifth control example described above, and in addition to determining the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, a determination of whether or not a time-saving win has occurred (special symbol 1 time-saving lottery process 12) is executed.

When the first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307) is executed, first, data of the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area is obtained (Y8001), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number 12 table 202ka (Y8002), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (Y8003: Yes), the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a jackpot (Y8004), the jackpot pattern of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (Y8005), a value indicating the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area (Y8006), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (Y8003: No), the special symbol 1 time-saving lottery process 12 is executed (Y8007), and this process is terminated.

Here, the special symbol 1 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8007) is a process for executing a judgment of whether or not a time-saving win has been made in the current special symbol lottery. In other words, in this 12th control example, in the first special symbol lottery, a judgment of whether or not a jackpot has been won is first executed (Y8003), and if a jackpot has been won, the special symbol lottery is terminated without executing a judgment of whether or not a time-saving win has been made, and the judgment of whether or not a time-saving win has been made is executed only if a jackpot has not been won. By configuring it in this way, multiple benefits (a jackpot win for a special symbol, a time-saving win) are not given to the player in one special symbol lottery, so it is possible to prevent the player from being given an overly advantageous game.

Next, referring to FIG. 420, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y308), which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation start process 12 (FIG. 418, Y237), will be described. FIG. 420 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y308).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Fig. 420, Y308), first, in the first special symbol determination process 12 (Fig. 419, Y307), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol has been determined to be a jackpot, i.e., whether a jackpot for the first special symbol has been set (Y501).

If it is determined in the process of Y501 that a jackpot for the first special symbol has been set (Y501: Yes), the jackpot type is determined (Y502) from the special symbol 1 jackpot 12 table 202kb (see FIG. 410(b)) based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of Y8005 in the above-mentioned first special symbol determination process 12 (see FIG. 419), and the process proceeds to Y503.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y501 that the lottery result for the first special symbol is a miss (Y501: No), the process of Y502 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y503.

In the process of Y503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a (Y503). Next, a variation pattern selection table (see Figures 413 to 416) according to the game status is read (Y504), and the process proceeds to Y505. The game status is determined based on the value of the time-saving winning variation flag and the information stored in the game status storage area 203g. In the process of Y505, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (Y505), and then a special symbol 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (Y506).

When the process of Y506 is completed, a special pattern 1 stop type command indicating the stop pattern is set (Y507). Next, the start of the variation of the first special pattern is set in the first pattern display device 37 (Y508), and this process is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8007) will be explained with reference to FIG. 421. FIG. 421 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8007).

When the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8007) is executed, first, the lottery result (time-saving winning judgment result) is obtained based on the time-saving random number 12 table 202kh (Y401), and it is determined whether or not a time-saving winning has been won (Y402). If it is determined that a time-saving winning has been won (Y402: Yes), the time-saving winning fluctuation status flag 203kg is set to on (Y403), time-saving A is set as the time-saving pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y404), the special chart 2 fluctuation stop flag kf is set to on (Y8105), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y402 that the time-saving win has not been made (Y402: No), the losing special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the acquired winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (Y406), and this process is terminated.

Next, the contents of game status update process 12 (Y309) will be explained with reference to FIG. 422. FIG. 422 is a flowchart showing the contents of game status update process 12 (Y309).

When the game status update process 12 (Y309) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y601), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is greater than 0 (Y601: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is decremented by 1 (Y602), and a remaining time-saving count command indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set (Y603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 0 (Y604), and if it is determined that the value is 0 (Y604: Yes), the time-saving game is not granted (i.e., the normal state), so a state command indicating the normal state is set (Y605), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y604 that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 0 (Y604: No), the process of Y605 is skipped and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 423, the contents of the first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235) executed in the special pattern change process 12 (see Y104 in FIG. 417) will be explained. FIG. 423 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235). In this first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235), a process for resuming the subtraction of the change time of special pattern 1 if the subtraction has been suspended, and a process for subtracting the change time are executed.

When the first special symbol change execution process 12 (Y235) is executed, it is first determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to on (Y2801). Here, we will briefly explain the case where this process is executed with the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc set to on. The special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to on when the special symbol 1 is changing and the special symbol 2 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a specific win (big win A to C, or small win A). Then, when the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set on, the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set on during the process, so the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds by the main control device 110 loops, and the next time the special pattern change process 12 (Fig. 417) is executed (2 milliseconds after the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set on), it is determined that a jackpot is in progress in the process of Y231, so the first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235) is not executed. Then, the jackpot game (or small jackpot game) ends, and the first special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y235) is executed because it is determined that a jackpot is not in progress (or a small jackpot) in the process of Y231. By configuring it in this way, the state in which the first special pattern variation in progress process 12 (Y235) is executed while the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON is configured to be the timing when the big win (or small win) game ends and the deduction of the variation time of the special pattern variation, which had been suspended, is resumed.

Returning to FIG. 423, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Y2801, if it is determined that the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to on (Y2801: Yes), then the special chart 1 fluctuation resume command is set (Y2802), the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to off (Y2803), and the process proceeds to Y2804. On the other hand, in the processing of Y2801, if it is determined that the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is not set to on (it is set to off) (Y2801: No), the processing of Y2802 and Y2803 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y2804.

In the processing of Y2804, the special pattern 1 variable time timer 203ka is updated by subtracting 1 (Y2804), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (Y2805), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 424, we will explain the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 12 (Y236), which is one process of the special symbol fluctuation process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104). FIG. 424 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol fluctuation stop process 12 (Y236).

In the first special symbol change stop process 12 (Fig. 424, Y236), first, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the change based on the first special symbol that is being executed (Y701). In the process of Y701, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the change based on the first special symbol that is being executed (Y701: Yes), it is determined whether a jackpot of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is set (Y702). If it is determined that a jackpot of the first special symbol is set (Y702: Yes), the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on (Y703). Although not shown in the figure, when the process of Y703 is executed, a special symbol 2 change stop command is set, indicating that the special symbol 2 change stop flag 203kd has been turned on.

After completing the process of Y703, a special symbol 1 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (Y704). Then, a jackpot scenario based on the selected jackpot type is set (Y705). After that, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set to instruct the voice lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the first special symbol (Y706). Then, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 37 (Y707), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y702, if the jackpot of the first special symbol is not set (Y702: No), it is determined whether or not a time-saving win of the first special symbol is set (Y710). In the process of Y710, if it is determined that a time-saving win is set (Y710: Yes), the time-saving setting process 12 (Y711) is executed, and the process proceeds to Y706. In this time-saving setting process 12 (Y711), a process is executed for setting the time-saving state corresponding to the time-saving type that has been won. The time-saving setting process 12 (Y711) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 426.

On the other hand, in the process of Y701, if it is determined that the timing for the end of the fluctuation based on the first special pattern being executed has not arrived (Y701: No), then it is determined whether the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special pattern 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is on (Y708). In the process of Y708, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special pattern 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is off (Y708: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y708 that the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special symbol 1 variation stop flag 203ke is on (Y708: Yes), this means that the second special symbol has stopped due to a big win or a small win, so in order to stop (temporarily stop) the variation based on the first special symbol that is currently being executed, the special symbol 1 forced stop processing 12 is executed (Y709). Details of this special symbol 1 forced stop processing 12 will be described later with reference to FIG. 425.

In this way, in the first special symbol stop process 12 (Y236), when the specified change time of the first special symbol during the change display has elapsed (Y701: Yes), a process (Y703 to Y707 or Y711) is executed to stop the change display with the symbol indicating the judgment result of the first lottery game. Also, when the second special symbol is stopped changing with the symbol indicating a big win (or a small win) and a big win game (or a small win game) of the second lottery game is executed (Y708: Yes), a process (Y709) is executed to forcibly stop the first special symbol during the change display. Note that when the first special symbol is stopped changing with the symbol indicating a big win (or a small win) (Y702: Yes), the change of the second special symbol during the change display may be interrupted (temporarily stopped).

Next, referring to FIG. 425, we will explain the special symbol 1 forced stop process 12 (Y709), which is one process of the first special symbol change stop process 12 (FIG. 424, Y236). FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 forced stop process 12 (Y709).

In the special symbol 1 forced stop process 12 (Fig. 425, Y709), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is on (Y721). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is on (Y721: Yes), the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is set to off (Y722), and then a special symbol 1 change stop command indicating that the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is off is set (Y723). Then, the change type of the first special symbol is set to miss (Y724), and it is determined whether the time-saving winning change state flag 203kg is on (Y725). Although not shown, before the process of Y725, the first special symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is stopped from changing with a miss symbol, and a special symbol 1 confirmation command for the first special symbol is set.

In the process of Y725, if it is determined that the time-saving winning status change flag 203kg is on (i.e., the result of the first special pattern drawing is a time-saving winning) (Y725: Yes), the time-saving winning status change flag 203kg is set to off (Y726), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y725, if the time-saving winning status change flag 203kg is not on (i.e., the result of the first special pattern drawing is not a time-saving winning) (Y725: No), Y726 is skipped, and this process is terminated.

...

On the other hand, in the processing of Y721, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 change time flag 203ke is not on (Y721: No), this means that the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is on, so a command to temporarily stop (interrupt) the change of the first special pattern is set (Y729), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, when the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203kc or the special symbol 1 change stop flag 203ke is turned on (the timing when the change that results in a big win or small win with the second special symbol stops), the change is forcibly interrupted even if the change time of the first special symbol has not yet elapsed, or is forcibly stopped as a result of a miss determination. As a result, even if the lottery results are displayed in a changing manner simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is only necessary to execute a small win or big win for only one of the lottery results, which reduces the gambling nature of the game. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this twelfth control example, depending on the type of big win or small win of the second special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol may be forcibly stopped as a miss or temporarily stopped (interrupted).

As described above, in this twelfth control example, time-saving A and time-saving B can be set as types of time-saving states. Time-saving A has a time-saving count of 5 times (see FIG. 411), and the probability that the second special symbol will win a big win (1/50 chance of winning) or a small win (1/50 chance of winning) with 5 time-saving times is a low probability of about 18%, so winning a big win or a small win with the second special symbol during time-saving A state is almost impossible. On the other hand, time-saving B has a time-saving count of 10,000 times (see FIG. 411), so when time-saving B is set, there is a high probability of winning the next big win or a small win. Therefore, it can be said that time-saving B state is a time-saving state that is more advantageous to the player than time-saving A state.

Here, if the second special symbol wins the time-saving bonus and the time-saving bonus B state is set due to the second special symbol winning a big jackpot, a small jackpot, or a time-saving bonus during the period from when the first special symbol wins the time-saving bonus until the first special symbol indicating the time-saving bonus is stopped (i.e., when the time-saving bonus winning variable state is set), if the first special symbol cannot be forcibly stopped as a miss symbol and the first special symbol indicating the time-saving bonus is stopped, the set time-saving bonus B state is discarded and a new time-saving bonus A state is set. In other words, in this case, the time-saving bonus B state will only continue until the variable time of the first special symbol that won the time-saving bonus (300 seconds in this twelfth control example) has elapsed, and there is a high possibility that the time-saving bonus state will end before the time-saving bonus limit is reached.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol wins the time-saving feature and the time-saving B state is set because the second special symbol wins a big win, a small win, or a time-saving feature during the period until the first special symbol indicating the time-saving feature has been won (i.e., when the time-saving feature change state is set), if a specific big win (big win D) or small win (small win B) is won and the change in the first special symbol can be forcibly stopped as a missing pattern, it is possible to continue the time-saving B state until the time-saving feature limit is reached, and the player can win a large number of prize balls.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, if the second special symbol wins a big jackpot, a small jackpot, or a time-saving win during the period until the first special symbol indicating the time-saving win is stopped and displayed (i.e., when a time-saving win variable state is set) when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win, and time-saving B state is set, the first special symbol that is being displayed as a variable can be forcibly stopped (discarded) as a miss, providing the player with new gameplay that allows the player to continue the advantageous time-saving state, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 12 (Y711) will be explained with reference to Fig. 426. Fig. 426 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 12 (Y711). In this time-saving setting process 12 (Y711), processing is executed to set the time-saving state when the time-saving winning decision is made and the time-saving winning decision is made. When the time-saving setting process 12 (Y711) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current time-saving type is time-saving A (Y8351), and if it is determined that it is time-saving A (Y8351: Yes), the time-saving winning variable state flag 203kg is set to OFF (Y8352), a value corresponding to the determined time-saving type is set in the time-saving counter 203h (Y8353), the time-saving state is set in the game state storage area (Y8354), the value of the time-saving counter 203h, and a state command indicating the time-saving type game state (information indicating the time-saving state and information indicating the set time-saving type) are set (Y8355), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y8351 that the time-saving type is not A (i.e., if the time-saving type is B) (Y8351: No), the process of Y8352 is skipped and the process of Y8353 is performed. Although not shown, in the process of Y8353, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is cleared and a new value corresponding to the determined type of time-saving type is set. Therefore, when the time-saving state A is set based on winning the time-saving state, if the time-saving counter 203h already has a value corresponding to time-saving type B (e.g., 10,000 times), the value corresponding to time-saving type B is discarded and the value corresponding to time-saving type A (5 times) is set.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, the time-saving state is set at different times depending on the time-saving winning trigger. If the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set when the special pattern stops changing, and if the time-saving state is set based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set when the jackpot game ends, not when the special pattern stops changing.

By configuring it in this way, the timing at which the time-saving state is set can be varied, providing players with a game that they will not tire of.

Next, referring to FIG. 427, we will explain the second special symbol change start process 12 (Y239), which is one process of the special symbol change process 12 (FIG. 417, Y104). FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol change start process 12 (Y239).

In the second special symbol variation start process 12 (Fig. 427, Y239), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is on (Y831). In the process of Y831, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is on (Y831: Yes), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y831, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is not on (Y831: No), the value (N1) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is obtained (Y832), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (Y833). In the process of Y833, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (Y833: Yes), the value (N1) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is decremented by 1 (Y834), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e after the subtraction is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved ball number command (Y835).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223d in the RAM 230. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223d according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that the value can be updated in synchronization with the value of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203e of the main control device 110.

When the process of Y835 is completed, the data in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is then shifted to the previous data (Y836). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 -> execution area, reserved area 2 -> reserved area 1, reserved area 3 -> reserved area 2, reserved area 4 -> reserved area 3, and so on.

When the process of Y836 is completed, the second special symbol determination process 12 is then executed (Y837). This second special symbol determination process 12 (Fig. 428, Y837) will be described in detail later, but it is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 that has been shifted to the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and based on the set game state.

When the process of Y837 is completed, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 is then executed (Fig. 431, Y838). Details will be described later, but this second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y838) is a process for selecting a fluctuation pattern based on the result of the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

When the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Y838) is completed, the game status update process 12 is then executed (Y839 (Y309)). This game status update process 12 (Fig. 421, Y839 (Y309)) is the same process as that executed for the first special symbol, and the details are explained with reference to Fig. 422, so detailed explanations are omitted. When the process of Y839 is completed, the special symbol 2 standby flag is set to OFF, and the special symbol 1 standby command indicating OFF is set (Y840), and this process is terminated. Note that the game status update process 12 (Y839) may be executed before the process of Y837. By configuring in this way, the special symbol lottery is executed after the game status is updated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y833, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter 203e is 0 (Y833: No), it is determined whether the special symbol 2 standby flag is on (Y841), and if it is determined that it is on (Y841: Yes), this process is terminated. In the process of Y841, if it is determined that it is off (i.e., not on) (Y841: No), the special symbol 2 standby flag is set to on (Y842), a special symbol 2 standby command indicating on is set (Y843), and then this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 428, the processing contents of the second special symbol determination process 12 (Y837) will be explained. FIG. 428 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the second special symbol determination process 12 (Y837). Unlike the above-mentioned first special symbol determination process 12 (Y307 in FIG. 419), in this second special symbol determination process 12 (Y837), when a miss is determined in the jackpot determination in the special symbol lottery, a determination of whether a small jackpot has been won (small jackpot lottery process 12) is made in addition to a determination of whether a time-saving win has been won (special symbol 2 time-saving lottery process 12).

When the second special symbol determination process 12 (Y837) is executed, first, data of the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is obtained (Y8101), the lottery result is obtained based on the first winning random number 12 table 202ka (Y8102), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (Y8103: Yes), the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a jackpot (Y8104), the jackpot symbol of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (Y8105), a value indicating the current game state is stored in the winning state storage area (Y8107), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (Y8103: No), the special symbol 2 time-saving lottery process 12 is executed (Y8106), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, if the big win lottery for the second special symbol does not result in a big win, a time-saving lottery and a small win lottery are executed, so there are more opportunities set for a state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player compared to the first special symbol, and the second special symbol can be said to be a more advantageous special symbol than the first special symbol. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is set to a long period (600 seconds), so that the playing efficiency of a player who tries to execute only the second special symbol lottery in the normal state is reduced.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8106), unlike the special chart 1 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8007 in FIG. 421), when a time-saving win is won, the type of time-saving to be set is determined depending on whether the time-saving winning change state flag 203kg is on or not. Specifically, the time-saving B state is set only when the time-saving winning change state flag 203kg is on. In other words, the time-saving B state is set only when the second special pattern wins the time-saving during the change display of the first special pattern indicating that a time-saving win has been won, and the time-saving A state is set in other cases. By configuring in this way, even if the second special pattern wins the time-saving win when there is no time-saving winning change state, the time-saving B state, which is the time-saving state advantageous to the player, is not set, so that it is possible to prevent a player who only executes the second special pattern lottery without changing the first special pattern from being excessively advantageous.

Next, the processing contents of the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8107) will be explained with reference to FIG. 429. FIG. 429 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8107).

When the special pattern 2 time-saving lottery process 12 (Y8107) is executed, first, the lottery result (time-saving winning judgment result) is obtained based on the time-saving winning random number 12 table 202kh (Y8201), and it is determined whether or not a time-saving winning has been won (Y8202). If it is determined that a time-saving winning has been won (Y8202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the time-saving winning change status flag 203kg is on (Y8203). If it is determined that the time-saving winning change status flag 203kg is on (Y8203: Yes), time-saving B is set as the time-saving pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y8205), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of Y8202 that the time-saving win has not been obtained (Y8202: No), the losing special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (Y8206), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of Y8203 that the time-saving winning variable state flag 203kg is off (Y8203: No), time-saving A is set as the time-saving special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 (Y8204), and this processing is terminated.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, the time-saving B state is set when the second special symbol wins the time-saving only when the time-saving winning variable state flag kg is on (i.e., when the first special symbol wins the time-saving and the variable display of the first special symbol indicating the time-saving win is being executed). By configuring in this way, the time-saving B state, which is the time-saving state advantageous to the player, is not set even if the second special symbol wins the time-saving when the time-saving winning variable state is not in effect, so it is possible to prevent a player who only executes the second special symbol lottery without varying the first special symbol from being excessively advantageous. In addition, a new gameplay feature of aiming to win the time-saving second special symbol within the period from when the first special symbol wins the time-saving and the first special symbol indicating the time-saving win is stopped and displayed can be provided to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 430, we will explain the small prize lottery process 12 (Y8108), which is one process of the second special symbol determination process 12 (FIG. 428, Y837). FIG. 430 is a flowchart showing this small prize lottery process 12 (Y8108).

In the small prize lottery process 12 (Fig. 430, Y8108), first, it is determined whether the lottery result for the second special pattern is determined to be a time-saving win, that is, whether a time-saving win for the second special pattern is set (Y8301).

If it is determined in the processing of Y8301 that the time-saving win for the second special symbol is set (Y8301: Yes), this processing ends as is.

On the other hand, in the process of Y8301, if it is determined that the time-saving winning of the second special pattern is not set (Y8301: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the small prize random number 12 table (Y8302), and if it is determined that a small prize has been won (Y8304: Yes), the value of the small prize type counter C5 is obtained, a small prize type is selected from the small prize type selection 12 table 202kf, and the small prize pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device is set (Y8305). On the other hand, in the process of Y8304, if it is determined that a small prize has not been won (Y8304: No), the process of Y8305 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, the jackpot, time-saving prize, and small prize winnings are not overlapped in one second special pattern drawing, preventing the player from being awarded multiple benefits and preventing the player from gaining an excessive advantage.

It is also possible for a jackpot or small jackpot to overlap with a time-saving win. In this case, for example, if a jackpot and a time-saving win overlap, a more favorable time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends than if only a jackpot was won. This makes it possible to provide variety to the game state after the jackpot game ends depending on whether or not a time-saving win was won, even if two jackpots of the same type are won, and increases the excitement of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 431, we will explain the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y838), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation start process 12 (FIG. 427, Y239). FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (Y838).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (Fig. 431, Y838), first, in the second special symbol determination process 12 (Fig. 428, Y8103), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol has been determined to be a jackpot, i.e., whether a jackpot for the second special symbol has been set (Y921).

If it is determined in the processing of Y921 that a jackpot for the second special symbol has been set (Y921: Yes), the jackpot type is determined (Y922) from the special symbol 2 jackpot 12 table 202kb2 (see FIG. 411) based on the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the processing of Y8105 in the above-mentioned second special symbol determination processing 12 (see FIG. 428), and the processing proceeds to Y923.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of Y921 that the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss (Y921: No), the process of Y922 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y923.

In the process of Y923, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is obtained from the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (Y923). Next, a variation pattern table (see Figs. 413-416) corresponding to the game status is read (Y924), and the process proceeds to Y925. The game status is determined based on the value of the time-saving winning variation flag and the information stored in the game status storage area 203g. In the process of Y925, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern table (Y925), and then a special symbol 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern (Y926).

When the process of Y926 is completed, a special symbol 2 stop type command indicating the stop symbol is set (Y927). Next, the first symbol display device 37 is set to start changing the second special symbol (Y928), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 432, the contents of the second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240) executed in the special pattern change process 12 (see Y104 in FIG. 417) will be described. FIG. 432 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240). In this second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240), a process is executed to resume the subtraction of the second special pattern change time if the subtraction has been suspended, and a process to subtract the change time.

When the second special symbol change execution process (Y240) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON (Y2901). Here, we will briefly explain the case where this process is executed with the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd set to ON. As described above, the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON when the special symbol 1 is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a win (jackpot) while the special symbol 2 is changing. Then, when the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set on, the jackpot in progress flag 203k is set on during the process, so that the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds by the main control device 110 loops, and the next time (2 milliseconds after the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set on) the special pattern change process 12 (Fig. 417, Y104) is executed, it is determined that a jackpot is in progress in the process of Y231, so the second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game ends and it is determined that a jackpot is not in progress in the process of Y231, the second special pattern change in progress process 12 (Y240) is executed. By configuring it in this way, the state in which the second special pattern variation in progress process 12 (Y240) is executed while the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to ON is configured to be the timing when the big win game ends and the deduction of the variation time of the special pattern variation, which had been suspended, is resumed.

Returning to FIG. 432, the explanation will continue. In the processing of Y2901, if it is determined that the special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to on (Y2901: Yes), then the special chart 2 fluctuation resume command is set (Y2902), the special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is set to off (Y2903), and the process proceeds to Y2904. On the other hand, in the processing of Y2901, if it is determined that the special chart 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is not set to on (it is set to off) (Y2901: No), the processing of Y2902 and Y2903 is skipped and the process proceeds to Y2904.

In the processing of Y2904, the special pattern 2 variable time timer 203kb is updated by subtracting 1 (Y2904), the display of the first pattern display device is updated (Y2905), and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the second special symbol change stop process 12 (Y241) will be described with reference to FIG. 433. FIG. 433 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol change stop process 12 (Y241). This second special symbol change stop process 12 (Y241) executes processing when stopping the change of special symbol 2, and differs from the above-mentioned first special symbol change stop process (see FIG. 424) in that, in addition to a configuration for interrupting the change of special symbol 1 (interrupting the subtraction of the change time) when the lottery result of special symbol 2 is a jackpot, a configuration for forcibly stopping the change of special symbol 1 is provided when the lottery result of special symbol 2 is a specific jackpot type (jackpot D), and a process to be executed when the lottery result of special symbol 2 is a small jackpot is added.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 12 (Y241) is executed, it is first determined whether the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has ended (Y901). Whether the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has ended is determined by whether the counter value of the special symbol 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is 0 or not.

If it is determined in the process of Y901 that the fluctuation time has ended (Y901: Yes), it is determined whether the result of the drawing of the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is a big win (Y902), and if it is determined that it is not a big win (a miss) (Y902: No), it is then determined whether the result of the drawing of special pattern 2 is a small win (Y912). If it is determined in the process of Y910 that it is not a small win (Y912: No), it is then determined whether the result of the drawing of special pattern 2 is a time-saving win (Y914). If it is determined that it is not a time-saving win, a confirmation command for the second special pattern is set (Y908), the fluctuation of the second special pattern on the first pattern display device is stopped (Y909), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of Y914 that the time-saving winning has occurred (Y914: Yes), the time-saving setting process 12 is executed (Y915), and then the process of Y908 is executed. Note that the time-saving setting process 12 is the same process as the time-saving setting process 12 (Y711) executed as one process of the first special pattern variation stop process 12 (Fig. 424, Y236) described above, and therefore a detailed explanation is omitted.

If it is determined in the process of Y912 that a small win has been won (Y912: Yes), the special chart 2 small win stop process 12 is executed (Y913), and then the process of Y908 is executed. The special chart 2 small win stop process 12 (Y913) executes a process to set whether to forcibly stop (discard) or temporarily stop (interrupt) the variable display of the first special pattern depending on the type of small win of the won small win, and a detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 435.

In the process of Y902, if it is determined that there is a jackpot (Y902: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot D (Y903), and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot D (Y903: No), the special chart 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to on (Y904), the special chart 2 stop type command indicating the set stop type is set (Y906), the jackpot scenario is set (Y907), and then the processes of Y908 and Y909 are performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y903 that it is a jackpot D, the special chart 1 variation stop flag ke is set to on (Y905), and the processing of Y906 to Y909 is executed.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this 12th control example, when the jackpot type is jackpot D, the special pattern 1 variation stop flag ke is set to ON, and when the jackpot type is other than this, the special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203kc is set to ON, so that it is possible to vary the variation of the first special pattern between being forcibly stopped (discarded) and being temporarily stopped (interrupted) depending on the jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 411, the type of jackpot determined when the second special symbol is a jackpot varies depending on the number of times the second special symbol is changed, and jackpot D is configured to be more likely to be determined when a jackpot is won on or after the 51st spin. By configuring it in this way, even if the player fails to win a jackpot with the second special symbol and continues to win misses (a so-called "stuck"), a jackpot type that is favorable to the player is more likely to be determined, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play when they are stuck.

If it is determined in the process of Y901 that the timing for the end of the fluctuation based on the second special pattern being executed has not arrived (Y901: No), then it is determined whether the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special pattern 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is on (Y910). If it is determined in the process of Y910 that the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special pattern 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is off (Y910: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y910 that the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd or the special symbol 2 change stop flag 203kf is on (Y910: Yes), this means that the first special symbol has stopped due to a jackpot or a time-saving win, so in order to stop (temporarily stop) the change based on the second special symbol that is currently being executed, the special symbol 2 forced stop processing 12 is executed (Y911). Details of this special symbol 2 forced stop processing 12 will be described later with reference to FIG. 434.

In this way, in the second special symbol stop process 12 (Y241), when the specified change time of the second special symbol being changed has elapsed (Y901: Yes), a process is executed to stop the change display at the symbol that indicates the result of the second special symbol lottery game. Also, when the first special symbol is stopped at the symbol that indicates a jackpot and a jackpot game of the first special symbol is executed, or when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win change state is set (Y910: Yes), a process is executed (Y911) to forcibly stop the second special symbol being changed.

Next, referring to FIG. 434, we will explain the special symbol 2 forced stop process 12 (Y911), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stop process 12 (FIG. 433, Y241). FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 2 forced stop process 12 (Y911).

In the special pattern 2 forced stop process 12 (Fig. 434, Y911), first, it is determined whether the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is on (Y631). If it is determined that the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is on (Y631: Yes), the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is set to off (Y632), and then a special pattern 2 change stop command indicating that the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is off is set (Y633). Then, the change type of the second special pattern is set to miss (Y634). Although not shown, after the processing of Y634, the second special pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is stopped from changing with a miss pattern, and a special pattern 2 confirmation command for the second special pattern is set.

On the other hand, in the process of Y631, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 variation stop flag 203kf is not on (Y631: No), this means that the special pattern 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is on, so a command to temporarily stop (interrupt) the variation of the second special pattern is set (Y635), and this process is terminated.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, when the special symbol 2 temporary stop flag 203kd is turned on (the timing when the fluctuation that results in a jackpot with the first special symbol stops), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is forcibly interrupted and stopped even if the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has not yet elapsed. As a result, even if the lottery results are displayed in a fluctuating manner simultaneously with the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is only necessary to execute a jackpot game for only one of the lottery results, which makes it possible to suppress gambling. Furthermore, the efficiency of the game can be increased.

In addition, in this twelfth control example, when the first special symbol starts to change when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win, the second special symbol change stop flag kf is turned on. As described above, in this twelfth control example, in the normal state, the change time of the second special symbol is set to a long time (600 seconds). Therefore, if the change display of the second special symbol has already started when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win and the change display of the second special symbol continues, the set time-saving win change state will end before the stop display of the second special symbol that is changing, and a malfunction may occur in which the player cannot execute the lottery for the second special symbol in the time-saving win change state.

Here, by configuring the stop flag kf for the second special pattern to be turned on when the first special pattern starts to change when the first special pattern wins the time-saving feature, when the change of the first special pattern that won the time-saving feature starts, the change of the second special pattern that is currently changing is discarded, so that a new drawing for the second special pattern can be held in the time-saving feature winning change state, and a problem in which the player cannot draw for the second special pattern in the time-saving feature winning change state can be prevented.

Next, referring to FIG. 435, we will explain the special pattern 2 small win stop process 12 (Y913), which is one process of the second special pattern change stop process 12 (FIG. 433, y241). FIG. 435 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special pattern 2 small win stop process 12 (Y913).

In the special chart 2 small win stop process 12 (Fig. 435, Y913), first, it is determined whether the small win type is small win B (Y931), and if it is determined to be small win B (Y931: Yes), the special chart 1 fluctuation stop flag ke is set to on (Y932), and a special chart 1 fluctuation stop command indicating that the special chart 1 fluctuation stop flag 203ke is on is set (Y933). Then, a small win scenario corresponding to the selected small win type is set (Y934), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of Y931 that the win is not a small win B (Y931: No), the special chart 1 temporary stop flag kc is set to on (Y937), a special chart 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special chart 1 temporary stop flag kc is on is set (Y938), and processing of Y934 is performed.

In this way, in this twelfth control example, it is configured to be possible to discard the first special symbol that is changing not only for a specific big win type, but also for a specific small win type. This makes it possible to get the player interested in the small win type as well, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the special symbol 1 change stop flag is set to ON when the second special symbol indicating a small win B win stops changing, but this is not limited to this, and the special symbol 1 change stop flag may be set to ON when the second special symbol that won the small win B starts changing. Also, the first special symbol may be discarded at the start of the small win game, or at the end of the small win game.

Next, referring to FIG. 436, the contents of the jackpot control process 12 (Y1004) executed in the main process will be explained. FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 12 (Y1004). This jackpot control process 12 (Y1004) differs only in that it executes jackpot end process 12 (Y11613) instead of jackpot end process 11 (S11651) of the jackpot control process 11 (see FIG. 403) in the 11th control example described above, and the other processes are the same as those in the 11th control example, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 437, the contents of the jackpot end process 12 (Y11613) will be described. FIG. 437 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process 12 (Y11613). When the jackpot end process 12 is executed, the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701) is executed first. A detailed explanation of the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701) will be described later with reference to FIG. 438, but it executes processing to set the upper limit value at which a high probability state of consecutive normal patterns can be set in the time-saving limit count counter 203ja, and to update (subtract) the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja that has already been set.

Now, referring to FIG. 438, we will explain the details of the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), which is one process within the jackpot end process 12 (see Y11613 in FIG. 437). FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701). In this time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), a process is executed to set an upper limit value for which a high probability state of consecutive normal patterns can be set, and to update the remaining number of times for the set upper limit value.

In the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is greater than 0 (Y3001). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is not greater than 0, that is, that the probability state of the normal pattern at the time of winning the jackpot is a low probability state (Y3001: No), the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is not set to a value that can consecutively set the high probability state of the normal pattern, so the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is set to 10 (Y3005) and the time-saving flag is set to ON (Y3006). Then, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of Y3001, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is greater than 0 (Y3001: Yes), the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja is subtracted by 1 (Y3002), and then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after subtraction is 0 or not (Y3003). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after subtraction is 0 (Y3003: Yes), the upper limit value at which the high probability state of consecutive normal patterns can be set has been reached, so the time-saving limit reaching flag 203kh is set to ON (Y3004), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y3004, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving limit count counter 203ja after subtraction is not 0 (Y3004: No), this process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the time-saving limit is set to 10 times, but this is not limited to this and may be set to one of multiple settings, such as 20 times or 30 times.

Returning to FIG. 437, the explanation will be continued. After executing the time-saving limit update process 12 (Y2701), it is determined whether the time-saving limit reached flag 203kh is on (Y2702), and if it is determined that the time-saving limit reached flag 203kh is on (Y2702: Yes), information indicating the normal state (low probability state of normal patterns) as the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is stored in the game state storage area 203g (Y2703), a state command corresponding to the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set (Y2707), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y2702, if it is determined that the time-saving limit reaching flag 203kh is not on (Y2702: No), information indicating a time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) as the game state to be set after the end of the jackpot game is stored in the game state storage area 203g (Y2704), the number of time-saving times corresponding to the jackpot type being executed is set as the counter value of the time-saving counter 203h based on the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb shown in Figures 410 and 411 (Y2705), a time-saving setting information command corresponding to the setting content is set (Y2706), and the process of Y2707 is performed.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) can be set consecutively after the end of a jackpot game, and the number of times that a state advantageous to the player can be set consecutively is limited, thereby preventing the player from getting excessive prize balls and encouraging his or her gambling urge.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the configuration is such that the high probability state (high probability state) of the special pattern is not set after the end of the jackpot game, but this is not limited thereto, and the configuration may be such that the high probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

Although not shown, the content of the presentation executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example will be described below. In conventional pachinko machines, the corresponding game state is generally set when a special symbol (e.g., a jackpot symbol) for indicating a specific result is displayed in a stopped state. For example, when a special symbol wins a jackpot, the player predicts that a jackpot has been won due to the presentation during the variable display of the special symbol indicating that a jackpot has been won, and the player can recognize that a jackpot has been won by the display of the special symbol and the display mode indicating that a jackpot has been won. In this case, the player can predict in advance that a different game state will be set after the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, and can smoothly respond to the change in game state.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, as described above, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving win and the variation of the first special symbol starts, the time-saving win variation state is set. As shown in FIG. 406, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, the first ball entrance 64, which is the trigger for starting the first special symbol lottery, is located at a position where the ball can enter whether the game ball flows down the left area or the right area of the board, but the second ball entrance 1641, which is the trigger for starting the second special symbol, is located at a position where the ball can enter only when the game ball flows down the right area of the board.

As a result, for example, if a player who is playing a game in which the game ball flows down the left area of the board and enters the first ball entrance 64 (so-called left-hand play) wins the time-saving win, if the player continues to play left-hand play even though the time-saving win change state has been set, a malfunction may occur in which the time-saving win change state ends without the second special pattern lottery being executed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this twelfth control example, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving feature, the time-saving feature win occurs before the first special symbol is displayed in a stopped state, and a presentation is executed to notify the player that the time-saving feature is in a changing state.

Specifically, when the first special symbol wins the time-saving feature, the display of the first special symbol begins to change, and after a predetermined time has elapsed (e.g., after 10 seconds have elapsed), the pseudo symbol stops and a display mode is displayed indicating that the time-saving feature change state has been set (e.g., "Entering the time-saving feature change zone"), and "hit right" is displayed to prompt the player to aim the game ball at the second ball entrance 1641 and fire it.

By displaying in this manner, the player recognizes that the time-saving winning variable state has been set, and can play in a manner appropriate to the game state. Additionally, it is advisable to display a notice to the player that the time-saving B state will be set if the second special symbol wins a big win (or small win) or a time-saving win during the time-saving winning variable state.

In addition, when it is determined by pre-reading the winning information that there is winning information for a time-saving winning among the winning information for the first special pattern reserved in the normal state (reserved special pattern 1), a configuration may be added in which a notification is made that a time-saving winning change state is set in the next change of the first special pattern on the stopped display screen of the first special pattern executed immediately before the change of the first special pattern that wins the time-saving winning. In other words, when there is a reserved special pattern 1, a notification is made that the next change is a time-saving winning change state in the change of the first special pattern immediately before the time-saving winning change state is set, and when there is no reserved special pattern 1, a notification is made that a time-saving winning change state is set after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the change of the first special pattern in which the time-saving winning change state is set.

In this way, when there is no reserved special chart 1, there is a loss of time from when the time-saving winning change starts until it is announced that the time-saving winning change state is in effect. However, when there is a reserved special chart 1, it is announced in advance that the time-saving winning change state will be set, so there is no loss of time from when the time-saving winning change starts until it is announced that the time-saving winning change state is in effect. Therefore, by making the player want to keep the reserved state saved at all times in order to eliminate the loss of time during the time-saving winning change state, it is possible to motivate the player to play.

The player may also be informed of the time it takes for the first special symbol to change during the time-saving winning change state in an easily understandable manner.

As explained above, this twelfth control example is configured to be able to execute the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern simultaneously (in parallel), and if both special patterns result in a jackpot, execute a jackpot game based on the drawing result of the special pattern on the side where the special pattern variation stopped first (determined special pattern display), and at the point where the special pattern variation stopped first (determined special pattern display), depending on the type of jackpot, the other special pattern variation is forcibly displayed as stopped in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is a miss, and is configured to be able to execute a time-saving winning judgment in both the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern.

As in the fifth control example described above, a time-saving lottery (time-saving winning judgment) is executed before the start of each special symbol variation, and if the time-saving winning is selected, the time-saving state is set when the special symbol variation stops. In this case, if only the first special symbol or only the second special symbol is selected, the time-saving state that will be the first benefit is set. Note that if the time-saving winning is selected in the first special symbol lottery, the time-saving state (time-saving state A) that will be the first benefit is set, and if the time-saving winning is selected in the second special symbol lottery, the time-saving state (time-saving state C) that will be the second benefit different from the first benefit is set.

Furthermore, in the case where the time-saving feature is won in the second special symbol drawing executed during the first special symbol variation in which the time-saving feature is won, it is possible to set a time-saving state (time-saving state B) in which a third benefit that is more advantageous than the first and second benefits is awarded. By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) draw the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it is possible to set a time-saving state in which different benefits are awarded depending on the timing of the time-saving feature win in each special symbol drawing.

The bonus that is awarded may be, for example, a third bonus in which the time-saving end condition is more difficult to achieve than the first or second bonus, or a third bonus in which the special pattern lottery is easier to execute than the first or second bonus.

Furthermore, the timing at which the time-saving state of the third bonus is set may be the timing at which the first special pattern change is stopped among the special pattern changes being executed in parallel, or the timing at which the last special pattern change is stopped. Also, regardless of whether it is before or after the timing of the stop display, it may be the timing at which the first special pattern change is stopped, or the timing at which the last special pattern change is stopped. It may also be the timing at which a specific special pattern type is stopped.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that can simultaneously (parallelly) draw multiple types of special symbols, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player wins a jackpot in each of the special symbol draws and is simultaneously awarded excessive bonuses (jackpot games).

Furthermore, even if a player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player in one special pattern lottery, it is possible for the player to win a jackpot that is advantageous to the player in the other special pattern lottery by the time the winning result is frozen (confirmed) display. In this case, it is advisable to execute a variable presentation that suggests to the player that he or she has won an unfavorable jackpot, using the variable time until the special pattern lottery result is frozen and displayed. This makes the player think that he or she has won an unfavorable jackpot, which can motivate the player to execute the other special pattern lottery during that variable time.

In addition, the reel may be configured so that a shorter fluctuation time is more likely to be set when a jackpot that is advantageous to the player is won than when a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is won. This allows a favorable win to be won in the lottery for the other special symbol while one of the special symbols that has won an unfavorable win is fluctuating, and the winning result can be displayed as a stop (confirmed display) before the winning result of the unfavorable win.

In this twelfth control example, the special symbol that wins the time-saving win is changed for a long time, and the time-saving win change state is set, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the special symbol that wins the jackpot is changed for a long time, and the jackpot win change state is set, and during the jackpot win change state, the other special symbol is changed for a short time, making it possible to win prize balls through small win play.

<Thirteenth control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 439 to Fig. 463. The pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above in that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 have been partially changed, and the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. Also, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example differs in that the control contents executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been partially changed. The rest of the contents are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same contents, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth control example described above, the game state can be set to a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), a probability-changing state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), or a second probability-changing state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and the probability state of each symbol (special symbols, normal symbols) can be shifted from a low probability state to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, which is executed based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game described above and when other end conditions (for example, an end condition that is established when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed reaches a predetermined number of times) are established, the probability state of each symbol (special symbols, normal symbols) can be shifted from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, a trigger other than a jackpot win in the special pattern lottery is provided as a trigger for transitioning the probability state of the normal pattern from a low probability state to a high probability state, and the system is configured so that a trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established in some of the lottery results (misses) in which the result of the special pattern lottery is different from a jackpot win.

In other words, even players who do not win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery can be given a bonus in which a high probability state for normal patterns is set. By configuring it in this way, in one special pattern lottery, the lottery result in which a jackpot game is executed and the lottery result in which a time-saving state (high probability state for normal patterns) is set can be provided to the player separately, making it easier to diversify the types of lottery results that are advantageous to players.

However, even in the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above, because the nature of the system is that bonuses are awarded based on the results of the special pattern lottery that is executed, a situation may continue for a long time in which no bonuses are awarded, even though the special pattern lottery has been executed multiple times, and depending on the results of the special pattern lottery that is executed, this can cause a problem in that it can reduce the player's motivation to play.

In response to this, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured to be able to award a special bonus to a player when the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed (number of special symbol lotteries) meets a predetermined condition. By configuring it in this way, a bonus can be awarded to a player who has played a game involving the execution of a special symbol lottery for a long period of time, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

The bonus (ceiling bonus) that is awarded when the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed (number of special pattern lotteries) meets a predetermined condition is a bonus that is awarded when a special pattern lottery that results in a lottery result other than a jackpot (a miss) is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 500 times) in succession, and is configured to set a game state (third time-saving state) that makes it relatively easy to execute a special pattern lottery.

In other words, in the special symbol lottery in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), if a jackpot is not won 500 times in a row (if the player is stuck at 500 times), a ceiling bonus is awarded and a game state (third time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for players who have been playing for a long time without winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery to continue playing, and to make it easier to improve game operation.

In addition, even if a pachinko machine 10 has had a large number of special symbol lottery draws executed since the end of the previous jackpot game (a so-called stuck machine), new players who aim to be awarded the ceiling bonus can play the game, which makes it easier to improve the operation of the game. In particular, in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to set multiple setting values with different jackpot winning probabilities, even a pachinko machine 10 with a relatively low setting value for the jackpot winning probability (low setting) can be played by players who aim to be awarded the ceiling bonus, so it is possible to prevent a significant decrease in the operation of the pachinko machine 10 by installing a pachinko machine 10 with a low setting.

In addition, in this thirteenth control example, the game is configured to be played in substantially the same content when the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set and when the time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, specifically, when the time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving lottery (first time-saving state), making it difficult for the player to know whether the currently set game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state.

The contents of the benefit granted as the ceiling benefit are varied depending on the game state at the time when the conditions for granting the ceiling benefit (the third time-saving state is set) are met (the game state at the time when the number of stuck plays reaches 500). Specifically, the system is configured so that a benefit that is more advantageous to the player (the third time-saving state, which is difficult to end) is granted when the ceiling benefit is granted when the first time-saving state is set, rather than when the ceiling benefit is granted when the normal state is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the game state that will be set.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured to have a high probability (1/2) of winning the time-saving feature when a special pattern lottery is executed, and is configured to set the first time-saving feature state for a short period of time (one special pattern change) in most cases when the time-saving feature is won. By configuring it in this way, the game state will frequently switch between the normal state and the first time-saving feature state until the ceiling bonus is awarded. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the game state at the time the conditions for awarding the ceiling bonus are met.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example, when a special symbol lottery is executed, a game state in which the number of special symbol lotteries until a ceiling bonus is awarded is updated (valid game state) and a game state in which the number is not updated (invalid game state) can be set.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured to be able to set a second probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and when the second probability variable state is set, a game similar to the normal state and the first time-saving state (left-hand play) is executed. In other words, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the set game state is the normal state, the first time-saving state, or the second probability variable state.

Then, when the state in which the second probability variable state is set becomes an invalid play state, and a special symbol lottery is executed during the second probability variable state, the number of special symbol lotteries until the ceiling privilege is awarded is not updated.

This configuration makes it difficult for players playing left-handed games (players playing in the normal state, the first time-saving state, or the second probability variable state) to determine whether they are currently in a valid or invalid game state, making it difficult for players to predict the number of special symbol draws required until the ceiling privilege is granted. In addition, the number of special symbol draws that satisfy the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege (the number of special symbol draws executed after the end of the previous big win game) can be varied depending on the length of the period in which the second probability variable state is set, so that even if only the same number of special symbol draws (for example, 500 times) is specified as the number of special symbol draws that will grant the ceiling privilege, the ceiling privilege can be granted at various times, providing players who are aiming to be granted the ceiling privilege with the fun of predicting the number of special symbol draws required until the ceiling privilege is granted.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, a game in which a special symbol lottery is relatively likely to be executed (right-hand play) can be executed by shifting the probability state of the normal symbol from a low-probability state to a high-probability state, but in this thirteenth control example, in addition to the configuration used in the fifth control example described above, a game in which a special symbol lottery is relatively likely to be executed (right-hand play) can be executed without shifting the probability state of the normal symbol from a low-probability state to a high-probability state.

Specifically, in the third time-saving state granted as a ceiling bonus, the low probability state of normal symbols is set, and only the normal symbol variation time is varied, making it possible to play a game in which the special symbol lottery is relatively likely to be executed (right-hand play). In other words, in this thirteenth control example, it is possible to set a game state in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set (second time-saving state) and a game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set (third time-saving state) as game states in which the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, even in a situation where the trigger for transitioning the probability state of the normal patterns from a low probability state to a high probability state (e.g., winning a jackpot) has not occurred, it is possible to vary the ease with which the special pattern lottery is executed (transitioning from a state in which it is relatively difficult to execute the special pattern lottery to a state in which it is relatively easy to execute the special pattern lottery), so it is possible to provide the player with a game in which the ease with which the special pattern lottery is executed varies at various times.

In the fifth control example described above, only the game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set (time-saving state, probability-changing state) can be set as the game state in which the special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed than when the normal state (low probability state of the special pattern, low probability state of the normal pattern) is set, so the game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set is called the game state in which the special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed (time-saving state, right-hit game state). However, in the thirteenth control example, as described above, in a part of the game state in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set (first time-saving state), the ease of executing the special pattern lottery is configured to be the same as in the normal state, and in a part of the game state in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set (second time-saving state), it is configured to be easier to execute the special pattern lottery than in the normal state.

Therefore, rather than explaining the probability state of each symbol that is actually set, when simply explaining the ease of executing the special symbol lottery, regardless of the probability state of the normal symbols, the game state (first time-saving state, second probability variable state) in which the ease of executing the special symbol lottery is the same (similar) as the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) will be referred to as the normal state or left-hand play state, and the game state (second time-saving state, third time-saving state) in which the special symbol lottery is easier to execute than the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) will be referred to as the time-saving state or right-hand play state.

In addition, in this thirteenth control example, a benefit similar to the ceiling benefit can be granted based on the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the left-hand play state (normal state, first time-saving state, second probability change state). Specifically, in some cases where a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the left-hand play state, a second time-saving state can be set in which the period during which the jackpot game is played (number of rounds played) is shorter than other jackpot wins, and the same time-saving end condition (number of time-saving times) as the third time-saving state that can be granted as a ceiling benefit is set after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, in some cases where a time-saving win is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the left-hand play state, the second time-saving state can be set, and when the second time-saving state is set based on the time-saving win, the same time-saving end condition (number of time-saving times) as the third time-saving state that can be granted as a ceiling benefit can be set.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to grant a bonus equivalent to the ceiling bonus to a player playing left-handed before the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, making it difficult for the player to understand the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus. Also, since it is possible to make the player believe that an event in which the second time-saving state is set based on winning a jackpot or winning a time-saving state in a special symbol drawing means that the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met and the third time-saving state is set, a player who believes that a small number of special symbol drawing times may be set as the condition for granting the ceiling bonus can be motivated to play in the hope of receiving the ceiling bonus, even if the number of special symbol drawing times performed since the end of the previous jackpot game is different from the number of special symbol drawing times that meet the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus, and the operation of the game can be improved.

In addition, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this thirteenth control example, during left-hand play, a suggestion effect (ceiling reach suggestion effect) can be executed to suggest to the player the remaining time (remaining number of special symbol draws) until the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met. By configuring in this way, it is possible to have the player predict whether or not the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are likely to be met (will be met soon) based on the results of the ceiling reach suggestion effect, making it easier for the player to play for long periods of time in the hope of receiving the ceiling bonus.

When determining the presentation mode of this ceiling-reaching suggestion presentation, in addition to information up until the ceiling bonus granting condition is established, information regarding whether or not the condition for setting a second time-saving state similar to the third time-saving state that can be granted as the above-mentioned ceiling bonus is established is also taken into consideration to determine the presentation mode. By configuring in this way, when the condition for setting a second time-saving state similar to the third time-saving state that can be granted as the ceiling bonus is satisfied, the same presentation mode as the ceiling-reaching suggestion presentation is determined as in the case where the condition for granting the ceiling bonus is highly likely to be established. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily believe that the condition for granting the ceiling bonus has been established and the third time-saving state has been set in the event that the second time-saving state similar to the ceiling bonus is set based on winning a jackpot or time-saving state in the special pattern lottery.

<About the performance content of the 13th control example>
First, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example will be described with reference to Figures 439 to 441. The pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured to be able to set a game state (right-hitting game state) advantageous to the player based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, in comparison with the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above.

Specifically, when it is determined that the number of times the special pattern lottery has been performed has reached a predetermined number (500 times), the special pattern variation to show the lottery result of that special pattern lottery (500th special pattern lottery) is stopped and displayed, and then a ceiling bonus can be awarded as a rescue measure. In this thirteenth control example, the ceiling bonus is awarded by setting a right-hand play state (third time-saving state) that makes it easier to execute a special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery) than a left-hand play state.

When a special symbol drawing is executed during a left-hand play state (for example, normal state or first time-saving state), a ceiling reach suggestion effect can be executed as an effect for allowing the player to predict the period (number of special symbol drawing) until the ceiling privilege is granted. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the period (number of special symbol drawing) until the ceiling privilege is granted by grasping the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion effect.

In addition, because the player can be made aware that the ceiling bonus will soon be awarded (or that there is a high possibility that the bonus will be awarded) before the ceiling bonus is actually awarded, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ceiling bonus is awarded without any warning, making it difficult for the player to enjoy the benefits of the ceiling bonus.

In this thirteenth control example, as the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation, at least a "strong suggestion" presentation mode with a high expectation of the ceiling privilege being awarded and a "weak suggestion" presentation mode with a lower expectation of the ceiling privilege being awarded than the "strong suggestion" presentation mode can be set, and the presentation mode is configured to be selected using a ceiling reach suggestion presentation selection table 222la (see FIG. 448) described later. A specific explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 448, but in this thirteenth control example, when selecting the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation, the presentation mode is selected based on the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the previous big win game, that is, the number of times that special symbol lotteries with lottery results other than a big win (miss) were executed consecutively (the number of times of getting stuck), and the result of the special symbol lottery that is the target of the variable presentation in which the ceiling reach suggestion presentation is executed.

In this way, by configuring the presentation mode to be selected based on the number of times a player has been stuck, the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation can be selected based on the actual period until the ceiling bonus is awarded (the number of times remaining), making it possible to execute a presentation with high reliability for the player. Also, in this thirteenth control example, a bonus similar to the ceiling bonus can be awarded based on the results of the special pattern lottery (based on the results of the jackpot lottery and the time-saving lottery), and even when the results of the special pattern lottery that is the subject of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation may award a bonus similar to the ceiling bonus, the presentation mode of "strong suggestion," which has a high expectation of awarding the ceiling bonus, is more likely to be selected.

By configuring it in this way, even when a bonus similar to a ceiling bonus is awarded based on the results of a special pattern drawing (based on the results of a jackpot drawing or time-saving drawing), it is possible to make the player more likely to believe that the ceiling bonus has been awarded. This makes it possible to make the player play while expecting that the ceiling bonus will be awarded at more times than when the predetermined ceiling bonus awarding conditions (number of times the special pattern drawing is performed) are met, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

As shown in FIG. 439, the ceiling reaching suggestion effect is configured to execute an effect in which the character that is displayed in the effect mode after the ceiling is reached (mid-ceiling mode) is displayed on the display screen. FIG. 439(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the ceiling reaching suggestion effect is set to "weak suggestion," which is an effect that is more likely to be selected when the period until the ceiling bonus is awarded is long than when it is short. FIG. 439(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the ceiling reaching suggestion effect is set to "strong suggestion," which is an effect that is more likely to be selected when the period until the ceiling bonus is awarded is short than when it is long.

When a ceiling reaching suggestion effect with the "weak suggestion" effect mode is executed, an effect is executed in which an angel-like character 809 crosses the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, as shown in FIG. 439(a). Then, the comment "Angel found! Ceiling?..." is displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a guidance mode to inform the player that a ceiling reaching suggestion effect has been executed.

As described above, the "weak suggestion" presentation mode shown in FIG. 439(a) is a presentation mode that has a low expectation of reaching the ceiling as a presentation mode set as a ceiling reach suggestion presentation, but in this thirteenth control example, the frequency with which the ceiling reach suggestion presentation is executed is configured to be higher as the period until the ceiling bonus is awarded (until the ceiling is reached) becomes shorter. Therefore, even with the "weak suggestion" presentation mode shown in FIG. 439(a), the mere execution of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation makes it possible for the player to play while expecting that the period until the ceiling bonus is awarded is short.

The display screen shown in FIG. 439(a) is a display screen during which the special symbol is changing to show the result of the 250th special symbol drawing since the end of the previous big win game, and "250 times" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a stuck number notification mode to show the number of special symbol drawings that have been performed since the end of the previous big win game. In other words, in this thirteenth control example, a display mode showing the stuck number is configured to be able to be displayed to make it easier for the player to grasp the cumulative number of special symbol drawing times (stuck number) during the period in which the left-hand hit game state continues.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the period until the ceiling bonus is awarded (the period until the ceiling is reached) based on the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation being executed and the number of stuck wins displayed in the small display area Dm7.

As shown in FIG. 439(a), in the left-hand play state, the reserved icons hr1 to hr4 corresponding to the reserved memory (special symbol 1 reserved) of the first special symbol lottery that is mainly executed are configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm9. In the example shown in FIG. 439(a), three reserved special symbols 1 have been acquired (see small display area Dm1a), so three reserved icons hr1 to hr3 are displayed in the small display area Dm9.

On the other hand, when "strong suggestion" is set as the presentation type of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation, as shown in FIG. 439(b), a presentation is executed to indicate to the player that there is a higher expectation that the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation will be executed than with the "weak suggestion presentation."

Figure 439 (b) shows a display screen during special pattern fluctuation to show the result of the special pattern lottery in which the number of special pattern lotteries executed since the end of the previous big win game is the 499th, and "499 times" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a stuck number notification mode to show the number of special pattern lotteries executed since the end of the previous big win game. Then, as a display mode to show that the ceiling reach suggestion effect currently being executed is "strong suggestion", a more luxurious character 809z is displayed than the "weak suggestion" character 809 (see Figure 439 (a)). In this way, as the performance mode of the ceiling reach suggestion effect, the performance mode "strong suggestion" which is likely to be set when the ceiling privilege is likely to be granted (the period until it is short) is configured to display a more luxurious character in appearance than the other performance mode "weak suggestion", so that it is easy to visually determine whether or not the situation is one in which the ceiling privilege is likely to be granted (the period until it is short) based on the mode of the character displayed when the ceiling reach suggestion effect is executed.

In addition, the secondary display area Ds displays the comment "It's the Archangel! We're almost at the ceiling" as a notification to inform the player that the ceiling reaching suggestion effect executed this time is a "strong suggestion." By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to determine whether or not the situation is such that the ceiling bonus is likely to be awarded (the time until it is awarded is short).

In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 439(b), two special chart 1 reservations have been acquired (see small display area Dm1a), so two reservation icons hr1 and hr2 are displayed in small display area Dm9.

In addition, the approach of the time when the ceiling bonus will be awarded may be indicated by changing the display mode of the reserved icon displayed in the small display area Dm9, rather than by a ceiling reaching indication effect executed in the main display area Dm of the display screen. For example, a specifying means may be provided to specify the range of the special chart 1 reserved that will be consumed during the left-hand play state among the special chart 1 reserved that has been acquired, and the display mode of the reserved icon may be different between the range specified by the specifying means and the other range, or the size of the displayed reserved icon may be different, or the displayed area may be different.

In addition, as a pre-reading effect executed using the reserved icon, a display mode with a high expectation of winning the jackpot may be configured to be different when the reserved icon for the special pattern 1 reserved corresponding to the first special pattern drawing executed before the ceiling bonus is awarded, and when the reserved icon for the special pattern 1 reserved corresponding to the first special pattern drawing executed after the ceiling bonus is awarded is set.

Furthermore, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide different bonuses based on winning a jackpot between winning a jackpot before the ceiling bonus is awarded and winning a jackpot after the ceiling bonus is awarded, it may be configured to display the reserved icon in a display manner that suggests the bonuses that will be awarded based on winning a jackpot. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with information that combines the probability of winning a jackpot and the probability of receiving the ceiling bonus through a look-ahead performance using the reserved icon.

In addition, as a pre-reading effect, a first suggestion mode for indicating the timing when the ceiling bonus will be awarded, a second suggestion mode for indicating a jackpot win, and a third suggestion mode for indicating a time-saving win through a time-saving lottery can each be set as a display mode of the reserved icon, and it is preferable to be able to display a combination display mode that combines two or more of the suggestion modes mentioned above as the display mode of one reserved icon. Also, in this case, it is preferable to be able to set the same display mode (a concept that includes differences to the extent that the player has difficulty distinguishing) as the combination display mode corresponding to different combinations.

This configuration allows the player to enjoy predicting the future game situation based on the display mode of the reserved icon displayed as a look-ahead effect. In addition, by determining the game situation in a comprehensive manner, including various information displayed on other display screens (e.g., the number of starts, etc.), it is possible to improve the accuracy of predicting the future game situation indicated by the display mode of the reserved icon displayed as a look-ahead effect.

Next, the content of the effects that are executed when a ceiling bonus is awarded will be explained. Figure 440(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed during a special pattern change (ceiling reached change) in which a ceiling bonus (right-hand play state) is set after the ongoing special pattern change is stopped and displayed, and Figure 440(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed during a right-hand play state (ceiling mode) in which a ceiling bonus is awarded.

Here, in this thirteenth control example, a ceiling bonus (right-hand play state) can be set if the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 500 times) without winning a jackpot during the left-hand play state (normal state, first time-saving state). In addition, when a ceiling bonus is set, the content of the ceiling bonus (degree of advantage to the player) is configured to differ depending on the set play state (normal state or first time-saving state).

The system is configured so that at least a part of the content of the ceiling bonus that will be awarded is notified to the player by the presentation mode of the ceiling reach variable presentation for notifying that a ceiling bonus will be awarded. By configuring it in this way, not only is the player notified that a ceiling bonus will be awarded when the ceiling bonus is awarded, but the content of the bonus can also be informed, providing an easy-to-understand game experience.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 440(a), when the ceiling reach variation effect is executed, a heavenly background corresponding to the ceiling mid-mode is displayed as the background image in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the characters "Ceiling!?" are displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a display mode to indicate that the ceiling has been reached (will be reached). Then, the ceiling reach variation effect is executed in a display mode in which the character 809 displayed in the ceiling reach suggestion effect celebrates the granting of the ceiling bonus. In addition, the contents 810a of the treasure chest 810 are displayed in a display mode including the information "100" to notify the contents of the current ceiling bonus.

Furthermore, the comment "Hit to the right" is displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm as a guide to guide the player on how to play after the right-hit play state (third time-saving state) is set as the ceiling bonus. The comment "Ceiling reached!! Get 100 time-savings!!" is displayed on the sub-display area Ds as a notification to suggest that the ceiling bonus will be awarded.

As shown in FIG. 440(a), in the ceiling reach variation effect executed during the variation period of the special pattern variation in which the ceiling privilege awarding condition is established, the small display area Dm7 is configured not to display information indicating the number of times the special pattern has been drawn since the end of the previous big win game (information displayed in the small display area Dm7 in FIG. 439(a)). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily determine the number of times the special pattern has been drawn in which the ceiling reach variation effect has been executed. Therefore, in order to know the number of times the special pattern has been drawn in which the condition for the ceiling privilege to be awarded can be established, it is necessary to always know the number of times the special pattern has been drawn before the ceiling reach variation effect is executed, and it is possible to make the player always interested in the display mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 even during left-hand play.

The above-mentioned ceiling reaching variable presentation is configured to be executed not only when the number of times the special pattern lottery has been executed since the end of the previous jackpot game reaches the number of times (500 times) that the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, but also when a jackpot is won that grants the same bonus as the ceiling bonus (right-hand play state) or when a specific time-saving feature is won that grants the same bonus as the ceiling bonus (right-hand play state).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the benefit currently being awarded is a ceiling benefit or not. Note that if it is made difficult for the player to determine the type of benefit that will actually be awarded by executing the ceiling reach variation presentation shown in FIG. 440(a) in multiple benefit awarding processes, it is advisable to configure the system so that at least a portion of the presentation mode of the ceiling reach variation presentation executed according to the type of benefit is changed. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible for only players who can distinguish slight differences in the presentation mode of the ceiling reach variation presentation executed to be able to determine the type of benefit that will currently be awarded.

In addition, the performance period during which the ceiling reach variation performance is executed, i.e., the variation time of the special pattern variation during which the ceiling reach variation performance is executed, may be configured to be different without changing the performance mode of the ceiling reach variation performance to be executed. For example, if the variation time of the special pattern variation for which a ceiling privilege is granted (the variation time of the special pattern variation for a non-winning win) is set to a basic time (e.g., 10 seconds), the variation time of the special pattern variation when the ceiling reach variation performance is executed based on a jackpot win (the variation time of the special pattern variation corresponding to a specific jackpot win) may be configured to be 11 seconds, and the variation time of the special pattern when the ceiling reach variation performance is executed based on a time-saving win (the variation time of the special pattern variation corresponding to a specific time-saving win) may be configured to be 12 seconds. By configuring in this way, the performance period of the ceiling reach variation performance can be made different depending on the type of privilege to be granted while executing the ceiling reach variation performance in the same performance mode. This makes it possible to execute different types of ceiling reach fluctuation effects depending on the type of bonus being awarded, while suppressing the increase in the amount of performance data required to execute the ceiling reach fluctuation effects. This makes it possible to determine the type of bonus being awarded only to players who can distinguish slight differences in the ceiling reach fluctuation effects being executed (differences in performance periods).

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this thirteenth control example, the ceiling reach variation effect shown in FIG. 440(a) can be executed even if the ceiling bonus is not awarded. In the ceiling reach variation effect (fake ceiling reach effect) executed in this case, the background image (heaven image) of the ceiling mode is displayed, similar to the display screen shown in FIG. 440(a), and an effect is executed in which a character 809 appears and attempts to open a treasure chest 810, and then a display mode indicating that a ceiling bonus will not be awarded (contents 810a with the word "unfortunate" written on it) is displayed from within the treasure chest 810, and then an effect is executed in which the background image switches to a normal background image.

During the execution period of this false ceiling reached effect, while the effect is being executed using the same effect as the ceiling bonus effect executed when a ceiling bonus is awarded, the comment "Ceiling reached?!" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a mode indicating that the ceiling bonus is likely to be awarded, and when an effect indicating the result of the false ceiling reached effect is executed, the comment "Too bad!!" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a mode indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be awarded.

In this way, by configuring the false ceiling reach effect to be executable in a situation where the ceiling perk will not actually be awarded, when an effect result indicating that the ceiling perk will not be awarded is temporarily displayed as the effect result of the ceiling reach effect, and then an effect mode (revival effect) in which an effect in which the ceiling perk is not awarded is executed is executed, it is possible to easily make the player believe that the ceiling reach effect being executed is a false ceiling reach effect indicating that the ceiling perk will not actually be awarded.

As described above, in this thirteenth control example, even if a ceiling reach effect (including a false ceiling reach effect) is executed, it does not notify the player that a ceiling benefit will be awarded, but only indicates to the player that a ceiling benefit may be awarded. Therefore, the small display area Dm7 of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 shown in FIG. 440(a) displays a display mode of "Ceiling!?", that is, a display mode indicating that a ceiling benefit may be awarded. In other words, the character "!?" of the characters "Ceiling!?" displayed in the small display area Dm7 of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 shown in FIG. 440(a) is a display mode indicating that it is not a definite notification that a ceiling benefit will be awarded. In this control example and other control examples, when "!?" is displayed as a character displayed on the display screen, it is used to indicate that the target to which the character is attached is not in a definite state.

In addition, in this thirteenth control example, as shown in Figures 439(a) and 439(b), during the left-hand play state, the number of special pattern changes (number of starts) executed since the end of the previous big win game is displayed, and the number of special pattern changes (remaining number of changes) required until the ceiling bonus is awarded (until the conditions for awarding the ceiling bonus are met) is not displayed, but this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be able to notify the number of remaining changes until the ceiling bonus is awarded. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to choose whether or not to continue playing after understanding the number of special pattern changes required until the ceiling bonus is awarded.

In addition, when the device is configured to be able to notify the player of information (e.g., the remaining number of times) corresponding to the number of special pattern changes (remaining number of changes) required until the ceiling bonus is awarded, the device may be configured to display presentation information (e.g., a number greater than the remaining number of times) corresponding to a value different from the actual remaining number of changes on the display screen, and the presentation information displayed on the display screen at the time the ceiling bonus is actually awarded may be presentation information indicating that the remaining number of changes required until the ceiling bonus is awarded is 0.

In this case, for example, if the number of remaining variations until the ceiling bonus is awarded is 200, the display mode of "300 remaining" is displayed as the presentation information displayed on the display screen. In other words, a remaining number greater than the actual number of remaining variations is displayed as the presentation information. Then, it is preferable to configure the value indicated by the presentation information displayed on the display screen to be updated (subtracted) to approach the actual number of remaining variations based on the establishment of an update condition, such as when the variation time of the executed special pattern variation is long, when a variation presentation is executed in a presentation mode with a high expectation of winning a jackpot, or when an operation presentation in which the player can operate the operation means is executed and the player operates the operation means during the operation presentation.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to subtract a larger number of remaining times displayed as the performance information than the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed, so it is possible to make the player believe that the performance result of the executed performance makes it easier for the ceiling bonus to be awarded (the number of remaining changes until the ceiling bonus is awarded has been shortened), thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, by configuring the remaining number of times displayed as the performance information to be able to be subtracted by a larger amount than the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed, if the result of the special pattern lottery before the ceiling privilege is awarded is a lottery result that can award a privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege (second time-saving state) (a big win C13, or a time-saving win that sets the second time-saving state), it is possible to easily execute a performance in which the remaining number of times displayed as the performance information is significantly updated (subtracted) to performance information indicating that the remaining number of changes required until the ceiling privilege is awarded is 0 by the time the special pattern for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery is stopped and displayed, without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the content of the presentation executed when a benefit equivalent to the ceiling benefit (second time-saving state) is awarded from diverging from the content of the presentation executed when the ceiling benefit is awarded, making it difficult for the player to understand which benefit has been awarded. This makes it possible to make the player believe that the ceiling benefit will be awarded at various times (number of times of addiction), motivating them to play.

Next, in the ceiling mode, which indicates the period during which the ceiling bonus (right-hit game state in which the third time-saving state is set) has been granted, as shown in FIG. 440(b), a rabbit-like character 801 flies around heaven in the main display area Dm, and the words "Ceiling" are displayed to indicate that the mode is currently in the ceiling mode. Then, the words "Right-hit" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 as a guide display mode to guide the player on how to play, and the words "Last 90 times" are displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a remaining period display mode to notify the player of the remaining period until the ceiling bonus ends.

The display screen shown in Figure 440(b) is the display screen at the time when the special pattern lottery has been executed 10 times after "100" was displayed (see Figure 440(a)) as the content of the ceiling bonus in the ceiling reaching variable performance, indicating that 100 times of time reduction will be granted, so the value of "100", indicating the content of the ceiling bonus notified to the player when the ceiling bonus was granted, is subtracted each time a special pattern lottery is executed, and "90" is displayed.

In this way, by notifying the player of the period until the ceiling bonus ends (period during which the ceiling mode continues), it is possible to prevent the ceiling bonus from ending suddenly. Also, in this thirteenth control example, it is configured so that when a right-hit play state is set, it is easier for a player to be granted an advantageous bonus that is advantageous to the player as a bonus (jackpot play content or play state set after the jackpot play ends) granted to the player when a jackpot is won when the right-hit play state is set than when the left-hit play state is set. Therefore, the comment "Good things will happen if you hit the jackpot now!" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this thirteenth control example, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is the same (5/1000) in the left-hand play state in which the normal state or the first time-saving state is set, and in the right-hand play state in which the third time-saving state is set, and in the left-hand play state in which the normal state or the first time-saving state is set, if 500 consecutive special symbol lotteries that do not win a jackpot are performed, the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, and the third time-saving state (right-hand play state) is set as the ceiling bonus. And, it is configured so that it is easier to grant a bonus that is advantageous to the player when a jackpot is won in the right-hand play state than in the left-hand play state.

In other words, in the above-mentioned right-hand play state, when the remaining period (remaining number of special symbol lotteries) until the ceiling privilege is granted becomes short, the player does not expect to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery executed during the left-hand play state, but plays the game hoping that he will not win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and hopes to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery after the right-hand play state is set, providing a novel gameplay. Here, in the conventional pachinko machine 10, although there are some that vary the degree of advantage for the privilege granted based on the jackpot winning according to the set play state, regardless of which play state is set, the player is configured to be more advantageous in terms of the privilege being granted in the case of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery than in the case of not winning the jackpot, so that regardless of which play state is set, the game has a monotonous gameplay in which the player aims to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

In contrast, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured to be able to award bonuses based on the number of times the special symbol lottery has been drawn, rather than on the results of the lottery. Specifically, it is configured to set a right-hand play state (third time-saving state) if the special symbol lottery has been drawn 500 times without winning a jackpot during a left-hand play state in which the normal state or the first time-saving state is set. It is also configured so that a jackpot game with a larger number of play rounds is more likely to be played if a jackpot is won when the third time-saving state is set, than when the normal state or the first time-saving state is set.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a novel gameplay experience in which, when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the normal state or the left-hand play state in which the first time-saving state is set approaches 500, the player can hope that the special symbol lottery executed does not result in a jackpot win. In other words, it is configured so that a part of the play period during which the special symbol lottery is executed can be set as a special period in which a jackpot win is not expected.

Therefore, the player can be provided with a play period during which he or she hopes to win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, and a play period (special period) during which he or she hopes not to win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery (a losing win), which makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game earlier than with conventional pachinko machines 10 that always aim to win the jackpot.

Next, referring to FIG. 441, the effect (addition effect) when the remaining period of the ceiling mode is added will be explained. FIG. 441 shows an example of a display screen that is displayed during the addition effect in which information (remaining number of times) display showing the remaining period of the ceiling mode is added (added).

In this thirteenth control example, the ceiling reach fluctuation presentation (see FIG. 440(a)) that is executed when a ceiling bonus is awarded is configured to be able to notify the player of the content of the bonus (number of times the time is reduced), but the content of the bonus (number of times the time is reduced) notified in the ceiling reach fluctuation presentation is configured to be determined by referring to a dedicated selection table (ceiling reach presentation selection table 222lb), with the number of times the time is reduced set internally as the upper limit.

If a difference occurs between the content of the bonus (number of time-saving times) notified in the ceiling-reaching variation effect and the number of time-saving times set internally, an additional effect is executed during the ceiling-reaching mode to increase (add) the remaining period of the ceiling-reaching mode (the remaining number of times displayed in the small display area Dm7 in FIG. 440(b)). By configuring in this way, a player for whom the ceiling-reaching mode has been set can play with peace of mind knowing the minimum period that the ceiling-reaching mode will continue, and can play while hoping that the period that the ceiling-reaching mode will continue will be extended.

Furthermore, in this thirteenth control example, the content of the benefit granted as the ceiling benefit is varied depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling benefit is granted. Specifically, if the game state set at the time when the process for determining whether to grant the ceiling benefit is executed at the start of the special pattern fluctuation is the normal state, a right-hitting game state (third time-saving state) with 100 time-saving plays is set as the ceiling benefit, and if the game state set at the time when the process for determining whether to grant the ceiling benefit is executed at the start of the special pattern fluctuation is the first time-saving state, a right-hitting game state (third time-saving state) with 300 time-saving plays is set as the ceiling benefit.

In other words, the system is configured so that a ceiling bonus that is more advantageous to the player is awarded when the ceiling bonus is awarded in the first time-saving state, rather than when the ceiling bonus is awarded in the normal state. The system is also configured so that when a ceiling bonus of 300 time-saving times is awarded as the content of the ceiling bonus (number of time-saving times) to be notified in the ceiling-reaching variable presentation, it is possible to notify the content of a ceiling bonus that is disadvantageous to the player (100 time-saving times).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether the ceiling bonus given this time is a ceiling bonus advantageous to the player (300 times of time reduction) or disadvantageous to the player (100 times of time reduction) at the time when the ceiling reach fluctuation effect is executed. Note that in the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example, the content of the ceiling bonus notified in the ceiling reach fluctuation effect is configured to be within the range of the content of the ceiling bonus that is actually set, making it possible for the player to play with peace of mind in accordance with the notified content, but without being limited to this, it may also be configured to execute a subtraction effect in which the content of the ceiling bonus (the number of times of time reduction) notified in the ceiling reach fluctuation effect is subtracted during the period in which the ceiling mode is set.

For example, if a ceiling privilege (100 time-saving times) unfavorable to the player is set, the ceiling reach variation effect may be configured to notify the player of the fact that a ceiling privilege (300 time-saving times) favorable to the player has been granted (displaying "300 times" in the small display area Dm7), and the information displayed in the small display area Dm7 in the ceiling mode (remaining number of time-saving times) may be deducted by a number greater than the number of times the special pattern lottery has been executed. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to understand that a ceiling privilege (300 time-saving times) favorable to the player may have been set in the ceiling reach variation effect regardless of which ceiling privilege is granted, and the player can play in the hope that the favorable ceiling privilege has actually been granted.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured so that the same game (left-hand play) is executed when the normal state is set and when the first time-saving state is set, and the same variable presentation is executed during the left-hand play state in which the left-hand play is executed. In other words, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish the game state that is set during the left-hand play state. Therefore, when the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met during the left-hand play state, it is possible to make the player difficult to understand which bonus (number of time-savings) will be granted as the ceiling bonus, and therefore it is possible to make the player interested in the content of the ceiling bonus notified in the ceiling reach variable presentation.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured to execute a time-saving winning judgment (time-saving lottery) if the jackpot is not won in the special pattern lottery executed in the normal state and when the first time-saving state is set, and if the result of the time-saving winning judgment (time-saving lottery) is a win, the time-saving state (first time-saving state, second time-saving state) can be set without playing the jackpot after the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery that won the time-saving state.

When the first time-saving state is set based on the result of the time-saving lottery, a time-saving end condition that is established when a special pattern change is performed once is set as the time-saving end condition for ending the first time-saving state.

In other words, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured so that the game state frequently switches between the normal state and the first time-saving state during the left-hand play state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily vary the game state set at the time when the condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 special pattern lotteries) is met, making it difficult for players to understand the content of the bonus granted as the ceiling bonus (the number of time-saving bonuses).

The display screen shown in FIG. 441 shows a display mode indicating the content of the benefit corresponding to the ceiling benefit (100 times of time reduction) disadvantageous to the player in the ceiling reach variable presentation when the ceiling benefit (300 times of time reduction) is set as the ceiling benefit (see FIG. 440(a)), and this is the display screen at the time when 100 special symbol lotteries have been performed in the ceiling mode (the remaining number of time reductions displayed in the small display area Dm7 is 1 (last)), and "last" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 to indicate that this is the final period of the ceiling mode. Then, as an additional presentation to add to the remaining period of the ceiling mode, an additional presentation is performed in which an additional presentation mode 809a is displayed so that the character 809 extends the remaining period of the ceiling mode.

In FIG. 441, "+200" is displayed as the added feature 809a to indicate that the remaining period of the ceiling mode will be extended by 200 special symbol draws. Then, the added feature 809a moves toward the small display area Dm7, and an added effect is executed in which the remaining period displayed in the small display area Dm7 is changed to "Last 200 times". Then, the sub-display area Ds displays a guidance mode informing the player that the ceiling mode will be extended, and the words "Ceiling extension!! Plus 200 times!!" are displayed as a guidance mode indicating the details of the extension.

In the example shown in FIG. 441, a display screen is shown when an additional effect is executed during the final period of the ceiling mode (the special pattern change period when "Last" is displayed in the small display area Dm7), but the additional effect may be executed at a time other than the final period of the ceiling mode. For example, the additional effect may be executed when information indicating a predetermined period (for example, 90 remaining time reductions) is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as the remaining period of the ceiling mode (see FIG. 440(b)). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the additional effect will be executed, thereby maintaining an interest in the effects executed during the ceiling mode.

Also, as shown in FIG. 441, the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured to execute a dedicated effect as an added effect, but some of the effect modes of the added effect may be configured to be the same as the effect modes of other effects. For example, when the result of the special pattern lottery that is the target of the variable effect for showing the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss, a display mode including information indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss and that the remaining period of the ceiling mode will be extended may be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to leave open the possibility that the various effects (variable effects, etc.) executed during the ceiling mode will display a performance result indicating that the remaining period of the ceiling mode will be extended, so that the player can be interested in the various effects executed during the ceiling mode.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example, the additional effect is executed during the ceiling mode to extend the remaining period of the ceiling mode, but it may be configured to execute a revival effect in which the ceiling mode is set again after the display mode indicating the end of the ceiling mode is displayed. In this case, for example, instead of executing the additional effect in the final variable effect of the ceiling mode shown in FIG. 441, a termination screen indicating the end of the ceiling mode is displayed once, and an effect suggesting that the left-hand play state is set (for example, a part of the effect executed when the guide notification "Please return to left-hand play" is set) is executed, and then an effect indicating that the ceiling mode has not ended (a performance including a guide notification "Entering the ceiling mode!! Please continue playing with the right hand") is executed, and "200 times remaining" is displayed in the small display area Dm7 as a display mode for indicating the remaining period of the ceiling mode.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player believe that the ceiling mode has not simply continued, but that a new ceiling mode has been set after one ceiling mode has ended, making it difficult for the player to understand the conditions under which the ceiling mode is set (the conditions for granting the third time-saving state). Therefore, a player playing in a left-hand play state can continue playing while hoping that the third time-saving state (right-hand play state) will be set.

<Regarding transition of game state in the thirteenth control example>
Next, the transition of the game state in the thirteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 442. Fig. 442 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state in the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example. As shown in Figure 442, the pachinko machine 10 in this 13th control example is configured to be able to set a left-hit game state in which a left-hit game is an advantageous game method for the player, in which a left-hit game is performed by firing a game ball toward the left side area (to the left of the variable display unit 80) of the game area formed on the game board 13 with the aim of having the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 (see Figure 234), which triggers the execution of the first special pattern lottery, and a right-hit game state in which a right-hit game is performed by firing a game ball toward the right side area (to the right of the variable display unit 80) of the game area formed on the game board 13 with the aim of having the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 (see Figure 234), which triggers the execution of the second special pattern lottery.

More specifically, if the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), the first time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), or the second probability-changing state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the game state, the game state will be a left-handed play state, and if the second time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) or the third time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, the game state will be a right-handed play state.

Here, the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are both game states in which a low probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols are set, but the game is configured so that different lengths of normal symbol change time are set as the change time for normal symbol change (normal symbol change time). When the first time-saving state is set, the player has a higher probability of winning the normal symbol lottery than when the low probability state for normal symbols is set, but the normal symbol change time is specified so that the game ball is less likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the normal symbol winning game that is executed based on the winning win. Therefore, when the first time-saving state is set, even though the high probability state for normal symbols is set, left-handed play is a more advantageous game method for the player than right-handed play.

The third time-saving state is a game state in which a low probability state for special symbols and a low probability state for normal symbols are set, but by configuring it so that a dedicated change time can be set as the change time for normal symbol change, it is a game state in which the rate at which game balls shot by right-handed play enter the second ball entrance 640 is higher than the rate at which game balls shot by left-handed play enter the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, when the third time-saving state is set, even though a low probability state for normal symbols is set, right-handed play is a more advantageous game method for the player than left-handed play.

First, the game content during the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) will be explained. The normal state is a game state in which a game (special symbol 1 game) is played in which the first special symbol lottery is mainly executed by causing the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 by playing from the left. When the first special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state, a special symbol lottery is executed with a 1/200 probability of winning a jackpot, and if the jackpot is not won, a 1/2 probability of winning a time-saving lottery is executed.

When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery that is executed in the normal state, one of the four jackpot types (jackpot A13, jackpot B13, jackpot C13, jackpot D13) is set, and the selection rates for the jackpot types are set to 20% for jackpot A13, 30% for jackpot B13, 30% for jackpot C13, and 20% for jackpot D13.

When jackpot A13 is set as the jackpot type, jackpot play with 10 rounds (R) is played, and the normal state is set after the jackpot play ends. When jackpot B13 is set, jackpot play with 10 rounds (R) is played, and the second time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends. When jackpot C13 is set, jackpot play with 2 rounds (R) is played, and the second time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends. When jackpot D13 is set, jackpot play with 10 rounds (R) is played, and the second special state is set after the jackpot play ends.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state does not result in a jackpot win but instead wins the time-saving state, the special symbol fluctuation to show the result of the first special symbol lottery is stopped and then the time-saving state is set. In this thirteenth control example, if the time-saving state is won in the special symbol lottery, one of two types of time-saving state is set, and the selection rate of the time-saving state in which the first time-saving state is set is 99%, and the selection rate of the time-saving state in which the second time-saving state is set is 1%. Note that the diagram shown in FIG. 442 shows the main transition flow of the game state, and therefore only shows the flow of transition to the first time-saving state when the time-saving state is won, but in reality, there is a 1% chance of transitioning to the second time-saving state when the time-saving state is won.

Next, we will explain the first time-saving state that is set when the time-saving prize is won. As described above, the first time-saving state is a game state in which a low probability state for special symbol selection and a high probability state for normal symbols are set, but a time-saving (variable) state is set in which the time-saving period for normal symbols is set to a shorter time (0.1 seconds) than the second time-saving state described below, making it difficult to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 even when playing with a right-handed ball. Therefore, like the normal state, left-handed play is more advantageous to the player than right-handed play.

In this thirteenth control example, since this is a game state in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set, the term indicating the game state is called the first time-saving state, but since this is actually a game state in which the same game is executed as in the normal state, the normal state may be referred to as the first normal mode, and the first time-saving state may be referred to as the second normal mode, as terms indicating the game content.

This first time-saving state is a game state that is set only when the time-saving effect is won in the special pattern lottery, and when the first time-saving state is set by winning the time-saving effect, "one time of time-saving effect" is set as the time-saving end condition for ending the first time-saving state. Note that even if the special pattern lottery is executed during the first time-saving state, the same time-saving effect lottery (determination of whether the time-saving effect has been won) as in the normal state is executed, and even if the time-saving effect is won during the first time-saving state, the time-saving effect type is selected with the same selection ratio and the same content as in the normal state described above.

In other words, if the result of the first special pattern lottery executed during the first time-saving state is neither a jackpot nor a time-saving win, the special pattern fluctuation to indicate the lottery result is stopped and then the time-saving end condition is met and the normal state is set. On the other hand, if the result of the first special pattern lottery executed during the first time-saving state is a time-saving win, a new first time-saving state is set at the timing when the special pattern fluctuation is stopped and the first time-saving state is set repeatedly. Therefore, when the first time-saving state is set, the special pattern lottery in the first time-saving state continues as long as the time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery, and if the time-saving win is not won in the special pattern lottery, the special pattern lottery in the normal state is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to frequently switch between the normal state and the first time-saving state during left-hand play. Also, in the normal state (first normal mode) in which left-hand play is performed, and in the first time-saving state (second normal mode), the variable presentation executed using the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be set to the same presentation mode. This makes it difficult for the player to know whether the normal state or the first time-saving state is set.

Furthermore, in this thirteenth control example, when the number of consecutive special symbol lotteries that result in a miss in the normal state or the first time-saving state (the number of times of getting stuck) reaches 500, the third time-saving state is set as a ceiling privilege. As will be described in detail later, when the third time-saving state is set, the right-hand hitting state is set in which a right-hand hitting game in which the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 is more advantageous to the player than a left-hand hitting game in which the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, just like the second time-saving state described above.

In addition, the content of the ceiling bonus is configured to differ depending on the game state set at the time when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the left-hand play state (number of stuck times) reaches the number of times at which the ceiling bonus is awarded, and the ceiling bonus is awarded to a player who is more advantageous when the first time-saving state is set than when the normal state is set.

In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of this thirteenth control example, the normal state and the first time-saving state are frequently switched during the left-hand play state, and the configuration is such that it is difficult for the player to know whether the normal state or the first time-saving state is set. Therefore, when the third time-saving state is set as the ceiling bonus, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know which play state (normal state, first time-saving state) the player has transitioned from to the third time-saving state.

Returning to FIG. 442, we will continue the explanation. When a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the first time-saving state, one of the four jackpot types (jackpot A13, jackpot B13, jackpot C13, jackpot D13) that are the same as when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the normal state described above is set. Each jackpot type is selected at a different selection rate than when a jackpot is won in the normal state, and the selection rates for the jackpot types are set to 50% for jackpot A13, 20% for jackpot B13, 10% for jackpot C13, and 20% for jackpot D13.

The pachinko machine 10 in this thirteenth control example is configured so that the game state set when a jackpot is won and the game state set after the jackpot game ends are different depending on the set jackpot type. If a jackpot is won during the first time-saving state and jackpot A13 is set as the jackpot type, the normal state is set after the jackpot game ends. If jackpot B13 or jackpot C13 is set, the first time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends. If jackpot D13 is set, the second probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends.

In other words, if a jackpot is won in the first time-saving state, there is a 50% chance that the normal state will be set after the jackpot play ends, a 30% chance that the first time-saving state will be set after the jackpot play ends, and a 20% chance that the second special state will be set after the jackpot play ends. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the first time-saving state, the player will be granted a less favorable privilege in terms of the play state that will be set after the jackpot play ends compared to if the jackpot is won in the normal state.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 13th control example, when the number of times that the special pattern lottery is executed in succession with a losing special pattern lottery) that is executed in the normal state or when the first time-saving state is set reaches a specific number of times (500 times), the right-hand play state (third time-saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the left-hand play state (normal state, first time-saving state) can be set as a ceiling bonus, and a ceiling bonus (third time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be met) that is more advantageous to the player can be set when the play state set when the ceiling bonus is granted is the first time-saving state rather than when it is the normal state. On the other hand, the bonus (jackpot bonus) that is awarded when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during left-hand play is configured so that a jackpot bonus that is advantageous to the player (a bonus that makes it easier for the right-hand play state to be set after the end of a jackpot game) is more likely to be awarded when the normal state is set than when the first time-saving state is set.

Therefore, as game states that are set during the left-hand play state, a period in which the normal state is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state (the period until the number of times of getting stuck that the ceiling privilege is granted is reached) and a period in which the first time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (the period after the number of times of getting stuck that the ceiling privilege is granted is reached) are created. Therefore, compared to a case in which the player is simply made to play in the hope that one of the game states will be set, the type of game state that is expected to be set can be varied depending on the game situation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Next, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed in the normal state and either jackpot B13 or C13 is set as the jackpot type, the second time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends. In this second time-saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is set higher than the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state, second probability state, etc.), similar to the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) set in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above, and the normal symbol fluctuation time is set so that the game ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640 during the normal symbol winning play when the right-hand play is continuously executed.

This second time-saving state is a game state that is set in some (1%) cases where a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery and a specific jackpot type (jackpot B13, C13) is set, or where a time-saving lottery is won (not shown in FIG. 442). Note that in this thirteenth control example, the time-saving lottery is not executed when the second time-saving state is set. This makes it possible to prevent a time-saving lottery executed during the second time-saving state, which is advantageous to the player, from being won and setting the first time-saving state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second time-saving state.

In this thirteenth control example, the time-saving end condition for terminating the second time-saving state can be set differently depending on the trigger for setting the second time-saving state, and when jackpot B13 is set as a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving end condition is set to 100 times the time-saving state, and when jackpot C13 is set, the time-saving end condition is set to 300 times the time-saving state. Also, when the second time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving end condition is set to 300 times the time-saving state.

In this way, by varying the content of the time-saving end condition for ending the second time-saving state depending on the trigger for setting the second time-saving state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how long the second time-saving state will continue when the second time-saving state is set.

When the number of times that the special symbol lottery is executed in succession with a losing special symbol lottery, which is executed in the normal state or when the first time-saving state is set, reaches a specific number (500 times), the third time-saving state is set. The third time-saving state is a game state set as a ceiling privilege, and is a special game state that is not set based on the results of the special symbol lottery.

The third time-saving state is a game state in which a low probability state of a special symbol and a low probability state of a normal symbol are set, but the ball entry rate into the second ball entrance 640 in the case of right-hand play is configured to be the same as in the second time-saving state described above. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth control example is only slightly lower in the probability of winning in the low probability state of a normal symbol than in the high probability state of a normal symbol, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation and the opening operation pattern of the electric role performed during the normal symbol winning game are set to be the same in the state in which the third time-saving state is set and the state in which the second time-saving state is set. Therefore, the same game (right-hand play) is performed for the player when the second time-saving state is set and when the third time-saving state is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player playing right-hand to understand whether the currently set game state is the second time-saving state or the third time-saving state.

As described above, in this thirteenth control example, when the number of consecutive times (stuck times) that a jackpot has not been won in a special pattern lottery executed in the normal state or the first time-saving state reaches a specified number (500 times), a special benefit (ceiling benefit) can be granted in which the third time-saving state (right-hand play state) is set.

Furthermore, in some cases where a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery executed in the normal state or the first time-saving state (a jackpot where jackpot C13 is set), a jackpot game with fewer rounds (two-round jackpot) is executed compared to other jackpot wins, and after the jackpot game ends, a second time-saving state (right-hitting game state) is set in which the player plays the same game (right-hitting game) as in the third time-saving state. Furthermore, in some cases where a time-saving game is won in a special symbol lottery executed in the normal state or the first time-saving state (a time-saving game where the second time-saving state is set), a special symbol variation is stopped to indicate that a time-saving game has been won, and then a second time-saving state (right-hitting game state) is set in which the player plays the same game (right-hitting game) as in the third time-saving state.

In other words, if the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed during the left-hand play state (the number of times it gets stuck) meets the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus, or if the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the left-hand play state (whether or not a jackpot is won, whether or not a time-saving win is won) is a specific lottery result, it is possible to set a right-hand play state that is advantageous to the player. And, as an effect to indicate that the right-hand play state is being set, the same effect is executed regardless of which of the above-mentioned triggers is met, making it difficult for the player to understand the trigger that sets the right-hand play state.

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to set right-hit game states with different degrees of advantage depending on the trigger for setting the right-hit game state, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine in advance whether the right-hit game state that is set is an advantageous game state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the thirteenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this thirteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 443 to Fig. 449. This thirteenth example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the RAM 203, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 have been changed, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 443 to Fig. 446. Fig. 443(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 443(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in this 13th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-mentioned 5th control example (see FIG. 244(a)) in that the 1st win random number 13 table 202la is provided instead of the 1st win random number 5 table 202da, the 2nd win random number 13 table 202lc is provided instead of the 2nd win random number table 202c, the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld is provided instead of the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd, the time-saving random number 13 table 202le is provided instead of the time-saving random number 5 table 202de, and the time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf is provided instead of the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df. All other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 13th control example, some of the fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) defined in the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 202db are different from those in the above-mentioned 5th control example, and instead of the normal/2nd probability 5 table 202db1 in the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 202db in the 5th control example, a left-hand play state 13 table (not shown) is provided. And, in the left-hand play state 13 table, a fluctuation pattern is defined so that a special fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds can be selected in any of the cases where the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win, a time-saving win, or neither a jackpot win nor a time-saving win.

In other words, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, the same variation time (15 seconds) variation pattern is selected. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing the result of the special symbol lottery by identifying the variation pattern of the special symbol variation that is set before the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

In this thirteenth control example, a special fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time 15 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a fluctuation pattern command including information for indicating the selected fluctuation pattern, a ceiling reaching suggestion performance with a performance period of 15 seconds is executed. In other words, the ceiling reaching suggestion performance is an effect that is executed when a special fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation.

By making it possible to execute a variable effect (ceiling reach suggestion effect) corresponding to the type of variable pattern output from the main control device 110 in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing required for determining a variable effect corresponding to the received variable pattern on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In addition, since the variable time of the special pattern variation in which the ceiling reach suggestion effect is executed can be fixed to 15 seconds, the performance period of the ceiling reach suggestion effect can be fixed to 15 seconds regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery. This makes it easier to reduce the amount of performance data corresponding to the performance mode of the ceiling reach suggestion effect.

Next, the first winning random number 13 table 202la in this thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 444(a). FIG. 444(a) shows the prescribed contents of the first winning random number 13 table 202la in this thirteenth control example.

As shown in FIG. 444(a), the first win random number 13 table 202la differs from the first win random number 5 table 202da (see FIG. 245(a)) described above in that the range of values of the first win random number counter C1 that are determined to be a jackpot win is different. In addition, in this ninth control example, the range of possible values of the first win random number counter C1 is different. Specifically, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, the range of possible values of the first win random number counter C1 is specified as 900 values from "0 to 899", but in this thirteenth control example, it is specified as 1000 values from "0 to 999". By configuring in this manner, it is possible to specify a lower probability of judgment results in various judgments that are determined by referring to the value of the first win random number counter C1. In this thirteenth control example, only the range of possible values of the first win random number counter C1 is different, and the process for updating the value of the first win random number counter C1 and the configuration for storing the updated value are the same, so detailed explanations are omitted.

Specifically, when the probability state of the special symbol is a "low probability state," the lottery result is defined as "jackpot" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1 in the range of "0 to 4," and as "miss" for the range of "5 to 999." When the probability state is a "high probability state," the lottery result is defined as "jackpot" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1 in the range of "0 to 19," and as "miss" for the range of "20 to 999."

In other words, when the probability state of the special symbol is a "low probability state," there are 1000 possible values that the first random number counter C1 can take, and 5 values that are determined to be jackpots, so the probability of winning the jackpot is 5/1000 (1/200). On the other hand, when the probability state of the special symbol is a "high probability state," there are 1000 possible values that the first random number counter C1 can take, and 20 values that are determined to be jackpots, so the probability of winning the jackpot is 20/1000 (1/50).

Next, referring to FIG. 444(b), the second winning random number 13 table 2021c in this thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 444(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number 13 table 2021c. Like the second winning random number table 202c described above, this second winning random number 13 table 2021c is a data table that is referenced when determining the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery, and specifies the value that is determined to be a winning for each probability state of the normal pattern within the range of possible values of the second winning random number counter C4 (0 to 299).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 444(b), when the probability state of the normal pattern is a "low probability state," the lottery result is defined as "win" for the value of the second win random number counter C4 in the range of "0 to 298," and as "miss" for a value of "299." When the probability state is a "high probability state," the lottery result is defined as "win" for the value of the second win random number counter C4 in the range of "0 to 299," i.e., the entire range.

In other words, in this thirteenth control example, it is configured so that when a normal pattern lottery is executed, a winning combination will occur in most cases, regardless of the probability state of the normal pattern. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to determine whether the currently set probability state of the normal pattern is a "low probability state" or a "high probability state" depending on the result of the normal pattern lottery (depending on whether or not a normal winning game, which is executed when a winning combination is won in the normal pattern lottery).

In this thirteenth control example, the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery is set high regardless of the probability state of the normal pattern, making it difficult to distinguish whether the currently set probability state of the normal pattern is a "low probability state" or a "high probability state." However, without being limited to this, it is sufficient to specify that the range of values of the second winning random number counter C4 that is determined to be a win is approximately the same for the "low probability state" and the "high probability state" of the normal pattern.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, as shown in FIG. 444(b), in this thirteenth control example, when the "high probability state" of the normal pattern is set, there is no losing win in the normal pattern lottery, and when the "low probability state" of the normal pattern is set, there is a low probability (1/300) of losing win in the normal pattern lottery. Therefore, by knowing that there is a losing win in the normal pattern lottery, it is possible to know that the "low probability state" of the normal pattern is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in whether the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery will be a losing one.

In this case, it is preferable to configure the normal symbol variation pattern so that the variation pattern set when the normal symbol lottery result is a miss is more likely to have a longer variation time (normal symbol variation time) than the variation pattern set when the normal symbol lottery result is a win. By configuring in this way, the longer the period during which the normal symbol winning game, which is executed when the normal symbol lottery result is a win, the higher the possibility that a low probability state for the normal symbol is set. Therefore, it is possible to make players who are trying to understand the probability state of the normal symbol interested in the frequency of playing the normal symbol winning game.

Next, referring to FIG. 444(c), the time-saving random number 13 table 202le will be explained. This time-saving random number 13 table 202le is a data table referenced in the time-saving judgment (time-saving lottery) that is executed when the result of the special pattern lottery is other than a jackpot win (miss), and differs from the above-mentioned time-saving random number 5 table 202de (see FIG. 245(c)) in that the conditions (special pattern type, game state) that stipulate the value (range) of the first winning random number counter C1 that is judged to be a time-saving win are different.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is "common" and the game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state, the range of the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 "500 to 999" is specified as the judgment value for the time-saving winning. Also, when the game state is other than the normal state or the first time-saving state, the judgment value for the time-saving winning is not specified (shown as "-" in the figure).

Here, in this thirteenth control example, the determination of whether or not the time-saving lottery has been won in the special pattern lottery (time-saving lottery) is configured to be executed when the jackpot has not been won in the special pattern lottery, i.e., when the jackpot lottery has been won but not won, and when the special pattern lottery is executed in the normal state or the first time-saving state, the time-saving lottery has a probability of 1/2. In other words, in this thirteenth control example, it is configured to be possible to win the time-saving lottery in some game states among the game states (normal state, first time-saving state, second time-saving state, third time-saving state) in which the probability state of the special pattern is set to a low probability state. Also, it is configured to be possible to win the time-saving lottery in some game states among the game states (first time-saving state, second time-saving state) in which the probability state of the normal pattern is set to a high probability state.

In this way, whether or not a time-saving winning lottery can be selected is determined not based on the probability state set for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol), but based on the set game state, making it difficult for players to tell whether or not a special symbol lottery that can win a time-saving winning lottery is being held.

Furthermore, in this thirteenth control example, among the left-hand play states (normal state, first time-saving state, second special probability state) in which the main play is to make the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 by left-hand play, it is configured so that it is possible to win the time-saving lottery in some of the left-hand play states (normal state, first time-saving state). And, when the second special probability state is set in the left-hand play state, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to determine the game state that is actually set when the left-hand play state is set. Therefore, it is possible to easily make a player who is playing in the left-hand play state believe that the time-saving lottery is always being executed.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this thirteenth control example, if a game state other than a game state in which a time-saving win can be obtained in the time-saving lottery is set, the time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving win can be obtained) is not executed, thereby ensuring that a time-saving win cannot be obtained. However, without being limited to this, the time-saving lottery can be executed regardless of the game state being executed, and a determination value that determines a time-saving win as a result of the time-saving lottery is not set for a game state in which a time-saving win cannot be obtained.

Next, referring to FIG. 445, the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld in this thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 445 is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld. As shown in FIG. 445, the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld specifies a common jackpot type for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, whether the jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the jackpot type is selected by referring to a common data table.

In this thirteenth control example, five types of jackpot types are set when a jackpot is won: jackpot A13, jackpot B13, jackpot C13, jackpot D13, and jackpot E13. The selection rate for each jackpot type is varied depending on the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot. In addition, the value of the time-saving counter 203h and the type of time-saving state when the same jackpot type is set are varied depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 445, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "normal state," the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "0 to 19" is specified to correspond to "jackpot A13." This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (10-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 20 counter values that are "jackpot A13," so the probability that "jackpot A13" will be determined when a jackpot is won by drawing special symbols in the normal state is 20% (20/100).

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "normal state," the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "20 to 49" is associated with "jackpot B13," which is stipulated. This "jackpot B13" is a jackpot type (10-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the second time-saving state (100 time-savings) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 30 counter values that become "jackpot B13," so the probability that "jackpot B13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state is 30% (30/100).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from 50 to 79 is also associated with a "jackpot C13". This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (2-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 2 and the second time-saving state (time-saving 300 times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 30 counter values that become "jackpot C13", so the probability that "jackpot C13" will be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the special symbol lottery in the normal state is 30% (30/100).

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "normal state," the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "80 to 99" is associated with "jackpot D13," which is stipulated. This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (10-round special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the second special state (30 special states) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 20 are "jackpot D13," so the probability that "jackpot D13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the normal state is 20% (20/100).

In other words, if a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery in the normal state, the probability that the left-hand play state (normal state, second probability variable state) will be set after the jackpot play ends is 40%, and the probability that the right-hand play state (second time-saving state) will be set is 60%. Also, for the jackpot types (jackpot A13, jackpot D13) in which the left-hand play state is set after the jackpot play ends, the same jackpot play (10-round jackpot play) is executed in both cases, so when the left-hand play state is set after the jackpot play ends, it is difficult to tell whether the normal state or the second probability variable state has been set.

In addition, when jackpot C13 is determined, a jackpot game with fewer rounds (2 rounds) is played than jackpot games corresponding to other jackpot types, making it difficult for the player to understand that a jackpot game is being played (is being played). Although detailed explanations are omitted, when a jackpot with jackpot C13 is won, a variable presentation is executed in a presentation mode that makes it difficult for the player to understand that a jackpot has been won, compared to when a jackpot with another jackpot type is won. Specifically, a ceiling reaching suggestion presentation that is executed when a ceiling bonus is awarded is executed.

By configuring it in this way, in some cases where a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, that is, when a jackpot type is set to jackpot C13, it is possible to make the player think that the game situation is such that a ceiling privilege is awarded, rather than that a jackpot has been won. Therefore, by winning a jackpot with jackpot C13 set, a privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege (300 times of time reduction) can be awarded to the player without meeting the predetermined ceiling privilege award condition (500 times of stuck play), making it difficult for the player to predict the timing when the ceiling privilege will be awarded. This makes it possible to make the player think that a different number of stuck play times may be set as the award condition for the ceiling privilege during a left-hand play state, and allows the player to continue playing while expecting the ceiling privilege to be awarded.

In addition, when the second probability variable state is set after the end of a jackpot game, the time-saving lottery is not executed until the second probability variable state ends and transitions to the normal state (until the value of the probability variable counter 203i reaches 0), and even if a special symbol lottery is executed, the number of times of getting stuck to award the ceiling bonus is not added. In other words, when the second probability variable state is set, the number of times of getting stuck reaches 500 when 530 special symbol lotteries are executed after the end of a jackpot game, and the ceiling bonus is awarded, so from the perspective of awarding the ceiling bonus, it is more disadvantageous to the player than when the normal state is set after the end of a jackpot game.

In addition, during the period when the second special state is set, the judgment of whether or not the time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) is not executed, and therefore, compared to the period when the normal state is set in which the time-saving lottery is executed, in some cases (0.1%) when the time-saving win is made, the gameplay aiming to set the second time-saving state (time-saving 300 times) is not executed, which makes the game state disadvantageous to the player from the viewpoint of setting the second time-saving state.

On the other hand, during the second probability change state, a high probability state for the special symbol is set, so the special symbol lottery executed during the second probability change state has a probability of 1/50 of winning the jackpot. Therefore, the period during which the second probability change state is set is a game state that is more advantageous for the player in terms of aiming to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery than when the normal state is set.

Next, as shown in FIG. 445, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "first time-saving state (second normal mode)," the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49" is associated with "jackpot A13," which is stipulated. This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (10-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the normal state is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first win type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot A13," so the probability that "jackpot A13" will be determined when a jackpot is won by drawing special symbols in the first time-saving state is 50% (50/100).

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "first time-saving state (second normal mode)," the range of the value of the first win type counter C2 from "50 to 69" is specified to correspond to "jackpot B13." This "jackpot B13" is a jackpot type (10-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the first time-saving state (100 time-savings) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first win type counter C2, there are 20 counter values that become "jackpot B13," so the probability that "jackpot B13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the first time-saving state is 20% (20/100).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from 70 to 79 is also associated with a "jackpot C13". This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (two-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is two and the first time-saving state (time-saving 300 times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 10 counter values that become "jackpot C13", so the probability that "jackpot C13" will be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the special symbol lottery in the first time-saving state (second normal mode) is 10% (10/100).

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "first time-saving state (second normal mode)," the value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "80 to 99" is specified to correspond to "jackpot D13." This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (10-round special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the second special state (30 special times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 20 counter values that become "jackpot D13," so the probability that "jackpot D13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the first time-saving state (second normal mode) is 20% (20/100).

In other words, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery during the first time-saving state (second normal mode), the probability that the left-hand play state (normal state, first time-saving state, second special probability state) will be set after the jackpot play ends will be 100%. Therefore, even if a jackpot is won during the first time-saving state (second normal mode), the right-hand play state, which makes it easier to execute the special symbol lottery than the left-hand play state, will not be set after the jackpot play ends, resulting in a play state that is less favorable to the player than the normal state.

As described above, in the normal state, if a jackpot that sets jackpot C13 is won, the second time-saving state is set, so even if the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are not met, a bonus equivalent to the ceiling bonus (the second time-saving state with 300 times of time saving) can be granted to the player. However, in the first time-saving state, even if a jackpot that sets jackpot C13 is won, the first time-saving state is set instead of the second time-saving state, so a bonus equivalent to the ceiling bonus (the second time-saving state with 300 times of time saving) cannot be granted to the player based on winning a jackpot.

Next, for the game state when a jackpot is won being the "second time-saving state (time-saving mode)," the range of values of the first winning type counter C2 from "0 to 9" is specified to correspond to "jackpot A13." This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (10-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the jackpot game ends is set to the normal state. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 10 counter values that become "jackpot A13," so the probability that "jackpot A13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the lottery for special symbols in the second time-saving state is 10% (10/100).

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "second time-saving state (time-saving mode)," the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 59" is associated with "jackpot B13," which is stipulated. This "jackpot B13" is a jackpot type (10-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the second time-saving state (100 time-savings) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, 50 counter values become "jackpot B13," so the probability that "jackpot B13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the second time-saving state is 50% (50/100).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from 60 to 79 is also associated with a "jackpot C13". This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (two-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is two and the second time-saving state (time-saving 300 times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 20 counter values that become "jackpot C13", so the probability that "jackpot C13" will be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the special symbol lottery in the second time-saving state (time-saving mode) is 20% (20/100).

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "second time-saving state (time-saving mode)," the value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "80 to 99" is specified to correspond to "jackpot D13." This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (10-round special jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the second special state (30 special times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 20 counter values that become "jackpot D13," so the probability that "jackpot D13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the second time-saving state (time-saving mode) is 20% (20/100).

In other words, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the second time-saving state, the probability that the left-hand play state (normal state, second probability variable state) will be set after the jackpot play ends is 30%, and the probability that the right-hand play state (second time-saving state) will be set is 70%. Also, if a high probability state for normal symbols (time-saving state) is set after the jackpot play ends, the second time-saving state (time-saving state in which the ease of executing the special symbol lottery is higher than the normal state) is always set, not the first time-saving state (time-saving state in which the ease of executing the special symbol lottery is the same as the normal state).

Therefore, the second time-saving state is a game state in which the player is more likely to receive advantageous benefits if he or she wins a jackpot in the special pattern lottery than the normal state and the first time-saving state described above.

Next, for the game state when a jackpot is won being the "second probability variable state," the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "0 to 29" is specified to correspond to "jackpot A13." This "jackpot A13" is a jackpot type (10-round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the game state after the jackpot game ends is set to the normal state. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 30 counter values that become "jackpot A13," so the probability that "jackpot A13" will be determined when a jackpot is won by drawing special symbols in the second probability variable state is 30% (30/100).

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "second probability variable state," the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "30 to 49" is specified to correspond to "jackpot B13." This "jackpot B13" is a jackpot type (10-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the second time-saving state (100 time-savings) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 20 counter values that become "jackpot B13," so the probability that "jackpot B13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the second probability variable state is 20% (20/100).

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from 50 to 79 is also associated with a "jackpot C13". This "jackpot C13" is a jackpot type (two-round time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds is two and the second time-saving state (time-saving 300 times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 30 counter values that become "jackpot C13", so the probability that "jackpot C13" will be determined when a jackpot is obtained in the special symbol lottery in the second probability variable state is 30% (30/100).

When the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the "second probability variable state," the value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "80 to 89" is specified to correspond to "jackpot D13." This "jackpot D13" is a jackpot type (10-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the second probability variable state (30 probability variable times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 10 counter values that become "jackpot D13," so the probability that "jackpot D13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the second probability variable state is 10% (10/100).

Furthermore, for the game state when a jackpot is won being the "second probability variable state", the range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "90 to 99" is specified to correspond to "jackpot E13". This "jackpot E13" is a jackpot type (10-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds is 10 and the second probability variable state (100 probability variable times) is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends. Of the 100 possible counter values of the first winning type counter C2, there are 10 counter values that become "jackpot E13", so the probability that "jackpot E13" will be determined when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery in the second probability variable state is 10% (10/100).

As described above, if a jackpot is won while the second probability variable state is set, multiple jackpot types for which the second probability variable state will be set after the jackpot play ends can be selected, and the number of probability variable times (the length of time that the second probability variable state will continue) is varied depending on the jackpot type selected. As described above, the number of special symbol draws performed during the second probability variable state is not added to the number of times a player gets stuck for granting the ceiling bonus, so the period from the end of the previous jackpot play until the ceiling bonus is awarded (the number of special symbol draws) can be varied depending on the length of time that the second probability variable state continues. This makes it difficult for players to easily grasp the remaining period of special symbol draws until the ceiling bonus is awarded.

As shown in FIG. 445, in this thirteenth control example, it is configured so that only when the second special state is set can a jackpot (jackpot D13, jackpot E13) be won that sets the second special state with a different number of special states (value set in special state counter 203i). However, without being limited to this, it may be configured so that even when a jackpot is won while another game state is set, a jackpot type that sets a different number of special states can be set.

In addition, in this thirteenth control example, the number of times the special symbol lottery is performed during the second high probability state is configured not to be added to the value of the number of times of stuck play for granting the ceiling privilege, but it is also possible to configure other game states to be set as game states in which the number of times the special symbol lottery is performed is not added to the value of the number of times of stuck play for granting the ceiling privilege, and for example, it is also possible to configure the number of times the special symbol lottery is performed during the first time-saving state not to be added to the value of the number of times of stuck play.

By configuring in this way, the more times the time-saving win is won in multiple special symbol draws executed without winning the jackpot and the first time-saving state is set, the more difficult it becomes to establish the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus. In addition, in this thirteenth control example, the number of special symbol draws executed during the game state (second probability variable state) set after the end of the jackpot game is configured not to be added to the value of the number of times of stuck for granting the ceiling bonus, so it is possible to delay the timing of granting the ceiling bonus for the period during which the second probability variable state continues (the period until the value of the probability variable counter 203i becomes 0), but since the timing of granting the ceiling bonus can only be delayed for the predetermined period (the period during which the second probability variable state continues), there is a problem that the timing of granting the ceiling bonus is easily predicted for players who play the pachinko machine 10 for a long time.

In contrast to this, if the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed during the first time-saving state is configured not to be added to the value of the number of times of stuck play, the length of the period during which the first time-saving state is set can be varied between the end of the jackpot game and the number of times of stuck play at which the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met, depending on the result of the time-saving lottery executed during the normal state or the first time-saving state. This makes it possible for the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed that is not updated to the value of the number of times of stuck play to be variable depending on the result of the time-saving lottery, rather than being a predetermined number. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the ceiling privilege will be granted.

Next, the contents of the time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf will be explained with reference to FIG. 446(a). FIG. 446(a) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf. This time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf is a data table referenced when determining the type of time-saving state (first to third time-saving states) to be set when the time-saving state is set without being based on a jackpot win, specifically, when the time-saving state is won in a time-saving lottery or when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are met, and stipulates the time-saving winning 13 table 202lf1 and the ceiling 13 table 202lf2, which are referenced when determining the type of time-saving state when the time-saving state is won.

Here, the contents stipulated in the time-saving winning 13 table 202lf1, which is referred to when the time-saving winning is won, will be explained with reference to FIG. 446(b). FIG. 446(b) is a diagram for showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving winning 13 table 202lf1. As shown in FIG. 446(b), the time-saving winning 13 table 202lf1 stipulates different time-saving types for the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1. Specifically, the time-saving type "first time-saving" is stipulated for the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1 in the range of "0 to 998", and the time-saving type "second time-saving" is stipulated for the range of "999". Then, when "first time-saving" is selected, the first time-saving state is set, and as the time-saving end condition of the first time-saving state, a time-saving end condition is stipulated in which the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "1". Furthermore, when "second time-saving" is selected, the second time-saving state is set, and the time-saving end condition for the second time-saving state is set to "300" as the value of the time-saving counter 203h.

In other words, the ratio of the first time-saving state being set when the time-saving win is won is 99.9%, and the ratio of the second time-saving state being set when the time-saving win is won is 0.1%. When the first time-saving state is set based on the time-saving win, the time-saving end condition is established when the special pattern lottery is executed once. Here, in this thirteenth control example, since the time-saving lottery can be executed even during the first time-saving state, if the time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery executed in the state in which the first time-saving state is set, a new time-saving state is set. Therefore, when the time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery executed during the first time-saving state and the time-saving type is set to "first time-saving", the first time-saving state is set after the special pattern variation is stopped, and the special pattern lottery is executed continuously in the first time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is set to one time (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is "1").

On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery executed during the first time-saving state does not result in a winning combination, the first time-saving state ends when the special symbol fluctuation stops and the normal state is set. Therefore, the next special symbol lottery will be executed in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, during the left-hand play period (stuck period) when special symbol lotteries are executed consecutively without winning the jackpot, the player can play by frequently switching between the normal state and the first time-saving state. In addition, since the game state in which the special symbol lottery is executed is configured to switch depending on the results of not only one time-saving lottery but multiple (2) time-saving lotteries executed consecutively, it is possible to make the multiple special symbol lotteries executed consecutively interesting.

Next, referring to FIG. 446(c), the contents of the ceiling table 13 202lf2 that is referenced when determining the time-saving type when the ceiling privilege is granted (when the third time-saving state is set) will be explained. FIG. 446(c) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the ceiling table 13 202lf2. This ceiling table 13 202lf2 is a data table possessed by the time-saving type selection table 13 202lf, and is referenced to determine the type of time-saving (number of time-savings) that is currently set when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are met.

As shown in FIG. 446(c), the ceiling 13 table 202lf2 has different ceiling bonuses (number of time-saving times) that vary depending on the game state when the ceiling is reached (when the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met). Specifically, if the game state when the ceiling is reached is the normal state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "100", and if the game state when the ceiling is reached is the first time-saving state, the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to "300". When the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, the third time-saving state is set, in which the high probability state of normal symbols is not set and the game state becomes a right-hit game state while the low probability state of normal symbols is set.

In other words, when setting a right-hand play state that makes it easier for the player to execute a special pattern lottery based on the number of times the special pattern lottery has been executed compared to a left-hand play state, the right-hand play state can be set without varying the probability state of the various patterns (special patterns, normal patterns). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load for executing a process that varies the probability state of the various patterns (special patterns, normal patterns) without being based on the results of the special pattern lottery (the results of the jackpot lottery, the results of the time-saving lottery).

As described above, in this thirteenth control example, when the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, the bonus can be granted to the player without changing the probability state of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol). However, without being limited to this, the configuration may be such that a bonus is granted by changing the probability state of each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) based on the fact that the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met (changing the probability state from one unfavorable to the player to one favorable to the player).

In this case, it is advisable to configure the system so that when the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, the second time-saving state is set instead of the third time-saving state. This allows the game state that is set during the right-hitting game state to be the second time-saving state only, simplifying the process for managing the game state.

Next, referring to FIG. 443(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 443(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 443(b), it differs from the RAM 203 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 244(b)) in that a special drawing lottery counter 203la, a first ceiling wait flag 203lb, and a second ceiling wait flag 203lc have been added. Other than that, they are the same, and the same contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

The special symbol lottery counter 203la is a counter for measuring the number of times that special symbol lotteries are executed during a low probability state of a special symbol (number of times that they are stuck), and the counter value is referenced when determining whether the number of times that the ceiling bonus special symbol lottery has been executed meets the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus.

Specifically, when it is determined that a low probability state of the special pattern is set in the ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in FIG. 452) executed in the special pattern determination process 13 (see S30251 in FIG. 451) of the special pattern change process 13 (see S30104 in FIG. 450) (S38102 in FIG. 452: Yes), that is, when a special pattern lottery (special pattern change) is started during a low probability state of the special pattern, the value of the counter is incremented by 1 (S38103 in FIG. 452). Then, when the special pattern is stopped and displayed in a manner to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a big win (S217 in FIG. 450: Yes), or when a ceiling privilege is awarded (S38351 in FIG. 455: Yes, or S38358 in FIG. 455: Yes), the value of the special pattern lottery counter 203la is cleared to 0.

In this thirteenth control example, when determining whether the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are met, the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the low probability state of the special symbol (the number of stuck times) is referenced, and the ceiling privilege is granted when the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the low probability state of the special symbol (the number of stuck times) reaches 500. As described above, the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la is not synchronized with the number of special symbol lotteries executed, but is configured so that the counter value is incremented in synchronization with the number of stuck times.

In this thirteenth control example, the number of times that special pattern lotteries are executed during a low probability state for the special pattern is added as the number of times that a player has been stuck; however, the conditions for adding the number of times that a player has been stuck, which are set as the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus, may be different. For example, the value of the special pattern lottery counter 203la may be added (the number of times that a player has been stuck) only when a special pattern lottery is executed for a specific special pattern type (first special pattern) out of multiple special pattern types (first special pattern, second special pattern), or the value of the special pattern lottery counter 203la (the number of times that a player has been stuck) added based on the execution of one special pattern lottery may be greater when a special pattern lottery is executed when a specific game state (e.g., normal state) is set than when a special pattern lottery is executed when another game state (e.g., first time-saving state) is set. This configuration makes it difficult for players to grasp the remaining number of times the special symbol lottery must be executed (remaining number of winning streaks) before the ceiling bonus is awarded.

Furthermore, in this thirteenth control example, only the conditions for incrementing the value of the special drawing counter 203la are stipulated, and when a jackpot is won (when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are cleared), the value of the special drawing counter 203la is cleared to 0 when the ceiling privilege is granted. Therefore, when the number of times of getting stuck reaches 500 times and the third time-saving state (100 times or 300 times of time-saving) is set as the ceiling privilege, the value of the special drawing counter 203la is cleared to 0, and thereafter, the value of the special drawing counter 203la is incremented each time a special pattern lottery is executed in the third time-saving state. Therefore, when the number of times of getting stuck reaches 500 times again after the third time-saving state is set as the ceiling privilege, that is, when the number of times of getting stuck since the end of the previous jackpot game reaches 1000 times, the second ceiling privilege is granted.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to grant the ceiling privilege again to a player who has not won the jackpot even during the period when the third time-saving state granted as the ceiling privilege is set. In addition, in this thirteenth control example, the value of the special pattern selection counter 203la is cleared to 0 at the timing when the ceiling privilege is granted. Therefore, when the third time-saving state with 100 time-saving times is set, the value of the special pattern selection counter 203la becomes 100 when the third time-saving state ends, and when the third time-saving state with 300 time-saving times is set, the value of the special pattern selection counter 203la becomes 300 when the third time-saving state ends. Therefore, when playing a game aiming for the second ceiling privilege, it is easier to reduce the number of special pattern selections to be performed in the left-hand play state than when playing a game aiming for the first ceiling privilege.

In this thirteenth control example, the number of consecutive hits before the ceiling bonus is awarded is set to 500, and the condition for awarding the ceiling bonus is met for the second and subsequent ceiling bonuses when the number of consecutive hits reaches 500. However, without being limited to this, the first ceiling bonus may be awarded when the number of consecutive hits reaches 500, and then the second ceiling bonus may be awarded when the number of consecutive hits since the first ceiling bonus was awarded reaches 300, i.e., when the number of consecutive hits since the end of the previous big win game reaches 800.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if the third time-saving state with 300 time-savings is set as the first ceiling bonus, it becomes possible to award the second ceiling bonus immediately after the end condition of the third time-saving state (300 special pattern draws) is met, and the third time-saving state can be set continuously, making it easier for players to continue playing.

In addition, in this thirteenth control example, when a special symbol lottery is executed, a process is executed to increment or decrement the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la depending on the set game state. In addition, the process may be configured to decrement the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la when the special symbol lottery that is executed satisfies certain conditions.

The first ceiling wait flag 203lb is a flag for indicating that the ceiling privilege granting condition is met when the normal state is set, and is set to ON when the ceiling privilege granting condition is met (when the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la reaches 500). Then, in the time-saving setting process 13 (S30254 in FIG. 455) executed when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the setting status of the first ceiling wait flag 203lb is determined (S38351 in FIG. 455), and if it is determined to be set to ON (S38351 in FIG. 455: Yes), the privilege (time saving 100 times) corresponding to the case where the game state at the time when the ceiling privilege granting condition is met is normal is granted as the content of the ceiling privilege (S38352 in FIG. 455), and then the first ceiling wait flag 203lb is set to OFF.

The second ceiling waiting flag 203lc is a flag for indicating that the ceiling awarding condition is met when the first time-saving state is set, and is set to ON when the ceiling awarding condition is met (when the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la reaches 500). Then, in the time-saving setting process 13 (S30254 in FIG. 455) executed when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, the setting status of the second ceiling waiting flag 203lc is determined (S38358 in FIG. 455). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S38358 in FIG. 455: Yes), the ceiling award is given as the content of the award (time saving 300 times) corresponding to the case where the game state at the time when the ceiling awarding condition is met is the first time-saving state (S38359 in FIG. 455), and then the second ceiling waiting flag 203lc is set to OFF.

In this thirteenth control example, the process of determining whether the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met (ceiling determination process) is executed at the start of the special symbol variation, and the process of actually granting the ceiling bonus (time-saving setting process) is executed at the stop of the special symbol variation. The result of the ceiling determination process executed at the start of the special symbol variation is determined by the time-saving setting process executed at the stop of the special symbol variation, based on the setting status of the first ceiling wait flag 203lb or the second ceiling wait flag 203lc.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to award appropriate ceiling benefits even when using a pachinko machine 10 with gameplay in which the game state changes during the execution of a special pattern change, a pachinko machine 10 with gameplay in which the game state changes between the execution of a ceiling determination process and the start of a special pattern change, or a pachinko machine 10 with gameplay in which the game state changes between the display of a stopped special pattern change and the execution of a time-saving setting process.

Next, with reference to Figs. 447 to 449, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this thirteenth control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the fifth control example described above. Note that detailed descriptions of the same contents as the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 447(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 447(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic configuration defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 447(a), the ROM 222 in this thirteenth control example differs from the ROM 222 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(a)) in that a ceiling reach suggestion performance selection table 222la and a ceiling reach performance selection table 222lb have been added.

The ceiling reach suggestion effect selection table 222la is a data table that is referenced when selecting the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion effect when the ceiling reach suggestion effect is executed as a variation effect corresponding to a special pattern variation during a left-hand play state. In this thirteenth control example, during the period until the number of stuck hits at which the ceiling bonus is awarded is reached, a ceiling reach suggestion effect is configured to be executable to suggest to the player the remaining period until the ceiling bonus is awarded.

By executing the ceiling reaching suggestion effect in this way, it is possible for a player playing left-handed to predict the remaining time until the ceiling privilege is granted, and to play while expecting the ceiling privilege to be granted. In addition, in this thirteenth control example, the ceiling reaching suggestion effect is configured to suggest not only the remaining time until the ceiling privilege is granted, but also that a privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege (second time-saving state) will be set based on the result of the special pattern lottery. This allows for the execution of a ceiling reaching suggestion effect that indicates a high possibility of the ceiling privilege being granted at a timing that is unexpected for the player (for example, a timing when the number of special pattern lotteries executed after the end of a jackpot game is about 20), and a surprising game can be provided in which the second time-saving state is set after the ceiling reaching suggestion effect is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the number of times of stuck-games at which the ceiling privilege is granted may be set to a small number, and it is possible to motivate the player to play left-handed. Furthermore, since the ceiling privilege (third time-saving state) is granted (set) based on the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed, it is easy to determine the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted, whereas the privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege (second time-saving state) is granted (set) based on the result of the lottery for the special pattern, and therefore the timing of granting the privilege tends to be more random than the third time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the state will transition to the right-handed play state in which the ceiling privilege (third time-saving state) or the privilege equivalent to the ceiling privilege (second time-saving state) is set, and it is possible to make the player interested in the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation that is executed in order to quickly grasp the timing of the transition to the right-handed play state.

Here, the detailed contents of the ceiling reach suggestion performance selection table 222la will be explained with reference to FIG. 448. FIG. 448 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the ceiling reach suggestion performance selection table 222la. As shown in FIG. 448, the ceiling reach suggestion performance selection table 222la defines two types of performance modes as the performance modes of the ceiling reach suggestion performance, corresponding to the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 223lc, the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) corresponding to the acquired special symbol reservation (reserved memory of special symbol), and the acquired value of the performance counter 223f.

Specifically, if the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c is "0 to 200" and the pre-reading result includes information indicating a jackpot win of "jackpot C13", then "ceiling suggestion (strong)" is specified as the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation for the range of the acquired presentation counter 223f from "0 to 79", and "no suggestion mode (shown as "-" in the figure)" is specified as the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation for the range of "80 to 99", and if the pre-reading result does not include information indicating a jackpot win of "jackpot C13" (otherwise), then "no suggestion mode (shown as "-" in the figure)" is specified as the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation for the entire range of the acquired presentation counter 223f from "0 to 99".

In addition, when the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc is "201 to 460" and the pre-reading result includes information indicating a jackpot win of "jackpot C13", the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is set to "ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "0 to 79", and "no suggestion mode (shown as "-" in the figure)" for the range of "80 to 99", as the presentation mode of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation. When the pre-reading result includes information indicating a "time-saving win", the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is set to "ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "0 to 19". " is specified as the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation when the value of the presentation counter 223f obtained is in the range of "0 to 4", "suggestion mode (weak)" is specified for the range of "20 to 39", and "no suggestion mode (shown as "-" in the figure)" is specified for the range of "40 to 99". If the pre-read result does not include information indicating a jackpot win of "jackpot C13" or a "time-saving win" (otherwise), "ceiling suggestion (weak)" is specified as the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation when the value of the presentation counter 223f obtained is in the range of "0 to 4", and "no suggestion mode (shown as "-" in the figure)" is specified for the range of "5 to 99".

Furthermore, if the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc is "461 to 495" and the pre-reading result includes information indicating a jackpot win of "jackpot C13", then the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is set to "ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "0 to 19", and "no suggestion mode (shown as "-" in the figure)" for the range of "20 to 99", as the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation, and if the pre-reading result includes information indicating a "time-saving win", then the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is set to "ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "0 to 39", and "no suggestion mode (shown as "-" in the figure)" for the range of "20 to 99". "Ceiling Suggestion (Weak)" is specified as the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation, and "Suggestion Mode (Strong)" is specified for the range of "40 to 99", and "Ceiling Reaching Suggestion" is specified as the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation when the obtained presentation counter 223f value is in the range of "0 to 49", "Ceiling Suggestion (Strong)" is specified for the range of "50 to 69", and "No Suggestion Mode (shown as "-" in the figure) ... for the range of "70 to 99".

Finally, when the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc is "496 to 500", regardless of the result of the advance reading, the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation is specified as "no suggestion mode (shown as "-" in the figure)" for the acquired presentation counter 223f value in the range of "0 to 9", "ceiling suggestion (weak)" for the range of "10 to 39", and "ceiling suggestion (strong)" for the range of "40 to 99".

In other words, the contents of the ceiling reach suggestion performance selection table 222la are stipulated so that the shorter the remaining time until the number of stuck times at which the ceiling privilege is granted is, that is, the larger the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c, the easier it is to set the ceiling suggestion mode, and the easier it is to set the "ceiling suggestion (strong)" as the suggestion mode to emphasize and suggest that the remaining time is short. In addition, when there is a special symbol reserved that wins "jackpot C13", which sets a benefit equivalent to the ceiling privilege (second time-saving state), the "ceiling suggestion (strong)" is stipulated to be selected easily regardless of the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c. Therefore, even if the right-hit play state (second time-saving state) is set based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, it is possible to suggest that to the player before the special symbol change that wins the jackpot is executed.

Furthermore, when the pre-reading result includes information indicating a time-saving win, there remains a slight possibility that the second time-saving state will be set based on the time-saving win, so the ceiling suggestion mode is configured to be set more easily than when the pre-reading result does not include information indicating a time-saving win. Note that in this thirteenth control example, the second time-saving state (right-hit play state) can be set in a portion (0.01%) of the time-saving wins in the time-saving lottery. And, the information used when selecting the presentation mode of the ceiling-reach suggestion presentation is not information on whether or not a time-saving win that sets the second time-saving state has been won by the time-saving lottery, but simply information on whether or not a time-saving win has been used.

By configuring it in this way, when a time-saving mode that does not set the second time-saving state (right-hit play state) is won and when a time-saving mode that sets the second time-saving state (right-hit play state) is won, the presentation mode (suggestion mode) of the ceiling-reached suggestion presentation is selected at the same selection rate. Therefore, even when the right-hit play state is not set, it is possible to execute a ceiling-reached suggestion presentation (so-called false presentation) that includes a ceiling suggestion mode at an appropriate rate.

In addition, without being limited to the contents of this thirteenth control example, for example, when there is a pre-reading result indicating that the time-saving state in which the second time-saving state is set will be selected, the ceiling suggestion state may be configured to be set more easily than when there is no pre-reading result indicating that the time-saving state in which the second time-saving state is set will be selected.

The ceiling reaching effect selection table 222lb is a data table that is referenced when determining the effect mode of the ceiling reaching effect executed by the special pattern change when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are met, and different effect modes are defined based on the content of the ceiling privilege that is currently being granted (number of time-saving cycles), the result of the special pattern lottery (jackpot, miss) indicated by the special pattern change when the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are met, and the obtained value of the effect counter 223f.

When the ceiling-reaching performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 440(a), the ceiling-reaching performance is executed in a performance mode including a mode indicating that the ceiling bonus will be awarded and a mode indicating the content of the ceiling bonus (number of time-saving times). This allows the player to know that the ceiling bonus will be awarded (the third time-saving state will be set) before the ceiling bonus is actually awarded.

In addition, if a jackpot is won with a special pattern change that satisfies the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus, i.e., if the jackpot game starts without the ceiling bonus being awarded, the presentation mode for the ceiling reaching presentation is set to a presentation mode that indicates that the ceiling bonus will not be awarded. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being played without playing right immediately after it is notified that the ceiling bonus (for example, 300 times of time reduction) will be awarded, which can cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In the thirteenth control example, the ceiling reaching effect is executed when the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc satisfies the ceiling bonus awarding condition (when it reaches 500), but the present invention is not limited to this. The ceiling reaching effect may be executed when the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc reaches a predetermined value (for example, a multiple of 100), and when the ceiling bonus awarding condition is not actually met, a performance mode is set to indicate that the ceiling bonus will not be awarded. By configuring in this way, when the ceiling reaching effect is executed in a performance mode indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be awarded, the possibility of winning the jackpot can be left open, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Now, referring to FIG. 449, the contents stipulated in the ceiling-reaching effect selection table 222lb will be explained. FIG. 449 is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the ceiling-reaching effect selection table 222lb. As shown in FIG. 449, the ceiling-reaching effect selection table 222lb stipulates the effect modes (effects A to C) in association with the ceiling bonus (number of time-saving times), the result of the target special symbol lottery, and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, and stipulates the value to be set in the ceiling time-saving counter 223la and the setting contents of the later-addition flag 223lb in association with each effect mode.

Specifically, when the content of the ceiling bonus to be awarded is "time reduction 100", that is, when the conditions for awarding the ceiling bonus are met during normal play and the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the performance mode "Performance A" is specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value from "0 to 99". In this case, the ceiling unreached mode, which indicates that the ceiling bonus will not be awarded as the performance when the ceiling is reached, is set. Then, no value is set in the ceiling time reduction counter 223la, and the later addition flag 223lb is set to off (not set to on).

A detailed explanation will be given later, but the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is a counter for measuring a value related to the content of the ceiling bonus (number of time-saving times) that has been notified to the player in advance, and the value is set when the presentation mode for the ceiling-reaching presentation is set. Then, the value is subtracted each time a special pattern change is executed, and when the value after subtraction becomes 0, the remaining number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state granted as the ceiling bonus is determined, and if there are remaining time-saving times, a presentation corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving times (additional presentation) is executed.

The later-addition flag 223lb is a flag for indicating that the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la set in the ceiling-reaching performance is not a value indicating the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state granted as a ceiling bonus, and is set to on when a value other than the value indicating the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state granted as a ceiling bonus (a value corresponding to a number less than the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state) is set to the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la.

In other words, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot," it is not possible to play in the third time-saving state that is granted as a ceiling bonus. Therefore, the performance mode for the performance when the ceiling is reached is set to "Performance A," which indicates that no ceiling bonus will be granted, and the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is not set, and the later-addition flag 223lb remains off.

On the other hand, if the ceiling bonus is "time reduction 100" and the result of the special symbol lottery is "miss", the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is set to the range of "0 to 19" and the effect mode "effect A" is set, the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is set to "1", and the later addition flag 223lb is set to ON.

In this case, the third time-saving state (100 times of time-saving) is actually granted as the ceiling bonus, but an effect indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be granted is executed as the ceiling-reaching effect, and after the ceiling-reaching effect ends, an additional effect (see FIG. 441) is executed to notify the player of the additional 100 times of time-saving. In this way, even when the ceiling bonus is actually granted, by configuring the ceiling-reaching effect to be able to set the effect mode of "effect A" indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be granted, it is possible to execute the ceiling-reaching effect indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be granted even when the result of the special pattern lottery in which the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met is not a result in which the ceiling bonus will no longer be granted (a big win), and therefore the frequency of the ceiling-reaching effect in which the effect mode of "effect A" is set can be increased.

In addition, for the range of the acquired value of the effect counter 223f from "20 to 99", the effect mode "effect B" is set. This effect mode "effect B" is an effect mode in which an effect including an effect indicating that a ceiling bonus will be awarded as an effect when the ceiling is reached, and an effect indicating that the content of the bonus awarded as the ceiling bonus is "100 times of time reduction". In this case, the content of the bonus awarded as the ceiling bonus (100 times of time reduction) matches the content of the bonus notified to the player in the effect when the ceiling is reached (100 times of time reduction), so an additional effect is not executed, and therefore the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is set to "101", and the later addition flag 223lb is set to off.

Next, if the content of the ceiling bonus to be awarded is "time reduction 300", that is, if the conditions for awarding the ceiling bonus are met during the first time-saving state and the result of the special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the performance mode "Performance A" is specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value from "0 to 99". In this case, a ceiling not reached mode indicating that a ceiling bonus will not be awarded is set as the performance when the ceiling is reached. Then, no value is set in the ceiling time-saving counter 223la, and the later addition flag 223lb is set to off (not set to on).

In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a "miss," the presentation mode "Presentation A" is set for the acquired presentation counter 223f value in the range of "0 to 19," the ceiling time-saving counter 223la value is set to "1," and the later-mounting flag 223lb is set to ON.

In this case, the third time-saving state (300 times of time-saving) is actually granted as the ceiling bonus, but an effect indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be granted is executed as the ceiling-reaching effect, and after the ceiling-reaching effect ends, an additional effect (see FIG. 441) is executed to notify the addition of 300 times of time-saving. In this way, even when the ceiling bonus is actually granted, by configuring the ceiling-reaching effect to be able to set the effect mode of "effect A" indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be granted, it is possible to execute the ceiling-reaching effect indicating that the ceiling bonus will not be granted even when the result of the special pattern lottery in which the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met is not a result in which the ceiling bonus will no longer be granted (a big win), and therefore the frequency of the ceiling-reaching effect in which the effect mode of "effect A" is set can be increased.

In addition, the effect mode "effect B" is set for the range of the acquired effect counter 223f value "20 to 49". This effect mode "effect B" is an effect mode in which an effect including an effect indicating that a ceiling bonus is granted as the ceiling reaching effect, and an effect indicating that the content of the bonus granted as the ceiling bonus is "100 times of time reduction". In this case, the content of the bonus granted as the ceiling bonus (300 times of time reduction) does not match the content of the bonus notified to the player in the ceiling reaching effect (100 times of time reduction), and at the end of the ceiling mid-mode effect (see FIG. 440(b)) corresponding to the short time period notified in the ceiling reaching effect, an additional effect that adds 200 times of time reduction is executed, so the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is set to "101" and the later addition flag 223lb is set to ON.

Furthermore, for the range of the acquired value of the effect counter 223f "50 to 99", the effect mode "effect C" is set. This effect mode "effect C" is an effect mode in which an effect including an effect indicating that a ceiling bonus will be awarded as an effect when the ceiling is reached, and an effect indicating that the content of the bonus awarded as the ceiling bonus is "300 times of time reduction". In this case, since the content of the bonus awarded as the ceiling bonus (300 times of time reduction) and the content of the bonus notified to the player in the effect when the ceiling is reached (300 times of time reduction) match, no additional effect is executed, so the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la is set to "301" and the later addition flag 223lb is set to off.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this thirteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 447(b). FIG. 447(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this thirteenth control example.

As shown in FIG. 447(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this thirteenth control example differs from the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(b)) in that a ceiling time-saving counter 223la, a later-loading flag 223lb, and a special drawing count counter 223lc have been added. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The ceiling time-saving counter 223la is a counter for measuring a value related to the content of the ceiling bonus (number of time-saving times) that has been notified to the player in advance, and the value is set when the presentation mode for the ceiling-reaching presentation is set. The value is then subtracted each time a special pattern change is executed, and when the value after subtraction becomes 1, the number of remaining time-saving times in the third time-saving state granted as the ceiling bonus is determined, and if there are remaining time-saving times, a presentation corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving times (additional presentation) is executed.

The ceiling time-saving counter 223la is set when the ceiling reaching effect (the effect corresponding to the special symbol change just before the third time-saving state is set) is executed, so that the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state is set to a value that is one plus the value notified in the ceiling reaching effect (see S34503 in FIG. 463), and the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is subtracted by one each time a change effect corresponding to a special symbol change is set while the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is set (see S34408 in FIG. 462). This makes it possible to determine the timing at which a special symbol change change effect is set, in which the remaining number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state notified to the player in the ceiling reaching effect is one (last), using the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la (see S34410 in FIG. 462).

The later-addition flag 223lb is a flag for indicating that the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la set in the ceiling-reaching performance is not a value indicating the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state granted as a ceiling bonus, and is set to on when a value other than the value indicating the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state granted as a ceiling bonus (a value corresponding to a number less than the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state) is set to the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la.

This later-loading flag 223lb is set to on in accordance with the content of the ceiling bonus (number of time-saving times) that is actually set and the presentation style of the ceiling-reaching presentation (S34504 in FIG. 463), and when the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la becomes 1 (S34410 in FIG. 462: Yes), the setting status of the flag is determined (S34411 in FIG. 462). This makes it possible to determine whether the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state (value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la) notified to the player in the ceiling-reaching presentation matches the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state that is actually set, and if they do not match (if the later-loading flag 223lb is set to on), an additional presentation is executed.

The special symbol lottery count counter 223lc is a counter for measuring the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed (the number of times it gets stuck) to satisfy the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege, and when a command is received to indicate the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la measured by the main control unit 110 (S9093 in FIG. 459: Yes), the value indicated by the received command is set (see S9094 in FIG. 459). This is then referenced when determining the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation (see S34508 in FIG. 463).

<Regarding control processing executed by main control device 110 in the thirteenth control example>
Next, referring to Figures 450 to 457, the control process contents of the main control device 110 in the 13th control example will be described, focusing on the points that differ from the above-mentioned 5th control example. The pachinko machine 10 of the 13th control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 5th control example in that a process for determining whether or not to grant a ceiling bonus based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed and a process for granting the ceiling bonus are added, the game state in which the time-saving lottery can be executed is changed, and the contents of the process based on the normal symbol lottery are described in detail.

Specifically, the difference is that special symbol change process 13 (see S30104 in FIG. 450) and normal symbol change process 13 (see S30106 in FIG. 456) and start-up process (see FIG. 457) are illustrated instead of special symbol change process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252). The rest of the processing content is the same, and detailed explanations of the same content will be omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol variation process 13 (S30104) will be described with reference to FIG. 450. FIG. 450 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation process 13 (S30104). As shown in FIG. 450, the special symbol variation process 13 (S30104) differs from the above-mentioned special symbol variation process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252) in that the special symbol determination process 5 (S251 in FIG. 252) is replaced with the special symbol determination process 13 (S30251), the special symbol variation pattern selection process 5 (see S252 in FIG. 252) is replaced with the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S30252), and the time-saving setting process 5 (S254 in FIG. 252) is replaced with the time-saving setting process 13 (S30254), and is otherwise the same. The same processing content will be given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, the processing contents of the special symbol determination process 13 (S30251) will be described with reference to FIG. 451. FIG. 451 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special symbol determination process 13 (S30251). As shown in FIG. 451, when the special symbol determination process 13 (S30251) is executed, first, data of the execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area is obtained (S8001), the lottery result (jackpot) determination result) is obtained based on the first winning random number 13 table 202la (S8002), and it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a jackpot win (S8003). If it is determined that it is a jackpot win (S8003: Yes), the lottery result of the special symbol is set to a jackpot (S8004), and the jackpot pattern of the special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set based on the value of the obtained winning type counter (first winning type counter C2) (S8005), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8003 that the jackpot has not been won (S8003: No), then ceiling determination processing 13 is executed (S38051), and then time-saving lottery processing 13 is executed (S38006), and this processing ends. In other words, the special symbol determination processing 13 (S30251) executed in this thirteenth control example differs from the special symbol determination processing 5 (see S251 in FIG. 253) executed in the fifth control example described above in that ceiling determination processing 13 (S38051) is added, and time-saving lottery processing 5 (S8006 in FIG. 253) is replaced with time-saving lottery processing 13 (S38006). The rest of the processing content is the same, and the explanation of the same processing content will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the ceiling determination process 13 (S38051) will be described with reference to FIG. 452. FIG. 452 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the ceiling determination process 13 (S38051). In this ceiling determination process 13 (S38051), a process is executed to determine whether the special symbol lottery executed this time is a special symbol lottery that can update the awarding condition (number of times of streaks) for awarding a ceiling privilege, and to update the awarding condition (number of times of streaks) based on the determination result, a process to determine whether the awarding condition of the ceiling privilege has been met based on the updated number of times of streaks, and a process to hold information indicating that the awarding condition of the ceiling privilege has been met until the setting condition of the ceiling privilege is met.

When the ceiling determination process 13 (S38051) is executed, first, the current game state is read from the game state storage area 203g (S38101), and it is determined whether the current game state is a low probability state of a special symbol (S38102). If it is determined that the current game state is a low probability state of a special symbol (S38102: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special symbol selection counter 203la (S38103), and it is determined whether the value of the special symbol selection counter 203la after the addition has reached 500 (S38104).

If it is determined in the process of S38104 that the value of the special drawing counter 203la has not reached 500 (S38104: No), a status command including information indicating the current value of the special drawing counter 203la is set (S38105), and this process ends. The status command set by the process of S38105 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the other status commands set in the fifth control example described above. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when a status command indicating the value of the special drawing counter 203la is received, the value of the special drawing number counter 223lc is updated. This makes it possible for the voice lamp control device 113 side to determine the value of the special drawing counter 203la, i.e., the number of times it has been stuck.

On the other hand, in the process of S38104, if it is determined that the value of the special chart lottery counter 203la is 500, i.e., if it is determined that the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met (S38104: Yes), then it is determined whether the current game state, i.e., the game state at the time when the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, is a normal state (S38106), and if it is determined that it is a normal state (S38106: Yes), the first ceiling waiting flag 203lb is set to on (S38107), and a state command including information indicating that the player is waiting for the ceiling and information indicating the ceiling type (first ceiling) is set (S38108), and this process is terminated.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S38106 that the current state is not the normal state, i.e., that the current state is the first time-saving state or the second time-saving state (S38106: No), the second ceiling wait flag 203lc is set to ON (S38109), and the process proceeds to S38108. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S38102 that the current state is not a low probability state for the special symbol, i.e., that the condition for updating the number of times of stuck hits is not met (S38102: No), the process ends as it is.

As explained above, in this thirteenth control example, when the number of times that special pattern lotteries have been executed since the end of the previous big win game (number of stuck times) reaches a specified value (500 times), the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are established, and the number of stuck times is not updated (incremented) in accordance with every special pattern lottery that is executed, but rather, when a special pattern lottery that satisfies the update condition for the number of stuck times is executed (corresponding to S38102: Yes in Figure 452), the number of stuck times (value of special pattern lottery count counter 2231c) is updated (incremented).

By configuring it in this way, the number of special symbol draws performed after the end of a jackpot game can be made different from the number of stuck times, so even if a specific number (500 times) is specified as the number of stuck times at which the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met, it is possible to make the number of special symbol draws performed before the number of stuck times reaches the specific number different. This makes it difficult for players to predict at what point (number of special symbol draws) the ceiling privilege will be granted.

In the thirteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 452, when a special symbol lottery is executed during a low probability state of a special symbol, the number of times of getting stuck is updated, and when a special symbol lottery is executed during a high probability state of a special symbol, the number of times of getting stuck is not updated. In other words, the low probability state of a special symbol is set as the update condition for the number of times of getting stuck, but the update condition for the number of times of getting stuck is not limited to this. For example, when a specific game state (first time-saving state) is set, the update condition for the number of times of getting stuck may be configured not to be established, when a special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) of a specific special symbol type (second special symbol) is executed, the update condition for the number of times of getting stuck may be configured not to be established, or when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery becomes a specific lottery result, the update condition for the number of times of getting stuck may be configured not to be established for a predetermined period thereafter (the period until the special symbol lottery is executed 10 times). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the number of special symbol draws that are executed until the number of times the player is stuck reaches a specific number. This makes it difficult for players to predict the timing (number of special symbol draws) at which the ceiling bonus will be awarded.

In addition, in this thirteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 452, when the condition for updating the number of stuck games is met, the number of stuck games is updated (added) once each time a special pattern lottery is executed, but without being limited to this, the number of stuck games may be updated two or more times or less than one time (0.5 times) for one special pattern lottery, or the number of stuck games may be subtracted for one special pattern lottery. Even when configured in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to predict at what point (number of special pattern lotteries) the ceiling bonus will be awarded.

Next, the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 13 (S38006) will be explained with reference to FIG. 453. FIG. 453 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of time-saving lottery process 13 (S38006). This time-saving lottery process 13 (S38006) is executed instead of time-saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254) executed in the fifth control example described above, and differs in that the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery (determination of whether a time-saving lottery has been won) are changed to correspond to the game specifications.

Specifically, when the time-saving lottery process 13 (S38006) is executed, the current game state is read from the game state storage area 203g (S8102), and it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state (S38151). If it is determined that the current game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state (S38151: Yes), the execution condition for the time-saving lottery is met, so the lottery result of the time-saving lottery is obtained based on the time-saving random number 13 table 202le (S38152), and then the same processes of S8105 and S8106 as those of the time-saving lottery process 5 described above (see S8101 in FIG. 254) are executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the processing of S38151 determines that the current gaming state is not the normal state or the first time-saving state, that is, the gaming state is one in which the conditions for executing the time-saving lottery have not been met (S38151: No), this processing ends without executing the time-saving lottery.

Next, the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S30252) will be explained with reference to Figure 454. Figure 454 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S30252). This special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 13 (S30252) differs from the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 5 (see S252 in FIG. 255) executed in the fifth control example described above in that the data table referred to in determining the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won is changed from the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd (see FIG. 246) to the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld (S38251), the data table referred to in determining the type of time-saving when a time-saving win is won is changed from the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df (see FIG. 248(b)) to the time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf (S38253), and the data table referred to when selecting a fluctuation pattern of special symbol fluctuation is changed from the fluctuation pattern selection 5 table 202db (see FIG. 247) to the fluctuation pattern selection 13 table 202db (see S38252), but is otherwise the same. The same contents will be denoted by the same symbols and their explanations will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the time-saving setting process 13 (S30254) will be described with reference to FIG. 455. FIG. 455 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 13 (S30254). This time-saving setting process 13 (S30254) differs from the above-mentioned time-saving setting process 5 (see S254 in FIG. 257) in that a process is added to set the time-saving state (third time-saving state) when information indicating that the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met is set in the ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in FIG. 452) (when the first ceiling standby flag 203lb or the second ceiling standby flag 203lc is set to on).

Furthermore, when the satisfaction of the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege by the ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in FIG. 452) and the winning of the time-saving lottery based on the execution of the special pattern lottery in 1 overlap, the setting of the time-saving state based on the satisfaction of the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege is processed as a priority, and a process is executed to discard information related to the winning of the time-saving state, which is a difference in that a priority order is set in advance for the settings of multiple time-saving states.

When the time-saving setting process 13 (S30254) is executed, first, it is determined whether the first ceiling waiting flag 203lb is set to ON (S38351), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S38351: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 (S38352), the first ceiling waiting flag 203lb is set to OFF (S38353), the third time-saving state is set in the game status storage area 203g (S38354), information regarding this time-saving lottery is cleared (S38355), a status command including information indicating the third time-saving state and information indicating the number of time-saving draws is set (S38356), the value of the special chart lottery counter 203la is cleared (S38357), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S38351, if it is determined that the first ceiling wait flag 203lb is not set to on (S38351: No), then it is determined whether the second ceiling wait flag 203lc is set to on (S38358). If it is determined that it is set to on (S38358: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 300 (S38359), the second ceiling wait flag 203lc is set to off (S38360), the third time-saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S38354), information related to this time-saving lottery is cleared (S38355), a state command including information indicating the third time-saving state and information indicating the number of time-saving times is set (S38356), the value of the special chart lottery counter 203la is cleared (S38357), and this process ends.

Then, in the process of S38358, if it is determined that the second ceiling wait flag 203lc is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are not met based on the special pattern lottery executed this time (S38358: No), the process of S8351 to S8354 is executed, which is the same as the time-saving setting process 5 (see S254 in FIG. 257) in the fifth control example described above, and this process is terminated.

As explained above, in this thirteenth control example, the control process (time-saving setting process 13 (S30254)) executed when the special pattern variation is stopped is configured to determine whether the setting conditions for the time-saving state are met (whether the lottery result allows the time-saving state to be set, or whether any of the various ceiling waiting flags are set to on), and to set the time-saving state if it is determined that the setting conditions are met; however, a different timing may be adopted for setting the time-saving state; for example, it may be configured to determine whether the setting conditions for the time-saving state are met at the timing when the special pattern variation starts (the timing when the process for starting the special pattern variation is executed), and to set the time-saving state if it is determined that the setting conditions are met.

In addition, the time-saving state may be set between the establishment of the setting condition for the time-saving state and the execution of the next special pattern lottery. For example, when the setting condition for the time-saving state is established, a predetermined value may be set in a measuring means (timer) capable of measuring the passage of time, and the time-saving state may be set when the time corresponding to the value set in the measuring means has elapsed. Alternatively, when the setting condition for the time-saving state is established (when any of the various ceiling waiting flags is set to on), a setting lottery (for example, a lottery executed in the main processing executed periodically by the main control device 110) may be executed periodically, and the time-saving state may be set at the timing when the setting lottery is won. In this way, by configuring the time-saving state to be set at various times within the range of the period from the establishment of the setting condition for the time-saving state to the execution of the next special pattern lottery, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time-saving state is set.

In addition, in this thirteenth control example, multiple time-saving setting conditions for setting the time-saving state can be set, and multiple time-saving setting conditions can overlap and be established based on one special pattern drawing. Specifically, it is possible to set a lottery result time-saving setting condition that is established based on the result of the special pattern drawing, and a lottery count time-saving setting condition that is established based on the number of times the special pattern drawing is performed.

The system is configured to be able to determine whether or not a time-saving setting condition (lottery count time-saving setting condition) that is likely to set a time-saving state (right-hand play state) that is advantageous to the player is met, and when it is determined that the lottery count time-saving setting condition is met, it is possible to set a time-saving state based on the lottery count time-saving setting condition being met, regardless of whether or not a lottery result time-saving setting condition that is unlikely to set a time-saving state (right-hand play state) that is advantageous to the player is met.

By configuring it in this way, even if multiple time-saving setting conditions are met at the same time, it is possible to prioritize and easily set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, thereby preventing the player from easily engaging in unfavorable play.

In addition, in a pachinko machine 10 configured so that multiple time-saving setting conditions can be established simultaneously, a method of setting the time-saving state different from the thirteenth control example described above may be adopted. For example, the system may be configured to be able to determine whether or not a time-saving setting condition (lottery result time-saving setting condition) that is difficult to set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player (right-hand play state) is established with priority, and when it is determined that the lottery result time-saving setting condition is not established, it may be configured to determine whether or not a lottery number time-saving setting condition that is easy to set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player (right-hand play state) is established, and when it is determined that the lottery number time-saving setting condition is established, it may be configured to set a time-saving state based on the establishment of the lottery number time-saving setting condition.

In other words, when multiple time-saving setting conditions are met at the same time, a time-saving state is set based on the fulfillment of a time-saving setting condition (lottery result time-saving setting condition) that makes it difficult to set a time-saving state (right-hit play state) that is advantageous to the player, and when only a time-saving setting condition (lottery number of time-saving setting condition) that makes it easy to set a time-saving state (right-hit play state) that is advantageous to the player is met, a time-saving state is set based on the fulfillment of a time-saving setting condition (lottery number of time-saving setting condition) that makes it easy to set a time-saving state (right-hit play state) that is advantageous to the player.

By configuring it in this way, it is easier to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player when only a specific time-saving setting condition is met, rather than when multiple time-saving setting conditions are met at the same time. In other words, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay experience in which the player is made to hope that other time-saving setting conditions will not be met based on the special pattern lottery that will result in the meeting of a specific time-saving setting condition.

In this case, for example, it is advisable to have different presentation styles for indicating whether or not other time-saving setting conditions (lottery result time-saving setting conditions) are met (for example, whether or not the time-saving lottery is won) between a variable presentation (ceiling reached presentation) for indicating the result of a special pattern lottery where a specific time-saving setting condition (number of draws time-saving setting condition) is met and a variable presentation (normal presentation) for indicating the result of a special pattern lottery where a specific time-saving setting condition (number of draws time-saving setting condition) is not met, and in the ceiling reached presentation, it is better to have different presentation styles for indicating whether or not the time-saving lottery is won. It is preferable to configure the game so that a presentation mode congratulating the player is more likely to be set when the time-saving lottery results in a win rather than a loss, since a favorable time-saving state is more likely to be set when the time-saving lottery results in a win than a loss, and in normal presentation, it is more likely to set a time-saving state when the time-saving lottery results in a win than a loss, since a time-saving state is more likely to be set when the time-saving lottery results in a win than a loss.

By configuring it in this way, players can easily understand whether or not a game situation that is favorable to them is likely to be set by understanding the content of the effects being executed, providing an easy-to-understand game experience.

The system may also be configured so that a special time-saving state (fourth time-saving condition) can be set only when multiple time-saving setting conditions are met in an overlapping manner.

Next, the contents of normal pattern change processing 13 (S30106) will be explained with reference to FIG. 456. FIG. 456 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of normal pattern change processing 13 (S30106). This normal pattern change processing 13 (S30106) illustrates the processing contents that were omitted from the illustration in each of the control examples described above.

In each control example, including this thirteenth control example, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, it is possible to set a game state in which it is easy to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during a normal winning game (the second time-saving state in this control example), and a game state in which it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during a normal winning game (the first time-saving state in this control example).

Specifically, the normal symbol variation time is set to a different length for a high probability state for normal symbols (first time-saving state) that is set based on winning the time-saving lottery, and a high probability state for normal symbols (second time-saving state) that is set based on winning the jackpot.

When the first time-saving state is set, as shown in S30807 of FIG. 456, a very short normal symbol variation time (0.1 seconds) is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to end the normal symbol winning game (normal symbol winning game) from when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery, until the game ball reaches the electric role device 640, resulting in a time-saving state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

On the other hand, when the second time-saving state is set, as shown in S30805 of FIG. 456, a short period (1 second) of normal symbol variation time is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the timing when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, which triggers the execution of the normal symbol lottery, and then reaches the electric device 640 during a normal symbol winning game (normal symbol winning game), resulting in a time-saving state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Furthermore, in this thirteenth control example, when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, a third time-saving state can be set, which allows game balls to enter the second ball entrance 640 to the same extent as in the second time-saving state described above. Specifically, when the third time-saving state is set, as shown in S30805 of FIG. 456, a short period (1 second) of normal pattern variation time is set. And, the winning probability of the normal pattern lottery is set to a low probability state of the normal pattern (299/300) or a high probability state of the normal pattern (299/300).

Therefore, even if a low probability state for normal symbols is set, by setting the normal symbol fluctuation time to the same length as the second time-saving state, it is possible to set a game state (right-hand hit game state) in which it is easier to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In the normal state and the second probability state in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, as shown in S30808 of FIG. 456, a longer fluctuation time (60 seconds) is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time than in other game states, making it difficult to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and it becomes a game state (left-hand play state) in which it is easier to execute the special symbol lottery by getting the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 by playing from the left.

Also, as shown in S30809 and S30810 in FIG. 456, the time during which the electric device 640 is in the open state during a normal winning game is longer when a high probability state for normal symbols is set than when a low probability state for normal symbols is set. In either case, however, when the normal symbol change time is set to one second, game balls can enter the second ball entrance 640, so that the same number of game balls can enter the second ball entrance 640 in the second time-saving state and the third time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 457, the start-up process of the main control device 110 in this thirteenth control example will be described. FIG. 457 is a flowchart showing the process contents of the start-up process of the main control device 110 in this thirteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 457, the start-up process of the main control device 110 in this thirteenth control example differs from the start-up process in each of the above control examples in that, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 has started up normally (S1707: Yes), the start-up process of the main control device 110 executes a process (S31701) of sending a status command including information indicating the value of the special drawing counter 203la to the voice lamp control device 113, and a process (S31702) of sending a status command including information stored in the game status storage area 203g to the voice lamp control device 113. The rest is the same.

By configuring it in this way, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, it is possible to transmit information indicating the game status of the pachinko machine 10 to the audio and lamp control device 113 when the power supply is restored. This makes it easier to appropriately set the performance that is executed based on the game status of the pachinko machine 10.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 13th control example>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this thirteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 458 to Fig. 463. This thirteenth control example differs from the fifth control example described above in that it executes a command determination process 13 (see S34182 in Fig. 458) and a variable display setting process 13 (see S34113 in Fig. 461). The rest of the process contents are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same process contents will be omitted.

First, the processing contents of command determination process 13 (S34182) will be described with reference to FIG. 458. FIG. 458 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of command determination process 13 (S34182). This command determination process 13 (S34182) differs from command determination process 5 (see S4182 in FIG. 262) of the fifth control example described above in that state command reception process 13 (see S34251 in FIG. 459) is executed instead of state command reception process 5 (S4282), but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 459, the processing contents of the status command reception process 13 (S34251) will be explained. FIG. 459 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the status command reception process 13 (S34251). As shown in FIG. 459, the status command reception process 13 (S34251) differs from the status command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 263) in the fifth control example described above in that the processing contents executed when it is determined that the game state has been changed to a time-saving state based on the information contained in the status command received from the main control device 110 (S9005: Yes) have been changed, and processing has been added when a status command containing information indicating the value of the special chart lottery counter 203la is received. The other processing contents are the same, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

When the status command reception process 13 (S34251) is executed, the processes of S9001 and S9002 are executed, which are the same as those of the status command reception process 5 (see S4282 in FIG. 265) in the fifth control example described above. Thereafter, the process of S9005 is executed, and if it is determined that the game state has been changed to the time-saving state (S9005: Yes), the time-saving state presentation setting process 13 is executed (S9091), and then the process proceeds to S9093. The contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 13 (S9091) will be described later with reference to FIG. 460.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S9005 that the time-saving state has not been changed (S9005: No), a display back image change command is set to indicate the back type corresponding to the changed game state (S9092), and the processing proceeds to S9093.

In the process of S9093, it is determined whether the currently received status command contains information indicating the value of the special drawing counter 203la, i.e., information indicating the number of times of getting stuck (S9093), and if it is determined that it does contain information (S9093: Yes), a value corresponding to the received value is set as the value of the special drawing counter 203la (S9094), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S9093, if it is determined that the currently received status command does not contain information indicating the number of times of getting stuck (S9093: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 460, the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting processing 13 (S9091) executed in the state command receiving processing 13 (see S34251 in FIG. 459) will be described. FIG. 460 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting processing 13 (S9091). This time-saving state presentation setting processing 13 (S9091) differs from the above-mentioned time-saving state presentation setting processing (see S9006 in FIG. 266) in that the processing contents when transitioning from the normal state to the time-saving state are changed, but the processing contents are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and their detailed explanations will be omitted.

When the time-saving state presentation setting process 13 (S9091) is executed, first, the game state before the change is read from the slave state setting area 223g (S34301), and it is determined whether the game state before the change is a normal state (S34302). In the process of S34302, if it is determined that it is in the normal state (S34302: Yes), it is determined whether the information indicating the time-saving type included in the currently received command is information indicating the first time-saving state (S34303). If it is determined that it is not in the first time-saving state (S34303: No), the number of time-saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the time-saving counter 223da (S34304). Thereafter, it is determined whether the time-saving type of the currently set time-saving state is the third time-saving state (S34305). If it is determined that it is in the third time-saving state (S34305: Yes), a display back image change command is set to indicate the back type (see FIG. 440(b)) corresponding to the ceiling mode (S34306), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S34305, if it is determined that the time-saving type of the currently set time-saving state is not the third time-saving state (S34305: No), it is then determined whether the time-saving type of the currently set time-saving state is the second time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot C13 (S34307), and if it is determined that it is the second time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot C13 (S34307: Yes), the process of S34306 described above is executed and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S34307 that the state is not the second time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot C13 (S34307: No), then it is determined whether the state is the second time-saving state set after winning the time-saving prize (S34308), and if it is determined that the state is the second time-saving state set after winning the time-saving prize (S34308: Yes), the process of S34306 described above is executed and this process ends. Then, if it is determined in the process of S34308 that the state is not the second time-saving state set after winning the time-saving prize (S34308: No), a display back image change command is set to indicate the back type corresponding to the set time-saving type (S34309), and this process ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to display the back image of the ceiling mode executed when the ceiling privilege is granted and the third time-saving state is set, even when the second time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot type "jackpot C13" and the second time-saving state set in a portion (0.1%) of the time-saving winning lottery are set. This makes it possible for the player to believe that the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege have been met, even when the above-mentioned second time-saving state, which is set without the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege being met, is set, allowing the player to play while expecting the ceiling privilege to be granted at various times.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 13 (S34113) will be explained with reference to FIG. 461. FIG. 461 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the variable display setting process 13 (S34113). This variable display setting process 13 (S34113) differs from the variable display setting process described above (see S4113 in FIG. 182) in that, in order to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation, presentation mode setting process 13 (S4991 in FIG. 461) is executed instead of the special chart 1 presentation mode setting process (S4903 in FIG. 182) and the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process (S4907 in FIG. 182), but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in this 13th control example, the process for setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation of the first special pattern and the process for setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation of the second special pattern are the same process, so presentation mode setting process 13 (see S4991 in FIG. 461) is executed when setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation of either special pattern.

Next, the contents of the presentation mode setting process 13 (S4991) will be described with reference to FIG. 462. FIG. 462 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the presentation mode setting process 13 (S4991). This presentation mode setting process 13 (S4991) executes processing for setting the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the special pattern variation, and executes processing for setting various presentation modes according to the result of the special pattern lottery for which the presentation mode is set and the set game state. Also, when a display mode for indicating the number of times the special pattern lottery has been performed or a display mode for indicating the remaining period (remaining number of time-saving times) that a specific game state (for example, the third time-saving state) can continue is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, processing is executed for updating the value indicated by the display mode.

When the performance mode setting process 13 (S4991) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is the second time-saving state or the third time-saving state (S34401). If it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (S34401: No), the performance setting process 13 for normal mode is executed (S34402), and then a display variable pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S34407), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S34401, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S34401: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223da is decremented by 1 (S34403), and then it is determined whether the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is greater than 0 (S34404). If it is determined that the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is not greater than 0, that is, that the game is in a right-hand play state (second time-saving state) in which the ceiling mode is not set (S34404: No), a display command is set to show the value of the time-saving counter 223da after the decrement (S34405), and the presentation mode corresponding to the various counter values is determined (S34406), and the process proceeds to the process of S34407 described above, and this process ends.

If it is determined in the processing of S34404 that the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is greater than 0 (S34404: Yes), the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is decremented by 1 (S34408), a display command is set to show the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la after the decrement (S34409), and it is determined whether the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la after the decrement is 1 (S34410).

In the processing of S34410, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is not 1, i.e., that this is not the final change in the ceiling mode (S34410: No), the processing of S34406 and S34407 described above is executed, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S34410, if it is determined that the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la is 1 (i.e., the final change in the ceiling mode) (S34410: Yes), it is then determined whether the later-addition flag 223lb is set to on (S34411), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S34411: Yes), the later-addition flag 223lb is set to off (S34412), a value corresponding to the value of the time-saving counter 223da is added to the value of the ceiling time-saving counter 223la (S34413), the presentation mode of the later-addition presentation (top-up presentation) in which the remaining time-saving count display increases is determined (S34414), the process of S34407 described above is executed, and this process ends.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S34411 that the later-loading flag 223lb is not set to on (S34411: No), the third time-saving state in which the ceiling mode is set and the special pattern change that ends the second time-saving state will be the variable presentation, so the presentation mode indicating the end of the ceiling mode (ceiling mode) is determined (S34415), the processing of S34407 described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Next, the contents of the normal mode presentation setting process 13 (S34402) will be described with reference to FIG. 463. FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the normal mode presentation setting process 13 (S34402). In this normal mode presentation setting process 13 (S34402), when the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed, a process is executed to determine the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching presentation to indicate that the ceiling mid-mode (ceiling mode) is set, and a process is executed to determine the presentation mode of the ceiling reaching suggestion presentation that can indicate to the player the remaining time until the ceiling privilege is awarded as a variation presentation executed in response to the special pattern variation executed when the left-hand play state is set.

When the normal mode performance setting process 13 (S34402) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special symbol drawing count counter 223lc is 500, i.e., whether the ceiling bonus awarding condition is met by the special symbol drawing executed this time (S34501). In the process of S34501, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol drawing count counter 223lc is 500 (S34501: Yes), the performance mode of the ceiling reaching performance is determined by referring to the ceiling reaching performance selection table 222lb (S34502), the value corresponding to the determined performance mode is set as the value of the ceiling time reduction counter 223la (S34503), the setting status of the back-loading flag 223lb corresponding to the determined performance mode is determined (S34504), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the process of S34501, if it is determined that the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c is not 500, i.e., the condition for granting the ceiling bonus is not met (S34501: No), then it is determined whether the current special pattern change is a special pattern change that will win the jackpot C13 (S34505), and if it is determined that the special pattern change is a special pattern change that will win the jackpot C13 (S34505: Yes), a second time-saving state that becomes a pseudo-ceiling mode (mid-ceiling mode) after the special pattern change is stopped is set, and the processes of S34502 to S34504 described above are executed, and this process ends.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S34505 that the special pattern change is not a winning combination for the jackpot C13 (S34505: No), then it is determined whether the current special pattern change is a time-saving winning change for which a second time-saving state is set (S34506). If it is determined that the current special pattern change is a time-saving winning change for which a second time-saving state is set (S34506: Yes), the second time-saving state, which becomes a pseudo-ceiling mode (ceiling mode) after the special pattern change has stopped, is set, and the processes of S34502 to S34504 described above are executed, and this process ends.

In the process of S34506, if it is determined that the time-saving winning change is not one that sets the second time-saving state, that is, if it is determined that the special pattern change this time is a special pattern change that does not set the ceiling mode (ceiling mode) after the special pattern change this time is stopped and displayed (S34506: No), then it is determined whether the special pattern change this time is a special change (15-second change) (S34507), and if it is determined that it is a special change (15-second change) (S34507: Yes), the ceiling reach suggestion effect selection table 222la is referenced to determine the performance mode of the suggestion effect (S34508), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined that the special change is not a special change (15-second change) in the process of S34507 (S34507: No), the performance mode corresponding to the received change pattern is determined (S34509), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding the first modified example in the thirteenth control example>
Next, the first modified example of the thirteenth control example described above will be described with reference to Fig. 464 to Fig. 470. In the thirteenth control example described above, the time-saving lottery is configured to be executable when the game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state, and when the time-saving lottery is won and the first time-saving state is set, the first time-saving state with one time of time-saving is set. Then, while the normal state or the first time-saving state is set, the special pattern lottery is executed 500 times without winning the jackpot, so that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established, and the third time-saving state is set as the ceiling privilege.

In addition, the contents of the benefit granted as the ceiling benefit are configured to differ depending on the game state that is set when the conditions for granting the ceiling benefit are met. If the normal state is set and the conditions for granting the ceiling benefit are met, the third time-saving state with 100 times of time reduction is set, and if the conditions for granting the ceiling benefit are met when the first time-saving state is set, the third time-saving state with 300 times of time reduction is set.

In other words, in the thirteenth control example described above, in addition to the conventional gameplay of aiming to win a jackpot by drawing a special symbol, if a long period of time continues without winning a jackpot, the player can be allowed to play a game in which they aim to win a ceiling bonus that is awarded based on the number of times the special symbol drawing is performed.

Furthermore, by frequently switching between the normal state and the first time-saving state based on the results of the time-saving lottery, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the content of the benefit (the number of time-saving times) granted as the ceiling benefit will be an advantageous benefit (300 time-saving times) that is favorable to the player, or an unfavorable benefit (100 time-saving times) that is less favorable than the advantageous benefit.

In contrast to this, in this first modified example, the probability of winning the time-saving lottery is set to a low probability (1/500), the time-saving lottery can be executed only in the normal state, and if the time-saving lottery is won, the first time-saving state is set with the number of time-saving times greater than the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed (the number of times it gets stuck), which is the condition for granting the ceiling bonus.

In other words, in this first modified example, when the time-saving lottery is won in the normal state and the first time-saving state is set, the first time-saving state continues until the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met, unless a jackpot is won. By configuring it in this way, an advantageous bonus is granted as a ceiling bonus as an added value for winning the time-saving lottery, so that the player is motivated to play with the aim of winning the ceiling bonus.

Furthermore, in this first modified example, during the period when the left-hand play state is being executed, a game state suggestion display can be executed to allow the player to predict whether the currently set game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has been playing in the left-hand play state for a long time without winning a jackpot to predict the currently set play state, and to make the player choose whether or not to continue playing in consideration of the remaining time until the ceiling bonus granting condition is met and the current play state. Also, even in a situation where the remaining time until the ceiling bonus granting condition is met is long, if a play state suggestion effect is executed in a presentation mode indicating that the first time-saving state is likely to be set, it is possible to make the player play with the aim of obtaining an advantageous bonus, and therefore it is easier to improve the operation of the pachinko machine 10 compared to a case where a presentation to suggest the currently set play state is not executed during the period in which the left-hand play state is being executed.

<Regarding the content of the performance executed in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example>
First, referring to Fig. 464, the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example is configured such that, compared to the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth control example described above, the time-saving lottery is not executed while the first time-saving state is set based on the result of the time-saving lottery executed in the left-hand play state, and the number of time-saving times is set to 1000 times, which is more than the number of times (500 times) at which the ceiling privilege is granted as the first time-saving state.

Therefore, when the first time-saving state is set based on the results of the time-saving lottery performed in the left-hand play state, it is determined that the advantageous benefit (the third time-saving state with 300 times of time saving) will be set as the ceiling benefit at that point.

Therefore, in this first modified example, a game state suggestion effect is executable during left-hand play to allow the player to predict whether or not the first time-saving state has been set. Figure 464(a) is a diagram showing an example of a presentation screen for the game state suggestion effect, and Figure 464(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a suggestion effect to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the first time-saving state has been set during left-hand play.

As shown in FIG. 464(a), when the game state suggestion effect is executed, a roulette 861 with multiple regions formed in the center of the main display area Dm is displayed in rotation, and the game state suggestion effect is executed in which the region that stops at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 becomes the effect result. The roulette 861 is formed with four regions with different occupancy ranges: a first region 862a displaying the display mode of "preparation" indicating that the first time-saving state is set, a second region 862b displaying the display mode of "chance" indicating the possibility that the first time-saving state is set, a third region 862c displaying the display mode of "V" indicating a jackpot win, and a fourth region 862d displaying the display mode of "?" which does not suggest any information.

The main display area Dm displays the words "Status Suggestion Chance" to indicate that a game status suggestion effect is being executed, and the secondary display area Ds displays the comment "Where will it stop? If it stops on "Preparation", it will go to "Ceiling Preparation", and if it stops on "V", it will be "Big Win!" as an explanatory format to explain the content of the game status suggestion effect to the player.

In this first variant, the frequency with which the game status suggestion effect is executed and the presentation style are varied based on the length of time remaining until the ceiling bonus is awarded and the results of the special symbol lottery that is executed. The shorter the time remaining until the ceiling bonus is awarded or the more specific number of special symbol lotteries (e.g., a multiple of 50), the easier it is to grasp the actual game status that is set when the game status suggestion effect is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for players who want to understand the set game state to play until the next specific number of special pattern lotteries are executed, which makes it easier to improve the operation of the pachinko machine 10. Also, as shown in FIG. 464(a), the small display area Dm7 formed in the main display area Dm is configured to display the number of special pattern lotteries executed since the end of the previous big win game, and the diagram shown in FIG. 464(a) shows the period during which the special pattern is changing to show the result of the 250th special pattern lottery.

When the first area 862a is stopped and displayed at a position corresponding to the indicator 863 in the game state suggestion effect, the ceiling preparation mode is set as shown in FIG. 464(b). This ceiling preparation mode is an effect mode for indicating that the first time-saving state is set, and the remaining period (remaining number of special pattern changes) until the ceiling privilege is granted is displayed in the small display area Dm7, instead of the number of special pattern lotteries executed since the end of the previous big win game, and the character 809 that appears during the ceiling mode (ceiling mode) is displayed. In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays the words "If you get stuck 90 more times, you will get 300 time-savings" as an explanatory mode for explaining the effect content of the ceiling preparation mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to not only suggest the currently set game state to the player in the game state suggestion effect, but also to notify the player of the remaining period until the ceiling privilege is granted, so that a player aiming for the grant of the ceiling privilege can play with enthusiasm.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of this first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 465 to Fig. 467. In this first modified example of the thirteenth control example, the electrical configuration of the main control device 110 is different from that of the thirteenth control example described above in that the winning probability of the time-saving lottery is changed to a low probability and the number of time-saving times set when the time-saving lottery is won is changed, and the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 is different in that a data table for determining the presentation mode of the game state suggestion presentation is added and a flag for indicating the state in which the ceiling preparation mode is set is added. The other elements are the same, and the explanation of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the time-saving random number 13a table 202lae will be explained with reference to FIG. 465(a). FIG. 465(a) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving random number 13a table 202lae. This time-saving random number 13a table 202lae differs from the time-saving random number 13 table 202le (see FIG. 444(c)) described above in that the number of judgment values that will win in the time-saving lottery is different.

Specifically, when the special symbol type is "common" and the game state is normal, the range of "998,999" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained is set as the judgment value for the time-saving win. Also, when the game state is other than normal, the judgment value for the time-saving win is not set (shown as "-" in the figure).

By configuring it in this way, the game state in which a time-saving lottery winner can win the time-saving lottery is limited to the normal state, and it is also possible to make it more difficult to win the time-saving lottery. Therefore, even if the game is configured to be able to grant a beneficial bonus (a third time-saving state with 300 time-savings) to a player as added value for winning the time-saving lottery, it is possible to prevent an excessive amount of beneficial bonuses from being granted to a player.

Next, the contents of the time-saving winning 13a table 202laf1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 465(b). FIG. 465(b) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving winning 13a table 202laf1. As shown in FIG. 465(b), the time-saving winning 13a table 202laf1 is the same as the time-saving winning 13 table 202lf1 of the 13th control example described above, except that the number of time-saving times (values set in the time-saving counter 203h) set for each time-saving type is different. Explanations of the same contents will be omitted.

Specifically, when the first time-saving state is set as the time-saving type, the number of time-saving times is set to "1000 times." By configuring it in this way, when a time-saving win is won and the first time-saving state is set, the first time-saving state can be set continuously until the number of times of stuck wins is exceeded.

Next, referring to FIG. 466(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this first modified example will be described. The ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this first modified example differs from the ROM 222 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned thirteenth control example (see FIG. 447(a)) in that a game state suggestion presentation selection 13a table 222laa is provided instead of the ceiling reach suggestion presentation selection table 222laa, but is otherwise identical.

The game status indication effect selection 13a table 222laa is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the game status indication effect, and is referenced when the special variation (15-second variation) variation pattern is selected during normal mode (normal state, first time-saving state, second special state) (see S34532 in FIG. 470).

Now, referring to FIG. 467, the contents stipulated in the game status suggestion presentation selection 13a table 222laa will be explained. FIG. 467 is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the game status suggestion presentation selection 13a table 222laa. As shown in FIG. 467, the game status suggestion presentation selection 13a table 222laa stipulates different suggestion modes (presentation modes) corresponding to the value of the special symbol drawing count counter 223lc, the set game status, the result of the special symbol drawing corresponding to the change, and the acquired value of the presentation counter 223f.

The presentation mode of the game status suggestion presentation is determined by referring to this game status suggestion presentation selection 13a table 222laa, that is, the game status suggestion presentation described with reference to FIG. 464(a), and the areas 862a to 862d that are stopped and displayed corresponding to the indicator 863 are finally determined.

Specifically, when the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "other than a multiple of 50 between 1 and 200," the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is a "jackpot," the performance mode "V" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 79," and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "80 to 99." When the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "other than a jackpot," the performance mode "?" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 89," and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "90 to 99."

In addition, if the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "other than a multiple of 50 between 1 and 200", the second normal mode (first time-saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 79", and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "80 to 99", and if the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "?" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 49", and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "50 to 99".

Next, when the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "50, 100, 150, 200", the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 99", and when the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "?" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 39", and the performance mode "chance" is specified for the range of "40 to 99".

In addition, when the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "50, 100, 150, 200", the second normal mode (first time-saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 99", and when the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "?" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 19", and the performance mode "chance" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "20 to 99".

When the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 223lc is "other than a multiple of 50 between 201 and 490", the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 89", and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "90 to 99". When the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "?" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 69", and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "70 to 99".

In addition, if the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "other than a multiple of 50 between 201 and 490", the second normal mode (first time-saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 89", and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "90 to 99". In the case where the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "?" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 19", and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "20 to 99".

Next, when the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "250, 300, 350, 400, 450", the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 99", and when the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "?" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 49", and the performance mode "chance" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "50 to 99".

In addition, when the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "250, 300, 350, 400, 450", the second normal mode (first time-saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 99", and when the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "chance" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 49", and the performance mode "preparation" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "50 to 99".

When the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "491 to 500", the first normal mode (normal state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 69", and the performance mode "chance" is specified for the range of "70 to 99", and when the result of the special symbol lottery for that variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "chance" is specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0 to 99".

In addition, when the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 2231c is "491-500", the second normal mode (first time-saving state) is set, and the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "jackpot", the performance mode "V" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0-79", and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the range of "80-99". When the result of the special symbol lottery of the variation is "other than jackpot", the performance mode "Preparation" is specified for the range of the acquired performance counter 223f value "0-98", and the performance mode "Chance" is specified for the value "99".

Here, if the presentation mode "V" is determined, the presentation in which the area 862c in which V is displayed is finally displayed at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 is executed as the game status indication presentation shown in FIG. 464(a). If the presentation mode "Chance" is determined, the presentation in which the area 862b in which Chance is displayed is finally displayed at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 is executed as the game status indication presentation shown in FIG. 464(a). If the presentation mode "?" is determined, the presentation in which the area 862d in which "?" is displayed is finally displayed at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 is executed as the game status indication presentation shown in FIG. 464(a). If the presentation mode "Preparation" is determined, the presentation in which the area 862a in which Preparation is displayed is finally displayed at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 is executed as the game status indication presentation shown in FIG. 464(a).

As explained above, the game state suggestion presentation is configured so that the larger the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc, that is, the shorter the remaining time until the ceiling bonus is awarded, the more likely it is that a suggestion mode corresponding to the currently set game state will be set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to gradually improve the prediction accuracy of the currently set game state for players who have been playing in the left-hand play state for a long time, making it easier for them to continue playing.

In addition, when the conditions for executing the game state suggestion effect are met when the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 223lc reaches a specific value (a multiple of 50), an effect that makes it easier to grasp the currently set game state is executed, compared to when the game state suggestion effect is executed at other times. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is trying to grasp the currently set game state to continue playing in order to execute a special symbol lottery until the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 223lc reaches a specific value.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this first modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 466(b). The RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this first modified example differs from the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned thirteenth control example (see FIG. 447(b)), in that a notification completion flag 223laa has been added. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The already-notified flag 223laa is a flag for indicating that a notification indicating that the first time-saving state has been set has been executed in the game state suggestion effect, and is set to on when the ceiling preparation mode (see FIG. 464(b)) is set as the effect result of the game state suggestion effect (see S34534 in FIG. 470). The setting status of the already-notified flag 223laa is referred to when determining whether or not to execute a game state suggestion effect (see S34531 in FIG. 470), and when the already-notified flag 223laa is set to on (S34531 in FIG. 470: Yes), a new game state suggestion effect is not executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent unnecessary execution of a game state suggestion effect when it has already been notified that the first time-saving state has been set.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110 in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the main control device 110 in this first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 468. This first modified example differs from the above-mentioned thirteenth control example in that the execution conditions of the time-saving lottery are different, but is otherwise the same. Detailed descriptions of the same processing contents will be omitted.

Now, the contents of the time-saving lottery process 13a (S38006a) will be described with reference to FIG. 468. FIG. 468 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving lottery process 13a (S38006a) in this first modified example. As shown in FIG. 468, the time-saving lottery process 13a (S38006a) differs from the time-saving lottery process 13 (S38006) of the thirteenth control example described above in that the execution condition for the time-saving lottery is met only when the game state is in the normal state (S38151a: Yes) and that the data table referenced during the time-saving lottery is the time-saving random number 13a table 222iae (S38152a), but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and their explanations will be omitted.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example>
Next, the control process contents executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 469 and Fig. 470. In this first modified example, the difference from the above-mentioned thirteenth control example is that instead of the time-saving state performance setting process 13 (see S9091 in Fig. 460), the time-saving state performance setting process 13a (see S9091a in Fig. 469) is executed, and instead of the normal mode performance setting process 13 (see S34402 in Fig. 463), the normal mode performance setting process 13a (see S34402a in Fig. 470) is executed. Since the rest are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 13a (S9091a) will be described with reference to FIG. 469. FIG. 469 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 13a (S9091a). As shown in FIG. 469, when the time-saving state presentation setting process 13a (S9091a) is executed, the same processing of S34301 to S34304 as the above-mentioned time-saving state presentation setting process 13 (see S9091 in FIG. 460) is executed.

Then, if the processing of S34305 determines that the state is the third time-saving state (S34305: Yes), if the processing of S34307 determines that the state is the second time-saving state after the big win C13 (S34307: Yes), or if the processing of S34307 determines that the state is the second time-saving state after winning the time-saving win (S34308: Yes), it determines whether the notified flag 223laa is set to on (S34331), and if it determines that the flag is set to on (S34331: Yes), it sets the notified flag 223laa to off (S34332), and executes the processing of S34306, which is the same as the above-mentioned time-saving state presentation setting processing 13 (see S9091 in FIG. 460), and ends this processing.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of S34331 that the notified flag 223laa is not set to ON (S34331: No), the process of S34332 is skipped, and the process of S34306, which is the same as the time-saving state presentation setting process 13 (see S9091 in FIG. 460) described above, is executed, and this process ends. By configuring in this manner, the notified flag 223laa can be reliably set to OFF.

Next, the processing contents of the normal mode performance setting process 13a (S34402a) will be described with reference to FIG. 470. FIG. 470 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the normal mode performance setting process 13a (S34402a). This normal mode performance setting process 13a (S34402a) differs from the normal mode performance setting process 13 in the thirteenth control example described above (see S34402 in FIG. 463) in that the processing contents for setting the performance mode when a special variation (15-second variation) is executed in normal mode are different, but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted.

When normal mode performance setting process 13a (S34402a) is executed, first, the same processes of S34501 to S34507 as normal mode performance setting process 13 in the thirteenth control example described above (see S34402 in FIG. 463) are executed, and if the process of S34507 determines that there is a 15-second fluctuation (special fluctuation) (S34507: Yes), it is determined whether the notified flag 223laa is set to on (S34531).

In the processing of S34531, if it is determined that the notified flag 223laa is not set to on (S34531: No), since the ceiling preparation mode for notifying the player that the first time-saving state is set has not been set, the game state suggestion effect selection 13a table 222laa is referenced to determine the presentation mode of the suggestion effect (game state suggestion effect) (S34532), and then it is determined whether the presentation mode determined this time is the ceiling preparation mode (S34533). If it is determined that it is the ceiling preparation mode (S34533: Yes), the notified flag 223laa is set to on (S34534).

Then, the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc is read (S34535), the number of times remaining until the read value reaches 500, i.e., the number of times remaining until the condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met, is calculated (S34536), a display command is set to show the calculated remaining number of times (S34537), and this process ends. By receiving the display command set by the process of S34537 on the display control device 114 side, the remaining number of times until the ceiling is reached is displayed in the small display area Dm7 on the display screen shown in FIG. 464(b).

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the remaining number calculated by the processing of S34536 is set in a dedicated counter (remaining number counter), and each time a special pattern lottery is executed, the set value is subtracted by 1, and a display command to show the value after subtraction is output to the display control device 114. As a result, when the ceiling preparation mode is set, the value indicating the remaining number of times until the ceiling is gradually subtracted each time a special pattern lottery is executed, making it easy for the player to know that the time when the ceiling bonus will be awarded is approaching.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S34531 that the notified flag 223laa is set to on (S34531: Yes), the ceiling preparation mode has already been set, so the processing for executing the game state indication presentation is skipped and the processing proceeds to S34535.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of S34533 that a presentation mode other than the ceiling preparation mode has been determined (S34533: No), since a new game state suggestion presentation can be executed, the processing of S34534 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S34535.

As explained above, in the first variant of the thirteenth control example, the probability of winning the time-saving lottery is set to a low probability (1/500), the time-saving lottery can be executed only in the normal state, and if the time-saving lottery is won, a first time-saving state is set with a number of time-saving times greater than the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed (number of times it gets stuck), which is the condition for granting the ceiling bonus, and if the time-saving lottery is won in the normal state and the first time-saving state is set, the first time-saving state will continue until the condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met, unless a jackpot is won.

By configuring it in this way, players are given advantageous bonuses in the ceiling bonus as an added value for winning the time-saving lottery, which makes it possible for players to enthusiastically play with the aim of winning the ceiling bonus.

In the first modified example of the thirteenth control example, the time-saving lottery is not executed during the first time-saving state, but the time-saving lottery can be executed during the first time-saving state. If the time-saving lottery is won during the first time-saving state, the first time-saving state is newly set with a number of time-saving times greater than the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed (the number of times it gets stuck), which is the condition for granting the ceiling privilege. The content of the privilege granted as the ceiling privilege (the number of time-saving times) may be different depending on the number of time-saving wins until the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met. In this case, it is preferable to configure the number of time-saving times granted as the ceiling privilege to be greater the more the number of time-saving wins. By configuring in this way, the added value of winning the time-saving lottery can be further increased. It is also possible to configure the number of time-saving times granted as the ceiling privilege to be smaller.

Furthermore, in the first variant of this thirteenth control example, as in the thirteenth control example described above, the number of times of getting stuck is configured to be continuously updated (incremented) even when the normal state switches to the first time-saving state, but without being limited to this, the number of times of getting stuck may be configured to be reset when the game state switches from the normal state to the first time-saving state, or when the game state switches from the first time-saving state to the normal state.

Even when configured in this way, in the first variant of this thirteenth control example, when a time-saving win occurs in the normal state, the first time-saving state is set to a number of time-saving times greater than the number of times the special pattern is drawn (500 stuck wins) at which the ceiling bonus is awarded, so that the ceiling bonus can be awarded reliably.

In the first variant of this thirteenth control example, when a time-saving win occurs in the normal state, a first time-saving state is set with a number of time-saving times greater than the number of times a special symbol is drawn that will grant the ceiling privilege (500 times of stuck play). However, without being limited to this, it may be possible to set a first time-saving state with a number of time-saving times (e.g., 100 times, 150 times, etc.) smaller than the number of times a special symbol is drawn that will grant the ceiling privilege (500 times of stuck play) in some cases when a time-saving win occurs in the normal state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine whether or not it is confirmed that the ceiling privilege will be granted during the first time-saving state at the time when the first time-saving state is set, depending on the timing of winning the time-saving state in the normal state (the number of times the player gets stuck when the time-saving state is won) and the type of time-saving state that is set based on the time-saving state win. In this case, it is preferable to configure the following as the effects executed in the normal state: a suggestion effect that can suggest the expectation that the first time-saving state that is set when the time-saving state is won will continue until the ceiling is reached, based on the selection ratio of each time-saving state type in which the first time-saving state is set when the time-saving state is won, and a suggestion effect that can suggest the expectation that the first time-saving state that is currently set will continue until the ceiling is reached, when the time-saving state is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to have the player play while predicting whether the result of the time-saving lottery executed in the normal state will be advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this first modified example, during the period when the left-hand play state is being executed, a game state suggestion display can be executed to allow the player to predict whether the currently set game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who has been playing in the left-hand play state for a long time without winning a jackpot to predict the currently set play state, and to make the player choose whether or not to continue playing in consideration of the remaining time until the ceiling bonus granting condition is met and the current play state. Also, even in a situation where the remaining time until the ceiling bonus granting condition is met is long, if a play state suggestion effect is executed in a presentation mode indicating that the first time-saving state is likely to be set, it is possible to make the player play with the aim of obtaining an advantageous bonus, and therefore it is easier to improve the operation of the pachinko machine 10 compared to a case where a presentation to suggest the currently set play state is not executed during the period in which the left-hand play state is being executed.

<Regarding the modified effect in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example>
Next, a modified example of the effect executed in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example described with reference to Fig. 464 (a) will be described. In the first modified example of the thirteenth control example described above, in the left-hand hitting game state, a game state suggestion effect for suggesting to the player whether the currently set game state is the normal state or the first time-saving state was configured to be executable.

Then, as a game state suggestion effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 464(a) is displayed. As described above, in the game state suggestion effect executed in the first modified example of the 13th control example, the game state suggestion effect is executed in a manner that makes it easier for the player to understand the currently set game state as the number of special symbol draws (number of stuck times) that is the condition for granting the ceiling privilege approaches, which makes it easier for the player to continue playing. However, when the number of special symbol draws (number of stuck times) that is the condition for granting the ceiling privilege is far away, the game state suggestion effect tends to result in an effect that makes it difficult for the player to understand which game state is set (an effect in which the area 862d with a "?" mark at the position corresponding to the indicator 863 stops), which reduces the effect of the effect.

In addition, even when a game state suggestion effect that results in a performance result that makes it difficult for the player to understand which game state has been set (a performance result in which area 862d with a "?" mark at the position corresponding to indicator 863 stops) is executed multiple times in succession, the same performance is simply executed repeatedly, resulting in a problem that the executed performance becomes monotonous.

In contrast, in this modified presentation, part of the presentation mode of the game state suggestion presentation (the mode of the roulette 861) is made different from that in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example described above. Specifically, in this modified presentation, an "indicator" is provided in place of the area 862d marked with a "?" in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example described above. This indicator has ten scale marks, and is configured so that the display mode can be changed so that the value increases in units of one scale, starting from one end of area 862d (the side adjacent to area 862c).

When "?" is selected as the presentation result of the game status indication presentation, if area 862d with "indicator" attached is located (displayed) at a position corresponding to indicator 863, the "indicator" attached to area 862d rises by one notch, and if the display state after the change of the "indicator" rises to the maximum value set on the other end side of area 862d (the side adjacent to area 862d), the presentation result is the same as when area 862a with "preparation" attached is located (displayed) at a position corresponding to indicator 863.

In other words, a storage means is provided that stores the number of times a specific effect (a performance result in which a "?" is displayed) has been achieved as a result of a specific effect (a performance result in which a "?" is displayed) that has been executed during a specific period (the period until the ceiling bonus is awarded), and the performance mode of the specific effect (a performance result in which a "?" has been displayed) is made variable based on the information stored in the storage means (the number of times a specific performance result has been achieved). This makes it possible to prevent the same performance mode from being executed repeatedly, which would result in a decrease in the performance effect.

Furthermore, when the number of times stored in the storage means reaches a predetermined number, the display area for showing the specific presentation result can be changed to a display area for showing another presentation result ("preparation") that is more advantageous to the player than the specific presentation result. Therefore, the more game state suggestion presentations that result in a specific presentation result are executed in succession, the more frequently game state suggestion presentations that result in other presentation results can be executed, and the player can be made to look forward to the game state suggestion presentations being executed repeatedly.

In this modified presentation, the presentation result of the game status suggestion presentation indicated by the area 862d marked with the "indicator" is changed when the "indicator" rises to its maximum value. However, without being limited to this, for example, the range of the area marked with the "indicator" where the value has already risen may be displayed as an area for showing other presentation results. In this case, the area showing other presentation results gradually expands each time the value indicated by the "indicator" rises, so the player can expect the game status suggestion presentation to be executed repeatedly.

In addition, in the first modified example of the thirteenth control example described above and this modified presentation, one type of display mode (see FIG. 464(a)) is shown as the display mode of the roulette 961 that is first displayed during the game status suggestion presentation, but without being limited to this, the display mode of the roulette 961 that is first displayed during the game status suggestion presentation may be changed based on the number of times the game is stuck (the number of times the special symbol changes remaining until the ceiling bonus is awarded) at the time the game status suggestion presentation is first executed. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to allow the player to predict the remaining time until the ceiling bonus is awarded based on the display mode of the roulette 961 that is displayed before the presentation result of the game status suggestion presentation is displayed.

<Regarding another technical idea related to the 13th control example>
In the above-mentioned thirteenth control example and the first variant of the thirteenth control example, a third time-saving state with a different number of time-saving times can be set as a different ceiling privilege depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted, but a different privilege may be granted as the content of the ceiling privilege granted to the player, and for example, the type of special pattern lottery that is likely to be executed during the time-saving state may be configured to be different depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted. For example, when a ceiling privilege is granted in a normal state, a time-saving state is set in which the first special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed than the second special pattern lottery, and when a ceiling privilege is granted in the first time-saving state, a time-saving state is set in which the second special pattern lottery is more likely to be executed than the first special pattern lottery.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the results of the special symbol lottery executed during the period when the ceiling bonus is granted, rather than varying the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed during the period when the ceiling bonus is granted, depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling bonus is granted.

As another ceiling privilege, the length of the period during which the electric device 1640 is open may be configured to be different depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted. In this case, for example, the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery during the time-saving state may be set to be different depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation during the time-saving state may be set to be different depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted, or the length of the period during which the electric device 1640 is in the open state during a normal symbol winning game during the time-saving state may be set to be different depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted. By configuring in this way, the number of prize balls paid out during the ceiling privilege can be made different depending on the content of the ceiling privilege. Furthermore, in this case, a time-saving state in which the number of prize balls paid out during the ceiling privilege is greater than the number of game balls shot during the ceiling privilege may be set as part of the privilege granted as the ceiling privilege.

In addition, if a time-saving state in which the number of winning balls paid out during a ceiling bonus is greater than the number of balls fired during the ceiling bonus is configured to be able to be awarded as a ceiling bonus, the rate at which the number of balls increases can be determined according to the number of times the player is stuck before the ceiling bonus is awarded. Since the more times the player is stuck before the ceiling bonus is awarded, the more balls are used before the ceiling bonus is awarded, it is good to configure the system so that during the ceiling bonus, about 30% of the balls used before the ceiling bonus is awarded can be increased as balls in hand. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to make it easier for players to play with the aim of winning the ceiling bonus.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned 13th control example and the first modified example of the 13th control example, a different ceiling privilege is granted depending on the game state set at the time when the ceiling privilege is granted, and a privilege that changes the control processing content of the main control device 110 (a privilege that sets a different number of time-saving times) can be granted. However, without being limited to this, a privilege that can be granted within the control processing range of the sound lamp control device 113 may be set as the ceiling privilege. For example, as a variable performance executed to show the result of the special pattern lottery, it may be configured to make it easier to execute a premium performance that appears less frequently when a ceiling privilege is granted than when it is not granted, and in a pachinko machine 10 having a setting function that can set different jackpot probabilities in multiple stages, it may be configured to make it easier to execute a setting suggestion performance that can suggest the set setting value to the player when a ceiling privilege is granted than when it is not granted. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to motivate players to play a pachinko machine 10 to which a ceiling privilege is granted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 13th control example, the normal state and the first time-saving state are frequently switched until the ceiling privilege is awarded, so that, as in the first modified example of the above-mentioned 13th control example, a presentation (game state suggestion presentation) capable of suggesting (informing) the player of the set game state is not executed during the period until the ceiling privilege is awarded. However, without being limited to this, a presentation (game state suggestion presentation) capable of suggesting (informing) the player of the set game state may be executed. In this case, if it is determined that the same game state has been set continuously for a predetermined period of time, it is preferable to configure it so that the fact can be notified. By configuring it in this way, for example, it is possible to easily identify a player who is playing illegally so as not to end the first time-saving state in which a privilege advantageous to the player is awarded as a ceiling privilege.

<Regarding the 14th control example>
Next, the present 14th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 471 to Fig. 480. The pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 13th control example is configured to be able to give a special benefit to a player when the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed (the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed) meets a predetermined condition. By configuring in this way, a special benefit can be given to a player who has played a game in which a special symbol lottery is executed for a long time, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

However, when the number of times (the number of times of losing) that special symbol lotteries are executed consecutively and the lottery result is not a jackpot (a miss), reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 500 times), the ceiling bonus is awarded. This means that it is easy for players to predict when the ceiling bonus will be awarded, and there is a problem that the operation of the pachinko machine 10 decreases during the period when the ceiling bonus is unlikely to be awarded.

In contrast, the 14th control example is configured to grant the ceiling bonus when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met, and then the time-saving lottery has a high probability (900/1000) of winning, and the second condition is met (a losing win). This allows for irregularity in the timing at which the ceiling bonus is granted, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 14th control example, if the period from when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met until the second condition is met exceeds a predetermined period (200 special chart fluctuations), a bonus that is more advantageous to the player (second ceiling bonus) can be granted.

By configuring it in this way, even if the period from when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met until the second condition is met becomes long, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

<About the performance content in the 14th control example>
First, referring to Fig. 471 and Fig. 472, the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this 14th control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this 14th control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 13th control example in that a ceiling activation period is set as the period from when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of stuck time) is satisfied to when the second condition (missing the time-saving lottery) is satisfied, and during the ceiling activation period, an effect (ceiling activation mode) is executable that indicates that winning the time-saving lottery by failing will be a lottery result that is advantageous to the player.

Figure 471 (a) shows an example of a display screen that is displayed when a ceiling activation period is set, and Figure 471 (b) shows an example of a display screen for the ceiling activation mode that is executed during the ceiling activation period.

As shown in FIG. 471(a), when the number of special symbol lotteries executed since the end of the previous big win reaches 500 and the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met (when the 500th special symbol variation is stopped and displayed), the main display area Dm displays the text "Entering ceiling activation mode! Significantly increased probability of time-saving symbol stopping" to notify the player that the ceiling activation mode will be set from the next special symbol variation (the 501st special symbol variation). In addition, the small display area Dm4 formed at the bottom right of the main display area Dm displays the text "Continue hitting with the left hand" as a guide to inform the player that the playing method during the ceiling activation mode is left hitting.

Here, conventional pachinko machines 10 are known to execute a game that causes the player to switch the game method (for example, a game that causes the player to switch from left-handed play to right-handed play) in accordance with the timing of the switch in the presentation mode (the content of the presentation to be executed). In this case, a method is used in which a notification is issued to inform the player that the game method will be switched, thereby allowing the player to easily understand the switch in game method.

In the current situation where such pachinko machines 10 have become mainstream, if the presentation mode (the content of the presentation to be executed) is switched without switching the game method, there is a problem that even if a notification to inform the player that the game method is switching is not executed, the player may switch the game method and end up playing a game that is disadvantageous to the player.

In response to this, in the present thirteenth control example, as shown in FIG. 471(a), a notification mode is configured to notify the player that the same game method will continue. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being forced to play a game that is disadvantageous to him or her.

The secondary display area Ds displays the comment "When the time-saving symbols line up, the time-saving mode will begin!!" to guide the player on how to play in the ceiling activation mode, and the comment "If you get more than 700 starts...a big chance!?" to suggest the existence of additional bonuses that may be awarded in the ceiling activation mode.

When the ceiling activation mode is set, as shown in FIG. 471(b), when three cards are displayed in a specific combination on the active line LZ, a variable presentation is executed to indicate that the corresponding bonus (jackpot, time-saving) will be awarded. In this control example, multiple card rows are formed on each of the left line LL, middle line CL, and right line RL, including at least losing cards (LL3, CL3, RL3) corresponding to a "miss," V cards (LL1, CL1, RL1) corresponding to a "jackpot," and time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) corresponding to a "ceiling bonus," and a variable presentation is executed in which each card row is displayed from top to bottom.

When three time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) displayed in each symbol row are stopped and displayed on the valid line LZ, it is possible to notify that a time-saving state will be granted as a ceiling bonus, and when three V cards (LL1, CL1, RL1) displayed in each symbol row are stopped and displayed on the valid line LZ, it is possible to notify that a bonus based on winning a jackpot will be granted.

As mentioned above, the condition for the ceiling privilege to be awarded during the ceiling activation mode is that the time-saving lottery does not win (a miss wins), so if the result of the special pattern lottery is a complete miss (no win in either the jackpot or the time-saving), an effect will be executed in which the time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) displayed in each pattern row are stopped and displayed three times on the active line LZ.

Figure 472(a) shows an example of a display screen during super ceiling activation mode, which indicates that the length of the ceiling activation period has exceeded a predetermined period (200 special chart changes) and that the second ceiling bonus can be awarded, and Figure 472(b) shows an example of a display screen when the player loses the time-saving lottery in the ceiling activation mode but wins.

As shown in FIG. 472(a), when the ceiling activation mode is set and a special symbol lottery is executed for a predetermined period, if the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are met, the super heaven activation mode is displayed to indicate that the player will be granted the second ceiling privilege, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal ceiling privilege. Then, the secondary display area Ds displays the comment "The time-saving mode is powered up to super time-saving mode" to indicate that the third time-saving mode, which has a greater number of time-saving times, will be set as the ceiling privilege, and the time-saving card (LL2, CL2, RL2) is displayed in a display mode with the character "super" added.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the conditions for granting the second ceiling bonus have been met.

If the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the ceiling activation mode is a complete miss (see small display area Dm1 in FIG. 472(b)), as shown in FIG. 472(b), the time-saving cards (LL2, CL2, RL2) displayed in each symbol row are displayed stopped in three on the active line LZ, and a performance is executed in which character 809, which is displayed when the ceiling privilege is granted, congratulates the player on the granting of the ceiling privilege.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 14th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the present 14th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 473 to Fig. 475. The pachinko machine 10 in the present 14th control example is different from the above-mentioned 13th control example in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is provided with a time-saving random number 14 table 202me instead of the time-saving random number 13 table 202le, and a time-saving type selection 14 table 202mf instead of the time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf, but is otherwise the same.

The configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 differs in that a third ceiling standby flag 203ma has been newly added as shown in FIG. 473(b), but is otherwise the same. The configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 differs in that a ceiling activation mode flag 223ma has been newly added as shown in FIG. 475. The configuration is otherwise the same, and so a description of the same configuration will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 474(a), the time-saving random number 14 table 202me differs from the time-saving random number 13 table 202le (see FIG. 444(c)) in that it changes the probability of winning the time-saving lottery in the time-saving lottery. Specifically, out of the possible range of "0-999" for the value of the first winning random number counter C1, the judgment value for winning the time-saving lottery is set for the range "100-999". In other words, this 14th control example is configured so that when the time-saving lottery is executed, there is a high probability (probability of 900/1000) of winning the time-saving lottery.

The time-saving type selection 14 table 202mf also differs from the time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf (see FIG. 446(a)) in that it has a ceiling 14 table 202mf2 instead of the ceiling 13 table 202lf2. Here, the contents of the ceiling 14 table 202mf2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 474(b). FIG. 474(b) is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the ceiling 14 table 202mf2.

As shown in FIG. 474(b), in the ceiling 14 table 202mf2, the value set in the time-saving counter 203h varies depending on the number of times the player has been stuck at the time the ceiling bonus (third time-saving state) is set. It is stipulated that when the number of times the player has been stuck is up to 700, the second time-saving state (time-saving count 300 times) is set as the ceiling bonus (first ceiling bonus), and when the number of times the player has been stuck is more than 700, the second time-saving state (time-saving count 1000 times) is set as the ceiling bonus (second ceiling bonus).

In this way, the longer the period until the ceiling bonus (third time-saving state) is set, the more advantageous bonuses are awarded to the player. This prevents a significant decrease in motivation for players who have not won a jackpot for a long time.

The third ceiling wait flag 203ma is a flag for indicating that the number of times a player has been stuck on a jackpot has exceeded 700 times, and is set to ON when the number of times the player has been stuck on a jackpot has exceeded 700 times. When setting the ceiling bonus, the setting status of the third ceiling wait flag 203ma is determined, and if it is determined that the flag is set to ON, a ceiling bonus (second ceiling bonus) corresponding to the number of times the player has been stuck on a jackpot of 700 times is set. When the ceiling bonus is awarded or when a jackpot is won, the flag is set to OFF.

The ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is a flag for indicating that the ceiling activation mode is in progress, and is set to on when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met. The presentation style in the normal mode is set according to the setting status of the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma (see S34571 in FIG. 480).

<Regarding control process of main control device 110 in the 14th control example>
Next, the contents of the control process of the main control device 110 executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 14th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 476 and Fig. 477. In the 14th control example, the process for determining whether the ceiling award condition is met and the process for setting the third time-saving state that is set based on the fact that the ceiling award condition is met are different from the above-mentioned 13th control process. Specifically, the difference is that the ceiling determination process 14 (see S38071 in Fig. 476) is executed instead of the ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in Fig. 452), and the time-saving setting process 14 (see S30274 in Fig. 477) is executed instead of the time-saving setting process 13 (see S30254 in Fig. 455).

In this 14th control example, the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are different from those in the 13th control example described above. Specifically, the ceiling bonus (third time-saving state) is set when both the first condition (number of times of stuck wins) and the second condition (no win in the time-saving win) are met. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to randomly set the timing for granting the ceiling bonus, compared to when the ceiling bonus is granted based on the number of times (number of times of stuck wins) that a special pattern lottery has been executed and a winning result has reached a predetermined number (500 times).

Furthermore, the system is configured so that the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege can be set to a normal first condition (500 times stuck) and a special first condition (700 times stuck) that is set after the normal first condition, and if the special first condition is fulfilled without granting the ceiling privilege based on the special pattern lottery that is executed when the normal first condition is fulfilled, the system is configured so that the second ceiling privilege (third time-saving state (1000 times time-saving)) can be granted, which is more advantageous to the player than the case where the ceiling privilege (third time-saving state (300 times time-saving)) is granted when only the normal first condition is fulfilled.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible for a player who has been playing for a long time without winning the time-saving lottery that is normally executed when the first condition is met, i.e., playing without the ceiling bonus being awarded, to continue playing without losing motivation to play.

In the fourteenth control example, a ceiling award (second ceiling award) that is more advantageous to the player is granted when the special first condition is met, compared to when the ceiling award is granted when only the normal first condition is met. However, without being limited to this, a ceiling award (second ceiling award) that is more advantageous to the player may be granted when the ceiling award is granted when only the normal first condition is met, compared to when the ceiling award is granted when the special first condition is met. By configuring in this way, the player can be more motivated to play in the hope of being granted a ceiling award during the period from when the normal first condition is met to when the special first condition is met.

It may also be possible to configure the period during which only the normal first condition is met and the period during which the special first condition is met to be alternately set; for example, it may be configured so that when the last digit of the number of times of stuck spins is between "1 and 5", only the normal first condition is met, and when it is between "6 and 0", the special first condition is met. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to keep the player interested in when the second condition will be met (whether the time-saving lottery will result in a loss) after the number of times of stuck spins exceeds 500, at which point the normal first condition is first met.

Furthermore, in this fourteenth control example, the determination of whether or not the time-saving feature has been won is executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery for updating the number of times the player has been stuck. In other words, the special symbol lottery is executed, and the element related to the first condition (the number of times the player has been stuck) is updated, and the establishment or non-establishment of the second condition (the result of the time-saving lottery) is determined. By configuring in this way, it is not possible to execute a game for establishing the second condition without updating the element related to the first condition (the number of times the player has been stuck), so that it is possible to prevent only the determination of the second condition from being repeatedly executed in a situation in which a ceiling privilege advantageous to the player is granted (a situation in which the special first condition is established). Also, it is possible to prevent only the determination of the second condition from being repeatedly executed in a situation in which a ceiling privilege disadvantageous to the player is granted (a situation in which only the normal first condition is established), and thus prevent a ceiling privilege disadvantageous to the player from being granted with a high probability.

First, the processing contents of ceiling determination process 14 (S38071) will be explained with reference to FIG. 476. FIG. 476 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of ceiling determination process 14 (S38071). Ceiling determination process 14 (S38071) differs from the above-mentioned ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in FIG. 452) in that it determines whether the special first condition (700 times stuck) has been met, and in that the processing contents when the special first condition is met are different. The processing contents are otherwise the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

When the ceiling determination process 14 (S38071) is executed, the processes of S38101 to S38109 are executed, which are the same as the above-mentioned ceiling determination process 13 (see S38051 in FIG. 452). Then, in the process of S38104, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol selection count counter 2231c is not 500 (not the special symbol selection for the 500th time of the combination) (S38104: No), it is next determined whether the value of the special symbol selection count counter 2231c is 700 (is it the special symbol selection for the 700th time of the combination) (S38171).

If it is determined in the process of S38171 that the number is not 700 (S38171: No), the process proceeds to S38105 and ends this process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number is 700, the special first condition is met (S38171: Yes), so the third ceiling wait flag 203ma is set to on (S38172), the second ceiling wait flag 203lc is set to off (S38173), the process proceeds to S38108 and ends this process.

When the second ceiling wait flag 203lc or the third ceiling wait flag 203ma is set to on, the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, and the time-saving type (number of time-saving times) according to the type of ceiling wait flag that is set to on is set as the time-saving state. In other words, in this fourteenth control example, different types of ceiling wait flags are set to on depending on the value of the special symbol lottery count counter 223lc, so that different types of time-saving states are set as the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, different time-saving states can be set depending on the number of times the player gets stuck, so it is possible to provide a game in which the player does not quickly become bored with the game.

In addition, in this 14th control example, if a player wins a special pattern lottery a predetermined number of times in a row (if the lottery results are unfavorable to the player in a row), the ceiling bonus can be awarded (the ceiling wait flag is set to ON). However, this is not limited to this, and the ceiling wait flag (special ceiling wait flag) may be set to ON, for example, after the end of a jackpot game or for a predetermined period of time after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

By configuring it in this way, when a special period (special ceiling wait flag) is set as the play period of the pachinko machine 10, a period can be set in which the ceiling bonus is more likely to be awarded, making it easier to provide players with a more advantageous play experience than when other periods are set.

Next, the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 14 (S30274) will be described with reference to FIG. 477. FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 14 (S30274). This time-saving setting process 14 (S30274) differs from the above-mentioned time-saving setting process 13 (see S30254 in FIG. 455) in that the ceiling bonus is not awarded if the time-saving win is won in the target special pattern lottery, that processing for the case where the third ceiling wait flag 203ma is set to on has been added, and that the content of the bonus awarded when the first ceiling wait flag 203lb is set to on has been changed, but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

When time-saving setting process 14 (S30274) is executed, first it is determined whether the result of this lottery is a time-saving winning (S8351), and if it is determined that the result is a time-saving winning (S8351: Yes), the same processes of S8352 to S8354 as those of time-saving setting process 13 described above (see S30254 in FIG. 455) are executed, and this process ends.

In other words, in the time-saving setting process 13 of the thirteenth control example described above (see S30254 in FIG. 455), priority is given to the ceiling bonus award, which is more likely to award a bonus advantageous to the player, than the result of the time-saving lottery, whereas in this fourteenth control example, if the result of the time-saving lottery is a time-saving win, priority is given to processing based on the time-saving win over the ceiling bonus award.

By configuring it in this way, even if a ceiling privilege can be granted (a state in which various ceiling standby flags are set to ON), as long as the lottery results of the special pattern lottery continue to be time-saving winning, the ceiling privilege will not be granted (it will be difficult to grant). Therefore, since the timing at which the ceiling privilege is granted can be made random even after a state in which a ceiling privilege can be granted (a state in which various ceiling standby flags are set to ON) is established, it is possible to have the player continue to play for a long time in the hope of being granted the ceiling privilege.

In the fourteenth control example, when a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery, the ceiling bonus is always not awarded, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a specific time-saving type is set as the time-saving type to be set when a time-saving win is won, the process for awarding the ceiling bonus may be executed with priority over the process for setting the time-saving state based on the time-saving win. By configuring in this way, the conditions for awarding the ceiling bonus can be made more complex, and the timing from when a state in which the ceiling bonus can be awarded (a state in which various ceiling standby flags are set to on) is set to when the ceiling bonus is awarded can be made more random.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to execute a process that combines the results of the time-saving lottery and the granting of a ceiling bonus. For example, if a specific time-saving type is set as the type of time-saving type that is set when the time-saving lottery is won, a more favorable ceiling bonus may be set than the ceiling bonus that is set when the time-saving lottery is not won. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a gameplay that combines the results of the time-saving lottery and the granting of a ceiling bonus.

Returning to FIG. 477, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S8351, if it is determined that the time-saving has not been won (S8351: No), it is determined whether the first ceiling waiting flag 203lb is set to ON (S38351). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S38351: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 300 (S38374), the first ceiling waiting flag 203lb is set to OFF (S38353), the third time-saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S38354), information regarding this time-saving lottery is cleared (S38355), a state command including information indicating the third time-saving state and information indicating the number of time-savings is set (S38356), the value of the special drawing counter 203la is cleared (S38357), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S38351, if it is determined that the first ceiling wait flag 203lb is not set to on (S38351: No), then it is determined whether the second ceiling wait flag 203lc is set to on (S38358), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S38358: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 300 (S38359), the second ceiling wait flag 203lc is set to off (S38360), the third time-saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S38354), information regarding this time-saving lottery is cleared (S38355), a state command including information indicating the third time-saving state and information indicating the number of time-saving times is set (S38356), the value of the special chart lottery counter 203la is cleared (S38357), and this process is terminated.

Then, in the processing of S38358, if it is determined that the second ceiling wait flag 203lc is not set on (S38358: No), then it is determined whether the third ceiling wait flag 203ma is set on (S38371), and if it is determined that it is set on (S38371: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 10,000 (S38372), the third ceiling wait flag 203ma is set to off (S38373), the third time-saving state is set in the game status storage area 203g (S38354), information regarding this time-saving lottery is cleared (S38355), a status command including information indicating the third time-saving state and information indicating the number of time-saving times is set (S38356), the value of the special chart lottery counter 203la is cleared (S38357), and this processing is terminated. Furthermore, if it is determined in the processing of S38371 that the third ceiling wait flag 203ma is not set to ON (S38371: No), that is, if it is determined that the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are not met based on the special pattern lottery executed this time, this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to Figs. 478 to 480, the control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 14th control example will be described. The control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 14th control example differs from the 13th control example described above in the processing related to the period presentation (ceiling activation mode) for notifying the player of the period from when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 stuck times) is met to when the ceiling bonus is actually granted (until the second condition, which is met without winning the time-saving bonus, is met), and the processing related to the suggestion presentation for suggesting to the player the results of the time-saving bonus lottery during the ceiling activation mode.

Specifically, the difference is that instead of the status command reception process 13 (see S34251 in FIG. 459), a status command reception process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478) is executed, and instead of the normal mode performance setting process 13 (see S34402 in FIG. 463), a normal mode performance setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480) is executed. The rest of the processing is the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the contents of the status command reception process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478) will be explained with reference to FIG. 478. FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the status command reception process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478). In this state command receiving process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478), the state command receiving process 13 (see S34251 in FIG. 459) executed in the above-mentioned 13th control example is different in that, as the process executed when it is determined that the game state has been changed to the time-saving state, the time-saving state presentation setting process 14 (see S39091 in FIG. 479) is executed instead of the time-saving state presentation setting process 13 (S9091 in FIG. 460) as the process executed, and in that the process is configured to be able to execute a process of determining whether the second ceiling waiting flag 203lc is set to ON or the third ceiling waiting flag 203ma is set to ON in order to execute a period presentation (ceiling activation mode) for notifying the player of the period from when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 times stuck) is established until the ceiling bonus is actually granted (until the second condition that is established without winning the time-saving bonus is established). Otherwise, it is the same, and the description of the same processing contents will be omitted.

When the status command reception process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478) is executed, the same processes of S9001 to S9094 as the status command reception process 13 (see S34251 in FIG. 459) executed in the thirteenth control example described above are executed. Then, if it is determined in the process of S9005 that the time-saving state has been changed (S9005: Yes), the time-saving state presentation setting process 14 is executed (S39091) and the process proceeds to S9093. The contents of this time-saving state presentation setting process 14 (S39091) will be described later with reference to FIG. 479.

In addition, in the processing of S9093, if it is determined that there is no information indicating the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la (S9093: No), or if it is determined that there is information indicating the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la (S9093: Yes) in the processing of S9093, and the value corresponding to the received value is set as the value of the special drawing lottery count counter 223lc (S9094), that is, when the processing for synchronizing the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la measured by the main control unit 110 with the value of the special drawing lottery count counter 223lc is completed, it is next determined whether the received status command has information indicating the second ceiling standby or the third ceiling standby (information indicating that the second ceiling standby flag 203lc or the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to on) (S9095), and if it is determined that it does have such information (S9095: Yes), the ceiling activation mode in progress flag 223ma is set to on (S9096), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9095 that the received status command does not contain information indicating second ceiling standby or third ceiling standby (information indicating that the second ceiling standby flag 203lc or the third ceiling standby flag 203ma is set to on) (S9095: No), the process of S9096 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In this way, when the status command reception process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478) is executed, it is determined whether the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met (the number of stuck times is 500 or more) based on the information contained in the status command output from the main control unit 110, and if the first condition is met, the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON.

When the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to on, a special presentation is executed to notify the player that the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus is currently met (the number of stuck times is 500 or more). This makes it possible to clearly notify the player that the ceiling bonus is likely to be granted (a state in which it is more likely to be granted than when the first condition is not met), and this makes it possible for the player to play with enthusiasm in the hope of receiving the ceiling bonus.

Next, referring to FIG. 479, the control process of the time-saving state presentation setting process 14 (S39091) executed in the state command receiving process 14 (see S34271 in FIG. 478) will be described. FIG. 479 is a flowchart showing the process contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 14 (S39091). This time-saving state presentation setting process 14 (S39091) differs from the time-saving state presentation setting process 13 (see S9091 in FIG. 460) executed in the thirteenth control example described above in that when a ceiling bonus (third time-saving state) is awarded (set), a process is added to set the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma to off to indicate that the first condition for awarding the ceiling bonus is met. Other than that, it is the same, and the description of the same content will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 479, when the time-saving state presentation setting process 14 (S39091) is executed, the same processes of S34301 to S34309 as the time-saving state presentation setting process 13 (see S9091 in FIG. 460) executed in the above-mentioned thirteenth control example are executed. Then, in the process of S34305, if it is determined that the third time-saving state has been set (a ceiling bonus has been granted) (S34305: Yes), it is determined whether the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to on (S34371), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S34371: Yes), the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to off (S34372), and the process proceeds to S34306. Furthermore, if it is determined in the process of S34371 that the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is not set to on (S34371: No), the process of S34372 is skipped and the process proceeds to S34306.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma remains set to on even though a ceiling bonus has been awarded, resulting in the execution of an effect indicating that the ceiling activation mode is in progress (see FIG. 471(b)), which is difficult for the player to understand.

In addition, in this 14th control example, as in the above-mentioned 13th control example, a right-hitting game state (third time-saving state) for a predetermined period of time can be granted as a ceiling privilege, and a privilege in which the degree of advantage granted to the player is the same as the ceiling privilege (second time-saving state in which the right-hitting game state is set) can be granted based on the results of a special pattern lottery. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set the right-hitting game state before the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (number of times of getting stuck) is met, making it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the right-hitting game state (ceiling privilege) will be granted.

In this fourteenth control example, when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met, the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to on, making it possible to execute a period effect (ceiling activation mode effect) during which there is a high possibility of granting the ceiling privilege. However, when the right-hit game state is set by another trigger (winning the jackpot C13, or winning the time-saving state which sets the second time-saving state), the ceiling activation mode effect is not executed, so there is a problem that when the right-hit game state is set, the trigger is predicted by the player depending on whether the ceiling activation mode effect is executed or not.

To solve this problem, for example, a configuration may be made in which a predetermined lottery is executed when the first condition for granting a ceiling privilege is met, and when the lottery result is a specific result, the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON. By configuring in this way, when the ceiling activation mode presentation is executed, the player can easily understand that the right-hit game state has been set because the ceiling privilege has been granted. However, since it is possible to prevent the ceiling activation mode presentation from being executed even when the first condition for granting a ceiling privilege is met, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to predict the trigger when the right-hit game state is set than in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 14th control example.

In addition, the information (lottery information) contained in the reserved and stored lottery right for the special pattern lottery (special pattern reservation) may be configured to be able to be determined in advance (read ahead) before the special pattern lottery is executed, and if the result of that pre-determination contains information indicating the special pattern lottery result for which a right-hand play state is set, the ceiling activation mode presentation may be executed using a presentation period that includes at least a portion of the period until the special pattern lottery is executed, which contains information indicating the special pattern lottery result for which the right-hand play state is set.

By configuring it in this way, even if the right-hit game state is set by a trigger other than the awarding of the ceiling bonus (winning the jackpot C13, or winning the time-saving mode that sets the second time-saving state), it is possible to execute the ceiling activation mode presentation, making it more difficult for the player to predict the trigger when the right-hit game state is set than in the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th control example described above.

In addition, in this case, when the right-hand play state is set by a trigger other than the awarding of the ceiling privilege (winning the jackpot C13, or winning the time-saving state that sets the second time-saving state), the rate at which the ceiling activation mode effect is executed can be varied based on the number of times the special pattern has been drawn (the number of times it has stuck) since the end of the previous jackpot play. For example, when the last digit of the number of times the special pattern has been drawn (the number of times it has stuck) is "0" or when the last two digits are "00", i.e., when the number of times it stuck is a round number, it can be configured so that the ceiling activation mode effect is more likely to be executed than in other cases.

By configuring it in this way, when a right-hit game state (second game state) is set based on the results of a special symbol lottery, a ceiling activation mode presentation is executed if the number of stuck turns is good, and the right-hit game state can be easily set through a presentation process similar to that when a ceiling bonus is awarded. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the first condition for awarding a ceiling bonus has been met or whether the ceiling activation mode presentation has been executed as a result of a prior determination.

Next, referring to FIG. 480, the processing contents of the normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480) will be described. FIG. 480 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480). This normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480) differs from the above-mentioned normal mode effect setting process 13 (see S34402 in FIG. 463) in that it executes processing to set the effect to be executed when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 times stuck) is met (when the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON). All other aspects are the same, and the same processing contents will not be described.

When normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480) is executed, the same processes of S34501 to S34506 as normal mode effect setting process 13 (see S34402 in FIG. 463) of the thirteenth control example described above are executed, and if it is determined in the process of S34506 that the time-saving winning change that sets the second time-saving (second time-saving state) is not occurring (S34506: No), it is then determined whether the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON (S34571).

In the process of S34571, if it is determined that the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON (S34571: Yes), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot (S34572), and if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S34572: No), it is then determined whether the current lottery result is a time-saving win (S34573). If it is determined that the time-saving win is not a win, that is, if the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to ON and the normal state is set (S34578: No), the ceiling bonus (third time-saving state) is set after the special symbol variation stops, so the performance mode for stopping and displaying the third symbol (decorative symbol) corresponding to the time-saving as the ceiling activation mode performance is determined (S34578), the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to OFF (S34579), and this process is terminated.

When a variable presentation based on the presentation mode determined in the processing of S34578 is executed, as shown in FIG. 472(b), a variable presentation is executed in which the "time-saving" decorative patterns (LL2, CL2, RL2) are displayed as stopped to indicate that a ceiling bonus will be awarded. In this way, in this 14th control example, even if the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss (complete miss) that does not result in a jackpot win or a time-saving win, if a specific presentation state is set, the decorative patterns are displayed as stopped in a display mode that indicates that a bonus that is advantageous to the player will be awarded.

By configuring it in this way, in the variable presentation to show the result of the special pattern lottery, instead of stopping and displaying decorative patterns in a combination that corresponds to the result of the special pattern lottery, it is possible to stop and display decorative patterns that indicate the content of the benefit that will be granted based on the result of the special pattern lottery that was executed, making it possible to execute a variable presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

In this fourteenth control example, there are two states in which the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss (complete miss) that does not result in a jackpot win or a time-saving win, and which is advantageous to the player (a state in which the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to on) and unfavorable to the player (a state in which the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is not set to on). Depending on the state that is set, the display mode of the decorative pattern that stops to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a complete miss is changed, but without being limited to this, the same display mode may be set as the display mode of the decorative pattern that stops to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a complete miss, regardless of the state that is set.

In this case, it is sufficient to execute a notification effect to indicate that a beneficial bonus (ceiling bonus) will be awarded to the player based on the result of the special pattern lottery being a complete miss, without using the stop display mode of the decorative pattern. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to omit the process of determining different stop display modes of the decorative patterns based on the result of the special pattern lottery and the set state.

As shown in FIG. 472(b), if the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern is configured to inform the player of the contents of the benefit that will be granted later based on the result of the special pattern lottery, rather than the result of the special pattern lottery, it is preferable to display the stopped display mode of a second decorative pattern (fourth pattern) that is different from the decorative pattern in a stopped display mode that indicates the result of the special pattern lottery ("342" in FIG. 472(b)). This makes it possible to inform the player of information showing the result of the special pattern lottery.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 472(b), in this fourteenth control example, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern larger than the stopped display mode of the second decorative pattern. By configuring it in this way, it is easier for the player to grasp the stopped display mode of the decorative pattern than the stopped display mode of the second decorative pattern, so even if the decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern are configured to be displayable, it is possible to execute a variable presentation that is easy for the player to understand.

Returning to FIG. 480, the explanation will continue. In the process of S34573, if it is determined that the time-saving feature has been won (S34573: Yes), it is determined whether the first time-saving feature will be set based on the time-saving feature win (S34574). If it is determined that the first time-saving feature will be set (S34574: Yes), a presentation mode for stopping and displaying the third symbol (decorative symbol) corresponding to a "miss" is determined (S34575). Next, it is determined whether the value of the lottery count counter 2231c is 700 (S34576). If it is determined that the value is 700 (S34576: Yes), a presentation mode for indicating the super ceiling activation mode is determined (S34577), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S34572 that a jackpot has been won (S34572: Yes), or if it is determined in the process of S34574 that a time-saving state other than the first time-saving state (second time-saving state) is set (S34574: No), that is, if the ceiling activation mode effect ends without granting a ceiling bonus, the ceiling activation mode in progress flag 223ma is set to OFF (S34580), the process of S34509 is executed, and this process ends. In this case, for example, if a jackpot has been won, a performance mode for stopping and displaying the third symbol (decorative symbol) corresponding to "V" is determined, and the ceiling activation mode effect ends when the third symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped and displayed in a stop display mode indicating that a jackpot has been won, and if the second time-saving state is set based on the time-saving win, a performance mode for stopping and displaying the third symbol (decorative symbol) corresponding to "time-saving" is determined, and the ceiling activation mode effect ends after executing a variable performance as if a ceiling bonus had been granted.

By configuring it in this way, even if the termination condition for terminating the ceiling activation mode is met during the ceiling activation mode presentation before the ceiling bonus is awarded, the ceiling activation mode presentation can be terminated without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

As explained above, this 14th control example is configured so that after the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met, the ceiling bonus can be granted if the second condition is met (a miss win) in a time-saving lottery that has a high probability (900/1000) of winning the time-saving lottery. This allows for irregularity in the timing at which the ceiling bonus is granted, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 14th control example, if the period from when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met until the second condition is met exceeds a predetermined period (200 special chart fluctuations), a bonus that is more advantageous to the player (second ceiling bonus) can be granted.

By configuring it in this way, even if the period from when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met until the second condition is met becomes long, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In this fourteenth control example, the condition for granting the second ceiling privilege (700 consecutive hits) is predefined, but without being limited thereto, the number of consecutive hits that is the condition for granting the second ceiling privilege may be determined based on the result of a special lottery that is executed when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 consecutive hits) is met, and the number of consecutive hits may be determined to be 700 if the result of the special lottery is the first result, 501 if the result is the second result that is different from the first result, and 800 if the result is the third result that is different from the first result and the second result.

In this way, rather than prescribing the conditions for granting the second ceiling bonus, the conditions are made determinable during the period in which the number of stuck times is being updated, and the conditions for granting the second ceiling bonus that are determined can be set to grant conditions that are easy to achieve (low number of stuck times) and grant conditions that are difficult to achieve (high number of stuck times). This makes it possible to play games in which the second ceiling bonus is likely to be granted and games in which the second ceiling bonus is unlikely to be granted, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 14th control example, as described above with reference to Figures 471 and 472, during the ceiling activation mode, which indicates that the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 consecutive hits) is met, the time-saving card (LL2, CL2, RL2) corresponding to the "ceiling privilege" is displayed, and during the super ceiling activation mode, which indicates that the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege (700 consecutive hits) is met, the super time-saving card (LL2, CL2, RL2) corresponding to the "second ceiling privilege" is displayed, so that the player is informed of the current game situation in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition to this, during the ceiling activation mode, a suggestion mode that can suggest the remaining time until the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege (700 consecutive hits) is met may be displayed.

For example, the period from when the ceiling activation mode is set to when the super ceiling activation mode is set (the period from when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege (500 times of sticking) is met to when the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege (700 times of sticking) is met) can be divided into a plurality of periods (first to third periods) corresponding to the length of the remaining period until the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege is met, and in the first period in which the remaining period until the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege is met is the longest, the effect shown in FIG. 471(b) is executed, in the second period in which the remaining period until the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege is met is shorter than the first period, the effect in which the super time-saving card RL2 is added to the right line RL is executed, and in the third period in which the remaining period until the first condition for granting the second ceiling privilege is met is shorter than the second period, the effect in which the super time-saving cards RL2 and CL2 are added to the right line RL and the middle line CL is executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to gradually increase the card types (ultra-time-saving cards) that can be stopped and displayed in a specified combination (three-match) during the ultra-ceiling activation mode as various patterns (cards) that are variably displayed during the ceiling activation mode, making the player believe that the ultra-ceiling activation mode will be activated soon. In this case, if each pattern row that is variably displayed during the ceiling activation mode has multiple time-saving cards, it is also possible to configure it so that some of the time-saving cards that are already variably displayed are switched to super-time-saving cards. By configuring in this way, it is possible to variably display super-time-saving cards without increasing the number of cards that each pattern row has.

In this case, a combination in which three time-saving cards or three super time-saving cards are stopped can be set as a combination of symbols that indicates that a ceiling bonus will be awarded during the ceiling activation mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player believe that the super ceiling activation mode will be activated soon by simply executing a process that switches the display mode of the time-saving cards to that of the super time-saving cards, without changing the variable display control of various cards during the ceiling activation mode.

<Regarding the first modified example of the fourteenth control example>
Next, a first modified example of the present fourteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 481 to Fig. 490. The above-mentioned fourteenth control example is configured to grant a ceiling award when a second condition is satisfied (a miss win) in a time-saving lottery that has a high probability (900/1000) of winning the time-saving lottery after a first condition (500 times of stuck wins) for granting the ceiling award is satisfied, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game by providing irregularity to the timing at which the ceiling award is granted.

However, after the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met, the period until the second condition is met can be long, which can cause a problem in which the player is unable to be granted the ceiling bonus.

In contrast to this, in the first variant of this 14th control example, when a player wins the time-saving lottery in the normal state, a first time-saving state with a different number of time-saving times can be set, and after the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 stuck times) is met, the set first time-saving state ends, thereby fulfilling the second condition and granting the ceiling bonus.

In other words, the period from when the first condition is met to when the second condition is met can be diversified by the number of time-saving events set as the first time-saving state and the timing at which the first time-saving state is set, and it is also possible to set an upper limit on the period from when the first condition is met to when the second condition is met.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide irregularity in the timing at which the ceiling bonus is awarded, increasing the player's interest in the game, while at the same time preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing by setting an upper limit on the period from when the first condition is met to when the second condition is met.

In addition, in this first modified example, the timing when the second condition is met can be determined in advance before the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met. Specifically, when the remaining period (remaining number of fluctuations) until the timing when the first condition is met (until the number of stuck times reaches 500) is 50 times and the remaining number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state is 100 times, it is possible to determine in advance that the period from the meeting of the first condition to the meeting of the second condition will be 50 special pattern fluctuations.

This makes it possible to execute a suggestion effect for indicating the timing at which the ceiling bonus will be granted before the first condition is met. Furthermore, before the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met, it is also possible to notify the player of whether the number of time-saving times to be set as the first time-saving state in a state in which the first time-saving state can be newly set, i.e., in the normal state, will be a number of time-saving times that will lengthen the period from when the first condition is met to when the second condition is met, or a number of time-saving times that will be relatively short.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play while predicting the timing when the ceiling prize will be awarded, even when none of the multiple conditions for awarding the ceiling prize have been met.

<Regarding the content of the performance in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example>
First, referring to Fig. 481, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the present 14th control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the first modified example of the present 14th control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 14th control example in that the time-saving lottery is not executed while the first time-saving state is set based on the result of the time-saving lottery executed in the left-hand play state, and a different number of time-saving times can be set as the number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state.

In other words, after the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met, the set first time-saving state ends, and the second condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met, and the ceiling bonus is granted.

By configuring it in this way, the remaining number of times the first time-saving state is set at the time the first condition is met is preset as the remaining period until the ceiling bonus is awarded, making it less likely that a situation will occur in which the second condition is not met for a long period of time despite the first condition being met, as in the pachinko machine 10 in the 14th control example described above.

Furthermore, similar to the 14th control example described above, a period effect (ceiling activation mode effect) is configured to be executable to indicate that the first condition (500 consecutive wins) for which a ceiling bonus can be awarded has been met, and in the ceiling activation mode effect, an effect based on the remaining period until the ceiling bonus is awarded is configured to be executable.

Here, in the first modified example of this fourteenth control example, the length of the period during which the ceiling activation mode effect is executed is the remaining time (remaining number of time-saving times) in the first time-saving state, so it is possible to determine this length in advance. The system is configured to be able to execute an effect according to the length of the period set as the effect period for the ceiling activation mode effect. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict the period until the ceiling bonus is granted, making it easier for the player to decide whether or not to continue playing.

In addition, in the first variant of the fourteenth control example, if the period from when the first condition is met to when the second condition is met is within a predetermined period (e.g., four special pattern draws), a special presentation mode different from the normal one can be set as a notification mode for notifying the player that the first condition has been met. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the timing at which the second condition is met is advantageous to the player (the timing immediately after the first condition is met).

In addition, in the first variant of the fourteenth control example, in cases where the right-hit game state is set without the second condition being met after the first condition is met (where the second time-saving state is set based on winning a jackpot or time-saving win), the presentation mode that is set when the second condition is met can be set for the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the trigger that sets the right-hit game state.

In the first modified example of the fourteenth control example, when the ceiling activation mode effect is executed, the effect shown in FIG. 481 is executed. FIG. 481(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in the ceiling activation mode effect to indicate that the first condition has been met, and FIG. 481(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when it has been determined that the second condition will be met at the time the first condition is met.

Therefore, in this first modified example, a game state suggestion effect is executable during left-hand play to allow the player to predict whether or not the first time-saving state has been set. Figure 481(a) is a diagram showing an example of a presentation screen for the game state suggestion effect, and Figure 481(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen during a suggestion effect to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the first time-saving state has been set during left-hand play.

As shown in FIG. 481(a), when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is met, a heart-pounding zone is set as a ceiling activation mode effect. During this heart-pounding zone, a door 871 appears in the main display area Dm, and each time a special symbol lottery is performed, an effect is executed in which the rabbit 801 uses a key to open the door 871.

In the secondary display area Ds, a comment such as "Use the key to open the door. When the door opens, the time-saving feature will begin" is displayed as a way of explaining the content of the performance during the Doki Doki Zone, informing the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a bonus will be awarded if the door 871 opens.

The small display area Dm9 formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm is configured to be able to display the reserved icons hr1 to hr4 corresponding to the lottery right for the first special pattern lottery that has already been acquired (Special pattern 1 reserved), and in the diagram shown in Figure 481 (a), four reserved icons hr1 to hr4 are displayed corresponding to the fact that four Special pattern 1 reserved have been acquired.

The reserved icons hr1 to hr4 are configured to display a number corresponding to the acquired special chart 1 reservations, with the first reserved icon hr1 corresponding to the first special chart 1 reservation (first special chart 1 reservation), the second reserved icon hr2 corresponding to the second special chart 1 reservation (second special chart 1 reservation), the third reserved icon hr3 corresponding to the third special chart 1 reservation (third special chart 1 reservation), and the fourth reserved icon hr4 corresponding to the fourth special chart 1 reservation (fourth special chart 1 reservation).

When a new special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) is performed during the Doki Doki Zone, the key displayed as the first reserved icon hr1 is used to open the door 871, and the key displayed as the second reserved icon hr2 shifts to the first reserved icon hr1, and then the key displayed as the third reserved icon hr3 shifts to the second reserved icon hr2, and the key displayed as the fourth reserved icon hr4 shifts to the third reserved icon hr3, and the display screen becomes one in which the fourth reserved icon hr4 is not displayed. In this case, if a new special symbol 1 reservation is acquired, the fourth reserved icon hr4 is displayed.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 481, only the fourth hold icon hr4 is displayed in a different display mode from the other hold icons (the first hold icon hr1 to the third hold icon hr3), and the first hold icon hr1 to the third hold icon hr3 are displayed in a display mode indicating a normal key, while the fourth hold icon hr4 is displayed in a display mode indicating a special key.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, the display mode of the first reserve icon hr1 to the fourth reserve icon hr4 is usually configured to be set to a display mode showing a normal key, and is configured so that the display mode showing a special key is more likely to be set for special reserves corresponding to special pattern changes where the second condition is met, or special reserves that result in a jackpot win (time-saving win). Furthermore, in a change presentation using a reserve icon displayed in a display mode showing a special key, a change presentation that results in the opening of door 871 is more likely to be executed than in a change presentation using a reserve icon displayed in a display mode showing a normal key. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to get the player interested in the display mode of the reserve icons.

In addition, if the second condition is met immediately after the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met and the thrill zone is set, the special effect shown in FIG. 481(b) can be executed, instead of the effect shown in FIG. 481(a) (opening the door with a key).

In the special effect shown in FIG. 481(b), an automatic door 871 is displayed instead of the door 871 (see FIG. 481(a)) that is displayed in the normal effect during the Doki Doki Zone. The comment "You're so lucky! Just get close and the door will open" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a notification to inform the player that the ceiling bonus (third time-saving state) will soon be awarded.

During the special effect, an effect is executed in which the rabbit 801 approaches the automatic door 871 until a special pattern change that satisfies the second condition is displayed, and the automatic door 871 opens when the special pattern change that satisfies the second condition is displayed, and an effect is executed in which the player is notified that a ceiling bonus will be awarded. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually determine the length of time remaining until the ceiling bonus is awarded, depending on the type of door that is displayed when the thrill zone is set.

In addition, by configuring the system to be able to execute a special effect in which an automatic door 871 is displayed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which, for example, a normal effect (see FIG. 481(a)) is executed when the second condition is met by executing a special pattern change for the 501st stuck time, i.e., the door 871 opens with the first key before the player has time to understand the content of the normal effect, thereby reducing the effect of the effect.

As explained above, in the first variant of the fourteenth control example, the remaining period until the second condition is met can be determined when the first condition for granting a ceiling bonus is met, so it is possible to execute an effect (ceiling activation mode effect) according to the length of the remaining period from when the first condition is met until when the second condition is met. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to get the player interested in the content of the ceiling activation mode effect.

In the first variant of the fourteenth control example, when the number of times the player gets stuck reaches a specified number (500 times), a ceiling activation mode effect is executed, and the effect mode is set according to the effect period of the ceiling activation mode effect (the remaining period from when the first condition is met until the second condition is met). When the effect period of the ceiling activation mode effect is within a specified period (for example, within four special pattern lotteries), a ceiling activation mode effect (see FIG. 481(b)) in which a special effect mode is set can be executed, thereby making it possible to keep the player interested in which effect mode will be set when the ceiling activation mode effect is executed.

However, in the first variant of this 14th control example, the ceiling activation mode effect is executed when the number of times the player gets stuck reaches a specified number (500 times), so the special effect mode can be set when the second condition is met with a special pattern change where the number of times the player gets stuck is between 501 and 504 times, which creates the problem that it is difficult to set the special effect mode.

To solve this problem, for example, the timing to execute the ceiling activation mode effect may be configured to be determined based on the timing of the establishment of the second condition. For example, even if the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 consecutive wins) is established, the ceiling activation mode effect may not be executed, and the ceiling activation mode effect may be executed when the remaining time until the second condition is established is within a predetermined period (for example, within four special symbol draws). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily set a special effect mode as the ceiling activation mode effect. Also, by making the period for the first condition to be established different from the performance period of the ceiling activation mode effect, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the content of the game that will be executed later.

In the first variant of the fourteenth control example, when the number of times the player has been stuck reaches a specified number (500 times), a ceiling activation mode presentation is executed, and the presentation mode is set according to the presentation period of the ceiling activation mode presentation (the remaining period from when the first condition is met until the second condition is met), so that a presentation that allows the player to predict the remaining period until the ceiling bonus is awarded can be executed. However, various presentations that allow the player to predict the remaining period until the second condition is met during the period before the first condition is met may also be executed.

For example, when a time-saving lottery is executed in the normal state, it may be possible to determine whether the first time-saving state set this time will end after the first condition is met based on the number of time-saving times for the first time-saving state set this time and the number of times remaining until the first condition is met, and to execute an effect (time-saving winning effect) corresponding to the length of the period from the first condition being met to the end of the first time-saving state if it is determined that the first time-saving state will end after the first condition is met. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict whether the game situation is such that the ceiling bonus is likely to be awarded (the period from the first condition being met to the second condition being met is short) before the first condition is met.

In addition, if it is determined that the first time-saving state currently set will end before the first condition is satisfied, the remaining period from the end of the first time-saving state currently set until the first condition is satisfied is identified, and it is determined whether the length of the identified remaining period is longer than the smallest number of time-saving times that can be set as the first time-saving state. If it is determined that the length of the remaining period from the end of the first time-saving state currently set until the first condition is satisfied is shorter than the smallest number of time-saving times that can be set as the first time-saving state, or if it is longer, different types of presentation (presentation when the time-saving state is won) may be executed.

By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified of information regarding the timing when the next set first time-saving state will end and the timing when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus will be met, making it possible for the player to predict whether or not the game situation is such that the ceiling bonus is likely to be granted (the period from when the first condition is met to when the second condition is met is short).

For example, it would be good to configure the device to be able to execute a presentation that can inform the player of periods that are likely to be advantageous to the player and periods that are likely to be disadvantageous to the player if the time-saving win is won, based on the number of times the player gets stuck measured in the normal state and the number of times the time-saving win is set in the first time-saving state if the time-saving win is won.

Specifically, in this 14th control example, as shown in FIG. 483, when the first time-saving state is set, the number of time-saving times can be set in the range of "100" to "300", and most of them are set in units of about 100 (100 times, 200 times, 300 times). The number of times of stuck play is set to 500 times as the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege. Therefore, the period in which the number of times of stuck play measured in the normal state is around 200 times, around 300 times, and around 400 times is the period in which the first time-saving state that ends immediately after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established (advantageous period) can be set. On the other hand, in the period in which the number of times of stuck play measured in the normal state is 450 times to 499 times, the period from the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established to the end of the first time-saving state is long (unfavorable period).

Therefore, periods in which the number of times a player is stuck in a normal state is between 201 and 220, 301 and 320, and 401 and 420 are set as advantageous periods, and an effect is executed to indicate to the player that this is an advantageous period that is likely to be advantageous to the player if the player wins the time-saving feature. More specifically, "Advantageous Zone" is displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 as a guide mode to indicate that the player is currently in an advantageous period, and if a special symbol lottery is executed during the advantageous zone, an effect is executed in which the rabbit 801 hits a golf ball. Then, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a complete miss (no win for either the jackpot or the time-saving feature), "One more time" is displayed, and an effect is executed in which the player hits the ball again in an effect corresponding to the next special symbol lottery.

If the jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, or if the time-saving win sets the second time-saving state, a hole-in-one effect is executed in which the golf ball hit by rabbit 801 goes into the cup, and if the icon on the ball taken out of the cup is a "V," a jackpot win is announced, and if it is "time-saving," the setting of the second time-saving state based on the time-saving win is announced.

In addition, when the time-saving is won in the special pattern lottery, the difference between the number of times the time-saving state is set by this time-saving winning and the number of times the remaining number of times the ball is stuck until the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met is calculated, and when the calculated difference is such that the first time-saving state ends within five special pattern fluctuations executed after the first condition is met, that is, when the optimal first time-saving state is set for the set advantageous zone, a near-pin effect is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, in which the golf ball hit near the cup is positioned and the words "Nice shot! Near-pin award won" are displayed. When this near-pin effect is executed, the near-pin award trophy is configured to continue to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 until the ceiling privilege is granted or until a jackpot game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the player that the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is a game status in which the ceiling privilege is granted immediately after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is granted (within five special pattern fluctuations).

In addition, if the calculated difference (the difference between the number of times the first time-saving state set by the current time-saving winning and the number of times the remaining stuck state is until the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established) ends within 20 special pattern variations executed after the first condition is established, that is, if an appropriate first time-saving state is set for the set advantageous zone, a green-on effect is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, in which the golf ball is positioned on the green and the words "Nice shot!!" are displayed. When this green-on effect is executed, unlike the near-pin award effect, a specific mode (trophy, etc.) is not continuously displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 until the ceiling privilege is granted or until a big win game is executed. By configuring in this way, only the player who has experienced the green-on effect can easily inform the player that the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is a game status in which the ceiling privilege is granted immediately after the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is established (within 20 special pattern variations).

On the other hand, if the calculated difference (the difference between the number of times the first time-saving state is set by the current time-saving winning and the number of times the remaining stuck state is reached until the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met) is such that the first time-saving state does not end within 20 special pattern fluctuations that are executed after the first condition is met, that is, if an appropriate first time-saving state is not set for the set advantageous zone, and the length of the period from the first condition being met to the setting of the first time-saving state is longer than 20 special pattern fluctuations, an OB effect is executed in which the golf ball hit by the character 801 becomes an OB, and then the advantageous zone ends. When this OB effect is executed, it is an effect that indicates that the period from the first condition being met to the end of the first time-saving state is long, as the playing status of the pachinko machine 10, so that a player who has confirmed that the OB effect has been executed can easily decide on a future playing strategy, including moving to another pachinko machine 10.

By configuring the game so that the fact that this OB effect was executed is not displayed as history, it is possible to provide information that only players who are actually playing the game can know (whether or not an OB effect was executed), making it possible to provide players who are actually playing with more advantageous information than players who are not playing the game. It is also possible to configure the game so that the fact that an OB effect was executed can be displayed as history, allowing players to check later whether or not an OB effect was executed.

In addition, if the first time-saving state ends before the first condition is met, the golf ball is positioned on the fairway, a first shot effect is executed in which the words "Next Approach Challenge" are displayed, and the advantageous zone ends.

In this case, a storage means is provided that can store information indicating that the first hit effect has been executed, and when the next advantageous zone is set, if the storage means stores that the first hit effect has been executed, an approach effect is executed. Then, if a new time-saving win occurs in that advantageous zone and the first time-saving state is set, each effect is determined using the same method as the above-mentioned method for determining the effects, and the determined effect is executed.

By executing the effects described above, it is possible to execute different effects before the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus is met and after the first condition is met as suggestive effects that can suggest to the player when the ceiling bonus will be granted, making it easier for the player to continue playing without losing motivation to play.

In addition, the various effects executed can suggest the timing at which the ceiling bonus will be awarded to the player at a disadvantage (the timing at which the period from when the first condition for awarding the ceiling bonus is met until the awarding of the ceiling bonus becomes longer), so that the player playing the pachinko machine 10 can decide at various times whether or not to continue playing in order to award the ceiling bonus. This makes it easier for players with different criteria for deciding whether or not to continue playing in order to award the ceiling bonus to alternate between playing the pachinko machine 10, making it easier to increase the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the first modified example of the present 14th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 482 to Fig. 485. The first modified example of the present 14th control example differs from the above-mentioned 14th control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 are changed. The other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 482, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first modified example of this 14th control example will be described. FIG. 482 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the first modified example of this 14th control example. As shown in FIG. 482, the first modified example of this 14th control example is the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the above-mentioned 14th control example (see FIG. 473(a)) in that a time-saving type selection 14a table 202maf is provided instead of the time-saving type selection 14 table 202mf.

The time-saving type selection 14a table 202maf differs from the time-saving type selection 14 table 202mf of the above-mentioned 14th control example in that it has a time-saving winning 14a table 202maf1 instead of the time-saving 13 table 202lf1 that is referenced when determining the time-saving type when a time-saving lottery is won. This time-saving winning 14a table 202maf1 specifies five types of time-saving types as the types of time-saving types for which the first time-saving state is set, and is configured so that a different number of time-saving times is set depending on the type of time-saving type that is set.

Now, referring to FIG. 483, the contents of the time-saving winning 14a table 202maf1 in the time-saving type selection 14a table 202maf will be explained. FIG. 483 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving winning 14a table 202maf1. As shown in FIG. 483, the time-saving winning 14a table 202maf1 defines a total of six types of time-saving types, with five types of time-saving types for which the first time-saving state is set based on the time-saving winning, and one type of time-saving type for which the second time-saving state is set.

The selection ratio and the number of time-saving times set for the time-saving type for which the second time-saving state is set are the same as those in the 14th control example described above, so detailed explanations are omitted. On the other hand, the number of types of time-saving types for which the first time-saving state is set is increased, and the number of time-saving times is set to a maximum of 300 and a minimum of 100, depending on the type of time-saving time set.

Specifically, within the range of "0 to 999" that the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1 can take, in the range of "0 to 99," the time-saving number is 100 (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100), and the time-saving type for which the first time-saving state is set is selected; in the range of "100 to 199," the time-saving number is 101 (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 101), and the time-saving type for which the first time-saving state is set is selected; in the range of "200 to 299," the time-saving number is 102 (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 102), and the time-saving type for which the first time-saving state is set is selected; In the range of "300 to 599", the time-saving type for which the first time-saving state is set is 200 times the time-saving count (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 200), in the range of "600 to 899", the time-saving type for which the first time-saving state is set is 300 times the time-saving count (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 300), in the range of "900 to 999", the time-saving type for which the second time-saving state is set is 300 times the time-saving count (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 300).

As shown in FIG. 483, in the first modified example of this 14th control example, multiple types of time-saving types are specified as the number of time-saving times set in the first time-saving state, with only a slight difference in the value of the last digit. As described above, in the first modified example of this 14th control example, when the first condition for which the ceiling bonus can be awarded (500 stuck times) is met, the remaining number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state that is set becomes 0 and the normal state is set, the ceiling bonus can be awarded.

In other words, the timing at which the ceiling bonus is awarded varies depending on the number of remaining time-saving times in the first time-saving state at the time the first condition is met. In this case, if the value that can be set as the number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state is set to vary at a predetermined interval (for example, 50 times), when the number of special symbol draws near the end of a specific number of time-saving times has ended, the next time the time-saving state can end will be about 50 special symbol draws later, which creates the problem that it is difficult to allow players to continue playing in the hope of receiving the ceiling bonus.

In contrast to this, in this first modified example, it is possible to set a time-saving type with a slightly different number of times the time-saving is performed, making it easier for players to continue playing in the hope of receiving the ceiling bonus. Furthermore, in this first modified example, similar to the above-mentioned 14th control example, it is possible to set the first time-saving state when the time-saving is won in the special pattern lottery, and the probability of winning the time-saving in the time-saving lottery executed in the special pattern lottery is 990/1000, so there is also about a 1% chance that the time-saving will not be won in the first special pattern lottery after the end of the jackpot game.

In other words, after the end of a jackpot game, the measurement of the number of times the player is stuck starts anew, but the timing at which the number of remaining time-saving times in the first time-saving state becomes 0 can be made to differ depending on the timing at which the first time-saving state is set and the type of time-saving time in the first time-saving state that is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier to make different the value of the number of remaining time-saving times in the first time-saving state when the number of times the player is stuck meets the first condition (500 times), making it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the second condition will be met.

The number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state can be set to a maximum of 300 times. This number of time-saving times, 300, is set to a value greater than the number of times the special symbol is drawn that is required from the establishment of the normal first condition (500 times of stuck play) until the establishment of the special first condition (700 times of stuck play).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which the second ceiling bonus is likely to be set (a situation in which the first time-saving state cannot (is difficult to) end between the establishment of the normal first condition and the establishment of the special first condition) depending on the timing at which the new first time-saving condition is set before the first condition (500 stuck times) is met and the type of time-saving state that is set. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to execute the second ceiling bonus in the above-mentioned 14th control example.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of this 14th control example will be described with reference to Figures 484 and 485. Figure 484 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of this 14th control example. As shown in Figure 484 (a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of this 14th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 14th control example in that it has a heart-pounding zone performance selection table 222maa. Other than that, they are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The heart-pounding zone presentation selection table 222maa is a data table that is referenced when determining the presentation mode when a heart-pounding zone is set.

Here, we will explain the contents defined in the Doki Doki Zone Presentation Selection Table 222maa with reference to FIG. 485. FIG. 485 shows the contents defined in the Doki Doki Zone Presentation Selection Table 222maa.

As shown in FIG. 485, the Doki Doki Zone effect selection table 222maa specifies different effect modes corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving times (remaining number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state) at the time when the Doki Doki Zone is set, the pre-reading result (pre-determination result) for the special chart reservation that has already been acquired (special chart 1 reservation), and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "1", that is, when the second condition is met in the next variation following the special pattern variation in which the first condition is met and the ceiling bonus is awarded, "automatic door" is specified as the presentation mode regardless of the results of the look-ahead and the acquired value of the presentation counter 223f. Here, when the presentation mode "automatic door" is determined, the special presentation shown in FIG. 481(b) is executed.

Next, if the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "2" and the pre-read result is "all misses", that is, if it is determined that the pre-read result (pre-determination result) for the special reserved pattern (special reserved pattern 1) that has been acquired at the time the Doki Doki Zone is set does not contain information indicating a jackpot win or information indicating a time-saving win that will set the second time-saving state, then the performance mode is specified as "Hold 2 Strong Key" for the acquired performance counter 223f value in the range of "0 to 49", "Normal" for the range of "50 to 89", and "Automatic Door" for the range of "90 to 99".

Here, when the presentation mode of "Hold 2 Strong Key" is determined, the display mode of a special key different from a normal key (corresponding to the display mode of the fourth hold icon hr4 in FIG. 481(a)) is displayed for the second hold icon hr2.

On the other hand, if the pre-read result is "win", that is, if the pre-read result (pre-determination result) for the reserved special chart (reserved special chart 1) that has been acquired at the time the Doki Doki Zone is set is determined to contain information indicating a jackpot win, or information indicating a time-saving win that sets the second time-saving state, then "automatic door" is specified as the performance mode for the range of "0 to 49" for the acquired performance counter 223f value, and "hold 2 strong key" is specified as the performance mode for the range of "50 to 99".

Here, even if the pre-read result is "a win," the "strong key" is determined for the reserved icon corresponding to the value of the remaining number counter 223maa. In this case, if a special pattern lottery that results in a "win" is executed before the second condition is met, an effect is executed in which the door 871 opens using the normal key indicated by the reserved icon corresponding to that special pattern lottery. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily execute an effect in which the door 871 opens even when a normal key is used.

In addition, if the special symbol lottery for the "winning" prize is held after the second condition is met (after the ceiling bonus is awarded), the special symbol lottery for the winning prize is held after the Doki Doki Zone ends, so there is no sense of incongruity in the presentation during the Doki Doki Zone.

In addition, if the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is "3" and the pre-read result is "all misses", that is, if it is determined that the pre-read result (pre-determination result) for the special reserved pattern (special reserved pattern 1) that has been acquired at the time the Doki Doki Zone is set does not contain information indicating a jackpot win or information indicating a time-saving win that will set the second time-saving state, then the performance mode is specified as "Hold 3 strong key" for the acquired performance counter 223f value in the range of "0 to 49", "Automatic door" for the range of "50 to 89", and "Normal" for the range of "90 to 99".

On the other hand, if the pre-read result is "win", that is, if the pre-read result (pre-determination result) for the reserved special chart (reserved special chart 1) that has been acquired at the time the Doki Doki Zone is set is determined to contain information indicating a jackpot win, or information indicating a time-saving win that sets the second time-saving state, then "automatic door" is specified as the performance mode for the acquired performance counter 223f value in the range of "0 to 89", and "normal" is specified for the range of "90 to 99".

In addition, if the remaining number counter 223maa value is "4" and the look-ahead result is "all misses", then the performance mode is specified as "Keep 4 strong key" for the acquired performance counter 223f value range of "0 to 49", and "Automatic door" for the range of "50 to 99". On the other hand, if the look-ahead result is "Hit", then the performance mode is specified as "Keep 4 strong key" for the acquired performance counter 223f value range of "0 to 49", "Automatic door" for the range of "50 to 89", and "Normal" for the range of "90 to 99".

Furthermore, if the remaining number counter 223maa value is "5-20" and the look-ahead result is "all misses", then "Chance" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired performance counter 223f value in the range of "0-89", and "Random Strong Key" is specified as the presentation mode for the range of "90-99". On the other hand, if the look-ahead result is "Hit", that is, if the Doki Doki Zone ends with a special symbol lottery that wins before the second condition is met (before the first time-saving state ends), then "Normal" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired performance counter 223f value in the range of "0-49", "Strong Key to Win" is specified as the presentation mode for the range of "50-89", and "Automatic Door" is specified as the presentation mode for the range of "90-99".

When "Chance" is set as the presentation mode, the display mode of the door 871 displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is set to a display mode showing a door (chance door) that is slightly more luxurious than a normal door (see FIG. 481(a)). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually determine that the situation is such that the door is more likely to open (the second condition is more likely to be met) than when a normal door 871 is displayed.

In addition, when "random strong key" is set as the presentation mode, the display mode of "strong key" is set for one randomly selected reserved icon among the reserved icons displayed corresponding to acquired reserved special charts. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a presentation in which the door 871 does not open when a special key is used (failed presentation).

When the remaining number counter 223maa value is "21-100" and the pre-reading result is "all misses", "Chance" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired presentation counter 223f value range of "0-49", and "Normal" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired presentation counter 223f value range of "50-99". On the other hand, when the pre-reading result is "win", that is, when the Doki Doki Zone ends with a special symbol lottery that wins before the second condition is met (before the first time-saving state ends), "Strong Key to Win" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired presentation counter 223f value range of "0-49", "Automatic Door" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired presentation counter 223f value range of "50-89", and "Normal" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired presentation counter 223f value range of "90-99".

When the remaining number counter 223maa value is "101-300" and the pre-reading result is "all misses", "normal" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired presentation counter 223f value in the range of "0-89", and "chance" is specified as the presentation mode for the range of "90-99". On the other hand, when the pre-reading result is "win", that is, when the Doki Doki Zone ends with a special symbol lottery that wins before the second condition is met (before the first time-saving state ends), "automatic door" is specified as the presentation mode for the acquired presentation counter 223f value in the range of "0-49", "strong key to win" is specified as the presentation mode for the range of "50-89", and "normal" is specified as the presentation mode for the range of "90-99".

Returning to FIG. 484(b), the explanation will continue. FIG. 484(b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of this 14th control example. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of this 14th control example differs from the 14th control example described above in that a remaining number counter 223maa and a heart-pounding flag 223mab have been added, but otherwise is the same. Explanations of the same elements will be omitted.

The remaining number counter 223maa is a counter for measuring the number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state, and is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times to be set when a state command indicating that the first time-saving state has been set is received. The value is updated (decremented) each time a special symbol lottery is executed during the first time-saving state. The value of this remaining number counter 223maa is referenced when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 stuck times) is met, and the remaining period until the second condition for granting the ceiling bonus (end of the first time-saving state) is met is calculated based on the value of the remaining number counter 223maa. The value is cleared to 0 when the first time-saving state ends.

The pounding flag 223mab is a flag for indicating that the presentation mode of the pounding zone has been decided and that the period in which the presentation of the pounding zone is being executed is being held, and is set to ON when the presentation mode of the pounding zone has been decided. While the pounding flag 223mab is set to ON, no new processing for deciding the presentation mode of the pounding zone is executed. By holding the flag in this manner, it is possible to execute a presentation that is easy for the player to understand. The flag is then held to OFF when the presentation period of the pounding zone has ended.

<Regarding control processing in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example>
Next, the control process in the first modified example of the present fourteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 486 to Fig. 490. The first modified example of the present fourteenth control example differs from the above-mentioned fourteenth control example in that the control process executed by the main control device 110 is different in the process content for executing the time-saving lottery, the process content for granting the ceiling award, and the process content for setting the time-saving state, and in that the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 is different in the process content for setting the variable presentation executed in the normal state and the time-saving state.

Specifically, the processing executed by the main control unit 110 differs in that instead of the time-saving lottery processing 13 (see S38006 in FIG. 453) executed in the above-mentioned 14th control example, time-saving lottery processing 14a (S38056a in FIG. 486) is executed, instead of the ceiling determination processing 14 (see S38071 in FIG. 476), and instead of the ceiling determination processing 14a (S38071a in FIG. 487) being executed, time-saving setting processing 14 (see S30274 in FIG. 477) is executed. Also, the processing executed by the voice lamp control device 113 differs in that instead of the time-saving state presentation setting processing 14 (see S39091 in FIG. 479) executed in the above-mentioned 14th control example, a time-saving state presentation setting processing 14a (see S39091a in FIG. 489) is executed, and instead of the normal mode presentation setting processing 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480), a normal mode presentation setting processing 14a (see S34472a in FIG. 490) is executed. The rest of the processing contents are the same, and the explanation of the same processing contents will be omitted.

First, the processing contents of the time-saving lottery process 14a (S38056a) will be described with reference to FIG. 486. FIG. 486 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving lottery process 14a (S38056a). This time-saving lottery process 14a (S38056a) differs from the time-saving lottery process 13 (see S38006 in FIG. 453) executed in the above-mentioned 14th control example in that the type of game state in which the time-saving lottery can be executed is different, and the data table referenced when determining whether or not a time-saving lottery has been won is different, but otherwise it is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 486, when the time-saving lottery process 14a (S38056a) is executed, first, information indicating the currently set game state stored in the game state storage area 203g is read (S8102), and it is determined whether the currently set game state is normal (S38151a). If it is determined that it is normal (S38151a: Yes), the lottery result (determination result of time-saving winning) is obtained based on the time-saving random number 14 table 202me (S38152a), and the same processes of S8105 and S8106 as those of the time-saving lottery process 13 (see S38006 in FIG. 453) executed in the above-mentioned 14th control example are executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not normal in the process of S38151a (S38151a: No), this process is terminated without executing the time-saving lottery.

In other words, in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example, only the normal state is specified as the gaming state in which the time-saving lottery can be executed, and if a gaming state other than the normal state is set, the time-saving lottery is not executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide an opportunity (time-saving lottery) that can grant a special benefit (second time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player only in the normal state, which was the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player, and therefore it is possible to prevent a decrease in the motivation of a player playing in the normal state.

In addition, unlike the above-mentioned 14th control example, the time-saving lottery is not executed when the first time-saving state is set. Therefore, when the first time-saving state is set based on winning the time-saving lottery, the normal state can be reliably set by consuming the number of time-saving times corresponding to the set first time-saving state. Therefore, since the maximum period during which the first time-saving state continues can be preset at the time when the first time-saving state is set, it is possible to prevent the player from playing in the first time-saving state for an unnecessarily long period of time. In addition, it is possible to execute a performance (excitement zone) that suggests to the player the length of the period until the first time-saving state ends, based on the length of the maximum period during which the first time-saving state continues that is preset at the time when the first time-saving state is set.

Next, the processing contents of the ceiling determination process 14a (S38071a) will be described with reference to FIG. 487. FIG. 487 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the ceiling determination process 14a (S38071a). This ceiling determination process 14a (S38071a) differs from the ceiling determination process 14 (see S38071 in FIG. 476) executed in the above-mentioned 14th control example in that the condition for updating the information (number of times of sticking) related to the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (number of times of sticking 500 times) is different, but the processing contents are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their explanations are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 487, when the ceiling determination process 14a (S38071a) is executed, a control process is executed in which the process of S38102 is deleted from the ceiling determination process 14 (see S38071 in FIG. 476) executed in the above-mentioned 14th control example. Specifically, after the process of S38101 is executed, the process moves to the process of S38103 without executing the process of S38102.

In other words, the ceiling determination process 14a (S38071a) is configured so that the number of times a player is stuck is incremented each time a special symbol lottery is executed, regardless of the set game state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily fix the timing at which the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 times of stuck bonuses) is met, and therefore it is possible to easily get the player interested in the timing at which the second condition for granting the ceiling bonus (end of the first time-saving state) is met.

Next, the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 14a (S30274a) will be explained with reference to FIG. 488. FIG. 488 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving setting process 14a (S30274a). This time-saving setting process 14a (S30274a) differs from the time-saving setting process 14 (see S30274 in FIG. 477) executed in the above-mentioned 14th control example in that a new time-saving state can be set only when the normal state is set as the game state. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and explanations will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 488, when the time-saving setting process 14a (S30274a) is executed, it is determined whether the current state is normal (S38571), and if it is determined that the current state is not normal (S38571: No), various processes for setting the time-saving state are skipped and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current state is normal (S38571: Yes), the same processes of S8351 to S38357 as those of the time-saving setting process 14 described above (see S30274 in FIG. 477) are executed, and this process is terminated.

In this way, the process for setting a new time-saving state is configured to be executable only when a specific game state (normal state) is set, and by first determining whether a specific game state (normal state) is set, it is possible to make it difficult for unnecessary processes to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 488, in the first modified example of the 14th control example, when the normal state is set, the setting of the time-saving state based on the result of the time-saving lottery is configured to be executed in priority over the setting of the time-saving state based on the ceiling privilege. However, without being limited to this, the setting of the time-saving state based on the ceiling privilege may be configured to be executed in priority over the setting of the time-saving state based on the result of the time-saving lottery. In this case, similar to the time-saving setting process 13 (see S30254 in FIG. 455) executed in the above-mentioned 13th control example, the process of determining the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege (setting status of various ceiling standby flags) is executed first, and if the conditions for granting the ceiling privilege are not met (if none of the various ceiling standby flags are set to on), the process of setting the time-saving state based on the result of the time-saving lottery is executed.

By configuring it in this way, when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 stuck wins) is met and the first time-saving state that has already been set ends, the ceiling bonus can be granted without fail.

Furthermore, in the first variant of this fourteenth control example, except when the normal state is set, even if the conditions for setting a new time-saving state are met (when any of the various ceiling waiting flags are set to on), a new time-saving state is not set, and the right to set a new time-saving state is carried over until the normal state is set (a time-saving carryover function is provided).

This time-saving carryover function may be applied to other purposes. For example, when a right-hitting game state such as the second time-saving state or the probability bonus state is set, if the conditions for granting a ceiling bonus are met, a right-hitting game state based on the ceiling bonus may be set after the right-hitting game state based on the currently set game state ends. By configuring it in this way, the period during which the right-hitting game state that is advantageous to the player continues can be extended, making it easier to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, regardless of when the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus are met during right-hand play, the same bonus (awarding of the ceiling bonus after the right-hand play ends) can be provided, so it is possible to prevent the contents of the ceiling bonus granted to the player from being excessively advantageous or disadvantageous.

Furthermore, the time-saving lottery may be configured to be executable even during right-hand play mode, and if a time-saving type for which the second time-saving state is set is selected in the time-saving lottery, the second time-saving state based on the time-saving winning may be set after the right-hand play mode ends. In this case, as in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to set a time-saving type (advantageous time-saving) for which the second time-saving state is set during a part of the time-saving winning, the time-saving lottery may be configured to be executable repeatedly until the advantageous time-saving type is won (even if a time-saving type other than the advantageous time-saving type is won), and the time-saving lottery may not be executed on the condition that the advantageous time-saving type is won.

Furthermore, the system may be configured so that multiple winning results of the time-saving feature can be carried over. For example, if five time-saving features are won in a time-saving feature lottery executed during right-hand play, the system may be configured to set the time-saving feature state in sequence based on those five time-saving features.

Next, the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 14a (S39091a) will be explained with reference to FIG. 489. FIG. 489 is a diagram showing the processing contents of the time-saving state presentation setting process 14a (S39091a). This time-saving state presentation setting process 14a (S39091a) differs from the above-mentioned time-saving state presentation setting process 14 (see S39091 in FIG. 479) in that a process for measuring the number of time-saving times that is set when the first time-saving state is set is added, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals and explanations will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 489, when the time-saving state presentation setting process 14a (S39091a) is executed, the same processes of S34301 to S34303 as those of the time-saving state presentation setting process 14 described above (see S39091 in FIG. 479) are executed, and if it is determined in the process of S34303 that the first time-saving state has been set (S34303: Yes), the number of time-saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the remaining number counter 223maa (S34391), and then the same processes of S34305 to S34309 as those of the time-saving state presentation setting process 14 described above (see S39091 in FIG. 479) are executed to end this process.

In this way, in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example, the remaining time period of the first time-saving state can be determined by measuring the remaining number of time-saving times in the first time-saving state using the value of the remaining number counter 223maa. This makes it possible to determine the period until the second condition for granting the ceiling bonus (end of the first time-saving state) is met, and to execute a performance based on the determination result.

Next, the processing contents of the normal mode performance setting process 14a (see S34472a) will be described with reference to FIG. 490. FIG. 490 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the normal mode performance setting process 14a (see S34472a). This normal mode performance setting process 14a (see S34472a) differs from the above-mentioned normal mode performance setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480) in that the content of the control processing executed when the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to on, that is, when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 stuck times) is met, is different, but otherwise it is the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and their explanations are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 490, when normal mode effect setting process 14a (see S34472a) is executed, first, the same processes S34501 to S34571 as those in normal mode effect setting process 14 (see S34472 in FIG. 480) described above are executed.

If it is determined in the processing of S34571 that the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to on (S34571: Yes), the value of the remaining number counter 223maa is updated (S34591), the Doki Doki Zone performance selection table 222maa is referenced to determine the performance mode of the Doki Doki Zone (S34592), the ceiling activation mode flag 223ma is set to off (S34593), the Doki Doki flag 223mab is set to on (S34594), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S34571 that the ceiling activation mode in progress flag 223ma is not set to on (S34571: No), then it is determined whether the pounding flag 223mab is set to on (S34595), and if it is set to on, i.e., if it is determined that the pounding zone has already been set (S34595: Yes), it is decided to update the presentation mode of the pounding zone (S34596), and this processing is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S34595 that the pounding flag 223mab is not set to on (S34595: No), the presentation mode corresponding to the currently received fluctuation pattern is decided (S34509), and this processing is terminated.

As explained above, in the first variant of this 14th control example, when a time-saving lottery is won, the first time-saving state can be set a predetermined number of times (100 to 300 times of the first time-saving state), and when the first condition for granting the ceiling bonus (500 times of stuck play) is met, the second condition is met when the first time-saving state ends (when the remaining number of time-saving times becomes 0), and the ceiling bonus can be granted.

By configuring it in this way, the timing at which the ceiling bonus is awarded can be made different depending on when the first time-saving state ends, making it difficult for the player to understand when the ceiling bonus will be awarded.

In the first modified example of this fourteenth control example, the first time-saving end condition for ending the first time-saving state is set to be established based on the number of times the special pattern changes, but without being limited to this, a second time-saving end condition that can be established based on the result of the special pattern lottery before the first time-saving end condition is established may be set. For example, when the number of times that the result of the special pattern lottery becomes a specific lottery result (a specific lottery result other than winning the jackpot) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), the second time-saving end condition may be established and the first time-saving state may be ended.

By configuring it in this way, the first time-saving state can be ended before the number of special pattern changes (time-saving count) that meets the first time-saving end condition is executed, making it difficult for the player to understand when the ceiling bonus will be awarded.

Furthermore, in the first modified example of the fourteenth control example, the time-saving lottery is not executed when the first time-saving state is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. The time-saving lottery may be executed even when the first time-saving state is set, and when the time-saving lottery executed when the first time-saving state is set is won, the number of time-saving times of the newly won first time-saving state may be set (set to the value of the time-saving counter 203h). Alternatively, it may be configured to be able to determine whether the number of time-saving times of the newly won first time-saving state is less than the remaining number of time-saving times of the already-set first time-saving state, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be determined based on the determination result. In this case, for example, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be determined to correspond to the value that is advantageous to the player, and in the case of applying to the first modified example of the fourteenth control example, after the first condition is established, the value of the time-saving counter 203h may be determined to correspond to the number of time-saving times that results in the smaller value of the time-saving counter 203h. This configuration can prevent the frequent occurrence of an unnecessarily long period of time between the satisfaction of the first condition and the satisfaction of the second condition.

As explained above, in the above-mentioned 14th control example and the first modified example of the 14th control example, the first condition (500 stuck times) and the second condition (end of the first time-saving state) are set as the conditions for granting the ceiling bonus, and the ceiling bonus is granted when both conditions are met. Therefore, it is possible to easily differentiate between the timing when the number of special pattern draws (stuck times) set as the first condition is reached and the timing when the ceiling bonus is actually granted.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to set different numbers as the number of times that a winning combination will result in the ceiling bonus being awarded, and when the set conditions are met, the ceiling bonus can be awarded at various times (number of times the special symbol is drawn) without having to perform complex processing such as determining one winning combination from among the different winning combinations.

In the above-mentioned 14th control example and the first modified example of the 14th control example, the first time-saving state can be set based on the result of the special symbol drawing (the result of the time-saving drawing) regardless of the number of times the special symbol is drawn. However, without being limited to this, for example, if the normal state is set at the time when the first condition for granting the ceiling privilege is met, the first time-saving state may be set without fail.

In addition, in the above-mentioned 14th control example and the first modified example of the 14th control example, the third time-saving state is not set as a ceiling bonus when the first time-saving state is set. In other words, the first time-saving state can be considered a delay state that delays the timing when the third time-saving state is set. It can also be considered a restrictive state that restricts the setting of the third time-saving state.

The first time-saving state is configured to end when the special symbol lottery has been executed a preset number of times for time-saving. In other words, the means for ending the first time-saving state can also be considered a release means for releasing the restricted state (restriction period) in which the setting of the third time-saving state is restricted.

As a method of canceling the first time-saving state (delay state, restricted state), the above-mentioned 14th control example and the first modified example of the 14th control example are configured to cancel the first time-saving state (delay state, restricted state) when a condition based on the number of times a special pattern is drawn is satisfied. However, without being limited to this, the time-saving end conditions for terminating the time-saving state used in each of the above-mentioned control examples may be applied as appropriate.

<Regarding the 15th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 15th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 491 to Fig. 503. The pachinko machine 10 in the 15th control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 5th control example in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been changed, and a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been changed. Also, the control contents executed by the MPU of the main control device 110 and the control contents executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 have been changed. The rest of the contents are the same, and the same reference numerals are used for the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth control example described above, a trigger other than a jackpot win in the special pattern lottery is provided as a trigger for transitioning the probability state of the normal pattern from a low probability state to a high probability state, and a time-saving lottery can be executed in some lottery results (misses) in which the result of the special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery) for a specific special pattern (second special pattern) is different from a jackpot win, so that a trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established.

In the pachinko machine 10 in this fifteenth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, the time-saving lottery is configured to be executable only in the second special symbol lottery, and is configured to be executable at least in the normal state and the second special state.

When the time-saving state (second time-saving state) is set, it is configured to make it easier to insert a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and the first special symbol lottery is executed in preference to the second special symbol lottery. In addition, in this fifteenth control example, it is configured to set a probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) after the end of a jackpot game, and it is configured so that the length of the period during which the high probability state for special symbols continues (probability variable period) and the length of the period during which the high probability state for normal symbols continues (time-saving period) can be set to be different.

Specifically, the system is configured so that the probability variable state can be set after the end of a jackpot game so that the duration of the probability variable period is longer than the duration of the short time period. In this case, the game state after the end of a jackpot game is configured to transition in the following order as the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed increases: probability variable state (high probability state for special patterns, high probability state for normal patterns), second probability variable state (high probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns), normal state (low probability state for special patterns, low probability state for normal patterns).

Furthermore, the system is configured so that a time-saving lottery that is more advantageous to the player is executed when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a normal state, rather than when the second special symbol lottery is executed in a second special probability state.

By configuring it in this way, during the special probability state (during a right-hand play state in which it is easy to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640), the reserved memory of the acquired second special pattern (reserved special pattern 2) is not executed during the second special probability state, and the game ball is allowed to enter the first ball entrance 64 during the second special probability state, so that the reserved memory of the first special pattern (reserved special pattern 1) is not interrupted, providing the player with a novel gameplay experience.

<Configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 15th control example>
First, referring to FIG. 491, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above had a game board 13 (see FIG. 234) capable of executing a left-handed game to cause a game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 in a normal state, and executing a right-handed game to cause a game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, which becomes easier to enter when a time-saving state is set. As shown in FIG. 234, the game area (right side area) in which the game ball launched by the right-handed game can flow down does not have a ball entrance means capable of acquiring the right to execute the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 reservation) by the game ball entering, and is configured to be in a game state in which it is difficult to acquire a new special pattern 1 reservation during the right-handed game.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the 15th control example is configured to acquire the special symbol 2 reservation by performing right-hand play during the high probability state, and to grant a beneficial bonus to the player if the special symbol 2 reservation is not consumed by executing the first special symbol lottery, which is executed in priority over the second special symbol lottery, during the period from the end of the high probability state until a predetermined period has elapsed. And, even if right-hand play is performed during the high probability state in which it is easy to acquire the special symbol 2 reservation, the game board 13 is configured so that a new special symbol 1 reservation can be acquired. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily end the high probability state while acquiring the special symbol 1 reservation.

Figure 491 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of this fifteenth control example. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this fifteenth control example differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above (see Figure 234) in that the configuration of the various devices arranged in the right area of the play area formed on the game board 13 is different, and it is configured so that the special chart 1 reservation can be obtained even during right-hand play. Note that the configuration other than the right-hand area is the same, and the same configuration is given the same symbol and its description is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 491, in this fifteenth control example, as the ball entry means by which the game ball can enter and acquire the right to execute the first special pattern lottery, there are a first ball entry port 64 through which a game ball that has flowed down the left side area of the game board 13 can enter more easily than a game ball that has flowed down the right side area of the game board 13, and a right first ball entry port 64b through which a game ball that has flowed down the right side area of the game board 13 can enter more easily than a game ball that has flowed down the left side area of the game board 13, and the first ball entry port 64 is arranged in the lower area of the game board 13 (the game area formed below the variable display unit 80), and the right first ball entry port 64b is arranged in the right side area of the game board 13.

The first ball entrance 64 and the right first ball entrance 64b are both configured so that four prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters them, and when playing left-handed, the first ball entrance 64 is arranged so that approximately 20 game balls can be entered into the first ball entrance 64 before all 250 game balls are used (including the use of prize balls paid out along the way).

On the other hand, when playing right-hand, the right first ball entrance 64b is arranged so that approximately 15 game balls can be inserted into the right first ball entrance 64b before all 250 game balls are used (including the use of prize balls paid out during the game).

Here, the left side area is provided with a general ball entry port 63 through which 10 prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters any port other than the first ball entry port 64, and prize balls are paid out even if a game ball that cannot enter the first ball entry port 64 enters the general ball entry port 63 among the game balls flowing down the left side area. Therefore, when a certain number of game balls are shot, it is easier to win more prize balls based on game balls entering the entry ports (general ball entry port 63, first ball entry port 64, right first ball entry port 64b) through which game balls can always enter when playing left-handed games than when playing right-handed games.

Therefore, in the normal state where the high probability state of normal symbols that makes it easier to get the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is not set (the low probability state of normal symbols is set), playing left-handed is more advantageous to the player than playing right-handed.

As shown in FIG. 491, the right area of the game board 13 is provided with a second ball entrance 1640, which is an entrance (starting ball entrance) for executing the second special symbol lottery, an electric device 1640a attached to the second ball entrance 1640, a through gate 67 through which the right to execute the normal symbol lottery can be acquired by the game ball passing through (entering), a right first ball entrance 64b, which is an entrance (starting ball entrance) for executing the first special symbol lottery, and a variable winning device 1065 that allows the game ball to enter (win) when a jackpot game is executed.

The second ball entrance 1640 is provided with an electric device 1640a that opens and closes in a winning game (normal winning game) that is executed based on a winning normal symbol lottery, and is configured to be able to create a state where it is easy to enter the game ball (high probability state of normal symbol) and a state where it is difficult to enter the game ball (low probability state of normal symbol) depending on the set game state. Note that the contents of the normal symbol lottery and the operation control contents of the electric device 1640a that opens and closes in a winning game (normal winning game) that is executed based on a winning normal symbol lottery are the same as the contents of the electric device control explained in each control example above, so detailed explanations are omitted.

Next, the flow of the game ball launched by right-handed play will be explained. As shown in FIG. 491, the game ball launched by right-handed play flows down while changing its flow direction due to multiple nails planted in the right area of the game board 13. Then, the ball is distributed in a ratio of approximately 9 to 1 to the first flow path in which the second ball entrance 1640 is located, or the second flow path in which the through gate 67 and the right first ball entrance 64b are located, and then flows further downstream.

The inlet to the second flow path is formed by the gap su1 between the two nails, and is configured so that of the game balls that flow down the right-hand region, those that do not pass through the gap su1 flow down the first flow path. The opening width of the gap su1 expands and contracts depending on the position of the nails that form the gap su1, so for example, if the position of the nails that form the gap su1 moves in a direction that narrows the opening width of the gap su1, the game balls that flow down the right-hand region will have difficulty flowing down the second flow path and will be more likely to flow down the first flow path. On the other hand, if the position of the nails that form the gap su1 moves in a direction that widens the opening width of the gap su1, the game balls that flow down the right-hand region will have difficulty flowing down the second flow path and will be more likely to flow down the first flow path.

The game ball flowing down the first flow path reaches the second ball entrance 1640 to which the electric device 1640a is attached, and if the electric device 1640a is operating to the open state due to a normal winning game, the game ball is guided to the second ball entrance 1640 by the electric device 1640a protruding from the game board 13 and enters the second ball entrance 1640. Also, if a normal winning game is not being played (the electric device 1640a is in a closed state) at the time when the game ball reaches the second ball entrance 1640, the electric device 1640a is buried in the game board 13, so the game ball passes through the electric device 1640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 1065.

The game balls flowing down the second flow path are distributed by nails planted in the second flow path to the third flow path with the through gate 67 and the fourth flow path with the right first ball inlet 64b in a ratio of about 1:1. The inlet to the fourth flow path is formed by the gap su2 between the two nails, and the game balls flowing down the second flow path that do not pass through the gap su2 flow down the third flow path. The opening width of the gap su2 is expanded or contracted depending on the position of the nails that form the gap su2. For example, if the position of the nails that form the gap su2 is moved in a direction that narrows the opening width of the gap su2, the game balls that flow down the second flow path will have difficulty flowing down the fourth flow path and will be easier to flow down the third flow path. On the other hand, if the position of the nails that form the gap su2 is moved in a direction that widens the opening width of the gap su2, the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path will be more likely to flow down the fourth flow path and less likely to flow down the third flow path.

Then, the game balls flowing down the third flow path pass through the through gate 67 and flow down toward the variable winning device 1065, and most of the game balls flowing down the fourth flow path enter the right first ball entrance 64b. Note that the fourth flow path is provided with an outlet so that some of the game balls flowing down the fourth flow path can flow down toward the variable winning device 1065 without entering the right first ball entrance 64b. By configuring it in this way, even if game balls are stuck near the opening of the right first ball entrance 64b (ball clogging occurs), it is possible to allow the game balls that flow into the fourth flow path to flow down.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 of this 15th control example is configured so that game balls flowing down the right area can enter the second ball entrance 1640, the through gate 67, and the right first ball entrance 64b at a predetermined rate. When 100 game balls flow down the right area, 90 of them flow down the first flow path where the second ball entrance 1640 is located, and 10 of them flow down the second flow path. Then, of the 10 game balls flowing down the second flow path, 5 flow down the third flow path and pass through the through gate 67. The remaining 5 flow down the fourth flow path and enter the first ball entrance 64b.

When the normal state is set, even if a winning normal symbol lottery is won, a normal symbol winning game (a normal symbol winning game in which the period during which the electric device 1640a is open is short (0.1 seconds)) in which it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 1640 is executed, so if a right-hand hit game is executed in the normal state and the game ball flows down to the right side area, only the prize balls (4 balls) that would be paid out if the game ball entered the right first ball entrance 64b are paid out.

When playing right-handed games under normal conditions, the machine is designed so that approximately 5% of the game balls that are shot can enter the right first ball entrance 64b. Therefore, when all 250 game balls are used (including the use of prize balls paid out during the game), it is possible to have approximately 15 game balls enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

By adjusting the positioning of the various nails so that the opening width of gap su1 or gap su2 is narrowed, it is possible to adjust the rate at which game balls shot by right-handed play enter the right first ball entrance 64b lower. However, when the positioning of the various nails is adjusted in this way, the rate at which game balls enter the second ball entrance 1640 or the through gate 67 is configured to be higher.

Although detailed explanations will be omitted here, in this fifteenth control example, when a normal symbol lottery is won in the second special state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a normal symbol winning game can be executed in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 1640 than when a normal symbol lottery is won in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols).

In other words, if the position of the various nails is adjusted so that it is difficult to acquire a special chart 1 reservation by playing from the right, in order to make it difficult to end the special chart 2 reservation in the special probability state, it becomes easier to make the game ball enter (pass) the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 1640 by playing from the right, so it becomes easier to acquire a new special chart 2 reservation by playing from the right during the second special probability state.

In addition, in order to make it difficult to obtain a new reserved special chart 2 during the second probability change state, when the position of the various nails is adjusted to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 1640 by playing from the right, it is configured so that the game ball can easily enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the 15th control example is configured so that when left-handed play is performed, it is not possible (it is difficult) to obtain the special chart 2 reservation, and is basically configured so that when left-handed play is performed, it is easier to obtain the special chart 1 reservation than when right-handed play is performed. Therefore, when the special chart 2 reservation is obtained and the special chart 2 reservation ends, the player can play left-handed play during the second special chart state that is set after the special chart state ends, in order to obtain a new special chart 1 reservation and to hold the special chart 2 reservation until the second special chart state ends. However, depending on the results of the right-handed play performed during the special chart state, it is possible to allow the player to play a wide variety of games during the second special chart state.

For example, if the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is such that the positions of the various nails are adjusted so that the game ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64b more easily than usual, during the second probability change state, the player can choose between playing left-handed to aim to obtain the reserved special chart 1, or playing right-handed to aim to obtain the reserved special chart 1 while aiming to obtain a new reserved special chart 2, although this has a low probability.

In addition, in the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13, if the positions of the various nails are adjusted so that it is more difficult than usual for the game ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64b, if the player has a special chart 2 reserved at the end of the special probability state, the player can play left-handed games that make it easier to acquire a special chart 1 reserved during the second special probability state, and if the player does not have a special chart 2 reserved at the end of the special probability state, the player can play right-handed games that make it more difficult to acquire a special chart 1 reserved during the second special probability state than left-handed games, but can acquire a new special chart 2 reserved.

This configuration allows players to play through a trial and error process of various gameplay methods, preventing players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

In this case, a game method that is advantageous to the player may be determined as a game method in the second special probability state that is set after the special probability state ends, based on the number of reserved special figures 1 and 2 that have been acquired at the time the special probability state ends, and information indicating the determined game method may be notified to the player.

Specifically, if it is determined that the reserved special chart 2 has not been acquired at the end of the special probability state, right-hand play, which allows for a new reserved special chart 2, is announced as the playing method during the second special probability state, and if it is determined that the reserved special chart 2 has been acquired at the end of the special probability state, left-hand play, which makes it easier to acquire the reserved special chart 1, is announced as the playing method during the second special probability state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game that is disadvantageous to him or her during the second special probability state.

As explained above, in this 15th control example, by using the game board 13 shown in FIG. 491, it is possible to acquire the right to execute the first special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 reserved) even during right-hand play that is performed in a game state (high probability state) in which it is easy to acquire the right to execute the second special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 reserved).

By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the first special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to easily end the special symbol state when both the special symbol 1 reserve and the special symbol 2 reserve have been acquired. Therefore, even after the special symbol state ends and a game state (second special symbol state) in which it is more difficult to acquire a new special symbol 2 reserve than in the special symbol state is set, it is possible to easily continue the first special symbol lottery, which is executed with priority, and to easily continue playing in a game state in which it is difficult to acquire a new special symbol 2 reserve without using up the special symbol 2 reserve that has already been acquired.

In addition, instead of using a configuration that allows the reserved special symbol 1 to be acquired by playing with the right hand as in the 15th control example, a different configuration may be used to create a similar playability to the 15th control example. For example, when using the game board 13 (Fig. 234) of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 5th control example, the second special symbol lottery is easily executed by playing with the right hand during the high probability state, and a long period of time (for example, 180 seconds) is set as the change time of the last special symbol change (final special symbol change) executed in the high probability state. During the final special symbol change, a first performance (right hand performance) that notifies the acquisition of the reserved special symbol 2 up to the maximum number of reserved symbols that can be stored (1 in the 15th control example) and a second performance (left hand performance) that notifies the acquisition of the reserved special symbol 1 up to the maximum number of reserved symbols that can be stored (4 in the 15th control example) may be executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 491, a variable winning device 1065 that opens during a big win is provided below the right-hand area of the game board 13. This variable winning device 1065 has the same content as the variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 294) in the seventh control example described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<About the content of the performance in the 15th control example>
Next, the contents of the characteristic effects among the various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present fifteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 492 and Fig. 493. The pachinko machine 10 in the present fifteenth control example is configured such that the probability variable period is longer than the time short period so that the second probability variable state is set after the probability variable state ends, as compared to the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example described above.

The reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the special probability state is not consumed during the second special probability state, and is instead held until the normal state that is set after the second special probability state ends, making it possible to execute a second special symbol lottery that is advantageous to the player.

Here, the content of the keep zone effect that is executed when the second probability change state is set while the special chart 2 is reserved will be explained with reference to FIG. 492. FIG. 492(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed during the keep zone effect, and FIG. 492(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed as the end screen of the keep zone effect when a success effect is executed indicating that the second probability change state has ended while the special chart 2 is reserved.

As shown in FIG. 492(a), when the second probability variation state is set while holding the reserved special chart 2 acquired during the probability variation state, a keep zone effect is executed. When the keep zone effect is executed, a conveyor 10802 is displayed in the lower right of the main display area Dm, and an effect is executed in which bait icons hr1 to hr5, which resemble multiple baits placed on the top surface of the conveyor 10802, move from right to left in conjunction with the movement of the conveyor 10802. Then, a fish 10801 is displayed on the left side of the conveyor 10802, waiting for bait to be discharged from the conveyor 10802, and an effect is executed in which the fish eats the bait discharged from the conveyor 10802.

Here, the multiple baits placed on the top surface of the conveyor 10802 are configured to be displayed corresponding to the special chart 1 reserve and the special chart 2 reserve, and in the display screen shown in FIG. 492(a), as shown in the small area Dm1a, two special chart 1 reserves have been acquired, so two baits (bait icons hr1, hr2) corresponding to the special chart 1 reserve are displayed. And, as shown in the small area Dm8a, one special chart 2 reserve has been acquired, so one bait (bait with the letters SP) corresponding to the special chart 2 reserve is displayed (bait icon hr5).

And, as shown in the small area Dm1, because the first special pattern variation is in progress, an effect is being executed in which the bait icon hr0 (bait in a display mode corresponding to the first special pattern) for indicating the type of special pattern in progress is being eaten by the fish 10801.

In this fifteenth control example, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery, so that each time a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and a new special symbol 1 reservation is acquired, the rabbit 801 throws food onto the top surface of the conveyor 10802 so that new food icons hr1 to hr4 are added downstream of the conveyor 10802 (closer to the fish 10801) than the food icon hr5 corresponding to the special symbol 2 reservation.

Then, the word "Keep Zone" is displayed above the main display area Dm to indicate that the keep zone effect is being performed, and the words "Feed the fish until they're full!!" are displayed as a guide to guide the player on the gameplay during the keep zone effect. In addition, the comment "Save up your special chart 1 reserve so the SP food doesn't get eaten" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a guide to show more detailed gameplay instructions.

In addition, a traffic light 10803 is displayed above the conveyor 10802 to inform the player of the operating status of the conveyor 10802. This traffic light 10803 has a display area for "GO" indicating that the conveyor 10802 is operating, and a display area for "STOP" indicating that the conveyor 10802 is not operating (stopped), and either display area is lit up according to the operating status of the conveyor 10802.

Furthermore, "left hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm4 as a guidance display area to guide the player on the game method (left hit game, right hit game). In this fifteenth control example, basically, during left hit game, no notification is given to guide the player on the game method, and when right hit game is advantageous to the player, the display of "right hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm4. However, during the keep zone performance, when the game ball is not launched, it becomes easier for the player to play a game that is disadvantageous to the player than when left hit game is executed, so the display of "left hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm4.

In the keep zone effect described above, each time one special pattern change ends and the next special pattern change begins, an effect is executed in which new bait (bait icon hr1 in the figure) is eaten by the fish 10801. In other words, the bait icon hr0 being eaten by the fish 10801 becomes a mode showing information about the special pattern change that is currently in progress (pending in progress), and the bait icon hr1 showing the bait closest to the fish 10801 among the baits moving on the conveyor 10802 becomes a mode showing information about the next special pattern change that will be executed (pending first special pattern).

The operation of the conveyor 10802 is configured to be determined based on the change time of the first special pattern change being performed and the change time of the special pattern change corresponding to the reserved special pattern 1 that has already been acquired. For example, if the change time of the first special pattern change being performed and the change time of the special pattern change corresponding to the reserved special pattern 1 that has already been acquired are short, that is, if the reserved special pattern 2 can be consumed in a short time, the operation speed of the conveyor 10802 is increased, and if the change time of the first special pattern change being performed and the change time of the special pattern change corresponding to the reserved special pattern 1 that has already been acquired are long, that is, if there is sufficient time until the reserved special pattern 2 can be consumed, the operation speed of the conveyor 10802 is reduced or the conveyor 10802 is temporarily stopped.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict the period until the reserved special chart 2 is consumed (the reserved special chart hr5 is eaten by the fish 10801) based not only on the number of remaining baits (the number of displayed bait icons hr1 to hr4), but also on the operating status of the conveyor 10802, and the player can execute a left-handed play to acquire a new reserved special chart 1 based on the prediction result.

Although we will not go into detail here, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the keep zone performance, a special probability state is set after the jackpot play ends, making it difficult to maintain the already acquired reserved special symbol 2 until the normal state. Therefore, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the keep zone performance, an end performance is executed to end the keep zone performance.

Specifically, the display mode of the bait icons hr1 to hr4 corresponding to the reserved special chart 1 can be set to poisoned bait, and when the fish 10801 eats the poisoned bait, an effect is executed in which the fish runs away far away. In addition, the bait icon imitating poisoned bait is configured to be displayed with a low probability even when the jackpot has not been won, and when a display mode imitating poisoned bait is set as the display mode of the bait corresponding to the reserved special chart 1 that does not have information indicating a jackpot win, an effect is executed in which the fish 10801 avoids the poisoned bait.

By configuring it in this way, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery during the keep zone performance, it is possible to end the keep zone performance without giving the player a sense of incongruity. Also, since it is possible to set the display mode that is set when a jackpot is won (display mode showing poisoned bait) for reserved special symbol 1 that has not actually won a jackpot, it is possible to display the bait icon in the display mode that shows poisoned bait without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

If it is determined that the second probability variable state will end with the reserved special symbol 2 acquired, that is, if the number of reserved memories (reserved special symbol 1) for the first special symbol lottery, which is executed in priority over the second special symbol lottery, exceeds the number of special symbol lotteries required until the second probability variable state ends, and if the reserved special symbol 1 that has already been acquired does not contain information indicating a jackpot win, then as shown in FIG. 492(b), the performance in which the fish 10801 gets full and goes home satisfied ends, the conveyor 10802 is displayed as stopped, and the traffic light 10803 displays the display area "STOP" to indicate that the conveyor 10802 has stopped.

Then, in the small display area Dm4, "Break!?" is displayed as a guide display mode to encourage the player to temporarily stop shooting the game ball. This prevents the first special symbol lottery from being executed (continuing to acquire new reserved special symbols 1) by continuing to play left-handed even after the second probability variable state ends and the normal state is set in which the second special symbol lottery advantageous to the player is executed, thereby preventing a long period during which the second special symbol lottery is not executed.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 492(b), a display mode that does not have the force to prohibit the player from firing game balls is displayed in the small display area Dm4, but the display mode is not limited to this and may be configured to display a display mode that directly prohibits the player from firing game balls (for example, a display saying "Please stop firing game balls until the SP bait runs out").

As shown in FIG. 492(b), if the keep zone effect is successful, the comment "Great success! Let's eat the remaining SP bait" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a guide to inform the player of the next game content. If the launch of the game ball is interrupted from the state shown in FIG. 492(b) and a second special pattern lottery is executed without acquiring a new reserved special pattern, the effect shown in FIG. 493(a) is executed.

Figure 493 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a second special symbol change is executed in the normal state. As shown in Figure 492 (b), when the ceiling mode effect ends with the food icon hr5 corresponding to the special symbol 2 reserved remaining, the normal state is set and then an effect is executed in which the rabbit 801 eats the food corresponding to the special symbol 2 reserved. Here, when the rabbit 801 has eaten all of the food, an effect is set that indicates that the time-saving state has been won as a result of the second special symbol lottery executed during the normal state.

On the other hand, if a new special symbol 1 reservation cannot be acquired during the keep zone performance, the special symbol 2 reservation is consumed, and the second special symbol change is executed during the second probability change state, the end performance shown in FIG. 493(b) is executed. FIG. 493(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the second special symbol change is executed during the second probability change state. As shown in FIG. 493(b), the small display area Dm8 displays a display mode (shown by an arrow in the figure) to indicate that the second special symbol change is being executed, and the small display area Dm8a displays "0" indicating that the number of special symbol 2 reservations acquired is 0. Then, in the main display area Dm, a performance is executed in which a hungry fish 10801 attacks the rabbit 801 while angrily saying "there is not enough food," and the sub-display area Ds displays the comment "Keep Zone Ended," indicating that the keep zone performance has ended.

In addition, in this fifteenth control example, the duration of the second high probability state can be varied depending on the type of jackpot, and the duration of the second high probability state can be a maximum of 40 special drawing rounds and a minimum of one special drawing round. Therefore, the display screen shown in FIG. 492(a) is configured not to notify the duration of the second high probability state (the remaining duration of the second high probability state) so that the player does not know the duration of the keep zone effect (the period until the fish 10801 becomes full).

In addition, in the keep zone effect executed in this fifteenth control example, the presentation mode of the keep zone effect (for example, the display mode of the fish 10801, the speed of the conveyor 10802, etc.) is varied to make it possible to suggest the remaining period of the second probability change state.

By configuring it in this way, the duration of the keep zone presentation can be clearly notified to the player, which makes the player eager to keep the reserved special chart 2 until the second special state ends. Also, instead of displaying a dedicated display mode to indicate the remaining period of the second special state, for example, the remaining period of the second special state may be suggested to the player by making the form of the fish 10801 different and settable. In this case, the form of the fish 10801 may be configured to be set to a light eater form and a big eater form, and the light eater form may be configured to be more likely to be set when the remaining period of the second special state is short.

In addition, different from the keep zone presentation of this fifteenth control example, it may be configured to be possible to display information (remaining number of chances of winning) until the second chance state ends during the keep zone presentation, and the remaining number of chances of winning may be counted down and displayed each time a special pattern lottery is executed during the second chance state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner of the number of times the special pattern lottery will be executed until the second chance state ends.

In this case, the device may be configured to display information (pseudo remaining number of times of probability change) that is different from the remaining information (number of times of remaining probability change) until the second probability change ending condition for ending the second probability change state is met, and may be configured to execute a pseudo remaining number of times of probability change update effect that updates the pseudo remaining number of times of probability change in a manner different from the update content of the information indicating the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed during the second probability change state.

Specifically, when the number of remaining chances of winning until the second chance state ends is 40, information corresponding to the number of pseudo remaining chances of winning "50" is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 as information until the second chance state ends, and when the second chance state actually ends, the information indicated by the number of pseudo remaining chances of winning is displayed in a display mode indicating the end of the second chance state (for example, a display mode of "last"). When a special symbol change time for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery executed during the second chance state is set to a change time longer than a predetermined period (30 seconds), a pseudo remaining chance number subtraction effect is executed during the special symbol change period to update (subtract) the number of pseudo remaining chances of winning by at least 2 or more.

By configuring it in this way, when the pseudo remaining number of chances of winning displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 becomes "last (0)," the second chance state actually ends, but in the initial stage when the second chance state is set, it is possible to display a pseudo remaining number of chances of winning that is greater than the actual number of chances of winning, making it difficult for the player to understand the length of time that the second chance state will continue.

In addition, since it is possible to subtract two or more from the pseudo remaining number of chances of winning based on the execution of one special pattern lottery, in the second chance state where the pseudo remaining number of chances of winning is displayed, the player can continue playing in the hope that the second chance state will end quickly (the pseudo remaining number of chances of winning will be significantly subtracted)

In this case, if it is determined that a jackpot will be won in the first special pattern drawing during the second special probability state based on the results of the advance judgment of the reserved special pattern 1, it is preferable to configure the device to be capable of executing a pseudo remaining special probability count subtraction effect so that the pseudo remaining special probability count displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 becomes "last (0)" during the period until the lottery result of the first special pattern drawing that will result in the jackpot (lottery result indicating a jackpot win) is stopped and displayed.

By configuring it in this way, no matter what triggers the end of the second probability change state (the consumption of the probability change number or winning a jackpot), the second probability change state can be ended after displaying "Last (0)" as the pseudo remaining probability change number, providing a presentation that feels natural to the player. In addition, since the pseudo remaining probability change number can be set to a number greater than the actual remaining probability change number and the value of the pseudo remaining probability change number can be updated (deducted) by 2 or more when a special pattern lottery is executed once, it is possible to greatly deduct the pseudo remaining probability change number even in cases other than when a jackpot is won during the second probability change state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 15th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the present fifteenth control example will be described with reference to Fig. 494 to Fig. 498. The present fifteenth control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 have been changed, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to Figs. 494 to 496. Fig. 494(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this 15th control example. As shown in Fig. 494(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in this 15th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-mentioned 5th control example (see Fig. 244(a)) in that the 2nd win random number table 202c is replaced with the 2nd win random number 15 table 202nc, the jackpot type selection 5 table 202dd is replaced with the jackpot type selection 15 table 202nd, the time-saving random number 5 table 202de is replaced with the time-saving random number 15 table 202ne, and the time-saving type selection 5 table 202df is replaced with the time-saving type selection 15 table 202nf. All other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 494(b), the second winning random number 15 table 202nc in this fifteenth control example will be described. FIG. 494(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the second winning random number 15 table 202nc. Like the second winning random number table 202c described above, this second winning random number 15 table 202nc is a data table that is referenced when determining the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery, and specifies the value that is determined to be a winning for each probability state of the normal pattern within the range of possible values of the second winning random number counter C4 (0 to 299).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 494(b), when the probability state of the normal pattern is a "low probability state", no judgment value is specified for the lottery result of "win" for the entire range of the value of the second win random number counter C4, and the lottery result of "miss" is specified for the entire range, whereas when it is a "high probability state", the lottery result of "win" is specified for the value range of the second win random number counter C4 from "0 to 149".

In other words, in this fifteenth control example, when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, a win is not made in the normal symbol lottery. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the occurrence of an event in which a normal symbol winning game is executed when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, and a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

In this 15th control example, the contents of the second winning random number 15 table 202nc are specified so that a winning is not obtained in the normal pattern lottery that is executed when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, but it is sufficient to suppress the frequent execution of normal pattern winning games in the low probability state of the normal pattern, and the contents of the second winning random number 15 table 202nc may be specified so that a winning is possible with a low probability.

In addition, even when a normal winning game is being played, the technical idea used in any of the control examples described above, that is, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, may of course be used.

Next, the time-saving random number 15 table 202ne will be explained with reference to FIG. 494(c). This time-saving random number 15 table 202ne is a data table referenced in the time-saving judgment (time-saving lottery) that is executed when the result of the special pattern lottery is other than a big win (miss), and differs from the above-mentioned time-saving random number 5 table 202de (see FIG. 245(c)) in that the conditions (special pattern type, game state) that stipulate the value (range) of the first winning random number counter C1 that is judged to be a time-saving win are different.

Specifically, if the special symbol type is the "second special symbol," the range of "3 to 899" of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is set as the judgment value for winning the time-saving mode, regardless of the game state. In addition, if the special symbol type is the "first special symbol," no judgment value for winning the time-saving mode is set (shown as "-" in the diagram).

Next, referring to FIG. 495, the jackpot type selection 15 table 202nd in this 15th control example will be described. FIG. 495(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 15 table 202nd. As shown in FIG. 495(a), the jackpot type selection 15 table 202nd has a special 1 jackpot 15 table 202nd1 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery, and a special 2 jackpot 15 table 202nd2 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, and the jackpot type is determined by referring to the data table corresponding to the special pattern type that won the jackpot.

First, the contents of the 15 table 202nd1 for special 1 jackpot will be explained with reference to FIG. 495(b). FIG. 495(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the 15 table 202nd1 for special 1 jackpot. As described above, the 15 table 202nd1 for special 1 jackpot is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, and different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the acquired first jackpot type counter C2.

Specifically, when the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the jackpot type is "jackpot A15", when it is in the range of "50 to 89", the jackpot type is "jackpot B15", and when it is in the range of "90 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot C15".

"Jackpot A15" is a type of jackpot in which 6 rounds (R) of jackpot play are played, and a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot play ends, and the value of the high probability state counter 203i for indicating the high probability period is set to 100, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h for indicating the time-saving period is set to 60. In other words, when a jackpot play based on jackpot A15 is played, a high probability state is set after the jackpot play ends, and when the number of special symbol lotteries played during the high probability state reaches 60, the game state transitions from the high probability state to a second high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols).

"Jackpot B15" is a jackpot type in which a 6-round (R) jackpot game is played, and a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, and the value of the high probability state counter 203i for indicating the high probability state period is set to 80, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h for indicating the time-saving state period is set to 60. In other words, when a jackpot game based on jackpot B15 is played, a high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the number of special symbol lotteries played during the high probability state reaches 20, the game state transitions from the high probability state to a second high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols).

"Jackpot C15" is a jackpot type in which a 6-round (R) jackpot game is played, and a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends, and the value of the high probability state counter 203i for indicating the high probability period is set to 61, and the value of the time-saving counter 203h for indicating the time-saving period is set to 60. In other words, when a jackpot game based on jackpot C15 is played, a high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and when the number of special symbol lotteries played during the high probability state reaches 1, the game state transitions from the high probability state to a second high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols).

Next, the contents of the 15 table 202nd2 for special jackpot 2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 495(c). FIG. 495(c) is a flowchart showing the contents defined in the 15 table 202nd2 for special jackpot 2. This 15 table 202nd2 for special jackpot 2 differs from the 15 table 202nd1 for special jackpot 1 described above in that the type of special pattern for which the jackpot type is set has been changed and the various parameters defined for each jackpot type are different, but a detailed description of the detailed settings will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the time-saving type selection 15 table 202nf will be explained with reference to FIG. 496. FIG. 496 is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving type selection 15 table 202nf. As shown in FIG. 496, the time-saving type selection 15 table 202nf stipulates different types of time-saving and the number of times of time-saving corresponding to the game state at the time when the time-saving is won.

Specifically, if the game state when the time-saving bonus is won is the "normal state," the time-saving bonus type is set to "second time-saving" for the entire range of the acquired value of the time-saving bonus type selection counter CC1 from "0 to 99," and the value of the time-saving bonus counter 203h is set to "500." Also, if the game state when the time-saving bonus is won is the "second special bonus state," the time-saving bonus type is set to "first time-saving" for the entire range of the acquired value of the time-saving bonus type selection counter CC1 from "0 to 99," and the value of the time-saving bonus counter 203h is set to "10000."

In other words, the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the special bonus state is held until the normal state is set, and if the second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state, there is a high probability of winning the time-saving bonus (see FIG. 494(b)), and the time-saving type is set to the second time-saving state, which is a right-hand play state (a time-saving state in which the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently by having the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 by playing with a right hand, rather than by having the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 by playing with a left hand), with the time-saving count set to 500.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol lottery is executed during the second probability bonus state, there is a high probability of winning the time-saving bonus (see FIG. 494(b)), and the time-saving type is set to the first time-saving state, which is a left-handed play state (a time-saving state in which the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently by having the game ball enter the first ball entrance 64 by playing from the left than by having the game ball enter the second ball entrance 640 by playing from the right), with the time-saving count set to 10,000.

By configuring it in this way, the degree of advantage given to the player can be greatly varied depending on the game state in which the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the special probability state is executed. In addition, since a low probability state of normal symbols is set in which it is difficult to acquire new reserved memories (reserved special symbol 2) for the second special symbol lottery during both the second special probability state and the normal state, and since it is not possible to acquire new reserved special symbol 2 after the special probability state ends, it is possible to motivate the player to play in an attempt to acquire as many reserved memories (reserved special symbol 1) for the first special symbol lottery, which is executed in priority over the second special symbol lottery, so that the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the special probability state is not consumed.

Next, referring to Figures 497 and 498, the electrical configuration of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 15th control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the above-mentioned 5th control example. Note that detailed descriptions of the same contents as those in the above-mentioned 5th control example will be omitted.

First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifteenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 497(a). FIG. 497(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic configuration defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this fifteenth control example. As shown in FIG. 497(a), the ROM 222 in this fifteenth control example differs from the ROM 222 in the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(a)) in that a keep zone performance selection table 222na has been added.

The keep zone effect selection table 222na is a data table that is referenced when determining the effect mode of the keep zone effect that is set in response to the first first special pattern change in the second probability change state, which is executed when the special pattern 2 is reserved.

Now, referring to FIG. 498, the contents of the keep zone performance selection table 222na will be explained. FIG. 498 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the keep zone performance selection table 222na. As shown in FIG. 498, the keep zone performance selection table 222na defines different performance modes (suggested modes) in association with the length of time that the second probability variable state continues, the length of time that the first special symbol variation is performed when determining the performance mode of the keep zone performance, and the acquired performance counter 223f, and the keep zone performance is executed based on the performance mode determined by referring to the keep zone performance selection table 222na.

Specifically, when the remaining period of the second probability variable state is "40", that is, when the jackpot A15 is won, in the keep zone effect set for the second probability variable state, if the time for the first special symbol change to be executed is "short (within 60 seconds)", a "high speed" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves at high speed and a "big eater" suggestion mode 2 in which the big eater fish 10801 is shown are regulated for the range of the acquired effect counter 223f value "0 to 79", and a "high speed" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves at high speed and a "small eater" suggestion mode 2 in which the small eater fish 10801 is shown are regulated for the range of "80 to 99".

When the time for the first special symbol change to be executed is "long (longer than 60 seconds)," a "slow" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves slowly and a "small appetite" suggestion mode 2 in which a small appetite fish 10801 is displayed are specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value from "0 to 99."

In addition, when the remaining period of the second probability variable state is "20", that is, when the jackpot B15 is won, in the keep zone effect set for the second probability variable state, if the time for the first special symbol change to be executed is "short (within 60 seconds)", a "high speed" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves at high speed and a "big eater" suggestion mode 2 in which the big eater fish 10801 is shown are regulated for the range of the acquired effect counter 223f value "0 to 39", and a "low speed" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves at high speed and a "small eater" suggestion mode 2 in which the small eater fish 10801 is shown are regulated for the range of "40 to 99".

When the time for the first special symbol change to be executed is "long (longer than 60 seconds)," a "slow" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves slowly and a "small appetite" suggestion mode 2 in which a small appetite fish 10801 is displayed are specified for the entire range of the acquired performance counter 223f value from "0 to 99."

Finally, when the remaining period of the second probability variable state is "1", that is, when the jackpot C15 is won, the keep zone effect set for the second probability variable state is set. Regardless of the time period for the first special symbol change to be executed and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, a "slow" suggestion mode 1 in which the conveyor 10802 moves at a slow speed and a "premium" suggestion mode 2 in which a special golden fish 10801 is displayed are specified.

In other words, the more difficult it is for the end condition to end the second probability change state to be met (the longer the remaining period of the second probability change state is set), the more likely it is that a fish 10801 that eats a lot of food will be displayed, and the shorter the fluctuation time of the first special symbol selection executed during the second probability change state is, in other words, the shorter the period for acquiring a new reserved special symbol 1, the more likely it is that the conveyor 10802 will move at high speed.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible for the player to understand the difficulty of holding the reserved special chart 2 in the currently set second probability change state based on the content of the keep zone effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 497(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this fifteenth control example will be explained. The RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this fifteenth control example differs from the RAM 223 possessed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 249(b)) in that a second probability change counter 223na, a keep zone performance flag 223nb, and a keep confirmation flag 223nc have been added. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The second special chance counter 223na is a counter for measuring the duration of the second special chance state, and when it is determined in the second special chance state presentation setting process 15 (see S9058 in FIG. 501) that the game state has transitioned from the special chance state to the second special chance state (S9402 in FIG. 501: Yes), a value corresponding to the special chance counter 203i is set (see S9451 in FIG. 501). Then, the value is decremented by 1 each time the first special symbol lottery is executed (see S9566 in FIG. 502), and is referenced when determining that the reserved special symbol 2 that has already been acquired will not be consumed during the second special chance state (see S9573 in FIG. 502).

The keep zone performance flag 223nb is a flag for indicating that the performance mode of the keep zone performance has been set and that the keep zone performance is being executed, and is set to ON when the performance mode of the keep zone performance has been determined in correspondence with the first first special symbol drawing after the transition to the second probability variable state. By setting the keep zone performance flag 223nb to ON, the process of determining the performance mode of a new keep zone performance is prevented from being executed when setting a variable performance corresponding to the second or subsequent first special symbol drawing during the second probability variable state.

The keep confirmation flag 223nc is a flag for indicating that it has been determined that the special chart 2 reservation will not be consumed during the second probability variable state (the special chart 2 reservation can be held until the state transitions to the normal state) during the keep zone performance, and is set to on when it has been determined that the special chart 2 reservation will not be consumed during the second probability variable state (the special chart 2 reservation can be held until the state transitions to the normal state). By setting this keep confirmation flag to on, a keep confirmation performance is executed to indicate that the special chart 2 reservation will not be consumed during the second probability variable state.

Here, as a keep confirmation effect, for example, the bait (bait icon hr5 marked with SP) corresponding to the reserved special chart 2 displayed on the display screen shown in FIG. 492(a) rises from the conveyor and does not approach the fish 10801, and an effect is executed in which the words "SP bait stocking successful" are displayed. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that a situation has been reached where the SP bait will not be eaten by the fish 10801.

<Regarding control process of main control device 110 in the 15th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 499 and Fig. 500, the control process contents of the main control device 110 in this 15th control example will be described, focusing on the points that are different from the above-mentioned 5th control example. The pachinko machine 10 of this 15th control example differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned 5th control example in that the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed in priority over the second special symbol lottery, and in that the execution conditions of the time-saving lottery are different.

Specifically, the difference is that special symbol variation process 15 (see S15104 in FIG. 499) is executed instead of special symbol variation process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252). The rest of the processing is the same, and detailed explanations of the same processing will be omitted.

First, the contents of the special symbol variation process 15 (S15104) will be described with reference to FIG. 499. FIG. 499 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the special symbol variation process 15 (S15104). As shown in FIG. 499, the special symbol variation process 15 (S15104) is configured to, after completing the processing of S203 in the above-mentioned special symbol variation process 5 (see S104 in FIG. 252), determine whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S15204), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S15204: Yes), subtract 1 from the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S15205), and execute the processing of S206 to S207 to execute the first special symbol lottery.

In the process of S15204, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is not greater than 0 (S15204: No), it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e is greater than 0 (S15210), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S15210: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S15211), and the processes of S212 to S213 for executing the second special pattern lottery are executed. The other process contents are the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the fifteenth control example, compared to the fifth control example described above, the first special symbol lottery is executed in priority over the second special symbol lottery. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to maintain the state in which the special symbol 2 reservation has been obtained by continuing the state in which the special symbol 1 reservation has been obtained.

Next, the contents of the time-saving lottery process 15 (S8086) will be explained with reference to FIG. 500. FIG. 500 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the time-saving lottery process 15 (S8086). As shown in FIG. 500, the time-saving lottery process 15 (S8086) differs from the above-mentioned time-saving lottery process 5 (see S8006 in FIG. 254) in that the game state in which the time-saving lottery can be executed is different, and that the data table referenced in determining whether or not a time-saving lottery has been won is different.

Specifically, when the time-saving lottery process 15 (S8086) is executed, first, the process of S8101 to S8102, which is the same as the time-saving lottery process 5 described above (see S8006 in FIG. 254), is executed. Then, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state or the second probability variable state (S8183), and if it is determined that the current game state is the normal state or the second probability variable state (S8183: Yes), it refers to the time-saving random number 15 table 222ne to determine whether or not the time-saving win has been made (S8184). After that, the process of S8105 and S8106, which is the same as the time-saving lottery process 5 described above (see S8006 in FIG. 254), is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this fifteenth control example, the time-saving lottery can be executed not only in the normal state but also in the second special probability state. And, as mentioned above, the time-saving lottery executed in the normal state is configured to give the player a more advantageous bonus when the time-saving lottery is won than when the time-saving lottery is executed in the second special probability state. In this way, by configuring the time-saving lottery to be executable in multiple game states and varying the bonus granted when the time-saving lottery is won depending on the game state in which the time-saving lottery is executed, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in at what timing (game state) the time-saving lottery will be executed.

In the fifteenth control example, the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the high probability state is held until the end of the second high probability state, making it possible to provide a novel gameplay that aims to prevent the second special symbol lottery from being executed by granting a beneficial bonus to the player. In order to provide a novel gameplay that aims to prevent the second special symbol lottery from being executed, the time-saving lottery is executed in the normal state to grant a beneficial bonus to the player when the time-saving lottery is won, compared to when the time-saving lottery is executed in the second high probability state. However, without being limited to this, for example, if the second special symbol lottery is executed during the second high probability state, the time-saving lottery may not be executed. In this case, the reserved special symbol 2 acquired during the high probability state is held until the end of the second high probability state, making it possible to grant the player the added value of executing the time-saving lottery.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 15th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 501 to Fig. 503, among the control processes executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this 15th control example, the characteristic contents different from the above-mentioned 5th control example will be explained. In the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 15th control example, it is configured to execute a control process different from the above-mentioned 5th control example in that it executes various processes for determining the performance mode of the keep zone performance executed during the second probability variable state.

First, the contents of the second probability variable state presentation setting process 15 (S9058) will be explained with reference to FIG. 501. FIG. 501 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the second probability variable state presentation setting process 15 (S9058). In this second probability variable state presentation setting process 15 (S9058), when the second probability variable state is set, processing is executed to determine the presentation mode of the keep zone presentation.

When the second probability change state presentation setting process 15 (S9058) is executed, first, the game state before the change is read from the sub-state setting area 223g (S9401), and it is determined whether the read game state is a probability change state (S9402). If it is determined in the process of S9402 that it is a probability change state (S9402: Yes), the probability change state is set after the end of the big win game, the time period ends before the probability change period, and the second probability change state is set, so the value corresponding to the remaining number of probability changes (the value of the probability change counter 203i) is set to the value of the second probability change counter 223na (S9451), and then it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol selection counter 203e is greater than 0, i.e., whether the special symbol 2 reservation is acquired (S9452).

If it is determined in the processing of S9452 that N2 is greater than 0 (S9452: Yes), the value of the probability change counter 203i is read (S9453), the keep zone performance selection table 222na is referenced to determine the performance mode (S9454), the keep performance in progress flag 223nb is set to ON (S9455), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9452 that N2 is not greater than 0 (S9452: No), this means that the game has transitioned to the second special bonus state without acquiring the reserved special chart 2 during the special bonus state, so the game determines the presentation mode corresponding to the transition to the normal state without executing the keep zone presentation (S9456), and ends this process.

Next, the contents of the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S15483) will be explained with reference to FIG. 502. FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S15483). This special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S15483) executes a process for determining the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol change, and in particular, the contents of the process for determining the performance mode of the variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol change during the second probability change state differ from those of the fifth control example described above. Note that in cases where the process contents are the same as the process corresponding to the special chart 1 performance mode setting process in the fifth control example described above, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

When the special chart 1 performance mode setting process (S15483) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S9501), and if it is determined that it is greater than 0 (S9501: Yes), the process of S9502 to S9504, which is the same as the fifth control example described above, is executed as it is, and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S9501, if the value of the time-saving counter 223da is not greater than 0, that is, it is neither the high probability state nor the second time-saving state (S9501: No), next, it is determined whether the value of the second high probability counter 223na is greater than 0 (S9565), and if it is determined that the value of the second high probability counter 223na is greater than 0 (S9565: Yes), the value of the second high probability counter 223na is decremented by 1 (S9566). Next, it is determined whether the keep zone effect flag 223nb is on (S9571), and if it is set to on (S9571: Yes), it is then determined whether the keep confirmation flag 223nc is set to on (S9572).

In the processing of S9572, if it is determined that the keep confirmation flag 223nc is not set on (S9572: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is equal to or greater than the value of the second special probability variation counter 223na (S9573). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is equal to or greater than the value of the second special probability variation counter 223na (S9573: Yes), it is then determined whether the acquired reserved special pattern 1 contains information indicating a jackpot win (S9574). If it is determined that this is not the case (S9574: No), a presentation mode indicating that the keep zone presentation will be completed is determined (S9575), the keep confirmation flag 223nc is set to on (S9576), and the processing proceeds to S9578. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9573 that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is less than the value of the second special symbol counter 223na (S9573: No), and if it is determined in the process of S9574 that the acquired reserved special symbol 1 contains information indicating a jackpot win (S9574: Yes), the presentation mode of the corresponding keep zone presentation is determined (S9577) and the process proceeds to S9578. Also, if it is determined in the process of S9572 that the keep confirmation flag 223nc is set to on (S9572: Yes), the process of S9573 to S9577 is skipped and the process proceeds to S9578.

In the process of S9578, it is determined whether the updated value of the second probability variation counter 223na has reached 0 (S9578), and if it is determined that it has reached 0 (S9578: Yes), the keep zone performance flag 223nb is set to OFF (S9579), a display pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set (S9504), and this process ends. In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S9565 that the value of the second probability variation counter 223na is 0 (S9565: No), and if it is determined in the process of S9571 that the keep zone performance flag 223nb is OFF (S9565: No), the process of S9572 to S9579 is skipped and the process proceeds directly to S9504.

Next, the contents of the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 15 (S15487) will be explained with reference to FIG. 503. FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 15 (S15487). This special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 15 (S15487) differs from the above-mentioned special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 5 (see S4987 in FIG. 269) in that the processing contents for determining the presentation mode corresponding to the variable presentation executed during the normal state or the second probability change state are different.

Specifically, when the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 15 (S15487) is executed, the process of S9601 is executed, which is the same as the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 described above (see S4987 in FIG. 269). If the process of S9601 determines that the state is not normal or the second probability bonus state (S9601: No), the process of S9611 to S9619 is executed, which is the same as the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 described above (see S4987 in FIG. 269), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S9601, if it is determined that the current state is the normal state or the second probability bonus state (S9601: Yes), it is determined whether the keep effect in progress flag 223nb is set to on (S9651). If it is determined that the keep effect in progress flag 223nb is not set to on (S9651: No), it is next determined whether the keep confirmation flag 223nc is set to on (S9652). If it is determined that it is set to on (S9652: Yes), the keep confirmation flag 223nc is set to off (S9653), a presentation mode suggesting the granting of a time reduction is determined (S9654), the process of S9611 is executed, and this process ends.

Also, if it is determined in the processing of S9652 that the keep confirmation flag 223nc is not set to on (S9652: No), the processing of S9653 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S9654.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9651 that the keep performance in progress flag 223nb is set to on (S9651: Yes), the processing proceeds to S9611, where the performance mode corresponding to the end of the keep performance is determined (S9655), the keep performance in progress flag 223nb is set to off (S9656), and the processing proceeds to S9611. In other words, if the second special symbol lottery is executed while the keep performance is being executed, the performance mode corresponding to the end of the keep performance is determined, and the end performance including the display screen shown in FIG. 492(b) is executed.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in this fifteenth control example is configured to be able to execute winning lotteries using multiple symbol types, to be able to execute winning lotteries using one symbol type in priority over winning lotteries using other symbol types, and to be able to set a first game state in which it is easier to acquire the lottery right to execute a winning lottery for another symbol type, and a second game state in which it is more difficult to acquire the lottery right than the first game state.

A storage means is provided that can store a predetermined number of acquired lottery rights (e.g., 1), and the lottery rights for other symbol types stored in the storage means during the first gaming state are stored until a predetermined period of time (e.g., 40 winning lotteries) has elapsed since the second gaming state was set, and a winning lottery for the other symbol type is executed after the predetermined period has elapsed, making it easier for the player to be granted a beneficial bonus than if a winning lottery for the other symbol type were executed before the predetermined period had elapsed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a new and innovative gameplay that makes it easier to obtain advantageous benefits by not holding a winning lottery using lottery rights already stored in the storage means for a specified period of time.

In the fifteenth control example, a maximum of four drawing rights for one symbol type can be stored in the storage means, and the number of drawing rights for other symbol types that can be stored in the storage means is configured to be less than the number of drawing rights for one symbol type (only one can be stored). Therefore, if a winning drawing for another symbol type is executed even once after the first game state ends, the right to acquire an advantageous benefit is lost, so the player can play with a sense of tension. In addition, since multiple drawing rights for one symbol type can be stored, it is possible to make it easier to continue playing a game to acquire a drawing right for one symbol type after the second game state is set, and by storing multiple drawing rights for one symbol type, it is possible to make it more difficult to execute a winning drawing for another symbol type.

In this fifteenth control example, the storage means is configured to store only one lottery right for another pattern type, but the present invention is not limited to this and multiple lottery rights may be stored.

Furthermore, the system is configured so that different lengths of change time can be set as the pattern change time for indicating the result of the winning lottery for one pattern type executed in the second game state. Therefore, when a pattern change with a longer change time is executed, the period until all lottery rights for one pattern type stored in the storage means are used can be made longer, making it easier to store a new lottery right for one pattern type in the storage means. Therefore, the player can play while hoping that a pattern change with a long change time will be executed.

In addition, the fifteenth control is configured to be able to vary the period from when the first game state ends and the second game state is set until when a player is more likely to be given a special benefit. Specifically, the first game state is set after the end of a winning game that is executed when a winning lottery is won, and the length of time that the first game state continues and the length of time that the second game state is set until when a player is more likely to be given a special benefit can be set differently depending on the type of winning that is set when a winning lottery is won.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for players to understand the period until advantageous benefits are awarded to them, making it easier to provide players with an enjoyable game experience.

The gameplay used in this fifteenth control example may also be the gameplay used in the fourteenth control example described above, that is, a gameplay in which a special bonus (ceiling bonus) is awarded to a player when a winning lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without a winning prize being won.

In this case, for example, when the number of consecutive losses in the winning lottery held during the second game state (the number of times of losing) reaches a predetermined number, the first game state can be set, and by storing the lottery right for another symbol type in the storage means during the first game state, it is possible to replay a game in which the lottery right for the other symbol type is held until it becomes easier for the player to be awarded a special benefit.

In addition, a third gaming state can be set as a ceiling bonus by executing a winning lottery for one symbol type a predetermined number of times while holding the right to draw for other symbol types, and a bonus advantageous to the player can be easily awarded by executing a winning lottery for another symbol type during the third gaming state.

Furthermore, in this fifteenth control example, the second special pattern lottery is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (until the second special variable state ends and the normal state is set) since the second gaming state (a gaming state in which it is difficult to obtain a special pattern 2 reservation) is set, making it easier for the player to be granted a special privilege (second time-saving state). However, if the player has obtained the special pattern 2 reservation at the time when a predetermined period of time has elapsed (until the second special variable state ends and the normal state is set) since the second gaming state (a gaming state in which it is difficult to obtain a special pattern 2 reservation) is set, that is, if the player has obtained the special pattern 2 reservation after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the second gaming state was set, the second special pattern lottery is executed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the second gaming state was set. If the player has obtained the right to execute the different symbol lottery, the player may be given a special bonus. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 that can set multiple settings that vary the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, if a special symbol 2 reservation is acquired after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (until the second probability change state ends and the normal state is set) since the second game state (a game state in which it is difficult to acquire a special symbol 2 reservation) has been set, the display mode of the reserved symbols to show the number of reserved special symbols 2 that have been acquired may be switched to a display mode that corresponds to the set value.

In the 15th control example described above, the second special symbol lottery is executed after the first game state (a game state in which it is easy to obtain a reserved special symbol 2) ends and the second game state (a game state in which it is difficult to obtain a reserved special symbol 2) is set, and a predetermined period of time has passed (until the second probability variable state ends and the normal state is set). This makes it easier for the player to receive a special benefit (second time-saving state) than when the second special symbol lottery is executed before the predetermined period has passed (during the second probability variable state). However, without being limited to this, the second special symbol lottery may be executed after the first game state (a game state in which it is easy to obtain a reserved special symbol 2) ends and the second game state (a game state in which it is difficult to obtain a reserved special symbol 2) is set, making it easier for the player to receive a special benefit (second time-saving state) than when the second special symbol lottery is executed when the first game state is set.

In addition, in this fifteenth control example, the first game state (a game state in which it is easy to obtain a reserved special symbol 2) can be set to a special variable state, and the second game state (a game state in which it is difficult to obtain a reserved special symbol 2) can be set to a second special variable state or a normal state. However, this is not limited to this, and the various game states set in each of the above control examples can be appropriately set so that it is relatively easier to obtain a reserved special symbol for a specific special symbol type in the second game state than in the first game state. For example, it is also possible to set a time-saving state (second time-saving state) as the first game state, and the first time-saving state or the normal state as the second game state.

In addition, in this fifteenth control example, a maximum of one reserved special symbol 2 can be acquired, but multiple reserved special symbols 2 can be acquired. In this case, the remaining period until the end of the second special variable state (number of times the special symbol changes) is compared with the total number of reserved special symbols 1 and 2 that have been acquired, and it is possible to determine whether the situation is such that the second special symbol lottery can be executed after the end of the second special variable state. If it is determined that the situation is such that the second special symbol lottery can be executed after the end of the second special variable state, the above-mentioned keep confirmation performance can be executed (the keep confirmation flag 223nc is set to on).

By configuring it in this way, multiple SP baits (bait icons corresponding to the special chart 2 reservation) can be displayed in the keep zone presentation, enhancing the presentation effect.

<Regarding the first modified example of the fifteenth control example>
Next, a modified example of the game characteristics used in the 15th control example will be described when applied to a pachinko machine 10 with a different game specification. The first modified example of the 15th control example is different from the above-mentioned 15th control example in that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are configured to be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variable specification).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute lottery games with more special symbols within a given time, and the probability that the player will be awarded a jackpot within the given time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play efficiently.

The configuration that allows the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol to be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous change specification) is the same as the twelfth control example described above, so a detailed explanation of this will be omitted.

<Regarding the content of the performance executed in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 616, we will explain the effects executed in the first variant of this fifteenth control example, which differ from those in the fifteenth control example described above.

First, we will explain the characteristic gameplay that occurs when the gameplay used in the above-mentioned 15th control example is combined with a configuration that makes it possible to simultaneously (in parallel) execute the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern.

In the above-mentioned 15th control example, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed in priority over the second special symbol lottery, and further, the second special symbol lottery is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (until the second probability variable state ends and the normal state is set) since the second game state (a game state in which it is difficult to obtain a special symbol 2 reservation) is set, so that the player is more likely to be granted a special privilege (second time-saving state). In the first modified example of this 15th control example, the first special symbol lottery is executed depending on the game state to be set. The time for the first special symbol to indicate the result of the selection and the time for the second special symbol to indicate the result of the second special symbol lottery are configured to differ depending on the game state to be set, and in a game state (first game state) in which it is easy to obtain the reserved special symbol 2, a shorter time for the second special symbol to be set than for the first special symbol to be set, and in a game state (second game state) in which it is difficult to obtain the reserved special symbol 2, a shorter time for the first special symbol to be set than for the second special symbol to be set.

In addition, in the first variant of this 15th control example, a maximum of four special chart 2 reservations can be stored.

Then, before the reserved special symbols 2 acquired during the first gaming state (high probability state) are all consumed during the second gaming state (second high probability state), the number of special symbol draws executed during the second gaming state (second high probability state) reaches a predetermined number (remaining number of high probability state draws), so that a second special symbol draw that is advantageous to the player can be executed after the second high probability state ends.

In the first variant of the fifteenth control example configured in this way, as a keep zone effect, a performance is executed in which a bait icon corresponding to the special symbol 1 reservation and a bait icon corresponding to the special symbol 2 reservation are given to the fish 10801 in overlapping fashion in accordance with the type of special symbol lottery being executed. Then, a performance is executed in which the aim is to fill the stomach of the fish 10801 with the bait icon corresponding to the special symbol 1 reservation until all of the bait icons corresponding to the special symbol 2 reservation that have been acquired are consumed.

As described above, in the first variant of the fifteenth control example, the first special symbol drawing and the second special symbol drawing are configured to be executed in parallel, so even if the game is played without interrupting the reserved special symbol 1 as in the fifteenth control example described above, if the time period during which the second special symbol changes to show the result of the second special symbol drawing is short, or if the time period during which the first special symbol changes to show the result of the first special symbol drawing is long, there is a risk that all reserved special symbol 2 will be consumed during the second special symbol state.

Therefore, in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, the player will be interested in the time it takes for the special symbol to change for each special symbol type. Therefore, in the keep zone presentation executed in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, the presentation mode of the bait icon is configured to be able to determine more types of presentation modes based on the time it takes for the corresponding special symbol to change, compared to the fifteenth control example described above.

Figure 616 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen executed during the keep zone effect executed in the first modified example of this fifteenth control example. As shown in Figure 616 (a), the keep zone effect executed in the first modified example of this fifteenth control example differs from the keep zone effect executed in the fifteenth control example described above in that an effect is executed in which fish 10801 simultaneously preys on multiple bait icons (hr0, hr0a), the number of bait icons displayed corresponding to the special chart 2 reservation is increased, and the display mode of each bait icon is different, but otherwise it is the same. Explanation of the same display modes is omitted.

The first modified example of the fifteenth control example is configured to allow the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change to be executed in an overlapping manner, so that the fish 10801 eats the bait icon hr0 corresponding to the first special symbol change being executed and the bait icon hr0a corresponding to the second special symbol change being executed together. Then, on the conveyor 10802, the bait icon hr1 and the bait icon hr2 corresponding to the special symbol 1 reservation, and the bait icon hr1a and the bait icon hr2a corresponding to the special symbol 2 reservation are displayed.

In the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, the display mode of the corresponding bait icon is configured to differ depending on the length of the special pattern change time corresponding to each special pattern reservation. Specifically, as the bait icon corresponding to the special pattern change, if the change time is less than 10 seconds, a display mode imitating small bait (see bait icon hr1) is displayed, and if the change time is 180 seconds or more, a display mode imitating hard bait is displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the change time of the special pattern change by understanding the display mode of the bait icon that is displayed.

As described above, in this first modified example, when a short change time is set as the first special pattern change during the second probability change state, the first special pattern change is more advantageous to the player, so when a bait icon with a display mode that resembles small bait is displayed, the game situation is more advantageous to the player than when a bait icon with a display mode that resembles small bait is not displayed.

On the other hand, as the bait icon corresponding to the second special pattern change, if the change time is less than 30 seconds, a display mode imitating small bait is displayed, and if the change time is 300 seconds or more, a display mode imitating hard bait (see bait icon hr1a) is displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the change time of the second special pattern change by grasping the display mode of the bait icon corresponding to the displayed second special pattern change.

As mentioned above, in this first modified example, when a longer change time is set as the second special pattern change during the second probability change state, the second special pattern change is more advantageous to the player, so when a bait icon with a display mode that resembles hard bait is displayed, the game situation is more advantageous to the player than when a bait icon with a display mode that resembles hard bait is not displayed.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the total time of the second special pattern change corresponding to the acquired reserved special pattern 2 symbols excluding the last reserved special pattern 2 symbol to be consumed, and the remaining time of the second special pattern change being executed, exceeds a predetermined time (the period during which the second special pattern lottery can end the second special pattern state if playing normally), a special effect is executed to show that there is a high possibility that the reserved special pattern 2 will be acquired at the time the second special pattern state ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 616(a), the bait icon hr2a corresponding to the latest reserved special chart 2 floats in the air, and the display position does not move even when the conveyor 10802 is in operation. By configuring it in this way, the player can play with peace of mind when a special effect is executed.

In addition, while this special effect is being executed, compared to the normal keep zone effect, an emphasis notification is executed to emphasize and guide the player to continue playing to obtain the reserved special symbol 1. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which all reserved special symbols 2 are consumed during the second probability change state due to a period of time in which the game is temporarily interrupted while the special effect is being executed and the first special symbol lottery is not executed.

In the above example, the total time of the change time of the second special symbol change corresponding to the acquired special symbol 2 reserves excluding the last one to be consumed, and the remaining change time of the second special symbol change being executed are calculated. However, it is sufficient to be configured to be able to determine that there is a high possibility that the special symbol 2 reserve will be acquired at the time the second special symbol change state ends. For example, it may be configured to determine only whether the remaining change time of the second special symbol change being executed is longer than the period that would make it possible to end the second special symbol change state by the first special symbol lottery if playing normally, or to determine whether the acquired special symbol 2 reserves excluding the last one to be consumed contain information corresponding to a change time longer than the period that would make it possible to end the second special symbol change state by the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, in the first variant of the fifteenth control example, if it is determined that a period during the keep zone presentation during which the first special symbol variation (lottery) is not performed continues for a predetermined period of time, a guidance presentation can be executed to encourage the player to play a game that will obtain the reserved special symbol 1.

Here, the display content that is displayed when the first special symbol change is not executed during the keep zone performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 616(b). FIG. 616(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when time has passed from the state shown in FIG. 616(a) and the first special symbol change is not executed during the keep zone performance.

As shown in FIG. 616(b), if the special symbol 1 reserve runs out during the keep zone presentation and only the second special symbol variation is being executed, a display mode that emphasizes the presentation that guides the player on how to play displayed in the small display area Dm4 (displayed in a double frame in the figure) is displayed in order to emphasize guidance for the player on how to acquire the special symbol 1 reserve, and an emphasized guidance announcement is executed in the secondary display area Ds, displaying the text "There is no special symbol 1 reserve! Hurry and save up the special symbol 1 reserve."

In addition, to indicate that only the second special symbol variation is in progress on the conveyor 10802, an effect is executed in which the bait icon hr1a corresponding to the reserved special symbol 2 approaches the fish 10801, as shown in FIG. 616(a). Note that the bait icon hr2a is displayed in the same position as in FIG. 616(a) because a special effect is being executed. This configuration makes it possible to prevent a situation in which all reserved special symbols 2 are consumed during the second probability variation state due to a period in which play is temporarily interrupted while the special effect is being executed and the first special symbol lottery is not executed.

In addition, if the state shown in FIG. 616(b) continues without acquiring a new reserved special symbol 1, and the second special symbol state cannot end before the second special symbol change corresponding to the bait icon hr2a is executed, that is, if it is determined that the number of first special symbol draws that can be executed within the remaining time until the second special symbol change corresponding to the bait icon hr2a is executed (the remaining period until the second special symbol change corresponding to the bait icon hr1a ends) cannot reach the remaining number of special symbol draws required to end the second special symbol state, the special performance will end and the display will switch to a normal display in which the bait icon hr2a moves as the conveyor 10802 operates.

In the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, multiple reserved special symbols 2 can be stored, and even if a situation occurs where reserved special symbols 1 have not been acquired, a new second special symbol variation using the reserved special symbols 2 already acquired is not executed until the ongoing second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed. In other words, during the second special symbol variation state, in order to end the second special symbol variation state, a first special symbol variation with a shorter variation time is executed, and in order to make it difficult for all reserved special symbols 2 to be consumed during the second special symbol variation state, a second special symbol variation with a longer variation time is executed, which is the most advantageous game content for the player.

Therefore, in the keep zone presentation, an icon type that is advantageous to the player is likely to be set for the first special pattern change with a short change time. Also, an icon type that is advantageous to the player is likely to be set for the second special pattern change with a long change time.

By configuring it in this way, players can be motivated to try to get as many reserved special charts 1 as possible during the keep zone performance.

Here, we will explain the variation time that can be determined as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation during the second high probability variable state in the first modified example of this fifteenth control example. Although not shown, in the first modified example of this fifteenth control example, a dedicated variation pattern table is referenced when selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation and the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation executed during the second high probability variable state.

Although not shown in the figure, the second probability variable state referenced pattern table has an advantageous table where a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is likely to be selected as the first special symbol variation and a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is likely to be selected as the second special symbol variation, and an unfavorable table where a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time is unlikely to be selected as the first special symbol variation and a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is unlikely to be selected as the second special symbol variation, and either table is determined based on the setting trigger for the second probability variable state (jackpot type) and the result of a lottery to determine the variation pattern table to be referenced.

The advantage table specifies that a variation pattern of 1 to 60 seconds can be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and a variation pattern of 100 to 300 seconds can be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol. A different variation pattern is selected according to the number of stored rights to draw the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved) (special symbol 1 reserved number) and the acquired value of the variation pattern type counter CS1.

More specifically, the more reserved special pattern 1 is, the more likely it is that a pattern with a short change time will be selected as the change pattern for the first special pattern change, and the more likely it is that a pattern with a long change time will be selected as the change pattern for the second special pattern change.

The disadvantage table specifies that a variation pattern of 1 to 45 seconds can be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation, and a variation pattern of 30 to 300 seconds can be selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation. A different variation pattern is selected according to the number of stored rights to draw the first special symbol (reserved special symbol 1 number) and the acquired value of the variation pattern type counter CS1.

More specifically, the more reserved special pattern 1 is, the more likely it is that a pattern with a short change time will be selected as the change pattern for the first special pattern change, and the more likely it is that a pattern with a long change time will be selected as the change pattern for the second special pattern change.

As explained above, in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, the variation pattern of the various special symbol variations executed during the second probability variable state is configured to be able to switch between a state in which a variation pattern advantageous to the player is likely to be selected and a state in which a variation pattern advantageous to the player is unlikely to be selected, depending on the type of variation pattern table referenced. By configuring it in this way, the success rate of the keep zone presentation can be made to differ depending on the type of variation pattern table referenced.

In the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, the type of variation pattern table to be referenced is determined according to the game situation (jackpot type) when the second high probability variable state is set, but this is not limited thereto. For example, the scenario may be configured so that the type of variation pattern table to be referenced is switched according to the number of times the special pattern lottery is executed during the second high probability variable state.

In addition, in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, a variation pattern table in which the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation and the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation are specified is referenced, but without being limited to this, a variation pattern table in which only the variation pattern of the first special symbol variation is specified and a variation pattern table in which only the variation pattern of the second special symbol variation are specified may be provided, and tables with different degrees of advantage to the player may be provided for each variation pattern table, and different types of variation pattern tables may be referenced for each special symbol type depending on the game situation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the combinations of variation patterns of various special symbol variations executed during the second probability variable state more diverse, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device 110 executed in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 617, the characteristic processing contents of the control processing of the main control device 110 executed in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example will be described. The first modified example of the fifteenth control example is different from the fifteenth control example described above in that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

In addition, when the game state is switched, specifically when the second special probability state ends based on the execution of a special pattern lottery, a process is executed to discard the ongoing special pattern variation, which differs from the above-mentioned twelfth control example and fifteenth control example. By configuring in this way, even if the normal state is set while a long-term second special pattern variation is being executed, it is possible to discard the long-term second special pattern variation midway, making it easier to execute a new second special pattern lottery in the normal state.

In addition, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to simultaneously (parallelly) display the first special symbol and the second special symbol, as in the first modified example of this fifteenth control example (so-called simultaneous change specification), the special symbol change that is being executed may be discarded when the ceiling bonus is awarded or when a time-saving lottery is won, or the special symbol change that is being executed may be continued without being discarded.

Note that, among the differences between the first modified example of this 15th control example and the 15th control example described above, the explanation of the parts where the various control processing contents described in the 12th control example described above can be reused will be omitted. In other words, here, with reference to FIG. 617, the process of discarding the ongoing special symbol fluctuation (fluctuation discarding process at state transition) when the game state described above is switched, specifically, when the second probability variable state ends based on the execution of a special symbol lottery, will be explained.

Figure 617 is a flow chart showing the processing contents of the state transition variation discarding process (YS101). This state transition variation discarding process (YS101) is a process executed by the timer interrupt process (see Figure 156) executed by the MPU 101 of the main control device 110, and if a specific condition is met when the game state transitions, processing is executed to discard the special pattern variation that is being executed.

When the state transition variation discard process (YS101) is executed, first it is determined whether there has been a change in the game state (YS201), and if it is determined that there has been no change in the game state (YS201: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of YS201 that there has been a change in the game state (YS201: Yes), it is next determined whether there has been a change from the second high probability state to the normal state (YS202), and if it is determined that there has not been a change from the second high probability state to the normal state (YS202: No), this process is terminated.

In the process of YS202, if it is determined that the second probability change state has been changed to the normal state (YS202: Yes), it is determined whether the special pattern is currently changing (YS203), and if it is determined that the special pattern is not changing (YS203: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of YS203, if it is determined that the special pattern is currently changing (YS203: Yes), it is determined whether the special pattern change being executed is a jackpot change (YS204), and if it is determined that the jackpot change is not happening (YS204: No), the change stop flag (special pattern 1 change stop flag 203ke, special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf) corresponding to the special pattern type during the special pattern change is set to on (YS205), and this process is terminated.

By executing the processing of YS205, in the special pattern change processing 12 (see Y104 in FIG. 417) that is executed next, the special pattern change being executed is forcibly stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a miss.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of YS204 that a jackpot fluctuation is occurring (YS204: Yes), a special continuation command is set (YS206) and this process is terminated. By receiving the special continuation command set in the process of YS206 on the voice lamp control device 113 side, a congratulatory effect is executed to inform the player that a jackpot fluctuation is occurring at the timing of transition from the second probability fluctuation state to the normal state.

As explained above, in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, it is possible to discard the special pattern variation being executed when the game state transitions. Therefore, a special pattern type (e.g., the second special pattern) that has executed a long-term special pattern variation in the game state before the transition is more likely to execute a short-term special pattern variation in the game state after the transition. In a pachinko machine 10 that can vary the gameplay based on the transition of the game state, it is possible to easily execute a new special pattern variation as the game state transitions, making it easier to provide an appropriate game that is in line with the gameplay.

Also, as in the twelfth control example described above, the special pattern change in progress is not discarded based on the start or stop of the special pattern change, but is configured to be discarded based on the transition of the game state. Therefore, for example, even if the game state transitions regardless of the start or stop of the special pattern change (if the game state transitions 5 seconds after the change starts or the game state transitions based on the results of the normal pattern lottery), the special pattern change in progress can be discarded in accordance with the timing of the transition of the game state. In addition, even if multiple types of special patterns are undergoing special pattern changes at the time the game state transitions, the special pattern changes can be discarded for all special pattern types that are undergoing special pattern changes.

In the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, a process for discarding the special pattern variation currently in progress is configured to be executable when the game state switches from the second special probability state to the normal state, but the process for discarding the special pattern variation currently in progress based on the transition of the game state may be diverted to other uses, and for example, as in the thirteenth and fourteenth control examples described above, the process for discarding the special pattern variation currently in progress may be configured to be executed based on the awarding of a ceiling bonus.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 executed in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 618, the characteristic processing contents of the processing for determining the presentation mode of the keep zone presentation executed in the first modified example of the present fifteenth control example will be described. The first modified example of the present fifteenth control example is different from the above-mentioned fifteenth control example in that the game method for not consuming all the reserved special figures 2 during the state in which the keep zone presentation is executed (the second probability variable state) is different.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned 15th control example, the first special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the second special symbol lottery, so that as long as the first special symbol lottery continues to be executed during the keep zone performance (as long as the special symbol 1 reservation is not interrupted), the special symbol 2 reservation is not consumed (the second special symbol lottery is not executed) until the keep zone performance ends (until the second special symbol state ends). In contrast, in the first modified example of this 15th control example, the first special symbol change display and the second special symbol change display are configured to be executed simultaneously (in parallel), so even if the special symbol 1 reservation is always held, if the change time of the first special symbol change executed is long and the change time of the second special symbol change executed is short, there is a risk that the special symbol 2 reservation will be consumed in its entirety before the second special symbol state ends.

Therefore, in this fifteenth control example, the presentation mode of the keep zone presentation (display mode of the bait icon) is configured to differ based on the change time of the currently executing special pattern change (first special pattern change, second special pattern change) and the change time of the special pattern change (first special pattern change, second special pattern change) corresponding to the acquired special pattern reserve (special pattern 1 reserve, special pattern 2 reserve).

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible for the player to predict the difficulty of ending the keep zone performance while retaining the reserved special chart 2, based on the performance mode of the keep zone performance being executed.

Figure 618 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the second high probability state presentation setting process 15a (YS9058). As shown in Figure 618, the second high probability state presentation setting process 15a (YS9058) differs from the second high probability state presentation setting process 15 (S9058) executed in the above-mentioned 15th control example in that a process for determining the display mode of the bait icon is added, but the processing contents are otherwise the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and their explanations are omitted.

When the second probability bonus state presentation setting process 15a (YS9058) is executed, first, the same processes of S9401 to S9456 as the second probability bonus state presentation setting process 15 (S9058) executed in the 15th control example described above are executed. Then, when the process of S9455 is completed, next, from among the information stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a and the information stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, information other than the latest special pattern 2 reserved (the last special pattern 2 reserved stored) is read (YS9001), and the display mode of each bait icon is determined according to the fluctuation time included in each of the read information (YS9002).

By processing YS9002, it becomes possible to display different display styles (small bait icon, hard bait icon) for each bait icon, as shown in FIG. 616(a).

Next, the total fluctuation time included in the information read from the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b (information stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b other than the latest special pattern 2 reservation (the last special pattern 2 reservation stored)) is calculated (YS9003), and the calculated fluctuation time is added up to the remaining time of the special pattern 2 fluctuation being executed (YS9004). In other words, in the process of YS9004, the remaining time until the last special pattern 2 reservation among the acquired special pattern 2 reservations is consumed (the special pattern fluctuation is executed) is calculated.

Then, the reference time corresponding to the value of the second probability variation counter 223na (remaining period of the second probability variation state) is read (YS9005), and it is determined whether the total time calculated in the process of YS9004 is longer than the reference time read in the process of YS9005 (YS9006). If it is determined to be longer, that is, if the game is played normally, it is determined that the second probability variation state is likely to end before the last reserved special chart 2 is consumed (YS9006: Yes), a special mode is determined as the display mode of the bait icon corresponding to the latest reserved special chart 2 (the reserved special chart 2 to be consumed last) (YS9007). By determining the special mode in the process of YS9007, the display mode of the bait icon hr2a shown in FIG. 616(a) (special performance floating above the conveyor 10802) is executed. When the process of YS9007 is completed, a display command is set to show the display mode (performance mode) determined in this process (YS9009), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of YS9006, if it is determined that the total time calculated in the process of YS9004 is shorter than the reference time read in the process of YS9005, that is, if it is determined that there is a high possibility that the second probability of the special bonus state ending before the last reserved special chart 2 is consumed if the game is played normally (YS9006: No), the normal mode is determined as the display mode of the bait icon corresponding to the latest reserved special chart 2 (the reserved special chart 2 to be consumed last) (YS9008), a display command is set to show the display mode (presentation mode) determined in this process (YS9009), and this process ends.

As explained above, in the first variant of the fifteenth control example, the special reserved symbols stored at the time the second probability variable state (keep zone presentation) is set and the change time for the special symbol change being executed are predicted, and it is determined whether or not at least one of the acquired special reserved symbols 2 is in a state that is likely to be consumed (execution of special symbol lottery) after the second probability variable state ends, and the keep zone presentation is configured to be executed in a display mode based on the result of that determination.

This configuration allows the player to predict whether the keep zone effect being executed this time is likely to be successful, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

In addition, in the first modified example of this fifteenth control example, a reference time corresponding to the remaining period of the second special probability state (the value of the second special probability state counter 223na) is used as a method of determining whether or not the state is likely to be consumed (execution of a special pattern lottery) after the end of the second special probability state, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to determine whether or not there is a special pattern reservation that includes information of a specific fluctuation time or more in the special pattern 2 reservation, and based on the result of this determination, determine whether or not the state is likely to be consumed (execution of a special pattern lottery) after the end of the second special probability state.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the first modified example of the fifteenth control example, during the second probability variable state, periodically (when a new reserved special symbol is acquired, when a new special pattern variation is executed, when a predetermined time has passed) a process is executed to update (correct) the presentation mode of the keep zone presentation based on the value of the second probability variable counter 223na and new information related to the variation time (variation time information included in the acquired reserved special symbol, or information indicating the difference between the variation time determined when a special pattern variation is actually executed and the variation time read out during the look-ahead (pre-determination)).

By executing this process, for example, when a special effect (special mode) is being executed, if a player stops playing and a period occurs during which the first special symbol variation is not executed, or if a variation time that is unfavorable to the player and that may be set with a low probability as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation is selected, it becomes possible to correct the presentation mode of the keep zone effect. This makes it easier to execute a presentation that is appropriate for the game state at the end of the second probability variation state that may actually occur.

<16th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 504 to Fig. 547. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example, similarly to the above-mentioned 13th control example, when a lottery result other than a big win is obtained (miss) in a predetermined number of consecutive special symbol lotteries (for example, 500 times), a game state (third time-saving state) advantageous to the player is set, and an output method of an external signal to various devices (data display device 262, hall computer 263, etc.) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

In addition, in this 16th control example, a specific presentation is configured to be executable in a presentation mode that is linked to the visual state of a predetermined device (e.g., data display device 262) electrically connected to pachinko machine 10. More specifically, in pachinko machine 10 of this 16th control example, as a type of presentation for informing a player that a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot or time-saving state) has been reached, the fact that the player has entered a favorable state is concealed for a predetermined period of time, and after the transition to the favorable state, a display device-linked presentation is configured to be executable in a presentation mode that prompts the player to view a predetermined device (e.g., data display device 262) at a predetermined opportunity. Most of the data display devices 262 currently in general circulation, which display various data related to the game status of the pachinko machine 10 (number of draws between jackpots, number of jackpots, total number of draws, etc.) based on various signals received from the connected pachinko machine 10, are configured to notify the player of an advantageous state (jackpot game state, probability game state, time-saving game state, etc.) by lighting up characters or decorative lamps, etc., when an advantageous state is set. Therefore, by executing a display device linked performance, it is possible to realize an extremely innovative performance mode in which the pachinko machine 10 and the data display device 262 are performing the performance in conjunction with each other. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 16th control example, as a lottery result of the first special pattern that is mainly executed in the normal game state, a jackpot (special jackpot) is provided in which almost no prize balls can be obtained (the number of rounds is small, and the opening period of the specific winning port 65a in each round is also short). Since the game state after the jackpot ends in the normal game state, this special jackpot basically plays a role of resetting the number of lotteries (the number of remaining times until the bonus related to reaching the ceiling number of lotteries is awarded) until the third time-saving state is set. Furthermore, in this 16th control example, as a part of the miss of the special pattern, a small prize lottery result is provided that is accompanied by the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a, and that the opening and closing operation is common to the opening and closing operation (specific opening and closing operation) set at the time of the special jackpot. In other words, a lottery result that is difficult to distinguish from a special jackpot from the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a, and a lottery result in which the number of lotteries until the third time-saving state is set is not reset is provided. As a result, each time the specific winning port 65a is opened or closed with the specific opening/closing action, the player can be made aware that the number of draws until the third time-saving state is granted may have been reset, making it difficult for the player to grasp the number of draws remaining until the third time-saving state is granted (the number of draws remaining until the bonus related to reaching the ceiling number of draws is granted), thus providing gameplay that allows the player to predict the number of remaining draws.

Furthermore, in this 16th control example, the time for which the special symbol changes at the ceiling number of lottery draws is fixed to a predetermined specific period (30 seconds) regardless of the lottery result, making it difficult to tell whether the game will move to the third time-saving state or whether the jackpot has been won at the ceiling number of lottery draws. By configuring it in this way, the player's sense of anticipation for the move to the third time-saving state can be maintained for a longer period of time, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 16th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 13th control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 13th control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 13th control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 504, the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example will be described. FIG. 504(a) is a diagram illustrating the appearance of the island equipment in a state where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 to which the data display device 262 is connected are installed side by side in a hall. As illustrated in FIG. 504(a), when the pachinko machines 10 are installed in a hall, the data display device 262 is basically installed directly above each pachinko machine 10. This data display device 262 is at least composed of, for example, a data display unit 276 for displaying various data related to the game status of the pachinko machine 10, an illumination unit 278 composed of a light-emitting device such as an LED and performing a predetermined notification by emitting light, and an input device 277 capable of receiving input operations by the player to switch the display contents of the data display unit 276. The various data displayed on the data display device 262 can provide a criterion for a player to select a pachinko machine 10 to play on, or to decide whether to continue playing on a pachinko machine 10 that is currently being played. The pachinko machine 10 in this 16th control example is configured to be able to output various signals to a predetermined device such as the data display device 262, such as a jackpot signal 1 indicating that a jackpot has been won, a jackpot signal 2 indicating that a time-saving state for normal symbols has been entered after the jackpot has ended, and a jackpot signal 3 indicating that a time-saving state has been entered. The data display device 262 is configured to monitor and collect the jackpot winning status, game status, and other game status information using external output signals received from the connected pachinko machine 10, and to display some of the data on the data display unit 276.

Next, referring to FIG. 504(b), an example of display of various data displayed on the data display unit 276 of the data display device 262 will be described. As shown in FIG. 504(b), the data display unit 276 of the data display device 262 is divided into a right display area 276R and a left display area 276L, and the left display area 276L displays, for example, the number of first wins on the day (the number of times the jackpot was won in the normal state or the third time-saving state). In the example of FIG. 504(b), a case is illustrated in which 12 first wins have occurred and the text "12 first wins" is displayed on the left display area 276L. In addition, the right display area 276R displays, for example, the current number of draws (the number of changes since the end of the previous jackpot), the number of draws when the first win was won up to the 5th time ago, and the number of jackpots won from the first win until the transition to the normal state (the so-called consecutive wins), etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 504(b), the letters "CURRENT", "1", "2", "3", "4", and "5" are displayed at the bottom of right display area 276R. In addition, above these letters, a bar graph indicating the number of times the special symbol has been drawn and a number indicating the number of times it has been drawn are displayed. The bar graph and number displayed above the letter "CURRENT" indicate the number of times the special symbol has been drawn since the end of the previous jackpot, and the bar graphs and numbers displayed above the letters "1" through "5" indicate the number of times the special symbol has been drawn when the first jackpot (a jackpot in the normal state or the third time-saving state) was won one to five times ago. In addition, the characters displayed above the characters "1" to "5" and below the bar graph ("4 times", "1 time", "1 time", "6 times", and "1 time") indicate the number of consecutive jackpots (number of consecutive wins) that were won from the first win 1 to 5 times ago until the transition to the normal state. In other words, they indicate the number of times that a jackpot was won without interruption in the game state (first probability change state, second time-saving state) that is set to the time-saving state of the normal pattern. These display contents allow the player to easily grasp the tendency of the pachinko machine 10 (the tendency of the number of lotteries that won the jackpot, the tendency of the number of consecutive wins, etc.), so that it is possible to provide the player with a criterion for selecting the pachinko machine 10 to play on and for deciding whether or not to continue playing the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player. In the following explanation, for the sake of simplicity, the display contents displayed in the right display area 276R will be referred to as the game history.

The display contents of the data display section 276 can be changed by input operations on the input device 277. Here, the input device 277 is composed of at least a left input section 277a, a display switching input section 277b, a cancel input section 277c, and a right input section 277d, and the display range of the game history displayed in the right display area 276R can be changed by pressing (input operations) the left input section 277a and the right input section 277d. Specifically, every time the right input section 277d is pressed, an older history (a combination of a display indicating the number of lotteries at the time of the first winning and a character indicating the number of consecutive wins) is displayed. That is, every time the right input section 277d is pressed in the state of FIG. 504(a), each history is shifted one by one to the left. Accordingly, the older history is displayed at the right end, and the display of the history displayed at the left end is erased. Conversely, each time the left input section 277a is pressed, each history is shifted one by one to the right, and the newest history is displayed on the left end while the history displayed on the right end is erased. The game history is configured to store up to 10 previous history entries.

The display switching input section 277b is an input section that can switch the display contents of the data display section 276 to history for another day by pressing (input operation). Each time the display switching input section 277b is pressed, the display contents of the data display section 276 are updated to the first hit count data and game history data from one day ago, the first hit count data and game history data from two days ago, the first hit count data and game history data from three days ago, and so on. In addition, by pressing the cancel input section 277c, it is possible to return to a state in which the first hit count data and game history data for the current day are displayed. These functions make it possible to provide the player with more information about the pachinko machine 10, thereby further improving the convenience for the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 505 and FIG. 506, the visual appearance of the data display device 262 (the display appearance of the data display unit 276 and the light emission appearance of the illumination unit 262) when the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a specific state will be described. First, FIG. 505(a) is a diagram showing the visual appearance of the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a jackpot game state. When the pachinko machine 10 connected to the data display device 262 wins a jackpot, a jackpot 1 signal is output from the pachinko machine 10 to indicate that the jackpot has been won. Upon receiving this jackpot 1 signal, the visual appearance of the data display device 262 is set to the visual appearance for the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 505(a). Specifically, for example, the game history displayed on the data display unit 276 is erased, and the word "jackpot!" is displayed across the entire data display unit 276. In addition, the right illumination section 278R and the left illumination section 278L that make up the illumination section 278 appear to be lit up more brightly than in normal times (when the game history is displayed on the data display section 276). These visual confirmation modes (jackpot visual confirmation modes) allow the player to easily understand that the pachinko machine 10 has transitioned to a jackpot game state. The jackpot 1 signal is configured to continue to be output until the jackpot game state is terminated. The data display device 262 is configured to continue the jackpot visual confirmation mode until the output of the jackpot 1 signal is terminated.

Next, the visual appearance of the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 when the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a normal symbol time-saving state after the jackpot is over will be described. Figure 505 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the visual appearance of the data display device 262 when a normal symbol time-saving state (either the first probability change state or the second time-saving state) is set after the jackpot is over. When the pachinko machine 10 connected to the data display device 262 transitions to a normal symbol time-saving state after the jackpot is over, the pachinko machine 10 starts outputting a jackpot 2 signal to indicate a transition to a normal symbol time-saving state. This jackpot 2 signal continues to be output until the normal symbol time-saving state ends (i.e., until a jackpot is won or the number of time-saving times has elapsed and the state transitions to a normal game state). When the output of the jackpot 1 signal ends and the output of the jackpot 2 signal starts, the visual mode of the data display device 262 is set to the visual mode for the time-saving state as shown in FIG. 505(b). Specifically, for example, the visual mode for the jackpot displayed on the data display unit 276 is erased, and the word "Chain-in-a-row!" is displayed across the entire data display unit 276. In addition, the right illumination unit 278R and the left illumination unit 278L constituting the illumination unit 278 appear to be lit brighter than in normal times (when the game history is displayed on the data display unit 276). These visual modes (visual modes for the time-saving state) make it easy to understand that the pachinko machine 10 has transitioned to a time-saving state for normal patterns after the jackpot ends.

Next, the visual appearance of the data display device 262 when the number of times the special symbol is drawn reaches the ceiling number of times (500 times) and the state transitions to the third time-saving state will be described. FIG. 506 is a diagram showing the visual appearance of the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 after the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the third time-saving state. When the pachinko machine 10 connected to the data display device 262 wins the third time-saving state, the pachinko machine 10 starts outputting a jackpot 2 signal indicating that the state transitions to the normal symbol time-saving state. In addition, a jackpot 3 signal is output for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) to indicate that the state transitions to the time-saving state related to the reaching of the ceiling number of times. By the combination of these signal outputs, the data display device 262 can easily determine the transition to the third time-saving state related to the ceiling number of times, so the visual appearance of the data display device 262 is set to the visual appearance for the third time-saving state. Specifically, for example, the game history displayed on the data display unit 276 is erased, and the words "Rescue Activated" are displayed across the entire data display unit 276. In addition, the right illumination unit 278R and the left illumination unit 278L that make up the illumination unit 278 appear to be lit up more brightly than in normal times (when the game history is displayed on the data display unit 276). These visual aspects (visual aspects for the third time-saving state) make it easy to understand that the pachinko machine 10 has reached the ceiling number of lottery draws and has transitioned to the third time-saving state.

In this way, the visual appearance of the data display device 262 can be linked to the state of the pachinko machine 10 and changed, so the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be more easily notified to the player. This improves the convenience for the player.

Next, referring to Fig. 507 to Fig. 509, a characteristic presentation mode executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th control example will be described. First, referring to Fig. 507, a data display device-linked jackpot notification presentation will be described. This data display device-linked jackpot notification presentation is a presentation mode that draws attention to the data display device 262 after the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing combination in the variable display presentation. If a jackpot is won in the lottery of the special symbol, a jackpot 1 signal is output to the data display device 262, and the data display device 262 is set to the jackpot visual mode, allowing the player to understand that a jackpot has been won. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a loss, a jackpot 1 signal is not output to the data display device 262, and the data display device 262 is not set to the jackpot visual mode (the game history remains displayed), allowing the player to understand that a jackpot has not been won.

Figure 507 (a) shows the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of a performance (a teasing performance of a data display device linked performance) that suggests to the player that a data display device linked jackpot notification performance may be executed. This teasing performance of a data display device linked performance is a performance that can be executed as part of a variable display mode that corresponds to a variable type other than a complete miss (SP reach hit, SP reach miss, super reach hit, super reach miss, normal reach hit, normal reach miss), and is an effect that is executed 5 seconds before the variable time has elapsed (the special symbol is displayed as confirmed).

As shown in FIG. 507(a), when the teasing effect of the data display device linked effect is executed, an effect is executed in which an angel-like character 809 appears in the upper right of the main display area, and then a light 809L is emitted from the stick held by the character 809 toward the upper part of the main display area Dm. In addition, a speech bubble image 809F consisting of a vertically elongated oval shape and containing the words "Shine!" is displayed to the left of the character 809 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the words "If the data lamp lights up, the bonus is confirmed!?" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. These display contents make the player believe that the angel-like character 809 is about to emit light 809L toward the data display device (data lamp) 262 installed directly above the pachinko machine 10, thereby causing the illumination part 278 of the data display device (data lamp) 262 to light up. In addition, when the light 809L emitted by the character 809 causes the illumination unit 278 to emit light, the player can easily understand that a big win game is being played (a bonus is confirmed).

Figure 507 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a jackpot is actually announced after the teasing performance of the data display device linked performance is executed (when a data display device linked jackpot announcement performance is executed). As shown in Figure 507 (b), in the data display device linked jackpot announcement performance, first, at the jackpot start timing (the start of the opening period of the jackpot), a signal indicating the start of the jackpot (jackpot 1 signal) is output to a predetermined device (data display device 262, hall computer 272, etc.), and the visual recognition mode of the data display device 262 that received the jackpot 1 signal is set to the visual recognition mode for the jackpot. In other words, the illumination part 278 of the data display device 262 appears to be illuminated as suggested by the character 809, etc. in the teasing performance of the data display device linked performance. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 507(b), from above the third symbol that was stopped and displayed in a manner that was out of reach, the third symbol that is the same as the symbol that was in reach descends, and the stopped and displayed middle symbol and the descending third symbol are replaced (the stopped and displayed middle symbol are pushed aside). In other words, an effect is executed as if the third symbol that is a winning symbol is released downward from the data display device 262, and the third symbol is replaced with the middle symbol. In addition, a balloon image 809F with the words "Yay!" is displayed on the upper left of the angel-like character 809, and a display mode is set as if light is leaking out from above the main display area Dm. Furthermore, the words "Bonus confirmed!" are displayed on the sub-display area Ds. These display modes can realize a novel performance mode as if the data display device 262 and the pachinko machine 10 are linked to form one performance mode. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel presentation in which it is as if the lottery result has been rewritten to a jackpot by the data display device 262. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Currently, various devices with different specifications are in widespread use as the data display device 262, and the display contents of the game history and the visual confirmation modes such as the visual confirmation mode for the jackpot vary from device to device. Therefore, even if the same data display device-linked jackpot notification performance is executed, if the type of data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 on which the data display device-linked jackpot notification performance is executed is different, the visual confirmation mode for the jackpot will also be different, making it possible to give the player a completely different impression. Therefore, even if the performance modes of the data display device-linked jackpot notification performance are not increased, the performance modes can be diversified by the number of types of data display device 262, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved while saving the memory capacity of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 508(a), the small bonus presentation in this 16th control example will be described. Here, in this 16th control example, as described above, there are lottery results for special jackpots in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed with a specific opening and closing action that hardly gives any prize balls even if the player hits from the right, and for small jackpots. In this control example, these lottery results that are difficult for players to distinguish from the appearance of the opening and closing action of the specific winning opening 65a are collectively referred to as "small bonuses." In contrast, jackpots (jackpots A17 to E16) that can give a relatively large number of prize balls other than special jackpots are referred to as "normal bonuses."

Figure 508 (a) is a diagram showing the display mode at the end of the variable display performance corresponding to the small bonus (when the third symbol stops). As shown in Figure 508 (a), in this 16th control example, when a small bonus (special big win, small win) is won, the third symbol imitating the same even number is stopped and displayed in the right symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the left symbol row of the main display area dm. The example of Figure 508 (a) illustrates a case where the third symbol imitating the number "2" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the left symbol row. In addition, a small display area Dm4 with the characters "Right hit" is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 508 (a), the characters "Small bonus" are displayed in the small display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the lottery result is a small bonus.

In contrast, although not shown in the figures, if a bonus (any of the jackpots A16 to E16) is won, a third symbol that resembles the same odd number is stopped and displayed in the right, middle, and left symbol rows. This makes it easy to determine the type of bonus from the type of third symbol that is stopped and displayed, improving convenience for the player.

As mentioned above, if a special jackpot is won during normal gameplay, the normal gameplay state will be set even after the special jackpot has ended, and the value of the special drawing counter 203la will be cleared to 0. However, if a small jackpot is won, the value of the special drawing counter 203la will be maintained. Therefore, winning a small jackpot is more advantageous for the player than winning a special jackpot, since the number of draws until the transition to the third time-saving state is not reset.

In this 16th control example, in the normal state, the small display area Dm7 of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display the number of draws after the last bonus has ended as the number of "between bonuses", rather than the number of draws for the special pattern after the end of a jackpot. In other words, the displayed number of draws is reset not only when a jackpot is won, but also when a small jackpot is won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it even more difficult to distinguish between a special jackpot and a small jackpot, and therefore it is possible to add a game element of predicting the remaining number of draws up to the ceiling number of draws. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 508(b), the presentation mode set in the variable display performance executed at the ceiling drawing count (500th time) will be described. FIG. 508(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when the variable display performance of the ceiling drawing count (500th time) is being executed. As shown in FIG. 508(b), in the variable display performance of the ceiling drawing count (500th time), a reach performance occurs. Here, in this 16th control example, in order to ensure that a reach performance occurs in the variable display performance of the ceiling drawing count (500th time), when a lottery of a special pattern for the ceiling drawing count (500th time) is executed, a 30-second change time corresponding to the super reach variation is set regardless of the lottery result. This makes it possible to reliably secure the presentation time of the reach performance. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the reach performance may notify the transition to the third time-saving state related to the reaching of the ceiling drawing count. If the special symbol is not drawn after the ceiling number of draws (500), the same third symbol combination (see FIG. 278) as when the time-saving symbol is won is displayed as a static display to notify the transition to the time-saving state. In other words, after a reach effect occurs, a symbol with the word "Chance Time" written on it is displayed as a static display in the middle symbol row to notify the transition to the time-saving state. This allows the player to easily understand that the transition to the third time-saving state has occurred based on the ceiling number of draws being reached (it is not a transition to the time-saving state triggered by a jackpot).

Also, as shown in FIG. 508(b), a small display area Dm7 with the characters "Ceiling!?" is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm. Furthermore, the characters "Right hit strictly prohibited! Left hit!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. The display content of this sub-display area Ds can prevent a player who predicts that the game will transition to the third time-saving state from starting a right hit before the game transitions to the third time-saving state (normal game state). Here, if a right hit is started before the game transitions to the third time-saving state (normal game state), there is a possibility that the game ball will pass through the through gate 67 during the normal game state and the variable display of the normal pattern will start. In this 16th control example, the normal pattern variable time in the normal state (normal game state) of the normal pattern is set to 30 seconds. For this reason, for example, if the game ball passes through the through gate 67 (the normal symbol starts to change) just before the change stops (just before the transition to the third time-saving state), the normal symbol cannot be a winning symbol for about 30 seconds after the transition to the third time-saving state. This is because the change time of the normal symbol once set is not changed even if the game state changes during the change. For this reason, even if the transition to the third time-saving state is notified, it is possible that the normal electric device 640a is set in an unfavorable situation in which it is not opened for a relatively long period of time, and the player may feel dissatisfied because he or she cannot enjoy the benefits of the third time-saving state. In contrast, in this 16th control example, in the change display performance of the ceiling lottery number (500 times), a display can be made in the sub-display area Ds to urge the player not to hit the right, so that it is possible to suppress the player from hitting the right before the transition to the third time-saving state. This prevents the normal symbol variation display from starting before the transition to the third time-saving state, preventing the player from enjoying the benefits of the third time-saving state (whereby a game ball hit to the right becomes more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640) for the relatively long period of time until the variation display ends.

In addition, in this 16th control example, in addition to the variable display effect for the ceiling number of draws (500th time), a variable display effect of a presentation mode (see FIG. 508 (b)) suggesting that the ceiling number of draws has been reached may be executed. More specifically, this is the case when one or more small bonuses have been won after a bonus, at least one small bonus is a special big win, and the number of draws after the last bonus won has reached 500, and when the number of draws after the end of a small bonus won after the last bonus won has reached 500. In other words, from the player's perspective (a perspective where it is not possible to determine whether the small bonus is a special big win or a small win), the ceiling number of draws may have been reached. In other words, if a special jackpot is won after a bonus, the player cannot distinguish between the special jackpot and a small jackpot. Therefore, even if the value of the special drawing counter 203la is actually reset at the time of the special jackpot, it is difficult for the player to be certain that it has been reset. Therefore, when the number of drawings after the end of the bonus won before the special jackpot reaches 500, the player can be made to expect that the ceiling number of drawings will be reached. Therefore, by setting a performance mode (see FIG. 508(b)) that suggests that the ceiling number of drawings will be reached at this timing, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation for the ceiling number of drawings to be reached for a longer period of time.

Similarly, if the number of draws after a bonus exceeds 500, it is confirmed that one of the small bonuses won during those 500 draws is the special jackpot, but if multiple small bonuses are won, it becomes difficult for the player to determine which small bonus was the special jackpot. Therefore, until a bonus is won or the ceiling number of draws is reached, each time the number of draws since the winning of each small bonus reaches 500, a presentation mode (see FIG. 508(b)) is executed to suggest that the ceiling number of draws has been reached. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to keep the player's sense of anticipation for reaching the ceiling number of draws for a longer period of time.

Next, referring to FIG. 509, a data display device-linked time-saving activation presentation, which is one of the characteristic presentation modes in the 16th control example, will be described. This data display device-linked time-saving activation presentation is a presentation that notifies the player that a transition to a time-saving state will occur without a jackpot (based on winning a time-saving symbol or reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws) in a normal game state, and is a presentation in a presentation mode as if the pachinko machine 10 and the data display device 262 electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 are performing a presentation linked to each other, similar to the data display device-linked jackpot notification presentation (see FIG. 507 (b)) described above. First, referring to FIG. 509 (a), a diagram showing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of a presentation (a teasing presentation of a data display device-linked presentation) that suggests to the player that a data display device-linked time-saving activation presentation may be executed. This teasing performance of the data display device linked performance is a performance that can be executed as part of the variable display mode corresponding to the SP reach miss or the Super reach miss, and is a performance to suggest the possibility of transitioning to a time-saving state based on the winning of the time-saving pattern or the reaching of the ceiling lottery number. This teasing performance of the data display device linked performance is a performance that is executed 5 seconds before the variable time elapses (the special pattern is displayed for confirmation), similar to the teasing performance of the data display device linked performance that suggests a big win (see FIG. 507 (a)). Note that, similar to the thirteenth control example described above, the lottery result of a miss also includes the winning of the time-saving pattern. Also, as described above, the variation pattern related to the lottery of the special pattern of the ceiling lottery number (500 times) is always selected as the 30-second Super reach variation, so the teasing performance of the data display device linked performance may also be executed as the variable display performance of the ceiling lottery number (500 times).

As shown in FIG. 509(a), when the teasing performance of the data display device linked performance is executed, an angel-like character 809 appears in the upper right corner of the main display area, and then a light 809L is emitted from the stick held by the character 809 toward the upper part of the main display area Dm. Also, a balloon image 809F, which is configured in a vertically elongated oval shape and has the words "Shine!", is displayed to the left of the character 809 when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the words "If the data lamp lights up, you get a chance time!?" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents make the player believe that the angel-like character 809 is about to emit light 809L toward the data display device (data lamp) 262 installed directly above the pachinko machine 10, thereby causing the illumination part 278 of the data display device (data lamp) 262 to light up. In addition, when the light 809L emitted by the character 809 causes the illumination unit 278 to emit light, the player can easily understand that the game is moving to a time-saving state (a chance time is coming).

Figure 509 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the transition to the time-saving state is actually notified after the teasing performance of the data display device linked performance is executed (when the data display device linked time-saving activation performance is executed). As shown in Figure 509 (b), in the data display device linked time-saving activation performance, first, at the timing of the transition to the time-saving state, a signal indicating that the time-saving state is in progress (jackpot 2 signal) and a signal indicating that the time-saving state has been transitioned to without a jackpot (jackpot 3 signal) are output to a predetermined device (data display device 262, hall computer 272, etc.), and the visual recognition mode of the data display device 262 that has received the jackpot 2 signal and the jackpot 3 signal is set to the visual recognition mode for the time-saving state. In other words, as suggested by the character 809, etc. in the teasing performance of the data display device linked performance, the illumination part 278 of the data display device 262 appears to be illuminated. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 509(b), the third symbol with "Chance Time" written on it descends from above the third symbol that was temporarily stopped in the form of a missed reach, and the stopped and displayed middle symbol is replaced with the descending third symbol (the stopped and displayed middle symbol is pushed aside). That is, an effect is executed as if the third symbol with "Chance Time" written on it was released downward from the data display device 262, and the third symbol was replaced with the middle symbol. Also, a balloon image 809F with the words "Yay!" is displayed on the upper right of the angel-like character 809, and a display mode is set as if light is leaking out from above the main display area Dm. Furthermore, the words "Chance Time GET!" are displayed on the sub-display area Ds. These display modes can realize a novel performance mode as if the data display device 262 and the pachinko machine 10 are linked to form one performance mode. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel presentation mode that makes it seem as if the data display device 262 has caused the game to transition to a time-saving state. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 510, the reserved ball change presentation in this 16th control example will be described. Here, the reserved ball change presentation is a presentation in which the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern displayed in the small display area Dm9 is changed according to the result of the advance reading. As shown in FIG. 510(a), in this 16th control example, at least six types of display modes are provided as the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 510(a), there is a normal (default) display mode (normal reserved) consisting of a black circle pattern, a display mode (change 1 reserved) consisting of a pattern with an x inside a white circle, which suggests that the expectation of a relatively high jackpot and the expectation of a time-saving state are low, a display mode (change 2 reserved) consisting of a pattern imitating a white circle, which suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is medium but the expectation of a time-saving state is low, and a display mode (change 3 reserved) consisting of a pattern imitating a white circle, which suggests that the expectation of a jackpot is medium but the expectation of a time-saving state is low, and a display mode (change 4 reserved) consisting of a pattern imitating a double circle, There are six types of display modes: a display mode (change 3 reserved) that suggests a relatively high probability of a jackpot, but a low probability of entering the time-saving mode; a display mode (change 4 reserved) that consists of a white circle with a cross inside, suggesting a low probability of a jackpot, but a high probability of entering the time-saving mode; and a display mode (change 5 reserved) that consists of a white circle with a star-shaped figure inside, which can only be displayed if the predicted result is either a jackpot or the time-saving mode.

In this 16th control example, when a start winning of the first special symbol is detected in the normal state, the lottery result is predicted from various counter values (random number values) obtained based on the start winning, and the display mode of the reserved ball number symbol indicating the reserved balls increased based on the start winning is determined with a lottery probability according to the predicted result. This allows the player to have a sense of expectation of a jackpot or a time-saving state even before the lottery for the special symbol actually begins, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game. The selection ratio of each display mode for each lottery result (variation type) will be described later with reference to FIG. 521.

Next, referring to FIG. 510(b), the conditions under which the reserved ball change presentation is suppressed in this 16th control example will be described. Here, as described above, in this 16th control example, after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or after the end of a jackpot, if the lottery result (a miss lottery result including a time-saving symbol winning and a small jackpot winning) that is different from the jackpot is consecutively obtained over a predetermined ceiling lottery number (500 times), the configuration is such that the state transitions to the third time-saving state after the end of the variable display of the ceiling lottery number (500 times). In other words, before and after the ceiling lottery number, the normal game state in which the game progresses by mainly executing the lottery of the first special symbol by hitting left is switched to the third time-saving state in which the game progresses by mainly executing the lottery of the second special symbol by hitting right. In this 16th control example, the configuration is such that the reserved ball number pattern (change 1 to change 5) of a display mode other than the normal reserved ball number pattern (change 1 to change 5) is suppressed from continuing to be displayed across the switching of this game state.

Here, in this 16th control example, it is configured so that, particularly for the first special symbol, it is more advantageous to win the jackpot during the time-saving state than to win the jackpot after the time-saving state ends. More specifically, if a special jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol in the normal game state, the normal game state is set even after the jackpot ends, but if a special jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is set even after the jackpot ends. In addition, in this 16th control example, as in the 13th control example, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed with priority over the lottery for the first special symbol. In other words, in a situation where one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol and one or more reserved balls of the second special symbol are both reserved and a new lottery condition for a special symbol is established (when the variable display ends, when the jackpot ends, etc.), the lottery for the special symbol based on the reserved ball of the second special symbol is executed with priority. For this reason, in a situation where one or more reserved balls of the first special pattern and one or more reserved balls of the second special pattern are reserved in the time-saving state, the player can adjust to some extent the timing of the lottery based on the reserved balls of the first special pattern. For this reason, if the reserved ball number pattern of the display mode of change 3 or change 5, which has a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, is displayed as the reserved ball number pattern of the first special pattern and the transition to the third time-saving state is made in a state where the player may think that he or she wants to check the lottery result based on the reserved balls with a high expectation of a jackpot without executing the lottery for the second special pattern. In other words, in the lottery for the first special pattern, where it is more advantageous to win a jackpot during the time-saving state, the player may think that the lottery based on the reserved balls with a high expectation of a jackpot should be executed before the end of the third time-saving state. In other words, if the reserved change is continuously displayed before and after the transition to the third time-saving state, there is a risk that it will be excessively advantageous for the player.

Therefore, in this 16th control example, in order to prevent the reserved ball number pattern (change 1 to change 5) in a display mode other than normal reserved from continuing to be displayed across the timing of switching to the third time-saving state (and the reserved change display of the first special pattern from being executed during the time-saving state), a reserved change display prohibition state (special pattern 1 pre-reading display prohibition state) is set. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 510(b), a start winning corresponding to the drawing of the special pattern at the ceiling drawing count (500th drawing) is detected, and the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern based on the start winning is determined, and a special pattern 1 pre-reading display prohibition state is set from the time until the third time-saving state set based on the reaching of the ceiling drawing count (500th drawing) ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to configure it so that a gaming method in which the interval between launching game balls is intentionally adjusted so that the timing of the lottery execution of the reserved ball of the first special pattern, which is reserved before the ceiling number of lotteries is reached and is used to draw the special pattern after the ceiling number of lotteries is reached (after transition to the third time-saving state), is during the third time-saving state, or conversely, the interval between launching game balls is intentionally adjusted so that the timing of the lottery execution of the reserved ball of the first special pattern is not during the third time-saving state, is not valid. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly advantageous.

Next, referring to FIG. 511, the method of transition between each game state in this 16th control example will be described. Here, as shown in FIG. 511, in this 16th control example, four game states are provided as game states: normal state, first probability variable state, second time-saving state, and third time-saving state. As in the 13th control example, the normal state is set to a low probability state of special symbols and a low probability state of normal symbols, and is configured as a game state in which the fluctuation shortening function (variation shortening) of normal symbols is not activated. In other words, it is configured as a game state that is disadvantageous to a player who needs to progress in the game by executing a lottery for the first special symbol, which has a low degree of advantage, by hitting left.

The first probability change state is set to a high probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols, and is configured as a game state in which the fluctuation shortening function (variation shortening) of normal symbols is activated, and is configured as the most advantageous game state for the player, in which the probability of winning a jackpot is high and the advantageous second special symbol can be drawn frequently by hitting to the right. The second time-saving state is set to a low probability state for special symbols and a high probability state for normal symbols, and is configured as a game state in which the fluctuation shortening function (variation shortening) of normal symbols is activated, and is configured as a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is low, making it less advantageous than the first probability change state, but is more advantageous than the normal state, in which the second special symbol is drawn frequently by hitting to the right.

Furthermore, the third time-saving state is configured as a game state in which the special symbol low probability state and the normal symbol low probability state are set, and the normal symbol variable shortening function (variable shortening) is activated. In other words, the third time-saving state is configured as a game state in which the degree of advantage is lower than that of the normal state because the probability of winning the normal symbol is lower than that of the second time-saving state. Here, in this 16th control example, as in the 13th control example, the number of random numbers (counter values) that are judged to be winning for the normal symbol differs by only one. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the difference in the degree of advantage (the degree of advantage of the third time-saving state is lower than that of the second time-saving state). Therefore, when the third time-saving state is entered, the player can be made to feel as if he or she has obtained the same value as when the second time-saving state is entered, and the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

First, referring to the upper part of FIG. 511, a method of transition from the normal state to another game state will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 511, there is a possibility of transition from the normal state to another state when a jackpot is won, when a time-saving pattern is won, and when the ceiling number of lottery attempts is reached without winning a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 511, when a jackpot A16, which is determined with a probability of 80% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first probability variable state, which is the most advantageous state for the player. Also, when a jackpot B16, which is determined with a probability of 10% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern in the normal state, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second probability variable state, which is less advantageous than the first probability variable state. Also, when a time-saving pattern is won in the lottery of the first special pattern in the normal state, it is similarly set to the second time-saving state. Furthermore, when the ceiling number of lottery attempts is reached in the normal state, it is set to the third time-saving state. On the other hand, if a special jackpot, which is determined with a 10% probability when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol in the normal state, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set back to the normal state (looping the normal state). Therefore, in the normal state, the gameplay is basically in the hope of winning a jackpot in the lottery for the special symbol and transitioning to the first probability variable state. Also, if a certain number of lotteries have passed without winning a jackpot (so-called a "stuck" has occurred), the player can play in the hope of reaching the ceiling number of lotteries.

Next, referring to the left center of FIG. 511, a method of transition from the first variable probability state to another game state will be described. As shown in the left center of FIG. 511, there is a possibility of transition from the first variable probability state to another game state when a jackpot is won or when the number of variable probability times set after the end of the previous jackpot has elapsed (the value of the variable probability counter 203i becomes 0). More specifically, as shown in the left center of FIG. 511, when a jackpot E16, which is determined at a rate of 20% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern in the first variable probability state, is won, the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to the second time-saving state. Also, when the number of variable probability times elapses in the first variable probability state (the value of the variable probability counter 203i becomes 0), the game state is set to the normal state. On the other hand, if the player wins either the jackpot C16 or D16, which is determined with an 80% probability when the player wins a jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol in the first probability variable state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first probability variable state again (the first probability variable state is looped). Therefore, in the first probability variable state, the player is expected to win a jackpot before the probability variable count has elapsed, and to win the jackpot C16 or D16.

In addition, the system is configured so that the first special symbol can be drawn by hitting the left hand even in the second probability variable state. If the first special symbol draws a jackpot B16 or a special jackpot, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state. On the other hand, if the first special symbol draws a jackpot A16, the first probability variable state is looped. In addition, if the time-saving symbol is drawn in the first special symbol draw, the game state does not change because the time-saving state of the normal symbol has already been set. Strictly speaking, when the time-saving symbol is drawn, the time-saving count is reset to 100 (the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100), while the time-saving symbol wins the probability variable count (the value of the probability variable counter 203i) does not change, so in this case, an event occurs in which the probability variable count and the time-saving count are not equal. Therefore, although illustration is omitted, only when this irregular event occurs will the situation occur in which the number of chance bonuses has elapsed in the first chance bonus state but there are still time-saving bonuses remaining, and the game will transition to the second time-saving bonus state.

Next, referring to the right side of the first probability variable state in FIG. 511, the method of transition from the second time-saving state and the third time-saving state to other game states will be described. The method of transition to other game states is almost the same for the second time-saving state and the third time-saving state, so they will be described collectively as the time-saving state here. As shown in the center right part of FIG. 511, there is a possibility of transition from the time-saving state to other game states when a jackpot is won or the number of time-saving times has elapsed (the value of the time-saving counter 203h becomes 0). More specifically, as shown in the center right part of FIG. 511, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special pattern in the time-saving state, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first probability variable state when either the jackpot C16 or D16, which is determined with a probability of 80%, is obtained. In addition, if the player wins the jackpot E16, which is determined with a 20% probability when the player wins the jackpot in the lottery for the second special symbol, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state again (if the time-saving state at the time of the jackpot win was the second time-saving state, the game state will loop to the second time-saving state, and if it was the third time-saving state, the game state will transition to the second time-saving state). In addition, if the number of time-saving times has elapsed, the game state will transition directly to the normal state. Although not shown in the figure, if the player hits the left hand in the third time-saving state, the lottery for the first special symbol is executed and the time-saving symbol is won, the game state will transition to the second time-saving state.

In this way, in this 16th control example, the game state is changed by various triggers, such as when a jackpot is won, when a time-saving symbol is won, and when the ceiling number of draws is reached. Therefore, since a transition to a game state with a high degree of advantage can be expected at more times, the player's interest in the game can be further increased.

<Electrical configuration in 16th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 512. FIG. 512 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example. As shown in FIG. 512, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example differs from the electrical configuration (see FIG. 137) in the 13th control example (and the 1st control example) described above only in that the external output terminal board 261 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control device 110 and the input/output port 215 of the payout control device 111. The other configurations are the same as the electrical configuration (see FIG. 137) in the 13th control example (and the 1st control example) described above, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th control example, information indicating the start winning, information indicating the number of winning balls, information according to the game situation such as whether or not a jackpot game is being played, etc. can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the external output terminal board 261. The externally output data is received by the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263, which are electrically connected to the external output terminal board 261. The data display device 262 is configured to be able to collect information output from one pachinko machine 10 to which it is electrically connected, and to display the collected data on the data display unit 276 as a game history. In addition, the hall computer 263 is electrically connected to multiple pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall, and is configured to be able to collect information output from each pachinko machine 10 individually. More specifically, the hard disk 289 (see FIG. 513) of the hall computer 263 has a data storage area corresponding to each pachinko machine 10 installed in the hall, and each time data is received from the external output terminal board 261, the contents of the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that output the data are updated. Based on the contents stored in this data storage area, it is configured to be able to grasp the game history of each pachinko machine 10 (number of jackpots and number of fluctuations per day, the ball entry port of the lottery device 700 into which the game ball entered during each jackpot, etc.), the payout rate, operation rate, the presence or absence of fraudulent activities or abnormalities, etc.

The external output terminal board 261 is configured with eleven output channels CN1 to CN11. Each of these eleven channels is configured to be capable of outputting either an H output signal (e.g., a 5-volt output) or an L output signal (e.g., a 0-volt output). Each of these channels is provided with a ground pin in addition to a pin for outputting game information such as the game state and game situation. That is, each channel is a set of two pins. The ground pin is connected to a common ground of the external output terminal board 261, and is configured to always output 0 volts. The data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 can easily determine whether the state of the pin for outputting information is an H output state or an L output state by comparing the 0-volt reference voltage output from this ground pin with the voltage output from the pin for outputting information. It is not necessary to provide a ground pin for each channel. For example, a dedicated channel for outputting a 0-volt reference voltage may be provided. This allows the number of pins for each channel to be reduced by one, which in turn reduces the number of harnesses and connectors, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 513, the configuration of the gaming system consisting of the pachinko machine 10, data display device 262, and hall computer 263 in this 16th control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 513, the external output terminal board 261 of the pachinko machine 10 is electrically connected to the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263. That is, signal lines leading to the external output terminal board 261 are connected to the input/output port 275 of the data display device 262 and the input/output port of the hall computer 263.

As shown in FIG. 513, the data display device 262 is equipped with an MPU 271 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 271 includes a ROM 272 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 271, a RAM 273 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 272, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. The input/output port 275 of the data display device 262 is connected to at least a data display unit 276 that is configured to display data such as a game history and is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display, an input device 277 that can accept input operations to switch the display content of the data display unit 276, and an illumination unit 278 that is composed of light-emitting members such as LEDs. The MPU 271 controls the display content of the data display unit 276 based on the data stored in the ROM 272 and the RAM 273, monitors whether or not there is an input operation to the input device 277, and switches the display content of the data display unit 276 when an input operation is detected. It also monitors various signals output from the external output terminal board 261 to update the information on the game history stored in the RAM 273, update the display mode of the data display unit 276, and update the light emission mode of the illumination unit 278. This allows the game history of the pachinko machine 10 to be displayed on the data display unit 276 without any time lag, improving convenience for the player.

As shown in FIG. 513, the hall computer 263 is equipped with an MPU 281 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 281 includes a ROM 282 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 281, a RAM 283 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 282, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. At least a speaker 286 capable of outputting a predetermined sound, a display 287 composed of a liquid crystal display or the like and configured to display data such as a game history, and an input device 288 composed of a keyboard or the like and capable of receiving input operations such as switching the display contents for the display 287 are connected to the input/output port 285 of the hall computer 263. Furthermore, the hall computer 263 includes a hard disk 289 for individually tallying up the game history of multiple pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall. The MPU 281 controls the display contents of the display 287 based on data stored in the ROM 282, RAM 283, and hard disk 289, and also monitors whether or not there is an input operation to the input device 288, and switches the display contents of the data display section 287 when an input operation is detected. It also monitors various signals output from the external output terminal board 261 to update the information on the game history stored in the hard disk 289, update the display mode of the display 287, and control the sound output from the speaker 286. As a result, the game history and game status of multiple pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall can be displayed on the display 287 without any time lag, improving the convenience of the hall computer operator (mainly the hall staff, etc.).

Next, the details of the signal output from the external output terminal board 261 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 514. As shown in FIG. 514, the external output terminal board 261 has 11 channels, CN1 to CN11, and each channel outputs a signal according to the game situation. Specifically, a payout signal indicating that the number of prize balls paid out from the pachinko machine 10 has reached 10 is output from CN1. This payout signal is configured to continue as an H output for 0.2 seconds each time the number of prize balls paid out reaches 10 (see S2906 in FIG. 58). The hall computer 262 is configured to be able to grasp the number of prize balls paid out from each pachinko machine 10 based on this payout signal. This makes it possible to calculate the ball payout rate of each pachinko machine 10 and the sales of the hall.

An inner frame open signal indicating whether the inner frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 is open or not is output from CN2 of the external output terminal board 261. This inner frame open signal has its output set to H while the inner frame 12 is open, and its output is set to L while the inner frame 12 is closed. Based on this inner frame open signal, the hall computer 263 can determine whether the inner frame 12 of each pachinko machine 10 has been opened by a fraudulent player, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

A door open signal indicating whether the front frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 is open or not is output from CN3 of the external output terminal board 261. The output of this door open signal is set to H while the front frame 14 is open, and the output of this door open signal is set to L while the front frame 14 is closed. Based on this door open signal, the hall computer 263 can determine whether the front frame 14 of each pachinko machine 10 has been opened by a fraudulent player, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

A pattern stop signal indicating that the variation of the special pattern has stopped is output from CN4 of the external output terminal board 261. This pattern stop signal is set to an H output state for one second based on the fact that the variation of the special pattern has stopped (see S212 in FIG. 31). The hall computer 262 can grasp the number of times the special pattern has changed for each pachinko machine 10 based on the pattern stop signal.

From CN5 of the external output terminal board 261, a start winning signal is output, which is a signal indicating that a start winning has been detected for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. This start winning signal is set to an H output each time a start winning is detected. The H output is configured to continue for 0.2 seconds. The hall computer 263 is configured to be able to grasp the start winning of each pachinko machine 10 based on this start winning signal.

From CN6 of the external output terminal board 261, an out ball detection signal is output that becomes H (high output) every time 10 game balls enter the out port 66. This out ball detection signal is kept in an H output state for 0.2 seconds each time 10 out balls are detected, and then set to an L output state. The hall computer 263 is configured to be able to grasp the number of out balls of each pachinko machine 10 based on this out ball detection signal.

A jackpot 1 signal is output from CN7 of the external output terminal board 261, which indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state. The output of this jackpot 1 signal is set to H during a jackpot of a special symbol, and is set to L when the machine is not in a jackpot state. Based on this jackpot 1 signal, the hall computer 263 can determine the number of jackpots of each pachinko machine 10 and whether or not there is any fraudulent activity. Specifically, when this jackpot 1 signal is set to an H output state, the hall computer 263 is configured to add 1 to the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 10, and to grasp the number of jackpots in real time. Based on this number of jackpots, if an abnormal number of jackpots have occurred, it can determine that there is a possibility of an abnormality or fraudulent activity, and report the abnormality.

CN8 of the external output terminal board 261 outputs a jackpot 2 signal indicating whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal symbol time-saving state. The output of this jackpot 2 signal is set to H while the normal symbol time-saving state is set, and the output is set to L when the normal symbol time-saving state is not set. The hall computer 263 can determine the number of consecutive wins of each pachinko machine 10 and whether or not there is any fraudulent activity based on this jackpot 2 signal. Specifically, when a jackpot is won while this jackpot 2 signal is in the H output state and a jackpot 1 signal is output, the hall computer 263 is configured to add 1 to the number of consecutive wins of the pachinko machine 10 and grasp the number of consecutive jackpots in real time. If an abnormal number of consecutive jackpots have occurred based on this number of consecutive jackpots, it can determine that there is a possibility of an abnormality or fraudulent activity and report the abnormality.

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state, CN9 of the external output terminal board 261 outputs a jackpot 3 signal indicating the start and end of the third time-saving state. Like the jackpot 1 signal, the output of this jackpot 3 signal is set to H while a jackpot game is being played, and in addition, the output of this jackpot 3 signal is set to H for 0.2 seconds when the ceiling number of draws is reached and the third time-saving state begins, and when the third time-saving state ends. This jackpot 3 signal makes it possible to output information indicating a jackpot game state, information indicating that the third time-saving state related to the ceiling number of draws has begun, and information indicating that the third time-saving state has ended, by varying the signal output mode on only one channel.

As with the jackpot 1 signal, by setting CN9 to the H output state even during the execution of the jackpot game, the information to be received can be selected according to the specifications of the specified device (data display device 262 or hall computer 263) electrically connected via the external output terminal board 261. In other words, the function of transitioning to the time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number, which is installed in this pachinko machine 10, is a very special function that transitions to a favorable game state without going through a jackpot, and depending on the specifications of the specified device, there is a risk that the transition to the time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number cannot be treated as normal. In other words, if a signal indicating the time-saving state is received without receiving a signal indicating a jackpot, it may be determined that the transition to the time-saving state has been made illegally without going through a jackpot, or that the output is invalid because an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in the sixteenth control example, by providing a signal that is set to the H output state not only during the execution of the jackpot game but also when the ceiling number of lotteries is reached as the jackpot 3 signal, the time-saving state to which the state is shifted based on the fact that the ceiling number of lotteries is reached can be treated as normal regardless of the specifications of a predetermined device connected to the external output terminal board 261. In other words, even if a specification is such that a signal indicating a time-saving state is received without receiving a signal indicating a jackpot, it is possible to realize a signal output mode that pseudo-sounds as if the state was shifted to the time-saving state after the jackpot has been obtained, even when the ceiling number of lotteries is reached, by inputting the jackpot 3 signal as a signal indicating a jackpot. In other words, since the jackpot 3 signal indicating a jackpot is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds and the jackpot 2 signal indicating the shift to the time-saving state is set to the H output state, it can be determined that the shift to the legitimate time-saving state has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state set based on the fact that the ceiling number of lotteries is reached from being determined as illegal or abnormal. In addition, in the case of a specified device with specifications that can identify the time-saving state based on reaching the ceiling number of draws, by determining the output period of the jackpot 3 signal, it is possible to distinguish whether the H output is based on reaching the ceiling number of draws or based on winning the jackpot. Therefore, regardless of the specifications of the specified device, the transition to the time-saving state based on reaching the ceiling number of draws can be treated as valid.

A winning detection signal is output from CN10 of the external output terminal board 261, indicating that the number of prize balls to be paid out has reached 10, based on the fact that game balls have entered various winning ports. This winning detection signal is configured so that an H output continues for 0.2 seconds each time the number of prize balls to be paid out reaches 10. The hall computer 263 is configured to be able to grasp the number of prize balls of each pachinko machine 10 based on this winning detection signal.

Various security-related signals are output from CN11 of the external output terminal board 261. More specifically, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the output of CN11 is set to H for 0.2 seconds (power-on signal). The hall computer 263 measures the period during which CN11 is at H output, and if the period of H output is 0.2 seconds, it can determine that the power to the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on. Also, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the output of CN11 is set to H for 0.4 seconds (power-off signal). The hall computer 263 measures the period during which CN11 is at H output, and if the period of H output is 0.4 seconds, it can determine that the power to the pachinko machine 10 has been cut off. In the 16th control example, the hall computer 263 stores the game state when the power is cut off, and when power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10, it compares the stored game state when the power is cut off with the game state when the power is turned on to see if they match. In other words, it is configured to determine whether or not the game state may have been changed to a more advantageous state by some fraudulent method when the power is turned on, and to report an abnormality if the game state does not match. This configuration makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts that fraudulently change the game state of the pachinko machine 10 to a more advantageous game state (jackpot game state or first probability change state).

If the power is cut off during a jackpot state (while the jackpot 1 signal is outputting H) and then turned on again, the jackpot 1 signal (CN7), which was set to off (outputting L) while the power was cut off, will again be in the H output state. In this case, if the hall computer 263 adds up the number of jackpots, the actual number of jackpots and the number of jackpots grasped by the hall computer 263 will differ. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th control example, if it is determined that the game state at the time of power-on and the game state at the time of the previous power-off are both jackpot states, it is determined that the jackpot state continues from before the power-off, and the number of jackpots is not added up when the power is turned on. This allows the hall computer 263 to accurately grasp the number of jackpots.

In addition, CN11 of the external output terminal board 261 is also set to the H output state when any type of abnormality (magnetic abnormality, radio wave abnormality, switch abnormality, abnormal winning, etc.) is detected in the pachinko machine 10. When any type of abnormality is detected, the output remains set to H until the abnormality is resolved. If the H output state of CN11 continues for more than 0.4 seconds, the hall computer 263 can determine that an abnormality has occurred, and can quickly notify the operator of the abnormality via the speaker 286 or display 287. This allows any abnormality that has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 to be quickly resolved.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 in this 16th control example is configured to output signals according to the game situation from each of the 11 channels CN1 to CN11 of the external output terminal board 261, so that a predetermined device (data display device 262 or hall computer 263) installed outside the pachinko machine 10 can grasp the game situation. The data display device 262 can grasp the game situation based on various signals output from the connected pachinko machine 10, update the display of the game history, and visually notify that a favorable game state has been entered. The hall computer 263 can grasp the game situation based on various signals output from each pachinko machine 10, grasp the ball payout rate of each pachinko machine 10, and determine whether or not there is any fraudulent activity against each pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 515, an example of the signal output mode of the external output terminal board 261 during normal play will be described. In FIG. 515, the signal output mode of CN4 and CN7 to CN9 will be described. As shown in FIG. 515, until a jackpot is reached, CN4 is set to the H output state for one second each time the timing for the special symbol to stop fluctuating is reached. This output mode of CN4 allows the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 to count the number of times the special symbol fluctuates. During this time, CN7 to CN9 maintain the L output state. Then, as shown in FIG. 515, when a jackpot is reached by drawing a special symbol, and the timing for the jackpot fluctuating to stop based on the jackpot is reached and CN4 is set to the H output state for one second, the timing for the jackpot game to start is reached. CN4 is set to the L output state and CN7 and CN9 are set to the H output state. This H output state continues until the timing for the jackpot to end. Based on the outputs of CN7 and CN9, the data display device 262 and hall computer 263 can determine that the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state.

Then, when the jackpot ends (the timing for setting the time-saving state of the normal symbol after the jackpot), CN7 and CN9 are set to the L output state, and CN8 is set to the H output state. This H output state of CN8 is maintained until the game state transitions to the jackpot state or the game state transitions to the normal state of the normal symbol. In other words, if the game state after the jackpot ends is the first probability variable state, the H output state is maintained until the jackpot is won during the first probability variable state and the jackpot game starts, or until the number of probability variable times in the first probability variable state has passed and the game state transitions to the normal game state. Also, if the game state after the jackpot ends is the second time-saving state, the H output state is maintained until the jackpot is won during the second time-saving state and the jackpot game starts, or until the number of time-saving times in the second time-saving state has passed and the game state transitions to the normal game state. The balance between the output state of CN8 and the output states of CN7 and CN9 allows the data display device 262 and hall computer 263 to accurately grasp the number of consecutive wins. In other words, if CN8 goes into the L output state and CN7 and CN9 switch to the H output state at the same time, it can be determined that a consecutive win has occurred during a game state in which the time-saving state of normal symbols is set, and 1 can be added to the number of consecutive wins, whereas if the state of CN7 and CN9 remains the L output, it can be determined that the consecutive win has ended. Therefore, the game history of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately determined.

Furthermore, if the ceiling number of lottery draws is reached during normal play, CN8 is set to the H output state at the timing of transition to the third time-saving state, and CN9 is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds. In other words, by outputting an H output signal of a length (significantly shorter than the opening period of a jackpot) that cannot be output when transitioning from CN9 to the jackpot state, it is possible to make the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 understand that the current H output is not a signal output triggered by a jackpot. In other words, it is possible to make the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 understand that the transition to the time-saving state has occurred without a jackpot (the transition to the third time-saving state has occurred due to the ceiling number of lottery draws being reached).

Next, referring to FIG. 516, an example of a signal output mode when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 516 is a diagram showing an example of a signal output mode when the power is turned on during the third time-saving state (the time-saving state transitioned to based on the ceiling lottery number being reached). As shown in FIG. 516, when the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10, the security signal (CN11) is set to an H output state for 0.2 seconds to indicate the power-on. Also, when the game state when the power is turned on is the third time-saving state, the output of the jackpot 2 signal (CN8) for indicating that the time-saving state is in progress rises to H, and the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) for indicating that the third time-saving state is in progress is set to an H output state for 0.2 seconds. These signal output modes allow the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263 to be accurately notified that the game state when the power is turned on is the time-saving state (the third time-saving state) transitioned to based on the ceiling lottery number being reached. In other words, when the state when the power is turned on is a game state set to a time-saving state for normal symbols, it is possible to distinguish and notify whether the time-saving state set after the end of a big win game (either the first probability change state or the second time-saving state) is in place, or whether the time-saving state is in place based on the number of lottery draws reaching the ceiling (the third time-saving state). Therefore, the hall computer 263 can more accurately determine whether or not the game state may have been changed by fraudulent behavior while the power was cut off, which can help to prevent fraudulent behavior.

Next, referring to FIG. 517(a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in this 16th control example will be described. FIG. 517(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in this 16th control example. As shown in FIG. 517(a), the ROM 202 in this 16th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the above-mentioned 13th control example (see FIG. 443(a)) in that the 1st win random number 13 table 202la is replaced by the 1st win random number 16 table 202pa, the variation pattern selection 5 table 202db is replaced by the variation pattern selection 16 table 202pb, the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld is replaced by the jackpot type selection table 202pd, and the time-reduction random number 13 table 202le is replaced by the time-reduction random number 16 table 202pe. Another difference is that the time-saving type selection 13 table 202lf has been deleted. The rest of the configuration is the same as the ROM 202 in the 13th control example described above, so a detailed description of it will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 518(a), the details of the first winning random number 16 table 202pa in this 16th control example will be described. FIG. 518(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number 16 table 202pa in this 16th control example. As shown in FIG. 518(a), in the first winning random number 16 table 202pa in this 16th control example, in addition to the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a big win, the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a small win is also specified. Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is specified in the range of "20 to 44" in common to the low probability state and high probability state of the special pattern, and the lottery result of the small win is associated with it. Of the 1000 possible counter values (random numbers) of "0-999" of the first winning random number counter C1, the number of counter values (random numbers) determined to be small winnings is 25, "20-44", so the probability of being determined to be a small winning in the lottery of the special symbol is 1/40. This small winning is a type of miss lottery result, and as described above, it is a lottery result in which a special big win special difficult opening and closing action (special opening and closing action) is set for the specific winning port 65a. By providing this special big win special difficult small winning lottery result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how many times are left until the ceiling lottery number. In other words, when a specific opening/closing operation is performed (a small bonus is won), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether a special big win has occurred and the value of the special drawing counter 203la has been reset (the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws has been reset to 500) or whether a small win has occurred and the value of the special drawing counter 203la has been incremented by 1 (the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws has been decremented by 1), so that it is possible to add a game feature that allows the player to predict the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws. This can increase the player's interest in the game. The counter value (random number value) that is determined to be a big win is the same as in the thirteenth control example described above, so a detailed explanation of it will be omitted here.

Next, referring to FIG. 518(b), the details of the variation pattern selection 16 table 202pb in this 16th control example will be described. FIG. 518(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 16 table 202pb in this 16th control example. As shown in FIG. 518(b), the variation pattern selection 16 table 202pb in this 16th control example is composed of at least a normal 16 table 202pb1 for selecting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of a special symbol when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in a normal state, and a probability variable/time-saving 16 table 202pb2 for selecting a variation pattern according to the lottery result of a special symbol when a lottery for a special symbol is executed in any of the first probability variable state, the second time-saving state, and the third time-saving state.

Referring to FIG. 518(c), the details of the normal 16 table 202pb1 will be described. FIG. 518(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal 16 table 202pb1. As shown in FIG. 518(c), various change patterns are specified in the normal 16 table 202pb1 in correspondence with the change count and the lottery result of the special pattern, and the value range of the change type counter CS1 is associated with each of the change patterns. Specifically, when the change count (the value of the special pattern lottery counter 203la) is 500 (i.e., when the ceiling lottery count is reached), regardless of the lottery result, a super reach change with a change time of 30 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) that the value of the change type counter CS1 can take. Therefore, when the ceiling lottery count is reached, a change time of 30 seconds is always set, so that the performance period for the performance to indicate whether the ceiling lottery count has been reached can be reliably secured.

In addition, for the number of fluctuations other than the ceiling number of draws, if the result of the special symbol draw is a jackpot, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 19" is associated with a normal (reach) fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "20 to 169" is associated with a super (reach) fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "170 to 198" is associated with a SP (reach) fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a special win or a small win (i.e., a small bonus), the entire range (0 to 198) that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take is associated with a normal (reach) fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds. For this reason, when a small bonus is won, the fluctuation time is always set to 15 seconds. This prevents a long fluctuation time (30 seconds or 55 seconds) from being set for a small bonus with a low degree of advantage, which can lead to expectations of a bonus or a transition to the first probability change state, and allows the winning of a small bonus to be announced relatively quickly, preventing players from having excessive expectations.

In addition, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol (win/lose judgment result) is a miss (time-saving), that is, if the win/lose judgment result is a time-saving win, a Super (reach) fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 169", and a SP (reach) fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "170 to 198". Therefore, since a relatively long fluctuation time can be set when transitioning to the advantageous second time-saving state, it is possible to further increase the player's anticipation for a jackpot or transition to the time-saving state when a fluctuation display with a long fluctuation time is executed.

In addition, if the result of the lottery for the special pattern (win/lose determination result) is a miss, a short miss with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is correspondingly specified as the fluctuation pattern for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 149", a long miss with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is correspondingly specified as the fluctuation pattern for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "150 to 189", a normal miss with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is correspondingly specified as the fluctuation pattern for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of "190 to 196", a super miss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is correspondingly specified as the fluctuation pattern for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "197", and a super miss with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is correspondingly specified as the fluctuation pattern for the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 "198". Therefore, if the lottery result is simply a miss, the selection rate for a short miss or long miss with a short fluctuation time will be extremely high, so if a fluctuation display with a long fluctuation time is executed, the expectation for a jackpot or a time-saving win can be increased.

Although not shown in the figures, the 16-table 202pb2 for special chance/time-saving is configured to have a higher selection rate for short misses and long misses when the lottery result for the special symbols is a miss than the 16-table 202pb1 for normal use. This makes it possible to shorten the average fluctuation time in the first special chance state, the second time-saving state, and the third time-saving state, thereby improving the gaming efficiency in the gaming state in which the advantageous time-saving state for normal symbols is set. This makes it possible to further increase the degree of advantage in the gaming state in which the time-saving state for normal symbols is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 519(a), the details of the jackpot type selection 16 table 202pd described above will be explained. This jackpot type selection 16 table 202pd is a data table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in a lottery for a special symbol, similar to the jackpot type selection 13 table 202ld (see FIG. 445) in the 13th control example. As shown in FIG. 519(a), the jackpot type selection 16 table 202pd in this 16th control example specifies three types of jackpot types for the first special symbol: jackpot A16, jackpot B16, and special jackpot. In addition, three types of jackpot types for the second special symbol: jackpot C16 to E16.

As shown in FIG. 519(a), as the content of the provision for the first special symbol, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "0 to 79" and "jackpot A16" is set to correspond to the range of "0 to 79" for the first winning type counter C2. This "jackpot A16" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first winning type with 80 winning times. That is, it is a jackpot type in which the counter value 80 is set for both the time-saving counter 203h and the winning type counter 203i at the end of the jackpot. In this 16th control example, since the first winning type is configured as the most advantageous game state, the jackpot A16 is the most advantageous jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol. In terms of the number of rounds, it is the jackpot type with the most rounds (advantageous in terms of the prize ball surface) among the jackpot types of the first special symbol, but it is the jackpot type with the fewest rounds (disadvantageous in terms of the prize ball surface) compared to each jackpot of the second special symbol. Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot A16" is 80, or "0-79." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A16" will be determined (specified) as the jackpot type is 80% (80/100).

As shown in FIG. 519(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "80 to 89" and "jackpot B16" is associated with it. This "jackpot B16" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 4, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the second time-saving state with 100 time-saving times. In other words, it is a jackpot type in which the counter value 100 is set for the time-saving counter 203h at the end of the jackpot. In this 16th control example, the probability of a special pattern jackpot is lower in the second time-saving state than in the first probability variable state (the jackpot probability in the first probability variable state is 1/50, while the jackpot probability in the second time-saving state is 1/200), so even if the number of time-saving times is 20 times more, "jackpot B16" is a jackpot type that is less advantageous (less advantageous) than "jackpot A16" in terms of the game state after the jackpot is ended. In terms of the number of rounds, this jackpot type is the one with the most rounds (advantageous in terms of prize balls) among the jackpot types of the first special symbols, along with "jackpot A16", but compared to each jackpot of the second special symbols, this jackpot type has fewer rounds (disadvantageous in terms of prize balls). Of the 100 random number values (counter values) of "0-99" that the first jackpot type counter C2 can take, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot B16" is 10, from "80-89", so the probability that "jackpot B16" will be determined (specified) as the jackpot type when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special symbol is 10% (10/100).

As shown in FIG. 519(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "90 to 99" and a "special jackpot" is associated with it. This "special jackpot" is a jackpot type in which a specific opening and closing action (opening and closing action that hardly gives any prize balls) common to the small winning game is set as the opening and closing action of the specific winning port 65a, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal state. For this reason, the "special jackpot" is configured as the jackpot type that is least advantageous to the player in terms of both the number of rounds and the game state after the jackpot. In addition, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is a game state other than the normal state (a game state in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set), the game state after the special jackpot is set to the second time-saving state. This is intended to remedy the problem that may be excessively disadvantageous to the player if the game transitions to a game state in which the time-saving state for normal symbols is set when there is one or more reserved balls of the first special symbol, and then transitions to the normal state when a special jackpot is obtained by drawing a lottery based on the reserved balls of the first special symbol. Of the 100 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 99" that the first jackpot type counter C2 can take, the number of random numbers (counter values) associated with a "special jackpot" is 10 from "90 to 99", so the probability that a "special jackpot" will be determined (specified) as the jackpot type when a jackpot is obtained by drawing a lottery for the first special symbol is 10% (10/100).

On the other hand, as a provision for the second special symbol, "jackpot C16" is defined to correspond to the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 49". This "jackpot C16" is a jackpot type with 10 rounds, and like "jackpot A16", the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first special state with 80 special states. This "jackpot C16" has the greatest number of rounds out of all jackpot types, and is also set to the most advantageous first special state after the jackpot ends, making it the most advantageous jackpot type of all jackpots. Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" for the first winning type counter C2, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot C16" is 50, or "0-49." Therefore, when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C16" will be determined (specified) as the jackpot type is 50% (50/100).

In addition, a "jackpot D16" is defined to correspond to the range of values of the first winning type counter C2 from "50 to 79". This "jackpot D16" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 6, and like "jackpot A16" and "jackpot C16", the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the first special probability state with 80 special probability states. This "jackpot D16" has the second most rounds after "jackpot C16", and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the most advantageous first special probability state, making it the second most advantageous jackpot type after "jackpot C16". Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of "0-99" for the first winning type counter C2, the number of random number values (counter values) associated with "jackpot D16" is 30, or "50-79." Therefore, when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot D16" will be determined (specified) as the jackpot type is 30% (30/100).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "80 to 99" and a "jackpot E16" is specified to correspond to this range. This "jackpot E16" has 6 rounds, and like "jackpot B16", the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state with 100 time-saving rounds. Like "jackpot D16", this "jackpot E16" is the jackpot type with the second highest number of rounds after "jackpot C16", but like "jackpot B16", it is a jackpot type with a relatively low degree of advantage in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 519(b), the above-mentioned time-saving random number 16 table 202pe will be described in detail. This time-saving random number 16 table 202pe is a data table in which the judgment value (random number value) that is judged as a time-saving win in the lottery of the special pattern is specified, similar to the time-saving random number 13 table 202le (see FIG. 444(c)) in the above-mentioned 13th control example. As shown in FIG. 519(b), in this 16th control example, two random number values (counter values) of "998, 999" are correspondingly specified as the random number value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is judged as a time-saving win in the lottery of the first special pattern. Of the 1000 possible random numbers (counter values) of "0-999" for the first winning random number counter C1, there are two random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be time-saving winnings, so the probability of determining that a time-saving winning has occurred when a lottery for the first special symbol is executed in the 16th control example is 1/500 (2/1000). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 519(b), a random number (counter value) that is determined to be a time-saving winning is not associated with the second special symbol, so the possibility of determining that a time-saving winning has occurred in the lottery for the second special symbol is 0.

Next, referring to FIG. 517(b), the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this 16th control example will be described in detail. FIG. 517(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this 16th control example. As shown in FIG. 517(b), the RAM 203 in this 16th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 13th control example (see FIG. 443(b)) in that a ceiling time reduction flag 203pa and an out ball counter 203pb have been added. It also differs in that the first ceiling wait flag 203lb and the second ceiling wait flag 203lc have been deleted. The other configurations are the same as those of the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 13th control example, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is a flag for indicating whether the current game state is in a time-saving state (third time-saving state) that is set based on reaching the ceiling number of draws. If this ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is on, it means that it is in the third time-saving state, and if it is off, it means that the current game state is not in the third time-saving state. This ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is initially set to off, and is set to on when the ceiling number of draws is reached and the third time-saving state is set (see S38116A in FIG. 526). In addition, it is set to off when a jackpot is won, and when the number of time-saving times (100 times) has passed during the third game state without winning a jackpot (see S8312A in FIG. 525). Depending on the state of this ceiling time-saving flag 203pa, it is easy to distinguish whether the game is in the second time-saving state or the third time-saving state. In the second time-saving state, a lottery for a normal symbol can be executed with a lottery probability corresponding to a high probability state of the normal symbol, while in the third time-saving state, a lottery for a normal symbol can be executed with a lottery probability corresponding to a low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, a lottery for an appropriate normal symbol can be executed for each game state.

The out ball counter 203pb is a counter for counting the number of game balls (out balls) that have entered the out hole 66. The initial value of this out ball counter 203pb is set to 0, and the value is updated by adding 1 each time an out ball is detected (S142A in FIG. 529). In addition, when the value of the out ball counter 203pb is updated to 10 (10 out balls are detected), the value is cleared to 0 (S144A in FIG. 529). Every time the value of this out ball counter 203pb becomes 10, an out ball detection signal (CN6) can be output from the external output terminal board 261, so that a predetermined device connected to the pachinko machine 10, such as the hall computer 263, can accurately grasp the number of out balls of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 520(a), the details of the ROM 222 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 16th control example will be described. FIG. 520(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in this 16th control example. As shown in FIG. 520(a), the ROM 222 in this 16th control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the above-mentioned 13th control example (see FIG. 447(a)) in that a hold mode selection table 222pa and a time-saving suggestion effect selection table 222pb have been added. It also differs in that the ceiling reach suggestion effect selection table 222la and the ceiling reach effect selection table 222lb have been deleted.

First, referring to FIG. 521, the details of the reserved ball number selection table 222pa will be described. This reserved ball number selection table 222pa is a data table that is referenced when a new start winning is detected to select the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern showing the reserved balls increased by the start winning according to the pre-reading results of various counter values acquired based on the start winning. FIG. 521 is a diagram showing the contents of the reserved ball number selection table 222pa. As shown in FIG. 521, the reserved ball number selection table 222pa specifies the range of the judgment value (value of the performance counter 223f) that is determined to select each of the six types of display modes (see FIG. 510(a)) that can be set as the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern for each pre-reading result (variation type) based on various counter values (random number value) acquired based on the new start winning.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 521, the prescribed contents for the variation type (pre-read result) of "SP Reach Hit" are as follows: when the value of the performance counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 4", the display mode of "Normal Hold" (default display mode) is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "5 to 19", the display mode of "Change 1" (a display mode suggesting that both the expectation of a jackpot and the expectation of time-saving are low) is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "5 to 19", and the display mode of "Change 2" (a display mode suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is medium and the expectation of time-saving is low) is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "20 to 44". A display mode of "change 3" (a display mode suggesting a high expectation of a big win and a low expectation of a time-saving state) is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "45 to 84", a display mode of "change 4" (a display mode suggesting a low expectation of a big win and a high expectation of a time-saving state) is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "85 to 89", and a display mode of "change 5" (a display mode in which either a big win or a transition to a time-saving state is determined) is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "90 to 99". Since the performance counter 223f can take 100 values from "0 to 99", the ratio of each display mode being set when the pre-read result is "SP reach hit" is 5% for "normal hold", 15% for "change 1", 25% for "change 2", 40% for "change 3", 5% for "change 4", and 10% for "change 5". In other words, when a start winning corresponding to an "SP Reach Hit" is detected, the probability that "Change 2" or "Change 3" will be selected will be relatively high, while the probability that "Normal Hold" or "Change 4" will be selected will be relatively low.

Also, as shown in FIG. 521, the prescribed contents for the variation type (pre-read result) of "Super Reach Hit" are such that the display mode of "Normal Hold" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "0 to 9", the display mode of "Change 1" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "10 to 29", the display mode of "Change 2" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "30 to 59", the display mode of "Change 3" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "60 to 89", the display mode of "Change 4" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "90 to 93", and the display mode of "Change 5" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "94 to 99". Therefore, when the pre-read result is a "Super Reach Hit", the percentage of each display mode that is set is 10% for "Normal Hold", 20% for "Change 1", 30% for "Change 2", 30% for "Change 3", 4% for "Change 4", and 6% for "Change 5". In other words, when a start winning corresponding to a "Super Reach Hit" is detected, the percentage of "Change 1", "Change 2", and "Change 3" that are selected is relatively high, while the percentage of "Change 4" that is selected is relatively low. Also, the percentage of "Normal Hold" and "Change 1" that are selected is higher than for an "SP Reach Hit".

Also, as shown in FIG. 521, as the prescribed contents for the variation type (pre-read result) of "normal reach hit", the display mode of "normal hold" is prescribed in correspondence with the range of the value of the effect counter 223f of "0 to 19", the display mode of "change 1" is prescribed in correspondence with the range of the value of the effect counter 223f of "20 to 44", the display mode of "change 2" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the effect counter 223f of "45 to 79", the display mode of "change 3" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the effect counter 223f of "80 to 96", the display mode of "change 4" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the effect counter 223f of "97", and the display mode of "change 5" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the effect counter 223f of "98, 99". Therefore, when the pre-read result is a "normal reach hit," the percentages at which each display mode is set are "normal hold" 20%, "change 1" 25%, "change 2" 35%, "change 3" 17%, "change 4" 1%, and "change 5" 2%. In other words, when a start winning corresponding to a "normal reach hit" is detected, the selection percentages of "normal hold," "change 1," and "change 2" are higher, and the selection percentages of "change 3," "change 4," and "change 5" are lower, compared to "SP reach hit" and "super reach hit."

Also, as shown in FIG. 521, the prescribed contents for the variation type (pre-read result) "SP reach time reduction" are such that the display mode of "normal hold" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "0 to 4", the display mode of "change 1" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "5 to 19", the display mode of "change 2" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "20 to 44", the display mode of "change 3" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "45 to 64", the display mode of "change 4" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "65 to 89", and the display mode of "change 5" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "90 to 99". Therefore, when the pre-read result is "SP Reach Time-saving", the rate at which each display mode is set is "Normal Hold" 5%, "Change 1" 15%, "Change 2" 25%, "Change 3" 20%, "Change 4" 25%, and "Change 5" 10%. In other words, when a start winning corresponding to "SP Reach Time-saving" is detected, the selection rate for "Change 4" is significantly higher than when a start winning corresponding to a winning fluctuation is detected.

Also, as shown in FIG. 521, the prescribed contents for the variation type (pre-read result) "Super Reach Time Reduction" are such that the display mode of "Normal Hold" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "0 to 9", the display mode of "Change 1" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "10 to 29", the display mode of "Change 2" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "30 to 64", the display mode of "Change 3" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "65 to 79", the display mode of "Change 4" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "80 to 93", and the display mode of "Change 5" is associated with the value range of the effect counter 223f of "94 to 99". Therefore, when the pre-read result is "Super Reach Time-saving", the rate at which each display mode is set is 10% for "Normal Hold", 20% for "Change 1", 35% for "Change 2", 15% for "Change 3", 14% for "Change 4", and 6% for "Change 5". In other words, even when a start winning corresponding to a "Super Reach Time-saving" is detected, the selection rate for "Change 4" is higher than when a start winning corresponding to a winning fluctuation is detected.

As shown in FIG. 521, the prescribed contents for the variation type (pre-read result) of "SP reach miss" are as follows: the display mode of "normal hold" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0-9", the display mode of "change 1" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "10-39", the display mode of "change 2" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "40-79", the display mode of "change 3" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "80-98", and the display mode of "change 4" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f of "99". On the other hand, the value of the performance counter 223f is not associated with the display mode of "change 5". Therefore, when the pre-read result is "SP Reach Miss", the rate at which each display mode is set is 10% for "Normal Reserve", 30% for "Change 1", 40% for "Change 2", 19% for "Change 3", 1% for "Change 4", and 0% for "Change 5". In other words, when a start winning corresponding to "SP Reach Miss" is detected, the selection rate of "Change 3" is lower and the selection rate of "Normal Reserve" and "Change 1" is higher than when a start winning corresponding to SP Reach Hit or SP Reach Time Short is detected. Also, "Change 5" is not selected. Therefore, when it develops to SP Reach, if the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern is "Normal Reserve" or "Change 1", the expectation of a hit is relatively low, while the expectation of a hit is relatively high if it is "Change 3". Also, if it is "Change 5", either a big win or a time short pattern is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 521, the display mode of "normal hold" is specified in association with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0-19", the display mode of "change 1" is specified in association with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "20-74", the display mode of "change 2" is specified in association with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "75-98", and the display mode of "change 3" is specified in association with the value of the performance counter 223f of "99". On the other hand, the value of the performance counter 223f is not specified in association with the display modes of "change 4" and "change 5". Therefore, the percentage of times each display mode is set when the result of the pre-reading is "super reach miss" is 20% for "normal hold", 55% for "change 1", 24% for "change 2", 1% for "change 3", and 0% for "change 4" and "change 5". In other words, if a start winning corresponding to a "Super Reach Miss" is detected, the selection rate for "Change 3" will be lower and the selection rate for "Normal Hold" or "Change 1" will be higher than when a start winning corresponding to a Super Reach Hit or Super Reach Time Saving is detected. Also, "Change 4" and "Change 5" will not be selected. Therefore, if it progresses to a Super Reach, if the display mode of the reserved ball count pattern is "Normal Hold" or "Change 1," the expectation of a hit will be relatively low, while if it is "Change 3," the expectation of a hit will be relatively high. Also, if it is "Change 5," either a jackpot or a time saving pattern is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 521, the prescribed contents for the variation types (pre-read results) of "normal reach miss" and "normal reach small win" are as follows: the display mode of "normal hold" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 49", the display mode of "change 1" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "50 to 94", and the display mode of "change 2" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "95 to 99". On the other hand, the values of the performance counter 223f are not associated with the display modes of "change 3", "change 4", and "change 5". Therefore, the proportions at which each display mode is set when the pre-read results are "normal reach miss" and "normal reach small win" are 50% for "normal hold", 45% for "change 1", 5% for "change 2", and 0% for "change 3", "change 4", and "change 5". In other words, if a start winning corresponding to a "normal reach miss" or "normal reach small win" is detected, the selection rate for "normal hold" or "change 1" will be higher than if a start winning corresponding to a super reach win or super reach time reduction is detected. Also, "change 3", "change 4", and "change 5" will not be selected. Therefore, if the small bonus is announced as a result of changing from "change 3" to "change 5", it is confirmed that the small bonus was a special big win.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 521, as the prescribed contents for the "Super Reach Miss" when the variation type (pre-read result) is the ceiling number of lottery draws reached, the display mode of "Normal Hold" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "0 to 39", the display mode of "Change 1" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "40 to 49", the display mode of "Change 2" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "50 to 53", the display mode of "Change 3" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "54", the display mode of "Change 4" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "55 to 84", and the display mode of "Change 5" is prescribed in correspondence with the value of the performance counter 223f in the range of "85 to 99". If the result of the special symbol lottery at the ceiling lottery number is a miss (a transition to the third time-saving state) the selection rates of "normal hold", "change 4", and "change 5" are significantly higher than if the result is a win (a transition to the third time-saving state) (i.e., if a start winning corresponding to the variable type of the super reach hit is detected). Therefore, players who expect a transition to the third time-saving state can expect that the display mode of the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the special symbol lottery at the ceiling lottery number will be one of "normal hold", "change 4", and "change 5".

In this way, in this 16th control example, the display mode of the reserved ball count symbol is determined according to the results of the pre-read based on the start winning, making it possible to suggest to the player the likelihood of a jackpot or time-saving expectation, so that the player can play while paying attention to the display mode of the reserved ball count symbol. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, the time-saving suggestion effect selection table 222pb will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 522. This time-saving suggestion effect selection table 222pb is a data table that specifies the execution rate of suggestion effects (see FIG. 439 (a) and (b)) that suggest a transition to a time-saving state for each of various conditions. As shown in FIG. 522, when the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc is 496 to 500, the suggestion mode of "time-saving suggestion (strong)" is associated with the range of the effect counter 223f of "0 to 59", regardless of the winning status of the small bonus, and the suggestion mode of "time-saving suggestion (weak)" is associated with the range of the effect counter 223f of "60 to 89". On the other hand, no suggestion mode is associated with the range of the effect counter 223f of "90 to 99". Therefore, in each variable display effect from four draws before the ceiling draw number is reached to the ceiling draw number, there is a 60% chance that a "time-saving suggestion (strong)" (see FIG. 429(b)) will occur, and a 30% chance that a "time-saving suggestion (weak)" (see FIG. 429(a)) will occur.

In addition, when the value of the special symbol drawing count counter 223lc is a value other than 496 to 500 (a situation in which the number of fluctuations until the ceiling number of drawing counts is reached is 5 or more), the selection ratio of the suggestive mode varies depending on the number of drawings after the previous bonus and the number of drawings after the end of the small bonus whose execution timing was the oldest among the most recent 500 special symbol drawings. Specifically, when either the number of drawings after the previous bonus or the number of drawings after the end of the small bonus whose execution timing was the oldest among the most recent 500 special symbol drawings is within the range of 496 to 500 (i.e., a situation in which the number of fluctuations until the ceiling number of drawing counts is reached from the player's perspective is likely to be 4 or less), the suggestive mode of "time-saving suggestion (weak)" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f of "0 to 4" for the special symbol drawing result "probable win" or "time-saving win", and no suggestive mode is associated with "5 to 99". In other words, if you win the bonus, there is a 5% chance that a "Time-saving hint (weak)" will occur.

For the special symbol lottery result "time-saving win", the value of the performance counter 223f is specified to correspond to "0-49" as "time-saving suggestion (strong)", "50-74" as "time-saving suggestion (weak)", and "75-99" as "no suggestion mode". In other words, in the case of a time-saving win, the "time-saving suggestion (strong)" occurs 50% of the time, and the "time-saving suggestion (weak)" occurs 25% of the time. In addition, for the other lottery results (small bonus or loss), the value of the performance counter 223f is specified to correspond to "time-saving suggestion (strong)", "5-49" as "time-saving suggestion (weak)", and "50-99" as "no suggestion mode". In other words, in the case of a small bonus or loss, the "time-saving suggestion (strong)" occurs 5% of the time, and the "time-saving suggestion (weak)" occurs 45% of the time.

In contrast, if neither the number of draws after the previous bonus nor the number of draws after the end of the small bonus that was the oldest of the most recent 500 draws of special symbols is within the range of 496 to 500 (i.e., in a situation where the number of fluctuations until the ceiling number of draws is reached is unlikely to be within 4 from the player's perspective), then for the special symbol draw result of "certain bonus hit" or "time-saving hit", the suggestion mode of "time-saving suggestion (weak)" is associated with the value of the performance counter 223f of "0 to 4", and no suggestion mode is associated with "5 to 99". In other words, when a bonus is won, there is a 5% chance that a "time-saving suggestion (weak)" will occur.

For the special symbol lottery result "time-saving win", the value of the performance counter 223f is specified to correspond to "0-24" as "time-saving suggestion (strong)", "25-49" as "time-saving suggestion (weak)", and "50-99" as "no suggestion mode". In other words, in the case of a time-saving win, the "time-saving suggestion (strong)" occurs 25% of the time, and the "time-saving suggestion (weak)" occurs 25% of the time. In addition, for the other lottery results (small bonus or loss), the value of the performance counter 223f is specified to correspond to "time-saving suggestion (strong)", "1-4" as "time-saving suggestion (weak)", and "5-99" as "no suggestion mode". In other words, in the case of a small bonus or loss, the "time-saving suggestion (strong)" occurs 1% of the time, and the "time-saving suggestion (weak)" occurs 4% of the time.

In this way, in this 16th control example, even if the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws is 5 or more, the selection rate of the suggestive mode during misses and small bonuses is significantly different between a situation where, from the player's perspective, there is a possibility that the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws is 4 or less and a situation where there is no possibility of 4 or less. In other words, the system is configured so that the suggestive mode is more likely to occur in a situation where, from the player's perspective, there is a possibility that the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws is 4 or less. By configuring it in this way, even if there are actually 5 or more draws until the ceiling number of draws, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for reaching the ceiling number of draws, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 520(b), the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 16th control example will be described in detail. FIG. 520(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this 16th control example. As shown in FIG. 520(b), the RAM 223 in this 16th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 13th control example (see FIG. 447(b)) in that a bonus interval counter 223pa, a bonus history storage area 223pb, a look-ahead suppression flag 223pc, a normal map fluctuation time timer 223pd, and a linked performance flag 223pe have been added.

The bonus interval counter 223pa is a counter that counts the number of times a special symbol is drawn after the bonus (any big win or small win) has ended. The bonus interval counter 223pa is updated by adding 1 to its value each time the main control device 110 notifies the player of the special symbol drawing counter 203la (see S9015A in FIG. 537), and is cleared to 0 when a big win or small win is won (see S4724A in FIG. 539 and S4753A in FIG. 540). The displayed number of draws between bonuses in the normal state is updated in synchronization with the bonus interval counter 223pa. This makes it difficult to know the number of draws remaining until the ceiling number of draws, and adds a game feature of predicting the number of draws remaining until the ceiling number of draws. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

The bonus history storage area 223pb is a memory area for storing information indicating the winning history of bonuses (normal bonuses and small bonuses) within the range of the most recent 500 special symbol lotteries. This bonus history storage area 223pb stores information on the winning bonus each time a big win or small win (bonus) is won (see S4726A, S4727A in FIG. 539 and S4754A in FIG. 540). In addition, each time the main control device 110 is notified by command that the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la has been updated, the data is updated according to the updated counter value (see S9015A in FIG. 537). In the normal state, the number of draws after the end of the normal bonus or small bonus can be determined from the data in this bonus history storage area 223pb, and when the number of draws that may be close to the ceiling number of draws from the player's perspective (close to 500 draws after the normal bonus and close to 500 draws after the small bonus in a situation where a special jackpot has been won at least once after the normal bonus), a presentation can be executed that suggests the possibility of the ceiling number of draws being close. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

The look-ahead suppression flag 223pc is a flag that indicates whether or not to suppress the execution of look-ahead effects such as reserve change effects when the start winning of the first special pattern is detected. If this look-ahead suppression flag 223pc is on, it means that the state is such that look-ahead effects should be prohibited, and if it is off, it means that the state is such that look-ahead effects are permitted. This look-ahead suppression flag 223pc is set on when it is determined that the ceiling number of lottery draws has been reached (the transition to the third time-saving state has been confirmed) by look-ahead (see S4428A in FIG. 538), and is set off when a jackpot is won and when the third time-saving state ends (see S9013A in FIG. 537). By prohibiting the pre-reading performance of the first special symbol when the transition to the third time-saving state is confirmed, it is possible to make it impossible for the player to obtain information on whether it is better to refrain from hitting to the right after the transition to the third time-saving state and instead have the lottery for the first special symbol be executed, or to refrain from executing the lottery for the first special symbol and start the lottery for the second special symbol, thereby preventing a large difference in the degree of advantage that arises depending on the playing method between a knowledgeable player and a knowledgeable player.

The normal pattern change time timer 223pd is a timer for counting the change time in the normal pattern change display executed in the main control unit 110. When a lottery for a normal pattern is executed in the main control unit 110 and the normal pattern change pattern determined according to the lottery result is notified by the normal pattern change pattern command, this normal pattern change time timer 223pd is set to a timer value indicating the change time corresponding to the notified normal pattern change pattern (see S4252A in FIG. 541). During the execution of the change display of the ceiling lottery count (500 times), it is determined whether or not to change (rewrite) the performance mode of the change display performance being executed according to the remaining change time indicated by the timer value of this normal pattern change time timer 223pd. That is, the value of the normal symbol fluctuation time timer 223pd is referenced at a specific timing during the fluctuation (for example, 5 seconds before the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed), and if it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation display will continue for a relatively long period of time (for example, 5 seconds or more) after the special symbol fluctuation has ended, the timing of notifying the transition to the third time-saving state is delayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the right during the normal symbol fluctuation display when the normal electric role 640a cannot be opened, and thus wasting game balls.

The linked performance flag 223pe is a flag that indicates whether or not a data display device linked performance is set. If this linked performance flag 223pe is on, it means that a data display device linked performance (jackpot notification, time-saving activation performance) is set, and if it is off, it indicates that a data display device linked performance is not set. Each time a variable pattern command is received from the main control device 110 and the variable display mode is determined in accordance with the variable display mode, the state of this linked performance flag 223pe is updated in accordance with the determined variable display mode (see S34520A in FIG. 542). In other words, if a data display device linked variable display mode is determined, the flag is set to on, and if not, the flag is set to off.

<Regarding control process of main control device in 16th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this 16th control example will be described with reference to Figs. 523 to 533. Specifically, this 16th control example differs from the 13th control example (first control example) in that the contents of the timer interrupt process (see Fig. 523) and the start-up process (see Fig. 532) have been changed. The other configurations are the same as those in the 13th control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 523, the timer interruption process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 16th control example will be described. FIG. 523 is a flow chart showing the contents of this timer interruption process. The timer interruption process in the 16th control example (see FIG. 523) differs from the timer interruption process in the 13th control example (and the 1st control example) (see FIG. 156) in that the special symbol variation process 13 (see FIG. 451) is changed to the special symbol variation process 16 (see FIG. 524), and that the outer end output setting process (S112A) is executed after the through gate passing process (S107) is completed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 528 to FIG. 531, but the outer end output setting process (S112A) is a process for controlling the output of a signal to be output from the external output terminal board 261 to a predetermined device (such as the data display device 262 and the hall computer 263) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10. The other processing is the same as the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 156) in the 13th control example (and the 1st control example), so a detailed description of it will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 524, we will explain the special symbol variation process 16 (S111A), which is one process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 523) in this 16th control example. FIG. 524 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 16 (S111A). In the special symbol variation process 16, each of the processes S201 to S207, S210 to S218, S220, and S30219 is the same as each of the processes S201 to S207, S210 to S218, S220, and S30219 in the special symbol variation process 13 (see FIG. 450) in the 13th control example.

In addition, in the special symbol fluctuation process 16 (S111A) in this 16th control example, when the process of S207 or S213 is completed, instead of the special symbol determination logic 13 (see S30251 in FIG. 450) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 13 (see S30252 in FIG. 450) in the 13th control example, the special symbol determination process 16 (S231A) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 16 (S232A) are executed. Although not shown in the figure, the special symbol determination process 16 (S231A) in this 16th control example differs from the special symbol determination process 13 (see FIG. 451) in the above-mentioned 13th control example only in that the ceiling determination process 13 (S38051) has been deleted. In this 16th control example, the ceiling determination process 16 corresponding to the ceiling determination process 13 (S38051) in the 13th control example is configured to be executed in the update process 16 (S233A) described later. In addition, although not shown, the special symbol variation pattern selection process 16 (S232A) in this 16th control example is different from the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 454) in the 13th control example described above in that various data tables referred to in the process are replaced with data tables for this 16th control example. In other words, it is different in that the big win type selection 13 table 202ld is replaced by the big win type selection 16 table 202pd, and the variation pattern selection 13 table 202lb is replaced by the variation pattern selection 16 table 202pb. Another difference is that in this 16th control example, there is only one type of time-saving type (a time-saving symbol that reduces the time by 100 times), and therefore the processes of S8209 and S38253 have been deleted.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 16 (S111A) in this 16th control example, if it is determined in the process of S217 that the current special symbol lottery result is not a jackpot (S217: No), instead of the update process 5 (see S253 in FIG. 450) and the time-saving setting process 13 (see S30254 in FIG. 450) in the 13th control example, the update process 16 (S233A) and the time-saving setting process 16 (S234A) are executed, and the process proceeds to S220. Details of this update process 16 (S233A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 525 and FIG. 526. Details of the time-saving setting process 16 (S234A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 527.

In addition, in the special symbol change process 16 (S111A) of this control example, after executing the process of S220, a symbol stop signal is set to be output from CN4 of the external output terminal board 261 for 1 second (the output of CN4 becomes H output for 1 second) (S235A), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 525, we will explain the update process 16 (S233A), which is one process in the special pattern change process 16 (see FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 16th control example. FIG. 525 is a flowchart showing the contents of this update process 16 (S233A).

In this update process 16 (S233A), in each of the processes S8301 to S8307, the same process as each of the processes S8301 to S8307 in the update process 5 (see FIG. 256) in the 13th control example (and the 5th control example) is executed. In addition, in the update process 16 (S233A) in this 16th control example, after executing the process of S8306, it is determined whether the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is on or not (S8311A), and if it is determined that the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is on (S8311A: Yes), the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is set to off (S8312A), and then the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) is set to be output for 0.2 seconds (S8313A), and the process proceeds to S8307. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8311A that the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is not on (i.e., it is off) (S8311A: No), the processing of S8312A and S8313A is skipped and the processing proceeds directly to S8307.

In addition, in the update process 16 (see FIG. 525) in this 16th control example, after the process of S8307 is completed, the ceiling determination process 16 is executed (S8314A) and this process is terminated. This ceiling determination process 16 (S8314A), like the ceiling determination process 13 (see FIG. 452) in the above-mentioned 13th control example, is a process for updating the value of the special drawing counter 203la and setting the third time-saving state when the counter value (drawing count) corresponding to the ceiling drawing count is reached. This ceiling determination process 16 (S8314A) will be explained with reference to FIG. 526. FIG. 526 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ceiling determination process 16 (S8314A).

Of this ceiling determination process 16 (S8314A), each of the processes S38101 to S38105 executes the same process as each of the processes S38101 to S38105 of the ceiling determination process 13 (see FIG. 452) in the 13th control example. In addition, in the ceiling determination process 16 (S8314A) in this 16th control example, if it is determined in the process of S38104 that the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is 500 (S38104: Yes), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 (S38111A), data indicating the third time-saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S38112A), information regarding the current time-saving lottery is cleared (S38113A), a state command including information indicating the third time-saving state and information indicating the number of time-savings is set (S38114A), and the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is cleared (S38115A). After the process of S38115A, the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is turned on (S38116A), and the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) is set to be output for 0.2 seconds (S38117A), and this process is terminated.

In other words, in the 13th control example described above, it was configured to determine whether the ceiling number of draws had been reached when the fluctuation started, and if the ceiling number of draws had been reached, to execute a process to set the third time-saving state when the fluctuation stopped, but in this 16th control example, it is configured to execute the ceiling determination process 16 (see FIG. 526) when the fluctuation stopped, to determine whether the ceiling number of draws had been reached, and to set the third time-saving state all at once. By configuring in this way, it is possible to simplify the control process.

Next, referring to FIG. 527, we will explain the time-saving setting process 16 (S234A), which is one process of the special pattern variation process 16 (FIG. 524) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 16th control example. FIG. 527 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time-saving setting process 16 (S234A).

In this time-saving setting process 16 (S234A), in each of the processes of S8351 to S8354, the same process as each of the processes of S8351 to S8354 in the time-saving setting process 13 in the thirteenth control example (see FIG. 455) is executed. In addition, in the time-saving setting process 16 (S234A) in this sixteenth control example, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 100 or not (S8361A). In the process of S8361A, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 100 (S8361A: Yes), this means that the third time-saving state was set based on the fact that the ceiling lottery count was reached in the ceiling determination process 16 (see FIG. 526) executed before this time-saving setting process 16 (see FIG. 527), so in order to avoid the time-saving state being set redundantly due to the time-saving winning, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8361A that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is not 100 (S8361A: No), the processing proceeds to S8351.

Next, referring to FIG. 528(a), the outer end output setting process (S112A), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 523) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 16th control example, will be described. FIG. 528(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of this outer end output setting process (S112A). In this outer end output setting process (S112A), first, it is determined whether various abnormalities have occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and if an abnormality has occurred, an error signal process is executed (S121A) for outputting a signal indicating an abnormality (error) from the external output terminal board 261 to the outside, and then, an out ball detection signal process is executed (S122A) for monitoring the number of detected out balls and outputting an out ball detection signal from the external output terminal board 261 for each specific number. When the out ball detection signal processing (S122A) is completed, the start winning at the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 is monitored, and if a start winning is detected, a start entrance signal is executed (S123A) to output a start entrance signal from the external output terminal board 261 to the outside, and then the open/closed state of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is monitored, and an open signal processing is executed to output a signal indicating the open/closed state from the external output terminal board 261 to the outside (S124A), and this processing ends. A detailed explanation of each processing will be described later with reference to Figure 528 (b) and Figures 529 to 531.

Next, referring to FIG. 528(b), the error signal processing (S121A), which is one process of the outer end output setting process (see FIG. 528), will be described. FIG. 528 is a flowchart showing the error signal processing (S121A). In this error signal processing (S121A), first, it is determined whether various errors (magnetic anomaly, radio wave anomaly, switch anomaly, abnormal winning, etc.) have been detected (S131A). If various errors have been detected (S131A: Yes), then the output of the security signal (CN11) is started (S132A) and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if various errors have not been detected in the process of S131A (S131A: No), this process is terminated as it is. If various errors have been detected, the security signal continues to be output without a time limit, so that the hall computer 263 can continue to notify the occurrence of an error. Therefore, the occurrence of various errors can be reliably recognized by the hall staff, and various errors can be quickly eliminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 529, we will explain the out ball detection signal processing (S122A), which is one process of the outer end output setting process (see FIG. 528). FIG. 529 is a flowchart showing the out ball detection signal processing (S122A). This out ball detection signal processing (S122A) is a process for monitoring the number of detected out balls and setting the output of the out ball detection signal (CN2) each time a specific number of out balls are detected.

In this out ball detection signal processing (S122A), first, it is determined whether or not there is a game ball (out ball) that has entered the out hole 66 (S141A), and if it is determined that there is an out ball (S141A: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the out ball counter 203pb (S142A). Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the out ball counter 203pb after the increment is 10 (S143A), and if it is determined that it is 10 (S143A: Yes), the value of the out ball counter 203pb is set to 0 to initialize the out ball counter 203pb (S144A), and it is determined whether or not the out ball detection signal (CN6) is in the H output state (S145A).

In the process of S145A, if it is determined that the out ball detection signal (CN6) is in the H output state (S145A: Yes), the H output period of the currently output out ball detection signal (CN6) ends, and a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) has elapsed, and then processing is performed to set the output of the out ball detection signal corresponding to the 10th out ball detected this time. Specifically, the remaining period until the out ball detection signal (CN6) currently set to the H output state becomes the L output state is obtained (S147A). Then, based on the obtained remaining period, a delay time is set for the out ball detection signal to be output corresponding to the 10th out ball detected this time (S148A), and this process is terminated. For example, if it is determined that the remaining period until the out ball detection signal (CN6) in the H output becomes the L output state is 0.1 seconds, the delay time until the next time the out ball detection signal (CN6) is set to the H output state is set to 0.3 seconds (the remaining period of the H output state of 0.1 seconds + the L output period of 0.2 seconds). In this way, by setting the L period to 0.2 seconds, even if out balls are detected continuously within a short period of time, a specified device (such as the hall computer 263) can accurately determine the number of times the out ball detection signal (CN2) is set to the H output state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S145A that the out ball detection signal (CN6) is not in the H output state (i.e., in the L output state) (S145A: No), the out ball detection signal (CN6) is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds (S146A), and this process is terminated. Note that even if the out ball detection signal (CN6) is in the L output state (S145A: No), if it is within 0.2 seconds since it was set to the L output state, the L output state is continued for 0.2 seconds and then set to the H output state. In this way, by ensuring an L period of at least 0.2 seconds between each H output period, even if out balls are detected continuously in a short period of time, a predetermined device electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10, such as the hall computer 263, can accurately grasp the number of times the out ball detection signal (CN6) has been set to the H output state.

If an out ball is not detected in the process of S141A (S141A: No), and if the value of the out ball counter 203pb is less than 10 in the process of S143A (S143A: No), the process proceeds to S149A. In this process of S149A, it is determined whether or not there is a detection result that is delaying the setting of the H output state (S149A).

If it is determined that there is no detection result that is delaying the H output setting (S149A: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a detection result that is delaying the H output setting (S149A: Yes), it is determined whether the set delay period has elapsed (S150A), and if it is determined that the delay period has not elapsed (S150A: No), this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S150A that the delay period has elapsed (S150A: Yes), the out ball detection signal (CN6) is set to the H output state (S151A), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 530, the start port signal processing (S123A), which is one process of the outer end output signal processing (see FIG. 528(a)), will be described. FIG. 530 is a flowchart showing the start port signal processing (S123A). This start port signal processing (S123A) is a process for monitoring start winnings at each start port (first ball entry port 64, second ball entry port 640) and setting the output of the start port signal (CN5) each time a start winning is detected.

In this start port signal processing (S123A), first, it is determined whether or not a winning entry (start winning entry) into the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 has been detected (S161A). Specifically, the detection information of various switches saved in the switch reading process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 523) is read, and it is determined whether or not detection information indicating a winning entry into the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 has been stored.

In the process of S161A, if it is determined that a winning entry into the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 has been detected (S161A: Yes), then it is determined whether the state of the start port signal (CN5) is in the H output state (S162A). If it is determined that the state is in the H output state (S162A: Yes), the H output period of the currently output start port signal (CN5) ends, and after a predetermined period (0.2 seconds) has elapsed, a process is performed to set the output of the start port signal corresponding to the start winning detected this time. Specifically, the remaining period until the start port signal (CN5) currently set to the H output state becomes the L output state is obtained (S164A). Then, based on the obtained remaining period, a delay time is set for the start port signal to be output in response to the start winning detected this time (S165A), and this process is terminated. For example, if it is determined that the remaining period until the start port signal (CN5) becomes an L output state during an H output is 0.1 seconds, the delay time until the start port signal (CN5) is next set to an H output state is set to 0.3 seconds (0.1 seconds remaining period of the H output state + 0.2 seconds L output period). In this way, by setting the L period to 0.2 seconds, even if start winning is detected consecutively within a short period of time, a predetermined device electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10, such as the hall computer 263, can accurately grasp the number of times the start port signal (CN5) has been set to an H output state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S162A that the start port signal (CN5) is not in the H output state (i.e., in the L output state) (S162A: No), the start port signal (CN5) is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds (S163A), and this process is terminated. Note that even if the start port signal (CN5) is in the L output state (S162A: No), if it has been within 0.2 seconds since it was set to the L output state, the L output state is continued for 0.2 seconds and then the H output state is set. In this way, by ensuring an L period of at least 0.2 seconds between each H output period, the external device can accurately grasp the number of times the start port signal (CN5) has been set to the H output state, even if start winnings are detected consecutively in a short period of time.

In the process of S161A, if a start winning is not detected (S161A: No), it is determined whether or not there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output state (S166A). Then, if it is determined that there is no detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S166A: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a detection result that delays the setting of the H output (S166A: Yes), it is determined whether or not the set delay period has elapsed (S167A), and if it is determined that the delay period has not elapsed (S167A: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S167A, if it is determined that the delay period has elapsed (S167A: Yes), the start port signal (CN5) is set to the H output state (S168A), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 531, the open signal processing (S124A), which is one process of the outer end output signal processing (see FIG. 528(a)), will be described. FIG. 531 is a flowchart showing the open signal processing (S124A). As described above, this open signal processing (S124A) is a process for setting the output of the inner frame open signal (CN2), which indicates the open/closed state of the inner frame 12 and front frame 14, and the door open signal (CN3).

In this open signal process (S124A), first, it is determined whether the inner frame 12 is open (S171A), and if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is open (S171A: Yes), the inner frame open signal (CN2) is set to the H output state (S172A), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not detected that the inner frame 12 is open in the process of S171A (S171A: No), it is next determined whether it is detected that the inner frame 12 is closed (S173A), and if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is closed (S173A: Yes), the inner frame open signal (CN2), which is set to the H output state, is set to the L output state (S174A), and this process ends.

In the process of S173A, if it is not detected that the inner frame 12 is closed (S173A: No), it is then determined whether or not it is detected that the front frame 14 is open (S175A). If it is determined that the front frame 14 is open as a result of the process of S175A (S175A: Yes), the door open signal (CN3) is set to the H output state (S176A) and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not detected that the front frame 14 is open (S175A: No), it is then determined whether or not it is detected that the front frame 14 is closed (S177A), and if it is determined that the front frame 14 is closed (S177A: Yes), the door open signal (CN3) that is set to the H output state is set to the L output state (S178A) and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S177A, if it is not detected that the front frame 14 is closed (S177A: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this 16th control example, the outer end output signal processing (see FIG. 528(a)) is executed every 2 ms, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 523), and information according to the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 is output from the external output terminal board 261 to a specified device such as a hall computer 263. Based on the information output from the external output terminal board 261, the specified device such as the hall computer 263 can grasp the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 in real time. This makes it possible to accurately manage the ball payout rate and operating status of each pachinko machine 10, as well as the presence or absence of abnormalities or fraudulent activity.

Next, referring to FIG. 532, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on to the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 532 is a flowchart showing the contents of this start-up process.

Of this startup process, the processes S1701 to S1714, S31701, and S31702 are the same as the processes S1701 to S1714, S31701, and S31702 in the startup process in the thirteenth control example (see FIG. 457). In addition, in the startup process of this control example, after the process of S1709 is executed, a startup signal output process is executed (S1721A) to output various data indicating the state of the pachinko machine 10 when the power is turned on (startup) from the external output terminal board 261 to a specified device, and the process moves to S31701. Details of this startup signal output process (S1721A) will be described with reference to FIG. 533. FIG. 533 is a flowchart showing the startup signal output process (S1721A).

In this startup signal output process (S1721A), first, the security signal (CN11) is set to be output for 0.2 seconds (S1731A), and then it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203k is on or not (S1732A). If it is determined in the process of S1732A that the jackpot flag 203k is on (S1732A: Yes), this means that a jackpot game is currently being played, so the output of the jackpot 1 signal (CN7) and the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) is started to notify a specified device that a jackpot game is currently being played (S1733A), and the process proceeds to S1734A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1732A that the jackpot flag 203k is not on (i.e., it is off) (S1732A: No), this means that the jackpot game is not being played (normal game is being played), so the processing of S1733A is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1734A.

In the process of S1734A, it is determined whether the value of the probability counter 203i is 1 or more (S1734A), and if it is determined that it is 1 or more (S1734A: Yes), the process proceeds to S1736A. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability counter 203i is not 1 or more (i.e., 0) in the process of S1734A (S1734A: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more (S1735A), and if it is determined that it is not 1 or more (i.e., 0) (S1735A: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more in the process of S1735A (S1735A: Yes), the process proceeds to S1736A. In the process of S1736A, which is executed when it is determined that the value of either the probability variation counter 203i or the time-saving counter 203h is 1 or more (i.e., the game state is set to the time-saving state of the normal pattern), the output of the big win 2 signal (CN8) is started (S1736A). When the process of S1736A is completed, it is next determined whether the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is on or not (S1737A), and if it is determined that the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is on (i.e., the current state is the third time-saving state set based on the ceiling lottery number reaching) (S1737A: Yes), it is set to output the big win 3 signal (CN9) for 0.2 seconds (S1738A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1737A, if it is determined that the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa is not on (i.e., it is off) (S1737A: No), the process of S1738A is skipped and this process is terminated. By configuring the S1738A process to output the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) for 0.2 seconds only when the third time-saving state is reached, it is possible to easily allow a specified device to determine whether the game state when the power is turned on (started up) is the normal pattern time-saving state set after the jackpot ends, or the normal pattern time-saving state set based on the ceiling number of draws being reached.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the 16th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 534 to Fig. 542, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 16th control example will be described. In this 16th control example, the difference from the above-mentioned 13th control example is that the contents of the main process have been changed, and the contents of the normal mode performance setting process 16, which is one process of the performance setting process 13 (see Fig. 462), have been changed, and the rest is the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted. Note that, for the parts where detailed description of the same elements as those in the above-mentioned control examples and the contents described in each control example are omitted, the above-mentioned control examples and the contents described in each control example are applied. In addition, the above-mentioned control examples and the technical ideas described in each control example are naturally applied to this 16th control example, and the above-mentioned control examples and the modified examples and additional examples described in each control example are naturally applied to this 16th control example.

First, referring to FIG. 534, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 16th control example will be described. FIG. 534 is a flowchart showing the contents of this main processing. The main processing in this 16th control example (see FIG. 534) differs from the main processing (see FIG. 174) in the 13th control example (and the first control example) only in that the performance update processing 16 (S4121A) is executed instead of the performance update processing (see FIG. 174), and that the command judgment processing 16 (S4122A) is executed instead of the command judgment processing (see FIG. 174). The other processing is the same as in the 13th control example (and the first control example), so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 535, the effect update process 16 (S4121A), which is one process in the main process, will be described. FIG. 535 is a flowchart showing this effect update process 16 (S4121A). In this effect update process 16 (S4121A), first, it is determined whether or not the variable display effect of the special pattern is being executed (S4151A), and if it is determined that the variable display effect is not being executed (S4151A: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable display effect is being executed (S4151A: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c is 500 (S4152A), and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c is not 500 (S4152A: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special pattern notified in the currently executed variable display effect is a time-saving pattern (S4153A). In the process of S4153A, if it is determined that the special symbol lottery result is not a time-saving symbol (S4153A: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4153, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the variable display effect being executed is a time-saving pattern (S4153A: Yes), and in the process of S4152A, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern lottery count counter 2231c is 500 (S4152A: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special pattern is a lottery result corresponding to a jackpot (S4154A). In the process of S4154A, if it is determined that the lottery result is a lottery result corresponding to a jackpot (S4154A: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S4154A, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a lottery result corresponding to a jackpot (S4154A: No), it is determined whether or not the remaining variable time of the variable display effect being executed is 5 seconds (S4155A), and if it is determined that the remaining variable time of the special pattern is not 5 seconds (S4155A: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In contrast, in the processing of S4155A, if it is determined that the remaining change time of the ongoing change display performance is 5 seconds (S4155A: Yes), it determines whether the remaining change time of the normal pattern is 10 seconds or more by referring to the value of the normal pattern change time timer 223pd (S4156A), and if it is determined that the remaining change time of the normal pattern is not 10 seconds or more (S4156A: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4156A, if it is determined that the remaining change time of the normal pattern is 10 seconds or more (S4156A: Yes), it is determined whether or not the currently executed change display performance is a change display mode with a display device linked performance (S4157A), and if it is determined that it is not a change display mode with a display device linked performance (S4157A: No), the change display mode is rewritten to a display device linked time-saving activation performance (S4158A), the performance period of the time-saving activation teasing performance is set to the remaining change time of the normal pattern (S4159A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S4157A, if it is determined that the currently executed change display performance is a change display mode with a display device linked performance (S4157A: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

In this way, in this 16th control example, if it is determined 5 seconds before the end of the fluctuation that the normal pattern will continue to fluctuate for a relatively long period of time, 5 seconds or more, after the transition to the time-saving state (a relatively long period in which the game ball cannot be placed into the second ball entrance 640 even by hitting with the right), the timing of the notification of the transition to the time-saving state is delayed. In other words, the time-saving activation effect is executed only after the player is in a state in which the benefit of the time-saving state can actually be obtained (after it becomes possible to place the game ball into the second ball entrance 640 by hitting with the right). This makes it possible to prevent the player from making unnecessary right hits while the normal pattern is fluctuating.

Next, referring to FIG. 536, we will explain command determination process 16 (S4122A), which is one process of the main process. FIG. 536 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 16 (S4122A). In this command determination process 16 (S4122A), each of the processes S4201, S4203 to S4211, S4213, S4214, S4217, and S4219 executes the same processes as each of the processes S4201, S4203 to S4211, S4213, S4214, S4217, and S4219 in command determination process 13 (see FIG. 458) in the 13th control example. Furthermore, in the command determination process 16 (S4122A) of this control example, if it is determined in the process of S4201 that a status command has been received (S4201: Yes), status command reception process 16 is executed (S4221A) instead of status command reception process 13 (see FIG. 459) in the 13th control example, and this process ends. Details of this status command reception process 16 (S4221A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 537.

In addition, in the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536) in this 16th control example, if it is determined in the process of S4211 that a winning command has been received (S4211: Yes), the winning command process 16 is executed (S4222A) instead of the winning command process (see FIG. 177) in the 13th control example (and the 1st control example), and this process is terminated. In addition, in the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536) in this 16th control example, if it is determined in the process of S4217 that a jackpot-related command has been received (S4217: Yes), the jackpot-related process 16 is executed (S4223A) instead of the jackpot-related process (see FIG. 180) in the 13th control example (and the 1st control example) described above, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4217 that a command related to a big win has not been received (S4217: No), then it is determined whether or not a command related to the lottery for normal symbols has been received (S4224A). If it is determined in the process of S4224A that a command related to the lottery for normal symbols has been received (S4224A: Yes), a normal symbol-related process is executed to execute control according to the type of the command related to the lottery for normal symbols (S4225A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4224A that a command related to the lottery for normal symbols has not been received (S4224A: No), the process proceeds to S4219. Details of the winning command process 16 (S4222A), the big win-related process 16 (S4223A), and the normal symbol-related process (S4225A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 538, FIG. 539, and FIG. 541.

Next, referring to FIG. 537, we will explain the status command reception process 16 (S4221A), which is one process in the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536). FIG. 537 is a flowchart showing this status command reception process 16 (S4221A).

In this status command reception process 16 (S4221A), the processes of S9001, S9002, S9092, and S9093 are the same as the processes of S9001, S9002, S9092, and S9093 of the status command reception process 13 (see FIG. 459) in the 13th control example described above. In addition, in the status command reception process 16 (S4221A) in this 16th control example, when the process of S9092 ends, it is then determined whether or not the received status command has notified the user of a change to the normal state (S9011A).

If it is determined in the processing of S9011A that a change to the normal state has been notified (S9011A: Yes), it is determined whether the read-ahead suppression flag 223pc is on (S9012A), and if it is determined that the read-ahead suppression flag 223pc is on (S9012A: Yes), the read-ahead suppression flag 223pc is set to off (S9013A) and the processing proceeds to S9093. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9011A that a change to the normal state has not been notified (S9011A: No), and if it is determined in the processing of S9012A that the read-ahead suppression flag 223pc is not on (i.e., it is off) (S9012A: No), the processing proceeds to S9093.

In addition, in the state command reception process 16 (see FIG. 537) in this 16th control example, if it is determined in the process of S9093 that there is information indicating the value of the special drawing counter 203la (S9093: Yes), a value corresponding to the received value is set as the value of the special drawing count counter 223lc (S9014A), the data of the bonus interval counter 223pa and the bonus history storage area 223pb are updated (S9015A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9093 that information indicating the value of the special drawing counter 203la has not been notified (S9093: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 538, we will explain the winning command process 16 (S4222A), which is one process of the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536). FIG. 538 is a flowchart showing this winning command process 16 (S4222A).

In the winning command processing 16 (S4222A), the processing of S4401 and S4413 is the same as the processing of S4401 and S4413 in the winning command processing (see FIG. 177) in the 13th control example (and the 1st control example). In the winning command processing 16 (S4222A) in the 16th control example, after executing the processing of S4401, it is determined whether the winning information notified by the winning information command this time is winning information of the first special pattern (S4421A), and if it is determined that it is winning information of the first special pattern (S4421A: Yes), it is determined whether the pre-reading suppression flag 223pc is on (S4422A), and if it is determined that the pre-reading suppression flag 223pc is on (S4422A: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the processing of S4421A determines that the information is not about a winning prize for Special Chart 1 (S4421A: No), and if the processing of S4422A determines that the pre-reading suppression flag 223pc is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4422A: No), the processing proceeds to S4423A.

In the process of S4423A, the reserved ball count selection table 222pa (see FIG. 521) is read (S4423A), then the display mode of the reserved ball count pattern corresponding to the current winning information is identified according to the variation type indicated by the winning information of the lottery target (S4424A), the display of the reserved ball count pattern of the identified display mode is set (S4425A), and it is determined whether the sum of the value of the special pattern lottery count counter 223lc and the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c is 500 or not (S4426A).

In the process of S4426A, if it is determined that the sum of the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c and the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c is not 500 (S4426A: No), the process proceeds to S4413. On the other hand, in the process of S4426A, if it is determined that the sum of the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c and the value of the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223c is 500 (S4426A: Yes), it is determined whether there is winning information corresponding to a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b (S4427A), and if it is determined that there is no winning information corresponding to a jackpot in the winning information storage area 223b (S4427A: No), this means that the ceiling number of drawing times has been reached and the third time-saving state is set, so the pre-reading suppression flag 223pc is set to on (S4428A) and the process proceeds to S4413.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4427A that winning information corresponding to a jackpot is present in the winning information storage area 223b (S4427A: Yes), this means that a jackpot game will be played without setting the third time-saving state, so the processing of S4428A is skipped and the process moves to S4413.

By executing this winning command process 16 (see FIG. 538), the look-ahead suppression flag 223pc can be turned on at the point in time when a reserved ball corresponding to a losing result for which a lottery is executed at the ceiling lottery count is acquired, so that even if a reserved ball of the first special pattern is acquired thereafter, the look-ahead effect (reserved change effect) can be suppressed from being executed. This makes it possible to suppress irregular playing methods that adjust whether or not a lottery corresponding to a reserved ball of the first special pattern is executed during the third time-saving state depending on the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern of the first special pattern that is consumed after the transition to the third time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 539, we will explain the jackpot-related process 16 (S4223A), which is one process of the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536). FIG. 539 is a flowchart showing the jackpot-related process 16 (S4223A).

Of this jackpot-related processing 16 (S4223A), the processes S4701, S4709, S4710, S4714 and S4715 execute the same processes as the processes S4701, S4709, S4710, S4714 and S4715 of the jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 180) in the 13th control example (and the 1st control example). In addition, in the jackpot-related process 16 (S4223A) in this 16th control example, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that a jackpot start command has been received (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether or not the linked performance flag 223pe is on (S4721A), and if it is determined that the linked performance flag 223pe is not on (i.e., off) (S4721A: No), a display opening command indicating an opening performance according to the jackpot type is set (S4722A), and the process proceeds to S4724A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4721A that the linked performance flag 223pe is on (S4721A: Yes), a display opening command indicating a data display device linked jackpot notification performance is set (S4723A), and the process proceeds to S4724.

In the process of S4724A, which is executed after the process of S4722A or S4723A, the value of the bonus interval counter 223pa is reset (S4723A), and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot that is about to start this time is a special jackpot (S4725A). If it is determined that it is a special jackpot (S4725A: Yes), the winning information of this special jackpot is stored in the bonus history storage area 223pb (S4726A), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a special jackpot (S4725A: No), the winning information of the normal bonus is stored in the bonus history storage area 223pb (S4727A), and this process ends.

In addition, the processes of S4711 to S4713 in the big win-related process (see FIG. 180) in the thirteenth control example (and the first control example) are deleted in this control example. In the process of S4714, if it is determined that an ending command has not been received (S4714: No), it is determined whether a small win-related command has been received (S4728A). If it is determined that a small win-related command has been received (S4728A: Yes), small win-related process is executed to perform control according to the type of various small win-related commands (S4729A), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a small win-related command has not been received (S4728A: No), this process ends. Details of the small win-related process (S4729A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 540.

Next, referring to FIG. 540, we will explain the small win related process (S4729A), which is one process of the big win related process 16 (see FIG. 539). FIG. 540 is a flowchart showing this small win related process (S4729A).

In this small win related process (S4729A), first it is determined whether or not a small win start command has been received (S4751A). If it is determined that a small win start command has been received (S4751A: Yes), a display small win start command indicating the opening performance of the small win is set (S4752A), the value of the bonus interval counter 223pa is reset (S4753A), the winning information of this small win is stored in the bonus history storage area 223pb (S4754A), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4751A that the small win start command has not been received (S4751A: No), it is then determined whether a small win ending command has been received (S4755A), and if it is determined that a small win ending command has not been received (S4755A: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that a small win ending command has been received (S4755A: Yes), a display small win ending command indicating the ending performance of the small win is set (S4756A), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 541, we will explain the general map related process (S4225A), which is one process of the command determination process 16 (see FIG. 536). FIG. 541 is a flowchart showing the general map related process (S4225A).

In this map-related process (S4225A), first, it is determined whether or not a map fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4251A). If it is determined that a map fluctuation pattern command has been received (S4251A: Yes), the fluctuation time corresponding to the notified map fluctuation pattern is set in the map fluctuation time timer 223pd (S4252A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4251A that a map fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S4251A: No), processing according to other commands is executed (S4253A), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 542, we will explain the normal mode performance setting process 16 (S34421A) that is executed in place of the normal mode performance setting process 13 (see FIG. 463) in the 13th control example in the performance setting process 13 (see FIG. 462). FIG. 542 is a flowchart showing this normal mode performance setting process 16 (S34421A).

This normal mode performance setting process 16 (S34421A) is a process executed to determine the variable display mode in normal mode, similar to the normal mode performance setting process 13 (see FIG. 463) in the 13th control example. In this normal mode performance setting process 16 (S34421A) in the 16th control example, first, the time-saving suggestion performance selection table 222pb is read (S34511A), the performance mode of the suggestion performance corresponding to the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c and the data in the bonus history storage area 223pb is determined (S34512A), and it is determined whether the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c is 500 or not (S34513A). If it is determined that the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c is not 500 (S34513A: No), the data in the bonus history storage area 223pb is read (S34514A), and it is determined whether the number of drawings after the previous normal bonus is 500 or not (S34515A). If it is determined that the number of drawings after the previous normal bonus is not 500 (S34515A: No), it is determined whether the number of drawings after the oldest small bonus is 500 or not (S34516A), and if it is determined that the number of drawings after the oldest small bonus is 500 (S34516A: Yes), the history of the oldest small bonus is deleted from the bonus history storage area 223pb (S34517A), and then a display mode is set to prompt not to hit the right (S34518A), and the process proceeds to S34519A.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S34513A that the value of the special drawing count counter 2231c is 500 (S34513A: Yes), and if it is determined in the process of S34515A that the number of drawings after the previous normal bonus is 500 (S34515A: Yes), the process proceeds to S34518A. Also, if it is determined in the process of S34516A that the number of drawings after the oldest small bonus is not 500 (S34516A: No), the processes of S34517A and S34518A are skipped, and the process proceeds to S34519A.

After executing the process of S34518A, the presentation mode corresponding to the received variation pattern is determined (S34519A), the linked presentation flag 223pe is updated according to the determined presentation mode (S34520A), and this process ends. By executing this normal mode presentation setting process 16 (see FIG. 542), a presentation can be executed that notifies the player not to hit to the right in a variation display presentation where the ceiling number of draws may have been reached from the player's perspective, so that the player can play in the hope that the ceiling number of draws has been reached, even if the ceiling number of draws has not actually been reached. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<Regarding control process of data display device in 16th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 271 of the data display device 262 in this control example will be described with reference to Fig. 543 to 544. First, main processing executed by the MPU 271 of the data display device 262 will be described with reference to Fig. 543. Fig. 543 is a flow chart showing this main processing. This main processing is a process for updating data (data corresponding to the game status of the pachinko machine 10) displayed on the data display unit 276 based on various signals received from the pachinko machine 10 electrically connected to the data display device 262, and for executing control for varying the visual recognition mode according to the game status of the pachinko machine 10.

In this main process, first, an initial setting process is executed (S101D). Next, a display device signal receiving process is executed (S102D). Next, a display update process is executed to update the display contents of the data display section 276 of the data display device 262 (S103D). Then, it is determined whether or not the player has performed an input operation on the input device 277, and if an input operation has been performed, an operation means input monitoring process is executed to execute a process corresponding to that operation (S104D).

Next, it is determined whether there is information about a power outage (S105D), and if there is information about a power outage (S105D: Yes), power outage processing is executed (S107D), and an infinite loop is continued thereafter until the power is completely cut off and processing can no longer be executed.

If it is determined in the process of S105D that no information about the occurrence of a power outage has been stored (S105D: No), then it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed since the end of the process of S101H or the start of the previous process of S102H (S106D), and if it is determined that 1 ms has not elapsed (S106D: No), the process returns to S106D. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S106D that 1 ms has elapsed (S106D: Yes), the process returns to S102D, and the processes of S102D to S104D are repeatedly executed.

Next, the display device signal reception process (S102D), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 543), will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 544. In this display device signal reception process (S102D), processing is performed in response to various signals received from the pachinko machine 10.

In the display device signal reception process (S102D), first, it is determined whether or not an external output signal (various signals in the H output state) has been received from CN1 to CN11 of the external output terminal board 261 of the pachinko machine 10 (S201D), and if an external output signal has not been received (S201D: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 543).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S201D that an external output signal has been received (S201D: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a power-on signal has been received as an external output signal (i.e., CN11 has entered an H output state for 0.2 seconds) (S202D). Then, if it is determined that a power-on signal has been received (S202D: Yes), then the current state is identified from the outputs of CN7 to CN9 (S203D), and the state of the data display unit 276 and the illumination unit 277 is updated according to the identified state (S204D), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S202D that a power-on signal has not been received (i.e., an H output signal of 0.2 has not been received from CN11) (S202D: No), various data counter values are updated in response to a signal other than the power-on signal (S205D), the display contents of the data display unit 276 are set to be updated in response to the received signal (S206D), and this processing ends.

<Regarding hall computer control process in the 16th control example>
Next, with reference to Figures 545 to 547, various control processes executed by the MPU 281 of the hall computer 263 in this control example will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 545, the main processing executed by the MPU 283 of the hall computer 263 will be described. FIG. 545 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In the main processing, based on various signals received from the pachinko machines 10, data corresponding to the game status of each pachinko machine 10 is updated, and each pachinko machine 10 is judged for abnormalities or fraudulent activity.

In this main process, first, an initial setting process is executed (S101H). Next, a signal reception process is executed to execute a process according to a signal received from each pachinko machine 10 (S102H), and then a display update process is executed to update the display on the display 287 provided in the hall computer 263 (S103H). Then, an operation means input monitoring process is executed to determine whether or not the operator of the hall computer 263 has performed an input operation on the input device 288 of the hall computer 263, and if an input operation has been performed, a process according to that operation is executed (S104H).

Next, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a comparison process is executed at power recovery to compare the game state at the time of the previous power outage with the game state at the time of the current power-on and determine whether or not there is an abnormality (S105H). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information about a power outage (S106H), and if there is information about a power outage (S106H: Yes), a power outage process is executed (S108H), and thereafter, an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process can no longer be executed.

If it is determined in the process of S106H that the power interruption occurrence information is not stored (S106H: No), then it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed (S107H), and if it is determined that 1 ms has not elapsed (S107H: No), the process returns to S107H. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S107H that 1 ms has elapsed (S107H: Yes), the process returns to S102H, and the processes of S102H to S105H are repeatedly executed.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 546, the signal reception process (S102H), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 545), will be explained. In this signal reception process (S102H), processing is performed in response to various signals received from the pachinko machine 10.

In the signal reception process (S102H), first, it is determined whether or not an external output signal (various signals in the H output state) has been received from CN1 to CN11 of the external output terminal board 261 of any of the pachinko machines 10 connected to the hall computer 263 (S201H). If an external output signal has not been received (S201H: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 545).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S201H that an external output signal has been received (S201H: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a power-on signal has been received from the pachinko machine 10 from which the external output signal was output (i.e., an H output signal of 0.2 s has been received from CN11) (S202H). If it is determined that a power-on signal has not been received (i.e., an H output signal of 0.2 s has not been received from CN11) (S202H: No), then it is determined whether or not a power-off signal has been received (i.e., an H output signal of 0.4 s has been received from CN11) (S203H). If it is determined in the process of S203H that a power-off signal has been received (i.e., an H output signal of 0.4 s has been received from CN11) (S203H: Yes), then information corresponding to the current (at the time of power interruption) game state is stored in the power interruption information storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine that output the signal (S204H), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S203H that the power off signal has not been received (i.e., the 0.4 s H output signal has not been received from CN11) (S203H: No), the information in the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine that output the signal is updated (S204H), and this process is terminated. For example, if it is determined that the jackpot 1 signal (CN7) of the first pachinko machine 10 (machine number 1) installed in the hall is in the H output state and the other external output signals are in the L output state, information indicating that a jackpot is being won is stored in the data storage area corresponding to the first pachinko machine 10 (machine number 1). The type (machine number) of the pachinko machine 10 that received the external output signal is identified by the type of connection terminal to the hall computer 263 (the position of the terminal that received the external output signal).

If it is determined in the process of S202H that a power-on signal has been received (i.e., a 0.2 s H output signal has been received from CN11) (S202H: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the startup flag (a flag indicating whether or not the corresponding pachinko machine 10 is starting up upon power-on) in the data storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that output the external output signal is on (S206H). If it is determined as a result of the determination in the process of S206H that the startup flag is off (S206H: No), the information in the power recovery information storage area corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that received the external output signal is updated (S207H), the display content of the display 287 is updated (S208H), the startup flag corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 that received the external output signal is set to on (S209H), and this process ends.

Next, the comparison process at power recovery (S105H) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 547. This comparison process at power recovery (S105H) is one of the main processes executed by the MPU 281, and when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, it compares the game state at the time of the previous power outage with the game state at the time of this power-on, and determines whether or not there is an abnormality.

In this power recovery comparison process (S105H), first, it is determined whether the start-up flag is on or not (S301H), and if it is determined that the start-up flag is not on (i.e., it is off) (S301H: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S301H that the start-up flag is on (S301H: Yes), then the information in the power interruption information storage area is compared with the information in the power recovery information storage area (S302H), and it is determined whether the compared information matches (S303H).

If it is determined in the process of S303H that the compared information does not match (S303H: No), an abnormality notification is set (S304H) and the process proceeds to S305H. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S303H that the compared information matches (S303H: Yes), the process of S304H is skipped and the process proceeds to S305H. In the process of S305H, the start-up flag is set to off (S305H), and the process ends.

By executing this comparison process at power recovery (see FIG. 547), when a power-on signal is output to the hall computer 263 as a result of power being turned on to any of the pachinko machines 10 connected to the hall computer 263, the data showing the game state when the power was turned off for that pachinko machine 10 can be compared with the data showing the game state when the power was turned on this time. Therefore, if an abnormal situation occurs in which the game state has changed, the hall computer 263 can grasp this immediately after powering on. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent behavior such as rewriting the game state while the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (for example, fraudulently setting it to a jackpot state).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this 16th control example is configured to be able to execute a specific presentation (data display device linked presentation) in a presentation mode that is linked to the visual appearance of a specific device (e.g., data display device 262) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the pachinko machine 10 in this 16th control example is configured to be able to execute a display device linked presentation in a presentation mode that keeps the transition to an advantageous state concealed for a predetermined period of time as a type of presentation for informing the player that a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot or time-saving state) has been reached, and encourages the player to view a specific device (e.g., data display device 262) at a predetermined opportunity after the transition to the advantageous state. Most of the data display devices 262 currently in general circulation, which display various data related to the game status of the pachinko machine 10 (number of draws between jackpots, number of jackpots, total number of draws, etc.) based on various signals received from the connected pachinko machine 10, are configured to notify the player of an advantageous state (jackpot game state, probability game state, time-saving game state, etc.) by lighting up characters or decorative lamps, etc., when an advantageous state is set. Therefore, by executing a display device linked performance, it is possible to realize an extremely innovative performance mode in which the pachinko machine 10 and the data display device 262 are performing the performance in conjunction with each other. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the 16th control example, as the lottery result of the first special pattern that is mainly executed in the normal game state, a jackpot (special jackpot) from which almost no prize balls can be obtained (the number of rounds is small, and the opening period of the specific winning port 65a in each round is also short) and a small jackpot in which the opening pattern (specific opening and closing operation) of the specific winning port 65a common to the special jackpot is set are provided, so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a special jackpot or a small jackpot. These lottery results can make the player recognize that the number of lotteries until the ceiling lottery number is reached (the third time-saving state is granted) may have been reset by winning the special jackpot each time the specific winning port 65a is opened and closed by the specific opening and closing operation, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the remaining number of lotteries until the third time-saving state is granted (the remaining number of lotteries until the award related to the ceiling lottery number is reached) can be granted. Therefore, it is possible to impart a gameplay that allows the player to predict the remaining number of lotteries.

In addition, in this 16th control example, the time for which the special symbols change at the ceiling number of lottery draws is fixed to a predetermined specific period (30 seconds) regardless of the lottery result, making it difficult to tell whether the game will move to the third time-saving state or whether the jackpot has been won at the ceiling number of lottery draws. By configuring it in this way, the player's sense of anticipation for the move to the third time-saving state can be maintained for a longer period of time, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this 16th control example, the configuration is such that the execution of the reserved ball change effect is suppressed for reserved balls that are reserved before the ceiling number of draws is reached and are consumed in the third time-saving state that is set after the ceiling number of draws is reached. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress irregular playing methods that try to increase the degree of advantage by deliberately consuming the reserved balls of the first special pattern that are consumed after the transition to the third time-saving state during the third time-saving state by not causing the start winning of the second special pattern, or conversely, by quickly acquiring the reserved balls of the second special pattern and then playing so as not to run out of the reserved balls of the second special pattern, deliberately consuming the reserved balls of the first special pattern after the third time-saving state ends, thereby increasing the degree of advantage.

In addition, in the 16th control example, when the game is shifted to the jackpot game state and when the game is shifted to the third time-saving state, a signal is output from the common signal output channel (CN9) in the external output terminal board 261 in different output modes. This allows the number of signal output channels to be reduced, and therefore the increase in the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed. Here, in the 16th control example, as with the jackpot 1 signal, by setting CN9 to the H output state even during the execution of the jackpot game, the information to be received can be selected according to the specifications of the specified device (data display device 262 or hall computer 263) electrically connected via the external output terminal board 261. In other words, the function of shifting to the time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number, which is installed in the pachinko machine 10, is a very special function that shifts to a favorable game state without going through a jackpot, and depending on the specifications of the specified device, there is a risk that the shift to the time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number cannot be treated as normal. In other words, if a signal indicating a time-saving state is received without receiving a signal indicating a jackpot, it may be determined that the state has been shifted to the time-saving state due to fraud without going through a jackpot, or that the output is invalid due to an abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in the present 16th control example, by providing a signal that is set to the H output state not only during the execution of a jackpot game but also when the ceiling lottery number is reached as the jackpot 3 signal, the time-saving state to which the state is shifted based on the ceiling lottery number being reached can be treated as normal regardless of the specifications of the predetermined device connected to the external output terminal board 261. In other words, even if a specification is such that a signal indicating a time-saving state is received without receiving a signal indicating a jackpot, and is determined to be fraudulent or abnormal, if the jackpot 3 signal is input as a signal indicating a jackpot, a signal output mode that pseudo-shifts to the time-saving state after the jackpot is achieved can be realized even when the ceiling lottery number is reached. In other words, the jackpot 3 signal indicating a jackpot is set to the H output state for 0.2 seconds, and the jackpot 2 signal indicating a shift to the time-saving state is set to the H output state, so that the shift to the legitimate time-saving state can be determined. This makes it possible to prevent the time-saving state set based on the reaching of the ceiling number of draws from being judged as fraudulent or abnormal. In the case of a specified device with specifications that can identify the time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling number of draws, it is possible to distinguish whether the H output is based on the reaching of the ceiling number of draws or the winning of the jackpot by determining the output period of the jackpot 3 signal. Therefore, regardless of the specifications of the specified device, the transition to the time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling number of draws can be treated as legitimate.

In the 16th control example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, a signal indicating the game state is output from the external output terminal board 261 to the outside. In addition to this, when the power is turned on in the normal state, the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la may be output to the outside. In this case, the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la may be output as a signal indicating 9-bit data from one signal output channel (e.g., CN9). More specifically, for example, in a situation where neither the jackpot 1 signal nor the jackpot 2 signal is output (neither the jackpot game state nor the time-saving state), the jackpot 3 signal is set to H output for a predetermined period (e.g., 0.4 seconds), thereby notifying a predetermined device that the jackpot 3 signal output from CN9 thereafter is data indicating the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la. Then, the data of the 1st bit to the 9th bit of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is output in sequence in 0.2-second intervals. More specifically, if the bit of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is 1, the output of CN9 is set to H output for 0.2 seconds, and if it is 0, the output of CN9 is set to L output for 0.2 seconds. After the output is completed, an H output signal with an output period different from 0.2 seconds or 0.4 seconds (for example, 0.6 seconds) may be output to notify a specified device that the output of data indicating the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la has been completed. By configuring in this way, the number of draws at the time of power-on can be easily grasped by simply monitoring the output of the external output terminal board 261 on the specified device (such as the hall computer 263).

Furthermore, in this case, even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the value of the special drawing counter 203la may be notified in a similar manner. By configuring in this way, the value of the special drawing counter 203la can be output to the specified device when the power supply is cut off and when the power supply is turned on, so that if a fraudulent act of illegally rewriting the value of the special drawing counter 203la while the power supply is cut off is performed, it is possible to configure it so that it is easy to detect on the specified device side. In other words, by installing a function in a specified device such as the hall computer 263 that compares the value of the special drawing counter 203la at the time of power cut and the value of the special drawing counter 203la at the time of the next power-on, the discrepancy of the special drawing counter 203la can be easily detected on the specified device side, so that the presence or absence of fraudulent acts can be determined when the power supply is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

In this 16th control example, a jackpot 3 signal is provided in addition to the jackpot 1 signal, but the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal may be output from one signal output channel (CN7). By configuring in this way, the number of signal output channels can be reduced.

In the 16th control example, the degree of advantage is made different depending on whether the special jackpot is won in the normal game state before the ceiling number of draws is reached, or in the third time-saving state after the ceiling number of draws is reached, so that the degree of advantage is higher in total if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol after the ceiling number of draws has passed, but the method of making the degree of advantage different when the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the rate of a special jackpot is higher (it is easier to transition to the second special jackpot state) if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the third time-saving state set after the ceiling number of draws is reached than if the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal game state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player more excited about the game because it is more likely to reach the ceiling number of draws.

In the 16th control example, the small bonus is provided to make it difficult to know the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws, but the method of making it difficult to know the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws is not limited to this. For example, the number of ceiling draws after the end of the jackpot may be made different depending on the type of jackpot, making it difficult to know how many is set as the ceiling number of draws. In addition, whether the small bonus is a special jackpot or a small win can be understood by visually checking the type of the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37. Therefore, for example, at the timing when the stop pattern corresponding to the small bonus is stopped and displayed on the first pattern display device 37, the display of the first pattern display device 37 may be erased, a common pattern may be temporarily displayed, or a predetermined movable role may be moved in front of the first pattern display device 37 to hide the first pattern display device 37. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to know whether the small bonus is a special jackpot or a small win, so that the remaining number of draws until the ceiling number of draws can be made more difficult to know. Also, the same control may be performed during the period from when the power is turned on until at least the first variable display is started. Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed) when the power is turned on, the display contents of the first symbol display device 37 are also cleared, whereas if the pachinko machine 10 is not initialized when the power is turned on, the display contents of the first symbol display device 37 are usually restored to the display contents at the time of power off. In this case, if a hall staff member or the like initializes the pachinko machine 10 outside the business hours of the hall, the player can easily determine on the next business day whether the remaining number of lotteries up to the ceiling number of lotteries has been reset or has been maintained as it was at the end of the business on the previous day simply by visually checking the first symbol display device 37. In other words, if the display contents of the first symbol display device 37 are cleared, it may be determined that the remaining number of lotteries up to the ceiling number of lotteries has been reset, and the player may avoid starting a game on the pachinko machine 10. To avoid such a situation from occurring, when the power is turned on, the display of the first pattern display device 37 may be erased regardless of whether initialization has been performed, a common pattern may be temporarily displayed regardless of whether initialization has been performed, or a predetermined movable device may be moved in front of the first pattern display device 37 to hide the first pattern display device 37 until the first variable display of the special pattern begins. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been initialized, and therefore it is possible to prevent a decrease in the operating rate of the initialized pachinko machine 10.

In the 16th control example, as shown in FIG. 509(a), the character 809 emits light 809 above the third symbol display device 81, indirectly drawing attention to the upper part of the pachinko machine 10 and drawing attention (visualization) to the data display device 262, which is generally installed directly above the pachinko machine 10, and the lottery result (whether or not the player will move to an advantageous state) is notified to the player depending on the visual state of the data display device 262, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a performance that encourages attention to the data display device 262 in a more direct manner (for example, a performance in which the words "Look at the top of the table!" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81) may be executed. By configuring in this way, the data display device 262 can be more reliably viewed by the player, and the performance effect of the data display device-linked performance can be further improved.

In the 16th control example, the execution of the reserved ball notice performance for reserved balls (reserved balls that cross the ceiling number of draws) that are acquired (the start winning is detected) before the ceiling number of draws is reached and are used to draw special symbols after the big win ends is suppressed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, as the reserved ball notice performance, in a state where there are multiple reserved balls and a display mode different from that of the normal reserved is set for at least one reserved ball number pattern, a performance may be provided in which the display mode of one reserved ball number pattern set to a display mode different from that of the normal reserved is switched with the display mode of one reserved ball number pattern set to the display mode of the normal reserved. In other words, the reserved ball number pattern determined as the target of the reserved ball number pattern may be temporarily set to a reserved ball number pattern different from the reserved ball number pattern determined as the target of the reserved ball number pattern, and a display mode may be exchanged with the reserved ball number pattern temporarily set to a display mode different from the normal reserved at a predetermined timing after the reserved ball number pattern is executed (for example, at the start of the next change, during the change display based on the reserved ball determined as the target of the reserved ball number pattern), so that the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern determined as the target of the reserved ball number pattern is set to a display mode different from the normal reserved. In this case, the reserved balls that cross the ceiling lottery number may be configured to be allowed to execute the reserved ball number pattern, and the display mode may be exchanged with the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball used in the lottery for the ceiling lottery number by the time the change display for the ceiling lottery number is completed. In other words, the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved balls consumed at the ceiling lottery number is basically set to the display mode of normal reservation, and if the reserved balls of the first special pattern increase thereafter, a lottery for whether or not to execute the reserved ball change effect is executed as in normal times, and if a reserved ball change effect of a display mode other than normal reservation is executed, an effect for switching the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern is executed, so that the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern of the first special pattern consumed after the ceiling lottery number is reached can be unified to the display mode of normal reservation. By configuring in this way, as with the 16th control example described above, the third time-saving state can be started without any information to determine whether it is better to consume the reserved balls of the first special pattern during the third time-saving state.

In this 16th control example, the second time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot or based on winning a time-saving symbol, and the third time-saving state is set based on reaching the ceiling number of draws. The third time-saving state is slightly less advantageous, but the difference in the advantageous degree is kept to a small difference that is difficult for the player to feel, but this is not limited to this. For example, the third time-saving state may be configured to have a clearly lower advantageous degree. Specifically, for example, the probability of winning a normal symbol in a low probability state of a normal symbol (normal game state, third time-saving state) may be configured to be significantly lower (for example, 1/100) than the high probability state of a normal symbol (second probability state, second time-saving state). In other words, in both the normal state and the third time-saving state, the game may be configured to proceed by executing the lottery for the first special symbol by hitting from the left, by configuring the lottery for the normal symbol to be almost unwinnable. Even if configured in this way, if the degree of advantage in the case of a jackpot in the drawing of the first special symbol is configured to be higher in the third time-saving state, it is possible to maintain the gameplay that makes one expect the ceiling number of draws to be reached. In addition, by configuring the game to maintain the disadvantageous left-handed play even after the ceiling number of draws is reached, it is possible to prevent the degree of advantage from changing significantly before and after the ceiling number of draws is reached. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the existence of the third time-saving state from excessively improving the ball-out performance of the pachinko machine 10, which becomes excessively advantageous for the player, or from trying to cover the payout rate in the third time-saving state with other elements (for example, the probability of a jackpot, the number of prize balls paid out for each ball entering each winning slot, the number of rounds of a jackpot, the probability of a probability change, etc.), which ends up being excessively disadvantageous for the player.

<Modification of the 16th control example>
Next, a modified example of the above-mentioned 16th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 614 and FIG. 615. In the above-mentioned 16th control example, a configuration is adopted in which a performance is executed to encourage the player to view the data display device 262 as a performance for notifying a jackpot and a performance for notifying a time-saving state. In addition, in this modified example, a configuration is adopted in which an upper part UY capable of appearing and disappearing to a position where the data display device 262 can be physically concealed is mounted on the upper part of the pachinko machine 10, and the upper part UY conceals the visual state of the data display device 262, making it more difficult for the player to know whether a data display device-linked performance is being executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 614, in this modified example, a configuration is adopted in which an upper part UY capable of appearing and disappearing is provided on the upper part of the pachinko machine 10 as a part of an interesting performance associated with a variable display performance. This upper role UY is normally maintained in a state (origin position) stored inside the pachinko machine 10, and mainly when the "SP reach" variable pattern, which has a high expectation of winning a jackpot, is selected, it performs an upward movement in the latter half of the variable display performance, and stops at a position (projecting position) that covers the front of the data display device 262. This state in which the upper role UY is stopped in front of the data display device 262 is basically maintained until the variable display performance is completely finished.

In this modified example, as a kind of big win performance, the upper part UY is maintained in the protruding position until the opening period of the big win game, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed in a miss combination (see FIG. 615(a)). Then, after performing a performance that draws attention to the data display device 262 (see FIG. 507(a)), the upper part UY descends to the origin position, exposing the front of the data display device 262, and a performance is performed in which the big win visual confirmation mode set in the data display device 262 becomes visible. Based on the big win visual confirmation mode becoming visible, the pachinko machine 10 also notifies the big win, as in the data display linked type performance in the 16th control example. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to confirm the visual confirmation mode of the data display device 262, so that even if the timing of notifying the big win or transition to the time-saving state on the pachinko machine 10 side is delayed, it is possible to configure it so that it is difficult to notice that the big win or transition to the time-saving state has occurred. This makes it possible to further enhance the performance effects of the data display device-linked performance, while also providing greater freedom in the timing of notifications.

In the above-mentioned 16th control example and its variant, the third pattern display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 displays a display mode that suggests to the player to pay attention to (visually recognize) a specified device (such as the data display device 262) that is electrically connected to the pachinko machine 10 via the external output terminal board 261, and a data display device-linked presentation is executed to notify the player of whether or not a specified advantageous state has been reached depending on whether or not the specified device is set to a specified visual recognition mode (visual recognition mode for jackpot, visual recognition mode for time-saving state) to indicate that the pachinko machine 10 is in a specified advantageous state (jackpot state, time-saving state for normal patterns), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a display mode that prompts the player to pay attention to (visually recognize) a predetermined device that can be set to a visual recognition mode indicating a predetermined advantageous state when the pachinko machine 10 receives a predetermined signal that indicates a predetermined advantageous state, separate from the data display device 261 (for example, a display device that is set to a predetermined display mode when a predetermined signal indicating a predetermined advantageous state is received, a light-emitting device that is set to a predetermined light-emitting mode, a displacement device that is displaced (moved) in a predetermined displacement mode, etc.) may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, thereby allowing a linked performance to be performed between the predetermined device and the third pattern display device 81. This configuration allows for greater freedom in the installation position compared to the data display device 262, which is mostly installed directly above the pachinko machine 10, and therefore allows for a greater variety in the performance modes.

In the above-mentioned 16th control example and its modified example, the bonus interval number displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is reset even when a small win in which the remaining number of times until the ceiling number of times is not reset is won. However, in a pachinko machine 10 to which a predetermined device capable of displaying the game history such as the above-mentioned data display device 262 is connected, the number of times of the special symbol drawn after the previous big win is completed can be grasped by visually checking the game history displayed on the data display device 262. In other words, by visually checking the data display device 262, the remaining number of times of the lottery until the ceiling number of times of the lottery is reached can be grasped. In response to this, the upper role UY in the modified example of the above-mentioned 16th control example may be provided, and the initial position (origin position) of the upper role 262 may be set to the position shown in FIG. 614 (the front of the data display device 262 is blocked by the upper role UY, making it difficult to visually check the data display device 262), so that it is physically difficult to grasp the remaining number of times of the lottery until the ceiling number of times of the lottery by visually checking the data display device 262. By configuring it in this way, the player can determine the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws is reached based only on the number of bonus intervals displayed on the third pattern display device 81, making the game more enjoyable by allowing the player to predict the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws is reached.

In the above-mentioned 16th control example and its modified example, the through gate 67 is provided only in a position where the game ball cannot enter unless it is hit to the right (a position where it is difficult to enter), and the normal pattern variable display does not start during the variable display of the ceiling lottery number unless the right hit is intentionally started during the variable display performance of the ceiling lottery number, but this is not limited to this. For example, the through gate 67 or the second ball entrance 640 may be provided in a position where both the game ball hit to the left and the game ball hit to the right can enter. In this case, it is easy for a situation to occur where the variable display of the normal pattern continues before and after the variable display of the special pattern stops, but as in the above-mentioned 16th control example, the occurrence of wasted balls can be suppressed by shifting (delaying) the timing of notifying the transition to the time-saving state according to the remaining variable time of the normal pattern.

In the above-mentioned 16th control example and its modified example, when the time-saving symbol is won during the third time-saving state, the second time-saving state is set, and when the ceiling number of lotteries is reached in the second time-saving state, the third time-saving state is set (the time-saving state is overwritten). However, it is not necessary to overwrite the time-saving type. For example, when the ceiling number of lotteries is reached in the second time-saving state in which the degree of advantage is high (the probability of winning a normal symbol is high), it may be configured to update only the number of time-saving times to the number of time-saving times (100 times) corresponding to the time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling number of lotteries while maintaining the second time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the degree of advantage from becoming lower than the game state before the ceiling number of lotteries is reached, regardless of the game state at the time when the ceiling number of lotteries is reached, so that the player can be pleased regardless of the timing of reaching the ceiling number of lotteries.

In the above-mentioned 16th control example and its modified example, when the time-saving pattern is won during the third time-saving state and the state transitions to the second time-saving state (as a result, the number of time-saving times increases to 100), or when the ceiling lottery number is reached during the second time-saving state and the state transitions to the third time-saving state (as a result, the number of time-saving times increases to 100), a special performance mode may be executed to indicate that the number of time-saving times has increased. Specifically, for example, in a variable display performance corresponding to the winning of a time-saving pattern during the time-saving state or a variable display performance of the ceiling lottery number during the time-saving state, a performance in which the number indicating the remaining number of times until the time-saving state ends, displayed in the display area Dm7, increases to 100 (the number of time-saving times is restored) may be executed, or a display mode such as a so-called rewind playback may be set to execute a content performance as if time had gone back to the start of the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, a more diverse range of performance modes can be realized, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game. In this case, the configuration may be such that the fewer the remaining times of the time-saving count, the more likely it is that a more extravagant (flashy) presentation mode will be set when the setting conditions for the time-saving state are met. If the setting conditions for the time-saving state are met when the number of times of the time-saving count is low and the number of times of the time-saving state is reset to 100, the player can be made to feel as if he or she has obtained more advantageous time-saving states, and therefore, by executing a more extravagant presentation in this case, the player can be made to feel even greater joy and satisfaction.

In the above-mentioned 16th control example and its modified example, a state in which pre-reading effects such as reserved change effects are prohibited is set based on the acquisition of reserved balls used to draw special symbols at the ceiling drawing count, but the conditions for setting the state in which pre-reading effects are prohibited are not limited to this. For example, a state in which pre-reading effects are prohibited may be set based on the reserved ball corresponding to a time-saving symbol winning being reserved, or a state in which pre-reading effects are prohibited may be set based on the reserved ball corresponding to a jackpot other than a special jackpot being reserved (i.e., a reserved jackpot of a type that transitions to a game state in which a time-saving state of a normal symbol is set after the jackpot has ended is reserved). By configuring in this way, in the same way as when the third time-saving state is set based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number, when the time-saving state is entered in a state in which one or more reserved balls of the first special pattern are held, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether the reserved balls of the first special pattern will be a jackpot or not, so that it is possible to suppress irregular playing methods in which the reserved balls of the first special pattern are consumed during the time-saving state only when it is predicted that a jackpot will be generated, and when it is predicted that a jackpot will not be generated, a lottery for the second special pattern is executed. In addition, a configuration may be made in which a state in which the pre-reading performance is prohibited may be set in cases other than when entering the time-saving state. More specifically, for example, a state in which the pre-reading performance is prohibited may be set from the time when the reserved change performance set to a display mode other than the normal reserved (any of changes 1 to 5) is determined until the variable display performance based on the reserved balls of the display mode other than the normal reserved is completed. This configuration prevents multiple reserved ball count patterns with display modes other than normal reserved from being displayed, which can lead to the player being confused about which reserved ball-based variable display presentation to focus on, making it difficult for the player to concentrate on the variable display presentation based on each reserved ball.

In the above-mentioned 16th control example and its modified example, when the reserved balls used for the lottery of the special pattern are reserved at the ceiling lottery number, the display mode other than the normal reservation is suppressed for the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special pattern acquired after that, but this is not limited to this. For example, the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball of the first special pattern that is consumed after the transition to the third time-saving state may be configured to be set to a specific display mode different from the normal reservation and any of the changes 1 to 5. Even in this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict whether it is advantageous to consume it during the time-saving state, so that the reserved ball of the first special pattern is consumed during the time-saving state only when it is predicted that a jackpot is likely to be obtained, and the lottery of the second special pattern is executed when it is predicted that a jackpot is not likely to be obtained. In addition, contrary to the above-mentioned 16th control example and its modified example, the reserved ball change presentation may be permitted in the same way as in normal times. In this case, in addition to display modes that suggest the possibility of a jackpot or a time-saving symbol winning, a display mode that suggests a high probability of a jackpot type (special jackpot) that is advantageous if won during the time-saving state (i.e., that the degree of advantage is likely to be higher if consumed during the time-saving state) or that the degree of advantage is likely to be higher if consumed after the time-saving state ends rather than during the time-saving state may be provided. By configuring in this way, the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be consumed at the most advantageous timing for the player.

<17th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 548 to Fig. 575. In the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 12th control example, the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are configured to be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the time-saving winning judgment is configured to be executed in both the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol. In addition, in the above-mentioned 12th control example, a plurality of time-saving states (time-saving A, time-saving B) with different advantageous degrees (time-saving times) are provided as the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the player.

In response to this, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventeenth control example is configured to provide two time-saving states: a time-saving state (second time-saving state A, third time-saving state A) in which a lottery for the first special symbol, which has a low degree of advantage, is likely to be executed, and a time-saving state (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B) in which a lottery for the second special symbol, which has a high degree of advantage, is likely to be executed. When the ceiling number of lottery draws is reached, the third time-saving state B is set first, while when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the time-saving state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state A, which has a low degree of advantage, with a high probability. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play with a stronger expectation of reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws than of winning a jackpot.

In addition, in this 17th control example, when a time-saving symbol is drawn during the time-saving state, the number of time-saving times corresponding to the drawn time-saving symbol is added. In addition, in the drawing of the second special symbol, the time-saving symbol is drawn with a higher probability (for example, 90%) than the drawing of the first special symbol. In addition, when the second time-saving state B or the third time-saving state B is entered, the second time-saving state A or the third time-saving state A is entered by drawing a specific number of special symbols (for example, 10 times). In other words, during the second time-saving state B or the third time-saving state B, the time-saving symbol is drawn with a high probability each time the drawing of the second special symbol is executed, and the number of time-saving times is added, so that an innovative gameplay is realized in which the number of times of continuation of the second time-saving state A or the third time-saving state A, which is entered after the drawing of the special symbol has passed a specific number of times, can be changed.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 17th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 12th control example described above in that the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 has a partially changed board configuration, that the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 have a partially changed configuration, that the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 have a partially changed configuration, that the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has a partially changed configuration, and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a partially changed configuration. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 12th control example. In the following, elements that are the same as those in the twelfth control example will be given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations of those elements will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 548, the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this 17th control example will be described. FIG. 548 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 17th control example. As shown in FIG. 548, the game board 13 in this 17th control example is different from the game board 13 in the 12th control example (see FIG. 406) in that a small win variable winning device 2650 is provided directly below the first ball entrance 64. The upper part of this small win variable winning device 2650 is blocked by the first ball entrance 64 and a nail, and is positioned so that the game ball has difficulty entering. This small win variable winning device 2650 is a variable winning device that is opened when the lottery for the first special pattern results in a small win. In other words, even if the lottery result for the first special symbol is a small win, it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the small win variable winning device 2650, so the small win for the first special symbol in this 17th control example has almost the same value as a miss in a general gaming machine. The significance of providing a small win for the first special symbol in this 17th control example is the function of forcibly stopping the long fluctuation of the second special symbol at a miss.

Here, in the seventeenth control example, the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are configured to be executed in parallel, and if one of the special symbols becomes a big win or a small win while both special symbols are changing, the display of the other special symbol being executed is forcibly stopped at a missing symbol. And, the first special symbol is configured to win a small win with a high probability (49/50). By configuring in this way, even if the second special symbol is drawn by hitting the right side in a normal state and a long variation for 600 seconds is set, the long variation of the second special symbol can be forcibly stopped at a missing symbol by drawing the first special symbol without waiting for 600 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem of the second special symbol being drawn endlessly.

The game board 13 in this 17th control example also differs from the game board 13 in the 12th control example in that the variable winning device 1065 has been removed, and the V winning device 1650 also serves the role of the variable winning device 1065 (as a big winning port that is opened for a predetermined period of time in each round of a big win). This allows the board configuration of the game board 13 to be simplified.

Furthermore, the game board 13 in this 17th control example differs from the 12th control example in that, instead of the right-side second ball entrance 1640 and the electric device 1640a that opens and closes the right-side second ball entrance 1640, the game board 13 in this 17th control example is provided with the right-side first ball entrance 64r and the electric device 64ra that opens and closes the right-side first ball entrance 64r. This right-side first ball entrance 64r is configured as a type of starting winning hole that triggers the drawing of the first special symbol, just like the first ball entrance 64. In addition, when a winning normal symbol is drawn, the electric device 64ra is controlled to open and close in an opening pattern that corresponds to the game status.

Next, referring to FIG. 549 and FIG. 550, the characteristic presentation mode in this 17th control example will be described. Here, as described above, in this 17th control example, there are two types of time-saving states: time-saving state A (second time-saving state A, third time-saving state A) in which a lottery is executed for the first special pattern with a low degree of advantage (almost no time-saving pattern is won), and time-saving state B (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B) in which a lottery is executed for the second special pattern with a high degree of advantage (high probability of winning the time-saving pattern, and essentially a big win is also confirmed if a small win is won). And, in this 17th control example, when a time-saving pattern is won in the time-saving state, a control is adopted to add the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving pattern that has been won, and a configuration is adopted in which a lottery for a specific number of times (for example, 11 times) of special patterns is drawn in the time-saving state B, thereby transitioning to the time-saving state A. In other words, the more times the time-saving state B, where it is easy to win the time-saving symbol, is increased by winning the time-saving symbol, the more times the time-saving state A to which it subsequently transitions (after a specific number of times has elapsed) will transition, resulting in a highly unique and innovative gameplay configuration. In other words, the time-saving state B is not only an extremely advantageous state in which the lottery for the second special symbol, which has a high probability of actually winning a jackpot (even if a small jackpot is won, a jackpot is essentially guaranteed), but it is also a state for determining the number of times the time-saving state A to which it subsequently transitions will continue.

The presentation mode in this time-saving state B will be described with reference to Fig. 549 and Fig. 550. Fig. 549(a) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode executed by the third pattern display device 81 after the lottery result is different from the big win (i.e., a miss including a small win) over the ceiling lottery number (150 times in this 17th control example) and the state transitions to the third time-saving state. As described above, when the state transitions to the third time-saving state, first, the third time-saving state B is set in which the lottery for the second special pattern is mainly executed, and the third time-saving state B transitions to the third time-saving state A by executing the variable display of the special pattern a specific number of times. Fig. 549(a) is a diagram showing the display mode during the third time-saving state B.

As shown in FIG. 549(a), in the third time-saving state B, the words "-Add-on RUSH-" are displayed above the main display area Dm, and each time a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, an effect is executed in which a rabbit-like character 801 is granted a bonus contained in a treasure chest 810 by an angel-like character 809. FIG. 549(a) illustrates an example in which contents 810a including a symbol with the number "5" attached thereto is granted to character 801 from treasure chest 810, indicating that five time-saving times have been added (the time-saving symbol with five time-saving times has been selected). Also, as shown in FIG. 549(a), a small display area Dm4 with the words "Right Hit" is formed in the upper left corner of the main display area Dm, and below the small display area Dm4, a small display area Dm7 with the words "Last 8 Hits" is formed, and below the small display area Dm7, a small display area Dm13 with the words "Stock 50 + 10 Hits" is formed.

The small display area Dm7 displays the remaining number of times the second special symbol will be drawn until the time-saving state B ends (transition to the time-saving state A), and the value is decremented by one each time the second special symbol is drawn in the time-saving state B. The small display area Dm13 displays the number of times the time-saving state has been reduced after the transition to the time-saving state A, and the left side displays the number of times the time-saving state has been determined at the time of transition to the time-saving state B, and the right side displays the number of times the time-saving state has been acquired (added) by winning the time-saving symbol in the time-saving state B. In other words, in the example of FIG. 549(a), when the ceiling number of times of drawing is reached (transition to the third time-saving state B), 50 times of the time-saving state A are guaranteed, and furthermore, the situation is illustrated in which 10 times of the time-saving state have been successfully acquired (added) by winning the time-saving symbol in the second special symbol drawing. In this 17th control example, the number of times the time-saving state is activated when the ceiling number of lottery draws is reached is set to a uniform 61 times. Of these, 11 times are set to the third time-saving state B, and 50 times are set to the third time-saving state A.

In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays the words "Increase the number of chance times!" These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the number of time-saving times in the chance time (time-saving state A) is added (stocked) each time the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. In the present 17th control example, in the time-saving state, the game ball is frequently entered into both the first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 1641 by hitting from the right. For this reason, when hitting from the right after transitioning to the third time-saving state B, not only the lottery for the second special symbol but also the lottery for the first special symbol is almost certainly executed. Here, in the present 17th control example, a simultaneous change specification is adopted that allows the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner at the same time, and both the start of the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display of the second special symbol and the start of the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display of the first special symbol are permitted. Also, in time-saving state B, a relatively long variation time (for example, 120 seconds) is set for the first special symbol. Therefore, while the variation display of the first special symbol is executed once, the lottery game with the second special symbol can be executed the remaining number of times until the transition to time-saving state A is made. The reason why the number of times that time-saving state B continues is an odd number of 11 times is that one lottery for the first special symbol and ten lottery for the second special symbol are added together. This makes it possible to set the number of lottery draws for the second special symbol before the transition to time-saving state A to a convenient round number of 10 times.

Figure 549 (b) is a diagram showing the presentation mode after the 11th variable display is completed in the third time-saving state B in this 17th control example. When the 11th variable display is completed in the third time-saving state B, a presentation is executed to notify the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state A to be transitioned thereafter. Specifically, as shown in Figure 549 (b), characters indicating the number of time-saving times are displayed in the center part of the main display area Dm. In the example of Figure 549 (b), a case where the characters "TOTAL 110 times" are displayed is illustrated, and in addition to the 50 times of time-saving times that were determined from the start of the time-saving state B, a situation where 60 times of time-saving times are added during the time-saving state B is illustrated. In addition, the characters "Chance time entry" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand the number of time-saving times in the third time-saving state A.

Next, referring to FIG. 550, the presentation mode when a jackpot or small jackpot is won during time-saving state B (add-on RUSH) will be described. In this 17th control example, when a jackpot is won during time-saving state B, or when a V prize occurs after a small jackpot is won and a jackpot is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state. In this second time-saving state, as in the third time-saving state based on reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws, the game state transitions to time-saving state A after 11 time-saving states B are set. Therefore, from the player's perspective, when a jackpot is won during time-saving state B (add-on RUSH), the game state moves as if the time-saving state B (add-on RUSH) is restarted after the jackpot. Furthermore, the number of time-saving times after the jackpot of the second special symbol is set to 86, so excluding the 11 times consumed in time-saving state B, the number of time-saving times for time-saving state A to which the player transitions after time-saving state B is guaranteed to be 75, and time-saving state B is resumed from the beginning. Therefore, since the number of time-saving times is set to be greater than the third time-saving state associated with reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws, it is possible to expect a jackpot during time-saving state B.

As shown in FIG. 550, if a big win or small win is won during time-saving state B, contents 810a containing a pattern with the word "RUSH" appear from a treasure chest 810, and an effect is executed in which the contents are awarded to the character 801. Also, the display showing the number of time-saving times displayed in the small display area Dm13 is changed to display "75 times stocked". Furthermore, the words "Add-on RUSH reset confirmed!!" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that after acquiring 75 time-saving times, the add-on RUSH can be restarted from the beginning. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 551, a method of transition between game states in this 17th control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 551, in this 17th control example, five game states are provided: a normal state, a second time-saving state A, a second time-saving state B, a third time-saving state A, and a third time-saving state B. The normal state is set to a low probability state for normal symbols, and is configured as a game state in which the fluctuation shortening function (variation shortening) of normal symbols is not activated. In other words, it is configured as a game state that is disadvantageous to a player who needs to progress in the game by executing a lottery for the first special symbol, which has a low degree of advantage, by hitting left.

The second time-saving state A is set to a high probability state for normal symbols, and is configured as a game state in which the normal symbol fluctuation shortening function (variation shortening) is activated, so that game balls frequently enter both the right-side first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 1641 by hitting from the right, but since an extremely long fluctuation time (for example, 600 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, it is configured as a game state in which only the lottery for the first special symbol based on the ball entering the right-side first ball entrance 64r is executed. The second time-saving state B is set to a high probability state for normal symbols like the second time-saving state A, and is configured as a game state in which the normal symbol fluctuation shortening function (variation shortening) is activated, but unlike the second time-saving state A, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes longer and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes significantly shorter, so it is configured as a game state in which only the lottery for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1641 is executed. Here, because the drawing of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the drawing of the first special symbol, the second time-saving state B is a more advantageous gaming state than the second time-saving state A.

The third time-saving state A is set to a low probability state of special symbols and a low probability state of normal symbols, and is configured as a game state in which the normal symbol variation shortening function (variation shortening) is activated. As with the second time-saving state A, game balls frequently enter the right-side first ball entrance 64r and the second ball entrance 1641 by hitting from the right, but since an extremely long variation time (for example, 600 seconds) is set as the variation time of the second special symbol, it is configured as a game state in which only the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the right-side first ball entrance 64r is executed. In other words, compared to the second time-saving state A, the probability of winning the normal symbol is low, so the degree of advantage is lower, but the degree of advantage is higher than in the normal state. Here, in this 17th control example, as with the 16th control example, the number of random numbers (counter values) determined to be a win for the normal symbol is configured to differ by only one. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the difference in the degree of advantage (the degree of advantage of the third time-saving state A being lower than that of the second time-saving state A). Therefore, when the player transitions to the third time-saving state A, the player can be made to feel as if he or she has obtained the same value as when the player transitions to the second time-saving state A, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the third time-saving state B is set to a low probability state of normal symbols like the third time-saving state A, and is configured as a game state in which the normal symbol fluctuation shortening function (variation shortening) is activated; however, unlike the third time-saving state A, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol becomes longer and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes significantly shorter, so that it is configured as a game state in which only the lottery for the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 1641 is executed. Therefore, the third time-saving state B is a game state with a higher degree of advantage than the third time-saving state A.

First, referring to the upper part of FIG. 551, a method of transition from the normal state to another game state will be described. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 551, there is a possibility of transition from the normal state to another game state when a jackpot is won, and when the ceiling number of draws is reached without winning a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 551, when a jackpot A17, which is determined with a 90% probability when a jackpot is won in a drawing of the first special pattern, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-shortening state A. Also, when a jackpot B17, which is determined with a 10% probability when a jackpot is won in a drawing of the first special pattern in the normal state, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-shortening state B, which is more advantageous than the second time-shortening state A. Furthermore, when the ceiling number of draws (150 times) is reached without winning a jackpot in the normal state, the game state is set to the third time-shortening state B. The second time-saving state B and the third time-saving state B have roughly the same degree of advantage, and the second time-saving state A is configured as a game state that is clearly less advantageous than the second time-saving state B and the third time-saving state B. Therefore, in the normal state, the player can play with a stronger hope of reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws without winning a jackpot, rather than winning a jackpot, which has a higher chance of transitioning to the second time-saving state A, which has a lower degree of advantage. In other words, a novel gameplay in which the player plays while more strongly hoping not to win a jackpot can be realized, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to the left middle section of FIG. 551, a method of transition from the second time-saving state A to another game state will be described. As shown in the left middle section of FIG. 551, there is a possibility of transition from the second time-saving state A to another game state when a jackpot is won, when the number of time-saving times has elapsed without winning a jackpot, and when the ceiling number of lottery times has been reached without winning a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 551, when the jackpot B17, which is determined at a rate of 10% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern in the second time-saving state A, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state B. Also, when the number of time-saving times has elapsed in the second time-saving state A, the game state is set to the normal state, which is disadvantageous to the player. Furthermore, when the ceiling number of lottery times (150 times) is reached without winning a jackpot in the second time-saving state A, the game state is set to the second time-saving state B. In order to reach the ceiling number of draws while remaining in the time-saving state A, it is necessary to first transition to the second time-saving state B, transition to the time-saving state A in the second time-saving state B with the number of draws exceeding the ceiling number of draws added, and then reach the ceiling number of draws without winning the jackpot. When transitioning to the second time-saving state B, the number of time-savings granted at the end of the jackpot is 61 or 86, so in order to add the number of time-savings exceeding the ceiling number of draws, it is necessary to add at least 64 or more during the second time-saving state B. However, 80% of the time-savings added in the drawing of the second special pattern 1 are 5 times, and the rate of adding 10 or more time-savings is only 20%, so it is difficult to add the number of time-savings exceeding the ceiling number of draws in the first place. Furthermore, since the event of reaching the ceiling number of draws without winning a jackpot is a relatively unlikely event in the first place, it can be said that it is extremely rare for the ceiling number of draws (150 draws after the end of a jackpot) to be reached while maintaining the second time-saving state A.

In contrast to this, if jackpot A17, which has a 90% chance of being determined when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol in the second time-saving state A, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state A again (loops through the second time-saving state A). Therefore, in the second time-saving state A, the gameplay is such that the player basically plays the game in the hope of winning a jackpot and of determining jackpot B17, which has a low chance of being determined (10%) when a jackpot is won.

Next, referring to the lower left of FIG. 551, a method of transition from the second time-saving state B to another game state will be described. As shown in the lower left of FIG. 551, there is a possibility of transition from the second time-saving state B to another game state only when a specific number of (6 or 11) special symbol drawings are performed without winning either a jackpot or a small jackpot. Specifically, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 551, when a specific number of (6 or 11) special symbol drawings are completed in the second time-saving state B, the game state transitions to the second time-saving state A, which is less advantageous than the second time-saving state B. In contrast, if a jackpot is won in the drawing of the second special symbol before a specific number of special symbol drawings are performed in the second time-saving state B, or if a small jackpot that essentially guarantees a jackpot is won, the game state after the jackpot is completed is set to the second time-saving state B again (looping through the most advantageous second time-saving state B). Therefore, in the second time-saving state B, the game is played in the hope of winning a big win or a small win before the drawing of the specific number of special symbols is completed. The probability of winning either a big win or a small win in the drawing of the second special symbol is 1/10, and the number of times the second special symbol is drawn before the drawing of the specific number of special symbols is completed is basically 5 or 10, so the possibility of looping the second time-saving state B is about 41% when the number of times the second special symbol is drawn is 5, and about 65% when the number of times the second special symbol is drawn is 10. As mentioned above, even if neither the big win nor the small win is won during the second time-saving state B, there is a high probability that the number of time-saving times can be acquired (added) five or more times for each drawing of the second special symbol in the second time-saving state B, so the degree of advantage (number of continuations) of the second time-saving state A that is set after the drawing of a specific number of special symbols has been completed can be made higher than normal (the second time-saving state A that is set based on winning the big win A17). This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to the middle right of FIG. 551, a method of transition from the third time-saving state B to another game state will be described. As shown in the middle right of FIG. 551, there is a possibility of transition from the third game state B to another game state when a big win or a small win is won, and when a specific number of times (11 times) of special symbol lotteries are executed without winning either a big win or a small win. Specifically, as shown in the middle right of FIG. 551, when a big win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol in the third time-saving state B, or when a small win that essentially determines a big win is won, the game state after the big win is set to the second time-saving state B. Also, when a specific number of times (11 times) of special symbol lotteries are finished in the third time-saving state B, the game state transitions to the third time-saving state A, which is less advantageous than the third time-saving state B. Therefore, in the third time-saving state B, the player can play with the strong expectation of winning either a big win or a small win in the drawing of the special symbol within a specific number of times (11 times). As with the second time-saving state B described above, in the third time-saving state B, there is a high probability of winning (adding) five or more time-saving times for each drawing of the second special symbol, so the degree of advantage (number of continuations) of the third time-saving state A, which is set after the drawing of the special symbol has been completed a specific number of times, can be improved. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to the lower right side of FIG. 551, a method of transition from the third time-saving state A to another game state will be described. As shown in the lower right side of FIG. 551, there is a possibility of transition from the third time-saving state A to another game state when a jackpot is won, when the number of time-saving times has elapsed without winning a jackpot, and when the ceiling number of lottery times has been reached without winning a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 551, when the jackpot A17, which is determined with a 90% probability when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern in the third time-saving state A, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state A. Also, when the jackpot B17, which is determined with a 10% probability when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special pattern in the third time-saving state A, is won, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state B. Also, when the number of time-saving times has elapsed in the third time-saving state A, the game state is set to the normal state, which is disadvantageous to the player. Furthermore, if the ceiling number of draws (150) is reached in the third time-saving state A without winning a jackpot, the state is set to the third time-saving state B. As with the second time-saving state A, reaching the ceiling number of draws in the third time-saving state A is an extremely rare case (an event that cannot occur unless the number of draws reaches the ceiling number after an additional 65 or more time-savings have been generated in the third time-saving state B). For this reason, in the third time-saving state A, as with the second time-saving state A, the gameplay is such that the player basically plays in the hope of winning a jackpot and of winning the jackpot B17, which is determined at a low rate (10%) if a jackpot is won.

In this way, in this 17th control example, the gameplay can be switched between five different game states, and even in the same time-saving state, the degree of advantage and gameplay can be significantly different between time-saving state A (second time-saving state A, third time-saving state A) and time-saving state B (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B), so that the game can be made more interesting. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

<Electrical configuration in 17th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 552, the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the 17th control example will be described. FIG. 552 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 17th control example. As shown in FIG. 552, the ROM 202 in the 17th control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 12th control example described above (see FIG. 407) in that the jackpot type selection 12 table 202kb is replaced with the jackpot type selection 17 table 202qb, the 2nd random number 12 table 202kc is replaced with the 2nd random number 17 table 202qc, and the fluctuation pattern 12 table 202kd is replaced with the fluctuation pattern 17 table 202qd. 12. The ROM 202 is configured to receive the random number 17 of the small prizes instead of the random number 12 of the small prizes, the table 202qe is provided for the random number 17 of the small prizes instead of the table 202kf for the selection of the small prize type, the table 202qh is provided for the random number 12 of the time-saving prize instead of the table 202kh for the selection of the random number 17 of the time-saving prize, the table 202qi is added, and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj is added. The other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the twelfth control example described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted here.

First, referring to FIG. 554(a), the details of the jackpot type selection 17 table 202qb in this 17th control example will be described. FIG. 554(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 17 table 202qb in this 17th control example. As shown in FIG. 554(a), the jackpot type selection 17 table 202qb in this 17th control example is composed of at least a special jackpot 17 table 202qb1 for special jackpot 1, which is referenced to select the jackpot type of the first special symbol, and a special jackpot 2 17 table 202qb2 for special jackpot 2, which is referenced to select the jackpot type of the second special symbol.

Figure 554 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot 17 table 202qb1. As shown in Figure 554 (b), in the special chart 1 jackpot 17 table 202qb1 in this 17th control example, two types of jackpot types for the first special pattern are specified: "jackpot A17" and "jackpot B17". That is, in the special chart 1 jackpot 17 table 202qb1, the jackpot type "jackpot A17" is specified in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 89", and the jackpot type "jackpot B17" is specified in correspondence with the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99".

"Jackpot A17" is a type of jackpot where the number of rounds of the jackpot is 5 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the second time-saving state A (the time-saving state where the lottery for the first special symbol is mainly executed) with 51 time-saving times. Also, "jackpot B17" is a type of jackpot where the number of rounds of the jackpot is 5 rounds, and the game state after the jackpot is set to the second time-saving state B (the time-saving state where the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed) with 56 time-saving times. Note that when the lottery for the special symbol is executed 11 times in the second time-saving state B, it transitions to the second time-saving state A, and thereafter, the second time-saving state A is basically maintained until the time-saving times elapse (end) or until the jackpot is won. As mentioned above, the second time-saving state B is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving state A, so "jackpot B17" is a jackpot type with a higher degree of advantage than "jackpot A17". In addition, 90 random numbers out of 100 possible random numbers (counter values) for the value of the first winning type counter C2 are associated with "jackpot A17," while 10 random numbers (counter values) are associated with "jackpot B17." Therefore, when a jackpot is won by drawing the first special symbol, there is a 90% chance that it will be a "jackpot A17," and a 10% chance that it will be a "jackpot B17."

Next, referring to FIG. 554(c), the details of the special chart 2 jackpot 17 table 202qb2 will be described. FIG. 554(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot 17 table 202qb2. As shown in FIG. 554(c), the special chart 2 jackpot 17 table 202qb2 in this 17th control example specifies three types of jackpot types for the second special pattern: "jackpot C17", "jackpot D17", and "jackpot E17". That is, in the special chart 2 jackpot 17 table 202qb2, the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 84" is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot C17", the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "85 to 89" is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot D17", and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 in the range of "90 to 99" is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot E17".

As shown in FIG. 554(c), "jackpot C17," "jackpot D17," and "jackpot E17" have different numbers of jackpot rounds, 15 rounds, 8 rounds, and 4 rounds, respectively, but the game state after the jackpot ends is commonly set to the second time-saving state B with 86 time-saving rounds. Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the second time-saving state B, which has a high degree of advantage, is set at a 100% rate, making the lottery for the second special symbol more advantageous than the lottery for the second special symbol. In addition, 85 random number values (counter values) out of 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2 are associated with the "jackpot C17", 5 random number values (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot D17", and 10 random number values (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot E17", so that if a jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol, there is an 85% chance that it will be a "jackpot C17", a 5% chance that it will be a "jackpot D17", and a 10% chance that it will be a "jackpot E17".

In this way, in this 17th control example, even if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the first special symbol, there is only a 10% chance of transitioning to the advantageous second time-saving state B, whereas if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the second special symbol, the advantageous second time-saving state B is always set, so that when the drawing of the second special symbol is executed, players can have a stronger expectation of winning a jackpot. This can add variety to the game, further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 555(a), the second winning random number 17 table 202qc in this 17th control example will be described in detail. This second winning random number 17 table 202qc, like the second winning random number 12 table 202kc in the 12th control example described above, is a data table that is referenced when drawing a lottery for a normal symbol, and that specifies the random number value (counter value of the second winning random number counter C2) that results in a winning normal symbol.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 555(a), 299 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 298" are specified as the random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a winning normal pattern in the low probability state of the normal pattern, while 300 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 299" are specified as the random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a winning normal pattern in the high probability state of the normal pattern. Since the second winning random number counter C4 can take a value in the range of "0 to 299", the probability of a winning normal pattern in the low probability state of the normal pattern is 299/300, and the probability of a winning normal pattern in the high probability state of the normal pattern is 1 (300/300). In other words, in this 17th control example, even in the low probability state of the normal pattern, it is configured to be determined to be a winning normal pattern in almost every lottery. This is for the purpose of almost eliminating the difference in the degree of advantage between the second time-saving state and the third time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, the degree of advantage when the ceiling number of draws is reached and the game transitions to the third time-saving state can be made almost equal to that of the second time-saving state, allowing players to play with a stronger expectation of reaching the ceiling number of draws.

Even in normal conditions, hitting from the right will pass through the through gate 67 and a lottery for a normal pattern will be executed, resulting in a high probability of winning a normal pattern. However, in normal conditions, the normal pattern variation shortening function does not operate, and the opening period of the electric device 64ra is also short (for example, 0.1 seconds), so even if you continue hitting from the right, it is almost impossible to get the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64r on the right side. In other words, since the game efficiency is lower than continuing to shoot game balls aiming at the first ball entrance 64 by hitting from the left, it is possible to suppress the irregular game method of hitting from the right in normal conditions.

Next, referring to FIG. 555(b), the details of the fluctuation pattern 17 table 202qd in this 17th control example will be described. This fluctuation pattern 17 table 202qd, like the fluctuation pattern 17 table 202kd in the 12th control example described above, is a data table that is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) according to the lottery result when a lottery for a special symbol is held. FIG. 555(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern 17 table 202qd in this 17th control example.

As shown in FIG. 555 (b), the fluctuation pattern 17 table 202qd in this 17th control example is composed of at least a normal table 202qd1 which is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special pattern is executed in the normal state, a special 1 time-saving table 202qd2 which is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special pattern is executed in the time-saving state A (second time-saving state A, third time-saving state A) in which the lottery for the first special pattern is mainly executed, and a special 2 time-saving table 202qd3 which is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) when a lottery for a special pattern is executed in the time-saving state B (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B) in which the lottery for the second special pattern is mainly executed. Here, the normal table 202qd1 has the same regulation contents as the normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1 (see FIG. 414) in the 12th control example described above, so detailed explanations are omitted here. Note that the 17th control example differs from the 12th control example in that there is no possibility of winning the time-saving pattern in the lottery for the first special pattern, and in that there is a high probability of a miss with a small win in the lottery for the special pattern. For this reason, the regulation contents related to the small win of the first special pattern in the normal table 202qd1 of the 17th control example are the same as the regulation contents related to the miss of the first special pattern in the normal state variation pattern 12 table 202kd1 of the 12th control example.

Next, referring to FIG. 555(c), the details of the special 1 time-saving table 202qd2 constituting the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern 17 table 202qd will be described. FIG. 555(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the special 1 time-saving table 202qd2. As shown in FIG. 555(c), for the first special symbol lottery result being a miss (small win), a short miss with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is associated and specified as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Also, for the first special symbol lottery result being a big win, a short win with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is associated and specified as the fluctuation pattern for the entire range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

In contrast, as shown in FIG. 555(c), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a time-saving win, a long miss with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Also, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, a long win with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Therefore, in the second time-saving state A and the third time-saving state A, in which the special 1 time-saving table 202qd1 is referenced, a short fluctuation time of 5 seconds or less is set each time the lottery of the first special symbol is executed by hitting the right, while an extremely long fluctuation time of 600 seconds is set when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed regardless of the lottery result, so that a game state in which only the lottery of the first special symbol is executed can be formed. As described above, in this 17th control example, when a right hit is performed in the time-saving state, game balls frequently enter both the first ball entrance 64r on the right side and the second ball entrance 1641, and the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, so that in the time-saving state A, the first special symbol can be drawn multiple times while the second special symbol is long-changing. In other words, it is configured as a game state in which the game progresses mainly by drawing the first special symbol.

The special 2 time-saving table 202qd3 differs from the time-saving state variation pattern 12 table 202kd2 (see FIG. 415) of the above-mentioned 12th control example in that the variation time of the first special symbol is 120 seconds regardless of the lottery result, so a detailed explanation is omitted here. In the game state (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B) where this special 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is referenced, the second special symbol can be continuously varied for 5 seconds or less while the first special symbol is being long-varied (120 seconds), so a game state in which the game progresses mainly by the lottery of the second special symbol is formed. The change time of the first special symbol is changed from 600 seconds in the 12th control example to 120 seconds in order to avoid a long period during which the drawing of the first special symbol cannot be executed, when the time-saving state B does not win and the state transitions to time-saving state A. On the other hand, if the drawing time of the first special symbol is made too short, the drawing of the first special symbol may be executed multiple times in the second time-saving state B or the third time-saving state B, which may reduce the number of times the second special symbol is drawn, so a relatively long period of 120 seconds is set.

Next, referring to FIG. 556(a), the details of the small prize random number 17 table 202qe will be described. This small prize random number 17 table 202qe is a data table in which the random number value (counter value of the first prize random number counter C1) that is determined to be a small prize in the drawing of the special pattern is prescribed, similar to the small prize random number 12 table 202ke (see FIG. 409(d)) in the above-mentioned 12th control example. FIG. 556(a) is a diagram showing the prescribed contents of the small prize random number 17 table 202qe in this 17th control example. As shown in FIG. 556(a), in this 17th control example, the random number value (counter value of the first prize random number counter C1) associated with the first special pattern is made different from that of the second special pattern. In other words, the probability of winning a small prize is made different between the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 556(a), the range of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a small win in the drawing of the first special symbol is set to "18-899," while the range of random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a small win in the drawing of the second special symbol is set to "18-89." Of the 900 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning random number counter C1 can take, ranging from "0-899," the random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a small win in the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol are 882 and 72, respectively, so the probability of a small win in the drawing of the first special symbol is 49/50 (882/900), and the probability of a small win in the drawing of the second special symbol is 2/25 (72/900). Considering that the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol is 1/50, the lottery of the first special symbol will win either a jackpot or a small jackpot. In addition, the lottery of the second special symbol will win a jackpot or a small jackpot with a probability of 1/10 (2/25 + 1/10). Here, as will be described in detail later, the small jackpot of the first special symbol is substantially the same as a miss in other control examples because only unfavorable small jackpot types that cannot win a jackpot (V winning cannot occur) are selected. On the other hand, the small jackpot of the second special symbol is substantially the same as a miss in other control examples because only favorable small jackpot types that almost certainly win a jackpot by hitting the right during a small jackpot game and cause a V winning are selected. Therefore, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol is 1/50 because it is not affected by the small jackpot, whereas the jackpot probability of the second special symbol is substantially the combined probability of the jackpot and the small jackpot, so it is 1/10. Therefore, the player has an advantage over the player who wins the lottery for the second special symbol over the lottery for the first special symbol.

Next, referring to FIG. 556(b), the details of the small win type selection 17 table 202qf in this 17th control example will be described. This small win type selection 17 table 202qf is a data table that is referenced to determine the type of small win when a small win is won in the lottery of a special pattern, similar to the small win type selection 12 table 202kf in the 12th control example described above. FIG. 556(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the small win type selection 17 table 202qf. As shown in FIG. 556(b), the small win type selection 17 table 202qf in this 17th control example specifies only one type, "small win A17", as the small win type of the first special pattern, while three types, "small win B17" to "small win D17", are specified as the small win types of the second special pattern.

"Small Win A17" is a small win in which the small win winning device 2650 is opened and closed. In other words, since the V winning device 1650, which is provided with the specific area 1650a that is the winning opportunity for the big win, is not opened, it is a small win type that has no possibility of winning the big win (V winning occurs). In addition, "Small Win B17" to "Small Win D17" are all small wins in which the V winning device 1650 is opened, and since the game ball can be easily entered into the specific area 1650a by hitting right, they are small win types in which the big win is essentially confirmed. In addition, "Big Win B17" executes big win C17 (15 round special chart 2-hour short big win) when a V win occurs, "Big Win C17" executes big win D17 (8 round special chart 2-hour short big win) when a V win occurs, and "Big Win D17" executes big win E17 (4 round special chart 2-hour short big win) when a V win occurs. For this reason, among the small wins of the second special pattern, "small win B17" has the highest degree of advantage, and "small win D17" has the lowest degree of advantage.

As shown in FIG. 556(b), the "small win A17" is associated with the full range (0-99) of values that the small win type counter C5 can take. Therefore, if a small win is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, the "small win A17" is always determined, which does not allow for a V win. Therefore, the small win for the first special symbol is essentially the same lottery result as a miss in other control examples.

As shown in FIG. 556(b), the contents of the regulations for the second special symbol are such that "small win B17" is associated with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "0-49", "small win C17" is associated with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "50-69", and "small win D17" is associated with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "70-99". Therefore, when a small win is obtained in the drawing of the second special symbol, the probability that "small win B17" is determined is 50%, the probability that "small win C17" is determined is 20%, and the probability that "small win D17" is determined is 30%. Considering that the allocation of the most favorable "jackpot A17" was set to 85% when the second special symbol was selected for the jackpot (see FIG. 554(c)), it can be said that the setting is such that the degree of favorability is higher when the second special symbol is selected for the jackpot than when a small jackpot is won and a V prize is generated. Therefore, in the time-saving state B, the player can play with a stronger expectation of winning a jackpot with a low probability (1/50) than a small jackpot with a high probability (2/25), which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 556(c), the details of the time-saving random number 17 table 202qh in this 17th control example will be described. This time-saving random number 17 table 202qh is a data table in which the random number value (counter value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a time-saving pattern winning in the lottery of the special pattern is specified, similar to the time-saving random number 12 table 202kh in the 12th control example described above. FIG. 566(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving random number 17 table 202qh. As shown in FIG. 556(c), in this 17th control example, 810 random number values (counter values) from "90 to 899" are associated and specified as the random number value (value of the first winning random number counter C1) that is determined to be a time-saving winning in the lottery of the second special pattern. Of the 900 possible random numbers (counter values) between 0 and 899 for the first winning random number counter C1, there are 810 random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be time-saving winnings, so the probability of a time-saving winning being determined when a lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the 17th control example is 9/10 (810/900). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 556(c), a random number (counter value) that is determined to be a time-saving winning is not associated with the first special symbol, so the possibility of a time-saving winning being determined in the lottery for the first special symbol is 0.

In this way, in this 17th control example, when a lottery for the second special symbol is executed, there is a high probability (probability of 9/10) of winning the time-saving symbol. By configuring it in this way, in the time-saving state B where the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed, it is possible to win the time-saving symbol almost every time the lottery is executed in a limited number of times, thereby increasing the number of time-saving times. Therefore, it is possible to realize an extremely unique and innovative gameplay in which the degree of advantage in the time-saving state A can be determined according to the lottery content in the time-saving state B which is set before the time-saving state A, and it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 557(a), the time-saving winning type selection table 202qi added to the ROM 202 in this 17th control example will be described in detail. This time-saving winning type selection table 202qi is a data table that is referenced to select the type of time-saving pattern when a time-saving pattern is won. As shown in FIG. 557(a), this time-saving winning type selection table 202qi specifies the type of time-saving pattern (time-saving winning type) in correspondence with the value of the first winning type counter C2. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 557(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0" and the "time-saving pattern A" with 50 time-saving times is associated with the time-saving winning type, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "1 to 19" and the "time-saving pattern B" with 10 time-saving times is associated with the time-saving winning type, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "20 to 99" and the "time-saving pattern C" with 5 time-saving times is associated with the time-saving winning type.

Among the random number values (counter values) of "0 to 99" that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the random number values (counter values) associated with "time-saving pattern A", "time-saving pattern B", and "time-saving pattern C" are 1, 19, and 80, respectively, so that when the time-saving pattern is won in the lottery for the second special pattern, the probability that "time-saving pattern A" is determined is 1%, the probability that "time-saving pattern B" is determined is 19%, and the probability that "time-saving pattern C" is determined is 80%. Therefore, in the time-saving state B (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B) in which the lottery for the second special pattern is executed, when the time-saving pattern is won, the number of time-saving times is increased by 50 times at a rate of 1% (time-saving pattern A is determined), the number of time-saving times is increased by 10 times at a rate of 19% (time-saving pattern B is determined), and the number of time-saving times is increased by 5 times at a rate of 80% (time-saving pattern C is determined). This allows for variation in the number of time-saving turns added during time-saving state B (when an additional rush is in progress), further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 557(b), the details of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj added to the ROM 202 in this 17th control example will be described. This fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj is a data table in which the type of fluctuation pattern table to be referenced (either normal table 202qd1, special 1 time-saving table 202qd2, or special 2 time-saving table 202qd3) is specified according to the previous jackpot type, the currently set game state, and the number of times a special symbol is drawn after the jackpot ends. When a special symbol is drawn, the type of fluctuation pattern table to be referenced for selecting a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is determined using this fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj, and the fluctuation pattern is selected by referring to the determined fluctuation pattern table.

Figure 557 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of this variation pattern scenario table 202qj. As shown in Figure 557 (b), this variation pattern scenario table 202qj specifies the type of variation pattern table to be referenced for each combination of the previous jackpot type, the currently set game state, and the number of times a special symbol is drawn after the jackpot ends (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa).

Specifically, in a situation where the previous jackpot type was "jackpot A17" and the current game state is normal, the normal table 202qd1 is associated with the range of 52 to 150 and the range of 212 to 300 for the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa). Therefore, when a special symbol is drawn within these ranges of the number of times, the normal table 202qd1 is referenced to select a variation pattern (variation time). On the other hand, no variation pattern table is associated with the other ranges. This is because the range of 1 to 51 times after the end of the jackpot A17 is always set to the second time-saving state (the value of the time-saving counter 203h is set to 51 at the end of the jackpot A17), and the range of 151 to 211 times after the end of the jackpot A17 is always set to the third time-saving state based on the ceiling number of times drawn, so there is no possibility of a special symbol being drawn in normal mode.

In addition, in this 17th control example, when the value of the special drawing counter 203qa reaches 300 (when the number of times the special pattern is drawn reaches 300 without winning), the value of the special drawing counter 203qa is updated to 150. In other words, even if the ceiling number of draws is reached one or more times after the ceiling number of draws is reached, the third time-saving state B can be set each time the ceiling number of draws is reached. Therefore, even if a so-called big hit occurs, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively disadvantaged. In addition, since it is no longer necessary to specify a scenario for the number of times the special pattern is drawn that exceeds 300 times in the variation pattern scenario table 202qj, the amount of data in the variation pattern scenario table 202qj can be reduced. Therefore, the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 557(b), in a situation where the previous jackpot type was "jackpot A17" and the current game state is the time-saving state, the special 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is defined in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) in the range of 1 to 51 and in the range of 163 to 300, and the special 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is defined in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) in the range of 151 to 162. Therefore, for the number of drawings within 51 or less times after the end of the jackpot A17, and for the number of drawings 163 or more times, the special 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is referenced as long as the time-saving state continues (time-saving counts remain), forming the time-saving state A in which the drawing of the first special symbol is mainly performed. In addition, after the end of the jackpot A17, the special 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is referenced for the 151st to 162nd lottery draws, creating a time-saving state B. This creates an extremely favorable state in which the lottery for the second special symbol is primarily executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 557(b), in a situation where the previous jackpot type was "jackpot B17" and the current game state is normal, the same variation pattern scenario is defined as when the previous jackpot type was "jackpot A17". In other words, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the ranges of 52 to 150 and 212 to 300 for the number of times the special symbol has been drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa). Therefore, when a special symbol is drawn within these ranges of the number of times it has been drawn, the normal table 202qd1 is referenced to select the variation pattern (variation time). In contrast, in a situation where the jackpot type is "jackpot B17" and the current game state is the time-saving state, the special 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is associated with the range of the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) of 7 to 150 and the range of 163 to 300, and the special 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is associated with the range of the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) of 1 to 6 and the range of 151 to 162. Therefore, in the number of times of drawing 7 to 150 times and the number of times of drawing 163 or more times after the end of the jackpot B17, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is referenced as long as the time-saving state continues (the number of time-saving times remains), forming the time-saving state A in which the drawing of the first special symbol is mainly executed. In addition, for the 1st to 6th and 151st to 162nd lottery draws after the end of the jackpot B17, the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is referenced, forming the time-saving state B. Therefore, an extremely advantageous state is formed in which the lottery for the second special symbol is mainly executed. Note that, unlike the "jackpot A17", the time-saving state may continue even if the lottery draws are in the range of 52 to 150, because there is a possibility that the number of time-saving draws may exceed the ceiling number of draws depending on the number of time-saving draws added in the second time-saving state B immediately after the end of the jackpot.

Also, as shown in FIG. 557(b), when the previous jackpot type was any of "jackpot C17" to "jackpot E17" and the current game state is normal, the same variation pattern scenario is defined as when the previous jackpot type was "jackpot A17" or "jackpot B17". In other words, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the ranges of 52 to 150 and 212 to 300 for the number of times the special symbol has been drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa). Therefore, when a special symbol is drawn within these ranges of the number of times it has been drawn, the normal table 202qd1 is referenced to select the variation pattern (variation time). In contrast, when the jackpot type is any of "jackpot C17" to "jackpot E17" and the current game state is the time-saving state, the special 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is defined in correspondence with the range of the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) of 12 to 150 and the range of 163 to 300, and the special 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is defined in correspondence with the range of the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) of 1 to 11 and the range of 151 to 162. Therefore, for the number of times of drawing 12 to 150 times and the number of times of drawing 163 or more times after the end of the jackpot C17 to the jackpot E17, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is referenced as long as the time-saving state continues (the number of time-saving times remains), forming the time-saving state A in which the drawing of the first special symbol is mainly executed. In addition, after the end of jackpot C17 to jackpot E17, the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is referenced for the 1st to 11th draws and the 151st to 162nd draws, forming the time-saving state B. Therefore, an extremely favorable state is formed in which the draws for the second special symbol are mainly executed. Note that, as with "jackpot B17," "jackpot C17" to "jackpot E17" also set the second time-saving state B immediately after the end of the jackpot, so depending on the number of time-saving times added in the second time-saving state B, there is a possibility that the number of time-saving times may exceed the ceiling number of draws.

Also, as shown in FIG. 557(b), in a situation where a jackpot has not been won (a jackpot has not been won even once since the pachinko machine 10 was initialized) and the current gaming state is normal, the normal table 202qd1 is specified in correspondence with the number of times a special symbol has been drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) ranging from 1 to 150 and from 212 to 300. Therefore, when a special symbol is drawn within these ranges of the number of times it has been drawn, the normal table 202qd1 is referenced and a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is selected. On the other hand, in a situation where the jackpot has not been won and the current game state is a time-saving state, the special 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is associated with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) in the range of 163 to 300, and the special 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is associated with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa) in the range of 151 to 162. Therefore, for the number of times of drawing 163 or more times after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is referenced as long as the time-saving state continues (the number of time-saving times remains), forming a time-saving state A in which the drawing of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Also, for the number of times of drawing 151 to 162 times after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is referenced, forming a time-saving state B. This creates an extremely favorable situation in which the lottery for the second special symbol is primarily executed.

In this way, in this 17th control example, the variation pattern scenario is defined by the variation pattern scenario table 202qj, and a variation pattern table is selected according to the previous jackpot type, the current game state, and the number of times the special symbol has been drawn, so a relatively complex game state transition method can be realized. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 553, the RAM 203 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 17th control example will be described in detail. FIG. 553 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this 17th control example. As shown in FIG. 553, the RAM 203 in this 17th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 12th control example (see FIG. 408) in that a special drawing lottery counter 203qa, a big win flag 203qb, a special drawing 1 small win flag 203qc, and a special drawing 2 small win flag 203qd have been added. It also differs in that the small win A counter 203fg and the small win B counter 203fh have been deleted.

The special symbol selection counter 203qa is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is selected after a jackpot has ended (or after the pachinko machine 10 has been initialized). This special symbol selection counter 203qa is updated by incrementing its value by one at the timing when the start of the variable display of the special symbol is set (see S38103 in FIG. 564). By referring to the value of this special symbol selection counter 203qa, it is possible to determine whether the ceiling number of selections has been reached, and a process of selecting a variation pattern table corresponding to the number of selections from the variation pattern scenario table 202qj is executed.

The jackpot flag 203qb is a flag that is set to ON when a jackpot is obtained by drawing a special symbol (see Y8011 in FIG. 561 and Y8111 in FIG. 568). This jackpot flag 203qb is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (see Y727 in FIG. 565 and Y925 in FIG. 571). This jackpot flag 203qb is provided with a jackpot flag for the first special symbol and a jackpot flag for the second special symbol, and when the jackpot flag for the first special symbol is ON and the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, when the variable display time of the first special symbol ends, a process is executed to forcibly stop the second special symbol with a miss symbol (see Y726 in FIG. 565). In addition, when the jackpot flag for the second special symbol is on and the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, if the variable display time of the second special symbol ends, a process is executed to forcibly stop the first special symbol with a miss symbol (see Y924 in FIG. 571). This prevents a malfunction in which a jackpot and a jackpot or a jackpot and a small jackpot start at the same time when one of the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol is a jackpot and the other is a jackpot or a small jackpot.

The special chart 1 small win flag 203qc is a flag that is set to ON when the drawing of the first special pattern results in a small win (see Y8055 in FIG. 562). This special chart 1 small win flag 203qc is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the small win of the first special pattern (see Y759 in FIG. 566). When the special chart 1 small win flag 203qd is ON and the variable display of the second special pattern is being executed, if the variable display time of the first special pattern ends, a process is executed to forcibly stop the second special pattern with a miss pattern (see Y753 in FIG. 566). This makes it possible to prevent a malfunction in which a small win and a big win, or a small win and a small win, start in an overlapping manner when one of the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern results in a small win and the other results in a big win or small win.

The special pattern 2 small win flag 203qd is a flag that is set to ON when the drawing of the second special pattern results in a small win (see Y8055 in FIG. 562). This special pattern 2 small win flag 203qd is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop pattern corresponding to the small win of the second special pattern (see Y759 in FIG. 566). When the special pattern 1 small win flag 203qd is ON and the variable display of the second special pattern is being executed, if the variable display time of the first special pattern ends, a process is executed to forcibly stop the second special pattern with a miss pattern (see Y959 in FIG. 573). This makes it possible to prevent a malfunction in which a small win and a big win, or a small win and a small win, start in an overlapping manner when one of the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern results in a small win and the other results in a big win or small win.

Next, referring to FIG. 558, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 17th control example will be described. FIG. 558 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this 17th control example. As shown in FIG. 558, the RAM 223 in this 17th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 12th control example (and the 5th control example) (see FIG. 249 (b)) in that a special drawing number counter 223lc, an additional RUSH counter 223qa, a base number counter 223qb, and an additional number counter 223qc have been added. It also differs in that the time-saving drawing number counter 223db, the mode type storage area 223dc, the long time-saving flag 223dd, and the initial setting flag 223de have been deleted.

The special symbol selection counter 223lc is a counter that has the same function as the special symbol selection counter 223lc in the thirteenth control example described above. That is, it is a counter that is updated in synchronization with the value of the special symbol selection counter 203qa provided in the RAM 223 in the main control device 110, and the value is updated every time the value of the special symbol selection counter 203qa is notified by the main control device 110 via a status command. This special symbol selection counter 223lc can always match the number of times the special symbol is selected after the end of the jackpot as determined by the main control device 110 and the number of times the special symbol is selected after the end of the jackpot as determined by the sound lamp control device 113.

The counter 223qa during the add-on RUSH is a counter that indicates the number of remaining times until the end of the add-on RUSH (time-saving state B). The initial value of the counter 223qa during the add-on RUSH is set to 0, and when time-saving state B (either the second time-saving state or the third time-saving state) is set, a counter value according to the setting trigger (a value according to the number of times the special pattern is drawn before transitioning to time-saving state A) is set. That is, in the case of transition to time-saving state B based on reaching the ceiling number of draws (150 times), or transition to time-saving state B based on winning the jackpot C17 to E17, the number of draws for time-saving state B is set to 11, so 11 is set for the counter 223qa during the add-on RUSH (see S9314A in FIG. 574). Furthermore, in the case of a transition to time-saving state B based on winning the jackpot B17, the number of draws in time-saving state B is set to 6, so the counter 223qa during the add-on RUSH is set to 6 (see S9317A in FIG. 574). Also, each time a draw for a special symbol is performed in the add-on RUSH, the value is updated by subtracting 1. The display of the number of remaining draws until the end of the add-on RUSH is set according to the value of the counter 223qa during the add-on RUSH.

The base number of times counter 223qb is a counter that indicates the number of time-saving times (base number of time-saving times) that have already been determined (guaranteed) at the time of entering the time-saving state B (add-on RUSH) among the number of time-saving times of the time-saving state A to which the state transitions after the time-saving state B (add-on RUSH) ends. The initial value of this base number of times counter 223qb is set to 0, and when the state transitions to the time-saving state B, a value is set that is the number of time-saving times set with the transition minus the number of times that the special pattern was drawn during the time-saving state B. More specifically, when the time-saving state B is set based on winning any of the jackpots C17 to E17, 75 is set for this base number of times counter 223qb (see S9316A in FIG. 574). In addition, when the time-saving state B is set based on winning the jackpot B17, or when the time-saving state B is set based on reaching the ceiling number of draws, the base number counter 223qb is set to 50 (see S9318A in FIG. 574). The value set in the base number counter 223qb continues to be displayed on the left side of the small display area Dm13 during the time-saving state B (add-on RUSH).

The add-on count counter 223qc is a counter for counting the number of time-saving times added in time-saving state B (add-on RUSH). The initial value of this add-on count counter 223qc is set to 0, and each time a time-saving pattern is won in the lottery for the second special pattern in time-saving state B (add-on RUSH) and the number of time-saving times is added (the number of time-saving times corresponding to the won time-saving pattern is added to the time-saving counter 203h), the counter value corresponding to the number of time-saving times added is added and updated (see S9629A in FIG. 575). The value set in this add-on count counter 223qc continues to be displayed on the right side of the small display area Dm13 during time-saving state B (add-on RUSH).

<Regarding control process of main control device in 17th control example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the 17th control example will be described with reference to Figs. 559 to 573. Specifically, the 17th control example differs in that the special symbol variable process 17 (see Fig. 559) is executed instead of the special symbol variable process 12 (see Fig. 417) in the 12th control example. Other configurations are the same as those in the 12th control example, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted. The change from the special symbol variable process 12 (see Fig. 417) to the special symbol variable process 17 (see Fig. 559) is mainly due to a change to a specification in which, when one special symbol is displayed as a big win or small win while the other special symbol is displayed as a big win or small win during the display of the other special symbol, the one special symbol being displayed as a big win or small win is forcibly displayed as a miss symbol.

First, referring to FIG. 559, the special symbol variation process 17 (Y111) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in this 17th control example will be described. FIG. 559 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 17 (Y111). In this special symbol variation process 17 (Y111), the processes Y231, Y234, and Y238 are the same as the processes Y231, Y234, and Y238 of the special symbol variation process 12 in the 12th control example (see FIG. 417).

In addition, in the special symbol fluctuation process 17 (Y111) of this control example, if it is determined in the process of Y234 that the special symbol 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is not greater than 0 (i.e., it is 0) (Y234: No), the first special symbol fluctuation start process 17 is executed (Y251) instead of the first special symbol fluctuation start process 12 (see FIG. 418) in the 12th control example, and the process moves to Y238. Details of this first special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (Y251) will be described later with reference to FIG. 560.

On the other hand, in the process of Y234, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 change time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (Y234: Yes), the special pattern 1 change time timer 203ka is updated by subtracting (Y252), the display of the first special pattern on the first pattern display device is updated (Y253), and then the first special pattern change stop process 17 is executed (Y254) instead of the first special pattern change stop process 12 (see FIG. 424) in the twelfth control example described above, and the process proceeds to Y238. Details of this first special pattern change stop process 17 (Y254) will be described later with reference to FIG. 564.

In addition, in the special symbol fluctuation process 17 (see FIG. 559) in this 17th control example, if it is determined in the process of Y238 that the special symbol 2 fluctuation time timer 203kb is not greater than 0 (i.e., it is 0) (Y238: No), the second special symbol fluctuation start process 17 is executed (Y255) instead of the second special symbol fluctuation start process 12 (see FIG. 427) in the above-mentioned 12th control example, and this process is terminated. Details of this second special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (Y255) will be described later with reference to FIG. 567.

On the other hand, in the process of Y238, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (Y238: Yes), the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is updated by subtracting it (Y256), the display of the second special pattern on the first pattern display device is updated (Y257), and the second special pattern change stop process 17 is executed (Y258) instead of the second special pattern change stop process 12 (see FIG. 433) in the twelfth control example described above, and this process is terminated. Details of the second special pattern change stop process 17 (Y258) will be described later with reference to FIG. 571.

Next, referring to FIG. 560, the first special symbol change start process 17 (Y251), which is one process of the special symbol change process 17 (FIG. 559) in this 17th control example, will be described. FIG. 560 is a flowchart showing the contents of this first special symbol change start process 17 (Y251).

In this first special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (Y251), the processes Y302 to Y306 and Y309 are the same as the processes Y302 to Y306 and Y309 in the first special symbol fluctuation start process 12 (see FIG. 418) in the 12th control example. In addition, in the first special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (Y251) in this 17th control example, the process Y301 in the first special symbol fluctuation start process 12 (see FIG. 418) in the 12th control example has been deleted. In addition, in the first special symbol variation start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in this 17th control example, after executing the process of Y306, the first special symbol determination process 17 is executed (Y321) instead of the first special symbol determination process 12 (see FIG. 419) in the 12th control example, and the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 is executed (Y322) instead of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (see FIG. 420) in the 12th control example, and the process moves to Y309. Furthermore, in the first special symbol variation start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in this 17th control example, when the process of Y309 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the ceiling lottery count has been reached, and if the ceiling lottery count has been reached, the ceiling determination process 17 for setting the third time-saving state is executed (Y323), and this process is terminated. Details of the first special symbol determination process 17 (Y321), the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y322), and the ceiling determination process 17 (Y323) will be described later with reference to Figures 561, 563, and 564.

Next, referring to FIG. 561, we will explain the first special symbol determination process 17 (Y321), which is one process of the first special symbol change start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in this 17th control example. FIG. 561 is a flowchart showing the contents of this first special symbol determination process 17 (Y321).

In this first special symbol determination process 17 (Y321), in each of the processes Y8001 to Y8006, the same process as each of the processes Y8001 to Y8006 in the first special symbol determination process 12 (see FIG. 419) in the 12th control example is executed. In addition, in the first special symbol determination process 17 (Y321) of this control example, if it is determined in Y8003 that the lottery result is a jackpot (Y8003: Yes), the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON (Y8011), and the process proceeds to Y8004. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (Y8003: No), the small jackpot lottery process 17 is executed (Y8012), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 562, we will explain the small prize lottery process 17 (Y8012), which is one process of the first special symbol determination process 17 (FIG. 561) in this 17th control example. FIG. 562 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small prize lottery process 17 (Y8012).

In this small prize lottery process 17 (Y8012), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result for this special pattern is a time-saving win (Y8051). In the process of Y8051, if it is determined that the lottery result is a time-saving win (Y8051: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving win is not a win (Y8051: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the small prize random number 17 table 202qe (Y8052), and it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small prize win (Y8053). If it is determined that the lottery result is not a small prize win (Y8053: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is a small prize win (Y8053: Yes), a small prize type is selected from the small prize type selection 17 table 202qf based on the acquired value of the small prize type counter C5, the small prize pattern of the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device is set (Y8054), the small prize flag corresponding to the special pattern that has won the small prize this time is set to ON (Y8055), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a small prize win in the process of Y5053 (Y8053: No), the processes of Y8054 and Y8055 are skipped and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 563, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (Y322), which is one process of the first special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in this 17th control example, will be described. FIG. 563 is a flowchart showing the contents of this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (Y322).

In this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (Y322), in each of the processes Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508, the same processes as the respective processes Y501 to Y503 and Y505 to Y508 of the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 12 (see FIG. 420) in the 12th control example are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (Y322) of this control example, after executing the process Y503, the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202qj is referenced to identify the fluctuation pattern selection table corresponding to the current value of the special symbol lottery counter 203qa (Y511), the identified fluctuation pattern selection table is read (Y512), and the process proceeds to Y505.

Next, referring to FIG. 564, we will explain the ceiling determination process 17 (Y323), which is one process of the first special pattern variation start process 17 (see FIG. 560) in this 17th control example. FIG. 564 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ceiling determination process 17 (Y323).

In this ceiling determination process 17 (Y323), first, 1 is added to the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203qa (S38103), and it is determined whether the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203qa is 300 or not (S38121A). If it is determined that the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203qa is 300 (S38121A: Yes), the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203qa is updated to 150 (S38122A), a status command including information indicating the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203qa is set (S38105), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S38121A, if it is determined that the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203qa is not 300 (S38121A: No), it is then determined whether the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203qa is 151 (S38123A), and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203qa is not 151 (S38123A: No), the processing proceeds to S38105.

In contrast, if the processing of S38123A determines that the value of the special drawing counter 203qa is 151 (S38123A: Yes), this means that the ceiling number of draws has been reached, so the third time-saving state is set by adding 61 to the time-saving counter 203h (S38124A), and information indicating the third time-saving state is set in the game status storage area 203g (S38112A). Next, information regarding this time-saving drawing is cleared (S38113A), and a status command including information indicating the third time-saving state and information indicating the number of time-saving draws is set (S38114A), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 565, the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (Y254), which is one process of the special symbol fluctuation process 17 (FIG. 559) in this 17th control example, will be described. FIG. 565 is a flowchart showing the contents of this first special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (Y254).

In this first special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (Y254), in each of the processes Y701 and Y704 to Y707, the same process as each of the processes Y701 and Y704 to Y707 in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 12 (see FIG. 424) in the 12th control example is executed. Also, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (Y254) in this control example, if it is determined in the process Y701 that the fluctuation time has not ended (Y701: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of Y701, if it is determined that the variable time has ended (Y701: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203qb of the first special symbol is on or not (Y721), and if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203qb of the first special symbol is not on (Y721: No), this means that the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is not a jackpot, so the special symbol 1 miss stop process is executed (Y722) and this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol 1 miss stop process (Y722) will be described later with reference to FIG. 566.

On the other hand, in the process of Y721, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203qb of the first special pattern is on (Y721: Yes), it is determined whether the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (Y723), and if it is determined that the special pattern 2 change time timer 203kb is greater than 0 (i.e., the second special pattern is being displayed) (Y723: Yes), the special pattern 2 change stop flag 203kf is set to on (Y724), a special pattern 2 change stop command indicating the stop of the change of the special pattern 2 is set (Y725), the second special pattern of the first pattern display device is displayed as a stopped pattern (Y726), and the process proceeds to Y727.

On the other hand, in the process of Y723, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 variation time timer 203kb is 0 (i.e., the second special symbol is not being displayed), (Y723: No), the processes of Y724 to Y726 are skipped and the process proceeds to Y727. Next, the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the first special symbol is set to off (Y727), and the process proceeds to Y704.

Next, referring to FIG. 566, we will explain the special pattern 1 miss stop process (Y722), which is one process of the first special pattern variation stop process 17 (FIG. 565) in this 17th control example. FIG. 566 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special pattern 1 miss stop process (Y722).

In this special chart 1 miss stop processing (Y722), first, it is determined whether the special chart 1 small win flag 203qc is on or not (Y751), and if it is determined that the special chart 1 small win flag 203qc is on (Y751: Yes), a special chart 2 change stop command is set (Y752), the second special pattern of the first pattern display device is stopped and displayed as a miss pattern (Y753), and a small win scenario is set (Y754). Next, the small win start flag 203fb is set to on (Y755), the small win in progress flag 203fc is set to on (Y756), and the special chart 1 determination command is set (Y757). Next, the first special pattern of the first pattern display device is stopped and displayed as a small win pattern (Y758), the special chart 1 small win flag 203qc is set to off (Y759), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of Y751, if it is determined that the special chart 1 small win flag 203qc is not on (i.e., it is off) (Y751: No), the special chart 1 confirmation command is set (Y760), the first special pattern of the first pattern display device is stopped from changing to the missing pattern (Y761), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 567, we will explain the second special symbol change start process 17 (Y255), which is one process of the special symbol change process 17 (FIG. 559) in this 17th control example. FIG. 567 is a flowchart showing the contents of this second special symbol change start process 17 (Y255).

In this second special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (Y255), in each process of Y832 to Y836 and Y839 (Y309), the same process as each process of Y832 to Y836 and Y839 (Y309) in the second special symbol fluctuation start process 12 (see FIG. 427) in the 12th control example is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (Y255) of this control example, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is on or not (Y851), and if it is determined that the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is on (Y851: Yes), the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is set to off (Y852), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203kf is not on (i.e., it is off) (Y851: No), the process is shifted to Y832.

After executing the process of Y836, the second special symbol determination process 17 is executed (Y853), the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 is executed (Y854), and then Y839 (Y309) is executed, the ceiling determination process 17 is executed (Y855 (Y323)), and this process is terminated. Details of the second special symbol determination process 17 (Y853) and the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y854) will be described later with reference to Figures 568 and 570. Also, the ceiling determination process 17 (Y855 (Y323)) is the same as that of Figure 564 described above, so its description will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 568, we will explain the second special symbol determination process 17 (Y853), which is one process of the second special symbol change start process 17 (FIG. 567) in this 17th control example. FIG. 568 is a flowchart showing the contents of this second special symbol determination process 17 (Y853).

In this second special symbol determination process 17 (Y853), in each of the processes Y8101 to Y8106, the same process as each of the processes Y8101 to Y8106 in the second special symbol determination process 12 (see FIG. 428) in the 12th control example is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol determination process 17 (Y853) of this control example, if the lottery result is determined to be a jackpot in the process of Y8103 (Y8103: Yes), the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the second special symbol is set to on (Y8111), and the process proceeds to Y8104. On the other hand, in the process of Y8103, if the lottery result is determined to be not a jackpot (Y8103: No), the special symbol 2 time-saving lottery process 17 is executed (Y8112), the small jackpot lottery process 17 is executed (Y8113 (Y8012)), and this process is terminated. Details of the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 17 (Y8112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 569. Also, the small win lottery process 17 (Y8113 (Y8012)) is the same as that in FIG. 562 described above, so a detailed description of it will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 569, we will explain the special pattern 2 time-saving lottery process 17 (Y8112), which is one process of the second special pattern determination process 17 (FIG. 568) in this 17th control example. FIG. 569 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special pattern 2 time-saving lottery process 17 (Y8112).

In this special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 17 (Y8112), the processes of Y8202 and Y8206 are the same as the processes of Y8202 and Y8206 in the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 12 (see FIG. 429) in the 12th control example. In the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 17 (Y8112) in this control example, the lottery result is first obtained based on the time-saving random number 17 table 202qh (Y8211), and the process moves to Y8202. In the special chart 2 time-saving lottery process 17 in this 17th control example (see FIG. 569), if the lottery result is determined to be a time-saving win in the process of Y8202 (Y8202: Yes), the time-saving pattern is set as the special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device (Y8212), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 570, we will explain the second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (Y854), which is one process of the second special symbol fluctuation start process 17 (FIG. 567) in this 17th control example. FIG. 570 is a flowchart showing the contents of this second special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 17 (Y854).

In this second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y854), in each of the processes Y921 to Y928, the same process as each of the processes Y921 to Y928 in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 12 (see FIG. 431) in the 12th control example is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (Y854) in this control example, after executing the process Y923, the variation pattern scenario table 202qj (see FIG. 557(b)) is referenced to identify a variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current value of the special symbol selection counter 203qa, the current game state, and the previous jackpot type (Y931), the identified variation pattern selection table is read (Y932), and the process proceeds to Y924.

Next, referring to FIG. 571, we will explain the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (Y528), which is one process of the special symbol fluctuation process 17 (FIG. 559) in this 17th control example. FIG. 571 is a flowchart showing the contents of this second special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (Y528).

In the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (Y528), in each of the processes Y901, Y906 to Y909, and Y914, the same process as each of the processes Y901, Y906 to Y909, and Y914 of the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 12 (see FIG. 433) in the 12th control example is executed. In addition, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 17 (Y528) in this 17th control example, if it is determined in the process of Y901 that it is the end timing of the fluctuation time (Y901: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the second special symbol is on (Y921), and if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the second special symbol is on (Y921: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the special symbol 1 fluctuation time timer 203ka is a value greater than 0 (Y922). If it is determined that the special pattern 1 variation time timer 203ka is greater than 0 (Y922: Yes), this means that the timing for the stop display of the jackpot pattern of the second special pattern has come during the display of the variation of the first special pattern, so in order to stop the display of the variation of the first special pattern being executed, a special pattern 1 variation stop command indicating the stop of the variation of the special pattern 1 is set (Y923), the first special pattern of the first pattern display device is stopped and displayed as a miss pattern (Y924), and then the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the second special pattern is set to off (Y925), and the process moves to Y906. On the other hand, in the process of Y922, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 variation time timer 203ka is not greater than 0 (i.e., 0) (Y922: No), the processes of Y923 and Y924 are skipped and the process moves to Y925.

On the other hand, in the process of Y921, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203qb corresponding to the second special symbol is not on (i.e., it is off) (Y921: No), the process of Y914 is executed, and in the process of Y914, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is a time-saving symbol winning (Y914: Yes), the time-saving setting process 17 is executed (Y926) instead of the time-saving setting process 12 (see FIG. 426) in the 12th control example, and the process proceeds to Y908. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a time-saving symbol winning (Y914: No), the special symbol 2 miss stop process is executed (Y927), and this process is terminated. Details of the time-saving setting process 17 (Y926) and the special symbol 2 miss stop process (Y927) will be described later with reference to FIG. 572 and FIG. 573.

Next, referring to FIG. 572, we will explain the time-saving setting process 17 (Y926), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stop process 17 (FIG. 571) in this 17th control example. FIG. 572 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time-saving setting process 17 (Y926).

This time-saving setting process 17 (Y926), like the time-saving setting process 12 (see FIG. 426) in the 12th control example described above, is a process for setting the time-saving state corresponding to the time-saving pattern when the time-saving pattern is won in the special pattern lottery. In the time-saving setting process 17 (see FIG. 572) in the 17th control example, the same processes as the Y8354 and Y8455 processes of the time-saving setting process 12 (see FIG. 426) in the 12th control example are executed. In the time-saving setting process 17 (see FIG. 572) in the 17th control example, first, a value corresponding to the time-saving pattern that has been won this time is added to the time-saving counter 203h (Y8361), and the process moves to Y8354.

In this way, in this 17th control example, each time a time-saving pattern is won, the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving pattern can be added to the time-saving counter 203h, so that an innovative gameplay can be realized in which the number of time-saving times is added almost every time a lottery for the second special pattern is executed in the time-saving state B, where a lottery for the second special pattern, which has a 90% chance of winning the time-saving pattern, is executed. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 573, the special symbol 2 miss stop process (Y927), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stop process 17 (FIG. 571) in this 17th control example, will be described. This special symbol 2 miss stop process (Y927) is a process for setting the stop display of a miss (including a small win) pattern of the second special symbol. FIG. 573 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special symbol 2 miss stop process (Y927).

In this special chart 2 miss stop processing (Y927), first, it is determined whether the special chart 2 small win flag 203qd is on or not (Y951). If it is determined that the special chart 2 small win flag 203qd is on (Y951: Yes), a special chart 1 change stop command is set (Y952), the first special pattern of the first pattern display device is stopped and displayed as a miss pattern (Y953), and a small win scenario is set (Y954). Next, the small win start flag 203fb is set to on (Y955), the small win in progress flag 203fc is set to on (Y956), and a special chart 2 confirmation command is set (Y957). Then, the second special pattern of the first pattern display device is stopped and displayed as a small win pattern (Y958), the special chart 2 small win flag 203qd is set to off (Y959), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of Y951, if it is determined that the special chart 2 small win flag 203qd is not on (i.e., it is off) (Y951: No), the special chart 2 confirmation command is set (Y960), the second special pattern of the first pattern display device is stopped from changing to a missing pattern (Y961), and this process is terminated.

By executing this special symbol 2 miss stop process (see Fig. 573), when a small win is won in the drawing of the second special symbol and the small win symbol based on the small win is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol can be stopped and displayed as a miss symbol. This makes it possible to prevent a big win and a small win, or a small win and a small win, from being executed at the same time when the drawing result of the first special symbol is a big win or a small win.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the 17th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 574 to FIG. 575, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 17th control example will be described. In this 17th control example, the difference from the above-mentioned 12th control example (and the 5th control example) is that the contents of the time-saving state performance setting process 5 (S9011A), which is one process of the state command receiving process 5 (see FIG. 263), have been changed, and the contents of the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 (see FIG. 269) have been changed, and the rest are the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations are omitted. Note that, for the parts where the detailed explanations of the same elements as those described in the above-mentioned control examples and the contents described in each control example are omitted, the above-mentioned control examples and the contents described in each control example are applied. In addition, the technical ideas described in the above-mentioned control examples and each control example are naturally applied to this 17th control example, and the modified examples and additional examples described in the above-mentioned control examples and each control example are naturally applied to this 17th control example.

First, referring to FIG. 574, the time-saving state presentation setting process 17 (S9011A) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 17th control example will be described. FIG. 574 is a flowchart showing the contents of this time-saving state presentation setting process 17 (S9011A). In this time-saving state presentation setting process 17 (S9011A), first, the number of time-saving times included in the received command is set to the value of the time-saving counter 223da (S9311A), then it is determined whether or not the time-saving state has been changed to B (S9312A), and if it is determined that the time-saving state has not been changed to B (S9312A: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S9312A, if it is determined that the time-saving state has been changed to B (S9312A: Yes), it is determined whether or not the time-saving state is triggered by the jackpot B17 (S9313A). If it is determined that the time-saving state is not triggered by the jackpot B17 (S9313A: No), the additional RUSH counter 223qa is set to 11 (S9314A) and it is determined whether or not the time-saving state is triggered by reaching the ceiling (S9315A). If it is determined that the time-saving state is not triggered by reaching the ceiling (S9315A: No), the base number counter 223qb is set to 75 (S9316A) and the process proceeds to S9319A.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S9313A that the time-saving state is triggered by the jackpot B17 (S9313A: Yes), the add-on RUSH counter 223qa is set to 6 (S9317A), the base number counter 223qb is set to 50 (S9318A), and processing proceeds to S9319A. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S9315A that the time-saving state is triggered by reaching the ceiling (S9315A: Yes), processing proceeds to S9318A. Next, the display of the remaining number of add-on RUSHes and the initial stock number is set according to each counter value (S9319A), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 575, the special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 17 (S4991A) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in this 17th control example will be described. FIG. 575 is a flowchart showing the contents of this special chart 2 presentation mode setting process 17 (S4991A).

In the process of S9611 of this special chart 2 performance mode setting process 17 (S4991A), the same process as the process of S9611 of the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 5 (see FIG. 269) in the 12th control example is executed. In addition, in the special chart 2 performance mode setting process 17 (S4991A) of this control example, first, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state is in effect (S9621A), and if it is determined that the time-saving state is not in effect (S9621A: No), the performance mode corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern is determined (S6922A), the process of S9611 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is reduced (S9621A: Yes), it is determined whether it is in the time-reduction state A or not (S9623A), and if it is determined that the time is reduced (S9623A: Yes), it is determined whether it is the first special chart 2 change after the end of the add-on rush (S9624A), and if it is determined that it is the first special chart 2 change after the end of the add-on rush (S9624A: Yes), a chance time entry display (see FIG. 549 (b)) is set which continues until the end of the remaining change time of special chart 1 (S9625A), and the display of the value obtained by adding the value of the base number counter 223qb and the value of the add-on number counter 223qc is set as the TOTAL number of times (S9626A), and processing transitions to S9622A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9624A that this is not the first change in special chart 2 since the end of the added RUSH (S9624A: No), the processing of S9625A and S9626A is skipped and the processing proceeds to S9622A.

On the other hand, in the processing of S9623A, if it is determined that the time-saving state A is not reached (S9623A: No), it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery for this special pattern is a time-saving pattern winning (S9627A), and if it is determined that the time-saving pattern winning (S9627A: Yes), a variable display mode (see FIG. 549(a)) that notifies the number of times that the time-saving pattern has been won is determined (S9628A), the number of times that the time-saving pattern corresponding to the winning time-saving pattern has been added to the time-saving counter 223da and the number of times that the time-saving pattern has been won counter 223qc (S9629A), and the processing transitions to S9611. On the other hand, if the processing of S9627A determines that the win is not a time-saving win (i.e., a big win or a minor win that essentially guarantees a big win) (S9627A: No), the variable display mode (see FIG. 550) that notifies the reset of the top-up RUSH is determined (S9630A), the value of the top-up count counter 223qc is cleared to 0 (S9631A), and processing transitions to S9611.

By executing this special symbol 2 presentation mode setting process 17 (see FIG. 575), the lottery for the second special symbol is executed in the time-saving state B, and each time the time-saving symbol is won, the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol is added can be announced. This makes it possible to realize an extremely innovative presentation mode in which the time-saving symbol is added almost every time it changes, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in this 17th control example is configured to provide two time-saving states: a time-saving state (second time-saving state A, third time-saving state A) in which a lottery for a first special symbol with a low degree of advantage is likely to be executed, and a time-saving state (second time-saving state B, third time-saving state B) in which a lottery for a second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is likely to be executed. When the ceiling number of lottery draws is reached, the third time-saving state B is set first, while when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the time-saving state after the jackpot ends is set to the second time-saving state A with a low degree of advantage with a high probability. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play with a stronger expectation of reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws than of winning a jackpot.

In addition, in this 17th control example, when a time-saving symbol is drawn during the time-saving state, the number of time-saving times corresponding to the drawn time-saving symbol is added. In addition, in the drawing of the second special symbol, the time-saving symbol is drawn with a higher probability (for example, 90%) than the drawing of the first special symbol. In addition, when the second time-saving state B or the third time-saving state B is entered, the second time-saving state A or the third time-saving state A is entered by drawing a specific number of special symbols (for example, 10 times). In other words, during the second time-saving state B or the third time-saving state B, the time-saving symbol is drawn with a high probability each time the drawing of the second special symbol is executed, and the number of time-saving times is added, so that the number of times of continuation of the second time-saving state A or the third time-saving state A, which is entered after the drawing of the special symbol has passed a specific number of times, can be changed according to the result of the drawing of the special symbol executed during the time-saving state B, realizing an innovative gameplay.

In the seventeenth control example, only the "small win A17" in which a V win cannot occur is provided as a small win of the first special pattern, but it may be configured so that some of the small wins of the first special pattern can also result in a V win. If there is a lottery result of a small win of the first special pattern in which a V win can occur when the number of lotteries is close to the ceiling (for example, within 5 lotteries remaining until the ceiling lottery number is reached), a configuration may be made in which a performance is executed to encourage the player not to win a V win in the small win. In other words, in particular, when a small win of the type that wins the "big win A17" in which the second time-saving state A is set by generating a V win, it is more likely to be advantageous to reach the ceiling lottery number and transition to the third time-saving state B than to generate a V win and transition to the second time-saving state A, so in such a case, a novel performance may be executed to encourage the player to avoid a V win. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the seventeenth control example, in the time-saving state B (add-on RUSH), each time a time-saving pattern is won in the lottery for the second special pattern, an effect is executed to add the number of time-saving times corresponding to the winning time-saving pattern, but this is not limited to this. For example, in the time-saving state B, the number of times the time-saving times have been added may be kept secret without being notified until halfway (for example, until the lottery for the ninth second special pattern is executed), and the number of times the time-saving times have been added may be notified at once at a predetermined notification timing (for example, a variable display effect related to the variable display of the last second special pattern in the time-saving state B). By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize a game that allows the player to predict how many times the time-saving times have been added until the predetermined notification timing, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved. Also, in this case, each time a lottery for a special pattern is executed, an effect suggesting the number of time-saving times added may be executed, or a configuration may be used in which no information regarding the number of time-saving times is suggested at all. In the former case, it is easier to predict how the number of time-saving times will be increased, and in the latter case, players can focus on whether the second special symbol will result in a jackpot or not until the notification timing is reached.

In the 17th control example, the lottery for the second special symbol has a 1/10 probability of winning a big win or small win, and a 9/10 probability of winning the time-saving symbol, but this is not limited to this. It may also be configured to win the time-saving symbol with a predetermined probability (for example, a 1/2 probability). In other words, in the 17th control example, there was no lottery result that was simply a loss, but it may be configured to include a loss. With this configuration, the player can be pleased just by winning the time-saving symbol in time-saving state B, and the player's interest in playing in time-saving state B can be increased.

In the thirteenth to seventeenth control examples described above, a transition to the third time-saving state occurs when the ceiling number of draws is reached, but the game state set when the ceiling number of draws is reached is not limited to the third time-saving state, and can be set to any game state. Specifically, for example, a transition to the second time-saving state, which is more advantageous than the third time-saving state, or a transition to the more advantageous second probability variable state may occur. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage when the ceiling number of draws is reached can be varied, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design.

In the above-mentioned thirteenth to seventeenth control examples, when a fixed ceiling lottery number is reached, a transition to an advantageous game state (third time-saving state) is made, but the ceiling lottery number does not have to be fixed. For example, a configuration may be made in which a plurality of numbers (e.g., 50 times, 300 times, 500 times, 1000 times, etc.) that can be set as the ceiling lottery number are provided, and the ceiling lottery number is determined by lottery when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on) or when the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to add a playability that allows the player to play in the hope that a small number of lotteries will be selected as the ceiling lottery number, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. In this case, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized (for example, during the first variable display performance after initialization) or when the jackpot ends (for example, during the ending performance or the first variable display performance after the end), a performance suggesting the ceiling lottery number may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further add a game feature of predicting the ceiling lottery number from the performance suggesting the ceiling lottery number, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. In addition, for example, the ceiling lottery number after the end of the jackpot may be different for each type of jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play the game by paying more attention to the type of jackpot, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further improved. In this case, it is also possible to provide a jackpot type in which the number of rounds and the game state after the end of the jackpot are the same, but the ceiling lottery number after the end of the jackpot is different. Specifically, for example, a type with a ceiling lottery number of 100 times and a type with a ceiling lottery number of 1000 times may be provided as a 4-round time-saving jackpot, and a type with a ceiling lottery number of 400 times and a type with a ceiling lottery number of 600 times may be provided as an 8-round time-saving jackpot. By configuring in this way, in the case of a 4-round time-saving jackpot, the ceiling lottery number may be small, so that the interest of the player can be improved. In addition, if an 8-round time-saving jackpot occurs, there is no possibility that the ceiling number of draws, which is an extremely large number of 1,000, will be set, allowing players to play with peace of mind.

In the above-mentioned thirteenth to seventeenth control examples, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the RAM 203 is also initialized, and the value of the special drawing counter 203la is reset, but this is not limited to the above. For example, even when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the value of the special drawing counter 203la may not be reset. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a player from avoiding playing with a pachinko machine 10 that is likely to have been initialized (for example, when the hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed closes during a jackpot or second probability change state), and therefore it is possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 regardless of the possibility of initialization.

<18th control example>
Next, the contents of the 18th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 576 to Fig. 606. This 18th control example is different from the above-mentioned 7th control example in that it has a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, if the special symbol is already being displayed in a variable manner, a predetermined number of winning information of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) can be stored (reserved memory) (up to an upper limit of 4 in this 18th control example).

In addition, in this 18th control example, during the execution of a big win game, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol 2 reserved ball stored (reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is determined in advance (pre-read) and a reserve that is a small win (V reserve) is found, a display for notifying the player that a V reserve exists is configured to be executable, which is different from the above.

Specifically, when a big win game is started, if a V reserve is found to exist as a result of pre-reading the lottery results for the special symbol 2 reserve stored (reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b, an effect is executed in which a "V icon" is acquired (V icon acquisition effect), which is a notification mode indicating the existence of a V reserve. The acquired V icon is displayed in a reduced size in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 until the start of the display of the special symbol changes based on the V reserve, and is enlarged while the display of the special symbol changes based on the V reserve (hereinafter referred to as the activation of the V icon), thereby notifying the player that this change will result in a small win.

By configuring it in this way, the player is notified in advance that they will win a small prize in the special pattern lottery that is held after the big win game ends, so the player's anxiety that the set number of fluctuations will be reached and the time-saving mode will end without winning a small prize after the big win game ends can be reduced.

Here, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol 2 reserved stored (reserved reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b during the execution of the jackpot game is read in advance, and if a V reserved is present, then the V icon acquisition effect is always executed. If the V icon acquisition effect is not executed, it becomes clear that there are no V reserved symbols among the special symbol 2 reserved symbols stored (reserved reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (i.e., they are all misses), which may disappoint the player.

For this reason, in this 18th control example, during the execution of a jackpot game, the result of the lottery for the special symbol 2 reserved ball stored (reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is read in advance, and in some cases where a V reserved ball exists, a V icon acquisition effect is executed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the V icon acquisition effect is not executed during the execution of the big win game, the player can have hope that he or she may win a small win until the display of the changing special pattern based on the reserved special pattern 2 stored (reserved memory) in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b ends.

In addition, in this 18th control example, when the display of a special pattern based on a V reservation begins, it is possible to determine whether or not to activate a V icon in the display of the special pattern.

Specifically, when starting to display the changing special pattern based on a V reserve (a reserve that will win a small jackpot), it is determined whether there is another V reserve among the special pattern 2 reserves stored (reserved memory) in the second special pattern reserve ball storage area 203b, and if a V reserve is present, it is configured to continue displaying a reduced version of the V icon until the display starts to change the special pattern based on the V reserve that will be consumed later, without activating the V icon (enlarging the V icon and announcing that a small jackpot has been won).

By configuring it in this way, even if the V icon is acquired and the V icon is not activated during the changing display of the special pattern, there is a possibility of winning a small prize, so even if the V icon is not activated until the changing display of the special pattern ends, the player can have hope that he or she may win a small prize.

In addition, by configuring in this way, for example, if there was only one V reservation during the jackpot game, but a new V reservation is stored (reserved) in the second special pattern reservation ball storage area 203b during the period from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reservation, it is possible to switch the target for activating the V icon to the new V reservation. As a result, even if the last reservation of the special pattern 2 reservations that are read ahead at the time the V icon acquisition performance is executed is a V reservation, the V icon is not necessarily activated during the variable display of the special pattern based on that V reservation, and since it is determined that a consecutive win (continuous small wins) will occur if the V icon is not activated, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by making the player hope that the V icon will not be activated.

In the 18th control example, when a plurality of V reserves are stored (reserved memory) in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b and the V icon is displayed, whether the V reserve that is consumed first or the V reserve that is consumed later is the target for activating the V icon is determined when the display of the special pattern change based on the V reserve that is consumed first is started. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured so that the player can select in advance by button operation whether the setting is such that the V reserve that is consumed first is likely to activate the V icon, or the setting is such that the V reserve that is consumed later is likely to activate the V icon, according to the player's preference.

In addition, in this 18th control example, the rate at which the V icon acquisition effect is executed varies depending on the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls stored (reserved) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b and the position of the V reserved ball.

Specifically, when the first special symbol 2 reserved (first reserved) of the special symbol 2 reserved stored (reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is a V reserved, the fewer the number of special symbol 2 reserved stored (reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the more likely the V icon acquisition effect is to be executed. Also, when four special symbol 2 reserved are stored (reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the rate at which the V icon acquisition effect is executed is higher when the special symbol 2 reserved consumed later is a V reserved than when the special symbol 2 reserved consumed first is a V reserved.

By configuring it this way, when the V icon is activated, there will likely be many reserved special charts 2 that have not been read ahead at the time the V icon acquisition performance is executed, making it difficult to predict the lottery results for the reserved special charts 2 that remain after the V icon is activated.

In the 18th control example, when the first reserve is a V reserve (a reserve that wins a small jackpot), the fewer the number of special symbol 2 reserves stored (reserved memory) in the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b, the more likely the V icon acquisition effect is to be executed. However, this is not limited to this, and the more the number of special symbol 2 reserves, the more likely the V icon acquisition effect is to be executed.

In the 18th control example, when four special symbol 2 reserved balls are stored (reserved) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, the rate at which the V icon acquisition effect is executed is higher when the special symbol 2 reserved that is consumed later is a V reservation than when the special symbol 2 reserved that is consumed earlier is a V reservation. However, this is not limited to this, and the rate at which the V icon acquisition effect is executed may be higher when the special symbol 2 reserved that is consumed earlier is a V reservation than when the special symbol 2 reserved that is consumed later is a V reservation.

In addition, the configuration may be such that the more V reserves stored (reserved) in the second special pattern reserve ball storage area 203b, the easier it is to execute the V icon acquisition effect.

In addition, in this 18th control example, when multiple V reserves are stored (reserved memory) in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, whether or not to activate the V icon for the V reserve that is consumed first is determined according to the fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, when multiple V reserves are stored (reserved memory) in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, if a specific variation pattern is not set in the V reserve that is consumed first, the V icon is activated, and a specific performance mode setting table with a different setting ratio of the specific performance mode is referenced from the performance mode setting table referenced when the V icon is not activated. Note that a specific performance mode refers to, for example, a performance that is executed only when a big win or small win is won (so-called premium performance), or a performance that changes to a display mode indicating a big win or small win after displaying a display mode indicating a miss in the lottery result (so-called revival performance).

This configuration makes it easier for players to predict whether or not the V icon will be activated based on the type of performance being executed, making it possible to get players interested in the performance being executed and preventing players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

In the eighteenth control example, when the V icon is activated, the configuration is such that the premium effect or the revival effect is difficult to execute, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the premium effect or the revival effect is easy to execute. In addition, for example, in some cases where a plurality of V reserves (reservations that win small prizes) are stored (reserved memory) in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, a period during which the activation of the V icon is prohibited may be set until the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reserve that is consumed later begins. In this case, a display mode (for example, a display mode in which a chain is wrapped around the V icon to lock it) to indicate that the activation of the V icon is prohibited may be displayed. By configuring in this way, when a performance with a high expectation of winning a small prize is executed during a period during which the activation of the V icon is prohibited, the expectation of winning a small prize in which the activation of the V icon is not executed can be increased, so that it is possible to make the player interested in the performance during the period during which the activation of the V icon is prohibited.

In addition, during the variable display of one special pattern, the configuration may have times when the V icon is likely to be activated and times when the V icon is unlikely to be activated. For example, when a reach effect is executed during the variable display of a special pattern, the configuration may be such that the V icon is more likely to be activated in the period from the start of the variable display of the special pattern to the start of the reach effect than in the period from the start of the reach effect to the stop display of the special pattern. If the V icon is not activated before the reach effect starts, the player can have hope for a consecutive win. Therefore, even if the V icon is not activated immediately after the variable display of the special pattern starts, the player can be interested in whether or not a reach will occur.

In the 18th control example, whether or not to execute the V icon acquisition effect during a jackpot game is determined based on whether or not a V reservation exists as a result of pre-reading the reserved special pattern 2 reservation, but this is not limited to the above. Whether or not to execute the V icon acquisition effect during a jackpot game may be determined based on the pre-reading result of the reserved special pattern 1 reservation (winning information of the first special pattern) or based on the pre-reading results of both the special pattern 2 reservation and the special pattern 1 reservation. Also, the display mode of the V icon displayed when a V reservation exists in the special pattern 2 reservation and when a V reservation exists in the special pattern 1 reservation may be different.

The following describes the pachinko machine 10 of this 18th control example, but the same reference numerals will be used to designate the same contents as the above-mentioned control examples, and detailed descriptions will be omitted.

<Regarding the board configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example>
First, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 576 to Fig. 581. Fig. 576 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example, Fig. 577 is an enlarged view of the lower right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example as viewed from the front, and Figs. 578 to 581 are schematic diagrams showing the structure of the V winning device 650 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example.

As shown in Fig. 576, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first ball winning port 64, a second ball winning port 640, a first variable winning device 65, a V winning device 650, a normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Fig. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first ball winning port 64, the second ball winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the V winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 576.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61, also made of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62, is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 242) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left of FIG. 576) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of FIG. 576) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side of Fig. 576), the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 242), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In the eighteenth control example, the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64, the first pattern display device 37a is activated, while when the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640, the first pattern display device 37b is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37a and 37b also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in time-saving or normal mode, whether the display is variable, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a time-saving jackpot (a jackpot in which the time-saving mode is set as the game mode after the jackpot game ends) or a normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the game mode is set as the normal mode after the jackpot game ends) or a miss, and indicate the number of reserved balls by their lighting states. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The LEDs are configured to have different light colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can indicate various game modes of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not a jackpot has been won (jackpot lottery), and if a jackpot has been determined, judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that are judged here include a 16R time-saving jackpot (16R time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 16 and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, a 10R time-saving jackpot (10R time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, a 7R time-saving jackpot (7R time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 7 and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended, and a 7R normal jackpot (7R time-saving jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 7 and a time-saving state is granted after the jackpot has ended.

In addition, in some cases where the result of the jackpot lottery is determined to be a miss rather than a jackpot as described above, a small prize is prepared which gives the player fewer benefits than the jackpot described above (for example, a benefit of opening the V winning device 650 for only one round). The first pattern display device 37a, 37b not only shows whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not (or whether it is a small prize or not) as the stopped pattern after the variable display ends, but if it is a jackpot, a pattern according to the type of jackpot is displayed.

Here, a "16R jackpot with time-saving" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 16, a "10R jackpot with time-saving" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10, and a "7R jackpot with time-saving" refers to a jackpot that transitions to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7. Also, a "7R jackpot without time-saving" refers to a jackpot that transitions to the normal state without transitioning to a time-saving state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7.

In other words, this pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide, as a jackpot game when a special pattern jackpot is won, one of the following jackpot games is provided: a "16R jackpot with time reduction" that can provide the player with the most bonuses, a "10R jackpot with time reduction" that can provide the next most bonuses, a "7R jackpot with time reduction" that can provide the next most bonuses, and a "7R no time reduction jackpot" that can provide the player with the fewest bonuses of all jackpot games. This allows the player to play in the hope that, even if a jackpot is won in the lottery for a special pattern, the jackpot game that provides the most bonuses will be provided out of the jackpot games that have different bonuses that can be provided.

In the 18th control example, the size of the bonus given to the player is defined according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game) and the content of the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends, but this is not limited to this, and the size of the bonus given to the player may be defined using conditions other than those mentioned above, or the content of the jackpot game may simply be changed so that different bonuses are given without defining the size of the bonus.

The "time-saving state" is a game state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is the same as in the normal state, but the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, as an added value (benefit) given to the player after the jackpot ends. In order to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, in the 18th control example, the change time of the second symbol is made shorter than in the normal state, and the operation mode of the electric device 640a that is operated when the lottery result of the second symbol is a hit is set so that the period during which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640 is longer than in the normal state. Note that other configurations may be used to set a game state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and only a part of the above-mentioned settings may be used, or the hit probability of the second symbol may be set higher than in the normal state in addition to the above-mentioned contents.

In addition, in this 18th control example, the first special symbol lottery, which may be triggered when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and the second special symbol lottery, which may be triggered when a gaming ball enters the second ball entrance 640, are configured to be capable of winning the time-saving feature in addition to winning the big prize and small prize described above. Specifically, the system is configured so that the determination of whether or not a time-saving feature has been won is performed in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) that is performed when the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set.

Here, if the time-saving is won, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set before the big win determination is performed in the special symbol lottery, and a process (update process 18) is executed to determine whether or not to end the time-saving state when the variable display of the special symbol to show the result of the special symbol lottery begins. For example, in the case of a time-saving state set to 1 time-saving count (value of time-saving counter 203h is 1), the remaining time-saving count (value of time-saving counter 203h) is updated (decremented) in update process 18, which is executed when the variable display of the special symbol to show the result of the special symbol lottery in which the time-saving has been won begins, and it is determined that the time-saving state is to be ended. On the other hand, in the case of a time-saving state in which a value of multiple times (e.g., 100 times) is set as the time-saving count, the time-saving state continues until the time-saving end condition is met based on the result of the update of the remaining time-saving count executed by update process 18.

In other words, by using the timing for setting the time-saving state and the timing for ending the time-saving state used in this 18th control example, it is possible to set the time-saving state only for the jackpot determination timing of the special pattern lottery (excluding the special pattern change period), or to set the time-saving state including the special pattern change period, depending on the number of time-saving times that are set.

In addition, as a method of achieving the same effect, a different processing timing may be set. For example, as in the fifth control example described above, the time-saving state may be set at the timing when the special symbol variation that has won the time-saving state is stopped, and the time-saving state update process (processing to determine whether or not to end the time-saving state) may be executed before the next special symbol variation begins. Even in this case, by varying the number of time-saving times that are set, it is possible to set the time-saving state so that it includes the special symbol variation period, or to set the time-saving state so that it does not include the special symbol variation period. In this case, if the special symbol variation with the time-saving state set is stopped and the next special symbol lottery does not begin with the time-saving state set, the time-saving state will continue because the time-saving end condition cannot be met.

In this case, it is advisable to determine whether the player has acquired the right to execute the next special pattern lottery (special pattern reserve) by the time the special pattern variation that won the time-saving feature is stopped (before the time-saving feature is set), and to notify the player that the time-saving feature has been won only if it is determined that the special pattern reserve has been acquired, that is, if the next special pattern variation will start immediately after the time-saving feature is set and the time-saving feature can end. By configuring the player in this way, it is possible to prevent a player who knows that they have won the time-saving feature from playing right-handed and causing the second special pattern lottery to be executed without causing the first special pattern lottery to be executed.

In addition, as described in detail later, in the 18th control example, the condition for terminating the "time-saving state" is configured such that, for the time-saving state granted based on winning the big prize in the special pattern lottery, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the normal state when either of the following termination conditions is met: the number of times the first special pattern and the second special pattern have changed (the total number of times they have changed) reaches a first predetermined number (e.g., 100 times) (first termination condition), or the number of times the small prize has been won (the small prize game has been executed) in the special pattern lottery reaches a second predetermined number (e.g., 1 time) (second termination condition). In this way, by providing multiple termination conditions for transitioning the game state from the time-saving state to the normal state and transitioning from the time-saving state to the normal state when any of the multiple termination conditions is met, it is possible to set multiple timings for the time-saving state to end, and the player can play while feeling excited about how long the time-saving state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, will continue.

Furthermore, in the 18th control example, multiple small prize types (e.g., small prizes A, B, C) are prepared as small prizes that can be won in the special pattern lottery (second special pattern lottery), and the number of times the second ending condition is met is set differently for each small prize type. By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult to predict whether the time-saving state will end based only on the number of small prizes won during the time-saving state, so the player can be made to feel a constant sense of tension while playing the time-saving game.

On the other hand, in this 18th control example, when a time-saving state (second time-saving state) is set based on winning the special pattern lottery, an end condition is set that is different from when a time-saving state (first time-saving state) is set based on winning the jackpot, and specifically, the number of time-saving states is set to "1." In other words, the first time-saving state that is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special pattern lottery utilizes the time-saving state as a special lottery function for executing only the jackpot determination of the special pattern lottery in the time-saving state.

In the 18th control example, a specific area is provided in the V winning device 650 that is opened during a small win game, and a big win (so-called two-type win) is awarded when the ball passes through the specific area during a small win game (when the V switch 650e3 provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, which is the specific area, detects the ball) (see FIG. 580). In addition, as will be described in detail later, the expectation of the ball passing through the specific area during a small win game (V winning expectation) is configured to differ depending on the type of small win that is won. And, the number of times the second end condition set for each small win type is met (number of small wins) is configured to be less for the small win type in which a small win game with a high V winning expectation is executed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to associate the expectation of winning a V to obtain a two-type win when a small win is won during time-saving play with the anxiety that the time-saving mode may end, making the player more motivated to play.

In the 18th control example, the number of times the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) change is set to the first predetermined number (e.g., 100 times) as described above as the end condition (first end condition), but other end conditions may be set for the number of times the special symbols change. For example, the end condition for the time-saving state may be established when the number of times only the first special symbol changes reaches a third predetermined number (e.g., 50 times) or when the number of times only the second special symbol changes reaches a fourth predetermined number (e.g., 80 times). Also, only some of the many end conditions described above may be used, or they may be combined as appropriate.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, through which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 63. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37a, 37b, triggered by the entry of a ball into the first ball entry hole 64 and the second ball entry hole 640 (start winning), and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball into the normal pattern start hole (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 242), so that, for example, three pattern rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed (see FIG. 122). Each pattern row is composed of multiple patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are scrolled horizontally for each pattern row, so that the third patterns are variably displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 of the 18th control example performs a decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b, while the display of the game status in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242) is performed by the first pattern display devices 37a, 37b.

In other words, the third pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the third pattern display device 81 in correspondence with the period (dynamic display period) during which the first pattern is variably displayed (variably displayed) on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b, and the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode according to the lottery result of the special pattern in correspondence with the timing at which the first pattern is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the lottery result of the special pattern on the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b.

In other words, when the discrimination condition (a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) is met, the discrimination means discriminates (a lottery for a special symbol is executed), and the identification information (third symbol) is dynamically displayed (variably displayed) until a predetermined dynamic display period has elapsed, after which the identification information (third symbol) is displayed stationary in a display mode (combination of symbols) that indicates the discrimination result of the discrimination means (the lottery result for the special symbol). This allows the player to understand the lottery result for the special symbol by understanding the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

The third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 may have a display mode corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery, and may be a display mode corresponding to a part of the special pattern lottery result (for example, only the result of the win/loss judgment such as a big win or a miss, or a time-saving win), or may be a display mode corresponding to the details of the special pattern lottery result (for example, the type of big win that was won). In addition, if there are four types of lottery results (for example, a big win, a small win, a miss, or a time-saving win) as the lottery result of the special pattern, the display mode of the third pattern may be a display mode indicating that the lottery result of the special pattern is one of two specific types (for example, a big win or a small win) out of the three types of lottery results described above. In addition, if a double win is won by a judgment that allows double wins (for example, a stable big win, a time-saving judgment), a display mode for indicating a double win may be used, and if the content of the game executed based on the double win is the same as the content of the game executed based only on the big win, the same display mode may be used.

In addition, instead of the display device used in the 18th control example, the third pattern display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel, or multiple display devices may be provided on the pachinko machine 10.

In this 18th control example, when the second pattern (normal pattern) is won during the time-saving state, the period during which the electric device 640a is operated (the period during which the electric device 640a is protruded to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) is longer than when the second pattern (normal pattern) is won during the normal state. This makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state.

The configuration for making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 during the time-saving state is not limited to the above, and may be configured to increase the probability of winning the second symbol, or to increase the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win. In addition, if the time-saving state is made easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 by changing the operating pattern of the electric device 640a, the time it takes for the second symbol to change may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change is set shorter during the time-saving state than during normal play, the probability of winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, in the case where the time required for the second symbol to be displayed is varied according to the set game state, and the opening time and number of times of the electric role 640a are varied, the time for displaying the second symbol to be displayed may be determined according to the game state set at the time when the display of the second symbol to be displayed is started, and the opening time and number of times of the electric role 640a may be determined according to the game state set at the time when the display of the second symbol to be displayed is stopped and the second symbol indicating a win is displayed (the winning game of the second symbol, i.e., the timing when the electric role 640a is operated). By configuring in this way, for example, when the second symbol that started to be displayed during the time-saving state is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a win during the normal state, the electric role 640a can be operated with the operation pattern corresponding to the normal state. Therefore, the set game state and the operation pattern of the electric role to be executed can be more accurately associated.

The relationship between the game state, the time the second symbol changes, and the operation pattern of the electric device 640a may be specified other than as described above. For example, if it is determined that the time-saving state is set as the game state at either the timing when the second symbol starts changing or the timing when the electric device 640a starts operating, the operation pattern of the electric device 640a may be configured to set an operation pattern that is advantageous to the player (an operation pattern executed during the time-saving state).

A first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first ball entrance 64, a first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the first ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37a.

As shown in FIG. 576, nails are planted on the game board 13 so that the first ball entry port 64 is easier to enter in a game in which the ball flows down the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called left-handed game) than in a game in which the ball flows down the right side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called right-handed game). Therefore, when a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 is set, a left-handed game is executed to enter the ball into the first ball entry port 64.

On the other hand, a second ball entrance 640 through which a ball can enter is provided to the right of the first ball entrance 64 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters this second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the second ball entrance switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 242), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device 37b.

The first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are also each one of the winning holes through which five balls are paid out when a ball enters the hole. In the 18th control example, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is the same as the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. However, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be different, for example, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 may be three, and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 may be five.

In addition, in the 18th control example, a switch (first ball entrance switch, second ball entrance switch) that detects a ball that triggers the lottery for a special pattern (lottery trigger for a big win) is provided in the ball entrance, so that the lottery trigger for a special pattern can be obtained and prize balls can be obtained. However, other configurations may be used. For example, an area (gate) through which a ball can pass may be provided, and when a switch (detection means) that detects a ball passing through the area (gate) detects the passage of a ball, the lottery trigger for a special pattern may be obtained. In this case, it is preferable to provide a ball entrance that allows at least a portion of the balls that pass through the area (gate) that can trigger the lottery for a special pattern to enter, and that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, five) when a ball enters. By configuring in this way, the number of times the lottery trigger for a special pattern is obtained and the number of times the prize balls are obtained can be made different, so that a variety of playability can be provided.

The second ball entrance 640 is provided with an electric device 640a. This electric device 640a is configured to be variable between a protruding state (permitted state) protruding from the game board 13 toward the player (the player in front of the game board 13 in FIG. 576) and a waiting state (restricted state) waiting on the game board 13 side. Normally (when the second symbol is not selected), the electric device 640a is in the waiting state (restricted state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when the second symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is triggered by the ball passing through the normal symbol starter hole (through gate) 67, that is, when the second symbol is selected as a winning symbol, the electric device 640a is in the protruding state (permitted state), making it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

Here, the ball flow to the second ball entrance 640 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example will be explained. In the 18th control example, as shown in FIG. 576, the variable display unit 80 is disposed in the approximate center of the play area of the play board 13, and the play area is divided into the left side (left-hitting area) and the right side (right-hitting area) of the variable display unit 80, and the player can adjust the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 to direct the shot ball to either the right-hitting area or the left-hitting area. Hereinafter, a game in which the player operates the operating handle 51 to shoot a ball into the left-hitting area of the play area will be referred to as a left-hitting game, and a game in which the player shoots a ball into the right-hitting area will be referred to as a right-hitting game.

In the 18th control example, as shown in FIG. 576, the second ball entrance 640, the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, and the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 that triggers the lottery to determine whether or not to operate the electric device 640a are arranged in the right-hand hitting area, and the game is configured so that right-hand hitting is performed when the time-saving state is set as the game state.

To prevent the ball shot in left-handed play from entering the second ball entrance 640, a nail is planted under the variable display unit 80, and the ball is configured to not enter the second ball entrance 640 during left-handed play. By configuring it in this way, a game in which the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 to change the first special pattern can be played in left-handed play, and a game in which the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 to change the second special pattern can be played in right-handed play, and different playability can be appropriately provided depending on the playing method.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example, as shown in FIG. 576, a V winning device 650 is disposed in the right hitting area, the upper surface of which slopes downward to the lower left (the lower left direction when viewed from the front of FIG. 576), and the various mechanisms are disposed so that the ball that flows down the upper surface of the V winning device 650 passes through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 and flows down toward the electric role 640a.

When the electric device 640a is in the standby state, the ball passes through the standby electric device 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, when the electric device 640a is in the protruding state, the ball that reaches the electric device 640a flows down toward the lower right (lower right direction when viewed from the front of FIG. 576). When the ball reaches the right end of the electric device 640a, it enters the second ball entry port 640, and when the electric device 640a is changed to the standby state before it reaches the right end of the electric device 640a, it enters the general winning port 63 arranged below the electric device 640a.

Furthermore, this pachinko machine 10 is provided with a transparent cover member 655 to cover the above-mentioned electric device 640a, second ball entrance 640, and general winning entrance 63. This cover member 655 has a cut processing on the surface to diffusely reflect the incident light. By providing this cover member 655, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the inside of the cover member 655 during play due to various lights emitted from the light emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of playing right-handed by timing the operation of the electric device 640a.

In addition, when no game is being played (when the gaming machine is powered off), the amount of light incident on the cover member is reduced, making it easy to see inside the cover member 655 and facilitating maintenance of the pachinko machine 10. When using a configuration in which the visibility of the interior is variable using the cover member 655 in this way, the light emitting means can be shared by making the light emitting means that emits light for decorative purposes available as described above, and the number of parts that make up the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, but a dedicated light emitting means for making the interior of the cover member 655 difficult to see may also be provided.

Also, it is sufficient to make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see for a predetermined period of time including the period during which the electric role 640a is operating. For example, when it is determined that the electric role 640a will be operated (i.e. when a winning normal symbol is selected by lottery), the light emitting means may be controlled so that text (e.g., "Open") informing that the electric role 640a will be operating is displayed on the surface of the cover member 655, and the displayed text may make the inside of the cover member 655 difficult to see. This allows the player to know that the electric role 640a will be operating, while making it difficult for him or her to know the detailed timing of the operation.

Now, with reference to FIG. 577, the configuration of the right-hitting area of this pachinko machine 10 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 577, of the balls shot by right-hitting play, those that pass through the through gate 67 flow down toward the area where the electric device 640a is arranged. To explain more specifically, the electric device 640a has a length of 50 mm, and its upper surface is made of a plate-like member through which the balls can flow down, and is arranged on the game board 13 so that it slopes downward toward the lower right (the lower right direction when viewed from the front of FIG. 577). Then, the ball that passes through the through gate 67 flows down into area a (see FIG. 577) which is within a range of 20 mm from the left end of the electric device 640a.

When the ball reaches area a, if the electric device 640a is in the waiting state, it passes through the electric device 640a and flows down toward the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, if the electric device 640a is in the protruding position, the ball flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a toward the right end position. Then, when the ball reaches area b (the area corresponding to 20 mm to 40 mm from the left end of the electric device 640a) and the electric device 640a is changed to the waiting state, the ball is configured to flow down toward the general winning port 63 provided below the electric device 640a. Finally, when the ball reaches area c (the area corresponding to 20 mm from the right end of the electric device 640a), the ball is configured to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In addition, in this 18th control example, the period during which the electric device 640a operates continuously in the game state (normal symbol probability state) is configured to be different, and when the electric device 640a operates in the normal state (normal symbol low probability state) set as the game state, the electric device 640a changes to a waiting state before the ball flowing down on the electric device 640a in the protruding state reaches area b (see FIG. 577), and when the time-saving state is set, the electric device 640a is configured to be in the protruding position for a period sufficient for the ball flowing down on the electric device 640a to reach area c (see FIG. 577).

Specifically, the operating period of the electric role 640a (the period during which it is continuously positioned in the protruding state) is configured to be 2 seconds during the time-saving state and 0.2 seconds during the normal state. The electric role 640a is configured so that the flow period for the ball to flow down the area shown in FIG. 577 (the range from area a to area c) is longer than 0.2 seconds and shorter than 2 seconds (0.8 seconds in the 18th control example). By configuring it in this way, even if a right-handed play is performed during the normal state, a normal pattern is won, and the ball flows down the top surface of the electric role 640a in operation, the operation of the electric role 640a ends before the ball flowing down the top surface of the electric role 640a reaches the second ball entrance 640, so it is possible to reliably prevent the lottery for the second special pattern from being drawn in the normal state.

In addition, during the time-saving state, the electric device 640a is operated for a period longer than the period (0.4 seconds) it takes for a ball to flow down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reach the second ball entrance 640, making it easier for the ball that flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a, which is in the induction state (protruding state), to reach the second ball entrance 640, and making it easier to draw the second special pattern.

Furthermore, during the time-saving state, for example, a ball that reaches the electric device 640a 1.5 seconds after the electric device 640a is activated flows down the upper surface of the electric device 640a, and the operation of the electric device 640a ends when the ball reaches area b (2 seconds have passed since the electric device 640a was activated). As shown in FIG. 577, such a ball enters the general winning hole 63 arranged below the electric device 640a, and 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when a right-handed play is performed during the time-saving state, the ball can be guided to a different ball entry hole (the second ball entry hole 640 or the general winning hole 63) depending on the timing of the operation of the electric device 640a and the timing of the ball arriving at the electric device 640a, so that the player can continue to play right-handed games during the time-saving state.

As described above, the number of prize balls awarded for a ball entering the general winning port 63 is 10, and the number of prize balls awarded for a ball entering the second winning port 640 is 5. Therefore, if a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be drawn, a ball entering the second winning port 640 can give a player a more advantageous bonus (i.e., a lottery for special symbol 2 and 5 prize balls) than a ball entering the general winning port 63. If a lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) cannot be drawn (special symbol changing), a ball entering the general winning port 63 can give a player a more advantageous bonus (i.e., 10 prize balls) than a ball entering the second winning port 640.

This allows the player to change the ball entry port (the one that can get many rewards) through which the ball wants to enter depending on the game situation (whether or not the special symbol changes), allowing the player to enjoy right-hand play during the time-saving state. Also, in order to have the ball enter both the second ball entry port 640 and the general winning port 63 during one operation of the electric device 640a, it is necessary to continue right-hand play, which increases the operation of the game.

In the 18th control example, the operating period of the electric device 640a during the time-saving state is set to a period (2 seconds) that is sufficiently longer than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640, so that the ball is reliably admitted into the second ball entrance 640 when the electric device 640a operates. However, in addition to this, for example, the operating period of the electric device 640a during the time-saving state may be configured to be slightly longer (for example, 0.9 seconds) than the period (0.8 seconds) in which the ball flows down the top surface of the electric device 640a and reaches the second ball entrance 640. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to suppress the action of stopping the ball's release after the ball has passed through the through gate 67 during the time-saving state, and then restarting the release of the ball after confirming that the electric device 640a has operated (the so-called stop-hit). This allows right-hitting play to continue during the time-saving state, improving game operation.

Returning to Figure 576, we will continue with the explanation. As described above with reference to Figure 577, the ball released by right-handed play first reaches the V winning device 650. Next, we will explain the configuration of the V winning device 650. The V winning device 650 is configured to be variable between an open state in which the ball can win and a closed state in which it is difficult to win, and is configured to be variable to an open state in which the ball can win at a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a by operating the opening/closing door 650f1 when the lottery result of the second special pattern is a "small win."

In addition, in some cases where a "big win" of a special pattern is won, the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 may be configured to operate in the same way as when a "small win" is won as described above. This makes it difficult to know whether a "big win" or a "small win" of a special pattern has been won when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 operates.

Now, the configuration of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to Figs. 577 to 578. First, as shown in Fig. 577, when the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is in a closed state closing the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, the ball is configured to be able to flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 in the closed state, and a ball that reaches the V winning device 650 while the V winning device 650 is in a closed state flows down the opening and closing door 650f1 toward the lower left side (the lower left side when viewed from the front in Fig. 577) and is discharged toward the through gate 67. On the other hand, when the V winning device 650 is in an open state (i.e., during a small win game), the ball enters the V winning device 650.

In the 18th control example, the opening period of the V winning device 650 during a small winning game is configured to be 0.1 seconds x 12 times, and the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 at the timing when the V winning device 650 opens enters the V winning device 650. The ball that enters the V winning device 650 is configured to flow down in an aligned manner toward the detection port 650a1 (see FIG. 580 (a)) while flowing down the first regulating member 651 or the second regulating member 652. By configuring in this way, the ball can be made to flow down smoothly regardless of the position of the opening and closing door 650f1 from which the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650.

In the 18th control example, the period during which the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is continuously open is set to 0.1 seconds, but any other period may be set as long as the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 during the opening period of the opening and closing door 650f1 can win the V winning device 650. Also, in the 18th control example, the number of times that the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened in one small win game is set to 12 times, but any other number of times may be set.

As with the seventh control example described above, in the eighteenth control example, the period from when the opening/closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650 is opened once to when it is opened again (interval period between openings) is set to 5 seconds after the fifth and tenth opening operations during a small win game, and is set to 0.5 seconds at other times. This is to make it easier for a ball to enter the V winning device 650 during a small win game. Specifically, if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the time the fifth opening operation is completed during a small win game, a game guide display that emphasizes right-hand play and encourages the player to play during the interval period between openings after the fifth opening operation is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The interval between openings is set longer than usual so that the ball can enter the V winning device 650 even when right-hand play is started by grasping the game guide display displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The same control process is also executed when it is determined that the V switch 650e3 has not detected a ball at the end of the 10th opening operation during a small winning game.

This configuration makes it easier for players who are not playing appropriately during small win games (players who are not playing with the right hand) to play appropriately. In this way, during a specific game (small win game) in which multiple opening actions are performed, some inter-opening interval periods are set longer than others, and if it is determined that the player is not playing appropriately, a game guide display can be displayed to encourage proper gameplay, allowing players who are playing incorrectly to play with peace of mind.

In the 18th control example, as in the 7th control example described above, a longer special inter-open interval period is set after the 5th and 10th opening operations during a small win game. In this way, by providing multiple times for the timing of displaying the game guide display to the player during one small win game, it is possible to make it easier for the player to play appropriately. In addition, when providing multiple times for displaying the game guide display, it is preferable to set the notification timing for at least the second transition to a timing that a player playing normally cannot reach. That is, as in the 7th control example described above, in the 18th control example, by continuously playing right-hand during a small win game, at least one ball can enter in one opening operation of the opening and closing door 650f1 of the V winning device 650. Therefore, if a normal game (continuous right-hand play) is played, the number of winning balls (10 balls) that is the end condition of the small win game will be reached during the 10th opening operation, and the small win game will end.

In other words, the inter-open interval period that is executed after the 10th opening action during a small win game is a timing that cannot be reached if the player is playing normally (continuous right-hitting game). Therefore, by using this timing to set the timing for displaying the game guide display, an unnecessarily long special inter-open interval period will not be executed for a player playing normally (continuous right-hitting game), and the small win game can be played smoothly.

In addition, when the first special inter-opening interval period is set to the timing (after the end of the fifth opening operation) that is reached even if normal play (continuous right-hand play) is performed as in the 18th control example, it is preferable to determine whether the V switch 650e3 detects a ball at the timing when the first special inter-opening interval period starts (the timing when the fifth opening operation ends) or at the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the first special inter-opening interval period (the timing when the period required for the ball that entered during the fifth opening operation to be discharged from the V winning device 650 has elapsed), and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 detects a ball, a notification effect to notify that effect is displayed during the first special inter-opening interval period, and if it is determined that the V switch 650e3 does not detect a ball, a game guide display is displayed as described above. This allows the special inter-opening interval period set during small winning play to be used effectively according to the game content.

Furthermore, during the second special opening interval period, it is preferable to configure the game guide display to be displayed even if the V switch 650e3 has already detected a ball. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the small win game ends without a predetermined number (10 balls) of balls entering the V winning device 650 during the small win game.

Next, the structure of the V winning device 650 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 578. FIG. 578 is an exploded perspective view of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 578, the V winning device 650 includes an opening forming member 650b arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, a base member 650c combined with the back side of the opening forming member 650b to screw the V winning device 650 to the game board 13, an LED board 650d arranged on the back side of the base member 650c and having a plurality of LEDs arranged thereon to light up the LEDs from the back side of the base member 650c to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, a back cover body 650e that holds the LED board 650d between the base member 650c, and an opening/closing door 650f1 for opening and closing a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a formed in the opening forming member 650b. It is composed of an opening and closing unit 650f, a flow path cover body 650g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 650e to form a flow path, a switching member 650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the back cover body 650e and the flow path cover body 650g to switch the flow path of the game ball, a link member 650i that engages with the switching member 650h, a back cover body 650j that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 650g, a flow path solenoid 650k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 650j and operates the link member 650i, and a fixing cover body 650m that covers the flow path solenoid 650k from the back side and fixes it to the back cover body 650j with a screw.

Figure 579 is a cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. Figure 579 (c) is a top view of the V winning device 650, and Figure 579 (b) is a Lb-Lb cross-sectional view of the V winning device 650. As shown in Figure 579 (b), the V winning device 650 has a specific winning port (V winning port) 650a, which is an opening through which a game ball can enter. The specific winning port (V winning port) 650a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and has a bottom surface that is inclined downward to the left so that the game ball that passes through the opening is guided to the left direction of Figure 579 (b). At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 650c1 for detecting the entry of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that passes through this detection port 650a1 is guided to the distribution flow path formed on the back side of the rear cover body 650e shown in FIG. 579(a).

As shown in FIG. 579(b), the opening of the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a can be changed between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot (is difficult to enter) by an opening/closing door 650f1 made of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 650f1, and the game ball can roll over the top of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 650f1 is configured to be retreated to the inside of the base member 650c (inside the game board 13) and retreated from within the specific winning hole (V winning hole) 650a.

By configuring it this way, right-hand play can be continued during time-saving play, big win play, and small win play, reducing the effort required to change the play method depending on the game status. This makes it easier to play.

In addition, when the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game ball flows down can be configured as the opening of the V winning device 650, so the game ball can be efficiently made to win inside the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a. This makes it possible to shorten the time required for a small win game, and improve the efficiency of the game.

Figure 579(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in Figure 579(b). As shown in Figure 579(a), the magnetic sensor 650c1 having the detection port 650a1 is fixed to the base member 650c so that the detection port 650a1 is inclined toward the sorting flow path side of the rear cover body 650e.

Next, referring to FIG. 580, we will explain the configuration in which game balls guided to the distribution flow path of the rear cover body 650e are distributed to the normal discharge flow path 650e1 and the special discharge flow path 650e2 described below.

Figure 580 (a) is a rear view of the rear cover body 650e showing the state in which the switching member 650h is operated so that the game balls are sorted to the special discharge flow path 650e2. As shown in Figure 580 (a), the switching member 650h has a locking hole 650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 650i is inserted and a guide piece 650h2 that guides the game balls, and is pivotally supported on the flow path cover body 650g from the rear side. Here, the flow path cover body 650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 650h2 can be inserted, and is configured so that the guide piece 650h can be rotatably positioned in the sorting flow path from the rear side of the flow path cover body 650g.

As shown in FIG. 580(a), the game ball guided into the distribution flow path from the detection port 650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge flow path 650e2. The game ball that passes through the special discharge flow path 650e2 is detected by the V switch 650e3, which is composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball and is provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2, and is discharged outside the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example, as in the above-mentioned 7th control example, a game ball passes through the above-mentioned V switch 650e3 during a small win game, and a big win game is set after the small win game. That is, the V switch 650e3 is configured as a trigger for starting a big win game. In addition, the switching member 650h is configured to connect either a flow path (special discharge flow path 650e2) through which a ball that has entered the V winning device 650 during a small win can pass through the V switch 650e3, or a flow path (normal discharge flow path 650e1) that cannot (is difficult to pass through) the V switch 650e3, and by setting the flow path solenoid 650k to on, the flow path is switched so that the ball that has entered the V winning device 650 flows down the special discharge flow path 650e2 (see FIG. 580(b)).

The pachinko machine 10 used in the 18th control example is configured such that the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off during normal play, and balls that have won the V winning device 650 flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1. When a small jackpot is won, the flow path solenoid 650k is set to on according to the contents specified in the above-mentioned opening scenario table 202g, and the balls that have won the V winning device 650 can flow down the special discharge flow path 650e2. In this way, when the flow path solenoid 650k is set to off, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to provide a state that is maintained for a long period of time, that is, a state in which the switching member 650h is maintained so that balls that have won the V winning device 650 flow down the normal discharge flow path 650e1 (see FIG. 580(a)), thereby reducing the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, the game state set after the small win game is changed depending on the flow route of the game ball that entered the V winning device 650 during the small win game, so the player's interest can be increased even during the small win game. The time required for the ball to pass from the opening (specific winning port) of the V winning device 650 to the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h) is configured to be at least 1 second. By configuring it in this way, even if the ball flow route is switched by the switching member 650h after detecting that the opening and closing door 650f1 is opened even if the small win has not been won, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from flowing down the special discharge flow path 650e2.

In addition, at the end of the normal discharge flow path 650e1, a discharge confirmation switch 650e4 consisting of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting the passage of a ball is provided. As a result, it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have been discharged by the sum of the discharge confirmation switch 650e4 and the V switch 650e3. In addition, if all the game balls that entered the V winning device 650 have not been discharged at the end timing of the small win game (the timing when the small win ending period executed after the end condition of the small win game (when a predetermined number (10) of wins have been made in the V winning device 650, or when the opening scenario of the V winning device 650 has ended) has elapsed), it is preferable to determine that there is an abnormality inside the V winning device 650, and to notify the outside of the abnormality or to stop the game so that the big win game or normal game does not start. This makes it possible to prevent the game from progressing in a state where an abnormality has occurred in a part of the pachinko machine 10, causing a secondary abnormality to occur.

In this way, the game ball that enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650 is detected by the magnetic sensor 650c1, and based on that, prize balls (10 prize balls for one winning ball in the 18th control example) can be paid out as a bonus to the player. In addition, by using the game ball after detection, it can be configured to be able to determine whether it passes through the V switch 650e3 or not, so it can be determined whether a big win game is executed after the small win game ends. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning port (specific area) for awarding a big win game separately from the V winning device 650, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

Furthermore, in the 18th control example, a small win game is executed in which the flow path solenoid 650k is set to ON for different periods and timings depending on the small win type (small win A, B, C) that is set when a small win is won. By configuring in this way, the expectation of the ball passing through the V switch 650e3 during a small win game (V winning expectation) can be made to differ depending on the content of the small win game executed when a small win is won. Therefore, the player can play while expecting not only to win a small win, but also to play a small win game with a high V winning expectation.

Next, referring to FIG. 581, the structure of the ball flow underside of the opening and closing door 650f1 that opens and closes the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 will be described. FIG. 581(a) is a schematic diagram showing a plan view of the state in which the opening and closing door 650f1 closes the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650. As shown in FIG. 581(a), the opening and closing door 650f1 of the 18th control example is configured so that a ball that reaches the upper surface of the V winning device 650 flows from the right upper surface 650y1 of the V winning device 650 through the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 along the slope of the upper surface of the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 576), down the left upper surface 650y2, and flows out toward the variable winning device 65.

The upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 is provided with a first delay member 650fa, a second delay member 650fb, and a third delay member 650fc as delay members for delaying the flow of the balls, and is configured so that the flow period during which the balls flow down the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 is 0.6 seconds. This flow period (0.6 seconds) is configured to be longer than the interval (closing period (0.5 seconds)) when the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a of the V winning device 650 is opened multiple times by small win play. By configuring it in this way, it is configured so that the balls flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 will definitely win when the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is opened by small win play.

In the state shown in FIG. 581(a), when a small winning game is executed and the opening and closing door 650f1 is changed to the open state, the state shown in FIG. 581(b) is transitioned to. FIG. 581(b) is a schematic diagram showing a plan view of the state in which the V winning port 650a of the V winning device 650 is open. As shown in FIG. 581(b), when the opening and closing door 650f1 is in the open state, it moves to retreat inside the game board 13, and the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a is in an open state so that the ball flowing down the upper right surface 650y1 can win in the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a. In addition, the ball flowing down on the opening and closing door 650f1 also wins in the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a because the opening and closing door 650f1 is positioned in the retreat position.

In addition, the V winning device 650 is provided with a first regulating member 651 and a second regulating member 652 to ensure smooth flow of the ball after winning, regardless of the position from which the ball flowing down the opening and closing door 650f1 enters the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a (see Figure 576), and is configured so that balls that enter the specific winning port (V winning port) 650a on the upstream side of the upper surface of the opening and closing door 650f1 are aligned in a row via the first regulating member 651 and the second regulating member 652 before flowing down towards the detection port 650a1, which is a passageway width for one ball. By providing the first and second restricting members 651 and 652 in this way, even if the detection port 650a1 is provided below the first restricting member, it is possible to prevent the ball that enters the game with force from the opening and closing door 650f1 from directly colliding with the detection port 650a1, thereby suppressing the failure of the ball detection switch 650c1 provided in the detection port 650a1. In addition, it is possible to ensure a flow path (a flow path that flows down over the first and second restricting members 651 and 652) for aligning the balls before they pass through the detection port 650a1, which has a passage width for one ball, thereby suppressing the occurrence of ball clogging in the V winning device 650 and the occurrence of a situation that interferes with the game.

As explained above, in the 18th control example, the flow period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) is longer than the interval between openings (0.5 seconds) of the variable member (opening/closing door 650f1) that operates in the bonus game (small prize game) that is awarded when the discrimination result of the discrimination means (the result of the lottery for the special symbol) is a predetermined discrimination result (small prize), so that the ball flowing down the variable member during the interval between openings (the timing when the opening/closing door 650f1 is closed) during the small prize game can be reliably made to win the V winning device 650 at the next opening timing.

In addition, the number of opening operations (12) in one small win game is set to be greater than the number of winning balls (10 balls) required to end the small win game, so that a predetermined number (10 balls) can be won during a small win game even if only the balls flowing down the variable member enter the V winning device 650 during the small win game. Therefore, even if one opening period (0.1 seconds) is set short, a sufficient number of winning balls can be secured. In addition, by setting one opening period long, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of balls from entering the V winning device 650 during a small win game.

<About the content of the performance in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example>
With reference to Figures 582 to 583, the characteristic presentation content executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example will be described.

In the seventh control example described above, the winning information of the second special symbol (winning information obtained when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640) is not reserved and stored. In contrast, the eighteenth control example is configured to be able to reserve and store the winning information of the second special symbol (hereinafter, special symbol 2 reserve), and is different from the seventh control example in that it is configured to be able to determine (pre-read) the lottery result of the special symbol 2 reserve that is reserved and stored before the start of the jackpot game, and if there is a reserve that will win a small jackpot (V reserve), it is possible to execute a performance to notify the player that there is a V reserve during the jackpot game.

Specifically, in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols), a predetermined number of reserved special symbols 2 (up to 4 in this 18th control example) can be reserved and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, and when a jackpot game is started based on the special symbol winning a jackpot or a small jackpot, the lottery results of the reserved and stored special symbol 2 are read in advance, and if a V reserved exists among them, a performance is executed in which a V icon indicating the presence of a V reserved is acquired (V icon acquisition performance). The acquired V icon is displayed in a reduced size in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 until the V reserved is consumed, and the V icon is enlarged during the variable display of the special symbol based on the V reserved (hereinafter referred to as the activation of the V icon), thereby informing the player that the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner has won a small jackpot before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, while the V icon is displayed in a reduced size, it is guaranteed that a small win will be won on one of the reserved special charts 2, and the time-saving state will not end when the set number of fluctuations is reached without winning a big or small win, so the player can enjoy playing in the time-saving state with peace of mind.

Here, an overview of the effects executed in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) in this 18th control example will be described. In this 18th control example, when the time-saving state is set, an effect is executed in which character 802, modeled after a hero, advances through a dungeon, and when character 802 encounters enemy character 804, modeled after a dinosaur, a reach is reached and a battle effect begins. In this battle effect, if character 802 triumphs over enemy character 804, it is announced that a big win or small win has been won.

With reference to FIG. 582(a), the display screen of the V icon acquisition effect executed during jackpot play in this 18th control example will be described. FIG. 582(a) is an example of a display screen when a V icon acquisition effect is executed during jackpot play. In this 18th control example, when execution of a V icon acquisition effect is set, a V icon acquisition effect is executed in place of the normal ending effect during the ending period of the jackpot play. By executing a V icon acquisition effect during the ending period in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that the period between the end of the final round of jackpot play and the start of the variable display of the first special pattern is drawn out.

The small display area Dm8 shows a display mode indicating that a special symbol has won the jackpot, allowing the player to recognize that they have won the jackpot with the special symbol. In addition, the small display area Dm4 shows "Hit right", providing the player with easy-to-understand guidance on how to play in the jackpot game.

In the small display area Dm14, the number of jackpot wins from the last jackpot win in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) to the present is displayed, so the more consecutive jackpot wins (consecutive jackpot wins) there are, the more the number of jackpot wins is displayed, giving the player a sense of superiority.

The small display area Dm15 displays the number of rounds of the jackpot game currently in progress. In FIG. 582(a), "ED" is displayed to indicate that the game is in the ending period, informing the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the game is in the ending period.

In the small display area Dm9, the reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved special pattern 2 (winning information of the second special pattern) reserved and stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b is displayed. In FIG. 582(a), the first reserved pattern hr1, the second reserved pattern hr2, and the third reserved pattern hr3 are displayed as white reserved patterns, and the fourth reserved pattern hr4 is displayed as a black reserved pattern. In this 18th control example, the configuration is such that the black reserved pattern is more likely to have won a big prize or a small prize than the white reserved pattern. Therefore, FIG. 582(a) shows a state in which the fourth reserved pattern hr4 is more likely to have won a big prize or a small prize than the first reserved pattern hr1 to the third reserved pattern hr3.

When the display of the changing special symbols starts after the big win game ends, the reserved symbols are consumed in order from the first reserved symbol hr1 to the youngest, and when the first reserved symbol hr1 is consumed, the second reserved symbol hr2 is shifted to the position of the first reserved symbol hr1 and displayed, and the third reserved symbol hr3 is shifted and displayed in the space vacated by the shift of the second reserved symbol hr2. Similarly, the fourth reserved symbol hr4 is also shifted and displayed in the space vacated by the third reserved symbol hr3. The space vacated by the shift of the fourth reserved symbol hr4 will be blank until a new reserved special symbol 2 is stored, and when a new reserved special symbol 2 is stored, the corresponding reserved symbol will be displayed.

When the V icon acquisition effect is set, an effect is started in the main display area Dm during the ending period of the big win game in which the character 802 discovers a treasure chest 810, and an effect is executed in which a V sword 803 with a "V" displayed appears from inside the treasure chest 810. In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays "V icon acquisition" to clearly inform the player that the V icon acquisition effect has been executed. This V sword 803 is a V icon to inform the player that there is a V reservation (reservation for winning a small win) among the reserved special pattern 2 reservations (winning information of the second special pattern) stored in the reservation, and is also displayed in reduced size in the main display area Dm during the period in which the variable display of the special pattern after the end of the big win game is executed.

In the eighteenth control example, the treasure chest 810 shown in FIG. 582(a) is found only when the V icon acquisition effect is set, but this is not limited to this, and the treasure chest 810 may also be found in the normal ending effect. In this case, a sword not marked with a V may appear from the treasure chest 810. The sword may also be displayed in a manner that indicates the expected probability of winning a jackpot or a small jackpot in the reserved state. In the eighteenth control example, the V icon acquisition effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, but this is not limited to this, and the V icon acquisition effect may be executed during the opening period of the jackpot game or during a specific round of the jackpot game. In this way, by configuring the V icon acquisition effect to be executed at multiple times, it is possible to prevent the game during the jackpot game period from becoming monotonous.

It is also possible to configure the game so that in a specific round of a jackpot game, the character 802 shown in FIG. 582(a) finds a treasure chest 810. In this case, it is also possible to provide a pattern in which a V sword 803 appears from the treasure chest 810, and a pattern in which a display mode indicating that more rounds will be added (for example, a ball showing the number of rounds to be added) appears. By configuring it in this way, even if the conditions for executing the V icon acquisition effect are not met, the effect of finding the treasure chest 810 is executed, making it possible to make the player hopeful of acquiring a V icon, and since more rounds are added if the V icon is not acquired, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing.

Next, referring to FIG. 582(b), this is an example of a display screen for a battle presentation when a V reserve (a reserve that will win a small prize) is consumed by the fourth change in the display of a special pattern after the end of a big prize game.

In the small display area Dm6, a reduced version of the V sword 803 acquired in the V icon acquisition performance is displayed, and the message "V acquired" is displayed to inform the player that a V reserve exists among the reserved special chart 2 reserves stored in the reserve memory.

In the main display area Dm, a battle scene begins in which the character 802 encounters an enemy character 804, and the sub-display area Ds displays "If you defeat the enemy, you win the big prize?", allowing the player to easily recognize that if the character 802 wins against the enemy character 804, he or she will win the big prize or the small prize.

Figure 583 (a) is an example of a display screen when the V icon is activated during a battle presentation. In this 18th control example, when the V icon is activated, the V sword 803 that was displayed in a reduced size in the small display area Dm6 is enlarged in the main display area Dm, and a presentation is executed in which the character 802 uses the V sword 803 to defeat the enemy character 804. In this case, "V icon activated" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, informing the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the V icon has been activated.

In this way, when the V icon is activated (the V sword 803 is enlarged), the special symbol is always displayed frozen in a display mode that indicates a small win. Therefore, when the V icon is activated, the player can recognize that the changing display of the special symbol indicates a small win before the special symbol is frozen.

Figure 583 (b) is an example of a display screen for a battle effect when the display of the special symbol based on the V reservation starts and there is another V reservation among the remaining special symbol 2 reservations. In this case, unlike Figure 583 (a), a revival effect is executed in which character 802 is defeated by enemy character 804 once, and then revives and wins. When the revival effect is executed, as shown in Figure 583 (b), character 802 defeats character 804 using a normal sword 805, which is different from V sword 803. Therefore, V sword 803 continues to be displayed in a reduced size in the small display area Dm6, and continues to be displayed in a reduced size even after the end of the big win game that is executed based on this special symbol winning the small win.

In this way, when a V reserve (a reserve that will win a small prize) is consumed, if there is another V reserve among the remaining Special Symbol 2 reserves (winning information for the second special symbol), the V icon will not be activated, thereby informing the player that there will be a consecutive win (consecutive small prize wins) with the remaining Special Symbol 2 reserves.

Also, as shown in FIG. 582(a), if only the last Special Chart 2 Reserve (the fourth reserved pattern hr4 in FIG. 582(a)) stored in the reserved memory at the time the V icon acquisition effect is executed is a V reserve, the V icon is not activated until the display of the special pattern of the Special Chart 2 Reserve corresponding to the fourth reserved pattern hr4 begins to change, so it is clear to the player that the small prize will be won with the Special Chart 2 Reserve corresponding to the fourth reserved pattern hr4, and no matter what effect is executed in the display of the special pattern change, the small prize will still be won, so the player will not be able to decide whether to win the small prize or not. There is a risk that the player's interest will wane, but as in this 18th control example, when the display of the special pattern based on the V reservation begins, if there is a V reservation among the reserved special pattern 2 reservations stored in the reservation memory, it is possible to configure it so that the V icon is not activated, and by switching the target for activating the V icon to the special pattern 2 reservation that did not exist at the time the V icon acquisition performance was executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the V icon will not be activated during the display of the special pattern of the fourth reserved pattern hr4, and it is possible to get the player interested in the performance executed in the display of the change.

In the 18th control example, even if there are multiple V reservations among the reserved special chart 2 reservations stored in the reservation, only one V icon is displayed, but this is not limited to this, and multiple V icons corresponding to the number of V reservations may be displayed.

Alternatively, when there are multiple V reserved, the V icon may be activated in the display of the special pattern based on the V reserved that is consumed first, and then the V icon may be displayed again in a reduced size in the small display area Dm6. Alternatively, in FIG. 583(a), when a V reserved exists in the reserved special pattern 2 reserved that is stored, the character 802 may continue to hold the V sword 803 for a period until the reserved V reserved is consumed.

In this way, by configuring the V icon activated based on the consumption of one V reservation to continue to be displayed until the next V reservation is consumed, even if a new V icon acquisition performance is not executed during a jackpot game that is executed based on the V reservation that activated the V icon, it is possible to make the player expect that the activated V icon will continue to be displayed, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The type of weapon used by character 802 (swords with different colors and shapes) or the type of enemy character (enemy characters with different numbers and sizes of horns) may indicate the likelihood of the V icon being activated. This configuration makes it easier for the player to predict whether the V icon will be activated, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In this 18th control example, a V icon resembling a sword is displayed, but this is not limited to this, and any display mode that allows the player to recognize that there is a V reserve within the reserve may be used.

The display mode of the V sword 803 and treasure chest 810 displayed in the V icon acquisition performance may be different depending on whether there is only one V reserve in the reserve or multiple V reserves. Alternatively, the performance mode may be determined from multiple types of V icon acquisition performance performance modes based on the number of V reserves in the reserve. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the V icon acquisition performance from becoming monotonous.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example>
Next, the counters of the MPU 201 of the pachinko machine 10 of this 18th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 584. Note that, although this example differs from the counters used in the above-mentioned control examples in that the update range of the counters is partially different, the basic configuration is the same, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first win random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 999) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 999 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 999). In particular, when the first win random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first win random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process 7 (see FIG. 325).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the 18th control example), for example, and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a, the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, and the special pattern reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the first winning random number 18 table 202ra stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number 18 table 202ra, it is determined that a jackpot for the special pattern has occurred.

The first winning random number 18 table 202ra has two types: a special pattern 1 random number 18 table 202ra1 for the first special pattern, and a special pattern 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 for the second special pattern. The number of random numbers that will result in a big win is the same, but the number of random numbers that will result in a small win is set to be different (see FIG. 586). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that will result in a small win different, the player's expectation of receiving a special prize (a big win or a small win) can be made different between the drawing of the first special pattern and the drawing of the second special pattern. The special pattern 1 random number 18 table 202ra1 and the special pattern 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 are provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Now, referring to FIG. 586, the first winning random number 18 table 202ra will be described. FIG. 586(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number 18 table 202ra, FIG. 586(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special pattern 1 random number 18 table 202ra1, and FIG. 586(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special pattern 2 random number 18 table 202ra2. This first winning random number 18 table 202ra is a table in which a random number value (determination value) that is determined to be a big win and a random number value (determination value) that is determined to be a small win are set in the drawing of the first special pattern or the second special pattern.

Specifically, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the special symbol 1 random number 18 table 202ra1 is referenced. As shown in FIG. 586(b), the special symbol 1 random number 18 table 202ra1 specifies that the values of the random number counter C1 between "0 and 4" are the jackpot determination values, and other values are specified as the determination values for non-jackpots (i.e., misses). Then, when the lottery for the first special symbol is executed, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any of "0 to 4," it is determined to be a jackpot.

When the lottery for the second special symbol is executed, the special symbol 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 is referenced. As shown in FIG. 586(c), the special symbol 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 specifies that the value of the random number counter C1 is "0 to 4" as the jackpot determination value, "5 to 144" as the small jackpot determination value, and "145 to 999" as the other value (i.e., miss). Then, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the value of the first win random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any of "0 to 4", it is determined to be a jackpot, and if the value is any of "5 to 144", it is determined to be a small jackpot.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is reached, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the 18th control example), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64. In addition, in a state where the lottery (change) of the special symbol can be executed (i.e., a state other than during the change of the special symbol and during the big win game or small win game), the value is stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area is not a random number that is determined to be a big win or small win for a special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that is determined to be a miss for a special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a miss for a special pattern.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area is a random number that results in a jackpot with a special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a jackpot with a special pattern. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern reserved ball execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter with a range of 0 to 999. In this first winning random number counter C1, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are drawn, there are five random number values that result in a jackpot for the special symbol, and the random number values "0 to 4" are stored in the special symbol 1 random number 18 table 202ra1 and the special symbol 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 of the first winning random number 18 table 202ra, as described above. In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example, the total number of random number values that result in a jackpot is 5 out of a total of 1000, so the probability of a jackpot for a special symbol is "1/200".

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. In the 18th control example, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to refer to the jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb will be explained with reference to FIG. 587.

Figure 587 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb. As shown in Figure 587 (a), the 18th control example has a special pattern 1 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb1 used to determine the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired when the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is drawn, and a special pattern 2 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb2 used to determine the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired when the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is drawn. This allows the jackpot type when a jackpot is won by the drawing of special symbol 1 to be different from the jackpot type when a jackpot is won by the drawing of special symbol 2, or allows the ratio at which each of the multiple jackpot types is selected to be different, providing players with different playability between a game using the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and a game using the second special symbol (special symbol 2), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 587(b), the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb1 used when drawing the first special symbol (special symbol 1) will be explained. FIG. 587(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special symbol 1 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb1. As shown in FIG. 587(b), when the normal state is set as the game state, the jackpot type in the first jackpot type counter C2 is "jackpot A" if the random number value is any of "0 to 9", "jackpot B" if the random number value is any of "10 to 49", and "jackpot C" if the random number value is any of "50 to 99". When the time-saving state is set as the game state, if the random number value in the first winning type counter C2 is any of "0-9", the jackpot type is "jackpot D", if it is any of "10-49", the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and if it is any of "50-99", the jackpot type is "jackpot B".

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 16, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. In addition to the large number of rounds, the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, so "Jackpot A" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, there are 10 random number values that select "Jackpot A", so the probability that "Jackpot A" will be selected when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 10%.

"Jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 7, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Although the number of rounds is fewer than the above-mentioned "Jackpot A," "Jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, since the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, 40 random number values are used to select "Jackpot B," so the probability that "Jackpot B" will be selected when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 40%.

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 7, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state (non-time-saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the jackpot, "Jackpot C" is a disadvantageous jackpot type for players. Of the 100 possible counter values (random number values) of the first jackpot type counter C2, 50 random number values will select "Jackpot C", so the probability that "Jackpot C" will be selected when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is 50%.

"Jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 16, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. In addition to the large number of rounds, the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, so "Jackpot D" is the most advantageous jackpot type for the player. Furthermore, compared to the above-mentioned "Jackpot A," "Jackpot D" is configured to set a time-saving state that is difficult to end. Therefore, it is a more advantageous jackpot type for the player than "Jackpot A," in which the same jackpot game is executed and the same game state is set after the jackpot game ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) which is set to the normal state, there is a 10% chance that a 16-round jackpot game will be selected, and a 90% chance that a 7-round jackpot game will be selected. In addition, there is a 50% chance that a jackpot will be selected in which the game state after the jackpot game ends will transition to a time-saving state.

On the other hand, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) executed while the time-saving state is set, 16 rounds of jackpot play is selected 50% of the time, and 7 rounds of jackpot play is selected 50% of the time. Also, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot play executed based on the winning jackpot.

In other words, winning a jackpot in the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than winning a jackpot in the normal state in terms of the content of the jackpot game and the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, as for the game state at the time of winning a jackpot, the time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

Next, referring to FIG. 587(c), the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb2 used when drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2) will be described. FIG. 587(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the special symbol 2 jackpot type selection 18 table 202rb2. As shown in FIG. 587(c), when the random number value is any of "0 to 99" in the first jackpot type counter C2, the jackpot type is "jackpot E". "Jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 10 rounds as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. Although the number of rounds is less than the above-mentioned "jackpot A", the game state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, so "jackpot E" is a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the jackpot type "jackpot E," which is advantageous to the player, is always selected.

In the eighteenth control example, five types of jackpots are provided, but the number is not limited to five, and may be four or less, or six or more. Also, different jackpot types may be selected for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, even if the first jackpot type counter C2 has the same value. By configuring in this way, for example, when a jackpot is obtained with the second special symbol, a jackpot type that is executed in a larger number of rounds can be set, so that the player can be more likely to expect a jackpot with the second special symbol. Therefore, a jackpot in a high probability game state can be made more advantageous to the player, and the entertainment value of the game during the high probability state can be improved. Therefore, the player can be strongly motivated to move to the high probability state, and can play for a longer period of time.

Also, the types of jackpot types selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (allocation rate) of each jackpot type may be the same, and only the range of the first jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type may be different. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts of obtaining the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 by targeting a specific counter value from being carried out with both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The small win type counter C5 determines the type of small win when a special pattern small win occurs and determines the display mode of the first pattern display device 37. It is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small win type counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the 18th control example), and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and is stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 in a state in which the lottery (change) of the special pattern can be executed (i.e., a state other than during the change of the special pattern and during the big win game or small win game).

The value of the small win type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. If the result of the big win lottery for the second special symbol is a small win, a small win type selection 18 table 202rf (see FIG. 588) for determining the type of small win to be executed is set in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the contents of the small win type selection 18 table 202rf will be explained with reference to FIG. 588. FIG. 588 is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the small win type selection 18 table 202rf. As shown in FIG. 588, the small win type selection 18 table 202rf stipulates that three types of small wins A, B, and C are selected as the small win type of the second special pattern according to the value of the small win type counter C5. Specifically, when the acquired value of the small win type counter C5 is "0 to 49", the small win type is "small win A (V passing big win A)", when it is either "50 to 79", the small win type is "small win B (V passing big win B)", and when it is either "80 to 99", the small win type is "small win C (V passing big win E)".

Here, for each small win type (small win A, B, C), when the ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 during a small win game, a type of big win game is set to be executed after the small win game ends. In the case of small win A, big win A (16R time-saving big win) is set, and after the execution of small win A, a big win in which the variable winning device 65 is set to a 16R open state is executed, and then a time-saving state (a period in which the special pattern changes 7 times, or until small win A is won twice, small win B is won 5 times, or small win C is won 3 times) is set. In addition, in the case of small win B, a big win B (a big win with 7R time reduction) is set, and after the execution of small win B, a big win in which the variable winning device 65 is set to a 7R open state is executed, and then a time reduction state (a period until the special pattern changes 7 times, or until the small win A is won twice, the small win B is won 5 times, or until the small win C is won 3 times) is set. In addition, in the case of small win C, a big win E (a big win with 10R time reduction) is set, and after the execution of small win C, a big win in which the variable winning device 65 is set to a 10R open state is executed, and then a time reduction state (a period until the special pattern changes 7 times, or until the small win A is won twice, the small win B is won 5 times, or until the small win C is won 3 times) is set.

In this way, the content of the big win game that is executed after the small win game ends can be changed depending on the type of small win selected. Specifically, small win A is set as the most advantageous small win for the player because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is large (16R), while small win B is set as less advantageous than the above-mentioned small win A because the number of rounds executed in the big win game is small (7R).

In the 18th control example, the time-saving end conditions for the time-saving state that is set after the end of the big win game via the small win game are the same for each small win type, but this is not limited to this, and the time-saving end conditions for the time-saving state that is set may be different depending on the small win type.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the 18th control example, the time-saving state can be ended with a time-saving end condition that is established based on the result of the second special pattern lottery (such as the number of times small win A is won, the number of times small win B is won, or the number of times small win C is won), or a time-saving end condition that is established based on the number of times the special patterns (first special pattern and second special pattern) change. By configuring in this way, if a jackpot is won with one or more reserved balls for the first special pattern and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the time-saving state will not end even if the first special pattern (special pattern 1) changes after the jackpot ends. In addition, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) changes and a small prize (small prize A, small prize B, small prize C) that can execute a big prize game is won, the time-saving end condition is met based on the number of times the special symbol changes, and the time-saving state can be ended before the time-saving end condition is met, so that it is possible to suppress the repeated execution of a game in which the game ball is not allowed to pass through a specific area during a small prize game until a favorable small prize (small prize A) is won during the time-saving state until the second end condition is met.

Next, the contents of the variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd will be explained with reference to FIG. 589(a). FIG. 589(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd. As shown in FIG. 589(a), the variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd defines the normal variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd1 used when the normal state is set as the game state, and the time-saving variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd2 used when the time-saving state is set. Details will be described later, but in the 18th control example, the data table used to select the variation pattern is different depending on the game state, so that the variation pattern (variation time) selected depending on the game state can be different.

Figure 589 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd1 provided in the variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd. As shown in Figure 589 (b), the normal variation pattern selection 18 table 202rd1 defines the pattern type, lottery result, and the value range of the variation type counter CS1 in association with the variation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 589(b), the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is "miss", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is specified to correspond to a short miss with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds in the range of "0 to 139", to correspond to a false miss with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds in the range of "140 to 149", to correspond to various normal reaches with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds in the range of "150 to 179", and to correspond to a super reach with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds in the range of "180 to 198".

In addition, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the lottery result is "jackpot", and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29", various normal reaches with a fluctuation time of 40 seconds are associated with it, the range of "30 to 189" is associated with it, super reaches with a fluctuation time of 80 seconds are associated with it, and the range of "190 to 198" is associated with it, special reaches with a fluctuation time of 140 seconds are associated with it.

Next, if the symbol type is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., a long miss with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds is specified for the entire range, and if the lottery result is a "big win or small win," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., a long win with a fluctuation time of 180 seconds is specified for the entire range.

In this way, depending on the result of the lottery for the special pattern, one of the change patterns with a change time between 7 seconds and 180 seconds is set, and by sending a command indicating this change pattern to the voice lamp control device 113, a change performance corresponding to the change time is executed by the third pattern display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 589(b), the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) selected in the normal fluctuation pattern selection 18 table 202rd1 is specified so that when the pattern type is special pattern 1 and the lottery result is a miss, the order of most likely to be selected is 7 seconds (selection rate of about 70%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), 80 seconds (selection rate of about 10%), and 20 seconds (selection rate of about 5%). Also, when the lottery result is a jackpot, the order of most likely to be selected is 80 seconds (selection rate of about 80%), 40 seconds (selection rate of about 15%), and 140 seconds (selection rate of about 5%).

In this way, there is a correlation between the lottery result of the special symbol and the selected fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), and the ratio of fluctuation times (fluctuation patterns) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and the ratio of fluctuation times (fluctuation patterns) selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot when a specific fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is selected. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict whether or not they will win a jackpot based on the selected fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern).

In the eighteenth control example, the same variation pattern table is used regardless of the type of jackpot that is won, but the present invention is not limited to this, and different variation pattern tables may be used when the jackpot type indicates a jackpot that is advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot A) and when the jackpot type indicates other jackpots (jackpot B, jackpot C). In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating an advantageous jackpot (jackpot A) is won so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating other jackpots is won. This allows the player to be interested in the variation time of the special symbol, since the longer the variation time set in the executed variation pattern, the more advantageous the game result can be expected to be for the player.

Also, the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating a normal jackpot is won may be configured to select a variation pattern with a longer variation time more easily than the variation pattern table used when a jackpot type indicating a guaranteed jackpot is won. This makes it possible to provide the player with an unexpected game result when a jackpot is won with a short variation time, and keeps the player excited until the end even when a short variation time is selected.

Next, the contents of the time-saving fluctuation pattern selection 18 table 202rd2 provided in the fluctuation pattern selection 18 table 202rd will be explained with reference to FIG. 590. FIG. 590 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving fluctuation pattern selection 18 table 202rd2. As shown in FIG. 590, the time-saving fluctuation pattern selection 18 table 202rd2 defines the pattern type, the number of fluctuations, the lottery result, and the range of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in association with the fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 590, when the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations is 1-4, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a short miss with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified for the entire range, and when the lottery result is a "jackpot," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a short big win with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is specified for the entire range. When the symbol type is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the number of fluctuations is 5 or more, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a miss with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified for the entire range, and when the lottery result is a "jackpot," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0-198," i.e., a win with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is specified for the entire range. In addition, if the pattern type is the second special pattern (special pattern 2), the number of fluctuations is 1 or more, and the lottery result is a "miss," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 198," i.e., the entire range is set to a miss with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds; if the lottery result is a "small win," the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to the range of "0 to 160," a short and small win with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and a range of "161 to 198," a long and small win with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds; and if the lottery result is a "jackpot," a long and big win with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is set.

Returning to FIG. 584, the explanation continues. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 239). Also, when the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In the 18th control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 314), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the second pattern reserved ball execution area of the RAM 203.

The random number value that results in a winning normal symbol is set by the second winning random number 18 table 202rc stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the winning random number value set by the second winning random number 18 table 202rc, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. Note that, in the 18th control example, the probability of winning a normal symbol is configured to always be constant regardless of the game state of the pachinko machine 10, but other configurations may be used.

For example, the second winning random number 18 table 202rc may be provided with two types: one for a low probability of a normal pattern (period when the normal pattern is in its normal state), and one for a high probability of a normal pattern winning that is higher than the low probability (period when the normal pattern is in its time-saving state). In this case, the number of winning random numbers contained in each is set to be different. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different, the probability of a win can be changed between the low probability of a normal pattern and the high probability of a normal pattern.

When the ball passes through the normal start hole 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained and it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving state. If the game state is in the time-saving state, the second pattern display device 83 displays a variable normal pattern for three seconds. On the other hand, if the game state is not in the time-saving state, the second pattern display device 83 displays a variable normal pattern for 30 seconds.

If the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "○" pattern is displayed as the stopped pattern (second pattern). Then, it is determined whether the game state at the time when the second pattern is displayed (determined display) as a stopped pattern is in a time-saving state, and if the time when the second pattern is displayed (determined display) as a stopped pattern is in a time-saving state and the time when the variable start of the second pattern is also in a time-saving state, the operation of the electric role 640a is controlled (long opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in other cases, the operation of the electric role 640a is controlled (short opening control) so that the second ball entrance 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". The opening time and number of times of the second ball entrance 640 may be set arbitrarily.

In this way, the normal symbol variation time and the operation of the electric device 640a when a winning combination is selected (opening period and number of times the second ball entrance 640 is opened) are configured to be variable depending on the set game state. When the game state when the normal symbol starts to vary is in the time-saving state, the time of the variation display becomes very short (30 seconds → 3 seconds) compared to the normal state. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second symbol that starts to vary during the time-saving state is a win and the time-saving state is also set at the time when the electric device 640a starts to operate, the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long (0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times) compared to other cases, making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. A table (not shown) that stores random numbers that determine whether the normal symbol is a win or not from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202.

In the 18th control example, the time for the second symbol to change and the operation of the electric device 640a are set differently depending on the game state when the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to change and the game state when the electric device 640a starts to operate based on the winning of the normal symbol. However, other configurations may be used. For example, a discrimination means may be provided that determines that the time-saving state is continuously set from the time when the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to change to the time when the electric device 640a starts to operate, and the discrimination result of the discrimination means may be used to set the time for the second symbol to change and the operation of the electric device 640a.

As described above, in the 18th control example, in order to execute the operation (long opening) of the electric role 640a that is advantageous to the player, the time-saving state must be set at both the start of the normal pattern change and the start of the operation of the electric role 640a. By configuring in this way, for example, when the second pattern that started changing at the timing when the normal state was set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating a win at the timing when the time-saving state was set, or when the second pattern that started changing at the timing when the time-saving state was set is stopped and displayed with identification information indicating a win at the timing when the normal state was set, the change of the second pattern and the operation of the electric role 640a that is advantageous to the player are executed based on the lottery of one second pattern when they span multiple game states. It is possible to suppress the execution of the operation control (long opening) of the electric role 640a that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 314) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of main process 7 (see Figure 325).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Next, referring to FIG. 585(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th control example will be described. As shown in FIG. 585(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least the first win random number 18 table 202ra, the big win type selection 18 table 202rb, the second win random number 18 table 202rc, the variable pattern selection 18 table 202rd, the time-saving grant 18 table 202re, the small win type selection 18 table 202rf, the opening scenario 7 table 202fg, the time-saving win random number 18 table 202rh, and the time-saving type selection 18 table 202ri as part of the fixed value data.

Incidentally, among the fixed value data stored in ROM 202, the first win random number 18 table 202ra, the big win type selection 18 table 202rb, the second win random number 18 table 202rc, the variable pattern selection 18 table 202rd, and the small win type selection 18 table 202rf have already been explained in detail, so their explanation will be omitted.

The time-saving granting 18 table 202re is a data table that is referenced when multiple time-saving end conditions that end the time-saving state are set differently for each type of jackpot won, and is referenced when the jackpot game ends (the ending period of the jackpot game ends) (S1612: Yes in FIG. 326), and different times of time-saving (time-saving end conditions) are set depending on the type of jackpot.

Here, the contents stipulated in the time-saving granting 18 table 202re will be explained with reference to FIG. 587(d). FIG. 587(d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the time-saving granting 18 table 202re. The 18th control example has jackpot types (jackpots A, B, D, E) in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, and jackpot types (jackpot C) in which a time-saving state is not set after the jackpot ends (a normal state is set), and as shown in FIG. 587(d), multiple time-saving end conditions are stipulated corresponding to each jackpot type.

The 18th control example has a first time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the special pattern changes, a second time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the small prize A is won in the special pattern drawing, a third time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the small prize B is won in the special pattern drawing, and a fourth time-saving end condition that is met depending on the number of times the small prize C is won in the special pattern drawing.

Specifically, in the case of jackpot types A, B, and E, the time-saving end condition is set to "7" in the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition), "2" in the small win A counter 203fg, "5" in the small win B counter 203fh, and "3" in the small win C counter 203ra. In the case of jackpot D, the time-saving end condition is set to "100" in the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition), "4" in the small win A counter 203fg, "10" in the small win B counter 203fh, and "7" in the small win C counter 203ra.

As described above, in the 18th control example, when the jackpot type is jackpot C, the time-saving state is not set after the jackpot game ends, so the values to be set for the various counters described above are not specified for jackpot C in the time-saving granting 18 table 202re. In this way, by making the end conditions of the time-saving state set after the jackpot game ends different for each jackpot type won, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the specific time-saving content even if the player is notified in advance that the time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends, so that the player can play with heightened motivation to play until the end (until the time-saving state ends).

In the 18th control example, the time-saving state is configured to end when a jackpot with a special symbol is won in addition to the time-saving end state set using the time-saving granting 18 table 202re. However, since the time-saving end condition established based on winning the jackpot does not differ depending on the type of jackpot set, it is omitted from the time-saving granting 18 table 202re. However, the time-saving end condition described above (the time-saving end condition established based on winning the jackpot with a special symbol) may also be configured to specify a value in the time-saving granting 18 table 202re.

Furthermore, in this 18th control example, the time-saving state (second time-saving) is set even when the time-saving prize is won in the special pattern lottery, but the time-saving end condition set for the second time-saving prize will be explained with reference to the time-saving type selection 18 table 202ri, which will be described later. Note that in this 18th control example, the time-saving end condition for the time-saving state (second time-saving) that is set based on the time-saving prize being won is set with reference to the time-saving type selection 18 table 202ri, not the time-saving granting 18 table 202re, but without being limited to this, the time-saving end condition corresponding to the second time-saving prize may be specified in the time-saving granting 18 table 202re.

In the 18th control example, a configuration having the above-mentioned first to fourth time-saving end conditions is used as the multiple time-saving end conditions, but other conditions may be set as the time-saving end conditions. For example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the first special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50 times), a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the second special symbol changes reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 80 times), or a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the small prize is won and the V prize winning device is activated (the total number of times the values of the small prize A counter 203fg, the small prize B counter 203fh, and the small prize C counter 203ra are added together) may be set.

Furthermore, it is also possible to set a time-saving end condition that is established based on other factors, rather than on the number of times the special symbol changes or the lottery results. For example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the normal symbol changes or the number of times the normal symbol has been won (the number of times the electric device 640a has been activated) reaches a predetermined number, or a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of balls that have entered a specific ball entry port (for example, the general winning port 63) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 balls), etc., may be set in advance.

As described above, by setting multiple time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, and configuring the time-saving state to end when any of the time-saving end conditions is set, it becomes difficult for the player to know in advance how long the time-saving state will continue, and this makes it possible to prevent monotonous gameplay.

In addition, in the 18th control example, a control is used in which the time-saving state is terminated when any one of the multiple time-saving end conditions is satisfied, but in addition to this, for example, a configuration in which the time-saving end condition is satisfied when a predetermined number (e.g., two) of multiple time-saving end conditions are satisfied may also be used. In this case, a number-of-conditions-satisfied determination means for determining the number of satisfied time-saving end conditions and a condition-achieved determination means for determining whether the number of satisfied conditions determined by the number-of-conditions-satisfied determination means has reached a predetermined number (e.g., two) may be provided, and the time-saving state may be terminated (a normal state may be set) when the number of satisfied conditions is determined by the condition-achieved determination means to have reached the predetermined number (e.g., two).

In addition, a content discrimination means may be provided that discriminates the content of the time-saving end condition that is first established, and a discrimination criterion number variable means may be provided that varies a predetermined number (e.g., two) that serves as the discrimination criterion for the condition achievement discrimination means based on the discrimination result of the content discrimination means. This makes it possible to set a time-saving state that is easy to end or a time-saving state that is difficult to end depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is first established, so that the player can be motivated to play even after the time-saving state has been set.

In addition to the above, a predetermined period measurement means for measuring a predetermined period after the time-saving state is set (for example, until the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 10) and a result determination means for determining the measurement result of the predetermined period measurement means may be provided, and if the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, a time-saving end delay means for delaying the end of the time-saving state until the predetermined period has elapsed even if the above-mentioned time-saving end condition is established may be provided, or an end condition invalidation means for invalidating the established time-saving end condition when the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period may be provided. Also, while the result determination means determines that the current time is within the predetermined period, the process of determining whether the time-saving end condition is established or updating (subtracting) the values of various counters set corresponding to each time-saving end condition may not be executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably prevent the time-saving state from ending immediately after it is set, and the timing for ending the time-saving state can be set in a complex manner. In addition, when using a process for ending the time-saving state based on the establishment of multiple time-saving end conditions as described above, it is preferable to set multiple time-saving end conditions as a priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 100 times) and a non-priority time-saving end condition (for example, a time-saving end condition that is established when the number of small wins reaches 3 times), and to configure the time-saving state to end immediately when the priority time-saving end condition is established, and to end the time-saving state when only multiple non-priority time-saving end conditions are established. By setting the priority time-saving end condition in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessive time-saving state.

Open scenario 7 table 202fg is the same as open scenario 7 table 202fg in the seventh control example described above, so a detailed description of it will be omitted.

The time-saving random number 18 table 202rh is a data table in which the value (judgment value) of the first winning random number counter C1, which is judged to be a time-saving win in the lottery for the first special pattern or the second special pattern, is specified in correspondence with the game state. Here, the contents of the time-saving random number 18 table 202rh will be explained with reference to FIG. 591(a). FIG. 591(a) is a diagram showing the contents specified in the time-saving random number 18 table 202rh.

Specifically, regardless of the type of special symbol, when the game state is normal (low probability state for special symbols and normal symbols), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is set to a range of "3, 4, 140 to 287" as the judgment value for a time-saving win, and for other game states, no judgment value for a time-saving win is set.

Here, in this 18th control example, the judgment of the big win and the judgment of the time-saving win can be executed in a single special pattern lottery. Also, the judgment of the small win and the time-saving win can be executed in a overlapping manner. Therefore, for example, if the acquired value of the first win random number counter C1 is "3, 4", it is judged as a big win in the big win judgment executed using the first win random number 18 table 202ra (see FIG. 586 (a)), and it is judged as a time-saving win in the time-saving win judgment executed using the time-saving win random number 18 table 202rh (see FIG. 591 (a)), so that both the big win and the time-saving win are won. Similarly, if the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is "140 to 144," a small win is determined in the small win determination performed using the special pattern 2 random number 18 table 202ra2 (see FIG. 586 (c)), and a time-saving win is determined in the time-saving win determination performed using the time-saving win random number 18 table 202rh (see FIG. 591 (a)), resulting in a double win in both the small win and the time-saving win.

As described above, in this 18th control example, the jackpot (small jackpot) determination is performed after the time-saving winning determination is performed, so in the case of a double win, the jackpot (small jackpot) is won in the time-saving state. Therefore, a more advantageous bonus can be awarded to the player compared to winning the jackpot (small jackpot) without winning the time-saving state.

In this 18th control example, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in one special pattern lottery is used to determine whether or not there is a big win (small win) and whether or not there is a time-saving win, and if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained is the winning determination value in either determination, a double win is possible; however, this is not limited to this, and for example, when the right to execute a special pattern lottery is acquired, the value of the random number counter for determining a big win (small win) and the value of the random number counter for determining a time-saving win may be obtained separately, and the obtained values may be used to determine whether or not there is a big win (small win) and whether or not there is a time-saving win.

The time-saving type selection 18 table 202ri is a data table that is referenced when setting the time-saving end conditions for the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set when the time-saving state is won in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving type is specified in accordance with the value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1.

Now, with reference to FIG. 591(b), the contents of the time-saving type selection 18 table 202ri will be explained. FIG. 591(b) is a diagram showing the contents specified in the time-saving type selection 18 table 202ri. As shown in FIG. 591(b), the time-saving type selection 18 table 202ri specifies a time-saving type corresponding to the acquired value of the time-saving type selection counter CC1, and specifies a time-saving end condition corresponding to the specified time-saving type.

Specifically, time-saving A is specified as the time-saving type for the entire range ("0 to 99") of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1. Then, a time-saving end condition is specified in which "1" is set to the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition) as the time-saving end condition corresponding to time-saving A. In other words, the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state is set when the process of updating the value of the time-saving counter 203h is executed once. Therefore, if a time-saving win is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving state is set at the time of the time-saving win, and then a jackpot determination is made in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving state is set until the special pattern variation starts to show the result of the special pattern lottery.

In other words, if the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern lottery, it is possible to set a time-saving feature only for the purpose of making the jackpot determination in the special pattern lottery during the time-saving feature (making a special lottery) during the time-saving feature. Therefore, if the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern lottery, it is possible for only the jackpot determination to be made during the time-saving feature without the player realizing that they have won the time-saving feature, so that if the player wins the jackpot, an unexpected bonus (the jackpot gameplay content, the time-saving feature after the jackpot game ends) can be given to the player.

As shown in FIG. 591(b), in this 18th control example, when the time-saving type is won in the special pattern lottery, the time-saving type A is always set as the time-saving type, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a time-saving type different from time-saving type A may be selectable depending on the value of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1. In this case, for example, the time-saving type A is specified as the time-saving type for the range of the acquired time-saving type selection counter CC1 from "0 to 94", and the time-saving type Z different from time-saving type A is specified as the time-saving type for the range of "95 to 99", and a time-saving end condition in which "100" is set to the time-saving counter 203h (first time-saving end condition) is specified as the time-saving end condition corresponding to time-saving type Z.

By configuring it in this way, in some cases where a time-saving win is made in the special symbol lottery, it is possible to set a time-saving state for continuing to execute the second special symbol lottery, rather than a time-saving state for executing a special lottery, providing players with a more unexpected experience.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 18th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 585(b). FIG. 585(b) is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the RAM 203 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example. As shown in FIG. 585(b), the RAM 203 in this 18th control example differs from the above-mentioned 7th control example in that a small win C counter 203ra is added, but otherwise is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The small win C counter 203ra is a counter for counting the number of times a small win with small win C set as the small win type is won until one of the time-saving end conditions set during the time-saving state is met. When it is determined in the big win control process 7 (S11504 in FIG. 326) that it is the end timing of the ending presentation (end timing of the big win) (S11612 in FIG. 326: Yes), the value (1) specified in the time-saving grant 18 table 202re is set (S11614 in FIG. 326).

Then, in the small win time-saving update process 18 (S40405 in FIG. 597) executed in place of the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405 in FIG. 321) executed in the small win start setting process (S10223 in FIG. 320) of the special pattern change process 7 (S10104 in FIG. 315), if it is determined that the small win type of the small win won this time is not small win B (S40510 in FIG. 597: No), the counter value is decremented by 1. If it is determined that the value of the small win C counter 203ra after the decrement is 0 (S40514 in FIG. 597: Yes), the time-saving end condition is met, and the normal state is set as the game state (S40507 in FIG. 597). In the 18th control example, a plurality of time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state are set, and even if any of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied (for example, even if the time-saving end condition based on the number of times of special pattern fluctuation is satisfied), the value of the counter is set (reset) to 0 (S40606 in FIG. 596). In this way, even if a time-saving end condition other than the time-saving end condition that refers to the value of the small win C counter 203ra (the fourth time-saving end condition) among the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the value of the small win C counter 203fra is set (reset) to 0, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the process of subtracting the value of the small win C counter 203ra is continued even though the time-saving state has ended. In addition, regardless of which of the plurality of time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the values of various counters used when determining whether the time-saving end condition is satisfied when terminating the time-saving state are set to the initial value (0), so that it is possible to prevent the process after the time-saving state is terminated from becoming complicated.

Next, referring to FIG. 592(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 18th control example will be described. FIG. 592(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this 18th control example. As shown in FIG. 592(a), the ROM 222 of this 18th control example differs from the ROM 222 of the seventh control example described above (see FIG. 311(a)) in that a performance mode selection 18 table 222ra and a V icon acquisition performance setting table 222rb have been added. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

Now, with reference to FIG. 593(a), the contents defined in the performance mode selection 18 table 222ra will be explained. FIG. 593(a) is a diagram showing a schematic of the contents defined in the performance mode selection 18 table 222ra. As shown in FIG. 593(a), the performance mode selection 18 table 222ra defines a normal performance mode setting table 222ra1, a time-saving performance mode setting A table 222ra2, and a time-saving performance mode setting B table 222ra3.

The normal performance mode setting 222ra1 (not shown) is a table that is referenced when a special symbol variable display is executed in the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols). It sets the performance mode based on the type of variable pattern set in the main control device 110 and the value of the performance counter CS1.

Figure 593 (b) shows the contents of the time-saving performance mode setting A table 222ra2. The time-saving performance mode setting A table 222ra2 is a table that is referenced when a special symbol variable display is executed in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). The performance mode is set based on the variable pattern type set in the main control device 110 and the value of the performance counter CS1.

Figure 593 (c) shows the contents of the time-saving performance mode setting B table 222ra3. The time-saving performance mode setting B table 222ra3 is a table that is referenced when a special symbol variable display is executed in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols). The performance mode is set based on the variable pattern type set in the main control device 110 and the value of the performance counter CS1.

Details will be described later, but in this 18th control example, in the time-saving state, when the activation of the above-mentioned V icon (the V icon notifying the player that a small jackpot has been won in the changing display of the special pattern being executed is notified by enlarging the display, notifying the player that a small jackpot has been won in the time-saving performance mode setting B table 222ra3) is executed, and in other cases, the time-saving performance mode setting A table 222ra2 is referenced.

For example, in the time-saving state, when "long/small win" is set as the fluctuation pattern type, in the time-saving performance mode setting A table 222ra3, the probability that "win" will be selected is 150/199 (approximately 75%), the probability that "revival win" will be selected is 40/199 (approximately 20%), and the probability that "premium performance" will be selected is 9/199 (approximately 5%). On the other hand, in the time-saving performance mode setting B table 222ra3, the probability that "win" will be selected is 190/199 (approximately 95%), the probability that "revival win" will be selected is 9/199 (approximately 5%), and the premium performance will not be selected.

This configuration makes it easier for players to predict whether or not the V icon will be activated depending on the presentation mode, making it possible to create interest in the presentation mode.

In the 18th control example, the ratio of the presentation modes selected when the V icon is activated is different from the ratio of the presentation modes selected when the V icon is not activated, but this is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to provide a presentation mode that can be selected only when the V icon is activated.

Next, the V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb will be described with reference to FIG. 594. The V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect during the ending period of a jackpot game when a jackpot game is started and a reserve (V reserve) that will win a small jackpot is present among the reserved special pattern 2 reserves (winning information of the second special pattern) that are reserved and stored.

As shown in FIG. 594, whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect is determined based on the position of the V reserve, the number of reserves, and the value of the effect counter CS1. The position of the V reserve is determined by which of the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a the V reserve is stored in. For example, if the special chart 2 reserve stored in the fourth area is a V reserve, the reserve 4 column is referenced.

In addition, in this 18th control example, the V icon acquisition effect is most likely to be executed when the V reserve is stored in the fourth area, followed by the third area, the second area, and the first area, in that order.

By configuring it in this way, a period of time can be given to the player to acquire a new Special Chart 2 Reserve before the V Reserve is consumed, so that when the V Icon is activated, it is easier to leave behind many Special Chart 2 Reserves that have not been read ahead at the time the V Icon acquisition performance that acquired the V Icon is executed, making it difficult for the player to predict the lottery results for the Special Chart 2 Reserve after the V Icon is activated.

In addition, when V reserves are stored in the first area, the ease with which the V icon acquisition effect is executed varies depending on the number of reserves, and it is configured so that the V icon acquisition effect is more likely to be executed when the number of reserves is 1 than when the number of reserves is 4.

By configuring it in this way, when a V icon acquired by a V icon acquisition performance is activated during the variable display of special symbols after the end of a jackpot game, it becomes easier to leave many of the Special Chart 2 Reserves remaining at the time the V icon is activated that have not been read ahead at the time the V icon acquisition performance that acquired the V icon is executed, making it difficult for players to predict the lottery results for the Special Chart 2 Reserves after the V icon is activated.

However, this is not limited to the above, and the V icon acquisition effect may be most easily executed when the V reserve is stored in the first area, followed by the second area, the third area, and the fourth area in that order. Also, when the V reserve is stored in the first area, the V icon acquisition effect may be less easily executed when the reserve number is 1 than when the reserve number is 4.

Next, referring to FIG. 592(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 592(b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 18th control example differs from the above-mentioned 7th control example in that a special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223ra, a V icon acquisition performance execution flag 223rb, and a V icon display flag 223rc have been added. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

The V icon acquisition performance execution flag 223rb is set on in the V icon acquisition performance setting process (see FIG. 602), details of which will be described later, and is set off in the ending process (see FIG. 603).

The V icon display flag 223rc is set to ON when the V icon acquisition effect is executed in the ending process (see FIG. 603), and while it is set to ON, the V icon is displayed in a reduced size even after the jackpot game has ended, and is set to OFF when the V icon is activated in the time-saving effect mode setting process (see FIG. 606).

Next, referring to FIG. 595, the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example will be described. FIG. 595 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the game of the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example. As shown in FIG. 595, the pachinko machine 10 in the 18th control example is configured to reserve and store the winning information of the second special symbol in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, compared to the above-mentioned 7th control example. Therefore, when the time-saving end condition is established in a state where the special symbol 2 reserved (winning information of the second special symbol) is acquired in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbol), it becomes possible to win a jackpot or a small jackpot with the special symbol 2 reserved in the normal game state (low probability state of normal symbol). Therefore, in such a case, it differs from the 7th control example in that the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends and that the small jackpot C is added, and the other game flows are the same, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding control processing executed by main control device 110 in the 18th control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Fig. 596 to Fig. 606. Note that detailed description of the same contents as those of the control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the above-mentioned seventh control example will be omitted. Also, among the control processes that are the same as those of the control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the main control device 113 in the above-mentioned seventh control example, some control processes are given different reference numerals for convenience of description, but detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 596, update process 18 (S48253) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 596 is a flowchart showing this update process 18 (S48253). This update process 18 (S48253) is a process executed in place of update process 7 (S8253) executed in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 7 (S10210 in FIG. 318) of the seventh control example described above, and differs from update process 7 (S8253 in FIG. 319) in that a configuration related to the small win C has been added, but the other processes are the same.

Specifically, after executing the process of S40605 in FIG. 596 (corresponding to the process of S10605 in FIG. 319 in the seventh control example), a configuration has been added in which the small win A counter, small win B counter, and small win C counter are set to 0 (S40606).

Next, referring to FIG. 597, the small win time-saving update process 18 (S40405) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 597 is a flowchart showing this small win time-saving update process 18 (S40405). This small win time-saving update process 18 (S40405) is a process executed in place of the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405) executed in the small win start setting process (S10223 in FIG. 320) of the seventh control example described above, and differs from the small win time-saving update process 7 (S10405 in FIG. 321) in that a process related to small win C has been added, but the other processes are the same.

Specifically, after executing the process of S40505 (corresponding to the process of S10505 in FIG. 321 in the seventh control example), a configuration has been added in which the small win A counter, small win B counter, and small win C counter are set to 0 (S40506).

In addition, in the process of S40510 (corresponding to the process of S10510 in FIG. 321 in the seventh control example), if it is determined that the small win is not a B (S40510: No), the value of the small win C counter 203ra is decremented by 1 (S40513), and it is determined whether the small win C counter 203ra is 0 (S40514). In the process of S40514, if it is determined that the value of the small win C counter 203ra is 0 (S40514: Yes), the process proceeds to S40505, and if it is determined that the value of the small win counter 203ra is not 0 (S40514: No), the process proceeds to S40508.

Next, the processing contents of the start winning process 18 (S40105) will be explained with reference to FIG. 598. FIG. 598 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the start winning process 18 (S40105). In this start winning process 18 (S40105), the only difference from the start winning process 5 (see S195 in FIG. 258) described above is that when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value of the small win type counter C5 is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S40712), and pre-reading process 18 (S40713) is executed instead of pre-reading process 5 (S653). Since the processing contents are otherwise the same, detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, the contents of the pre-reading process 18 (S40713) will be explained with reference to FIG. 599. FIG. 599 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-reading process 18 (S40713). When this pre-reading process 18 (S40713) is executed, first, the various counter values, namely the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1, and the small win type counter C5, are read from the storage area newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b (S40801). Then, the read data is stored in the empty storage area in the pre-reading reserved storage area with the smallest winning order (S40802).

Next, the result of the hit/miss judgment is determined based on each counter value newly stored in the read-ahead reserved memory area. Note that here, both the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a low probability state and the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a high probability state are determined. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b) and the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information, making it difficult to predict the game state (probability state of the special pattern) that will be set at the time when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot or not (S40803). If it is determined that the result is a jackpot (S40803: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the jackpot type and fluctuation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S40804), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of S40803 is that it is not a big win (S40803: No), then it is determined whether or not it is a small win (S40805), and if it is determined that it is not a small win (S40805: No), a winning command including information that can identify a miss win and a variation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S40807), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S40805 that a small prize has been won (S40805: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the type of small prize and the variation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (S40806), and this processing ends.

The winning command set in the processing of S40804, S40806, or S40807 is set to include, in addition to the information indicating the winning/losing judgment result described above (information that has a different meaning depending on the winning/losing judgment result), information indicating the various counter values read out by the processing of S40801 as common information. The winning command set in this processing is then output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (S11501) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 325).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command, it can execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which it changes the display mode of the reserved balls (for example, by changing the color of the reserved balls to a color different from normal) based on various information contained in the winning command, or it displays a preview pattern or the like before the change starts to suggest to the player the result of the winning/losing judgment (whether or not they have won a big prize or a small prize).

In this control example, since there is only one probability state for the special pattern (low probability state for the special pattern), the information to be set in the winning command (win/lose judgment result) can be set regardless of the game state. However, for example, in a gaming machine that has multiple probability states for the special pattern (high probability state for the special pattern, low probability state for the special pattern), the winning/lose judgment result for the high probability state of the special pattern and the winning/lose judgment result for the low probability state of the special pattern can be distinguished, and the winning command can be set based on the results of each judgment. Alternatively, a judgment value (value of the first win random number counter C1) that is judged to be a jackpot whether the special pattern is in a high probability state or a low probability state can be specified, and the winning command indicating a jackpot for the special pattern can be set only when that judgment value is read.

By configuring it in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot or time-saving win is output to the voice lamp control device 113 only if it is determined in advance that a specific jackpot or time-saving win has occurred, so it is possible to create a sense of anticipation of a jackpot win even with special pattern changes that do not involve a pre-reading performance.

Furthermore, the game state when the lottery for the special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be accurately determined, and a win/lose judgment may be performed based on the game state. In this case, the determination is possible by configuring the selection of the fluctuation pattern to be selected to be constant regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation, rather than varying the selection of the fluctuation pattern depending on the number of reserved balls. When performing a look-ahead, the game state at the start of the fluctuation can be determined by determining the order of fluctuation until the reserved balls start to fluctuate based on the reserved and memorized information.

In addition, in this 18th control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, a read-ahead process is executed based on the winning information, and a win/lose judgment is predicted in advance during the read-ahead process. However, without being limited to this, in the read-ahead process of the main control unit 110, information indicating the contents (counter values) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b may be set as a winning command, and the winning/lose judgment result may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control unit 113 side.

By configuring in this way, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can be configured to execute a process to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and if it is determined that a look-ahead performance should be executed, to analyze the information contained in the winning command received from the main control device 110 (prediction of the winning/losing determination result). As a result, if the look-ahead performance is not executed, specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the winning/losing determination result) is not executed, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary control from being executed in the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to prevent a problem in which a player illegally obtains the results of a look-ahead process that was executed without a title.

Next, with reference to Figs. 600 to 606, the control process contents executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this 18th control example will be explained. This 18th control example differs from the above-mentioned 7th control example in that it adds a command determination process 18 (see Fig. 600), a jackpot-related process 18 (see Fig. 601), and a variable display setting process 18 (see Fig. 604), but is otherwise the same. The same process contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 600, the command determination process 18 (S44112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 600 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 18 (S44112). This command determination process 18 (S44112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for determining the command received from the main control device 110, as described above.

In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S44301). In the process of S44301, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has been received (S44301: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S44302), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S44303), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control unit 114 of the start of the variation performance and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S44301 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S44301: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S44304). Then, if a stop type command has been received (S44304: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d in the RAM 223 is set to on (S44305), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S44306), and this processing ends. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) described below is executed. It is then used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S44304, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S44304: No), then it is determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S44307). Then, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S44307: Yes), the value contained in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the value of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control unit 110 (the reserved number of times N1 of the variable display based on the lottery of the first special pattern) or the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203ra (the reserved number of times N2 of the variable display based on the second special pattern) is extracted, and this is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 223d or the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 223e of the voice lamp control unit 113 (S44308). In addition, in the process of S44308, a display reserved ball count command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223ra. After the process of S44308 ends, this process ends.

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (initial entry), or when a lottery for a special pattern is held, so that each time a initial entry is detected or a lottery for a special pattern is held, the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223ra of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to the values of the first special pattern reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control unit 110 by processing S44308. Therefore, even if the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223ra of the voice lamp control device 113 deviate from the values of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223ra of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected at the time of detecting the start winning or drawing the special pattern, and can be adjusted to the values of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203d and the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203e of the main control device 110. Note that when the process of S44308 is executed, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223ra. As a result, the display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number on the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S44307 that the reserved ball count command has not been received (S44307: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S44311). If it is determined in the process of S44311 that a winning information command has been received (S44311: Yes), the information notified by the received winning information command (the type of ball entry port where the new initial winning was detected, and information indicating the lottery result) is stored in the corresponding memory area of the winning information storage area 223a (S44312), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S44311 that a winning information command has not been received (S44311: No), then it is determined whether or not a command related to a jackpot (any of a jackpot start command, a round number command, or an ending command) has been received (S44313). Then, if it is determined that a command related to a jackpot has been received (S44313: Yes), jackpot-related process 18 is executed to execute control corresponding to the type of command related to the jackpot (S44314), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot-related process 18 (S44314) will be described later with reference to FIG. 601.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S44313 that a command related to a jackpot has not been received (S44313: No), processing according to the other command is executed (S44315), and this processing is terminated. In the processing of S44315, if the other command is a command to be used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is executed, and the processing result is stored in RAM 223, and if it is a command to be used by the display control device 114, the command is set so that the command is sent to the display control device 114.

Next, referring to FIG. 601, we will explain the jackpot-related process 18 (S44314) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. FIG. 601 is a flowchart showing this jackpot-related process 18 (S44314).

In the jackpot-related process 18, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot start command has been received (S42101), and if a jackpot start command has been received (S42101: Yes), a display opening command for starting an opening performance is set (S42106). The display opening command set in the process of S42106 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S4112) of the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, it starts an opening performance in the third pattern display device 81 to notify the start of a jackpot.

After processing S42106, it is determined whether the V icon display flag 223rc is on (S42107). If it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is on (S42107: Yes), processing S42108 is skipped and this process is terminated.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in this 18th control example, when the display of the special pattern based on the V reservation (reservation that wins a small prize) starts, if there is a V reservation among the remaining special pattern 2 reservations, the small prize can be notified without activating the acquired V icon. Therefore, when the V icon display flag 223rc is on at the start of the big prize game, it means that a V icon was acquired in a previously executed big prize game, and the small prize was won without the V icon being activated. Since the player already knows that a consecutive win (continuous small prize wins) will occur because the V icon was not activated, when the V icon display flag 223rc is on, the V icon acquisition performance (see FIG. 582(a)) is not executed.

In the 18th control example, if a V icon is already displayed at the start of a jackpot game, the V icon acquisition effect is not executed during that jackpot game, but this is not limited to the above, and the V icon acquisition effect (see FIG. 582(a)) may be executed even if a V icon is already displayed at the start of a jackpot game. For example, if a V icon is already displayed at the start of a jackpot game and there are multiple V reservations among the remaining special pattern 2 reservations (winning information for the second special pattern), a new V icon acquisition effect may be executed and a V icon may be added.

If it is determined in the processing of S42107 that the V icon display flag 223rc is not on (S42107: No), the V icon acquisition effect setting processing is executed (S42108). Details of the V icon acquisition effect setting processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 602.

On the other hand, in the process of S42101, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S42101: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S42102). Then, if it is determined that a round number command has been received (S42102: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command, and a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set (S42104). The display round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 174) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, it starts a new round performance in the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S42104, this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42102 that the round count command has not been received (S42102: No), then it is determined whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S42103). Then, if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S42103: Yes), an ending process is executed to set the presentation mode of the ending presentation (S42105), and this process ends. Details of the ending process (S42105) will be described later with reference to FIG. 603.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42103 that an ending command has not been received (S42103: No), this processing is terminated. By executing this jackpot-related processing 18 (see FIG. 601), appropriate control can be executed in response to various commands related to the jackpot.

In the 18th control example, the V icon acquisition effect setting process (S42108) is executed when a jackpot game start command is received, but this is not limited to the above, and it may be executed when a round number command is received, or when an ending command is received. By configuring it in this way, it is also possible to read in advance the lottery results for the special chart 2 reserve acquired during the jackpot game.

Next, referring to FIG. 602, the V icon acquisition effect setting process (S42108) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 602 is a flowchart showing the V icon acquisition effect setting process (S42108). This V icon acquisition effect setting process (S42108) is a process executed in the jackpot-related process 18 (see FIG. 601), and is a process for determining whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect during the ending period of the jackpot game.

When the V icon acquisition performance setting process is executed, first, the winning information of the second special pattern stored in the winning information storage area 223a is obtained (S42201). Here, the winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of the reserved balls before the fluctuation begins. When the winning command process (see S4212 in FIG. 177) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the winning information based on the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 is stored in this winning information storage area 223a in order from the first area. The winning information command sent from the main control device 110 is set when the main control device 110's pre-reading process 18 (S40713 in FIG. 599) is executed, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (S11501 in FIG. 325) executed in the main process 7 (see FIG. 325) of the main control device 110.

The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results for the reserved balls, etc., before the change begins. Each time the voice lamp control device 113 executes the change display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182), the winning information stored in the first to fourth areas of this winning information storage area 223a is shifted one by one (the winning information stored in the second area is moved to the first area) (see S4904, S4908 in FIG. 182). This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to reliably determine when the special pattern change corresponding to the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 will be executed.

When the winning information is acquired in S42201, it is next determined whether the winning information (reserved 4) stored in the fourth area is a small prize winning (S42202). If reserved 4 is not a small prize winning, or if there is no reserved 4 (i.e., no winning information is stored in the fourth area) (S42202: No), it is determined whether the winning information (reserved 3) stored in the third area is a small prize winning (S42206). If reserved 3 is not a small prize winning, or if there is no reserved 3 (i.e., no winning information is stored in the third area) (S42206: No), it is determined whether the winning information (reserved 2) stored in the second area is a small prize winning (S42207). If Reserve 2 is not a small prize winning entry, or if there is no Reserve 2 (i.e., no winning information is stored in the second area) (S42207: No), it is determined whether the winning information (Reserve 1) stored in the first area is a small prize winning entry (S42208). If Reserve 1 is not a small prize winning entry, or if there is no Reserve 1 (i.e., no winning information is stored in the first area) (S42208: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S42202, if it is determined that reserved 4 is a small jackpot winning (S42202: Yes), the above-mentioned V icon acquisition performance setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition performance during the ending period. If it is determined that reserved 4 is a small jackpot winning, the reserved 4 column in the V icon acquisition performance setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition performance based on the value of the performance counter CS1 and the number of reserved balls.

In addition, in the process of S42206, if it is determined that reserved 3 is a small jackpot winning (S42206: Yes), the above-mentioned V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect during the ending period. If it is determined that reserved 3 is a small jackpot winning, the reserved 3 column in the V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect based on the value of the effect counter CS1 and the number of reserved balls.

In addition, in the process of S42207, if it is determined that reserved 2 is a small jackpot winning (S42207: Yes), the above-mentioned V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect during the ending period. If it is determined that reserved 3 is a small jackpot winning, the reserved 2 column of the V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect based on the value of the effect counter CS1 and the number of reserved balls.

In addition, in the processing of S42208, if it is determined that reserved 1 is a small jackpot winning (S42208: Yes), the above-mentioned V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect during the ending period. If it is determined that reserved 1 is a small jackpot winning, the reserved 1 column of the V icon acquisition effect setting table 222rb (see FIG. 594) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute a V icon acquisition effect based on the value of the effect counter CS1 and the number of reserved balls.

In this way, in this 18th control example, the lottery results are determined in advance (pre-read) starting with the special symbol 2 reserve (winning information of the second special symbol) that is consumed last after the big win game ends, and if there is a V reserve, it is decided at that point whether or not to execute the V icon acquisition effect. For example, if there are V reserves in reserves 2 and 4, it is decided whether or not to set the V icon acquisition effect when it is determined that reserve 4 is a small win. In this case, if it is decided not to execute the V icon acquisition effect, even if reserve 2 is a V reserve, the configuration is such that no decision is made as to whether or not to execute a new V icon acquisition effect.

In addition, in this 18th control example, when the display of the special pattern based on the V reservation starts to change, it is determined whether or not to activate the acquired V icon. Therefore, for example, even if the V icon acquisition performance is executed based on reservation 4 being a V reservation, it is possible to activate the V icon when the V reservation of reservation 2 is consumed.

In the 18th control example, the lottery results are determined starting from the special symbol 2 reserve (winning information of the second special symbol) that is consumed last after the jackpot game ends, but this is not limited to this, and the lottery results may be determined starting from the special symbol 2 reserve that is consumed first after the jackpot game ends. Also, if there is even one V reserve, the lottery results for the subsequent special symbol 2 reserves are not determined, but they may be determined.

When the process of S42203 ends, the process of S42204 is executed. In the process of S42204, it is determined whether or not the performance mode to be executed during the ending period determined in the process of S42203 includes a V icon acquisition performance, and if the V icon acquisition performance is not included (S42204: No), the process of S42205 is skipped and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42204 that a V icon acquisition performance is to be performed (S42204: Yes), the V icon acquisition performance execution flag 223rb is set to on (S42205), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 603, the ending process (S42105) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice and lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 603 is a flowchart showing the ending process (S42105). This ending process (S42105) is a process executed in the jackpot-related process 18 (see FIG. 601), and is a process for executing the presentation during the ending period of the jackpot game.

When the ending process (S42105) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V icon acquisition performance execution flag 223rb is on or not (S42301). If it is determined that the V icon acquisition performance execution flag 223rb is not on (S42301: No), a normal display ending performance execution command is set (S42305), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42301 that the V icon acquisition performance execution flag 223rb is on (S42301: Yes), a display V icon acquisition performance execution command is set (S42302), the V icon acquisition performance execution flag 223rb is set to off (S42303), the V icon display flag 223rc is set to on (S42304), and this processing ends.

In the 18th control example, the V icon acquisition effect is executed during the ending period of the big win game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the V icon acquisition effect may be executed when the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 (see FIG. 580(a)) during a small win game, or may be executed during a period other than the ending period of the big win game. Alternatively, the V icon acquisition effect may be executed during the variable display of the special pattern. In addition, multiple execution timings of the V icon acquisition effect may be set, and the timing at which the V icon acquisition effect is executed may be set randomly. With this configuration, the player cannot predict the timing at which the V icon acquisition effect will be executed, which prevents the game from becoming monotonous.

Next, referring to FIG. 604, the variable display setting process 18 (S44113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 604 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 18 (S44113). This variable display setting process 18 (S44113) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 174), and generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variation display setting process 18, first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on or not (S42401). Then, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223c is not on (i.e., it is off) (S42401: No), since no variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S42407. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S42401 that the variation start flag 223c is on (S42401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c is turned off (S42402), and then, in the process of S44303 of the command determination process 18 (see FIG. 600), the variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S42403).

Then, a performance mode selection process 18 (S42404) is executed to set the performance mode of the performance executed in the third pattern display device 81. Details of this performance mode selection process 18 (S42404) will be described later with reference to FIG. 605.

Then, based on the presentation mode set in S42404, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S42405). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation presentation so that the third pattern display device 81 displays the third pattern variation in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

Then, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S42406), and the process proceeds to S42407. In the process of S42406, the data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted in order to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area, etc.

In the process of S42406, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on or not (S42407). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (i.e., it is off) (S42407: No), since a stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this variable display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S42407: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is set to off (S42408), and then in the processing of S44306 of the command determination processing 18 (see FIG. 600), the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S42409). Next, based on the stop type obtained in the processing of S42409, a display stop type command is set (S42410), and this processing is terminated. By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 is controlled so that the third pattern display device 81 displays the third pattern stop with the stop type indicated by this display stop type command.

Next, referring to FIG. 605, the performance mode selection process 18 (S42404) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 605 is a flowchart showing the performance mode selection process 18 (S42404). This performance mode selection process 18 (S42404) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604), and is a process for setting the performance mode of the performance executed in the third pattern display device 81.

When the performance mode selection process 18 (S42404) is executed, first, it is determined whether the game state is in the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) (S42501). The current game state is determined based on the information stored in the game state storage area 223f, and if it is determined that the game state is not in the time-saving state (i.e., the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols)) (S42501: No), the performance mode is set by referring to the normal performance mode setting table 222ra1 (not shown) specified in the performance mode selection 18 table 222ra based on the fluctuation pattern extracted in the processing of S42403 of the fluctuation display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the process of S42501 determines that the time-saving state is in effect (S42501: Yes), the process executes the time-saving performance mode setting process (S42502) and ends this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 606, the time-saving performance mode setting process (S42502) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 606 is a flowchart showing the time-saving performance mode setting process (S42502). This time-saving performance mode setting process (S42502) is a process executed in the performance mode selection process 18 (see FIG. 605), and is a process for setting the performance mode of the performance executed in the third pattern display device 81 when the time-saving state is set.

When the time-saving performance mode setting process (S42502) is executed, first, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery that is about to start is a small win or not (S42601). If it is determined that it is not a small win (S42601: No), the performance mode is determined from the time-saving performance mode setting A table 222ra2 based on the fluctuation pattern extracted in the processing of S42403 of the fluctuation display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) and the value of the performance counter CS1 (S42609), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42601 that it is a small win (S42601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V icon display flag 223rc is on (S42602). If it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is not on (i.e., it is off), the processing proceeds to S42609. Note that a state in which the V icon display flag 223rc is off means that the V icon has not been acquired.

In the process of S42602, if it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is on (S42602: Yes), the winning information is obtained from the winning information storage area 223a (S42603), and it is determined whether or not there is a reserve (V reserve) that will win a small prize in the obtained winning information (S42604). If there is no V reserve (S42604: No), the execution of the V icon activation performance (see FIG. 583(a)) is set (S42605), the V icon display flag 223rc is set to off (S42606), and the performance mode is determined from the time-saving performance mode setting B table 222ra3 based on the fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of S42403 of the fluctuation display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) and the value of the performance counter CS1 (S42607), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42604 that there is a V reservation (S42604: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern extracted in the processing of S42403 of the fluctuation display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) is a fluctuation pattern for a long/small win (S42608), and if it is not a fluctuation pattern for a long/small win (S42608: No), the process proceeds to S42605. If it is determined in the processing of S42608 that it is a fluctuation pattern for a long/small win (S42608: Yes), the process proceeds to S42609.

In this way, in this 18th control example, when the display of the special pattern change based on the V reservation starts, it is determined whether or not there is a V reservation among the remaining special pattern 2 reservations, and if there is a V reservation, it is determined whether the change pattern of the special pattern change that will be executed from now on is a specific change pattern, and it is configured to refer to different performance mode setting tables when the V icon is activated and when the V icon is not activated.

In this way, when a V icon has been acquired and the display of a special pattern based on a V reserve begins, it is possible to determine whether or not to activate the V icon, so it is possible to activate the V icon using the special pattern 2 reserve (winning information for the second special pattern), which did not exist at the time the V icon acquisition performance was executed when the V icon was acquired.

Here, for example, if the Special 2 reserve that is to be consumed last among the Special 2 reserves that are predicted at the time when the V icon acquisition effect is executed is the only V reserve (e.g., reserve 4), the V icon will not be activated until that Special 2 reserve is consumed. Therefore, even if the V icon is not activated, at the time when the special pattern based on the Special 2 reserve of reserve 4 starts to change, the player will recognize that this change is a small win, and since it will remain a small win no matter what effect is executed, there is a risk that the player will not be interested in the effects executed during the change.

However, as in the 18th control example, by configuring the special symbol 2 reserve that did not exist at the time when the V icon acquisition effect in which the V icon was acquired is executed to be the target for activating the V icon, even in the special symbol change display when it is clear that a small jackpot has been won regardless of whether the V icon is activated as described above, if the V icon is not activated, it is clear that a V reserve exists among the remaining newly acquired special symbol 2 reserves (i.e., it is confirmed that there will be consecutive wins (successive small jackpot wins)), so it is possible to get the player interested in whether the V icon will be activated or not, and to draw attention to the effect executed during the change.

In addition, in this 18th control example, the performance mode setting table referenced when the V icon is activated is different from the performance mode setting table referenced when the V icon is not activated. Specifically, in the time-saving performance mode setting B table 222ra3 referenced when the V icon is activated, the proportion of revival performances selected in long and short wins is set low compared to the time-saving performance mode setting A table 222ra2 referenced when the V icon is not activated, and a premium win is not selected.

This configuration makes it easier for players to predict whether or not the V icon will be activated based on the presentation mode that has been executed, and by making the player interested in the presentation that is executed during the variable display of the special pattern even when the V icon has been acquired, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

As explained above, in this 18th control example, during the execution of a jackpot game, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol 2 reserve (winning information of the second special symbol) stored (stored) in the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b is determined in advance (pre-read), and if a reserve that is a small jackpot win (V reserve) exists, a presentation to notify the player that a V reserve exists is possible, and this technical concept unique to this 18th control example may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 described in the other control examples.

In the 18th control example, the V icon acquisition effect is set based on the result of pre-reading the lottery result of the reserved special pattern 2, but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the V icon acquisition effect based on the result of pre-reading the winning information of the reserved first special pattern (reserved special pattern 1), or to set the V icon acquisition effect based on the result of pre-reading both reserved special pattern 1 and reserved special pattern 2.

In the 18th control example, the V icon acquisition effect is executed during a jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be executed during a period other than when a jackpot game is being played. For example, the V icon acquisition effect may be executed during the variable display of a special pattern. By configuring in this way, when the V icon acquisition effect is executed during the variable display of a special pattern to indicate that the lottery result is a miss, even if the special pattern to indicate a miss is displayed stationary, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play. The V icon acquisition effect may also be executed during a period when a small win game is being played.

In the 18th control example, the V reservation is a reservation that will win a small prize, but this is not limited to this, and a reservation that will win a big prize may be a V reservation. Or, the V reservation may be a reservation that will win a time-saving prize.

In this 18th control example, a "V icon" is displayed as a notification mode to indicate that a V reservation exists among the reserved special chart 2 reservations stored in the reservation, but this is not limited to this, and a notification may be made using a character, or by changing the background, and any display mode that can notify the player that a V reservation exists will suffice.

In this first variant, when there is a V reservation among the reserved special chart 2 reservations stored in the reservation, the V icon is displayed, that is, a notification mode for notifying the player of advantageous information is displayed, but this is not limited to this, and the configuration may also be such that a notification mode for notifying the player of disadvantageous information is displayed. For example, in a gaming machine (so-called V-variable machine) in which the second special symbol is consumed with priority over the first special symbol and the probability of a jackpot winning with the first special symbol and a jackpot winning with the second special symbol being set to a game state advantageous to the player (for example, a probability variable state (high probability state of the special symbol)) is different, when a probability variable jackpot (a jackpot type in which a probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends) with the first special symbol is won in a normal state (low probability state of the special symbol), if there is a reserved first special symbol that will win a normal jackpot (a jackpot type in which a normal state is set after the jackpot game ends) among the reserved first special symbols, a notification mode (for example, an icon displayed as "danger") for notifying the player that there is a reserved symbol that will win a normal jackpot may be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player aware that consuming the reserved first special symbol will put him at a disadvantage, and the player can play without interrupting the reserved second special symbol.

Also, the configuration may be such that a notification mode can be displayed to notify in advance that any of the second to fourth time-saving end conditions will be met within the reserved ball. By configuring in this way, if there is a special symbol 2 reserved ball (winning information for the second special symbol) remaining after the time-saving end condition is met, a small win can be expected with the remaining reserved ball. Therefore, by allowing the player to recognize in advance that the time-saving end condition will be met within the reserved ball, the player can be encouraged to try to accumulate the special symbol 2 reserved ball to the upper limit before the variable display of the special symbol that meets the time-saving end condition ends.

In addition, in a gaming machine in which a player is given a special benefit (for example, a time-saving state is set) when a predetermined number of consecutive misses are won in the special pattern lottery (so-called ceiling), an icon (for example, a time-saving icon) may be displayed to notify the player that the special benefit will be given before the predetermined number of times the ceiling is reached. In this case, if a time-saving win is made before the ceiling is reached and a time-saving state equivalent to the time-saving state given when the ceiling is reached is set, the time-saving state may be set without activating the time-saving icon, and after the time-saving state given by the time-saving win ends, a time-saving state in which the time-saving icon is activated may be set. In addition, in a gaming machine in which the ceiling count is reset when a time-saving win is made, the time-saving icon displayed based on the fact that the predetermined number of times before the ceiling is reached may be activated in the variable display of the special pattern when the time-saving win is made.

The introductory part of the V icon acquisition effect (the effect in which the character 802 discovers the treasure chest 810 as shown in FIG. 582(a)) and the introductory part of the round number addition effect may be the same effect, and an effect that can branch into a V icon acquisition effect and a round number addition effect (for example, an effect in which either a V icon or an icon indicating the number of rounds to be added appears from the contents of the treasure chest 810) may be executed. By configuring in this way, even if there is no V reserved in the reserve, the player can be made to expect the acquisition of a V icon, and even if the V icon is not acquired, the number of rounds of the jackpot game is added, so that a decrease in the player's motivation to play can be suppressed. The introductory part of the V icon acquisition effect (the effect in which the character 802 discovers the treasure chest 810 as shown in FIG. 582(a)) and the round number addition effect may be the same effect, and a branching effect into a V icon acquisition effect and a round number addition effect (for example, an effect in which either a V icon or an icon indicating the number of rounds to be added appears from the contents of the treasure chest 810) may be executed. This configuration makes it possible to make the player expect the acquisition of a V icon even if there is no V reserved in the reserve, and to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play because the number of rounds of the jackpot game is added even if the V icon is not acquired. It is also possible to set an effect pattern in which both a V icon and an icon indicating the number of rounds to be added appear from the treasure chest.

The introductory portion described above is not limited to this, and may be configured, for example, to prompt the player to press a button, and when the player presses the button, the player may obtain either a V icon or an icon indicating the number of additional rounds.

<First Modification of the Eighteenth Control Example>
Next, the first modified example of the 18th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 607 to Fig. 613. In the above-mentioned 18th embodiment, the configuration was such that, as a result of determining (pre-reading) the lottery result of the winning information (special symbol 2 reservation) of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b during a big win game, if there is a reservation (V reservation) that wins a small win, the V icon acquisition performance is executed.

In contrast to this, in this first modified example, the special symbol 2 reserve stored in the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b is read ahead during a jackpot game, and if a V reserve is found to exist and the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on that V reserve is equal to or greater than a specific number of rounds (16 rounds in this first modified example), then a V icon acquisition effect is executed.

Specifically, as a result of pre-reading the reserved special chart 2 during the jackpot game, if there is at least one V reserved that will win the small prize A (when the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 (see FIG. 580) (V passing), it will win the jackpot A (16R time-saving jackpot), see FIG. 588), a V icon acquisition effect is executed. Also, even if there is no V reserved that will win the small prize A, if there is a V reserved that will win the small prize B (V passing to win the jackpot B (7R time-saving jackpot), see FIG. 588), and there is also a V reserved that will win the small prize C (V passing to win the jackpot E (10R time-saving jackpot), see FIG. 588), a V icon acquisition effect is executed. In other words, when the V icon acquisition effect is executed, the execution of at least 16 rounds of the jackpot game is guaranteed in the reserved special chart 2.

By configuring it this way, if the result of the V reserve lottery that activates the V icon is not the small jackpot A win, which is the most advantageous for the player, a consecutive win (consecutive small jackpot wins) is guaranteed, and the execution of at least 17 rounds of big jackpot play is confirmed, so it is possible to prevent the player from becoming discouraged and suppress a decline in their motivation to play.

<About the performance content of the first modified example of the 18th control example>
The characteristic effects executed in this first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 607 to Fig. 608. Fig. 607(a) is an example of a display screen of the V icon acquisition effect executed in this first modified example. Unlike the V icon acquisition effect in the above-mentioned 18th control example, an effect is executed in which a rabbit-like character 801 acquires a flower 806, which is a V icon that resembles a flower. In the small display area Dm9, a black first reserved pattern hr1 and white second reserved pattern hr2, third reserved pattern hr3, and fourth reserved pattern hr4 are displayed.

As described above, in this first modified example, when a V reservation is found as a result of pre-reading the special symbol 2 reservation stored in the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b during a jackpot game, and the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reservation is equal to or greater than a specific number of rounds (16 rounds in this first modified example), a V icon acquisition performance is executed. Figure 607(a) shows a case where the first reserved symbol hr1 is a V reservation that wins small prize A, and the other reservations are misses. Note that, for the sake of convenience in explanation, in Figure 607(a), the reserved symbols are displayed in different ways according to the lottery result of the special symbol 2 reservation and the type of small prize, but this is not limited to this.

Here, we will explain the V icon in this first modified example. The V icon in this first modified example has a display form imitating a flower, and is configured in a display form in which a flower 806 is surrounded by four petals 806a to 806d. When a variable display of a special pattern is executed based on V reservation, these four petals 806a to 806d are consumed in accordance with the type of small win that has been won, and when all the petals have been consumed, the flower 806 itself disappears (i.e., there is no guarantee of consecutive wins).

With reference to FIG. 607(b), the specific flow of activating the V icon will be described. FIG. 607(b) is an example of a display screen when the V icon is activated during the variable display of the special pattern when the small win A (V-passing big win A (16R time-saving big win), see FIG. 588) is won. In FIG. 607(b), in order to win the small win A, an effect is executed in which all of the petals 806a to 806d attached to the flower 806 are consumed (scattered). In other words, in this first modified example, the player is notified that the V icon has been activated by the accompanying petals 806a to 806d being consumed (scattered), rather than the flower 806 itself, which is the V icon.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 608(a), if the type of small win won by the V reservation is small win B (large win B when V passes (large win with 7R time reduction), see FIG. 588), only petal 806a is consumed, and petals 806b to 806d continue to be attached to flower 806. In this case, at the time when the display of the special pattern based on the V reservation of the small win B starts, it is guaranteed that there will be other V reservations among the remaining special pattern 2 reservations.

The display mode of the second reserved symbol hr2 displayed in the small display area Dm9 in Fig. 608(a) indicates a V reservation for winning a small win C (a big win E when V passes (a big win with 10R time reduction), see Fig. 588), and the fourth reserved symbol hr4 is displayed to indicate that there is no special symbol 2 reservation. Therefore, in the case of Fig. 608(a), during the period in which the flower 806 is displayed, a 7-round big win and a 10-round big win are executed, for a total of 17 rounds. In other words, since the total number of executed rounds is greater than when the big win A, which is most advantageous to the player, is executed, when the flower 806 is displayed, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of small win that will be won.

Figure 608(b) is an example of a display screen when an effect is executed to cancel the activation of a V icon after the V icon is activated. Details will be described later, but similar to Figure 608(a), when the petal 806a is consumed during the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reservation, if a V reservation exists among the remaining special pattern 2 reservations and the total number of rounds of the V reservation is 16 rounds or more, an effect is executed in which the petal 806a returns to the flower 806 (rewind effect).

This makes it possible to have the player expect a rewind effect to occur even if the V icon is activated immediately after the display of the changing special pattern based on the V reserve has begun, and to have the player focus on the effect until the display of the changing special pattern has finished.

In this first variant, the V icon is displayed as a flower, but this is not limited to this and any display mode that can inform the player of the guaranteed number of rounds may be used, for example, an indicator may be used.

In addition, in this first modified example, if a V reservation exists among the reserved special chart 2 reservations stored in the reservation, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reservation is 16 or more, a rewind effect is executed, but this is not limited to this, and the V icon may not be activated. Also, for example, if a new V reservation is acquired, a new petal may be added.

In the 18th control example, the petals 806a-806d are consumed only during the period when the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reservation is being executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the petals may be consumed during a jackpot game that is executed based on the V reservation being consumed, and if all the petals are not consumed during the jackpot game, a consecutive win is confirmed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to have the player play the jackpot game while hoping that the petals will not be consumed, and it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from becoming monotonous.

In the eighteenth control example, the presence of a V reserve in the reserve is notified by a V icon, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration that notifies that there is a high expectation of a V reserve in the reserve may be used. For example, a flower that displays "V?" is displayed, and if a reach effect is executed while the flower is displayed, a small win is confirmed, and an effect is executed in which the petals attached to the flower are consumed at a predetermined timing (for example, when a display mode indicating a miss is displayed), and the flower is also consumed when all the attached petals are consumed. This makes it possible to make the player expect a reach effect to occur while the flower is displayed, and to generate interest in the variable display of special symbols based on reserves that are not V reserves.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the first modified example of the 18th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of this first modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 609 to Fig. 610. This first modified example differs from the above-mentioned 18th control example in that a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed, but the rest is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 609, the configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this first modified example will be described. FIG. 609(a) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 609(a), the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this first modified example differs from the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 18th control example in that the performance mode selection 18a table 222rd is provided instead of the performance mode selection 18 table 222ra, the V icon acquisition performance setting table 222rb is deleted, and the V icon display mode setting table 222rc is added, and otherwise it is the same. The same contents will be denoted by the same symbols and detailed explanations will be omitted.

The performance mode selection 18a table 222rd (not shown) is a table that is referenced when the variable display of the special symbol is executed. The performance mode is set based on the type of variable pattern set in the main control device 110 and the value of the performance counter CS1.

Figure 610 is a diagram simulating the contents stipulated in the V icon display mode setting table 222rc. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to Figure 613, but when the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reservation (reservation for winning a small prize) starts, this is a table that is referenced to change the display mode of the V icon based on the value of the V icon display end counter described later and the type of small prize won in the variable display. For example, after the end of a big prize game in which a V icon acquisition performance is executed, if the V reservation for the small prize B winning is consumed, 7, which is a value corresponding to the number of rounds executed, is subtracted from the V icon display end counter value (maximum 16 in this first modified example), and the V icon display end counter value becomes 9. Therefore, in this case, the performance in which one petal is consumed is executed as the display mode of the V icon.

When the V icon display end counter value reaches 0, all petals 806a to 806d remaining on the displayed flower 806 (see FIG. 607(a)) will be consumed, and the flower 806 will also be hidden.

Next, referring to FIG. 609(b), the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in this first modified example will be described. FIG. 609(b) is a diagram showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 in a schematic manner. As shown in FIG. 609(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in this first modified example differs from the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 18th control example in that a V icon display end counter 223rd has been added, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The V icon display end counter 223rd is set to a counter value when the V icon display flag 223rc is set to ON in the ending process a (see FIG. 612), and the counter value is updated when a small win is won based on the V reservation in the time-saving performance mode setting process a (see FIG. 613). When the counter value becomes 0, the V icon display flag 223rc is set to OFF.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first modified example of the 18th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 611 to Fig. 613, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in this first modified example will be described. This first modified example differs from the above-mentioned 18th control example in that a V icon acquisition effect setting process a (see Fig. 611) is executed instead of the V icon acquisition effect setting process, an ending process a (see Fig. 612) is executed instead of the ending process, and a time-saving effect mode setting process a (see Fig. 613) is executed instead of the time-saving effect mode setting process, but the other processes are the same. The same parts are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 611, the V icon acquisition effect setting process a (S42110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this first modified example will be described. FIG. 611 is a flowchart showing the contents of the V icon acquisition effect setting process a (S42110). The V icon acquisition effect setting process a (S42110) is a process executed in place of the V icon acquisition effect setting process (see S42108 in FIG. 602) in the above-mentioned 18th control example, and as a result of determining (pre-reading) in advance the winning information of the reserved second special pattern (special pattern 2 reservation) during a jackpot game, if there is a reservation (V reservation) that wins a small jackpot, and the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reservation is equal to or greater than a specific number of rounds, a process for executing a V icon acquisition effect is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game.

When the V icon acquisition performance setting process a (S42110) is executed, first, the winning information of the second special pattern in the winning information storage area 223a is obtained (S43601). Here, the winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results of the reserved balls before the fluctuation starts. Each time the variable display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 182) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the winning information stored in the first area to the fourth area of this winning information storage area 223a is shifted by one (the winning information stored in the second area is transferred to the first area) (see S4904, S4908 in FIG. 182). This allows the voice and lamp control device 113 to reliably determine when the special pattern change corresponding to the winning information command sent from the main control device 110 will be executed.

After obtaining the winning information in the process of S43601, it is determined whether or not there is a reserve (V reserve) that will win a small prize in the winning information (S43602). If it is determined that there is no V reserve (S43602: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a V reserve (S43602: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a V reserve that will win small prize A among the V reserves (S43603). If it is determined that there is a V reserve that will win small prize A (S43603: Yes), the V icon acquisition performance execution flag 223rb is set to on (S43607), and this process ends.

As mentioned above, in this first modified example, if the total number of rounds of the jackpot game that is executed based on the V reservation in the reserved special chart 2 is 16 or more, the V icon acquisition effect is executed. Therefore, if the small jackpot A is won, the jackpot A (16R time-saving jackpot, see FIG. 588) is executed by passing through the V (the game ball passes through the V switch 650e3 (see FIG. 580)) during the small jackpot game, so if there is a V reservation that wins the small jackpot A, the V icon acquisition effect is executed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S43603 that there is no V reservation that will win small prize A (S43603: No), it is determined whether there is a V reservation that will win small prize C (S43604). If it is determined that there is a V reservation that will win small prize C (S43604: Yes), it is determined whether there are at least two V reservations (S43606). If it is determined that there are two or more V reservations (S43606: Yes), the processing proceeds to S43607.

As described above, in this first modified example, if the total number of rounds of the jackpot game that is executed based on the V reservation in the reserved special chart 2 is 16 or more, the V icon acquisition effect is executed. If a small jackpot C is won, a jackpot E (10R time-saving jackpot, see FIG. 588) is executed by passing through the V during the small jackpot game, and in this first modified example, even for the jackpot type with the fewest number of rounds of jackpot game, 7 rounds of jackpot game are executed, so if there are two or more V reservations, including the V reservation for the small jackpot C win, the total number of rounds will be 16 or more.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S43604 that there is no V reservation for winning the small win C (S43604: No), only V reservations for winning the small win B (V passing big win B (7R time-saving big win), see FIG. 588) exist, so it is determined whether the number of V reservations is at least three or more (S43605). If it is determined that the number of V reservations is three or more (S43605: Yes), the processing of S43607 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of V reservations is not three or more (i.e., less than three) (S43605: No), this processing is terminated.

As described above, in this first modified example, if the total number of rounds of the jackpot game that is executed based on the V reservation in the reserved special chart 2 is 16 or more, the V icon acquisition effect is executed. If the small jackpot B is won, the jackpot B (7R time-saving jackpot, see FIG. 588) is executed by passing through the V during the small jackpot game, so if there are three or more V reservations for the small jackpot B win, the total number of rounds will be 16 or more.

In this way, in this first modified example, if the total number of rounds of jackpot play executed based on the V reservation in the reserved special chart 2 reservation stored in the reservation is 16 rounds or more, the V icon acquisition effect is executed. This guarantees the player a minimum of 16 rounds of jackpot play on the reserved special chart 2 when the V icon acquisition effect is executed.

For example, if the first V reserve consumed after the end of a big win game is a V reserve that will win small win A, 16 rounds of big win game will be played based on the consumption of that V reserve, so consecutive wins (consecutive small wins) are not guaranteed.

On the other hand, if the first V reservation consumed after the end of the big win game is a V reservation that will win small win C, even if 10 rounds of big win game are played based on the consumption of that V reservation, 16 rounds will not be reached, so consecutive wins are guaranteed. In this case, even if the next V reservation is a V reservation that will win small win B, which is relatively unfavorable for the player, the total number of rounds will be 17 rounds, and more big win game rounds will be played than if the player won small win A, which is the most favorable for the player.

Furthermore, if the first V reservation consumed after the end of a big win game is a V reservation that will win a small win B, even if seven rounds of big win game are played based on the consumption of that V reservation, the total number of rounds will not reach 16 rounds, so consecutive wins are guaranteed, and if the next V reservation also wins a small win B, even if seven rounds of big win game are played based on the consumption of that V reservation, the total number of rounds will not reach 16 rounds, so further consecutive wins are guaranteed. In this case, even if a small win B is won three times in a row, the total number of rounds will be 21 rounds.

In this way, in this first modified example, the expectation of consecutive wins is higher when a relatively unfavorable small win type is won than when the most favorable small win type is won when the V icon is displayed, which can increase the interest of the game.

In this first modified example, the V icon acquisition effect is executed when the total number of rounds is 16 or more, but this is not limited to the above, and the total number of rounds may be set to 15 or less, or 17 or more. Alternatively, when a specific combination of small win types is achieved, for example, when there is one V reserve for small win A, one V reserve for small win B, and one V reserve for small win C, the V icon acquisition effect may be executed.

In this first modified example, if the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reservation present in the special pattern 2 reservation is equal to or greater than a specific number of rounds, the V icon acquisition effect is always executed, but this is not limited to this, and if the total number of rounds is equal to or greater than a specific number of rounds, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute the V icon acquisition effect, and in some cases where the total number of rounds is equal to or greater than the specific number of rounds, the V icon acquisition effect may not be executed. By configuring it in this way, even if the V icon acquisition effect is not executed during the jackpot game, the player can have hope of winning the small jackpot A when the special pattern changes and is displayed after the jackpot game ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 612, the ending process a (S42109) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this first modified example will be described. FIG. 612 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process a (S42109). Ending process a (S42109) differs from the ending process in the 18th control example described above (see S42105 in FIG. 603) in that it sets the value of the V icon display end counter when the V icon display flag 223rc is set to on. As the other processes are the same, the same reference numerals are used and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

In the ending process a (S42109), after the process of S42304 is completed, the V icon display end counter 223rd is set to "16" (S42306). This "16" is a value corresponding to the minimum number of rounds guaranteed, and when the V reservation is consumed in the game after the end of the big win game, the counter value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is subtracted, and when the counter value becomes "0" or less, the display of the V icon (in this first modified example, the flower 806 (see FIG. 607(a))) ends.

In the first modified example, the counter value initially set in the V icon display end counter 223rd in the ending process a is fixed at "16", but this is not limited to this, and a value corresponding to the total number of rounds of the jackpot game executed based on the V reserves present in the special chart 2 reserves may be set. For example, if there is one V reserve that wins small win C (when V passes, jackpot E (10R time-saving jackpot), see FIG. 588) and one V reserve that wins small win B (when V passes, jackpot B (17R time-saving jackpot), see FIG. 588), the counter value may be set to "17".

Next, referring to FIG. 613, the time-saving performance mode setting process a (S42504) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this first modified example will be described. FIG. 613 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving performance mode setting process a (S42504). This time-saving performance mode setting process a (S42504) is a process executed in place of the time-saving performance mode setting process (see FIG. 606) in the above-mentioned 18th control example. In the above-mentioned 18th control example, the activation of the V icon was configured to be executed only once during the period in which the V icon was displayed. In contrast, in this first modified example, the activation of the V icon is configured to be executable multiple times until the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd becomes "0" or less.

When the time-saving performance mode setting process a (S42504) is executed, first, it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery that is about to start is a small win or not (S42601). If it is determined that it is not a small win (S42601: No), the performance mode selection 18a table is referenced and the performance mode corresponding to the variation pattern type obtained in S42403 of the variation display setting process 18 (see FIG. 604) is set (S42610).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42601 that it is a small win (S42601: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V icon display flag 223rc is set to ON (S42602). If it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is not ON (S42602: No), the processing proceeds to S42610.

In the process of S42602, if it is determined that the V icon display flag 223rc is on (S42602: Yes), it is determined whether or not it is a small win A (S42611). If it is determined that it is a small win A (S42611: Yes), the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is subtracted by 16 (S42612). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd after subtraction is 0 or more (S42613), and if it is determined that it is not 0 or more (S42613: No), the V icon display flag 223rc is set to off (S42614), and the V icon display mode setting table 222rc (see FIG. 610) is referred to, and the display mode of the V icon corresponding to the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is set (S42615). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42613 that the value is greater than or equal to 0 (S42613: Yes), the processing of S42614 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S42615.

If it is determined in the processing of S42611 that the winning combination is not a small win A (S42611: No), the winning information is obtained from the winning information storage area 223a (S42616), and it is determined whether the total number of rounds in the remaining reserved special chart 2 is 16 or more (S42617). If it is determined that the total number of rounds is 16 or more (S42617: Yes), the rewinding performance mode of the V icon is set (S42621), and the processing proceeds to S42610.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S42617 that there are not 16 rounds or more (S42617: No), it is determined whether the result of the special pattern lottery that will start from now is a small win B or not (S42618). If it is determined to be a small win B (S42618: Yes), 7 is subtracted from the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd (S42620), and the processing proceeds to S42613.

If it is determined in the processing of S42618 that the small prize B has not been won (i.e., the small prize C has been won) (S42618: No), the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is decremented by 10 (S42619), and the processing proceeds to S42613.

In this way, in this first modified example, when the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reservation starts, the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is subtracted depending on the type of small win that is won, and the variable display mode of the V icon is set to correspond to the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd after the subtraction.

In addition, in this first modified example, if small win A is won, the V icon rewind effect is not executed, but if small win B or C is won, the V icon rewind effect can be executed. By configuring in this way, when the player wins small win A, which is the most advantageous for the player, after acquiring the V icon, the display of the V icon can be terminated without fail. On the other hand, when the player wins small win B or small win C, which are relatively disadvantageous for the player, after acquiring the V icon, the period during which the V icon is continuously displayed can be made longer than when small win A is won. This makes it possible to set a small win type that guarantees only one small win by the V icon and a small win type that guarantees multiple small wins, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In this first modified example, if the type of small win that is won is small win A, the rewind effect is not executed, but this is not limited to the above. It is also possible to execute the processes of S42616 and S42617 before the process of S42611, and execute the rewind effect of the V icon.

In the first modified example, when the display of the special pattern based on the V reservation starts, if the execution conditions for the V icon acquisition effect are met in the remaining special pattern 2 reservations, the V icon rewind effect is always executed, but this is not limited to this, and the V icon rewind effect may be executed in some cases when the execution conditions for the V icon acquisition effect are met in the remaining special pattern 2 reservations. In addition, the ratio at which the V icon rewind effect is executed may be changed depending on the small win type of the special pattern that will be displayed in the future. For example, it may be easier to set the V icon rewind effect when the special pattern display is executed based on the V reservation of the small win B win than when the special pattern display is executed based on the V reservation of the small win A win.

In addition, in this first modified example, the V icon rewind effect is set at the time when the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reserve begins, but this is not limited to this. For example, after the V icon activation effect is executed during the variable display of the special pattern, if a new V reserve is acquired and the conditions for executing the V icon rewind effect are met before the variable display stops, the V icon rewind effect can be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to encourage the player to save up reserves even during the variable display of the special pattern that has been activated by the V icon, thereby improving gaming efficiency.

In addition, in this first modified example, the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is not incremented even if a new V reservation is acquired while a V icon is already acquired, but this is not limited thereto, and the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd may be incremented when a new V reservation is acquired. For example, when the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is "9", if a new V reservation is acquired as a result of winning small prize B, "7" may be added to the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd to make it "16". In this case, the configuration may be such that an effect (for example, an effect of adding petals) is executed in which the display mode of the displayed V icon is changed to the display mode of the V icon corresponding to the value of the V icon display end counter after the increment.

In addition, in the process of S42617, if there is a difference between the value of the counter corresponding to the display mode of the displayed V icon and the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd, a rewind effect may be set. For example, when three petals are consumed as the display mode of the displayed V icon (when the small win B is won twice and the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd is "2"), "7" is added to the value of the V icon display end counter 223rd based on the acquisition of a new V reservation that wins the small win B, and the value of the display end counter 223rd becomes "9", a rewind effect of the V icon may be set in the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reservation that is consumed first. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the activation effect of the V icon is not executed in the variable display of the special pattern based on the V reservation that is consumed first.

As explained above, in the first variant of the 18th control example, when a jackpot game is being played, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol 2 reserved ball stored (memorized) in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is determined in advance (pre-read), and the total number of rounds of the jackpot game played based on the small prize winning reserved ball (V reserved) in the reserved ball is a specific number of rounds, the player is notified that the specific number of rounds of the jackpot game is guaranteed. This has a technical concept different from other control examples, but the technical concept unique to the first variant of the 18th control example may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 described in the other control examples.

In this first modified example, the V icon acquisition effect is set based on the result of pre-reading the lottery result of the reserved special pattern 2, but this is not limited to this. The V icon acquisition effect may be set based on the result of pre-reading the winning information of the reserved first special pattern (reserved special pattern 1). Also, the V icon acquisition effect may be set based on the result of pre-reading both reserved special pattern 1 and reserved special pattern 2.

In this first modified example, the V icon acquisition effect is executed during a jackpot game, but this is not limited to this, and it may be executed during a period when a jackpot game is not being played. For example, it may be executed while a special pattern is being changed. By configuring it in this way, when a V icon acquisition effect is executed during the changing display of a special pattern to indicate that the lottery result is a miss, even if the special pattern to indicate that it is a miss is displayed stationary, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In this first modified example, the V reserve is a reserve that will win a small prize, but this is not limited to this, and a reserve that will win a big prize may be a V reserve. Or, the V reserve may be a reserve that will win a time-saving prize.

In this first modified example, a "V icon" is displayed as a notification to indicate that a V reserve exists among the reserved special chart 2 reserves stored in the reserves, but this is not limited to this, and a character may be used instead of the V icon to notify, or the background may be variable, and any display mode that allows the player to recognize the minimum guaranteed number of jackpot rounds will suffice.

In addition, in this first modified example, if there is a V reserved in the reserved special chart 2 stored, the V icon is displayed, that is, a notification mode for notifying the player of advantageous information is displayed, but this is not limited to this, and a notification mode for notifying the player of disadvantageous information may be displayed. For example, in this first modified example, if small prize A is won twice during the time-saving state, or if small prize C is won three times, the time-saving state ends, so if there are two V reserved that will win small prize A in the reserved, or three V reserved that will win small prize C, an icon (for example, a skull icon) that notifies the player that the time-saving end condition is met in the reserved may be displayed.

By configuring it this way, if there is any reserved special symbol 2 (winning information for the second special symbol) remaining after the time-saving end condition is met, it is possible to expect a small win with that remaining reserved symbol. Therefore, by allowing the player to recognize in advance that the time-saving end condition will be met within the reserved symbol, the player can be encouraged to try to accumulate the reserved special symbol 2 symbol up to the upper limit before the variable display of the special symbol that meets the time-saving end condition ends.

The display mode of the V icon may be different depending on the type of small win of the V reservation present in the reservation. For example, the number of petals attached to the flower 806 may be more likely to be greater when there is a V reservation for a small win B or C than when there is a V reservation for a small win A. Alternatively, the color of the petals may indicate the likelihood of consecutive wins (successive small wins).

<19th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 619 to Fig. 636. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example described above, when the special symbol lottery does not result in a jackpot for a specified number of times (for example, 500 times) in a row, and when the time-saving symbol is won in the special symbol lottery, the time-saving game state is set directly (without going through a jackpot game).

The pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example has the following differences 1 to 3 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example. That is, as difference 1, during the execution of the variable display effect based on the winning of the time-saving symbol, a performance is executed to notify (suggest) the number of time-saving times as one type of variable display mode. Then, when the time-saving symbol is won and the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state that is directly set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol (the number of times that the special symbol changes, which ends the time-saving state if the jackpot is not won) is greater than the number of remaining lotteries up to the ceiling lottery number (the ceiling lottery number is reached within the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state that is set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol), a special performance control is executed in which the number of time-saving times that is notified (suggested) is greater than the number of time-saving times that is set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol. More specifically, assuming that no jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the apparent number of times the time-saving number is reported is taken into account by the number of times the special symbol is drawn from the time-saving symbol winning until the time-saving state actually ends (transitions to the normal state) (in other words, if the ceiling number of draws is reached during the time-saving state based on the time-saving symbol winning, the number of draws until the time-saving state based on reaching the ceiling number of draws ends). By configuring in this way, it is possible to generate cases where a number of times the time-saving number is reported that is greater than the number of times the time-saving number is set based on the time-saving symbol winning, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

As a difference 2 from the above-mentioned 16th control example, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 19th control example, even if the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, the remaining number of lotteries up to the ceiling number of lotteries is suppressed from being cleared, and the counter value data for switching and setting the variation pattern group (variation pattern selection table) is also held (the progress status of the variation pattern scenario is held). By configuring in this way, even if a process such as RAM clear is executed, it is possible to set a time-saving state when the variation of the special pattern is executed a specified number of times (the ceiling number of lotteries is reached), and it is possible to set a variation pattern (variation time) using a suitable variation pattern selection table (variation pattern group) for each variation number up to the ceiling number of lotteries, regardless of whether or not a RAM clear operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game that gradually increases the sense of expectation until the ceiling number of lotteries is reached, regardless of whether or not a RAM clear operation is performed. Furthermore, even if the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, the number of remaining draws up to the ceiling number of draws will not increase, so it is possible to prevent players from avoiding playing on a pachinko machine 10 where it is highly likely that a RAM clear operation has been performed (for example, when the hall was in a favorable state other than the normal state when it closed the previous day).

Furthermore, as a difference 3 from the above-mentioned 16th control example, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 19th control example, the number of times the special symbols change reaches a specified number (ceiling lottery number) without a jackpot being determined, and the time-saving game state (ceiling game state) is set without going through a jackpot game every time the next special symbol change display stops, the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number is reset when the ceiling lottery number is reached. In other words, after the ceiling lottery number is reached, a lottery for the special symbols is further executed for the ceiling lottery number, so that the time-saving game state (ceiling game state) is set again. As a result, even if the player is unable to win a jackpot during the time-saving game state set based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number and transitions (falls) to the normal state, the player can be made to aim to reach the ceiling lottery number again (activating the ceiling again), so that a gameplay in which the player's motivation for playing is unlikely to decrease can be realized. In addition, in accordance with this, in the 19th control example, the variation pattern scenario is reset based on the fact that the ceiling number of draws has been reached. In other words, based on the fact that the ceiling number of draws has been reached, the correspondence between each variation number until the next ceiling number of draws is reached and the variation pattern selection table to be referenced is reset. By configuring in this way, regardless of whether the ceiling number of draws has not been reached or the ceiling number of draws has been reached once or more and the time-saving state has been skipped, a special variation pattern can be selected when the remaining number of draws until the ceiling number of draws becomes a specific number (150, 100, and 50 remaining). In other words, since the ceiling teasing performance can be executed when the remaining number of draws until the ceiling number of draws becomes a specific number, it is possible to realize a game that gradually increases the player's sense of expectation until the ceiling number of draws is reached, regardless of whether the ceiling number of draws has been reached once or more.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 19th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 16th control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 16th control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

<About the performance in the 19th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 619 to Fig. 622, the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the difference 1 described above will be described. Before describing the main configuration of this control example in detail, the main configuration of this control example will be briefly described. When the special symbol variation is performed a prescribed number of times without a jackpot game being performed (the number of times the special symbol is drawn reaches the ceiling number of times), the variation for the prescribed number of times ends, and at the timing of the next time the variation display of the special symbol is to be performed, the time-saving game state (ceiling game state) in which the frequency of opening the electric role 640a is high and the opening period is set long, resulting in a game state in which the probability of ball entry into the second ball entrance 640 is set high, is set continuously until the variation of the special symbol is performed up to 100 times. In addition to the ceiling game state, in this control example, a sudden time-saving game state, which is set by winning the lottery executed every time the variation of the special symbol starts on the time-saving winning symbol, is configured to be able to be set even without the execution of a jackpot game.

Below, we will explain the presentation mode executed by the third pattern display device 81 until the ceiling game state shown in Figure 622 is set, and the presentation mode displayed by the third pattern display device 81 shown in Figures 619 to 621.

Figure 622 is a diagram showing the transition of the presentation mode when the set number of times (ceiling number of draws) is reached during the time-saving state based on winning the time-saving pattern, and the time-saving state is set overlappingly. Figure 622 shows an example of a case where a time-saving pattern with a time-saving count of 50 times is won when the remaining number of draws for the special pattern until the ceiling number of draws is reached is 25, and shows the correspondence between the presentation mode and the number of draws for the special pattern.

In the lottery at the start of the 475th variation (the number of variations without the execution of the jackpot game) when there are 25 variations remaining until the specified number of variations (500 in this control example), the time-saving pattern is won, and the time-saving pattern winning performance shown in FIG. 619(a) is executed while the special pattern is being displayed (during dynamic display). FIG. 619(a) is a performance mode diagram showing an example of the time-saving pattern winning performance. When the time-saving pattern is won, the special pattern begins to vary, and the variable display area Dm1 of the special pattern (third pattern) is displayed in a reduced size in the upper right. In the display area (display area larger than the variable display area Dm1) where the special pattern was displayed, a rabbit character 801 is displayed, and above it, the modes 811a to 811d suggesting the number of variations of the time-saving game state (the number of variations of the special pattern) to be granted are displayed in a multiple rotation. Further above that, the message "~Chance Time Waiting~" is displayed to indicate that the time-saving symbol has been selected, making it easy for the player to tell that they have won the time-saving symbol.

When a time-saving symbol is won and a time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is suddenly set, a number of multiple fluctuations is determined by lottery to be 1, and the time-saving game state is set to continue until the special symbol corresponding to that number of fluctuations is executed. Note that if a jackpot is won before the set number of fluctuations is executed, the game state selected by the jackpot lottery is set after the jackpot game, so it is possible that the time-saving game state will end before the set number of fluctuations is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 619(a), the small display area Dm4 in the upper left area of the third symbol display device 81 displays the word "Right Hit", and displays a notification mode suggesting that the player shoot the game ball so that it passes through the right side (right hit area) of the third symbol display device 81. In this control example, the right hit notification is made from the change of the special symbol that has won the time-saving symbol, making it easier for the player to understand that the time-saving symbol has been won. However, it is not limited to this, and the right hit notification may be configured to be made from the start of the change of the special symbol in the next change (476th time) in which the sudden time-saving game state is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a more advantageous notification to the player. Also, as shown in FIG. 619(a), the display of the reserved symbol is hidden in the sub-display area Ds (below the display area), and a character display is displayed to suggest that the mode for suggesting the number of changes in which the sudden time-saving game state will continue, such as "Decide the number of chance times!", is determined from among the candidates.

Here, when the presentation mode of FIG. 619(a) is being executed, immediately before the time for the special symbol to change (the timing when the time for the change ends) elapses (e.g., 5 seconds before the change stops), one of the candidate number of changes 811a to 811d for the number of changes for which the sudden time-saving game state displayed as shown in FIG. 619(b) is continued is determined. In the example of FIG. 619(b), 100 number of changes is notified as the number of changes to continue. Note that, in this control example, the number of changes notified to the player is configured to be notified as the number of changes in the presentation that is less than the number of changes actually determined (the actual number of changes until the sudden time-saving game state continues). By configuring in this way, even if the number of changes in the presentation becomes 0, it is possible to make the player expect that the time-saving game state will continue, and the presentation mode can be diversified. When the number of times the time-saving game state will continue to change is determined, the sub-display area Dm4 will display a pattern indicating that the number of times the time-saving game state will change has been determined (the text "GET 100 times!!" will be displayed). In addition, the special symbol changes are displayed in a frozen state in the small area Dm1 in a combination pattern indicating a miss.

As shown in FIG. 619(b), when the variation number candidates 811a-811d for the sudden time-saving game state are displayed in a rotating manner, the rabbit 801 jumps upwards and punches, hitting and determining one variation number mode for the performance, and that variation number mode (variation number pattern) is enlarged and displayed. The other variation number modes are scattered while shrinking in the direction outside the display area, making it easy to see the determined variation number mode.

In this embodiment, the number of fluctuations is automatically determined in accordance with the time that the special symbols change, but the invention is not limited to this. When the player presses the frame button 22 or the effective time of the frame button 22 has elapsed (the timing when the effective time has ended), one of the candidates 811a to 811d for the number of fluctuations that will continue the sudden time-saving game state displayed as shown in FIG. 619(b) may be determined.

As shown in FIG. 622, the number of times the special symbol changes during which the sudden time-saving game state that was actually won with the time-saving winning symbol continues is 50 times in the example shown here, but 100 times is determined as the number of changes in the presentation. This is because 26 times pass before the ceiling game state is set before the 50 times of special symbol changes that are actually decided, and the remaining number is updated to 100 times when the time-saving game state has passed 26 times as the ceiling game state, so the behavior is that the time-saving state actually continues from when the time-saving symbol is won until the display of the 126 times of special symbol changes ends, so even if 100 times, which is less than 126 times, is decided, no inconsistency in presentation occurs.

By configuring in this way, even if the actual number of fluctuations for which the sudden time-saving game state will continue is 50, it is possible to determine a candidate number of fluctuations exceeding 50 in the presentation that determines the number of fluctuations in the presentation, allowing a more advantageous notification to be given to the player, and further increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, in the presentation described below, even if the actual number of fluctuations is 50 and 100 is notified, the total number of fluctuations from the start of the sudden time-saving game state to the end of the ceiling game state is a maximum of 126, which is more than the 100 in the notified presentation, and it is possible to use a maximum of 26 times as an added presentation as an intermediate presentation. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the number of fluctuations for which the actual time-saving game state (sudden time-saving game state or ceiling game state) will continue, and creates a sense of expectation that the remaining number of fluctuations will be added indefinitely.

Next, we will explain the chance time effect, which is an effect executed during the sudden time-saving game state, which is executed when the number of fluctuations in Figure 622 is 476 (the remaining number of time-savings (the remaining number of fluctuations of the special pattern for which the sudden time-saving game state will continue) is 50). Figure 620 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the form of this chance time effect. During chance time (the period during which the sudden time-saving game state is set), the remaining number of time-savings in the effect is displayed in small area Ds7 below small area Dm4 where the right-hit notification of the display area is executed. Figure 620 (a) shows the form of the timing when the variable display of the special pattern stops when the remaining number of time-savings in the effect becomes 0 (the timing when the special pattern (second special pattern) displayed in small area Ds1 stops). A rabbit character 801 and an angel character 809 are displayed in the main display area Dm, and an effect is performed to see whether or not a treasure chest 810 will be opened to add to the remaining number of time-saving times. When the treasure chest 810 is opened, smoke and an addition mode 810a showing "10", which indicates the remaining number of time-saving times to be added, are displayed from inside. The words "Chance time added!", which is an effect indicating that the remaining number of time-saving times has been added, are displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

After the addition mode 810a in which the remaining number of time-saving times is added is displayed, the number (10) indicating the number of time-saving times of the addition mode 810a is moved to the small area Ds7, and then the remaining number of time-saving times in the small area Ds7 is updated to 10 times. By performing this kind of performance, it is possible to easily inform the player that the displayed addition mode 810a was a performance that increases the remaining number of time-saving times. In addition, as a performance during the chance time, a performance in which the rabbit character 801 dashes is displayed in the main display area Dm, and a performance of searching for a treasure box 810 is executed during the variation of the special pattern. By configuring in this way, in the sudden time-saving game state, the variation of the second special pattern is mainly executed, and the variation time is made to be shorter than that in the normal game state, but a consistent and easy-to-understand performance can be performed by utilizing the variation times of multiple special patterns. In addition, if the lottery result of the special pattern is a jackpot, the letter "V" is displayed from the treasure box 810, and a mode for indicating a jackpot is displayed. After that, the special symbol stops and the big win game begins.

In addition, if the time-saving symbol is won during the chance time (a lottery result in which the big win game is not executed and the time-saving game state (time-saving game state) is suddenly set when the special symbol stops changing), the newly determined number of times to continue time-saving (the number of times the special symbol changes to continue the ceiling game state) from the treasure chest 810 or information on the number of times to continue time-saving and the number of times to continue time-saving with the ceiling game state set thereafter is determined and notified, and the mode of addition is determined.

In this control example, the time-saving symbol is selected during the chance time, but the invention is not limited to this. In the event that the time-saving game state suddenly occurs (during the chance time), the game may be controlled so that the time-saving symbol is not selected until the time-saving game state suddenly ends. In this case, the lottery for the time-saving symbol does not need to be executed, and control may be executed so that if the lottery for the time-saving symbol is selected, it is invalid.

In the chance time performance, the performance in which the treasure chest 810 is displayed is configured to be executed when a performance lottery is executed on the condition that the performance of the treasure chest 810 is not being executed at the timing when the special pattern starts to change, and it is determined that the performance of the treasure chest 810 is executed. In this case, the larger the difference between the number of remaining time reductions in the performance and the actual number of remaining time reductions, the higher the probability that the performance of the treasure chest 810 is determined to be executed. Furthermore, when it is determined that the performance of the treasure chest 810 is executed, the content of the performance mode to be executed when the treasure chest 810 is open is determined based on the difference in the number of remaining time reductions and the result of the pre-reading of the reserved balls. In this case, when no performance mode is determined, a performance in which the treasure chest 810 is not opened is executed. Although it is configured so that the treasure chest 810 is not opened when no performance mode is determined, it may be configured so that only smoke is notified when it is open. In addition, when it is determined to execute the performance of the treasure chest 810, it may be configured to determine whether the treasure chest 810 is opened or not with a predetermined probability.

Next, the ceiling game state (100 times of continuous time-saving play) is set at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol for the 501st time in FIG. 622 stops. At this point, the game suddenly transitions from the time-saving game state to the ceiling game state, but the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 continues to be the performance during the chance time described above.

Next, an example is shown in which the performance mode of FIG. 620(a) described above is executed as an additional performance when the number of times the special symbol changes in FIG. 622 is 575. Here, a lottery is drawn when the special symbol changes 575 times to determine that the treasure chest performance is to be executed, and 10 times is determined as the additional performance mode, so that the additional performance mode showing the number of times of addition 10 is executed as shown in FIG. 620(a). After that, from the 576th time when the special symbol changes, the performance during the chance time is executed continuously. After that, the end waiting performance is executed when the special symbol changes 595 times (the remaining number of time-saving times in the ceiling game state is 6 times). In this 19th control example, since it is configured to add a number of times that is a multiple of 10 as an additional performance, when the number of time-saving times displayed becomes 0, there is a possibility that a fractional number of times less than 10 will be generated in the remaining number of times in the actual time-saving state. Therefore, while this fractional number of time-saving times is consumed, a display mode is set in which the remaining number of time-saving times is not notified as an end waiting performance. This creates a sense of excitement for players as they don't know how long the time-saving state will last.

Figure 620 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this end waiting presentation. In the end waiting presentation, after the remaining time-saving number of times is updated to 0 times in the small display area Dm7 below the small display area Dm4, "Last ??? times" is displayed, in which the remaining time-saving number of times in the presentation cannot be identified. Also, in the main display area Dm, a hole 812 is opened in a part of the cloud through which the rabbit 801 dashes, and when it falls, a presentation is executed indicating that the ceiling game state (time-saving game state) will end. In the upper part of the main display area Dm, the character mode of "~End waiting~" is displayed, indicating that the remaining time-saving number of times in the presentation is less than 0 times and the mode indicating the remaining number of times is unidentifiable. In the small display area Dm1, the second special symbol is displayed in a reduced size and changed, and in the sub-display area Ds, the character "End waiting zone" is displayed, indicating that the period is one in which the ceiling game state may end every time the change display of the special symbol stops. By configuring it in this way, the player can feel a sense of crisis that the ceiling game state will end every time the special pattern stops changing, even if the remaining number of time-saving turns reaches 0, and it will continue even when the next special pattern changes, making it difficult to distinguish the remaining number of time-saving turns. This gives the player a sense of crisis that the ceiling game state will end every time the special pattern stops changing, and allows the player to enjoy the contrast with the sense of relief that comes when the state does not end, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 622, when the number of times the special symbol changes becomes 600 (the number of times the time reduction remaining in the ceiling game state is 1), the change stops, the ceiling game state ends, and the game transitions to the normal game state, and the end performance is executed while the special symbol changes. FIG. 621 is a diagram showing an example of the content of the performance mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in this end performance. In the end performance mode, from the start of the change of the special symbol, a performance in which the rabbit 801 dashes on a cloud with a hole is performed, similar to the end waiting performance described above, and 5 seconds before the change of the special symbol stops, a performance in which the rabbit falls through the hole 812 is executed as shown in FIG. 621. In addition, the small display area Dm7 displays a mode in which the number of times the time reduction remaining in the performance is difficult to distinguish, such as "Last ??? times", and the change display of the special symbol is temporarily stopped and is waiting for the change time to pass (see small display area Dm1). Additionally, the sub-display area Ds displays the words "Chance time ended!", indicating that the chance time (ceiling game state (time-saving game state)) has ended. Additionally, the words "End" are displayed at the top of the main display area Dm, indicating that the chance time has ended.

In this way, when the configuration of difference 1 described above results in the remaining number of times being less than the number of times that the time-saving symbol is selected and the time-saving game state is suddenly set to continue, the number of times that the time-saving symbol is selected is taken into account in the number of times that the ceiling game state is set to continue, and a presentation is executed with the time-saving symbol selected as the settable number of times. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player of a remaining number of time-saving times that is greater than the number actually granted at a timing based on the time-saving symbol being selected, and it is also possible to execute an additional presentation so that the remaining number of time-saving times is greater than the actual number, making it difficult for the player to guess the actual number of times. In addition, since the player is notified of a remaining number of time-saving times that is unexpected, a presentation that feels fresh to the player can be provided.

<About the production in differences 2 and 3>
Next, referring to Fig. 623 to Fig. 625, an example of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the above-mentioned differences 2 and 3 will be described. In the above-mentioned difference 2, even if the RAM clear operation is performed and the power is turned on, the value of the counter for counting the specified number of times for which the ceiling game state is set is not initialized, and the count value is held, so that the variation pattern group (variation pattern scenario) for displaying the special symbol is switched based on the value of the count value. Also, in the above-mentioned difference 3, after the ceiling game state is set and the set number of time reductions are executed, the variation of the special symbol is executed again the specified number of times and the game transitions to the ceiling game state, the variation pattern group (variation pattern scenario) is switched each time the game transitions to the ceiling game state, so that a specific variation pattern is easily selected.

Figures 623 (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the performance of the variation pattern executed in the next first variation after the variation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for the specified number of times. Based on the variation of the special symbol being stopped and displayed for the specified number of times, the variation pattern group for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol is set to be selected from the table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached (see Figure 628 (c)). The variation pattern selected from the table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached (variation pattern group) is displayed in a reduced form in the small display area Ds1 at the upper right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, as shown in Figure 623 (a), a rabbit character 801 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and an angel character 809 is displayed to the upper right of the rabbit 801 with a board on which text information is displayed. The board displays text information "Trajectory to the ceiling" to indicate the game state until the ceiling game state is reached, and further displays the number of small win games executed before the ceiling game state is set (small bonus: 2 times displayed in text) and the number of times the special symbol has changed (number of starts: 500 times displayed in text). In addition, the small display area Dm7 displays text information indicating that the special symbol has changed a specified number of times, saying "Ceiling!?" In addition, the sub-display area Ds displays text information indicating that the special symbol has changed a specified number of times, saying "Ceiling reached!! Chance time GET!"

After the mode shown in FIG. 623(a) is displayed (dynamic display) for 10 seconds, the performance mode shown in FIG. 623(b) is displayed. In the performance mode shown in FIG. 623(b) that is displayed after the performance mode in FIG. 623(a) is displayed, the special symbol changes and is displayed continuously in the small display area Dm1, the rabbit character 801 continues to be displayed in the main display area Dm, the board held by the angel character 809 is hidden, and a comment display from the angel 809 saying "If you hit during chance time, it's a big chance!?" is displayed in a speech bubble, and when a jackpot is drawn in the ceiling play state, the player is notified of the mode that suggests that it will be more advantageous than in the normal play state.

In this control example, if a jackpot occurs during the ceiling game state, the jackpot type that is advantageous to the player is set to be more likely to be selected than if it occurs during a jackpot in the normal game state. This makes it possible to increase interest when a jackpot occurs during the ceiling game state by implementing a presentation that encourages the player to think that it will be advantageous if a jackpot occurs during the 100 times that the special symbols that set the ceiling game state are drawn. Furthermore, since the player can be made to look forward to transitioning to the ceiling game state, the player can be made to play for a long period of time, aiming to continuously execute the special symbol fluctuations up to the specified number of times.

Also, as shown in FIG. 623(b), the small display area Dm4 displays the text "Right Hit" and a notification is executed to suggest that a right hit game should be executed in order to transition to the ceiling game state. Also, the small display area Dm7 displays the text "Last 100 Hits" and a notification is executed of the remaining number of time-saving plays. Also, the sub-display area Ds displays text information in the form of a notification to indicate that the special pattern has changed a specified number of times, saying "Ceiling Reached!! Chance Time GET!".

By configuring it in this way, when the specified number of times (500 times in this control example) for setting the ceiling game state has elapsed and it reaches the 501st time, the fluctuation pattern table is switched so that a dedicated fluctuation pattern can be executed for the 501st fluctuation, and advance notification of the transition to the ceiling game state can be given, and the method of playing in the ceiling game state can be clearly notified.

With reference to Figures 624(a) and (b), we will explain the presentation for suggesting the number of times remaining until the specified number of times for setting the ceiling game state, which is executed by switching the variation pattern table based on the number of times the special symbol changes in the above-mentioned differences 2 and 3 in this control example. Figure 624(a) is a diagram showing an example of a weak promotion presentation mode that is executed when there is a low expectation of reaching the specified number of times for setting the ceiling game state.

As shown in FIG. 624(a), in the small display area Dm1 located in the upper right of the display area, the special symbol is displayed in a reduced size and changed, and in the main display area Dm, a large special symbol is displayed in a changed size. In the lower right of the main display area Dm, reserved symbols hr1 and hr2 (black circle symbols) are displayed, and it is notified that there are two reserved balls. In the main display area Dm, an angel character 809 is displayed, and a comment display of "Approaching...?" is displayed, which indicates the degree of expectation for the remaining number of times until the specified number of times. In the small display area Dm7, a display of "350 times between bonuses" is displayed, which indicates the number of times the special symbol has changed since the big win game was executed. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, the text "Angel appears!" is displayed, and a text display is displayed to indicate that a preview mode in which a notification is given until the specified number of times is executed.

In this way, after a jackpot is hit, which is not initialized even if RAM clearing is executed, the number of times the special symbol changes is determined based on the count value in the change pattern table, and by executing a preview performance that indicates the expectation of reaching the specified number of times with a specified number of changes, the player can predict from the preview performance the number of times remaining until the specified number of times is reached and play the game, giving the player the fun of deciding whether or not to continue playing.

Next, referring to FIG. 624(b), an example of a strong stimulating performance mode in which there is a high expectation of reaching the specified number of times will be described. In the strong stimulating performance mode, a text display of "450 times between bonuses" is displayed in the small display area Dm7, suggesting that the number of times the special pattern has changed since the big win game was executed is 450 times. In addition to the display of the special pattern changes, the main display area Dm displays an archangel character 809z, which is different from the angel character 809, and a comment display of "Approaching closely!!" is displayed to suggest that there is a high expectation of only a few times remaining until the specified number of times at which the ceiling game state is set.

Details will be described later, but in this control example, the variation pattern table is switched and set based on the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la for counting the number of variations of the special pattern between big win games that are not reset even when the RAM clear is executed. In this control example, as specified in the variation pattern scenario 19 table 202sj of FIG. 629 (b), the ceiling agitation table 202sb3 is configured to be set every 50 times, such as the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la being 350, 400, 450, etc. In the ceiling agitation table, the variation pattern is assigned to be set by lottery, and the closer the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is to the specified number of times (500 times, 1000 times, etc.), the higher the rate at which the strong agitation performance mode described above is determined is set. By configuring in this way, when the strong agitation performance mode is executed, it is possible to expect that the remaining number of times is small, and the player can continue playing. Also, like the 16th control example described above, the 19th control example is also equipped with a small bonus (special big win and small win), and is configured so that the displayed number of draws (number of draws between bonuses) is reset when the small bonus is won. In other words, even in the case of a small win where the remaining number of draws up to the ceiling number is not reset, the apparent number of draws (number of draws between bonuses) is reset to 0, so that it is configured so that it is difficult to completely determine the remaining number of draws up to the ceiling number from the displayed number of draws. Under such circumstances, by configuring a ceiling-inducing effect in which the archangel character 809z is displayed as the ceiling number of draws approaches, it is possible to realize a game that allows the player to predict the remaining number of draws up to the ceiling number from the performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 625, after a transition to the ceiling game state once, the special symbol variation is executed up to the number of times of continuation, and after transition to the normal game state, the number of times of variation of the special symbol becomes 850 times, with 150 remaining times until the specified number of times without a jackpot game being executed again, the ceiling sway table 202sb3 is set, and an example of the performance mode executed by the selected variation pattern is shown. As shown in FIG. 625, in addition to the display of the variation of the special symbol in the main display area Dm, an angel character 809 is displayed, and a comment such as "Approaching again...?" is displayed as a character to suggest the remaining number of the specified number of times at which the second ceiling game state is set. In this way, when a jackpot game is not executed and the ceiling game state is set continuously, a performance mode different from the performance mode of the first ceiling sway is executed, so that the player can play while recognizing that it is the expectation that the ceiling game state will be set again, and the player can determine the probability of the jackpot game being executed and decide whether to continue playing.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 19th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the 19th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 626 to Fig. 630. Note that only the points that differ from the 16th control example will be described, and illustrations and descriptions of the same contents will be omitted.

Figure 626 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in this 19th control example. In this 19th control example, the contents of the first win random number 19 table 202sa, the fluctuation pattern selection 19 table 202sb, the time-saving win type selection 19 table 202si, and the fluctuation pattern scenario 19 table 202sj have been changed.

Figure 627 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number 19 table 202sa. The first winning random number 19 table 202sa is set with information for executing a winning/losing judgment (discrimination) of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640. In the case of a low probability state in which the judgment probability of a jackpot is set to a low probability as the normal game state or the time-saving game state (including the sudden time-saving game state and the ceiling game state) as the game state, and in the case of a high probability state in which the judgment probability of a jackpot is set to a higher probability state as the probability change game state (latent probability change game state), a setting value (judgment value) for judging a jackpot is set for each of the settings from 1 to 6. As shown in FIG. 627, in the low probability state, the judgment values are set as 0 to 4 for setting 1, 0 to 5 for setting 2, 0 to 6 for setting 3, 0 to 7 for setting 4, 0 to 8 for setting 5, and 0 to 9 for setting 6. In addition, in the high probability state, the judgment values are set as 0 to 19 for setting 1, 0 to 23 for setting 2, 0 to 27 for setting 3, 0 to 31 for setting 4, 0 to 36 for setting 5, and 0 to 39 for setting 6. In addition, the judgment values are set so that each value of 40 to 64 on the first winning random number counter C1 is judged to be a small winning.

Next, referring to FIG. 628, the variation pattern selection 10 table 202sb will be described. The variation pattern selection 19 table 202sb is a selection table for determining a variation pattern table (variation pattern group) for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired at the start of the variation of the acquired special pattern, the result of the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern, and the current number of reserved balls. The variation pattern table to be selected is determined based on the type of game state currently set (normal game state, time-saving game state, sudden time-saving game state, ceiling game state, probability change game state) and the number of times the special pattern changes, etc. In this control example, the variation pattern table is selected as described above, but it is not limited to this. A predetermined lottery may be executed to determine the type of variation pattern table, or the selection may be based on the timing of the end of a big win game, the result of a selection lottery in which one variation pattern table is executed with a predetermined selection probability after a small win game is executed, the game state, the number of times the special pattern has changed, the number of big wins and small wins, the number of remaining changes until the ceiling game state, the number of times the game has transitioned to the ceiling game state, or a combination of some of these information.

Figure 628 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 19 table 202sb. The variation pattern selection 10 table 202sb has a normal 19 table 202sb1, a sure-win/time-saving 19 table 202sb2, a ceiling boost table 202sb3, and a ceiling reaching table 202sb4.

The normal 19 table 202sb1 and the special/time-saving 19 table 202sb2 are not shown in the figures, but to briefly explain, the normal 19 table 202sb1 is a table that is set as a table from which a variation pattern is selected when the normal game state is set. Multiple variation patterns are set in accordance with the result of the big win judgment (win, miss, small win), the current number of reserved balls, and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1. Since the variation time of the special pattern (execution period of the variation pattern) is set in advance for each variation pattern, the selection of the variation pattern can also be said to be the selection of the variation period (dynamic display period). By configuring in this way, the period until the result of the win/loss judgment is displayed can be set in the design, so that it is possible to limit the number of times the lottery is drawn per hour, and the gambling nature of the game can be adjusted and designed.

The 19 table 202sb2 for special probability and time saving is selected as a variation pattern table for selecting a variation pattern when in special probability play state or time saving play state, and multiple variation patterns are set corresponding to the win/lose judgment result, the current number of reserved balls, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 for each of the special probability play state and time saving play state. Note that the variation patterns set in the 19 table 202sb2 for special probability and time saving are set to have shorter variation times than the variation patterns set in the 19 table for normal play, making it possible to execute many lotteries in a short period of time.

Next, the ceiling agitation table 202sb3 will be described with reference to FIG. 628(b). FIG. 628(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ceiling agitation table 202sb3. The ceiling agitation table 202sb3 is a table that is selected when the number of times the special symbol changes after a jackpot game is played (the number of times the special symbol changes from the start of play in a gaming machine where a jackpot game is not played) is 350, 400, or 450. The number of changes to be selected is determined based on the value of the special symbol selection counter 203la.

The ceiling boost table 202sb3 is assigned a value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment (hit, special hit, small hit, miss (when the time-saving symbol is hit), miss), and multiple fluctuation patterns are set corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Each fluctuation pattern selected in the ceiling boost table 202sb3 is configured to execute the ceiling boost performance (Figs. 624 and 625) described above.

Next, referring to FIG. 628(b), the table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached will be described. FIG. 628(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached. The table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached is a variation pattern table that is selected when the number of times the special symbol has changed reaches the specified number of times at which the ceiling game state is set, and the next variation of the special symbol is executed (i.e., the 501st time).

The table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached is assigned a value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment (win, special win, win and non-special win), and multiple fluctuation patterns are set corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Each fluctuation pattern selected in the table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached is configured to execute the performance for when the ceiling is reached (Fig. 623) described above.

Next, the time-saving win type selection 19 table 202si will be described with reference to FIG. 629(a). FIG. 629(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the time-saving win type selection 19 table 202si. This time-saving win type selection 19 table 202si is a data table (lottery table) for selecting the number of times the special pattern will fluctuate (time-saving number of times) at which the ceiling time-saving game state will be set to continue if the time-saving pattern is won in the lottery for winning or losing. The types of time-saving patterns are set corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 obtained at the time of the start winning.

In detail, as shown in FIG. 629(a), when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is 0, the time-saving pattern A (time-saving number of times 100) is selected, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is 1 to 19, the time-saving pattern B (time-saving number of times 50) is selected, and when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is 20 to 99, the time-saving pattern C (time-saving number of times 30) is selected.

Next, referring to FIG. 629(b), the variation pattern scenario 19 table sj will be described. FIG. 629(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern scenario 19 table sj. This variation pattern scenario 19 table sj is a data table in which data is specified for selecting a variation pattern table based on the number of times the special pattern changes after the big win game is executed (the value of the special pattern lottery counter 203la). When the ceiling game state has not been reached, this scenario table stores a scenario table corresponding to the ceiling not being reached in the scenario storage area 203sb described later, and a variation pattern type is selected based on the value of the special pattern lottery counter 203la. On the other hand, when the ceiling game state is reached and the set time-saving game state (ceiling game state) has ended, a scenario table corresponding to the ceiling being reached is stored in the scenario storage area 203sb, and a variation pattern type is selected based on the value of the special pattern lottery counter 203la.

As shown in Figure 629 (b), scenarios for when the ceiling has not been reached are set for the normal state (normal gameplay state) and other than the normal state. In the normal state, if the value of the special symbol selection counter 203la (the number of times the special symbol changes after the big win) is 1 to 349, the normal use (normal use 19 table 202sb1) is selected, if it is 350, the ceiling tilt (ceiling tilt table 203sb3) is selected, if it is 351 to 399, the normal use (normal use 19 table 202sb1) is selected, if it is 400, the ceiling tilt (ceiling tilt table 203sb3) is selected, if it is 401 to 449, the normal use (normal use 19 table 202sb1) is selected, if it is 450, the ceiling tilt (ceiling tilt table 203sb3) is selected, if it is 451 to 500, the normal use (normal use 19 table 202sb1) is selected. Note that, in cases other than the normal state, the 19 table 202sb2 for special symbol/time reduction is always selected.

On the other hand, there are different scenarios set for when the ceiling is reached in the normal state (normal gameplay state) and in other than the normal state. In the normal state, when the value of the special symbol selection counter 203la (the number of times the special symbol changes after the big win game) is 1, the use for when the ceiling is reached (table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached) is selected, when it is 2 to 349, the use for normal use (table 19 for normal use 202sb1) is selected, when it is 350, the use for ceiling tilt (table 203sb3 for ceiling tilt) is selected, when it is 351 to 399, the use for normal use (table 19 for normal use 202sb1) is selected, when it is 400, the use for ceiling tilt (table 203sb3 for ceiling tilt) is selected, when it is 401 to 449, the use for normal use (table 19 for normal use 202sb1) is selected, when it is 450, the use for ceiling tilt (table 203sb3 for ceiling tilt) is selected, and when it is 451 to 500, the use for normal use (table 19 for normal use 202sb1) is selected. In addition, when it is not in the normal state, the 19 table 202sb2 for special bonus/time-saving is always selected.

By configuring it in this way, the next fluctuation pattern can be a fluctuation pattern dedicated to when the ceiling is reached each time the ceiling is reached (every time the special symbol fluctuation count is executed 500 times after playing a jackpot), and the player can be clearly notified that they are moving to a ceiling gaming state, and the discomfort of suddenly switching to a gaming state without even playing a jackpot can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 629, both the variation pattern scenario for when the ceiling has not been reached and the variation pattern scenario for when the ceiling has been reached are configured as a set of two scenarios, one for the normal state and one for a game state other than the normal state. In other words, when setting a variation pattern scenario (storing in the scenario storage area 223sb), a set of two scenarios is set, one for the normal state and one for a game state other than the normal state, and during the normal state, the type of variation pattern selection table corresponding to the number of times the special symbol is drawn is identified by referring to the scenario for the normal state from the set of scenarios, while during a game state other than the normal state (probable bonus state or time-saving state), the type of variation pattern selection table corresponding to the number of times the special symbol is drawn is identified by referring to the scenario for the other than the normal state from the set of scenarios. In other words, even if the game state is changed midway (for example, if the time-saving symbol is won in the normal state and the state is changed to the time-saving state), the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the number of variations) when the variation pattern scenario is referred to is not reset, and the variation pattern selection table can be specified by referring to the scenario for the corresponding game state from the set of scenarios. Therefore, even if the normal state continues without transitioning to another game state, or even if the normal state is set by transitioning to the time-saving state one or more times, while staying in the normal state, the correspondence between the number of times the special symbol is drawn since the end of the previous big win and the type of the variation pattern selection table to be referred to can be made common. Therefore, regardless of the circumstances under which the normal state was set, when the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of draws reaches a specific number (150 times, 100 times, and 50 times), a variation pattern for ceiling agitation can be selected, and a performance for ceiling agitation can be executed. Therefore, the performance mode in the normal state can be set appropriately.

Next, referring to FIG. 626(b), the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in this 19th control example will be described. The RAM 203 in this 19th control example differs from the 16th control example in that a ceiling time-saving standby flag 203sa and a scenario storage area 203sb have been added to the store. Explanations of the same configuration will be omitted.

The special drawing lottery counter 203la is configured so that it is not reset even when a normal RAM clear is performed, and the backed up value is retained. This special drawing lottery counter 203la is configured so that it is reset by performing a special RAM clear, clearing the RAM, turning on the power, turning off the power, and then clearing the RAM again within 5 seconds and turning on the power.

The ceiling wait flag 203sa is a flag that indicates that the number of times the special symbol changes has reached a specified number of times at which the ceiling game state is set. It is set to ON when the specified number of times has been reached, and is set to OFF when the game transitions to the ceiling game state.

The scenario storage area 203pb is an area for storing a scenario for when the ceiling has not been reached or a scenario for when the ceiling has been reached, obtained from the fluctuation pattern scenario 19 table. Even if the RAM is cleared, this area keeps the information backed up and stored until a special RAM clear is performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 630, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 19th control example will be described. FIG. 630 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. 630, the RAM 223 in this 19th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 16th control example (see FIG. 520(b)) in that a time-saving display count counter 223sa and a ceiling-reached flag 223sb have been added.

The time-saving display count counter 223sa is a counter that indicates the remaining number of draws on the display of the time-saving state, and when the time-saving state is set, a counter value corresponding to the number of time-saving draws of the time-saving state to be set is set. Also, exceptionally, if there is a possibility that the ceiling number of draws will be reached during the time-saving state set based on the winning of the time-saving pattern (if no winning is won, the ceiling number of draws will be reached within the time-saving number of draws), a counter value corresponding to the number of determinations from the start of the time-saving state based on the winning of the time-saving pattern to the end of the time-saving state set based on the reaching of the ceiling number of draws is set (see S34558A, S34559A in FIG. 636). While the time-saving state continues, the number of time-saving draws corresponding to the counter value of this time-saving display count counter 223sa is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the remaining number of time-saving draws.

The ceiling reached flag 223sb is a flag indicating whether or not the game has transitioned to a time-saving state (ceiling game state) based on the number of ceiling draws reached at least once after the end of the previous big win. If the ceiling reached flag 223sb is on, it means that the game has transitioned to the ceiling game state, and if it is off, it means that the ceiling game state has not been set. The ceiling reached flag 223sb is initially set to off, and is set to on when the number of ceiling draws is reached (see S34521A in FIG. 635). When a fluctuation pattern for ceiling arousal is notified by a fluctuation pattern command, the state of the ceiling reached flag 223sb is referred to to switch between setting a performance mode for when the ceiling has not been reached (see FIGS. 624(a) and (b)) as a performance for ceiling arousal (see FIG. 625) or setting a performance mode for when the ceiling game state has ended at least once (see FIG. 625) (see S34573A in FIG. 637).

<Regarding control process of main control device in 19th control example>
Next, the control processing executed by main control device 110 in this 19th control example will be described with reference to Figures 631 to 633. Note that illustration and description of the same contents as those in the 16th control example will be omitted.

Figure 631 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of the ceiling determination process 19 (S8321A) executed by the main control device 110 in the 19th control example. This ceiling determination process 19 determines whether the special symbol selection counter 203la (the number of times the special symbol changes after a jackpot game) has reached a specified number of times at which the ceiling game state is set, and if so, a process is executed to set the ceiling game state.

When the ceiling determination process 19 is executed, first, the current game state is read from the game state storage area 203g (S38101), and it is determined whether the current game state is a low probability state of a special symbol (S38102). If it is determined that the current game state is a low probability state of a special symbol (S38102: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special symbol selection counter 203la (S38103), and it is determined whether the ceiling time-saving standby flag 203sa is on (S38121A). This ceiling time-saving standby flag 203sa is a flag that is set on when the value of the special symbol selection counter 203la becomes 500, which is the specified number of times, and indicates that the special symbol has been changed up to the specified number of times to set the ceiling game state (if it is on). If the ceiling time-saving waiting flag 203sa is off (S38121A: No), it is determined whether the value of the special drawing counter 203la after the increment has reached 500 (S38104).

If it is determined in the process of S38104 that the value of the special drawing counter 203la has not reached 500 (S38104: No), a status command including information indicating the current value of the special drawing counter 203la is set (S38105), and this process ends. The status command set by the process of S38105 is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the same manner as the other status commands set in the fifth control example described above. On the voice lamp control device 113 side, when a status command indicating the value of the special drawing counter 203la is received, the value of the special drawing number counter 223lc is updated. This makes it possible for the voice lamp control device 113 side to determine the value of the special drawing counter 203la, i.e., the number of times it has been stuck.

On the other hand, in the process of S38104, if it is determined that the value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is 500 (S38104: Yes), data indicating the third time-saving state is set in the game state storage area 203g (S38112A), a process is executed to clear the information based on the current time-saving drawing lottery (S38113A), and a state command including information indicating the third time-saving state and information indicating the number of time-saving times (100 times) is set (S38114A). The value of the special drawing lottery counter 203la is updated by adding 1 (S38124A), the ceiling time-saving waiting flag 203sa is set to ON (S38125A), and a scenario for after reaching the ceiling is selected from the variation pattern scenario 19 table 202sj and set in the scenario storage area 203sb (S38126A). It is set to output the jackpot 3 signal (CN9) for 0.2 seconds (S3817A). Then, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S38121A that the ceiling time-saving standby flag 203sa is on (S38121A: Yes), the time-saving counter 203h is set to 100 (S38122A), the ceiling standby flag 203sa and the ceiling time-saving flag 203pa are set to on (S38123A), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 632, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on to the main control unit 110 in this 19th control example will be described. FIG. 632 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. Note that some parts overlap with the contents explained with reference to FIG. 166, but they will be explained again for ease of understanding.

This startup process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the startup process (Fig. 632), first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (S1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1703).

Then, it is determined whether the setting key has been turned to the ON position (S1751A). If the setting key is in the ON position, the setting value control process (S1752A) is executed, and then the process is terminated. The setting value control process (S1752A) will be described in detail later, but if the RAM clear operation has been performed, the initialization process is performed, and then the process related to the settings of the gaming machine (1 to 6) is executed. On the other hand, if the setting key is in the OFF position, the process of S1704 is executed. In the process of S1704, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 121) provided on the power supply unit 115 is turned on (S1704), and if it is turned on (S1704: Yes), the process proceeds to S1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not on (S1704: No), the system further determines whether or not information about the power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S1705). If not (S1705: No), this may indicate that the processing at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, and in this case too, the process proceeds to S1712.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1705: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S1706). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S1707: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S1712. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of S1712, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it executes an initialization process for the RAM 203, and initializes (clears) the areas of the RAM area other than the special drawing counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb (S1753A). After that, the areas of the RAM 222 other than the special drawing counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb are initialized, and initial data is set (S1754A).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM 203 is initialized, and an initialization (clear) process (S1753A) is executed for the areas of the RAM area in use other than the special drawing counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb. After that, the areas of the RAM 222 other than the special drawing counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb are set as initial settings, and the initial data is set (S1754A). After that, the process of S1710 is executed.

Similarly, if the power failure occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed based on the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process proceeds to S1710 after executing S1712, S1753A, and S1754A.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S1704: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S1707: Yes), the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S1708) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command at power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power interruption (S1709), and the process proceeds to S1721A. In the process of S1721A, a start-up signal output process (S1721A) is executed. This start-up signal output process (S1721A) is the same process as the process of FIG. 533 in the 16th control example described above, so illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

After the start-up signal output process (S1721A) is executed, a process (S31701) is executed to send a status command including information indicating the value of the special drawing counter 203la to the voice lamp control device 113, and a process (S31702) is executed to send a status command including information stored in the game status storage area 203g to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, a performance permission command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit various performances to be executed (S1710). After that, an interrupt is permitted (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 633, the setting value control process (S1752A), which is one process within the start-up process (FIG. 632) executed by the main control device 110 in this tenth control example, will be described. FIG. 633 is a flowchart showing the control contents of this setting value control process (S1752A). In the setting value control process (S1752A), processing is mainly executed to change and confirm the settings of the gaming machine.

First, in the setting value control process (S1752A), it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 is on (operated) (S1761A). If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 122 is on (S1761A: Yes), a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1712), and an initialization process for the RAM 203 is performed to initialize (clear) the areas of the RAM area other than the special drawing counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb (S1763A). After that, the areas of the RAM 222 other than the special drawing counter 203la and the scenario storage area 203sb are set as initial settings, and initial data is set (S1764A).

After that, a state command is set to indicate the setting change state to show that the setting change is being executed (S1765A). It is determined whether the setting switch is on (S1766A). If it is determined that the setting switch is on (S1766A: Yes), the data in the setting value storage area is updated to the set setting type (S1767A). It is determined whether the setting key is in the off position (S1768A), and if it is determined that the setting key is in the off position (S1768A: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key is in the on position (S1768: No), the processes of S1766A, S1767A and S1768A are repeatedly executed until the setting key is in the off position.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1761A that the RAM erase switch is off (S1761A: No), a payout restoration command at power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cut (S1769A), data is read from the setting value storage area (S1770A), the setting value corresponding to the read data is displayed on the setting display device (S1771A), a status command indicating the setting confirmation status is set (S1772A), and it is determined whether the setting key is off (S1773A). If it is determined that the setting key is in the off position (S1773A: Yes), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the setting key is in the on position (S1773A: No), the process of S1773A is repeatedly executed until the setting key is in the on position.

Next, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this 19th control example will be described with reference to Figs. 634 to 637. Note that illustrations and descriptions of the same contents as in the 16th control example will be omitted.

Referring to FIG. 634, the performance mode setting process 19 (S5001A) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 634 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of this performance mode setting process 19 (S5001A).

This presentation mode setting process 19 (S5001) executes processing to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the special pattern variation, and executes processing to set various presentation modes depending on the results of the special pattern lottery for which the presentation mode is set and the currently set game state.

When the performance mode setting process 19 (S5001A) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is the second time-saving state or the third time-saving state (S34401). If it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (S34401: No), the performance setting process 19 for normal mode is executed (S34431A), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S34401, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is greater than 0 (S34401: Yes), it is determined whether the result of the special pattern lottery (determination result) is a jackpot (S34432A), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S34432A: Yes), a presentation mode indicating a jackpot is set (S3433A), and after executing the process of S34407, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S34432A, if it is determined that the lottery result is other than a jackpot (S34432: No), the value of the time-saving counter 223da is decremented by 1 (S34403), it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern for when the ceiling is reached is set (S34434A), and if it is determined that a fluctuation pattern for when the ceiling is reached is set (S34434A: Yes), the presentation mode for when the ceiling is reached is set based on the data in the bonus history storage area 223pb (S34435A), and after executing the process of S34407, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not for when the ceiling is reached (S34434A: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving display count counter is greater than 0, i.e., whether the number of remaining time-saving times in the presentation is greater than 0 (S34436A). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving display count counter is 0 or less (S34436A: No), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is 0 (S34437: Yes), and if it is determined that it is 0 (S34437A: Yes), it determines the presentation mode indicating that the chance time (time-saving game state) has ended (S34438A), and after executing the processing of S34407, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S34437A that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is not 0 (S34437A: No), a presentation mode that avoids the end of the chance time (such as a presentation mode in which the rabbit character does not fall into the hole in the cloud (see FIG. 620(b))) is determined (S34439A), and after the processing of S34407 is executed, this processing ends.

In addition, in the process of S34436A, if it is determined that the hit of the time-saving display count counter 223sa is a value greater than 0 (S34436A: Yes), the value of the time-saving display count counter 223sa is subtracted by 1, and a display command is set to indicate the value of the time-saving display count counter 223sa after subtraction (S34441A). After that, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving display count counter 223sa is 0 (S34442A), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving display count counter 223sa is 0 (S34442: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is a value greater than 10 (S34444A), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is a value greater than 10 (S34444A: Yes), a performance mode in which the maximum value of the multiples of 10 less than or equal to the value of the time-saving counter is added as the time-saving count is determined (S34448A). Then, the process of S34407 is executed, and the process ends. In the process of S34407, a display variation pattern command indicating the determined performance mode is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S34442A, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving display count counter 223sa is not 0 (S34442A: No), the presentation mode for the chance time according to the received fluctuation pattern is determined (S34443A), and then the process of S34407 is executed, and this process is terminated. Also, in the process of S34444A, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223da is 10 or less (S34444A: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223da is 0 (S34445A), and if it is 0 (S34445A: Yes), the presentation mode indicating that the chance time (time-saving game state) is ending is determined (S34447A). Then, the process of S34407 is executed, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S34445A that the time-saving counter 223da is not 0 (S3445A: No), the presentation mode indicating a transition to the end waiting zone (see FIG. 620(b)) is determined (S3446A). After that, the process of S34407 is executed, and then this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 635, the normal mode presentation setting process (S34431A), which is one process within the previously explained presentation mode setting process 19 (S5001: FIG. 634), will be described. FIG. 635 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of this normal mode presentation setting process (S34431A). In this normal mode presentation setting process (S34431A), processing is executed to set the presentation mode that will be executed until the ceiling game state is set.

In the normal mode effect setting process 19 (S34431A), first, the time-saving suggestion effect selection table 222pb is read (S34511A), and the effect mode of the suggestion effect corresponding to the value of the special symbol selection count counter 223lc and the data in the bonus history storage area 223pb is determined (S34512A). It is determined whether the value of the special symbol selection count counter 223lc is 500, which indicates the specified number of times for setting the ceiling game state (S3413A). If the value of the special symbol selection count counter 223lc is 500 (S34513A: Yes), the number of times the special symbol has changed has reached the specified number for setting the ceiling game state, so the ceiling reached flag 223sb is set to on to indicate that the game will transition to the ceiling game state, and the process proceeds to S34518A.

On the other hand, in the processing of S34513A, if the value of the special drawing counter 2231c is not 500 (S34513A: No), the data of the bonus history storage area 223pb is read (S34514A), and it is determined whether the number of drawings after the previous normal bonus is 500 (S34515A). If it is determined that the number of drawings is 500 (S34515A: Yes), the processing proceeds to S34518A. On the other hand, in the processing of S34515A, if it is determined that the number of drawings is not 500 (S34515A: No), it is determined whether the number of drawings after the oldest small bonus is 500 (S34516A). If it is determined that the number of drawings is not 500 (S34516A: No), the processing proceeds to S34522. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of draws is 500 (S34516A: Yes), the oldest small bonus history is deleted from the bonus history storage area 223pb (S34517), and the process proceeds to S34518.

In the process of S34518A, a display mode is set to encourage the player not to play with a right-handed hit (S34518A), and the process proceeds to S34522A. In S34522A, a variable pattern setting process is executed (S34522A). After that, the linked performance flag 223pe is updated according to the determined performance mode (S34520A), and this process ends. Details of the variable pattern setting process (S34522A) will be described later with reference to FIG. 636.

Next, referring to FIG. 636, we will explain the variation pattern setting process (S34522), which is one process within the normal performance setting process 19 (S34431: FIG. 635) described above. FIG. 636 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of this variation pattern setting process (S34522A).

In the variable pattern setting process (S34522A), first, the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is judged to be whether the time-saving symbol is a hit (S34551A). If it is judged that the hit/miss judgment result is a time-saving symbol hit (S34551A: Yes), it is judged whether the number of time-saving times corresponding to the current time-saving symbol is equal to or greater than the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number (the specified number of times at which the ceiling game state is set) (S34553A). If it is judged to be equal to or greater than the remaining number of times (S34553A: Yes), a value indicating the number of times the special symbol will be lottery-drawn until the ceiling time-saving (ceiling game state) ends is set in the time-saving number counter (S34556A). It is judged whether the value of the time-saving number counter is less than 150 (S34557A). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving count counter is less than 150 (S34557A: Yes), a presentation mode in which 150 time-saving counts are notified is determined (S34559A), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S34557A that the value of the time-saving count counter is not less than 150 (S34557A: No), a presentation mode in which 100 time-saving counts are notified is determined (S34558A), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S34553A, if it is determined that the number of time-saving times corresponding to the current time-saving pattern is not equal to or greater than the remaining number of times up to the ceiling lottery number (the specified number of times at which the ceiling game state is set) (S34553A: No), the presentation mode in which the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving pattern is announced is determined (S34554A), and the value of the number of time-saving times corresponding to one of the selected time-saving patterns A to C is set in the time-saving times counter (S34555A). After that, this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S34551A that the time-saving symbol has not been won (S34551A: No), the ceiling-related effect setting processing is executed (S34552A).

Figure 637 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ceiling-related performance setting process (S34552A) executed by the audio lamp control device 113. In this ceiling-related performance setting process (S34552A), if the received fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern for ceiling stimulation, the ceiling reached flag is used to determine whether or not the game has already transitioned to the ceiling gaming state, and settings are made to execute the corresponding performance mode.

First, in the ceiling-related performance setting process (S34552), it is determined whether the received fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern for ceiling stimulation (S34571A). If it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern for ceiling stimulation (S34571A: Yes), it is determined whether the ceiling reached flag 223sb, which indicates whether or not a transition to a ceiling gaming state has occurred, is on (S34574A). If it is determined that the ceiling reached flag 223sb is on (S34573A: Yes), the performance mode for ceiling stimulation corresponding to the next ceiling is determined by lottery. Here, the performance mode as shown in FIG. 625 is determined. Then, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the process of S34571A determines that the fluctuation pattern is not for ceiling tilt (S34571A: No), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is selected and this process ends. If the process of S34573A determines that the ceiling reached flag 223sb is off (S34573A: No), the performance mode for ceiling tilt (see FIG. 624) corresponding to the initial ceiling is determined (S34575A), and this process ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example, if the special symbol lottery does not result in a jackpot for a specified number of times (for example, 500 times) in succession, and if the time-saving symbol is won in the special symbol lottery, the time-saving game state is set directly (without going through a jackpot game), and during the execution of the variable display effect based on the winning of the time-saving symbol, a display is executed to notify (suggest) the number of time-saving times as one type of variable display mode. Then, if the time-saving symbol is won and the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state that is directly set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol (the number of times the special symbol changes at which the time-saving state ends if a jackpot is not won) is greater than the number of remaining lotteries up to the ceiling number of lotteries (the ceiling number of lotteries is reached within the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state that is set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol), a special display control is executed in which the number of time-saving times that is notified (suggested) is greater than the number of time-saving times that is set based on the winning of the time-saving symbol. More specifically, assuming that no jackpot is won during the time-saving state, the apparent number of times the time-saving number is reported is taken into account by the number of times the special symbol is drawn from the time-saving symbol winning until the time-saving state actually ends (transitions to the normal state) (in other words, if the ceiling number of draws is reached during the time-saving state based on the time-saving symbol winning, the number of draws until the time-saving state based on reaching the ceiling number of draws ends). By configuring in this way, it is possible to generate cases where a number of times the time-saving number is reported that is greater than the number of times the time-saving number is set based on the time-saving symbol winning, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example, even if the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, the remaining number of lotteries up to the ceiling number of lotteries is prevented from being cleared, and the counter value data for switching and setting the variation pattern group (variation pattern selection table) is also held (the progress status of the variation pattern scenario is held). By configuring in this way, even if a process such as RAM clear is executed, it is possible to set a time-saving state when the variation of the special pattern is executed a specified number of times (the ceiling number of lotteries is reached), and it is possible to set a variation pattern (variation time) using a suitable variation pattern selection table (variation pattern group) for each variation number up to the ceiling number of lotteries, regardless of whether a RAM clear operation is performed or not. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game that gradually increases the sense of expectation until the ceiling number of lotteries is reached, regardless of whether a RAM clear operation is performed or not. Furthermore, even if the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, the number of remaining draws up to the ceiling number of draws will not increase, so it is possible to prevent players from avoiding playing on a pachinko machine 10 where it is highly likely that a RAM clear operation has been performed (for example, when the hall was in a favorable state other than the normal state when it closed the previous day).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 19th control example, when a jackpot ends and a new variation pattern scenario is set, the counter value of a specific counter (special pattern lottery counter 203la) for managing the progress of the variation pattern scenario (number of times the special pattern is drawn (varied)) is updated each time a specific update condition (condition for executing the lottery for the special pattern) is satisfied, and when the value of the specific counter is updated to a counter value (first counter value) corresponding to a predetermined specified number (ceiling lottery number), a control (specific control) for setting a new variation pattern scenario is executed and the value of the specific counter is updated to a second counter value (for example, 0) that is less than the first counter value. More specifically, the value of the specific counter is cleared to 0 each time a jackpot is won, and a new variation pattern scenario is set, and the value of the specific counter is updated by adding 1 each time a lottery for a special pattern is executed, and the value of the specific counter is cleared to 0 and the specific control is executed based on the fact that the value of the specific counter has been updated to 500 corresponding to the ceiling lottery number. More specifically, the number of times the special symbols change is not judged as a jackpot, the number of times is reached as specified (the number of times of ceiling lotteries), and the time-saving game state (the ceiling game state) is set without going through the jackpot game every time the next display of the special symbols stops. The number of times remaining until the number of times of ceiling lotteries is reset when the number of times of ceiling lotteries is reached. In other words, after the number of times of ceiling lotteries is reached, the number of times of special symbols is further drawn for the number of times of ceiling lotteries, so that the time-saving game state (the ceiling game state) is set again. As a result, even if the player does not win a jackpot during the time-saving game state set based on the number of times of ceiling lotteries and transitions (falls) to the normal state, the player can aim to reach the number of times of ceiling lotteries again (the ceiling is activated again), so that the player's motivation for playing is not likely to decrease. In addition, in this 19th control example, the variation pattern scenario is reset based on the number of times of ceiling lotteries being reached. That is, based on the reaching of the ceiling number of draws, the correspondence between each of the number of variations until the next ceiling number of draws is reached and the variation pattern selection table to be referenced is reset. By configuring in this way, regardless of whether the ceiling number of draws has not been reached or the ceiling number of draws has been reached once or more and the time-saving state has been skipped, a special variation pattern can be selected when the number of draws remaining until the ceiling number of draws reaches a specific number (150, 100, and 50 remaining). In other words, since the ceiling teasing performance can be executed when the number of draws remaining until the ceiling number of draws reaches a specific number, it is possible to realize a gameplay that gradually increases the player's sense of expectation until the ceiling number of draws is reached, regardless of whether the ceiling number of draws has been reached once or more.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 19th control example, a variation pattern scenario (a data table that specifies the correspondence between the type of variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern and the number of times a special pattern is drawn) is set as a set (stored in the scenario storage area 223sb) of a scenario for a normal state and a scenario for a game state other than the normal state, and during the normal state, the type of variation pattern selection table corresponding to the number of times a special pattern is drawn is identified by referring to a scenario for the normal state from the set of scenarios that has been set, while during a game state other than the normal state (a special bonus state or a time-saving state), the type of variation pattern selection table corresponding to the number of times a special pattern is drawn is identified by referring to a scenario for the other than the normal state from the set of scenarios that has been set. That is, even if the game state is changed midway (for example, when the time-saving symbol is won in the normal state and the state is changed to the time-saving state), the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the number of variations) when the variation pattern scenario is referred to is not reset, and the variation pattern selection table can be specified by referring to the scenario for the corresponding game state from the set scenarios. Therefore, even if the normal state continues without transitioning to another game state, or even if the normal state is set after transitioning to the time-saving state one or more times, the correspondence between the number of times the special symbol is drawn since the end of the previous big win and the type of the variation pattern selection table to be referred to can be made common while staying in the normal state. Therefore, regardless of the circumstances under which the normal state is set, when the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of draws reaches a specific number (150 times, 100 times, and 50 times), the variation pattern for the ceiling agitation can be selected, and the performance for the ceiling agitation can be executed. In other words, in the 19th control example, in a state (normal state) where control for specifying a variation pattern selection table by referring to a variation pattern scenario for the normal state is executed for each variation, when a change condition for the game state is satisfied, control for specifying a variation pattern selection table by referring to a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the game state after the change is executed for each variation, and when an end condition for the game state after the change is satisfied and the game state returns to the normal state again, the specification of the variation pattern selection table is resumed from the number of times of drawing of the special symbol that takes into account the number of times of drawing of the special symbol executed while the game state was changed in the variation pattern scenario for the normal state. In other words, regardless of the timing and number of times of drawing set to other game states, if the normal state is set and the number of times of drawing of the special symbol after the previous big win (or reaching the ceiling number of times of drawing) is common, the same variation pattern selection table is referenced to select the variation pattern. As a result, regardless of the circumstances under which the normal state was set, when the number of times remaining until the ceiling number of times of drawing becomes a specific number (150 times, 100 times, and 50 times), a variation pattern for ceiling agitation can be selected, and a performance for ceiling agitation can be executed. This allows you to set the presentation in the normal state in an optimal way.

In the 19th control example, the time-saving state set when the ceiling number of draws is reached for the first time without winning the jackpot after the jackpot is ended and the time-saving state set when the ceiling number of draws is reached for the second or subsequent time are configured to have the same degree of advantage, but this is not limited to the above, and the degree of advantage may be different. More specifically, the degree of advantage may be different by making the number of time-savings different between the first ceiling game state and the second or subsequent ceiling game states, or, for example, as in the 17th control example described above, a time-saving state A (a time-saving state in which a lottery for the first special symbol with a low degree of advantage is mainly executed) and a time-saving state B (a time-saving state in which a lottery for the second special symbol with a high degree of advantage is mainly executed) may be provided, and the type of time-saving state set between the first ceiling game state and the second or subsequent ceiling game states may be different, thereby making the degree of advantage different. In this case, the second and subsequent ceiling game states may be more advantageous than the first ceiling game state, or the first ceiling game state may be more advantageous. By configuring the second and subsequent ceiling game states to be more advantageous, even if the player does not win a jackpot in the first ceiling game state and transitions to the normal game state, the player can aim for the second, more advantageous ceiling game state, so that the player's motivation for playing can be maintained. Also, by configuring the first ceiling game state to be more advantageous, the player can be restrained from choosing a playing method in which the next ceiling lottery number is a mental support and he or she does not quit playing until he or she wins a jackpot after skipping the ceiling game state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively addicted to playing.

In the 19th control example, regardless of whether the setting has been changed, even if the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, the value of the special drawing counter 203la is maintained as it was when the power was turned off, and the remaining number of draws until the ceiling number of draws does not increase. In other words, the remaining number of draws until the ceiling number of draws after power is turned on is common between power on without a RAM clear operation and power on with a RAM clear operation, but elements other than the remaining number of draws until the ceiling number of draws may also be common. Specifically, for example, the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 at the time of power on may be common. More specifically, for example, the display of the first pattern display device 37 may be erased, a common pattern may be temporarily displayed, or a predetermined movable role may be moved in front of the first pattern display device 37 to hide the first pattern display device 37 from the time the power is turned on until at least the first variable display is started. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it more difficult to determine whether the power is simply turned on or the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation. In this case, even if the power supply is cut off while the variable display is being executed and the power supply is simply turned on (i.e., the RAM clear operation is not performed), the above-mentioned control (the display of the first pattern display device 37 is erased or a common pattern is temporarily displayed) may be executed without restarting the variable display. Conversely, information indicating the state of the special pattern at the time of the power supply cut off (for example, whether or not the variable display is being executed) may be retained so as not to be cleared even if the power supply is turned on with the RAM clear operation, and if it is determined that the variable display was being executed at the time of the previous power supply cut off, even if the power supply is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the display mode may be set so that the variable display is pseudo-resumed in the first pattern display device 37 at the time of power supply on. Also, if it is determined that the previous power supply cut off was a jackpot game state, the display mode may be set to indicate that the jackpot game is pseudo-played in the first pattern display device 37. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the power was turned on with or without a RAM clear operation, and the player can predict whether or not a RAM clear operation has been performed. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the 19th control example, when the ceiling number of draws is reached, the value of the special drawing counter 203la is cleared to 0 to reset the variation pattern scenario up to the next ceiling number of draws and reset the remaining number of draws up to the ceiling number of draws, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a separate counter may be provided to manage the progress of the variation pattern scenario, and when the ceiling number of draws is reached, the counter for managing the progress of the variation pattern scenario may be reset to a specific value (for example, 250, which is half the ceiling number of draws) rather than being cleared to 0. By configuring in this way, a variation pattern scenario that is significantly different from the scenario up to the first ceiling number of draws is possible, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In this 19th control example, when a jackpot ends and a new fluctuation pattern scenario is set, the counter value of a specific counter (special pattern lottery counter 203la) is updated each time a specific update condition (condition for executing a lottery for a special pattern) is met, and when the value of the specific counter is updated to a counter value (first counter value) corresponding to a predetermined specified number of times (ceiling lottery number of times), control (specific control) is executed to set a new fluctuation pattern scenario and the value of the specific counter is updated to a second counter value (e.g., 0) that is less than the first counter value. However, the specific counter is not limited to a counter for managing the progress of the fluctuation pattern scenario, and the specific control is not limited to control for setting a fluctuation pattern scenario, and the control of this 19th control example may be diverted to other counters and controls installed in the pachinko machine 10. For example, the first winning random number counter C1 for executing the lottery for the special pattern may be used as the specific counter, the fluctuation type counter CS1 for selecting the fluctuation pattern may be used as the specific counter, or the voice lamp control device 113 may be used as the counter for selecting the presentation mode. Also, the control process for executing the winning game may be used as the specific control, the process for selecting the fluctuation pattern may be used as the specific control, the control for determining the presentation mode according to the fluctuation type notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the fluctuation pattern command may be used as the specific control, or the control for determining the presentation mode according to the pre-reading result notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the winning information command may be used as the specific control.

In the 19th control example, in a state (normal state) where control for identifying a variation pattern selection table is executed by referring to a variation pattern scenario for the normal state for each variation, when a change condition for the game state is satisfied, control for identifying a variation pattern selection table is executed by referring to a variation pattern scenario corresponding to the game state after the change for each variation, and when the end condition for the game state after the change is satisfied and the game state returns to the normal state again, the identification of the variation pattern selection table is resumed from the number of times that the special symbol was drawn, taking into account the number of times that the special symbol was drawn while the game state was changed in the variation pattern scenario for the normal state. However, this control is not limited to the control for identifying a variation pattern selection table from a variation pattern scenario. If a situation arises where a condition for executing a third control with a higher priority is satisfied while the first control and the second control are executed in a predetermined order, the third control is executed with priority over the first control and the second control, it can be adopted. For example, if a playback condition for a high-priority audio is met while control is being executed to play audio such as music, the originally played music may be played at zero volume while the high-priority audio is being played, and when playback of the high-priority audio ends, the volume of the originally played music may be returned to normal volume, so that control allows playback of the originally played audio to continue from where it left off, taking into account the output period of the high-priority audio.

<20th control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 20th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 638 to FIG. 649. In the above-mentioned 17th control example, a configuration was adopted in which a scenario covering the number of times of drawing special symbols in a range up to the number of times the ceiling drawing number is reached twice (i.e., 300 times) was predefined as a variation pattern scenario, and when the second ceiling drawing number is reached without winning a jackpot, the counter value of the special drawing counter 203qa was updated to the counter value corresponding to the first ceiling drawing number (i.e., 150). In other words, after reaching the ceiling drawing number once, the variation pattern scenario was configured to repeat a scenario in which the number of times of drawing special symbols is in the range of 150 to 300 times (the range of the number of times of drawing from the time-saving state based on the ceiling drawing number reaching to the next ceiling drawing number), thereby making it possible to omit a variation pattern scenario in the range in which the number of times of drawing special symbols exceeds 300 times, and reducing the storage capacity of the ROM 202. In addition, by configuring the device to use a special symbol drawing counter 203qa for determining whether or not the ceiling number of drawing attempts has been reached as a counter for determining the number of times a special symbol has been drawn when identifying a variation pattern from a variation pattern scenario, the number of times the special symbol has changed and the progress of the variation pattern scenario are always consistent regardless of whether or not the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation (i.e., an operation of turning on the RAM clear switch 122).

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the 20th control example, a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is drawn (special symbol drawing counter 203qa) and a counter for determining the number of times a special symbol is drawn when a variation pattern is specified from a variation pattern scenario (scenario counter 203tb) are separately provided, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 on, only the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa is reset, and the value of the scenario counter 203tb is held. In other words, the progress of the variation pattern scenario is held from the state at the time of power off, and only the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number of draws is reset. In addition, in the 20th control example, the variation pattern scenario is set for the number of draws up to the ceiling number of draws based on the fact that the first specific drawing result (for example, a drawing result corresponding to a small win) different from the big win is obtained in the drawing of a special symbol after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 on. In addition, in the 20th control example, in order to reliably set the variation pattern scenario triggered by the first drawing of the special symbol after the power is turned on, the specification is adopted in which the drawing of the first special symbol is either a big win or a small win, as in the 17th control example described above. More specifically, as in the 17th control example, the specification of a so-called one-type two-type mixed machine is adopted, and when the drawing of the first special symbol is executed, there is a 1/50 (18/900) probability of winning a big win, and there is a 1/49 (872/900) probability of winning a small win type in which it is difficult (impossible) to obtain a prize ball and to generate a V prize. By configuring in this way, the variation pattern scenario can be reset by drawing the first special symbol once after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 on, so that the variation pattern performance can be preferably executed up to the ceiling number of draws.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 20th control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 17th control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 17th control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 638, the characteristic presentation mode in the 20th control example will be described. As described above, in the 20th control example, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on, the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number of times is reset, while the progress of the variation pattern scenario is maintained, and the variation pattern scenario is set up to the ceiling number of times based on the first small win after the power is turned on. Also, as described above, in the 20th control example, when the lottery for the first special pattern is executed, either a big win or a small win is always won. As a result, if the lottery for the first special pattern after the power is turned on is a big win, the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number of times is reset as in the other control examples, and the variation pattern scenario according to the reset remaining number can be reset, while even if the lottery for the first special pattern is a lottery result other than a big win (i.e., a small win), the variation pattern scenario can be set up to the number of times of lottery up to the ceiling number of times. Figure 638 shows the presentation mode when the initial drawing of the first special symbol results in a specific drawing result (i.e., a small win) that is different from a big win, and the conditions for setting a new variation pattern scenario are met.

Figure 638 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a variable display mode when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on and the result of the first lottery for the first special symbol is a small win. As shown in Figure 638 (a), when the result of the first lottery for the first special symbol after power is turned on is a small win, the variable display of the third symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, and at the bottom of the main display area Dm, a futon 852, a character 801 resembling a rabbit sleeping in the futon 852, and an alarm clock 851 sounding an alarm are displayed. In addition, the words "Waiting to wake up..." are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily recognize that something will happen when the rabbit character 801 wakes up.

Figure 638 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the time of stopping the variation among the variable display modes when the first lottery result of the first special pattern is a small win. As shown in Figure 638 (b), when the timing of stopping the variable display corresponding to a small win of the first special pattern (i.e., a lottery result substantially equivalent to a miss in other control examples) comes, the third pattern is stopped and displayed in a miss combination in the main display area Dm, and a display mode in which the rabbit character 801 pushes off the futon 852 is displayed. In addition, a speech bubble image FD imitating a speech bubble is displayed to the left of the rabbit character 801, and the word "Let's go!" is displayed on the speech bubble image FD. Furthermore, the word "Wake up completed!" is displayed on the sub-display area Ds. These display contents can suggest to the player that some preparations have been made internally in the pachinko machine 10. In addition, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on, a special performance mode is generated in the variable display mode based on the first drawing of the special symbol, so that the player can easily determine whether the RAM clear has been performed. In other words, since it is possible to determine whether the remaining number of times up to the ceiling number of times of drawing has been cleared by the first drawing of the first special symbol, the player can be made to want to try drawing the special symbol at least once after turning on the power. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall can be improved. Also, as in the above-mentioned 19th control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has a specification that allows the setting to be changed to multiple stages, the player can be made to determine whether the setting is possible or not by configuring a performance mode that confirms that the RAM clear has been performed. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall can be further improved.

In the 20th control example, the rabbit-like character 801 wakes up without making it clear what has been set inside the pachinko machine 10, but the presentation mode may make it clear that a variation pattern scenario has been set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that they have moved into some advantageous state.

<Electrical configuration in 20th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 639, the details of the ROM 202 in the 20th control example will be described. FIG. 639 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the 20th control example. As shown in FIG. 639, the ROM 202 in the 20th control example is different from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 17th control example described above (see FIG. 552) in that a fluctuation pattern scenario 20 table 202tj is provided instead of the fluctuation pattern scenario 17 table 202qj. In addition, the contents of the fluctuation pattern 17 table 202qd have also been partially changed. The other configurations are the same as those in the 17th control example described above, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted here. Details of the fluctuation pattern scenario 20 table 202tj will be described with reference to FIG. 641 and FIG. 642.

Figure 641 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202tj in this 20th control example. This fluctuation pattern scenario table 202tj is a data table in which the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to is associated with each number of times the special pattern is drawn, similar to the fluctuation pattern scenario 17 table 202qj in the above-mentioned 17th control example. As shown in Figure 641 (a), the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202tj in this 20th control example is at least composed of a post-win table 202tj1 that specifies the correspondence between the number of times the special pattern is drawn after the big win and the type of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to, a post-small win table 202tj2 that specifies the correspondence between the number of times the special pattern is drawn after the first small win of the first special pattern after the RAM is cleared and the type of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to, and a ceiling reach table 202tj3 that specifies the correspondence between the number of times the special pattern is drawn after the ceiling number of times is reached and the type of the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to. First, we will explain the details of the post-win table 202tj1 described above with reference to FIG. 641(b).

Figure 641 (b) shows the contents of the post-win table 202tj1. As shown in Figure 641 (b), the post-win table 202tj1 in this 20th control example is specified by associating the type of variation pattern table corresponding to the combination of the number of times the special symbol was drawn (scenario counter) and the current game state for each type of jackpot game executed last time.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 641(b), in a situation where the previous jackpot type was "jackpot A17" and the current game state is normal, the normal table 202qd1 is associated with the ranges of 1 to 99, 101 to 139, and 141 to 150 for the number of times the special symbol has been drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb). Therefore, when a special symbol is drawn within these ranges of the number of times it has been drawn, the normal table 202qd1 is referenced to select a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). On the other hand, the ceiling tilt table 202sb3 is associated with the ranges of 100 and 140 for the number of times the special symbol has been drawn. This ceiling fanning table 202sb3 is the same data table as the ceiling fanning table 202sb3 provided in the variation pattern selection 19 table 202sb in the 19th control example described above, and although not shown, it is also added to the variation pattern 17 table 202qd in the 20th control example. As described above, the small win of the first special symbol in the 20th control example is a lottery result equivalent to a miss in other control examples, so when the small win of the first special symbol occurs in the 20th control example, the variation pattern is selected by allocation corresponding to the miss lottery result. In other words, it is configured so that either a normal reach miss with a variation time of 15 seconds or a super reach miss with a variation time of 30 seconds is always selected. Therefore, when a variation display performance with a variation time of 15 seconds or 30 seconds is set, it is possible to make the player think that the ceiling lottery number is close, and therefore it is possible to improve the player's expectation of reaching the ceiling lottery number. In addition, in this 20th control example, when the ceiling number of draws is reached, the fluctuation pattern scenario switches to a scenario that references the table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached, so only scenarios up to the ceiling number of draws are specified in the post-win table 202tj1.

Also, as shown in FIG. 641(b), when the previous jackpot type was "jackpot A17" and the current game state is the time-saving state, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is associated and specified regardless of the number of times the special symbol has been drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb). Therefore, from the end of the jackpot A17 until the ceiling number of draws is reached, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is referenced as long as the time-saving state continues (the number of time-saving draws remains), forming the time-saving state A in which the drawing of the first special symbol is mainly performed.

As shown in FIG. 641(b), when the previous jackpot type was "jackpot B17" and the current game state is normal, the same variation pattern scenario is defined as when the previous jackpot type was "jackpot A17". In other words, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the ranges of 1 to 99, 101 to 139, and 141 to 150 for the number of times the special symbol has been drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb), and the ceiling tilt table 202sb3 is defined in association with the number of times the special symbol has been drawn, 100 and 140. In contrast, in a situation where the jackpot type is "jackpot B17" and the current game state is the time-saving state, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is associated with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) in the range of 7 to 150, and the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is associated with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) in the range of 1 to 6. Therefore, for the number of times of drawing 7 to 150 times after the end of the jackpot B17, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is referenced as long as the time-saving state continues (the number of time-saving times remains), forming a time-saving state A in which the drawing of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Also, for the number of times of drawing 1 to 6 times after the end of the jackpot B17, the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is referenced, forming a time-saving state B. This creates an extremely favorable situation in which the lottery for the second special symbol is primarily executed.

As shown in FIG. 641(b), when the previous jackpot type was "jackpot C17-E17" and the current game state is normal, the same variation pattern scenario is defined as when the previous jackpot type was "jackpot A17" or "jackpot B17". In other words, the normal table 202qd1 is defined in association with the ranges of 1-99, 101-139, and 141-150 for the number of times the special symbol has been drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb), and the ceiling tilt table 202sb3 is defined in association with the number of times the special symbol has been drawn, 100 and 140. In contrast, in a situation where the jackpot type is "jackpot C17-E17" and the current game state is the time-saving state, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is associated with the number of times of drawing the special symbol (value of the scenario counter 203tb) in the range of 12-150, and the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is associated with the number of times of drawing the special symbol (value of the scenario counter 203tb) in the range of 1-11. Therefore, for the number of times of drawing 12-150 times after the end of the jackpot C17-E17, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is referenced as long as the time-saving state continues (time-saving number remains), forming the time-saving state A in which the drawing of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Also, for the number of times of drawing 1-11 times after the end of the jackpot B17, the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is referenced, forming the time-saving state B. This creates an extremely favorable situation in which the lottery for the second special symbol is primarily carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 642(a), the details of the table 202tj2 for after the small win, which is one of the data tables constituting the above-mentioned variation pattern scenario table 202tj, will be described. As described above, the table 202tj2 for after the small win is a data table that specifies the variation pattern scenario that is set when the first special symbol is won in the small win after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 642(a), in a situation where the current game state is the normal state, the normal table 202qd1 is specified in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) in the ranges of 1 to 99, 101 to 139, and 141 to 150, and the ceiling tilt table 202sb3 is specified in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn in the ranges of 100 and 140. On the other hand, in a situation where the current game state is the time-saving state, the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is specified in correspondence with the entire range of the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) from 1 to 150. Therefore, if the time-saving state is transitioned to after 150 times (the number of times of drawing less than the ceiling number of times of drawing) after power-on with RAM clear operation, the time-saving state A with a relatively low degree of advantage is formed. Note that this 20th control example is based on the 17th control example, and since there is no allocation of the time-saving symbol winning in the drawing of the first special symbol, the only case in which the time-saving state is transitioned to within 150 times after power-on with RAM clear operation is when the time-saving symbol is won in the drawing of the second special symbol. In other words, this is a case in which an irregular game method is performed in which the drawing of the second special symbol is executed by hitting the right hand even though the time-saving state is not in effect, so this case does not generally occur.

Next, referring to FIG. 642(b), the details of the ceiling reaching table 202tj3, which is one of the data tables constituting the above-mentioned variation pattern scenario table 202tj, will be described. As described above, the ceiling reaching table 202tj3 is a data table that specifies the variation pattern scenario that is set when the number of times the special symbol is drawn reaches the ceiling number of times. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 642(b), in a situation where the current game state is the normal state, the normal table 202qd1 is specified in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) in the ranges of 1 to 99, 101 to 139, and 141 to 150, and the ceiling tilt table 202sb3 is specified in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn, which is 100 and 140. On the other hand, in a situation where the current game state is a time-saving state, the ceiling-reaching table 202sb4 is defined in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) being 1, the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is defined in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) being in the range of 2 to 12, and the special symbol 1 time-saving table 202qd2 is defined in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203tb) being in the range of 13 to 150. Therefore, if the first special symbol drawing is not a winning combination after the ceiling drawing number is reached, a super reach variation with a variation time of 30 seconds is always set. In other words, a sufficient presentation period can be secured to perform various notifications such as a presentation mode that celebrates the reaching of the ceiling drawing number, and therefore the presentation mode can be set appropriately. In addition, after the ceiling number of draws is reached, the special symbol 2 time-saving table 202qd3 is referenced for the number of draws from 2 to 12, forming the time-saving state B. Therefore, the extremely advantageous time-saving state B in which the second special symbol is mainly drawn is formed. In addition, for the number of draws from 13 onwards, as long as there are still time-saving counts remaining, the relatively less advantageous time-saving state A in which the first special symbol is mainly drawn is formed. Furthermore, when the number of time-saving counts becomes 0, the normal state scenario is referenced, so if the 100th or 140th special symbol draw after the ceiling is reached is not a winning combination, a ceiling-teasing performance can be executed. Therefore, the player can be made to expect the ceiling number of draws to be reached again.

In this way, in this 20th control example, the number of times the special symbol is drawn when the variation pattern scenario is referenced is determined by the value of the scenario counter 203tb, and the scenario counter 203tb is configured to retain its value even when the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation. Then, when the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation and the first drawing of the first special symbol is a small win, the table 202tj2 for after the small win is set as the variation pattern scenario. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suitably reset the variation pattern scenario up to the ceiling number of draws without initializing the scenario counter 203tb by a RAM clear operation. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, it is possible to suitably set the performance mode up to the ceiling number of draws.

Next, referring to FIG. 640, the RAM 203 in this 20th control example will be described in detail. FIG. 640 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this 20th control example. As shown in FIG. 640, the RAM 203 in this 20th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 17th control example (see FIG. 553) in that a ceiling time reduction waiting flag 203sa, a scenario storage area 203sb, an initial small win flag 203ta, and a scenario counter 203tb have been added. The other configurations are the same as those in the above-mentioned 17th control example, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted here.

The ceiling time-saving standby flag 203sa is the same as the ceiling time-saving standby flag 203sa added to the RAM 203 in the 19th control example described above, and is a flag for waiting for the occurrence of the time-saving state until the end of the variable display executed for the first time after the variable display for the ceiling lottery number ends, when the setting condition for the time-saving state is established based on the fact that the ceiling lottery number has been reached. Also, the scenario storage area 203sb is the same as the scenario storage area 203sb added to the RAM 203 in the 19th control example described above, and is a memory area for storing data indicating the currently set variable pattern scenario.

The first small win flag 203ta is a flag that indicates whether or not a small win of the first special pattern has occurred at least once after the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch 122 turned on (after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation). If the first small win flag 203ta is on, it means that a small win has been won at least once, and if it is off, it means that a small win has not been won at all. The initial value of this first small win flag 203ta is set to off, and it is set to on when a small win is won in the drawing of the first special pattern (see Y773 in FIG. 646). If a small win is won in the drawing of the first special pattern, the state of this first small win flag 203ta is referenced to determine whether or not it is the first small win after the RAM is cleared. If it is the first small win, the variation pattern scenario in the range up to the ceiling number of draws (150 times) is overwritten.

The scenario counter 203tb is a counter for determining the current number of times the special symbol is drawn when selecting a variation pattern table according to the variation pattern scenario. This scenario counter 203tb is set to a value of 1 when the first special symbol wins a small win after the RAM is cleared and a variation pattern scenario for after the small win (table 202tj2 for after the small win) is set (see Y773 in FIG. 646). In addition, when the big win ends or the ceiling number of draws is reached, the corresponding variation pattern scenario is set and the value is reset to 0 (see S38133A in FIG. 645 and Y2712 in FIG. 648). In addition, 1 is added to the value when the special symbol starts to vary (see Y521 in FIG. 644). By configuring the scenario counter 203tb to manage the number of draws of the special symbol, a variation pattern can be set to indicate that the ceiling number of draws is approaching 50 times or 10 times before the ceiling number of draws is reached. This can effectively increase players' sense of anticipation until the ceiling number of draws is reached.

Next, referring to FIG. 643, the details of the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 20th control example will be described. FIG. 643 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this 20th control example. As shown in FIG. 643, the RAM 223 in this 20th control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 17th control example (see FIG. 558) only in that a scenario set flag 223ta has been added. This scenario set flag 223ta is a flag indicating whether or not a fluctuation pattern scenario has been set one or more times after the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation for the pachinko machine 10. If it is on, it means that the fluctuation pattern scenario has been set one or more times, and if it is off, it means that the fluctuation pattern scenario has not been set. The initial value of this scenario set flag 223ta is set to OFF, and is set to ON when the power is turned on without the RAM clear operation, or when the variation pattern scenario is set for the first time after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation (see S9114A in FIG. 649 and S9515A in FIG. 650). When a small win is won in the lottery for the first special symbol, this scenario set flag 223ta is referenced, and if the scenario set flag 223ta is OFF, this means that the variation pattern scenario is reset by the small win, so by executing the wake-up completion performance (see FIG. 638(b)), it is possible to suggest to the player that some setting has been completed as the internal control of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand the internal state of the pachinko machine 10 to some extent.

<Regarding control process of main control device in 20th control example>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 20th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 644 to Fig. 648. First, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 20 (Y331) in this 20th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 644. This first special symbol variation pattern selection process 20 (Y331) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (see Fig. 564) in the above-mentioned 17th control example, and is a process executed to select a variation pattern when a lottery for the first special symbol is executed, similar to the above-mentioned first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (see Fig. 564).

In the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 20 (see FIG. 644) in this 20th control example, the same processes as the Y501-Y503, Y505-Y508, and Y512 processes of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 17 (see FIG. 563) in the 17th control example described above are executed in each of the Y501-Y503, Y505-Y508, and Y512 processes. In addition, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 20 (see FIG. 644) in this 20th control example, when the process of Y503 is completed, the value of the scenario counter 203tb is updated by adding 1 (Y521), and the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the updated value of the scenario counter 203tb is identified from the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the data stored in the scenario storage area 203sb (Y522), and the process proceeds to Y512.

By executing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process 20 (see FIG. 644), the scenario counter 203tb is updated independently of the special symbol selection counter 203qa, and the corresponding variation pattern selection table can be accurately identified from the variation pattern scenario according to the value of the independently updated special symbol selection counter 203qa.

Next, referring to FIG. 645, the details of the ceiling determination process 20 (Y332) in this 20th control example will be described. This ceiling determination process 20 (Y332) is a process executed in place of the ceiling determination process 17 (see FIG. 564) in the above-mentioned 17th control example, and, like the ceiling determination process 17 (see FIG. 564), is a process for determining whether the ceiling number of draws has been reached depending on the value of the special drawing counter 203qa. FIG. 645 is a flowchart showing this ceiling determination process 20 (Y332).

Of the ceiling determination process 20 in this 20th control example (see FIG. 645), the processes of S38103, S38105, S38112A-S38114A, S38123A, and S38124A are the same as the processes of S38103, S38105, S38112A-S38114A, S38123A, and S38124A of the ceiling determination process 17 in the 17th control example (see FIG. 564). Also, in this 20th control example, the processes of S38121A and S38122A have been deleted.

In addition, in the ceiling determination process 20 (see FIG. 645) in this 20th control example, if it is determined in the process of S38123A that the value of the special drawing counter 203qa has been updated to 151 (S38123A: Yes), the value of the special drawing counter 203qa is updated to 1 (S38131A), and a fluctuation pattern scenario that references the ceiling reaching table 202tj3 is set by storing data indicating the ceiling reaching table 202tj3 in the scenario storage area 203sb (S38132A). Next, the value of the scenario counter 203tb is cleared to 0 (S38133A), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 646, the details of the special symbol 1 miss stop process 20 (Y731) in this 20th control example will be described. This special symbol 1 miss stop process 20 (Y731) is a process executed in place of the special symbol 1 miss stop process 17 (see FIG. 566) in the 17th control example described above, and like the special symbol 1 miss stop process 17 (see FIG. 566) in the 17th control example, it is a process for setting the stop display of the miss pattern when the change time of the change display corresponding to the miss of the first special symbol has elapsed.

In the special chart 1 miss stop processing 20 (see FIG. 646) in this 20th control example, the same processing as each of the Y751 to Y761 processes of the special chart 1 miss stop processing 17 (see FIG. 566) in the 17th control example described above is executed in each of the Y751 to Y761 processes. In addition, in the special chart 1 miss stop processing 20 (see FIG. 646) in this 20th control example, when the processing of S759 is completed, it is determined whether the first small win flag 203ta is on (Y771), and if it is determined that the first small win flag 203ta is on (Y771: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of Y771, if it is determined that the first small win flag 203ta is off (Y771: No), this means that the variable display corresponding to the first small win of the first special pattern has ended after the power was turned on with the RAM clear operation, so a variable pattern scenario that references the table 202tj2 for after the small win is set by storing data indicating the table 202tj2 for after the small win in the scenario storage area 203sb (Y772), the first small win flag 203ta is set to on, and the value of the scenario counter 203tb is set to 1 (Y773), and this process ends.

By executing this special symbol 1 miss stop processing 20 (see FIG. 646), when the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the first special symbol is drawn once, so that it is possible to reliably set a fluctuation pattern scenario up to the ceiling number of draws. Also, in the processing of Y771, if the first small win flag 203ta is on and a small win of the first special symbol is won under the circumstances where the fluctuation pattern scenario has already been set, it is possible to suppress resetting of the fluctuation pattern scenario, so that the timing of setting the fluctuation pattern scenario can be made common (at the time of the first draw after the RAM clear operation).

Next, referring to FIG. 647, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 20th control example will be described in detail. This start-up process is executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, similar to the start-up process (see FIG. 166) in the 17th control example (and the first control example) described above.

In the startup process 20 in this 20th control example (see FIG. 647), each of the steps S1701 to S1712 is the same as each of the steps S1701 to S1712 in the startup process in the 17th control example (and the 1st control example). In addition, in the startup process in this 20th control example (see FIG. 647), when the process of S1712 is completed, the memory area in the used RAM area other than the scenario storage area 203sb and the scenario counter 203tb is cleared (S1761A), and the memory area in RAM 203 other than the scenario storage area 203sb and the scenario counter 203tb is set to initial values (S1762A), and the process proceeds to S1710.

By executing the startup process (see FIG. 647) in this 20th control example, when power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, it is possible to initialize other data in RAM 203 while retaining the information on the set variation pattern scenario (data in scenario storage area 203sb) and the progress of the variation pattern scenario (value of scenario counter 203tb) in the state they were in when power was turned off.

Next, referring to FIG. 648, the details of the jackpot end process 20 (Y11621) in this 20th control example will be described. This jackpot end process 20 (Y11621) is a process executed in place of the jackpot end process 12 (see FIG. 437) in the above-mentioned 17th control example (and the 12th control example), and, like the jackpot end process 12 (see FIG. 437), is a process for making various settings based on the end of the jackpot.

In the jackpot end process 20 (see FIG. 648) in this 20th control example, the same processes as those in the jackpot end process 20 (see FIG. 437) in the 17th control example (and the 12th control example) in the 17th control example (and the 12th control example) in the 27th control example (see FIG. 437) in the Y2704 to Y2707 processes are executed. In addition, in the jackpot end process 20 (see FIG. 648) in this 20th control example, when the process in Y2707 is completed, data indicating the variation pattern scenario corresponding to the current jackpot type is stored in the scenario storage area 203sb (Y2711), the scenario counter 203tb is reset to 0 (Y2712), and this process is terminated.

<Control process of voice lamp control device in 20th control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 20th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 649 and Fig. 650. First, details of the normal state presentation setting process 20 (S9011A) in the 20th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 649. This normal state presentation setting process 20 (S9011A) is a process executed in place of the normal state presentation setting process (see Fig. 264) in the above-mentioned 17th control example (and the 5th control example), and is a process for setting the presentation mode when the normal state is notified by a state command as the game state, similar to the normal state presentation setting process (see Fig. 264).

When this normal state presentation setting process 20 (see FIG. 649) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the normal state was notified as the game state when the power was turned on for the pachinko machine 10 (S9111A). If it is determined that the normal state was notified based on the power being turned on (S9111A: No), a display command for the presentation mode corresponding to the normal state is set (S9112A), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9111A that the normal state was notified based on the power being turned on (S9111A: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the normal state was set by powering on with a RAM clear operation (S9113A). If it is determined that the power was turned on without a RAM clear operation (S9113A: No), the scenario set flag 223ta is set to ON (S9114A), and the process proceeds to S9112A.

In contrast, if the processing of S9113A determines that the power-on is accompanied by a RAM clear operation (S9113A: Yes), a display command for the wake-up waiting mode is set so that the wake-up waiting performance (see FIG. 638(a)) is executed when a special symbol is selected (see S9115A), and this processing ends. By executing this normal state performance setting processing 20 (see FIG. 649), it is possible to set the performance mode for the wake-up waiting mode while leaving the scenario set flag 223ta in the off state when the power-on is accompanied by a RAM clear operation.

Next, referring to FIG. 650, the details of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 20 (S4991A) in this 20th control example will be described. This special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 20 (S4991A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 5 (see FIG. 268) in the 17th control example (and the 5th control example), and is a process for setting the variable display mode of the first special symbol, similar to the special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 5 (see FIG. 2689). FIG. 650 is a flowchart showing this special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 20 (S4991A).

In the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 20 (see FIG. 650) in this 20th control example, in each process of S9501 to S9504, the same process as each process of S9501 to S9504 of the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 5 (see FIG. 268) in the 17th control example (and the 5th control example) is executed. In addition, in the special chart 1 performance mode setting process 20 (see FIG. 650) in this 20th control example, when each process of S9501 to S9503 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the scenario set flag 223ta is on (S9511A), and if the scenario set flag 223ta is on (S9511A: Yes), the variable display mode according to the variable pattern type notified by the variable pattern command is determined (S9512A), and the process proceeds to s9504.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9511A that the scenario set flag 223ta is off (S9511A: No), then it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a small win (S9513A), and if it is determined that it is not a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a small win (i.e., it is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a big win) (S9513A: No), the processing proceeds to S9512A. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S9513A that it is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a small win (S9513A: Yes), a fluctuation display mode accompanied by a wake-up completion performance (see FIG. 638(b)) is determined (S9514A), the scenario set flag 223ta is set to on (S9515A), and the processing proceeds to S9504.

By executing this special symbol 1 presentation mode setting process 20 (see FIG. 650), if a small win occurs in the first drawing of the first special symbol after the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, a wake-up completion presentation can be executed, suggesting to the player that some setting has been made in the internal control of the pachinko machine 10.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 in this 20th control example is configured to execute a predetermined specific control (setting of a new variation pattern scenario) based on the establishment of the first condition (winning a small jackpot with the first special symbol), which occurs relatively frequently during normal play, and to avoid (suppress) the execution of the specific control even if the first condition is established once the specific control has been executed. In other words, the specific control is permitted to be executed only when the first condition is established in a situation where the specific condition is not established, and is configured to perform a characteristic control that avoids the execution of the specific control even if the first condition is established in a situation where the specific condition is established. More specifically, in the twentieth control example, the first condition is met when the first drawing of a special symbol after the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on (after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation) results in a drawing different from the big win (for example, a drawing result corresponding to a small win), and the variation pattern scenario is set for the number of drawing times up to the ceiling number of drawing times. On the other hand, in a situation where a small win has already been won at least once after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation (a situation where a specific condition is met), the setting of the variation pattern scenario is avoided even if a small win is won. In other words, when a big win is won in the first drawing of a special symbol after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, a variation pattern scenario according to the big win type is set at the end of the big win, while a variation pattern scenario is set for the number of drawing times up to the ceiling number of drawing times even if a drawing result different from the big win (small win) occurs. In addition, once the variation pattern scenario is set, the variation pattern scenario is restricted from being overwritten. As a result, when the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the first special symbol is drawn, so that the variation pattern scenario can be set almost reliably. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the variation pattern scenario can be set up to the ceiling number of draws. In addition, in this 20th control example, a counter (special symbol drawing counter 203qa) for counting the number of draws of the special symbol and a counter (scenario counter 203tb) for determining the number of draws of the special symbol when identifying the variation pattern from the variation pattern scenario are separately provided, and when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM clear switch 122 on, only the value of the special symbol drawing counter 203qa is reset, and the value of the scenario counter 203tb is maintained.

In addition, in the 20th control example, when power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, a first presentation mode (wake-up waiting mode) is set, which suggests that some setting is waiting, and when a lottery for a first special symbol is executed during execution of the first presentation mode, a second presentation mode (wake-up presentation) is executed, which can suggest to the player that some setting has been executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player easily understand whether or not power is turned on with a RAM clear operation. Therefore, in order to determine whether or not a RAM clear operation has been performed, it is possible to make the player think that at least one special symbol lottery will be executed in a pachinko machine 10 that has not executed the first special symbol lottery since the opening of the hall, thereby improving the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the opening of the hall.

In the 20th control example, after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the first lottery for the first special symbol is executed and the variation pattern scenario is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, assuming that there are multiple ceiling lottery numbers that can be set when the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, the second performance mode (wake-up performance) may be executed as a performance that suggests to the player that the ceiling lottery number has been reset. By configuring in this way, the second performance mode can be configured as a performance that indicates that the setting content that directly affects the player's advantage has been set. In this case, the second performance mode may be configured to execute a performance that suggests which value has been set as the ceiling lottery number. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to want to check the second performance mode more strongly, and the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the opening of the hall can be further improved. Also, for example, in a specification in which the setting can be changed to one of multiple settings, such as in the 19th control example, the second presentation mode may be executed if the setting is changed when the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation. In this case, the player can know that the setting has been changed by the second presentation mode being executed, thereby improving the convenience for the player.

In the 20th control example, after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, a variation pattern scenario is set to specify the variation pattern selection table by referring to the table 202tj2 for after the small win, based on the first small win of the first special pattern (the first condition is met), and the value of the scenario counter 203tb is reset (specific control), while the execution of the specific control is avoided (suppressed) when the second or subsequent small win is won. However, the conditions for the execution and avoidance of the specific control are not limited to this. For example, the specific control may be configured to be executed when the small win of the first special pattern is won consecutively for two or more specific times (for example, 10 times). In addition, as the execution condition of the specific control (first condition), instead of a small win, for example, a simple miss may be adopted, a specific variation type (for example, a short miss or a normal reach miss, etc.) may be adopted, or a jackpot win of a specified jackpot type may be adopted. By allowing various controls and conditions as the specific control and the first condition in this way, the freedom of development can be improved.

In the 20th control example, after the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, a fluctuation pattern scenario is set to identify the fluctuation pattern selection table by referring to the table 202tj2 for after the small win, and control (specific control) is executed to reset the value of the scenario counter 203tb based on the first small win of the first special pattern (the first condition is met), while the execution of the specific control is avoided (suppressed) when a small win is won for the second or subsequent times. However, a state is initially set in which the setting of a new fluctuation pattern scenario (execution of specific control) is avoided (the fluctuation pattern scenario and the progress of the scenario at the time of power off are carried over), and a state in which the execution of specific control is permitted is created when a specified release condition is met (for example, after the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, a specific number of draws (for example, 100 draws) of special patterns that are less than the ceiling number of draws have been performed). In this configuration, the number of remaining draws up to the ceiling number of draws is reset when the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, but until 100 special symbol draws are performed, the tendency to select a variation pattern is the same whether the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation or not, so it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know whether a RAM clear operation has been performed or not. In this case, it is sufficient to prepare a variation pattern scenario set as a specific control that spans from the number of draws of the special symbol for the specific number of draws to the number of draws of the special symbol for the ceiling number of draws, which has the secondary effect of reducing the storage capacity of ROM 202.

In the 20th control example, after the power is turned on with the RAM clear operation, a variation pattern scenario is set to specify the variation pattern selection table by referring to the table 202tj2 for after the small win based on the first small win of the first special pattern (the first condition is satisfied), and the control (specific control) is executed to reset the value of the scenario counter 203tb, while the execution of the specific control is avoided (suppressed) by determining that the avoidance condition is satisfied when the second or subsequent small win is won, but the first condition, specific control, and avoidance condition are not limited to these. Other conditions that may be satisfied in the pachinko machine 10 may be adopted as the first condition or the avoidance condition, or other installed control may be adopted as the specific control. For example, it may be adopted for the performance control on the voice lamp control device 113 side. More specifically, for example, the setting of the reserved change performance in the above-mentioned 16th control example may be adopted as the specific control, and the first condition may be adopted as the reception of a winning information command based on a new start winning. In this case, the avoidance condition may be set, for example, to a state during which the reserved change performance is already set, or during the execution of a jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, you can conveniently set the timing for when the hold change effect will be executed.

<21st control example>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the 21st control example will be described with reference to FIG. 651 to FIG. 664. In the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example described above, the counter value of the counter (special symbol lottery counter 203la) for counting the number of lotteries after the end of the big win is used to determine whether the ceiling lottery number has been reached, and the number of variations (number of lotteries for special symbols) when identifying the variation pattern selection table from the variation pattern scenario is determined. And, even if the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, the value of the special symbol lottery counter 203la is configured to be held without being cleared. In other words, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off or a RAM clear operation is performed, the remaining number of lotteries up to the ceiling lottery number and the progress of the variation pattern scenario are configured to be held without being cleared. In the 19th control example, the variation pattern scenario is configured to set a variation pattern scenario for the normal state and a variation pattern scenario for a game state other than the normal state as a set at the end of the jackpot or when the ceiling lottery number is reached, and if the game state is the normal state, the variation pattern selection table is specified by referring to the regulation content for the normal state among the set variation pattern scenarios, while if the game state is other than the normal state, the variation pattern selection table is specified by referring to the regulation content for the non-normal state. In other words, by unifying the setting timing of the variation pattern scenario to the timing when the ceiling lottery number is reset, it is possible to make the variation pattern scenario common up to the ceiling lottery number when the game state is shifted to the normal state, regardless of the game state after the jackpot. In other words, it is configured so that when the remaining lottery number until the ceiling lottery number in the normal state is 150 times, 100 times, and 50 times, the special variation pattern for the ceiling fanning is always likely to be selected.

In contrast, in the 21st control example, the variation pattern scenario is switched when the time-saving state set based on reaching the ceiling lottery count or the time-saving state set based on winning the time-saving symbol ends, and the selection ratio of the variation pattern is made different from the normal one over the predetermined number of special symbol lotteries after the end of these time-saving states. In other words, the relationship between the lottery results and the selection ratio of various variation patterns is made different from the normal one to make the tendency of the variation time different, and the variation display mode set according to the variation time is also made different, thereby forming a special presentation mode. By configuring in this way, when the time-saving state set without a jackpot ends (the advantageous time-saving state ends without winning any prize balls), a special presentation mode is formed to alleviate the player's disappointment and to make the player want to continue playing until the special presentation mode ends. This makes it possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the time-saving state ends.

The pachinko machine 10 in this 21st control example differs in configuration from the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example described above in that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main control device 110 has been partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The other configurations, other processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the 19th control example. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the 19th control example are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 651 and FIG. 652, the characteristic performance mode in this 21st control example will be described. Here, in this 21st control example, the variable pattern scenario is reset based on the end of either the time-saving state activated based on winning the time-saving pattern or the time-saving state activated based on reaching the ceiling lottery number. More specifically, based on the end of the time-saving state, a special state in which various variable patterns are selected at a selection ratio different from normal is formed for a predetermined period (until 20 special pattern lotteries are completed) in order to form a special performance mode. First, referring to FIG. 651 (a), the performance mode after the end of either the time-saving state activated based on winning the time-saving pattern in this 21st control example or the time-saving state activated based on reaching the ceiling lottery number will be described. In the following explanation, for the sake of simplicity, the time-saving state activated based on winning the time-saving pattern and the time-saving state activated based on reaching the ceiling lottery number (the time-saving state to which the state transitions directly without going through a jackpot) are collectively referred to as the normal time-saving state. In this 20th control example, when there is one or more reserved balls of the second special pattern at the time when the normal time-saving state ends, the system is configured to execute a performance mode indicating the end of the normal time-saving state by utilizing the period until the reserved balls of the second special pattern are consumed in the normal state after the normal time-saving state ends. In the normal time-saving state, by continuing to hit the right, the reserved balls of the second special pattern will be accumulated to the upper limit number (4 balls) at the time when the normal time-saving state ends. Figure 651 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a performance mode (ending performance for the normal time-saving state) indicating the end of this normal time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 651(a), when the normal time-saving state ends, a rabbit-like character 801 is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm with its head down and tears streaming down its face until the reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed, and the words "~END~" are displayed above the character 801. Furthermore, the words "Chance time ended..." are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. These display modes allow the player to easily understand that the normal time-saving state has completely ended. Also, as shown in FIG. 651(a), during the ending performance for the normal time-saving state, the second special symbol is displayed in a relatively narrow range (a range that is difficult for the player to see) in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm, changing.

Although not shown in the figure, if a jackpot is obtained by drawing the second special symbol during the execution of the ending performance for the normal time-saving state (normal time-saving end performance), a relatively short performance time is executed in which an angel-like character 809 appears in the jackpot variation and notifies the rabbit character 801 of the jackpot. Also, if there is no reserved ball of the second special symbol at the end of the normal time-saving state and only a reserved ball of the first special symbol is present, the ending performance for the normal time-saving state is controlled to be executed using the variable display period based on the reserved ball of the first first special symbol. Furthermore, if there is neither a reserved ball of the first special symbol nor a reserved ball of the second special symbol at the end of the normal time-saving state, the normal time-saving end performance is started at the end of the normal time-saving state, and the ending performance for the normal time-saving state (normal time-saving end performance) is terminated at the point when a new special symbol is drawn. This allows the ending effect for the normal time-saving state (normal time-saving end effect) to be executed regardless of the number of reserved balls at the end of the normal time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 651(b), the performance mode after the normal time-saving ends until the 20th drawing of the special symbol is completed (and after the normal time-saving end performance is completed) will be described. FIG. 651(b) is a diagram showing the performance mode after the normal time-saving ends until the 20th drawing of the special symbol is completed (and after the normal time-saving end performance is completed). Here, although details will be described later, in this 21st control example, the variation pattern scenario is configured so that the rate at which a short variation time (for example, 5 seconds) is selected as the variation time in the case of a miss of the first special symbol between the end of the normal time-saving and the 20th drawing of the special symbol is completed increases significantly (the rate at which a variation time of 15 seconds or more is selected decreases significantly). In other words, the configuration is such that, by making it difficult to select a long variation time in the case of a miss, the expectation of a jackpot or winning a time-saving symbol increases relatively in the case of a long variation time. While this special variation pattern scenario is set (until the end of the normal time-saving feature and the end of the 20 special symbol lotteries), as shown in FIG. 651(b), a rabbit-like character 801 is displayed in the main display area Dm in an effect of climbing a rocky mountain, and the words "Training Zone" are displayed above the character 801. Additionally, the words "Big chance with reach?!" are displayed in the secondary display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that a special variation pattern scenario has been set (a special effect mode has been set), and that the probability of winning is higher than usual when a long variation time is set (a variation type that generates a reach is selected).

Figure 652 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation mode in the case where the transition condition to the normal time-saving state is met again (the ceiling number of draws is reached or the time-saving pattern is won) while the special presentation mode (training zone presentation) is set. Figure 652 illustrates the case where the ceiling number of draws is reached and 100 time-saving times are granted. As shown in Figure 652, when the transition condition to the normal time-saving state is met in the special presentation mode (training zone presentation), a presentation is executed in the main display area Dm in which the character 801 climbs the rocky mountain and reaches the top of the rocky mountain. In addition, the display mode is set to a state in which the same clouds as the rabbit-like character 801 stays around the top of the rocky mountain spread all over the area, as in the presentation during the chance time. Furthermore, the words "Get 100 chance times!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the normal time-saving state will be entered.

Next, referring to FIG. 653, the transition of the presentation mode before and after the end of the normal time-saving state will be described using the example of the case where the time-saving state ends with the end of the 250th variable display of the special symbol after the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 653, when the normal time-saving state ends with the 250th drawing of the special symbol after the jackpot, as the presentation mode in the 250th (i.e., the last in the normal time-saving state) variable display presentation, a variable display presentation with a presentation mode (see FIG. 621) indicating the end of the chance time (time-saving state) is executed, as in the above-mentioned 19th control example. In addition, when the last variable display presentation in the normal time-saving state ends and the game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed by hitting the right hand ends, the ending presentation of the normal time-saving state (see FIG. 651(a)) is executed using the period until all the variable displays based on the reserved balls of the second special symbol reserved during the normal time-saving state end. This makes it possible to further emphasize that the normal time-saving state has ended. Details will be given later, but the variation pattern scenario after the normal time-saving feature has ended is configured so that when the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the time-saving feature has ended is between 1 and 4, the variation time for the second special symbol to miss is fixed at 1 second. Therefore, if the reserved ball for the second special symbol is a miss, the ending performance of the normal time-saving feature will be executed for a performance period of the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol x 1 second, so the ending performance of the normal time-saving feature will be a maximum of 4 seconds (when 4 reserved balls have been accumulated).

Also, as shown in FIG. 653, when the reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed and the ending performance of the normal time-saving state ends, a training zone performance indicating a special performance mode is executed. This training zone performance continues until the 20 special symbol lotteries are completed after the normal time-saving state ends. During the 20 fluctuation times during which this training zone performance is executed, the rate at which a fluctuation type with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds or more (the fluctuation time during which a reach performance occurs) is selected when the first special symbol lottery is missed becomes significantly lower than usual. In other words, since the expectation of a jackpot when a reach performance occurs becomes significantly higher than usual, the player can be made to expect the reach performance to occur more strongly. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, since the gameplay is different from usual (the expectation of the reach performance is significantly increased), the player can feel a sense of novelty and can be made to want to continue playing while the training zone performance is being executed. This prevents players from quitting the game immediately after the normal time-saving mode ends, improving the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10. After 20 special symbol draws have been completed and the training zone presentation has ended, the machine transitions to a state in which the presentation for the normal mode is executed.

In this way, in this 21st control example, by setting a dedicated variation pattern scenario (a scenario that identifies a variation pattern selection table by referring to table 202uj3 for after time-saving end (see FIG. 657) described later) when the normal time-saving state ends, it is possible to ensure a period for executing the ending presentation of the normal time-saving state after the normal time-saving state ends and the game transitions to the normal state, or to transition to a special presentation mode (a gameplay mode in which the likelihood of a jackpot increases when a reach presentation occurs) after the reserved balls of the second special pattern have been consumed. This can further increase the player's interest in the game after the normal time-saving state ends.

In this case, since the configuration is such that a dedicated fluctuation pattern scenario is set simply based on the end of the normal time-saving state without taking into account the number of remaining draws until the ceiling number of draws, a drawback is that, as in the 19th control example described above, it becomes difficult to select a special fluctuation pattern for ceiling stimulation when the number of draws after the end of the jackpot (or after power-on with RAM clear operation) is a specific number (350, 400, and 450). The developer can choose which control to prioritize.

<Electrical configuration in 21st control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 654(a), the details of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the 21st control example will be described. FIG. 654(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 21st control example. As shown in FIG. 654(a), the ROM 202 in the 21st control example differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the 19th control example described above (see FIG. 626(a)) only in that the variation pattern selection 21 table 202ub is provided instead of the variation pattern selection 19 table 202sb, and the variation pattern scenario 21 table 202uj is provided instead of the variation pattern scenario 19 table 202sj. The other configurations are the same as those of the ROM 202 in the 19th control example described above, so detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted here.

First, referring to FIG. 655(a), the details of the fluctuation pattern selection 21 table 202ub in this 21st control example will be described. FIG. 655(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection 21 table 202ub in this 21st control example. As shown in FIG. 655(a), the fluctuation pattern selection 21 table 202ub in this 21st control example differs from the fluctuation pattern selection 19 table 202sb (see FIG. 628(a)) in the 19th control example described above in that a time-saving end notification table 202ub5 and a time-saving end table 202ub6 are added. The other configurations are the same as the fluctuation pattern selection 19 table 202sb in the 19th control example described above, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted here.

First, referring to FIG. 655(b), the time-saving end notification table 202ub5, which is one of the data tables constituting the variation pattern selection 21 table 202ub in this 21st control example, will be described in detail. This time-saving end notification table 202ub5 is a variation pattern selection table referenced when the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the end of the normal time-saving state is within a range of four or less, and is a data table for fixing the variation time to one second when a miss occurs when using up the reserved balls for the second special symbol that were accumulated at the end of the normal time-saving state.

Figure 655 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving end notification table 202ub5. As shown in Figure 655 (b), in the time-saving end notification table 202ub5, the range of values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponding to various fluctuation patterns is associated with each type of special symbol and each lottery result of the special symbol. Specifically, when the type of special symbol is the first special symbol, a normal reach hit with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is associated with the range of values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from 0 to 149 for the lottery result of the special symbol "big win", and a super reach hit with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds is associated with the range of values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 from 150 to 198. In addition, for the lottery results of the first special symbol being "special win" and "small win", a normal reach hit with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is associated with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In addition, for the special pattern lottery result "time-saving pattern win", a normal reach with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is specified in correspondence with the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Furthermore, for the first special pattern lottery result "miss", a short miss with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is specified in correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the range of 0 to 196, and a normal reach miss with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds is specified in correspondence with the range of 197, 198. Therefore, when the first special pattern lottery is executed under a situation where the time-saving end notification table 202ub5 is referenced, the rate at which a fluctuation type with a fluctuation time of 15 seconds or more is selected in the case of a miss is extremely low (2/199). Therefore, when the first special pattern lottery is executed, the expectation of a big win can be greatly increased just by the occurrence of a reach performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 655(b), when the type of the special symbol is the second special symbol, the lottery result "jackpot" of the special symbol is specified to correspond to a short win with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds for the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1. On the other hand, the lottery result "miss" of the second special symbol is specified to correspond to an "ultra-short miss" with a fluctuation time of 1 second for the entire range of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Therefore, if the lottery result of the special symbol is executed with the second special symbol within 4 times after the end of the normal time-saving state, the fluctuation time is always set to 5 seconds when the lottery result is a jackpot, and the fluctuation time is always set to 1 second when the lottery result is a miss. This makes it possible to fix the consumption time when consuming the reserved balls of the second special symbol that were accumulated at the end of the normal time-saving state, and therefore it is possible to secure the presentation period of the ending presentation after the end of the normal time-saving state.

Next, referring to FIG. 655(c), the details of the time-saving end table 202ub6, which is one of the data tables constituting the variation pattern selection 21 table 202ub in this 21st control example, will be described. This time-saving end table 202ub6 is a variation pattern selection table referenced when the number of times the special symbol is drawn after the normal time-saving state ends is in the range of 5 to 20 times, and is a data table referenced to form a special presentation mode in which the probability of winning when a reach presentation occurs is significantly higher than usual. As shown in FIG. 655(c), in this time-saving end table 202ub, the prescribed content corresponding to the first special symbol in the time-saving end notification table 202ub5 (see FIG. 655(b)) is set as the prescribed content common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Therefore, when this time-saving end table 202ub6 is referenced, the rate at which a variation type with a variation time of 15 seconds or more is selected when the special symbol is not selected becomes extremely low (2/199). Therefore, when a special symbol is drawn, the occurrence of a reach effect alone can greatly increase the expectation of a big win, resulting in an innovative gaming experience. This makes it possible to encourage the player to continue playing even after the normal time-saving state has ended, until at least 20 special symbol drawings have been performed, thereby improving the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 656(a), the details of the fluctuation pattern scenario 21 table 202uj in this 21st control example will be described. FIG. 656(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern scenario 21 table 202uj in this 21st control example. As shown in FIG. 656(a), the fluctuation pattern scenario 21 table 202uj in this 21st control example is composed of at least the following: a post-win table 202uj1, which is a data table that specifies the fluctuation pattern scenario set with the end of the jackpot; a post-ceiling reach table 202uj2, which is a data table that specifies the fluctuation pattern scenario set with the end of the ceiling draw count; and a time-saving end table 202uj3, which is a data table that specifies the fluctuation pattern scenario set with the end of the normal time-saving state (time-saving state based on the time-saving pattern win and time-saving state based on the ceiling draw count reach). First, referring to FIG. 656(b), the details of the post-win table 202uj1 will be described. Figure 656(b) is a block diagram showing the prescribed contents of this post-win table 202uj1.

As shown in FIG. 656(b), when the current gaming state is the normal state, the normal 19 table 202sb1 is defined in correspondence with the ranges of 1 to 349, 351 to 399, 401 to 449, and 451 to 500 for the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203ua), and the ceiling tilt table 202sb3 is defined in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn, 350, 400, and 450. On the other hand, when the current gaming state is a gaming state other than the normal state, the probability change/time-saving 19 table 202sb2 is defined in correspondence with the entire range of 1 to 500 for the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203ua). Therefore, after the big win, if the game state is normal, a special variation pattern for ceiling agitation will be selected each time the number of remaining draws to the ceiling number of draws reaches 150, 100, and 50, and a ceiling agitation effect (see Figures 624 and 625) can be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 656(c), the details of the above-mentioned table 202uj2 for after reaching the ceiling will be described. FIG. 656(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the table 202uj2 for after reaching the ceiling. As shown in FIG. 656(c), only scenarios for game states other than the normal state are associated with the table 202j2 for after reaching the ceiling. In other words, only scenarios for states until the normal time-saving state ends with the number of time-saving times set based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number, or until the normal time-saving state ends when the time-saving pattern is won during the normal time-saving state. This is because, as described above, at the timing when the normal time-saving state ends (i.e., the timing of transition to the normal state), the normal time-saving state is switched to a variation pattern scenario for the end of the normal time-saving state (a variation pattern scenario that refers to the table 202uj3 for after the time-saving state ends), so there is no possibility of referring to the table 202uj2 for after reaching the ceiling in the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 656(c), when the current game state is a game state other than the normal state, the table 202sb4 for when the ceiling is reached is specified in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203ua) being 1, and the 19 table 202sb2 for sure-variable/time-saving is specified in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn in the range of 2 to 500. Therefore, as with the 19th control example, after the ceiling number of times is reached and the time-saving state is set, the fluctuation time for the first variable display can be fixed to 30 seconds in the case of a miss, so that a sufficient presentation period can be secured for various notifications to be executed based on the entry into the time-saving state.

Next, the details of the time-saving end table 202uj3 will be described with reference to FIG. 657. FIG. 657 is a diagram showing the contents of the time-saving end table 202uj3. As shown in FIG. 657, when the current game state is the normal state, the time-saving end notification table 202ub5 (see FIG. 655(b)) is described in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203ua) in the range of 1 to 4, the time-saving end table 202ub6 (see FIG. 655(c)) is described in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn (the value of the scenario counter 203ua) in the range of 5 to 20, and the normal 19 table 202sb1 is described in correspondence with the number of times the special symbol is drawn in the range of 21 or more. In contrast, when the current game state is other than the normal state, the 19 table 202sb2 for special bonus/time-saving is associated and specified, regardless of the number of times the special symbol has been drawn.

By configuring the configuration so that a variation pattern scenario is set that references the time-saving end table 202uj3 after the normal time-saving state ends, the ending performance of the normal time-saving state can be executed in the period from when the normal time-saving state ends until all reserved balls of the second special symbol are consumed. Also, a special mode can be created that significantly increases the likelihood of a jackpot when a reach performance occurs from when the normal time-saving state ends until the drawing of 20 special symbols is completed. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player want to continue playing at least until the drawing of 20 special symbols is completed after the normal time-saving state ends, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 654(b), the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in this 21st control example will be described in detail. FIG. 654(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in this 21st control example. As shown in FIG. 654(b), the RAM 203 in this 21st control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 19th control example only in that a scenario counter 203ua and a normal time-saving flag 203ub have been added.

The scenario counter 203ua is a counter for determining the current number of times the special symbol has been drawn when selecting a variation pattern table according to the variation pattern scenario, similar to the scenario counter 203tb in the 20th control example described above. In other words, in this 21st control example, similar to the 20th control example described above, the special symbol drawing counter 203la and the scenario counter 203tb are separately provided, and control for updating them separately is adopted. Specifically, the scenario counter 203tb in this 21st control example is reset to 0 when various variation pattern scenarios are set (see S8323A in FIG. 660 and S38131A in FIG. 661), and is updated by adding 1 each time a variation pattern of a special symbol is selected (S38263 in FIG. 659). The scenario counter 203ua is referred to to identify the corresponding variation pattern selection table from the currently set variation pattern scenario.

The normal time-saving flag 203ub is a flag that indicates whether the time-saving state is the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot or the normal time-saving state (the time-saving state based on the winning of the time-saving pattern, or the time-saving state based on the reaching of the ceiling lottery number). If this normal time-saving flag 203ub is on, it means that it is the normal time-saving state, and if it is off, it means that it is the time-saving state set after the end of the jackpot. The normal time-saving flag 203ub is initially set to off, and is set to on when transitioning to the normal time-saving state (see S38132A in FIG. 661). Also, it is set to off when the normal time-saving state ends (see S8322A in FIG. 660). If the time-saving state ends while this normal time-saving flag 203ub is on, it is determined that the normal time-saving state has ended, and the fluctuation pattern table is reset. In other words, it is possible to set a variation pattern scenario that can realize the ending performance of the normal time-saving state, a performance mode with high expectations for reach performance, etc., so that the player is less likely to want to quit playing after the normal time-saving state ends. This makes it possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, referring to FIG. 658, the RAM 223 provided in the voice lamp control device 113 in this 21st control example will be described in detail. FIG. 658 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in this 21st control example. As shown in FIG. 658, the RAM 223 in this 21st control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 19th control example (see FIG. 630) only in that a performance mode flag 223ua has been added. As the other configurations are the same as the RAM 223 in the above-mentioned 19th control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The presentation mode flag 223ua is a flag that indicates the current presentation mode. When determining the variable display mode according to this variable pattern command, the variable display mode according to the presentation mode indicated by this presentation mode flag 223ua is selected.

<Regarding control process of main control device in 21st control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 21st control example will be described with reference to FIG. 659 to FIG. 662. First, the details of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (S30261A) in this 21st control example will be described with reference to FIG. 659. This special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (S30261A) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 454) in the above-mentioned 19th control example (and the 13th control example), and is a process for setting a variation pattern according to the lottery result when a lottery for a special symbol is executed, similar to the special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 454). FIG. 659 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (S30261A).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (see FIG. 659) in this 21st control example, the same processes as S8201, S8203, and S8205 to S8209 in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 19 (see FIG. 454) in the 19th control example are executed in S8201, S8203, and S8205 to S8209. In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (see FIG. 659) in this 21st control example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot in the process of S8201 (S8201: Yes), the current jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection 16 table 202pd (S38261A), and the process proceeds to S8203.

In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (see FIG. 659) in this 21st control example, if it is determined in the process of S8209 that the lottery result corresponds to a time-saving symbol win (S8209: Yes), the type of time-saving win is identified (S38262A) by referring to the time-saving win type selection 19 table 202si (see FIG. 629(a)), and the process proceeds to S8203.

Furthermore, in the special symbol variation pattern selection process 21 (see FIG. 659) in this 21st control example, when the process of S8203 is completed, the value of the scenario counter 203ua is updated by adding 1 (S38263A), and then the currently set variation pattern scenario is read based on the data in the scenario storage area 203sb (S38264A). When the process of S38264A is completed, the variation pattern selection table corresponding to the current game state, the special symbol lottery result, and the value of the scenario counter 203ua is identified based on the read variation pattern scenario (S38265A), and the process proceeds to S8205.

Next, referring to FIG. 660, update process 21 (S241A) in this 21st control example will be described. This update process 21 (S241A) is a process executed in place of update process 16 (see FIG. 525) in the 19th control example (and the 16th control example) described above, and, like update process 16 (see FIG. 525), is a process for updating the game state when the special symbol stops varying.

In the update process 21 in this 21st control example (see FIG. 660), the same processes as those in S8301 to S8307 and S8313 in the update process 16 in the 19th control example (and the 16th control example) (see FIG. 525) are executed. In addition, in the update process 21 in this 21st control example (see FIG. 660), when the process of S8306 is completed, it is determined whether the normal time-saving flag 203ub is on (S8321), and if it is determined to be on (S8321: Yes), data indicating a scenario that specifies a variation pattern selection table by referring to the time-saving end table 202uj3 is then stored in the scenario storage area 203sb (S8322A). When the processing of S8322A ends, the normal time-saving flag 203ub is set to OFF (S8323), the value of the scenario counter 203sa is reset to 0 (S8324A), and the processing proceeds to S8313. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8321A that the normal time-saving flag 203ub is OFF, the processing proceeds to S8307.

In addition, in the update process 21 (see FIG. 660) in this 21st control example, when the process of S8307 is completed, the ceiling determination process 21 is executed (S8325) instead of the ceiling determination process 19 (see FIG. 631) in the above-mentioned 19th control example, and this process is terminated. Details of this ceiling determination process 21 (S8325) will be described later with reference to FIG. 661.

By executing this update process 21 (see FIG. 660), when the normal time-saving state ends, a variation pattern scenario can be set for when the time-saving state ends, so that a special mode can be created that increases the expectation when the normal time-saving state develops into an ending performance or a reach performance.

Next, referring to FIG. 661, the above-mentioned ceiling determination process 21 (S8325A) will be described in detail. As described above, this ceiling determination process 21 (S8325A) is a process executed in place of the ceiling determination process 19 (see FIG. 631) in the 19th control example, and like the ceiling determination process 19 (see FIG. 631), it is a process for determining whether the ceiling number of draws has been reached from the number of draws of the special pattern, and for generating a time-saving state when the ceiling number of draws has been reached.

In the ceiling determination process 21 (see FIG. 661) in this 21st control example, the processes of S38101 to S38105, S38112A to S38114A, S38117A, S38121A to S38123A, and S38126A are the same as the processes of S38101 to S38105, S38112A to S38114A, S38117A, S38121A to S38123A, and S38126A in the ceiling determination process 19 (see FIG. 631) in the 19th control example described above.

In addition, in the ceiling determination process 21 (see FIG. 661) in this 21st control example, when the processing of S38114A is completed, the value of the special drawing counter 203la and the value of the scenario counter 203ua are cleared to 0 (S38131), the ceiling time-saving standby flag 203sa and the normal time-saving flag 203ub are set to on (S38132), and the processing transitions to S38126A.

Next, the start-up process in this 21st control example will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 662. This start-up process is executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, similar to the start-up process in the 19th control example described above. FIG. 662 is a flowchart showing the start-up process in this 21st control example.

Of the startup processes in this 21st control example, steps S1701 to S1712, S1721A, S1751A, S1752A, S31701A, and S31702A are identical to steps S1701 to S1712, S1721A, S1751A, S1752A, S31701A, and S31702A of the startup process in the 19th control example (see FIG. 632).

In addition, in the start-up process (see FIG. 662) in this 21st control example, when the process of S1712 is completed, the memory areas of the RAM 203 used are cleared other than the special drawing counter 203la, the scenario counter 203ua, and the scenario storage area 203sb (S1761A), and the memory areas of the RAM 203 other than the special drawing counter 203la, the scenario counter 203ua, and the scenario storage area 203sb are set to initial values (S1762A), and the process proceeds to S1710. This makes it possible to maintain the number of remaining draws up to the ceiling number of draws and the progress of the variation pattern scenario, even when the power is turned on with a RAM clear operation.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the 21st control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 21st control example will be described with reference to Fig. 663 and Fig. 664. First, the performance mode setting process 21 (S5011A) in this 21st control example will be described with reference to Fig. 663. This performance mode setting process 21 (S5011A) is a process executed in place of the performance mode setting process 19 (see Fig. 634) in the 19th control example described above, and is a process for setting a variable display mode according to the variable type notified by the received variable pattern command when a variable pattern command is received, similar to the performance mode setting process 19 (see Fig. 634) in the 19th control example.

In the performance mode setting process 21 (see FIG. 663) in this 21st control example, the same processes as S34401, S34403, S34407, and S34431A to S34448A in the performance mode setting process 19 (see FIG. 634) in the 19th control example are executed in each of the processes S34401, S34403, S34407, and S34431A to S34448A. In addition, in the performance mode setting process 21 (see FIG. 663) in this 21st control example, when the process of S34447A is completed, the performance mode flag 223ua is updated to the value for the ending performance in the normal time-saving state (S34451A), and the process proceeds to S34407.

Next, referring to FIG. 664, the details of the ceiling-related performance setting process 21 (S34561A) in this 21st control example will be described. This ceiling-related performance setting process 21 (S34561A) is a process executed in place of the ceiling-related performance setting process (see FIG. 637) in the 19th control example described above, and is a process for setting the performance mode related to the ceiling, similar to the ceiling-related performance setting process (see FIG. 637) in the 19th control example.

In the ceiling-related performance setting process 21 (see FIG. 664) in this 21st control example, the same processing as S34571A and S34573A to S34575A of the ceiling-related performance setting process (see FIG. 664) in the 19th control example described above is executed in S34571A and S34573A to S34575A. In addition, in the ceiling-related performance setting process 21 (see FIG. 664) in this 21st control example, if it is determined in the processing of S34571A that the current fluctuation pattern is not a fluctuation pattern for ceiling tilt (S34571A: No), a performance mode is determined according to the received fluctuation pattern and the performance mode indicated by the performance mode flag 223ua (S34581A), and it is determined whether or not it is the timing to switch the performance mode (S34582A). Specifically, the presentation mode is a mode for the ending presentation after the normal time-saving state ends, and if the reserved balls for the second special symbol reach 0, it updates to a state showing the training zone, and if the number of times the special symbol has been drawn after the normal time-saving state ends reaches 20, it updates to a state showing the normal presentation mode.

If it is determined in the processing of S34582A that it is time to switch presentation modes (S34582A: Yes), the presentation mode flag 223ua is updated to a state corresponding to the presentation mode after the switch (S34583A), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S34582A that it is not time to switch presentation modes (S34582A: No), the processing of S34583A is skipped and this processing ends as is.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in this 21st control example is configured to switch the variation pattern scenario upon the end of the time-saving state set based on reaching the ceiling number of lottery draws or the time-saving state set based on winning the time-saving symbol (normal time-saving state), and is configured to form a special presentation mode by varying the variation display mode set according to the variation time. By configuring in this way, when the time-saving state set without a jackpot ends (the advantageous time-saving state ends without winning any prize balls), a special presentation mode is formed, thereby mitigating the player's disappointment and making it possible to make the player want to continue playing until the special presentation mode ends. This makes it possible to improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 after the time-saving state ends.

In the 21st control example, the variation pattern scenario is reset when the jackpot ends, when the ceiling lottery count is reached, and when the normal time-saving state ends, but this is not limited to this. The variation pattern scenario may also be reset when the time-saving state set after the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, a special presentation mode can be formed even when the time-saving state set after the jackpot ends, so that it is easy to make the player want to continue playing while the special presentation mode is set. Therefore, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be further improved. In addition, since the timing of the end of the time-saving state set after the jackpot ends is fixed (it ends 100 times after the jackpot ends), the remaining number of times until the ceiling lottery count at the time when the time-saving state or the probability change state ends is the same every time (400 times). Therefore, in the variation pattern scenario that is set when the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot ends, by configuring the number of lottery draws after the scenario is set to 250, 300, and 350, and referring to the variation pattern table for ceiling agitation (ceiling agitation table 202sb3), it is possible to execute the ceiling agitation effect when the number of remaining lottery draws until the ceiling number of draws is 150, 100, and 50. In other words, it is possible to realize the same behavior as the 19th and 21st control examples described above.

In the above-mentioned 19th to 21st control examples, when power is turned on with a RAM clear operation, a configuration is made to avoid initialization of some data in the RAM 203. In this case, the address at which the data to be avoided from being initialized is stored may be fixed. In other words, the scenario storage area 203sb and the special drawing lottery counter 203la, which are avoided from being initialized in the 19th control example, the scenario storage area 203sb and the scenario counter 203tb, which are avoided from being initialized in the 20th control example, and the special drawing lottery counter 203la, the scenario storage area 203sb, and the scenario counter 203ua, which are avoided from being initialized in the 21st control example, may be stored in a fixed address range of the RAM 203. When configured in this way, it is possible to easily divert the program when developing a pachinko machine 10 of another specification based on at least one of the specifications of the 19th to 21st control examples. In other words, when rewriting the program corresponding to the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see Figs. 637, 647, and 662) to match the specifications of the destination device, the address range in which initialization is avoided when power is turned on with a RAM clear operation can be made common, eliminating the need to change this part of the program and reducing the work of the program developer. Also, by eliminating the need to change the program, it is possible to prevent addresses in the program development stage from being rewritten to incorrect addresses as addresses in which initialization is avoided, thereby preventing malfunctions of the pachinko machine 10.

<22nd control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 665 to Fig. 734, the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example will be described. Conventionally, there are some pachinko machines having a light amount adjustment function that allows the player to adjust the light amount (LED brightness and LCD backlight brightness) of the pachinko machine 10 by operating a selection button (operation means). By using this light amount adjustment function, the player can adjust the brightness of the variable presentation for showing the result of the special pattern lottery, the jackpot game presentation during the jackpot game executed when the jackpot is won, and the status presentation for showing the set game state (the brightness of the decorative LED and the brightness of the LCD backlight used as the third pattern display device 81) to any brightness, so that it is possible to provide a comfortable presentation desired by the player. However, in conventional pachinko machines 10, it was common for the light intensity to be adjustable during the waiting period (the period when the special pattern lottery is not being held and no winning games are being played), and the light intensity was adjusted to the desired level by visually checking the brightness of the decorative LEDs that were emitting light at the time the light intensity was adjusted using the light intensity adjustment function, and the degree of variability in the brightness of the backlight of the LCD display on which the waiting screen was being displayed.

Here, in recent years, some pachinko machines aim to save energy by reducing the amount of light emitted by the entire pachinko machine 10 while a standby screen (demo screen) is displayed when the player is not playing. In addition, some pachinko machines are configured to vary the amount of light emitted by the entire pachinko machine 10 in response to the expectation of a jackpot for the performance being executed, even while the player is playing, thereby enabling the execution of a performance that is more striking for the player, and to increase the amount of light emitted by the entire pachinko machine 10 at times when the player should be directed to the content of the performance being executed (for example, when the player is notified of the presence or absence of a jackpot win or when the content of a winning game is announced), thereby preventing the player from missing the performance.

In a conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the light intensity adjustment operation is performed based on the light intensity of the pachinko machine 10 during the standby screen, i.e., the light intensity during play is different (set lower than during play), so when actually playing, there is a problem in that the player realizes that the desired light intensity differs from the set light intensity, and is forced to adjust the light intensity again.

In contrast to this, in the present 22nd control example, when a light intensity adjustment operation is performed during the standby screen, the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) equipped with a relatively high brightness LED is moved to the light intensity adjustment position, and the light intensity can be adjusted while the LED of the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is illuminated. In other words, even when no game is being played, the light intensity can be adjusted using the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) used for the variable presentation. This configuration makes it easier to appropriately adjust the light intensity to the player's desired level.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, the state in which the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is changed to a variable position (a position that covers the display surface of the third pattern display device 81) that is changed in the actual variable performance is set as the environment adjustment position, and the light emitting means (LED) provided on the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) that is located in the environment adjustment position is configured to emit light.

In conventional pachinko machines 10, the presentation mode of the variable presentation to show the result of the special symbol lottery includes moving decorative movable parts at the timing to notify the player of the presence or absence of a jackpot win or the timing to notify the player of the presence or absence of a change in the content of the variable presentation to a presentation mode with a high expectation of a jackpot win, thereby making the player pay attention to the variable presentation being performed. In this case, it is common to also perform a light-emitting presentation with increased light output from decorative light-emitting means (LEDs) provided on the pachinko machine 10.

In other words, according to this 22nd control example, a state similar to the state in which the decorative movable role (sword role Ym3) is moved in an actual variable performance is simulated, and the light intensity adjustment operation can be performed in that state. By configuring it in this way, in order to prevent a performance that is too dazzling from being performed, the light intensity adjustment operation is performed, and for a player who wishes to lower the light intensity, it is possible to adjust the light intensity based on a performance with a relatively high light intensity, making it easier to appropriately adjust the light intensity to the player's desire.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, the light intensity adjustment operation can be performed not only during the standby screen, but also while a special pattern variation is being performed or while a jackpot game is being performed, i.e., during the game period in which the player is playing the game, and when the light intensity adjustment operation is performed during the game period, the light intensity adjustment is performed without moving the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) to the environment adjustment position. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) from being moved based on the light intensity adjustment operation performed during the game period, and to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) has been moved as part of the variation performance.

Here, when the player is performing the light intensity adjustment operation while the standby screen is displayed, that is, when the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is in the environment adjustment position, and operates the operating handle 21 to cause a game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, the first special pattern variation will start during the light intensity adjustment operation, and an event will occur in which a variation performance corresponding to the first special pattern variation that was executed is executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

In this case, if the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is kept in the environment adjustment position until the light adjustment operation is completed, the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) in the environment adjustment position will overlap with the variable performance being performed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, which can cause a problem in that the player will find the performance difficult to understand. In addition, because the environmental adjustment position is the position where the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) can move as part of the variable performance, the player may mistakenly believe that the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) in the environment adjustment position based on the light adjustment operation is moving as part of the variable performance.

Therefore, in this 22nd control example, when the special pattern variation is started (a game is executed) while the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is located in the environment adjustment position, the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is moved from the environment adjustment position to the initial position (storage position) while the light intensity adjustment operation continues.

By configuring it in this way, even if a special pattern change starts while a light intensity adjustment operation is being performed during a standby screen, a natural presentation can be provided to the player.

To explain more specifically, when the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is moved from the environment adjustment position to the initial position (storage position) based on the execution of a special pattern change, before the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is moved, a light-off control is executed to turn off the light-emitting means (LEDs) of the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) that was emitting light to check the amount of light, and when all LEDs are turned off, a movement control is executed to move the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) to the initial position.

By configuring it in this way, the light emitting means (LED) of the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) can be kept unlit while the decorative movable part is being moved from the environment adjustment position to the initial position, so that the player can easily understand that the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is not moving as part of the variable performance.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, when the light intensity adjustment operation is completed while the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is in the environment adjustment position, and the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is stored in the initial position (storage position), a period of 10 seconds during which the sword part Ym3 is not movable can be set.

Specifically, if the light adjustment operation is performed again immediately after the light adjustment operation on the standby screen is completed, the light adjustment operation is performed in a mode in which the light adjustment operation screen is displayed without moving the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3). Also, if the special pattern variation is started (a game is executed) with the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) located in the environment adjustment position, a variation effect corresponding to the special pattern variation is determined to be a variation effect in which the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is not moved.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent movement control of the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) from being executed in a short period of time, and therefore to prevent the sword part Ym3 from moving too frequently and breaking down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movement control of the next sword part Ym3 from being executed before the sword part Ym3 becomes movable, which causes a discrepancy in the movement period of the sword part Ym3 or prevents normal movement from being executed.

Next, in each of the control examples described above, the reserved pattern indicating the number of reserved balls acquired is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, and the display mode of the reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved ball is changed based on the result of the pre-reading (pre-determination) of the lottery result for the reserved ball, thereby notifying the player of the result of the pre-reading (reserved change presentation), which is performed only by the third pattern display device 81.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 of the 22nd control example, when this reserved symbol change performance is executed, the device is used to cover up reserved symbols other than the reserved symbol to be changed, which are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it clear to the player which reserved symbol is the one to be changed.

To explain more specifically, in the reserved pattern change presentation in this 22nd control example, two decorative movable parts (left change part Ym1 and right change part Ym2, see FIG. 672(b)) are configured to be able to cover and conceal the display area in which the reserved patterns are displayed on the display device, and by changing the positions of these decorative movable parts (change parts Ym1, Ym2), it is possible to divide the display area of the reserved patterns into parts that are visible to the player and parts that are difficult to see. This makes it possible for only the display area in which the reserved pattern to be changed is displayed to be visible to the player, making it easier for the player to understand the reserved pattern to be changed.

Here, conventionally, there are reserved change effects that use flashy effects to draw the player's attention to the reserved change effect. For example, the reserved pattern to be changed is brightly lit and then the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed. In such a reserved change effect, if a reserved pattern is displayed in addition to the reserved pattern to be changed, the reserved change effect is displayed overlapping the reserved pattern displayed adjacent to the reserved pattern to be changed, which may cause the player to mistake the reserved pattern to be the reserved pattern to be changed. If it is desirable for the player that the reserved pattern adjacent to the reserved pattern to be changed among the multiple reserved patterns displayed (for example, the reserved pattern to be changed is a white reserved pattern (normal reserved pattern) and the adjacent reserved pattern is a green reserved pattern (a reserved pattern that becomes a red reserved pattern with the highest probability of winning when it changes)), such a mistake may cause the player to be overjoyed and may lead to a decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In response to this, the pachinko machine 10 of the present 22nd control example is configured to use the change devices Ym1 and Ym2 in the reserved change presentation to cover reserved patterns other than the one to be changed that are displayed on the third pattern display device 81, making it clear to the player which reserved pattern is the one to be changed, and preventing the player from mistaking the reserved pattern to be changed.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, the decorative movable parts (change parts Ym1, Ym2) are set to an initial position (see FIG. 669(a)) where they do not overlap with the third pattern display device 81 until the hold change performance starts, and when the hold change performance starts, the decorative movable parts (change parts Ym1, Ym2) move from the initial position to an operating position according to the operating scenario.

Specifically, the decorative movable parts (change parts Ym1, Ym2) do not directly change from the initial position to a state in which the display area in which the reserved patterns other than the one to be changed are displayed is difficult to see, but are configured to gradually narrow the number of reserved patterns that can be seen from four to two, and then from two to one.

This configuration makes it possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of gradually predicting which reserved symbol will change in the period from the start of the reserved symbol change presentation to the end of the reserved symbol change presentation, and by getting the player interested in how the decorative movable parts (change parts Ym1, Ym2) move, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this 22nd control example, when multiple reserved patterns are displayed, the display mode of the adjacent reserved patterns is reflected in the display mode of the reserved pattern to be changed.

To explain more specifically, in this 22nd control example, one of the seven colors (white, blue, yellow, purple, green, red, rainbow) is assigned to one reserved pattern, and the assigned color becomes the reserved color of the reserved pattern. In the reserved change performance in this 22nd control example, the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be changed can be changed by transplanting it from the reserved color of the adjacent reserved pattern. For example, if the reserved pattern to be changed is "blue" and the reserved pattern displayed one before is "yellow", the reserved pattern to be changed to "green" by transplanting "yellow" from the previous reserved pattern to the reserved pattern to be changed, and the reserved pattern one before is changed to "white". In this case, the reserved color "green" is a reserved color that is more likely to be displayed when the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than the reserved colors "blue" and "white", so "green" is a reserved color with a higher rank than "blue" and "white".

On the other hand, if the reserved pattern to be changed is "blue" and the previous reserved pattern is "white", the reserved color cannot be transferred to a higher reserved color, but if the reserved color of the reserved pattern displayed next to the reserved pattern to be changed is "yellow", the reserved color of the reserved pattern to be changed can be changed to "green" by transferring "yellow" from the next reserved pattern to the reserved pattern to be changed.

By configuring it in this way, even if the reserved color of the displayed reserved pattern is a reserved color with a low expectation of winning the jackpot, it is possible to make the player think that he or she may be able to change the reserved color to a higher reserved color by acquiring a new reserved pattern, which makes the player eager to play in order to acquire the reserved pattern.

<Configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example>
Figure 665 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example, Figure 666 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Figure 667 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Figure 665, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, the outer shell of which is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 665), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 666) having numerous nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 687) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 665) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls that juts out forward and is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 665), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a. In addition, a performance button 22 (see Figure 668 (a)) and a selection switch 600 (see Figure 668 (b)) are provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This performance button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the performance or background displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 666) described below.

As shown in FIG. 668(b), the selection switch 600 is composed of a decision switch 600a for deciding the selection of a performance, etc., an up switch 600b for instructing the selection of an up direction, a right switch 600c for instructing the selection of a right direction, a down switch 600d for instructing the selection of a down direction, and a left switch 600e for instructing the selection of a left direction.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a jackpot is hit or when a certain reach is reached, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-33 incorporating illumination units such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29-33 function as presentation lamps such as jackpot lamps, and when a jackpot is hit or when a reach is reached, each illumination unit 29-33 lights up or blinks by lighting or blinking the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying that a jackpot is being hit or that the player is in the reach just before a jackpot. In addition, the upper left corner of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see Figure 665) is provided with an indicator lamp 34 incorporating an illumination unit such as LED that can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed on the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 666) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 on the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 on the left side that is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 666, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill (movable member 310 is shown, others are not shown) and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device (not shown), a normal pattern start opening (through gate) 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 665). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 665) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 666.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed from a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 665) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where the shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Fig. 687) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left of Fig. 666) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of Fig. 666) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its momentum is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of Fig. 666), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 687), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this 22nd control example, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, while when the ball has entered the second winning hole 640, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while also displaying the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors using a seven-segment display device. The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R special jackpot, a 4R special jackpot, and a 15R regular jackpot. The first pattern display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but also show a pattern according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "10R sure-win jackpot" is a sure-win jackpot that transitions to a high probability state with a special symbol after a jackpot with a maximum of 10 rounds, and a "3R sure-win jackpot" is a sure-win jackpot that transitions to a high probability state with a special symbol after a jackpot with a maximum of 3 rounds. Also, a "3R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state with a special symbol after a jackpot with a maximum of 3 rounds, and is in a time-saving state for a specified number of changes (for example, 100 changes).

The "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot increases after the jackpot has ended as an added value, that is, when the probability is fluctuating (during a probability change), in other words, a state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. In this embodiment, the high probability state (during a probability change) includes a game state in which the probability of a hit of the second symbol described below increases and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability change is not in progress, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than when in a probability change. The time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, but only the probability of a hit of the second symbol increases, making it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state when it is not in a special mode or time-saving mode (neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of hitting the second symbol has increased).

During the special rate or time-saving period, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal play. When the electric device 640a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 640 than when the electric device 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving period, it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 640, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second winning slot 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role 640a opens with one win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the probability of winning the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the electric role 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens with one win may be changed. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the time when the electric role 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is opened and the number of times the electric role 640a opens with one win may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

In the play area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by the winning (start winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the normal pattern start hole (through gate) 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 687), so that, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of multiple symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 687) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed. If the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter during a special probability or time-saving mode than during normal game mode. As a result, during special probability and time-saving mode, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning lotteries can be held than during normal game mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning lottery, giving the player more opportunities for the electric device 640a of the second winning slot 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, during special probability and time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 640.

Note that if the state is such that the ball is more likely to enter the second winning slot 640 during a special probability or time-saving period by increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win, or by other methods, the time it takes for the second symbol to change display may be kept constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during a special probability or time-saving period than during normal times, the probability of winning may be kept constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one win may be kept constant regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is attached to the game board on the right side of the lower area of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow some of the balls that are launched onto the game board and flow down the right side of the game board to pass through. When a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is held. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery results in a winning lottery, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery results in a losing lottery, an "X" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second symbol reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second symbol reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second pattern may be performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the twenty-second control example, or may be performed using a part of the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81. Similarly, the second pattern reserve lamp may be turned on by a part of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of normal pattern start ports (through gates) 67 that are assembled is not limited to one, but may be multiple (e.g., two). In addition, the assembly position of the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the left of the variable display device unit 80. Also, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the second pattern reserved lamp may not be lit.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the first winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 687), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, to the right of the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, there is a second winning hole 640 into which a ball can enter. When a ball enters this second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on, and when the second winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 687), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

The first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 are also each one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out when a ball enters the winning port. In the twenty-second control example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640 may be five.

An electric device 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. This electric device 640a is configured to be able to open and close, and is usually in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal pattern starting opening (through gate) 67, the electric device 640a opens (expands), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640.

As mentioned above, during the special rate and time-saving period, the probability of the second symbol winning is higher than during normal play, and the time it takes for the second symbol to change is also shorter, so the "○" symbol is more likely to appear in the change display of the second symbol, and the number of times the electric device 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the special rate and time-saving period, the time that the electric device 640a is open is also longer than during normal play. Therefore, during the special rate and time-saving period, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning slot 640 than during normal play.

The probability of a jackpot being won when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, the probability of a 15R special jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot to be won when a jackpot is reached is set higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have an electric device like the second winning slot 640, and the ball is always capable of winning.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning slot 640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning slot 640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the first winning slot 64, which does not have an electric device, by shooting the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the so-called "left shot"), and by having the ball win at the first winning slot 64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery.

On the other hand, during the special bonus or time-saving mode, the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is likely to open when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, making it easier to win at the second winning slot 640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning slot 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), passing through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 to open the electric device, and aiming for the ball to win at the second winning slot 640 for a 15R special bonus jackpot.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this 22nd control example can allow the player to change the way the ball is shot to "left hit" or "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This allows the player to have more fun playing the game by providing variation in the way the ball is shot.

The first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large open hole) 65a is provided in the approximate center of the first variable winning device 65. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 comprises a horizontally long rectangular opening plate that covers the specific winning hole 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the opening and closing of the opening plate to the front side, with the lower edge of the opening plate as an axis. The specific winning hole 65a is normally in a closed state in which balls cannot or do not easily win. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening plate to the lower front side, temporarily creating an open state in which it is easier for balls to win the specific winning hole 65a, and the device operates to alternate between this open state and the normal closed state.

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a is open, a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, triggering the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a to be opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, forming a game state as a special game state. Also, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

In the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13, there is a space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 (see Figure 665) in the front frame 14.

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided through the first outlet 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The first outlet 71 is disposed below the first winning hole 64.

The game board 13 has many nails planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (apparatus) such as windmills are also arranged on it. In this embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as the movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, as shown in FIG. 666.

As shown in FIG. 667, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit consisting of the back pack 92, which forms the protective cover, and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each part, ports for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are each stored in the board boxes 100-104. The board boxes 100-104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to store the respective control devices and boards.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 687). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

The payout control device 111 is also provided with a state recovery switch 120, the firing control device 112 with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jamming in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 687). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, referring to FIG. 669, the decorative movable parts in this 22nd control example will be described. In this 22nd control example, the decorative movable parts are a left change part Ym1, a right change part Ym2, and a sword part Ym3. The change parts Ym1 and Ym2 are decorative movable parts used in the reserved change performance in this 22nd control example, and are in a stored state when the reserved change performance is not being performed. As shown in FIG. 669(a), they are stored below the third pattern display device 81 (initial position), making it easy for the player to see the change performance performed on the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, when the reserved change performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 669(b), the change reels Ym1 and Ym2 partially overlap with the display area of the third pattern display device 81. In this 22nd control example, by partially overlapping the change reels Ym1 and Ym2 with the display area of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to cover up the reserved patterns displayed in the overlapping display area, making them difficult to see. The detailed operation patterns of the change reels Ym1 and Ym2 will be described later with reference to FIG. 697.

The sword device Ym3 is not only used as part of the special pattern change performance, but is also movable as an adjustment device when the player adjusts the light intensity during the demo performance, and is otherwise in a stored state. When in the stored state, it is stored to the right of the third pattern display device 81 (initial position) as shown in FIG. 669(a), making it easy for the player to see the change performance being executed on the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, when the sword role object Ym3 becomes movable, as shown in FIG. 669(b), it appears from its initial position to a position (environment adjustment position) where it partially overlaps with the display area of the third pattern display device 81, and the player can see the sword role object Ym3, but it becomes difficult to see the display area of the third pattern display device 81 where the sword role object Ym3 overlaps. Note that the variable presentation mode using the sword role object Ym3 in this 22nd control example is configured to be easily set when the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot win, and by the sword role object Ym3 becoming movable during the variable presentation, it is possible to provide a more impressive presentation than the presentation executed only by the third pattern display device 81, which can increase the interest in the game.

Figure 670 is a cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. Figure 670 (c) is a top view of the first variable winning device 65, and Figure 670 (b) is a Lb-Lb cross-sectional view of the first variable winning device 65. As shown in Figure 670 (b), the first variable winning device 65 is formed with a first specific winning port 65a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The first specific winning port 65a has a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and has a bottom surface that is inclined downward and left so that a game ball that passes through the opening is guided to the left direction of Figure 670 (b). At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 65a1 composed of a magnetic sensor for detecting the winning of a game ball is arranged. The game ball that passes through this detection port 65a1 is guided to a distribution flow path formed on the back side of the back cover body 65e shown in Figure 671 (b).

As shown in FIG. 670(b), the opening of the first specific winning port 65a can be changed between an open state where the game ball can enter and a closed state where the game ball cannot enter (is difficult to enter) by an opening/closing door 65f1 made of a shutter mechanism that can appear and disappear from the game board 13 side. In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 65f1, and the game ball can roll over the top of the opening/closing door. In the open state, the opening/closing door 65f1 is configured to be retreated from within the first specific winning port 65a by retreating to the inside of the base member 65c (inside the game board 13).

By configuring it in this way, when the opening of the first variable winning device 65 is closed, the game ball rolls on the top surface of the first variable winning device 65 and is guided toward the second ball entry port 640. Therefore, even during time-saving play (including during special play), it is possible to have the game ball enter the second starting port 640 while still in the right-handed state, reducing the effort of immediately changing the playing method to left-handed play after a jackpot play. This makes it easier to play.

In addition, in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow can be configured as the opening of the first variable winning device 65, so that more game balls can efficiently enter the first specific winning port 65a. This shortens the time required for a big win game, and improves the efficiency of the game.

Figure 670(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in Figure 670(b). As shown in Figure 670(a), the detection switch 65c1 having the detection port 65a1 is fixed to the base member 65c so that the detection port 65a1 is inclined toward the sorting flow path side of the rear cover body 65e.

Referring to FIG. 671, we will explain the configuration in which game balls guided into the distribution flow path of the rear cover body 65e are distributed to the normal discharge port 65e1 and the special discharge port 65e2 described below.

Figure 671 (a) is a rear view of the rear cover body 65e showing the state in which the switching member 65h is operated so that the game balls are sorted to the special outlet 65e2. As shown in Figure 671 (a), the switching member 65h has a locking hole 65h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 65i is inserted and a guide piece 65h2 that guides the game balls, and is rotatably supported on the flow path cover body 65g from the rear side. Here, the flow path cover body 65g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 65h2 can be inserted, and is configured so that the guide piece 65h2 can be rotatably positioned in the sorting flow path from the rear side of the flow path cover body 65g.

As shown in FIG. 671(a), the game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 into the distribution flow path is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge port 65e2. The game ball that passes through the special discharge port 65e2 is detected by the special variable switch 65e3 composed of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball provided at the special discharge port 65e2, and is discharged out of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, details will be described later, but in the pachinko machine 10 in this 22nd control example, when the game ball passes through the probability change switch 65e3 described above during a jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability game state (probability change game state). In other words, the probability change switch 65e3 is configured as a winning slot for granting the probability change game state. In addition, the switching member 65h is configured to allocate the game state after the jackpot game to either a low probability game state (normal game state ST1) or a probability change game state.

In this way, the game state set after the jackpot game is changed depending on the flow route of the game ball that entered the first specific winning port 65a during the jackpot game, so that the interest of the player can be improved even during the jackpot game. The time required to pass from the opening of the first variable winning device 65 to the entrance of the special discharge port 65e2 (the opening surface closed by the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h) is configured to be at least 1 second. The operation timing and operation time of the switching member 65h are set according to the type of jackpot. In this 22nd control example, when the jackpot A, jackpot C, or jackpot D is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round. Also, when the jackpot B or jackpot E is won, the switching member 65h is configured to be operated for 0.5 seconds in accordance with the opening timing of the first variable winning device 65 at the start of the 14th round.

Therefore, in the case of jackpot A, the game ball that enters the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to pass through the probability change switch 65e3, but in the case of jackpot B, it is configured not to be able to pass through the probability change switch 65e3. Therefore, the probability change award rate can be controlled depending on the type of jackpot, and it can be configured to prevent excessive advantages and disadvantages from occurring.

Referring to FIG. 671(b), we will explain the case where the game ball is guided to the normal outlet 65e1. FIG. 671(b) is a diagram showing the state where the flow path solenoid 65k is not activated and the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h blocks the opening surface of the entrance of the special outlet 65e2.

The game ball guided from the detection port 65a1 to the distribution flow path is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 65h2 of the switching member 65h and guided to the normal discharge port 65e1. At the end of this normal discharge port 65e1, a ball discharge port switch 65e4 consisting of a magnetic sensor that can detect the passage of the game ball is provided. This makes it possible to determine whether all game balls that entered the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the ball discharge port switch 65e4 and the special chance switch 65e3. This prevents a problem in which a game ball that won 14 rounds ago wins in the 14th round without being discharged, and the special chance switch 65e3 wins even if it is a jackpot B.

In this way, a game ball that has entered the first specific winning port 65a in the first variable winning device 65 is detected by the detection switch 65c1, and based on that, prize balls (15 prize balls for each winning ball in this embodiment) can be paid out as a bonus to the player. In addition, by using the game ball after the detection, and configuring it so that it can be allocated whether or not it passes through the probability change switch 65e3, a lottery can be held to determine whether or not to grant a probability change game state. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated winning port for granting a probability change game state separately from the first variable winning device 65, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

<About the content of the performance in the 22nd control example>
Here, referring to FIG. 672 to FIG. 686, among various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 in this 22nd control example, characteristic effects will be described. First, referring to FIG. 672 to FIG. 677, the contents of the reserved change effect using the decorative movable parts (change parts Ym1, Ym2) will be described. As described above, in this 22nd control example, when the reserved change effect is executed, the reserved patterns other than the reserved pattern to be changed are hidden by the change parts Ym1, Ym2, making it easy for the player to understand which reserved pattern is the change target. Then, in the reserved change effect, the change parts Ym1, Ym2 operate to gradually hide the reserved patterns other than the change target, so that the player can enjoy predicting which reserved pattern is the change target. Below, the specific contents of the reserved change effect executed in this 22nd control example will be described.

Figure 672 (a) is an example of a display screen during special pattern change with the change gimmicks Ym1 and Ym2 stored. As shown in Figure 672 (a), a small display area Dm1 is formed in the upper right corner of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm1 is an area where identification information (fourth pattern) is displayed to show the lottery status of the special pattern (whether or not it is being selected (changing) and the lottery result), and is configured so that the fourth pattern (special pattern 1 fourth pattern) to show the lottery status of the special pattern (special pattern) is displayed in the small display area Dm1.

By providing the small display area Dm1 in this way, the player can be informed of the lottery status of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 22nd control example, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode using numbers, and the situation in which the special symbol is changing is indicated by displaying the fourth symbol in the small display area Dm1 in a variable manner (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 672(a)), and the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by displaying the fourth symbol in a stationary manner in the small display area Dm1 (see the small display area Dm1 in FIG. 678(a)). However, without being limited to this, for example, a display mode imitating figures such as a circle and a cross as the fourth symbol, or a display mode showing multiple colors may be used to indicate that the special symbol is changing by a display mode that changes numbers or colors, and a display mode showing a specific symbol or color may be displayed in a stationary manner to indicate the lottery result of the special symbol.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the selection status of the special symbol (whether or not it is being selected (changing), and the selection result), but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to only notify whether or not the special symbol is being selected (changing). Also, as shown in FIG. 672(a), this 22nd control example shows an example in which a fourth symbol display area (small display area Dm1) in which a fourth symbol is displayed to indicate the selection status of the special symbol is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm, but the position and size of this fourth symbol display area may be changed depending on the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed in the center part of the main display area Dm.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth pattern display area from limiting the area in which the variable performance is performed, thereby preventing the performance effect from being reduced. In this case, the small display area Dm1 may be removed from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth pattern may be performed using a light-emitting means (LED, etc.) provided in the variable display device unit 80.

In addition, a small display area Dm4 is formed at the upper left side of the main display area Dm, in which a guide notification mode is displayed to guide the player on how to play in the currently set game state. In the example shown in FIG. 672(a), since the set game state is the normal game state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the words "left hit" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 to guide the player to a game (left hit game) for executing the first special symbol lottery. In this way, by configuring it so that the game method during the normal game state can be displayed, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

When the player is in a sure-win game state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) or in a time-saving game state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), the word "right hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm4 to guide the player to a game (right hit game) for executing the second special symbol lottery.

In addition, the third symbol, which is a decorative display corresponding to the variable display of the fourth symbol, is displayed in a variable manner in the upper center of the main display area Dm. By displaying the third symbol in the upper center of the main display area Dm in this way, the player can play the game while simultaneously viewing the variable presentation being executed in the main display area Dm and the lottery status of the special symbol indicated by the third symbol, without looking at the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1.

Next, the center bottom of the main display area Dm is formed with a display area HR1, which is an area where the reserved pattern corresponding to the currently active special pattern is displayed. The word "NOW" is displayed in the display area HR1, indicating that this is an area where the currently active reserved pattern is displayed. This allows the player to easily recognize that the display area HR1 is an area where the currently active reserved pattern is displayed. In addition, by displaying the currently active reserved pattern hr0, the player can easily predict the lottery result of the currently active special pattern from the display state of the currently active reserved pattern hr0, and when the currently active reserved pattern hr0 is not displayed, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the special pattern lottery game is not being executed.

In this 22nd control example, the pending pattern hr0 and the other pending patterns are displayed in different display areas, but any configuration is acceptable as long as the player can distinguish the pending pattern h0. For example, they may be displayed in the same display area, and the pending pattern hr0 and the other pending patterns may be different sizes so that the player can distinguish them.

Below display area HR1 is display area HR2, which displays the reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls currently acquired. In display area HR2, the numbers 1 to 4 are displayed from left to right, allowing the player to easily see which reserved symbols will be consumed in order.

The display area HR2 displays the first reserved pattern hr1 to the fourth reserved pattern hr4, each of which is given a different color. The first reserved pattern hr1 to the fourth reserved pattern hr4 correspond to the reserved balls stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the first special reserved ball storage area 203va (second special reserved ball storage area vb), and when a player acquires a reserved ball, the reserved patterns are displayed in ascending order from the first reserved pattern hr1, and when the number of reserved balls decreases (when the reserved balls are consumed), the display position of the reserved pattern changes accordingly. Specifically, when the special pattern change corresponding to the active reserved pattern hr0 ends, the reserved pattern displayed at the position of the first reserved pattern hr1 shifts to the position where the active reserved pattern hr0 was displayed, and the reserved pattern displayed at the position of the second reserved pattern hr2 shifts to the position where the first reserved pattern hr1 was displayed. Then, the reserved pattern displayed at the position of the third reserved pattern hr3 shifts to the position where the second reserved pattern hr2 was displayed, and the reserved pattern displayed at the position of the fourth reserved pattern hr4 shifts to the position where the third reserved pattern hr3 was displayed.

Now, referring to FIG. 677(a), the display mode of the reserved pattern in this 22nd control example will be described. FIG. 677(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the color of the reserved pattern and the expected probability of winning a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 677(a), "rainbow" has the highest expectation of winning a jackpot, followed by "red" and "green", and then "white", "blue", "yellow", and "purple" have similar expectations. Note that if it is decided not to execute the reserve change performance in the reserve performance setting process 22 (see FIG. 722, F2504) described later, the reserve color "white" is set, and the reserve color "white" is the standard reserve color.

Figure 677 (b) shows an example of a variable color pattern of reserved symbols. As shown in Figure 677 (b), the reserved color "rainbow" is a reserved color that can be changed by combining elements of three or more different reserved colors excluding "white". The reserved color "red" is a reserved color that can be changed by transplanting "blue", one of the elements that make up "purple", from "purple" to another reserved symbol. The reserved color "green" is a reserved color that can be changed by combining an element of the reserved color "blue" with an element of "yellow". In this way, by combining the colors of multiple reserved symbols to make them variable to a higher display mode (color), even if all of the currently displayed reserved symbols have a low expectation of winning a jackpot, the player can expect that the elements that make up them will be combined to change to a higher reserved symbol, so that the player can predict the display mode of the variable reserved symbol from the display mode of the displayed reserved symbol, which can increase the interest of the game.

As described above, in this 22nd control example, the color elements of adjacent reserved patterns are combined. Therefore, for example, if the first reserved pattern hr1 is "purple" and the second reserved pattern hr2 is "blue", the color of the next reserved pattern to be displayed (in this case, the third reserved pattern hr3) can be changed to "rainbow" if it is other than "white", "purple", or "blue", and if it is "yellow", it can also be changed to "green". This makes it possible to make the player interested in what color the next reserved pattern to be displayed will be, and makes the player eager to play in order to acquire reserved balls.

Returning to Fig. 672(a), we continue the explanation. As mentioned above, "white", "blue", "yellow", and "purple" have the same degree of expectation, so in the example shown in Fig. 672(a), the expected degree of winning the jackpot does not change for any of the reserved patterns. Note that in the example shown in Fig. 672(a), the first reserved pattern hr1 to the fourth reserved pattern hr4 are each displayed in a different display mode (color), but in this 22nd control example, the display mode (color) of the reserved patterns is determined randomly based on the results of the special pattern lottery, so there may be cases where the same color appears consecutively, such as "white", "white", "white", and "white".

As shown in FIG. 672(a), the change role Ym1, Ym2 are stored below the third symbol display device 81 (initial position). The change role Ym1, Ym2 are configured to be the same size as the display area HR2 or larger than the display area HR2, and are configured so that at least the reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2 that overlap with the change role Ym1, Ym2 are difficult for the player to see. In this 22nd control example, the change role Ym1, Ym2 are in a movable state when a reserved change performance is executed, so that when the change role Ym1, Ym2 are in a movable state, the player can be notified that a reserved change performance will be executed. The operation patterns of the change role Ym1, Ym2 will be described with reference to FIG. 672(b) to FIG. 674(a).

Figure 672 (b) is an example of a display screen when the reserved change performance starts and the change parts Ym1 and Ym2 start moving. As shown in Figure 672 (b), the left change part Ym1 slides to the left and then moves to a position that hides the first reserved pattern hr1, and the right change part Ym2 slides to the right and then moves to a position that hides the fourth reserved pattern hr4 (first action). When the first action ends, the player will not know which of the second reserved pattern hr2 and the third reserved pattern hr3 is the reserved pattern that is to be changed. This allows the player to have fun predicting which reserved pattern is to be changed.

Figure 673 (a) is an example of a display screen when the second operation is performed after the first operation is completed. In the second operation, the right change role Ym2 slides leftward when viewed from the front, and an operation to hide the third reserved pattern hr3 is performed. Then, in the main display area Dm, in conjunction with the operation of the right change role Ym2, an effect is performed in which the reserved color "blue" of the third reserved pattern hr3 is transplanted from the display area HR2 to the second reserved pattern hr2, and as shown in Figure 673 (b), an effect is performed in which the "blue" of the third reserved pattern hr3 is transplanted to the "yellow" of the second reserved pattern hr2 and changed to "green". In this way, the reserved patterns other than the change target displayed in the display area HR2 are hidden by the change role Ym1 and Ym2, making it easier for the player to understand the reserved pattern to be changed.

Then, the left change mechanism Ym1 descends and slides to the right when viewed from the front, and the right change mechanism Ym2 continues to descend and returns to the stored state (initial position) (third action).

Figure 674 (a) is an example of the display screen when the change parts Ym1 and Ym2 return to their initial positions from the state of Figure 673 (b). Unlike the state of Figure 672 (a), the second reserved pattern hr2 displayed in the display area HR2 changes from "yellow" to "green," and the third reserved pattern hr3 changes from "blue" to "white." This allows the player to predict that, among the reserved patterns displayed in the display area HR2, the reserved ball corresponding to the second reserved pattern hr2 has a high chance of winning the jackpot.

Here, for example, if reserve change scenario 8 (see FIG. 695) is set as the reserve change scenario for the second reserved pattern hr2, and the reserve color of the first reserved pattern hr1 is displayed as "yellow," the reserve color of the second reserved pattern hr2 is displayed as "blue," and the reserve color of the third reserved pattern hr3 is displayed as "red," then if the elements that make up the reserve colors of the first reserved pattern hr1 and the third reserved pattern hr3 are transplanted to the second reserved pattern hr2 and a reserve change performance is executed in which the reserve color is changed to "rainbow," and then the reserve colors of the first reserved pattern hr1 and the third reserved pattern hr3 remain the same (i.e., the first reserved pattern hr1 remains "yellow" and the third reserved pattern hr3 remains "red"), then, when in reality only the second reserved pattern hr2 has won the jackpot, the player will be given the mistaken idea that there is a high expectation that the second reserved pattern hr2 and the third reserved pattern hr3 will win the jackpot. To prevent this, in this 22nd control example, when an element that makes up the color of the reserved pattern is transplanted, the color displayed changes to the color that corresponds to the transplant.

Figure 674 (b) is an example of a display screen when a part of the reserved color of the reserved pattern is transferred to the adjacent reserved pattern. When the first operation is completed, the second reserved pattern hr2 is displayed in the display area HR2 in the display mode of "purple" and the third reserved pattern hr3 is displayed in the display mode of "white". After that, when the second operation is started, the left change role Ym1 slides to the right when viewed from the front and performs an operation to hide the second reserved pattern hr2. At this time, in the main display area Dm, as shown in Figure 675 (a), a performance is executed in which "blue", one of the components that make up "purple", is transferred from the "purple" of the second reserved pattern hr2 to the third reserved pattern r3. Then, when the change role Ym1 and Ym2 return to their initial positions, the second reserved pattern hr2 is changed to "red" and the third reserved pattern hr3 is changed to "blue". Therefore, in this case, the second reserved symbol hr2, which is hidden by the change role Ym1, has a higher chance of winning the jackpot than the other reserved symbols.

In the 22nd control example, only the colors constituting the reserved pattern are transferred, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved pattern itself may be transferred. Specifically, in the state of FIG. 673(a), a performance is executed in which the reserved pattern displayed at the position of the third reserved pattern hr3 is transferred to the second reserved pattern hr2, and the reserved pattern originally displayed at the position of the fourth reserved pattern hr4 is displayed at the position of the third reserved pattern hr3 in the display area HR2 after the reserved change performance ends, and the position of the fourth reserved pattern hr4 is left blank (a state in which no reserved pattern is displayed), and when a special pattern change based on the reserved ball corresponding to the second reserved pattern hr2 is executed, the lottery result of the reserved ball corresponding to the second reserved pattern hr2 and the lottery result of the reserved ball corresponding to the third reserved pattern hr3 may be notified together. By configuring it this way, the number of times that the player is notified that he or she has won a jackpot can be reduced, making the player believe that they have a higher probability of winning the jackpot than they actually do.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 675(a), a pattern is also set in which the transplant color hr2a transplanted from the second reserved symbol hr2 is "red." In this case, the third reserved symbol hr3 becomes the reserved symbol with a higher expectation of winning the jackpot than the other reserved symbols. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the movement of the change gimmicks Ym1 and Ym2, but also in the performance performed by the third symbol display device 81, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

Figure 676 (a) is an example of a display screen when, even when the second action is executed from the state of Figure 674 (b), the hidden reserved symbol is not transferred, and the reserved symbol to be changed changes alone. Even though the second reserved symbol hr2 is hidden, the color is not transferred, and the third reserved symbol hr3 changes to "green." In this way, by setting a variety of patterns for the reserved symbol change, the reserved symbol change presentation does not become monotonous, and players are prevented from quickly becoming bored.

As described above, in this 22nd control example, the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2 are used to hide reserved patterns other than the one to be changed, thereby making it possible to clearly indicate to the player which reserved pattern is to be changed. In this way, because the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2 hide a portion of the reserved pattern display area of the third pattern display device 81, when a reserved change performance using an effect such as illumination is executed on the third pattern display device 81, even if the effect for the reserved pattern to be changed overlaps with the other reserved patterns, the other reserved patterns are hidden by the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2, making it possible to clearly indicate to the player which reserved pattern is to be changed.

In this 22nd control example, the change symbols Ym1 and Ym2 are used to hide the symbols, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to hide the reserved symbols other than the symbol to be changed by displaying a shutter-like image, or the third symbol may be enlarged to hide the reserved symbols other than the symbol to be changed.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, only the pattern of transferring the color of the second reserved pattern hr2 to the third reserved pattern hr3 and the pattern of transferring the color of the third reserved pattern hr3 to the second reserved pattern hr2 have been described, but this is not limited to this, and for example, a pattern of transferring the color of the second reserved pattern hr2 to the first reserved pattern hr1 may be set, or a pattern of transferring the color of the third reserved pattern hr3 to the fourth reserved pattern hr4 may be set.

In this 22nd control example, the color of the reserved pattern to be changed and the adjacent reserved pattern are combined, but this is not limited to this. For example, a pattern may be provided in which the color of the fourth reserved pattern hr4 is transferred to the first reserved pattern hr1.

In the 22nd control example, the color of the reserved symbol is randomly assigned, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the color may be assigned according to the number of reserved balls. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is two, "white" is displayed on the first reserved symbol hr1 and "purple" is displayed on the second reserved symbol hr2. When one reserved ball is consumed and the number of reserved balls becomes one, the "purple" reserved symbol displayed on the second reserved symbol hr2 changes to a "white" reserved symbol when shifting to the first reserved symbol hr1. When the number of reserved balls is four, "white" is displayed on the first reserved symbol hr1, "purple" is displayed on the second reserved symbol hr2, "yellow" is displayed on the third reserved symbol hr3, and "blue" is displayed on the fourth reserved symbol hr4. In this case, if the reserve change effect is executed at the position of the first reserved symbol hr1 and the second reserved symbol hr2, the player can expect one of the reserved symbols to change to "red", if the reserve change effect is executed at the position of the third reserved symbol hr3, the player can expect a change to "rainbow" or "green", and if the reserve change effect is executed at the position of the fourth reserved symbol hr4, the player can expect a change to "green".

In this way, by configuring the display area HR2 so that colors are assigned according to the position where each reserved pattern is usually displayed, the reserved color that changes varies depending on the position when the reserved pattern to be changed changes, making it possible for the player to take an interest in the position where the reserved pattern change performance is executed, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

Next, referring to Figs. 678 to 680, the light intensity adjustment function executed in this 22nd control example will be described. This 22nd control example has an environment adjustment function that allows the player to adjust the gaming environment (volume and light intensity) of the pachinko machine 10, and when light intensity adjustment is executed during the standby screen (during demo performance), the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) is moved to the environment adjustment position (see Fig. 678 (b)), thereby pseudo-reproducing a state similar to the state in which the decorative movable part is moved in the actual variable performance, and the light intensity adjustment operation can be executed in that state.

Figure 678 (a) is an example of a demo screen (demo screen) that is displayed during a waiting period when no special symbol variation is being performed. On the lower right side of the main display area Dm as viewed from the front, a small display area Dm3 is formed in which display selection buttons Sw1 to Sw5 that imitate the selection button 600 are displayed. In this small display area Dm3, the text "Press the button to adjust" is displayed as a guidance mode to guide the player on how to adjust the gaming environment, with "+" displayed on the upper display button Sw1 and "-" displayed on the lower display button Sw3, and "Volume" displayed above the upper display button Sw1, making it easy for the player to understand that the volume can be adjusted by operating the upper button 600b and the lower button 600d.

In addition, a "+" is displayed on the right display button Sw2, a "-" is displayed on the left display button Sw4, and "Light Intensity" is displayed to the right of the right display button Sw2, so that the player can easily understand that the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the right button 600c and the left button 600e.

At the bottom left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, a small volume gauge ga1 and a small light gauge ga2 are displayed as environmental information indicators to show the player the currently set volume and light intensity. The small volume gauge ga1 and the small light intensity gauge ga2 are configured with five levels, with "MIN" displayed on the left side of each gauge and "MAX" displayed on the right side. When the player operates the selection button 600, the environmental setting values ga1a and ga2a change in tandem, making it easy for the player to understand the difference between the gaming environment they prefer and the current gaming environment.

The secondary display area Ds formed below the primary display area Dm displays the words "Demo performance in progress", which is a game information display mode for displaying game information, to clearly inform the player that the game is currently in a waiting period in which special pattern variations are not being performed.

Figure 678(b) is an example of a light intensity adjustment screen when the player operates a button to adjust the light intensity during the standby period. The example shown in Figure 678(b) shows a state in which the adjustment device (sword device Ym3) has been changed to the environment adjustment position based on the player's operation of the left button 600e. The light intensity setting value ga2a of the small light intensity gauge ga2 decreases by one step in conjunction with the player's operation of the left button 600e. The LED setting value Ym3a of the LED associated with the sword device Ym3 is also configured to be variable in five steps, and is variable in conjunction with the small light intensity gauge ga2.

By configuring it in this way, even when no game is being played, the light intensity can be adjusted using the decorative movable part (sword part Ym3) used for the variable presentation, making it easier for the player to appropriately adjust the light intensity to their desired level.

At the top right of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, a display area HR3 is formed which displays a notification mode for notifying the player that the sword role object Ym3 is being moved to the environment adjustment position to simulate movement for adjusting the amount of light. The display area HR3 displays the words "Moving light adjustment role object" to clearly notify the player that the movement of the sword role object Ym3 this time is not related to the variable performance, and is configured to avoid misunderstanding the player.

Figure 679 (a) is an example of an adjustment completion screen that appears when the light intensity adjustment is complete and the player operates the decision button 600a. When the player operates the decision button 600a, an environmental adjustment completion display cm1, which is a guide to indicate that the environmental adjustment is complete, is displayed above the small light intensity gauge ga2. This allows the player to recognize that the currently displayed light intensity setting value ga2a has been set.

In addition, based on the player's operation of the decision button 600a, the sword role object Ym3 changes from the environment adjustment position to the initial position (see FIG. 669(a)).

Here, if the special symbol starts to change before the light intensity adjustment is completed, the sword symbol Ym3 will overlap with the third symbol display device 81 while the sword symbol Ym3 is in the environment adjustment position, causing a problem in which it is difficult for the player to see the changing performance being executed on the third symbol display device 81.

In contrast, in the present 22nd control example, when the special symbol starts to change during the light intensity adjustment, the light intensity adjustment is continued while the sword role object Ym3 is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 679(b), the sword role object Ym3 changes from the environment adjustment position to the initial position in accordance with the start of the special symbol change, and the small light intensity gauge ga2 is switched to the large light intensity gauge ga3. By switching to the large light intensity gauge ga3 in this manner, the player can be made aware that the light intensity adjustment is continuing even if the sword role object Ym3 is changed to the initial position.

Furthermore, if the action of changing the sword role object Ym3 to its initial position is executed during a change performance, the player may mistakenly believe that the current action of the sword role object Ym3 is part of a change performance. Therefore, in this 22nd control example, when the sword role object Ym3 is changed based on the start of the change of the special pattern, unlike when the sword role object Ym3 is changed by operating the decision button 600a, the sword role object Ym3 is changed to its initial position after all the LEDs associated with it are turned off. By configuring it in this way, the player can easily understand that the sword role object Ym3 is not moving as part of the change performance.

Figure 680 is an example of a light intensity adjustment screen when the movement of the sword role object Ym3 is restricted. In this 22nd control example, when the sword role object Ym3 is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position, the movement of the sword role object Ym3 is restricted for a certain period (10 seconds). By configuring in this way, when a performance mode is set in which the sword role object Ym3 is moved as part of a variable performance, the performance execution timing occurs during the period when the sword role object Ym3 is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position, which prevents the sword role object Ym3 from performing unnatural movements or being overloaded and causing a breakdown.

When the movement of the sword role object Ym3 is restricted during the standby period, that is, when a player who has finished adjusting the light intensity performs light intensity adjustment again, a display area HR4 is formed in the upper center of the main display area Dm, displaying a guide mode to indicate that the operation of the sword role object Ym3 is restricted. By displaying the words "Role object operation restricted" in the display area HR4, the player can be informed in an easy-to-understand manner that the reason the sword role object Ym3 cannot be moved is not due to a malfunction.

Next, referring to Figs. 681 to 637, the content of the shutter closing reach effect, which is one of the reach effects executed in this 22nd control example, will be explained. The shutter closing reach effect is a reach effect in which one reach effect is divided into six stages, and if the final stage (the sixth stage) is reached (i.e., the shutter opens and closes a predetermined number of times), a jackpot win is announced. The specific content of the shutter closing reach effect will be explained below.

First, we will explain the basic pattern of the shutter closing reach performance with reference to Figures 681 to 682.

Figure 681 (a) is an example of a display screen when the shutter closing reach effect starts. On the left and right sides of the main display area Dm as viewed from the front, shutters St1 and St2 are displayed to encourage the player to proceed to the next stage, and a display area HR4 is formed in the upper center of the main display area Dm, in which a guide mode is displayed to notify the player of the progress of the effect. In addition, a game information notification mode is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to notify the player of the success conditions of the effect. The words "Continue 1/6 with shutters closed" are displayed in the display area HR4, and the words "If you can complete it, it's a jackpot" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, so that the shutters St1 and St2 displayed in the main display area Dm close to advance the stage, and when the display area HR4 displays "6/6", it is possible to easily notify the player that it is a jackpot.

In addition, in the center of the main display area Dm, two "3" symbols are displayed as the third symbol, along with a downward arrow indicating that the third symbol is changing, indicating that the "3" symbol is in reach.

As shown in FIG. 681(a), in the shutter closing reach presentation, the state in which the shutters St1 and St2 are vibrating violently is a branching presentation as to whether or not to proceed to the next stage, and if it is decided to proceed to the next stage, as shown in FIG. 681(b), the shutters St1 and St2 close, and the character St1a for "continue" displayed on shutter St1 and the character St2a for "continue" displayed on shutter St2 combine to become "continue," thus informing the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the presentation will continue.

In addition, the progress of the performance displayed in the display area HR4 changes from "1/6" to "2/6" in accordance with the closing of the shutters St1 and St2, allowing the player to recognize that the performance has progressed to the next stage as the shutters St1 and St2 close.

On the other hand, although not shown, if the branching effect does not progress to the next stage, the shutters St1 and St2 do not close and the vibration stops, and an ending state (for example, the word "Failed") indicating the end of the effect is displayed. By configuring it in this way, the player can be notified that the reach effect has ended in an easy-to-understand manner.

Figure 682 (a) is an example of a display screen when the fifth stage of the shutter closing reach performance has been reached. Unlike the state of Figure 681 (a), the "7" symbol is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm as the third symbol in a reach state, and the character "Continue" St1a displayed on the shutter St1 changes to the character "Celebration" St1b, and the character "Continue" St2a displayed on the shutter St2 changes to the character "Fortune" St2b. In this way, by changing the characters on the shutters St1 and St2 from "Continue", which indicates proceeding to the next stage, to "Celebration", which indicates a jackpot win, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner that the next time the shutters St1 and St2 close, a jackpot will be reached.

Here, in the shutter closing reach performance of this 22nd control example, the number of the third pattern displayed in the main display area Dm is incremented by one each time the shutters St1 and St2 are closed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 682(a), the shutters St1 and St2 have been closed four times since the state of FIG. 681(a), so the number of the "3" pattern is incremented by four and changed to a "7" pattern. Therefore, when the shutters St1 and St2 are closed at the fifth stage, the number of the third pattern displayed in the main display area Dm becomes an "8" pattern, and as shown in FIG. 682(b), the shutters St1 and St2 are fully opened, and the notification mode nz1 indicating a jackpot win is displayed between the two "8" patterns, thereby notifying the jackpot win.

In this 22nd control example, the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the first stage of the shutter closing reach is determined randomly based on the result of the special symbol hit/fail judgment. For example, if the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the first stage of the shutter closing reach performance is the "2" symbol, the "7" symbol will be displayed when the final stage (sixth stage) is reached.

As will be described later, in this 22nd control example, the player can predict the type of jackpot from the number of the stopped third symbol, and the "7" symbol is the third symbol type that is displayed only when the player wins "Jackpot A," which is the jackpot type that has the most rounds of jackpot play and in which a special probability game state is set after the jackpot play ends. The other symbols indicate that the player has won "Jackpot B," which is the jackpot type that has fewer rounds of jackpot play than jackpot A, or "Jackpot C," which has fewer rounds of jackpot play than jackpot A and in which a special probability game state is not set after the jackpot play ends.

In this way, the player can predict the number of the third symbol that will be displayed when the final stage is reached from the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the first stage, making it possible to create interest in the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the first stage of the shutter closing reach, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

The above explains the basic pattern of the shutter closing reach presentation. As mentioned above, the basic pattern of the shutter closing reach presentation is to entertain the player as to whether or not they can reach the final stage. However, simply showing whether or not shutters St1 and St2 will close in the branching presentation results in a monotonous presentation, and there is a problem in that the player quickly becomes bored with the presentation.

To address this issue, the 22nd control example adds a configuration in which the mode of the performance executed in the final stage varies depending on the mode of the performance executed in the process up to reaching the final stage. With reference to FIG. 683, an example of a special pattern of the shutter closing reach performance will be described.

Figure 683 (a) is an example of a display screen when a capsule acquisition effect occurs in the third stage of the shutter closing reach effect. After the shutters St1 and St2 close in the branching effect of the second stage of the shutter closing reach, when the third stage of the shutter closing reach begins, an effect may be executed in which a capsule Cp1 is acquired. This capsule Cp1 is displayed in such a way that its contents cannot be seen at the time of the third stage. When a capsule Cp1 is acquired, a display area HR4 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front, displaying a game information notification mode to notify the number of capsules held (see Figure 683 (b)).

As shown in FIG. 683(b), in the fifth stage branching effect, the capsule Cp1 displayed in the display area HR4 is opened, and a HOLD ticket Cp1a pops out of the capsule Cp1 and sticks to the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. This HOLD ticket Cp1a prevents the number of the currently displayed symbol from being updated even when the shutters St1 and St2 are closed. In this case, if the fifth stage branching effect is successful, a jackpot win is announced in the sixth stage by the "7" symbol.

The contents of capsule Cp1 do not only contain a HOLD ticket Cp1a, but also specify a pattern in which a display form resembling a "key" can be selected. When this key is selected, shutters St1 and St2 are fully opened when the key is successfully used, and the number of the pattern displayed at that point indicates that a jackpot has been won.

Even if an item such as a HOLD ticket Cp1a appears from the capsule Cp1, there are cases where a jackpot win is not announced (i.e., a miss win occurs), so it is possible to keep the player interested in whether they will be able to win the capsule Cp1, what the contents of the capsule Cp1 are, and whether they will be successful in using the item, and this can prevent the player from becoming bored with the shutter closing reach too early.

In this way, in this 22nd control example, by adding a configuration that allows the player to obtain a capsule Cp1, which is a presentation variable aspect for varying the presentation aspect of the shutter closing reach presentation, it is possible to generate interest in the number of the pattern displayed in the first stage of the shutter closing reach presentation, in the presence or absence of a capsule obtaining presentation in the third stage, and in the contents of the capsule Cp1 in the fourth and fifth stages, thereby making it possible to sustain the player's attention on the presentation from the start to the end of the shutter closing reach presentation.

Next, referring to Figures 684 to 686, a movie execution reach effect, which is one of the reach effects executed in this 22nd control example, will be described. This movie execution reach effect is divided into a first half and a second half, and when the first half of the reach effect ends, a branching effect is executed to determine whether or not to transition to the second half. If this branching effect is successful, a special movie, which is the second half of the reach effect, begins. Then, when the special movie ends, it is announced that a jackpot has been won.

Figure 684 (a) shows the display screen when a branching effect of the movie execution reach effect is executed. A display effect button Sw6 that imitates the effect button 22 is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm, and below that, a valid period gauge ga4 is displayed as a notification mode for indicating the SW valid period. This valid period gauge ga4 is composed of a remaining valid period ga4a that indicates the remaining valid period and an elapsed time ga4b that indicates the elapsed time, and is configured so that the display portion of the remaining valid period ga4a decreases and the display portion of the elapsed time ga4b increases as time passes, thereby notifying the player of the remaining period during which operation of the effect button 22 is valid.

The secondary display area Ds also displays the text "Push the button to start a special movie?", which is a guide to show the game information that is a condition for success in the movie execution reach effect. In addition to the display effect button Sw6 displayed in the center of the primary display area Dm and the downward arrow displayed above it, which is a suggestion to encourage the player to operate the effect button, the guide displayed in the secondary display area Ds clearly informs the player that operating the effect button 22 may advance the effect.

Figure 684 (b) is an example of a display screen when the special movie ends if the effect button 22 is operated during a branching effect. A display area HR4 is formed in the upper center of the main display area Dm to display a notification mode indicating that the special movie has ended. The message "Special Movie Ended" is displayed in this display area HR4, allowing the player to easily recognize that the special movie has ended.

In this 22nd control example, a notification mode is displayed in the display area HR4 when the special movie ends, but this is not limited to this, and any mode that can let the player know that the special movie has ended can be used.

Here, the special movie of the movie execution reach effect in this 22nd control example is set to a movie playback time assuming that the player does not operate the effect button 22 during the SW valid period. By configuring in this way, a problem does not occur in which the special movie does not end within the special symbol variation time if the player does not operate the effect button 22. On the other hand, if the player operates the effect button 22 during the SW valid period, the special movie starts from the point when the player operates the effect button 22, so the special symbol variation time will not end when the special movie ends. For this reason, in this 22nd control example, if the variation of the special symbol has not ended when the special movie ends, the temporarily stopped symbol is configured to shake and wait from the end of the special movie until the special symbol variation stops.

Therefore, if the player does not operate the effect button 22 during the SW valid period, as shown in FIG. 685, when the special movie ends, the fourth symbol displayed in the small display area Dm1 also stops in a display mode indicating a jackpot win, the third symbol also stops in a display mode indicating a jackpot win, and a notification mode indicating a jackpot win is displayed in the sub-display area Ds, thereby notifying the player that a jackpot win has been won.

On the other hand, if the player operates the effect button 22 during the SW valid period, as shown in FIG. 684(b), even if the fourth symbol is changing in the small display area Dm1, the third symbol will temporarily stop in a display mode indicating a jackpot win as the special movie ends, and a notification mode to indicate a jackpot win will be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this way, in the movie execution reach effect, a player who operates the effect button 22 during the SW valid period is notified that a jackpot win has been won before the special symbol stops changing.

Figure 686 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the special movie presentation time and the special symbol fluctuation time. As described above, if the presentation button 22 is operated during a branching presentation, the symbol fluctuation period is set to the period from the end of the special movie to the stop of fluctuation, and the jackpot announcement is executed before the stop of fluctuation.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 22nd control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 687. Fig. 687 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing a jackpot, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37a, 37b and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing special symbols, drawing normal symbols, setting the display in the first symbol display device 37, setting the display in the second symbol display device 83, and setting the display in the third symbol display device 81. Various counters for controlling these processes are provided in the RAM 203. Here, referring to FIG. 688, the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 688 is a schematic diagram showing the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to draw special symbols, draw normal symbols, set the display in the first symbol display device 37, set the display in the second symbol display device 83, and set the display in the third symbol display device 81.

The first winning random number counter C1 used to draw the special symbols and to set the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 uses the following: the first winning type counter C1 used to draw the special symbols, the first winning type counter C2 used to select the type of big win for the special symbols, the stop type selection counter (C3) used to select the type of stop for a miss in the special symbols, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern.

The second winning random number counter C4 is used to select the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the normal symbol fluctuation pattern are used to set the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value, and they are loop counters that return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 698), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 709), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a specified area of RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa corresponding to balls entering the first ball opening 64 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4), and a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb corresponding to balls entering the second ball entrance 640 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4). The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, and the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 64.

When the conditions for starting the special pattern (conditions for changing) are met, the information on the special pattern corresponding to the special pattern type for which the next lottery will be executed is shifted to the special pattern execution area from among the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the various values stored in the reserved first area of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb, and the special pattern change based on the various stored values begins.

In this 22nd control example, a configuration is used in which there are two types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), but this is not limited to this, and there may be only one type of special symbol. Then, when the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol or the start condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area for the corresponding special symbol type are shifted to the special symbol execution area, and special symbol variation based on the various stored values is started. By configuring in this way, even in a pachinko machine 10 that uses multiple special symbol types, each special symbol variation can be smoothly executed.

Furthermore, as in this 22nd control example, if the pachinko machine 10 has multiple special symbol types (first special symbol, second special symbol), it may be configured so that the drawing of the first special symbol and the drawing of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel). In this case, each special symbol reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb) may be configured to have a special symbol execution area. This makes it possible to execute the next special symbol variation promptly when the start conditions for each special symbol are met.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, the lottery result for the special symbol is configured to be only a big win or a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in some cases where the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss, the player may win a small win that can be awarded a smaller bonus than when the big win is won (a bonus different from when the big win is won). By configuring in this way, even if the big win is not won, an opportunity to award a bonus to the player can be provided, thereby improving the interest of the game. In this case, a small win type counter can be provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, and the value of the acquired small win type counter can be configured to be stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area, and can be configured to be referenced when the lottery for the special symbol is executed.

In addition, if the special pattern lottery allows a small jackpot to be won, the game state transition content based on winning a big jackpot and the game state transition content based on winning a small jackpot may be configured to be different. For example, when a big jackpot is won, the game state may be transitioned to the normal state at the start of the big jackpot game, and a new game state may be set after the big jackpot game ends based on the set big jackpot type. When a small jackpot is won, the game state at the time of winning the small jackpot is maintained and a small jackpot game is executed, and the game state does not transition even after the small jackpot game ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to vary the presence or absence of a transition in the game state and the content of the transition depending on the type of winning (big win, small win), providing a wide variety of games.

Furthermore, the RAM 203 of this 22nd control example is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc that corresponds to the ball entering (passing through) the through gate 67, which is made up of four reserved areas (first reserved areas), and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc stores the values of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the through gate 67.

When the normal pattern start condition (change condition) is met, the various values stored in the first reserved area of the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203vc are shifted to the normal pattern execution area, and the normal pattern change based on the various stored values begins.

Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 688. The first hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by one in sequence within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 999) and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 999 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 999). In particular, when the first hit random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first hit random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first hit random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 399. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 698) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 709).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this 22nd control example), for example, and is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. The random number value that results in a jackpot for the special pattern is set by the first winning random number table 202va stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the first winning random number counter C1 matches the random number value that results in a jackpot set by the first winning random number table 202va, it is determined that a jackpot for the special pattern has occurred.

Now, referring to FIG. 690, the first winning random number table 202va will be described. FIG. 690 is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first winning random number table 202va. This first winning random number table 202va is a table that defines the random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a jackpot in the lottery for special symbols.

Specifically, the first win random number table 202va specifies different judgment values for determining a jackpot depending on the game state (probability state of the special symbol). As shown in FIG. 690, for a game state in which the special symbol has a low probability of occurrence (normal state, time-saving state), the first win random number counter C1 values of "0 to 4" are specified as jackpot judgment values, and other values ("5 to 999") are specified as miss judgment values. Also, for a game state in which the special symbol has a high probability of occurrence (high probability state), the first win random number counter C1 values of "0 to 19" are specified as jackpot judgment values, and other values ("20 to 999") are specified as miss judgment values. In other words, the update range of the first winning random number table 202a is 1000 numbers from "0 to 999", so in the low probability state of the special pattern, the probability of a jackpot being determined is 1/200 (5 out of 1000), and in the high probability state of the special pattern, the probability of a jackpot being determined is 1/50 (20 out of 1000).

In this 22nd control example, two types of jackpot probabilities are set according to the game state, but the invention is not limited to this, and the probability of winning a jackpot may be the same regardless of the game state, or three or more types of jackpot probabilities may be set. In this case, for example, the jackpot probability for special symbols may be different for up to four game states set by combining the special symbol state and the normal symbol state, or simply, the special symbol state may be set to three or more types, such as a high probability state, a normal probability state, and a low probability state, and a different jackpot probability may be set for each state.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, two types of lottery results, "big win" and "loss", are determined as the lottery results for the special symbols. In addition, a "small win" may be determined as a third lottery result as a type of "loss". When this "small win" is won, a small win game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a period (one round) shorter than that of the "big win". By configuring in this way, a small amount of bonus (prize balls) can be awarded to the player when the big win is not won. Note that when the "small win" is a type of "loss", it is possible to award the player with prize balls from the small win game, but since the big win has not been won, it is preferable to configure the process of changing the game state (setting a game state different from the game state at the time of winning) not to be executed. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish between the bonus awarded to the player based on the big win and the bonus awarded to the player based on the small win.

As described above, if it is configured so that a "small win" can be won as a result of the special pattern lottery, the first win random number table 202va can be configured to specify the value of the first win random number counter C1 corresponding to the "small win". By configuring it in this way, the big win lottery and small win lottery for the special pattern can be executed in the same process, so the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced compared to when the big win lottery and small win lottery are executed in different processes. Also, it is possible to prevent a big win and a small win from being won in the same special pattern lottery.

The first winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this 22nd control example), and is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, and in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sb of the RAM 203 when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 22nd control example is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. In this embodiment, the acquired value of the first win type counter C2 is used to refer to the first win type selection table 202sc to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won. Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection table 202sb will be explained with reference to FIG. 691(a).

Figure 691 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the first win type selection table 202vb. As described above, this first win type selection table 202vb is a data table for selecting the jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won in the drawing of the first special symbol or the drawing of the second special symbol, and different jackpot types are defined according to the value of the acquired first win type counter C2.

Specifically, for the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (update range "0-99") is set to "0" and "jackpot A" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 10, a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203sh is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. Note that if the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, there is one random number value (counter value) associated with "jackpot A." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A" will be determined is 1% (1/100).

When the value of the first winning type counter C2 (update range "0-99") is in the range of "1", "jackpot B" is associated with it as the jackpot type. This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 3 and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203sh is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, there is one random number value (counter value) associated with "jackpot B." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot B" will be determined is 1% (1/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "2 to 99" and is associated with a "jackpot C" as a jackpot type. This "jackpot C" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 3, a normal jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "100" and the value of the special probability counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 98 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot C." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of the first special symbol, the probability that "jackpot C" will be determined is 98% (98/100).

In other words, the two jackpot types (jackpot B, jackpot C) that can be set when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery have the same number of rounds of jackpot play, but differ in the ease with which the ball can pass through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided within the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot play, and are configured so that a jackpot play is executed in which it is easier for the ball to flow down to the specific gate during the jackpot play with "jackpot B" than with "jackpot C." Therefore, "jackpot B" is a more advantageous jackpot type than "jackpot C."

Next, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 is set in the range of "0 to 24" and "jackpot A" is specified as the jackpot type. This "jackpot A" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 10 and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203sh is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. Note that if the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the special win type counter C2, 25 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot A." Therefore, when a jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot A" will be determined is 25% (25/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "25 to 41" and is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot B". This "jackpot B" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 3 and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 12 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot B." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot B" will be determined is 12% (12/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "42 to 51" and is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot D". This "jackpot D" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is two and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 10 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot D." Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot D" will be determined is 10% (10/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "52 to 68" and is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot E". This "jackpot E" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 4 and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 17 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot B." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability of "jackpot E" being determined is 17% (17/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "69 to 82" and is associated with the jackpot type "jackpot F". This "jackpot F" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 5 and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 14 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot F." Therefore, when a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot F" will be determined is 14% (14/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "83 to 90" and is associated with the "jackpot G" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot G" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 6 and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 8 random number values (counter values) are associated with the "jackpot G", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that the "jackpot G" will be determined is 8% (8/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "91 to 97" and is associated with the "jackpot H" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot H" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 7 and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, 7 random number values (counter values) are associated with "jackpot H", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot H" will be determined is 7% (7/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "98" and is associated with "jackpot I" as the jackpot type. This "jackpot I" is a jackpot type in which the number of jackpot rounds is 8 and a special jackpot game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "120" and the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "120" after the jackpot game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special jackpot game (non-V time), the value of the special jackpot counter 203vu is set to "0" after the jackpot game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, there is one random number value (counter value) associated with "jackpot I", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that "jackpot I" will be determined is 1% (1/100).

As shown in FIG. 691(a), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set to the range of "99" as the winning type, and "jackpot J" is specified as the winning type. This "jackpot J" is a winning type in which the number of winning rounds is 9, and a special winning game is executed, and the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to "120" and the value of the special winning counter 203vu is set to "120" after the special winning game ends. If the ball does not flow (pass) through the specific area (V gate) 65v provided in the variable winning device 65 during the special winning game (non-V time), the value of the special winning counter 203vu is set to "0" after the special winning game ends.

Of the 100 possible random number values (counter values) of the first winning type counter C2, there is one random number value (counter value) that is associated with the "jackpot J", so if a jackpot is awarded in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability that the "jackpot J" will be determined is 1% (1/100).

In other words, the nine jackpot types that can be set when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot D, jackpot E, jackpot F, jackpot G, jackpot H, jackpot I, jackpot J) all result in a guaranteed jackpot game, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game differs, with "jackpot A," which results in the most rounds of game, being the most advantageous jackpot type to the player, and "jackpot D" being the least advantageous jackpot type to the player.

As explained above, if a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery, a guaranteed jackpot game will be played, so this is a more advantageous jackpot type in terms of the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends, compared to the first special pattern lottery, which has a 2% chance of playing a guaranteed jackpot game.

Returning to FIG. 688, the explanation will continue. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to increment by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the rough display mode (variation time) of so-called short-time miss, long-time miss, normal reach, super reach, etc. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing (see FIG. 709) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing. In addition, a variation pattern selection table 202vc (see FIG. 692) that stores random number values that determine one variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, referring to FIG. 692, the fluctuation pattern table 202sc will be explained. As shown in FIG. 692(a), this fluctuation pattern table 202sc defines at least a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202vc1 (see FIG. 692(b)), a miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202sc2 (see FIG. 692(c)), and a miss (high probability/time-saving) fluctuation pattern table 202sc3 (see FIG. 692(d)).

First, referring to FIG. 692(b), the jackpot table 202sc1 will be described. FIG. 692(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202vc1. The jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202vc1 is a data table that specifies the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) to be selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. The jackpot fluctuation patterns specified are various normal reaches (30 seconds), various super reaches (60 seconds), and special reaches (90 seconds). In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202vc1, each fluctuation pattern is associated with each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Specifically, the range of "0 to 50" as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various normal reaches (30 seconds), the range of "51 to 179" is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various super reaches (60 seconds), and the range of "180 to 198" is associated with the fluctuation patterns of various special reaches (90 seconds). When selecting a fluctuation pattern when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern in which a judgment value corresponding to the acquired value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set from the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202vc1.

Figure 692 (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202vc2. The miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202vc2 is a data table that specifies the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) to be selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss in a low probability state of the special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a miss, as described above, the stop type is determined by the value of the stop type selection counter C3 from the stop type selection table (not shown) as to whether the stop type is a complete miss (non-reach) or a reach miss (common to reach) according to the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Specifically, for example, in a low probability state of the special symbol, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete miss is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", a miss reach (front and rear miss reach, reach other than front and rear miss) is set.

Here, if the fluctuation pattern type is a complete miss, either a short miss (7 seconds) with a relatively short fluctuation time or a long miss (10 seconds) with a relatively long fluctuation time is set. For a short miss (7 seconds), "0 to 98" is set as the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and for a long miss (10 seconds), "99 to 198" is set.

For missed reaches, the range of the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 from "0 to 149" is set to various missed normal reaches (30 seconds), the range of "150 to 197" is set to various missed super reaches (60 seconds), and "198" is set to various missed special reaches (90 seconds).

In this way, when the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss during normal game mode, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 determines the stop type, and selects a fluctuation pattern from the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202vc2 based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 obtained from the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202vc2.

Figure 692 (d) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the miss (high probability/time-saving) fluctuation pattern table 202sc3. This miss (high probability/time-saving) fluctuation pattern table 202sc3 is a data table that specifies the type of fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that is selected when the special symbol is in a high probability state and the lottery for the special symbol is a miss. In this miss (high probability/time-saving) fluctuation pattern table 202sc3, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 that is set is different from that in the miss (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202vc2 described above.

As mentioned above, when the game state is a sure-win game state, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89" according to the stop type selection table (not shown), a complete miss is determined, and if it is in the range of "90 to 99", a miss reach (front or rear miss reach, reach other than front or rear miss) is determined.

In this way, the probability of reaching a winning jackpot in the event of a miss is set lower in the high probability play state or the time-limited play state than in the normal play state. This prevents the time it takes for a miss to fluctuate during the high probability play state from becoming too long, and the time it takes to hit a jackpot from becoming too long. This prevents the game from dragging on during the high probability play state, when a jackpot is more likely to occur, making the player feel bored.

Returning to FIG. 688, the explanation continues. The second winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 299). When the second winning random number counter C4 goes around once, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 698), and is obtained when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal start port (through gate) 67, and is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203vc of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is set by a second winning random number table 202vd stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning that is set by the second winning random number table 202vd, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. In addition, this second winning random number table 202vd is divided into two types, one for when the probability of a winning normal symbol is low and one for when the probability of a winning normal symbol is high, with each type containing a different number of random numbers that result in a big win. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that result in a win different, the probability of a winning normal symbol is changed between when the probability of a winning normal symbol is low and when the probability of a winning normal symbol is high.

The contents stipulated in this second winning random number table 202vd will be explained with reference to FIG. 691(b). FIG. 691(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the second winning random number table 202vd. As shown in FIG. 691(b), when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, a normal winning is stipulated when the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is a value of "0 to 2", and when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, a normal winning is stipulated when the acquired second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 149".

In other words, in this 22nd control example, when a low probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability (1/100) of winning in the lottery for normal symbols is set to a low probability. As a result, in this embodiment in which the same game method (left-handed play) is executed in the normal state, which is a low probability state for normal symbols, and the time-saving state, which is a high probability state for normal symbols, it is possible to make it difficult to win a normal symbol win during the normal state, making it difficult to cause a situation in which a normal symbol win game is executed during the normal state and a ball enters the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, the probability (1/2) of winning in the lottery for normal symbols is set to a high probability. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to execute a normal symbol win game based on a win of a normal symbol during the time-saving state.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, different lengths of variation time are set as the variation time of the normal pattern variation to indicate the result of the normal pattern lottery depending on the set game state, and a longer variation time (e.g., 10 seconds) is set when a low probability state of the normal pattern is set than when a high probability state of the normal pattern is set. In this way, by varying the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery and the length of the variation time of the normal pattern variation depending on the game state, it is possible to easily set a game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which it is easy to win the normal pattern lottery and enter the second ball entrance 640.

Furthermore, in this 22nd control example, if a normal symbol lottery executed in a state where a low probability state for normal symbols is set is won, a normal symbol winning game can be executed in which the electric device 640 is opened in an operating mode (long opening) that allows multiple balls to enter the second ball entrance 640. Therefore, even in a game state (normal state) in which it is difficult to win a normal symbol lottery, it is possible to temporarily make it easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640, so that no matter what game state is set, the possibility of the second special symbol lottery being executed can be left open for the player, improving the interest of the game.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second hit random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 299), and is updated once for each timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 698) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 709).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the display on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Returning to Fig. 687, we will continue the explanation. ROM 202 has various data tables and the like defined in correspondence with the various counters shown in Fig. 688. Here, with reference to Fig. 689(a), we will explain the contents of ROM 202 of main control device 110 in pachinko machine 10 of this 22nd control example. Fig. 689(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of ROM 202 of main control device 110 in pachinko machine 10 of this 22nd control example.

As shown in FIG. 689(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in this 22nd control example has at least a first win random number table 202va, a first win type selection table 202vb, a fluctuation pattern selection table 202vc, and a second win random number table 202vd. Note that the first win random number table 202va, the first win type selection table 202vb, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202vc, and the second win random number table 202vd have been described above when explaining the various counters shown in FIG. 688, so their explanation will be omitted.

Returning to FIG. 687, the explanation will continue. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 688, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and a working area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.

The RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by receiving a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on after the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 167) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 166) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 707) is immediately executed as a processing during a power outage.

As shown in FIG. 689(c), the RAM 203 has at least a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203va, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203vb, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203ve, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203vf, a special chance flag 203vg, a special chance setting flag 203vh, a special chance passing counter 203vi, a winning number counter 203vj, an operation counter 203vk, an alarm counter 203vm, a remaining ball timer flag 203vn, a remaining ball timer 203vo, a special chance active flag 203vp, a special chance active timer 203vr, a discharge number counter 203vs, a time-saving counter 203vt, a special chance active counter 203vu, and a miscellaneous memory area 203vz.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203va has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) as shown in FIG. 688, and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter C2 obtained based on winning in the first winning slot 64.

More specifically, when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 (initial winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4) in order of the area number (1 to 4) starting from the area with the smallest area number. In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winnings are stored, and the first holding area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a decision such as the lottery for the special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from reserved area 1 to the execution area, reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved area with the area number one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas in which winning data is stored (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203vb differs from the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203va only in that the counter values acquired in response to winnings in the second winning slot 640 are stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203vb. As the rest of the configuration is the same, a detailed description will be omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203va or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203vb, has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, the value of counter C4 is obtained when the ball passes through either the left or right normal start hole 67, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 4) in order of the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, just like the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203va, the order in which the winning balls were won is maintained and data corresponding to the winning balls is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a winning normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as the lottery for a winning normal symbol is made based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty, so a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number one smaller, just like in the case of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203va. Also, data shifting is only performed on the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203vd is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the first special pattern (first pattern) variable display (variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81) performed by the first pattern display device 37 based on a ball entering the first winning port 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203vd is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see F604 in FIG. 703). On the other hand, the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203vd is decremented by one each time a new variable display of a special pattern is performed (see F211 in FIG. 699).

The value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203vd (the number of reserved ball counts N for the special pattern variable display) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special pattern 1 reserved ball count command (see F212 in FIG. 699 and F605 in FIG. 703). The special pattern 1 reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203vd is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the actual number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 by the special pattern 1 reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd is changed. As a result, even if the reserved ball number of the variable display managed by the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball number of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the reserved ball number command received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and sends a reserved ball number display command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls each time the number of reserved balls changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern (reserved pattern) on the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by this reserved ball number display command.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ve differs from the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203vd in that the number of reserved balls that have won and been reserved in the second winning slot 640 is stored, so a detailed explanation will be omitted. When the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203ve is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by a special pattern 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203vf is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the normal pattern (second pattern) variable display performed by the second pattern display device 83 based on the passage of a ball through the normal start port 67, up to a maximum of four. The normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203vf is initially set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal start port 67 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see F904 in FIG. 706). On the other hand, the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203vf is decremented by one each time a new normal pattern (second pattern) variable display is executed (see F805 in FIG. 705).

When a ball passes through either the left or right normal start port 67, if the value of this normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203vf (the number of reserved normal pattern variable display M) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203vc (F905 in Fig. 706). On the other hand, when a ball passes through either the left or right normal start port 67, if the value of this normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203vf is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203vc (F903 in Fig. 706: No).

The probability change flag 203vg is a flag that indicates whether the current game state is a probability change game state (probability change game state). When the probability change flag 203vg is set to on, it indicates that the game state is a probability change game state, and when it is off, it indicates that the game state is a low probability game state (including time-saving game state). In this 22nd control example, the probability change flag 203vg is set to on when the probability change setting flag 203vh described later is set to on at the end of the jackpot game (see F1304 in FIG. 712). On the other hand, it is set to off when the jackpot game starts. Note that in the initialized state, it is set to off, and is configured so that if a normal power outage occurs, the state immediately before the power outage is backed up.

The high probability setting flag 203vh is a flag that indicates whether or not the game state is to be changed to the high probability game state after a big win game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is to be set to the high probability game state is determined by whether or not the game ball passes through the high probability switch 65e3 (see FIG. 671(a)) during a big win game. Here, when the game ball passes through this high probability switch 65e3, the high probability setting flag 203vh is set to ON (F1242 in FIG. 714). On the other hand, this high probability setting flag 203vh is set to OFF based on the high probability setting flag 203vg being set to ON (F1306 in FIG. 712). Note that this high probability setting flag 203vh is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power was turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to OFF in the initialized state.

If the special chance setting flag 203vh is set to on when the power is turned on, it may be configured to determine whether the special chance setting flag 203vh was passed before the power was turned off, and if it is determined that the special chance setting flag 203vh was passed, the special chance setting flag 203vh may be set to on and restored. In this case, whether the special chance setting switch 65e3 was passed before the power was turned off can be determined by whether the special chance passing counter 203vi, which will be described later, is greater than 0. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to determine fraud such as rewriting only the special chance setting flag 203vh to on and turning the power back on while the power is off, thereby reducing damage to the gaming establishment.

The probability change passing counter 203vi is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability change switch 65e3 in one round during a jackpot game (two rounds for jackpots A, B, and D to J in this 22nd control example). It is possible to determine whether all game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 65 have been discharged by adding up the probability change passing counter 203vi and the discharge number counter 203vs described later. The probability change passing counter 203vi is updated by adding one each time it passes through the probability change switch 65e3 (F1241 in FIG. 714). In addition, after executing a process to determine whether the number of game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, it is reset to the initial value "0" (F1271 in FIG. 715). The probability change passing counter 203vi is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203vj is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won the specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 in one round of a big win game (i.e., the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65). Specifically, it is updated by adding one to the number of game balls that have passed through the detection port 65a1 (see FIG. 671) provided in the first variable winning device 65 (F1233 in FIG. 77). On the other hand, when one round is completed, it is determined whether the number of balls that have won the first variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203vj) and the number of balls that have been discharged (the total value of the discharge number counter 203vs and the probability change passing counter 203vi) match (F1267 in FIG. 715), and then it is reset to the initial value "0". The value of this winning number counter 203vj is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, when initialized, it is set to 0.

The operation counter 203vk is a counter for timing (counting) the time when the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (excited). In this pachinko machine 10, in the case of a big win A, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 5 seconds based on the start of the second round, and in the case of a big win C, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to ON for 0.5 seconds based on the start of the second round. In the operation counter 203vk, in the case of a big win A, a counter value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the start data of the second round, and in the case of a big win C, a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set (F1202 in FIG. 711). On the other hand, the counter is updated by subtracting 1 at a time in the process of F1239 of the winning process 22 (F1115 in FIG. 714) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main control device 110. In addition, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF based on the fact that the value of this operation counter 203vk is determined to be 0 (F1243 in FIG. 714: Yes). This operation counter 203vk is backed up when the power is turned off, and when initialized, the initial value 0 is set. In this way, by setting the operation counter 203vk and controlling the flow path solenoid 65k, the winning of the probability change switch 65e3 can be controlled according to the type of jackpot.

The notification counter 203vm is a counter for determining the timing to output a notification effect (in this 22nd control example, the sound "Look at the LCD") to attract the player's attention. In this 22nd control example, the notification counter 203vm is set for 1 second at the end timing of the second round (10 balls enter the first variable winning device 65 or 30 seconds have passed). This notification counter 203vm is updated by subtracting 1 by the processing of F1224 of the notification processing (FIG. 713, F1114) of the main control device 110. When the notification counter 203vm becomes 0, a notification command is set to be output to the voice lamp control device 113. When this command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the processing to output the above-mentioned sound.

By configuring it in this way, a voice message saying "Look at the LCD" is output before the start of the second round when the flow path solenoid 65k is operated, so the player looks at the third pattern display device 81, which corresponds to the LCD. In the second round, the flow path solenoid 65k is activated, so if the player looks at its operation, the type of jackpot being executed will be determined by the operation period of the flow path solenoid 65k. In order to keep the player's hopes of being granted a sure-win state until the end of the jackpot game, a notification effect is executed that makes it difficult for the player to see the movement of the switching member 65h (see FIG. 671(a)). However, when the second round ends, there is a risk that the player will look at the switching member 65h during the interval display, so a notification effect is executed that notifies the player to look at the third pattern display device 81 by voice during the interval period. This allows the player's attention to be drawn to the display content that is displayed after the interval performance is executed, and distracts the player's attention from the operation of the switching member 65h.

In the 22nd control example, the player's attention is diverted from the switching member 65h by informing the player to show the third symbol display device 81, but the player may be informed to hold his/her hand over the first variable winning device 65 before the start of the second round, so that the movement of the switching member 65h is hidden by the player's hand. In addition, the player may be informed to look at the decorative lamp 34 or the like, not limited to the third symbol display device 81, to divert the player's attention. Furthermore, the player may be informed to display a three-dimensional code or the like during the second round and to read it with a mobile phone, to divert the player's attention. In the 22nd control example, the maximum time (5 seconds from the start of the second round) until the operation of the switching member 65h ends is set for the distracting effect. This can suppress the malfunction of determining whether the jackpot is A or B based on the notification time.

The remaining ball timer flag 203vn is a flag indicating that the opening and closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 was closed in one round. When this remaining ball timer flag 203vn is set to on, it indicates that the opening and closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 was set from an open state to a closed state in one round. When this remaining ball timer flag 203vn is set to on, the remaining ball timer 203vo described below is updated by incrementing by one (see F1264 in FIG. 715). The remaining ball timer 203vo is a counter for determining the time since the opening and closing door 65f1 was closed, and is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203vo is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed when the opening and closing door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is closed after the end of a preset round. In this 22nd control example, the time required for the game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 81 to be discharged is 2 seconds, and in this 22nd control example, a counter value corresponding to 3 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203vo. Based on the fact that the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203vo (3 seconds in this 22nd control example) has been reached, a determination is made as to whether the number of winning balls in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of balls discharged match (F1267 in FIG. 715). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notice is issued to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game balls are jammed in the first variable winning device 65. This prevents the fraudulent practice of leaving a game ball inside the first variable winning device 65 and then causing it to reach the switching member 65h earlier than it actually does by applying an impact or the like at the start of the second round, causing the game ball to pass through the guaranteed win switch 65e3 even in the event of a jackpot B.

If the number of winning balls and the number of balls dispensed do not match, a dedicated flag may be set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the special probability setting flag 203vh may not be set to ON even if the game ball passes through the special probability switch 65e3. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the special probability game state from being improperly granted.

The special chance valid flag 203vp is a flag for determining whether or not the passage of a game ball that passes through the special chance switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is set to off is to be considered valid. When this special chance valid flag 203vp is set to on, it indicates that the time required for the game ball that has flowed into the special outlet 65e2 (see FIG. 671(a)) to pass through the special chance switch 65e3 is less than the time required for the game ball to pass through the special chance switch 65e3 based on the flow path solenoid 65k being on. In other words, the period during which the special chance valid flag 203vp is on indicates that it is normal for the game ball to pass through the special chance switch 65e3.

The special chance valid timer 203vr is a counter for counting the time since the special chance valid flag 203vp described above is set to on. This special chance valid timer 203vr makes it possible to determine (measure) the period required for a ball to pass normally through the special chance switch 65e3 after the flow path solenoid 65k is turned off. In this 22nd control example, it takes one second for a game ball that has entered the special outlet 65e2 to pass through the special chance switch 65e3. The upper limit of the special chance valid timer 203vr is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds, and even if the ball passes through the special chance switch 65e3 after that, it is determined to be illegal and is not determined to have passed.

This makes it possible to prevent damage caused by fraud, such as illegally putting a game ball into the special outlet 65e2 without the switching member 65h guiding it to the special outlet 65e2, causing the game ball to pass through the special switch 65e3, or pushing the game ball up from below the special switch 65e3 with a piano wire or the like, or causing the magnetic sensor to erroneously detect that the game ball has passed through using radio waves or the like.

The discharged ball number counter 203vs is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed the discharge confirmation switch 65e4 (see FIG. 671(a)) in one round. This discharged ball number counter 203vs is reset to an initial value of 0 after the number of game balls that have won in the first variable winning device 65 and the number of balls discharged have been determined (F1271 in FIG. 715).

The time-saving counter 203vt is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol changes remaining in the time-saving game state. This time-saving counter 203vt is set to 100 if the high probability setting flag is off when the jackpot game ends. In other words, in this 22nd control example, if the high probability game state is not set after the jackpot game, the game transitions to a time-saving game state of 100 times.

The probability change counter 203vu is a counter for counting the number of times the special symbol changes remaining in the probability change game state. This probability change counter 203vu is set to 120 if the probability change setting flag is on when the jackpot game ends. In other words, in this 22nd control example, if the probability change game state is set after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a probability change game state of 120 times.

Other memory area 203vz stores other data necessary for play, counters, flags, etc.

Returning to FIG. 687, we will continue the explanation. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (speaker 308, etc.) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (illumination section 29-33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

As shown in FIG. 687, an input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22A (performance button 22, selection button 600), and a group of drive motors. The group of drive motors includes a motor 771 for a sword role, motors 773 and 774 for change roles, and other motors.

Each of the motors mentioned above is composed of a stepping motor and a motor driver, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 outputs operation commands (commands that can specify the operation (rotation) speed (pps), the number of operation steps, and the operation (rotation) direction) that set the operation contents for each motor driver. The motor operation commands output from this voice lamp control device 113 are set by referring to the contents specified in the operation scenario table 222vf stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by commands (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22A, and when the frame button 22A is operated by the player, instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the rear image refers to an image displayed on the rear side of the third symbol, which is the main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 according to commands sent from this voice and lamp control device 113.

When the frame button 22A is operated by the player, a device drive command may be sent to the other device 228 to drive a device for effects (not shown), a voice output command may be set to cause the voice output device 226 to output a sound corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22A, or a lamp output command may be set to cause the lamp display device 227 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the operation content on the frame button 22A.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

Here, we will explain the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 22nd control example. As shown in FIG. 693(a), the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222va, a reserve change performance lottery table 222vb, a reserve color selection table 222vc, a reserve change scenario selection table 222vd, a shutter closing reach selection table 222ve, and an operation scenario table 222vf.

In the variation pattern selection table 222va, the variation patterns of each variation pattern type (complete miss, reach miss, various reaches, etc.) are set in a counter value for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/lose judgment result, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to general information such as the variation time and variation pattern type. This prevents the same variation display mode from being displayed frequently, and suppresses the problem of players getting bored early on.

In the variation pattern selection table 222va, the variation patterns of each variation pattern type (complete miss, reach miss, various reaches, etc.) are set in a counter value for variation pattern selection (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the win/lose judgment result, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to general information such as the variation time and variation pattern type. This prevents the same variation display mode from being displayed frequently, and suppresses the problem of players getting bored early on.

The hold change performance selection table 222vb sets the hold change performance mode (not executed, single hold change performance, composite hold change performance) for each counter value of the first performance counter 223vf. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command for a special symbol from the main control device 110, it determines whether or not to execute a hold change performance for the hold symbol corresponding to the winning information based on this hold change performance selection table 222vb.

Here, the contents of the reserve change performance selection table 222vb will be described with reference to FIG. 694(a). FIG. 694(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserve change performance selection table 222vb. As shown in FIG. 694(a), in this 22nd control example, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute a reserve change performance for the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning command for the special symbol received from the main control device 110 based on the counter value of the first performance counter 223vf.

The value of the first effect counter 223vf is defined as "Do not execute hold change effect" in the range of "0 to 29", as "Single hold change effect" in the range of "30 to 89", and as "Composite hold change effect" in the range of "90 to 98".

The single reserve change effect is an effect in which, when a winning command for a special symbol is received from the main control device 110, the reserve color at the start of displaying the reserved symbol is displayed in the reserve color determined from the reserve color selection table 222vc. Note that, if the reserve change effect is not executed, the reserve color is set to "white."

The composite reserve change effect is a reserve change effect that uses multiple reserve symbols, and changes the reserve colors of the multiple reserve symbols that are displayed when the special symbol starts to change based on a preset reserve change scenario.

Returning to Figure 693 (a), we will continue the explanation. In the reserved color selection table 222vc, reserved colors are set for the counter values of the second effect counter 223vg. This reserved color selection table 222vc is a table that is referenced to determine the color of the reserved pattern that corresponds to the winning command received from the main control device 110 when a single reserved change effect is executed (see F2559 in Figure 722).

Now, with reference to FIG. 694(b), the contents of the reserved color selection table 222vc will be described. FIG. 694(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserved color selection table 222vc. As shown in FIG. 694(b), in this 22nd control example, the reserved color of the reserved pattern is determined based on the result of the win/lose determination and the counter value of the second performance counter 223vg.

When the result of the hit/miss judgment is "hit", the reserved color "white" is specified to correspond to the range of the second performance counter 223vg from "0 to 29", the reserved color "blue" is specified to correspond to the range of "30 to 59", the reserved color "yellow" is specified to correspond to the range of "60 to 89", the reserved color "purple" is specified to correspond to the range of "90 to 119", the reserved color "green" is specified to correspond to the range of "120 to 179", the reserved color "red" is specified to correspond to the range of "180 to 194", and the reserved color "rainbow" is specified to correspond to the range of "195 to 198". When the result of the hit/miss judgment is "hit", the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is set to on regardless of which reserved color is selected, and information indicating "hit reserved" is stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl.

The hold effect information storage area 223vl is provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, and stores hold effect information for executing hold change effects for the hold pattern.

The reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is a flag for preventing a new reserved performance for other reserved patterns from being set during the period when the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved performance is displayed. As described above, in this 22nd control example, a reserved performance is executed that combines the reserved color of the target reserved pattern with the reserved colors of the reserved patterns before and after it (see Figs. 672 to 677). In this reserved performance, the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 move according to an operation scenario corresponding to a predetermined reserved change scenario. For example, if a different reserved change scenario is set for the reserved pattern next to the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved performance, the execution timing of the reserved change performance may overlap, and there is a risk of giving incorrect game information to the player. In order to prevent this, a new reserved change performance is not executed during the period when the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is on.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss judgment is "miss", the reserve color "white" is associated with the range of the second performance counter 223vg from "0 to 49", the reserve color "blue" is associated with the range of "50 to 149", the reserve color "yellow" is associated with the range of "150 to 174", the reserve color "purple" is associated with the range of "175 to 194", the reserve color "green" is associated with the range of "195 to 197", and the reserve color "red" is associated with the range of "198". If the result of the hit/miss judgment is "miss", regardless of which reserve color is selected, the reserve performance restriction flag 223vm is set to off, and the reserve color information corresponding to the selected reserve color is stored in the reserve performance information storage area 223vl.

As shown in FIG. 694(b), when the result of the win/loss judgment is a "win," there is a greater range in which the reserved colors "green" and "red" can be selected than when the result of the win/loss judgment is a "miss," and "rainbow" can also be selected. In this way, by setting reserved colors that are likely to be selected when the result of the win/loss judgment is a "win" and when it is a "miss," the player can predict the result of the win/loss judgment based on the reserved color of the displayed reserved pattern.

In this 22nd control example, seven reserved colors are used, but this is not limited to this and six or fewer colors or eight or more colors are also acceptable.

Returning to FIG. 693(a), we will continue the explanation. The reserve change scenario selection table 222vd is a table that is referenced when a composite reserve change presentation is executed to determine the reserve presentation information, such as the reserve color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the winning command received from the main control device 110 and the reserve change scenario, based on the win/lose determination result, the previous reserve color, and the value of the second presentation counter 223vg.

Here, the contents of the reserved change scenario selection table 222vd will be described with reference to FIG. 695. FIG. 695 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the reserved change scenario selection table 222vd. As shown in FIG. 695, the reserved change scenario selection table 222vd determines the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the received winning command based on the winning/losing judgment result included in the winning command received from the main control device 110, the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the previous winning command, and the value of the second performance counter 223vg, and sets whether or not to turn on the reserved change performance restriction flag 223sm and the later reserved setting flag 223vn. In addition, the reserved change scenario is set, and information for executing a performance in which the reserved color changes at a predetermined timing during the period until the fluctuation of the special pattern based on the reserved pattern begins is stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl.

The later hold setting flag 223vn is provided in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a flag for forcibly determining the hold color of the hold pattern corresponding to the next received winning command when a hold change scenario of the composite hold change performance is set. It is turned on (see F2605 in FIG. 723) when a specific hold change scenario is determined in the composite hold change performance setting process 22 (see F2517 in FIG. 723), and is turned off when the hold color of the next received winning command is determined (see F2553 in FIG. 722).

Returning to FIG. 695, the explanation will continue. If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the reserved pattern one before is "white", and the value of the second performance counter 223vg is in the range of "0 to 49", "purple" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color is "purple" and the reserved change scenario is "reserved change scenario 1" is stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl. In the reserved change scenario 1, since the reserved color of the reserved pattern one before the reserved color "purple" of the target reserved pattern is "white", when the reserved pattern one before is hidden by the left change role Ym1, no color is transferred and the reserved color of the reserved pattern does not change. In this case, the reserved color is not specified for the next received winning command, so the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains in the OFF state.

In this 22nd control example, when the "white" reserved symbol is hidden, the reserved color of the reserved symbol does not change, but this is not limited to this, and the reserved symbol to be changed may be the only one to perform the reserved change effect.

If the result of the win/loss judgment is "win" and the reserved color of the reserved pattern one before is "white", and the value of the second performance counter 223vg is in the range of "50 to 89", "purple" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "purple" and the reserved change scenario "reserved change scenario 2" are stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl. In the reserved change scenario 2, since the reserved color of the reserved pattern one before the reserved color "purple" of the target reserved pattern is "white", when the target reserved pattern is hidden by the right change role Ym1, "blue" is transplanted from the target reserved pattern "purple" to the reserved pattern one before, and the target reserved pattern changes to "red" and the reserved pattern one before to "blue". In this case, the reserved color is not specified for the next winning command received, so the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains off.

In this way, the reserved symbol hidden by the change device Ym1, Ym2 can be changed to a display mode that has a high probability of winning a jackpot, providing the player with an unexpected presentation.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "white", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "90 to 198", "blue" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "blue" is stored in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl, the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is "yellow", and the reserved change scenario is "reserved change scenario 3". The reserved change scenario 3 is a scenario in which the reserved color "yellow" of the next reserved symbol is transplanted to the reserved color "blue" of the target reserved symbol, the target reserved symbol is changed to "green", and the reserved color of the next reserved symbol is changed from "yellow" to "white". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified to "yellow", the later reserved setting flag 223vn is set to ON.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 69", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "yellow", and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "yellow" and the reserved change scenario "reserved change scenario 4" are stored in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. The reserved color "yellow" of the target reserved symbol is transferred to the reserved color "yellow" of the previous reserved symbol, the previous reserved symbol is changed to "white", and the reserved color of the target reserved symbol is changed from "yellow" to "green". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn is maintained in the OFF state.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "70 to 149", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "white", and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "white", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is stored as "purple", and the reserved change scenario "reserved change scenario 5" is stored in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. The reserved color "white" of the target reserved symbol is transferred from the reserved color "purple" of the next reserved symbol to "red", the target reserved symbol is changed to "red", and the reserved color of the next reserved symbol is changed from "purple" to "blue". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "purple", the later reserved setting flag 223vn is set to ON.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "150-198", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "yellow", and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "yellow" is stored in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl, the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is "red", and the reserved change scenario is "reserved change scenario 6". In the reserved change scenario 6, the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol, "blue", and the reserved color of the next reserved symbol, "red", are transplanted to the reserved color "yellow" of the target reserved symbol, the target reserved symbol is changed to "rainbow", the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is changed from "blue" to "white", and the reserved color of the next reserved symbol is changed from "red" to "white". In this case, the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "red," so the later reserved setting flag 223vn is set to on.

In this way, even if a reserved pattern (red reserved pattern) with a display mode that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot is displayed, it can be transplanted to another reserved pattern to become a reserved pattern (rainbow reserved pattern) with an even higher expectation of winning a jackpot. Even if a reserved pattern with a display mode that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot is displayed first, it is not known which reserved pattern it will be transplanted to until the reserve change performance is executed, so it is possible to prevent lottery games based on reserved balls acquired before the reserved pattern with a display mode that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot from becoming a meaningless game.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "yellow" and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 149", "blue" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "blue" and the reserved change scenario "reserved change scenario 7" are stored in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. The reserved color "yellow" of the previous reserved symbol is transplanted to the reserved color "blue" of the target reserved symbol, the previous reserved symbol is changed to "white", and the reserved color of the target reserved symbol is changed to "green". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is not specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn is maintained in the OFF state.

If the result of the win/loss judgment is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "yellow" and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "150 to 198", "blue" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "blue" is stored in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl, the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the next winning command is "red", and the reserved change scenario is "reserved change scenario 8". The reserved change scenario 8 is a scenario in which the reserved color "blue" of the target reserved pattern is transplanted with the reserved color of the next reserved pattern, "red", and the target reserved pattern is changed to "purple", and the reserved color of the next reserved pattern is changed to "white". In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the next winning command is specified to "red", the later reserved setting flag 223vn is set to ON.

As mentioned above, in this 22nd control example, the reserved color "red" is a display mode that has a higher expectation of winning a jackpot than the reserved color "purple," and there is a risk that if the display mode of the reserved pattern is changed to a lower display mode and then a loss is notified, this may severely reduce the player's motivation to play. However, in this 22nd control example, the display mode can be changed to a lower display mode only in the event of a jackpot win. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an element of surprise.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the reserved symbol one before is "purple" and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 99", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "white" and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "white" and the reserved change scenario "reserved change scenario 9" are stored in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In the reserved change scenario 9, "red" is transferred from the reserved color "purple" of the reserved symbol one before to the reserved color "white" of the target reserved symbol, and the reserved color of the target reserved symbol changes to "red" and the reserved color of the reserved symbol one before changes to "blue". In this case, the reserved color is not specified for the next received winning command, so the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains OFF.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "purple" and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "100-149", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "white" and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color is stored as "white" in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl, and the reserved change scenario is stored as "reserved change scenario 10". Reserve change scenario 10 is a scenario in which the reserved color "white" of the target reserved symbol is changed independently to "green". In this case, the reserved color is not specified for the next received winning command, so the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains OFF.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "purple" and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "150 to 198", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "green" and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to off. Also, "green" is stored as the reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the reserved change scenario is not set, and since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains off.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "win" and the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is "blue", and the value of the second performance counter 223vg is "0 to 198", "yellow" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved color "yellow" is stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl, the reserved color of the reserved pattern corresponding to the next winning command is "blue", and the reserved change scenario is "reserved change scenario 11". In the reserved change scenario 11, the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern "red" and the reserved color of the next reserved pattern "blue" are transplanted to the reserved color "yellow" of the target reserved pattern, the target reserved pattern is changed to "rainbow", the reserved color of the previous reserved pattern is changed from "red" to "white", and the reserved color of the next reserved pattern is changed from "blue" to "white". In this case, the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "blue," so the later reserved setting flag 223vn is set to on.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "white", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 149", "white" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to off. Also, "white" is stored as the reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the reserved change scenario is not set, and since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains off.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "white", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "150-198", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "blue", and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved effect information storage area 223vl stores "blue" as the reserved color, "yellow" as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command, and "reserved change scenario 3" as the reserved change scenario. In this case, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command is specified as "yellow", the next reserved setting flag 223vn is set to ON.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 169", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "white", and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to off. Also, "white" is stored as the reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the reserved change scenario is not set, and since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains off.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "blue", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "170-198", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "yellow", and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved effect information storage area 223vl stores "yellow" as the reserved color and "reserved change scenario 4" as the reserved change scenario. In addition, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains OFF.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "yellow", and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 169", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "white", and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to off. Also, "white" is stored as the reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the reserved change scenario is not set, and since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains off.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "yellow" and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "170-198", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "blue" and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved effect information storage area 223vl stores "blue" as the reserved color and "reserved change scenario 7" as the reserved change scenario. In addition, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains OFF.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "purple" and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 129", "white" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to off. Also, "white" is stored as the reserved color in the reserved effect information storage area 223vl. In this case, the reserved change scenario is not set, and since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains off.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is "purple" and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "130 to 198", the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is determined to be "white" and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to ON. In addition, the reserved effect information storage area 223vl stores "white" as the reserved color and "reserved change scenario 9" as the reserved change scenario. In addition, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains OFF.

If the result of the win/loss determination is "miss" and the reserved color of the previous reserved symbol is other than "white, blue, yellow, purple," and the value of the second effect counter 223vg is "0 to 198," "white" is determined as the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command, and the reserved effect restriction flag 223vm is set to off. In addition, the reserved effect information storage area 223vl stores "white" as the reserved color and "reserved change scenario 8" as the reserved change scenario. In addition, since the reserved color of the reserved symbol corresponding to the next winning command has not been specified, the later reserved setting flag 223vn remains off.

In this way, in this 22nd control example, the reserved symbols acquired after the reserved change scenario of the reserved change presentation is set can also be incorporated as part of the reserved change presentation, and since there are patterns in which the reserved color of the target reserved symbol changes when the next reserved symbol is acquired, the player can be made to look forward to the reserved color changing, which can encourage the player to try to acquire the reserved symbol.

Returning to FIG. 693(a), we will continue the explanation. The shutter closing reach selection table 222ve is a table that is referenced to set the presentation mode of the "shutter closing reach" that is executed as one of the variable presentations of the special pattern in this 22nd control example. The contents of the shutter closing reach are as described above.

Now, referring to FIG. 696, the contents of the shutter closing reach selection table 222ve will be explained. FIG. 696 is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the shutter closing reach selection table 222ve. This shutter closing reach selection table 222ve determines the presentation mode based on the result of the win/loss determination of the special pattern during the fluctuation, the type of win, and the value of the first presentation counter 223vf.

When the result of the hit/miss determination is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot A", if the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "0 to 149", "closed reach 1" is determined. In closed reach 1, the "2" symbol is set as the initial symbol, and the symbol increases by 1 each time the shutter closes. Therefore, when the final stage (sixth stage) is reached, three "7" symbols are displayed in a line.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss determination is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot B, C," and the value of the first effect counter 223vf is "0 to 149," then "closed reach 4" is determined. In closed reach 4, the "3" symbol is set as the initial symbol, and the symbol increases by 1 each time the shutter closes. Therefore, when the final stage (sixth stage) is reached, three "8" symbols are displayed in a line.

In this 22nd control example, three "7" symbols are displayed only when the winning type is jackpot A, and three symbols other than the "7" symbols are displayed when the winning type is jackpot B or C. In this 22nd control example, since jackpot A has more rounds of jackpot play than jackpot B or C, it is more advantageous for the player to have three "7" symbols in a shutter closing reach than to have other symbols displayed. In this way, in the shutter closing reach, the player can predict the winning type based on the type of symbol set as the initial symbol, which can increase the interest of the game.

When the result of the hit/miss determination is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot A", if the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "150 to 174", "closed reach 2" is determined. In closed reach 2, the "3" symbol is set as the initial symbol, and the symbol increases by one each time the shutter is closed. Therefore, when the final stage (sixth stage) is reached, three "8" symbols are displayed. However, in closed reach 2, a "HOLD" capsule is given when the third stage is reached. This "HOLD" capsule is used when the fifth stage is reached as described above, and the symbol displayed at the time of reaching the fifth stage (in this case, the "7" symbol) is maintained until the sixth stage is reached. Therefore, in closed reach 2, although the "3" symbol is set as the initial symbol, three "7" symbols are displayed when the final stage is reached.

In addition, if the hit/miss judgment result is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot A", and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "175 to 198", "closed reach 3" is determined. In closed reach 3, the "3" symbol is set as the initial symbol, and the symbol increases by one each time the shutter is closed. Therefore, when the final stage (sixth stage) is reached, three "8" symbols are displayed. However, in closed reach 3, a "key" capsule is given when the third stage is reached. If this "key" capsule is given, a performance is executed in which the shutter is completely opened at the fifth stage. Therefore, the symbol (in this case, "7" symbol) displayed at the time of reaching the fifth stage is displayed in a three-part state. Therefore, in closed reach 3, although the "3" symbol is set as the initial symbol, three "7" symbols are displayed.

In addition, if the hit/miss determination result is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot B, C," and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "150 to 174," then "closed reach 5" is determined. Although the "2" symbol is set as the initial symbol for closed reach 5, the symbol remains unchanged at "5" from the fourth stage until the sixth stage is reached. Therefore, when the sixth stage is reached, three "5" symbols are displayed.

When the result of the hit/miss determination is "hit" and the hit type is "jackpot B, C", if the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "175 to 198", "closed reach 6" is determined. In closed reach 6, the "2" symbol is set as the initial symbol, and the symbol increases by one each time the shutter is closed. Therefore, when the final stage (sixth stage) is reached, three "7" symbols are displayed in a line, but as with closed reach 3, a "key" capsule is given when the third stage is reached, and a performance is executed in which the shutter is completely opened in the fifth stage. Therefore, three symbols ("6" symbols in this case) displayed at the time of reaching the fifth stage are displayed in a line. Therefore, in closed reach 6, although the "2" symbol is set as the initial symbol, three "6" symbols are displayed in a line. Note that the contents of the capsules given in closed reaches 2, 3, and 6 are not known to the player until the fifth stage is reached.

If the win/loss determination result is "miss" and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "0 to 99", "Closed Reach 7" is determined. In Closed Reach 7, the initial symbol is set to a "2" symbol or a "3" symbol, and the symbol becomes larger when the shutter closes. However, when moving from the second stage to the third stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the performance ends.

If the win/loss determination result is "miss" and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "100 to 159", "Closed Reach 8" is determined. In Closed Reach 8, the initial symbol is set to a "2" symbol or a "3" symbol, and the symbol becomes larger when the shutter closes. However, when moving from the third stage to the fourth stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the performance ends. In addition, when the third stage is reached, a performance indicating capsule grant failure is executed.

If the win/loss determination result is "miss" and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "160-169", "Closed Reach 9" is determined. In Closed Reach 9, the initial symbol is set to "2" or "3", and the symbol becomes larger when the shutter closes. However, when moving from the fourth stage to the fifth stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the performance ends.

If the win/loss determination result is "miss" and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "170-179", "Closed Reach 10" is determined. In Closed Reach 10, the initial symbol is set to "2" or "3", and the symbol becomes larger when the shutter closes. However, when moving from the fifth stage to the sixth stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the performance ends.

If the win/loss determination result is "miss" and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "180-189", "Closed Reach 11" is determined. In Closed Reach 11, the "2" symbol is set as the initial symbol, and the symbol becomes larger when the shutter closes. However, when moving from the 5th stage to the 6th stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the performance ends. Also, when moving from the 4th stage to the 5th stage, the "5" symbol is not updated.

If the result of the hit/miss determination is "miss" and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "190-194", then "Closed Reach 12" is determined. For Closed Reach 12, the "3" symbol is set as the initial symbol, and the symbol becomes larger when the shutter closes. However, when moving from the fifth stage to the sixth stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the performance ends. Also, when the third stage is reached, a "HOLD" capsule is given, and although it is used in the fifth stage, the sixth stage is not reached, so the display mode announcing a jackpot win is not displayed.

If the win/loss determination result is "miss" and the value of the first performance counter 223vf is "195-198", then "Closed Reach 13" is determined. For Closed Reach 13, the "2" symbol is set as the initial symbol, and the symbol becomes larger when the shutter closes. However, when moving from the fifth stage to the sixth stage, a display mode indicating failure is displayed, and the performance ends. Also, a "key" capsule is given when the third stage is reached, and although it is used in the fifth stage, a performance in which the key does not fit is executed, and a performance in which the shutter is completely opened is not executed, so a display mode announcing a jackpot win is not displayed.

In this way, in the shutter closing reach of this 22nd control example, the player is made interested not only in whether or not he can reach the final stage, but also in the type of initial pattern when the shutter closing reach begins, whether or not a capsule will be awarded in the third stage, and whether or not the patterns will not be updated even as the stages progress, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored early on.

Returning to Figure 693 (a), we will continue the explanation. The operation scenario table 222vf is a table for setting the operation scenarios of the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2. The operation scenario type is set to an operation scenario corresponding to the hold change scenario that is set when a composite hold change performance is executed in the hold performance execution process 22 at the start of fluctuation (see F3109 in Figure 730) described later.

Now, the contents of the operation scenario table 222vf will be explained with reference to FIG. 697. FIG. 697 is a schematic diagram showing the prescribed contents of the operation scenario table 222vf. In this operation scenario table 222vf, operation patterns are prescribed for each operation scenario type.

Operation scenario 1 is an operation scenario used when a reserve change performance is executed with the second reserve hr2 (see FIG. 672(a)) as the change target. As the first operation, the left change role Ym1 rises from the initial position to hide the first reserve hr1, and the right change role Ym2 rises from the initial position to hide the fourth reserve hr4, and only the second reserve hr2 and the third reserve hr3 are displayed (see FIG. 672(b)). Then, as the second operation, the right change role Ym2 moves to the left to hide the third reserve hr3 (see FIG. 673(a)). At this time, in the display area HR2 of the third pattern display device 81, a performance is executed in which the reserved color of the third reserve hr3 is transplanted to the second reserve hr2 based on the reserve change scenario. Then, as the third operation, the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 descend from the second operation position and return to the initial position.

Operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario used when a reserve change performance is executed with the third reserve hr3 (see FIG. 672(a)) as the change target. As the first operation, the left change role Ym1 rises from the initial position to hide the first reserve hr1, and the right change role Ym2 rises from the initial position to hide the fourth reserve hr4, and only the second reserve hr2 and the third reserve hr3 are displayed (see FIG. 672(b)). Then, as the second operation, the left change role Ym1 moves to the right to hide the second reserve hr2 (see FIG. 675(a)). At this time, in the display area HR2 of the third pattern display device 81, a performance is executed in which the reserve color of the second reserve hr2 is transplanted to the third reserve hr3 based on the reserve change scenario. Then, as the third operation, the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 descend from the second operation position and return to the initial position.

Operation scenario 3 is an operation scenario used when a reserve change performance is executed with the second reserve hr2 (see FIG. 672(a)) as the change target. As a first operation, the left change role Ym1 rises from the initial position, and the right change role Ym2 rises from the initial position to hide the fourth reserve hr4, and the first reserve hr1, the second reserve hr2, and the third reserve hr3 are displayed (not shown). Then, as a second operation, the left change role Ym1 moves to the right to hide the first reserve hr1, and the right change role Ym2 moves to the left to hide the third reserve hr3 (not shown). At this time, in the display area HR2 of the third pattern display device 81, a performance is executed in which the reserved colors of the first reserve hr1 and the third reserve hr3 are transplanted to the second reserve hr2 based on the reserve change scenario. Then, as the third operation, the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 descend from the second operation position and return to their initial positions.

In this way, in this 22nd control example, the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 are moved in an operation pattern corresponding to the reserve change scenario, so that a reserve change performance can be executed in which the third pattern display device 81, the left change role Ym1, and the right change role Ym2 are linked. When the reserve change performance is executed, the reserved patterns that change depending on the operation pattern of the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 change, so it is possible to get the player interested in the operation pattern of the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2.

Next, referring to FIG. 687(b), the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. As shown in FIG. 687(b), the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a winning information storage area 223va, a special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb, a special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223vc, a fluctuation start flag 223vd, a stop type selection flag 223ve, a first performance counter 223vf, a second performance counter 223vg, a slave state storage area 223vh, an adjustment device in operation flag 223vi, a limit timer 223vj, an environmental information storage area 223vk, a reserved performance At least an information storage area 223vl, a pending performance limit flag 223vm, a later pending setting flag 223vn, a performance SW effective time memory area 223vp, a time-saving counter 223vq, a sure-win counter 223sr, a V performance execution flag 223vs, a V winning flag 223vt, a V notification flag 223vu, a movie in progress flag 223vv, a shaking standby flag 223vw, an adjustment period flag 223vx, an elapsed timer 223vy, and a miscellaneous memory area 223vz are provided. Details of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this 22nd control example are described below.

The winning information storage area 223va has one execution area and four areas (area 1 to area 4), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. The information stored in this winning information storage area 223a allows the audio lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery results for reserved balls, etc., before the balls start to change.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb, like the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203vd of the main control unit 110, is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable performance (variable display) performed by the first pattern display unit 37 (and the third pattern display unit 81) that is reserved in the main control unit 110. In other words, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special pattern is set based on the reserved ball count command output from the main control unit 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203vd stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls for the first special pattern with the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is increased by a ball entering the first winning port 64, or when the variable display of a special pattern is executed in the main control unit 110 and the number of reserved balls is decreased, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd after the increase or decrease is sent to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203vd of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball count command and stores it in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb (see F2210 in FIG. 718). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb according to the reserved ball count command sent from the main control device 110, so that it can update its value in synchronization with the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203vd of the main control device 110.

The value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb is used to display the reserved ball count pattern on the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball count command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball count indicated by the command in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb, and transmits a display reserved ball count command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of an image so that the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, i.e., the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the display area HR4 of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb is changed in synchronization with the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203sa of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special pattern reserved ball number counter 203sa of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable display is pending.

The special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 223vc differs from the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb only in that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special pattern is stored based on a reserved ball count command output from the main control unit 110, so a detailed explanation of this will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223vd is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see F2204 in FIG. 718), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set (see F2907 in FIG. 728). When the fluctuation start flag 223vd is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (F2102) of the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223ve is turned on when a stop type command sent from the main control unit 110 is received (see F2207 in FIG. 718), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see F2912 in FIG. 728). When the stop type selection flag 223ve is turned on, the stop type is set as is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

The first effect counter 223vf is a counter used for preview effects and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown in the figure, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

The second effect counter 223vg is a counter used to set the color of the reserved pattern (reserved color) in the reserved change effect of this 22nd control example. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown in the figure, it is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The slave state storage area 223vh has a current state area in which the game state corresponding to the information indicated by the state command sent from the master control device 110 is stored, and a previous state area in which the game state previously stored in the current state area is stored. The currently set game state can be determined by the voice lamp control device 113 based on the game state stored in this current state area.

The adjustment feature movable flag 223vi is turned on when the sword feature Ym3 (adjustment feature) is moved to the environment adjustment position (see F3308 in FIG. 732), and is turned off when the display of the special symbol starts (see F2903 in FIG. 728). By setting this adjustment feature movable flag 223vi to on, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine that the sword feature Ym3 is in the environment adjustment position. As a result, when the special symbol starts to change while the sword feature Ym3 is in the environment adjustment position, a process is executed to move the sword feature Ym3 to the initial position, and it is possible to prevent the display of the special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 from being difficult to see due to the sword feature Ym3 in the environment adjustment position.

The limit timer 223vj is a timer for limiting the movement of the sword role object Ym3 for a certain period of time (10 seconds in this 22nd control example) when the sword role object Ym3 (adjustment role object) is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position. The timer value is set when an operation scenario for moving the sword role object Ym3 to the initial position is set (see F2906 in FIG. 727 and F3507 in FIG. 734), and the timer value is updated by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed. If the value of this limit timer 223vj is 0 seconds or more, the performance mode that operates the sword role object Ym3 is excluded from the candidates of performance modes that can be determined when setting the variable performance of the special pattern (see F3009 in FIG. 728).

In this way, when the sword role object Ym3 is moved from the environment adjustment position to the initial position, the movement of the sword role object Ym3 is limited for a certain period of time, thereby reducing the load caused by the sword role object Ym3 moving frequently.

The environmental information storage area 223vk is an area for storing environmental information adjusted by the player through operation of the volume control button or light control button. The environmental information stored in this environmental information storage area 223vk is updated in response to the button operation performed by the player (see F3311 in FIG. 731), making it possible to provide a gaming environment that matches the player's preferences.

The reserved performance information storage area 223vl is an area for storing information regarding the color of each reserved symbol in the reserved performance and the reserved change scenario. When a winning command is received from the main control device 110, the reserved performance information corresponding to the winning command is determined and stored in this reserved performance information storage area 223vl.

As described above, the reserved effect information storage area 223vl stores reserved effect information for executing reserved change effects on reserved symbols.

The reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is a flag for preventing a new reserved performance for other reserved patterns from being set during the period when the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved performance is displayed. As described above, in this 22nd control example, a reserved performance is executed that combines the reserved color of the target reserved pattern with the reserved colors of the reserved patterns before and after it (see Figs. 672 to 677). In this reserved performance, the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 move according to an operation scenario corresponding to a predetermined reserved change scenario. For example, if a different reserved change scenario is set for the reserved pattern next to the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved performance, the execution timing of the reserved change performance may overlap, and there is a risk of giving incorrect game information to the player. In order to prevent this, a new reserved change performance is not executed during the period when the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is on.

As described above, the later hold setting flag 223vn is a flag for forcibly determining the hold color of the hold pattern corresponding to the next received winning command when a hold change scenario for the composite hold change presentation is set. It is turned on (see F2605 in FIG. 723) when a specific hold change scenario is determined in the composite hold change presentation setting process 22 (see F2517 in FIG. 723), and is turned off when the hold color of the next received winning command is determined (see F2553 in FIG. 722).

The effect SW valid time memory area 223vp is a memory area that stores the period during which the effect button 22 is determined to be valid. In this 22nd control example, when a performance mode for indicating the result of a special pattern lottery is set, setting information for the operation valid period corresponding to the performance pattern is stored in this effect SW valid time memory area 223vp (see F3106 in FIG. 729).

The time-saving counter 223vq is a counter for measuring the period during which the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set, and is set to a predetermined value ("100" or "120" in this 22nd control example) when the high probability state of normal symbols is set (after the end of a jackpot game). When a special symbol variation is executed while the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the time-saving counter 223vq becomes "0", it is determined that a transition has occurred to a low probability state of normal symbols. In addition, the detailed period during the high probability state of normal symbols is determined based on the value of the time-saving counter 223vq.

The high probability counter 223sr is a counter for measuring the duration of the high probability state, and when it is determined in the state command receiving process 22 (see F2202 in FIG. 719) that the game state has transitioned to the high probability state (F2308 in FIG. 719: Yes), the counter value is set to "120" (see F673 in FIG. 719). When a special symbol variation is executed while the value of the high probability counter 223sr is 1 or more, the value is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the high probability counter 223sr becomes "0", it is determined that a transition has occurred to a low probability state of the special symbol. Also, the system is configured to determine the detailed period of the high probability state of the special symbol based on the value of the high probability counter 223sr.

When a jackpot start command is received from the main control device 110, the V performance execution flag 223vs is turned on if the jackpot type information included in the jackpot start command is jackpot A (see F2706 in FIG. 725), and is turned off when a V winning command is received (see F2406 in FIG. 720). When this V performance execution flag 223vs is on, a V performance is executed in a specific round (the second round in this 22nd control example) during the jackpot game. The V winning command is a command to notify that the ball has flowed down a specific area (V gate) 65v.

The V winning flag 223vt is turned on when a V winning command is received from the main control unit 110 (see F2404 in FIG. 720), and is turned off in the ending process 22 (see F2802 in FIG. 726). This V winning flag 223vt is a flag that allows the sound lamp control unit 113 to determine that the game ball has passed through a specific area (V gate) 65V arranged in the variable winning device 65, and can switch the display mode for the latter half of the ending performance depending on whether the game ball has passed through (V gate) 65V during the execution of the V performance or not.

The V notification flag 223vu is turned on when a V winning command is received from the main control unit 110 and a display command for notifying a V winning is set (see F2408 in FIG. 720), and is turned off when a state command for changing the game state to a special state is received from the main control unit 110 (see F2311 in FIG. 719).

The movie in progress flag 223vv is turned on when the effect button 22 is operated during the effective period of the effect SW in the movie execution reach (see F3404 in FIG. 733). If this movie in progress flag 223vv is on when the movie ends, it indicates that the special symbol fluctuation time has not yet elapsed, and in that case, the display mode at the end of the movie is set to the swinging display mode until the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (see F3512 in FIG. 734).

The shaking wait flag 223vw is turned on when a shaking display mode is set during the movie execution reach from the end of the movie until the special pattern variation time has elapsed (F3513 in FIG. 734), and is turned off when a stop command is received from the main control unit 110 (see F2653 in FIG. 724). When this shaking wait flag 223vw is on and the voice lamp control unit 113 receives a stop command from the main control unit 110, a display command is set to show a display mode indicating a jackpot win (see F2652 in FIG. 724).

The adjustment period flag 223vx is turned on when the environmental information adjustment screen is displayed (see F3304 in FIG. 731). This adjustment period flag 223vx is a flag to indicate that the player is currently adjusting the volume or light intensity.

The elapsed timer 223vy is a timer that is set to display a display mode indicating the end of the environmental adjustment when a certain time (10 seconds in this 22nd control example) has elapsed since the adjustment information adjustment screen started to be displayed. The timer value of this elapsed timer 223vy is set to a timer value corresponding to when the performance button 22 or the selection button 600 is operated, and is updated by "1" each time the performance update process 22 is executed.

Other memory area 223vz also includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from main control unit 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method.

Returning to FIG. 687 for further explanation, the display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The voice lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 667). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC becomes less than 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 667) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

<Regarding control processing executed by the main control device in the 22nd control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Fig. 698 to Fig. 715. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly classified into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

As described above, in the 22nd control example, when both the lottery right for the first special symbol (special symbol 1 reserved) and the lottery right for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reserved) are stored, the lottery for the second special symbol is preferentially executed. In addition, by passing the ball through a specific area (V gate) 65V arranged in the variable winning device 65 while the jackpot game is being executed, a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, as an end condition for terminating the probability state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, in addition to the end condition that is established when the jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, an end condition that is established when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is set.

Figure 698 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (F101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (F102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the second win random number counter C4 are updated (F103). Specifically, the first win random number counter C1, the first win type counter C2, and the second win random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (999, 99, and 999, respectively, in this control example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, the special symbol change process 22 is executed (F104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and also sets the change pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81. After that, the start winning process 22 is executed in response to the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64 (start winning) or the entry of a ball into the second ball entry port 640 (start winning) (F105). Details of the special symbol change process 22 and the start winning process 22 will be described later with reference to Figs. 699 to 704.

After the start winning process 22 is executed, the normal symbol variation process 22, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (F106), and the through gate passing process 22 associated with the passage of the ball through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is executed (F107). Details of the normal symbol variation process 22 and the through gate passing process 22 will be described later with reference to Figs. 705 and 706. After the through gate passing process 22 is executed, the launch control process is executed (F108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (F109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the ball launch is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the ball launch is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 699, the special symbol change process 22 (F104), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110, will be described. FIG. 699 is a flowchart showing this special symbol change process 22 (F104). The special symbol change process 22 (see F104 in FIG. 699) performs various judgments (win/lose judgments) and determinations of the special symbols based on the acquired counter values, controls the first symbol display device 37 to be able to display the variable display in the variable display mode determined by a predetermined control, sets various commands to execute the variable display performance of the third and fourth symbols in the third symbol display device 81, and controls to stop and display in a display mode showing the judgment result (win/lose judgment result). Below, the special symbol change process 22 (see F104 in FIG. 699) will be described.

In this special symbol variation process 22 (F104), first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently being won (a jackpot game is in progress) (F201). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203vv is on. If the result of the determination is that a special symbol jackpot is currently being won (a jackpot game is in progress) (F201: Yes), this process is terminated.

In the process of F201, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in a jackpot (a jackpot game is in progress) (F201: No), it is determined whether the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (F202). If the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (F202: No), that is, if a new special symbol lottery (change) can be executed, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203sd (the number of reserved variable display times N1 based on the lottery of the first special symbol) and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203se (the number of reserved variable display times N2 based on the lottery of the second special symbol) are obtained (F203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball counter 203se is greater than 0 (F204). If the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203se is not 0 (F204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203se is decremented by 1 (F205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203se changed by the calculation is set (F206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process of the main process described later executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special pattern reserved ball number counter 203se from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball number counter 223sc of the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of F206, the data stored in the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb is shifted (F207). In the process of F207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3, and so on, and then the process proceeds to F208.

On the other hand, in the process of F204, if the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 203se is 0 (F204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203sd obtained in the process of F203 is greater than 0 (F210).

In the process of F210, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203sd is 0 (F210: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of F210, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203sd is not 0 (i.e., 1 or more) (F210: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203sd is decremented by 1 (F211), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203sd changed by the calculation is set (F212). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process described later executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203sd from the reserved ball count command and stores the extracted value in the special pattern reserved ball count counter 223sc in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of F212, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203sa is shifted (F213) using the same method as the process of F207, and the process proceeds to the process of F208. In the process of F208, which is executed after the process of F207 or F213, the special symbol jackpot determination process 22 is executed (F208), and then the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 22 is executed (F209), and then this process is terminated. Details of the special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (F208) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 22 (F209) will be described later with reference to Figs. 700 and 701.

In the process of F202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (F202: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (F214). If the change time has not elapsed (F214: No), the display of the first pattern display device 37 is updated (F215), and then this process is terminated. In the process of F215, the value of the change time counter for measuring the change time of the special pattern is updated, and the display of the first pattern display device 81 is updated to correspond to the updated value of the change time counter. A value indicating the change time corresponding to the change pattern selected in the special pattern change pattern selection process 22 (F209) is set in this change time counter at the start timing of the special pattern change, and thereafter, it is updated (subtracted) each time the process of F215 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F214 that the fluctuation time has elapsed (F214: Yes), that is, if the value of the fluctuation time counter updated in the process of F215 is 0, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is set (F216). The setting of the stopped pattern is performed in advance by the special pattern fluctuation pattern selection process 22 (F209). When this special pattern fluctuation pattern selection process 22 (F209) is executed, a lottery for a special pattern is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not a special pattern jackpot has been won is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special pattern jackpot, one of the jackpots A to E is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, if a jackpot A occurs, the blue LED in the first pattern display device 37 is turned on, if a jackpot B occurs, the red LED is turned on, if a jackpot C occurs, the green LED is turned on, and if a jackpot D occurs, the blue LED and the green LED are turned on. Also, if a miss occurs, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Note that the LEDs are turned off when the next variation display starts, but they may be turned on for only a few seconds after the variation stops.

After the process of F216 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 starts, it is determined whether the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process 22 is a special symbol jackpot (F217). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (F217: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203vw is set to ON (F218), the time reduction counter 203sh and the probability change counter 203si are cleared (set to 0) (F219), and the process proceeds to F220. When the jackpot start flag 203vw is set to ON by the process of S220, if the jackpot control process 22 (see F1004 in FIG. 710) of the main process executed by the main control device 110 is executed, the process branches to F1101: Yes and an opening command is set (F1102). As a result, the jackpot performance is started in the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of F217, if the current lottery result is a miss for the special pattern (F217: No), the processes of F218 and F219 are skipped, update process 22 is executed (F221), and then the process proceeds to F220.

The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during external output processing (F1801) of the main processing executed by MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the status command, it acquires the game status contained in the status command. This allows the status grasped by the voice lamp control device 113 to match the actual status of the pachinko machine 10. In the processing of S220, a special chart confirmation command is set (F220), and this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 700, we will explain the special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (F208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 22 (F104 in FIG. 699). FIG. 700 is a flowchart showing this special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (F208).

In the special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (F208 in FIG. 700), first, each counter value stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (F301). Then, based on the first jackpot random number table 202va (see FIG. 690), it is determined whether the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 obtained in the process of F301 matches the jackpot determination value, and the lottery result (determination result) is obtained (F302).

After completing the process of F302, it is next determined whether the current lottery result is a jackpot (F303), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (F303: Yes), the lottery result of the special pattern is set to a jackpot (F304), and the jackpot special pattern to be displayed on the first pattern display device 37 is set based on the obtained value of the win type counter C2 (F305), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F303 that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (F303: No), a losing special pattern is set on the first pattern display device 37 (F306), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 701, we will explain the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (F209), which is one process of the special symbol variation process 22 (F104 in FIG. 699). FIG. 701 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (F209).

In the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (F209 in FIG. 701), first, in the special symbol jackpot determination process 22 (F208 in FIG. 700), it is determined whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, i.e., whether a special symbol jackpot has been set (F401).

If it is determined in the process of F401 that a jackpot with a special symbol is set (F401: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type selection table 202vb (see FIG. 691) and the acquired value of the first jackpot type counter C2 (F402). Next, the value of the variation type counter CS2 stored in the special symbol execution area is acquired (F403), and the variation pattern selection table 202vc corresponding to the current game state (normal state, latent state, high probability state) corresponding to the information stored in the game state storage area 203sg is read (F404).

Then, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS2 obtained in the process of F403 and the variation pattern selection table 202vc read in the process of F404 (F405), and a special pattern variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern selected in the process of F405 (F406). The special pattern variation pattern command set here includes information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery and the variation time of the special pattern, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the main processing of the main control device 110 (see F1801 in FIG. 709).

Next, a special symbol stop type command indicating the stopping symbol of the special symbol is set (F407), the start of the special symbol fluctuation is set in the first symbol display device 37 (F408), a value indicating the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is set to the value of the special symbol fluctuation time counter (not shown) (F409), and this process ends. The special symbol stop type command set in the process of F407 includes information indicating the type of the stopping symbol indicating the result of this special symbol fluctuation, that is, a rough type such as a reach miss or a miss that does not reach, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see F1801 in FIG. 709) of the main process (FIG. 709) of the main control device 110.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F401 that the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss (F401: No), the process of F402 is skipped and the process proceeds to F403.

Next, referring to FIG. 702, the contents of the update process 22 (F221) executed in the special pattern change process 22 (see F104 in FIG. 699) will be explained. FIG. 702 is a flowchart showing the contents of the update process 22 (F221). This update process 22 (F221) is a process that is executed when the change time of the special pattern change has elapsed (when the change stops), and processes are executed to update the remaining period of the period during which the high probability change state is set to continue and to update the remaining period of the period during which the time-saving state is set to continue.

When the update process 22 (F221) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the special chance counter 203si is greater than 0, i.e., whether the current state is one with a high probability of a special symbol (F501). If it is determined that the value of the special chance counter 203si is greater than 0 (F501: Yes), the value of the special chance counter 203si is decremented by 1 (updated) (F502). Next, it is determined whether the updated value of the special chance counter 203si is 0 (F503). If it is determined that the value is 0 (F503: Yes), a time-saving state is set in the game status storage area 203sg (F504), and processing proceeds to F505. Also, if it is determined in the processing of F501 that the value of the probability change counter 203si is not greater than 0 (is 0) (F501: No), the current state is not one with a high probability of a special symbol, so the processing of F502 to F504 described above for updating the value of the probability change counter 203si is skipped and processing proceeds to F505.

In addition, in the process of F503, if the value of the special probability counter 203si is not 0, that is, the value of the special probability counter 203si is greater than 0 and the special probability state (high probability state of special symbols) continues (F503: No), the process of F504 is skipped and the process proceeds to F505.

In the process of F505, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203sh is greater than 0, and if it is determined that it is greater than 0, that is, if the current state is a high probability state of a normal pattern (F505: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203sh is decremented by 1 (F506), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 203sh after the decrement is 0 (F507). If it is determined in the process of F507 that the value of the time-saving counter 203sh is 0, the normal state is set in the game state storage area 203sg (F508), and the value of the probability change counter 203si, the value of the time-saving counter 203sh, and a state command indicating the current game state are set (F509), and this process is terminated. Furthermore, if it is determined in the process of F505 that the value of the time-saving counter 203sh is not greater than 0 (is 0) (F505: No), or if it is determined in the process of F507 that the value of the time-saving counter 203sh is not 0 (F507: No), the process proceeds directly to F509.

Next, referring to FIG. 703, the start winning process 22 (F105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 698) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 703 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 22 (F105). The start winning process 22 (F105 in FIG. 703) is a process that determines whether a ball has entered either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (start winning), and if a start winning has occurred, stores the acquired counter values in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb, respectively, up to the reserved upper limit number (maximum of four in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640).

In addition, when the counter values acquired based on the reserved balls are stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb, respectively, a process (so-called pre-reading process) is executed to predict the win/loss judgment result and the selected variation pattern in advance based on the counter values stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb. The start winning process 22 (F105 in FIG. 703) will be explained below.

In the start winning process 22 (F105 in FIG. 703), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64, which is the first starting port (start winning) (F601). Here, the ball's entry into a ball detection switch (not shown) provided in the first ball entry port 64 is detected. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (a start winning has occurred) (F601: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203sd is obtained (F602), and it is determined whether the obtained value (N1) is less than 4 (F603).

In other words, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls at the first ball entrance 64 is currently less than the upper limit of four (i.e., whether the number of reserved balls has not been stored to the upper limit). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than four (F603: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203sd is incremented by one (F604), and a reserved ball count command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the reserved number at the first ball entrance 64 (the number of reserved lottery rights for the first special pattern) (F605).

Then, the various counter values (first winning random number counter C1, first winning type counter C2, variable type counter CS1) are read (obtained) from the counter buffer, and each is reserved (stored) in the corresponding reserved ball number memory area of the first special pattern reserved ball execution area of RAM203 (F606), and the process proceeds to F607.

In addition, if the process of F601 determines that a ball has not entered the first ball entrance 64 (F601: No), or if the process of F603 determines that the number of reserved balls at the first ball entrance 64 at this time is the upper limit (F603: No), the process of incrementing the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 203d is skipped and the process proceeds to F607.

Next, the processes from F607 to F612 differ only in that the processes performed for the entry of a ball into the first starting hole (first ball entry hole 64) in the processes from F601 to F606 are the same as those performed for the entry of a ball into the second ball entry hole 640, and therefore a detailed explanation will be omitted.

After executing each process from F601 to F612, the read-ahead process is executed (F613) and this process ends.

This pre-reading process 22 (F613) will be described later with reference to FIG. 704, but a process is executed to determine the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. from each counter value newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b. In this control example, the process is configured to execute the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. based on each newly stored counter value, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a new start winning occurs, the process may be configured to execute the winning/losing judgment result, the determined variation pattern, the stop type, etc. for all reserved memories stored (stored) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, when new information (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb, that is, when the right to draw a special pattern is newly acquired, the content of the lottery right for the special pattern (winning information) is determined in advance, but this is not limited to this, and the content of the lottery right for the special pattern (winning information) may be determined in advance, for example, when the ball passes through the through gate 67 or depending on the result of the lottery for the normal pattern.

As described above, in the 22nd control example, when the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203sd or the value (N2) of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203se is added, the pre-reading process 22 (F613) is executed based on the added winning information (winning information). However, without being limited to this, for example, when the value (N1) of the first special pattern reserved ball counter 203sd is determined to be the upper limit number (4) in the process of F603 (F603: No), that is, when a ball is inserted into the first ball entrance 64 in a state where the reserved ball number of the special pattern has reached the upper limit, the pre-reading process 22 (F613) may be executed. This allows the player to continue playing in order to execute the pre-reading process even when the reserved ball number of the special pattern has reached the upper limit. In addition, since added value can be added when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls with a special pattern has reached the upper limit, it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 when the number of reserved balls with a special pattern has reached the upper limit.

Next, referring to FIG. 704, we will explain the look-ahead process 22 (F613), which is one process of the start winning process 22 (F105 in FIG. 704). FIG. 704 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process 22 (F613).

In the pre-read process 22 (F613 in FIG. 704), first, the various counter values, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variable type counter CS1, are read from the storage area newly stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb (F701). Then, the read data is stored in the empty storage area in the pre-read reserved storage area with the smallest winning order (F702).

Then, the result of the hit/miss judgment is judged based on each counter value newly stored in the read-ahead reserved memory area. Note that here, both the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a low probability state and the hit/miss judgment when the special pattern is in a high probability state are judged. This is because there is a time lag between the timing when a new reserved memory is generated (the timing when new reserved (winning information) is stored in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb) and the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information, so it is difficult to predict the game state (probability state of the special pattern) that is set at the timing when the jackpot judgment is performed based on the newly reserved winning information.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot or not (F703). If it is determined that the result is a jackpot (F703: Yes), a winning command including information that can identify the jackpot type and fluctuation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (F704), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination in the process of F703 is that it is not a jackpot (F703: No), a winning command including information that can identify a miss win and a variation pattern is set based on the various counter values that have been read (F705), and then this process is terminated.

The winning command set in the processing of F704 or F705 is set to include, in addition to the information indicating the winning/losing judgment result described above (information that has a different meaning depending on the winning/losing judgment result), information indicating the values of the various counter values read out by the processing of F701 as common information. The winning command set in this processing is then output to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output processing (F1801) executed in the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 709).

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning command, it can execute a performance (pre-reading performance) in which the display mode of the reserved ball is changed (for example, the color of the reserved ball is changed to a color different from normal) based on various information contained in the winning command, or a preview pattern or the like is displayed before the change starts to suggest to the player the result of the winning or losing judgment.

In this 22nd control example, since there is only one probability state for the special pattern (low probability state for the special pattern), the information to be set in the winning command (win/lose judgment result) can be set regardless of the game state. However, for example, in a gaming machine that has multiple probability states for the special pattern (high probability state for the special pattern, low probability state for the special pattern), the winning/lose judgment result for the high probability state of the special pattern and the winning/lose judgment result for the low probability state of the special pattern can be distinguished, and the winning command can be set based on the results of each distinction. Alternatively, a judgment value (value of the first win random number counter C1) that is judged to be a jackpot whether the special pattern is in a high probability state or a low probability state can be specified, and the winning command indicating a jackpot for the special pattern can be set only when the judgment value is read.

By configuring it in this way, a winning command indicating a jackpot is output to the audio lamp control device 113 only if it is determined in advance that a specific jackpot has been reached, so that a sense of anticipation of a jackpot can be created for special pattern changes that do not involve a pre-reading performance.

Furthermore, the game state when the lottery for the special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory (winning information) stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb may be accurately determined, and a win/lose judgment may be performed based on the game state. In this case, the determination is possible by selecting a constant variation pattern regardless of the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation, rather than varying the selection of the variation pattern depending on the number of reserved balls. When performing a look-ahead, the game state at the start of the variation can be determined by determining the order of variation until the reserved balls start to vary based on the reserved and memorized information.

In addition, in this 22nd control example, when new reserved memory (winning information) is stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb, a read-ahead process is executed based on the winning information, and a win/loss judgment is predicted in advance during the read-ahead process. However, without being limited to this, in the read-ahead process of the main control device 110, information indicating the contents (counter values) of the winning information (reserved memory) newly stored (memorized) in the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sa or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203sb may be set as a winning command in the read-ahead process of the main control device 110, and the winning/loss judgment result may be predicted based on the information included in the winning command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

By configuring in this way, the processing load on the main control device 110 can be reduced. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 can be configured to execute a process to determine whether or not to execute a look-ahead performance, and if it is determined that a look-ahead performance should be executed, to analyze the information contained in the winning command received from the main control device 110 (prediction of the win/lose determination result). As a result, if the look-ahead performance is not executed, specific look-ahead processing (prediction of the win/lose determination result) is not executed, so it is possible to prevent unnecessary control from being executed in the pachinko machine 10. It is also possible to prevent a problem in which a player illegally obtains the results of a look-ahead process executed without a title.

Next, referring to FIG. 705, the normal symbol change process 22 (F106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 705 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change process 22 (F106). The normal symbol change process 22 (F106) is a process for controlling the change display of the second symbol (normal symbol) and the opening time of the electric role 640a, and is a process for executing various processes related to the normal symbol change (lottery) (process for executing the normal symbol change, process for setting the change mode (change time) of the normal symbol change to be executed, process for updating the normal symbol change being executed, process for stopping the normal symbol change, and process for determining the game content of the normal symbol winning game to be executed when the result of the normal symbol lottery is a win).

In this normal symbol variation process 22 (F106 in FIG. 705), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (F801). The normal symbol (second symbol) winning period includes the period from when the second symbol display device 83 displays a winning indication (from when the winning symbol is displayed stationary) to when the electric roler 640a is being controlled to open and close (until the winning game ends). If it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (F801: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (F801: No), it is determined whether the normal pattern on the second pattern display device 83 is displaying a changing pattern (F802). If it is determined that the normal pattern is not displaying a changing pattern, that is, a new normal pattern change (lottery) can be executed (F802: No), then the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203vf is obtained (F803), and it is determined whether the value is greater than 0 (F804).

If it is determined in the process of F804 that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203vf is 0 (F804: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203vf is greater than 0 (F804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203vf is decremented by 1 (F805). In other words, if it is determined in the process of F804 that the condition for executing a new normal pattern variation (winning information to be used for the normal pattern variation is reserved and stored) is met, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203vf is decremented by 1 to execute the normal pattern variation using the reserved and stored winning information.

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc is shifted (F806). In the process of F806, the data stored in normal symbol reserved 1 to normal symbol reserved 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203vc is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted from normal symbol reserved 1 to the execution area. After the data is shifted, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol reserved ball execution area (not shown) is obtained (F807).

Next, it is determined whether the time-saving counter 203sh is on or not, i.e., whether the current state is a high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols or not (F808). If it is determined that the time-saving counter 203sh is set to on (F808: Yes), a win/lose determination result (lottery result) is obtained based on the win determination value of the second win random number table 202sc (see FIG. 691(b)) for high probability (F809), and processing proceeds to F811. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving counter 203sh is off (F808: No), a win/lose determination result is obtained based on the win determination value of the second win random number table 202sc (see FIG. 691(b)) for low probability (F810), and processing proceeds to F811.

In the process of F811, it is determined whether the current normal pattern variation (lottery) is a win (F811), and if it is determined to be a win (F811: Yes), the display mode of "○", which is the display mode when a win occurs, is set (F812), and the process moves to F814. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F811 that the current normal pattern variation (lottery) is not a win (a loss) (F811: No), the display mode of "×", which is the display mode when a loss occurs, is set (F813), and the process moves to F814.

In the process of F814, it is determined whether the current game state is during time-saving (high probability state of normal patterns) by referring to the value of the time-saving counter 203sh (F814), and if it is determined that the game state is during time-saving (high probability state of normal patterns) (F814: Yes), the normal pattern change time is set to 3 seconds (F815) and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game state is not during time-saving (high probability state of normal patterns) (F814: No), the normal pattern change time is set to 10 seconds (F816) and this process is terminated.

In the 22nd control example, as described above, the normal pattern variation time is varied depending on the probability state of the normal pattern that is set, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to always set the variation time to 3 seconds regardless of the set game state. By configuring in this way, at the timing when the game state switches, specifically at the timing of the end of the jackpot game when the game state switches from the normal state (low probability state of normal pattern) where a long variation time is generally likely to be set to the time-saving state (high probability state of normal pattern) where a short variation time is likely to be set, a normal pattern variation with a long variation time is executed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the normal pattern lottery is not executed during the time-saving state even though the time-saving state is set.

The method of setting the normal symbol fluctuation time is not limited to the configuration of this control example, and the fluctuation time may be varied according to the game state, the number of reserved normal symbol balls, or the acquired predetermined value. For example, in this control example, the normal symbol fluctuation time may be variably set based on the set probability state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter 203vf (number of reserved normal symbols). Furthermore, the ease of ball entry into the second ball entry port 640 may be varied depending on the set normal symbol fluctuation time.

In this way, by configuring the ease of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 to be variable depending on the length of time the normal pattern is set to change, the ease of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 can be easily changed depending on the game status, creating a variety of gameplay features.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F802 that the normal pattern (second pattern) is not being displayed in a changing manner (F802: No), it is determined whether the time for changing the normal pattern being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (F817), and if it is determined that the time for changing has not elapsed (F817: No), this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F817 that the variation time has elapsed (F817: Yes), the second pattern display device 83 is set to display a stopped display (F818). In the process of F818, if the current normal pattern lottery is a winning combination, the second pattern display device 83 is set to display (light up) a "○" pattern. On the other hand, if the current normal pattern lottery is a losing combination, the second pattern display device 83 is set to display (light up) a stopped display of an "X" pattern. In other words, a setting is made to display the display mode set in the process of F812 or F813 described above.

When the stop display is set by processing F818, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stopped pattern (illuminated display) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by processing F812 or F813.

Next, it is determined whether the result of the current lottery for the normal symbol is a win (F819). If it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is not a win (a miss) (F819: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the normal symbol is a win (F819: Yes), it is determined whether the current game state is in the time-saving mode (high probability state for normal symbols) by referring to the value of the time-saving counter 203sh (F820), and if it is determined that the current game state is in the time-saving mode (high probability state for normal symbols) (F820: Yes), the game content for the normal symbol win game is set to an opening time of 1 second x 2 times (opening operation) for the electric role 640a (F823), and the process proceeds to F822.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F820 that the game is not in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (F820: No), the game content for the normal symbol winning game is set to the opening time of the electric roler 640a for 5 seconds x 1 time (opening operation) (F821), and the process proceeds to F822.

In the process of F822, the start of opening and closing control of the electric role object 640a is set based on the scenario set in the process of F821 or F823 (F822), and this process ends.

Next, the opening/closing control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a in this 22nd control example will be explained. In the pachinko machine 10 of this 22nd control example, the winning/losing judgment of the normal symbol is performed based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing when the winning/losing judgment of the normal symbol is performed (the timing when the processing of F808 to F811 is performed), and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol set at the timing when the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set (the timing when it is determined that the variable time has passed in the processing of F817).

In other words, in this 22nd control example, the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbol and the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol are configured to be executed independently, and further, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal symbol is configured to be variable based on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol. Therefore, depending on the result of the variable process (lottery process) for the special symbol that is executed in parallel while the variable process (lottery process) for the normal symbol is being executed, there may be cases where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of determining whether the normal symbol is a hit or miss, and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a.

In such a situation, for example, if the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern set at the timing of the normal pattern hit/fail judgment, there is a problem that the electric role 640a will open long (an opening pattern executed when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set) when the low probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Therefore, in this 22nd control example, the probability state (high probability state, low probability state) of the normal pattern at the timing for setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is determined, and the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a is set based on the determination result. This makes it possible to open the electric role 640a in an opening pattern that corresponds to the set game state.

In the 22nd control example, the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern is performed based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern, and the opening pattern of the electric role 640a is set based on the probability state of the normal pattern at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a that is moved in the winning game of the normal pattern. However, without being limited to this, for example, only when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern and the high probability state of the normal pattern is also set at the timing of setting the opening control mode (opening pattern) of the electric role 640a that is moved in the winning game of the normal pattern, the electric role 640a may be configured to open long, or the opening pattern of the electric role 640a may be configured to be set based on the game state set at the timing of the winning/losing judgment of the normal pattern.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, various information (result of the normal pattern lottery, normal pattern change time, normal pattern winning scenario, etc.) determined in the normal pattern change processing 22 (see F106 in FIG. 705) is set as a command indicating the content of each information, and output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output processing (see F1801 in FIG. 709) of the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 709).

Next, the contents of the through gate passing process 22 (F107) will be explained with reference to FIG. 706. FIG. 706 is a flow chart showing the contents of the through gate passing process 22 (see F660). This through gate passing process 22 (F107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 698), and is a process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67, and, if the ball has passed through, acquiring the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 and storing it in the execution area. In addition, it is a process for acquiring the lottery result (winning/losing judgment result) in advance using the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C5 before the actual winning/losing judgment is executed (before the winning/losing judgment (see F811) is executed in the normal pattern fluctuation process 22 (see F106 in FIG. 705)).

In the through gate passing process 22 (F107), first, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 (F901). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal pattern start port (through gate) 67 (F901: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203vf is obtained (F902), and then it is determined whether the obtained value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203vf is not greater than 4 (whether the number of reserved balls of the normal pattern has reached the upper limit) (F903).

If it is determined in the process of F903 that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203vf is greater than 4 (the upper limit value of 4) (F903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203vf is not greater than 4 (F903: Yes), 1 is added to the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball count counter 203vf (F904), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in the normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203vc (F905), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 707, the NMI interrupt process will be described. FIG. 707 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt process stores information on the occurrence of a power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the information on the occurrence of the power outage in the RAM 203 as the setting of the information on the occurrence of the power outage (F1601), and ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout/firing control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 708, we will explain the startup process 22 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power to the main control unit 110 is turned on. FIG. 708 is a flowchart showing this startup process 22.

This startup process 22 is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the startup process 22 (Fig. 708), first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (F1701). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (F1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (F1703).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 667) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (F1704), and if it is turned on (F1704: Yes), the process proceeds to F1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (F1704: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (F1705), and if it is not stored (F1705: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to F1712.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (F1705: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (F1706). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (F1707: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, too, processing transitions to F1712. Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of F1712, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (F1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (F1713, F1714).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the power is turned on to initialize the RAM data, for example when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process of the RAM 203 (F1713, F1714) is executed.

Similarly, if power failure occurrence information has not been set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), RAM 203 initialization processing (F1713, F1714) is executed. In the RAM initialization processing (F1713, F1714), the used area of RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (F1713), and then the initial value of RAM 203 is set (F1714). After execution of RAM 203 initialization processing, the process proceeds to F1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (F1704: No), power outage information is stored (F1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (F1707: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (F1708) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power was cut off (F1709), and processing proceeds to F1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, a performance permission command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit various performances to be executed (F1710). After that, an interrupt is permitted (F1711), and the process proceeds to the main process described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 709, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned startup processing will be described. FIG. 709 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is roughly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main process (see FIG. 709), first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 698), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (F1801). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 698) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special pattern change process 22 (see FIG. 699) or the start winning process 22 (see FIG. 703) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, by this external output process (F1801 in FIG. 709), various commands set in various processes of the main control device 110 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and are used as information for setting various effects (changing effects, decorative effects, etc.) displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the big win control process 22 (see FIG. 710) are sent to the voice and lamp control device 113. Furthermore, various commands set in other control processes are sent to the voice and lamp control device 113. In addition, when a ball is to be fired, a ball firing signal is sent to the firing control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (F1802). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (198 in this 22nd control example), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the updating of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (F1803), and then, if a jackpot state of a special symbol is reached, a command is set to execute a jackpot performance in the sound lamp control device 113, and jackpot control processing is executed to open the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 (F1804).

Details of the jackpot control process 22 (F1804) will be described later with reference to Figures 710 to 715, but in this jackpot control process 22 (F1804), the specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter referred to as the winning hole, etc.) is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have entered the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a). Then, when any of these conditions is met, the winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) is closed. The opening and closing of this winning hole, etc. (specific winning hole 65a) is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process 22 (F1804) is executed in the main process, but it may also be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric role opening/closing process is executed to control the opening and closing of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (F1806). In the electric role opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric role is set by the processing of F822 in the normal pattern fluctuation processing 22 (see FIG. 705), the opening/closing control of the electric role is started. Note that this opening/closing control of the electric role continues until the end of the period set by the processing of F821 and F823 in the normal pattern fluctuation processing 22.

Next, the first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B (F1807). In the first pattern display update process, when a change pattern is set by the special pattern change pattern selection process 22 (F209 in FIG. 701), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B start displaying changes according to the change pattern. In this 22nd control example, for example, if the currently lit LED of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process, when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by the special pattern change pattern selection process 22 (F209 in FIG. 701) ends, the change display being performed in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B is terminated, and the stopped pattern is displayed (illuminated) in a stopped state in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B in the display mode set in F407 of the special pattern change pattern selection process 22 (see F209 in FIG. 701).

Furthermore, in this 22nd control example, when one special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot (jackpot symbol), the other special symbol is displayed in a display mode indicating a miss (miss symbol), and the stop display for this purpose is also executed.

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device (F1808). In the second pattern display update process, when the second pattern change time is set by the process of F815 and F816 of the normal pattern change process 22 (see FIG. 705), the second pattern display device starts a change display. As a result, the second pattern display device performs a change display in which the "○" pattern and the "×" pattern as the second pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second pattern display update process (F1808), when the stop display of the second pattern display device is set by the process of F818 of the normal pattern change process 22 (see FIG. 705), the change display being executed in the second pattern display device is terminated, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) in a stopped state on the second pattern display device in the display mode set by the process of F812 or F813 of the normal pattern change process 22 (see FIG. 705).

Then, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (F1809). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (F1809: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not cut off. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (F1810). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (F1810: Yes), the process proceeds to F1801, and each process from F1801 onwards described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (F1810: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated until the specified time is reached, i.e., within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process (F1811, F1812).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (F1811). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 999 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as the processing of F1811 (F1812). Note that in this processing of F1812, the value of the general fluctuation type counter CS2 is also updated in the same manner as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

Here, since the execution time of each process of F1801 to F1808 changes depending on the game state, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the normal variation type counter CS2 can also be randomly updated in the same way. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the process contents for updating the judgment value related to the lottery of special patterns and normal patterns, and it is possible to suppress the execution of fraudulent play targeting the timing at which the judgment value corresponding to a win is obtained.

In addition, in the process of F1809, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 (F1809: Yes), the power is cut off due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 165 is executed, so the process at the time of power outage from F1813 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (F1813), and a power off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (F1814). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (F1815), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (F1816), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The processing of F1809 is executed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in the game state performed in F1801 to F1808, or at the end of one cycle of processing of F1811 and F1812 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main processing of the main control unit 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from the power interruption state, the processing can be started from the processing of F1801 after the start-up processing is completed. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of F1801, just as in the case where initialization is performed in the start-up processing. Therefore, in the processing at the time of power interruption, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting processing (FIG. 708, F1701), so that the processing can be started from the processing of F1801. Therefore, the control burden on the main control unit 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control unit 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 710, the jackpot control process 22 (F1804) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 710 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process 22 (F1804). This jackpot control process 22 (F1804) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 709), and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process 22 (Fig. 710, F1804), first, it is determined whether a jackpot with a special symbol will start (F1101). Specifically, the process of F218 or F220 of the special symbol variation process 22 (see Fig. 699) is executed, and if the start of a jackpot with a special symbol is set, it is determined that a jackpot with a special symbol will start. In the process of F1101, if a jackpot with a special symbol will start (F1101: Yes), an opening command is set (F1102), the jackpot start flag 203vw is set to off, and the jackpot in progress flag 203vv is set to on (F1103), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if a special jackpot has not started in the process of F1101 (F1101: No), it is determined whether or not a special jackpot is in progress (F1104). The period during which a special jackpot is in progress includes the period during which the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81 are displaying a special jackpot (including during a special jackpot game), and the period during which a predetermined time has passed since the end of the special jackpot game. If a special jackpot is not in progress in the process of F1103 (F1104: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1104 that a jackpot with a special symbol is occurring (F1104: Yes), the process of F1105 is executed. In the process of F1105, it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (F1105). If it is determined in the process of F1105 that it is time to start a new round (F1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process 22 is executed (F1106).

Now, referring to FIG. 711, the jackpot operation setting process 22 will be described (F1106). FIG. 711 is a flow chart showing the contents of this jackpot operation setting process 22 (F1106). In the jackpot operation setting process 22 (FIG. 711, F1106), first, the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds of the jackpot to be started is read from the set opening scenario (F1201). The opening operation of the flow path solenoid (probable change solenoid) 65k is set based on the data read in F1201 (F1202). The opening operation of the opening door 65f1 of the first variable winning device 65 is set based on the data read in the process of F1201. After that, this process is terminated. In the process of F1202, the operation of the flow path solenoid 65k and the opening door 65f1 for each round are set.

In this way, each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a jackpot game, it is possible to prevent a malfunction such as the jackpot game ending midway.

Returning to FIG. 710, the explanation will continue. In the process of F1105, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (F1105: No), it is determined whether it is the time to operate the opening/closing door 65f1 and the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k (F1107). If it is determined that it is the time to operate (F1107: Yes), the opening solenoid 65f2 is set to ON (F1108). After that, the flow path solenoid (probability change solenoid) 65k is set to ON (F1109). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of F1106, if it is determined that it is not the timing for the opening operation (F1107: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending performance (F1110). The timing to start the ending performance is determined as the timing to start the ending performance when the final round corresponding to the jackpot type determined in F402 of the special symbol variation pattern selection process 22 (see FIG. 701) ends, the opening and closing door 65f1 is closed, and the waiting time (3 seconds in this embodiment) which is the ball discharge time has elapsed. If it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending performance (F1110: Yes), an ending command is set (F1111) and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending presentation indicating the end of the jackpot begins on the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1110 that it is not the start timing of the ending period currently being executed (F1110: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (F1112). Here, the end timing of the jackpot refers to when the execution period of the ending presentation has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of F1112 that it is the end timing of the jackpot (F1112: Yes), then the jackpot end process 22 for setting the game state after the end of the jackpot is executed (F1113), and this process is terminated. Details of this jackpot end process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 712. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1112 that it is not the end timing of the jackpot (F1112: No), then the notification process 22 is executed (F1114). Details of the notification process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 713.

When the notification process 22 (Fig. 713, F1114) is executed, the winning process 22 is executed to perform control in response to a win at the specific winning port 65a (F1115), and the abnormality process 22 is executed to determine whether the ball that entered the specific winning port 65a was discharged normally (F1116), after which this process ends. Details of the winning process 22 and the abnormality process 22 will be described later with reference to Figs. 714 and 715.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 711, the details of the jackpot operation setting process 22 (F1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 711 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process 22 (F1106). This jackpot operation setting process 22 (F1106) is executed in the jackpot control process, and as described above, is a process for setting the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot operation setting process 22 (see FIG. 711) starts, first the opening operation corresponding to the number of rounds is read (F1201), the opening operation of the special probability solenoid is set (F1202), the opening operation of the large opening port 65c of the variable prize-winning device 65 is set (F1203), and this process ends. Although not shown, in the process of F1201, a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1801) of the main process executed by MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third pattern display device 81. This makes it possible to update the display content of the third pattern display device 81 according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

Although detailed explanations will be omitted here, in this control example, among the round games executed multiple times during one jackpot game, the content of the round game executed in a specific round number (second round) is made different depending on the jackpot type. Specifically, only in the case of a specific jackpot type (variable jackpot), a round game is executed as the second round of round games in which the switching valve 65y is operated to make it easier for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of the ball flowing down to the specific area (V gate 65V) only during a specific period of time during a jackpot game that is executed over a long period of time, so that the player can play during the jackpot game without losing concentration.

In the 22nd control example, when the second round of the jackpot game is played in the case where the jackpot A is won, the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be able to execute a V notification effect in which the characters "Aim for V" are displayed as a notification mode to inform the player that it is a chance period for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). This makes it possible to easily inform the player of a specific period during the jackpot game that is played over a long period of time in which it is easy for the ball to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V). Furthermore, based on the detection means detecting that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V), the characters "VGET" are displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 as a notification mode to inform the player that the ball has flowed down the specific area (V gate 65V). This makes it possible to easily inform the player that the conditions for setting the probability change state after the jackpot game is finished are met.

The notification mode of the above-mentioned guidance notification may be varied depending on whether a condition is met. For example, the color of the text "Aim for V" may be varied based on the elapsed time of a specific period in which the ball is likely to flow down to a specific gate, or the remaining time, or the size of the display area may be varied, or the text may be changed to something more emphatic (for example, "Aim for V quickly"). This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not fire the ball in a situation in which it is likely to flow down to a specific area (V gate 65V).

In the 22nd control example, a switching valve 65y is provided as a V-type device for switching the flow path of the winning ball to the variable winning device 65, and the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y can be changed to set a period in which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific gate and a period in which it is difficult to flow down to the specific gate. However, without being limited to this, for example, the switching valve 65y may be configured to operate with a common operation pattern from the start of the jackpot game, and the timing at which the specific winning port 65a becomes open may be changed depending on the type of jackpot, so that a period in which the ball is likely to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) and a period in which it is difficult to flow down to the specific area (V gate 65V) can be set. This makes it possible to standardize the operation pattern of the switching valve 65y, so that even if the operation content of the switching valve 65y is understood, it is difficult for the player to know whether the current jackpot game is a jackpot game in which the ball is likely to pass through to the specific area (V gate 65V). In addition, because the operation of the switching valve 65y can be unified, the load on the V solenoid 209a can be reduced, and failure of the V component (switching valve 65y) can be suppressed.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 711), the specific winning port 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the specific area (V gate 65V) can be set to allow the ball to pass through in the second round. As a result, in jackpots A, C to E, the player can simply shoot the ball in the second round and the ball will almost certainly pass through the specific area (V gate 65V), so a special probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be set after the jackpot game ends.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 712, the details of the jackpot end process 22 (F1113) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 712 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process 22 (F1113). This jackpot end process 22 (F1113) is executed in the jackpot control process 22 (see F1804 in FIG. 710), and as described above, is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end process 22 (F1113), first, it is determined whether the special chance setting flag 203sm is on (F1301). In the process of F1301, if it is determined that the special chance setting flag 203sm is on (F1301: Yes), this means that the ball passed through the V-gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot, so the value of the special chance counter 203vu is set to 120 (F1302), the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to 120 (F1303), the special chance flag 203vg is set to on (F1304), and the process proceeds to F1305. On the other hand, in the process of F1301, if the special chance setting flag 203sm is off (F1301: No), the value of the time-saving counter 203vt is set to 100, and the process proceeds to S2105.

In the process of S2105, a status command is set based on the value of the time-saving counter 203vt and the value of the high probability counter 203vu (F1305). The status command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (F1801) of the main process executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the status command, it updates the slave status setting area 223sh according to the game status notified by the status command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to accurately grasp the game status of the pachinko machine 10. Next, both the jackpot flag 203vv and the high probability setting flag 203vh are set to OFF (F1306), and this process ends.

By executing this jackpot end process 22 (see FIG. 712), the game state after the jackpot end can be accurately set depending on whether or not the ball passed through the V-gate (specific area) 65v during the jackpot game.

In the notification process 22 (F1114), first, it is determined whether the value of the notification counter 203vm is greater than 0 (F1221). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203vm is 0 (F1221: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the second round (F1222). The end timing of the second round is determined when it is detected that 10 balls have won in the second round or when it is determined that 30 seconds have passed. If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second round (F1222: Yes), a counter value corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the notification counter 203vm. Then, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1222 that it is not the end timing of the second round (F1222: No), this process is terminated. Here, by setting the counter to 2 seconds in F1223, the notification counter 203vm becomes 0 during the interval time of 3 seconds, which is the ball clearing time after the end of the second round, and a voice saying "Look at the LCD" is output. Therefore, the flow path solenoid 65k operates in the second round, but the player's attention is drawn to the liquid crystal from the interval time after the end of the second round, so the movement of the switching member 65h of the first variable winning device 65 is identified, and the player is prevented from identifying the type of big win. Therefore, the player can play until the end of the big win game in the hope of being granted a high probability game state.

In this 22nd control example, a notification counter 203vm is provided to draw attention to the LCD screen from 1 second before the end of the interval time to the second round, but this is not limited to the above and may be executed continuously from the second round.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1221 that the value of the notification counter 203vm is greater than 0 (F1221: Yes), the value of the notification counter 203vm is updated by -1 (F1224). It is determined whether the updated value of the notification counter 203vm is 0 (F1225). If it is determined that the value of the notification counter 203vm is 0 (F1225: Yes), a notification command is set (F1226). This process then ends. This notification command causes the voice lamp control device 113 to set the output of a voice saying "Look at the LCD".

Next, the details of the winning process 22 (F1115) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 714. FIG. 714 is a flowchart showing this winning process 22 (F1115). This winning process 22 (F1115) is executed within the big win control process 22 (see FIG. 710), and as described above, is a process for carrying out control in response to a win at a specific winning port 65a.

In the winning process 22 (FIG. 714, F1115), first, it is determined whether or not it is within the valid round period (F1231). The valid round period is the period during which the round play is set, that is, the period from the opening state of the opening door 65f1 to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that it is outside the valid round period (F1231: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the valid round period (F1231: Yes), it is determined whether it has passed the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning port 65a. If it is determined that it has passed the detection switch 65c1 of the specific winning port 65a (F1232: Yes), the winning number counter 203vj is updated by adding 1 (F1233). Then, the process of F1234 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has not passed the detection switch 65c1 (F1232: No), the process of F1234 is executed.

In the process of F1234, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203vj is 10 or more (F1234). If it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203vj is 10 or more (F1234: Yes), the opening and closing door 65f1 of the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed (F1236). Then, the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is set to ON (F1237). Then, the process of F1238 is executed. By setting this remaining ball timer flag 203vn to ON, it can be determined that the ball discharge time has begun since the opening and closing door 203n was closed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1234 that the value of the winning number counter 203vj is less than 10, it is determined whether the round time (30 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed (F1235). If it is determined that the round time has elapsed (F1235: Yes), the process of F1236 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (F1235: No), the process of F1238 is executed.

In the process of F1238, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203vk is greater than 0 (F1238). If it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203vk is greater than 0 (F1238: Yes), the value of the operation counter 203vk is updated by decrementing it by 1 (F1239). It is determined whether the game ball has passed the special chance switch 65e3 (F1240). If it is determined that the game ball has passed the special chance passing switch 65e3 (F1240: Yes), the value of the special chance passing counter 203vi is updated by adding 1 (F1241). The special chance setting flag 203vh is set to on (F1242), a V winning command is set (F1243), and then the process of F1244 is executed. On the other hand, in the process of F1240, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the special probability switch 65e3 (F1240: No), the process of F1244 is executed. In the process of F1244, it is determined whether the operation counter 203vk is 0 (F1244). If it is determined that the operation counter 203vk is 0, the flow path solenoid 65k is set to OFF (F1245). The special probability valid flag 203vp is set to ON (F1246). Then, this process is terminated. Here, by setting the special probability valid flag 203vp to ON, even after the switching member 65h is switched, if the game ball remaining in the special flow path 65e2 passes through the special probability switch 65e3, the special probability game can be set.

On the other hand, in the process of F1238, if it is determined that the operation counter 203vk is 0 (F1238: No), it is determined whether the special chance effective flag 203vp is on (F1247). If the special chance effective flag 203vp is off (F1247: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special chance effective flag 203vp is on (F1247: Yes), the special chance effective timer 203vr is updated by adding 1 (F1248). It is determined whether the value of the special chance effective timer is the upper limit value (1.2s in this embodiment) (F1249). If it is determined that the special chance effective timer 203vr is the upper limit value (F1249: Yes), the special chance effective flag 203vp is set to off (F1250). The special chance effective timer 203vr is reset to the initial value of 0 (F1251). Then, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1249 that the guaranteed bonus effective timer 203vr is not at its upper limit (F1249: No), the process of F1240 is executed.

As a result, if the probability variable effective timer 203vr is not at its upper limit, it is determined whether the game ball has passed the probability variable switch 65e3, so the probability variable game state can be set taking into account the time it takes for the ball to be cleared. Also, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the probability variable game state from being granted by improperly passing the game ball through the probability variable switch 65e3.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 715, we will explain the abnormality processing 22 (F1116) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. FIG. 715 is a flowchart showing the contents of this abnormality processing 22 (F1116). In abnormality processing 22 (F1116), processing is executed to monitor whether the special probability switch 65e3 has been passed illegally.

In the abnormality processing 22 (Fig. 715, F1116), first, it is determined whether or not it is within the valid round period (F1261). If it is outside the valid round period (F1261: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the valid round period (F1261: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (F1262). If it is determined that the game ball has passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (F1262: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is updated by adding 1 (F1263). Then, the processing of F1264 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the ball outlet switch 65e4 (F1262: No), the processing of F1264 is executed.

In the process of F1264, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203n is on (F1264). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is off (F1264: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is on (F1264: Yes), since it is during the ball removal time period, the remaining ball timer 203vo is updated by adding 1 (F1265). It is determined whether the remaining ball timer 203vo has reached its upper limit value (3 seconds in this 22nd control example) (F1266). If it is determined that it is not the upper limit value (F1266: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is the upper limit (F1266: Yes), it is determined whether the number of dispensed balls (the sum of the probability change passing counter 203vi and the dispensed ball number counter 203vs) matches the number of winning balls (the value of the winning ball number counter 203vj) (F1267).

If it is determined that there is a match (F1267: Yes), the process of F1269 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no match (F1267: No), an error command is set (F1268). Then, the process of F1269 is executed. When the error command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, an error display (for example, displaying the text "Winning number mismatch error") is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent behavior in which a gaming ball is left in the first variable winning device 65 and passes through the guaranteed win switch 65e3 even in the event of a jackpot C.

In the process of F1269, the remaining ball timer flag 203vn is set to OFF (F1269), and the remaining ball timer 203vo is reset to its initial value of 0 (F1270). After that, the winning ball counter 203vj, the paid ball counter 203vs, and the special chance passing counter 203vi are each reset to their initial values (F1271), and then this process is terminated.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device in the 22nd control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 716 to Fig. 734, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, referring to FIG. 716, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 716 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (F2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the execution of the power-off processing of F2117 (see FIG. 717) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (F2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 717, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see F2114 in FIG. 717), it executes the power-off processing of F2117. Before the execution of such power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of F2117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (F2002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off processing of F2117 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in RAM 223 has been corrupted (F2003).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of F2006. Therefore, the data stored in that specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, but conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (F2003: Yes), the process moves to F2004 and starts initializing RAM 223. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (F2003: No), the process moves to F2008.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply has been completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (F2003: Yes) and the process proceeds to F2004. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage has occurred and the power cut process of F2117 has been completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (F2003: No) and the process proceeds to F2008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (F2002: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of F2117 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct, since the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S1404 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S2004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (F2004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (F2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (F2006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (F2005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (F2007) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of F2008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (F2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of F2117 is executed (see F2116 in FIG. 717). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of F2117 is executed, so the process of F2008 is reached with the power-off flag on if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of F2117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (F2008: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared (F2009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (F2010), interrupt permission is set (F2011), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off, the process reaches F2008 because, for example, the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, and so the process went from F2004 to F2006 and then to F2008, or because noise or the like caused only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to be reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (F2008: No), F2009, which is the process of clearing the working area of RAM 223, is skipped, and the process moves to F2010, where the initial values of RAM 223 are set (F2010), interrupt permission is set (F2011), and the process moves to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of F2009 is that when the process goes from F2004 to F2006 and then to F2008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of F2004, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up process is started, the data in the working area of RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that control of voice lamp control device 113 can continue.

Next, referring to FIG. 717, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 717 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the current processing of F2101 was executed (F2101). If 1 ms or more has not elapsed (F2101: No), the processing of F2102 to F2111 is not executed and the processing proceeds to F2112. The reason for determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed in the processing of F2101 is that F2102 to F2111 are mainly processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 ms), whereas it is preferable to execute the command determination processing 22 of F2112 and the variable display setting processing 22 of F2113 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of F2112 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control unit 110 from being missed, and by executing the processing of F2113 at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination processing 22.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of F2101 (F2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of F2103 to F2113 are sent to the display control device 114 (F2102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of F2108 described later (F2103), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (F2104). The power-on notification processing is a processing for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the notification by the power-on notification processing is not performed and the processing proceeds to F2105.

In the process of F2105, a customer waiting performance process is executed, and then a reserved ball number display update process is executed (F2106). In the customer waiting performance process, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device 114. In the reserved ball number display update process, a process is performed to light up the reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb.

Then, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 is executed (F2107). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 monitors input as to whether or not the frame button 22A operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and sets up a corresponding effect when input of the frame button 22A is confirmed. In this process, when operation of the frame button 22A by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22A is set in the display control device 114. Details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 731.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process 22 is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (F2108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (F2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing F2109, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (F2110). In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of F2008 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing/output process of F2009 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81.

After the LCD display performance execution management process, the performance update process 22 is executed (F2111). In the performance update process 22, processing is executed to update the values of various counters and timers in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. Details of the performance update process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 734.

After the performance update process 22, a command determination process 22 is performed (F2112) to perform processing according to the command received from the main control device 110. Details of this command determination process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 718.

Next, the process proceeds to F2113. In the process of F2113, the variable display setting process 22 is executed (F2113). In the variable display setting process 22, a display variable pattern command is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 718.

Then, when the variable display setting process 22 is finished, it is determined whether or not power failure information is stored in the work RAM 233 (F2114). Power failure information is stored when a power failure command is received from the main control device 110. If power failure information is stored in the process of F2114 (F2114: Yes), both the power failure flag and the power failure processing in progress flag are turned on (F2116), and power failure processing is executed (F2117). After the power failure processing is executed, the power failure processing in progress flag is turned off (F2118), and the processing is then looped infinitely. In the power failure processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. The stored power failure information is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of F2114 (F2114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (F2115). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (F2115: No), the process returns to the process of F2101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (F2115: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if the RAM is determined to be destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a store clerk or the like at the hall and ask for repairs to the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, referring to FIG. 718, the command determination process 22 (F2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 718 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 22 (F2112). This command determination process 22 (F2112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process 22 (FIG. 718, F2112), the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (F2201). If a status command has been received (F2201: Yes), the status command reception process 22 is executed (F2202), processing according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. This status command reception process 22 (F2202) is a process for setting a display mode corresponding to the changed game status in the third display control device 81 when the game status is changed in the main control device 110. Details of the status command reception process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 719.

In addition, if the other command is a command to be used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command to be used by the display control device 114, the command is set to be sent to the display control device 114.

On the other hand, if a status command has not been received (F2203: No), it is then determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (F2203). If a variation pattern command has been received (F2203: Yes), the variation start flag 223vd is set to on (F2204), a variation pattern is extracted from the received variation pattern command (F2205), processing according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main processing.

On the other hand, if a variation pattern command has not been received (F2203: No), it is then determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (F2206). If a stop type command has been received (F2206: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223ve in the RAM 223 is set to on (F2207), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (F2208), processing according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referenced when the variation display setting process 22 (see FIG. 727) described below is executed. It is then used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation performance.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (F2206: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (F2209). If the reserved ball number command has been received (F2209: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball number command is a special pattern 1 reserved ball number command or a special pattern 2 reserved ball number command, and the value contained in the command, i.e., the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203vd of the main control unit 110 (the number of reserved variable displays in the special pattern N1) or the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203ve of the main control unit 110 (the number of reserved variable displays in the special pattern N2), is extracted, and this is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc of the voice lamp control unit 113 (F2210). In addition, in the process of F2210, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223vb and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223vc. After the process of F2210 is completed, processing according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special symbol 1 reserved ball count command or special symbol 2 reserved ball count command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 (initial winning), or when a lottery for a special pattern is held. Therefore, each time a start winning is detected or each time a lottery for a special pattern is held, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 223vb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 223vc of the voice lamp control unit 113 can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter 203vd and the special symbol 2 reserved ball count counter 203ve of the main control unit 110 by processing of F2210. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223vb or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223vc of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203vd or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ve of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223vb or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223vc of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected at the time of detecting the start winning or drawing the special symbol, and can be adjusted to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203vd or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203ve of the main control device 110. Note that when the process of F2210 is executed, a display reserved ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223vb and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223vc. As a result, the display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of F2209, if the reserved ball number command has not been received (F2209: No), it is then determined whether a winning command has been received from the main control device 110 (F2211). If it is determined that a winning command has been received (F2211: Yes), the winning command process 22 is executed (F2212), processing according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. This winning command process 22 is executed when a winning command (winning information command) set when the lottery right for a special symbol is acquired from the main control device 110, a winning information command for normal symbols set when the lottery right for a normal symbol is acquired, or a V winning command set when a ball flows down (passes) a specific gate (probability change switch) during a jackpot game is received. Details of the winning command process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 720.

Next, in the process of F2211, if it is determined that a winning command has not been received (F2211: No), it is determined whether a stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (F2213). If it is determined that a stop command has been received (F2213: Yes), the stop command process 22 is executed, processing according to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. This stop command process 22 executes various processes when a stop command is received from the main control device 110, that is, when the special symbol stops. Details of the stop command process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 724.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F2213 that a stop command has not been received (F2213: No), it is determined whether a jackpot-related command has been received (F2215). If it is determined that a jackpot-related command has been received (F2215: Yes), jackpot-related processing is executed (F2216), processing corresponding to other commands is executed (F2217), and the process returns to the main process. This jackpot-related processing is processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute a performance display corresponding to a jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won, and when a jackpot is won, processing corresponding to various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 is executed. Details of the jackpot-related processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 725.

Next, referring to FIG. 719, the status command receiving process 22 (F2202) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 719 is a flowchart showing this status command receiving process 22 (F2202). This status command receiving process 22 (F2202) is executed within the command determination process 22 (see FIG. 718) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and executes processing to set different display modes displayed on the third pattern display device 81 depending on the set game status. Details of the status command receiving process 22 (F2202) will be described below.

When the state command receiving process 22 (F2202) is executed, it is first determined whether the currently set game state will be changed (F2301). Here, it is determined whether the game state set in the slave state storage area 223vh differs from the game state indicated by the currently received state command. If it is determined in the process of F2301 that there is no change in the game state (F2301: No), this process is terminated as is. If it is determined that there is a change in the game state (F2301: Yes), it is determined whether the changed game state is the normal state (F2302).

If it is determined in the process of F2302 that the game state after the change is normal (if the state command received this time is a command indicating the normal state) (F2302: Yes), a display command indicating normal mode is set (F2303), and the process proceeds to F2304.

In the process of F2302, if it is determined that the game state after the change is not the normal state (if the currently received state command is not a command indicating the normal state) (F2302: No), then it is determined whether the game state after the change is the time-shortened state (F2305), and if it is determined that the game state is the time-shortened state (if the currently received state command is a command indicating the time-shortened state) (F2305: Yes), the value of the time-shortened counter 223vq is set to 100 (F2306), a display command indicating the chance mode is set (F2307), and the process proceeds to F2304.

In the process of F2305, if it is determined that the game state is not in a time-saving state (F2305: No), it is then determined whether the changed game state is a high probability state (F2308). If it is determined that the game state is a high probability state (the state command received this time is a command indicating a high probability state) (F2308: Yes), the value of the high probability state counter 223sr is set to 120 (F2309), and it is determined whether the V notification flag 223vu is on (F2310). If the V notification flag 223vu is off (F2310: No), the process proceeds to the process of F2306 described above. If the V notification flag 223vu is on (F2310: Yes), the V notification flag 223vu is set to off (F2311), a display command indicating the super chance mode is set (F2312), and the process proceeds to the process of F2304.

In the process of F2304, the game status set in the current status area of the slave status setting area 223sh is set in the past status area (F2304), the game status corresponding to the information indicated by the received status command is set in the current status area of the slave status setting area 223sh (F2304), and this process is terminated.

Here, the commands set in the processing of F2303, F2307, and F2312 are notified to the display control device 114, and a variable presentation display corresponding to the game status is executed. In this way, in this 22nd control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set the type (mode, background) of various display modes to be displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 based on the status command output from the main control device 110, and to output a command indicating the type to the display control device 114.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to, for example, eliminate the need to set the display mode of the variable performance display for each game state set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In other words, by simply outputting to the display control device 114 a command (type command) indicating the type of various display modes corresponding to the currently set game state and a variable pattern command (common command) corresponding to the variable display of the special pattern, it is possible to set display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a display mode corresponding to the current game state and the received variable pattern based on the type command and common command received on the display control device 114 side. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113.

As described above, when the display control device 114 is configured to set the display data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by combining multiple commands received from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is configured to output information (confirmation information) indicating the contents of the display data after setting to the voice lamp control device 113, and a discrimination means is provided to discriminate whether the confirmation information received on the voice lamp control device 113 is appropriate. If the discrimination result is determined to be inappropriate, a simplified display variation pattern command indicating appropriate information is set, and the contents of the display data already set are rewritten to the simplified display data.

By configuring in this way, when the voice lamp control device 113 does not set appropriate display data for various commands received from the main control device 110, it is possible to set simplified display data showing appropriate information and display a variable performance display based on the simplified display data. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a variable performance display with content different from the actual game result (the lottery result of the special pattern) from being executed, which reduces the player's motivation to play. In addition, as the above-mentioned simplified display data, for example, display data that displays a special mode that does not correspond to any game state (for example, a mode with a black background) or display data that executes a variable display of the fourth pattern, which has a smaller amount of data than the display data used for normal variable performance display, can be used.

In this 22nd control example, the above-mentioned configuration is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to set a display variation pattern command based on the current game state and the received variation pattern.

Next, referring to FIG. 720, the contents of the winning command process 22 (see F2212) executed in the command determination process 22 (see F2112 in FIG. 718) will be described. FIG. 720 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning command process 22 (F2212). This winning command process 22 (F2212) is a process executed when a winning command (winning information command) is received from the main control device 110 when the right to draw a special symbol is acquired, a regular symbol winning information command is set when the right to draw a regular symbol is acquired, or a V winning command is received when the ball flows down (passes through) a specific gate (high probability switch) during a jackpot game.

When the winning command process 22 (F2212) is executed, first, the information of the winning command (winning information command) received this time is stored (set) in the corresponding area of the winning information storage area (winning information storage area) 223b (F2401), and the special winning information command process is executed (F2402). Details of the special winning information command process will be described later with reference to FIG. 721.

When the special winning information command processing is finished, it is then determined whether the currently received command is a V winning command (a command (see F1243) that is set when the ball flows down to the special winning switch (specific gate) in the winning processing 22 (see F1115 in FIG. 714)) (F2403). If the received command is a V winning command (F2403: Yes), the V winning flag 223vt is set to on (F2406), and it is determined whether the V performance execution flag 223vs is on (F2405). If the V performance execution flag 223vs is on (F2407: Yes), the V performance execution flag 223vs is set to off (F2406), and a display command for notifying the V winning is set (F2407). Then, the V notification flag 223vu is set to on (F2408), other processing is performed (F2409), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the received command is not a V-winning command in the process of F2403 (F2403: No), the processes of F2405 to F2408 are skipped and the process proceeds to F2409.

In addition, in the process of F2405, if the V performance execution flag 223vs is not on (F2405: No), the processes of F2406 to F2408 are skipped and the process proceeds to F2409.

In the processing of F2409, other processing is executed (S4413), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 721, the contents of the special prize information command processing 22 (F2402) executed in the prize command processing 22 (F2212 in FIG. 720) will be described. FIG. 721 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special prize information command processing 22 (F2402).

When the special winning information command process 22 (F2402) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning command received this time is a winning command for a special symbol (F2501). If the received command is a special winning command (F2501: Yes), the current game state is extracted based on the information set in the slave state setting area 223sh (F2502), and it is determined whether the information indicates a normal game state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) (F2503). If it is a normal game state (F2503: Yes), the reserved performance setting process 22 is executed (F2504) and the process proceeds to F2505. This reserved performance setting process 22 is a process for setting the performance content of the reserved change performance described above. Details of the reserved performance setting process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 722. On the other hand, if it is not a normal game state (F2503: No), the process of F2504 is skipped and the process proceeds to F2505.

In this 22nd control example, the reserve change effect can be executed when the normal game state is set as the game state, but this is not limited to this, and the reserve effect can also be executed in the special bonus state and the time-saving state.

In the process of F2505, a display command is set based on the information contained in the received special prize information command (F2505), and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 722, the contents of the reserved performance setting process 22 (F2504) executed in the special winning command process 22 (F2402 in FIG. 721) will be described. FIG. 722 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved performance setting process 22 (F2504).

When the reserved performance setting process 22 (F2504) is executed, first, it is determined whether the later reserved setting flag 223vn is on (F2551). As described above, the later reserved setting flag 223vn is set to on when the reserved change scenario of the composite reserved change performance is set and the color of the reserved pattern of the reserved ball acquired next to the reserved ball to be changed is specified. Therefore, when the later reserved setting flag 223vn is on (F2551: Yes), the color of the corresponding reserved pattern is determined based on the reserved performance information stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl (F2552), the later reserved flag 223sn is set to off (F2553), a display command is set to show the display mode (color) of the determined reserved pattern, and the process proceeds to F2555.

On the other hand, in the process of F2551, if the post-pending setting flag 223vn is not on (F2551: No), it is determined whether the pending performance restriction flag 223vm is on (F2556). If the pending performance restriction flag 223vm is on (F2556: Yes), since it is a period during which it is restricted to set a new pending change performance, the process related to setting the pending change performance is skipped and the process proceeds to F2555.

In the process of F2556, if the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is not on (F2556: No), the reserved performance change lottery table 222vb (see FIG. 694(a)) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the reserved performance change (F2557). Then, in the process of F2557, it is determined whether or not the execution of the single reserved performance change has been determined (F2558), and if the execution of the single reserved performance change has been determined (F2558: Yes), the reserved color selection table 222vc (see FIG. 694(b)) is referenced to determine the color of the reserved pattern corresponding to this winning command (F2559), and the determined reserved performance information is stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl (F2560). After that, the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is set in accordance with the determined content (F2561), and the process proceeds to F2554.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F2558 that a single hold change presentation will not be executed (F2558: No), it is determined in the process of F2557 whether or not it has been decided to execute a composite hold change presentation (F2562). If it has been decided to execute a composite hold change presentation (F2562: Yes), the composite hold change presentation setting process 22 is executed (F2563), and the process proceeds to F2554.

Here, the composite hold change presentation setting process 22 will be explained with reference to FIG. 723. FIG. 723 is a flowchart showing the contents of the composite hold change presentation setting process 22.

When the composite hold change performance setting process 22 (F2517) is executed, first, the hold change scenario is determined by referring to the hold change scenario selection table 222vd (see FIG. 695) (F2601), and the color of the hold pattern corresponding to the content determined in the process of F2601 is determined (F2602). Then, the hold performance information indicating the content determined in the process of F2601 is stored in the hold performance information storage area 223vl (F2603). After that, the hold performance restriction flag 223vm is set corresponding to the content determined in the process of F2601 (F2604), the post-hold setting flag 223vn is set corresponding to the content determined in the process of F2601 (F2605), and the hold performance setting process 22 (see FIG. 722) is returned to.

Returning to FIG. 722, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of F2562 that the composite hold change effect will not be executed (F2562: No), the processing proceeds to F2555.

In the process of F2555, a display command is set based on the information contained in the currently received special prize winning information command (F2555), and after the process of F2555 is completed, the process returns to the special prize winning information command process 22.

Next, referring to FIG. 724, the contents of the stop command process 22 (F2214) executed in the command determination process 22 (see F2112 in FIG. 718) will be described. FIG. 724 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stop command process 22 (F2214). When a stop command is received from the main control device 110, that is, various processes are executed at the timing when the special pattern stops.

When the stop command process 22 (F2214) is executed, first, it is determined whether the swing wait flag 223vw is on (F2651). If the swing wait flag 223vw is on (F2652: Yes), a display command is set to show a display mode indicating a big win (in this 22nd control example, a display of "Congratulations") (F2652), the swing wait flag 223vw is set to off (F2653), and processing proceeds to F2654. On the other hand, if the swing wait flag 223vw is not on in the processing of F2651 (F2651: No), the processing of F2652 and F2653 is skipped and processing of F2654 is executed.

In the process of F2654, the reserved performance information stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl is read (F2654), and it is determined whether there is a reserved change scenario in which the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern being changed is the change target (F2655). If there is a reserved change scenario in which the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern being changed is the change target (F2655: Yes), the reserved performance restriction flag 223vm is set to off (F2656), the stop display of the third pattern is decided (F2657), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of F2655, if there is no reserved change scenario in which the reserved pattern corresponding to the special pattern being changed is the change target (F2655: No), the process of F2656 is skipped and the process proceeds to F2657.

Next, the contents of the jackpot-related process 22 (F2216) will be explained with reference to FIG. 726. FIG. 726 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot-related process (F2216). The jackpot-related process (F2216) performs processing to cause the third pattern display device 81 to execute a presentation display corresponding to the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won, and when a jackpot is won, processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main control device 110 is executed.

In the jackpot-related process 22 (F2216), first, it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot start command (F2701). If it is determined to be a jackpot start command (F2701: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (F2702). The jackpot start command for display set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 during the command output process (F2102) of the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221. When the display control device 114 receives the jackpot start command for display, it displays an effect suggesting the start of a jackpot on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot C (3R time-limited jackpot) (F2703), and if it is determined to be jackpot C (F2703: Yes), an ending display mode indicating entry into chance mode is set (F2704), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be not jackpot C (F2703: No), it is determined whether the current jackpot type is jackpot A (10R variable jackpot) (F2505), and if it is determined to be not jackpot A (F2705: No), that is, if it is jackpot B (3R variable jackpot), the process proceeds to F2704.

Here, the chance mode in this 22nd control example is configured as a mode in which the player cannot distinguish whether the set game state is a high probability game state or a time-limited game state. By configuring it in this way, even if the display mode set after the end of a big win game is not the super chance mode (a display mode that is set only when a high probability game state is set), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by making the player expect that a high probability game state has been set.

However, because a V effect (an effect to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward a specific area (V gate) 65v) is executed during the jackpot play that is executed when a special jackpot is won, the player can recognize that he or she has won a special jackpot. Therefore, there was a risk that the player would realize that the chance mode that is set after the end of a jackpot play in which no V effect is executed is not a special jackpot play state.

For this reason, in this 22nd control example, if a player wins jackpot B, which is a guaranteed jackpot, the V performance is not executed during the jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, it is made difficult for the player to tell whether the current chance mode is a guaranteed jackpot game state or a time-limited game state, and the player's desire to play can be suppressed by making the player expect that a guaranteed jackpot state has been set.

On the other hand, if the process of F2705 determines that the jackpot is A (F2705: Yes), the V performance execution flag 223vs is set to on (F2706), an ending display mode is set indicating that a super chance mode has been entered (a high probability state is set) (F2707), and this process ends.

In this way, in the 22nd control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 725, different ending display modes are set according to the set jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C), and the ending display mode corresponding to the ending period of the jackpot game to be executed this time is set in advance at the timing when the jackpot game starts. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to execute display control for setting the ending display mode during the jackpot game period when various controls (variable display control of jackpot game information that is variably displayed according to the progress of the jackpot game (for example, control to display information indicating the number of prize balls acquired or control to display information indicating the number of rounds being played) and prize ball payout control for paying out prize balls according to the number of balls won into the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game) are frequently executed, so the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can be reduced. In this 22nd control example, the process for setting the ending display mode is executed at the start timing of the jackpot game, but it is not limited to this. The ending display mode may be set during the jackpot fluctuation of the special pattern when it is confirmed that the jackpot game will be executed, or may be configured to be set using the remaining period of the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113, which is executed during a period of the jackpot game period when there is little control processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F2701 that the jackpot start command has not been received (F2701: No), then it is determined whether a round number command has been received (F2708). If it is determined that a round number command has been received (F2708: Yes), a display round number command is set based on the round number (F2710), and it is determined whether the current round number is 2 rounds (V rounds) (F2710). If it is determined that there are 2 rounds (V rounds) (F2710: Yes), it is determined whether the V performance execution flag 223vs is on (F2711). If it is determined that the V performance execution flag 223vs is on (F2711: Yes), a display command is set to notify of a V win (F2712), and this process ends. Furthermore, if the process of F2710 determines that the current round number is not two (V round), i.e., that a round other than the second round will be played (F2710: No), or if the process of F2711 determines that the V performance execution flag 223vs is off (F2711: No), this process is also terminated.

If it is determined in the process of F2708 that the round count command has not been received (F2708: No), it is then determined whether an ending command has been received (F2713), and if it is determined that an ending command has been received (F2713: Yes), ending process 22 is executed (F2714) and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of F2713 that the ending command has not been received (F2713: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the processing of the ending process 22 (F2714) will be explained with reference to FIG. 727. FIG. 727 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending process 22 (F2714). This ending process 22 (F2714) is a process that is executed when it is determined that an ending command has been received in the jackpot-related process 22 (see F2216 in FIG. 725) described above, and executes a process for finally determining the ending display mode to be executed during the ending period.

When the ending process 22 (F2714) is executed, first, it is determined whether the V winning flag 223vt is set to on (F2801), and if it is determined that it is set to on (F2801: Yes), the V winning flag 223vt is set to off (F2802), and the execution of the ending display corresponding to the ending display mode that has already been set is set (F2805), and this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of F2801 that the V winning flag 223vt is not set to on (F2801: No), it is determined whether the V performance execution flag 223vs is on (F2803), and if it is determined that the V performance execution flag 223vs is off (F2803: No), the process proceeds directly to the process of F2804.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F2803 that the V performance execution flag 223vs is on (F2803: Yes), a display switching command is set to switch the display mode of the latter half period (7 seconds) of the ending period (F2804), and the processing proceeds to F2805.

When a display switching command is set in the process of F2804, the display control device 114 is notified, and a process is executed to switch the display mode for the latter half of the ending period, which was previously set in response to the setting of the Super Chance Mode, to a display mode corresponding to the setting of the Chance Mode. In this 22nd control example, the display period for the display mode that is switched based on this display switching command is constant (7 seconds), so that the display mode can be easily switched.

Next, the contents of the variable display setting process 22 (F2113) will be explained with reference to FIG. 728. FIG. 727 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 22 (F2113). This variable display setting process 22 (F2113) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variation display setting process 22 (F2113), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223vd provided in the RAM 223 is on (F2901). Then, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223vd is not on (i.e., it is off) (F2901: No), since no variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110, the process proceeds to F2911. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223vd is on (F2901: Yes), it is next determined whether the adjustment feature movable flag 223vi is on (F2902). If the adjustment feature movable flag 223vi is on (F2902: Yes), the adjustment feature movable feature (sword feature Ym3) is in the adjustment position (see FIG. 678(b)), so the adjustment feature movable flag 223vi is set to off (F2903), and a lamp control command is set to turn off all the LEDs associated with the adjustment feature (sword feature Ym3) (F2904). After that, a feature operation scenario is set to move the adjustment feature (sword feature Ym3) to the initial position (see FIG. 669(a)) (F2905), a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set to the limit timer 223vj (F2906), and the process proceeds to F2907.

In this way, in the 22nd control example, when the player is performing light intensity adjustment using the sword role object Ym3 during a waiting period when the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, a process is performed to store the sword role object Ym3 so that the player can easily see the variable performance. In addition, at this time, if the sword role object Ym3 performs an action of returning from the adjustment position to the initial position while emitting light, there is a risk that the player will misunderstand that the action is part of the variable performance. In order to prevent this, all LEDs associated with the sword role object Ym3 are turned off before the sword role object Ym3 performs an action of returning from the adjustment position to the initial position, making it easy for the player to understand that the current action of the sword role object Ym3 is not related to the variable performance.

If the result of the special symbol lottery that is started while the sword role object Ym3 is in the adjustment position is a big win, the LEDs associated with the sword role object Ym3 may not be turned off completely, but may instead be illuminated in rainbow colors and then returned to the initial position.

On the other hand, if the adjustment feature in operation flag 223vi is not on in the process of F2902 (F2902: No), the processes of F2903 to F2906 are skipped and the process proceeds to F2907.

In the process of F2907, the fluctuation start flag 223vd is set to OFF (F2907), and then the fluctuation pattern extracted in the process of F2205 of the command determination process 22 (see F2203 in FIG. 718) is obtained (F2908). Then, the fluctuation performance setting process 22 is executed (F2909) to generate a display fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 based on the obtained fluctuation pattern type, and the display fluctuation pattern command is set (F2910), and the process proceeds to F2911. Details of the fluctuation performance setting process 22 (F2909) will be described later with reference to FIG. 728.

In the process of F2911, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223ve provided in the RAM 223 is on (F2911). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223ve is not on (i.e., it is off) (F2911: No), this is a state in which a stop type command has not been received from the main control unit 110, and this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223ve is on (F2911: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223ve that is set to on is set to off (F2912), and then the stop type extracted in the process of S2208 of the command determination process 22 (see S2112 in FIG. 718) is obtained (F2913), and the extracted stop type is set as it is (F2914). After that, a stop type command for display is set (F2915), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 728, the contents of the variable presentation setting process 22 (F2909) executed in the variable display setting process 22 (see F2113 in FIG. 727) will be described. FIG. 728 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable presentation setting process 22 (F2909). This variable presentation setting process 22 (F2909) is executed when setting the variable presentation of special patterns in the variable display setting process 22 (see F2113 in FIG. 727), and a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the set game state.

When the variable performance setting process 22 (F2909) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is 0 or more (F3001). If the value of the time-saving counter sq is not 0 or more (F3001: No), that is, if the chance mode is set as the display mode, the processes of F3002 and F3003 are skipped and the process proceeds to F3004. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is 0 or more (F3001: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is decremented by 1 (F3002), a display command is set to show the value of the time-saving counter 223vq after the decrement (F3003), and the process proceeds to F3004.

In the process of F3004, it is determined whether the value of the high probability counter 223sr is 0 or greater (F3004). If the value of the high probability counter 223sr is not 0 or greater (F3004: No), that is, if the high probability game state is not set, the processes of F3005 to F3007 are skipped and the process moves to F3008.

On the other hand, in the process of F3004, if the value of the probability bonus counter 223sr is 0 or more (F3004: Yes), the value of the probability bonus counter 223sr is decremented by 1 (F3005), and then it is determined whether the super chance mode is set as the display mode (F3006). If the super chance mode is set (F3006: Yes), a display command is set to show the value of the probability bonus counter 223sr after decrement. On the other hand, in the process of F3006, if the super chance mode is not set (F3006: No), the process of F3007 is skipped and the process proceeds to F3008.

In the process of F3008, it is determined whether the value of the limit timer 223vj is 0 or greater (F3008). If the value of the limit timer 223vj is 0 or greater (F3008: Yes), that is, if 10 seconds have not elapsed since the sword role object Ym3 returned to the initial position from the adjustment position, it is determined to exclude the performance mode including the movement of the sword role object Ym3 from the candidates for the performance mode that can be determined (F3009). On the other hand, if the value of the limit timer 223vj is not 0 or greater (F3008: No), the process of F3009 is skipped and the process proceeds to F3010.

In this way, in the 22nd control example, after the sword role object Ym3 is moved, the performance mode for moving the sword role object Ym3 is not selected until a certain period (10 seconds) has elapsed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the movement control for the sword role object Ym3 from being executed in a short period of time, and therefore it is possible to prevent the sword role object Ym3 from moving frequently and breaking down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movement control for the next sword role object Ym3 from being executed before the sword role object Ym3 becomes movable, which causes a discrepancy in the movement period of the sword role object Ym3 or prevents normal movement from being executed.

In the process of F3010, the game state stored in the slave state storage area 223vh is read (F3010), and it is determined whether the game state is a time-saving game state (F3011). If it is a time-saving game state (F3011: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is 1 (F3012), and if it is 1 (F3012: Yes), the presentation mode of the time-saving end indication presentation whose presentation result is the end of the chance mode is determined (F3013), and the process proceeds to F3014. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is not 1 (F3012: No), the process skips F3013 and proceeds to F3014. In the process of F3014, the presentation mode corresponding to the basic command indicated by the variation pattern command is determined, and the process proceeds to F3019.

In the process of F3011, if it is determined that the game is not in the time-saving game mode (F3011: No), it is determined whether the game is in the high probability game mode (F3013). If it is determined that the game is in the high probability game mode (F3015: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter 223vq is 1 (F3016), and if it is 1 (F3016: Yes), the presentation mode of the time-saving end suggestion presentation that results in promotion to the super chance mode is determined (F3017), and the process proceeds to F3014.

In this way, in this 22nd control example, when the probability variable game state is set based on winning the jackpot B (3R probability variable jackpot), even if the chance mode is set after the jackpot game ends, if the special pattern variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times), the mode will be promoted to the super chance mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player think that the final variation of the chance mode may promote the mode to the super chance mode, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play when the remaining number of chance mode times becomes 0.

If it is determined in the processing of F3015 that the game is not in the special probability game state (F3015: No), the normal game state is set, and the normal state presentation mode determination processing 22 is executed (F3018). Here, the contents of the normal state presentation mode determination processing 22 (F3018) will be explained with reference to FIG. 729. FIG. 729 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal state presentation mode determination processing 22 (F3018).

When the normal state presentation mode determination process 22 (F3018) is executed, first, based on the variation pattern acquired in the process of F2908 of the variation display setting process 22 (F2113 in FIG. 727), a variation pattern selection table (not shown) is referenced to determine the type of variation presentation (F3101). Then, it is determined whether the determined variation presentation mode is a shutter closing reach (F3102). If a shutter closing reach is determined (F3102: Yes), the presentation mode is determined (F3103) based on the result of the special pattern lottery and the value of the first presentation counter 223vf, with reference to the shutter closing reach selection table 222ve (see FIG. 696), and the process proceeds to F3108.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F3102 that the shutter closing reach is not reached (F3102: No), it is determined whether or not a movie execution reach is reached (F3104). If it is determined that a movie execution reach is reached (F3104: Yes), the presentation mode for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is decided (F3105), setting information for the operation effective period corresponding to the presentation pattern is stored in the presentation SW effective time memory area 223vp (F3106), and the processing proceeds to F3108.

If it is determined in the process of F3104 that the movie execution reach is not reached (F3104: No), the process determines the presentation mode corresponding to the determined variable presentation type (F3107), and proceeds to the process of F3108. In the process of F3108, the process of executing the pending presentation at the start of the fluctuation 22 (F3108) is executed. The contents of the process of executing the pending presentation at the start of the fluctuation 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 730. After that, a display variable pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set, and this process ends.

In this way, in this 22nd control example, since the normal game state is configured to be able to execute a wider variety of reach effects than the high probability game state and the time-limited game state, it is possible to prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with playing in the normal game state, which is less favorable to the player than the high probability game state and the time-limited game state.

Next, the contents of the hold effect execution process 22 at the start of fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. 730. FIG. 730 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold effect execution process 22 at the start of fluctuation. This hold effect execution process 22 at the start of fluctuation (F3109) is a process for executing a composite hold change effect based on the hold change scenario stored in the hold effect information storage area 223vl.

When the hold effect setting process 22 (F3109) is executed at the start of the change, first the hold effect information stored in the hold effect information storage area 223vl is read (F3201), and it is determined whether there is hold change scenario information (F3202). If there is no hold change scenario (F3202: No), this process ends because a composite hold change effect has not been set. On the other hand, if there is hold change scenario information (F3202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the current special pattern is 10 seconds or more (F3203). If the change time is not 10 seconds or more (F3203: No), this process ends.

In this way, in this 22nd control example, the composite reserve change performance corresponding to the reserve change scenario is executed only when the change time is 10 seconds or more. This is because the reserve change performance executed in this 22nd control example is a performance in which the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 are operated, and therefore the reserve change performance is executed, and the change of the special pattern ends during the period from when the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 are moved to when they are stored, and the next change is prevented from starting while the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 are still in the movable state.

In the process of F3203, if the change time is 10 seconds or more (F3203: Yes), it is determined whether the stored reserved change scenario is 1, 4, 7, or 9 (F3204). If the reserved change scenario is 1, 4, 7, or 9 (F3204: Yes), it is determined whether the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change is the third reserved pattern hr3 (see FIG. 672) (F3205), and if it is the third reserved pattern hr3 (F3205: Yes), the role operation scenario 2 (see FIG. 697) is determined (F3206), and the process proceeds to F3207. On the other hand, if the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change is not the third reserved pattern hr3, this process is terminated.

Note that reserve change scenarios 1, 4, 7, and 9 are all scenarios in which the color of the reserved pattern immediately before the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserve change is transferred to the color of the reserved pattern immediately before the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserve change, so the reserved pattern immediately before the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserve change is hidden by the left change device Ym1.Note that reserve change scenario 2 is a special scenario in which the color of the target reserve is changed by hiding the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserve change with the change device Ym2.

In the process of F3204, if the reserved change scenario is not 1, 2, 4, 7, or 9 (F3204: No), it is determined whether the reserved pattern targeted for the reserved change is the second reserved pattern hr2 (see FIG. 672) (F3210). If it is not the second reserved pattern hr2 (F3210: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the second reserved pattern hr2 (F3210: Yes), it is determined whether the later reserved setting flag 223vn is on (F3211). If the later reserved setting flag 223vn is on (F3211: Yes), that is, if the state is such that the reserved ball corresponding to the reserved pattern targeted for the reserved change has not been obtained after the next reserved ball has been obtained, the later reserved setting flag 223vn is set to off (F3215), the reserved change scenario stored in the reserved performance information storage area 223vl is cleared (F3216), and this process is terminated.

In this way, when the later reserve setting flag 223vn is on, the composite reserve change presentation is not executed because all reserve change scenarios other than reserve change scenarios 1, 4, 7, and 9 are scenarios in which the color of the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserve change is transferred to the color of the reserved pattern acquired after the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserve change. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent an unnatural presentation from being executed for the player.

In the process of F3211, if the later reserved setting flag 223vn is not on (F3211: No), it is next determined whether the reserved change scenario stored is either 5 or 9 (F3212). If it is determined that the reserved change scenario is not either 6 or 11 (F3212: No), role operation scenario 1 is decided (F3213) and the process moves to F3207. As described above, the reserved change scenarios 3, 5, 8, and 10 are all scenarios in which the color of the reserved pattern acquired after the reserved change target reserved pattern is transferred to the color of the reserved pattern target of the reserved change, so the right change role Ym2 performs an operation to hide the reserved pattern target of the reserved change.

On the other hand, if the process of F3212 determines that the reserved pattern is either reserved pattern 6 or 11 (F3214: Yes), then the reel operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 697) is selected (F3214) and the process proceeds to F3207. Note that both reserved pattern change scenarios 6 and 11 are scenarios in which the colors of the reserved patterns before and after the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change are transferred to the target reserved pattern, so in reel operation scenario 3, the first reserved pattern hr1 is hidden by the left change reel Ym1, and the third reserved pattern hr3 is hidden by the right change reel Ym2.

In the process of F3207, the presentation mode corresponding to the reserved change scenario stored in the reserved presentation information storage area 223vl is determined (F3207), and a display pattern command indicating the determined presentation mode is set (F3208). Then, a reel operation command indicating the determined reel operation scenario is set (F3209), the reserved presentation restriction flag 223vm is set to off (F3217), and this process ends.

In this way, in this 22nd control example, based on a preset reserve change scenario, it is determined whether or not the reserve change presentation corresponding to the reserve change scenario can be executed in the change, and if it can be executed, the reserve change presentation is executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent malfunctions that occur when the special pattern change ends while the reserve change presentation is being executed, and to prevent presentations that seem unnatural to the player being executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 731, the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 22 (F2107) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 731 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 22 (F2107). This frame button input monitoring/presentation processing 22 (F2107) is executed within the main processing (see FIG. 717) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and generates and sets a display command based on the operation of the frame button 22A in order to execute an effect in response to the player's operation in order to enhance the presentation effect in the third pattern display device 81.

In the frame button input monitoring and performance process 22 (Fig. 731, F2107), it is first determined whether the volume adjustment button (up button 600b or down button 600d) or the light adjustment button (right button 600c or left button 600e) has been operated (F3301). If an operation has been performed (F3301: Yes), it is determined whether the adjustment period flag 223vx is on (F3302). If it is not on (F3302: No), it is determined whether the environmental information adjustment screen is to be displayed (F3303), the adjustment period flag 223vx is set to on (F3304), and the elapsed timer 223vy is set to a value corresponding to 10 seconds (F3305).

Then, it is determined whether the game is in the standby period (F3306), and if it is determined that the game is in the standby period (F3306: Yes), an operation scenario is set for moving the adjustment role (sword role Ym3) to the environment adjustment position (see FIG. 678 (b)) (F3307), and the adjustment role movable flag 223vi is set to ON (F3308). Then, the mode for indicating that the adjustment role is in motion (display of the display area HR3 in FIG. 678) is determined (F3309), and the process proceeds to F3310.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3306 that the game is not in the standby period (F3306: No), that is, the special symbol is being displayed or a jackpot is being played, the process skips the processes of F3307 to F3309 and proceeds to the process of F3310. In this way, in this 22nd control example, if the selection button 600 is operated during a period other than the standby period, the adjustment device (sword device Ym3) is not changed to the environment adjustment position, so that a problem does not occur in which the adjustment device (sword device Ym3) overlaps with the variable performance and the player cannot see the variable performance.

In the 22nd control example, if the selection button 600 is operated during a period other than the standby period, the adjustment device (sword device Ym3) is not changed to the environment adjustment position. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the adjustment device Ym3 may be changed to the environment adjustment position, and the special pattern variable presentation may be displayed in a reduced size at a position that does not overlap with the adjustment device (sword device Ym3).

In the process of F3302, if the adjustment period flag 223vx is on (F3302: Yes), the environmental information adjustment screen is already being displayed, so the environmental information stored in the environmental information storage area 223vk is updated to correspond to the button operation content (F3311), and the mode corresponding to the updated environmental information is determined (F3312). Then, the elapsed timer 223vy is reset to a value corresponding to 10 seconds (F3313), and the process proceeds to F3310.

In the process of F3301, if the volume adjustment button (up button 600b or down button 600d) or the light adjustment button (right button 600c or left button 600e) has not been operated (F3301: No), it is determined whether the decision button 600a has been operated (F3314). If the decision button 600a has been operated (F3314: Yes), decision button operation process 22 (F3315) is executed, and the process proceeds to F3310. The contents of decision button operation process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 732.

On the other hand, if the decision button has not been operated in the process of F3314 (F3314: No), the effect button operation process 22 is executed (F3316), and the process of F3310 is executed. In the process of F3310, a display command corresponding to the determined mode is set (F3310), and this process ends. The contents of the effect button operation process 22 will be described later with reference to FIG. 733.

Next, the contents of the decision button operation process 22 (F3315) executed in the frame button input monitoring/performance process 22 (see F2107 in FIG. 731) will be described with reference to FIG. 732. FIG. 732 is a flowchart showing the contents of the decision button operation process 22.

When the decision button operation process 22 (F3315) is executed, first it is determined whether the adjustment period flag 223vx is on (F3351). If it is determined that the adjustment period flag 223vx is not on (F3351: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the adjustment period flag 223vx is on (F3351: Yes), the value of the elapsed timer is set to 1 (F3352), and it is determined whether the adjustment feature movable flag 223vi is on (F3353). If the adjustment feature movable flag 223vi is not on (F3353: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the adjustment reel movable flag 223vi is on (F3352: Yes), the adjustment reel (sword reel Ym3) is in the environment adjustment position, so an operation scenario is set to move the adjustment reel (sword reel Ym3) to its initial position (F3354), and the display mode indicating the end of the environment adjustment (environment adjustment end display cm1 in FIG. 679(a)) is determined (F3355). Then, the adjustment reel movable flag 223vi is set to off (F3356), the limit timer 223vj is set to a value corresponding to 10 seconds (F3357), and this process is terminated.

When the adjustment device (sword device Ym3) is in the environment adjustment position and the display of the special symbol begins, a process of turning off all the LEDs associated with the adjustment device Ym3 (see F2904 in FIG. 727) is executed. However, when the adjustment device (sword device Ym3) is changed from the environment adjustment position to the initial position in response to the operation of the enter button, the special symbol change performance has not yet been executed, and there is no risk of the player misunderstanding that the operation of the adjustment device (sword device Ym3) is part of the change performance. Therefore, the LEDs associated with the adjustment device (sword device Ym3) are changed to the initial position without being turned off all.

In addition, by setting the value of the elapsed timer 223vy to 1 in the decision button operation process 22, the value of the elapsed timer 223vy can be set to 0 when the next performance update process 22 (see F2111 in FIG. 734) is executed, so that the process of setting the flag 223vx to off during the adjustment period can be unified.

Next, referring to FIG. 733, the contents of the effect button operation process 22 (F3319) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 22 (see F2107 in FIG. 731) will be described. FIG. 733 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button operation process 22 (F3319).

When the effect button operation process 22 (F3319) is executed, first, it is determined whether the effect button 22 has been operated (F3401). If the effect button 22 has not been operated (F3401: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the effect button 22 has been operated (F3401: Yes), it is determined whether the effect SW is in an effective period (F3402). The effect SW effective period is set based on the information stored in the effect SW effective time memory area 223vp. If it is determined that the effect SW is in an effective period (F342: Yes), the movie playback mode is determined (F3403), and the movie in progress flag 223vv is set to on (F3404). Thereafter, the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the other effect buttons is determined (F3405), and this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of F3402 that the performance SW is not in an effective period (F3402: No), the process of F3405 is executed and this process ends.

Next, the contents of the performance update process 22 (F2111) will be described with reference to FIG. 734. FIG. 734 is a flowchart showing the contents of the performance update process 22 (F2111). When the performance update process 22 (F2111) is executed, it is first determined whether the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is equal to or greater than 0 (F3501).

If the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is equal to or greater than 0 (F3501: Yes), the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is updated (F3502), and it is determined whether the updated value of the elapsed timer 223vy is 0 (F3503). If the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is not 0 (F3503: No), the process proceeds to F3510.

On the other hand, if the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is 0 (F3503: Yes), a display mode indicating the end of the environmental adjustment (environment adjustment end display cm1 in FIG. 679) is set (F3504), and the adjustment period flag 223vx is set to OFF (F3505). Then, it is determined whether the adjustment reel moving flag 223vi is ON (F3506). If the adjustment reel moving flag 223vi is not ON (F3506: No), the process proceeds to F3510. If the adjustment reel moving flag 223vi is ON (F3506: Yes), an operation scenario for moving the adjustment reel (sword reel Ym3) to the initial position is set (F3507), the adjustment reel moving flag 223vi is set to OFF (F3508), a value corresponding to 10 seconds is set to the limit timer 223vj (F3509), and the process proceeds to F3510.

In the process of F3501, if the value of the elapsed timer 223vy is not equal to or greater than 0 (F3501: No), that is, if the environmental information adjustment screen is not displayed, the processes of F3502 to F3509 are skipped and the process proceeds to F3510.

In the process of F3510, it is determined whether the value of the limit timer 223vj is 0 or greater (F3510), and if the value of the limit timer 223vj is 0 or greater (F3511: Yes), the value of the limit timer 223vj is updated (F3511) and the process proceeds to F3512. On the other hand, in the process of F3510, if the value of the limit timer 223vj is not 0 or greater (F3510), that is, if no value is set in the limit timer 223vj, the process proceeds to F3512.

In the process of F3512, it is determined whether the movie has finished playing in the movie play reach (F3512). If the movie has not finished playing (F3512: No), the process moves to F3517. On the other hand, if the movie has finished playing (F3512: Yes), it is determined whether the movie play flag 223vv is on (F3513). If the movie play flag 223vv is not on (F3513: No), this means that the movie play reach has not been executed, so the processes of F3514 to F3516 are skipped and the process moves to F3517.

In the processing of F3513, if the movie in progress flag 223vv is on (F3513:Ye number), the shaking display mode (the display mode in which the third symbol is shaking, as shown in FIG. 684(b)) is set (F3514), the shaking standby flag 223vw is set to on (F3515), the movie in progress flag 223vv is set to off (F3516), and the processing proceeds to F3517.

In the processing of F3517, update processing of various other counters and timers is performed (F3517), and this processing ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 22nd control example, when a presentation (a reserved change presentation) is executed in which the display mode of the reserved patterns corresponding to the acquired reserved balls is changed, the reserved patterns other than the one to be changed are hidden by the decorative movable parts (change parts Ym1, Ym2). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly show the player which reserved pattern is the one to be changed.

In addition, when the decorative movable parts (decorative movable parts Ym1, Ym2) perform the action of hiding reserved symbols other than the one to be changed, the action of hiding reserved symbols other than the one to be changed is performed in stages. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting which reserved symbol will be the one to be changed during the period from the start of the reserved change performance to the end of the reserved change performance.

In the 22nd control example, the decorative movable part is used to hide the reserved patterns other than the one to be changed, but this is not limited to this. The third pattern display device 81 may be configured to display a blocking mode (for example, a display mode imitating a shutter) to make the display area in which the reserved patterns other than the one to be changed are displayed invisible. Alternatively, the third pattern may be used to hide the reserved patterns other than the one to be changed.

<Modification of the 22nd control example>
Next, a modified example of the second control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. 797. In the above-mentioned 22nd control example, the pachinko machine 10 has a light amount adjustment function, and when adjusting the light amount during the standby period, the decorative movable role (sword role Ym3) used in the variable performance of the special pattern is changed to an environmental adjustment position, and the light amount can be adjusted by the LED attached to the decorative movable role (sword role Ym3). In contrast, the modified example of the 22nd control example is different in that the light amount is adjusted using the large sword role Ym4 instead of the sword role Ym3.

In recent years, pachinko machines 10 have become known that are equipped with decorative movable parts that are large enough to hide most of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. Some such pachinko machines 10 have the decorative movable parts moved in accordance with the demo performance that is executed during the waiting period. By configuring it in this way, the decorative movable parts are moved in the demo performance, making it easier for the player to imagine the variable performance that is executed during play, and making the player want to see the variable performance that uses this decorative movable part, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

However, with this type of pachinko machine 10, when attempting to adjust the light intensity during the execution of a demo performance, the decorative movable parts move according to the operating scenario, making it difficult to see the indicator for adjusting the light intensity displayed on the LCD display, which can be a hindrance to adjusting the light intensity. In response to this problem, a modified version of this 22nd control example will be described with reference to FIG. 797.

Figure 797 (a) is an example of a pachinko machine 10 in which the decorative movable part (large sword part Ym4) is in a movable state during a demo performance. As shown in Figure 797 (a), when the large sword part Ym4 is in a movable state, most of the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81 becomes difficult to see. When the player is not operating the selection button 600, this large sword part Ym4 operates according to a set operation scenario. This operation scenario is set in the customer waiting performance processing of the 22nd control example (see Figure 717, F2105).

On the other hand, when the player operates the selection button 600, the light intensity adjustment is performed according to the operation pattern of the great sword role Ym4 and the position of the great sword role Ym4 at the time of the operation. More specifically, in the process of F3306 of the frame button input monitoring/performance process 22 (see FIG. 731, F2107) of the 22nd control example, if it is determined that the standby period is in progress (F3306: Yes), it is determined whether the position of the great sword role Ym4 is in the initial position (a position in a stored state that does not overlap with the third pattern display device 81). If it is in the initial position, the great sword role Ym4 is not changed to the environment adjustment position a (the position shown in FIG. 751(a)), and a process is performed to display the large light intensity gauge ga3 (see FIG. 679(b)) in the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is not in the initial position, it is determined whether the great sword part Ym4 is in the environment adjustment position a. If the great sword part Ym4 is in the environment adjustment position a, the great sword part Ym4 is stopped in the environment adjustment position, and processing is performed to adjust the light intensity using the LED associated with the great sword part Ym4.

In this modified example of the 22nd control example, when the great sword role Ym4 is not in the environment adjustment position a, since the great sword role Ym4 is in operation, the start of the light intensity adjustment is put on hold (delayed) until the great sword role Ym4 is moved to the initial position or to the environment adjustment position a, and a process is performed to display a notification mode (for example, displaying the words "Preparing for light intensity adjustment" in the display area of the third pattern display device 81 that is not overlapping with the great sword role Ym4) to notify the player that the start of the light intensity adjustment is on hold (delayed).

Next, it is determined whether the motion pattern of the great sword role Ym4 is a motion pattern (motion pattern A) in which it changes from the initial position to the environment adjustment position a. If it is motion pattern A, the great sword role Ym4 is stopped at the environment adjustment position a, a process is performed to discard (or interrupt) the set motion scenario, and a process is performed to hide the notification mode for notifying the player that it is waiting (delayed). On the other hand, if the motion pattern of the great sword role Ym4 is not motion pattern A, that is, if it is a motion pattern (motion pattern B) in which it changes from the environment adjustment position a to the initial position, the great sword role Ym4 is stopped at the initial position, a process is performed to display the light quantity gauge ga3 in the main display area Dm, and a process is performed to hide the notification mode for notifying the player that it is waiting (delayed).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to eliminate the need to reset the movement pattern of the great sword role Ym4, which moves according to a movement pattern that follows the movement scenario.

It is also possible to configure the device to determine whether to change the large sword role Ym4 to the initial position or to the environmental adjustment position a depending on the position during operation. For example, even if operation pattern A is set, if the current position of the large sword role Ym4 is closer to the initial position than the environmental adjustment position a, the period of waiting for the start of light intensity adjustment can be shortened by changing it to the initial position.

Figure 797 (b) is an example of a display screen when the special symbol starts to change during the light intensity adjustment. In the above-mentioned 22nd control example, when the decorative movable part is in the environment adjustment position and the special symbol starts to change, the decorative movable part is moved from the environment adjustment position to the initial position. In contrast, in a modified example of the 22nd control example, as shown in Figure 797 (b), during the period until the light intensity adjustment is completed, the large sword part Ym4 is moved to the environment adjustment position b (the position in Figure 797 (b)), and the change of the special symbol is displayed in a reduced size in the display area HR7 on the left side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. Then, when the player operates the decision button 600a and the light intensity adjustment is completed, the large sword part Ym4 is moved to the stored state (a position that does not overlap with the liquid crystal display of the third symbol display device 81).

When the large sword Ym4 is in the environment adjustment position b (i.e., when the light intensity adjustment is being performed during the variation of the special symbol), for example, when a variation performance mode using the large sword Ym4 with a high probability of winning a jackpot is selected as the variation performance mode of the special symbol, or when a variation pattern in which a reach performance (such as a special reach) with a high probability of winning a jackpot is selected, the large sword Ym4 may be changed to a stored state before the light intensity adjustment is completed (i.e., regardless of the player's operation of the decision button 600a), and the display area HR7 in which the variation performance of the special symbol is displayed may be enlarged. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the performance with a high probability of winning a jackpot. In addition, the operation of the large sword Ym4 during the light intensity adjustment can be made interesting, thereby improving the fun of the game.

Next, referring to Fig. 798 and Fig. 799, a modified example of the shutter closing reach performance executed in the present 22nd control example will be described. In the above-mentioned shutter closing reach performance (see Fig. 681 to Fig. 683), the shutter closes to proceed to the next stage, and when the final stage is reached, or when the shutter is completely opened by an item obtained in the middle stage, the winning of the jackpot is notified. In contrast, in the modified shutter closing reach performance, the winning of the jackpot is not necessarily notified when the final stage is reached, but is configured to be notified at any stage, which is a major difference. In addition, the color of the shutter suggests the type of pattern when the middle pattern that is changing in the reach state stops, and the number of times the shutter closes suggests the type of the third pattern that is finally stopped and displayed. More specifically, the description will be made with reference to Fig. 798 and Fig. 799.

Figure 798 (a) is an example of a display screen when a development tease of the shutter closing reach effect variation occurs when a reach state is reached. In the center of the main display area Dm, a reach state is displayed in which the third symbol "11" is displayed stopped in two of the three symbol rows, and the third symbol (final stopped symbol) is displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol row, and a display area HR4 is formed in the upper center of the main display area Dm, where a guide mode is displayed to inform the player that a reach state is reached. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand that a reach state is reached.

In addition, the shutters St3 and St4 are displayed in a rattling, vibrating manner on the left and right ends of the main display area Dm, and the sub-display area Ds displays the text "When the shutters close, progress to a shutter closed reach," which is a notification manner for notifying the player of game information related to the presentation. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand that when the shutters St3 and St4 displayed in the main display area Dm close, the presentation will progress to a higher-level reach presentation (shutter closed reach presentation).

In the example shown in FIG. 798(a), the third symbol is displayed as "11" in the two symbol rows in the center of the main display area Dm, but in this 22nd control example, the number is set based on the results of a lottery for a special symbol from the numbers "1" to "8".

Figure 798 (b) is an example of a display screen when the performance has progressed to a shutter closing reach performance. As shown in Figure 798 (b), in the main display area Dm, a performance is executed in which the shutters St3, St4 close with the characters St3a, St4a "blue" displayed to indicate that the shutters St3, St4 are in the first display mode, and in the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Shutter closing reach begins, even numbers are your chance" are displayed, which is a notification mode to notify the player of game information related to the performance.

Here, in a modified example of the shutter closing reach performance, the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 is set to either a first display mode in which the word "blue" is displayed, or a second display mode in which the word "red" is displayed. When the first display mode is displayed, it is suggested that the final stop pattern will stop at an even number pattern, and when the second display mode is displayed, it is suggested that the final stop pattern will stop at an odd number pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 798(b), since the word "blue" St3a and St4a are displayed on the shutters St3 and St4 (i.e., the first display mode), the notification mode "Even number pattern is chance" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds. On the other hand, when the word "red" is displayed on the shutters St3 and St4 (i.e., the second display mode), the notification mode "Odd number pattern is chance" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds.

In a modified version of the shutter closing reach effect, the final stop symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol when the shutter is completely opened. When shutters St3 and St4 are displayed in the first display mode, any one of the numbers "2, 4, 6, 8" is displayed as the final stop symbol, and when they are displayed in the second display mode, any one of the numbers "1, 3, 7, 9" is displayed as the final stop symbol.

In the modified shutter closing reach performance, the shutters St3 and St4 have two display modes, but this is not limited to this and three or more modes may be used. For example, a third display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 displaying the word "rainbow" may be configured to be configurable, and when the third display mode is displayed, it is announced that a jackpot has been won regardless of whether the shutters St3 and St4 are fully opened on an even or odd number of times.

In addition, the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 may be configured so that the player can distinguish which display mode they are by making the color of the shutters St3 and St4 blue (or red) instead of displaying the letters St3a and St4a "blue" (or "red").

On the other hand, if the development tease of the modified shutter closing reach performance (see FIG. 799(a)) fails, the final stopping pattern, which is a combination indicating a miss win, is displayed, and a notification mode (for example, the word "Failed") is displayed to indicate that the development to the shutter closing reach performance has failed.

Figure 799 (a) is an example of a display screen when a branching effect in a modified shutter closing reach effect is being executed from the state of Figure 798 (b). In the main display area Dm, the shutters St3 and St4 go from a closed state (see Figure 798 (b)) to a half-open state, and an effect is executed in which the shutters vibrate to tease whether or not they will close again.

In addition, in the center of the main display area Dm, a reach state is displayed in which the third symbol "22" is displayed stopped in two of the three symbol rows, and the third symbol (final stopping symbol) is displayed in a fluctuating manner in the remaining symbol row.

In addition, the display area HR4, which displays the currently reached stage and a guide to indicate the final stage, displays "Continues 2/6 when the shutter closes" at the top center of the main display area Dm. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand that the current stage is the second stage of the shutter closing reach performance, and that the current shutter closing reach performance can go up to a maximum of the sixth stage.

In addition, in the modified shutter closing reach performance, it is possible to set either a pattern in which the final stage is the sixth stage, or a pattern in which the final stage is the fifth stage.

Here, in the shutter closing reach performance, when the shutters St3 and St4 are closed, the game proceeds to the next stage and one is added to the number of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. In the example shown in FIG. 799(a), because the shutters St3 and St4 have been closed once since the state of FIG. 798(a), one is added to the third symbol "1" that was stopped and displayed in the center of the main display area Dm in FIG. 798(a), and it becomes "2" as shown in FIG. 799(a).

In the example shown in FIG. 799(a), the sixth stage is the final stage, so the shutters St3 and St4 are closed five times before the sixth stage is reached. Therefore, when the final stage is reached, the third symbol displayed as stopped in the center of the main display area Dm will be "66." As described above, when the shutters St3 and St4 are displayed in the first display mode, the final stopped symbol is an even number, suggesting to the player that there is a high possibility that a jackpot will be announced when the final stage is reached.

On the other hand, when the display mode of shutters St3 and St4 is the second display mode, the final stopped symbol is an odd number, suggesting to the player that it is unlikely that a jackpot will be announced when the final stage is reached. Therefore, in this case, it suggests to the player that it is likely that a jackpot will be announced when shutters St3 and St4 are fully opened at the odd number stage before the final stage is reached.

Figure 799 (b) is an example of a display screen when the shutters are fully opened in the fourth stage. In the example shown in Figure 799 (b), the characters "4/6" are displayed in the display area HR4 as a guide mode to inform the player that the current stage is the fourth stage, and an effect is executed in the main display area Dm in which the shutters St3, St4 are fully opened from the closed state (see Figure 798 (b)). Then, the third pattern displayed in the main display area Dm is displayed as "444", which is a display mode to inform the player that a jackpot has been won, and the characters "jackpot" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, which is a notification mode to indicate that a jackpot has been won, so that an effect is executed in which the shutters St3, St4 are fully opened in the fourth stage, and the player is informed in an easy-to-understand manner that a jackpot has been won.

As described above, if the result of the lottery for the special symbol is not a jackpot, when the shutter is fully opened, the third symbol displayed in the main display area Dm will be displayed in a display mode (e.g., "454") to inform the player that it is a miss win, and the secondary display area Ds will display a display mode (e.g., the word "unfortunate") to inform the player that it is a miss win.

As explained above, in the modified shutter closing reach, by gradually displaying information on the type of third pattern that will be stopped and displayed in the center of the main display area Dm at the start of the shutter closing reach performance, information on the type of display mode of the shutters St3 and St4, and information on the final stage pattern that will be displayed in the display area HR4, the player can be given the fun of predicting the third pattern that will be stopped and displayed by combining this information.

The display modes of shutters St3 and St4 indicate advantageous and disadvantageous stages for the player, making the player expect the shutter to fully open in advantageous stages and closing in disadvantageous stages, allowing the player to enjoy the reach variation presentation until the very end without getting bored.

In the example shown in FIG. 799(a), the display area HR4 is configured to display the currently reached stage and a guide to indicate the final stage, but this is not limited to this, and a number corresponding to the current number of times the shutter is closed and the maximum number of times it can be closed may also be displayed.

Also, the configuration may be such that the performance of acquiring the capsule Cp1 described with reference to FIG. 683 is executed. For example, when the HOLD ticket Cp1a shown in FIG. 683(b) is used, the number of the third pattern currently stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm is maintained even when proceeding to the next stage, so that when the third pattern corresponding to the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 is displayed (for example, when the third pattern stopped and displayed when the shutters St3 and St4 are in the first display mode is an even number), the possibility of winning the jackpot increases when the HOLD ticket Cp1a is used. On the other hand, when the third pattern not corresponding to the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 is displayed (for example, when the third pattern stopped and displayed when the shutters St3 and St4 are in the first display mode is an odd number), the possibility of winning the jackpot decreases when the HOLD ticket Cp1a is used. In this way, the advantage or disadvantage of the player can be changed depending on the timing of the use of the HOLD ticket Cp1a, further increasing the interest of the game.

For example, if the second display mode is set as the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 (i.e., the odd-numbered third symbol is the chance), and the third symbol "55" is displayed in the main display area Dm at the time the fifth stage is reached, the player knows that the third symbol in the reach state at the time the shutters St3 and St4 are closed is "66" and that the final stop symbol will be an odd number, so the player will know that he or she has missed and won before the shutters St3 and St4 are fully opened, and there is a risk that the player's sense of expectation will not be sustained until the end of the shutter closing reach. On the other hand, since the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 suggests the type of the final stop symbol (even or odd), if the even-numbered third symbol is displayed in the reach state as the final stop symbol when the shutters St3 and St4 are in the second display mode, the credibility of the information suggested by the display mode of the shutters St3 and St4 will be lost. Therefore, if the information indicated by the display mode of shutters St3 and St4 does not correspond to the display mode for notifying the player of a jackpot win, the middle symbol nz1, which displays the word "jackpot" as shown in FIG. 682(b), is displayed as the final stopped symbol, making it possible to notify the player of the lottery result in an unexpected way without giving the player a sense of incongruity, thereby maintaining the player's sense of anticipation until the very end of the shutter closing reach.

<23rd control example>
Next, the 23rd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 735 to Fig. 755. The pachinko machine 10 in this 23rd control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example in that the player can select a presentation mode with different expectation of winning the jackpot for the variable presentation to be executed (the presentation can be customized), and that the running pending change presentation that moves the change role Ym1, Ym2 can be executed as a variable presentation to increase the expectation of the running special pattern variation winning the jackpot. The rest of the contents are the same, and the detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

There has been a pachinko machine 10 that can perform a selection operation (performance customization operation) to vary the expectation of winning a jackpot indicated by each performance mode of the executed variable performance. Here, the expectation of winning a jackpot indicates the expectation of winning a jackpot when a variable performance in which a target performance mode is set is executed, and is specified based on the percentage set as the performance mode of the variable performance (jackpot variable performance) executed when the target performance mode wins a jackpot and the percentage set as the performance mode of the variable performance (miss variable performance) executed when a miss is won. The higher the percentage set during the jackpot variable performance, or the lower the percentage set during the miss variable performance, the higher the expectation of winning a jackpot. On the other hand, the lower the percentage set during the jackpot variable performance, or the higher the percentage set during the miss variable performance, the lower the expectation of winning a jackpot.

In other words, by increasing the rate at which a specific presentation mode is selected as the presentation mode for a jackpot variation presentation, or by lowering the rate at which a specific presentation mode is selected as the presentation mode for a miss variation presentation, the jackpot winning expectation for the specific presentation mode increases. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a presentation mode with a high jackpot winning expectation to be set when a jackpot has not been won. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult for a presentation mode with a low jackpot winning expectation to be set when a jackpot has been won.

In this 23rd control example, as in each of the control examples described above, the probability of not winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery (probability of winning a miss) is set to be higher than the probability of winning the jackpot. Therefore, the miss variable performance is more likely to be executed when the expectation of winning the jackpot is set low than when the expectation of winning the jackpot is set high, and therefore the execution frequency can be increased.

By configuring the performance customization operation to be executable in this way, it is possible to vary the expectation of winning a jackpot when a specific performance mode (e.g., chance notice) is set depending on the set performance mode; for example, a player who wants to experience a variable performance in which a specific performance mode is set regardless of whether or not a jackpot is won can increase the frequency of variable performances in which various performance modes are set by executing a performance customization operation to lower the expectation of winning a jackpot for each performance mode. On the other hand, a player who is paying close attention to whether or not a jackpot is won can know in advance from the content of the performance that is executed that there is a high possibility of winning a jackpot by executing a performance customization operation to increase the expectation of winning a jackpot for a variable performance in which a specific performance mode (e.g., chance notice) is set.

Here, in conventional pachinko machines 10, when the above-mentioned custom performance operation is performed during a special symbol change, it is common for the performance mode corresponding to the custom performance operation performed to be set after the special symbol change currently being performed has stopped and displayed. In other words, in conventional pachinko machines 10, the performance mode of the change performance to be performed during the special symbol change period is determined at the start of the special symbol change, and the change performance is executed based on the determined performance mode. Therefore, it is not possible to switch the performance mode midway through the change performance currently being executed, and it is common for the performance mode to be set to the performance mode corresponding to the set performance mode from the change performance corresponding to the next special symbol change.

In this case, there is a discrepancy between the timing at which the player executes the effect customization operation and the timing at which the effect mode is switched based on the execution of the effect customization operation, making it difficult to execute the variable effect desired by the player.

In contrast to this, in the present 23rd control example, when a custom effect operation is performed during the period in which a special symbol variation is being performed, the presentation state of the variation effect corresponding to the currently being performed special symbol variation can be made to correspond to the newly set presentation mode based on the custom effect operation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to solve the conventional problem of a discrepancy between the timing at which the player performs the custom effect operation and the timing at which the presentation mode is switched based on the execution of the custom effect operation.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, the type of presentation mode selectable by the presentation custom operation is configured to vary depending on the timing at which the presentation custom operation is executed. Specifically, a special presentation mode (premium mode) is provided that is selectable when a presentation custom operation is executed during a jackpot fluctuation. This configuration makes it possible for a player to know whether or not they have won a jackpot by executing a presentation custom operation, so that players who want to know whether or not they have won a jackpot as soon as possible can be motivated to perform a presentation custom operation.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, a notification effect can be executed that can notify the player that the special pattern change being executed is a jackpot change, based on the execution of a decision operation (pressing the decision button 600a) when deciding on a new presentation mode through a presentation customization operation.

In other words, in this 23rd control example, when an operation to select a presentation mode is performed using a presentation customization operation (when the right button 600c or the left button 600e is operated), a first notification effect can be executed to notify the player that a jackpot is changing, and when an operation to determine a presentation mode is performed using a presentation customization operation (when the decision button 600a is pressed), a second notification effect can be executed to notify the player that a jackpot is changing.

By configuring it in this way, when the first notification effect is executed, it becomes possible to select the special effect mode (premium mode) as the effect mode for the special pattern change being executed (the special pattern change that results in a jackpot win) and allow the player to choose whether to see an effect that cannot normally be seen, or to not select the special effect mode (premium mode) and watch the normally executed change effect with peace of mind, making it easier to provide effects that suit the player's tastes.

In addition, because the second notification effect is executed based on the decision operation of the effect customization operation, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect to a player who performs the decision operation to switch the effect mode.

In this 23rd control example, the first notification effect and the second notification effect can be combined and executed, so that a player who executes a custom effect operation while a special symbol is changing can be notified of whether or not a jackpot change has occurred at the stage of selecting the presentation mode, and further, even if the first notification effect indicating a jackpot change has not been executed at the stage of selecting the presentation mode, the second notification effect can be executed at the stage of deciding the presentation mode.

By configuring it in this way, custom effects can be executed while the special symbols are changing, making it possible to notify the player that a jackpot is changing at various times, enhancing the effect of the presentation.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, the second notification effect is configured to be executed more easily when a presentation mode (chance up mode) in which the expected probability of winning a jackpot when a specific presentation mode is set by the presentation customization operation is determined, compared to when another presentation mode (normal mode) is determined. In other words, the second notification effect is configured to be executed relatively easily when a presentation mode type desired by a player who wants to know (predict) whether or not a jackpot has been won as soon as possible is determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that suits the player's preferences more easily.

Next, in this 23rd control example, as described above, the reserved pattern display is configured to be hidden when the presentation pattern (reach mode) of the variable presentation currently being executed progresses (develops) into a presentation pattern with a high expectation of winning a jackpot. In other words, the reserved pattern display is configured to be hidden in order to clearly inform the player that the presentation being executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is a variable presentation to show the results of the special pattern variation currently being executed.

Then, as the presentation mode for hiding the reserved symbols, a presentation mode for moving the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 is set in the same way as when the reserved change presentation is executed in the above-mentioned 22nd control example, and it is configured so that immediately after the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 are moved, it is difficult for the player to know whether a reserved change presentation for changing the display mode of the reserved symbols has been executed or a presentation for hiding the reserved symbols has been executed.

By configuring it in this way, players can have fun predicting which effect will be the target when the changeable parts Ym1 and Ym2 are moved.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, when a presentation mode is set in which the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2 are moved to hide the reserved patterns as a variable presentation, if the reserved patterns are displayed in a display mode of three or more colors as the reserved pattern display and the result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the variable presentation being executed is a jackpot win, the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2 are configured to be able to execute a presentation in which all reserved pattern displays are hidden and the display mode of the execution reserved pattern (execution pending pattern) corresponding to the special pattern change being executed is changed to a display mode (rainbow colors) indicating a jackpot win.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to give the effect of notifying the player of the lottery results for the special pattern change that is currently being performed in addition to the effect of simply hiding the reserved pattern display (the effect of moving the change role Ym1, Ym2), so that it is possible to execute an effect that is unexpected for the player, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

<About the content of the performance in the 23rd control example>
Here, referring to Fig. 735 to Fig. 740, characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this 23rd control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in this 23rd control example is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that it has an effect mode selection function (effect customization function) that can change the probability of winning a jackpot for the variable effect executed, and is configured to be able to execute an effect based on an effect customization operation for selecting the effect mode, and is configured to be able to execute an effect that hides the reserved pattern display as a variable effect corresponding to the special pattern change being executed.

First, with reference to Fig. 735 to Fig. 738, the content of the effects executed based on the effect customization operation will be described. A detailed description will be given later with reference to Fig. 737, but in this 23rd control example, four types of effect modes (normal mode, chance up mode, probability change notification mode, premium mode) can be selected as the effect modes selectable by the effect customization operation, and the effect customization operation for selecting the effect mode can be executed when the special pattern variation is not being executed or when the special pattern variation is being executed.

Figure 735 (a) shows an example of a display screen that is displayed when the normal state is set as the game state and the normal mode is set as the presentation mode, and the chance up mode is selected by presentation customization operation during the latter half of the variation presentation corresponding to the special symbol variation (after a reach is achieved).

As shown in FIG. 735(a), when the normal state is set as the game state, as in the 22nd control example described above, the word "left hit" is displayed in the small display area Dm4 formed on the upper left side of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 as a game method guidance mode for guiding the player to a game method that is advantageous to the player, and notifies the player that during the normal state, left hit play, that is, left hit play in which the game ball is fired toward the game area (left side area) formed on the left side of the variable display unit 80 (see FIG. 620), is a game method that is advantageous to the player.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this 23rd control example, regardless of the set game state or the presence or absence of a jackpot game, the small display area Dm4 in which the game method guidance mode is displayed is configured to always be formed in the same position (upper left position) on the display screen. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide easy-to-understand gameplay for players who are unfamiliar with playing pachinko machine 10, since the game method guidance can always be displayed in the same position.

In the 23rd control example, as in the 22nd control example described above, the game method guide mode (left hit, right hit) for indicating the game method (left hit game, right hit game) that is advantageous to the player is always displayed in the small display area Dm4, but this is not limited to this. For example, the execution of a left hit game is considered to be a normal game, and a state in which the game method guide mode is not displayed in the small display area Dm4 is considered to be a game state in which the normal game (left hit game) is advantageous to the player, and when a game method other than the normal game (right hit game) becomes advantageous to the player, the characters "right hit" may be displayed in the small display area Dm4. By configuring in this way, in a game state in which the normal game (left hit game) is advantageous to the player, there is no need to display the game method guide mode (left hit), so the display area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be used for other purposes (for example, variable performance).

In addition, the small display area Dm4 may not be constantly displayed with the game method guidance mode, but may be configured to display the game method guidance mode in the small display area Dm4 only when the player wants to know a game method that is advantageous to the player. For example, the small display area Dm4 may be configured to display the game method guidance mode when a predetermined operation (long press) is performed on the operation means (frame button 22). By configuring in this way, for players who are unfamiliar with playing the pachinko machine 10, the game method guidance mode is displayed in the small display area Dm4 to make it easier to understand, and for experienced players, the performance effect can be enhanced by performing a powerful performance (a performance with a larger execution area than when the small display area Dm4 is formed) that also utilizes the display area in which the game method guidance mode can be displayed. In this case, the size of the small display area Dm4 may be changed rather than switching between display and non-display based on the operation of the operation means.

As shown in FIG. 735(a), below the small display area Dm4, a small display area Dm15 is formed, and the characters "Normal mode set" are displayed as a currently set mode display mode to indicate the currently set presentation mode. FIG. 735(a) shows a display screen in which the normal mode is set as the presentation mode, so the characters "Normal mode set" are displayed in the small display area Dm15 to indicate that the normal mode is set. When the chance up mode is set, the characters "Chance up mode set" are displayed in the small display area Dm15, when the probability change notification mode is set, the characters "Probability change notification mode set" are displayed in the small display area Dm15, and when the premium mode is set, the characters "Premium mode set" are displayed in the small display area Dm15. This configuration allows the player to know at a glance the currently set presentation mode.

Various aspects related to the performance customization operation are displayed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm. In this 23rd control example, by pressing the middle button 600a when no light adjustment operation or volume adjustment operation is being performed, a performance customization state in which a performance mode can be selected and operated is set, and by pressing the right button 600c or the left button 600e in the performance customization state, a performance mode can be selected. Then, by operating (pressing) the middle button 600a when the desired performance mode is selected, the selected performance mode can be set.

When the performance customization state is set, as shown in FIG. 735(a), a display area HR6 is formed and the selected performance mode is displayed. A small display area Dm16 is formed above the display area HR6, and the text "Use the left and right buttons + middle button to switch modes" is displayed as a guide to show the operation method in the performance customization state, i.e., the operation method for selecting a performance mode.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, until the custom presentation state is set, that is, until the middle button 600a is pressed to select the presentation mode, the text "Press the middle button to display the presentation mode selection screen" is displayed below the small display area Dm15 as a guide to guide the player on the operation method for setting the custom presentation state. In other words, the operation method for changing the presentation mode is displayed near the small display area Dm15 that shows the currently set presentation mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly inform a player who knows the currently set presentation mode that the device has a function for changing the presentation mode and the operation method for changing the presentation mode.

When the presentation customization state is set, a display mode is displayed in the display area HR6 to indicate the currently set presentation mode. A left arrow LY is displayed to the left of the display area HR6, and a right arrow RY is displayed to the right of the display area HR6. The left arrow LY and right arrow RY are display modes to guide the player through a switching operation to switch the presentation mode displayed in the display area HR6 to another presentation mode, and when the player operates the right button 600c, the right arrow RY is illuminated, and when the player operates the left button 600e, the left arrow LY is illuminated.

By operating the right button 600c or the left button 600e, a presentation mode different from the currently set presentation mode is displayed in the display area HR6. As shown in FIG. 735(a), in this 23rd control example, the display area HR6 is configured to display only one presentation mode, and the player is prevented from knowing which display mode will be displayed in the display area HR6 when the right button 600c is next operated.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 in this 23rd control example, when a presentation customization operation is performed to change the presentation mode during a jackpot fluctuation, a special presentation mode (premium mode) can be selected. Therefore, in order to prevent the player from easily grasping the types of presentation modes that can be selected in the current presentation customization operation, the next presentation mode is not displayed in the display area HR6 until the presentation mode selection operation is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to perform the presentation mode selection operation in order to grasp whether or not the special presentation mode (premium mode) is selectable.

The display contents of the display area HR6 when the performance customization state is set are not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the display mode indicating the currently selected performance mode, at least a portion of the display mode indicating the performance mode selected when the left button 600e is operated, and at least a portion of the display mode indicating the performance mode selected when the right button 600c is operated may be displayed in the display area HR6.

By configuring it in this way, players who wish to select a desired presentation mode can efficiently execute presentation customization operations.

Then, when the display mode indicating the desired presentation mode is displayed in the display area HR6 through the presentation customization operation, the middle button 600a is pressed again to complete the presentation mode switching operation.

Figure 735 (a) shows a display screen indicating that the presentation mode cannot be switched immediately when a different presentation mode has been determined by a presentation customization operation, and the words "on standby" are displayed in the auxiliary display area HR6a as a standby state indicating that the presentation mode switching operation has been normally accepted and the presentation mode has not been switched.

By displaying this waiting mode "on standby", the player can be notified that the operation to switch presentation modes has been performed normally, and this prevents the player from misunderstanding that the pachinko machine 10 is broken when the presentation mode displayed in the small display area Dm15 does not change despite the presentation mode switching operation being performed.

In FIG. 735(a), the auxiliary display area HR6a is formed near the display area HR6 to make it easier for a player who has performed a switching operation of the presentation mode while checking the display content of the display area HR6 to understand that the game is "on standby." However, the auxiliary display area HR6a may be formed near the small display area Dm15, or may be formed so that its display position overlaps with that of the small display area Dm15. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for a player who tries to check the display content of the small display area Dm15 to understand whether the presentation mode has been switched based on the switching operation of the presentation mode to understand that the game is "on standby."

On the other hand, if the presentation mode can be switched immediately at the timing when the presentation mode switching operation is performed, the display screen shown in FIG. 735(b) is displayed. FIG. 735(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the normal state is set as the game state and the normal mode is set as the presentation mode, and the chance up mode is decided by the presentation custom operation during the first half of the variable presentation corresponding to the special pattern variation (before the reach is established).

As shown in FIG. 735(b), when the presentation mode is immediately switched based on executing a presentation mode switching operation, the auxiliary display area HR6a displays the text "Set Complete" as a notification to indicate that the presentation mode has been switched, and the small display area Dm15 displays the text "Chance Up Mode Setting" to indicate the switched presentation mode.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this 23rd control example, when a performance customization operation is executed while a special pattern variation is being executed, the timing of switching the performance mode is varied depending on the progress of the currently executing variation performance. Also, the timing of switching the performance mode is varied depending on the type of performance mode selected. In addition, the timing of switching the performance mode is varied depending on the content of the variation performance executed later.

In this way, when a custom effect operation is performed while the special symbol is changing, the timing of the change in effect mode can be varied depending on various factors, providing the player with innovative gameplay in which the player can predict the outcome of the currently executing change in effect by combining the timing of the change in effect mode with the content of the currently executing change in effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 736, the display contents displayed during the selection operation of the presentation mode in the presentation customization state will be described. FIG. 736(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when the presentation mode is selected during a miss variation to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss.

The display example shown in FIG. 736(a) shows a state in which "Chance Up Mode" is set as the presentation mode, and "Normal Mode" is selected by operating the left button 600e after "Probability Change Notification Mode" has been selected by a presentation customization operation. Therefore, in FIG. 736(a), the words "Chance Up Mode Setting" are displayed in the small display area Dm15. Then, a left arrow LY is displayed in a manner indicating that the left button 600e has been operated, and the display area HR6 displays a part of the display mode indicating "Probability Change Notification Mode" (the display of "Notification Mode" in the figure) and a part of the display mode indicating "Normal Mode" (the display of "Normal" in the figure) as a display mode indicating that the selected presentation mode has switched from "Probability Change Notification Mode" to "Normal Mode". The state shown in FIG. 736(a) shows the display state in which the display mode displayed in the display area HR6 is being scrolled to the left as a result of operating the left button 600e, and the display continues to scroll until "Normal mode" is displayed in the display area HR6.

Note that FIG. 736(a) shows an example of a display in which the display mode displayed in the display area HR6 is scrolled leftward by operating the left button 600e during the performance customization state, but when a performance mode is selected by operating the right button 600c, a right arrow RY is displayed in the display mode to indicate that the right button 600c has been operated, and a display is executed in which the display mode of the display area HR6 is scrolled rightward.

In addition, in this 23rd control example, as shown in FIG. 735(a), the display area HR6 is configured to display only the display mode indicating the currently selected presentation mode, and the player is configured to be unable to grasp all of the presentation modes selectable in the current presentation customization state unless he or she operates the operating means (right button 600c, left button 600e) to scroll the display mode displayed in the display area HR6. A detailed explanation will be given later with reference to FIG. 737, but in this 23rd control example, the types of presentation modes that can be selected are varied depending on the timing at which the presentation customization state is set.

This makes it easier for players who wish to play in various presentation modes to perform operations (operations of the middle button 600a) for setting presentation customization states at various times. This makes it easier for players to actively participate in games that require them to operate the operating means.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, in some cases where a custom presentation state is set during a jackpot variation that is executed when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, a dedicated presentation mode (premium mode) that cannot be selected (is difficult to select) when a jackpot variation is not being executed can be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the player of the results of the special symbol lottery before the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed based on the execution of a selection operation to select the presentation mode, so that a custom presentation state can be proactively set for players who want to know the results of the special symbol lottery as soon as possible.

In addition, in this 23rd control example, when a presentation custom state is set, the display area HR6 is configured so that display modes other than the currently selected presentation mode are not displayed. By configuring in this way, since it is not possible to know what other presentation modes can be set simply by setting the presentation custom state, it is possible to make it easier for the player to perform operations to select a presentation mode (operation of the right button 600c and the left button 600e) in addition to performing operations to set the presentation custom state (operation of the middle button 600a). This makes it easier for the player to actively participate in games that involve operating the operating means.

As described above, in this 23rd control example, the display area HR6 is configured to display only the display mode for indicating one presentation mode, but without being limited to this, in addition to the display mode for indicating the selected presentation mode, it may be configured to display at least a portion of the display mode corresponding to the display area HR6 so that the player can grasp the presentation mode selected when the right button 600c or the left button 600e is operated before operating the right button 600c or the left button 600e. This configuration makes it easier for the player to select the desired presentation mode.

Next, referring to FIG. 736(b), the content of the presentation when a presentation custom operation is performed in a state in which the "premium mode" can be selected will be described. FIG. 736(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a presentation mode is selected during a jackpot fluctuation to indicate that the result of a special symbol lottery is a jackpot. In this 23rd control example, when a presentation custom operation is performed during a jackpot fluctuation in which a "jackpot A" type jackpot in which a probability variable state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is set after the jackpot game ends, the presentation mode "premium mode," which cannot be selected except during a jackpot fluctuation, can be selected.

Therefore, when a presentation customization operation (operation of the right button 600c and left button 600e in the presentation customization state) is performed in a state in which "premium mode" is selectable, a display mode corresponding to "premium mode" is displayed in the display area HR6. As described above, in this twenty-third control example, since only display modes for indicating the selected presentation mode are displayed in the display area HR6, the display mode corresponding to "premium mode" is displayed in the display area HR6 only when the player operates the operation means (right button 600c and left button 600e) in the presentation customization state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify a player who is performing a performance customization operation simply for the purpose of changing the performance mode of the results of the special pattern variation that is currently being performed, thereby providing a surprising performance. In addition, it is possible to have a player who wants to quickly understand the results of the currently being performed special pattern variation (the result of the special pattern lottery) proactively perform a performance customization operation.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, the player is not able to know whether or not the "Premium Mode" is selectable simply by setting the presentation custom state. Therefore, even if, for example, the player accidentally operates the middle button 600a while playing and the presentation custom state is set unintentionally, the display mode displayed based on the presentation custom state being set (the display mode displayed in the display area HR6) can be used to prevent the player from being notified of the results of the special pattern change that is currently being performed.

In the display example shown in FIG. 736(b), the display mode corresponding to the presentation mode displayed in display area HR6 only differs in the identification information (characters indicating the presentation mode) for indicating the corresponding presentation mode, and the display mode is otherwise the same; however, without being limited to this, the display mode corresponding to a presentation mode that is advantageous to the player (e.g., "premium mode") may be a display mode that is decorated to make it easier for the player to focus on than display modes corresponding to other presentation modes. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to visually inform the player that a presentation mode that is advantageous to the player is available for selection, and it is possible to provide the player with a presentation that is easy to understand.

Now, referring to FIG. 737, the selection range of presentation modes that can be selected by presentation customization operations will be described. FIG. 737(a) is a diagram that shows a schematic representation of the selection range of presentation modes that can be set during a miss variation to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a miss, and FIG. 737(b) is a diagram that shows a schematic representation of the selection range of presentation modes that can be set during a jackpot variation to indicate that the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 737(a), during a miss fluctuation, a normal selection range (normal presentation mode selection area) is set in which three types of presentation modes can be selected: "normal mode," "chance up mode," and "high probability announcement mode." As shown in FIG. 737(b), during a jackpot fluctuation, a special selection range (special presentation mode selection area) can be set in which four types of presentation modes can be selected: "normal mode," "chance up mode," "high probability announcement mode," and "premium mode."

A detailed explanation will be given later, but the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 possessed by the pachinko machine 10 of this 23rd control example has a performance customization information table 222wa, which specifies performance specification information corresponding to each performance mode and information indicating the selection order of the performance modes selected when the player executes a performance customization operation. The performance mode selection area shown in FIG. 737 is a schematic representation of the selection order of the performance modes specified in this performance customization information table 222wa.

In this 23rd control example, the type of selectable presentation mode is determined based on the game situation (whether or not the jackpot is changing) at the time when the player presses the middle button (decision button) 600a and the presentation customization state is set. When the player presses the middle button (decision button) 600a and the presentation customization state is set at a time when the special pattern is changing and a jackpot that will grant the player the most advantageous bonus (jackpot A with 10 rounds of jackpot play and a game state after the jackpot play ends in a probability change state) is being won, and the lottery for determining whether or not to make the "premium mode" selectable is won, the "premium mode" can be selected as the presentation mode.

When the selectable presentation modes are determined by the presentation customization operation, the presentation modes can be selected within the selection range according to the selection order defined in the presentation customization information table 222wa. Therefore, when the right button 600c is operated as a presentation customization operation during the special pattern variation period for indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery has been lost and that the player has won, the presentation modes are selected in the order of "probability change notification mode", "chance up mode", and "normal mode". When the right button 600c is further operated in a state where "normal mode" is selected, the "probability change notification mode" is selected in a rotary manner. By configuring in this way, even if only the right button 600c or the left button 600e is operated in the presentation customization state, all of the selectable selection modes can be reliably selected, so that even players who find it troublesome to operate multiple operating means (right button 600c, left button 600e) in the presentation customization state can reliably perform the presentation customization operation.

In addition, in this 23rd control example, when the presentation custom state is set, the display mode for indicating the currently set presentation mode is configured to be displayed first in the display area HR6. Therefore, for example, if the presentation custom state is set during a miss variation in which the "chance up mode" is set, the display mode of the "chance up mode" will be displayed in the display area HR6. Then, depending on the operation content of the right button 600c and the left button 600e, a presentation mode is selected according to the order shown in FIG. 737(a), and the display mode corresponding to the selected presentation mode is displayed in the display area HR6. With this configuration, the operation for changing the presentation mode can be performed based on the display mode displayed in the display area HR6, allowing the player to perform presentation customization operations in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, when the left button 600e is operated as a performance customization operation in a state where "Premium Mode" can be selected, the performance modes are selected in the following order: "Normal Mode", "Chance Up Mode", "Probability Change Notification Mode", and "Premium Mode". When "Premium Mode" is selected and the left button 600e is further operated, "Normal Mode" is selected in a rotary fashion. By configuring in this way, even if only the right button 600c or the left button 600e is operated in the performance customization state, all of the selectable selection modes can be reliably selected, so that even players who find it troublesome to operate multiple operating means (right button 600c, left button 600e) in the performance customization state can reliably execute the performance customization operation.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 737, the 23rd control example is configured to have the player select from multiple presentation modes based on a predetermined selection order, but without being limited to this, it may be configured so that when an operation to select a presentation mode is performed, one presentation mode can be selected randomly (in no particular order) from multiple selectable presentation modes. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the types of presentation modes that are currently selectable, and therefore it is possible to make it easier for the player to operate the operating means more in order to understand whether or not "premium mode" is selectable.

Next, referring to FIG. 738, the content of the effect that is executed when the effect mode switching operation (effect customization operation) is performed (when the decision button 600a is operated) will be described. FIG. 738 is a diagram showing an example in which a notification effect (second notification effect) that notifies a jackpot win is executed when the effect mode switching operation is performed.

As described above with reference to FIG. 735(a), normally, when a custom effect operation is executed during the latter half of the variable effect period, the effect mode is not switched and "Standby" is displayed in the auxiliary display area HR6a until the variable effect currently being executed ends (until the special pattern change currently being executed is displayed as stopped). However, when a custom effect operation executed during the latter half of the variable effect period meets a predetermined condition, the effect mode can be switched while the variable effect is being executed, as shown in FIG. 738.

Specifically, in the latter half of the variable presentation corresponding to the jackpot variation, if the "Chance Up Mode" is selected as the presentation mode to be switched to by the presentation customization operation, a predetermined condition is met, and the presentation mode can be switched while the variable presentation is being executed. In this case, "Set Complete" is displayed in the auxiliary display area HR6a as a display mode to indicate that the presentation mode has been switched, and the sound Ke1 of "Congratulations" is output from the speaker unit 308 connected to the audio output device 226 to indicate that a jackpot has been won.

In this way, by configuring the game so that a jackpot change can be notified by a custom effect operation executed while a special symbol is changing, it is possible to grant a bonus other than switching the effect mode depending on the timing of executing the custom effect operation, making it possible for the player to execute the custom effect operation at various times.

In the 23rd control example, in the latter half of the variable presentation corresponding to the jackpot variation, when the "Chance Up Mode" is selected as the presentation mode to be switched to by the presentation customization operation, the predetermined conditions for granting a bonus to the player are met, and the player is given a bonus informing them of the jackpot win by hearing the sound "Congratulations." However, the manner in which the jackpot win is not limited to this, and for example, the operation means used in the presentation customization operation (such as the decision button 600a) may be provided with a light-emitting means (such as an LED), and the operation means may be configured to emit light in a specific manner (such as rainbow colors) when the predetermined conditions are met.

Furthermore, the system may be configured to grant a bonus other than a bonus notifying a jackpot win as a bonus that is granted when a predetermined condition is met by executing a performance custom operation. For example, the system may be configured to grant a bonus notifying the currently set game state, or, in the case of a pachinko machine 10 that has a setting function that allows different jackpot probabilities to be set (for details, see the 24th control example described below), grant a bonus suggesting the currently set value.

By configuring it in this way, in this 23rd control example, the specified condition could only be met during the jackpot fluctuation, but it is now possible to meet the specified condition in other cases as well, making it possible to award bonuses based on the performance customization operation at various times.

As explained above, the 23rd control example is configured to allow the player to select from a variety of presentation modes. This configuration can prevent the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

In addition, in this 23rd control example, the expectation of winning when a presentation (preview presentation) is executed in the same presentation mode is varied depending on the selected presentation mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to execute a game according to the game content desired.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, when an operation (custom performance operation) for switching the presentation mode is performed during a jackpot fluctuation, a presentation mode that cannot be selected when an operation (custom performance operation) for switching the presentation mode is performed other than during a jackpot fluctuation is made selectable. In other words, when the timing for performing the custom performance operation satisfies a predetermined condition, a presentation mode that cannot be selected when the predetermined condition is not satisfied is made selectable.

This configuration makes it easier for players to execute custom effect operations at various times, preventing players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

In this 23rd control example, information on whether or not a jackpot change is in progress is used as the predetermined condition for varying the presentation mode selectable by the presentation customization operation, but without being limited to this, the type of presentation mode selectable by the presentation customization operation may be different between a state in which a special pattern change is being executed and a state in which a special pattern change is not being executed, the type of presentation mode selectable by the presentation customization operation may be different between a state in which the number of special pattern draws executed since the end of the previous jackpot game exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 500 times) and a state in which the number of special pattern draws has not been executed, and the type of presentation mode selectable by the presentation customization operation may be different depending on the set game state.

The types of selectable presentation modes may also be varied depending on the history of previously set presentation modes. In this case, for example, presentation modes A, B, and C may be configured to be selectable in the initial state, and if presentation mode A is selected in this state, presentation modes A1, A2, and A3 may be configured to be selectable as the next selectable presentation modes. By configuring in this way, the selectable presentation modes can be varied depending on the history of presentation mode selection, so that various presentation modes can be set for a player who wishes to play in all presentation modes.

Next, referring to Figures 739 and 740, the contents of the in-progress hold effect, which is a change effect corresponding to the in-progress special pattern change, in which the reserved pattern display is made invisible using the change role Ym1, Ym2 and only the in-progress hold pattern is displayed, will be explained. Figure 739(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the in-progress hold effect has started and the change role Ym1, Ym2 are moved to hide part of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and Figure 739(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the change role Ym1, Ym2 are moved to hide the entire display area (display area HR2) of the reserved pattern as the in-progress hold effect.

As described above, in this 23rd control example, the reserved pattern display is configured to be hidden when the presentation pattern (reach state) of the variable presentation currently being executed progresses (develops) into a presentation pattern with a high expectation of winning a jackpot. In other words, the reserved pattern display is configured to be hidden in order to clearly inform the player that the presentation being executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is a variable presentation to show the results of the currently executing special pattern variation.

Then, as the presentation mode for hiding the reserved symbols, a presentation mode for moving the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 is set in the same way as when the reserved change presentation is executed in the above-mentioned 22nd control example, and it is configured so that immediately after the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 are moved, it is difficult for the player to know whether a reserved change presentation for changing the display mode of the reserved symbols has been executed or a presentation for hiding the reserved symbols has been executed.

By configuring it in this way, players can have fun predicting which effect will be the target when the changeable parts Ym1 and Ym2 are moved.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, when a presentation mode is set in which the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2 are moved to hide the reserved patterns as a variable presentation, if the reserved patterns are displayed in a display mode of three or more colors as the reserved pattern display and the result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the variable presentation being executed is a jackpot win, the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2 are configured to be able to execute a presentation in which all reserved pattern displays are hidden and the display mode of the execution reserved pattern (execution pending pattern) corresponding to the special pattern change being executed is changed to a display mode (rainbow colors) indicating a jackpot win.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to give the effect of notifying the player of the lottery results for the special pattern change that is currently being performed in addition to the effect of simply hiding the reserved pattern display (the effect of moving the change role Ym1, Ym2), so that it is possible to execute an effect that is unexpected for the player, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

When the pending performance begins, a movable operation is performed in which the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 move from the stored position to a movable position that covers part of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. This pending performance is executed in conjunction with the timing at which the performance mode of the variable performance being executed switches from a first performance mode (e.g., normal reach mode) with a low probability of winning a jackpot to a second performance mode (e.g., super reach mode) with a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the first performance mode. In other words, the movement of the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 by the pending performance makes it possible to clearly notify the player that the performance mode of the variable performance being executed is changing.

In the ongoing hold effect, the change parts Ym1 and Ym2 move to cover part of the display area HR2 in which the reserved symbols are displayed, similar to the reserved change effect in the 22nd control example described above, resulting in the state shown in FIG. 739(a). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish whether the trigger for moving the change parts Ym1 and Ym2 is the reserved change effect or the ongoing hold effect.

The movable state of the change mechanism Ym1, Ym2 can be changed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2 and the display mode. The display example shown in FIG. 739(a) shows a state in which four reserved symbols are displayed in the display area HR2, and the first reserved symbol hr1 is displayed in a display mode of "yellow", the second reserved symbol hr2 is displayed in a display mode of "blue", the third reserved symbol hr3 is displayed in a display mode of "green", and the fourth reserved symbol hr4 is displayed in a display mode of "red", that is, the first reserved symbol hr1 to the third reserved symbol hr3 are displayed in three different colors, and only the fourth reserved symbol hr4 is hidden by the change mechanism Ym2.

As the in-progress hold performance progresses, as shown in FIG. 739(b), the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 perform a moving operation to move to the second movable position that covers the entire display area HR2, and a decorative display (black darkening in the figure) corresponding to the movement of the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 to the second movable position is performed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Then, a performance is performed in which additional patterns corresponding to the display elements (elements showing the color of each reserved pattern) related to the display mode of the multiple reserved patterns (first reserved pattern hr1 to third reserved pattern hr3) that are hidden by the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 moving from the movable position to the second movable position are released toward the in-progress hold hr0 displayed in the display area HR1.

Figure 739 (b) shows an example of a performance in which the first reserved pattern hr1, the second reserved pattern hr2, and the fourth reserved pattern hr4 displayed in the display area HR2 are released from the display area HR2 and absorbed into the active reserved pattern hr0. As shown in Figure 739 (b), the display mode of the additional pattern released from the display area HR2 based on the movement of the change role Ym1 and Ym2 to the second movable position may be the display mode of the reserved pattern displayed in the display area HR2 as it is, or a display mode showing only specific elements (color information) constituting the display mode of the reserved pattern may be used. As shown in Figure 739 (b), the display area HR1 in which the active reserved pattern hr0 is displayed is formed above the center of the display area HR2, and is provided above the position where the left change role Ym1 and the right change role Ym2 come into contact when they are moved to the second movable position. This makes it easier for players to understand that there is a relationship between the effect in which the pending execution effect is executed and the change role Ym1, Ym2 move to the second movable position, and the effect in which the reserved symbols displayed in the display area HR2 (first reserved symbol hr1 to fourth reserved symbol hr4) are released and absorbed into the pending execution symbol hr0 displayed in the display area HR1.

Then, the first reserved pattern hr1, the second reserved pattern hr2, and the fourth reserved pattern hr4 displayed in the display area HR2 are absorbed into the active reserved pattern hr0, and as shown in FIG. 740, the display mode of the active reserved pattern hr0 changes from "white" to "rainbow", and the active reserved performance ends. The display mode of the active reserved pattern hr0 changes to "rainbow", so that the player can be notified that the active special pattern variation has resulted in a jackpot win. In addition, if the performance result of the active reserved performance is favorable to the player, a decorative mode corresponding to the performance result (in FIG. 740, a star display mode) is displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

The pending effect in progress is executed at a point before the variable effect corresponding to the currently executing special pattern change announces the result of the effect (the timing when the effect mode of the currently executing variable effect switches from a first effect mode (e.g., normal reach mode) with a low probability of winning a jackpot to a second effect mode (e.g., super reach mode) with a higher probability of winning a jackpot than the first effect mode). Therefore, in FIG. 740, regardless of the result of the currently executing pending effect, the variable effect that was set in advance continues to be executed, and the secondary display area Ds displays "SP reach," which is a display mode for announcing that the effect mode has switched from normal reach to SP reach (super reach).

In other words, when a performance result favorable to the player (a performance result in which the performance result of the currently pending symbol hr0 changes to rainbow colors) is displayed as the performance result of the currently pending performance, the player can watch the variable performance knowing in advance that the performance result of the variable performance will be a performance result indicating a big win, so the player can play with peace of mind. Also, since it is possible to know in advance that the performance result of the variable performance will be a performance result indicating a big win, a performance mode with as low a chance of a big win as possible is set as the performance mode of the variable performance, so that the player can play while hoping that a performance result that is not often experienced will be announced (displayed).

When the in-progress hold effect shown in FIG. 740 ends, the change role Ym1, Ym2 move to the initial position, and the display area HR2 becomes visible to the player. In this case, the display mode (color) of the reserved symbols (first reserved symbol hr1 to fourth reserved symbol hr4) displayed before the in-progress hold effect is executed is all displayed in the default display mode (white). By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily make the player think that the display mode (color) given by the reserved change effect executed for each reserved symbol was used for the in-progress hold effect, so it is possible to easily associate the reserved change effect for each reserved symbol with the in-progress hold effect. Also, as shown in FIG. 740, when the performance result of the in-progress hold effect is a performance result indicating a jackpot win, the in-progress hold effect continues until the third symbol indicating a jackpot win is stopped and displayed, and when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot win, the in-progress hold effect ends.

As a result, the display mode of the reserved pattern corresponding to the reserved information used in the special pattern lottery executed after the end of the jackpot game can be temporarily set to the default (white) display mode. Therefore, even if the result of the special pattern lottery changes before and after the end of the jackpot game (the probability state of the special pattern switches), the display mode set by the reserved pattern change effect executed before the jackpot game continues to be displayed even after the end of the jackpot game, and it is possible to prevent the execution of a preview effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to Figures 741 to 743, we will explain the timing of execution of the performance custom operation during the special pattern variation period, among the execution timings of the performance custom operation in this 23rd control example, and the flow for setting the performance mode of the variation performance corresponding to the special pattern variation for which the performance custom operation was executed.

As described above, in this 23rd control example, the custom effect operation can be executed during the special pattern changing period, and the effect mode can be switched even during the special pattern changing period depending on the timing of executing the custom effect operation. Here, we explain the difference between when the effect mode can be switched during the special pattern changing period and when it cannot be switched.

First, referring to FIG. 741, the flow for determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed in response to the special pattern variation period will be explained. FIG. 741 is a diagram showing the flow for setting the variable presentation during the special pattern variation. In order to explain the basic flow for determining the presentation mode of the variable presentation, FIG. 741 shows the flow when no presentation customization operation is performed during the special pattern variation.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 741(a), the "normal mode" is always set as the presentation mode during the corresponding special pattern change period. As shown in FIG. 741(b), at the start timing of the special pattern change with a change time of 30 seconds, the overall presentation pattern (presentation A) and the type (blue) of the chance up presentation (first half notice mode) executed in the first half period (10 seconds) are determined as the presentation mode of the corresponding change presentation, and the change presentation is executed in response to the start of the special pattern change. Then, as shown in FIG. 741(c), when 6 seconds have passed since the start of the change presentation (presentation A), a 2-second first half notice is executed, and 2 seconds have passed since the end of the first half notice (the timing of the first half period), that is, at the timing when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the special pattern change, the type (blue) of the chance up presentation (second half notice mode) executed in the second half period (20 seconds) is determined.

In other words, in this 23rd control example, the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to one special pattern variation is configured to be determined at multiple times. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to determine the presentation mode of at least a part of the variable presentation being executed according to the requirements that are met during the variable presentation period in which one variable presentation is being executed, making it easier to determine the presentation mode corresponding to the fulfillment of the requirements without delay.

In this 23rd control example, one variable performance is divided into two performance periods, a first half period and a second half period, and the mode (preview mode) of the preview performance executed in each performance period is determined at different times, but one variable performance may also be divided into three or more performance periods. In this way, the more a variable performance is divided into multiple performance periods, the easier it is to shorten the length of one performance period, and therefore the easier it is to determine the preview mode without delay according to the requirements established during the variable performance.

In addition, in this 23rd control example, the presentation pattern (presentation mode) of the variable presentation executed throughout one variable presentation period is determined at the timing when one variable presentation is executed, and the preview presentation mode (preview mode) executed during specific periods of the variable presentation period (the first preview period, which is two seconds after six seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable presentation, and the second preview period, which is two seconds after 28 seconds have elapsed since the start of the variable presentation) can be determined at different timings. By configuring in this way, the preview presentation mode (preview mode) can be set at different timings while the presentation pattern (presentation mode) executed throughout one variable presentation period is continuously executed, so that a presentation that does not feel strange to the player can be executed.

In the 23rd control example, for the performance period of the variable performance executed in response to one special pattern change, the performance pattern (performance mode) to be executed throughout the entire performance period is set in advance (at the start timing of the variable performance), and the performance mode (preview mode) of the preview performance executed within a specific period of the performance period is appropriately determined at different timings. However, without being limited to this, for the performance period of the variable performance executed in response to multiple special pattern changes, the performance pattern (performance mode) to be executed throughout the entire performance period may be set in advance (at the start timing of the variable performance), and the performance mode (preview mode) of the preview performance executed within a specific period of the performance period may be appropriately determined at different timings. Alternatively, for a performance period in which multiple special pattern changes may be executed (for example, a performance period in which a state performance to indicate the set game state is executed), the performance pattern (for example, a background performance) to be executed throughout the entire performance period may be set in advance (at the timing when the game state is set), and the performance mode (for example, the performance mode of the variable performance) of the performance executed within a specific period of the performance period may be appropriately determined at different timings.

Next, referring to FIG. 742, the flow for setting a variable performance during special chart fluctuation and the transition of the performance mode when a performance custom operation is performed in the first half of the variable performance will be explained. FIG. 742 is a diagram showing the flow for setting a variable performance during special chart fluctuation and the transition of the performance mode when a performance custom operation is performed in the first half of the variable performance.

Compared to FIG. 741 described above, FIG. 742 differs in that a performance customization operation is executed during the first half of the variable performance, and the performance mode is switched during the variable performance period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 742(a), the "normal mode" is set as the performance mode at the time the corresponding special pattern change is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 742(b), at the start timing of the special pattern change with a change time of 30 seconds, the overall performance pattern (performance A) and the type (blue) of the chance up performance (first half notice mode) executed in the first half period (10 seconds) are determined as the performance mode of the corresponding variable performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 742(c), when 6 seconds have passed since the start of the variable performance (performance A), a 2-second first half notice is executed.

If a performance customization operation is performed during the first half of the variable performance period and "Chance Up Mode" is selected, a process is executed to determine the preview performance (second half preview mode) to be executed in the second half period before the first half period has elapsed. Figure 742 (b) shows an example in which (red) is determined as the second half preview mode at the time when the performance customization operation is performed. Since this second half preview mode (red) is a performance mode that can be executed when "Chance Up Mode" is set, as shown in Figure 742 (a), a display mode is displayed to indicate that the performance mode has switched from "Normal Mode" to "Chance Up Mode" at the time when the performance customization operation is performed.

On the other hand, in contrast to the flow in FIG. 742, if a performance customization operation is performed during the first half of the variable performance period and "Chance Up Mode" is selected, and the process of determining the preview performance (second half preview mode) to be executed during the executed second half period determines (blue) as the second half preview mode, this second half preview mode (blue) is a performance mode that cannot be executed when "Chance Up Mode" is set, so as shown in FIG. 743(a), at the time the performance customization operation is executed, "Normal Mode" continues to be displayed, and a display mode is displayed to indicate that the next variation will switch to "Chance Up Mode".

In other words, in this 23rd control example, when a performance customization operation is performed during the period in which a variable performance is being executed, the timing of notifying that the performance mode has been switched based on the performance customization operation is varied depending on the performance mode of the variable performance executed during the remaining remaining period. Specifically, when a performance customization operation is performed, if the performance mode of the variable performance executed during the remaining remaining period is a performance mode that matches the changed performance mode, the timing of notifying that the performance mode has been switched is configured to notify that the performance mode has been switched after the remaining period has elapsed if the performance mode of the variable performance executed during the remaining remaining period is a performance mode that does not match the changed performance mode, or is a performance mode that is commonly likely to be executed regardless of the set performance mode.

By configuring in this way, when a performance customization operation is executed during a variable performance, the player can be interested in the timing at which the performance mode will be switched based on the performance customization operation. Also, in this 23rd control example, the timing of notifying that the performance mode has been switched by the performance customization operation is varied depending on the performance state of the preview performance executed after the performance customization operation is executed. For example, when a "chance up mode" is set as a performance mode that can notify that there is a high probability of winning a jackpot simply by executing a preview performance by a performance customization operation, it is possible to easily make the player predict that there is a high possibility that the variable performance being executed is a performance result indicating a jackpot win simply by being notified that the performance mode has been switched during the variable performance period.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 23rd control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the 23rd control example will be described with reference to Fig. 744 to Fig. 747. The pachinko machine 10 in the 23rd control example differs from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example described above in that a part of the configuration of the ROM 222 and a part of the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed, but the rest of the configuration is the same. The description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 744, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 23rd control example will be described. FIG. 744 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 744, this 23rd control example differs from the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that a performance custom information table 222wa and a second half preview performance selection table 222wb have been added, but the rest of the configuration is the same. The same components are given the same symbols and detailed descriptions are omitted.

The performance customization information table 222wa is a data table that specifies information corresponding to each performance mode that can be selected by the player, and is referenced when reading out information corresponding to the determined (set) performance mode when the performance mode is determined (set) by a performance customization operation. The information read out here is stored in the custom information storage area 223wb, which will be described later, and is referenced when determining the performance mode of the variable performance.

Now, with reference to FIG. 745, the contents defined in the effect customization information table 222wa will be explained. FIG. 745 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the effect customization information table 222wa. As shown in FIG. 745, the effect customization information table 222wa defines the selection conditions that can be selected by effect customization operations for four types of customization (effect mode types) that can be selected by the player, and the setting contents (defined contents) of the effect mode when selected.

In this 23rd control example, a maximum of four different presentation mode types (custom types) can be selected by executing a presentation customization operation, and the frequency of the presentation (preview presentation, advance notice presentation, etc.) and the expectation of winning can be varied depending on the selected presentation mode type (custom type).

More specifically, the setting conditions for the presentation mode are specified for each presentation mode type (custom type) so that the frequency of execution of the hold change presentation, the frequency of execution of the probability change notification presentation, and the frequency of execution of the second half preview presentation differ depending on the presentation mode type (custom type).

As shown in FIG. 745, for the customization type (presentation mode type) "normal mode," the selection condition is set to "always." In other words, "normal mode" is specified as a customization type (presentation mode type) that is always selectable by the presentation customization operation. In addition, the execution frequency of the hold change presentation is set to "medium," the execution frequency of the probability change notification is set to "medium," and the execution frequency of the second half preview presentation is set to "medium." In other words, when "normal mode" is selected, various presentations are configured to be executed at the normal frequency.

The selection condition for the custom type (presentation mode type) "Chance Up Mode" is set to "Always." In other words, "Chance Up Mode" is set as a custom type (presentation mode type) that is always selectable by the presentation customization operation. The execution frequency of the hold change presentation is set to "low," the execution frequency of the probability change notification is set to "medium," and the execution frequency of the second half preview presentation is set to "low." In other words, when "Chance Up Mode" is selected, the execution frequency of the hold change presentation and the second half preview presentation is set to be lower than when "Normal Mode" is selected.

In this 23rd control example, the lower the execution frequency of the various effects is set, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot when they are executed. In other words, the execution frequency of the various effects is changed by changing the selection ratio of the effect mode when a miss is won, without changing the selection ratio for selecting the effect mode when a jackpot is won. Therefore, when "Chance Up Mode" is selected over "Normal Mode", the expectation of winning the jackpot can be increased when a reserve change effect or a second half preview effect is executed.

Next, for the custom type (presentation mode type) "probability change announcement mode", "always" is specified as the selection condition. In other words, "probability change announcement mode" is specified as a custom type (presentation mode type) that is always selectable by the presentation customization operation. Also, the execution frequency of the hold change effect is "medium", the execution frequency of the probability change announcement is "high", and the execution frequency of the second half notice effect is "medium". In other words, when "probability change announcement mode" is selected, the hold change effect and the second half notice effect are executed with the same frequency as "normal mode", and the execution frequency of the probability change announcement is increased.

Finally, for the customization type (presentation mode type) "Premium Mode," the selection condition is stipulated as "part of the jackpot fluctuation." In other words, "Premium Mode" is stipulated as a customization type (presentation mode type) that can be selected when a presentation customization operation is executed during part of the jackpot fluctuation.

When this "premium mode" is selected, a special dedicated effect (celebratory effect) is executed using the period until the jackpot fluctuation is stopped and displayed, regardless of the remaining period of the currently executing fluctuation effect or the content of the already set presentation mode. Therefore, the hold change effect and the second half notice effect are not executed, and the execution frequency of the hold change effect is set to "-", and the execution frequency of the second half notice effect is set to "-". In addition, since the "premium mode" is configured to be selectable only when the jackpot type "jackpot A" is set, which sets a high probability state after the jackpot play ends, the special dedicated effect (celebratory effect) executed when the "premium mode" is selected has a high probability state notification function to indicate that a high probability state is set, and therefore a "confirmed notification" is specified as the high probability state notification.

In the present 23rd control example, the above-mentioned four types of presentation modes are selectable, but five or more types of presentation modes may be selectable by the player. In this case, the selectable presentation mode may be, for example, a presentation mode (silent mode) in which a presentation (preview presentation) for suggesting the expectation of winning a jackpot is not executed (is difficult to execute). By providing such a presentation mode, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine in advance whether or not he will win a jackpot, so that the player can play the game while always expecting to win a jackpot. In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 is capable of executing a presentation that can gradually suggest the expectation of winning a jackpot by gradually changing the display mode of a specific identification information, it may be configured to be able to set a presentation mode (happening mode) in which the display mode for gradually indicating the expectation of winning a jackpot is switched. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a reserved change effect that can suggest to a player the likelihood of winning a jackpot by gradually changing the color of reserved symbols, while normally the likelihood of winning a jackpot increases as the colors of reserved symbols increase in the order of "blue → green → red → rainbow," it is preferable to set the above-mentioned happening mode so that the likelihood of winning a jackpot increases in the order of "rainbow → red → green → blue."

By configuring it in this way, the relationship between the display mode of the identification information and the probability of winning the jackpot can be changed depending on the presentation mode that is set, so that a presentation that would normally be more likely to result in a miss becomes a presentation that is more likely to result in a jackpot, and a presentation that would normally be more likely to result in a miss becomes a presentation that is more likely to result in a miss. This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the game too early.

The second half preview performance selection table 222wb is a data table referenced when determining the performance mode (preview mode) of the second half preview to be executed in the second half period of the variable performance, and different preview modes are defined corresponding to the performance pattern of the target variable performance. It is referenced to determine the performance mode of the second half preview performance when it is determined that the first half period of the variable performance has ended (F3902: Yes in FIG. 755) in the variable performance update process 23 (see F2161 in FIG. 754). It is also referenced to determine the performance mode of the second half preview performance when a performance customization operation is performed and the performance mode is switched during the first half period of the variable performance (F3709: Yes in FIG. 752).

Now, referring to FIG. 746, the contents stipulated in the second half preview performance selection table 222wb will be explained. FIG. 746 is a diagram showing the contents stipulated in the second half preview performance selection table 222wb. As shown in FIG. 746, the second half preview performance selection table 222wb stipulates different performance modes (preview modes) of the second half preview performance in association with the currently set custom type (performance mode type), the hit/miss determination result (the lottery result of the special pattern lottery corresponding to the target variable performance), the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf, and the executed performance (the performance pattern of the target variable performance).

As shown in FIG. 746, there are two presentation patterns executed as variable presentations: "Performance A" and "Performance B." The number of preview presentations executed in the latter half of the variable presentation period is varied depending on the presentation pattern of the variable presentation executed. Specifically, when "Performance A" is set as the presentation pattern, one preview presentation can be executed in the latter half of the period, and when "Performance B" is set, two preview presentations can be executed in the latter half of the period. By configuring in this way, the number of preview presentations executed in the latter half of the period can be varied depending on the presentation pattern of the variable presentation executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Specifically, when the custom type (presentation mode type) is set to "normal mode" or "probable change announcement mode," that is, when the custom type (presentation mode type) is set to a "medium" frequency of execution of the second half preview performance, and the result of the hit/miss judgment is a "hit," if the presentation pattern of the variable presentation being executed is "presentation A," the value of the acquired first presentation counter 223vf is in the range of "0 to 39," and the second half first preview "blue" is in the range of "40 to 69." Therefore, the second half first notice "green" is specified for the range of "70 to 98", and the second half first notice "red" is specified for the range of "70 to 98", and if the presentation pattern of the variable presentation being executed is "presentation B", the second half first notice "blue" and the second half second notice "red" are specified for the range of "0 to 39" of the acquired first presentation counter 223vf, the second half first notice "green" and the second half second notice "green" are specified for the range of "40 to 69", and the second half first notice "green" and the second half second notice "red" are specified for the range of "70 to 98".

In addition, if the hit/miss judgment result is "miss", if the performance pattern of the variable performance being executed is "performance A", then the second half first notice "blue" is specified for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223vf value "0-39", the second half first notice "green" is specified for the range of "40-69", and the second half first notice "red" is specified for the range of "70-98", and if the performance pattern of the variable performance being executed is "performance B", then the second half first notice "blue" and the second half second notice "red" are specified for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223vf value "0-39", the second half first notice "green" and the second half second notice "green" are specified for the range of "40-69", and the second half first notice "green" and the second half second notice "red" are specified for the range of "70-98".

Here, we will explain the types of preview modes defined in the second half preview performance selection table 222wb. As shown in Figure 746, in this 23rd control example, the expectation of winning a jackpot (win) varies depending on the type of preview mode, with the expectation of winning increasing in the order of "blue," "green," and "red."

Specifically, in the first second half preview when "Presentation A" is being executed as the presentation pattern, the preview pattern "blue" is selected at a rate of 40/90 when the hit/miss judgment result is a "hit" and 30/99 when it is a "miss", the preview pattern "green" is selected at a rate of 30/90 when the hit/miss judgment result is a "hit" and 9/99 when it is a "miss", and the preview pattern "red" is selected at a rate of 29/90 when the hit/miss judgment result is a "hit" and is not selected when it is a "miss".

In other words, by making the selection ratio of each preview pattern when a winning combination is reached significantly different from the selection ratio of each preview pattern when a losing combination is reached, the expectation of winning a combination is made different when each preview pattern is set, so that the "blue" preview pattern has the lowest expectation of winning a combination, followed by the "green" preview pattern and the "red" preview pattern.

The preview mode "red" is configured to be selected only when a winning combination is achieved, in contrast to the "blue" and "green" preview modes. By configuring it in this way, when the "normal mode" or "probability change notification mode" is set as the presentation mode type, the latter half of the preview presentation of various preview modes is easily executed regardless of whether the winning/losing judgment result is a "win" or a "miss," and a presentation can be provided that prevents the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

On the other hand, when the custom type (presentation mode type) is set to "Chance Up Mode", that is, when the custom type (presentation mode type) is set to "Low" execution frequency of the second half preview effect, and the hit/miss judgment result is "Hit", if the presentation pattern of the variable presentation being executed is "Presentation A", then for the acquired value of the first presentation counter 223vf in the range of "0-59", the second half first preview "None" is specified, and for the range of "60-98", the second half first preview "Red" is specified. If the presentation pattern of the variable presentation being executed is "Presentation B", then for the acquired value of the first presentation counter 223vf in the range of "0-59", the second half first preview "None" and the second half second preview "None" are specified, for the range of "60-79", the second half first preview "None" and the second half second preview "Red" are specified, and for the range of "80-98", the second half first preview "Red" and the second half second preview "Red" are specified.

In addition, if the hit/miss judgment result is "miss", if the performance pattern of the variable performance currently being executed is "Performance A", then for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223vf value "0 to 94", "none" for the second half first notice is specified, and for the range of "95 to 98", "red" for the second half first notice is specified, and if the performance pattern of the variable performance currently being executed is "Performance B", then for the range of the acquired first performance counter 223vf value "0 to 94", "none" for the second half first notice and "none" for the second half second notice are specified, and for the range of "95 to 98", "none" for the second half first notice and "red" for the second half first notice are specified.

In other words, when "Chance Up Mode" is set, it is more difficult for the second half preview performance to be executed (the preview mode is more difficult to set) than when "Normal Mode" or "Probable Win Announcement Mode" is set, and it is possible to increase the expectation of winning at the point when the second half preview performance is executed (the preview mode is set). This makes it easier for players to quickly predict whether or not they will win a jackpot.

In addition, in this 23rd control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 746, in the "normal mode" and "high probability announcement mode" in which the latter half announcement performance is executed in various announcement modes, the announcement mode "red" is set only when a winning combination is achieved, and in the "chance up mode" in which the latter half announcement performance is executed only in a specific announcement mode, the announcement mode "red" is set even when a winning combination is not achieved. In other words, when the "normal mode" and "high probability announcement mode" are set, the expectation of a winning combination is low just by executing the latter half announcement performance (announcement mode is set), and the expectation of a winning combination is high when a specific announcement mode "red" is set, whereas when the "chance up mode" is set, the expectation of a winning combination is high just by executing the latter half announcement performance (announcement mode is set), and the specific announcement mode "red" is set in some cases in which a losing combination is achieved.

By configuring it in this way, the focus point for the second half preview performance can be made different depending on the type of performance mode (custom type) that is set, making it easier for players to play in various types of performance modes (custom types).

Next, when "Premium Mode" is set as the custom type (presentation mode type), that is, when a jackpot is fluctuating, the notification pattern "rainbow" is always set for the second half notice effect that may be executed, regardless of whether the presentation pattern of the currently executing fluctuating presentation is "Presentation A" or "Presentation B." In other words, as described above, "Premium Mode" is a custom type (presentation mode type) that can be selected only during a jackpot fluctuating in which the jackpot type "Jackpot A" is set, in which a high probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, and therefore, when "Premium Mode" is selected, the player is notified that a jackpot is fluctuating. Therefore, when a second half notice effect is set after "Premium Mode" is set, the special notification pattern "rainbow" is always set to indicate that a jackpot has been won.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent players who know that they will win a jackpot because "Premium Mode" has been set from being confused and thinking that they haven't won the jackpot because the latter half of the preview performance is executed in a preview mode (e.g., "blue" or "green") that indicates the likelihood of winning the jackpot.

Next, referring to FIG. 747, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 23rd control example will be described. FIG. 747 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 23rd control example. As shown in FIG. 747, this 23rd control example differs from the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that it adds a performance customization in progress flag 223wa, a custom information storage area 223wb, a mode change waiting flag 223wc, a second half notice set flag 223wd, and a second half notice information storage area 223we. All other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

The performance customization flag 223wa is a flag for indicating that the player is performing a performance customization operation to change the performance mode type, and is set to ON while the performance customization operation is being performed. This performance customization flag 223wa is set to ON when the player operates (presses) the decision button (middle button) 600a while not performing a volume adjustment operation or a light adjustment operation (environment adjustment operation) and a state in which the performance mode type can be selected (performance customization state) is set (see F3806 in FIG. 753), and is set to OFF when the decision button (middle button) 600a is operated to determine the performance mode type during the performance customization state (see F3707 in FIG. 752).

In this way, by providing the effect customization flag 223wa that can determine whether the effect is in a customization state, the content of the control process when the right button 600c or the left button 600e is operated can be made to differ depending on the setting status of the effect customization flag 223wa. Specifically, when the effect customization flag 223wa is set to ON, i.e., when the effect is in a customization state, a selection control that can select the type of effect mode is executed based on the operation of the right button 600c or the left button 600e, and when the effect customization flag 223wa is set to OFF, i.e., when the effect is not in a customization state, a selection control that can select the light intensity level is executed based on the operation of the right button 600c or the left button 600e.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute different selection controls using the same operating means (right button 600c, left button 600e), so in a pachinko machine 10 that allows the player to execute operations to change various gaming environments (light level, volume level, presentation mode, etc.), the types of operating means can be reduced compared to when dedicated operating means are provided for each change operation. This makes it easier to secure an area for providing operating means. Also, by reducing the types of operating means provided in the same area, it becomes possible to design one operating means (push button) to be larger, making it easier to provide operating means that are easy for players to operate.

Furthermore, in this 23rd control example, the change state for changing each gaming environment (light intensity adjustment operation state, presentation customization state) is configured to be terminated by the player operating the decision button (middle button) 600a. In other words, each change state can be terminated at the stage where the player has decided on the gaming environment of his choice. Therefore, when each change state is set, the period during which the change state is set can be shortened compared to when control is executed to terminate the change state set based on the elapsed time, making it easier to change between multiple types of gaming environments in a short period of time.

The custom information storage area 223wb is a storage area in which information indicating the type of presentation mode (custom type) selected by the presentation customization operation is temporarily stored, and each time the player operates the left and right buttons (600c, 600e) during the presentation customization state to select a play mode, information indicating the selected play mode is stored. The information stored in the custom information storage area 223wb (information indicating the selected presentation mode) is referenced when determining the presentation style of the variable presentation.

The information stored in this custom information storage area 223wb is cleared when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, and the initial information corresponding to "normal mode" is stored by the start-up process executed when the power supply is started. Therefore, in the initial state when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started, "normal mode" is set as the presentation mode type.

By configuring it in this way, players who are not interested in changing the presentation mode can play the pachinko machine 10 using a presentation mode in which various presentations are executed evenly, preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

The mode change waiting flag 223wc is a flag that indicates the period from when a performance customization operation is executed during a performance customization state, when a performance mode different from the current state is determined, until a display mode indicating that the performance mode has actually been switched is displayed. It is configured to be set to on when a performance mode different from the current state is determined, and to remain on until a display mode indicating that the performance mode has actually been switched is displayed.

In this 23rd control example, when the mode change waiting flag 223wc is set to on, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a "waiting" image, which is waiting for the conditions for changing the presentation mode to be met. By configuring in this way, the player can easily understand whether the presentation mode has not been switched despite the presentation customization operation being performed normally, or whether the presentation customization operation has not been performed normally at all and the presentation mode has not been switched.

The second half preview setting flag 223wd is a flag for indicating that the presentation mode of the second half preview performance to be executed in the second half of the variable performance has been determined, and is set to on when the variable performance is being executed and the presentation mode of the second half preview performance is determined based on the execution of a presentation custom operation before the first half of the variable performance has elapsed. The setting status is then determined during the first half of the variable performance, and if it is determined that it is not set to on, the presentation mode of the second half preview performance will be determined when the first half of the variable performance has elapsed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to on, the process of determining the presentation mode of the second half preview performance when the first half of the variable performance has elapsed is skipped.

In the 23rd control example, the multiple performance modes set as one variable performance (the variable performance set in response to one special pattern variation) are not all determined at one timing (for example, the start timing of the variable performance), but some of the performance modes can be determined after the variable performance is executed. Specifically, the execution period of one variable performance is divided into a first half period and a second half period, and the performance mode of the notice performance (second half notice performance) executed in the second half period is determined when the first half period has elapsed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine the performance mode corresponding to various events (for example, a change operation of the performance mode, acquisition of a new special pattern reservation, etc.) that occurred during the first half period of the variable performance as the performance mode of the second half notice performance, so that when various events (for example, a change operation of the performance mode, acquisition of a new special pattern reservation, etc.) occur during the variable performance, it is easier to quickly determine the performance mode corresponding to the event that occurred (during the variable performance execution period) compared to when all of the multiple performance modes set as one variable performance are determined at the start timing of the variable performance.

Furthermore, if the presentation mode is changed by executing a presentation customization operation before the first half of the variable presentation period has elapsed, the presentation mode of the second half notice presentation can be determined based on the changed presentation mode at that time. If it is determined that the presentation mode of the second half notice presentation matches the content of the changed presentation mode, a display mode ("set complete") is displayed to indicate that the presentation mode has been switched at the time the presentation customization operation is executed, and if it is determined that the presentation mode of the second half notice presentation does not match the content of the changed presentation mode, a display mode ("waiting") is displayed to indicate that the presentation mode is waiting to be switched. By configuring in this way, it is possible to immediately execute the presentation mode switching display for a player who executed a presentation customization operation during the variable presentation period, without making the player wait until the variable presentation being executed ends for the presentation mode to be switched. Furthermore, immediately after the presentation mode switching display is executed, the notice presentation (second half notice presentation) is executed in a presentation mode corresponding to the switched (changed) presentation mode, making it easier for the player to realize that the presentation mode has been switched.

In the 23rd control example, when a performance customization operation is performed during the first half of the variable performance period, a process is executed to determine the performance mode based on the changed performance mode for preview performances (second half preview performances) that are executed during the variable performance period and for which the performance mode (preview mode) has not been determined. However, without being limited to this, for example, at the start timing of the variable performance, the performance mode (preview mode) of various preview performances executed during the variable performance period is determined, and at the time when an operation to switch the performance mode is executed by the performance customization operation, the content of the performance mode (preview mode) that has been set for the preview performance that has not yet been executed is determined, and if the content of the determined performance mode (preview mode) matches the changed performance mode, a display for switching the performance mode is executed, and if they do not match, a standby display for switching the performance mode is executed.

In other words, it is preferable to configure the display to accept the presentation mode change only when the presentation style of the pre-set preview presentation matches the content of the presentation mode set based on the presentation customization operation. By configuring it in this way, immediately after the presentation mode switching display is executed, the preview presentation (second half preview presentation) is executed in the presentation style corresponding to the switched (changed) presentation mode, making it easier for the player to realize that the presentation mode has been switched.

The second half preview information storage area 223we is a storage area for temporarily storing information indicating the presentation mode of the second half preview performance determined during the first half of the variable performance period, and when a performance customization operation is executed during the first half and the presentation mode (preview mode) of the second half preview performance is determined before the first half period has elapsed, information indicating the determined presentation mode (preview mode) is stored (see F3711 in FIG. 752). Then, when the first half of the variable performance period has elapsed and the presentation mode (preview mode) of the second half preview performance is set, if it is determined that the presentation mode (preview mode) of the second half preview performance has already been determined (F3903: Yes in FIG. 755), the information stored in the second half preview information storage area 223we is read out, and the presentation mode (preview mode) based on the read information is set (F3905 in FIG. 755).

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 23rd control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 748 to Fig. 755, the contents of the control process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 23rd control example, which differ from the above-mentioned 22nd control example, will be described. As described above, this 23rd control example differs from the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that it is configured to be able to select a plurality of performance modes with different winning expectation rates for the preview performance to be executed, and in that it is configured to be able to execute a performance in which the reserved pattern is not displayed (execution pending performance), and in that the control process related to the difference is executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, it differs from the above-mentioned 22nd control example.

Specifically, the difference is that the fluctuation start pending performance execution process 23 (see F3159 in FIG. 748) is executed instead of the fluctuation start pending performance execution process 22 (see F3109 in FIG. 730), the frame button input monitoring/performance process 23 (see F2137 in FIG. 750) is executed instead of the frame button input monitoring/performance process 22 (see F2107 in FIG. 731), the decision button operation process 23 (see F3332 in FIG. 751) is executed instead of the decision button operation process 22 (see F3315 in FIG. 732), and the performance update process 23 (see F2161 in FIG. 754) is executed instead of the performance update process 22 (see F2111 in FIG. 734); otherwise, the control process contents are the same. The same control contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 748, the fluctuation start pending performance execution process 23 (F3159) will be described. FIG. 748 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the fluctuation start pending performance execution process 23 (F3159). As shown in FIG. 748, in this 23rd control example, when it is determined that there is no information indicating a pending change scenario in the pending performance information storage area 223vl (F3201: No), the execution pending change performance setting process 23 (F3251) is executed to set an execution pending change performance that changes the display mode of the execution pending pattern (execution pending hr0 displayed in the display area HR1 of FIG. 739). The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are assigned the same symbols and their detailed description is omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 749, the processing contents of the ongoing hold change presentation setting process 23 (F3251) will be explained. FIG. 749 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the ongoing hold change presentation setting process 23 (F3251). In this ongoing hold change presentation setting process 23 (F3251), processing is executed to set the presentation mode of the ongoing hold presentation.

When the ongoing pending change performance setting process 23 (F3251) is executed, it is first determined whether the performance pattern of the current variable performance is a movable performance that moves the change role pieces Ym1 and Ym2 (F3601). If it is determined that it is a movable performance (F3601: Yes), the information stored in the pending performance information storage area 223vl is read (F3602) and it is determined whether the read information contains information indicating a pending change scenario, that is, whether there is a pending pattern that will trigger the execution of a pending change performance among the pending patterns that have been acquired (F3603).

If it is determined in the process of F3603 that there is no information indicating a reserved change scenario (F3603: No), it is then determined whether the reserved patterns that have been acquired (first reserved pattern hr1 to fourth reserved pattern hr4) are displayed in a display mode of three or more colors (F3604). In the process of F3604, the display mode (color) of the displayed reserved pattern is determined based on the information indicating the display mode of each reserved pattern (reserved color information) stored in the reserved information storage area 223vl.

If it is determined in the process of F3604 that three or more colors of reserved patterns are displayed (F3604: Yes), it is then determined whether the special pattern change corresponding to this change performance is a jackpot change (F3605), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot change (F3605: Yes), a display change pattern command for indicating the pending change performance in progress is set (F3606), reel operation scenario 4 is determined (F3607), a reel operation command indicating the determined reel operation scenario is set (F3608), and this process ends.

Here, in the processing of F3605, it is determined whether the current variation presentation is a variation presentation corresponding to a jackpot variation based on the information included in the variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110. In other words, the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is set with information including at least information indicating the variation time of the special pattern variation and information indicating the result of the special pattern lottery as the variation pattern of the current special pattern variation.

In this 23rd control example, as in the 22nd control example described above, in order to prevent the player from knowing whether the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot based on the fluctuation time of the special pattern fluctuation, the same length of fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) can be set regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern command is configured to include information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery in addition to the information indicating the currently set fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). However, without being limited to this, for example, in a case where the result of the special pattern lottery can be determined on the voice lamp control device 113 side based on the length of the set fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), that is, in a case where a different length of fluctuation time is set for a jackpot win and a miss win in the special pattern lottery, there is no need to separately set information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, and it is sufficient to configure the fluctuation pattern command to include only information indicating the length of the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the special pattern fluctuation. In this case, the variable time (variation pattern) with different lengths set based on the results of the special pattern lottery can be configured so that the lengths of the various variable patterns set when a losing win are slightly different (to the extent that the player finds it difficult to tell the difference) from the various variable patterns set when a jackpot is won. For example, if the variable pattern that can be set when a jackpot is won has a variable time of 60 seconds, the variable pattern that can be set when a losing win has a variable time of 60.5 seconds.

By configuring it in this way, simply by including information in the fluctuation pattern command to indicate the set fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), it becomes possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to easily determine whether the currently set fluctuation performance is a fluctuation performance executed in response to a special pattern fluctuation that has resulted in a jackpot win, or a fluctuation performance executed in response to a special pattern fluctuation that has not resulted in a jackpot win (a miss win), and it becomes possible to make it difficult for players to notice the difference in the set fluctuation pattern (difference in fluctuation time).

In addition, since it is possible to set the fluctuation time to be approximately the same length for the big win fluctuation and the miss fluctuation, it is possible to easily execute the same fluctuation performance except for the results of the fluctuation performance executed during the big win fluctuation and the fluctuation performance executed during the miss fluctuation.

Here, we will explain the contents of the reel operation scenario (reel operation scenario 4) set in the pending change performance setting process 23 (F3251) explained in Fig. 749. This reel operation scenario is a scenario for operating the change reels Ym1 and Ym2 in a predetermined manner, similar to the 22nd control example described above, and is predefined in the operation scenario 23 table 222wf. In addition, in the operation scenario 23 table 222wf, in addition to the role operation scenario 1 to role operation scenario 3, which have the same contents as the 22nd control example described above, information corresponding to role operation scenario 4 that can be selected during the execution of the pending change performance is specified. When role operation scenario 4 is set, first, the change role Ym1, Ym2 are moved to a first specific position that hides all but three specific reserved patterns (three-color reserved patterns) among the multiple (maximum four) reserved patterns displayed in the display area HR2 (see FIG. 739(a)), and then the change role Ym1, Ym2 are moved to a second specific position that hides all reserved patterns (first reserved pattern to fourth reserved pattern) displayed in the display area HR2 (see FIG. 739(b)), and then the change role Ym1, Ym2 are controlled to move to the initial position (storage position).

When the pending-in-progress performance is executed, the pending patterns are hidden on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the movable state of the changeable parts Ym1 and Ym2 corresponding to the above-mentioned part operation scenario 4, and a performance is executed in which the display mode of the pending patterns in progress is changed (see Figures 739 and 740).

In addition, in this 23rd control example, a moving effect is executed in which the change role Ym1, Ym2 are moved to a position where the display area HR2 of the reserved pattern becomes difficult to see, and a performance is executed in which the display mode of the reserved pattern being executed is changed using the display mode of the reserved pattern being displayed in the display area HR2 in accordance with the timing at which the reserved pattern being displayed in the display area HR2 becomes difficult to see due to the change role Ym1, Ym2. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect because it is possible to make the player think that the change role Ym1, Ym2 have been moved to change the reserved pattern being executed, rather than simply making the reserved pattern difficult to see due to the movement of the change role Ym1, Ym2.

Here, in the 23rd control example, the change role Ym1, Ym2 is moved to a position where the display area HR2 of the reserved pattern is difficult to see, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the change role Ym1, Ym2 may be moved to the variable display position of the third pattern executed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 to indicate to the player that there is a high expectation that the currently active special pattern will be a winning combination. In this case, in addition to the display area HR2 where the reserved patterns are displayed, the display area HR1 where the currently active reserved pattern hr0 is displayed is also difficult to see due to the moved change role Ym1, Ym2, which causes a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to predict the result of the currently active special pattern lottery, including the display mode of the currently active reserved pattern.

In this case, the display position of the pending symbol (the position where the display area HR1 is formed) can be changed in response to the execution of the movable performance of the change parts Ym1 and Ym2, for example, the display area HR1 can be formed outside the movable areas of the change parts Ym1 and Ym2. This allows the pending symbol to be reliably viewed even when the change parts Ym1 and Ym2 are in a movable state, making it easier for the player to predict the result of the special symbol lottery being executed.

However, when the above-mentioned configuration is used, that is, when the position of the display area HR1 in which the pending execution pattern is displayed is changed while the pending execution pattern is being displayed, there is a problem in that it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether the pending pattern displayed in the changed display area HR1 is the pending execution pattern or the pending pattern before execution. In other words, when the active reserved pattern hr0 is displayed in a "white" display mode and the first reserved pattern hr1 is also displayed in a "white" display mode, if the change parts Ym1 and Ym2 are moved and the display area HR2 in which the first reserved pattern hr1 is displayed and the display area HR1 in which the active reserved pattern hr0 is displayed are covered by the change parts Ym1 and Ym2, the display area HR2 is hidden and the display area HR1 is formed in a different display position (a display position that does not overlap with the moving change parts Ym1 and Ym2), and the active reserved pattern hr0 is displayed in a "white" display mode, the first reserved pattern hr1 is hidden in conjunction with the movement of the change parts Ym1 and Ym2, so there is a problem in that the player cannot immediately tell whether the reserved pattern in the "white" display mode being displayed is the active reserved pattern hr0 or the first reserved pattern hr1.

In this case, therefore, it is advisable to set a presentation mode indicating that the reserved patterns (first reserved pattern hr1 to fourth reserved pattern hr4) displayed in the display area HR2 will be hidden in correspondence with the timing when the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2 cover the display area HR2, and set a presentation mode indicating that the position of the display area HR1 will move in correspondence with the timing when the change role devices Ym1 and Ym2 cover the display area HR1. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand whether the displayed reserved pattern is a reserved pattern currently being executed or a reserved pattern before execution, even after the display position of the reserved pattern has been moved.

Next, referring to FIG. 750, the processing contents of the frame button input monitoring and performance processing 23 (F2137) will be described. FIG. 750 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the frame button input monitoring and performance processing 23 (F2137). As shown in FIG. 750, the frame button input monitoring and performance processing 23 (F2137) differs from the frame button input monitoring and performance processing 22 (see F2107 in FIG. 731) of the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that a process related to a performance custom operation (performance custom selection) for selecting a performance mode is added, and that instead of the decision button operation processing 22 (F3315) that is executed when the decision button (middle button) 600a is pressed, a decision button operation processing 23 (F3332) is executed. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted with the same reference numerals and their detailed description is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/performance process 23 (F2137) is executed, first, the performance custom selection process 23 is executed (F3331), and when the processing of F3331 is completed, the processing of F3301 to F3314, which is the same as the above-mentioned frame button input monitoring/performance process 22 (see F2107 in FIG. 731), is executed. Then, in the processing of F3314, if it is determined that the decision button (middle button) 600a has been operated (F3314: Yes), the decision button operation process 23 is executed (F3332), F3310 is executed, and this processing ends.

In addition, if it is determined in the processing of F3314 that the decision button (middle button) 600a has not been operated (F3314: No), the processing of F3316 (effect button operation processing 22) is executed, which is the same as the frame button input monitoring/effect processing 22 (see F2107 in FIG. 731) of the 22nd control example described above, and then the processing of F3310 is executed, and this processing is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of the performance customization selection process 23 (F3331) will be described with reference to FIG. 751. FIG. 751 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the performance customization selection process 23 (F3331). In this performance customization selection process 23 (F3331), processing is executed to select a performance mode based on the operation contents of the operating means (middle button 600a, right button 600c, left button 600e) during the performance customization state.

When the performance customization selection process 23 (F3331) is executed, first it is determined whether the performance customization in progress flag 223wa is set to on (F3701). If it is determined that it is not set to on, i.e., if it is determined that the performance is not in a customization state (F3701: No), the entire processing of the performance customization selection process 23 (F3331) is skipped and this processing is terminated in order to execute other selection control (e.g., light intensity adjustment) rather than the selection control of the performance mode by operating the operation means (middle button 600a, right button 600c, left button 600e).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F3701 that the performance customization in progress flag 223wa is set to on (F3701: Yes), it is then determined whether the right button 600c or the left button 600e has been operated (F3702), and if it is determined that an operation has been performed (F3702: Yes), the selected performance mode is updated to correspond to the determined operation content (F3703), information indicating the updated performance mode is stored in the custom information storage area 223wb (F3704), a display command indicating the updated performance mode is set (F3705), and the processing proceeds to F3706.

The display mode (display mode for indicating the selected presentation mode) to be displayed in the display area HR6 (see FIG. 735(a)) formed on the display surface of the third pattern display area 81 is determined in accordance with the display command set in the processing of F3705. Note that in this state, presentation mode change candidates are simply displayed in the display area HR6, and the presentation mode after the change has not been determined by the presentation customization operation. In this state, when the player presses the determination button (middle button) 600a, a determination process is executed to determine the presentation mode corresponding to the display mode displayed in the display area HR6.

On the other hand, in the process of F3702, if it is determined that there has been no operation of the right button 600c or the left button 600e (F3702: No), then it is determined whether the decision button (middle button) 600a has been operated (F3706). If it is determined that the decision button (middle button) 600a has been operated, that is, if an operation to determine the changed presentation mode in the presentation customization state has been performed (F3706: Yes), the presentation customization flag 223wa is set to off (F3707), and it is determined whether the special pattern is currently changing (special pattern is changing) (F3708). If it is determined that the special pattern is currently changing (F3708: Yes), it is determined whether the current period is the first half of the change period (the first half of the changing presentation period) (F3709).

If it is determined in the processing of F3709 that it is the first half of the variable period (F3709: Yes), the presentation mode of the second half preview presentation is determined by referring to the second half preview presentation selection table 222wb based on the presentation mode corresponding to the information stored in the custom information storage area 223wb (the presentation mode displayed in the display area HR6) (F3710), and information indicating the determined presentation mode is stored in the second half preview information storage area 223we (F3711).

As explained with reference to FIG. 746, the second half preview performance selection table 222wb also specifies the content (shown as "none" in the figure) indicating that the second half preview performance will not be executed, and is configured so that if "none" is selected, the second half preview performance will not be executed. Therefore, in the processing of F3710, a process is performed to determine whether or not the second half preview performance will be executed, and if so, the performance mode (preview mode) if it will be executed. Then, in the processing of F3711, the processing result of F3710, i.e., information indicating whether or not the second half preview performance will be executed, and the performance mode to be set as the second half preview performance, is stored in the second half preview information storage area 223we. In other words, in the processing of F3711, information indicating that the second half preview performance will not be executed is also stored.

After completing the processing of F3711, the second half preview setting flag 223wd is set to on (F3712), and it is determined whether the presentation style of the second half preview presentation determined in the processing of F3710 matches the type of presentation mode after the update (F3713). If it is determined that they match (F3713: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the presentation mode will be changed (F3719), and this processing is terminated.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of F3713 that the mode is not compatible (F3713: No), a display command is set to indicate that the presentation mode will be changed from the next change (after the currently executing special pattern change is stopped and displayed) (F3714), the mode change standby flag 223wc is set to ON (F3715), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of F3709, if it is determined that the current period is not the first half of the fluctuation period, i.e., that the current period is the second half of the fluctuation period during the special pattern fluctuation (F3709: No), it is determined whether the special pattern fluctuation being executed is a jackpot fluctuation in which jackpot A is set (F3716), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot A fluctuation (F3716: Yes), a display command is set to indicate that the presentation mode will be changed (F3717), and an audio command is set to indicate that a jackpot has been won (F3718), and this process ends.

Finally, in the process of F3706, if it is determined that the enter button (middle button) 600a has not been operated (F3706: No), this process is terminated.

Next, the process contents of the decision button operation process 23 (F3332) will be described with reference to FIG. 752. FIG. 752 is a flowchart showing the process contents of the decision button operation process 23 (F3332). This decision button operation process 23 (F3332) is a process executed based on the player operating (pressing) the decision button (middle button) 600a, and differs from the decision button operation process 22 (see F3315 in FIG. 732) described above in that a process is added that is executed when the decision button (middle button) 600a is operated in a state where the adjustment period flag 223sx is not set to on, that is, when no light adjustment or volume adjustment is being performed, but otherwise is the same. The same process contents are assigned the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

When the decision button operation process 23 (F3332) is executed, first it is determined whether the period adjustment in progress flag 223vx is set to ON (F3351), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON, that is, if it is determined that the player operated (pressed) the decision button (middle button) 600a in a state where no light intensity adjustment or volume adjustment was performed (F3351: No), the performance customization execution process 23 is executed (F3371), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3351 that the period adjustment in progress flag 223vx is set to ON (F3351; Yes), the same processes F3352 to F3357 as the decision button operation process 22 of the above-mentioned 22nd control example (see F3315 in FIG. 732) are executed, and this process is terminated.

Now, referring to FIG. 753, the processing contents of the performance customization execution process 23 (F3371) will be explained. FIG. 753 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the performance customization execution process 23 (F3371). In this performance customization execution process 23 (F3371), processing is executed to set the performance customization state, that is, a state in which the selection operation of the performance mode can be executed.

When the effect customization execution process 23 (F3371) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot A is currently fluctuating (F3801). If it is determined that the jackpot A is fluctuating (F3801: Yes), a lottery is executed to determine whether or not the premium mode is selectable (F3802), and it is determined whether or not the lottery in F3802 has been won (F3803). If it is determined that the lottery in F3803 has been won (F3803: Yes), the effect customization selection target "premium mode available" (see FIG. 738(b)), which is a target that can be selected by the effect customization operation, is determined (F3804), and the process proceeds to F3806.

On the other hand, if the process of F3803 determines that the player has not won (F3803: No), the effect custom selection target "normal" (see FIG. 738(a)) is determined (F3805), and the process proceeds to F3806. Note that if the process of F3801 determines that the jackpot A is not fluctuating, that is, that the conditions for making it possible to select "premium mode" as the effect mode are not met (F3801: No), the process proceeds directly to F3805, and the effect custom selection target "normal" (see FIG. 738(a)) is determined.

Next, in the process of F3806, the performance customization in progress flag 223wa is set to ON (F3806), a display command is set to indicate that performance customization is in progress (F3807), and this process is terminated.

Next, the processing contents of the performance update process 23 (F2161) will be explained with reference to FIG. 754. FIG. 754 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the performance update process 23 (F2161). This performance update process 23 (F2161) differs from the performance update process 22 (see F2111 in FIG. 734) executed in the 22nd control example described above in that it executes an update process related to variable performance (variable performance update process 23), but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and detailed explanations will be omitted.

When the performance update process 23 (F2161) is executed, first, the processes F3501 to F3516 are executed, which are the same as the performance update process 22 described above (see F2111 in FIG. 734), then the variable performance update process 23 is executed (F3551), and then the process F3517 is executed, terminating this process.

Here, referring to FIG. 755, the processing contents of the variable performance update process 23 (F3551) will be explained. FIG. 755 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the variable performance update process 23 (F3551). In this variable performance update process 23 (F3551), processing is performed based on the elapsed time since the variable performance was executed. In this 23rd control example, a part of the performance mode of the variable performance (the performance mode of the notice performance executed in the latter half period) is configured to be set after the variable performance is executed (at the time when the first half period has elapsed). By configuring in this way, even if a part of the determination conditions of the performance mode (the performance mode type) is changed after the variable performance is executed, it is possible to set a part of the performance mode set in the variable performance being executed to correspond to the changed determination conditions. Therefore, since the variable performance corresponding to the changed determination conditions can be executed immediately, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to change the performance mode, as it takes time to determine the performance mode corresponding to the changed performance mode despite the operation of selecting the performance mode (performance custom operation).

When the variable performance update process 23 (F3551) is executed, it is first determined whether the performance pattern of the variable performance currently being executed is "Performance A" or "Performance B" (F3901). Here, the performance patterns "Performance A" and "Performance B" are performance patterns that are predefined so that the performance mode of the preview performance in the latter half of the variable performance is determined when the first half of the period has elapsed.

In the process of F3901, if it is determined that the presentation pattern is "Presentation A" or "Presentation B" (F3901: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the timing of the end of the first half period (F3902), and if it is determined that it is the timing of the end of the first half period (F3902: Yes), it is determined whether the second half notice setting flag 223wd is set to on (F3903).

If it is determined in the processing of F3903 that the second half preview setting flag 223wd is set to on, that is, if it is determined that an operation to change the presentation mode (performance customization operation) has been performed during the first half period and the presentation mode (preview mode) of the second half preview presentation has already been determined at the time of execution (F3903: Yes), the second half preview setting flag 223wd is set to off (F3907), information indicating the presentation mode of the second half preview presentation stored in the second half preview information storage area 223we is read (F3908), a display command for indicating the presentation mode of the second half preview presentation is set (F3906), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of F3903, if it is determined that the second half preview setting flag 223wd is not set to on, that is, if it is determined that an operation to change the presentation mode (performance customization operation) has not been performed during the first half period (F3903: No), the current custom information (presentation mode) is identified from the custom information storage area 223wb (F3904), and based on the identified custom information (presentation mode), the presentation mode of the second half preview presentation is determined by referring to the second half preview presentation selection table 222wb (F3905), a display command is set to indicate the presentation mode of the second half preview presentation (F3906), and this process is terminated.

In addition, if the processing of F3901 determines that the presentation pattern is not "Presentation A" or "Presentation B," that is, if it determines that the presentation pattern of the variable presentation currently being executed is not one for which a new presentation mode can be determined during the variable presentation (F3901: No), or if it determines that the current timing is not the end of the first half period (F3902: No), this processing is terminated without setting the presentation mode for the second half preview presentation.

<24th control example>
Next, the 24th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 756 to Fig. 782. The pachinko machine 10 in this 24th control example is significantly different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that it has a setting change function that can set the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery differently in the same probability state (low probability state or high probability state), and that the voice output device 226 stores voice data corresponding to various characters displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 in advance, and is configured to be able to switch the type of sound (voice) output from the pachinko machine 10 based on the voice command output from the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, with regard to the effects that are executed, it differs in that it is configured to be able to execute a setting suggestion effect that can suggest to the player the setting value that has been set by the setting change function, and a hold shift effect that can suggest whether or not the hold information that is the target when the display position of the hold patterns (first hold pattern hr1 to fourth hold pattern hr4 displayed in display area HR2) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is shifted contains jackpot information.

Traditionally, various characters have been used in pachinko machine 10 games, and some of these machines use the voice of a specific character to provide information about the game situation or output entertaining sounds to enhance the presentation effect. However, if the voice of a specific character is always output, players who play for long periods of time will become accustomed to the type of voice that is output, which reduces the presentation effect.

In addition, when the content of the output sound (lines) is the same, the meaning of the sound in relation to the game is always the same, so there is a problem that players who play for a long time will get bored of the sound content (lines), reducing the presentation effect.

In contrast to this, in the present 24th control example, when the third symbol for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed, different types of voices can be output based on the combination of the stopped and displayed third symbols. By configuring in this way, it is possible to output various types of voices based on the result of the special symbol lottery, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the presentation effect even for players who have been playing for a long time.

Furthermore, in this 24th control example, the content of the sound (lines) to be output can be determined based on the combination of the stopped third symbols. Specifically, different sound contents can be output depending on the combination of the stopped third symbols (double numbers) that are displayed when a jackpot is won, the combination of the stopped third symbols that are displayed when a reach is missed, and the combination of the stopped third symbols that are displayed without entering a reach state (variable numbers). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the content of the sound (lines) to be output from becoming monotonous.

In addition, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player (a loss), it is possible to output a voice (a line) that can grant the player a special benefit (setting suggestion). By configuring it in this way, even if the result of the special pattern lottery is a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player (a loss), it is possible to grant the player a special benefit that is advantageous to the player, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

Furthermore, if a presentation with a high probability of winning a jackpot (for example, a reach presentation with a specific symbol (7 symbol)) is executed but the jackpot is not won, in other words, if a presentation that gives the player a very high chance of winning a jackpot is executed but the presentation results in a miss, it is possible to grant a bonus that is more advantageous to the player (for example, a setting notification). By configuring it in this way, even if the result of the special symbol lottery is unfavorable to the player (a miss), it is possible to grant an advantageous bonus to the player, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

In addition, in this 24th control example, one third pattern is formed by the identification information (number icon) for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery and the character, and the combination is switchable. In other words, it is possible to vary the type of character associated with a specific number icon (e.g., 7). And, it is possible to output a line suggesting the character associated with the third pattern as the content of the line output as audio.

By configuring it in this way, even if lines suggesting the same character are output, the meaning of the lines can be made to differ greatly by changing the type of number icon associated with that character. Therefore, for players who have been playing for a long time, when lines with the same content are output, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting whether the character suggested by the lines is an advantageous character or not.

In addition, in this 24th control example, the voice type is determined in accordance with the stopped display mode of the third symbol, and when the voice type is determined based on a specific stopped display mode (a stopped display mode of the third symbol indicating a jackpot win), the player can select whether or not to continue audio output based on that voice type for a specific period of time. By configuring it in this way, when the third symbol with the player's favorite character is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot win, audio output based on the favorite character's voice type can be executed for a long period of time.

First, referring to FIG. 756, the structure of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th control example will be described. FIG. 756 is a rear view that shows a schematic configuration of the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th control example. As shown in FIG. 756, the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th control example is different from the pachinko machine in the 22nd control example in that the main control device 110 is provided with a setting change mechanism that is at least composed of a setting value display device 110a capable of displaying the setting value, a setting key 110b capable of switching between a state in which the setting change operation (and the setting confirmation operation) is accepted and a state in which the setting change operation is not accepted (normal game state), and a setting switch 110c capable of changing the setting value of the pachinko machine 10 in the state in which the setting change operation is accepted (setting change state) according to the operation of an operator (for example, a staff member of the hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed). The other configurations are the same, and the same components are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Now, with reference to FIG. 757, a method of changing settings using the setting change mechanism and a method of confirming settings will be described in detail. First, with reference to FIG. 757(a)-(d), a procedure for changing settings of the pachinko machine 10 using the setting change mechanism will be described. As shown in FIG. 757(a)-(d), in order to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10, first, with the power of the pachinko machine 10 cut off, the setting key 110b is rotated clockwise to the ON position (see FIG. 757(a)). In other words, in order to change the settings, it is necessary to first cut off the power of the pachinko machine 10. Next, with the setting key 110b rotated to the ON side, the RAM clear switch 122 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (see FIG. 757(b)). As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 after power-on is set to a setting change state indicating that the settings are being changed. When the setting change state is entered, "-" is displayed for each digit of the setting value display device 110a, which is composed of a 4-digit 7-segment display. This display makes it easy for the operator (e.g., a waiter) to understand that the setting change state has been successfully transitioned to.

When the setting is changed to the setting change state, the setting value is changed by 1 each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (see FIG. 757(c)). In this 24th control example, three types of setting values, 1 to 3, are provided, and the larger the value, the higher the probability of winning. That is, the setting 1 has the lowest probability of winning (for example, 1/262 in the low probability state, 1/65 in the high probability (high probability) state), and the setting 3 has the highest probability of winning (for example, 1/218 in the low probability state, 1/55 in the high probability state). In the setting change state, the setting is changed from 1 to 2 to 3 to 1, etc., each time the setting switch 110c is pressed. Also, when the setting switch 110c is pressed when the setting value is 3, the setting value is configured to return to 1 in a rotary manner. Also, each time the setting switch 110c is pressed, a number indicating the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 110a. FIG. 757(c) is a diagram showing the display state when the setting value is set to "3." As shown in FIG. 757(c), when the setting value is switched to 3 by pressing the setting switch 110c, the number "3," indicating a setting of 3, is displayed in the last digit on the setting value display device 110a.

After the operator has completed the switching operation to the desired setting value, the setting change state is terminated by rotating the setting key 110b counterclockwise to place the setting key 110b in the OFF position (see FIG. 757(d)). The setting key 110b is composed of a key-shaped key portion and a keyhole-shaped key portion that matches the key portion, and the key portion can be removed. This allows the operator (e.g., a hall staff member) to insert the key portion into the keyhole portion only when performing a setting change operation, and to remove and store the key portion when the setting change operation is completed. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent players, etc. from fraudulently changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 during business hours, and prevents the hall from suffering unexpected disadvantages.

Then, when the setting change operation is completed, the initial setting process of the main control device 110 is resumed. In the initial setting process after the restart, a process is executed to send to the voice lamp control device 113 a setting change completion command indicating that the setting change operation has been completed, and a setting value command indicating the setting value determined by the setting change operation. In addition, a process is executed to send a command (initialization command) to resume the initial setting process of the voice lamp control device 113, which is on hold until the setting change operation is completed.

Next, the procedure for checking the settings (settings checking operation) will be described with reference to Fig. 757 (e)-(g). To check the settings, first, in the same way as in the setting change operation, the setting key 110b is rotated to the ON position while the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (see Fig. 757 (e)). Then, the setting check state is set by turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 without turning on the RAM clear switch 122 (i.e., leaving it in the OFF state) (see Fig. 757 (f)). When the setting check state is entered, the setting value currently set is displayed on the setting value display device 110a. The example in Fig. 757 (f) shows a state in which "3" is set as the setting value. When the operator has finished checking the settings, the setting check state is ended by rotating the setting key 110b to the ON side, and the state is entered into which normal play is possible (see Fig. 757 (g)).

In the twenty-fourth control example, the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c are provided separately, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the setting switch 110c may be removed, and the setting may be changed according to the amount of rotation of the setting key 110b. More specifically, the setting may be changed from 1 to 2 to 3 to 1 ... each time the setting key 110b is rotated 60 degrees, and the key part of the setting key 110b is pulled out of the keyhole to return to a state in which normal play is possible. By configuring in this way, the configuration of the setting change mechanism can be simplified, and the number of parts can be reduced. This allows the cost rate of the pachinko machine 10 to be reduced.

In this 24th control example, as shown in FIG. 757, the setting change mechanism is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, that is, in a position that cannot be seen by the player during play. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the setting change mechanism from being operated during play. In addition, when actually performing a setting change operation, it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 in order to operate the setting key 110b and the setting switch 110c provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. In this open state, the inner frame 12 and the outer frame 14 are supported only by the opening and closing shaft, which is a relatively unstable state. In this situation, if the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the return operation of the decorative parts provided on the pachinko machine 10 is performed, excessive load is applied to the opening and closing shaft, etc., which may cause damage.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the reel is configured to return to its original state after the standby process in which the initial setting process of the audio lamp control device 113 is awaited has ended. In other words, the reel is not returned to its original state during a setting change operation. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the reel from returning to its original state during a setting change operation, resulting in damage to the pachinko machine 10. In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 is less likely to vibrate during a setting change operation than when the reel is returned to its original state while the operator is operating the setting switch 110c, erroneous operation of the setting switch 110c is less likely to occur.

In this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 122 is always set to ON when a setting change operation is performed, so that, for example, a setting change operation cannot be performed while a state in which a high probability state advantageous to the player is set is maintained. In other words, the game state set after the setting change operation is performed becomes the initial state (normal state). Therefore, for games performed after the setting change operation is performed, the game conditions other than the difference in the jackpot probability based on the setting value can be unified, making it easier to provide a fair game to players.

<About the performance content in the 24th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 758 to Fig. 760, the characteristic contents of the various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 24th control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the 24th control example, a voice effect is executed in which voice output is executed with different voice types based on the combination of the display modes of the multiple third patterns stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, a hold shift effect is executed that can suggest whether or not the hold information that is the target when the display position of the hold pattern (the first hold pattern hr1 to the fourth hold pattern hr4 displayed in the display area HR2) displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is shifted.

First, referring to FIG. 758(a), an example of the presentation at the start timing of the special pattern change will be described. FIG. 758(a) is a diagram showing the third pattern at the start timing of the special pattern change and the sound output from the speaker unit 308. As shown in FIG. 758(a), in this 24th control example, the display mode of the third pattern used in the change presentation is configured to be formed from a "number portion (number icon)" which is identification information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery, and a decorative character portion (character icon), and a basic third pattern with a different character icon corresponding to each number portion is formed as the basic pattern, and a change presentation using the basic third pattern is executed.

To explain the display mode of the basic third pattern in detail, the third pattern D1 with a character icon resembling an octopus is formed as the basic third pattern for the number icon "1", and the third pattern D4 with a character icon resembling a shark is formed as the basic third pattern for the number icon "4". The display data of the basic third pattern is stored in advance in the character ROM 234 of the display control device 114, and is configured to execute a variable presentation using the display mode of the basic third pattern unless a dedicated command is output to use a special third pattern, which is a display mode other than the basic third pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a presentation that is easy for the player to understand, since it is possible to easily understand the result of the special pattern lottery just by understanding the character icon that is displayed in a variable manner.

In this 24th control example, instead of the basic third pattern, a special third pattern with a different combination of the type of number icon and the type of character icon is variably displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 758(a), a special third pattern in which a character icon resembling an octopus is attached to the number icon "3" is variably displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to generate an event in which the type of number icon (identification information for indicating the result of the special pattern lottery) cannot be ascertained simply by checking the character icon attached to the variably displayed third pattern, so that a surprising variable performance result can be provided to the player.

Furthermore, in this 24th control example, a sound corresponding to the type of character icon (character type) attached to the third pattern (basic third pattern, special third pattern) displayed on the display screen can be output, and the sound can be used to suggest to the player the character type attached to the third pattern that will be stopped and displayed in the next change. In addition, when a change display using a special third pattern is executed, as shown in FIG. 758(a), the display mode of the special third pattern is first notified to the player before the change performance begins. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the performance results of the suggestion performance executed by sound.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 758(a), when a change performance is executed in response to the start of a special pattern change, the change performance starts from a state in which the third pattern corresponding to the previous special pattern change is stopped and displayed. In this case, when a change performance using a special third pattern is executed, the change performance is executed in a state in which a special third pattern consisting of a number icon "3" with a character icon resembling a turtle is displayed, as shown in the third pattern D3. Then, the speaker unit 308 outputs the sound "I wonder if Octopus will win next time? Turtle, here we go" as a suggestion performance to suggest the stopped display mode of the third pattern to show the performance result of the change performance executed this time.

This suggestive effect suggests to the player that there is a high possibility that the third symbol with an octopus character icon or a turtle character icon will be displayed as the stopped display mode of the third symbol to indicate the performance result of the variable performance currently being executed. By understanding the content of the sound output as the suggestive effect, the player can play the game while calculating (predicting) the possibility that the third symbol, which indicates a big win, will be displayed. As described above, in this 24th control example, a special third symbol is configured to be displayed, so it is possible to increase the number of stop display patterns of the third symbol that can be predicted based on the content provided to the player by the suggestive effect described above (the type of character icon that can be displayed), and the player can enjoy predicting the future game content (performance result).

Furthermore, when the special third symbol is used, as shown in FIG. 758(a), a notification effect is configured to be executable that can notify the player that the special third symbol will be used before the variable effect begins. The notification effect is configured to be capable of notifying the player of at least a portion of the display mode of the special third symbol that will actually be used. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to predict the stopping display pattern of the third symbol based on the content provided to the player by the suggestion effect (type of character icon that may be stopped and displayed), including the display mode of the special third symbol, making it easier to improve prediction accuracy.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 758(a), the display mode of the special third pattern that is actually used is configured to be able to be displayed to indicate that the special third pattern is used, but without being limited to this, it may be configured to execute a notification effect (for example, displaying text during character shuffle) that simply indicates that a variable effect is being executed in which a special third pattern that is a combination different from the basic third pattern is used.

In addition, while the diagram shown in FIG. 758(a) shows an example in which one type of special third pattern is displayed, two or more types of special third patterns may be used in one variable performance. In this case, the display modes of all of the special third patterns used in one variable performance may be configured to be notifiable to the player before the variable performance starts, or at least some of them may be configured to be notifiable to the player.

In addition, in this 24th control example, the process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine whether or not to use the special third symbol, or the display mode of the special third symbol to be used, but without being limited to this, the system may be configured to allow the player to generate special third symbols in any combination.

Next, referring to FIG. 758(b), another presentation content using audio output will be described. FIG. 758(b) is a diagram showing an audio presentation executed during the next variation when the stopped display mode of the third pattern indicating the result of the previous variation presentation is a specific stopped display mode (7 reach miss). As described above, in this 24th control example, an audio presentation using audio corresponding to the character icon type (character type) attached to the third pattern stopped and displayed as a result of the previous variation presentation is configured to be executable after the previous variation presentation has ended. Furthermore, a bonus corresponding to the combination of the third patterns stopped and displayed as a result of the previous variation presentation can be granted to the player by the audio presentation.

Specifically, in FIG. 758(b), the result of the previously executed variable effect was "7 reach miss", so the character voice (7 reach character) selected by referring to the voice command selection table 222xa described below is set, and therefore while the variable effect is being executed, "Character Voice 7 Character" is displayed in the display area HR30 as a guide mode to indicate the currently set voice data (character voice). Then, the speaker unit 308 outputs the voice of the setting suggestion effect "Today's fortune is great fortune", which is a privilege given to the player as the voice effect corresponding to "7 reach miss".

By configuring it in this way, even if the stopped display mode of the third symbol that was stopped and displayed in the previous variable performance can no longer be seen due to the execution of the next variable performance, it is possible for the player to easily understand which character icon the character voice being output corresponds to.

Next, the contents of the voice performance in the state where the third pattern for indicating the performance result of the variable performance executed in response to the special pattern variation continues to be displayed in a stopped state, that is, the state where the next special pattern lottery is not executed (standby state)) will be described with reference to FIG. 759(a). FIG. 759(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the voice performance executed during the standby state (during the demo performance). As shown in FIG. 759(a), when the standby state is set in a state where the third pattern D1 with a character icon imitating an octopus attached to the number icon "1", the third pattern D4 with a character icon imitating a shark attached to the number icon "4", and the third pattern D3 with a character icon imitating a turtle attached to the number icon "3" are displayed in a stopped state as the performance result of the previous variable performance, normally, the voice performance during the standby state is executed with the character voice (voice data) corresponding to the character type attached to the third pattern D1 displayed in the left pattern row (the pattern row displayed in a stopped state first) among the three third patterns displayed in a stopped state. In this way, the voice data output during the standby state can be made different depending on the type of frozen third pattern (the frozen third pattern displayed to show the results of the previous variable presentation), making it possible to provide a variety of presentations (audio presentations) to the player, enhancing the presentation effect.

As described above, in this 24th control example, the type of voice data used in the executed sound performance can be made different depending on the character type attached to the stopped third symbol. In order to prevent the type of voice data from switching every time the third symbol is stopped, the voice data used for the sound output can be fixed until a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot win, the sound output using the voice data of the character type corresponding to that third symbol can be continuously executed until the next jackpot win symbol is stopped and displayed. In other words, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot win, a privilege that allows the same voice data to be continuously output can be granted as a privilege different from the case when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating anything other than a jackpot win.

This configuration allows the player to play the game while hoping that the third symbol, which is associated with the player's favorite character type, will bring about a big win. It also prevents the voice data from switching every time a special symbol lottery is executed, resulting in inconsistent audio effects and a decrease in the presentation effect.

As shown in FIG. 759(b), when the voice data is fixed, "Character Voice 7 Characters" is displayed in the display area HR30 to the right of the main display area Dm as a display mode to indicate the currently set voice data, and the display area HR31 formed above it displays the display mode "Voice Fixed" to indicate that the voice data is in a fixed state. This allows the player to easily understand that the voice data corresponding to "7 Characters" is currently fixed.

In addition, in the display area HR32, a button icon resembling the effect button 22 is displayed as a display mode for guiding the player on the game method (operation method) for releasing the fixed state of the voice data, and the text "You can release the voice lock by pressing the button" is displayed. This makes it possible to clearly inform the player that it is possible to release the audio output based on the currently fixed voice data.

In the example shown in FIG. 759(b), the jackpot is won with the third symbol corresponding to character 7, and the voice data for "character 7" is fixed. Therefore, even if multiple special symbol lotteries are performed after the jackpot play ends, and a standby state is set with the third symbol D1 with a character icon resembling an octopus attached to the number icon "1", the third symbol D4 with a character icon resembling a shark attached to the number icon "4", and the third symbol D3 with a character icon resembling a turtle attached to the number icon "3" stopped and displayed as the results of the previous variable performance, an audio performance using the voice data for "character 7" is executed during the standby state.

Although details will be described later, in this control example, when a voice effect using "7 character voices" is executed, a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 can be executed as a bonus, so that a setting suggestion effect may be executed as part of the voice effect executed during the standby state. When a setting suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 759(b), a voice saying "Today's fortune is very good" is output from the speaker unit 308, as in the example shown in FIG. 758(b), to notify the player that the setting value is favorable.

In this way, in this 24th control example, not only is an audio effect performed with different voice data depending on the stopped display mode of the third symbol, but a special bonus can be awarded depending on the type of stopped display mode of the third symbol, making it possible to perform an effect according to the display mode of the stopped third symbol, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 760, the contents of the reserved shift chance performance executed when the display position of the reserved pattern shifts among the performances (pre-reading performances) using the reserved pattern in this 24th control example will be described. FIG. 760(a) is a screen (reserved change precursor display screen) in which the reserved pattern to be executed in the reserved change performance is displayed in the display area HR2, and is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in a state in which a special pattern change is being executed; FIG. 760(b) is a screen (reserved change precursor display screen) in which the reserved pattern to be executed in the reserved change performance is displayed in the display area HR2, and is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed in a state in which a special pattern change is not being executed (a state in which a special pattern is stopped and displayed); FIG. 760(c) is a diagram showing an example of a reserved shift chance performance executed when the reserved pattern to be executed in the reserved change performance shifts its display position; and FIG. 760(d) is a diagram showing an example of a reserved shift chance performance executed when the reserved pattern to be executed in the reserved change performance shifts its display position.

In the 22nd control example described above, the display mode of the reserved patterns was the same as that of reserved patterns that are not the target of the reserve change performance until the reserve change performance was executed, so that the player would have difficulty in identifying the reserved patterns that are the target of the reserve change performance until the reserve change performance was executed. In contrast, in the 24th control example, a dedicated display mode (premonition display mode) can be set so that the reserved patterns that are the target of the reserve change performance can be identified by the player before the reserve change performance is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 760(a), like the 22nd control example described above, normal reserved symbols are displayed in a colored display mode (first reserved symbol hr1, second reserved symbol hr2, fourth reserved symbol hr4), but reserved symbols that are the subject of a reserved change presentation are displayed in a spiral display mode (premonition display mode) as shown in the third reserved symbol hr3, which is a display mode different from the normal display mode. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a possibility that a reserved change presentation will be executed before the reserved change presentation is executed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 760(a), the premonition display mode is configured to rotate clockwise while the special pattern variation is being executed, i.e., while the display position of the reserved pattern does not shift. By dynamically displaying (rotating) the premonition display mode in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand the difference between this and the normal reserved pattern that is statically displayed (stopped display).

As shown in FIG. 760(b), when the currently executing special pattern change is stopped and a new special pattern change (special pattern change using reserved information (winning information) corresponding to the first reserved pattern hr1) is executed, an effect is executed in which the display positions of each reserved pattern are shifted (the first reserved pattern hr1 is shifted to the display area HR1 (see FIG. 672) where the currently executing reserved pattern is displayed, and then the display positions of each reserved pattern displayed in the display area HR2 are shifted one position to the left) in the same manner as in the 22nd control example described above.

Here, the change time of the special pattern change is configured to vary depending on the result of the special pattern lottery, so an event may occur in which the display mode of the premonition reserved pattern is different at the timing when the special pattern change is stopped. Specifically, if the premonition display mode is a repeating display mode that is dynamically displayed from the first mode through the second mode to the first mode, at the timing when the special pattern change is stopped, the premonition reserved pattern may be displayed in the first mode or in the second mode.

In this 24th control example, the premonition reserved pattern with a dynamically (rotating) displayed premonition display mode is configured to be statically (stopped) displayed at the timing of the stop display of the special pattern variation. Specifically, the dynamically displayed premonition display mode is configured to be displayed in a predetermined initial stop mode (first mode). When executing a performance in which the reserved pattern is shifted, a performance pattern can be set in which various operational performances are executed from the initial stop mode (first mode) state for the reserved pattern in the premonition display mode.

By configuring it in this way, the presentation patterns set when executing the shift presentation of the reserved symbols can be limited to presentation patterns that start from the initial stop mode, so the number of presentation patterns can be reduced compared to when presentation patterns are set in accordance with the dynamic position (operation position) of the precursor display mode when the reserved symbols shift.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this 24th control example, a chance effect during hold shift can be executed when the premonition reserved pattern shifts, and the expectation of winning the jackpot and the set value can be suggested to the player depending on the type of effect mode set as the chance effect during hold shift. In other words, the player will pay more attention to the premonition reserved pattern when the premonition reserved pattern shifts than when the dynamically displayed premonition reserved pattern is stopped. Therefore, even if the premonition reserved pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed in the initial stop mode (first mode) regardless of the mode in which the premonition reserved pattern is displayed at the time the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed, it is possible to make it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable.

In the 24th control example, when the special pattern variation is stopped, the premonition reserved pattern is forcibly stopped and displayed in the initial stop mode, regardless of the display mode of the premonition reserved pattern at the timing when the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed, and when the premonition reserved pattern shifts, a performance pattern that starts from the initial stop mode is set. However, without being limited to this, for example, at least two types of stop modes (first initial stop mode, second initial stop mode) can be set as the initial stop mode, and one of the initial stop modes can be set based on the display mode of the premonition reserved pattern at the timing when the special pattern variation is stopped and displayed, and a performance pattern that starts from the first initial stop mode and a performance pattern that starts from the second initial stop mode can be set as the performance pattern executed when the premonition reserved pattern shifts. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable when the premonition reserved pattern that is dynamically displayed is stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the dynamically displayed premonition reserved pattern is displayed in a first mode corresponding to the initial stop mode during the period from immediately before the special pattern variation is stopped to the premonition reserved pattern shift (for example, the fixed display period of the special pattern), the premonition reserved pattern may be fixedly displayed. In other words, the dynamic display of the premonition reserved pattern may be terminated without any sense of incongruity by shifting the timing of the stop display of the special pattern variation and the timing of the stop display of the premonition reserved pattern. In this case, it is preferable to configure the dynamic display period of the premonition reserved pattern (the period from the first mode to the dynamic display until the first mode is again displayed) to be shorter than the fixed display period of the special pattern. By configuring in this way, the premonition reserved pattern can be fixedly displayed in the first mode without any sense of incongruity during the period in which the special pattern is fixedly displayed.

760(c) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen near the display area HR2 when "jump" is set as the presentation mode of the chance presentation during the reserved shift. As shown in FIG. 760(c), when the chance presentation during the reserved shift is executed, only the premonition reserved pattern is shifted in a presentation mode (dynamic display mode) different from the other reserved patterns. FIG. 760(c) shows a presentation mode in which the third reserved pattern hr3, which is the premonition reserved pattern, jumps out to the top of the display area HR2 and then moves to the display position of the shift destination. In other words, it shows a presentation mode in which only the premonition reserved pattern moves a longer distance than the other reserved patterns. Therefore, when "jump" is set as the presentation mode of the chance presentation during the reserved shift, while the premonition reserved pattern is moving outside the display area HR2, the other reserved patterns complete their shift to the display position (display area) of the shift destination, and then a presentation is executed in which the premonition reserved pattern moves to the display position (display area) of the shift destination.

By configuring it in this way, the timing at which the shift of the display position (display area) is completed can be made different for normal reserved patterns and premonition reserved patterns, so that the player can pay closer attention to the presentation mode of the premonition reserved patterns. Also, the timing at which the shift of the display position (display area) is completed is delayed for the premonition reserved patterns compared to the normal reserved patterns. In other words, the period required for the premonition reserved patterns to shift is configured to be longer than the period required for the normal reserved patterns to shift, so the presentation period of the chance presentation when the reserve is shifted can be made longer.

Next, FIG. 760(d) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen near the display area HR2 when "high speed" is set as the performance mode of the chance performance during the reserved shift. As shown in FIG. 760(d), when the chance performance during the reserved shift is executed, only the premonition reserved pattern is shifted in a performance mode (dynamic display mode) different from the other reserved patterns. FIG. 760(d) shows a performance mode in which the third reserved pattern hr3, which is the premonition reserved pattern, moves to the shift destination display position faster than the other normal reserved patterns. Therefore, when "high speed" is set as the performance mode of the chance performance during the reserved shift, the premonition reserved pattern moves to the shift destination display position (display area) before the other reserved patterns complete their shift to the shift destination display position (display area), so that multiple (two) reserved patterns (at least a part of them) are temporarily displayed at the same display position (display area). By configuring in this way, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the player and to enhance the performance effect.

The display mode of the premonition reserved pattern in the 24th control example may be applied to the 22nd control example described above. By configuring it in this way, the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserved change performance can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in this 24th control example, as in the above-mentioned 22nd control example, it is also possible to configure it so that, without using a premonition reserved pattern, at the execution timing of the shift chance presentation, the presentation pattern shown in FIG. 760(c) or FIG. 760(d) can be set as the presentation pattern at the time of shift transition only for the target reserved pattern. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a presentation that is unexpected.

In addition, in this 24th control example, the shift-time chance effect can be executed only for the premonition reserved pattern, but without being limited to this, when the shift-time chance effect is executed for the premonition reserved pattern, the same effect mode may be used to shift other reserved patterns as well. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set an effect mode ("jump", "high speed") different from the normal mode for the multiple reserved patterns displayed in the display area HR2, so that the player can be easily notified that the shift-time chance effect has been executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the 24th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 761. FIG. 761 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 761, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 24th control example is different from the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the 22nd control example described above (see FIG. 687) in that the set value display device 110a, the setting switch 110c, and the setting key 110b are connected to the input/output port 205 connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via the bus line 204, and the MPU 201 executes a process of changing the set value and a process of displaying the set value based on a signal output in response to the operation of the setting key 110b or the setting switch 110c. Note that the contents of various operations using the setting key 110b or the setting switch 110c and the display contents displayed on the set value display device 110a have been described above with reference to FIG. 757, and therefore will not be described here.

Next, the electrical configuration of the sound output device 226 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 24th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 762. FIG. 762 is a block diagram showing a simplified electrical configuration of the sound output device 226. As shown in FIG. 762, the sound output device 226 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 so that data can be transmitted and received.

As shown in FIG. 762, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 301 includes a ROM 302 that stores various control programs and fixed value data (voice data) executed by the MPU 301, and a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 302 are executed.

The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input/output port 305 and the audio synthesis unit 306. When the audio output device 226 receives a command specifying audio data from the audio lamp control device 113, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input/output port 305. In addition, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel of the audio synthesis unit 306 corresponding to the audio type.

The voice synthesis unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesis LSI that synthesizes the voice data input to each channel and outputs it to the amplifier unit 307 as synthetic voice data. The synthetic voice data is amplified by the amplifier unit 307 and input to the speaker unit 308. This allows the speaker unit 308 to output various sounds specified by the voice lamp control device 113. Note that in this 24th control example, the synthetic voice data generated by the voice synthesis unit 306 is input not only to the amplifier unit 307, but also to the ADC 309, which is composed of a known AC-DC converter. This ADC 309 is configured to convert the synthetic voice data, which is analog data, into digital data and output it to the MPU 301.

More specifically, ADC 309 has at least comparators 309a1-309a15 and a decode unit 309b. Each of comparators 309a1-309a15 can determine whether the amplitude (voltage) of the received analog data is greater than the voltage corresponding to each comparator 309a1-309a15. The voltages corresponding to each of comparators 309a1-309a15 are set in increments of 1 volt within the range from 7 volts to -7 volts. Each of comparators 309a1-309a15 is configured to output L if the voltage value of the synthetic voice data is greater than the corresponding voltage value, and output H if the synthetic voice data is smaller.

The decoding unit 309b identifies the range of voltage values of the current synthetic voice data from the combination of the outputs of the comparators 309a1 to 309a15, and converts it into a 4-bit digital value. That is, it converts the range of voltages from "0000B" to "1111B" in ascending order of voltage range. Specifically, for example, if the voltage value of the synthetic voice data is greater than 7 volts, "1111B" is output as the digital value. Also, for example, if the voltage value of the synthetic voice data is greater than 3 volts and equal to or less than 4 volts, "1011B" is output as the digital value.

The MPU 301 is configured to sample the synthesized audio data output from the ADC 309 over a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) and output the average value (average amplitude) to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 identifies the corresponding vibration intensity (duty ratio) from the received average amplitude. Then, an operation command is set in the motor control IC to drive a vibration motor (not shown) of the drive motors 770 connected to the input/output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 with the identified vibration intensity (duty ratio). This allows the vibration intensity to be varied according to the audio output from the speaker unit 308, providing a realistic presentation.

In the 24th control example, the digital value output from the ADC 309 is output to the MPU 301, but it may be output directly to the input/output port 305, so that the digital value is output directly to the voice lamp control device 113. When performing a variable effect accompanied by a vibration effect, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to calculate the average amplitude by sampling the digital value over a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds). The motor control IC may then be notified of the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) corresponding to the calculated average amplitude by an operation command. This reduces the processing load on the MPU 301.

In the 24th control example, the synthetic voice data is converted to the average value of the absolute amplitude, and the vibration intensity (DUTY ratio) is determined based on the average value, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the maximum absolute value during a predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) during sampling may be output from the voice output device 226 to the voice lamp control device 113, or an effective value (the maximum amplitude divided by the square root of 2) may be calculated and output from the voice output device 226 to the voice lamp control device 113.

The type of operation command for driving the vibration motor may be variably set in response to the voice command output from the voice lamp control device 113. For example, when a voice command for specifying voice data in a high range is set, a vibration intensity corresponding to a short amplitude may be set as the operation command, and when a voice command for specifying voice data in a low range is set, a vibration intensity corresponding to a long amplitude may be set as the operation command.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a clearer difference in the audio output that is executed depending on the type of voice data.

Next, referring to FIG. 763, the contents of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202xa in the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this 24th control example will be explained. The ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 in this 24th control example differs from the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that a different data table is referenced when determining whether or not the special symbol lottery has been won (jackpot determination), but is otherwise identical. A detailed explanation of the identical elements will be omitted.

Now, referring to Figure 763, the contents stipulated in the special pattern jackpot random number table 202xa will be explained. This special pattern jackpot random number table 202xa is a data table that is referenced when drawing a lottery for a special pattern, and the range of values of the first jackpot random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot is stipulated for each state of the special pattern and each set value. Figure 763 shows the stipulated contents of this special pattern jackpot random number table 202a.

As shown in FIG. 763, the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a jackpot for special symbols in a low probability state for special symbols is set to 250 values from "0 to 249" for a set value of "1", 275 values from "0 to 274" for a set value of "2", and 300 values from "0 to 299" for a set value of "3". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 763, the random number value (counter value) that is determined to be a jackpot for special symbols in a guaranteed bonus game state (special game state) is set to 1000 values from "0 to 999" for a set value of "1", 1100 values from "0 to 1099" for a set value of "2", and 1200 values from "0 to 1199" for a set value of "3".

In this 24th control example, since the first winning random number counter can have 65,536 possible values from "0 to 65,535", when the setting is "1", the probability of winning the jackpot (jackpot probability) is about 1/262 in the low probability state of the special pattern, and the jackpot probability is about 1/65 in the high probability state of the special pattern. When the setting is "2", the jackpot probability is about 1/238 in the low probability state of the special pattern, and the jackpot probability is about 1/60 in the high probability state of the special pattern. When the setting is "3", the jackpot probability is about 1/218 in the low probability state of the special pattern, and the jackpot probability is about 1/55 in the high probability state of the special pattern.

Therefore, the setting "1" is the setting value that makes it most difficult to win the jackpot (unfavorable setting value), and the setting "3" is the setting value that makes it most easy to win the jackpot (advantageous setting value). As described above, in this 24th control example, regardless of which setting value is set, the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special pattern is four times higher than the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special pattern. In other words, regardless of which setting value is set, the same bonus (bonus for making it easier to win the jackpot) is provided to the player when the special pattern moves from the low probability state to the high probability state of the special pattern. By configuring in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to be able to set multiple setting values, the bonus granted when the probability state of the special pattern switches can be made uniform regardless of the setting value, so that excessive differences in game content depending on the setting value can be suppressed.

The bonus content granted when the special symbol moves from a low probability state to a high probability state may be different depending on the setting value. For example, the setting "3" may be configured to have a greater degree of variability in the probability of winning when the special symbol moves from a low probability state to a high probability state than the setting "1". In the case of the setting "1", the probability of winning in the high probability state of the special symbol is four times that in the low probability state of the special symbol, and in the case of the setting "3", the probability of winning in the high probability state of the special symbol is six times that in the low probability state of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, the degree of advantage of the advantageous setting "3" can be made greater than the disadvantageous setting "1", so that the player can be motivated to play on the pachinko machine 10 with the advantageous setting value set.

In this 24th control example, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with three settings, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the settings may be two or four or more (for example, six). Furthermore, in this 24th control example, a setting difference is provided for the jackpot probability of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a setting difference may be provided for various elements that can change the degree of advantage of the game, such as the jackpot probability, the small jackpot probability, the probability of the probability change state, the duration of the probability change state, and the game content of the jackpot game. Even in such a case, since it is possible to provide the player with different degrees of advantage depending on the set setting value, it is possible to motivate the player to play on the pachinko machine 10 with the advantageous setting value set.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of this 24th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 764. FIG. 764 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203. As shown in FIG. 764, the RAM 203 in this 24th control example differs from the RAM 203 in the above-mentioned 22nd control example (see FIG. 689(b)) in that a setting value storage area 203xa has been added, but is otherwise the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The set value storage area 203xa is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the set value of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, if the set value storage area 203xa stores data "00H", it indicates that the set value "1" is set, if the set value storage area 203xa stores data "01H", it indicates that the set value "2" is set, and if the set value storage area 203xa stores data "02H", it indicates that the set value "3" is set. When a special symbol lottery is executed, the data of the set value storage area 203xa is read out, and a lottery (jackpot lottery) for a special symbol is executed with a lottery probability corresponding to the set value indicated by the read data. That is, the lottery for a special symbol is executed by comparing the range of random numbers corresponding to the set value indicated by the data of the set value storage area 203xa in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202xa (see FIG. 763) with the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area. The value of the setting value storage area 203xa is initially set to "00H", and each time the setting switch 110c is pressed (operated) in the setting change state, the value is updated by "01H" from "01H" to "02H", and when the setting switch 110c is pressed again while the data is "02H", the data is updated to "01H". When the power is turned on by pressing the RAM clear switch 122, all data in the RAM 203 is reset (cleared) to the initial value. Therefore, when only the RAM clear operation is performed, the value of the setting value storage area 203g is also reset to the initial value "00H". In other words, even if the setting change operation is not performed and only the RAM clear operation is performed, the setting can be changed to 1. This improves the convenience of the hall.

Next, referring to FIG. 765, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 24th control example will be described. FIG. 765 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 24th control example. As shown in FIG. 765, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 in this 24th control example differs from the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 22nd control example (see FIG. 693(a)) in that a voice command selection table 222xa and a reserved action selection table 222xb have been added, but otherwise is the same. The same components are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The voice command selection table 222xa is a data table that is referenced when selecting a voice type corresponding to the character of the third pattern displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. In this twenty-fourth control example, the type of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be a third pattern that is a combination of one of the seven number icons "1" to "7" corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery and one of seven types of characters ("1 character" to "7 character"), which is stopped and displayed.

Basically, the number icon "1" and the character "Character 1" combine to form the "First Third Pattern," the number icon "2" and the character "Character 2" combine to form the "Second Third Pattern," the number icon "3" and the character "Character 3" combine to form the "Third Third Pattern," the number icon "4" and the character "Character 4" combine to form the "Fourth Third Pattern," the number icon "5" and the character "Character 5" combine to form the "Fifth Third Pattern," the number icon "6" and the character "Character 6" combine to form the "Sixth Third Pattern," and the number icon "7" and the character "Character 7" combine to form the "Seventh Third Pattern."

Furthermore, when the combination change conditions for the third pattern are met (for example, a change condition that is met when the number of special pattern changes reaches a predetermined number (500 times), or a change condition that is met when the number of jackpot wins reaches a predetermined number (5 times)), a special third pattern can be formed in which a different type of character is combined with the number icon that forms the third pattern.

In this 24th control example, regardless of the type of the number icon of the stopped third pattern, voice data corresponding to the character type can be used for the sound output from the sound output device 226. By configuring it in this way, every time a special pattern lottery is executed (every time a game is played), a sound using a different type of voice data is output from the pachinko machine 10, which prevents the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

Furthermore, in this 24th control example, a special bonus can be awarded according to the combination of the third symbols (combination of character types) stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, when the third symbol indicating a big win is stopped and displayed, a bonus can be awarded in which the player can select whether or not to play the game by continuing the voice output based on the voice data corresponding to the character type associated with the third symbol, and when the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in a specific combination (for example, a reach miss), a setting suggestion bonus can be awarded in which a line that can suggest the setting value ("1" to "3") set in the pachinko machine 10 is uttered by a voice based on the voice data corresponding to the character type associated with the third symbol in the reach state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to have a player who has been focusing only on the result of the special pattern lottery being a big win pay attention to the result of the special pattern lottery (the stopped display mode of the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81) in the hope of receiving a special benefit other than a big win. This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming bored with the game too early.

In addition, in this 24th control example, the third pattern displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 can be a special third pattern that has a different type of number icon and character type from normal patterns. Furthermore, the device is configured to be able to output a voice message that can suggest a character associated with the third pattern that is stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

In other words, while the system is configured to allow the player to predict the type of third symbol that will be stopped next based on the voice output dialogue, it is also configured to allow the display of a special third symbol in which the type of number icon and the type of character are different from normal as the third symbol. For example, when a "1 character" is associated with a third symbol corresponding to the number icon "1" and a third symbol corresponding to the number icon "3", if a voice output is made suggesting that a "1 character" will be stopped, the player can enjoy predicting whether the third symbol corresponding to the number icon "1" or the third symbol corresponding to the number icon "3" will be stopped.

Now, referring to FIG. 766, we will explain the contents of the voice command selection table 222xa, which is a data table that is referenced when determining voice data in this 24th control example. FIG. 766 shows the contents defined in the voice command selection table 222xa.

The voice command selection table 222xa is referenced in the stop command process 24 (see F2273 in FIG. 777) that is executed when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, when determining the corresponding voice command based on the stopped display mode of the stopped and displayed third symbol (see F2672 in FIG. 777). As shown in FIG. 766, voice commands are defined for specifying voice data corresponding to each character type according to the character type associated with the stopped and displayed third symbol. In addition, a bonus is also defined according to the combination of character types associated with the stopped and displayed third symbol.

When a voice command is determined by referring to the voice command selection table 222xa, a voice command for audio corresponding to the determined voice command is output to the audio output device 226. The audio output device 226 then identifies the corresponding voice data based on the received voice command, and outputs a common sound for gameplay using the identified voice data. In other words, it is possible to change only the voice data of the sound content that is constantly output from the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, when the voice command received by the audio output device 226 contains information indicating the output of a specific line, the corresponding line data is read out and the received line is output using the received voice data. By configuring it in this way, not only can the voice data of the sound output from the pachinko machine 10 be made different depending on the stopped display mode (character type) of the third pattern stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, but it is also possible to output dedicated lines, which prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

In addition, in this 24th control example, lines that can suggest information that is advantageous to the player (e.g., setting value information) are also included as lines that are exclusive to specific voice commands, so in addition to improving the presentation effect by outputting sound with various voice data, it is possible to grant advantageous benefits to the player, making it possible to get the player interested in changes to the voice data.

Next, the contents stipulated in the voice command selection table 222xa will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 766. As shown in FIG. 766, in the voice command selection table 222xa, the types of third symbols stopped and displayed are broadly categorized into third symbol types indicating a big win, third symbol types indicating a missed reach, and third symbol types indicating a complete miss (scattered), and a different benefit can be granted for each of the broadly categorized third symbol types. Then, for each of the broadly categorized third symbol types, a voice corresponding to the third symbol type (character type) actually stopped and displayed is stipulated.

Specifically, when the third symbol type is "jackpot", that is, when three identical number icons are displayed side by side, the voice command "Command 1" is specified for the character attached to the stopped third symbol to be "Character 1", the voice command "Command 2" is specified for the character attached to the stopped third symbol to be "Character 2", the voice command "Command 3" is specified for the character attached to the stopped third symbol to be "Character 3", and the voice command "Command 4" is specified for the character attached to the stopped third symbol to be "Character 4". For the character attached to the stopped third pattern, which is "Character 4", a voice command "Command 4" is specified to specify the selected voice "Character 4", for the character attached to the stopped third pattern, which is "Character 5", a voice command "Command 5" is specified to specify the selected voice "Character 5", for the character attached to the stopped third pattern, which is "Character 6", a voice command "Command 6" is specified to specify the selected voice "Character 6", and for the character attached to the stopped third pattern, which is "Character 7", a voice command "Command 7" is specified to specify the selected voice "Character 7".

When the third symbol type is a "jackpot", a special bonus that allows the set voice data to be continuously set is provided as the special bonus to be granted. In other words, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, voice output for the subsequent play (play during the jackpot and play after the jackpot play ends) is executed using the voice data corresponding to the character attached to that jackpot symbol. In this 24th control example, voice output using the same voice data is configured to continue for the period until the next jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent another voice data from being immediately specified even though voice data corresponding to a favorite character has been specified.

In addition, in this 24th control example, a bonus of continuing the sound output corresponding to specific voice data can be granted in the event of a jackpot win, so that a player who wishes to have various game sounds output using voice data corresponding to their favorite character can continue playing in the hope of winning the jackpot with a third symbol associated with a specific character type.

In this 24th control example, the audio output using the voice data identified based on winning a jackpot (stopped display of a jackpot symbol) is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won, but without being limited to this, the configuration may also be such that the player operates the operation means (e.g., the performance button 22) to clear the special benefit granted based on winning a jackpot. By configuring in this way, even if a third symbol with a character identified by voice data that the player does not want is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, it is possible to prevent the audio output based on that voice data from continuing for a long period of time.

Furthermore, in this 24th control example, the voice output using the voice data identified based on winning a jackpot (stopped display of the jackpot symbol) is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won, making it easier for the player to continue playing until the voice data corresponding to the favorite character is identified, but without being limited to this, for example, the player may be allowed to arbitrarily select the type of character to be attached to the third symbol that is stopped and displayed when a jackpot is won based on the number of times the jackpot has been won or the playing time (number of times the special symbol is drawn). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play when the third symbol with the favorite character attached is not stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates a jackpot win, even if the player has played for a long time and won the jackpot multiple times.

Next, when the third symbol type is "reach miss", that is, when some of the multiple third symbols stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot (reach state), and the remaining third symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode different from the combination indicating a jackpot, the character attached to the third symbol displayed in the reach state is "7 character", and the voice command "command 8" for specifying the selected voice "reach character (7 character)" is specified, and the character displayed in the reach state is "7 character". When the character attached to the third symbol is an "odd number character excluding 7 (1 character, 3 characters, 5 characters)," the voice commands "Command 9" to "Command 11" are specified to specify the selected voice "Reachable character (1 character, 3 characters, 5 characters)," and when the character attached to the third symbol displayed in a reach state is an "even number character (2 characters, 4 characters, 6 characters)," the voice commands "Command 12" to "Command 14" are specified to specify the selected voice "Reachable character (2 characters, 4 characters, 6 characters)."

In addition, when the third symbol type is a "missed reach," information is specified that allows a special bonus to be given in the form of a dialogue output (conversational dialogue) that can suggest the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10. Although detailed explanations are omitted here, in this 24th control example, the expectation of winning a jackpot is varied according to the type of third symbol that is in a reach state, and when a "7 reach" occurs in which a third symbol with the number icon "7" is in a reach state, the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher than when other third symbols are in a reach state. Specifically, it is configured so that about 90% of the times when a "7 reach" occurs, a jackpot is won.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict the likelihood of winning a jackpot before all of the third symbols are stopped and displayed, depending on the type of third symbol that has reached the reach state. Furthermore, even when a variable performance (reach performance) of the same performance mode is executed, it is possible to vary the likelihood of winning a jackpot depending on the type of third symbol that has reached the reach state. Therefore, since variable performances with different expectations of winning a jackpot can be provided using the same performance mode, the amount of image data (reach video data) used for the variable performance can be reduced.

In a pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, if a reach state (7 reach state) is displayed with the type of third symbol that has a high expectation of winning the jackpot, and then the third symbol is displayed in a display mode that indicates a miss win, that is, if a miss win occurs despite the execution of a variable presentation that has a high expectation of winning the jackpot, the player's motivation to play is significantly reduced.

In contrast to this, in the present 24th control example, when the third symbol is displayed in a combination of symbols that is displayed in the event of a miss win (missed 7 reach) even though the expectation of a big win is high, a special benefit (setting suggestion) different from the big win can be offered to the player. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a significant decrease in the player's motivation to play.

In addition, in this 24th control example, the type of jackpot that will be set (normal (time-saving) jackpot, special jackpot) can be suggested to the player depending on the type of the third symbol when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot win, and the player is more likely to win a jackpot that is favorable to the player (special jackpot) when the type of the stopped and displayed third symbol is the number icon "odd (1, 3, 5, 7)" than when the type is the number icon "even (2, 4, 6)."

Therefore, when the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a combination that indicates a reach miss, the degree to which the player's motivation to play decreases differs depending on whether the reach state of the number icon "odd" becomes a reach miss or whether the reach state of the number icon "even" becomes a reach miss.

Here, in this 24th control example, the content of the special privilege granted when the type of the stopped third pattern displayed is a "reach miss" is configured to differ depending on the type of the third pattern that has become a "reach miss". The more the player's motivation to play decreases when the third pattern is stopped and displayed in a "reach miss" display mode, that is, when a miss occurs in a reach state where the expectation of winning a jackpot is high, or when a miss occurs in a reach state with a third pattern that is likely to grant a privilege advantageous to the player when a jackpot is won, the more the special privilege that is advantageous to the player is granted.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 766, when the target of the "missed reach" is a "7 reach", a special bonus is defined that can execute a "strong setting suggestion" voice output (see FIG. 758(b)) that clearly notifies the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, when the target of the "missed reach" is an "odd number reach other than 7", a special bonus is defined that can execute a "weak setting suggestion" voice output that can suggest the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, and when the target of the "missed reach" is an "even number reach", a special bonus is defined that can execute a lively voice output that does not suggest the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10.

By configuring in this way, the player can be interested not only in whether the third pattern stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is a display mode indicating a big win, but also in which type of third pattern is stopped and displayed, so that the player can be prevented from getting bored of the game early. In addition, since "reach miss" is specified as the stop display mode of the third pattern that can grant a special benefit advantageous to the player, for example, in a case where a special benefit (setting suggestion) can be granted with a predetermined probability when all the third patterns are stopped and displayed regardless of the stop display mode of the third patterns, the player can be made to understand that the special benefit may be granted before the special benefit is granted (at the time when the reach state is established), so that the occurrence of a situation in which the special benefit is suddenly granted and the player fails to understand the information granted as the special benefit can be prevented.

In addition, because a "missed reach" is defined as the stopped display mode of the third symbol that can grant a special bonus advantageous to the player, the higher the expectation of a jackpot as a variation presentation of the third symbol, the easier it becomes to grant a special bonus when a jackpot is not won (when a miss is won). This makes it possible to prevent situations in which the player's motivation to play decreases excessively.

In this 24th control example, "reach miss" is defined as a broad classification of third pattern type, and the content of the special bonus granted varies depending on the type of third pattern that is in a reach state (reach type). In addition to this configuration, the third pattern type may be further subdivided depending on the type of final stopped third pattern in the case of a "reach miss", and the content of the special bonus granted may vary.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the system so that a player is more likely to be granted a special bonus that is advantageous to him/her when the third symbol that finally stops is close to the third symbol "5" in the reach state (for example, "4" or "6") in the reach state of the same type (for example, "5 reach") than when the third symbol that stops is not close to the third symbol "5" in the reach state (for example, "1" or "2").

In other words, in recent pachinko machines 10, when a reach effect with a high probability of winning a jackpot (high reach effect) is executed when the third symbol being displayed changes to a reach state, the device is configured to execute an effect that makes it difficult to tell whether the third symbol combination ("555") corresponding to a jackpot will be displayed or not just before the display of the result of the effect indicating whether or not a jackpot will be won, between the third symbol "5" in the reach state and the third symbols "4" and "6" displayed before and after it, and when a reach effect with a low probability of winning a jackpot (low reach effect) is executed, the device is generally configured to make the final stopped third symbol when the reach is missed significantly different from the third symbol in the reach state in order to prevent the player from expecting a jackpot too much.

Therefore, by subdividing the "reach miss" defined as the third symbol type into "reach miss (one frame miss)" and "reach miss (other)," it becomes easier to grant a special bonus when a miss occurs despite the execution of a reach effect that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot.

In addition, in the 24th control example, the voice command is determined by referring to the voice command selection table 222xa shown in FIG. 766 regardless of the set game state, but the contents of the voice command selection table 222xa may be specified so that different voice commands are determined depending on the set game state. In this case, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the probability of a reach state being established is different depending on the set game state, it may be specified so that a special benefit is more likely to be awarded in a "reach miss" when a game state in which a reach state is difficult to be established is set than when a game state in which a reach state is easy to be established is set, or it may be specified so that a special benefit is more likely to be awarded overall when the set game state is a game state advantageous to the player (e.g., a probability change state) than when the set game state is a game state disadvantageous to the player (e.g., a normal state).

Returning to FIG. 766, the explanation will be continued. When the third symbol type is "Barakeme", that is, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a miss win without the reach state being established, voice data corresponding to the character type ("octopus" in FIG. 758(a)) displayed on the left stopped symbol (see symbol D1 in FIG. 758(a)) is specified, and a voice command (command 15...) is specified for granting a special privilege in which a line corresponding to the combination of the character types of the stopped and displayed third symbol (the combination of "octopus, shark, and turtle" in FIG. 758(a)) can be output as a voice command. In addition, in this 24th control example, as a special privilege that can be granted when "Barakeme" is stopped and displayed as the third symbol type, a special privilege in which a line for entertainment is output as a voice, and a special privilege in which a line suggesting the character type to be stopped and displayed in the next variation is output as a voice can be granted.

By configuring it in this way, even if the third pattern stopped and displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 is a "variety", it is possible to output audio using voice data corresponding to that stopped display mode (left stopped pattern) and audio output of dialogue corresponding to the combination of stopped display modes, preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on. Furthermore, a special bonus is given in part of the dialogue output based on the "variety", suggesting the type of stopped pattern (character type of the third pattern stopped and displayed) in the next variation, so that the content of the dialogue output can be made interesting to players who want to quickly understand the results of the special pattern lottery.

Furthermore, in this 24th control example, a special third pattern can be displayed in which the number icon and character type are different from normal, so that when a special bonus is awarded to suggest the type of stopped pattern (character type of the stopped third pattern) in the variation, the fun of predicting the type of the stopped third pattern (type of number icon) based on the character type of the stopped third pattern can be provided.

The pending action selection table 222xb is a data table referenced when determining the operation pattern for moving the display mode for indicating the pending patterns displayed in the display area HR2, i.e., the number of rights to execute a special pattern lottery that have already been acquired, and is referenced when determining the operation mode (action) for shifting the display area for pending patterns based on the start of a new special pattern variation (see F4101 in FIG. 779).

Here, in the above-mentioned 22nd control example, the reserved information including the right to execute the special pattern lottery is configured to be able to store (reserved memory) up to four reserved information for each special pattern type, and the reserved pattern for indicating the number of reserved information stored to the player is configured to be able to be displayed in the display area HR2 formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Then, when a new special pattern lottery is executed, the special pattern lottery is executed based on the information contained in the reserved information that is reserved and stored. In other words, the reserved information is reserved and stored in a state in which the information referenced when determining whether or not a jackpot has been won in the special pattern lottery that is executed later (the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1) is already stored. Therefore, in the above-mentioned 22nd control example, the reserved information (reserved information corresponding to the reserved pattern displayed in the display area HR2 formed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81) for which a special pattern lottery has not been executed is determined in advance, and a reserved change performance (see Figs. 672 to 676) for suggesting the possibility of winning a jackpot is executed is configured to be able to be executed.

However, the display position of the reserved pattern displayed in the display area HR2 shifts each time a new special pattern change is executed. Therefore, when executing a reserved change performance in which the change parts Ym1 and Ym2 are moved while the display position of the reserved pattern is fixed as in the 22nd control example described above, the reserved change performance can be executed only when the special pattern change is executed with a change pattern of at least a predetermined period (10 seconds), that is, when the condition that the display position of the reserved pattern does not change for a predetermined period (10 seconds) is met, and when this condition is not met, the reserved change performance cannot be executed.

In response to this, for example, in order to configure the reserve change performance used in the above-mentioned 22nd control example, that is, the reserve change performance that specifies the reserved patterns that can be changed by moving the change role Ym1, Ym2, so that it can be continuously executed even when the display position of the reserved patterns shifts, it is necessary to specify the timing at which the display position of the reserved patterns shifts based on the change time of the executed special pattern change, and to control the movable positions of the change role Ym1, Ym2 according to the specified timing, which creates a problem that the control process content for executing the reserve change performance becomes enormous. In addition, when short-term special pattern changes are executed continuously, there is a problem that a special pattern lottery is executed using the reserved information corresponding to the reserved pattern that is the target of the reserve change performance while the reserve change performance is being executed.

In contrast, in the present 24th control example, when the execution conditions for the reserved change performance for varying the display mode of the reserved pattern are met and a short period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) is set as the change time for the special pattern change being executed (executed), a reserved action performance is executed that changes the operation pattern (action) of the operation for shifting the display position of the reserved pattern, thereby making it possible to notify the player of the expected probability of winning a jackpot for the reserved pattern that is the subject of the reserved change performance.

By configuring it in this way, even if a situation occurs in which the reserved pattern is not maintained at a specific display position for a specified period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) (a situation in which a short-term change of the special pattern is executed), the player can be notified of the preliminary determination result for the reserved information in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, in this 24th control example, the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested based on the mode of the reserved action executed as the reserved action presentation and the result of the special pattern lottery based on the reserved information in question. Specifically, if a reserved action mode (e.g., a jump mode) with a high probability of winning a jackpot is executed but the result of the special pattern lottery based on the reserved information that is the subject of the reserved action presentation is a miss and a win, the system is configured to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that a setting value that is advantageous to the player (setting "3") has been set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player more interested in the reserved action mode executed when the display position of the reserved pattern shifts.

Now, referring to FIG. 767, the contents defined in the reserved action selection table 222xb will be explained. FIG. 767 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the reserved action selection table 222xb. As shown in FIG. 767, the reserved action selection table 222xb defines multiple types of action modes (normal, high speed, jump) as action modes executed when the reserved symbol that is the subject of the reserved action performance is shifted, in association with the target reserved pre-read result (the result of pre-determination of the target reserved information), the presence or absence of a reserved change scenario setting, the setting value, and the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf.

Specifically, when the result of the pre-reading (pre-determination result) of the reserved information (winning information) corresponding to the reserved symbol that is the target of the reserved action performance is a big win, and information (reserved scenario information) for executing the reserved change performance for the reserved symbol is set, if the setting value is set to "1", the reserved action "jump" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the reserved action "fast" is specified for the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved action "jump" is specified for the range of "90 to 98". Also, if the setting value is set to "2", the reserved action "fast" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the reserved action "jump" is specified for the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved action "jump" is specified for the range of "90 to 98". In addition, when the setting value is set to "3", the pending action "Jump" is set for the acquired first performance counter 223vf value in the range of "0 to 59", the pending action "Fast" is set for the range of "60 to 89", and the pending action "Fast" is set for the range of "90 to 98".

On the other hand, when the result of the pre-read (pre-determination result) of the reserved information (winning information) corresponding to the reserved symbol that is the target of the reserved action performance is a big win, and information (reserved scenario information) for executing the reserved change performance for the reserved symbol is not set, and the setting value is set to "1", the reserved action "normal" is set for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the reserved action "normal" is set for the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved action "fast" is set for the range of "90 to 98". Also, when the setting value is set to "2", the reserved action "normal" is set for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the reserved action "normal" is set for the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved action "jump" is set for the range of "90 to 98". In addition, when the setting value is set to "3", the pending action "Jump" is set for the acquired first performance counter 223vf value in the range of "0 to 59", the pending action "Fast" is set for the range of "60 to 89", and the pending action "Normal" is set for the range of "90 to 98".

Furthermore, when the result of the pre-read (pre-determination result) of the reserved information (winning information) corresponding to the reserved symbol that is the target of the reserved action performance is a miss win, and information (reserved scenario information) for executing the reserved change performance for the reserved symbol is set, if the setting value is set to "1", the reserved action "fast" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the reserved action "normal" is specified for the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved action "normal" is specified for the range of "90 to 98". Also, when the setting value is set to "2", the reserved action "fast" is specified for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the reserved action "normal" is specified for the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved action "jump" is specified for the range of "90 to 98". In addition, when the setting value is set to "3", the pending action "fast" is set for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the pending action "jump" is set for the range of "60 to 89", and the pending action "normal" is set for the range of "90 to 98".

On the other hand, when the result of the pre-read (pre-determination result) of the reserved information (winning information) corresponding to the reserved symbol that is the target of the reserved action performance is a miss win, and information (reserved scenario information) for executing the reserved change performance for the reserved symbol is not set, and the setting value is set to "1", the reserved action "normal" is set for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the reserved action "normal" is set for the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved action "fast" is set for the range of "90 to 98". Also, when the setting value is set to "2", the reserved action "normal" is set for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the reserved action "fast" is set for the range of "60 to 89", and the reserved action "normal" is set for the range of "90 to 98". In addition, when the setting value is set to "3", the pending action "normal" is set for the acquired value of the first performance counter 223vf in the range of "0 to 59", the pending action "fast" is set for the range of "60 to 89", and the pending action "jump" is set for the range of "90 to 98".

Next, referring to FIG. 768, the configuration of the RAM 223 possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this 24th control example will be described. FIG. 768 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this 24th control example. As shown in FIG. 768, the RAM 223 possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 in this 24th control example differs from the RAM 223 possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 22nd control example (see FIG. 693 (b)) in that a setting value storage area 223xa, a setting change flag 223xb, and a voice fixed flag 223xc have been added, but otherwise is the same. The same contents are assigned the same symbols and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The setting value storage area 223xa is a memory area for storing setting values based on information output from the main control unit 110 when that information is received regarding the setting values. Specifically, a status command including information regarding the setting values is set (see S1753 in FIG. 770) in the start-up process 24 of the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 770), and when that status command is received, a setting value is identified based on the information included in the received status command, and information indicating the identified setting value is stored in the setting value storage area 223xa.

The information stored in the setting value storage area 223xa is referenced when determining the presentation mode of the setting suggestion presentation. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this control example, when a setting change operation to change the setting value is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to always require an operation of turning on the power, and a status command including information regarding the setting value is set after the setting change operation is completed. Furthermore, each time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 (each time the start-up process 24 (see FIG. 770) of the main control device 110 is executed), a status command including information regarding the setting value is output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. By configuring in this way, even if information regarding the setting value is output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only at the limited timing of power-on, the current setting value can be reliably grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

Also, by minimizing the opportunities for outputting information about the setting value, it is possible to suppress the illegal acquisition of information about the setting value. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a signal indicating the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 is not directly output to the outside, but information about the setting value is output. Therefore, even if the information is illegally acquired, it is difficult to identify the setting value indicated by the information, and it is possible to suppress the illegal acquisition of information about the setting value. In addition, in this embodiment, information about the setting value is set using a part of the status command indicating the game status (for example, the upper bits of the 8 bits for generating the status command that are likely to be empty), so it is more difficult to identify the setting value indicated by the output information than when information about the setting value is output alone, and it is possible to suppress the illegal acquisition of information about the setting value.

Furthermore, since the setting value storage area 223xa is configured to store information indicating the setting value, rather than a value indicating the setting value, even if the information stored in the setting value storage area 223xa is illegally obtained, it is difficult to identify the setting value indicated by the output information, and therefore it is possible to prevent illegal acquisition of information regarding the setting value.

In this control example, a dedicated memory area called the setting value storage area 223xa is provided as a memory area for storing information related to the setting value (information for indicating the setting value), but this is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the memory area to store information for indicating the setting value using a part (free area) of another memory area, and to store an address indicating the memory area in which the information related to the setting value (information for indicating the setting value) is stored in a specific area. In this case, it is preferable to configure the area in which the information related to the setting value (information for indicating the setting value) is stored to be changed periodically or irregularly.

It is also advisable to configure the information about the setting values (information for indicating the setting values) to be processed according to predetermined rules in accordance with the specifications of the storage area that stores the information about the setting values. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it less likely that the setting values will be illegally obtained based on the information stored in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

The setting change in progress flag 223xb is a flag to indicate that the setting is currently being changed, and is set to ON when a change in progress command indicating that the setting is being changed is output from the main control unit 110 (see F2072 in FIG. 773). Then, it is set to OFF when it is determined that a change completion command indicating that the setting change is complete has been received (see F2074 in FIG. 773).

By providing this setting change in progress flag 223xb, it becomes possible for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the operation status of the setting change operation executed by the main control device 110, and therefore the processing of the standby processing (see F2051 in FIG. 773) executed until the setting change operation is completed can be switched according to the operation status of the setting change operation. Therefore, the processing load of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

The voice fixed flag 223xc is a flag for indicating a period during which the voice data output as audio is not changed, and is set to ON when a period during which the voice data output as audio is not changed is set. In this 24th control example, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the type of sound output from the pachinko machine 10 can be determined using the voice data corresponding to the character type attached to the stopped and displayed third symbol. Then, when the third symbol indicating that a jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed, the voice output can be continuously executed using the voice data corresponding to the character type attached to the third symbol indicating that a jackpot has been won until the next jackpot is won.

The voice fixed flag 223xc is set to ON (F2675 in FIG. 777) when it is determined that the third symbol to be stopped is the third symbol indicating a jackpot win (the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot win variation) in the stop command process 24 (see F2273 in FIG. 777) executed when a stop command for stopping the third symbol is received, and the setting status is determined each time a stop command is received (see F2671 in FIG. 777). Here, if it is determined that the voice fixed flag 223xc is set to ON (F2671 in FIG. 777: Yes), the process for identifying a new voice command for the current third symbol stop display is skipped. Then, it is set to OFF when setting the stop type corresponding to the jackpot win variation (see F4003 in FIG. 776).

Although a detailed description is omitted, in this 24th control example, the player can set the voice fixed flag 223xc, which is set to ON, to OFF by operating the operation means (effect button 22). By configuring it in this way, when a jackpot is won with a third symbol with a character type that is not intended by the player, it is possible to prevent audio output using voice data corresponding to the unintended character type from continuing for a long period of time.

Next, referring to FIG. 769, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in this 24th control example will be described. FIG. 769(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 302. As shown in FIG. 769(a), the ROM 302 is provided with at least an audio file storage area 302xa.

The audio file storage area 302xa is a storage area that stores voice data corresponding to character types in addition to audio files (audio data) used to output music and sound effects in various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10. When the execution of various effects is notified by the audio lamp control device 113, an audio file corresponding to the effect is read from this audio file storage area 302xa and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesis unit 306.

In addition, when a voice command for voice indicating the type of voice data is notified by the voice lamp control device 113, voice data corresponding to the voice command is read from this voice file storage area 302xa and output to the corresponding channel of the voice synthesis unit 306.

Furthermore, the audio file storage area 302xa stores a dedicated audio file that is output when an audio voice command is notified by the audio lamp control device 113, and when an audio voice command for indicating the type of voice data is notified by the audio lamp control device 113, a dedicated audio file corresponding to the voice command is read from this audio file storage area 302xa and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesis unit 306.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the sound output device 132 will be described with reference to FIG. 769(b). FIG. 769(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 303. As shown in FIG. 769(b), the RAM 303 is provided with at least a command memory area 303xa and a selected voice storage area 303xb.

The command memory area 303a is an area where various commands output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice output device 226 are temporarily stored until the processing for the command is executed. In detail, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see F6002 in FIG. 781) of the voice output device 226 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area 303a is read out from among the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing according to the command.

The selected voice storage area 303xb is a storage area for storing the type of voice data read from the voice file storage area 302xa in response to a voice command notified from the voice lamp control device 113. When a voice command is output from the voice lamp control device 113, the type of voice data corresponding to the voice command received from the voice file storage area 302xa is stored, and then, when the process of outputting new voice is executed by the voice output device 226, the voice data of the voice to be output is formed based on the information indicating the type of voice data stored in the selected voice storage area 303xb.

<Regarding control process of main control device 110 in 24th control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 770, the start-up process 24 executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 770 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (F1701). In the initial setting process (F1701), a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the dispensing control device 111) to become operable (F1702). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (F1703).

Next, it is determined whether the setting key 110b is in the ON position (F1751). If it is determined in the process of F1751 that the setting key 110b is in the ON position (F1751: Yes), this means that the setting is changed or confirmed, so a setting value control process is executed to perform control corresponding to these states (F1752), and the process proceeds to F1710, which will be described later. Details of this setting value control process (F1752) will be described later with reference to FIG. 771. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1751 that the setting key 110b is not in the ON position (F1751: No), the process proceeds to F1704.

In the process of F1704, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 756) provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (F1704), and if it is turned on (F1704: Yes), the process proceeds to F1712. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (F1704: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (F1705), and if no information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored (F1705: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to F1712.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (F1705: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (F1706). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (F1707: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, too, processing transitions to F1712. Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of F1712, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (F1712). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 (F1713, F1714).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (F1713, F1714) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (F1713, F1714) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (F1713, F1714), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (F1713), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (F1714). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to F1710.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (F1704: No), power outage information is stored (F1705: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (F1707: Yes), the power outage information is cleared (F1708) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command upon power recovery is sent to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state when the drive power was cut off (F1709), and processing proceeds to F1710. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes capable of starting payout control of game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of F1710, an initialization command indicating permission for effects is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted for the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Next, a status command including information indicating the current game status and information regarding the current setting values is set (F1753), interrupt permission is set (F1712), and the process proceeds to the main process.

Next, referring to FIG. 771, the contents of the setting value control process (F1752), which is one process in the startup process 24 (see FIG. 770) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be explained. FIG. 771 is a flowchart showing the detailed contents of the setting value control process (F1752).

As shown in FIG. 771, in the setting value control process (F1752), first, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 756) is turned on (F1901), and if it is turned on (F1901: Yes), a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (F1902). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes in a state where it can start the payout control of the game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (F1903, F1904). In the initialization process of RAM (F1903, F1904), the used area of RAM 203 is cleared (F1903), and then the initial value of RAM 203 is set (F1904). After the initialization process of RAM 203 is performed, a change command indicating that the settings are being changed is sent (F1905), and the process proceeds to F1906.

In the process of F1906, it is determined whether the setting switch 110c is on (pressed) (F1906). If it is determined in the process of F1906 that the setting switch 110c is on (pressed) (F1906: Yes), the data in the setting value storage area 203xa is updated by adding 1 (F1907), and the process proceeds to F1908. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1906 that the setting switch is off (F1906: No), the process of F1907 is skipped and the process proceeds to F1908.

In the process of F1908, it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is in the off position (F1908). If it is determined that the setting key 110b is in the off position (F1908: Yes), a change completion command indicating that the setting change is complete is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 (F1909), and this process ends. In other words, the setting change state is ended, and the process returns to the start-up process 24 (see FIG. 770). This allows the state to be transitioned to a playable state in which normal play is possible.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F1908 that the setting key 110b is not in the OFF position (F1908: No), the process returns to F1906. In other words, each of the processes of F1906 to F1908 is repeated until it is determined in the process of F1908 that the setting key 110b is in the OFF position.

In addition, in the process of F1901, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (F1901: No), first, a payout return command is sent to the payout control device 111 (F1910), and then the data in the setting value storage area 203xa is read (F1911). When the process of F1911 is completed, next, the setting value corresponding to the read data is displayed on the setting value display device 110a (F1912), a state command indicating the setting confirmation state is set (F1913), and it is determined whether or not the setting key 110b is placed in the OFF position (F1914). In the process of F1914, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is placed in the OFF position (F1914: Yes), this process is terminated as it is. In other words, it is transitioned to a playable state. On the other hand, in the process of F1914, if it is determined that the setting key 110b is not placed in the OFF position (F1914: No), the process of F1914 is repeatedly executed. In other words, the setting confirmation state continues until the setting key 110b is placed in the off position.

By executing this setting value control process (F1752: see FIG. 771), the setting value can be varied in the setting change state in response to the operation of the setting switch 110c. Also, in the setting confirmation state, the setting value can be kept displayed on the setting value display device 110a until the setting switch 110b is placed in the OFF position.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 24th control example>
Next, the contents of the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 24th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 772 to Fig. 779. In the 24th control example, the contents of the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the pachinko machine 10 of the 22nd control example described above are different in that the start-up process 24 (see Fig. 772) is executed instead of the start-up process (see Fig. 716), the command determination process 24 (see F2172 in Fig. 774) is executed instead of the command determination process (see F2112 in Fig. 718), the state command reception process 24 (see F2271 in Fig. 775) is executed instead of the state command reception process (see F2202 in Fig. 719), and the stop symbol type setting process 24 (see F2272 in Fig. 776) is executed when a stop type command is received from the main control device 110. The other processing contents are the same, and the same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, the processing contents of start-up process 24 will be described with reference to FIG. 772. FIG. 772 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of start-up process 24. As shown in FIG. 772, start-up process 24 differs from the start-up process (see FIG. 716) executed in the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that it executes a wait process (F2051) before executing the process F2010 that executes the initial value setting of the RAM, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals and their detailed description will be omitted.

Here, the processing contents of the standby process (F2051) executed in the start-up process 24 (see FIG. 772) will be explained with reference to FIG. 773. FIG. 773 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the standby process (F2051). In this standby process (F2051), when a setting change operation is being executed, processing is executed to hold the progress of the start-up process 24 by the voice lamp control device 113 until the setting change operation is completed.

When the standby process (F2051) is executed, it is first determined whether a change command has been received (F2071). If it is determined that a change command has been received (F2071: Yes), the setting change flag 223xb is set to on (F2072), and then it is determined whether a change completion command has been received (F2073).

If it is determined in the process of F2073 that a change completion command has been received, i.e., that a command indicating that the setting change operation has been completed has been received (F2073: Yes), the setting change in progress flag 223xb is set to off (F2074) and the process proceeds to start-up process 24. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F2073 that a change completion command has not been received, i.e., that a command indicating that the setting change operation has been completed has not been received (F2073: No), the process of F2073 is looped until a change completion command is received. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the start-up process 24 (see FIG. 772) of the voice lamp control device 113 from terminating during the setting change operation.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of F2071 that a change command has not been received, i.e., if a setting change operation has not been performed (F2071), the processes of F2072 to F2074 are skipped and the process moves to start-up process 24. By configuring in this way, if a setting change operation has not been performed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 is not unnecessarily put on hold, making it easier to quickly complete the various processes (start-up processes in each control device) that are performed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on.

Next, referring to FIG. 774, the processing contents of the command determination process 24 (F2172) in this 24th control example will be described. FIG. 774 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the command determination process 24 (F2172). As shown in FIG. 774, the command determination process 24 (F2172) differs from the command determination process (see F2112 in FIG. 718) in the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that the processing executed when a state command is received is changed from the state command reception process 22 (see F2202 in FIG. 719) to the state command reception process 24 (F2271 in FIG. 775), that when a stop type command is received, the stop pattern type determination process 24 (see F2272 in FIG. 776) is executed, and that the processing executed when a stop command is received is changed from the stop command process 22 (see F2214 in FIG. 724) to the stop command process 24 (see F2273 in FIG. 777). The rest of the processing is the same, so the same reference numbers are used for the same processing, and detailed descriptions are omitted.

Next, the processing contents of status command reception process 24 (F2271) will be described with reference to FIG. 775. FIG. 775 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of status command reception process 24 (F2271). This status command reception process 24 (F2271) differs from the command determination process in the 22nd control example described above (see F2112 in FIG. 718) in that a process that is executed when it is determined that setting value information has been received has been added, but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

When the command determination process (see F2112 in FIG. 718) is executed, it is first determined whether setting value information has been received (F2371). If it is determined that setting value information has been received (F2371: Yes), the setting value information included in the received command is stored in the setting value storage area 223xa (F2372), and the process proceeds to F2301.

If it is determined in the process of F2371 that the setting value information has not been received (F2371: No), or when the process of F2372 is completed, the process of F2301 to F2312 is executed, which is the same as the command determination process in the 22nd control example described above (see F2112 in FIG. 718), and this process is terminated.

As described above, by storing the setting value information in the setting value storage area 223xa through the processing of F2372, when setting a setting suggestion effect to suggest the set setting value, it is possible to reliably set the effect mode based on the currently set setting value.

Next, referring to FIG. 776, the processing contents of the stop symbol type setting process 24 (F2272) will be explained. FIG. 776 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the stop symbol type setting process 24 (F2272). In this stop symbol type setting process 24 (F2272), a process is executed to set the type of the third symbol to be stopped this time based on the stop type command (jackpot, missed reach, or spread) received from the main control device 110.

When the stop symbol type setting process 24 (F2272) is executed, first the stop symbol type selection flag is set to ON (F4001), and then it is determined whether the current stop symbol type is a "jackpot" (F4002). If it is determined to be a "jackpot" (F4002: Yes), the voice fixed flag 223xc is set to ON. In other words, the bonus to be awarded when a jackpot is won is set (F4003).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot type is "jackpot A", i.e., whether it is a jackpot that is advantageous to the player (F4004). If it is determined to be "jackpot A" (F4004; Yes), a lottery is held to determine the type of the third symbol, and a third symbol (odd winning symbol) with a number icon indicating an odd number is determined, and a stop type corresponding to the determined third symbol type is set (F4005), and then the process proceeds to F4010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F4004 that the jackpot type is not "jackpot A" (F4004: No), a lottery is held to determine the type of the third symbol, and a third symbol (even number winning symbol) with a number icon indicating an even number is determined, and a stop type corresponding to the determined third symbol type is set (F4005), and then the process proceeds to F4010.

In addition, in the process of F4002, if it is determined that the type of the current stopping symbol is not a "jackpot" (F4002: No), it is determined whether the received stopping symbol is a "missed reach" (F4007), and if it is determined that it is a "missed reach" (F4007: Yes), a lottery is held to determine the type of the third symbol to set the stopping symbol corresponding to the missed reach (F4008), and then the process proceeds to F4010. In the process of F4007, if it is determined that it is not a "missed reach" (F4007: No), the stopping symbol type corresponding to the variable type is set (F4009), and the process proceeds to F4010.

In other words, in this 24th control example, the odd-numbered third symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a display mode indicating a jackpot win only when "jackpot A" is won. Therefore, the multiple numbers (number icons) attached to the third symbol become identification information that can suggest the type of jackpot when a jackpot wins. And, since the odd-numbered third symbol is associated with a jackpot win that is more advantageous to the player than the even-numbered third symbol, it becomes the third symbol that is more advantageous to the player.

In the process of F4010, a character change lottery is executed (F4010), and then it is determined whether the character change lottery has been won (F4011). If it is determined that the lottery has been won (F4011: Yes), a decision is made to display a special third pattern corresponding to the winning content (F4012), a display command corresponding to the decided content is set (F4013), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery has not been won in the process of F4011 (F4011: No), this process ends as it is.

In the 24th control example, the display of the special third pattern (a third pattern in which the type of number icon and the type of character are different from those of the basic third pattern) is determined by lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured to be selectable by the player. In this case, the player may be configured to be able to select whether or not to determine the display of the special third pattern, and the combination of the special third patterns (determination of the character type to be assigned to a specific number icon, or the type of number icon to be assigned to a specific character type) may also be selectable by the player. Furthermore, when the combination of the special third patterns is configured to be selectable (determined) by the player, it is preferable to configure the display mode of the special third pattern selected (determined) by the player to be displayable separately from the third pattern that is displayed in a variable manner, so that the player can freely check the display mode of the special third pattern.

Next, the processing contents of stop command processing 24 (F2273) will be explained with reference to FIG. 777. FIG. 777 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of stop command processing 24 (F2273). As shown in FIG. 777, stop command processing 24 (F2273) differs from stop command processing 22 in the above-mentioned 22nd control example (see F2214 in FIG. 724) in that processing related to setting voice data has been added, but otherwise is the same. Identical processing contents are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

When the stop command process 24 (F2273) is executed, first, the processes F2651 to F2656 are executed, which are the same as the stop command process 22 (see F2214 in FIG. 724) of the 22nd control example described above. Then, after completing the process of F2656, it is determined whether the voice fixed flag 223xc is set to on (F2671). If it is determined that it is not set to on (F2671: No), a voice command is determined by referring to the voice command selection table 222xa (F2672), a voice command for voice to indicate the determined voice command is set (F2673), and the process proceeds to F2674. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F2671 that the voice fixed flag 223xc is set to on (F2671: Yes), there is no need to determine new voice data based on the current stop display, so the processes of F2672 and F2673 are skipped and the process proceeds to F2674.

In the process of F2674, it is determined whether the third symbol currently displayed as stopped is a jackpot stop (whether it is the third symbol corresponding to the special symbol that won the jackpot) (F2674), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot stop (F2674: Yes), the voice fixed flag 223xc is set to on (F2675), the process of F2657 is executed, and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of F2674 that it is not a jackpot stop (F2674: No), the process of F2675 is skipped, the process of F2657 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 778, the processing contents of the pending performance execution process 24 (F3179) at the start of fluctuation will be explained. FIG. 778 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the pending performance execution process 24 (F3179) at the start of fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 778, the pending performance execution process 24 (F3179) at the start of fluctuation differs from the pending performance execution process 22 (F3109) at the start of fluctuation in the 22nd control example described above in that it executes the pending action determination process (F3271) when it is determined that the fluctuation time is less than 10 seconds (F3203: No), but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same symbols and their detailed explanations are omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 779, the processing contents of the reserved action determination process (F3271) will be explained. FIG. 779 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the reserved action determination process (F3271). In this reserved action determination process (F3271), processing is performed to set a shift chance presentation when the change time of the special symbol change to be executed is short (less than 10 seconds) and it is difficult to execute the reserved change presentation (see the 22nd control example) while maintaining the reserved symbol in the same display area.

As shown in FIG. 779, when the pending action determination process (F3271) is executed, first, the pending action is determined by referring to the pending action selection table 222xb (F4101), a display command indicating the presentation mode corresponding to the determined pending action is set (F4102), and this process is terminated.

<Regarding control processing in the audio output device 226>
Next, with reference to Figures 780 to 782, the contents of the control processing executed by the audio output device 226 in this 24th control example will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 780(a), the main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 780(a) is a flowchart showing the contents of this main processing.

When the main processing of this audio output device 226 is executed, first, a command output process is executed (F6001) for transmitting to the audio lamp control device 113 a synthetic audio command that is generated based on the average amplitude obtained by sampling the synthetic audio data for a predetermined period (0.1 seconds) during the command determination process (F6002). Next, a command determination process is executed (F6002) for performing processing according to a command received from the audio lamp control device 113 or the ADC 309. Details of this command determination process (F6002) will be described later with reference to FIG. 781. After the processing of F6002, an audio setting process is executed (F6003) for playing audio data (audio file) according to the performance. Details of this audio setting process (F6003) will be described later with reference to FIG. 782.

When the processing of F6003 is completed, it is determined whether or not information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 303 (F6004). If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of F6004 (F6004: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (F6006), and the power outage processing is executed (F6007). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (F6008), and then the processing is looped infinitely.

On the other hand, if no information about a power outage has been stored in the process of F6004 (F6004: No), a determination is made as to whether or not RAM 303 has been corrupted based on the keyword stored in RAM 303 (F6005), and if RAM 303 has not been corrupted (F6005: No), the process returns to F6001 and the main process is executed repeatedly. On the other hand, if RAM 303 has been corrupted (F6005: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

Next, referring to FIG. 780(b), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 780(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing.

This command interrupt process (see FIG. 780(b)) is executed each time a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in the command buffer area provided in RAM 303 (F6501), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 781, we will explain the command determination process (F6002), which is one process within the main process (see FIG. 780) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226. FIG. 781 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (F6002).

In the command determination process (F6002), first it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (F6101), and if there is no unprocessed new command (F6101: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (F6101: Yes), the new command flag indicating that a new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (F6102), and then the type of each command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (F6103).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (F6104). This audio variation pattern command is set at the timing when a detailed display mode of the variation pattern is selected (see F2910 in FIG. 727) in the variation display setting process 22 (see F2113 in FIG. 727) of the audio lamp control device 113, and also to notify the type of audio to be played and the output timing corresponding to that display mode.

If it is determined in the processing of F6104 that there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (F6104: Yes), the music and sound effects to be used during the execution of the notified variation pattern command are identified (F6105), the output channel and output timing of the identified music and sound effects are set (F6106), and processing returns to F6101.

If it is determined in the process of F6104 that there is no voice variable pattern command (F6104: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a voice command (voice command) among the unprocessed commands (F6107). This voice command for voice is generated in the stop command process 24 (see FIG. 777) of the voice lamp control device 113 in response to the process of determining voice data based on the character type attached to the stopped and displayed third pattern (see F2672 in FIG. 777), and is output to the voice output device 226 by the command output process (F2102) of the main process (see FIG. 717) of the voice lamp control device 113.

In the process of F6107, if it is determined that there is a voice command for voice among the unprocessed commands (F6107: Yes), it identifies (obtains) the voice data corresponding to the notified voice type (F6108), stores the identified voice data in the selected voice storage area 303xb (F6109), and determines whether the currently received voice command for voice contains information for granting a special bonus (F6110). If it is determined that there is a special bonus (F6110: Yes), it reads the corresponding bonus audio from the audio file storage area 302xa, sets the output timing of the bonus audio (F6111), and returns to the process of S6101.

Next, referring to FIG. 782, we will explain the details of the audio setting process (F6003), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 780) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226. FIG. 782 is a flowchart showing the contents of this audio setting process (F6003).

In the audio setting process (F6003), it is first determined whether it is time to output (play) a song (F6201). If it is determined in the process of F6201 that it is time to output a song (F6201: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current song is read (F6202), the read audio file is output to the corresponding channel (F6203), the song output flag is set to ON (F6204), and the process moves to F6205. The channel to output the audio file is predetermined for each file; for example, the audio file of the song used in the variable performance is preset to be output to channel 1.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F6201 that it is not time to output music (F6201: No), the processes of F6202 to F6204 are skipped and the process proceeds to F6205.

In the process of F6205, it is determined whether it is the timing to output a sound effect (F6205). If it is not the timing to output a sound effect (F6205: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is the timing to output a sound effect (F6205: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current sound effect is read (F6206), the read audio file is output to the corresponding channel (F6207), and it is determined whether it is the timing to output a bonus audio (F6208). In the process of F6208, if it is determined that it is not the timing to output a bonus audio (F6208: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the timing to output a bonus audio (F6208: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current bonus audio is read (F6209), the read audio file is output to the corresponding channel (F6210), and this process ends.

<25th control example>
Next, the 25th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 783 to Fig. 794. Conventionally, a variable presentation indicating a big win by stopping and displaying a plurality (three) of third symbols in a specific combination (same symbol), in which a part of the plurality of third symbols (e.g., two of three third symbols) is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a part of a specific combination indicating a big win, and the remaining third symbols (e.g., the remaining one of three third symbols) are displayed in a variable manner (so-called reach state), and a variable presentation (reach variable presentation) is executed to provoke the player as to in what manner the remaining third symbols will be stopped and displayed.

The reach variation effect involves informing the player of the number of types of third symbols that can be stopped and displayed within a range that is more limited than the number of types of third symbols that can be variably displayed, and executing a reach variation effect in which one third symbol is stopped and displayed from among the types of third symbols that have been notified.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the type of third pattern that will be stopped and displayed before the third pattern (final stopping pattern) that is being changed during the reach changing performance is stopped and displayed. Therefore, for example, if the notified content indicates that there is a high possibility that the final stopping pattern will be stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot win (if the occupancy rate of the third pattern types that indicate a jackpot win is high among the third pattern types that are notified as the types of third patterns that may be stopped and displayed as the final stopping pattern), it is possible to have the player focus on the reach changing performance while increasing their sense of anticipation for a jackpot win, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, there are also known devices that are configured to notify multiple patterns of the same type of third pattern that can be displayed during a reach-changing performance, based on the number of types of third patterns that can be displayed during the reach-changing performance. Specifically, for example, a jackpot is indicated when the third patterns are displayed as a combination of "111," and in a reach-changing state in which two third patterns are displayed as "11" and the remaining third pattern (final stopped pattern) is displayed in a variable manner, five candidates for the stop display mode of the final stopped pattern, including two "1"s indicating a jackpot win and three "2"s indicating a miss win, are indicated before the final stopped pattern is displayed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to easily vary the proportion of stop display modes that indicate a win among all the stop display mode candidates for the final stop pattern, making it easier for the player to predict in advance whether the result of the variable presentation currently being performed is a result that indicates a jackpot win or a result that indicates a miss win.

However, in the above-mentioned reach-changing presentation, when the presentation result indicates a jackpot, the proportion of stop display modes indicating a jackpot in the stop display modes of the final stop patterns notified in advance is increased, thereby providing a presentation that gradually increases the player's anticipation of winning the jackpot. On the other hand, when the presentation result is not a jackpot, the proportion of stop display modes indicating a jackpot in the stop display modes of the final stop patterns notified in advance is decreased, resulting in a problem that the player's motivation to play is reduced before the presentation result of the reach-changing presentation is displayed (the final stop pattern is displayed).

In contrast to this, in the present 25th control example, in a specific reach state, after the candidate stop display mode of the final stop pattern is notified, the type of the third pattern displayed as the reach state is made variable. Specifically, after "1, 1, 1, 2, 2" is notified as the candidate stop display mode of the final stop pattern notified during the reach state of "22", the reach state mode is made switchable from "22" to "11".

In other words, the third symbol type during a reach state is configured to be different so that the display mode of the final stop symbol indicating a miss win during a specific reach state becomes the display mode of the final stop symbol indicating a win.

By configuring it in this way, even if the proportion of stop display modes indicating a win is low at the time the candidate stop display modes for the final stop pattern are announced, it is possible to leave open the possibility that the third pattern type in the reach state will switch and the proportion of stop display modes indicating a win will increase, allowing the player to play the reach variation presentation until the very end without getting bored.

Furthermore, in this 25th control example, in a specific reach state, after the candidate stop display mode of the final stop pattern is notified, the type of the third pattern displayed as the reach state can be increased. Specifically, after "1, 1, 1, 2, 3" is notified as the candidate stop display mode of the final stop pattern notified during the reach state of "22", the reach state mode can be switched from "22" (single reach) to "11" and "22" (double reach).

By configuring it in this way, even if the proportion of stop display modes indicating a win is low at the time when the candidate stop display modes for the final stop pattern are announced, it is possible to increase the number of third pattern types that are in a reach state, leaving open the possibility of an increase in the proportion of stop display modes indicating a win, so that the reach variation presentation can be executed until the very end without the player getting bored.

There has been a pachinko machine 10 that executes a variable performance in which a third symbol corresponding to a special symbol is displayed on a display screen (third symbol display device) composed of a liquid crystal display during a period in which identification information (special symbol) for indicating the result of a special symbol lottery is displayed in a variable manner. In this conventional pachinko machine 10, it is common for the player to predict whether the result of the special symbol lottery is favorable to the player (a big win) or unfavorable to the player (a losing win) depending on the content of the variable performance executed before the lottery result is announced, and it is known that a variable performance with a different performance mode can be executed based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, thereby enabling a variable performance (advantageous variable performance) that is more likely to be executed when a big win has been won than when a big win has not been won (a losing win), and a variable performance (unfavorable variable performance) that is more likely to be executed when a big win has not been won (a losing win) than when a big win has been won.

Furthermore, in pachinko machines 10, due to the nature of the game in which a player is given a special bonus in the event of a jackpot win, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is generally set lower than the probability of winning a miss. Even if a player continues playing for a long period of time in a game in which the special pattern lottery results in a miss and a win, in order to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing, some machines are configured to be able to set a wide variety of presentation modes as the presentation mode of the adverse variation presentation, preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

With a conventional pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the more presentation modes that can be determined as the presentation modes of the variable presentation, the less likely it is that players will become bored with the game. However, as the number of presentation modes that can be set increases, the amount of display data required to execute the variable presentation also increases, resulting in an increase in manufacturing costs.

In contrast to this, in the present 25th control example, the scale of the display area can be changed without changing the display data set as the presentation mode of the variable presentation, making it possible to provide the player with different variable presentations. Specifically, by sending a scale command to the display control device 114 to change the scale of the display area, the display image that was displayed on the entire display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be reduced and displayed on a partial area of the display screen, or the display image that was displayed on a partial area of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be enlarged to occupy the entire display screen. In addition to changing the scale of the display image, it is also possible to add a twist to the display image and vary the three-dimensional balance in the depth direction.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to allow players to experience variable presentations in many different display formats without increasing the amount of display data for the variable presentation, and it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 10 in which players do not quickly become bored with the game.

In addition, in the 25th control example, a plurality of image layers are provided to form the display image displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, and the scale setting of the display area described above can be set for each image layer. By configuring in this way, for example, among various images displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81, an image layer on which a display image corresponding to a variable performance being performed is displayed and an image layer on which a display image corresponding to information on the game (for example, reserved information indicating the number of reserved symbols, time-saving information indicating the number of time-saving times, etc.) is displayed can be formed differently, and the scale setting can be performed only for the image layer on which the display image corresponding to the variable performance is displayed. Therefore, while providing a novel performance to the player by changing the scale of the display image, it is possible to continuously display the display image (for example, time-saving number display, reserved symbol display) corresponding to the information to be notified to the player (game information) without scaling it, so that information on the game can be easily notified to the player while providing a variety of performances to the player.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in this 25th control example has multiple image layers (image layers for variable display) corresponding to the variable performance, for example, a main image layer on which at least the third pattern is displayed variably, and a sub-image layer formed behind the main image layer on which the background image of the variable performance is displayed. And, when the main image layer is scaled to the normal scale, it is configured so that the display mode displayed on the sub-layer is difficult for the player to see.

When a scale setting is executed to reduce the display area for the main image layer, the display image displayed on the main image layer is displayed in an area smaller than the display area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, so that the player can view the display image displayed on the sub-image layer from an area (empty display area) of the display area of the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 where the display image displayed on the reduced main image layer is not displayed.

By configuring it in this way, the displayed image is not simply scaled, but the player can see a new display mode (the display mode displayed on the sub-image layer), which can further enhance the presentation effect.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in this 25th control example is configured to be able to execute a scale setting to change the scale of the display image at various times for the variable effect being executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know at what timing the scale effect that reduces the scale of the display image will be executed, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

Furthermore, in this 25th control example, the above-mentioned scale-down effect is more likely to be executed when the variable effect being executed results in a jackpot win than when the jackpot win is not won. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player play while expecting the scale-down effect to be executed.

In this case, when a reduced-scale effect is executed, it is advisable to configure the display mode for the sub-layer to be preset so that a display mode for informing the player that a reduced-scale effect is being executed (for example, a display of "reduced-scale effect in progress") or a display mode for indicating that there is a high probability of winning a jackpot (for example, a display of "chance") is displayed in a display area of the image layer (sub-layer) formed behind the image layer (main image layer) whose display area is being reduced that does not overlap with the reduced main image layer, i.e., a display area that the player can see when the display area of the main image layer is reduced.

By configuring it in this way, when an effect (reduced-scale effect) is executed that changes the scale of the display image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has broken down. In addition, when a reduced-scale effect is executed, it is possible to provide the player with information that is advantageous to the player as information that becomes visible, so that the player can play while being more excited about the execution of the reduced-scale effect.

Here, as in the twenty-fifth control example, if a setting can be made to scale the display area in which the display image is displayed without changing the display data constituting the display image to be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81, the scale of the display mode (for example, the number icon showing the third pattern) displayed in the display image will also change according to the set scale, so if the aspect ratio is made different before and after scaling, the aspect ratio of the displayed display mode will also change. In this case, if a scaling effect is executed while a number icon (third pattern) is being displayed as a variable effect to suggest to the player whether or not a jackpot has been won, the number displayed as the third pattern will be distorted, causing a problem that the player will misinterpret it.

In addition, when multiple third symbols are displayed stationary in a reach state and the remaining third symbols are displayed in a variable manner, if a reduced-scale effect is executed while the remaining third symbols (the variable third symbols) are displayed in a frame-by-frame manner (where each third symbol changes while temporarily stopping on the reach line), there is a problem that the player may misidentify the type of third symbol (number type) that is temporarily stopped on the reach line.

In addition, in a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a variable presentation in which the third symbol is temporarily stopped in a combination indicating a miss during the variable presentation period, and then the third symbol is displayed again in a variable presentation to execute a presentation with a high expectation of a jackpot (development presentation), if a reduced-scale presentation is executed while the third symbol is temporarily stopped, the temporarily stopped third symbol changes shape, causing the player to misidentify the type of the third symbol (number type).

As mentioned above, if a player misidentifies the type of third symbol (number type), even if a combination of third symbols indicating a loss is displayed, the player may mistakenly believe that the combination of third symbols indicates a jackpot win, which could lead to a sense of distrust that a jackpot game is not being played.

Specifically, when the third symbol corresponding to the number "9" is in a reach state and the remaining third symbol is a "8" that is temporarily stopped on the reach line, the display state of the transformed "9" becomes difficult to distinguish from the display state of the "8", and there is a risk that the player will be misled into thinking that the same type of third symbol is stopped and displayed on the line (the third symbols are displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot win).

In response to this problem, in the present 25th control example, when a reduced-scale effect is executed in a state where all the third symbols are displayed stopped (including provisional stop displays) on the winning line, or in a state just before all the third symbols are displayed stopped (including provisional stop displays) on the winning line, display control can be executed that makes it difficult for the player to see at least the last third symbol to be displayed stopped (final third symbol).

Specifically, a reserve image layer with a transparency of 100% is always provided in front of the main image layer on which the third symbol is displayed, and when a reduced-scale effect is executed, the same scale setting can be executed for the main image layer and the reserve image layer. When a reduced-scale effect is executed, the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed on the main image layer is determined, and if it is determined that the effect pattern of the variable effect being executed is an effect pattern that may cause the above-mentioned problem, the excess rate of the display area of the reserve image layer that overlaps with the display area of the final third symbol on the main layer is reduced, making it difficult for the player to see the final third symbol.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to see the display state of the final third pattern when the reduced-scale effect is being executed, which prevents the player from mistaking the combination of third patterns that are displayed as stopped (including provisionally stopped) on the winning line.

In this way, by configuring the display area to be scaled at the same scale for the main image layer and the auxiliary image layer, no matter what scale the scale effect is performed at, any part of the main image layer can be made invisible (hard to see) using the display mode displayed on the auxiliary image layer.

Furthermore, in this 25th control example, display control is executed in advance to display a display mode (e.g., the word "chance") to indicate to the player that there is a high probability of winning the jackpot in at least the display area of the preliminary image layer that overlaps with the display area of the final third pattern in the main image layer, and when the transmittance of a portion of the preliminary image layer is reduced based on the execution of a reduced-scale performance, the display mode (e.g., the word "chance") displayed on the preliminary image layer to indicate to the player that there is a high probability of winning the jackpot is displayed in a manner that is visible to the player.

<About the performance content in the 25th control example>
Next, the contents of the characteristic effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the 25th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 783 to Fig. 787. In the 25th control example, after the reach state is displayed, a plurality of pattern icons are displayed to suggest the type of the third pattern (final stop third pattern) that is finally stopped and displayed, and a pattern stock reach effect is executed in which the third pattern corresponding to any one of the displayed plurality of pattern icons is finally stopped and displayed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to notify the player of candidates that may be displayed as the final third stop pattern after the reach state is established, making it easier for the player to predict the outcome of the current variable presentation.

Now, the contents of the symbol stock reach effect will be explained with reference to Fig. 783 and Fig. 784. Fig. 783(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed immediately after the symbol stock reach effect is started, Fig. 783(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed at the time when multiple symbol icons are stocked in the symbol stock reach effect, Fig. 784(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when the multiple stocked symbol icons are temporarily hidden from the display screen, and Fig. 784(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen showing the performance result of the symbol stock reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 783(a), the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner above the main display area Dm in the display manner "2↓2" to indicate that the current state is a reach state, and the word "Reach" is displayed in the display area HR3 formed near the third symbol displayed in the display manner indicating the reach state, as a guide to indicate that the current state is a reach state. When the symbol stock reach performance is started, the comment "Stock symbols" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a guide to the performance content of the symbol stock reach performance, and a performance is executed below the main display area Dm in which the character 801 collects symbol icons.

The example shown in FIG. 783(a) shows a state in which one pattern icon (first pattern icon 802a) has already been acquired (accumulated). The pattern icon is provided with a display mode that allows the player to recognize the type of the corresponding third pattern, and the first pattern icon 802a shown in FIG. 783(a) is provided with the display mode "1" to indicate that it corresponds to the third pattern of "1". In this 25th control example, the pattern icon is configured to be displayable as a display mode to suggest the display mode of the final stopped third pattern, and the display mode of the pattern icon is formed in a display mode that allows the player to recognize the type of the corresponding third pattern and allows the player to recognize that the pattern icon is not the third pattern.

Specifically, the symbol icon (first symbol icon 802a) is formed in a display mode in which a mark indicating the type (number) of the corresponding third symbol is added inside a sphere that resembles a round ball. By configuring it in this way, when the symbol icon (first symbol icon 802a) is displayed while the third symbol is in a reach state, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the symbol icon (first symbol icon 802a) is the final stopped third symbol.

Also, as shown in FIG. 783(a), the pattern icon is configured to be displayed in a location significantly different from the variable display area of the third pattern. By configuring it in this way, when one pattern icon (for example, the first pattern icon 802a) is displayed while the variable performance is being executed, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the third pattern (two patterns) in the reach state and the pattern icon (one pattern) are combined to form a combination indicating a jackpot win, and the third pattern is displayed in a stopped state.

Next, in the pattern stock reach performance, when multiple pattern icons are acquired (stocked), multiple pattern icons (first pattern icon 802a to fourth pattern icon 802d) are displayed as shown in FIG. 783(b). In this 25th control example, the maximum number of pattern icons that can be stocked is four, so the state shown in FIG. 783(b) is the state in which the maximum number of pattern icons are stocked. Therefore, the comment "Stock completed" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds as a notification mode to inform the player that the maximum number of pattern icons has been acquired (stocked).

By configuring it in this way, during the symbol stock reach performance, the player can be easily notified whether the number of stocked symbol icons is at the maximum number, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player unnecessarily expects more symbol icons to be stocked even when the number of stocked symbol icons cannot be increased any further.

Also, by positioning the character 801 between the first pattern icon 802a and the second pattern icon 802b, the three pattern icons are not displayed side by side. This configuration prevents pattern icons corresponding to the same third pattern type (e.g., "1") from being displayed side by side without any other display modes in between, which can prevent the player from misunderstanding that the third pattern indicating a jackpot win is being displayed in a stopped state.

In the example shown in FIG. 783(b), the four pattern icons are displayed in a straight line. For example, when the first pattern icon 802a and the fourth pattern icon 802d displayed to the right of the character 801 are displayed in a display mode to indicate the same third pattern type, the player may mistakenly believe that a new reach-established line has been established between the first pattern icon 802a and the fourth pattern icon 802d.

As shown in FIG. 783(b), when multiple pattern icons (first pattern icon 802a to fourth pattern icon 802d) are displayed, it is advisable to determine the display position of each pattern icon so that they are not positioned on a straight line. By configuring in this way, even if multiple pattern icons are displayed on the display screen, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to mistakenly believe that a new reach-established line has been established. In addition to this, it is also possible to configure each pattern icon to be displayed in a different manner or to have a different size. Even when using such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to mistakenly believe that a new reach-established line has been established.

After that, when the maximum number of stocks (acquisitions) is acquired in the pattern stock reach performance, as shown in FIG. 784(a), the acquired pattern icon rises and is temporarily removed from the display area. Then, the character 801 performs an action to display the acquired pattern icon on the display screen again, and a third pattern corresponding to one of the stocked pattern icons is stopped and displayed as the final stop third pattern.

In the above-mentioned pattern stock reach effect, if the effect result indicates a jackpot win, the proportion of pattern icons corresponding to the third pattern indicating a jackpot win among the types of pattern icons displayed in advance is increased, thereby providing an effect that gradually increases the player's anticipation of winning the jackpot. On the other hand, if the effect result is not a jackpot win, the proportion of pattern icons corresponding to the third pattern indicating a jackpot win among the types of pattern icons displayed in advance is decreased, resulting in a problem that the player's motivation to play is reduced before the effect result of the pattern stock reach effect is displayed (the final stopped third pattern is displayed).

In contrast, in the present 25th control example, the type of the third symbol in the reach state can also be changed using the stored symbol icon. In this case, in FIG. 784(b), the reach state of "2↓2" was displayed in the state shown in FIG. 784(a), but the symbol icon switches to the reach state of "1↓1", and "1" is stopped and displayed as the final stopped third symbol, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination to indicate to the player that he has won the jackpot.

In other words, during the first half of the symbol stock reach performance, the symbol icon corresponding to the final stop third symbol, which indicates a losing win, is configured to switch to a symbol icon corresponding to the final stop third symbol, which indicates a winning win.

By configuring it in this way, even if the proportion of pattern icons indicating a win is low when all the pattern icons are displayed in the pattern stock reach performance, it is possible for the third pattern type in the reach state to switch and leave open the possibility that the proportion of pattern icons indicating a win will increase, allowing the player to play the pattern stock reach performance until the very end without getting bored.

Although not shown in the figures, in this 25th control example, it is possible to set a presentation mode in which, as a symbol stock reach presentation, after all symbol icons are displayed, the type of the third symbol displayed as a reach state is increased. Specifically, it is possible to switch the reach state from the "2↓2" reach state shown in FIG. 784(a) to "11" and "22" (double reach) using the symbol icons.

By configuring it in this way, even if the proportion of pattern icons indicating a win is low when all pattern icons that are candidates for the stop display mode of the final stop third pattern are displayed, it is possible to leave open the possibility of increasing the proportion of pattern icons indicating a win by increasing the number of third pattern types that are in a reach state, so that the player can enjoy the pattern stock reach performance until the end without getting bored.

Next, referring to Figures 785 and 786, the contents of the screen press effect in this 25th control example will be explained. In this 25th control example, after creating a display image to be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, a processing process for processing the display image can be executed. Furthermore, this processing is not performed on the entire display image, but on the various sprites displayed on the display image, which are divided into multiple image layer units and processing can be executed corresponding to each image layer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 785(a), at least a sub-image layer fr, a main image layer sr, a reserve image layer yr, and a main image layer hr are provided from the rear side as image layers that form the display image. The display image that is normally displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and is visible to the player is formed by display images generated on the main image layer sr, where the main effects such as the variable effects of the third pattern are displayed, and the main image layer hr, where the fourth pattern related to the game result is displayed.

The sub-image layer fr is configured to always be difficult for the player to see due to the display image displayed on the main image layer sr, and is only visible to the player when, for example, a processing process is performed on the main image layer sr to reduce its display area. The reserve image layer yr is normally set to a transparency of 100%, and is configured so that the display image displayed on the reserve image layer yr cannot be seen by the player. This reserve image layer yr is specified to be processed in conjunction with the main image layer sr.

In other words, when a processing process with a reduction rate of A% is performed on the main image layer sr, a processing process with a reduction rate of A% is also performed on the reserve image layer yr. Therefore, the display positions of the display image displayed on the main image layer sr and the display image displayed on the reserve image layer yr are always synchronized regardless of the processing content of the processing. And, the reserve image layer yr is configured to be processed by processing to change the transparency. By configuring in this way, for example, when a processing process to change the aspect ratio is performed on the main image layer sr, if there is a risk that the display mode of the third pattern displayed on the main image layer sr will be deformed and the player will misidentify the type of the third pattern that is stopped and displayed, it is possible to hide the deformed third pattern by lowering the transparency of the reserve image layer yr (to 0%).

Next, the display image of the preliminary image layer yr will be described with reference to FIG. 785(b). As shown in FIG. 785(b), the preliminary image layer yr is an image layer in which a display image for concealment is displayed in an area where the display position overlaps with the display area of the third pattern displayed on the main image layer sr (at least the display area in which the third pattern that is the last to be stopped is displayed among the third patterns). In this 25th control example, the display process is always executed on the preliminary image layer yr, and the transparency is set to 100%. Then, when a screen press effect in which the aspect ratio of the main image layer sr is changed is executed as a variable effect with a high probability of winning a jackpot, a processing process is performed to change the transparency from 100% to 0%. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 785(b), a display image with the word "chance" is displayed as a display mode to show the player that the probability of winning a jackpot is high as a display image for concealment.

Next, the main image layer sr displays display images corresponding to the various variable effects executed in each of the control examples described above (see FIG. 785(c)). Then, as shown in FIG. 785(b), the sub-image layer fr always displays a display image corresponding to the case where a screen press effect in which the aspect ratio of the main image layer sr is changed is executed as a variable effect with a high probability of winning a jackpot. Although not shown, the main image layer hr displays game information related to the game result (information showing the result of the special pattern lottery and error display). This main image layer hr is an image layer on which no processing is performed on the display image. By configuring it in this way, important information related to the game can always be notified in the same manner, even if a processing process that changes the scale of the display image is executed.

Now, with reference to Figure 786, the contents of the screen press performance will be explained. Figure 786(a) is a diagram showing the normal display screen immediately before the start of the screen press performance, and Figure 786(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen during the screen press performance. The diagram shown in Figure 786(a) is in a state where no processing has been performed on any of the image layers. Therefore, the display image of the sub-image layer fr cannot be viewed, and the display image of the reserve image layer yr cannot be viewed either. Note that even in this state, display processing is being performed on the sub-image layer fr and the reserve image layer yr.

When the screen press performance is executed, the main image layer sr and the reserve image layer yr are processed with a scale A (a scale with a normal aspect ratio of 1:2 but with a scale of 1:8), and a variable performance is executed in which the display area (display image) of the main image layer sr is compressed vertically compared to normal. In this case, the third pattern "9" or "8" displayed on the main image layer sr appears to be displayed in a display mode close to "0", so if the press performance is executed with the display mode of the third pattern shown in FIG. 786(a) as it is, there is a risk that the third pattern with "0" added is mistakenly displayed in a display mode indicating a big win. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 786(b), the processing of the main image layer sr and the reserve image yr with a scale A (a scale with a normal aspect ratio of 1:2 but with a scale of 1:8) includes processing information that sets the transparency of the reserve image layer yr to 0%, and the display image of the reserve image layer yr is displayed at a position corresponding to the middle pattern "8". This prevents players from mistaking the third symbol with the "0" on it for a jackpot win.

In addition, the player is allowed to see the display image on the preliminary image layer yr with the word "chance" written on it, so it can be used not just to conceal the third symbol, but also as a display mode to indicate a high probability of winning the jackpot.

Then, in the empty display area created by processing the main image layer sr, the display image of the sub-image layer fr is displayed in a state that is visible to the player. A display image (arrow) is displayed on the sub-image layer fr to enhance the presentation effect of the main image layer sr being crushed. In addition, the words "Screen press presentation occurred" are displayed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the pachinko machine 10 has broken down when the display area of the main image layer sr is suddenly deformed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 25th control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 787, the configuration of the ROM 222 possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the 25th control example will be described. Fig. 787 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the 25th control example. As shown in Fig. 787, the ROM 222 possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the 25th control example is different from the ROM 222 possessed by the voice lamp control device 113 of the 22nd control example described above (see Fig. 693 (a)) in that a symbol stock reach selection table 222ya is added, and the rest is the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

The pattern stock reach selection table 222ya is a data table referenced when determining the presentation mode of the pattern stock reach presentation, and is referenced when the type of presentation change is determined to be pattern stock reach (F3191 in FIG. 791: Yes) in the normal state presentation mode determination process 25 (see F3098 in FIG. 791) for setting a presentation change corresponding to a special pattern change when the normal state is set as the game state.

Here, the contents of the symbol stock reach selection table 222ya will be explained with reference to FIG. 788. FIG. 788 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the symbol stock reach selection table 222ya. As shown in FIG. 788, different presentation patterns are defined depending on the hit/miss judgment result and the acquired value of the second presentation counter 223vg. Here, in this 25th control example, an odd numbered symbol is configured to more easily notify the player that he or she has won a jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than an even numbered symbol. Therefore, as the presentation mode of the symbol stock reach, each presentation pattern is defined so that the reach state of the odd numbered symbol "1.1" does not switch to the reach state of "2.2". By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing as the variable presentation progresses.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the 25th control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this 25th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 789. The display control device 114 in this 25th control example differs from the display control device 114 in the above-mentioned first control example in that an image processing data storage area 234a3 is provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and a processing information storage area 233aa is provided in the work RAM 233.

The image processing data memory area 234a3 is a memory area that stores processing information (image processing data) for changing the scale and inclination of a display image that is processed for display based on the drawing information stored in the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c based on the drawing list, i.e., the entire display image displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81.

In this 25th control example, the display control device 114 is configured to be able to execute processing based on processing information read from the image processing data memory area 234a3 on the display image generated by the image controller 237. This configuration makes it possible to easily vary the appearance of display images generated by the same drawing process. Therefore, it is possible to display display images with different display modes on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81 without increasing the processing load of the drawing process.

The processing information storage area 233aa is a storage area for temporarily storing processing information read from the image processing data storage area 234a3. When the display control device 114 executes display processing, in parallel with the process of storing drawing information based on the drawing list in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, display processing is executed based on the drawing information already stored in the other frame buffer and the processing data stored in the processing information storage area 233aa.

Next, the contents of the drawing list generated by the display control device 114 in this 25th control example will be described with reference to FIG. 790. FIG. 790 is a schematic diagram showing the drawing list in this 25th control example.

As shown in FIG. 790, the 25th control example differs from the first control example described above in that it generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame's worth of image, rearranges the detailed information for each sprite, and creates a drawing list with the layer types broadly categorized. In other words, similar to the first control example described above, when the MPU 231 generates a drawing list, it is configured to rearrange the sprites in one frame's worth of image in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest to the back to the sprite that should be placed in the foreground, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, and specifies the layer type for that sprite order. It is then possible to perform image processing on a layer type basis.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 790, the layer types are defined as follows, from the back side: sub-layer fr, main layer sr, spare layer yr, and main layer hr.

<Regarding the processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 in the 25th control example>
Next, the processing contents of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 25th control example will be described. The control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in this 25th control example is different from the control processing of the voice lamp control device 113 in the above-mentioned 22nd control example in that it executes the normal state presentation mode determination process 25 (see F3098 in FIG. 791) instead of the normal state presentation mode determination process 22 (see F3018 in FIG. 728), but is otherwise the same. The same contents are given the same symbols and their detailed description will be omitted.

Now, referring to FIG. 791, the processing contents of normal state presentation mode determination process 25 (F3098) will be explained. FIG. 791 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of normal state presentation mode determination process 25 (F3098). This normal state presentation mode determination process 25 (F3098) differs in that it adds a control process to be executed when a pattern stock reach is determined as the variable presentation type, and when a processed reach is determined as the variable presentation type, but is otherwise the same. The same processing contents are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations will be omitted.

When the normal state presentation mode determination process 25 (F3098) is executed, first, the processes F3101 to F3106 are executed, which are the same as the normal state presentation mode determination process 22 described above (see F3018 in FIG. 729). Then, if it is determined in the process of F3104 that it is not a movie execution reach (F3104: No), it is next determined whether the variable presentation type this time is a pattern stock reach (F3191), and if it is determined that it is a pattern stock reach (F3191: Yes), the presentation mode is determined by referring to the pattern stock reach selection table 222ya (F3192), and the process proceeds to F3108.

In addition, if it is determined in the process of F3191 that the pattern stock reach is not occurring (F3191: No), it is then determined whether the variable presentation type this time is a processed reach (F3193), and if it is determined that it is a processed reach (F3193: Yes), a corresponding processing command (a command including image processing information and information indicating the presentation period for processing the image) is set (F3194), and processing proceeds to F3108. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of F3194 that the processed reach is not occurring (F3194: No), the same processes as F3107 to F3108 as the normal state presentation mode determination process 22 described above (see F3018 in FIG. 729) are executed, and this process ends.

The processing command set in the processing of F3194 is output to the display control device 114 by a command output process (see F2102 in FIG. 717) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 717) of the voice lamp control device 113. When the display control device 114 receives a processing command, it identifies processing information for processing the display image from the information included in the received processing command and period information indicating the performance period during which the display image is processed, reads processing data corresponding to the identified processing information from the image processing data storage area, and stores the read processing data and period information in the processing information storage area 233aa.

When the display process is executed, image processing is performed on a layer type basis based on the various information stored in the processing information storage area 233aa, and the display image is displayed on the display screen. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player view the display image displayed on the sub-layer fr formed behind the main layer sr by performing reduction processing on only some of the layers (for example, the main layer sr) out of the multiple layers that form the display image.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to display different display modes using display images formed using the same drawing list, thereby enhancing the dramatic effect.

Next, the contents of the control processing executed by the display control device 114 in this 25th control example will be described with reference to Figs. 792 to 794. This 25th control example differs from the control processing contents of the display control device 114 in the first control example described above in that command determination processing 25 (see F6302 in Fig. 792) is executed instead of command determination processing (S6302 in Fig. 190), and drawing processing 25 (see F6306 in Fig. 794) is executed instead of drawing processing. The rest of the processing contents are the same, and the same contents are denoted with the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 792, the processing contents of command determination process 25 (F6302) will be described. FIG. 792 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of command determination process 25 (F6302). This command determination process 25 (F6302) is the same as the command determination process in the first control example described above (see S6302 in FIG. 190) except that a process to be executed when a processing command is received has been added. Note that in the command determination process 25 (F6302) shown in FIG. 792, for the sake of convenience, the alphabet of the reference characters given to each processing content has been changed from "S" to "F" compared to the command determination process described above (S6302 in FIG. 190), but detailed explanations of the control processes with the same numbers are omitted since they are the same.

As shown in FIG. 792, when command determination process 25 (F6302) is executed, first, the processes F6401 to F6417 are executed, which are the same as the command determination process described above (S6302 in FIG. 190). Then, if it is determined in the process of F6416 that there is no display notification command (F6416: No), it is then determined whether there is an edit command among the unprocessed commands (F6451). If it is determined that there is an edit command (F6451: Yes), edit command process is executed (F6452) and then the process proceeds to F6401.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F6451 that there is no processing command (F6451: No), the processing of F6420 to F6422 is executed, which is the same as the command determination processing described above (S6302 in FIG. 190), and then the process proceeds to F6401.

Next, the processing contents of the processing command processing (F6452) executed in the command judgment processing 25 (F6302) will be explained with reference to FIG. 793. FIG. 793 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the processing command processing (F6452). In this processing command processing (F6452), processing is executed to set the processing information used when processing the display image based on the processing command output from the voice lamp control device 113 (a command including processing information set for each image layer (sub-image layer fr, main image layer sr, spare image layer yr, main image layer hr) that forms the display image, and information indicating the performance period for processing each image layer).

When the processing command process (F6452) is executed, first, the processing information corresponding to the currently received processing command is read from the image processing data memory area 234a3 (F6901), the processing information contained in the read information and its execution period (performance period) are set in the processing information storage area 233aa (F6902), and this process ends. By executing this process, it becomes possible to perform processing (such as changing the scale, tilt, or transparency) on each image layer that forms the display image when executing the display process.

Next, referring to FIG. 794, the details of the drawing process 25 (F6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 794 is a flowchart showing this drawing process 25 (F6306). This drawing process 25 (F6306) is different from the drawing process in the first control example described above (see S6306 in FIG. 201) in that it executes display processing based on processing information, but is otherwise the same. Note that in the drawing process 25 (F6306) shown in FIG. 794, for the convenience of explanation, the alphabet of the reference characters given to each processing content is changed from "S" to "F" compared to the above-mentioned drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 201), but detailed explanations of the control processes with the same numbers are omitted because they are the same content.

When the drawing process 25 (F6306) is executed, first, the process of F7801 to F7803 is executed, which is the same as S7801 to S7803 in the drawing process in the first control example described above (see S6306 in FIG. 201). After that, it is determined whether information for processing the display image is stored in the processing information storage area 233aa (F7851), and if it is determined that there is information (F7851: Yes), the processing is executed for the image information expanded in the frame buffer on the side different from the frame buffer in which the image drawing process was executed based on the drawing list in this process (F7852), and the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (F7853), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of F7851 that there is no information in the processing information storage area 233aa, a display process is executed to display the image information expanded in the frame buffer on the side different from the frame buffer in which the image drawing process was executed based on the drawing list in this process as it is on the third pattern display device 81 (F7854), and this process is terminated.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to display a variety of display modes on the third pattern display device 81 by executing processing based on the processing information using image information expanded in the frame buffer based on the same drawing list. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect.

In addition, in this 25th control example, the processing can be performed on a layer type (image type) basis, rather than on the entire display image. Therefore, by performing a processing process that reduces the display area for a specific image layer (main image layer sr), it is possible for the player to visually recognize the display mode of an image layer (sub-image layer fr) that is formed behind the specific image layer (main image layer sr). Therefore, it is possible to display images with significantly different display modes using image information expanded in the frame buffer based on the same drawing list.

Furthermore, when a processing process is performed to change the aspect ratio of the display image of the main image layer sr on which the decorative third pattern (number icon) is displayed, the aspect ratio of the third pattern (number icon) displayed on the main image layer sr is also distorted, and there is a risk that a third pattern that is difficult for the player to distinguish is displayed. However, in this 25th control example, a reserve image layer yr that is processed in the same way as the main image layer sr is provided on the entire surface side of the main image layer sr, and when a processing process to change the aspect ratio is performed on the main image layer sr, the display mode of the reserve image layer yr is used to make it difficult for the player to see the third pattern with a distorted aspect ratio. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the third pattern indicating a jackpot win is displayed when the third pattern indicating a losing win is displayed.

In addition, in this 25th control example, a display mode for making the third pattern less visible is arranged in a position of the display area of the reserve image layer yr that overlaps with the display position where the third pattern (final stop third pattern) is stopped and displayed on the main image layer sr, and the transparency of the reserve image layer yr is always set to 100%, so that the player cannot normally see the display mode displayed on the reserve image layer yr, and when processing is performed on the main image layer sr to change the aspect ratio, the transparency of the reserve image layer yr is set to 0%, so that the player cannot see the deformed final stop third pattern. By configuring in this way, it is possible to develop in advance the display mode for hiding the deformed final stop third pattern based on the drawing list, thereby eliminating the need to generate different drawing lists based on whether processing has been performed or not.

<Regarding the first modified example of the 25th control example>
Next, the first modified example of the above-mentioned 25th control example will be described with reference to Fig. 795 and Fig. 796. The first modified example of the 25th control example is different in that the performance mode of the symbol stock reach performance executed in the above-mentioned 25th control example is changed. Since the other contents are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-mentioned 25th control example, as described above with reference to Figures 783 and 784, as a pattern stock reach presentation, a plurality of pattern icons (first pattern icon 802a to fourth pattern icon 802d) which are candidates for the stop display mode of the final stop third pattern are displayed during the reach state (see Figure 783 (b)), and a presentation is executed in which the plurality of pattern icons are temporarily lifted outside the display area (see Figure 784 (a)), and then, in conjunction with the action of the character 801 (the action of swinging down a sword), a presentation is executed in which the final stop third pattern is stopped and displayed in the display mode of the third pattern indicated by any one of the plurality of pattern icons (first pattern icon 802a to fourth pattern icon 802d). In addition, in conjunction with the action of the character 801 (swinging down the sword), a performance is executed in which the display mode of the third pattern, which is in a reach state, is switched using multiple pattern icons (first pattern icon 802a to fourth pattern icon 802d) (see FIG. 784(b)).

In other words, in the symbol stock reach presentation in the 25th control example described above, after the player is made aware of the contents of the multiple symbol icons that have been acquired (stocked), the icons are temporarily hidden and then displayed again, and either a presentation is executed in which only the final stopped third symbol is displayed in a stopped state corresponding to one of the stocked symbol icons, or a presentation is executed in which the third symbol in the reach state is also displayed in a stopped state corresponding to one of the stocked symbol icons.

In this way, by making the player aware of all the stocked pattern icons and then temporarily hiding them, it becomes difficult for the player to understand what kind of performance result will be displayed using the pattern icons, making it easier to provide unexpected performance results.

Therefore, for example, when a symbol stock reach effect is executed and many symbol icons with a display mode corresponding to the third symbol that will be a jackpot winning symbol in the current reach state are acquired (stocked) as multiple symbol icons, the player can expect that a symbol stock reach effect will be executed in which only the final stopped third symbol will be displayed in a stopped display mode corresponding to the stocked symbol icon, and even if many symbol icons with a display mode corresponding to the third symbol that will not be a jackpot winning symbol in the current reach state are acquired, the player can expect that a symbol stock reach effect will be executed in which the stopped display mode corresponds to the stocked symbol icons, including the display mode of the third symbol that indicates the reach state. Therefore, the player can enjoy the effect while expecting a jackpot winning symbol until the effect result of the symbol stock reach effect is stopped and displayed.

However, in the pattern stock reach performance executed in the 25th control example described above, the timing at which only the final stopped third pattern is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the pattern icon, and the timing at which the type of the third pattern in the reach state is switched to the type (display mode) corresponding to the pattern icon, are both after the pattern icon has been temporarily hidden, so there is a problem in that it is difficult to gradually vary the probability of a jackpot as the pattern stock reach performance progresses.

In contrast to this, in the pattern stock reach presentation in the first modified example of the present 25th control example, in a presentation in which multiple pattern icons are displayed and then temporarily lifted out of the display area, some of the multiple pattern icons displayed on the display screen are left displayed on the display screen, and the remaining pattern icons are used to perform a presentation in which the type of third pattern, which indicates a reach state, is increased.

By configuring it in this way, when a pattern stock reach effect is executed, the player can first become interested in the type of pattern icon that has been acquired (stocked), then become interested in the presentation mode of the effect of lifting the pattern icon (the effect of making the displayed pattern icon invisible), and finally become interested in the presentation result of the pattern stock reach effect. Therefore, during the presentation period in which the pattern stock reach effect is executed, it is possible to set various timings for the player to focus on the presentation content, and it is possible to execute an effect that continues to interest the player, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

In the first modified example of the 25th control example, when the symbol stock reach performance is executed, the first symbol icon 802a is displayed separately from the third symbol display during the reach state, similar to the symbol stock reach performance in the 25th control example described above. In the example shown in FIG. 795, the first symbol icon 802a is displayed in the display mode "9" corresponding to the third symbol type "9". In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 795, since the type of the third symbol indicating the reach state is "1", when the third symbol corresponding to the "9" shown in the display mode of the first symbol icon 802a is stopped and displayed as the final stopped third symbol, it is a combination of third symbols indicating a miss win.

In this manner, in this modified example, when a symbol stock reach performance is executed, the type of symbol icon displayed first is configured to correspond to the type of third symbol that is a miss and wins the third symbol in the reach state. By configuring it in this manner, when the first symbol icon is stopped and displayed in the symbol stock reach performance (the state shown in FIG. 795(a)), the display mode applied to the total of three symbols, the third symbol (two symbols) in the reach state displayed on the display screen and the symbol icon (one symbol), becomes the same display mode, which prevents the player from misunderstanding that they have won the jackpot.

<Summary of technical ideas 1>
Next, each technical concept described in each of the above control examples will be briefly explained. First, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a trigger other than the big win of the special pattern lottery is provided as a trigger for shifting the probability state of the normal pattern from a low probability state to a high probability state, and the trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established in some of the lottery results (misses) in which the lottery result of the special pattern lottery is different from the big win.

In other words, even players who do not win the jackpot in the special pattern lottery can be given a bonus that is different from the jackpot game. By configuring it in this way, in one special pattern lottery, the lottery result in which the jackpot game is executed and the lottery result in which the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) is set can be provided to the player separately, making it easier to diversify the types of lottery results that are advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, the ease of triggering the setting of a high probability state for normal symbols varies depending on the set game state. Specifically, when the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the game state, it is configured to be possible to determine whether or not a time-saving win (whether or not a trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols is established) in addition to whether or not a jackpot has been won when a special symbol lottery is executed, and when a game state other than the normal state is set, it is configured to be possible to determine only whether or not a jackpot has been won when a special symbol lottery is executed.

In this way, when the normal state is set, a jackpot win in the special pattern lottery or a time-saving win can be established as an opportunity for setting a high probability state for normal patterns, and when playing in a game state other than the normal state, a jackpot win in the special pattern lottery can be established as an opportunity for setting a high probability state for normal patterns. In other words, the normal state, in which the presence or absence of a time-saving win can be determined, is configured to be more likely to establish an opportunity for setting a high probability state for normal patterns than a game state other than the normal state. Therefore, the normal state, in which each pattern (special pattern, normal pattern) is set to a low probability state and is the game state in which it is most difficult to win in each pattern lottery (a game state that is disadvantageous to the player), can make it easier to set a high probability state for normal patterns than other game states, and can increase the motivation of players playing in the normal state.

In addition, in the fifth control example described above, the game state (high probability state, time-saving state) in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set is configured to make it easier to execute the second special symbol lottery than the game state (normal state, second high probability state) in which a low probability state of normal symbols is set, and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reserved) is configured to be memorizable (reserved and memorizable) up to a predetermined number (4). And, the game is configured to make it easier to win the time-saving lottery in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery.

In other words, when the game state transitions from any game state (probability bonus state, time-saving state) in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set to the normal state (when the game state transitions from an advantageous to an unfavorable game state for the player), the game is configured to make it easier to win the time-saving state if a second special symbol lottery is executed during the normal state after the transition based on the execution right for the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reservation) that was reserved and stored in the high probability state for normal symbols before the transition.

By configuring it in this way, even if the game state has shifted from favorable to unfavorable to the player, the player can be made to execute a special symbol lottery for a predetermined period of time that makes it easier for the player to return to a favorable game state, and it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from decreasing significantly when the normal state, which is a game state that is unfavorable to the player, is set. Also, in order to execute more second special symbol lotteries during the normal state, it is possible to motivate the player to play to obtain the reserved special symbol 2 until the last moment when the high probability state of the normal symbol ends, in order to end the high probability state of the normal symbol when the upper limit (4) of the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (reserved special symbol 2) has been acquired.

In the fifth control example described above, in addition to winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery, the high probability state of the normal pattern can be set even when the time-saving feature is won in the special pattern lottery, and the ease of establishing the end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern is different between the high probability state of the normal pattern (first time-saving feature) that is set based on winning the jackpot and the high probability state of the normal pattern (second time-saving feature) that is set based on winning the time-saving feature.

Specifically, the number of time-saving times set as the end condition for the second time-saving is configured to be more likely to be greater than the number of time-saving times set as the end condition for the first time-saving. In this way, when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set, it is possible to set a high probability state for a normal pattern with a different degree of advantage depending on the setting trigger (the trigger for setting the high probability state for a normal pattern). This makes it possible to interest the player not only in whether or not a high probability state for a normal pattern is set, but also in the game process of what trigger sets the high probability state for a normal pattern, making it easier for the player to continue playing.

In the fifth control example described above, the ease of achieving the time-saving end condition (number of time-saving times) is varied in order to vary the degree of advantage of the bonus given to the player in the high probability state of normal patterns. However, without being limited to this, for example, the ease of obtaining the reserved memory for the second special pattern lottery (opening pattern of the electric role 640a) may be varied between when the first time-saving is set and when the second time-saving is set, or the degree of advantage of the bonus given when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery during the high probability state of normal patterns (for example, the number of prize balls given during jackpot play or the type of game state set after the jackpot play ends) may be varied.

Next, the first variant of the fifth control example described above differs from the fifth control example described above in that it is configured so that the first special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set can also be a time-saving win.

In the fifth control example described above, a game is played in which the second special symbol lottery is executed in a state where a high probability state (high probability state, time-saving state) for normal symbols is set, and the right to execute the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 reservation) can be acquired during the high probability state for normal symbols. Then, when the second special symbol lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation acquired during the high probability state for normal symbols is executed in the normal state where a low probability state for normal symbols is set, in addition to the jackpot lottery, the time-saving lottery is also executed. This makes it possible for a player who has experienced a game during a high probability state for normal symbols (advantageous game) that is advantageous to the player to execute a game (pull-back game) that is more likely to return to advantageous game after the advantageous game ends.

However, in the fifth control example described above, unless a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery) executed in the normal state and a game (advantageous game) in which a high probability state of a normal symbol is set is executed, the player cannot benefit from the time-saving lottery, resulting in a problem that the player may become bored with the game without benefiting from the time-saving lottery.

In contrast, the first variant of the fifth control example described above is configured so that it is possible to win the time-saving lottery even in the first special pattern lottery that is executed in the normal state, making it easier for players to benefit from the time-saving lottery.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, the high probability state (time-saving state) for normal symbols that is set based on winning the time-saving state in the special symbol lottery is configured to tend to have a longer period during which the high probability state for normal symbols continues (normal symbol high probability period) than the high probability state (probable bonus state, time-saving state) for normal symbols that is set based on winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In other words, when the time-saving state is won in the special symbol lottery, the player is configured to be granted a privilege that makes it easier for the normal symbol high probability period to continue until the next jackpot is won.

In contrast to this, in the first modified example of the fifth control example described above, if a time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery, a short-term time-saving state (for example, one time of time-saving) can be set, and a game that acquires the right to execute the second special symbol lottery can be executed during the period in which the short-term time-saving state is set (normal symbol high probability period). In other words, in this first modified example, the pull-back game in the fifth control example described above is configured to be executed without winning a jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily execute the second special symbol lottery during the normal state without winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state.

Furthermore, in the first modified example of the fifth control example described above, a plurality of variation times can be selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol lottery executed during the time-saving state. In this first modified example, when the time-saving state is won in the first special symbol lottery executed during the normal state, the first special symbol is displayed frozen in a display mode (time-saving symbol) for indicating the time-saving win after a predetermined variation time has passed, and then the time-saving state (one time of time-saving) is set, and the time-saving state continues until the special symbol variation executed next is displayed frozen.

In other words, the length of time that the time-saving state lasts is determined according to the time that the special symbol changes during the time-saving state. Therefore, the longer the time that the special symbol changes during the time-saving state, the easier it is to acquire many reserved special symbols 2 during the time-saving state, making it a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player.

Next, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, in order to further increase interest in comparison with the fifth control example described above, the contents of the bonus granted in the case of winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery executed in a state in which a high probability state of normal patterns is set are configured to differ depending on the trigger (first time reduction or second time reduction) in which the high probability state of normal patterns is set. In other words, the contents of the bonus granted in the case of winning a jackpot during the first time reduction and the case of winning a jackpot during the second time reduction when the same jackpot type is set are different. By configuring in this way, when a high probability state (time reduction state) of normal patterns is set, it is possible to make the player interested in what trigger set the time reduction state, thereby further increasing the interest of the player in the game.

Furthermore, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, a jackpot game with a small number of rounds and a short play time per round (2R jackpot) can be executed as the jackpot game executed when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, and the time-saving state is set after the 2R jackpot game is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to notice the difference in the content of the game executed between when the time-saving state is set based on winning a jackpot in the special pattern lottery, i.e., when the first time-saving state is set, and when the time-saving state is set without executing a jackpot game, i.e., when the second time-saving state is set.

In addition, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, the variation effect executed in the process of setting the first time reduction and the variation effect executed in the process of setting the second time reduction are configured to be executable in the same presentation mode. Specifically, the first period from when the special pattern variation to indicate that a jackpot win (a 2R jackpot win) for which the first time reduction is set is started until the special pattern variation is stopped and the 2R jackpot game ends, and the second period, which is the variation time of the special pattern variation to indicate that a time reduction win for which the second time reduction is set is set, are set to be approximately the same period, and the presentation is executed in a common presentation mode using the periods.

By configuring it in this way, when the first time-saving state is set and when the second time-saving state is set, a common presentation style can be executed in the period from when the special pattern variation starts to when the time-saving state is set, making it difficult for the player to understand which trigger set the time-saving state.

Next, the sixth control example described above is significantly different from the fifth control example described above in that it is configured so that it is possible to win the time-saving feature in the special symbol lottery even when a game state other than the normal state is set.

By configuring it in this way, for example, if a new time-saving win occurs while the time-saving state is set, it is possible to update the remaining period for which the time-saving state will continue. This makes it difficult for the player to know how long the time-saving state will continue.

In addition, when updating the remaining period for which the time-saving state will continue, it is configured so that the period for which the time-saving state will continue can be updated to be longer than the current remaining period (favorable update) or shorter (unfavorable update). In other words, depending on the timing of winning the time-saving state in the time-saving lottery and the number of time-saving times (length of time period) that is set when the time-saving state is won, winning the time-saving state can be a favorable benefit to the player or an unfavorable benefit. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide innovative gameplay that combines gameplay in which a time-saving state is expected to be won and gameplay in which a time-saving state is not expected to be won.

Furthermore, in the sixth control example described above, the more consecutive time-saving wins without winning the jackpot, the easier it becomes for the player to be set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player. Specifically, multiple time-saving types that differ in the degree of advantage to the player are defined, and the more time-saving wins there are during the time-saving state, the easier it becomes to set an advantageous time-saving type. By configuring it in this way, the longer the period without winning the jackpot, the easier it becomes to grant a player an advantageous bonus.

In addition, when the most advantageous time-saving type for the player is set, it is configured so that it is easier for the player to transition to a time-saving type that is less advantageous than when a time-saving type that is less advantageous than the most advantageous time-saving type is set. In other words, there are multiple stages of time-saving types with different degrees of advantageousness, and time-saving types with gradually increasing degrees of advantageousness are set based on the time-saving win, so that when the highest stage of time-saving type is reached, it is easier for the player to fall down to the lowest stage of time-saving type. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a time-saving type that is advantageous for the player from continuing for an excessively long period of time.

As in the sixth control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute a time-saving lottery when the time-saving state is set, that is, when the setting condition for a new time-saving state is established when the time-saving state is set, to execute a process to set a new time-saving state regardless of the content of the already-set time-saving state (short remaining time period), or to execute a process to determine whether or not to set a new time-saving state based on the result of the determination between the content of the already-set time-saving state (short remaining time period) and the content of the time-saving state for which the new setting condition is established, and to execute a process to calculate the difference between the content of the already-set time-saving state and the content of the time-saving state for which the new setting condition is established, and to add (subtract) the information corresponding to the difference (short remaining time period) to (from) the short remaining time period of the already-set time-saving state.

The system may also be configured to execute a process that waits for a new time-saving state for which the setting conditions are met to be set until an already-set time-saving state ends. In this case, if multiple setting conditions for time-saving states are met before an already-set time-saving state ends, the system may be configured to set all of the time-saving states for which the setting conditions are met in order, or it may be configured to store up to a predetermined number of time-saving states that are advantageous to the player among the waiting time-saving states, and to set only the stored time-saving states in order.

Of course, each of the technical ideas described in the sixth control example above may be applied to each of the above control examples, and the technical idea described in the thirteenth control example above, that is, the technical idea that allows the time-saving state to be set as a ceiling privilege, may be applied to the sixth control example above as a setting condition for the time-saving state.

Next, in the seventh control example described above, it is configured so that a jackpot win and a time-saving win can be determined in a single special pattern lottery. Also, in the seventh control example described above, it is configured so that a time-saving win determination is made before a jackpot win determination is made, and when a time-saving win is made, a time-saving state is set before a jackpot win determination is made in the special pattern lottery, a jackpot win determination is made in the special pattern lottery while the time-saving state is set, and the time-saving state can be ended at the timing when a special pattern change is made to show the lottery result of the special pattern lottery.

Specifically, when the time-saving win is won in the first special symbol lottery in the normal state, as described above, the time-saving state is set for a short period including the timing when the jackpot determination is executed in the special symbol lottery. In other words, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a function (time-saving period setting function) that allows the time-saving win in the special symbol lottery is set in order to play a game (a game that is easy to execute the special symbol lottery) that is advantageous to the player toward the next jackpot win for a predetermined period (up to 10,000 times) without going through the jackpot game, whereas in the above-mentioned seventh control example, in addition to the above-mentioned time-saving period setting function, a function (special lottery function) is set that allows the jackpot determination of the special symbol lottery in the time-saving state to be executed during the game (left-handed play) executed in the normal state by configuring the timing when the jackpot determination is executed by the special symbol lottery to be in the time-saving state without making it easy to execute the special symbol lottery in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute the jackpot determination for the special pattern lottery during the time-saving state while making it difficult for the player to realize that they have won the time-saving special pattern lottery, so it is possible to notify the player of the unexpected lottery result as the result of the special pattern lottery.

In addition, in the seventh control example described above, the bonus granted when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery is different between when a jackpot is won in the normal state and when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state, and it is configured so that a bonus that is more advantageous to the player is granted when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state than in the normal state (for example, a jackpot game with more rounds). In other words, in the first special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, when a player wins both the time-saving state and the jackpot, a bonus that is more advantageous is granted than when a player wins only a jackpot.

In addition, in the seventh control example described above, the presentation mode of the variable presentation for showing the result of the special pattern lottery is configured to be able to set a suggestion mode (announcement mode) that can indicate whether or not a time-saving win has been won, and a suggestion mode (announcement mode) that can indicate whether or not a jackpot has been won.

In other words, by grasping the presentation mode of the variable presentation being executed, it is possible to allow the player to predict the result of the jackpot determination executed for the currently executing special pattern lottery and the result of the time-saving winning determination. Furthermore, as a variable presentation, the timing of notifying the presence or absence of a time-saving winning is configured to be different from the timing of notifying the presence or absence of a jackpot winning. By configuring it in this way, in a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a determination to grant multiple different benefits for one special pattern lottery, it is possible to grasp the suggestion mode for suggesting other judgment results while grasping (predicting) at least one judgment result.

In addition, in the seventh control example described above, the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher when the result of the effect (time-saving effect) including a suggestive aspect that can suggest whether or not the time-saving effect has been won is an effect result including a suggestive aspect that suggests that the time-saving effect has not been won, than when the time-saving effect is not executed. In this way, in a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration in which multiple bonuses with different awarding judgments can be awarded in one special pattern lottery, when a judgment result suggestive effect that can suggest the result of the awarding judgment for one bonus is executed, the result of the judgment result suggestive effect suggests that one bonus will not be awarded, so that the expectation of awarding another bonus is higher than when the judgment result suggestive effect is not executed. This makes it possible to notify the player that a bonus is more likely to be awarded at the time the judgment result suggestive effect is executed, compared to when the judgment result suggestive effect is not executed.

As in the seventh control example described above, a configuration that allows multiple bonuses to be awarded in a overlapping manner based on the execution of one special pattern lottery may of course be applied to each of the control examples described above. For example, a technical idea that allows a player to win both the jackpot lottery and the time-saving lottery in a overlapping manner based on the execution of one special pattern lottery may be applied to the thirteenth control example to the sixteenth control example described above, and the technical idea regarding the ceiling bonus used in the thirteenth control example to the eighth control example described above may be applied to the fifth control example to the eighth control example described above.

For example, if a technical idea regarding a ceiling bonus is added to the seventh control example, a single special pattern lottery can be executed to award up to three different bonuses (jackpot win, time-saving win, ceiling bonus) to the player, making the player more interested in the results of the special pattern lottery. In this case, the system may be configured to provide all three bonuses that can be awarded, or to discard at least one bonus. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an overly advantageous bonus is offered to the player.

Next, the eighth control example described above is configured to be able to execute a judgment of whether or not a time-saving win has been made (time-saving lottery) in both the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery that are executed in the normal state, and is configured to have a high probability of winning the time-saving win (most of the time-saving wins are negative wins), and is configured so that the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set based on the time-saving win is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal state.

In addition, in the eighth control example described above, the game board 13 is configured to make it easier for the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery to be executed alternately, and the end condition for the second time reduction described above is set to be established when one type of special symbol lottery is executed consecutively.

In the pachinko machine 10 in the eighth control example described above, configured in this way, if the special symbol lottery executed when the normal state is set does not result in a jackpot win (jackpot probability 1/300), the second time-saving period is set by winning the time-saving period with a high probability (298/300). Then, the special symbol lottery is executed in the second time-saving period until the condition for ending the second time-saving period is met.

In addition, the second time-saving end condition is configured to be set as a first time-saving end condition that is established when the total number of special pattern lotteries executed during the second time-saving period reaches a specific number (100 times), and a second time-saving end condition that is established when the special pattern lotteries are executed in a predetermined order, and the second time-saving end condition is configured to be established before the first time-saving end condition is established.

Therefore, when the second time-saving period is set, the player can be motivated to play in order to achieve the second time-saving end condition in order to end the second time-saving period as soon as possible.

In addition, the degree of advantage given to the player is varied depending on the type of special pattern lottery executed in the normal state, so that it is easier to set an advantageous gaming state after the end of the jackpot game if the jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery executed in the normal state than if the jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery executed in the normal state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of special pattern lottery that will be held after the second time-saving period ends.

In the eighth control example described above, if the type of special pattern lottery executed immediately after the time-saving state is set satisfies a specific condition (the same type as the special pattern for which the time-saving state is set), the special pattern lottery executed immediately thereafter is configured to establish the time-saving end condition (establish the shortened time-saving end condition). However, the configuration for establishing the shortened time-saving end condition is not limited to this, and for example, it may be configured to be able to execute the time-saving lottery even when the time-saving state is set, and if a time-saving win is made during the time-saving state, a new time-saving state with the content of the time-saving win may be set.

In the eighth control example described above, if an unfavorable time-saving effect is won in the second special pattern lottery, a special pattern lottery that is less favorable than the normal state is executed in the first special pattern lottery until the unfavorable time-saving state ends. In other words, it is configured so that a penalty can be imposed on other special pattern lotteries depending on the result of one special pattern lottery.

As a gaming method for imposing such a penalty, for example, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to simultaneously (in parallel) display the varying display of the first special symbol and the varying display of the second special symbol (so-called simultaneous variation specification) as in the 12th control example described above, when the second special symbol lottery is executed by executing an inappropriate game in a specific gaming state (normal state), an unfavorable time-saving state is set, and while the unfavorable time-saving state is set, a special symbol lottery that is more unfavorable to the player than in the normal state is executed in the first special symbol lottery.

Next, the twelfth control example described above is configured so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed simultaneously (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous variable specification). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute lottery games with more special symbols within a specified time, and the probability that the player will be awarded a jackpot within the specified time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play efficiently.

In addition, in the twelfth control example described above, the time-saving lottery can be executed for both the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, and the player is granted a more advantageous benefit if one of the special patterns wins the time-saving lottery during the period from when the time-saving lottery is won for the first special pattern to when the other special pattern also wins the time-saving lottery during the period until the variable display of that special pattern stops, than if only one of the first special pattern or the second special pattern wins the time-saving lottery.

In the twelfth control example described above, if the first or second special symbol wins the time-saving feature in the normal state, the time-saving A state is set. On the other hand, if the first special symbol wins the time-saving feature in the normal state, a long (300-second) fluctuation time is set (time-saving winning fluctuation state), and if the second special symbol wins the time-saving feature during the period until the fluctuation of the first special symbol ends (i.e., until the first special symbol, which indicates a time-saving feature win, is stopped and displayed), the time-saving B state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving A state, is set.

By configuring it in this way, if one special symbol wins the time-saving feature, the other special symbol will also win the time-saving feature, giving the player a special advantage. Therefore, when one special symbol wins the time-saving feature and the special symbol changes to indicate that a time-saving feature has been won, the player will be made to want to win the other special symbol as well, which makes it possible to motivate the player to play and increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, even if a jackpot of a jackpot type that can set a time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) after the jackpot play ends, the system is configured to execute a process to set the normal state (low probability state of normal symbols) after the jackpot play ends.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining an excessive advantage by continuing a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player for a long period of time, and to prevent the player's gambling spirit from increasing.

In addition, in a gaming machine with simultaneous variation specifications, when a big win (or small win) is won in one of the special symbol lotteries, the specification is generally such that only one of the following is executed: the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped (discarded) or temporarily stopped (interrupted); however, in the above-mentioned 12th control example, the configuration is such that whether the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped or temporarily stopped is determined depending on the big win type (or small win type). In other words, a big win type that forcibly stops (discards) the variable display of the other special symbol and a big win type that temporarily stops (interrupts) the variable display of the other special symbol are specified.

By configuring it in this way, when a game state advantageous to the player is set, and a game state disadvantageous to the player may be set by the stopped display of one special symbol, it is possible to prevent the setting of an unfavorable game state when a jackpot of a jackpot type that allows the variation of the other special symbols to be discarded, but if a jackpot of a jackpot type that interrupts the other special symbols is won, the situation in which an unfavorable game state may be set continues. Therefore, when a jackpot is won, it is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the variation of the other special symbols could be discarded, thereby increasing the excitement of the game.

Of course, the playability in the above-mentioned twelfth control example, i.e., the playability of the simultaneous variation specification, may be applied to each of the above-mentioned control examples. In addition, in a pachinko machine 10 with simultaneous variation specifications, a configuration may be used in which, based on the execution of one special pattern lottery, the result of the other special pattern lottery is discarded, for example, when a time-saving win is won or a ceiling bonus is awarded based on the execution of one special pattern lottery, the other special pattern lottery (variation) being executed is discarded.

<Summary of technical ideas 2>
Next, each technical idea described in each of the above-mentioned control examples will be briefly explained. First, regarding the technical idea that the probability of obtaining an advantageous privilege by the special drawing lottery increases when the number of times the special drawing lottery using the special drawing lottery reserved acquired during the time reduction exceeds a predetermined number of times, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the above-mentioned fifth control example, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the pachinko machine 10 has a means for acquiring the execution right of the second special pattern lottery (acquisition means capable of acquiring information) and has a means for reserving and storing the execution right of the second special pattern lottery (special drawing lottery reserved) up to the upper limit number (4 pieces) (storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means). Then, based on the execution right of the second special pattern lottery (special drawing lottery reserved) that is reserved and stored, the second special pattern lottery is executed (discrimination means capable of executing a judgment based on the information stored in the storage means). Then, a jackpot game (specific game) is executed based on the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery being a jackpot win (first discrimination result). Then, after the jackpot game ends, the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern, which makes it easier to enter the game ball into the second ball entrance 640, continues until the end condition (time-saving end condition) for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern is established. In addition, in the second special pattern lottery, a time-saving winning judgment can be executed separately from the jackpot winning judgment, and if it is determined that the time-saving winning has been won in the time-saving winning judgment (if it is determined that the second judgment result is true), the high probability state (specific setting) of the normal pattern can be set without executing the jackpot game. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned fifth control example, a plurality of game states are configured to be set, but among them, the time-saving winning judgment can be executed only in the state in which the normal state (specific period) is set.

By configuring it in this way, when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set based on winning a jackpot in the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state for a normal pattern is set at the end of the jackpot game, not when the special pattern variation stops, and when a high probability state for a normal pattern is set based on winning a time-saving game in the second special pattern lottery, the high probability state for a normal pattern is set at the stop of the special pattern variation. Thus, the timing at which the high probability state for a normal pattern is set can be made to differ depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state.

In addition, since it is possible to provide a period during which the time-saving winning judgment can be performed (period during which the normal state is set) and a period during which it cannot be performed (period during which the normal state is not set), it is possible to make the player interested in the period during which the special pattern lottery is performed. Note that in the fifth control example described above, it is configured so that the time-saving winning judgment is performed only in the normal state, but it is sufficient to provide a period during which the time-saving winning judgment can be performed and a period during which it is not performed. For example, it is also possible to configure so that the time-saving winning judgment can be performed in a game state in which a low probability state of a normal pattern is set (normal state, second probability state), and not to perform the time-saving winning judgment in a game state in which a high probability state of a normal pattern is set (time-saving state, probability state).

Furthermore, rather than switching whether or not to execute the time-saving win judgment depending on the set game state, the probability of winning the time-saving win judgment may be made to differ depending on the game state. For example, when the normal state is set, the time-saving win judgment has a 1/6 probability of winning the time-saving win, and in other game states, the probability of winning the time-saving win may be configured to be 1/200. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set game states in which it is easy to win the time-saving win and game states in which it is difficult to win the time-saving win, so that, similar to the technical idea described above, it is possible to get the player interested in the effect, i.e., the period during which the special pattern lottery is executed.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, a first ball entry port 64 (a first ball entry means through which a game ball can enter) through which a game ball can enter and trigger the execution of a first special symbol lottery is provided, and a second ball entry port 640 (a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means) through which a game ball can enter and trigger the execution of a second special symbol lottery is provided, and the time-saving winning determination is configured to be possible only in the second special symbol lottery.

In other words, in the first special pattern lottery, no time-saving winning judgment is performed regardless of the game state set, and in the second special pattern lottery, the time-saving winning judgment can be performed during a specific period (normal state). By configuring it in this way, the amount of value that is later granted to the player can be significantly different between the first special pattern lottery and the second special pattern lottery, and further between the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 and the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640.

In the fifth control example described above, the first special symbol lottery does not execute the time-saving winning judgment, and the second special symbol lottery is configured to execute the time-saving winning judgment in a specific period (normal state), but this is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving winning judgment may be executed only for the second special symbol lottery in the first specific period (normal state), and the time-saving winning judgment may be executed only for the first special symbol lottery in a second specific period (second probability change state) different from the first specific period. By configuring in this way, depending on the set period, it is possible to create a situation in which the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64 is more likely to give a player a value advantageous to the player than the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640, and a situation in which the entry of a game ball into the second ball entrance 640 is more likely to give a player a value advantageous to the player than the entry of a game ball into the first ball entrance 64. This makes it possible to motivate players to play games that are more likely to award them advantageous value.

Furthermore, in this case, as in the modified example shown in FIG. 329, it is advisable to configure the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 so that the rate at which game balls enter the first ball entrance 64 is similar to the rate at which game balls enter the second ball entrance 640, regardless of which game state is set. By configuring it in this way, the player can select which ball entrance to enter the game ball at his/her discretion, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as described in each control example, the time-saving state (second time-saving state) that is set based on winning the time-saving state by the time-saving state winning judgment (first time-saving state) is more likely to be set as a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, i.e., a time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be established, than the time-saving state (first time-saving state) that is set based on winning the jackpot. In other words, the system is configured to vary the degree of advantage of the set time-saving state depending on the trigger for setting the time-saving state. This makes it possible to vary the period (time-saving end condition) during which the time-saving state (specific setting) is set depending on the determined judgment result (setting trigger), which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing interest.

In this case, it is advisable to provide a case where the second time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the first time-saving state, depending on the game state before the time-saving state is set, and a case where the first time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the second time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the situation under which the time-saving state is set.

More specifically, for example, the system may be configured so that a more advantageous time-saving state is more likely to occur when the number of times special symbol lotteries have been executed since the end of the previous big win game (number of times they have been stuck) exceeds a predetermined number, compared to when this number has not been exceeded.

Next, in the seventh control example described above, it is configured so that a jackpot win and a time-saving win can be won in one special pattern lottery (see FIG. 315). This allows a jackpot win (first discrimination result) and a time-saving win (second discrimination result) to be discriminated in a overlapping manner, so that various lottery results can be expected in one special pattern lottery, such as a jackpot win, a time-saving win, or both a jackpot win and a time-saving win. Furthermore, in the seventh control example, when a time-saving win and a jackpot win overlap, a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player is executed than when there are no overlapping wins (see FIG. 306(b)). Therefore, since it is easy to execute a specific type of game that is advantageous to the player by discriminating in overlapping, there is an effect that the game can be diversified by granting the player a bonus corresponding to various discrimination results.

In addition, a configuration other than that of the seventh control example described above may be used to provide a more advantageous benefit to the player in the case of a duplicate win than in the case of no duplicate wins. For example, the game state set after the jackpot game ends may be configured so that a more advantageous game state (e.g., a special bonus state, a time-saving state, etc.) can be set in the case of a duplicate win than in the case of no duplicate wins.

In addition, in the seventh control example described above, after a time-saving winning judgment (a judgment as to whether or not the result is the second judgment result) is made, a jackpot judgment (a judgment as to whether or not the result is the first judgment result) is made, and if a time-saving winning is made in one special pattern lottery, the jackpot judgment in that special pattern lottery can be made in the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the degree of advantage of the bonus game that is executed when there is a double win different from the degree of advantage of the bonus game that is executed when there is no double win.

Next, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, the type of bonus (the number of time-saving times granted after the end of the jackpot game) granted to the player when the jackpot is won in the high probability state of the normal pattern (first time-saving) set based on winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery and the high probability state of the normal pattern (second time-saving) set based on winning the time-saving in the special pattern lottery is different (see FIG. 280 (b)). Therefore, since the selection ratio (the content of the jackpot game and the number of time-saving times granted) in the type of bonus game is variable according to the setting type (first time-saving, second time-saving), the bonus granted to the player can be different even in the high probability state of the same normal pattern (second game state), and there is an effect that the game can be diversified without setting many game states, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, the number of time-saving periods granted is different depending on the setting type (first time-saving period and second time-saving period), but this is not limited to this, and the content of the jackpot game to be executed (for example, the number of rounds played) may be configured to be different.

Furthermore, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, when the second time reduction is set rather than the first time reduction, that is, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set without a jackpot game being played, it is configured so that the high probability state for normal symbols, in which the end condition is less likely to be established, is more likely to be set. In other words, when a high probability state for normal symbols is set without winning a prize ball during a jackpot game, that is, when the second time reduction, which provides fewer benefits before the high probability state for normal symbols is set than the first time reduction, can prolong the high probability state for normal symbols, which has the effect of allowing benefits to be awarded fairly to players.

Furthermore, in the second variant of the fifth control example described above, similar to the fifth control example and the first variant of the fifth control example described above, the time-saving winning judgment (determination of the second discrimination result) is configured to be executable only in the normal state. In other words, the execution of the time-saving winning judgment is restricted in states other than the normal state. Therefore, since the time-saving winning judgment is not executed according to the game state, there is an effect of making the player more interested in the game state that has been set, and making the player look forward to the game state being set in which the second discrimination result can be determined.

In addition, in the second modified example of the fifth control example described above, a presentation mode for showing the result of the special symbol lottery can be set so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the first or second time reduction has been set (see Figs. 278 and 279). In other words, when the first time reduction is set, a specific presentation (see Fig. 278(a)) is executed for the first period which is the sum of the special symbol change time and the subsequent jackpot game period, and when the second time reduction is set, a specific presentation (see Fig. 278(b)) is executed for the second period which is the special symbol change time (including the fixed time).

More specifically, the variable time and the jackpot game period are predefined in accordance with each special symbol lottery result so that the first period and the second period described above are approximately the same, and the performance periods of the specific effects are the same. By configuring in this way, as the effect displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a performance indicating a high probability state of the normal symbol is executed after a specific effect with the same performance period and performance mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is watching the effects executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to determine which setting trigger set the high probability state of the normal symbol.

Next, in the sixth control example described above, the system is configured so that the time-saving winning judgment can be executed even during the time-saving state (second game state), and if a time-saving winning occurs during the time-saving state (second game state), it is possible to set a time-saving state (second game state) of a time-saving type in which the time-saving ending condition is unlikely to be met (the number of time-saving events is large or the probability of winning the time-saving event is high).

As a result, the longer the period for which the time-saving state is set, the more likely it is that a time-saving state of a type for which the time-saving end condition is less likely to be met will be set, making it easier to play bonus games.

In the sixth control example described above, as shown in FIG. 286(a), the probability of winning the time-saving bonus is different depending on the set game state, but the probability of winning the time-saving bonus may be set to the same. In addition, although the probability of winning the time-saving bonus is different depending on the game state, the probability of winning the time-saving bonus may also be different depending on the number of special pattern draws since the previous big win game was played. In this case, it is preferable to configure the probability of winning the time-saving bonus to be higher when the number of special pattern draws since the previous big win game is played exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 200 times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily grant a special bonus of winning the time-saving bonus, which is different from the big win game, to a player who has not won a big win in a special pattern draw for a long time. It goes without saying that this technical concept can be applied to other control examples.

The following configuration may be used as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 used in each of the embodiments or control examples described above.

<About the configuration of high probability states of normal symbols>
In each of the above-described embodiments, in some cases where a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery, a high probability state for a normal pattern can be set after the jackpot game ends. However, a setting trigger other than a jackpot win in a special pattern lottery may be provided as a setting trigger for setting a high probability state for a normal pattern. For example, a setting trigger for setting a high probability state for a normal pattern may be established when the number of times that a special pattern variation is executed without winning a jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, twice the denominator value of the probability of winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery executed in a low probability state for a special pattern).

By configuring it in this way, when a situation occurs in which special symbol lotteries (variations) that do not result in a jackpot are repeatedly performed, i.e., a situation in which the player's motivation to play is likely to decrease, it is possible to provide the player with a special bonus (a high probability state for normal symbols), thereby preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing significantly.

In addition, the number of times the special symbol variation, which is an element for realizing the above-mentioned setting opportunity, is executed may be configured to be variable depending on the game situation. For example, the number of times the special symbol variation that realizes the setting opportunity for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol may be configured to differ depending on the game state that is set. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the number of times the special symbol variation that realizes the setting opportunity is executed to differ depending on the type of game state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, that is, when the normal state (low probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set and when the second probability state (high probability state of the special symbol, low probability state of the normal symbol) is set. By configuring in this way, the expectation that the high probability state of the normal symbol will be set can be made different depending on the game state that is set.

In this case, since the second probability variable state in which a high probability state of the special symbol is set makes it easier to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery than the normal state in which a low probability state of the special symbol is set (because the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is higher), it is preferable to configure the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol to be established with fewer special symbol fluctuations when the second probability variable state is set than when the normal state is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier to establish the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal symbol regardless of which game state is set.

On the other hand, it may be configured so that when the normal state is set, the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established with fewer executions of the special pattern variation than when the second probability variable state is set. In other words, in the normal state (the most unfavorable game state for the player) in which the probability state of the special pattern is also set to a low probability state that is unfavorable to the player, the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern can be made more likely to be established, making it difficult for the player to play an excessively unfavorable game. Also, since the high probability state of the normal pattern is more likely to be set based on the setting trigger that is established when the number of executions of the special pattern variation reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to easily provide the player with a surprising game in which the high probability state of the normal pattern is set without winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, when the setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern is configured to differ depending on the set game state, a game state in which the setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern cannot (is difficult to) be established may be provided in some of the set game states. For example, a configuration may be made in which multiple types (e.g., normal AA, normal AB) can be set as normal states (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns), and the setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern is more likely to be established when the game state of normal AB is set than when the game state of normal AA is set.

By configuring it in this way, a player playing on a gaming machine in which the normal state is set can play while predicting when the high probability state of the normal pattern will be set, or whether the game state is one in which a setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern can be established, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game early on. In this case, it is preferable to configure it so that a presentation can be executed that allows the player to predict whether the currently set game state (game state for each type) is a game state in which a setting trigger for the high probability state of the normal pattern is likely to be established.

Furthermore, in gaming machines with game specifications in which the bonus (the jackpot game content and the game state set at the end of the jackpot game) given to the player when he wins the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is more likely to be favorable to the player in a game state in which a high probability state of normal patterns is set than in a game state in which a low probability state of normal patterns is set, it is preferable to configure the machine to be able to execute a presentation in which the presentation mode is changed based on information indicating the remaining period (remaining number of special pattern changes) until the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of normal patterns is realized and information indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery (or information indicating the advance determination result (pre-reading result) that has determined the lottery result of the special pattern lottery in advance).

For example, when determining the presentation mode of an effect (e.g., a reach effect) that is more likely to be executed when a jackpot has been won in a special pattern lottery than when a jackpot has not been won, the remaining period (remaining number of special pattern changes) until the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is realized is referenced, and different presentation modes are determined when the remaining number of special pattern changes is small, i.e., a first situation in which the high probability state of the normal pattern will soon be set, and when the remaining number of special pattern changes is large, i.e., a second situation in which the high probability state of the normal pattern will not be set for some time. The presentation mode of the reach effect can be determined so that a reach effect is more likely to be executed in a presentation mode that can inform the player that the first situation is more advantageous than the second situation.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute reach effects with different presentation modes depending on the timing when the reach effect suggesting a jackpot win is executed and the timing when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set, so that the reach effects can be executed in various presentation modes, enhancing the presentation effect. In addition, it is possible to allow the player to understand the degree of advantage of the timing when the reach effect is executed (whether it is immediately before the high probability state of the normal pattern is set or not) based on the presentation mode of the reach effect executed, so it is possible to provide a novel presentation that makes the player hope that the presentation result of the currently executed reach effect will be a miss (a presentation result indicating that the result of the special pattern lottery will be a miss).

In addition, in a case where a high probability state for normal symbols is set when a special symbol lottery is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot while a low probability state for normal symbols is set, and the high probability state for normal symbols is more likely to be set after the end of a jackpot game if a jackpot is won during a high probability state for normal symbols than if a jackpot is won during a low probability state for normal symbols, a specific variable performance for showing the result of the special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed when a jackpot is won in a different symbol lottery than when a jackpot is not won. It may be configured to be able to execute a performance (for example, a reach performance), and to determine the performance mode of the specific performance between a first performance mode suggesting that a jackpot has been won in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set after the end of a jackpot game, and a second performance mode simply suggesting that a jackpot has been won, and to fix the frequency with which the specific performance of the first performance mode is executed regardless of the remaining number of times that special symbols will fluctuate until the high probability state of normal symbols is set, and to lower the frequency with which the specific performance of the second performance mode is executed as the remaining number of times that special symbols will fluctuate until the high probability state of normal symbols is set decreases.

By configuring it in this way, the selection rate of the first presentation mode when a specific presentation is executed can be increased as the number of special pattern changes approaches the number of times that sets the high probability state of the normal pattern. Therefore, even if a specific presentation is executed in a state close to the number of special pattern changes that sets the high probability state of the normal pattern (for example, the number of special pattern changes since the end of the previous jackpot game is between 90 and 99 times), the player can be interested in the presentation result of the specific presentation without being disappointed.

In addition, a number of times lottery means may be provided to determine the number of times that a special pattern variation will be performed to establish a setting trigger for setting a high probability state of a normal pattern, and the number of times that a special pattern variation will be performed to establish the setting trigger may be determined based on the results of the lottery by the number of times lottery means. In this case, for example, it is preferable to configure the number of times that a special pattern variation will be performed to be "0" as the number of times that is most likely to establish the setting trigger, within the range of the number of times that can be determined by the number of times lottery means.

By configuring it in this way, even if a jackpot type that sets a low probability state for normal symbols is set, it is possible to set a game state that is essentially the same as when a high probability state for normal symbols is set.

In other words, even when the same game state is set and the same jackpot type (a jackpot type in which a low probability state of a normal pattern is set) is set, the game state (probability state of a normal pattern) that is set after the jackpot game ends (until the first special pattern variation is executed) can be made different based on the lottery result of the number of times lottery means.

This makes it difficult for players to predict the game state that will be set after the big win game ends, and provides players with an element of surprise.

The timing for executing the above-mentioned number of times lottery means may be set appropriately, and may be, for example, the timing when the big win game ends, or the number of times lottery means may be configured to be executable each time the special pattern variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times). In this case, if the number of times the special pattern variation has been executed determined as the lottery result of the number of times lottery means, the high probability state of the normal pattern may be set immediately after the lottery by the number of times lottery means is executed.

In this way, by configuring the number of times lottery means to be executable every time the special pattern variation is performed a predetermined number of times (50 times), it is possible to vary the contents of the setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern (the number of special pattern variations that establish the setting trigger) during the period in which the special pattern variation is performed multiple times without winning a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the high probability state of the normal pattern will be set. In this case, it is preferable to vary the range of the number of times the special pattern variation is performed, which is determined by lottery, based on the number of times the number of times lottery is performed by the number of times lottery means from the end of the jackpot game to the winning of the next jackpot. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the system so that the more the number of times lottery is performed, the easier it is to set the high probability state of the normal pattern. By configuring in this way, the more the number of special pattern variations performed between jackpots increases, the easier it is to set the high probability state of the normal pattern, so that it is possible to suppress a significant decrease in the player's desire to play.

In addition, the above-mentioned number of times selection means executes a selection to determine the number of times the special pattern will change to establish a setting trigger for setting a high probability state of the normal pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the contents of the number of times selection means may be configured to determine the number of times the special pattern will change required from the execution of the number of times selection means until the high probability state of the normal pattern is set.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine configured to execute a frequency selection means each time a special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), that is, configured to be able to execute the frequency selection means when a predetermined selection condition is established based on the execution of a special symbol variation, a normal symbol high probability selection means may be provided in place of the frequency selection means described above, and configured to set a high probability state for the normal symbol when this normal symbol high probability selection means is won.

In addition, a different setting trigger may be provided as a setting trigger for the high probability state of the normal pattern. For example, a measuring means may be provided that measures the number of times the result of the special pattern lottery is a specific lottery result other than a big win (for example, a small win), and when the measurement result of the measuring means is a predetermined measurement result, a setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern is established. Alternatively, a setting trigger for setting the high probability state of the normal pattern may be established when the game result (increase or decrease in the number of balls dispensed) since the end of the previous big win game exceeds a predetermined range (for example, when the rate of decrease in the number of balls dispensed is extremely drastic).

Furthermore, the degree to which the setting trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols is established (ease of establishment) may be varied depending on past game results. For example, if past winning jackpots have been biased toward jackpots that are disadvantageous to the player, that is, if a game that is disadvantageous to the player has continued for a predetermined period of time, the setting trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols may be configured to be established more easily, or if a game that is advantageous to the player has continued for a predetermined period of time, the setting trigger for setting a high probability state for normal symbols may be configured to be established less easily. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a player who has been playing for a long time from continuing to play excessively disadvantageous or excessively advantageous games.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, if a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set and a time-saving end condition is met, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set. Then, as the time-saving end condition, a time-saving end condition that is met when the special symbol variation count is executed (is executed) a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is set.

The time-saving end condition is not limited to this, and different time-saving end conditions may be set depending on the type of special symbol, for example. Specifically, the time-saving end condition may be established when the first special symbol has changed a first number of times, when the second special symbol has changed a second number of times, or when the combined number of times the first special symbol has changed and the second special symbol has changed a third number of times, etc.

In addition, when setting a time-saving end condition based on the number of times that the special pattern changes are performed, various numbers may be set as the number of times that the special pattern changes at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied. As shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the time-saving end condition may be satisfied when the special pattern changes are performed more than 100 times (e.g., 200 times) other than when the number of times the special pattern changes reaches 100 times, or when the time-saving end condition is performed less than 100 times (e.g., 50 times). Furthermore, the content of the time-saving end condition may be different depending on the setting trigger (jackpot type, number of special pattern changes, etc.) that is established to set the time-saving state, and it is preferable to configure the number of times that the special pattern changes at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied to be reduced so that the time-saving end condition is more likely to be established when another setting trigger is established than when one setting trigger is established. By configuring it in this way, when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the time-saving state will end, and to make the player interested in which setting trigger was met to set the time-saving state.

In addition, factors other than the number of times the special pattern variation is performed may be used as factors for establishing the time-saving end condition. For example, the time-saving end condition may be established when the number of times the special pattern lottery results in a specific lottery result (small win) reaches a predetermined number.

The timing for ending the time-saving state based on the satisfaction of the time-saving end condition may be the start timing of the corresponding special symbol change (lottery), the stop timing of the corresponding special symbol change, or a specific timing until the next special symbol lottery after the corresponding special symbol change is executed. Furthermore, the time-saving state may be ended at the start or end timing of a winning game (big win game, small win game), the start or stop timing of a normal symbol change, or the start or end timing of a normal winning game.

In this case, the time-saving state may be configured to end at the same timing regardless of which time-saving end condition is met, or the time-saving state may be configured to end at different timings depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is met. For example, if a time-saving end condition is met based on the number of times a special pattern change is performed, the time-saving state may be ended at a predetermined timing related to the special pattern change, and if a time-saving end condition is met based on the result of a special pattern lottery (such as winning a small jackpot), the time-saving state may be ended at a predetermined timing related to a winning game (small jackpot game, big jackpot game) that is executed based on the lottery result. By configuring in this way, the timing at which the time-saving state ends can be made different depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is met, making it more difficult to tell how long the time-saving state will continue.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the second probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, the game is executed with a gameplay that allows the ball output to be increased without winning a jackpot (a gameplay that allows the ball output to be increased by frequently occurring small jackpot games). However, by using a different gameplay that allows the ball output to be increased without winning a jackpot, it is also possible to configure it so that the ball output can be increased even when another game state is set.

For example, by setting a large number of prize balls as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters an entrance (e.g., the first right entrance 64b2) that is easier for the ball to enter when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, it may be possible to increase the number of balls paid out without winning a jackpot when a high probability state for normal symbols is set. By configuring in this way, the player can simultaneously play a game aiming to win a jackpot with a special symbol and a game aiming to win a jackpot with a normal symbol, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, the length of the normal pattern change time may be made different between the first game state (time-saving state) in which a high probability state of normal patterns is set and the second game state (probability change state) in order to make the number of balls dispensed per unit time different, or the length of the period in which it is actually possible to insert the ball into the right first ball entrance 64b2 during the normal pattern winning game period that is executed when a normal pattern is won may be made different, and the first game state may be configured to make it possible to obtain more balls dispensed per unit time than the second game state.

For gaming machines that have the ability to increase the number of balls dispensed without winning a jackpot when a high probability state for normal symbols is set, it is a good idea to provide the above-mentioned setting trigger (a setting trigger established based on the number of times the special symbol changes) as a setting trigger for setting the high probability state for normal symbols. This makes it possible to set a high probability state for normal symbols and allow a player who has been experiencing special symbol changes (lottery) for a long period of time without winning a jackpot in the normal state, which is a low probability state for normal symbols, to play a game that increases the number of balls dispensed (rescue game). This makes it possible to prevent the execution of games that result in excessively disadvantageous game results for the player.

As described above, a configuration that can increase the number of balls dispensed by playing without winning a jackpot in a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) can be configured, for example, so that the number of prize balls paid out is equal to or slightly (in the range of about 1 to 1.2 times the number of balls fired) greater than the number of balls continuously fired during the time-saving state. By configuring in this way, even in gaming machines with game specifications that tend to prolong play during the time-saving state (for example, game specifications with a low probability of winning a jackpot for special symbols, or game specifications with a relatively long change time set as the change pattern for the special symbol change executed during the time-saving state), it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's motivation to play during long-lasting time-saving games.

The above describes the configuration related to the high probability state of normal symbols, but the same content may be applied as the configuration related to the high probability state of special symbols. In this case, a configuration in which the elements corresponding to the normal symbols in the above content are changed to special symbols may be applied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for players to understand at what timing the probability state of the special symbols (low probability state, high probability state) is set, thereby increasing the interest of the game. Furthermore, the configuration with the above content may be used for both normal and special symbols.

<About the configuration of the high probability state of special symbols>
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a configuration is used in which the same ratio is pre-defined for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special symbol and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special symbol as the ratio at which a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of a jackpot game according to the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. However, without being limited thereto, for example, in a state in which a jackpot type that can set a high probability state of the special symbol after the end of a jackpot game is set (a state in which the right to set a high probability state of the special symbol has been acquired), a configuration may be used in which a high probability state of the special symbol is set after the end of a jackpot game by passing a ball through a specific area during a jackpot game, and a configuration may be made in which the execution ratio of an advantageous jackpot game in which it is possible to pass the ball through a specific area during a jackpot game and an unfavorable jackpot game in which it is difficult to pass the ball through a specific area during a jackpot game differs between a jackpot game executed based on a jackpot win in the first special symbol lottery and a jackpot game executed based on a jackpot win in the second special symbol lottery.

By configuring it in this way, even if the same percentage is pre-defined for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern as the percentage at which the high probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to make the percentage at which the high probability state of the special pattern is actually set different between when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery.

However, other configurations may be used, for example, the ratio at which the high probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game may be different between the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern, and may be predefined. In this case, the ratio at which the high probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game may be different for the same special pattern type depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot win (game state at the time of win).

Also, a predetermined setting lottery may be configured to be executable, and information may be provided to determine whether or not a high probability state of the special symbol is set for each jackpot type of special symbol after the jackpot game ends based on the result of the setting lottery. In other words, the type of game state set when a predetermined jackpot type is set may be configured to differ depending on the game situation. In this case, the game situation may be, for example, the jackpot winning situation within a predetermined period, the number of special symbol changes performed between jackpot games, the amount of balls won by the player, etc., and it is preferable to configure the game situation so that the high probability state of the special symbol is more likely to be set when the judgment result of the game situation is unfavorable to the player than when the judgment result is favorable to the player. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a game that results in an excessively unfavorable game result for the player.

Similarly, if a jackpot is won when a high probability state for a special symbol is set, the above-mentioned contents may also be applied to the rate at which a low probability state for a special symbol is set after the jackpot play ends.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a configuration is used in which the same ratio is pre-defined for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern as the ratio at which a low probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends, depending on the jackpot type that is set when a jackpot is won in a special pattern lottery in a state in which a high probability state of the special pattern is set. However, without being limited to this, for example, a state in which a jackpot type that can set a high probability state of the special pattern after the jackpot game ends is set (a state in which a high probability state of the special pattern is set In a state where the player has acquired the right to win a jackpot, a low probability state of a special symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game due to the ball not passing through the specific area during the jackpot game, and the jackpot game executed based on winning the first special symbol lottery and the jackpot game executed based on winning the second special symbol lottery may be configured to have different execution rates between advantageous jackpot games in which it is possible to pass the ball through the specific area during the jackpot game and disadvantageous jackpot games in which it is difficult to pass the ball through the specific area during the jackpot game.

By configuring it in this way, even if the same rate is pre-specified for the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern as the rate at which the low probability state of the special pattern is set after the jackpot game ends, it is possible to make the rate at which the low probability state of the special pattern is actually set different between when a jackpot is won in the first special pattern lottery and when a jackpot is won in the second special pattern lottery.

However, other configurations may also be used. For example, the ratio at which a low probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of a jackpot game in which a jackpot win during a high probability state of the special pattern is won may be different between the jackpot type corresponding to the first special pattern and the jackpot type corresponding to the second special pattern, and may be predefined. In this case, the ratio at which a low probability state of the special pattern is set after the end of a jackpot game in which a jackpot win is won during a high probability state of the special pattern may also be predefined to be different for the same special pattern type, depending on the game state at the time of the jackpot win (game state at the time of winning).

Also, a predetermined setting lottery may be configured to be executable, and information may be provided to determine whether or not a low probability state of the special symbol is set for each jackpot type of special symbol after the jackpot game ends based on the result of the setting lottery. In other words, the type of game state set when a predetermined jackpot type is set may be configured to differ depending on the game situation. In this case, the game situation may be, for example, a jackpot winning situation within a predetermined period, the number of special symbol changes performed between jackpot games, the amount of balls won by the player, etc., and it is preferable to configure the game situation so that the low probability state of the special symbol is more likely to be set when the judgment result of the game situation is favorable to the player than when the judgment result is unfavorable to the player. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of a game that results in an excessively favorable game result for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, an end condition based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery can be set as an end condition for ending the high probability state of the special pattern, and when the high probability state of the special pattern is set, the high probability state of the special pattern continues until the next jackpot is won. However, other end conditions may be set, and the configuration used as the time-saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern in each of the above-mentioned embodiments may be used as an end condition for ending the high probability state of the special pattern.

Specifically, the system may be configured so that the end condition is met when the number of times the special pattern changes after the high probability state of the special pattern is set reaches a specific number (e.g., 150 times). This makes it possible to end the high probability state of the special pattern, which has a high probability of winning a jackpot, without winning a jackpot, so that a player playing in a game state in which the high probability state of the special pattern is set can be motivated to play in an attempt to win a jackpot before the end condition is met.

The gaming machine may be configured to have both the above-mentioned end condition and the time-saving end condition. In this case, it is preferable to configure the number of times the special pattern variation is executed, which is set as the end condition, to be different from the number of times the special pattern variation is executed, which is set as the time-saving end condition. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to switch the game state each time each end condition is met, so that it is possible to provide the player with a game that they will never tire of.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the number of times the special symbol changes as the end condition can be set to one from a number of times including at least a first number of times of changes and a second number of times of changes different from the first number of times of changes. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the end condition is met.

In addition, when configuring an end condition related to the number of special pattern variations to be set for a gaming machine configured to be able to vary the number of special pattern variations set as an end condition, it is preferable to configure the first number of special pattern variations among the numbers of special pattern variations that can be set as an end condition to be a number of variations less than the number of special pattern variations at which the time-saving end condition is established, and the second number of variations different from the first number of variations to be a number of variations greater than the number of special pattern variations at which the time-saving end condition is established. By configuring in this way, it is possible to differentiate between the end condition and the time-saving end condition, whichever is established first, depending on the end condition that is set.

Therefore, for example, in a situation where the first probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the next game state to be set can be either the second probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) or a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) depending on the content of the set end condition, so that the player can be made to play a game that allows him to predict the next game state to be set while keeping him interested in the content of the set end condition, thereby increasing his interest in the game.

In this way, in a gaming machine configured to allow different contents to be set as the end condition or the time-saving end condition, it is preferable to configure it so that a notification effect can be executed that can notify the player of information indicating the contents of each currently set condition. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide the player with information that allows him to predict the timing when each condition may be fulfilled and the contents of each set condition, thereby making the player interested in the notification effect that is executed and improving the presentation effect.

The above describes an end condition for ending the high probability state of the special pattern that is established based on the number of times the special pattern variation is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a lottery (falling lottery) for transitioning the high probability state of the special pattern to a low probability state may be configured to be executable separately from the special pattern jackpot lottery (special pattern lottery), and the end condition may be established when the falling lottery is won. Even in this case, the probability of winning the falling lottery or the number of times the falling lottery is executed during the period in which one special pattern lottery is executed may be configured to be different, thereby varying the ease with which the end condition is established during the high probability state of the special pattern. This makes it difficult for the player to tell when the end condition is established after the high probability state of the special pattern is set.

<About the function that sets an upper limit on the period during which a high probability state can be continuously set (limit function)>
In a gaming machine in which high and low probability states can be set as probability states for special patterns, and high and low probability states can be set as probability states for normal patterns, and in which game states of different degrees of advantage can be set depending on the probability state that is set, an upper limit is set on the number of times that a probability state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a high probability state) can be set in succession, and a function (limit function) is provided that, when the upper limit is reached, forcibly sets the probability state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., a high probability state) to a probability state that is less advantageous than that probability state (e.g., a low probability state), thereby preventing game states that are excessively advantageous to the player from being set and preventing the player from playing a game that is excessively advantageous to the player.

In a gaming machine having such a limit function, the activation conditions of the limit function may be configured to be different depending on the limit setting conditions that are met. Specifically, based on the type of jackpot that is set when a jackpot is won, one of a first activation condition that makes the limit function more likely to be activated and a second activation condition that is less likely to be activated than the first activation condition may be selected and set.

Specifically, in a gaming machine with a probability limit function that sets an upper limit on the number of times a high probability state of a special pattern is set in succession, and when the upper limit is reached, forcibly sets a low probability state of the special pattern, it is preferable to configure the upper limit value until the probability limit function is activated to be different depending on the type of jackpot, and to configure the activation condition to be configurable so that when a first jackpot type is set, the upper limit is "5 times," and when a second jackpot type different from the first jackpot type is set, the upper limit is "3 times."

By configuring it in this way, the length of the advantageous play period during which the player can continue playing in an advantageous play state can be varied based on the type of jackpot that is set, depending on the value set as the activation condition.

In the above example, the limit function for the high probability state of special symbols (probability change limit function) was explained, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above contents may be applied to the limit function for the high probability state of normal symbols (time-saving limit function), or a combination of the above contents may be applied to each limit. Furthermore, for gaming machines with game specifications in which a low probability state is more advantageous to the player than a high probability state as a probability state for a symbol type, a limit function may be provided that sets an upper limit on the number of times the low probability state is set consecutively, and forcibly sets the high probability state when the upper limit is reached.

In addition, in the above example, the limit function is used with the aim of preventing the execution of games that are excessively advantageous to the player, but the limit function may also be used for other purposes. For example, a limit function may be provided that sets an upper limit on the number of times that a game state (low probability state) that is disadvantageous to the player is consecutively set, and when the upper limit is reached, a game state (high probability state) that is advantageous to the player is forcibly set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent games that are excessively disadvantageous to the player from being executed.

<Configuration that allows winning games to be played based on the ball passing through a specific area>
In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery, a jackpot game can be executed. A different execution trigger may be provided as an execution trigger for a jackpot game advantageous to a player. For example, a game machine (so-called two-type specification) may be configured to have a ball-entering means through which a ball can enter, a variable means that opens in a variable pattern that can be changed to a first state and a second state different from the first state when an operating condition is established based on the ball entering the ball-entering means, a second ball-entering means that is easier for the ball to enter when the variable means is changed to the first state than when the variable means is changed to the second state, a specific area through which the ball that entered the second ball-entering means can pass, and a jackpot game execution means that can execute a jackpot game based on the ball passing through the specific area, i.e., a jackpot game execution trigger is established based on the ball passing through the specific area. With this configuration, whether or not a big win game will be executed is determined by the behavior of the ball that has entered the second ball entry means, allowing the player to enjoy the behavior of the ball.

In addition, in such a gaming machine with two types of specifications, the operating conditions may be established based on the ball entering the ball entry means described above, or an action lottery is executed based on the ball entering the ball entry means, and the operating conditions are established if the action lottery is won. In the former case, the operating conditions are always established when the ball enters the ball entry means, making it easier for players to become interested in the behavior of the ball. On the other hand, in the latter case, the operating conditions are not established unless the action lottery is won, even if the ball enters the ball entry means, so the frequency of balls entering the ball entry means can be increased.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine with the above-mentioned two types of specifications, a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path that can pass through a specific area and a second flow path that has more difficulty passing through the specific area than the first flow path are provided as flow paths for balls that have entered the second ball entry means, and furthermore, a distribution means is provided that can distribute balls that have entered the second ball entry means to one of the plurality of flow paths, and the proportion of balls that have entered the second ball entry means that pass through the specific area can be varied depending on the distribution status of the distribution means.

By configuring it in this way, the degree to which the opportunity to execute a jackpot game is realized can be varied depending on the distribution status of the distribution means, so it is possible to generate interest in the timing at which the ball that enters the second ball entry means will reach the distribution means.

As described above, in a gaming machine having a configuration that can vary the degree to which a jackpot game execution trigger is realized depending on the distribution status of the distribution means, the distribution operation content of the distribution means may be configured to always execute a certain operation after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, or may be configured to always execute a certain operation based on either the entry of a ball into the ball entry means, the establishment of an operating condition, or the entry of a ball into the second ball entry means.

Furthermore, the distribution operation contents of the distribution means may be varied depending on the conditions to be met. For example, depending on the type of winning in the operation lottery, the distribution means may be configured to determine one of a plurality of distribution operation contents including at least a first distribution operation content that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area and a second distribution operation content that makes it harder for the ball to pass through the specific area than the first distribution operation content, and operate the distribution means.

Also, in a gaming machine (so-called type 1/type 2 mixed specification) that is configured so that the trigger for the execution of a jackpot game can be established in either case of winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery or when the ball passes through a specific area, the execution period of the jackpot game in progress can be extended by the ball passing through a specific area during the jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery. In other words, the execution period of the jackpot game in progress can be extended by the ball passing through a specific area during the jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery. In other words, the execution period of the jackpot game in progress can be extended (forced to end) if the ball does not pass through a specific area during the jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery.

This configuration makes it possible for players to become interested in both the results of the special pattern lottery and the behavior of the ball as it flows down toward the specific area.

<About the structure for changing the falling direction of the ball>
As a configuration for changing the flow direction (falling direction) of the ball flowing down the play area formed on the play board 13 configured in the pachinko machine 10, in addition to the nail members used in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, i.e., members capable of changing the flow direction of the ball within a range that does not go against the direction of gravity, a means for moving the ball in a direction different from the direction of gravity (e.g., an upward direction) may be provided. For example, a moving means for moving (e.g., lifting) the ball in a direction different from the direction of gravity (e.g., an upward direction) may be provided by using an electric drive source or by using the moving energy of another ball.

By configuring it in this way, the direction of movement of the ball flowing down the play area can be various, including directions different from the direction of gravity, providing players who are closely watching the ball's behavior with an unexpected movement of the ball. In addition, it is possible to move (rise) a ball that has reached the lowest point of the play area, i.e., a ball that has not entered the ball entry port that would grant the player a special privilege, toward the upstream side of the play area, keeping the player excited about the behavior of one ball until the very end.

Furthermore, for example, in a gaming machine in which a gate member through which a ball can pass is provided in the gaming area and a predetermined bonus can be awarded when a ball passes through the gate member, a moving means can be provided in the area that a ball that has passed through the gate member can reach, and the moving means can be configured to eject the ball above the gate member. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to provide a novel gameplay in which a single ball can award multiple bonuses to a player.

The above-mentioned moving means may also be provided in an area where the ball is more likely to enter during a winning game (jackpot game, small jackpot game) (for example, an internal area of the winning device that opens during a winning game). This configuration makes it possible to raise the ball inside the winning device, so that, for example, in a gaming machine that is configured to be able to award a player an advantageous benefit by having a ball pass through a specific area during a specific round of a jackpot game, it is possible to configure a ball that entered the winning device in a round prior to the specific round to be raised by the moving means, so that it remains there for a predetermined period of time, and to be able to pass through the specific area during the specific round depending on the timing at which the retained ball is discharged.

In this way, a moving means may be used to keep the ball within the specific area for a predetermined period of time. This configuration makes it difficult for the player to predict when the ball will be ejected from within the specific area.

<Configuration that acts on the entry of a ball into one entry hole to open another entry hole>
The machine is provided with a first operating port through which game balls can enter, and a first operating member which, in response to a game ball entering the first operating port, operates to a first state in which game balls can enter the first operating port more easily, and is configured such that, in response to a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., two) entering the first operating port, the first operating member operates to a second state in which game balls can enter the first operating port more difficultly than in the first state.

A second operating member is provided that operates in response to a game ball that has entered the first operating port entering a specific area, to a third state in which game balls can enter a second operating port different from the first operating port. This second operating member is configured to operate in a fourth state in which it is more difficult for game balls to enter the second operating port than in the third state when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., one) enter the second operating port.

With this configuration, when a game ball enters the first operating port, the second operating member operates to the third state, making it possible to allow a game ball to enter the second operating port, and in that state, by allowing one game ball to enter the second operating port, the second operating member operates to the fourth state. Then, by allowing the first operating member to again enter a game ball into the first operating port, which is in the first state, the second operating member is again operated to the third state, making it possible to allow a game ball to enter the second operating port.

More specifically, when a game ball is inserted into the first operating port while the first operating member is in the second state, up to four balls can be inserted into the operating ports (first operating port, second operating port). Furthermore, a first winning/losing lottery (lottery for a first normal symbol) is executed based on the game ball that entered the second operating port entering the second specific area, and when the result of the first winning/losing lottery is a winning (probability of winning is about 1/2), the first normal electric device that can restrict the game ball from entering the first variable ball entry means is opened (changed to a state that allows the game ball to enter the first variable ball entry means) until a first closing condition (for example, 5.8 seconds have passed or four balls have entered) is met. Then, based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the first variable ball entry means has entered a third specific area where entry is possible, a second win/lose lottery (second normal pattern lottery) is executed, and if the result of the second win/lose lottery is a win (probability of winning approximately 1/1), a second normal electric device that can restrict the game ball from entering the second variable ball entry means is opened (changed to a state that allows the game ball to enter the second variable ball entry means) until a second closing condition (for example, 5.8 seconds have passed or four balls have entered) is met. Then, based on the game ball that entered the second variable ball entry means entering a fourth specific area where balls can enter, a third winning/losing lottery (third normal symbol lottery) is executed, and if the result of the third winning/losing lottery is a winning (probability of winning is approximately 1/1), the third normal electric device that can restrict the game ball from entering the third variable ball entry means is configured to open (change to a state that allows the game ball to enter the third variable ball entry means) until a third closing condition (for example, 5.8 seconds have passed or 10 balls have entered) is met.

In this case, the maximum number of winning balls that can be entered into each operating port based on the entry (winning) of a game ball into the first operating port may be calculated as "4" by adding "2", which is the maximum number of winning balls into the first operating port, to "2", which is the product of the maximum number of winning balls into the first operating port (2) multiplied by the maximum number of winning balls into the second operating port (1) that can be entered each time a game ball enters the first operating port, or by calculating "4" based on the entry (winning) of a game ball into the first operating port (a winning game using multiple ordinary electric devices). The number of game balls that can enter each operating port during the period until the game is executed may be calculated as the maximum number of winning entries, that is, the number of winning entries required to execute one winning game ("2" obtained by adding the number of balls that enter the first operating port "1" to the number of balls that enter the second operating port "1"). Alternatively, the maximum number of winning entries may be calculated by adding the maximum number of winning entries into the first operating port to the value obtained by dividing the maximum number of winning entries into the first operating port by the maximum number of winning entries into the second operating port that can be won each time a game ball enters the first operating port.

The winning game may be configured to end when the maximum number of winnings reaches a predetermined limit, and the value of the maximum number of winnings calculated when determining whether the limit has been reached based on the establishment of a switching condition may be switched to and referenced from values (maximum number of winnings) calculated using the various calculation formulas described above. If the switched value has not reached the limit, the winning game may be configured to be extended until the maximum number of winnings after the switch reaches the limit.

In other words, using various calculation formulas that can vary the calculated value, the maximum number of winning entries for each operating port is specified so that the number of game balls that can win into multiple operating ports in a series of games when a game ball wins into the first operating port is a limited number, and the calculation formula for determining the maximum number of winning entries is specified differently depending on the conditions, and a winning game is executed based on the maximum number of winning entries for each operating port specified corresponding to the specified calculation formula.

By configuring it in this way, the content of the winning game (the total number of winnings for each operating port and each variable ball entry means) can be varied depending on the specified calculation formula.

The value of the maximum winning number may be changed according to the conditions. For example, when a first condition is met, the maximum winning number for the first operating port may be changed from "2" to "3", and when a second condition different from the first condition is met, the maximum winning number for the first operating port may be changed from "2" to "1". By configuring in this way, the content of the winning game (a game in which a game ball is made to enter each operating port and the variable ball entry means) that is executed when a game ball enters the first operating port may be changed according to the condition that is met, so that the player can play the game while expecting that a favorable condition for the advantageous establishment (a condition in which the total number of prize balls awarded during the winning game is set to be large) that is favorable to the player will be established, and that the winning game will be executed when the favorable condition is established.

<Regarding gaming machines that allow multiple setting levels>
It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine in which multiple combinations of probabilities (commonly known as settings) for jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed by the gaming parlor.

A representative example of a pachinko machine with multiple settings is one that allows the combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of the jackpot probability in a low probability state and the jackpot probability in a high probability state) to be set to one of multiple levels (e.g., six levels), but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine may be implemented that allows the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) that is determined in the event of a jackpot to be changed according to the setting. That is, the ratio of a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player to be determined according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player to be determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. Also, for example, the rate at which a jackpot that gives a large number of time-saving times (e.g., 100 times) after the jackpot is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that gives a small number of time-saving times (e.g., 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to a favorable game state (e.g., a probability change state) after the jackpot is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to an unfavorable game state (e.g., a normal state) may be determined may be varied according to the setting. Also, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type that is determined at a significantly higher rate only in a specific setting (almost never determined in other settings) is provided. Specifically, for example, the setting may be configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most favorable setting may be set to setting 6. Then, in setting 6, a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot occurs, while a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01% in other settings. By configuring in this way, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 being the most likely to occur when the jackpot ends after six rounds is extremely high, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time-saving times are given after the jackpot ends may be higher than in other settings. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Also, instead of or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot entry port (or the role inside the jackpot entry port) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game may be provided, and the jackpot type may be configured to be more likely to be determined in a specific setting (the ratio of being determined is higher). Also, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in a probability variable state, the more disadvantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability may be. This configuration is particularly effective in gaming machines of a type in which the more times the special symbols are drawn in the probability variable state, the easier it is to increase the number of balls held (the more prize balls are paid out than the number of game balls fired). More specifically, for example, the probability variable state continues until the next jackpot is won, and by applying this to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability variable state has a high probability of resulting in a small jackpot, the advantage of a high setting can be further enhanced. In other words, if the probability of a jackpot is low in the probability variable state, the number of draws until the next jackpot tends to be large, and there are also more opportunities to win small jackpots and win prize balls. Therefore, when the probability variable state is reached, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in a pachinko machine having multiple setting values, a configuration other than the configuration for changing the probability of winning (winning a big prize, winning a small prize, etc.) by the special symbol lottery by changing the set setting value may be used. For example, in a gaming machine capable of setting a first gaming state (low probability state of special symbols) in which a first probability is set as the probability of winning a special symbol lottery, and a second gaming state (high probability state of special symbols) in which a second probability higher than the first probability is set, the length of the specific period may be changed according to the set value when a specific period is set as the period during which the second gaming state continues, for example, a period until the number of times the special symbol lottery has been executed reaches a specified number, or a period until a specified ending lottery (so-called fall lottery) is won. For example, the specific period during which the second gaming state continues may be longer when a setting value advantageous to the player is set than when a setting value disadvantageous to the player is set.

By configuring it in this way, even without using a configuration that changes the probability of winning the special pattern lottery according to a set value, the frequency of winning the special pattern lottery can be varied according to the set value by varying the length that the second gaming state continues.

In the above example, a pachinko machine having multiple setting values is configured to be able to set setting values that are advantageous to the player and setting values that are disadvantageous to the player regardless of the game situation, but the present invention is not limited to this. In at least one of the various game situations (for example, a game situation in which a specific game situation is set among multiple types of game situations set by a combination of the probability state of a special symbol and the probability state of a normal symbol, a game situation in which a big win game is being played, and a game situation in which a small win game is being played) that are set in the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to be able to set setting values that are advantageous to the player and setting values that are disadvantageous to the player, or the game content that is set corresponding to each setting value may be specified so that a specific setting value is more advantageous to the player in a specific game situation than a specific setting value other than the specific setting value, and a specific setting value other than the specific setting value is more advantageous to the player in a specific game situation other than the specific game situation than a specific setting value.

This configuration eliminates any absolute advantage or disadvantage for the set values, and makes it possible to switch the relative degree of advantage of each set value depending on the game situation being played, so that players can be motivated to play no matter what set value is set.

In addition, players who understand the set setting value can be made to play in a game situation where the set setting value is relatively more advantageous than other setting values. In other words, it is possible to set different game situations as the game situation desired by the player depending on the set setting value. This makes it possible to provide a game that the player will not quickly become bored of.

In the above example, a configuration was described that aims to vary the degree of advantage given to the player according to the set value, but it may also be configured to provide multiple levels of set values for other purposes. For example, it may be configured so that the game process up until the point where the player is given a bonus corresponding to the degree of advantage varies according to the set value, without changing the degree of advantage given to the player. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 in which the probability of winning a jackpot for a special symbol varies according to the set value, the probability (expectation) of winning a jackpot within a specified period does not vary according to the set value ( The length of the specified period may be varied according to the set value so that the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is not significantly different. For example, when a set value of "1" is set, a game in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is 1/10 during a specific period until the 10th special pattern lottery has been performed (the probability of winning the jackpot during the specific period is approximately 65%) may be played, and when a set value of "6" is set, a game in which the probability of winning the jackpot in the special pattern lottery is 1/9 during a specific period until the 9th special pattern lottery has been performed (the probability of winning the jackpot during the specific period is approximately 65%) may be played.

By configuring it in this way, even if the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is changed according to each setting value, it is possible to change only the game content without significantly changing the degree of advantage given to the player. This allows players to play a variety of games.

It is also advisable to configure the above-mentioned multiple setting values so that they can be set (changed) as part of the process (initial setting process) that is performed when the pachinko machine is powered on. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the setting values from being changed while the pachinko machine is powered on, making it more difficult for players to commit fraud by, for example, manipulating the setting values while playing.

Note that other timings may be used as the timing at which the setting value can be set (changed). For example, the currently set value may be changed to a different setting value (a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player) based on the fact that the number of balls paid out (the number of balls paid out from the pachinko machine minus the number of balls used in playing the pachinko machine) is equal to or greater than the upper limit as a result of playing with the pachinko machine, or the currently set value may be changed to a different setting value (a setting value that is advantageous to the player) based on the fact that the number of balls paid out (the number of balls paid out from the pachinko machine minus the number of balls used in playing the pachinko machine) is less than the lower limit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent games that are excessively advantageous or disadvantageous to the player from being played.

In the above embodiments, the case where the reserved ball number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value (AN) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203b is updated in the main control device 110 (i.e., when it increases or decreases, respectively) has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 only when the value (AN) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203b increases in the main control device 110. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b2 by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. This can reduce the number of times the main control device 110 sends reserved number commands to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives reserved number commands, respectively, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the above embodiments, the first ball entrance 64 is configured to allow a maximum of four balls to enter the ball entrance and the through gate 67 is configured to allow a maximum of four balls to pass through the through gate 67, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to this and may be set to three or less, or five or more (e.g., eight). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed as a variable display based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as a number, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls. Alternatively, a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting element.

As shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be a display in which the pattern is moved vertically or along a predetermined path such as an AL shape. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern. In addition, the display mode of the dynamic display of the third pattern to indicate the lottery result of the special pattern and the display mode of the dynamic display of the decorative pattern to indicate the lottery result of the normal pattern may be configured to be set using common image data held by the display control device 114, for example, so that the player cannot easily distinguish between them.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the third pattern display for showing the player the lottery results for each pattern is performed by one display means (third pattern display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main pattern that is highlighted to the player among the third patterns, and for displaying the secondary patterns. Furthermore, the display means may be configured as a configuration other than a liquid crystal display.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the targeted area (play area) of the game board 13 is configured to differ depending on the game state, but without being limited to this, it may be configured so that a left-hand hit game that targets the left-hand area of the game board 13 is executed in a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player and a game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Also, a left-hand hit game may be executed during the time-saving state, and a right-hand hit game may be executed during the normal state.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the operation means that can be operated by the player is a frame button 22 that is pressed by the player to determine that the operation means has been operated, but other configurations may also be used, such as a lever-shaped operation means that can be determined to have been operated by the player tilting it left and right or forward and backward, a touch sensor-type operation means that can be determined to have been operated by the player contacting or approaching it, or a wireless operation means that can be determined to have been operated by emitting a specified radio wave. In addition, the frame button 22 is electrically connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button 22 is used as a performance operation means for varying the performance mode of the performance executed in the pachinko machine 10 based on the player's operation, but it is sufficient if the performance mode of various performances executed in the pachinko machine 10 can be varied based on the player's operation of the frame button 22. For example, the frame button 22 may be electrically connected to the display control device 114, or a control device may be provided that can input an output signal from the operation means (frame button 22) and generate a performance setting signal that can be output to the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113, the sound output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. By configuring in this way, even if multiple performance operation means are provided, the output signals (operation signals) output from the multiple performance operation means can be centrally managed, so that the performance mode can be smoothly set in response to the player's operation of the performance operation means.

The numerical values (probabilities) related to the game specifications, such as the distribution (ratio) of the jackpot types, the number of time-saving times and the number of chance-changing times (ASAT times) after the jackpot ends, the probability of a jackpot or a small win, the probability of winning a normal pattern, the number of prize balls for winning each winning slot, and the number of chance-changing times limit, are not limited to the numerical values in each of the above embodiments, and can be changed freely within the scope of the embodiment without changing the purpose of the embodiment. The degree of advantage for the player can be further increased by increasing the ratio of the advantageous jackpot types, increasing the number of time-saving times and the ASAT times, increasing the probability of a jackpot or a small win, increasing the number of prize balls, or increasing the number of chance-changing times limit. Conversely, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly advantageous by decreasing the ratio of the advantageous jackpot types, decreasing the number of time-saving times and the ASAT times, decreasing the probability of a jackpot or a small win, decreasing the number of prize balls, or decreasing the number of chance-changing times limit.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine that is different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value by making the ball enter a predetermined area as a necessary condition after the jackpot pattern is displayed. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as an AV zone, and the special game state is entered as a necessary condition by making the ball enter the special area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a combination of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) related to the jackpot lottery in multiple stages, and is configured so that the settings can be changed by the gaming parlor. In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that combine a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

A representative example of a pachinko machine with multiple settings is one that allows the combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of a jackpot probability in a low probability state and a jackpot probability in a high probability state) to be set to one of multiple levels (e.g., six levels), but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine may be implemented that allows the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) that is determined in the event of a jackpot to be changed according to the setting. That is, the ratio of a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player to be determined according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player to be determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. Also, for example, the rate at which a jackpot that gives a large number of time-saving times (e.g., 100 times) after the jackpot is finished may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that gives a small number of time-saving times (e.g., 0 times) is determined may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to a favorable game state (e.g., a probability change state) after the jackpot is finished may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to an unfavorable game state (e.g., a normal state) may be varied according to the setting. Also, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type that is determined at a significantly higher rate only in a specific setting (almost never determined in other settings) is provided. Specifically, for example, the setting may be configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most favorable setting may be set to setting 6. Then, in setting 6, a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot occurs, while a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01% in other settings. By configuring in this way, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 being the most likely to occur when the jackpot ends after six rounds is extremely high, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time-saving times are given after the jackpot ends may be higher than in other settings. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Also, instead of or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot entry port (or the role inside the jackpot entry port) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game may be provided, and the jackpot type may be configured to be more likely to be determined in a specific setting (the ratio of being determined is higher). Also, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in a probability variable state, the more disadvantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability may be. This configuration is particularly effective in gaming machines of a type in which the more times the special symbols are drawn in the probability variable state, the easier it is to increase the number of balls held (the more prize balls are paid out than the number of game balls fired). More specifically, for example, the probability variable state continues until the next jackpot is won, and by applying this to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability variable state has a high probability of resulting in a small jackpot, the advantage of a high setting can be further enhanced. In other words, if the probability of a jackpot is low in the probability variable state, the number of draws until the next jackpot tends to be large, and there are also more opportunities to win small jackpots and win prize balls. Therefore, when the probability variable state is reached, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 that can be set to multiple settings, it is preferable to configure it so that, based on the set value, the type of variation pattern selection table 202b referenced when selecting a variation pattern in the main control device 110 is changed, the type of variation pattern selection table 222a referenced when selecting the variation pattern (variation performance) of the third symbol in the sound lamp control device 113 is changed, or the type of various selection tables referenced when selecting a detailed performance mode to be executed as a variation performance is changed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 depending on the content of the variation performance to be executed, so that a variation performance that interests the player can be executed.

In addition, if the data table referenced when selecting the presentation mode of the operation presentation is made different based on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to define the presentation mode of the operation presentation as a "setting suggestion" presentation mode for suggesting the set setting value so that the selection ratio is the same for each data table used for each setting value, and configure the presentation content of the operation presentation executed in the "setting suggestion" presentation mode to differ depending on each setting value, and configure the selection ratio of other presentation modes to vary depending on the setting value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 by comprehensively grasping the presentation content when the "setting suggestion" operation presentation that directly suggests the setting value is executed, and the selection ratio of each presentation mode when other operation presentations are executed, so that it is possible to get the player interested in the various operation presentations that are executed.

Furthermore, as described above, the selection ratio of each presentation mode in the operation presentation is configured to differ depending on the game state that is set. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 that allows the setting value to be set in six stages from setting "1" that is disadvantageous to the player to setting "6" that is advantageous to the player, the selection ratio of the operation presentation selected when settings "1" to "3" are set and the first game state (high probability state) that is advantageous to the player is set is made the same as the selection ratio of the operation presentation selected when settings "4" to "6" are set and the second game state (time-saving state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game state is set. This makes it possible to make a player playing a pachinko machine 10 with a setting value that is disadvantageous to the player believe that a setting value that is advantageous to the player has been set.

In this way, by configuring the selection ratio of the presentation mode to be variable based on the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10 and other game conditions (jackpot lottery result, set game state, selected variation pattern (variation time)), it is possible to prevent the player from easily determining the setting value set in the pachinko machine 10.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

The above-mentioned embodiments may be configured in whole or in part.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<The point at which the ball passing through the path forming means conceals the passed means>
A gaming machine AA1 comprising a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, wherein the path forming means comprises a displaceable means that can be positioned in a position that overlaps with at least a portion of a first gaming ball flowing down the path forming means, on the upstream side of the passed means and in front of the first gaming ball, when viewed in a predetermined direction.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431, and are configured so that the area around the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to recognize due to a decorative plate 302 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the decorative plate 302 always makes it difficult to recognize the ball detection hole 431, so it is not possible to respond to a game mode in which the ball entering the ball detection hole 431 is confirmed to continue or stop the launch of the game ball, and there is a possibility that the player will feel dissatisfied. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the parts related to the game ball launch operation.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AA1, the means for reducing the visibility of the first gaming ball in the path configuration means is a predetermined displaceable means, so it is possible to configure a state in which the first gaming ball is easy to see. Therefore, in a state in which the first gaming ball is easy to see, it is easy to confirm the flow of the first gaming ball and to decide whether to continue or stop the operation of launching the gaming ball, so that it is possible to improve the parts related to the operation of launching the gaming ball.

The form of the specified displaceable means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be another game ball, or it may be a decorative member that is configured to be displaceable between the flow path of the game ball and the glass unit.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to the drawing of a pattern (e.g., a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which game balls can pass.

Gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that in gaming machine AA1, the displacement means is a second gaming ball that flows downstream upstream of the first gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AA1, gaming machine AA2 can change the visibility of the first gaming ball by using the gaming ball guided toward the passing means, which reduces material costs and design costs compared to using other decorative members as the displaceable means.

Gaming machine AA3 is characterized in that the path configuration means in gaming machine AA2 has a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length that allows a second gaming ball to be placed in front of the first gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AA2, gaming machine AA3 has a forward/backward path that allows a second gaming ball to be positioned in front of the first gaming ball, so that the second gaming ball can hide at least a portion of the first gaming ball when viewed from the front.

In the gaming machine AA3, the forward/rearward path is configured such that when the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball flow down the path configuration means at the launch interval set in the launch device, the second gaming ball hides at least a portion of the first gaming ball. Gaming machine AA4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AA3, gaming machine AA4 can also provide the effect of making it difficult to recognize a first gaming ball as a second gaming ball when multiple gaming balls flow down the path configuration means with the launch intervals unchanged. This makes it possible to create a situation in which it is difficult to recognize the first gaming ball as the second gaming ball even under normal circumstances.

Gaming machine AA5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AA3 or AA4, the front-rear path is arranged such that the front side component is closer to the center of the gaming area than the rear side component.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AA3 or AA4, gaming machine AA5 can configure a forward/backward path that is inclined along the line of sight of the player looking at the passing means, making it easier for the first gaming ball to be hidden by the second gaming ball. In other words, the blindfolding effect can be improved.

Gaming machine AA6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine AA5, the front side component is positioned in the line of sight of the player looking at the passing means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine AA5, gaming machine AA6 can produce a similar blindfolding effect regardless of the distance between the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball placed on the forward/backward path.

In other words, it is usually believed that the closer the first and second game balls are to each other, the greater the concealment effect, but if the first and second game balls are positioned in the line of sight, the effect of the distance between them can be eliminated.

A gaming machine AA7 is characterized in that the path configuration means of any one of the gaming machines AA2 to AA6 includes a front-rear path formed with a front-rear width length that allows a second gaming ball to be placed in front of the first gaming ball, and a left-right path formed with a left-right width that allows the gaming ball to flow left-right upstream of the front-rear path.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AA2 to AA6, gaming machine AA7 can also block the player's line of sight with gaming balls flowing down a left-right path, so a concealing effect can be created not only when the player views the passed-through means with a line of sight that does not shift left or right relative to the passed-through means, but also when the player shifts left or right and peers at the passed-through means. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the ball enters the passed-through means, regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a concealing effect can be created in all directions).

This effect is more pronounced when one side of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction is sealed with a wall. In other words, when one side is sealed with a wall, the wall acts as a screen on the left or right side, making it easier to create a state in which the passing means is not visible.

In any one of gaming machines AA1 to AA7, the path configuration means is provided with a first flow path through which the gaming ball passes through the passing means in a first manner, and a second flow path through which the gaming ball passes in a second manner, and is configured so that the first gaming ball is at least partially covered by the predetermined displaceable means and can be seen, regardless of which flow path of the path configuration means the first gaming ball flows down. Gaming machine AA8.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA7, gaming machine AA8 can make it difficult to recognize the flow pattern of the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means, regardless of whether or not the gaming ball passes through the passing means, thereby increasing attention to the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means.

The first and second aspects are not limited in any way. For example, the direction in which the ball flows down may be different, or the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

A gaming machine AA9 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA8, a branching means is provided on the upstream side of the passing means for dividing the flow direction of the gaming ball, the branching means is provided with a switching means for switching the flow direction of the received gaming ball, and the path configuration means is configured so that gaming balls whose flow paths are divided by the branching means and that reach the switching means flow down the same path for a specified section.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA8, the gaming ball that reaches the switching means flows down the same path for a certain section, making it more difficult to grasp the flow of the gaming ball compared to when the gaming ball that reaches the switching means immediately flows down a path that corresponds to the subsequent flow path. This can improve the player's ability to focus on the gaming ball.

In the gaming machine AA9, the path configuration means has a protruding portion that protrudes toward the gaming balls flowing down, and the protruding portion acts to branch the gaming balls in the branching means. Gaming machine AA10.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AA9, gaming machine AA10 can use the protruding portion to branch the game balls, improving the durability of the structure compared to, for example, cases where branching is caused by the movement of a valve body.

In the gaming machine AA10, the protruding portion includes a first protruding portion that extends in a predetermined direction and a second protruding portion that extends in a direction different from the first protruding portion, and the protruding amount of the first protruding portion and the protruding amount of the second protruding portion are configured to be different. Gaming machine AA11.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA10, the gaming machine AA11 can differentiate the effect of the first protrusion on the gaming ball from the effect of the second protrusion on the gaming ball depending on the flow-down state of the gaming ball. This makes it possible to use the fixed first protrusion and second protrusion to branch the gaming ball according to a predetermined rule depending on the flow-down state of the gaming ball.

<Points that appeal to the introduction of a ball passing through a route forming means into a passed means>
A gaming machine AB1 is characterized in that it comprises a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, the path forming means having a specified portion that constitutes the upstream side of the passed means, the specified portion being positioned on a more conspicuous side than the passed means, and being configured to be able to guide gaming balls to the passed means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431, and the area around the ball detection hole 431 is configured to be difficult to identify by the decorative plate 302, and depending on the state of the big prize component 300, the game ball may flow down a position outside the decorative plate 302 or may flow down in a manner that is hidden behind the decorative plate 302 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, highly visible gaming balls that fall off the decorative plate 302 and flow down are configured to miss the ball detection hole 431, and some of the gaming balls that flow down so as to be hidden behind the decorative plate 302 are guided to the ball detection hole 431. This means that the visibility of the gaming ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, and the player may feel dissatisfied because paying attention to the gaming ball is likely to be wasted. In other words, there was a problem that there was room for improvement in terms of making the way the gaming ball flows down after attracting attention worth paying attention to.

In response to this, gaming machine AB1 is configured so that a gaming ball that has flowed down a specified section arranged on the conspicuous side can be guided to the passing means, and so the degree of improvement in attention to the gaming ball can be associated with the gaming ball passing through the passing means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the likelihood that a gaming ball that has flowed down a specified section will pass through the passing means, leading to an improvement in terms of the significance of paying attention to the gaming ball after it has attracted attention.

In addition, this configuration makes it easier to guide the player's gaze to the game ball flowing down the specified area, reducing the possibility that the player will miss the game ball heading toward the passing means.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to the drawing of a pattern (e.g., a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which game balls can pass.

The conspicuous side is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the display device side that easily attracts the player's attention, the winning hole side or the starting hole side, the front side (nearby side) that is easy for the player to see, the stage side (mainly the part where the game ball is temporarily held at the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame) where the gaze is likely to be focused as the probability of the ball entering a specific ball entry hole is remarkably high, the V-winning hole side that directly leads to winning a jackpot, the ball dispensing device side as an object of operation, the performance operation button side, the area where the game ball that has strayed from the ball entry hole flows down (the area where the player will inevitably follow it with his eyes out of frustration), the bright side as a light-emitting means switches between light and dark, or any other side. Also, it is possible to intentionally form a less conspicuous side to make it stand out in comparison.

A gaming machine AB2 is characterized in that the path configuration means of the gaming machine AB1 includes a second predetermined portion that makes a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means less noticeable than when the ball entered the path, and the predetermined portion is positioned on a more noticeable side than the second predetermined portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AB1, gaming machine AB2 reduces the attention of the gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means at the second specified section before it flows down the specified section, thereby making it possible to highlight the attention of the gaming ball as it flows down the specified section.

A gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that the predetermined portion of the gaming machine AB1 or AB2 has sections where the speed at which gaming balls flow down is different.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AB1 and AB2, gaming machine AB3 can improve the effect of attracting the player's attention compared to when there is no difference in the flow speed of the gaming balls.

A gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that the gaming machine AB4 is configured such that the second flow speed of the gaming ball flowing down the second specified part is faster than the first flow speed of the gaming ball flowing down the specified part.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AB3, gaming machine AB4 can shorten the time it takes for a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means to reach a specified section.

A gaming machine AB5 is one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB4, characterized in that the specified section has a section in which the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction differs.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB4, gaming machine AB5 can create sections in which the apparent displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction is different, regardless of the actual speed at which the gaming ball flows down. Therefore, by reducing the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction at any specified location, the player's gaze can be easily focused on a specified location and distracted from other areas.

The manner in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is made different is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a difference between displacement on a straight line arranged on a plane perpendicular to the front-to-rear direction when viewed from the front and displacement on a straight line having a front-to-rear component, a difference between displacement on a straight line and displacement in a curved or serpentine shape, or some other difference.

A gaming machine AB6 is any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB5, and is characterized in that it is provided with an introduction means configured to be able to introduce gaming balls into the path configuration means, and the predetermined portion is disposed outside the introduction means when viewed in a predetermined direction.

Gaming machine AB6 can ensure the visibility of the introduction means in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AB1 to AB5. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the introduction means while also increasing the attention to gaming balls that are likely to pass through the passing means.

A gaming machine AB7 is one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB6, and is characterized by having an avoidance means configured to cause gaming balls on the front side of the path configuration means to flow down so as to avoid the line of sight toward the passing means or the specified part.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB6, the gaming machine AB7 is configured so that the gaming balls can flow down the front side of the path configuration means, and is equipped with an avoidance means for making the flow path of the gaming balls avoid the line of sight toward the passing means, so that it is possible to ensure both the size of the gaming area and the visibility of the gaming balls toward the passing means.

The manner in which the game ball affected by the avoidance means flows down is not limited in any way. For example, it may flow down avoiding a position directly in front of the passing means, it may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the passing means and the player's eye position, it may flow down avoiding a position directly in front of the last position at which the player can see the game ball heading towards the passing means, it may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the last position mentioned above and the player's eye position, or it may be something else.

In gaming machine AB7, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state in which the game ball flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which the game ball cannot be accepted, and the acceptance state change means is configured to be able to guide the game ball that has reached the acceptance state change means in the acceptance state to the path configuration means side when the state changes from the acceptance state to the non-acceptance state. Gaming machine AB8.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AB7, gaming machine AB8 can prevent gaming balls that reach the receiving state changing means and then flow down like a bridge from blocking the line of sight toward the passing means.

A gaming machine AB9 is characterized in that it is provided with a partitioning means that is arranged above the passing means in a front view of the gaming machine AB7 or AB8 and that partitioning means divides the gaming area, and that the partitioning means is configured to allow gaming balls to flow down the left and right outer sides.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AB7 or AB8, gaming machine AB9 uses a partitioning means to prevent gaming balls from flowing down in front of the passing means, making it easier to ensure visibility toward the passing means.

The partitioning means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a plate-shaped portion that forms the flow surface of the game balls, or it may be a ball entry port forming means through which the game balls can enter. The partitioning means may be a means with a fixed shape (appearance) or a means with a variable shape (appearance).

In the gaming machine AB9, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state where the game balls flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state where they cannot be accepted, and the part of the partition means on the acceptance state change means side is configured to easily guide the game balls to the acceptance state change means side. Gaming machine AB10.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB9, the gaming machine AB10 can be configured to accept a gaming ball that is in the process of being accepted by the acceptance state change means in a manner that pushes it into the acceptance state change means by the partition means. This makes it easier to prevent a gaming ball that slides sideways while being accepted from escaping from the acceptance state change means and falling down the front side of the passing means.

For example, the receiving state changing means is assumed to be a special winning device equipped with an opening/closing plate that tilts and displaces on a left-right axis, and the partitioning means is assumed to be a first winning port located above the special winning port of the special winning device. A game ball that reaches the special winning port just before the opening/closing plate is closed is often pinched between the pivoting tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening that is covered by the opening/closing plate, and slides sideways in the direction of the edge (the direction of the pivoting axis of the opening/closing plate).

Since the game ball after sliding can reach any position within the range of the pivot tip of the opening and closing plate, if at least a part of the opening and closing plate is positioned above the passing means, the game ball after sliding may fall to the front side and then pass in front of the passing means, and the game ball after sliding should not be allowed to fall to the front side.

If it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the front after sliding sideways, it will be necessary to position the opening and closing plate so as to avoid the position of the passing means when viewed from the front, which reduces the design freedom of the opening and closing plate.

In contrast, gaming machine AB10 makes it easier to prevent the gaming ball from sliding sideways and falling to the front side of the opening and closing plate, improving the design freedom of the opening and closing plate.

A gaming machine AB11 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AB7 to AB10, gaming balls flowing down the path configuration means and gaming balls flowing down the front side of the path configuration means are configured to flow down in a similar manner.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AB7 to AB10, gaming machine AB11 makes it difficult to distinguish between gaming balls that flow down the path forming means and may pass through the passed means and gaming balls that flow down the front side of the path forming means and do not pass through the passed means, making it difficult to determine the number of gaming balls flowing down the path forming means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between cases where it is easy and difficult for game balls to enter the path forming means from game balls flowing down near the path forming means.

A gaming machine AB12 is any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB11, characterized by having a light-emitting means for irradiating light from behind the ball flowing down the specified portion.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AB1 to AB11, gaming machine AB12 makes it easier to avoid the front of the ball flowing down a specified area reflecting light, making it difficult to see.

<Points to ensure the path length to the V-hole while saving space>
A gaming machine AC1 comprising: a path forming means configured to allow a gaming ball to flow down; a passed means configured to allow the gaming ball that has flowed down the path forming means to pass through; and a state switching means configured to switch between a first state in which the gaming ball can flow down to the passed means and a second state different from the first state, wherein the path forming means comprises a delay means which delays the vertical displacement of the gaming ball, and the delay means configures the gaming ball to be able to flow down towards the passed means.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, a distribution unit 75 that is configured to be movable left and right is arranged in the flow path of the gaming ball that entered the second large winning opening 12, and the flow direction of the gaming ball can be changed by the positioning of the distribution unit 75 (see, for example, JP 2014-155538 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, it is essential for the distribution unit 75 to operate for a short period of time to prevent erroneous entry into the specific area 73 or balls being caught by the distribution unit 75, and some players may feel suspicious of the behavior of the distribution unit 75 and be unable to continue playing with confidence.

One example of a solution to this problem is to lengthen the flow path length from the second large prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75. For example, by changing the position of the distribution section 75 from directly below the second large prize opening 12 to a position near the center of the left and right of the play area (near the first large prize opening 10), it is possible to ensure a long flow path length from the second large prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75. This is thought to reduce the possibility of an erroneous prize entry into the specific area 73.

On the other hand, when this method is implemented, it becomes necessary to ensure the visibility of the flow path of the game ball over a wide area from the second large prize opening 12 to the first large prize opening 10, and the design freedom of the game area is limited in this area. In other words, there is a problem in that the design freedom of the game area is limited over a wide area in order to prevent erroneous winning into the specific area 73.

In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of preventing game balls from entering the game area by mistake while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine AC1, the path configuration means is equipped with a predetermined delay means, so even if the vertical length of the path configuration means in a front view is shortened to save space, it is possible to ensure that a long time passes before a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means passes through the passing means.

Therefore, the timing at which it becomes necessary to operate the state switching means to switch whether or not the game ball can enter the passing means can be set to a predetermined time after the game ball enters the path configuration means, so that erroneous winning can be avoided without operating the opening/closing device that switches whether or not the game ball can enter the path configuration means for a short period of time. This makes it possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating hastily. This makes it possible to avoid erroneous entry of game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

The form of the delay means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a form in which a protrusion for deceleration is formed in the flow path, or a form in which a predetermined flow path is provided that causes the game ball to flow down a flow path having a forward/rearward component.

In the gaming machine AC1, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the acceleration of the game ball flowing down the flow path toward the front side is greater than that of the flow path toward the back side. In the gaming machine AC2,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AC1, gaming machine AC2 can ensure a longer period during which the player can see the gaming ball flowing down a specified flow path.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the inclination of the specified flow path relative to the horizontal plane, or the design of the surface shape on the game ball side of the specified flow path.

A gaming machine AC3, in which the delay means in the gaming machine AC1 or AC2 has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the acceleration of the gaming ball flowing down is greater in a flow path toward the front side than in a flow path in which the gaming ball flows down while maintaining its front-to-rear position.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AC1 and AC2, gaming machine AC3 can ensure a longer period during which the player can see the gaming balls flowing in front of them. This makes it easier to increase the player's attention to the gaming balls flowing down a specified flow path.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the inclination of the specified flow path relative to the horizontal plane, or the design of the surface shape on the game ball side of the specified flow path.

A gaming machine AC4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the gaming ball passes through a position located in front of the passing means when viewed in the predetermined direction.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the gaming machine AC4 can reduce the visibility of the area near the passed means when the gaming ball is placed in a forward position. This can increase the attention to the area near the passed means.

A gaming machine AC5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AC4, the front position can be configured in multiple places.

According to the gaming machine AC5, gaming balls are placed at multiple front positions, so that the gaming balls at the front can hide at least a portion of the gaming ball at the back. Since the passing means is placed behind the gaming balls at the back, the field of view toward the passing means can be blocked by the multiple gaming balls, and the visibility of the passing means can be reduced.

In this case, if the interval between balls entering a specified flow path is short, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is always positioned at one of the front positions, making it possible to create a state in which the passing means is not visible.

Among any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the gaming machine AC6 is characterized in that the path configuration means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a swirling manner when viewed from above.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the gaming machine AC6 can shorten the vertical width required to install a path configuration means of the same length.

In addition, compared to when a turn-around path is formed, there is no need to make the path walls thinner, which improves the strength of the flow path, and reduces the possibility of ball clogging, etc., compared to a turn-around path that turns 180 degrees.

Among any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC6, the path configuration means is characterized in that the gaming machine AC7 has a front-rear flow path section that extends in the front-rear direction.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC6, the gaming machine AC7 can reduce the width of the path configuration means, so that a pair of path configuration means can be configured symmetrically with a reduced width.

Among any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC7, the gaming machine AC8 is characterized in that the passing means is disposed diagonally downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of the path configuration means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC7, the gaming machine AC8 makes it easier to bring the passing means and the ball receiving portion of the path forming means within the field of view of the player looking from the front side.

Among any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC8, the path configuration means includes a first receiving means configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and a second receiving means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and the gaming machine AC9 is configured so that the profits obtained by the player change depending on the receiving mode of the gaming balls of the first receiving means and the second receiving means.

According to gaming machine AC9, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AC1 to AC8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be able to receive gaming balls at all times, and further, the benefits obtained by the player change depending on the receiving mode of the gaming balls by the first receiving means and the second receiving means, so that the player's attention to the gaming balls can be improved.

The manner in which the game balls are received is not limited in any way. For example, the game balls may be received only by the first receiving means, or only by the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the first receiving means and a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the second receiving means. Also, the frequency with which balls enter each receiving means may differ, or the balls may enter at different positions.

A gaming machine AC10 is characterized in that in the gaming machine AC9, the profits obtained by the player change depending on whether gaming balls are received by only the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or whether gaming balls are received by both the first receiving means and the second receiving means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC9, the gaming machine AC10 makes it easier for the player to shoot the gaming ball in a predetermined launch pattern by setting the amount of profit the player can obtain.

The benefits that the player can obtain are not limited in any way. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing the game balls flowing down, or it may be a benefit related to the game obtained by the game balls flowing down (payout of prize balls, winning a jackpot, the game state changing to a special state after the jackpot ends, the game state changing to a normal state (falling down), etc.).

A gaming machine AC11 is characterized in that the path configuration means in the gaming machine AC9 or AC10 is configured symmetrically from the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passed means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AC9 and AC10, gaming machine AC11 can reduce the possibility of a player suffering a disadvantage regardless of whether the gaming ball is mainly shot from the left or right.

In any one of the gaming machines AC9 to AC11, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state where the game ball flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state where the game ball cannot be accepted, and the acceptance state changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state change means or the state change state of the gaming machine AC12.

According to gaming machine AC12, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AC9 to AC11, the acceptance state changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state changing means or the state change state, so that the impact of the player's skill in firing the game ball on the profits obtained by the player can be reduced.

A gaming machine AC13 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AC12, the state change mode of the receiving state change means is configured in a plurality of types.

In addition to the effect of the gaming machine AC12, the gaming machine AC13 can change the reception mode of the gaming balls to the first reception means and the second reception means even when the gaming balls are launched in a certain launch mode. This makes it possible to adjust the profits that the player can obtain based on the state change mode of the reception state change means.

<Important points regarding the opening and closing member that moves parallel to the direction in which the ball flows>
Gaming machine XAA1 comprises a path forming means configured to allow game balls to flow down, a passing means configured to allow game balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, and a state switching means configured to be able to change between an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the path forming means and a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path forming means, wherein the state switching means is configured so that the direction of displacement that occurs during the state change is along the direction in which the game balls flow down.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the flow direction of the game balls and the opening and closing direction of the opening and closing plate of the big prize component 300 are approximately perpendicular, and the opening and closing operation is completed without being involved in the rolling of the game balls, so there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening and closing plate (state switching means).

In contrast, with the gaming machine XAA1, the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to follow the direction in which the gaming ball flows downward, so that by displacing the state switching means when the gaming ball is in close proximity to or in contact with the state switching means, it is possible to affect a change in the rolling pattern of the gaming ball. This makes it possible to improve the role of the state switching means.

For example, when a gaming ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means can be slid to the right with the gaming ball on top of it, applying a load to the gaming ball that rotates it in the forward direction of the rolling rotation, thereby accelerating the gaming ball.

Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means can be slid leftward with the game ball on top of it, applying a load to the game ball that rotates it in the opposite direction to the rolling rotation, thereby slowing down the rotation of the game ball.

In addition, when the state switching means slides so as to graze the bottom end of the rolling game ball, a load can be applied to the game ball that is not only in the rolling direction of the game ball, but also has a component in a direction perpendicular to the rolling direction, so that the change in the flow pattern of the game ball can be made complex and irregular.

These effects on the way the game ball flows down can be varied in various ways when the state switching means is opened and closed, allowing players who are watching the game balls to concentrate on the game without getting bored.

In addition, the positional relationship between the opening and closing operation of the state switching means and the gaming ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be positioned so that it rubs against the side of the gaming ball, or it may be positioned so that it collides with the gaming ball in the direction opposite to the flow of the gaming ball.

In the state switching means that is displaced in a manner that collides with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured to perform a closing operation in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball, so that the game ball can be bounced back, or it may be configured to perform a closing operation in the same direction as the flow direction of the game ball, so that the introduction of the game ball thereafter can be restricted with little resistance.

Gaming machine XAA2 is characterized in that in gaming machine XAA1, the state change of the state switching means is configured to be executable while the state switching means and the gaming ball are in contact with each other.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XAA1, gaming machine XAA2 can cause the gaming ball to spin by changing the state of the state switching means.

Gaming machine XAA3 is characterized in that the state switching means in gaming machine XAA1 or XAA2 is equipped with a change means that changes the direction of the load in a direction intersecting the direction of the displacement.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines XAA1 and XAA2, gaming machine XAA3 can release the load applied from the gaming ball while the state switching means is displaced, thereby reducing the load applied to the state switching means.

<Important points regarding the opening and closing member that allows balls to flow in a first direction when open and in a second direction when closed>
Gaming machine XAB1 comprises a path forming means configured to allow game balls to flow down, a passed means configured to allow game balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, and a state switching means configured to be able to change between an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the passed means and a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the passed means, wherein the state switching means is configured to be able to guide the game ball in a first direction in the introduction state, and to be able to guide the game ball in a second direction in the non-introduction state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it is extended forward, but when it is retracted to the rear, it does not come into contact with the game ball and it falls freely, so it does not guide it. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, when it is retracted to the rear, it is necessary to prepare a part (frame part, etc.) other than the lower movable body 371 to guide the game ball flowing down, and there was a problem that there was room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members) for guiding the game ball flowing down.

In contrast, with the gaming machine XAB1, the state switching means is configured to guide the gaming ball in different directions depending on whether it is in the introduced state or not, making it unnecessary to use a dedicated component for guiding the flow path of the gaming ball, thereby reducing the number of components required. This makes it possible to diversify the flow direction of the gaming ball in a limited space.

The relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited in any way. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set left and right with respect to the game ball flowing down in the front-to-back direction. In this case, it is possible to maximize the difference in direction after guidance by the state switching means begins, while only slight displacement of the game ball is discernible when viewed from the front before it is guided by the state switching means.

The arrangement of the guide section that produces the guiding effect of the state switching means is not limited in any way. For example, the guide section may be disposed on a movable member of the state switching means, or the guide section may be disposed on a non-movable section in the periphery of the state switching means, and may be configured so that the state is switched to one in which the game ball is likely to approach or come into contact with the guide section by the operation of the movable member.

When the guide is provided on a movable member, it is preferable that the design not only provides guidance after switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also takes into consideration the effect on the game ball during the state switching operation.

For example, if the state switching means is equipped with a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the flow direction of the game ball, providing a wall portion with a surface (flat, curved, etc.) shape that is inclined with respect to the flow direction, rather than providing a wall portion with a flat shape perpendicular to the flow direction, makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball becomes large in a direction that causes the game ball to flow backwards. This makes it easier to avoid the game ball flowing backwards.

Gaming machine XAB2 is characterized in that in gaming machine XAB1, the state change of the state switching means occurs due to a displacement in a third direction, and the third direction is perpendicular to the first direction and the second direction.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine XAB1, the gaming machine XAB2 can reduce the possibility of malfunction of the state switching means due to the load applied by the guided gaming ball.

Gaming machine XAB3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XAB1 or XAB2, the path configuration means has a pair of left and right paths, the state switching means has a pair of guide sections capable of receiving gaming balls from the pair of left and right paths, and the first direction and the second direction are configured symmetrically in the pair of guide sections.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines XAB1 and XAB2, the gaming machine XAB3 can complicate the path along which the gaming ball flows. Also, since the first direction and the second direction are configured symmetrically on the left and right in the pair of guide sections, the displacement that the state switching means receives due to the load that the pair of guide sections receive from the gaming ball can be made symmetrical on the left and right.

This makes it easier to uniformly position the state switching means, for example, when gaming balls are placed into a pair of left and right paths in approximately equal numbers, depending on the load that the guide section receives from the gaming balls.

Gaming machine XAB4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine XAB3, the state switching means has a protruding portion formed to protrude in a direction intersecting the third direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine XAB3, gaming machine XAB4 can reduce the contact area with other components by using the protruding portion, thereby reducing the displacement resistance of the state switching means.

The gaming machine XAB5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine XAB3 or XAB4, it is provided with an abutment means configured to be able to abut when the state switching means is in the introduced state or the unintroduced state, and is configured to be able to correct the left-right displacement of the state switching means by abutting against the abutment means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines XAB3 and XAB4, the gaming machine XAB5 can receive load from the gaming ball from either the left or right direction, so the displacement of the state switching means, which tends to become disorderly, can be returned to an orderly state by the action of the abutment means.

<Separation, inversion, combination, and rotation are all part of the same movement>
A gaming machine AD1 is provided with a displacement means configured to be displaceable so that the visible surface changes, the displacement means comprising a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and configured so that the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced relative to each other in a predetermined manner of displacement.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, the rotating base 214 disposed at the tip of the base arm 220 is configured to be able to rotate multiple times (see, for example, JP 2016-116782 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, although the rotating base 214 is rotationally displaced, the surface visible to the player is the same, which creates the problem that it is difficult to maintain attention to the displacement means.

In contrast, gaming machine AD1 is configured so that the visible surface of the displacement means can be changed in response to the displacement, so attention can be maintained on the displacement means.

In addition, the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member relative to each other, thereby increasing the attention to the displacement means.

In the gaming machine AD1, the predetermined displacement includes at least a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move toward or away from each other based on a collection section where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are collected and arranged, and a second displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member rotate based on the collection section. In the gaming machine AD2,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AD1, gaming machine AD2 can easily dynamically cause relative movement between the first and second displacement members. That is, with only the first displacement as a displacement based on the assembly part, the displacement between the first and second displacement members is likely to be reduced at the terminal part where the distance from the assembly part is the shortest or longest, and the first and second displacement members may appear to be stationary, which may reduce the presentation effect. However, by mixing in the second displacement, it is possible to cause a rotational displacement even at the terminal part, improving the presentation effect.

A gaming machine AD3, in which the predetermined displacement in the gaming machine AD1 or AD2 includes at least a third displacement in which the visible surface of the displacement means is inverted.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AD1 or AD2, gaming machine AD3 inverts the surface that is visible due to the third displacement, making it possible to significantly change the decorations that are visible to the player before and after the third displacement.

A gaming machine AD4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AD1 to AD3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixed by suction or adhesion, and the load related to the fixing acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AD1 to AD3, gaming machine AD4 has a load related to the fixation that acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first and second displacement members, so the displacement of the first and second displacement members can be designed taking into account the load related to the fixation.

For example, in the case of driving force transmission by gears, if deformation of the shape is not taken into account, mechanical displacement will occur. However, if the load related to fixing is taken into account, the elastic change of the component due to the load will become apparent, causing a delay in the timing of the displacement of the component.

The degree of fixation may also be configured to vary depending on the visible surfaces of the first and second displacement members.

In this case, the effect of fixation differs depending on the surface being viewed, so the degree of fixation can be varied on the side the player can see.

This allows, for example, inverted surfaces of the same displacement means to be easily viewed as one surface tightly joined together and integrated, while the other surface can be easily viewed as loosely joined together and easily displaced relative to one another.

In addition, for example, by configuring the degree of adhesion of the first displacement member and the second displacement member to differ for each fixed position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member differs.

The manner in which the magnet can be attached is not limited in any way. For example, the magnet can be attached with an adhesive tape, or the magnet can utilize the adhesive force between the magnet and the metal part. The first and second inverted members can also be designed to use, for example, fixing screws or bolts as the metal part that is attached to the magnet.

Among any of the gaming machines AD1 to AD4, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in the forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, displaces in the forward direction in a first displacement mode, and displaces in the reverse direction in a second displacement mode different from the first displacement mode, and the second displacement mode is configured to displace in the first displacement mode after displacing in the predetermined mode. Among the gaming machines AD5, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in the forward and reverse directions in a first displacement mode, and in a predetermined state, displaces in the first displacement mode.

According to gaming machine AD5, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines AD1 to AD4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is configured as a displacement mode in which a predetermined mode is added before the first displacement mode, so that the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means can be reduced. This reduces the attention to the displacement means when retracting, and relatively increases the attention to the displacement means that displaces at the presentation position.

In conventional machines, the rotation pattern was the same in both forward and reverse directions, so after extending the display to the performance position (the position in front of the LCD display area), it was necessary to rotate again in the opposite direction multiple times before retreating to the retracted position (the position outside the LCD display area). In this case, there was a possibility that the viewer's gaze would be drawn to the part retreating from the performance position, which could be seen as a problem.

The type of displacement is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a rotational displacement or a linear displacement. The displacement may be on a plane, may span multiple planes, or may be three-dimensional.

In the gaming machine AD5, the displacement means is equipped with a release means configured to release the load transmission when the operating resistance becomes greater than a predetermined amount. A gaming machine AD6.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AD5, gaming machine AD6 can change the displacement mode of the displacement means by varying the magnitude of the operating resistance of the internal structure of the displacement means.

A gaming machine AD7 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines AD1 to AD6, it is provided with a light-emitting means for irradiating light toward the displacement means, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be able to change the visible state of the light from the light-emitting means depending on whether the visible surface is one side or the other side.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AD1 to AD6, the gaming machine AD7 can change the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means in accordance with the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

For example, it is possible to change between a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are perceived as emitting light individually and a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are perceived as emitting light together.

A gaming machine AD8 is any one of the gaming machines AD1 to AD7, and is provided with a detection means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to detect whether the displacement of the displacement means is in an acceptable state.

According to gaming machine AD8, in any of gaming machines AD1 to AD7, the detection means can detect a state in which the displacement of the displacement means is permissible, so that the displacement means can be prevented from colliding with surrounding structural parts during displacement.

In addition, since the detection means can detect the section in which the displacement means can be displaced while the displacement means is being displaced, by controlling the displacement to occur in a displacement mode that includes zooming in and out after a certain amount of displacement from the performance position toward the evacuation position, it is possible to suppress an increase in attention to the displacement means compared to when the displacement from the performance position to the evacuation position occurs in a displacement mode that includes zooming in and out from the start of the displacement.

A gaming machine AD9 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AD1 to AD7, it is provided with a detection means for detecting the state of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect two or more types of numerical values regarding the displacement of the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AD1 to AD7, gaming machine AD9 can reduce the number of detection means. Various types of values for the displacement of the displacement means are exemplified. For example, they may be values for the respective positions and attitudes of different movable members, or they may be values related to the change in the operating mode when the operating mode changes at a predetermined timing.

The arrangement of the detection means is not limited in any way. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure that detects the arrangement and attitude of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip end side of the displacement means.

A gaming machine AD10, in any one of gaming machines AD1 to AD9, is characterized in that the displacement means comprises the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be reversible between a position in which the surface facing the player is one side and a position in which the surface is the other side, and when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are distinguishable, whereas when the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are indistinguishable.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AD1 to AD9, gaming machine AD10 can maintain high expectations from the player that a reversal action will occur, regardless of the state of the first and second displacement members when one side is facing the player.

<Points for changing the easily visible surface by arranging the displacement means having a plurality of visible surfaces>
The gaming machine AE1 is provided with a displacement means having a first visible surface and a second visible surface configured to be visible, and the displacement means is configured to be switchable between a first state in which the first visible surface is easy to see and a second state in which the second visible surface is easy to see depending on the arrangement.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a reversible reversing unit 71, and are configured to change the appearance seen by the player by changing the surface seen (see, for example, JP 2016-153095 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the reversing unit 71 is turned over while remaining in a fixed position, so the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the surface seen. In other words, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the player's line of sight.

In contrast, with the gaming machine AE1, the displacement means can switch between a state in which the first visible surface is easily visible and a state in which the second visible surface is easily visible depending on the position, so that the line of sight of a player who wishes to see the first visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner that follows the path of the change in position of the displacement means.

A gaming machine AE2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AE1, an opening portion is provided that opens so that the displacement means can be viewed, and the displacement means is configured so that the opening portion side is easily visible.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AE1, gaming machine AE2 allows a player looking through the opening to easily see the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

A gaming machine AE3 is characterized in that the displacement means in the gaming machine AE2 is positioned closer to the rear side when placed on the edge of the opening than when placed in the center of the opening.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AE2, gaming machine AE3 makes it possible to make the displacement means visible from the front when it is placed in the center of the open section, while reducing the amount of eye movement required when viewing the displacement means when it is placed on the edge of the open section. This makes it possible to achieve both good visibility of the displacement means and reduced fatigue for the player who follows the displacement means with their eyes.

A gaming machine AE4, which is any one of the gaming machines AE1 to AE3, is characterized in that the displacement means has a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and when the first visible surface and the second visible surface of one set are visible, the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the other set are difficult to see.

According to gaming machine AE4, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AE1 to AE3, by applying different letters or figures for each set to the first visible surface and the second visible surface, it is possible to make different letters or figures visible to a player viewing the displacement means, and by configuring the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the set that are not intended to be visible to be difficult to see, it is possible to avoid the appearance of the displacement means being unsightly.

For example, if the first set displays characters or figures on the first and second visible surfaces indicating that there is a low expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot, and the second set displays characters or figures on the first and second visible surfaces indicating that there is a high expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot, the level of expectation of a jackpot can be confirmed through the displacement means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. In this case, the display of the expectation of a jackpot by the displacement means can be maintained even after the displacement means is retracted from the front side of the display area of the display device, so that the display of the expectation of a jackpot can continue to be visible even to a player who has taken their eyes off the liquid crystal display device.

The manner in which the display is made difficult to see is not limited in any way. For example, it may be arranged on a surface on a side other than the player's side (the rear side, the left or right outer surface, etc.), or it may be configured to reduce visibility by being shielded with a shielding means.

A gaming machine AE5 is characterized in that the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface that are visible in the gaming machine AE4 is configured so that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to recognize during the operation.

According to gaming machine AE5, it is possible to easily avoid predicting the pair of first and second visible surfaces that will be displayed to the player during the action of switching (before confirmation) the pair of first and second visible surfaces that are visible in gaming machine AE4. This makes it possible to improve attention to the displacement means.

The manner in which the first visible surface and the second visible surface are configured to be difficult to recognize during the above-mentioned switching operation is not limited in any way. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make them difficult to recognize, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) may be configured to be separable from the other parts and operated in a separated state to make them difficult to recognize, or a light-emitting means may be used to set the brightness to create a relatively dark part to make it difficult to recognize.

In this case, the manner in which the separation occurs is not limited in any way. For example, during the above-mentioned switching operation, the device may be configured to operate facing backward so that only one of the part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part is visible, and the other part is not visible, or the device may be configured to operate in a state in which the part and the other part are simultaneously visible but are misaligned.

A gaming machine AE6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AE5, an opening portion is provided that opens the displacement means so that the displacement means can be seen, and the switching operation is performed in a state in which the displacement means is positioned in the center of the opening portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AE5, gaming machine AE6 makes it easier for players to see the switching action, improving attention to the switching action.

A gaming machine AE7, which is a gaming machine AE5 or AE6, is characterized in that during the switching operation, one of the part of the first visible surface and the other part faces the front side, and the other faces a side different from the front side.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AE5 or AE6, gaming machine AE7 makes it difficult to recognize the first visible surface during operation by making a portion of the first visible surface visible and the entire surface invisible during operation.

A gaming machine AE8 is any one of the gaming machines AE1 to AE7, and is provided with a second displacement means configured to be capable of blocking at least a portion of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to be switchable to a third state, together with the second displacement means, for making the first visible surface visible.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AE1 to AE7, the gaming machine AE8 can improve the design freedom of the presentation position of the displacement means by making at least a portion of the second visible surface difficult to see using the second displacement means.

A gaming machine AE9, which is one of the gaming machines AE1 to AE8, is characterized in that the displacement means is configured to change the surface visible when viewed in a specified direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface as the displacement occurs.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AE1 to AE8, the gaming machine AE9 changes the surface that is visible when viewed in a specified direction between the first visible surface and the second visible surface, so the surface that is easily visible can be changed at will, regardless of the amount of change in the player's line of sight.

A gaming machine AE10, which is a gaming machine AE9, is characterized in that the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AE9, gaming machine AE10 can increase the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state by changing the posture of the displacement means.

A gaming machine AE11 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AE9 or AE10, it is provided with an auxiliary means configured to be arranged close to the displacement means, and in the first state, the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means is arranged away from the auxiliary means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AE9 and AE10, gaming machine AE11 can arrange the auxiliary means close to the displacement means so that they can be viewed as one unit, and can also arrange the auxiliary means and the displacement means so that they can be viewed separately, allowing the displacement means to give multiple different impressions to the player.

The type of the auxiliary means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a means whose arrangement is fixed, or it may be a movable means.

A gaming machine AE12 is characterized in that the auxiliary means in the gaming machine AE11 is configured to be switchable between a state in which it is viewed integrally with the displacement means and a state in which it is viewed separately from the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AE11, the gaming machine AE12 can switch between viewing the displacement means and the auxiliary means as a single unit or separately, thereby increasing the variety of visible patterns relative to the number of components.

<Points at which the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means to the displacement amount of the installation means at the same time differs in each section>
A gaming machine AF1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable, an arrangement means for arranging a first part on the displacement means, and a support means for supporting a second part of the arrangement means, wherein the support means is configured to be capable of controlling the arrangement of the second part relative to the first part during the displacement of the displacement means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that is equipped with a tiltable base arm 220, a rotating part 211 rotatably attached to the tilt tip side of the base arm 220, and a drive motor 222 that generates a driving force for rotating the rotating part 211, and is configured to rotate the rotating part 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220 (see, for example, JP 2016-116782 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the rotating part 211 is prone to wobbling at the tip of the base arm 220, and rotating the rotating part 211 while the base arm 220 is tilting and displacing may cause a malfunction in the mechanism. As a result, the rotational displacement of the rotating part 211 is assumed to be performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, and the degree of freedom of displacement is low.

In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of increasing the design freedom for the displacement of the displaceable parts.

In contrast, according to gaming machine AF1, the placement means is supported at least at two points by the displacement means and the support means, and the two support points are configured to displace relative to one another during the displacement of the displacement means. The support means makes it possible to control the placement of the second part based on the first part, so that the placement means can be displaced during the displacement of the displacement means while being stably supported. This allows for greater design freedom in the displacement of the placement means (displaceable part).

The manner of the support means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be supported in a manner that restricts displacement in a guide groove formed in a fixed base means, or it may be connected to a displaceable second displacement means and supported. Furthermore, control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, but also includes mechanical control, such as restricting (guiding) the displacement of the second part with a wall portion.

A gaming machine AF2, characterized in that in the gaming machine AF1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace a first section and a second section, the support means has a first range in which the second part is supported when the displacement means displaces the first section, and a second range in which the second part is supported when the displacement means displaces the second section, and is configured such that the direction in which the second part is displaced in the first range differs from the direction in which the second part is displaced in the second range.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AF1, gaming machine AF2 allows the displacement speed of the arrangement means to be varied even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, and the support means is configured to allow changes in the displacement direction of the second portion, so that the displacement of the arrangement means can be made smooth even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly.

A gaming machine AF3, which is a gaming machine AF1 or AF2, characterized in that the support means is equipped with a limiting portion that limits the displacement of the second portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AF1 and AF2, gaming machine AF3 can limit the displacement of the second portion at the boundary position (limiting portion) between the first and second ranges, making it easier to stop the second portion at the boundary position (limiting portion) between the first and second ranges when displacing the second portion from the side with larger displacement to the side with smaller displacement.

The type of load required to displace the second part relative to the first part is not limited in any way. For example, the second part may be pulled, or the second part may be pushed.

The type of the limiting section is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a type that sets an increase or decrease in the displacement resistance of the second section, or a type that switches the displacement direction of the second section.

A gaming machine AF4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AF2 or AF3, the first section is arranged closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means in the second section is smaller than the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means in the first section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AF2 and AF3, gaming machine AF4 can provide a section in which the relative amount of displacement of the arrangement means based on the displacement means becomes smaller at an intermediate position of the displacement of the displacement means, so that positions at which the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily viewed as one unit can be provided in addition to the end position of the displacement of the displacement means, and as a result, the number of positions at which the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily viewed as one unit can be increased.

A gaming machine AF5 is one of the gaming machines AF1 to AF4, characterized in that the (ratio of) the displacement speed of the second part based on the displacement speed of the first part is made variable.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF4, the gaming machine AF5 can change the displacement speed of the second part of the arrangement means on the support means side even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, so that a motion presentation can be created in which the displacement speed of the arrangement means is variable through simple drive control of the drive means (constant speed drive).

A gaming machine AF6 is one of the gaming machines AF1 to AF5, characterized in that the support means is configured to reduce the displacement speed at the displacement end of the second portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AF1 to AF5, gaming machine AF6 can prevent the second portion from bouncing back, making it easier to stop the placement means early at the end of the displacement.

The method for preventing the second part from bouncing back is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured to reduce the displacement speed of the second part at the end of the displacement (e.g., the amount of displacement of the second part when the first part displaces a predetermined unit length), or it may be configured to restrict the displacement of the second part by a geometric design such as erecting a wall in the direction of displacement of the second part when the first part is stopped.

In addition, the method is not limited to reducing the amount of displacement of the second portion, and the displacement resistance of the second portion may be increased. For example, a load may be applied to the displacement end of the second portion by magnetic force or the like to increase the displacement resistance of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be increased by the biasing force of a coil spring or the like.

A gaming machine AF6, characterized in that the support means is configured so that the displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part intersects with the displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second part when the first part stops at the displacement end. A gaming machine AF7.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AF6, gaming machine AF7 has a support means that has the function of guiding the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part, thereby reducing the return displacement (bound) of the second part when the first part stops.

A gaming machine AF8 is any one of the gaming machines AF1 to AF7, and is characterized in that it is provided with a supported means that is displaceably supported by the arrangement means, and the supported means is configured to displace by an amount of displacement that corresponds to the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF7, the gaming machine AF8 can also perform complex effects using the supported means that displaces in conjunction with the placement means.

The manner in which the supported means is displaced is not limited in any way. For example, the supported means may be displaced so as to move parallel to the disposition means on a predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced, or the supported means may be displaced in a manner different from the manner in which the disposition means is displaced (for example, a sliding displacement on a predetermined plane) (for example, a rotational displacement about a predetermined axis) at a position away from the predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced.

The manner in which the displacing means is displaced with respect to the amount of displacement of the displacing means is not limited in any way. For example, the displacing means may be a change in posture, or may be a displacement while maintaining the posture.

A gaming machine AF9 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AF8, while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second portion has a section in which it can move back and forth in a direction intersecting the displacement trajectory of the first portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AF8, gaming machine AF9 can achieve a configuration in which the amount of relative displacement of the second part with respect to the first part returns and changes (e.g., increases and then decreases) while the first part is displaced, thereby realizing a displacement configuration in which the amount of displacement of the supported means is increased while the position of the second part is maintained.

A gaming machine AF10, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine AF8 or AF9, the (relative) rotational displacement speed of the supported means with respect to the placement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AF8 and AF9, gaming machine AF10 can make the displacement mode of the supported means equivalent to that of the displacement means, sandwiching the placement means. This gives the player the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own drive means.

A gaming machine AF11, in any one of the gaming machines AF1 to AF10, is characterized in that the positioning means includes a position change means that changes its position so that the side facing the player is switched between the first side and the second side as the positioning means itself is displaced, and the position change means is configured so that when the second portion is positioned at the end of the displacement, the first side or the second side is in a position facing the player.

In addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF10, the gaming machine AF11 faces the first or second surface of the position change means toward the player, allowing the player to understand that the second portion has reached the end of the displacement, making it possible to easily understand the end of the presentation action by the displacement means.

A gaming machine AF12 is any one of gaming machines AF1 to AF11, and is configured so that electrical wiring is inserted into the arrangement means through the second part, and is provided with an arrangement means in which the electrical wiring is arranged inside and fixed to the second part, the arrangement means having an opening through which the electrical wiring can be inserted, and the opening is configured to be displaceable so as to avoid contact of the electrical wiring with the surrounding parts formed around it.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF11, the gaming machine AF12 can prevent electrical wiring from coming into contact with surrounding areas.

The positioning means may be configured as a means for combining multiple components when the second part is composed of multiple components, or as a means for preventing a separate component from falling off the second part when a separate component is disposed in the second part.

<Characteristic BA group>
a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition, a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means, a first dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, a second information acquisition means capable of acquiring second information based on the establishment of a second information acquisition condition, a second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and a second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means. a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means; a second dynamic display mode determination means for determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when a first identification information for indicating a specific first discrimination result or a second identification information for indicating a specific second discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means;

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to gaming machine BA1, the presentation mode executed during the period when the second identification information is dynamically displayed varies depending on the number of pieces of second information stored, so that it is possible to execute a presentation that corresponds to the number of times that the second identification information can be dynamically displayed thereafter. Even if the second identification information for indicating a specific second judgment result is not displayed, the player's interest in the game thereafter can be maintained, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

A gaming machine BA2, characterized in that in the gaming machine BA1, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed in priority to the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the presentation mode execution means executes the presentation mode when a specific second dynamic display mode is being executed.

According to gaming machine BA2, the specific second dynamic display mode is executed, which has the effect of making the player motivated to store the second information, thereby increasing the player's interest.

A gaming machine BA3, in which the presentation mode is set for a period spanning the next dynamic display of the second identification information that is executed consecutively after the period of the second dynamic display mode that is executed corresponding to the number of stored second information ends, in the gaming machine BA1 or BA2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BA1 or BA2, gaming machine BA3 has the effect of increasing interest by making the multiple second dynamic display modes appear as a single dynamic display, since the presentation mode is configured to be executable across the dynamic display period of the second identification information that is executed multiple times in succession.

A gaming machine BA4, which has a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first state, a variable control means that changes the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established, and a pre-determination means that can determine in advance whether the specific condition is established before the specific condition is established, in any one of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, the presentation mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific presentation mode based at least on the result of the pre-determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BA1 to BA3, gaming machine BA4 has the effect of creating anticipation for obtaining the second information, since a specific presentation mode is selected based on the results of a prior determination of the establishment of a specific condition that will trigger the second information to be easily obtained.

<Feature BB group> (Performance can be changed depending on the number of reserved special charts 2 during the execution of the variable pattern)
a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information based on the establishment of a first information acquisition condition, a first determination means capable of executing a first determination based on the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying, on a display means, first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means, a first dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a first dynamic display mode of the first identification information dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, a second information acquisition means capable of acquiring second information based on the establishment of a second information acquisition condition, a second information storage means for storing the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination based on the second information acquired by the second information acquisition means, and a second identification information for indicating a second determination result by the second determination means. a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the display means; a second dynamic display mode determination means for determining a second dynamic display mode of the second identification information dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when a first identification information for indicating a specific first discrimination result or a second identification information for indicating a specific second discrimination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the gaming machine having: a presentation mode execution means for executing a presentation mode during the dynamic display period of the first identification information; and a presentation mode selection means for selecting the presentation mode to be executed by the presentation mode execution means, the presentation mode selection means selecting the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information stored in the second information storage means.

Here, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is a presentation to show the result of a lottery held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the presentation mode that has been determined (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

According to gaming machine BB1, the presentation mode to be executed during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed in the first dynamic display mode determined at the start of the dynamic display is determined based on the number of stored second information, so that not only the result of the first discrimination but also information regarding the possibility of executing the second discrimination can be determined from the presentation mode, which has the effect of preventing the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

Gaming machine BB2 is characterized in that in gaming machine BB1, the presentation mode selection means selects the presentation mode based on at least the number of the second information and the dynamic display mode of the dynamically displayed first identification information.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine BB1, gaming machine BB2 has the effect of being able to execute a variety of presentation modes, since the presentation mode is selected based on the first dynamic display mode being executed and the number of pieces of second information stored during that execution.

Gaming machine BB3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BB1 or BB2, the dynamic display of the second identification information is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first identification information, and the presentation mode is one in which a presentation related to the dynamic display mode of the second identification information that is executed thereafter is executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BB1 and BB2, gaming machine BB3 has the effect that, when second information is stored, dynamic display of second identification information is started after the first identification information being executed is finished, and the presentation mode related to the second dynamic display mode can be executed before the dynamic display of the second identification information starts, so that the player can be made aware at an early stage that the dynamic display of the second identification information, which is executed with priority, is about to start.

Any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB3, which have a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, a variable member that can be changed between a first state in which a gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than in the first state, a variable control means that changes the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a specific condition until a predetermined condition is established, and a pre-determination means that can determine in advance whether the specific condition is established before the specific condition is established, the gaming machine BB4 is characterized in that the presentation mode selection means is configured to be able to select a specific presentation mode based at least on the result of the pre-determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BB1 to BB3, gaming machine BB4 has the effect of creating anticipation for obtaining the second information because a specific presentation mode is selected based on the results of a prior determination of the establishment of a specific condition that will trigger the second information to be easily obtained.

<Feature BC group> (Special chart 1 change performance is used as a pseudo-performance of special chart 2 change)
a first bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the first determination means becoming a predetermined first determination result; a second bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming a predetermined second determination result; a first effect execution means for executing a first effect for indicating the determination result of the first determination based on the first determination being executed; and a second effect execution means for executing a second effect different from the first effect as an effect for indicating the determination result of the second determination based on the second determination being executed, wherein the second effect execution means is configured to be capable of executing the second effect of a presentation pattern including at least a specific presentation pattern that is likely to be executed during a presentation period of the first effect when at least a predetermined specific condition is established.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

The gaming machine BC1 can execute the first effect as an effect for indicating the result of the second determination, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine BC2 is characterized in that in gaming machine BC1, the second performance execution means is capable of executing the second performance in a performance mode that includes at least a display mode showing the result of the first determination as the performance mode of the first performance.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BC1, gaming machine BC2 can execute a second presentation using a display mode that shows the result of the first judgment, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

In the gaming machine BC2, the second performance execution means executes a second performance mode for indicating the result of the second discrimination within one performance indicating the result of the second discrimination, and the performance mode. Gaming machine BC3.

Gaming machine BC3 has the effect of being able to provide more unexpected effects in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine BC2.

<Feature BD group> (Double display including probability change even for normal hits)
a first discrimination means capable of executing a first discrimination, a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of first discrimination symbols on a display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode and then statically displaying them in a combination to show a first discrimination result by the first discrimination means, a second discrimination means capable of executing a second discrimination, a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying a plurality of second discrimination symbols on the display means in a predetermined dynamic display mode and then statically displaying them in a combination to show a second discrimination result by the second discrimination means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the first discrimination symbols are statically displayed on the display means in a specific combination to show a specific first discrimination result or when the second discrimination symbols are statically displayed on the display means in a specific combination to show a specific second discrimination result, The gaming machine BD1 is configured such that a first benefit can be awarded as the benefit when a combination of identification patterns corresponding to a first specific combination is stopped and a second benefit that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit can be awarded when a combination of identification patterns corresponding to a second specific combination different from the first specific combination is stopped and displayed, the gaming machine has a determination means for determining the type of benefit to be awarded by the benefit awarding means, and the first dynamic display means, when a specific period is set, displays a multiple reach display mode in which one first identification pattern is dynamically displayed and the remaining identification patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be either of the first specific combination and the second specific combination, and then displays the first identification patterns in the specific combination.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by announcing the results of a lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot using a combination of multiple symbols, and then awarding different prizes depending on the type of symbol displayed (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, some of the symbols that make up a combination that does not award a lower bonus than the bonus desired by the player are displayed statically, which causes the player to lose interest in the game before the result is announced.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players.

With gaming machine BD1, when identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination during a specific period, the specific combination is displayed after passing through multiple reach display modes, so that it is possible to prolong the anticipation that both the combination corresponding to the first special benefit and the combination corresponding to the second special benefit will be displayed, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

Gaming machine BD2 is characterized in that in gaming machine BD1, the determination means determines the first benefit when the specific first judgment result occurs during the specific period.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine BD1, gaming machine BD2 has the effect of making it easier to have expectations that the second benefit will be awarded even if the first judgment is made during the specific period, since a specific combination is displayed through a multiple reach display mode, even during the specific period in which the first benefit is determined by the determination means.

In the gaming machine BD2, the determination means determines the second benefit when the specific second discrimination result is obtained during the specific period, and the second dynamic display means, when a specific period is set, displays a special multiple reach display mode in which one second discrimination pattern is dynamically displayed and the remaining discrimination patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination that can be any one of two or more different second specific combinations, and then displays the second discrimination patterns in the specific combination. In the gaming machine BD3,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BD2, gaming machine BD3 has the effect of allowing the player to recognize early on that a second benefit advantageous to the player will be granted without fail if a specific second judgment result is obtained during the specific period.

<Feature BE group> (Break ED control when hitting the probability hit)
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result; a bonus game type determination means for determining the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means from a plurality of types; a specific area through which a game ball can pass when the specific bonus game is executed, and a setting means for setting a favorable game state that is more favorable to the player than a normal game state as a game state that is set after the execution of the bonus game when the game ball passes through the specific area until an end condition is established; and a suggestion mode execution means for executing a suggestion mode that can suggest the game state that will be set after the execution of the bonus game when the bonus game ends, wherein the suggestion mode is configured by combining a first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode, and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the normal game state and the second suggestion mode for suggesting the favorable game state are configured in the same period.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a winning game is decided by a lottery based on the entry of a game ball into a starting winning slot, and different winning games are played depending on the type of winning game. During a specific type of winning game, a variable ball entry area that can be changed between a state where the game ball can enter and a state where it is difficult to enter is changed to a state where the ball can enter, and when the game ball enters the area, the game state after the winning game becomes a game state favorable to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Gazette No. 2514417).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, even when a specific type of winning game is executed, there are cases where the game ball does not enter the variable ball entry area, which causes an increase in the control load in the notification control.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide an amusement machine that can reduce the control load.

According to gaming machine BE1, by setting the second suggested mode to the same period, it is possible to suppress the variation in the period for displaying the suggested mode, while setting the mode suggested by the ball entry state in a specific area, which has the effect of facilitating notification control of the suggested mode at the end of the bonus game and reducing the control load.

The gaming machine BE2 is characterized in that it has a suggestion mode setting means for setting the suggestion mode to be executed by the suggestion mode execution means in response to the type of bonus game to be executed when the bonus game is executed in the gaming machine BE1, and a switching means capable of switching the second suggestion mode, which is set when the gaming ball does not enter the specific area during the specific bonus game, to a second suggestion mode corresponding to a game other than the specific bonus game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BE1, gaming machine BE2 has the effect of suppressing the control load and executing the correct suggestion, because even if the suggestion mode is set at the start of bonus play to suppress the concentration of control load at the end of the bonus play, the suggestion mode can be switched to a suggestion mode corresponding to the normal play state without changing the period for displaying the suggestion mode.

<Feature BF group> (Setting different lengths of ED period depending on the type of jackpot)
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result; a bonus game type determination means for determining the type of bonus game to be executed by the bonus game execution means from a plurality of types; and a period setting means for setting a period of a length corresponding to the type of the bonus game being executed as a period for indicating the end of the bonus game based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition during the execution of the bonus game.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

The gaming machine BF1 has the effect of increasing interest in the game by allowing different periods to be set depending on the type of bonus game.

A gaming machine BF2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BF1, it is provided with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect using the period set by the period setting means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BF1, gaming machine BF2 can execute specific effects at different periods set according to the type of bonus game, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine BF3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a period switching means that can switch the length of the period set by the period setting means to a different length when a variable condition is established during the execution of the bonus game in gaming machine BF1 or BF2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BF1 and BF2, gaming machine BF3 can also vary the length of the period when a variable condition is met during bonus play, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

<Feature BG group> (ED period varies depending on whether or not V is won)
a specific area through which a game ball can pass while the bonus game is being executed; a game state setting means for setting an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player while the bonus game is being executed, based on the game ball passing through the specific area while the bonus game is being executed; and a specific period setting means for setting a specific period to indicate the end of the bonus game while a predetermined end condition is met while the bonus game is being executed, wherein the specific period setting means is configured to be able to set the specific period of different lengths depending on whether the game ball has passed through the specific area while the bonus game is being executed or not.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the excitement of the game by determining a presentation mode for announcing the lottery result based on the lottery result, which is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot, and executing the determined presentation mode (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417).

However, the conventional gaming machines described above had the problem that players quickly became bored with the content of the presentation.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents players from becoming bored with the game too quickly.

The gaming machine BG1 makes it possible to set specific periods of different lengths depending on whether or not the gaming ball has passed through a specific area during bonus play, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine BG2 is characterized in that it has a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect during the specific period in the gaming machine BG1.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BG1, gaming machine BG2 can execute specific effects within a specific period of time, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine BG3 is characterized in that the specific presentation in gaming machine BG2 includes at least a notification mode for notifying the player of the passage of the gaming ball into the specific area during the bonus game.

With gaming machine BG3, the specific effects include a notification mode, which has the effect of providing players with a game that is easy to understand.

<Feature BH Group> (Limitation control of button operation)
A gaming machine BH1 having a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine having an operation means that can be operated by a player, a setting execution means that can execute a setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means, and a restriction means that restricts the execution of the setting based on the operation of the operation means when a specific condition is established during the dynamic display period of the identification information.

Traditionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, many machines are configured to notify (statically display) the result of the lottery via a specified special symbol variation period, and use the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is statically displayed (special symbol variation period) to execute various effects (variable effects) to prevent players from quickly becoming bored with the game. Among these, there are machines that are configured to prepare multiple presentation modes in advance, and to vary the manner of the variable effects executed during the special symbol variation period for each presentation mode.

In a gaming machine configured in this way, different variable presentations can be provided to the player by switching presentation modes, which prevents the player from becoming bored early on with the game due to the same variable presentations being provided all the time. Furthermore, there are gaming machines that allow the player to switch presentation modes at will by operating an operating means that the player can operate (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-249877 A). In such a gaming machine, the player can select the presentation mode that he or she is most interested in from among multiple presentation modes, which prevents the player from becoming bored early on with the game due to a variable presentation that he or she is less interested in being executed. Furthermore, the player's interest in the game can be improved because he or she needs to operate the operating means to switch presentation modes.

However, as mentioned above, if the player is allowed to switch the presentation mode at any time by operating the operating means, for example, just before the result of the special pattern lottery is frozen and displayed, or when a short period of change is set as the special pattern change period, the switching of the presentation mode makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special pattern lottery, resulting in a problem of reduced motivation to operate the operating means.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase players' motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine BH1, if a specific condition is met during the dynamic display period of the identification information, the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means can be restricted, thereby preventing malfunctions caused by the operation of the operating means.

A gaming machine BH2, characterized in that in the gaming machine BH1, a dynamic display period determination means determines a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, a gaming state setting means is capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is satisfied, and the specific condition is set as at least one of the conditions for satisfaction that the short gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BH1, gaming machine BH2 can regulate the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means during a short game state, and can prevent the player from having difficulty in understanding the determination result of the determination means due to the execution of the setting execution means. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine BH3 is characterized in that it has a presentation mode setting means capable of setting at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode based on the setting executed by the setting execution means in the gaming machine BH1 or BH2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BH1 and BH2, gaming machine BH3 can set different presentation modes based on the operation of the operating means, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

BH4 is characterized in that any one of the gaming machines BH1 to BH3 has a specific setting means capable of executing a specific setting, and the regulating means is configured to be capable of executing the specific setting by the specific setting means without causing the setting execution means to execute the setting based on the operation of the operating means when the specific condition is set.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines BH1 to BH3, gaming machine BH4 has the effect of making the operation of the operating means a meaningful act by providing the player who operated the operating means with an action resulting from the operation of the operating means, since the specific setting is executed even when the execution of the setting is restricted by operating the operating means during the period when a specific condition is satisfied.

A gaming machine BH4 is characterized in that it has a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect that can suggest information about the identification information that is stopped and displayed before the identification information is stopped and displayed based on the specific setting. A gaming machine BH5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BH4, gaming machine BH5 has the effect that, when a specific condition is met, the information of the identification information displayed in a stopped state can be identified by a suggestive effect before the stopped state is displayed, and when a specific condition is met, a variety of effects can be executed by operating the device, thereby preventing the player from quickly becoming bored.

<Feature BI group> (notifying advantageous periods spanning multiple game states)
a game machine having a determination means capable of executing a determination, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting at least a first game state, a second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a third game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state and is different from the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting the second game state after the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means is ended, a third gaming state can be set when a first setting condition is established while a skill state is set, and the first gaming state can be set when a second setting condition different from the first setting condition is established while the third gaming state is set, and when the second gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the gaming machine BI1 is characterized in having an advantageous period determination means for determining an advantageous period based on the period until the second setting condition is established, and an indication means for indicating the advantageous period determined by the advantageous period determination means.

Conventionally, when a favorable game state (for example, a time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set, there are devices that notify the player of the period during which that favorable game state will continue (number of times the special pattern will change). Specifically, there are devices that display "100 times" as the remaining period display mode indicating the period during which the favorable game state will continue, and subtract one from the value of the remaining period display mode each time a special pattern lottery is executed. This allows the player to easily grasp how many more times the special pattern lottery can be executed during the currently set favorable game state.

In addition, some recent gaming machines are capable of setting multiple types of advantageous game states that are advantageous to the player, and some of these advantageous game states can be set to a first advantageous game state (e.g., a time-saving state) and a second advantageous game state that is even more advantageous than the first advantageous game state (e.g., a special state).

In a gaming machine configured in this way, for example, when a first advantageous gaming state (e.g., a time-saving state) is set, it is possible to inform the player of the period (remaining period) during which the first advantageous gaming state will continue, but there is a problem in that it is not possible to inform the player of which gaming state will be set after the first advantageous gaming state ends. In other words, when the first advantageous gaming state ends, the player cannot know whether a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state will be set, or whether a gaming state that is less advantageous to the player than the first advantageous gaming state will be set, making it difficult for the player to know what they should aim for during the first advantageous gaming state, which reduces their motivation to play.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game by increasing the player's motivation to play.

According to gaming machine BI1, when a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set, the notification means notifies the player of the advantageous period determined based on the period until the first gaming state is set again. Therefore, even in a gaming machine that has multiple gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, the player can know the period during which the gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state is set. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine BI2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BI1, a suggestion effect execution means is provided that is capable of executing a suggestion effect for suggesting the gaming state set by the gaming state setting means when the notification means has notified that the advantageous period is in progress.

The gaming machine BI2 can notify the player of the advantageous period until the first gaming state is set, while also suggesting the currently set gaming state, which has the effect of making the player interested in the content of the suggestive performance that is executed, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine BI3, in which the suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a past suggestion effect to suggest the game state set by the game state setting means when the notification means has notified the player that the advantageous period is in progress.

According to the gaming machine BI3, the suggestion effect execution means can suggest to the player the game state that was set in the past. Therefore, it is possible to predict the current game state based on the contents of the past suggestion effects, and to analyze the past game contents during the advantageous period, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine BI4, in which the notification means in gaming machine BI2 or BI3 is capable of displaying on the display means a remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the advantageous period, and the suggestion performance execution means is capable of suggesting the currently set gaming state or a gaming state that was set in the past by varying the remaining period display mode.

According to gaming machine BI4, by varying the remaining period display mode for showing the remaining advantageous period, a suggestive presentation regarding the game status is executed, so that the suggestive presentation can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for a player who is paying close attention to the remaining advantageous period, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Gaming machine BI5 is any one of gaming machines BI1 to BI4, characterized in that it has a second suggestion presentation means capable of suggesting the timing when the first set condition may be met when the notification means has notified that the advantageous period is in progress.

The gaming machine BI5 allows the player to predict the timing when the game state will change during the advantageous period, which has the effect of preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too quickly during the advantageous period.

Gaming machine BI6 is any one of gaming machines BI1 to BI5, characterized in that it has an advantageous notification means capable of notifying the player of the gaming state that is advantageous to the player between the second gaming state and the third gaming state.

The gaming machine BI6 allows the player to grasp the relative merits of multiple game states that are set during the advantageous period, which can generate interest by predicting which game state is currently set.

<Feature BJ Group> (Displaying one symbol row variably with multiple symbol display control)
A gaming machine BJ1 having a display means for displaying suggestive information that can suggest a discrimination result, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the suggestive information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when a specific display mode for indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, wherein the suggestive information is set to at least a first pattern row composed of a pattern row composed of a plurality of patterns, and a second pattern row composed of a pattern row composed of a plurality of patterns different from the first pattern row, and the dynamic display means is configured to be capable of dynamically displaying the second pattern row in a second direction different from the first direction during a period in which the first pattern row is dynamically displayed in a first direction.

Conventionally, there have been machines that display a third symbol in a variable manner as identification information for indicating the result of a special symbol lottery (for example, Patent Document 1: Patent Publication No. 2514417). In addition, there have been machines that execute various effects (variation effects) during the variable display of the third symbol, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, and allow the player to play while expecting a jackpot win. In addition, in general gaming machines, one symbol row is composed of multiple third symbols (for example, third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and a variable pattern display is executed using multiple (for example, three) of the symbol rows, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row, an effect (for example, a reach effect) that increases the expectation of a jackpot win is executed. In this way, by using multiple symbol rows to change the third symbol and perform a change effect to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery will be a jackpot, the player's expectations of winning the jackpot can be gradually increased, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the order of the symbols that make up the symbol string is not changed, and the third symbol is simply displayed in a variable manner for each symbol string. This means that the only variations available are, for example, changing the speed at which each symbol string is displayed, changing the direction in which each symbol string is displayed, or changing the size at which each symbol string is displayed. This creates a problem in that there is a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game by improving the effect of the variable presentation using the variable display of the symbol string.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

According to gaming machine BJ1, the first and second symbol rows are dynamically displayed in different directions, making it easier to distinguish between the first and second symbol rows, and the result of the distinction can be more easily determined from the suggestive information.

A gaming machine BJ2, which has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed in the gaming machine BJ1, the first symbol row is configured to be dynamically displayed in the first direction based on the start of the dynamic display period, and the second symbol row is dynamically displayed in the second direction based on the establishment of a specific condition at a position where the symbols dynamically displayed in the first symbol row and the symbols constituting the second symbol row at least partially overlap with each other.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BJ1, gaming machine BJ2 has the effect of dynamically displaying the first and second symbol rows at overlapping positions, making it possible to perform effects that make effective use of the display area.

A gaming machine BJ3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BJ2, it has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the suggestive information can be dynamically displayed, and the first pattern row and the second pattern row are configured to be dynamically displayed in the first direction and the second direction, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BJ2, gaming machine BJ3 has the effect of increasing the interest in the game because the first and second symbol rows are dynamically displayed in the first and second directions, respectively, based on the start of the dynamic display period.

A gaming machine BJ4 is any one of the gaming machines BJ1 to BJ3, and has a display control means capable of controlling the display of the suggestion information, and the display control means is capable of controlling the display of the first pattern row so as to display the discrimination result according to the display mode of the first pattern row.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine BJ3, gaming machine BJ4 uses the display mode of the first symbol row to display the discrimination result, so the display mode of the dynamic display of the first symbol row can be controlled based on the discrimination result, and the display mode of the dynamic display of the second symbol row can be freely set. This has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect of the dynamic display of the suggestive information and increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine BJ4 has a first display image layer capable of dynamically displaying the first symbol row and a second display image layer capable of dynamically displaying the second symbol row, and the gaming machine is configured such that at least a portion of a first display area in the first display image layer and a second display area in the second display image layer overlap, and in the area where the first display area and the second display area overlap, the first symbol row can be displayed so as to be visible to a player in priority to the second symbol row. A gaming machine BJ5.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine BJ4, gaming machine BJ5 displays the first symbol row so that it is more visible to the player when the first symbol row and the second symbol row overlap. This has the effect of making effective use of the display area while still displaying the display mode showing the determination result in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

In the gaming machine BJ4 or BJ5, the display control means is capable of controlling the display of the first symbol row and the second symbol row so that the multiple symbols constituting the first symbol row and the multiple symbols constituting the second symbol row are arranged in a predetermined order to form a combined symbol row. Gaming machine BJ6.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BJ4 and BJ5, gaming machine BJ6 can dynamically display the first and second symbol rows as a combined symbol row, making the player believe that a combined symbol row is formed. Among these, since the first and second symbol rows can be dynamically displayed in the opposite direction, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising presentation, which has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect.

In the gaming machine BJ6, the display control means is capable of display control so that it is easier to dynamically display the first and second pattern rows as the combined pattern row when the discrimination result is other than the specific discrimination result than when the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result. Gaming machine BJ7.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine BJ6, gaming machine BJ7 makes it more difficult to dynamically display the first and second symbol strings as the combined symbol string when the discrimination result is a specific discrimination result. Therefore, when the dynamic display of the first and second symbol strings is in a different form from the dynamic display of the second symbol string, it is possible to heighten the expectation for a specific discrimination result, and it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

<Feature BK group> (Velo control of the V-sure machine is performed based on the number of balls entered by the attacker)
a first detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the first specific area; a second detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the second specific area; a guide path for guiding a game ball that has passed through the first specific area to the second specific area; and a variable means for varying the second specific area between an allowable state in which a game ball can pass and a restricted state in which it is difficult to pass, the variable means being configured to vary the second specific area from the restricted state to the allowable state based on the detection of a predetermined number of game balls by the first detection means until a variable condition is met.

Conventionally, there have been gaming machines (so-called V-guaranteed machines) that provide a specific area within an attacker that is opened during a jackpot game, and when a gaming ball passes through the specific area during a jackpot game, set a high probability state after the jackpot game ends (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2015-119807 A). In such gaming machines, the percentage at which the high probability state is set can be specified in advance by setting a first state in which the gaming ball is likely to pass through the specific area for a predetermined period based on the elapsed time since the start of the jackpot game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the first state is set based on the time that has elapsed since a jackpot game was played. For example, if a malfunction of the gaming machine occurs during a jackpot game that prevents the gaming ball from landing in the attacker, the predetermined period during which the first state is set may pass, causing a problem that reduces the player's motivation to play.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in the game by increasing the player's motivation to play.

According to gaming machine BK1, the variable means is changed to an allowable state based on the measurement results of the gaming balls that have entered the variable ball entry means, so it is possible to pass gaming balls into the second specific area depending on the number of balls that have entered the variable ball entry means, which has the effect of making the player interested in the number of balls that have entered the variable ball entry means and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine BK2 is characterized in that in gaming machine BK1, the variable means is changed to the permissible state during a period in which the predetermined number of gaming balls in the first specific area can reach the variable means in a state changed to the permissible state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BK1, gaming machine BK2 has the effect of making it possible to cause a predetermined number of gaming balls that have passed through a first specific area to enter a second specific area, and by controlling gaming balls that pass through the second specific area, it is possible to limit the number of balls that enter the second specific area.

Gaming machine BK3 is characterized in that it has a period determination means capable of determining the period from when the predetermined number of gaming balls pass through the first specific area until the gaming ball is detected by the second detection means, and an abnormality processing means capable of executing an abnormality processing based on the determination result of the period determination means, in the gaming machine BK1 or BK2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BK1 and BK2, gaming machine BK3 has the effect of being able to detect malfunctions early on, such as when a predetermined number of gaming balls have passed through the first specific area but are stuck on the guideway.

Gaming machine BK4 is characterized in that in any of gaming machines BK1 to BK3, the termination condition is set to be met when a period of time that is shorter than the period of time it takes for the next gaming ball to reach the variable means has elapsed after the predetermined number of gaming balls have been detected by the second detection means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK3, gaming machine BK4 has the effect of being able to reliably cause a predetermined number of gaming balls to enter the second specific area.

BK5 is a gaming machine that is any one of BK1 to BK4 and is characterized by having a bonus granting means that can grant a bonus that is advantageous to the player based on the detection of a gaming ball by the second detection means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BK1 to BK4, gaming machine BK5 has the effect of making the player motivated to land the gaming ball in the second specific area even when a bonus game is played, thereby preventing the bonus game from becoming boring.

<Feature BL group> (By varying the pattern row, some of the patterns in the pattern row are switched)
a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification pattern; a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification pattern indicating a specific identification result is displayed after the identification pattern is dynamically displayed; and a bonus type determination means for determining a bonus type to be awarded by the bonus awarding means, the gaming machine having: a discrimination means for performing discrimination, a display means for displaying an identification pattern indicating a result of the discrimination means, and a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period including at least a period during which the identification pattern is dynamically displayed; and a setting means for setting the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means so that a first identification pattern is displayed as the identification pattern indicating a first result during a first period, and a second identification pattern different from the first identification pattern is displayed during a second period to indicate a second result different from the first result.

Conventionally, there have been machines that display a third symbol in a variable manner as identification information to indicate the result of a special symbol lottery. In addition, there have been machines that execute various effects (variation effects) during the variable display of the third symbol, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing the player to play while expecting a jackpot win. In addition, in general gaming machines, one symbol row is formed by multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and a pattern variable display is executed using multiple (e.g., three) of the symbol rows, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row, a performance (e.g., a reach performance) that increases the expectation of a jackpot win is executed. In this way, by executing a variable performance to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win or not while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using multiple symbol rows, the player's expectation of a jackpot win can be gradually increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, only changes during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops and is displayed. This causes a problem in that players get bored with the game and lose motivation to play during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players by suppressing the decline in their desire to play during the period when the third symbol changes.

According to gaming machine BL1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification pattern dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification pattern dynamically displayed in the second period during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, so that the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Gaming machine BL2 is characterized in that in gaming machine BL1, the dynamic display means is capable of displaying the first identification symbol in a static manner at the end of the first period, and the second period is a period at least after the first period has elapsed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BL1, gaming machine BL2 can easily notify the player that the first period has ended and the second period has begun, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Gaming machine BL3 is characterized in that in gaming machine BL2, the dynamic display means is capable of displaying, as the first result, the first identification pattern to indicate that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BL2, gaming machine BL3 can notify the player of the determination result of the determination means before the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means has elapsed, so that players who wish to quickly understand the determination result of the determination means can focus on the dynamic display of the identification pattern executed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game early on, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine BL4 is characterized in that in gaming machine BL3, the dynamic display means is capable of displaying the second identification pattern to indicate the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means as the second result.

Gaming machine BL4 provides the following effect in addition to the effect provided by gaming machine BL3. That is, after the end of the second period, an identification pattern for indicating the bonus type can be displayed. In other words, after displaying the discrimination result of the discrimination means, the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means can be displayed. Therefore, after notifying the player that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means can be notified to the player, which has the effect of enabling the dynamic display of the second period to be executed with at least a sense of security that bonus play will be executed.

Gaming machine BL5 is characterized in that in gaming machine BL4, the bonus type determination means determines one of a plurality of bonus types including at least a first bonus type and a second bonus type that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus type, and the second identification pattern is displayed in a display mode that includes at least information for indicating the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine BL4, gaming machine BL5 has the effect of allowing the player to predict the determined bonus means even during the period when the second identification pattern is dynamically displayed, since the display mode of the second identification pattern indicates the bonus type determined by the bonus type determination means, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine BL6, which has a pattern row setting means capable of setting a pattern row in which the multiple identification patterns dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means are displayed in a predetermined order, the dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying the identification patterns based on the pattern row set by the pattern row setting means, and the pattern row setting means is capable of setting a second pattern row in which the first identification pattern forming at least a part of the first pattern row set during a first period is switched to the second identification pattern.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BL5, gaming machine BL6 sets a second pattern row in which the first identification pattern forming at least a part of the first pattern row is switched to the second identification pattern, so that the number of identification patterns in the first pattern row and the number of identification patterns in the second pattern row can be made the same. Therefore, there is no need to vary the dynamic display mode of the identification patterns executed by the dynamic display means according to the type of pattern row that is set, which has the effect of reducing the processing load for dynamically displaying the identification patterns.

In the gaming machine BL6, the symbol row setting means can form the first symbol row by overlapping first identification symbols to indicate the same discrimination result of the discrimination means, and when setting the second symbol row, the gaming machine BL7 is characterized in that one of the overlapping first identification symbols can be switched to the second identification symbol.

According to gaming machine BL7, the first identification symbols that are overlapping in the first symbol string are switched to the second identification symbols, so that even during the second period, it is possible to confirm each of the first identification symbols that were displayed in the dynamic display executed during the first period. This has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Feature BM group> (Release the restriction by another operation while the button operation is restricted)
A gaming machine BM1 having a display means for displaying an identification information showing a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine having an operable operation means, an operation discrimination means capable of discriminating at least a first operation and a second operation different from the first operation as types of operation for the operation means, a setting execution means capable of executing a setting based on a discrimination result of the operation discrimination means, and a restriction means for restricting the setting execution means from executing a first setting when the operation discrimination means discriminates that the operation is the first operation, and the setting execution means is capable of executing the first setting when the operation discrimination means discriminates that the operation is the second operation during the restriction by the restriction means.

Conventionally, when a special symbol lottery is executed, many machines are configured to notify (stop display) the lottery result through a specified special symbol changing period, and various effects (changing effects) are executed during the period from when the special symbol lottery is executed to when the lottery result is stopped display (special symbol changing period), in order to prevent players from quickly becoming bored with the game. Among these, there are machines that are configured to prepare multiple performance modes in advance, and to vary the manner of the changing effects executed during the special symbol changing period for each performance mode (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-249877 A).

In a gaming machine configured in this way, different variable presentations can be provided to the player by switching presentation modes, which prevents the player from becoming bored early on with the game due to the same variable presentations being provided all the time. Furthermore, some gaming machines allow the player to switch presentation modes at will by operating an operating means that the player can operate. In such gaming machines, the player can select the presentation mode that interests him/her most from among multiple presentation modes, which prevents the player from becoming bored early on with the game due to a variable presentation that he/she finds less interesting being executed. Furthermore, the player's interest in the game can be improved because he/she needs to operate the operating means to switch presentation modes.

However, as mentioned above, if the player is allowed to switch the presentation mode at any time by operating the operating means, for example, just before the result of the special pattern lottery is frozen and displayed, or when a short period of change is set as the special pattern change period, the switching of the presentation mode makes it difficult for the player to grasp the result of the special pattern lottery, resulting in a problem of reduced motivation to operate the operating means.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase players' motivation to play.

According to the gaming machine BM1, even if the first setting based on the first operation is restricted, the first setting can be executed by executing the second operation. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means in an attempt to execute various operations.

In the gaming machine BM1, the setting execution means is capable of executing a second setting different from the first setting when the operation determination means determines that the first operation is performed during the regulation by the regulation means. Gaming machine BM2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BM1, gaming machine BM2 executes the second setting when the first operation is executed during regulation, which makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the setting execution means does not execute anything even though the first operation is executed. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operation means.

A gaming machine BM3, which has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means in the gaming machine BM1 or BM2, and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is satisfied, and the restricting means is capable of restricting the first setting from being executed by the setting execution means when the short gaming state is set and the operation determining means has determined that the first operation has been performed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BM1 and BM2, gaming machine BM3 can regulate the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means during a short game state, and can prevent the player from having difficulty understanding the determination result of the determination means due to the execution of the setting execution means. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine BM3 is characterized in that it has a presentation mode setting means capable of setting at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode based on the setting executed by the setting execution means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BM3, gaming machine BM4 can set different presentation modes based on the operation of the operating means, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

Gaming machine BM5 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines BM1 to BM4, the operation means has a first operation section for executing the first operation, and a second operation section different from the first operation section for executing the second operation.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BM1 to BM4, the gaming machine BM5 operates different operation sections when performing the first operation and when performing the second operation, which prevents the player from mistakenly performing the first operation and the second operation. This has the effect of providing the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Gaming machine BM6 is characterized in that in gaming machine BM5, the second operation unit is located in a location that is more difficult for a player to operate during play than the first operation unit.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BM5, gaming machine BM6 can vary the ease of operation of each operation unit, making it possible to set a first operation using a first operation unit as a normal operation and a second operation using a second operation unit as an emergency operation. This has the effect of preventing the player from worrying about which operation to perform.

<Feature BN group> (Perform different operations while limiting button operations)
A gaming machine having a display means for displaying identification information indicating a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine BN1 having an operation means that can be operated by a player, a first setting execution means that can execute a first setting corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means, a restriction means that restricts the execution of the first setting based on the operation of the operation means, and a second setting execution means that executes a second setting different from the first setting when the operation means is operated while the execution of the first setting is restricted by the restriction means.

Conventionally, there have been machines that display a third symbol in a variable manner as identification information to indicate the result of a special symbol lottery. In addition, there have been machines that execute various effects (variation effects) during the variable display of the third symbol, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing the player to play while expecting a jackpot win. In addition, in general gaming machines, one symbol row is formed by multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and a pattern variable display is executed using multiple (e.g., three) of the symbol rows, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row, a performance (e.g., a reach performance) that increases the expectation of a jackpot win is executed. In this way, by executing a variable performance to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win or not while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using multiple symbol rows, the player's expectation of a jackpot win can be gradually increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, only changes during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops and is displayed. This causes a problem in that players get bored with the game and lose motivation to play during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players by suppressing the decline in their desire to play during the period when the third symbol changes.

According to gaming machine BN1, during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, it is possible to show different results between the first identification pattern dynamically displayed during the first period and the second identification pattern dynamically displayed during the second period, so that the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine BN1, if the operating means is operated while the first setting is restricted, the second setting is executed, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which nothing is executed despite the operation of the operating means. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means.

A gaming machine BN1, characterized in that the regulating means is capable of regulating the execution of the first setting when a specific condition is met during the dynamic display period of the identification information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BN1, gaming machine BN2 has the effect of preventing the player from having difficulty understanding the results of the dynamic display of the identification information due to the execution of the first setting being restricted by the restricting means while the dynamic display of the identification information is being executed.

A gaming machine BN3 having a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a game state setting means capable of setting a short game state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is satisfied, and the restricting means is capable of restricting the setting execution means from executing the first setting when the short game state is set and the operation determining means has determined that the first operation has been performed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BN1 and BN2, gaming machine BN3 can regulate the execution of settings based on the operation of the operating means during a short game state, and can prevent the player from having difficulty understanding the determination result of the determination means due to the execution of the setting execution means. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine BN3 is characterized in that it has a presentation mode setting means capable of setting at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode based on the first setting executed by the setting execution means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BN3, gaming machine BN4 can set different presentation modes based on the operation of the operating means, which has the effect of preventing players from becoming bored with the game too early.

Gaming machine BM5 is one of gaming machines BN1 to BN4, characterized in that the operation means has a first operation section for executing a first operation, and a second operation section different from the first operation section for executing a second operation different from the first operation.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BN1 to BN4, gaming machine BN5 has the advantage that when performing the first operation and when performing the second operation, different operation parts are used, which prevents the player from mistakenly performing the first operation and the second operation. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

Gaming machine BN6 is characterized in that the second operation unit in gaming machine BN5 is located in a location that is more difficult for a player to operate during a game than the first operation unit.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine BN5, the gaming machine BN6 can vary the ease of operation of each operation unit, making it possible to set a first operation using a first operation unit as a normal operation and a second operation using a second operation unit as an emergency operation. This has the effect of preventing the player from worrying about which operation to perform.

<Characteristic BO group> (If you change stages when it is difficult to do so, it is your chance)
A gaming machine BO1 having a display means for displaying identification information showing a discrimination result, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific discrimination result is statically displayed on the display means, the gaming machine BO1 having an operation means operable by a player, a presentation mode setting means for setting at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode as presentation modes based on the operation of the operation means, and a period setting means for setting a first period during which the presentation mode setting means can set the presentation mode, and a second period during which it is more difficult to set the presentation mode than the first period, the gaming machine being characterized in that when the presentation mode setting is executed during the second period, it is possible to provide the player with more advantageous information than when the presentation mode is executed during the first period.

Conventionally, there have been machines that display a third symbol in a variable manner as identification information to indicate the result of a special symbol lottery. In addition, there have been machines that execute various effects (variation effects) during the variable display of the third symbol, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing the player to play while expecting a jackpot win. In addition, in general gaming machines, one symbol row is formed by multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and a pattern variable display is executed using multiple (e.g., three) of the symbol rows, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row, a performance (e.g., a reach performance) that increases the expectation of a jackpot win is executed. In this way, by executing a variable performance to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win or not while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using multiple symbol rows, the player's expectation of a jackpot win can be gradually increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, only changes during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops and is displayed. This causes a problem in that players get bored with the game and lose motivation to play during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players by suppressing the decline in their desire to play during the period when the third symbol changes.

According to gaming machine BO1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification pattern dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification pattern dynamically displayed in the second period during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, so that the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

According to the gaming machine BO1, when a presentation mode is set during the second period in which it is difficult to set a presentation mode, advantageous information can be provided to the player, so that the player can play the game while hoping that the presentation mode will be set during the second period. This has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine BO2, characterized in that in gaming machine BO1, the presentation mode setting means is capable of setting a third presentation mode different from the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode when executing the setting of the presentation mode during the second period.

In addition to the effects of game machine BO1, game machine BO2 has the effect of providing the player with an easily understandable effect by setting the third presentation mode, which can inform the player that a presentation mode has been set during the second period.

A gaming machine BO4, which is any one of the gaming machines BO1 to BO3, has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is satisfied, and the period setting means is capable of setting the second period when the short gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BO1 to BO3, the gaming machine BO4 makes it difficult for the presentation mode to be set during a short game state, which prevents the player from having difficulty understanding the determination result of the determination means due to the presentation mode being set. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine BO5 is any one of the gaming machines BO1 to BO4, characterized in that it has a notification means capable of notifying a player that the second period will be set by the period setting means before the second period is set.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BO1 to BO4, the gaming machine BO5 allows the player to know in advance that the second period will be set, and therefore allows the second period to be set with the desired presentation mode set. This has the effect of preventing the second period from being set in a presentation mode that the player does not want, which would reduce the player's motivation to play.

<Feature BP group> (Advance stage change by predicting the timing)
a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means, an identification information indicating a result of the determination by the determination means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating that the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result is statically displayed on the display means. The gaming machine BP1 further comprises: a pre-determination means for pre-determining the information stored in the information storage means before the determination by the determination means based on the information is executed; and a switching means for switching the presentation mode from a first presentation mode to a second presentation mode different from the first presentation mode when a switching condition is established, wherein the switching condition is more likely to be established when the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means is a second pre-determination result different from the first pre-determination result than when the pre-determination result of the pre-determination means is a first pre-determination result.

Conventionally, there have been machines that display a third symbol in a variable manner as identification information to indicate the result of a special symbol lottery. In addition, there have been machines that execute various effects (variation effects) during the variable display of the third symbol, suggesting the result of the special symbol lottery to the player, allowing the player to play while expecting a jackpot win. In addition, in general gaming machines, one symbol row is formed by multiple third symbols (e.g., third symbols numbered 1 to 9), and a pattern variable display is executed using multiple (e.g., three) of the symbol rows, and when a predetermined third symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position in the other symbol rows except for the one symbol row, a performance (e.g., a reach performance) that increases the expectation of a jackpot win is executed. In this way, by executing a variable performance to suggest whether the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot win or not while displaying the third symbol in a variable manner using multiple symbol rows, the player's expectation of a jackpot win can be gradually increased, thereby improving the interest of the game.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the third symbol, which indicates the result of the special symbol lottery, only changes during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops and is displayed. This causes a problem in that players get bored with the game and lose motivation to play during the period from when the third symbol starts to change until it stops.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of players by suppressing the decline in their desire to play during the period when the third symbol changes.

According to the gaming machine BP1, it is possible to show different results between the first identification pattern dynamically displayed in the first period and the second identification pattern dynamically displayed in the second period during the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means, so that the player can continue to be interested in the identification pattern dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play during the dynamic display period and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

With the gaming machine BP1, the ease with which the switching condition is met can be varied depending on the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means, which has the effect of allowing the player to predict the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means when the presentation mode is switched, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine BP2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine BP1, it has an operation means that can be operated by a player and an operation discrimination means that can discriminate the operation on the operation means, and the switching condition can be established when the operation is discriminated by the operation discrimination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BP1, gaming machine BP2 can also satisfy the switching condition when the player operates the operating means, which has the effect of encouraging the player to operate the operating means and preventing the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

A gaming machine BP2, characterized in that the switching means is capable of switching from the first presentation mode to a third presentation mode different from the second presentation mode when the result of the determination by the pre-determination means is the second pre-determination result.

In addition to the effect of the gaming machine BP2, the gaming machine BP3 can set the third presentation mode, thereby making it possible to inform the player that the result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means is the second pre-determination result. This has the effect of providing the player with a presentation that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine BP4, which is any one of the gaming machines BP1 to BP3, has a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a short gaming state in which a short dynamic display period is likely to be determined as the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means until a termination condition is satisfied, and is characterized in that the switching condition is more difficult to satisfy when the short gaming state is set than when the short gaming state is not set.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BP1 to BP3, the gaming machine BP4 can make it difficult to switch presentation modes during a short game state, which prevents the player from having difficulty understanding the results of the discrimination means due to the presentation mode being set. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine BP5 is any one of the gaming machines BP1 to BP4, characterized in that it has a notification means capable of notifying a player that the short gaming state will be set by the gaming state setting means before the short gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BP1 to BP4, gaming machine BP5 allows the player to know in advance that a short play state will be set, so that the player is motivated to operate the operating means to achieve the switching condition before the short play state is set. This makes it easier to set the short play state with the desired presentation mode set, and has the effect of preventing the short play state from being set in a presentation mode that the player does not want, which would reduce the player's motivation to play.

<5066 Series>
<Feature CA group> (When the number of times the special chart 2 lottery is performed using the special chart 2 reservation acquired during the time reduction exceeds a certain number of times, the probability of receiving a favorable bonus by the special chart 2 lottery increases)
A gaming machine CA1 having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a discrimination means capable of making a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a first discrimination result, and a setting means capable of setting a specific setting after the specific game is executed until an end condition is met, characterized in that the gaming machine CA1 has a setting control means capable of causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that the second discrimination result is different from the first discrimination result, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating the second discrimination result when a specific period is set.

According to gaming machine CA1, when a specific period is set, it is possible to determine that the result is the second judgment, and therefore when a specific period is set, the result is determined to be the second judgment, and the specific setting is set, so that the specific setting is set at a timing different from normal times, and this has the effect of increasing interest in the game by not only executing a specific game, but also increasing the expectation for the period in which the specific period is set.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

A gaming machine CA2, which has a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, the acquisition means is capable of acquiring first information as the information based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, and is capable of acquiring second information as the information based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating the second discrimination result based on the second information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CA1, gaming machine CA2 is configured so that the second judgment result can be determined by having the ball enter the second ball entry means, so that the value of the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means can be varied, and when a specific period is set, the game can be played as if the second information was stored, and the game can be made more interesting by diversifying the game.

Gaming machine CA3 is characterized in that the specific setting set based on the determination of the second discrimination result in gaming machine CA1 or CA2 is configured to be set for a longer period than the specific setting set after the execution of a specific game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines CA1 and CA2, gaming machine CA3 makes it possible to vary the period during which a specific setting is set depending on the results of the determination, which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing interest.

<Feature CB group> (If you win both the jackpot and the time-saving bonus in one special drawing, you will receive more special bonuses than if you won only one of them)
a setting control means for causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that the specific game is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating between the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result in a game machine CB1 having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a discrimination means capable of making a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a first discrimination result, and a setting means capable of setting a specific setting until an end condition is satisfied based on the fact that a specific condition is satisfied after the specific game is executed, the gaming machine CB1 having a setting control means for causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that the specific discrimination result is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating between the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result in a duplicated manner.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine CB1 is configured to be able to discriminate between the first and second discrimination results in a redundant manner, so that a specific setting can be set even when the specific condition is not met, and this has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the timing at which the specific setting is set.

A gaming machine CB2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine CB1, a type of specific game that is advantageous to the player is made easier to execute based on the fact that the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result are discriminated as overlapping by the discrimination means, compared to a case where the overlapping was not discriminated as the specific game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CB1, gaming machine CB2 has the effect of diversifying games by granting players benefits corresponding to various discrimination results, since specific types of games that are advantageous to the player are likely to be executed by overlapping discrimination results.

Gaming machine CB3, which is characterized in that in gaming machine CB1 or CB2, the setting control means is configured to be able to set the specific setting during the period in which the discrimination means discriminates whether the result is the first discrimination result after discriminating that the result is the second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CB1 or CB2, gaming machine CB3 has the effect of making a specific setting during the period in which, when the second discrimination result is determined, it is determined whether the result is the first discrimination result, and therefore it is possible to determine whether the result is the first discrimination result in a state in which the specific setting is made, and thus making it possible to make discriminations in a variety of states.

<Feature CC group> (The degree of advantage when winning the time-saving jackpot during the time-saving state is changed depending on the time-saving trigger)
a first determination result obtained by the determination means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means being a specific first determination result; and a game state setting means for setting a second game state in which the determination by the determination means is more likely to be performed than a first game state, the game state setting means being capable of executing at least a first setting for setting the second game state after the bonus game execution means is terminated, and a second setting for setting the second game state without executing the bonus game based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means being a second determination result different from the first determination result, and the gaming machine being capable of changing a selection ratio of the type of bonus game to be executed based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means during the second game state being the first determination result according to the setting type.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, when an advantageous state is set, although there is an effect that the game win/loss lottery is more likely to be held, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because the same benefit is always awarded if the game win/loss lottery results in a win during the advantageous state. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to gaming machine CC1, the selection ratio for the type of bonus game is variable depending on the set type, so even the same second game state can be made different, which has the effect of diversifying the game and increasing interest in the game without having to set many game states.

In gaming machine CC1, the second game state is set to continue until a termination condition is met, and gaming machine CC2 is characterized in that, when the bonus game is executed while the second setting is set, it is easy to set the period until the termination condition is met to be longer after the bonus game is executed.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine CC1, gaming machine CC2 has the effect of lengthening the period during which the second gaming state is set by making the second setting, which creates an increased interest in the period until the end condition is set when a bonus game is executed in the second gaming state.

Gaming machine CC3 is characterized in that in gaming machine CC1 or CC2, the discrimination means is regulated from discriminating the second discrimination result depending on the gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines CC1 and CC2, gaming machine CC3 has the effect of making the player more interested in the set gaming state and anticipating the setting of a gaming state in which the second discrimination result can be discerned, since the second discrimination result is not determined by the gaming state.

<Feature CD group> (The more you get into it, the easier it is to set advantageous time-saving when time-saving is established)
a game state setting means for setting the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition when the second game state is set, and the game machine has setting information discrimination means for discriminating setting information that can be set when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, and is capable of setting the second game state in which the end condition is less likely to be established after the bonus game is ended when the setting information discrimination means discriminates second setting information that is set later than the first setting information,

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine CD1, the longer the period during which the second game state is set, the more difficult it becomes for the end condition to be met when a bonus game is played. Therefore, it is possible to alternate between setting a period during which the player expects a bonus game to be played and a period during which the player does not expect a bonus game to be played, which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine CD2, which is characterized in that the gaming machine CD1 has a setting information setting means capable of setting the setting information based on the fact that the discrimination means has determined that a specific second discrimination result different from the specific first discrimination result, and the setting information setting means is configured to be capable of setting setting information corresponding to the type of setting information that has been set.

In addition to the effects of the game machine CD1, the game machine CD2 has the effect of being able to regularly vary the setting information set according to the history of the setting information, making it easy to determine the period during which the second game state is set.

A gaming machine CD3, which is a gaming machine CD1 or CD2, is characterized in that the discrimination means regulates the discrimination of the second discrimination result depending on the gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines CD1 and CD2, gaming machine CD3 has the effect of increasing interest in the set gaming state and creating anticipation that a gaming state in which the second discrimination result can be discerned will be set, since the second discrimination result is not determined by the gaming state.

<Feature CE group> (Special chart 1 that can execute big win lottery + time-saving lottery, and special chart 2 that can execute big win lottery + small win lottery)
a first benefit granting means for granting a first benefit based on a result of the first benefit executed by the first benefit execution means being a first benefit result, and a second benefit different from the first benefit based on the result of the first benefit execution being a second benefit result different from the first benefit; a second benefit granting means for granting a second benefit based on the result of the second benefit execution being a third benefit result, and a third benefit different from the first benefit and the second benefit based on the result of the second benefit execution being a fourth benefit result different from the third benefit result;

In the past, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a ball into a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special benefit that is advantageous to the player is awarded. A configuration has been proposed that can execute a first lottery and a second lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the bonus awarded if a player wins is the same whether the first lottery is held or the second lottery is held, which can lead to the game becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine CE1 is configured to be able to award different benefits when the first judgment is made and when the second judgment is made, which has the effect of encouraging the player to play in order to make different judgments, and preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Feature CF group> (When a second advantageous condition is established between the establishment of a first advantageous condition and the setting of the first advantageous state, a specific advantageous state can be set)
A gaming machine having a first judgment means capable of performing a first judgment to determine that a first condition has been established, a first state setting means capable of setting a first advantageous state based on the first judgment means determining that the first condition has been established, a second judgment means capable of performing a second judgment to determine that a second condition different from the first condition has been established, and a second state setting means capable of setting a second advantageous state based on the second judgment means determining that the second condition has been established, characterized in that the gaming machine CF1 has a third state setting means capable of setting a third advantageous state which is more advantageous to a player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state based on the second judgment means determining that the second condition has been established between the time when the first judgment means determines that the first condition has been established and the time when the first advantageous state is set by the first state setting means.

In the past, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a ball into a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special benefit that is advantageous to the player is awarded. A configuration has been proposed that can execute a first lottery and a second lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, whether the first lottery is executed or the second lottery is executed, if the lottery result is one in which a bonus is awarded, the corresponding bonus is simply awarded, creating the problem that gameplay can become monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent gameplay from becoming monotonous.

According to gaming machine CF1, a first advantageous state is set based on the first condition being met, and a second advantageous state is set based on the second condition being met. Then, if the second condition is met between the time the first condition is met and the time the first advantageous state is set, a third advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set. This has the effect of keeping the player interested in the timing at which the first condition is met and the timing at which the second condition is met, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Feature CG group> (Performs advantageous lotteries at specific intervals)
a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting the second game state based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means executed in a state in which the first game state is set being a second judgment result different from the first judgment result, the game state setting means being capable of setting the first game state based on the establishment of a termination condition in a state in which the second game state is set, and being capable of setting a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means executed in a state in which the first game state is set being a third judgment result different from the first judgment result and the second judgment result.

In the past, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the same winning/losing lottery is always executed, which can lead to monotony in gameplay. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent gameplay from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine CG1, while the second gaming state is set, it is difficult to set the third gaming state, so that the player aims to play a game in which the third gaming state is set during the period in which the first gaming state is set. This has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous, since it is possible to execute a game with a different degree of advantage depending on the gaming situation.

A gaming machine CG2, characterized in that in the gaming machine CG1, the discrimination means is capable of executing the discrimination so that the probability that the result of the discrimination will be the third discrimination result is lower than the probability that the result of the discrimination will be the second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CG1, gaming machine CG2 is more likely to result in the second determination result than the third determination result, and therefore allows the player to play with the aim of setting the third gaming state while avoiding the game state transitioning to the second gaming state in which it is difficult to set the third gaming state due to the determination result of the determination means becoming the second determination result. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine CG3 is characterized in that it has an end condition setting means for setting, as the end condition, a first end condition that can be established based on the number of times the determination by the determination means executed when the second gaming state is set reaching a predetermined number, in the gaming machine CG1 or CG2.

Gaming machine CG3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine CG1 or CG2. That is, since the second gaming state can be ended when the number of determinations performed during the second gaming state reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to perform determination by the determination means in the first gaming state at least at a specific period. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine CG3, characterized in that the end condition setting means is capable of setting a second end condition that can be established based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means being a specific judgment result.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine CG3, gaming machine CG4 has the effect of providing the player with an unexpected gameplay by ending the second game state at an interval shorter than the specific period when the second ending condition is met.

Gaming machine CG5 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines CG1 to CG4, the discrimination means is capable of executing the discrimination such that the probability that the result of the discrimination executed during the second gaming state will be the third discrimination result is lower than the probability that the result of the discrimination executed during the first gaming state will be the third discrimination result.

Gaming machine CG5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines CG1 to CG4. That is, since the third gaming state is more likely to be set in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state, it has the effect of allowing the player to play in the hope that a determination will be made in a situation where the second gaming state is not set.

<Feature CH group> (You can set time-saving that is better to finish and time-saving that is better not to finish)
a first determination result indicating a first determination result obtained by the determination means and a second determination result indicating a second determination result obtained by the determination means and a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state; and a type setting means for setting at least a first setting for setting the second game state after the bonus game execution means is terminated and a second setting for setting the second game state without executing the bonus game based on the result of the determination made by the determination means being a second determination result different from the first determination result, the game machine CH1 being characterized in that the game state setting means is capable of setting a second advantageous game state that is more advantageous than the first game state and a second disadvantageous game state that is less advantageous than the first game state according to the setting type set by the type setting means.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the advantageous state is simply set after the bonus game is executed, which creates the problem of the game becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine CH1 can set a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state and a gaming state that is less advantageous than the first gaming state, which has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Technical Concept of 5068>
<Feature DA group> (When the number of times the special chart 2 lottery is performed using the special chart 2 reservation acquired during the time reduction exceeds a certain number of times, the probability of receiving a favorable bonus by the special chart 2 lottery increases)
A gaming machine DA1 having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, a discrimination means capable of making a discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, a specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a first discrimination result, and a setting means capable of setting a specific setting after the specific game is executed until an end condition is met, characterized in that the gaming machine has a setting control means capable of causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that the second discrimination result is different from the first discrimination result, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating the second discrimination result when a specific period is set.

According to the gaming machine DA1, when a specific period is set, it is possible to determine that the result is the second judgment, and therefore when a specific period is set, the result is determined to be the second judgment, and the specific setting is set, so that the specific setting is set at a timing different from normal times, and this has the effect of increasing interest in the game by not only executing a specific game, but also increasing the expectation for the period in which the specific period is set.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

A gaming machine DA2 has a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, the acquisition means is capable of acquiring first information as the information based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, and is capable of acquiring second information as the information based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating the second discrimination result based on the second information.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine DA1, the gaming machine DA2 is configured so that the second judgment result can be determined by having the ball enter the second ball entry means, so that the value of the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means can be varied, and when a specific period is set, the game can be played as if the second information was stored, and the game can be made more interesting by diversifying the game.

A gaming machine DA3, characterized in that the specific setting set based on the determination of the second determination result in the gaming machine DA1 or DA2 is configured to be set for a longer period than the specific setting set after the execution of a specific game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines DA1 and DA2, gaming machine DA3 makes it possible to vary the period during which a specific setting is set depending on the results of the determination, which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing interest.

<Feature DB group> (If you win both the jackpot and the time-saving bonus in one special drawing, you will receive more special bonuses than if you won only one of them)
a setting control means for causing the setting means to set the specific setting without executing the specific game when the discrimination means discriminates that a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is obtained, and the discrimination means is configured to be capable of discriminating between the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine DB1 is configured to be able to discriminate between the first and second discrimination results in a redundant manner, so that a specific setting can be set even when the specific condition is not met, and this has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by diversifying the timing at which the specific setting is set.

A gaming machine DB2 characterized in that, in the gaming machine DB1, a type of specific game that is advantageous to the player is made easier to execute based on the fact that the first discrimination result and the second discrimination result are discriminated as overlapping by the discrimination means, compared to a case where the overlapping was not discriminated as the specific game.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine DB1, the gaming machine DB2 has the effect of diversifying games by granting the player benefits corresponding to the various discrimination results, since it is easy to execute specific types of games that are advantageous to the player by discriminating them in overlapping fashion.

In the gaming machine DB1 or DB2, the setting control means is configured to be able to set the specific setting during the period in which the discrimination means discriminates whether the result is the first discrimination result after discriminating that the result is the second discrimination result. Gaming machine DB4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DB1 or DB2, gaming machine DB4 has the effect that, when the second discrimination result is determined, a specific setting is made during the period in which it is determined whether the result is the first discrimination result, which is executed thereafter, so that it is possible to determine whether the result is the first discrimination result in a state in which the specific setting is made, and thus it is possible to perform discrimination in a variety of states.

<Characteristic DC group> (The degree of advantage when winning the time-saving jackpot during the time-saving state is varied depending on the time-saving trigger)
a first determination result indicating that the second game state is more likely to be determined than a first game state; and a second determination result indicating that the second game state is more likely to be determined than a first game state. The gaming machine DC1 is characterized in that the gaming machine DC1 has a determination means capable of performing a determination, a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means being a specific first determination result, and a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the determination by the determination means is more likely to be determined than a first game state, the game state setting means being capable of performing at least a first setting capable of setting the second game state after the bonus game execution means is terminated, and a second setting capable of setting the second game state without executing the bonus game based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means being a second determination result different from the first determination result, and the gaming machine is capable of changing a selection ratio of the type of the bonus game to be executed based on the result of the determination performed by the determination means during the second game state being the first determination result according to the setting type.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, when an advantageous state is set, although there is an effect that the game win/loss lottery is more likely to be held, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because the same benefit is always awarded if the game win/loss lottery results in a win during the advantageous state. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine DC1, the selection ratio for the type of bonus game is variable depending on the set type, so even the same second game state can be made different, which has the effect of diversifying the game and increasing the interest in the game without having to set many game states.

In the gaming machine DC1, the second gaming state is set to continue until a termination condition is met, and when the bonus game is executed while the second setting is set, the gaming machine DC2 is characterized in that it is easy to set it so that the period until the termination condition is met after the bonus game is executed can be extended.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine DC1, the gaming machine DC2 has the effect of lengthening the period during which the second gaming state is set by making the second setting, which has the effect of making the player more interested in the period until the end condition is set when a bonus game is executed in the second gaming state.

Gaming machine DC3, which is a gaming machine DC1 or DC2, is characterized in that the discrimination means regulates the discrimination of the second discrimination result depending on the gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines DC1 and DC2, gaming machine DC3 has the effect of making the player more interested in the set gaming state and anticipating the setting of a gaming state in which the second discrimination result can be discerned, since the second discrimination result is not determined depending on the gaming state.

<Feature DD group> (The more you get into it, the easier it is to set advantageous time-saving when time-saving is established)
a game state setting means for setting the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition when the second game state is set, and the gaming machine has setting information discrimination means for discriminating setting information that can be set when the second game state is set by the game state setting means, and is capable of setting the second game state in which the end condition is less likely to be established when the setting information discrimination means discriminates second setting information that is set later than the first setting information when the setting information discrimination means discriminates second setting information that is set later than the first setting information, wherein the second game state is set when the bonus game is ended.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, because an advantageous state was not set unless a bonus game was played, there was a problem that the game became monotonous for players who continued playing for a long period of time without winning the lottery. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

According to gaming machine DD1, the longer the period during which the second game state is set, the more difficult it becomes for the end condition to be met when a bonus game is played. This makes it possible to alternate between a period during which the player expects a bonus game to be played and a period during which the player does not expect a bonus game to be played, which has the effect of diversifying the game and further increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine DD2, which is characterized in that it has a setting information setting means capable of setting the setting information based on the fact that the discrimination means has determined that a specific second discrimination result different from the specific first discrimination result in the gaming machine DD1, and the setting information setting means is configured to be capable of setting setting information corresponding to the type of setting information that has been set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DD1, gaming machine DD2 has the effect of being able to regularly vary the setting information set according to the history of the setting information, making it easy to determine the period during which the second gaming state is set.

Gaming machine DD3 is characterized in that in gaming machine DD1 or DD2, the discrimination means regulates the discrimination of the second discrimination result depending on the gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines DD1 and DD2, gaming machine DD3 has the effect of making the player more interested in the set gaming state and anticipating the setting of a gaming state in which the second discrimination result can be discerned, since the second discrimination result is not determined by the gaming state.

<Feature DE group> (Special chart 1 that can execute big win lottery + time-saving lottery, and special chart 2 that can execute big win lottery + small win lottery)
a first benefit granting means for granting a first benefit when a result of the first benefit executed by the first benefit execution means is a first benefit result, and a second benefit granting means for granting a second benefit different from the first benefit when the result of the first benefit execution is a second benefit result; and a second benefit granting means for granting the first benefit when a result of the second benefit execution by the second benefit execution means is a specific second benefit result, and a third benefit different from the first benefit and the second benefit when the result of the second benefit execution is a fourth benefit result different from the third benefit result, wherein the gaming machine is configured so that the third benefit is not granted based on the first benefit execution by the first benefit execution means, and the second benefit is not granted based on the second benefit execution by the second benefit execution means.

In the past, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a ball into a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special benefit that is advantageous to the player is awarded. A configuration has been proposed that can execute a first lottery and a second lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the bonus awarded if a player wins is the same whether the first lottery is held or the second lottery is held, which can lead to the game becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine DE1 is configured to be able to award different benefits when the first judgment is made and when the second judgment is made, which has the effect of encouraging the player to play in order to make different judgments, and preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

<Feature DF group> (If a second advantageous condition is established between the establishment of a first advantageous condition and the setting of the first advantageous state, a specific advantageous state can be set)
a display means for displaying first identification information showing a result of the first determination made by the first determination means; a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information and then statically displaying the first identification information in a manner showing the first determination result; a second determination means for performing a second determination; and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information showing a result of the second determination made by the second determination means and then statically displaying the second identification information in a manner showing the second determination result. The gaming machine DF1 is characterized in that it is configured such that when dynamic display of the first identification information is started, a specific gaming state is set when an advantageous gaming state that can be advantageous to a player is set, and when the specific gaming state is set, the second determination means is configured to easily determine the second determination result that is advantageous to the player.

In the past, when a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine receives a ball into a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special benefit that is advantageous to the player is awarded. A configuration has been proposed that can execute a first lottery and a second lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, whether the first lottery is executed or the second lottery is executed, if the lottery result is such that a bonus is awarded, the corresponding bonus is simply awarded, which creates a problem of gameplay becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that prevents gameplay from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine DF1, a first advantageous state is set based on the first condition being met, and a second advantageous state is set based on the second condition being met. Then, if the second condition is met between the time the first condition is met and the time the first advantageous state is set, a third advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state is set. This has the effect of keeping the player interested in the timing at which the first condition is met and the timing at which the second condition is met, thereby preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

Gaming machine DF1, in which the dynamic display of the first identification information in which the advantageous gaming state is set is controlled so that a dynamic display mode is selected from a group of dynamic display modes in which a dynamic display of a period longer than the period in which the dynamic display of the second identification information executed in the specific gaming state can be executed multiple times is likely to be selected, and when the specific gaming state is set, a dynamic display mode is selected as the dynamic display of the second identification information from a group of dynamic display modes in which a dynamic display mode configured with a dynamic display period shorter than the normal gaming state is likely to be selected. Gaming machine DF2, which is characterized in that.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DF1, gaming machine DF2 has the effect of making it possible to set a specific gaming state longer by selecting a long dynamic display period as the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and in that specific gaming state, by setting a short dynamic display period of the second identification information, the dynamic display of the second identification information is executed multiple times, which makes it easier to motivate the player to execute the dynamic display of the second identification information more frequently, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine DF3 is characterized in that, when the specific gaming state is set in gaming machine DF1 or DF2, a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous gaming state can be set based on the specific second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines DF1 and DF2, gaming machine DF3 has the effect of diversifying play, because a gaming state that is more advantageous than the advantageous gaming state is set in the specific gaming state when the second identification information becomes a specific second discrimination result, making it possible to vary the benefits given to the player depending on the remaining period of the specific gaming state.

A gaming machine DF4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines DF1 to DF3, the dynamic display of the second identification information is displayed in a frozen state, and the dynamic display of the first identification information that is displayed dynamically when a specific condition is met can be forcibly frozen so that the advantageous gaming state is not set.

According to gaming machine DF4, in any of gaming machines DF1 to DF3, the advantageous gaming state that would be set by the dynamic display of the second identification information can be forcibly discarded, which has the effect of diversifying the game.

Gaming machine DF5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines DF1 to DF4, when the special game state is set and the dynamic display of the second identification information ends to execute a bonus game, the dynamic display period of the dynamically displayed first identification information is interrupted, and is resumed after the bonus game ends, so that the dynamic display can be executed.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines DF1 to DF4, gaming machine DF5 has the effect that during a bonus game, the dynamic display of the first identification information is suspended and then resumed after the bonus game ends, so that the bonus game is executed, reducing expectations for a favorable gaming state and suppressing defects that reduce the value of the bonus game.

Gaming machine DF6, which is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines DF1 to DF5, the advantageous gaming state can be set based on at least a first setting condition that is set when the first identification information is dynamically displayed so that a bonus game is executed after the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and a second setting condition that is set when the first identification information is dynamically displayed so that the bonus game is not executed.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines DF1 to DF5, gaming machine DF6 is configured so that an advantageous gaming state is set even if a bonus game is not executed, making it difficult to predict the timing at which the advantageous gaming state is set, which has the effect of adding a sense of freshness to the game.

<Feature DG group> (Advantageous lottery is executed at specific intervals)
a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting the second game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means executed in a state in which the first game state is set being a second determination result different from the first determination result, the game state setting means being capable of setting the first game state based on the establishment of a termination condition in a state in which the second game state is set, and being capable of setting a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means executed in a state in which the first game state is set being a third determination result different from the first determination result and the second determination result.

In the past, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the same winning/losing lottery is always executed, which can lead to monotony in gameplay. This was done to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent gameplay from becoming monotonous.

According to the gaming machine DG1, while the second gaming state is set, it is difficult to set the third gaming state, so that the player aims to play a game in which the third gaming state is set during the period in which the first gaming state is set. This has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous, since it is possible to execute a game with a different degree of advantage depending on the gaming situation.

Gaming machine DG2 is characterized in that in gaming machine DG1, the discrimination means is capable of executing the discrimination so that the probability that the result of the discrimination will be the third discrimination result is lower than the probability that the result of the discrimination will be the second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DG1, gaming machine DG2 is more likely to result in the second determination result than the third determination result, and therefore allows the player to play with the aim of setting the third gaming state while avoiding the game state transitioning to the second gaming state in which it is difficult to set the third gaming state due to the determination result of the determination means becoming the second determination result. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine DG3 is characterized in that it has a termination condition setting means capable of setting, as the termination condition, at least a first termination condition that can be established based on the number of times the determination by the determination means executed in a state in which the second gaming state is set has reached a predetermined number of times.

Gaming machine DG3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machines DG1 and DG2. That is, since the second gaming state can be ended when the number of determinations performed during the second gaming state reaches a predetermined number, it is possible to perform determination by the determination means in the first gaming state at least at a specific period. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine DG4 is characterized in that in gaming machine DG3, the end condition setting means is capable of setting a second end condition that can be established based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means being a specific judgment result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DG3, gaming machine DG4 has the effect of providing the player with an unexpected gameplay by ending the second game state at an interval shorter than the specific period when the second ending condition is met.

Gaming machine DG5 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines DG1 to DG4, the discrimination means is capable of executing the discrimination such that the probability that the result of the discrimination executed during the second gaming state will be the third discrimination result is lower than the probability that the result of the discrimination executed during the first gaming state will be the third discrimination result.

Gaming machine DG5 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines DG1 to DG4. That is, since the third gaming state is more likely to be set in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state, it has the effect of allowing the player to play in the hope that a determination will be made in a situation where the second gaming state is not set.

<Feature DH group> (You can set time-saving that is better to finish and time-saving that is better not to finish)
A gaming machine DH1 having a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when identification information showing a specific discrimination result is displayed, and a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, characterized in that the gaming machine DH1 has a state setting means for setting a first state in which a game state advantageous to the player is set when a termination condition for terminating the setting of the second game state is satisfied, and a second state in which a game state which is more playable than a case in which the game ends when the termination condition is not satisfied is set.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and after the bonus game ends, an advantageous state is set in which the lottery for the game success or failure is more likely to be executed (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, the advantageous state is simply set after the bonus game is executed, which creates the problem of the game becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

When the second game state is set, the gaming machine DH1 can vary the expectation of the end condition being met by setting the first and second states, which has the effect of varying the interest felt when the second game state ends, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine DH2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DH1, when the first state is set, the first gaming state is set by the completion of the termination condition, and the second state is set based on the second gaming state being set from the state in which the first gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DH1, gaming machine DH2 sets a second gaming state in which the first state is set, the first gaming state is passed through, and the second state is set. This has the effect of making it easier to continue playing while gradually increasing expectations, as advantageous gaming states are set depending on the order in which the gaming states are set.

Gaming machine DH3 is characterized in that in gaming machine DH1 or DH2, the second gaming state is configured to be set based on a first condition that can be set when the identification information is dynamically displayed so that the bonus game is executed, and a second condition that can be set when the identification information is dynamically displayed so that the bonus game is not executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines DH1 and DH2, gaming machine DH3 has the effect of diversifying the timing at which the second gaming state is set, providing a fresh gaming experience.

<Feature DI group> (When the special drawing 2 is performed under normal circumstances, a penalty is also imposed on the special drawing 1 for a specified period of time)
A gaming machine DI1 having a first discrimination means capable of performing a first discrimination and a second discrimination means capable of performing a second discrimination different from the first discrimination, characterized in that the gaming machine DI1 has setting means capable of setting a first setting that can be set when the first discrimination means and the second discrimination means are discriminated in a first order, and a second setting that can be set when they are discriminated in a second order different from the first order.

In the past, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which multiple triggers are used to determine whether a player has won or not, in a predetermined order, and the player is notified based on the results of the determination, and a special bonus is awarded to the player when a specific notification such as a win is made (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, even if the order in which hit and other determinations are made is different, games are played based on the results of each determination, and changing the order does not result in games with different playability being played, which can lead to the problem of the game becoming monotonous. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent games from becoming monotonous.

With the gaming machine DI1, different settings are made depending on the order in which the first and second judgments are performed, which has the effect of making the player interested in the order in which the judgments are performed and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine DI2 having a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state in a gaming machine DI1, the gaming state setting means being capable of setting the second gaming state based on the first determination being made, and being capable of setting the first gaming state based on the first determination being made next.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine DI1, the gaming machine DI2 makes it possible to set the first gaming state periodically, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by varying the gaming state at regular intervals.

In the gaming machine DI2, the gaming state setting means can set the second gaming state based on the second determination being made, and can set the first gaming state based on the second determination being made next. Gaming machine DI3.

By alternately executing the first and second judgments, it is possible to continuously set the first game state, which has the effect of making the order of judgments interesting and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine DI4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines DI1 to DI3, in the first setting, a first bonus game is executed based on the specific first discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result, and in the second setting, a second bonus game that is more advantageous to the player than the first bonus game is executed based on the specific first discrimination result or the specific second discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines DI1 to DI3, the gaming machine DI4 has the effect of providing an advantage to the player by setting a second setting, and of varying the interest of the game depending on the order of judgment.

In any of the gaming machines DI2 to DI4, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting the first gaming state based on the establishment of a setting condition that can be established by at least the first determination being performed multiple times when the second determination is performed following the first determination that triggered the setting of the second gaming state. Gaming machine DI5.

<Feature DJ Group> (Three game states can be set: normal state, advantageous state, and super advantageous state. It is possible to transition from the normal state to either the advantageous state or the super advantageous state, but it is difficult to transition from the advantageous state to the super advantageous state)
a game state setting means for setting one of a plurality of game states including a second game state which is more advantageous to a player than a first game state and a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting the second game state after the bonus game ends, and ... third game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state, the game state setting means being capable of setting one of a plurality of game states including a third game state which is more advantageous to a player than the second game state is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result, the discrimination means is capable of determining the second discrimination result more easily when the discrimination is performed in a state where the first game state is set than when the discrimination is performed in a state where the second game state is set, and the gaming machine is configured such that the third game state is more easily set when the discrimination is performed in a state where the first game state is set than when the discrimination is performed in a state where the second game state is set.

Conventionally, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines that allows players to switch between multiple game states by setting multiple game states and switching between the game states when certain conditions such as a win are met, thereby increasing motivation to play (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

Furthermore, some machines are configured to be able to set multiple game states with different degrees of advantage to the player, and by gradually switching from a game state with a low degree of advantage to a game state with a high degree of advantage, the player is encouraged to aim to switch to a game state that is even more advantageous than the current one, thereby maintaining a high desire to play.

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, if the gaming state was switched periodically, the player would not quickly become bored with the game and could maintain a high desire to play. However, if the gaming state did not switch and a gaming state with a low degree of advantage continued for a long period of time, the player's desire to play would drop significantly, which was a problem. This product was developed to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

According to the gaming machine DJ1, a determination is made that the first gaming state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state, is more likely to set the third gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state, than the second gaming state. Therefore, for a player in the first gaming state, a game aiming to set the second gaming state after a bonus game is executed and a game aiming to set the third gaming state can be executed in parallel, which has the effect of providing a gaming machine in which the player does not quickly become bored with the game.

In addition, by continuing the first gaming state for a long period of time without switching to the second gaming state, the possibility of the gaming state switching to the third gaming state can be increased, which has the effect of preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing even if the first gaming state, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues.

Gaming machine DJ2 is characterized in that in gaming machine DJ1, the discrimination means can execute a first discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and can execute a second discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the establishment of the second discrimination condition is restricted, and in the third gaming state, a setting is executable in which the establishment of the second discrimination condition is permitted.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DJ1, gaming machine DJ2 has the effect of varying the gameplay method and adding a new element of novelty to the gameplay, since the ease with which the discrimination conditions are met is changed for each type depending on the gameplay state.

Gaming machine DJ3 is characterized in that in gaming machine DJ1 or DJ2, the gaming state setting means is configured to be capable of setting the second gaming state when the second determination determines that a specific determination result is obtained when the third gaming state is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines DJ1 and DJ2, gaming machine DJ3 has the effect of being able to transition to the second gaming state, which is an advantageous gaming state, even after the third gaming state, allowing the player to continue in an advantageous state for a longer period of time.

<Feature DK group> (The performance mode of the "Save reserved during time reduction" performance is changed based on the reserved pre-reading result)
a first determination means for determining the information stored in the storage means before the determination means determines the information stored in the storage means before the determination means determines the information; and a game state setting means for setting a first game state and a second game state that makes it easier to allow a game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first game state, based on a condition that can be established based on the information. The game machine DK1 has a ball entry means through which a game ball can enter, an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means, a storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means for performing a determination based on the information stored in the storage means, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game based on the determination result by the determination means being a first determination result, a pre-determination means for determining the information stored in the storage means before the determination by the determination means, and a game state setting means for setting a first game state and a second game state that makes it easier to allow a game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first game state, based on a condition that can be established based on the information.

In the past, a configuration has been proposed for gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which information such as random numbers is obtained when a gaming ball enters a starting hole or the like, and a lottery is run based on the random numbers to determine whether or not to award a beneficial bonus to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

Furthermore, a configuration was proposed that allows the acquired information to be stored up to a predetermined number, and allows the game state to be set to a first game state in which it is difficult to get the game ball into the starting hole, etc., and a second game state in which it is easier to get the game ball into the starting hole, etc., than in the first game state.

In such conventional gaming machines, the most advantageous play for the player is likely to be to end the second gaming state with as much information stored as possible, so players play in the second gaming state in a way that allows them to get as many gaming balls into the starting hole or the like.

However, depending on the content of the lottery based on already acquired information, it may be possible to acquire the right to set the second gaming state again even after the currently set second gaming state has ended, which may lead to the player playing a game that unnecessarily aims to get many gaming balls into the starting hole, etc. There is also the problem that the game becomes monotonous just before the end of the second gaming state, reducing interest in the game. This was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest in the game.

According to gaming machine DK1, a specific presentation is executed based on the results of a prior determination during the second gaming state, making it possible to quickly identify that the first condition has been met, which has the effect of increasing the value of the second gaming state being set and enhancing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine DK1, a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are arranged as the ball entry means, the discrimination means executes a first discrimination based on the ball entering the first ball entry means, and is capable of executing a second discrimination that is more advantageous than the first discrimination based on the ball entering the second ball entry means, and the second gaming state is characterized in that the second gaming state makes it easier to change the variable means from the first state to the second state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DK1, gaming machine DK2 has the effect of increasing the frequency with which the ball is scored into the second ball scoring means in the second gaming state, thereby enhancing the player's interest.

Gaming machine DK3 is characterized in that in gaming machine DK1 or DK2, a first end condition and a second end condition that is more advantageous to the player than the first end condition can be set as end conditions for the second gaming state, and the first condition can be established based on the fact that the second end condition is determined to be established by the advance determination.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines DK1 and DK2, gaming machine DK3 has the effect that, by satisfying the first condition, it is possible to store more information and execute the advantageous second judgment more frequently, so that by executing a specific presentation, it is possible to determine early on that the second judgment will be executed more frequently, and anticipation for the game can be increased in advance.

<Technical Concept of 5072>
<Feature EA group> (Different conditions (ceiling and effects) can be set)
A gaming machine EA1 having a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, characterized in that the gaming machine has a setting means capable of setting a first setting based on the establishment of a specific condition when a first gaming state is set, and capable of setting a second setting different from the first setting based on the establishment of the specific condition when a second gaming state different from the first gaming state is set.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a certain period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if certain conditions are met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to the gaming machine EA1, the setting type when a specific condition is met is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, so the gaming settings can be varied in a variety of ways, and this has the effect of making the game more interesting by creating interest in whether a specific condition is met in the first gaming state or the second gaming state.

The gaming machine EA2 described in claim 1 is characterized in that in the gaming machine EA1, the specific condition is set to be satisfied when a condition corresponding to the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed is satisfied, and the counted value of the number of times is maintained even when the first gaming state is transitioned to the second gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EA1, gaming machine EA2 provides the following effect. That is, since the count value of the number of times is maintained even when the gaming state changes, it is possible to reach the number of times until a specific condition is met while changing the gaming state in various ways.

Gaming machine EA3, in which the first setting is capable of setting an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player in a first period in gaming machine EA1 or EA2, and the second setting is capable of setting the advantageous state in a second period that is longer than the first period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EA1 and EA2, gaming machine EA3 provides the following effect. That is, by setting the second setting, it is possible to maintain an advantageous state for a long period of time, and this has the effect of increasing the interest of the game by varying the degree of advantage depending on the establishment of specific conditions.

A gaming machine EA4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines EA1 to EA3, when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a first discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, the second gaming state can be set before the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EA1 to EA3, gaming machine EA4 has the following effect. That is, the first determination result transitions to the second gaming state, which has the effect of making it possible to vary the gaming state in a variety of ways.

A gaming machine EA5 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines EA1 to EA4, when the second gaming state is set, the first gaming state can be set based on the dynamic display of the identification information being executed a predetermined number of times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EA1 to EA4, gaming machine EA5 provides the following effect. That is, it is possible to transition between the first gaming state and the second gaming state before the number of times until the specific condition is met is counted, and it is possible to diversify the period until the number of times until the specific condition is met has elapsed.

A gaming machine EA6 is any one of the gaming machines EA1 to EA5, and is characterized by having a suggestion effect execution means capable of suggesting that the second gaming state has been set before the specific condition is met.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EA1 to EA5, gaming machine EA6 provides the following effect. That is, it is possible for the player to understand that the second gaming state has been set, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting the gaming state that will be set when a specific condition is met.

A gaming machine EA7 is any one of the gaming machines EA3 to EA6, characterized in that it has at least an advantageous state setting means capable of setting the advantageous state for the second period based on the fact that the judgment result by the judgment means is the specific judgment result.

Gaming machine EA7 has the following effect in addition to the effects of gaming machines EA3 to EA6. That is, since it is possible to set an advantageous state for the second period based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, it is possible to provide the player with an advantageous state for the second period before the specific condition is established. This has the effect of making the player believe that various conditions are set as specific conditions, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine EA7, characterized in that the advantageous state of the second period can be set based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a first determination result different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine EA8.

Gaming machine EA8 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine EA7. That is, even if the judgment result is not one that grants a bonus, it is possible to set an advantageous state for the second period, making it easier for the player to believe that an advantageous state for the second period has been set in accordance with the number of times the identification information has been dynamically displayed. This has the effect of making the player believe that various conditions have been set as specific conditions, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine EA9 is characterized in that it has a third setting execution means capable of executing a third setting that is more advantageous to the player than the second setting when a period during which the specific condition is not satisfied continues for a specific period of time in any of the gaming machines EA1 to EA8.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines EA1 to EA8, the gaming machine EA9 has the following effect. That is, when a long period of time continues during which a specific condition is not met, a third setting that is advantageous to the player can be executed, thereby minimizing damage to the player.

<Feature EB group> (number of activations randomized)
a first setting means for executing a first setting when the result of the determination by the determination means is a first determination result different from the specific determination result; a release means for releasing the first setting when the first setting is set on the basis that the dynamic display of the identification information has been executed a predetermined number of times; and a second setting means for executing a second setting different from the first setting when the first setting is executed when a specific condition is met.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a certain period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if certain conditions are met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

With gaming machine EB1, the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed until the second setting is executed can be made random, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine EB2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EB1, when the first setting is being executed, the first setting is not set after the first benefit is awarded.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EB1, gaming machine EB2 provides the following effects. That is, since the first setting is cancelled when a bonus is awarded, it is possible to execute the second setting when a bonus is not awarded for a long period of time, and this has the effect of making the player feel advantageous that a bonus will not be awarded for a certain period of time or more.

A gaming machine EB3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EB1 or EB2, the second setting is executed to create a state that is more advantageous to the player than when the first setting is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EB1 and EB2, gaming machine EB3 has the following effect. That is, by executing the second setting, a favorable state can be created for the player, so that even if a state occurs in which no bonus is awarded for a long period of time, the player's losses can be reduced.

A gaming machine EB4 is characterized in that it has a third setting execution means capable of executing a third setting that is more advantageous to the player than the second setting when a period during which the specific condition is not satisfied continues for a specific period of time in any of the gaming machines EB1 to EB3.

Gaming machine EB4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines EB1 to EB3. That is, when a long period of time continues during which a specific condition is not met, a third setting that is advantageous to the player can be executed, thereby minimizing damage to the player.

<Characteristic EEC group> (Randomization 2)
A gaming machine EEC1 having a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit that is advantageous to a player when identification information showing a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, characterized in having: first setting means for executing a first setting when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is a first discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result; cancellation means for canceling the first setting when the first setting is set based on the dynamic display of the identification information being executed a predetermined number of times; and second setting means for executing a second setting based on the establishment of a first condition when the first setting is canceled by the cancellation means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a certain period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if certain conditions are met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to the gaming machine EC1, the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed until the second setting is executed can be made random, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine EC2 is characterized in that in gaming machine EC1, the second setting means is configured to be able to execute the second setting based on the dynamic display of the identification information being executed a predetermined specific number of times.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine EC1, the gaming machine EC2 has the following effect. That is, it has the effect of being able to randomize the number of dynamic displays until the second setting is executed.

Gaming machine EC3 is characterized in that in gaming machine EC1 or EC2, the second setting means is capable of executing the second setting when the determination result by the determination means is a second determination result different from the first determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EC2, gaming machine EC3 has the following effects. That is, because the second setting is executed based on multiple conditions, it is difficult for the player to understand the trigger for executing the second setting, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

<Characteristic ED group> (Randomization 3)
a first setting means for executing a first setting when the result of the determination by the determination means is a first determination result different from the specific determination result; a release means for releasing the first setting when the first setting is set, based on the dynamic display of the identification information being executed a predetermined number of times; and a second setting means for executing a second setting based on the dynamic display of the identification information being executed a predetermined specific number of times, wherein the gaming machine ED1 is characterized in that when the dynamic display of the identification information is started while the first setting is being executed, a count value for counting the specific number of times is not updated.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

With the gaming machine ED1, the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed until the second setting is executed can be made random, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine ED2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine ED1, the second setting is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first setting.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine ED1, gaming machine ED2 provides the following effects. That is, when the first setting is not set, dynamic display is executed a specific number of times to set the second setting, so that the period until a setting advantageous to the player is given can be made random, providing the player with an element of surprise.

A gaming machine ED3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine ED1 or ED2, when the bonus is granted to a player, the count value for counting the specific number of times is updated to an initial value.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines ED1 and ED2, gaming machine ED3 has the following effect. That is, by providing a bonus, the count value that counts a specific number of times is updated to the initial value, which has the effect of preventing a malfunction in which the game becomes too advantageous for the player.

A gaming machine ED4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines ED1 to ED3, when the specific number of times is reached when a dynamic display is executed to indicate that the discrimination means has determined that the first discrimination result has been obtained, the first setting is not set and the second setting is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines ED1 to ED3, gaming machine ED4 has the following effect. That is, the second setting, which is more advantageous than the first setting, is set with priority, which has the effect of providing the player with a more advantageous game.

A gaming machine ED5 is characterized in that it has a first measuring means for measuring the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed, a second measuring means for measuring the count value, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the first measurement result by the first measuring means and the second measurement result by the second measuring means, in any one of the gaming machines ED1 to ED4.

In addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ED1 to ED4, the gaming machine ED5 has the following effect. That is, based on the effect executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to easily predict the remaining number of times until the measurement value by the second measurement means reaches a specific number of times, and therefore it has the effect of making it easier for the player to predict the remaining period until the second setting is executed.

<Feature EE Group> (Lottery control during state transition)
A gaming machine EE1 having a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, characterized in that the gaming machine also has a game state setting means for setting a first game state and a second game state different from the first game state, and a means for transitioning to the second game state with information set in the first game state stored, and for canceling the second game state with the information stored, thereby making it easier to grant an advantageous period to the player.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to the gaming machine EE1, since the information is maintained in a stored state even when the gaming state changes, it is easy to grant the player an advantageous period, so that it is possible to generate interest in whether the information is being maintained, and this has the effect of increasing interest in the change in the gaming state.

A gaming machine EE2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EE1, it has an acquisition means capable of acquiring the information, and a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and the information stored in the storage means is maintained during the period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed as the identification information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EE1, gaming machine EE2 provides the following effects. That is, by continuing the dynamic display of the first identification information, the memory of the information is maintained, so that the player can play the game in anticipation of the dynamic display of the first identification information, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine EE3, which is a gaming machine EE1 or EE2, has a first information acquisition means capable of acquiring first information, and a first storage means in which the first information acquired by the first information acquisition means is stored, and the first identification information is dynamically displayed when the determination is made by the determination means based on the first information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EE1 and EE2, gaming machine EE3 provides the following effects. That is, since it is possible to create the expectation that the first information will be acquired so that the memory of the information is maintained, it is possible to increase the expectation for acquiring the first information until the second gaming state is released, and it is possible to vary the value of acquiring the first information depending on the period.

<Feature EF Group> (V Icon Control Part 1)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result determined by the determination means; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, the gaming machine EF1 having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not a specific effect is to be executed when the information determined by the advance determination means is stored, and a setting means for setting the timing of the execution of the specific effect during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to the gaming machine EF1, by setting the timing for executing a specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to understand which identification information corresponds to the information that results in a specific discrimination, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine EF2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EF1, when the execution of the specific performance is decided by the decision means, a specific suggestion mode for indicating that the execution of the specific performance has been decided can be executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EF1, gaming machine EF2 has the following effect. That is, the execution of the specific suggestion mode allows the player to know in advance that a specific judgment result will be obtained, so that the player can play the game looking forward to which dynamic display will notify the specific judgment result.

In the gaming machine EF1 or EF2, the setting means is characterized in that, when the storage means stores information that results in a plurality of the specific discrimination results, the setting means sets the execution timing of the specific performance during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information that will later start to be dynamically displayed. Gaming machine EF3.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EF1 and EF2, gaming machine EF3 provides the following effect. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display that awards a bonus is executed, execution of the specific performance is not started, so that the player can recognize that the subsequent dynamic display will result in a more specific determination result, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

<Feature EFa Group> (V Icon Control Part 1)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing a determination result determined by the determination means; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, the gaming machine EFa1 having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not a specific effect is to be executed when the information stored in the storage means is determined to be stored by the advance determination means, and a setting means for setting the timing of the execution of the specific effect during a period during which the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means is dynamically displayed.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

The gaming machine EFa1 has the effect of making it difficult to tell which identification information corresponds to which information resulting from a specific discrimination, by setting the timing for executing a specific effect, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine EFa2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EFa1, when the execution of the specific effect is decided by the decision means, during the waiting period until the timing for the execution of the specific effect, a notification mode is displayed to indicate that the execution of the specific effect is waiting.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine EFa1, the gaming machine EFa2 has the following effect. That is, the notification mode is displayed, so that the player can easily recognize that the execution of a specific effect is pending. This has the effect of preventing the player from stopping play before the specific effect is executed without realizing that the specific effect will be executed, even though the execution of the specific effect has been decided.

A gaming machine EFa3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EFa2, when a specific condition is established, it is possible not to execute the specific performance during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information determined to be the specific determination result in a state in which the notification mode is displayed.

The gaming machine EFa3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of the gaming machine EFa2. That is, even if a specific effect is not executed during the period when a notification mode indicating that the execution of a specific effect is pending is displayed, identification information indicating a specific determination result may be displayed, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game.

A gaming machine EFa4, which is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines EFa1 to EFa3, when the execution of the specific performance is decided by the decision means in a state where the storage means stores a plurality of pieces of the information judged to be the specific discrimination result, the gaming machine EFa4 has a selection means that allows a player to select in advance which of the dynamic display periods during which the execution timing of the specific performance is likely to be set by the setting means: the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information judged to be the specific discrimination result that is executed first, or the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information judged to be the specific discrimination result that is executed later.

The gaming machine EFa4 provides the following effects in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines EFa1 to EFa3. That is, for a player who has previously selected a setting that makes it easy for a specific effect to be executed during the dynamic display period of the identification pattern corresponding to the information determined as the specific discrimination result executed first, it is possible to provide the fun of predicting whether or not there is information determined as the specific discrimination result among the information remaining in the storage means at the time the specific effect is executed, and for a player who has previously selected a setting that makes it easy for a specific effect to be executed during the dynamic display period of the identification pattern corresponding to the information determined as the specific discrimination result executed later, it is possible to provide a game with an element of surprise in which identification information is displayed to indicate that the specific discrimination result is obtained even though the specific effect has not been executed during the dynamic display period of the identification information, so that a game tailored to the player's preferences can be provided.

<Feature EG group> (variable ratio control)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result determined by the determination means; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means; and a gaming machine EG1, characterized in that the gaming machine EG1 has an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not a specific performance will be executed based on information stored in the storage means when the advance determination means determines that information determined to be the specific determination result has been stored.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a certain period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if certain conditions are met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to gaming machine EG1, by setting the timing for executing a specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which identification information corresponds to which information that results in a specific discrimination, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine EG2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EG1, it has a setting means capable of setting the execution timing of the specific effect during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EG1, gaming machine EG2 provides the following effect. That is, the timing of the execution of the specific effect can be set randomly, which has the effect of making it possible to vary the expectation of a bonus being awarded to a player depending on the timing of the execution of the specific effect.

A gaming machine EG3, in which the determination means in the gaming machine EG1 or EG2 is set to vary the probability of determining the execution of the specific effect based on the number information corresponding to the number of pieces of information stored during a predetermined period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EG1 and EG2, gaming machine EG3 provides the following effect. That is, the probability of a winning combination varies depending on the number of pieces of information stored in a specified period of time, so the timing at which a specific performance is executed can be controlled in accordance with the number of pieces of information stored, which can further increase interest.

A gaming machine EG4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines EG1 to EG3, when the execution of the specific effect is decided by the decision means, a specific suggestion mode for indicating that the execution of the specific effect has been decided can be executed.

Gaming machine EG4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines EG1 to EG3. That is, the execution of a specific suggestion mode allows the player to know in advance that a specific judgment result will be obtained, and therefore has the effect of allowing the player to play the game while looking forward to which dynamic display will notify the specific judgment result.

In any one of the gaming machines EG1 to EG4, the setting means is characterized in that, when the storage means stores information that results in a plurality of specific discrimination results, the setting means sets the execution timing of the specific performance during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information that will later start to be dynamically displayed. Gaming machine EG5.

Gaming machine EG5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines EG1 to EG4. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display that awards a bonus is executed, execution of the specific performance is not started, so that the player can recognize that the subsequent dynamic display will result in a more specific determination result, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

<Feature EGa Group> (Variable ratio control)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing a determination result determined by the determination means; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, the gaming machine EGa1 having: an acquisition means for acquiring information; a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means; a determination means for determining whether or not a specific effect is to be executed when a specific condition is satisfied, the gaming machine having: an acquisition means for acquiring information;

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

The gaming machine EGa1 has the effect of making it difficult to tell which identification information corresponds to which information resulting from a specific discrimination by setting the timing for executing a specific effect, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine EGa1, the determination means is more likely to determine the execution of the specific performance the more information that can be newly stored in the storage means before the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information that is determined to be the specific discrimination result stored in the storage means is executed. The gaming machine EGa2 is characterized in that.

The gaming machine EGa2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine EGa1. That is, the more information that can be newly stored in the storage means before the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the specific discrimination result stored in the storage means and the information to be discriminated is executed, the easier it is for the determination means to decide to execute the specific performance, so that of the information stored in the storage means at the time the specific performance is executed, the amount of information that has not been discriminated in advance by the pre-discrimination means at the time the execution of the specific performance is decided tends to be large, making it difficult for the player to predict the discrimination result of the information remaining in the storage means after the specific performance is executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine EGa3, characterized in that, in the gaming machine EGa1 or EGa2, when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means is a predetermined number, the determination means is more likely to determine the execution of the specific performance when there are a plurality of pieces of information that are determined to be the specific discrimination result among the pieces of information stored in the storage means, than when there is only one piece of information.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EGa1 and EGa2, gaming machine EGa3 provides the following effect. That is, when there are multiple pieces of information in the storage means that are determined to be specific judgment results, the determination means is likely to determine that a specific performance will be executed. Therefore, when it is determined that a specific performance will be executed, the player is made to expect that multiple bonuses will be awarded, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

<Feature EH group> (Determining where to use)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result determined by the determination means; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means; a gaming machine EH1, characterized in that the gaming machine has: an acquisition means for acquiring information; a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means; a determination means for determining whether or not a specific effect is to be executed when the information is determined by the advance determination means to be stored, and a specific suggestion mode for indicating that the execution of the specific effect has been determined by the determination means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to gaming machine EH1, the execution of the specific suggestion mode allows the player to recognize at an early stage that information that will result in a specific discrimination has been stored, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game. In addition, by setting the timing for executing the specific presentation, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which identification information the information that will result in a specific discrimination corresponds to, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine EH2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EH1, it has an execution decision means capable of deciding to execute the determined specific performance when dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means is executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EH1, gaming machine EH2 provides the following effects. That is, the execution determination means determines whether or not to determine the dynamic display of identification information that executes a specific performance at the start of each dynamic display, so that the execution timing can be set depending on the content of the newly stored information.

A gaming machine EH3 is characterized in that, in either gaming machine EH1 or EH2, when the execution of the specific effect is determined by the determination means, a specific suggestion mode is executable to indicate that the execution of the specific effect has been determined.

Gaming machine EH3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines EH1 to EH2. That is, the execution of a specific suggestion mode allows the player to know in advance that a specific judgment result will be obtained, and therefore has the effect of allowing the player to play the game while looking forward to which dynamic display will notify the specific judgment result.

In any one of gaming machines EH1 to EH3, the setting means is characterized in that, when the storage means stores information that results in a plurality of specific discrimination results, the setting means sets the execution timing of the specific performance during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information that will later begin to be dynamically displayed. Gaming machine EH4.

Gaming machine EH4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines EH1 to EH3. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display that awards a bonus is executed, execution of the specific performance is not started, so that the player can recognize that the subsequent dynamic display will result in a more specific determination result, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

<Feature EI group> (frequency of use variable)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result determined by the determination means; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, wherein the gaming machine EI1 has an acquisition means for acquiring information, a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information, and a determination means for determining, based on the type of dynamic display mode determined by the dynamic display mode determination means, the execution of a specific presentation to indicate that the information stored in the storage means is information that is determined to be the specific determination result.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to gaming machine EI1, by setting the timing for executing a specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to tell which identification information corresponds to which information that results in a specific discrimination, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine EI2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EI1, it has a setting means capable of setting the execution timing of the specific performance during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EI1, gaming machine EI2 provides the following effect. That is, the timing of the execution of the specific effect can be set randomly, which has the effect of making it possible to vary the expectation of a bonus being awarded to a player depending on the timing of the execution of the specific effect.

Gaming machine EI3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine EI1 or EI2, when the execution of the specific performance is determined by the determination means, a specific suggestion mode is executable to indicate that the execution of the specific performance has been determined.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EI1 and EI2, gaming machine EI3 has the following effect. That is, the execution of a specific suggestion mode allows the player to know in advance that a specific judgment result will be obtained, and therefore allows the player to play the game while looking forward to which dynamic display will notify the specific judgment result.

Gaming machine EI4, characterized in that in gaming machine EI2 or EI3, the setting means sets the execution timing of the specific performance during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information whose dynamic display will start later, when the storage means stores information that will result in a plurality of the specific discrimination results.

Gaming machine EI4 has the following effect in addition to the effect of either gaming machine EI2 or EI3. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display that awards a bonus is executed, execution of the specific performance is not started, so that the player can recognize that the subsequent dynamic display will result in a more specific determination result, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

<Feature EJ group> (Controlled by round)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information indicating a determination result determined by the determination means; and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, the gaming machine EJ1 having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing information acquired by the acquisition means, a determination means for determining a type of bonus to be granted by the bonus granting means from a plurality of bonus types, and a determination means for determining to execute a specific presentation to indicate that the information stored in the storage means is determined to be the specific determination result, based on determination information corresponding to a result of a prior determination of a type of bonus to be granted by the bonus granting means based on the stored information.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a predetermined period of time, a pattern to notify the result of the lottery is displayed in a variable manner, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner to indicate the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, a variable display of the pattern to indicate the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to one that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A).

However, there was a demand for further improvements to the game's appeal.

The present invention was made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the entertainment value of the game.

According to gaming machine EJ1, by setting the timing for executing a specific effect, it is difficult to tell which identification information corresponds to which information that is a specific discrimination result, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine EJ2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EJ1, it has a setting means capable of setting the execution timing of the specific performance during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EJ1, gaming machine EJ2 has the following effect. That is, the timing of the execution of the specific effect can be set randomly, so that the expectation of the player receiving a special bonus can be varied depending on the timing of the execution of the specific effect.

Gaming machine EJ3, which is characterized in that in gaming machine EJ1 or EJ2, the bonus is a bonus game that is executed a number of times corresponding to the type of bonus, and the decision means is configured to be able to decide to execute the specific presentation when the judgment information determines that the bonus game will be executed a predetermined number of times or more.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EJ1 and EJ2, gaming machine EJ3 provides the following effect. That is, if the execution of bonus play is determined to be a predetermined number of times or more, the execution of a specific presentation is determined. Therefore, if the bonus play is executed less than the predetermined number of times and ends, the player can easily recognize that a specific judgment result will be obtained afterwards, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine EJ4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines EJ1 to EJ3, the predetermined number of times is set to be greater than the number of bonus games that are executed when multiple bonuses are awarded.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines EJ1 to EJ3, the gaming machine EJ4 has the following effect. That is, by executing a specific effect, it is possible to create anticipation for the number of times that a special bonus will be awarded, which has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

Gaming machine EJ5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines EJ1 to EJ4, when the specific effect is executed, the gaming machine EJ5 has a means for changing the mode of the specific effect being executed during the execution of the bonus game to a mode that indicates the number of times the remaining bonus games will be executed.

Gaming machine EJ5 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines EJ1 to EJ4. That is, by executing a bonus game, the remaining number of bonus games to be executed can be indicated in a specific manner, and the effect is that the player can play the game while expecting a larger number of remaining games.

A gaming machine EJ6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines EJ1 to EJ5, when the execution of the specific performance is decided by the decision means, a specific suggestion mode for indicating that the execution of the specific performance has been decided can be executed.

Gaming machine EJ6 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines EJ1 to EJ5. That is, the execution of a specific suggestion mode allows the player to know in advance that a specific judgment result will be obtained, and therefore has the effect of allowing the player to play the game in anticipation of which dynamic display will notify the specific judgment result.

A gaming machine EJ7, which is any one of the gaming machines EJ2 to EJ5, is characterized in that, when the storage means stores information that results in a plurality of specific discrimination results, the setting means sets the execution timing of the specific performance during the dynamic display period of the identification information corresponding to the information that will later start to be dynamically displayed.

Gaming machine EJ7 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines EJ2 to EJ6. That is, even though a specific determination result is notified and a dynamic display that awards a bonus is executed, execution of the specific performance is not started, so that the player can recognize that the subsequent dynamic display will result in a more specific determination result, which has the effect of further increasing the interest of the game.

<Features of the 5071 series>
<Feature A group> (Differentiate the degree of advantage between the advantageous state set after the end of a specific number of pre-determined special drawing lotteries and the advantageous state set by other triggers)
a first setting means for setting one of a plurality of states including at least a first state and a second state in which the discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first state, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined setting condition; and a second setting means for setting a third state in which the discrimination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first state and which has a different degree of advantage from the second state, based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition and the satisfaction of a predetermined specific number of times in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, have a lottery system in which a winning or losing game is determined when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the game board, and if the lottery results in a winning game, a winning game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Furthermore, some such gaming machines execute a time-saving game for a predetermined period of time after the winning game is executed, making it easier to execute a lottery (for example, JP 2012-217766 A).

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the degree of advantage of the time-saving game is the same regardless of the conditions under which the time-saving game is set, which creates the problem that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the game.

In response to this, gaming machine A1 changes to the third state when a period of time continues during which bonus play is not executed, making it easier for the discrimination condition to be met, so there is an effect of preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing even if a long period of time continues during which bonus play is not executed.

A gaming machine A1, comprising: an entry means through which a gaming ball can enter; a discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the entry means; a variable means capable of changing the position between a first position at which the gaming ball can enter the entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position; and a variable control means capable of executing a plurality of variable controls including at least a first variable control of the variable means and a second variable control that makes it easier for the gaming ball to enter the entry means than the first variable control based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition, and the second state is configured to be a state in which the variable means is more easily controlled by the second variable control than the first state. A gaming machine A2, characterized in that

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 has the effect that, since it is easier for the gaming ball to enter the ball entry means in the second state than in the first state, when a predetermined setting condition is met, the player can play the game with a stronger expectation that the second state will be set.

A gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the third state is a state in which the variable means is more easily controlled by the second variable control than in the first state, and is configured as a state in which the specified variable condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the second state, in the gaming machine A2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 has the effect of being able to configure the second state as a state in which it is easier for the discrimination means to make a discrimination than the third state.

A gaming machine A4, which is equipped with a second ball entry means configured to allow a gaming ball to enter and located at a position different from the ball entry means in the gaming machine A2 or A3, and a second discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring the discrimination information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second ball entry means, the discrimination means being configured such that discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means is more likely to be advantageous to the player than discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means, and the third state being configured such that discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the second discrimination information acquisition means is more likely to be executed than in the second state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A2 and A3, gaming machine A4 has the effect of allowing a player to play the game with a stronger expectation of transitioning to the third state than the second state, since in the third state, it becomes easier to make a highly advantageous determination using the determination information acquired by the second determination information acquisition means.

A gaming machine A4, comprising a launching means configured to launch at least a gaming ball in a first direction in which the gaming ball can reach the ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and a second direction different from the first direction, and a third ball entry means provided at a position where the gaming ball launched in the second direction by the launching means can enter the ball and where the gaming ball launched in the first direction has difficulty entering the ball, and the discrimination information acquisition means is configured to acquire the discrimination information when the gaming ball enters the ball entry means and when the gaming ball enters the third ball entry means, and the first state is configured such that the discrimination means is more likely to execute discrimination when the gaming ball is launched in the second direction than when the gaming ball is launched in the first direction, and the second state and the third state are configured such that the discrimination means is more likely to execute discrimination when the gaming ball is launched in the first direction than when the gaming ball is launched in the second direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A4, gaming machine A5 has the effect of adding variety to the game by making it possible to vary the direction in which the gaming ball is launched between the first state and the second and third states.

A gaming machine A6 is any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, and is characterized in that it includes an initialization means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine, and the specific condition is established at least when the settings of the gaming machine are initialized by the initialization means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, gaming machine A6 can achieve novel behavior in which an advantageous third state is set even if a bonus game has never been played, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine A7 is characterized in that in gaming machine A6, the specific condition is at least composed of a first specific condition that is established when the settings of the gaming machine are initialized by the initialization means, and a second specific condition that is established when the determination result of the determination means becomes the first determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A6, gaming machine A7 has the effect of allowing the player to play the game while paying attention to the number of determinations made after initialization or after the execution of a bonus game.

Gaming machine A8 is characterized in that in gaming machine A7, the specific condition is at least composed of the first specific condition, the second specific condition, and a third specific condition that is established based on the third state being set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A7, gaming machine A8 has the effect that even after the third state is set, if the second determination result is obtained consecutively a specific number of times, the third state is set again, so that even if the third state ends, the player can play the game in the hope that the third state will be set again.

<Feature B group> (suppressing the execution of pre-reading performance for reserved balls that will be consumed after the end of a predetermined specific number of special drawing)
a discrimination information acquisition means for acquiring discrimination information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition; a discrimination means for executing a discrimination using the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means based on the establishment of the discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined first discrimination result; a discrimination information storage means for storing the discrimination information acquired by the discrimination information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of pieces of information until the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means; and a pre-identification means for using the discrimination information stored in the discrimination information storage means to identify the discrimination result of the discrimination means before the discrimination information is used for discrimination by the discrimination means. a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect based on the determination result of the determination means being determined by the pre-determination means; a first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition; a second game state setting means for setting a second game state different from the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition in the first game state; and a suppression means for suppressing the specific effect of a predetermined presentation pattern from being executed by the specific effect execution means based on the determination information used for the determination of the determination means after the establishment of the second condition being obtained in the first game state.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a variable pattern, and when the patterns are displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded an advantageous winning game. In addition to the patterns, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are implemented to increase the excitement of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

In addition, some conventional gaming machines aim to increase the player's interest by implementing suggestive effects that indicate the possibility of a winning game being awarded even before the display of changing patterns begins (for example, when the initial winning event is detected).

However, if the suggestive performance is unconditionally executed, there is a risk of malfunction. As a result, it may be difficult to set the performance mode appropriately.

In contrast, gaming machine B1 allows the player to pay more attention to the fact that the second condition is met and the second gaming state is set, which has the effect of allowing the presentation mode to be set appropriately.

Gaming machine B2, in which the second condition in B1 is configured as a condition that is established at least when a second determination result different from the first determination result is obtained consecutively over a predetermined specific number of determinations by the determination means in the first gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous, since a second gaming state with a different degree of advantage is set even if the first judgment result is not obtained in the first gaming state.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B1 or B2, it is provided with a presentation mode determination means for determining one of a plurality of presentation modes including at least a first presentation mode and a second presentation mode that is more likely to be determined when the pre-determination means results in the first determination result as the presentation mode of the specific presentation executed by the specific presentation execution means, and the suppression means is configured to be capable of suppressing the execution of at least the second presentation mode.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 and B2, gaming machine B3 allows players to focus on the presentation of specific effects while playing the game, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine B3, the presentation mode determination means is configured to be capable of determining one of a plurality of presentation modes including at least the first presentation mode, the second presentation mode, and a third presentation mode that is more likely to be determined when the second condition is satisfied than the first presentation mode, and the suppression means is configured to be capable of suppressing the execution of at least the second presentation mode and the third presentation mode. Gaming machine B4.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine B3, gaming machine B4 has the effect of suggesting both the possibility of the first judgment result and the possibility of the second condition being met, depending on the presentation mode of the specific presentation, so that the presentation mode can be set more appropriately.

A gaming machine B5 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, it is provided with a termination means for terminating the second gaming state based on the establishment of a third predetermined condition in the second gaming state, and the discrimination information acquired in the first gaming state and corresponding to the first discrimination result is configured to be more advantageously used for discrimination by the discrimination means during the second gaming state than for discrimination by the discrimination means after the second gaming state has been terminated by the termination means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B4, gaming machine B5 can make it difficult to know from the presentation mode of the specific presentation whether or not the discrimination information obtained before the second condition is met and used after transition to the second gaming state is likely to result in the first discrimination result, and therefore has the effect of suppressing irregular gaming methods in which the order of use of the discrimination information is adjusted so that it is used in the lottery during the second gaming state only when there is a high possibility of the first discrimination result.

Gaming machine B6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B5, it is configured to set to the first gaming state based on the second gaming state being ended by the ending means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B5, gaming machine B6 allows the player to play in the strong hope that the first determination result will be obtained before the second gaming state ends, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine B7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B5 or B6, the discrimination information acquired in the first gaming state and corresponding to a miss discrimination result different from the first discrimination result is more likely to be advantageously used for discrimination by the discrimination means after the second gaming state is terminated by the termination means than for discrimination by the discrimination means during the second gaming state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B5 and B6, gaming machine B7 makes it difficult to know from the presentation mode of the specific presentation whether the discrimination information obtained before the second condition is met and used after transition to the second gaming state is likely to be the first discrimination result, and therefore has the effect of suppressing irregular gaming methods in which the order of use of the discrimination information is adjusted so that it is used in the lottery after the second gaming state ends when the first discrimination result is unlikely.

Any of gaming machines B5 to B7, comprising a first ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and a variable means capable of changing between a first position through which the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position, the discrimination information acquisition means being configured to acquire first discrimination information as the discrimination information based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means, and second discrimination information as the discrimination information based on the gaming ball entering the second ball entry means, the discrimination means being configured such that discrimination using the second discrimination information is more likely to give the player an advantage than discrimination using the first discrimination information, and the second gaming state being configured such that the variable means is more likely to be changed to the first position than in the first gaming state. Gaming machine B8.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B5 to B7, gaming machine B8 can further increase the degree of advantage of the second gaming state, so that the player can play with a stronger expectation that the second gaming state will be set.

<Feature C Group> (When transitioning to the first state and when transitioning to the second state, signals with different output modes are output from the same channel at the outer end)
A gaming machine C1 comprising: a signal output section composed of a plurality of signal output terminals capable of outputting a predetermined signal toward a predetermined device; a first signal control means for controlling a signal of a predetermined first output mode to be output from a predetermined specific signal output terminal among the plurality of signal output terminals based on a predetermined first output condition being satisfied; and a second signal control means for controlling a signal of a predetermined second output mode to be output from the specific signal output terminal based on a second output condition different from the first output condition being satisfied.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, output information about the game to a specified device (such as a hall computer) depending on the game situation. In such gaming machines, the specified device can be made to understand the game situation being played on the gaming machine based on the output information about the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 3848105).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, as the amount of information to be output to a specific device increases, the number of signal output terminals for outputting signals may increase. This may make it difficult to output signals to a specific device in an optimal manner.

In contrast, with gaming machine C1, a signal can be output to a specified device from the same signal output terminal in different output modes depending on whether the first output condition is met or the second output condition is met, which has the effect of reducing the number of signal output terminals.

A gaming machine C2 is provided with a discrimination means for discriminating based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined specific discrimination result, a first gaming state setting means for setting a predetermined first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined first setting condition, and a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined second setting condition in the first gaming state, the first condition being established when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result, and the second condition being established when the second setting condition is established.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 can output a signal indicating that a bonus game is being played and a signal indicating that an advantageous second game state is being set from a common signal output terminal, which has the effect of reducing the number of signal output terminals.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that in gaming machine C2, the second set condition is configured as a condition that is at least different from the determination result of the determination means becoming the specific determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C2, gaming machine C3 can achieve a novel gameplay in which a highly advantageous gaming state is set even if no specific judgment result is obtained, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the second setting condition is configured to be satisfied when the discrimination means produces a miss discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result consecutively over a predetermined specific number of discriminations executed after a predetermined specific condition is satisfied.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C3, gaming machine C4 can provide novel gameplay that creates the expectation of consecutive misses, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine C5 is characterized by comprising: a third game state setting means capable of setting a third game state, which is more advantageous than the first game state, as the game state after the execution of the bonus game is completed in gaming machine C3 or C4; a third signal output control means for controlling a signal of a third output mode to be output from a first signal output terminal different from the specific signal output terminal during the period from when either the second game state or the third game state is set until the second game state or the third game state is ended; a game state determination means for determining the game state based on the fact that the power supply to the gaming machine is turned on; and a fourth signal output control means for controlling a signal of a fourth output mode to be output from the specific signal output terminal based on the fact that the game state determination means has determined that the game state is the second game state.

Gaming machine C5 has the effect of being able to easily determine whether the gaming state at the time the gaming machine is powered on is the second gaming state or the third gaming state based on the presence or absence of a signal of the fourth output mode, in addition to the effect of gaming machine C3 or C4.

Gaming machine C6 is characterized in that it is provided with: a consecutive number determination means for determining the number of consecutive miss determination results after the specific condition is satisfied based on the power being turned on to the gaming machine C4; and a fifth signal output control means for controlling the output of a signal in an output mode corresponding to the consecutive number determined by the consecutive number determination means from a predetermined signal output terminal.

Gaming machine C6 has the effect of being able to allow a specified device to grasp the number of consecutive misses at the time the gaming machine is powered on, in addition to the effect of gaming machine C4.

A gaming machine C7 is characterized in that it is provided with: a means for specifying the number of consecutive misses when the power supply to the gaming machine C6 is cut off, which specifies the number of consecutive misses after the specific condition is met, based on the power supply to the gaming machine being cut off; and a sixth signal output control means for controlling the output of a signal from the predetermined signal output terminal in accordance with the number of consecutive misses specified by the means for specifying the number of consecutive misses when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off.

Gaming machine C7 has the same effect as gaming machine C6, but can also allow a specified device to know the number of consecutive misses when the power is cut off and the number of consecutive misses when the power is turned on. If there is a discrepancy between the number of consecutive misses when the power is cut off and the number of consecutive misses when the power is turned on, the specified device can determine the possibility of fraudulent activity against the gaming machine. This has the effect of preventing fraudulent activity.

<Feature D group> (outputs the number of times stuck from the outer end)
A gaming machine D1 having a signal output unit capable of outputting a predetermined signal to a predetermined device, characterized in that it comprises: a discrimination means which makes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means which executes a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined first discrimination result; a counting means which counts the number of times that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result in at least a specific gaming state; and a signal control means which causes the signal output unit to output a signal corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means based on the power being turned on to the gaming machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, output information about the game to a specified device (such as a hall computer) depending on the game situation. In such gaming machines, the specified device can be made to understand the game situation being played on the gaming machine based on the output information about the game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 3848105).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, there is a limit to the information that can be output to a specified device, which can make it difficult to output a signal to the specified device in an appropriate manner.

In contrast, gaming machine D1 has the advantage that the count value of the counting means can be ascertained by a specified device when the gaming machine is powered on.

The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it is equipped with an advantageous gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the specific gaming state, based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means has been the second discrimination result a predetermined specific number of times in succession after the specific gaming state is set in the gaming machine D1.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, gaming machine D2 can provide a novel gameplay that allows players to hope for successive second judgment results, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D1 or D2, the signal control means is configured to be able to output a signal from the signal output unit according to the number of times counted by the counting means based on the fact that the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 and D2, gaming machine D3 has the effect of allowing a specified device to grasp the count value of the counting means when the power is cut off.

In the gaming machine D3, the predetermined device is characterized by having a storage means capable of storing information corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means output from the signal output unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, at least until the gaming machine is next powered on and receives information corresponding to the number of times counted by the counting means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D3, gaming machine D4 has the effect that if fraudulent conduct, such as rewriting the number of times counted by the counting means while the gaming machine is powered off, is carried out, the fraudulent conduct can be easily detected by a specified device the next time the power is turned on.

<Feature E group> (When a predetermined signal is output to a device other than the display for displaying the performance, a predetermined performance is executed on the display)
a signal output means for outputting a signal to a specific device in which a visual appearance mode corresponding to the type of signal received is set; a discrimination means for making a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being the specific discrimination result; a signal control means for controlling, based at least on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined specific discrimination result, to output to the specific device a specific type of signal by which the specific device can be set to a specific visual appearance mode; and a first effect execution means for executing a first effect configured with an effect mode that makes it easier for a player to confirm that the specific device is in the specific visual appearance mode based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being the specific discrimination result.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a variable pattern, and when the patterns are displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded an advantageous winning game. In addition to the patterns, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are implemented to increase the excitement of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

However, there is a demand for more innovative presentation styles to be implemented in gaming machines to increase players' interest in playing the games.

In contrast, gaming machine E1 can realize a novel presentation that makes the player feel as if a special device and the gaming machine are working together to notify the player that a special game will be played, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine E2 is characterized in that it is provided with a second effect execution means for executing a second effect that makes it difficult for a player to recognize that the specific determination result has been obtained, at least from the time when the determination result of the determination means becomes the specific determination result until the first effect is executed, in the gaming machine E1.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E1, gaming machine E2 can give the player the impression that a specific judgment result has suddenly been notified to him/her through the first presentation and the specific visual appearance, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine E3, which is characterized in that it is provided with a variable means for varying the position between a first position where the visual appearance of the specific device is visible and a second position where the visual appearance of the specific device is more difficult to see than the first position, and a variable control means for variably controlling the variable means, and that the variable means is configured to be varied to the second position at least while the second performance is being executed, and to be varied to the first position based on the execution of the first performance.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E2, gaming machine E3 makes it physically difficult to visually determine whether or not the specific device is set to a specific viewing mode while the second performance is being performed, so that even if the player has visually determined the specific device before the first performance is performed, it is difficult for the player to realize that a specific result will be obtained while the second performance is being performed.

Gaming machine E4 is equipped with a first game state setting means for setting a first game state disadvantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined first setting condition in any one of gaming machines E1 to E3, and a second game state setting means for setting a second game state more advantageous to a player than the first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition in the first game state, the signal control means being configured to be controllable so that a first type of signal that can set the specific device to a first viewing mode different from the specific viewing mode based on the establishment of the second condition, and the first performance execution means being configured to be capable of executing the first performance when the second condition is established.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, gaming machine E4 can not only notify the player that a bonus game is being played, but also that a second game state is being set, through a presentation that makes it seem as if a specific device and the gaming machine are linked, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine E4, comprising: an entry means through which a gaming ball can enter; a discrimination information acquisition means capable of acquiring discrimination information used for discrimination by the discrimination means based on the entry of a gaming ball into the entry means; a variable means capable of changing between a first position at which the gaming ball can enter the entry means and a second position at which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first position; and a variable control means for changing the variable means from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the establishment of a predetermined variable condition, the second gaming state being configured as a gaming state in which the predetermined variable condition is more likely to be established than the first gaming state; and the first performance execution means being configured to execute the first performance based on the first change of the variable means to the first position after the second gaming state is set, when it is determined before the second condition is established that the period from the establishment of the second condition to the change of the variable means to the first position by the variable control means is equal to or longer than a predetermined specific period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E4, gaming machine E5 can notify the player of the second gaming state only after it becomes possible to actually insert the gaming ball into the ball insertion means, which has the effect of preventing the player from unnecessarily firing the gaming ball.

Gaming machine E6 is any one of gaming machines E1 to E5, characterized in that the specific visual appearance is configured as a visual appearance that can notify the player that the bonus game is being played.

In addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, gaming machine E6 has the effect of clearly notifying a player that a special game is being played using a specific device.

Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E1 to E6, the signal control means is configured to be controllable so that a second type of signal is output to the specific device based on the execution of the determination by the determination means, and the specific device is configured to be capable of setting a visual indication that can indicate to the player the number of times the determination by the determination means has been executed, depending on the number of times the second type of signal has been output from the signal output means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E6, gaming machine E7 has the effect of improving convenience for players by allowing them to check the number of determinations made based on the visual confirmation mode of a specific device.

Gaming machine E8 is characterized in that the specific device in gaming machine E7 is configured to be able to set a visual indication that can indicate to the player the number of times the bonus game has been executed, depending on the number of times the specific type of signal is output from the signal output means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E7, gaming machine E8 has the effect of improving convenience for players by allowing them to check the number of bonus games that have been played based on the visual confirmation mode of a specific device.

<Feature F group> (Regardless of whether the RAM is cleared or not, the ceiling time reduction is activated when the number of draws after the win reaches a certain number of draws)
a control unit for controlling a game machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; a control unit for controlling a game machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; a control unit for controlling a game machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; a control unit for controlling a game machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention;

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, dynamically display multiple symbols on a display means, such as a liquid crystal display, to notify the player of the results of a lottery that is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot. In such gaming machines, when the dynamically displayed multiple symbols are statically displayed in a specific predetermined combination, the machine transitions to a so-called winning state, which is advantageous for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-230714 A).

However, with such conventional gaming machines, it can be difficult to appropriately determine the dynamic display mode.

In response to this, gaming machine F1 prevents the information for selecting the specified information from being changed even when the machine is initialized, which has the effect of allowing the specified information to be suitably selected even after initialization.

A gaming machine F2 is characterized in that it is equipped with a setting means capable of setting information for setting a specific gaming state advantageous to a player, based on the fact that the determination means has executed a predetermined specific number of determinations without the award of the bonus after the award of the bonus has been completed in the gaming machine F1.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F1, gaming machine F2 has the effect of making it difficult for the player's motivation to play to decrease even if the discrimination means does not produce a specific result by executing discrimination a specific number of times, thereby setting an advantageous specific gaming state.

A gaming machine F3, which is characterized in that it is provided with a counting means for counting the number of times the determination means has executed the determination without the bonus being awarded, and a second suppression means for suppressing the count value counted by the counting means from being initialized when the initialization is performed by the initialization means, and the setting means is configured to be able to set information for setting the specific gaming state based on the count value of the counting means reaching a count value corresponding to the specific number of times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F2, gaming machine F3 maintains the count value of the counting means even when the gaming machine is initialized, so that the number of determinations made by the determination means until the specific gaming state is set can be prevented from increasing from the time the power is cut off, even if the gaming machine is initialized. This has the effect of preventing players from being reluctant to play on an initialized gaming machine.

A gaming machine F4 is characterized in that in the gaming machine F3, the specified information selection means is configured to be able to select the specified information based at least on the count value of the counting means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F3, gaming machine F4 has the effect of being able to use the count value of the counting means both when reading the number of discriminations of the discrimination means to determine whether or not to set a specific gaming state, and when reading the number of discriminations of the discrimination means to select the specified information, eliminating the possibility of the two being out of sync, and thus allowing the specified information to be suitably selected.

Gaming machine F5 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second setting means capable of setting information for setting the specific gaming state based on the fact that, after the specific gaming state is set, the determination by the determination means is executed the specific number of times without the bonus being awarded, in any of gaming machines F2 to F4.

According to gaming machine F5, even after a specific game state is set, if no bonus is awarded, the specific game state is set again when the number of determinations reaches a specific number, so that it is possible to realize novel gameplay in which the degree of advantage periodically increases even if no bonus is awarded.

Gaming machine F6 is characterized in that it is equipped with a second initialization means capable of initializing the count value of the counting means based on the setting of the specific gaming state in gaming machine F5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F5, gaming machine F6 can initialize the count value when a specific gaming state is set. Therefore, even when the specific gaming state has not been set, or even when the specific gaming state has been set, it is possible to determine whether or not to set a specific gaming state depending on whether the count value has reached a specific number of times, and this has the effect of allowing common control between the setting means and the second setting means.

Gaming machine F7 is any one of gaming machines F2 to F6, and is characterized by having a third initialization means for initializing the count value of the counting means based on the completion of the awarding of the bonus by the bonus awarding means.

In addition to the effect of any of gaming machines F2 to F6, gaming machine F7 has the effect that the count value of the counting means is initialized each time the awarding of the bonus is completed, so that a specific gaming state can be set when the number of determinations made by the determination means reaches a specific number after the awarding of the bonus is completed, regardless of the timing at which the bonus is awarded.

<Feature G group> (When the first lottery result after RAM clearing is different from a winning result, a variation pattern scenario is set, and the second or subsequent lottery results avoid setting the scenario)
A gaming machine G1 is characterized in that it is equipped with a control means for performing predetermined control related to a game, and is equipped with a specific control setting means for setting the control means to perform a predetermined specific control based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, and a suppression means for suppressing the setting of the specific control setting means if the predetermined specific condition is established at the time when the predetermined setting condition is established.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a control means for controlling the game. In such gaming machines, when the game situation changes, such as when transitioning to a winning state, the control means is set to execute predetermined controls, such as setting of set values (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-276365 A).

However, in such gaming machines, it may be difficult to cause the control means to perform suitable control.

In contrast, gaming machine G1 can avoid specific control when specific conditions are met, which has the effect of allowing more optimal control.

In the gaming machine G1, a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined specific discrimination result, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information to indicate the discrimination result of the discrimination means on the display means based on the discrimination of the discrimination means being executed, a stipulated information storage means for storing a plurality of stipulated information in which at least a correspondence is stipulated between dynamic display period information, which is information for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, and a discrimination count, which is the number of times the discrimination of the discrimination means has resulted in a discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, and A gaming machine G2 that includes a dynamic display period information specifying means for specifying the dynamic display period information corresponding to the determination count according to one of the multiple pieces of specified information stored in the specified information storage means based on the establishment of a condition, and a dynamic display period determination means for determining the dynamic display period according to the dynamic display period information specified by the dynamic display period information specifying means, and the control setting means is configured to be able to set, based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition, a control to specify one of the multiple pieces of specified information stored in the specified information storage means for use in specifying the dynamic display period information by the dynamic display period information specifying means as the specific control to be performed by the control means.

The gaming machine G2 has the advantage of being able to optimally determine the dynamic display period.

A gaming machine G3, characterized in that in the gaming machine G2, the predetermined setting condition is a condition that is established when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a first discrimination result that is at least different from the specific discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G2, gaming machine G3 has the effect of being able to identify specified information when the first determination result is reached, making it possible to differentiate the trends in the dynamic display period determined before and after the first determination result.

A gaming machine G4, which is characterized in that it is provided with an operating means operable by an operator in a gaming machine G3, and an initialization means capable of initializing the settings of the gaming machine to a predetermined initial setting based on the gaming machine being powered on in a state in which a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means, and the discrimination means is configured to determine the discrimination result as either the specific discrimination result or the first discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G3, gaming machine G4 has the effect of making a determination by the determination means after the gaming machine is initialized, and if a specific determination result is not obtained, the regulated information can be identified. Therefore, the regulated information can be identified by making a determination by the determination means once after the gaming machine is initialized. This has the effect of preventing a state in which the regulated information is not identified from continuing for a long period of time.

A gaming machine G5, in which the specific condition in the gaming machine G4 is configured as a condition that is established when the first determination result is obtained for the first time after the initialization means initializes the settings of the gaming machine to the initial settings.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G4, gaming machine G5 has the effect of preventing the repeated identification of stipulated information each time the first determination result is obtained.

Gaming machine G6 is characterized in that the control means in the gaming machine G4 or G5 is configured to be capable of performing at least the following specific controls: a first specific control that identifies one of the prescribed information based on the initialization means initializing the settings of the gaming machine to the initial settings and the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming the first discrimination result; and a second specific control that identifies one of the prescribed information based on the completion of the execution of the bonus game.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines G4 and G5, gaming machine G5 can also identify stipulated information when the bonus game ends, so the tendency of the dynamic display period to be determined can be changed when the bonus game ends. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine G7 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines G4 to G6, it is provided with an advantageous gaming state setting means for setting an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player based on the number of determinations having reached a predetermined specific number after the initialization means has initialized the settings of the gaming machine to the initial settings, and the specific control is configured with control for specifying the stipulated information that stipulates the correspondence between the dynamic display period information and each of the determination numbers at least until the specific number is reached.

In addition to the effect of any of gaming machines G4 to G6, gaming machine G7 can continue to use the regulation information identified when the gaming machine is initialized and the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the first discrimination result until the advantageous gaming state is set, so there is no need to perform control to switch the regulation information until the advantageous gaming state is set, and the processing load of the gaming machine can be reduced.

A gaming machine G8 is any one of the gaming machines G4 to G7, and is characterized in that it is equipped with an effect execution means that executes a specific effect when the gaming machine is initialized by the initialization means and the determination result of the determination means becomes the first determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines G4 to G7, gaming machine G8 has the effect of making the player understand that a specific condition has been met when a specific presentation is executed.

In the gaming machine G8, the effect execution means is configured to be able to suppress the execution of the specific effect when the power to the gaming machine is turned on and the settings of the gaming machine are not initialized to the initial settings by the initialization means. Gaming machine G9.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine G8, gaming machine G9 allows the player to understand whether the gaming machine has been initialized based on whether a specific performance is executed, so that when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the player is made to want to play at least until a specific condition is met to determine whether the gaming machine has been initialized. This has the effect of improving the operating rate of the gaming machine, particularly immediately after the opening of the hall in which the gaming machine is installed.

A gaming machine G10, which is one of gaming machines G2 to G9, is characterized in that the dynamic display period information is composed of information that specifies at least a plurality of different periods that can be determined as the dynamic display period.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G2 to G9, gaming machine G10 has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game by diversifying the dynamic display period, thereby providing variation in the period until the determination result of the determination means is displayed.

<Feature H group> (Reset the fluctuation pattern scenario when the ceiling lottery number is reached)
A gaming machine having a display means capable of displaying identification information, a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a dynamic display means capable of causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information for indicating a discrimination result of the discrimination means, and a benefit granting means capable of granting a benefit advantageous to a player based on the identification information for indicating a predetermined specific discrimination result being displayed on the display means, the gaming machine further comprising: a setting means capable of setting information for setting a specific gaming state advantageous to a player based on the discrimination of the discrimination means being executed a predetermined specific number of times without the benefit being granted after the granting of the benefit has been completed; a dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a dynamic display mode in the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display mode a selection information identification means for identifying one of the plurality of different pieces of selection information as selection information that is information for selecting one piece of selection information from the specification information storage means; and a selection information selection means for selecting one piece of selection information for determining the dynamic display mode from the specification information storage means in accordance with the selection information identified by the selection information identification means, wherein the selection information identification means is configured to be able to identify one piece of selection information for determining the dynamic display mode after the awarding of the bonus has been completed, based on the fact that the judgment of the judgment means has been performed a predetermined specific number of times without the bonus being awarded.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, dynamically display multiple symbols on a display means, such as a liquid crystal display, to notify the player of the results of a lottery that is held based on the entry of a gaming ball into a starting winning slot. In such gaming machines, when the dynamically displayed multiple symbols are statically displayed in a specific predetermined combination, the machine transitions to a so-called winning state, which is advantageous for the player (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-230714 A).

However, with such conventional gaming machines, it can be difficult to appropriately determine the dynamic display mode.

In response to this, gaming machine H1 has the advantage of being able to optimally identify the selection information.

The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that the selection information identification means in the gaming machine H1 is configured to identify first selection information as the selection information based on the fact that the bonus has been awarded, and to identify second selection information different from the first selection information based on the fact that the determination means has performed a predetermined specific number of times without the bonus being awarded after the awarding of the bonus has ended.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H1, gaming machine H2 has the effect of diversifying the tendency of the specified information to be determined, since different selection information can be specified when the awarding of the bonus is completed and when a specific gaming state is set.

Gaming machine H3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H1 or H2, the setting means is configured to be able to set information for setting the specific gaming state based on the fact that, after the specific gaming state has been set, the determination by the determination means has been performed the specific number of times without the bonus being awarded.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines H1 and H2, gaming machine H3 has the effect of realizing novel gameplay in which a specific gaming state is set periodically even if no special benefit is given, since the specific gaming state is set again even after the specific gaming state has been set once if no special benefit is given.

In gaming machine H3, the selection information is determined based on the determination of the determination means being performed a predetermined specific number of times without the benefit being awarded after the awarding of the benefit has been completed, and is configured with information that allows the specified information selection means to select the first specified information when the number of determinations of the determination means is less than a first number, which is less than the specific number, and to select the second specified information when the first number has been reached. Gaming machine H4.

According to gaming machine H4, when the first number of times is determined after the specific gaming state is set, the tendency of the determined dynamic display mode can be made to differ, which has the effect of making the player feel that the specific number of times is approaching due to the change in the tendency of the dynamic display mode.

In gaming machine H4, the selection information, which is determined based on the determination of the determination means being performed a predetermined specific number of times without the bonus being awarded, is configured as information that allows the specified information selection means to select the second specified information based on the number of times the determination means has determined a second number that is less than the specific number and greater than the first number, and allows the determination means to select the first specified information when the number of times the determination means has determined is greater than the first number and less than the second number. In gaming machine H5, the selection information is determined based on the number of times the determination means has determined a second number that is less than the specific number and greater than the first number, and allows the determination means to select the first specified information when the number of times the determination means determined is greater than the first number and less than the second number.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine H4, gaming machine H5 can determine a different tendency of the dynamic display mode when the determination count of the determination means executed after the setting of the specific gaming state becomes the first count and when it becomes the second count, compared to the other counts. This has the effect of making the player feel that the specific count is approaching in stages each time the tendency of the dynamic display mode changes.

Gaming machine H6 is characterized in that it is equipped with an advantage degree varying means capable of varying the advantage degree between the specific gaming state that is initially set after the awarding of the benefit is completed and the specific gaming state that is set after the specific gaming state is set based on the determination of the determination means being performed the specific number of times without the benefit being awarded.

With gaming machine H6, the degree of advantage can be varied depending on the timing set even in the same specific gaming state, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine H7 is characterized in that in gaming machine H6, the advantage degree varying means is configured to vary the advantage degree so that the specific gaming state that is set after the specific gaming state is set based on the determination by the determination means being performed the specific number of times without the benefit being granted is more advantageous than the specific gaming state that is initially set after the granting of the benefit is terminated.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H6, gaming machine H7 has the effect of realizing novel gameplay that creates the expectation that no bonus will be awarded, since a specific gaming state that is set in a state in which no bonus is awarded for a longer period of time can be made more advantageous.

<Feature I group> (When an interruption of a predetermined control with a high priority occurs during a periodic control that periodically varies the control, and the predetermined control is terminated, the periodic control is resumed from the control position as if the predetermined control had not been executed.)
a control means for executing a first control based on the establishment of a predetermined first execution condition, and for executing a second control different from the first control based on the establishment of a predetermined second execution condition during the execution of the first control; a third control setting means for setting a third control different from both the first control and the second control to be executed by the control means based on the establishment of a predetermined third execution condition at least during the execution of the first control; a termination means for terminating the third control based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition during the execution of the third control; and a post-termination control setting means for setting the second control to be executed by the control means if a predetermined specific condition is established at the time when the third control is terminated by the termination means, and for setting the first control to be executed by the control means if the specific condition is not established.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a control means for controlling the game. In such gaming machines, when the game situation changes, such as when transitioning to a winning state, the control means is set to execute predetermined controls, such as setting of set values (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-276365 A).

However, in such gaming machines, it may be difficult to cause the control means to perform suitable control.

In response to this, gaming machine I1 can switch between executing first control or second control after the end of third control depending on whether a specific condition is met at the time the third control ends, which has the effect of realizing more suitable control.

Gaming machine I2, characterized in that the post-termination control setting means in the gaming machine I1 is configured to be capable of setting the second control to be executed by the control means if the second control is being executed at the time the termination condition is satisfied, assuming that the third execution condition is not satisfied during execution of the first control, and to be capable of setting the first control to be executed by the control means if the first control is being executed at the time the termination condition is satisfied.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I1, gaming machine I2 has the effect of realizing more suitable control when the third control is terminated by setting the control content as if the third control had not been executed.

Gaming machine I3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a discrimination means for making a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in gaming machine I1 or I2, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined first discrimination result, and the second execution condition is a condition that is established when the number of times that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result after the first execution condition is established reaches a predetermined specific number of times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines I1 and I2, gaming machine I3 can switch to a different control when the number of times the second determination result occurs reaches a specific number of times, so it is possible to prevent the first control from being continuously executed in a situation where an advantageous bonus game is not being executed. This has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

Gaming machine I3, the post-termination setting means is configured to set the second control to be executed by the control means when the number of times the second determination result has occurred since the first execution condition was previously satisfied is equal to or greater than the specific number of times at the time the termination condition is satisfied, and to set the first control to be executed when the number of times the second determination result has occurred is less than the specific number of times. Gaming machine I4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I3, gaming machine I4 has the effect of being able to switch the control content after the end of the third control depending on the number of times the second judgment result is obtained, thereby realizing more suitable control.

A gaming machine I5, which is equipped with a display means capable of displaying identification information in a gaming machine I3 or I4, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means to show the result of the determination by the determination means, a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, and a prescribed information storage means for storing a plurality of prescribed information including at least a first prescribed information and a second prescribed information different from the first prescribed information as prescribed information for determining the dynamic display period, and the control means is configured to be capable of controlling the dynamic display period determination means to determine the dynamic display period using the first prescribed information as the first control, and to control the dynamic display period determination means to determine the dynamic display period using the second prescribed information as the second control.

According to gaming machine I5, the tendency of the dynamic display period determined by whether the first control or the second control is executed can be made different, so the tendency of the period until the determination result of the determination means is displayed can also be made different. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine I6 is characterized in that it is equipped with a first game state setting means for setting a first game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific setting condition in any one of gaming machines I3 to I5, and a second game state setting means for setting a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means has been the second discrimination result for a first number of times, which is greater than the specific number of times, after the first game state has been set, and the first execution condition is configured as a condition that is established when the specific setting condition is established.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I3 to I5, gaming machine I6 can switch from the first control to the second control during the first gaming state, which has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous until the second gaming state is set.

Gaming machine I7 is characterized in that it is provided with a third game state setting means for setting a third game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a third determination result that is different from the first determination result and is a part of the second determination result, and the third execution condition is configured as a condition that is established when the result of the determination by the determination means is the third determination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I6, gaming machine I7 can also switch control when switching from the first gaming state to the third gaming state, making it possible to execute control according to the gaming state.

Gaming machine I7, the first gaming state setting means is configured to be able to set the gaming state to the first gaming state based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means executed after the third discrimination result has been obtained has been the second discrimination result a predetermined second number of times in succession, and the end condition is configured as a condition that is established when the discrimination result of the discrimination means executed after the third discrimination result has been obtained has been the second discrimination result a predetermined second number of times in succession. Gaming machine I8.

According to gaming machine I8, when the third gaming state ends and the first gaming state is returned to, it is possible to switch between executing the first control or the second control depending on the number of times the second judgment result occurs, which has the effect of realizing more suitable control.

<Feature J group> (when a setting condition for an advantageous state is established, if it is determined that the setting condition for an advantageous state will be established again during the advantageous state, the degree of advantage taking into account the advantageous state that will be set later is notified)
A gaming machine J1 comprising: a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific setting condition; a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state which is more advantageous to a player than the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition which can be established at least in the first gaming state; and a specific effect execution means for executing, at least before the second gaming state is set, a specific effect which suggests to the player a degree of advantage taking into account the setting condition which is established again when the setting condition of the second gaming state is established again during the second gaming state.

Here, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the display device displays a variable pattern, and when the patterns are displayed in a predetermined combination, the player is awarded an advantageous winning game. In addition to the patterns, the display device also displays various images such as characters and landscapes, and a wide variety of exciting effects are implemented to increase the excitement of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2003-325886 A).

However, there was a need to further increase interest.

In addition, some conventional gaming machines are known to have multiple game states with different degrees of advantage, and some machines notify players of the degree of advantage through display effects or the like when transitioning to a game state with a higher degree of advantage.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, the degree of advantage is reported based on only the degree of advantage of the most recently set advantageous state, which may result in a discrepancy between the actual degree of advantage and the reported degree of advantage.

In response to this, with gaming machine J1, when it is known in advance that the second gaming state will be set and that the setting conditions for setting the second gaming state again during the second gaming state will be met, a novel presentation can be realized that suggests to the player the degree of advantage that takes into account the fact that the second gaming state will be set in an overlapping manner before the second gaming state is set, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine J1, comprising: a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a predetermined first discrimination result; and a termination means for terminating the second gaming state based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means executed after the second gaming state is set being a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result a predetermined specific number of times, and the specific presentation is composed of a presentation capable of suggesting the number of discriminations of the discrimination means until the second gaming state is terminated by the termination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine J1, gaming machine J2 can suggest the number of determinations until the second gaming state ends by using a specific effect, which has the effect of drawing attention to the specific effect.

A gaming machine J3 is characterized in that it is provided with a termination count determination means for determining one of a plurality of times including at least a first count and a second count greater than the first count as the number of times the determination means determines the number of times the determination means determines the second gaming state until the termination means terminates the second gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined setting condition.

According to gaming machine J3, multiple numbers of times can be determined by the end number determination means, which has the effect of allowing the player to pay attention to the number of times suggested by the specific presentation while playing the game.

Gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the predetermined setting condition in gaming machine J2 or J3 is composed of at least a first setting condition that is established when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a third discrimination result that is different from the first discrimination result and is included in the second discrimination result, and a second setting condition that is different from the first setting condition.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines J2 and J3, gaming machine J4 has multiple conditions for setting an advantageous gaming state, which increases the number of situations in which a transition to the second gaming state can be expected. This has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine J5, characterized in that in gaming machine J4, the second setting condition is configured as a condition that is established when the determination result of the determination means executed at least after the first gaming state is set becomes the second determination result a predetermined third number of times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine J4, gaming machine J5 has the effect of preventing the player's motivation to play from decreasing even if the first determination result is not obtained in the first gaming state in which the degree of advantage is low, because the determination by the determination means is the second determination result a third time, thereby setting the second gaming state in which the degree of advantage is high.

In the gaming machine J5, the specific effect execution means is configured to be able to set, as the effect mode of the specific effect, an effect mode corresponding to the number of determinations that can be executed between the establishment of the first setting condition and the end of the second gaming state, which is set based on the determination result of the determination means reaching the third number, when the first setting condition is established and the number of determinations of the determination means reaches the third number before the determination of the specific number of times is executed in the second gaming state, which is set based on the establishment of the first setting condition. Gaming machine J6.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine J5, gaming machine J6 can set the presentation mode of the specific presentation according to the number of determinations until the second game state is actually ended, which has the effect of allowing the player to pay more attention to the specific presentation while playing the game.

A gaming machine J6 is provided with a presentation mode determination means for determining one of a plurality of presentation modes, including at least a first presentation mode indicating that at least a fourth number of determinations can be made if the first determination result is not obtained in the set second gaming state, and a second presentation mode indicating that a fifth number of determinations, which is greater than the fourth number of determinations, can be made, as the presentation mode of the specific presentation executed by the specific presentation execution means, and the presentation mode determination means is configured to be capable of determining the first presentation mode when the number of determinations that can be made if the first determination result is not obtained in the set second gaming state is equal to or greater than the first number of determinations and is less than the second number of determinations. A gaming machine J7 is characterized in that it is configured to determine the first presentation mode when the number of determinations that can be made if the first determination result is not obtained in the set second gaming state is equal to or greater than the first number of determinations and is less than the second number of determinations.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine J6, gaming machine J7 can uniformly determine the first presentation mode when the number of determinations until the second game state ends is equal to or greater than the first number and less than the second number, thereby reducing the processing load of the gaming machine.

A gaming machine J7, characterized in that it comprises: a display means capable of displaying a presentation mode; a display control means for causing the display means to display information indicating the number of judgments that can be made before the second gaming state is ended, based on the second gaming state being set, the number of judgments corresponding to the presentation mode of the specific presentation that was made before the second gaming state was set; and an update means for updating the information indicating the number of judgments displayed on the display means to information that reduces the number of judgments by one each time the discrimination means makes a judgment in the second gaming state.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine J7, gaming machine J8 has the effect of displaying the number of determinations until the second gaming state ends on the display means, making it easy for the player to understand how long the second gaming state will continue.

<Feature K group> (update a counter within a predetermined range, and when the counter value becomes a first counter value, update the counter value to a second counter value)
A gaming machine K1 comprising: an update means capable of updating a counter value of a specific counter to a value of 1 within a predetermined range based on the establishment of a predetermined specific update condition; a specific control execution means for executing a predetermined specific control based on the counter value of the specific counter being updated to a predetermined first counter value by the update means; and a counter value setting means for setting the counter value of the specific counter to a second counter value which is within the predetermined range and is different from the first counter value based on the counter value of the specific counter being updated to the first counter value by the update means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a control means for controlling the game. In such gaming machines, when the game situation changes, such as when transitioning to a winning state, the control means is set to execute predetermined controls, such as setting of set values (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-276365 A).

However, better control is needed.

In contrast, with the gaming machine K1, when a specific counter value is updated to a first counter value, it can be updated to a second counter value, so the counter value can be updated appropriately. This has the effect of allowing specific control to be executed more appropriately.

A gaming machine K2, characterized in that in the gaming machine K1, the first counter value is configured to be greater than the second counter value, and the update means is configured to be able to update the counter value of the specific counter to a counter value greater than the counter value before the update.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine K1, gaming machine K2 has the effect of making the player expect that the specific control will be executed again, since after updating to the second counter value, the counter value can be updated again to the first counter value by repeatedly updating the counter value.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means on the display means, a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus advantageous to a player based on the display of the identification information for indicating a predetermined specific discrimination result on the display means, a setting means capable of setting information for setting a specific gaming state advantageous to a player based on the discrimination of the discrimination means being executed a predetermined specific number of times without the bonus being granted after the granting of the bonus has been completed, a dynamic display mode determination means capable of determining a dynamic display mode in the dynamic display of the identification information, and a plurality of different A gaming machine K3 is provided with a stipulated information storage means in which multiple pieces of stipulated information that stipulate dynamic display modes are stored, and a stipulated information selection means capable of selecting one piece of stipulated information for determining the dynamic display mode from the stipulated information storage means, the update condition being established based on the establishment of the discrimination condition, the specific control execution means being configured to execute control to specify a specific selection information that has been determined in advance from multiple selection information that is predefined as selection information that causes the stipulated information selection means to select one piece of stipulated information from the stipulated information storage means, and the stipulated information selection means being configured to select one piece of stipulated information in accordance with the counter value of the specific counter and the specified selection information.

The gaming machine K3 has the effect of being able to appropriately identify the selection information.

A gaming machine K4 is characterized in that, in a gaming machine K3, it is configured to be able to specify, as the selection information, first selection information different from the specific selection information based on the fact that the privilege has been granted.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine K3, gaming machine K4 can also identify selection information when a bonus is awarded, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine K5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine K3 or K4, the setting means is configured to be able to set information for setting the specific gaming state based on the fact that, after the specific gaming state has been set, the determination by the determination means has been performed the specific number of times without the bonus being awarded.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines K3 and K4, gaming machine K5 has the effect of realizing novel gameplay in which a specific gaming state is set periodically even if no special benefit is awarded, since the specific gaming state is set again even after the specific gaming state has been set once if no special benefit is awarded.

<Feature L group> (When an interruption of a first control having a high priority occurs during a periodic control in which the control is periodically varied, and the first control is terminated, a second control different from the periodic control is executed)
a control means for executing a first control based on the establishment of a predetermined first execution condition, and for executing a second control different from the first control based on the establishment of a predetermined second execution condition during the execution of the first control; a third control setting means for setting a third control different from both the first control and the second control to be executed by the control means based on the establishment of a predetermined third execution condition at least during the execution of the first control; a termination means for terminating the third control based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition during the execution of the third control; and a post-termination control setting means for setting a fourth control different from both the first control and the second control to be executed by the control means based on the termination of the third control by the termination means.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a control means for controlling the game. In such gaming machines, when the game situation changes, such as when transitioning to a winning state, the control means is set to execute predetermined controls, such as setting of set values (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2001-276365 A).

However, in such gaming machines, it may be difficult to cause the control means to perform suitable control.

In contrast, with gaming machine L1, when the third control is terminated, the fourth control can be executed, which has the effect of realizing more suitable control.

Gaming machine L2, in which the first execution condition in gaming machine L1 is composed of a condition that can be met at least while the fourth control is being executed.

Since the first execution condition is satisfied while the fourth control is being executed, the first control is executed again, which has the effect of enabling the expectation that the first execution condition will be satisfied while the fourth control is being executed.

Gaming machine L3 is characterized in that it is equipped with a discrimination means for executing a discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition in gaming machine L1 or L2, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means becoming a predetermined first discrimination result, and the second execution condition is a condition that is established when the number of times that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a second discrimination result different from the first discrimination result after the first execution condition is established reaches a predetermined specific number of times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines L1 and L2, gaming machine L3 can switch to a different control when the number of times the second determination result occurs reaches a specific number of times, so it is possible to prevent the first control from being continuously executed in a situation where an advantageous bonus game is not being executed. This has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

A gaming machine L3, comprising a display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means to show the result of the determination by the determination means, a dynamic display period determination means for determining a dynamic display period for the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, and a prescribed information storage means for storing a plurality of prescribed information including at least a first prescribed information and a second prescribed information different from the first prescribed information as prescribed information for determining the dynamic display period, and the control means is configured to be capable of controlling the dynamic display period determination means to determine the dynamic display period using the first prescribed information as the first control, and to control the dynamic display period determination means to determine the dynamic display period using the second prescribed information as the second control.

Gaming machine L4 is provided with a specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a third determination result that is different from the first determination result and is included in the second determination result, the third execution condition being configured as a condition that is established based on the result of the determination by the determination means being the third determination result, and the third control being configured as a control for causing the dynamic display period determination means to determine the dynamic display period using third specified information that is different from both the first specified information and the second specified information. Gaming machine L5.

With gaming machine L5, the tendency of the dynamic display period determined when a specific gaming state is set can be varied, which has the effect of preventing the game from becoming monotonous.

5073 Series <Features Group A>
A gaming machine A1, characterized in that in a game having a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, the gaming machine A1 has a presentation mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of presentation modes on the display means, a variable display means capable of varying the presentation mode displayed on the display means, a notification means capable of arranging a notification mode at a position where the presentation mode is displayed, and a suggestion control means capable of suggesting the variable presentation mode by arranging the notification mode when the plurality of presentation modes are displayed.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and an effect is executed to notify the player of the result of the determination. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game.

According to gaming machine A1, the notification mode is arranged so that the player can easily recognize the variable presentation mode, which has the effect of reducing the inconvenience of overlooking the variable presentation mode and increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine A2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A1, it has an acquisition means capable of acquiring information that can be determined by the determination means, and a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and the performance mode display means is capable of displaying the performance mode when the information is stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 has the effect of being able to determine the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means based on the number of presentation patterns displayed, and predicting the number of times that can be determined.

A gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A2, it has a pre-determination means capable of executing a determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the variable display means is configured to be variable based on the determination result of the pre-determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A1 and A2, gaming machine A3 varies the presentation mode based on the results of the determination made by the advance determination means, making it possible to predict the results of the determination by varying the presentation mode, and thus increasing the interest in the game.

<Characteristics Group B>
a setting means for setting information for varying a setting based on the operation of the operating means; a presentation execution means for executing a presentation mode corresponding to the varied setting; an identification mode display means for displaying an identification mode corresponding to the set information on a display means when the operating means is operated; a setting means for setting a specific period during which the identification mode is more difficult to see than during a normal period; and a presentation execution means for executing a first mode during the period during which the identification mode is not displayed, and executing a second mode different from the first mode to suggest the identification mode when the operating means is operated during the specific period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game has been won or not, and an effect is executed to notify the player of the result of the judgment. Gaming machines have been proposed in which the game mode can be changed by operating an operating means that is provided on the gaming machine and can be operated by the player. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, there has been a problem in that when the operating means is operated, it is sometimes difficult to determine whether the game mode has been changed, which reduces the interest in the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest in the game.

According to gaming machine B1, during a specific period when the identification mode is difficult to see, a second mode is executed to suggest the identification mode, so that by utilizing the mode execution means that executes a different first mode under normal circumstances, it is possible to suggest the identification mode to the player, making it easier for the player to understand, and thus increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine B2, which has a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information showing the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means on a display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus advantageous to a player when identification information showing a specific result of the discrimination is displayed on the display means, and the performance execution means is configured to be able to change during the period in which the identification information is subsequently dynamically displayed based on a setting changed by operating the operating means during a period in which the identification information is not dynamically displayed, and execute the performance.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 has the effect of allowing players to enjoy the effects of the dynamic display of the identification information in conjunction with the content operated during periods when dynamic display is not performed, and the content is reflected during the subsequent dynamic display period.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that in gaming machine B1 or B2, the mode execution means is configured to be moved to the position where the identification mode was displayed during the specific period and executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 and B2, gaming machine B3 has the effect of making it easier to understand that the second mode is being executed instead of the identified mode, as the mode execution means is moved to the position where the identified mode was displayed and executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

<Feature C> (Door opening and closing)
A gaming machine C1 having a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, the gaming machine C1 having: a performance execution means capable of performing a performance during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed; a variable means capable of varying the state of the identification information based on the establishment of a specific condition during the period in which the performance is being executed; and a determination means capable of varying and determining the number of times the specific condition is established during a period until the dynamic display period of the identification information has elapsed.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and multiple symbols are dynamically displayed as an effect to notify the result of the determination, and then the symbols are statically displayed in a combination to notify the result of the lottery. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, there was a problem that the dynamic display mode of the symbols was prone to becoming monotonous, and the combination to be notified could be predicted before the symbols were statically displayed, reducing the interest in the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest in the game.

With gaming machine C1, the identification information changes each time a specific condition is met, so that the player can expect the information to change to a state that indicates a specific judgment result each time a specific condition is met. This creates interest in the number of times determined by the determination means, and has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Gaming machine C2 is characterized in that in gaming machine C1, the dynamic display of the identification information is configured to be capable of executing a temporary stop mode that temporarily stops at least a portion of the identification information in a manner that allows the identification information to be displayed in a manner that indicates the specific determination result, and the specific condition is configured to be established during the period in which the temporary stop mode is being executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 has the effect that when a specific condition is met during the temporary stop period, the state of the identification information is changed, making it easier to identify that the change has occurred.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that in gaming machine C1 or C2, the identification information is configured to show a form indicating the specific discrimination result by displaying a combination of multiple symbols, and the variable means varies the combination of symbols.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C1 and C2, gaming machine C3 has the effect of being able to change the combination of symbols each time a specific condition is met, thereby increasing the expectation of a specific judgment result.

<Feature D group>
The gaming machine D1 has an effect execution means capable of executing an effect, a bonus granting means capable of granting an advantageous bonus to a player when a specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, an operation means operable by a player, and a setting means capable of varying game settings based on the operation of the operation means, and is capable of executing an effect based on the game settings that have been varied during the execution period of the effect, based on the operation of the operation means during the period when the effect is being executed.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and the results of the judgment are announced by determining the content of the performance through a lottery and executing a preview performance that indicates the expected probability of the success or failure judgment before the lottery results are announced. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, there was a problem in that the frequency at which the content of the performance mode to be executed was determined tended to be constant, reducing the interest in the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest in the game.

According to gaming machine D1, the game settings can be changed by operating the operating means while the performance is being performed, and the performance can be executed based on the changed settings during the performance period, which has the effect of allowing the player to play early on in a state that corresponds to the player's desires, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it has a performance setting means that can set a performance mode corresponding to multiple settings when the performance is executed in the gaming machine D1.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, gaming machine D2 has the effect that when a performance is executed, the performance mode corresponding to multiple settings is set, so that the performance mode can be easily changed during execution of the performance.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a special effect based on the operation means being operated during the period in which the specific effect is being executed, thereby changing the setting, in gaming machine D1 or D2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 and D2, gaming machine D3 has the effect of making it possible to quickly identify when a specific effect will be performed by changing the settings, thereby further increasing the interest in the game.

<Features Group E>
A gaming machine E1 having a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, wherein the identification information is composed of a plurality of patterns, and when the patterns are displayed in a stopped state, the gaming machine E1 has an effect execution means capable of executing an effect mode corresponding to the type of pattern to be stopped.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and as a presentation to notify the result of the judgment, multiple symbols are dynamically displayed, and then a combination of symbols showing the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, there was a problem in that the game became monotonous and interest in the game was reduced by simply repeating the dynamic display and stopping of symbols. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest in the game.

The gaming machine E1 executes a presentation mode that corresponds to the type of stopped symbol, which has the effect of making the type of stopped symbol easier to understand and increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the identification information is configured by adding an identification pattern to each of the multiple symbols in the gaming machine E1, and the identification pattern is determined and added without corresponding to the type of the symbol.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E1, gaming machine E2 has the effect of providing a wide variety of identification information because the identification mode is added to the pattern without corresponding to the type.

Gaming machine E3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E1 or E2, the mode for indicating the specific discrimination result is configured by displaying the identification modes in a specific combination.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E1 and E2, gaming machine E3 has the effect of being able to flexibly combine and report patterns with identification modes, since a specific discrimination result is reported by a combination of identification modes regardless of the type of pattern.

<Feature F Group> (The expected level is suggested by the operation pattern when the reserved pattern is shifted)
a display means for dynamically displaying identification information showing a result of the determination made by the determination means; a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means; an identification pattern display means for displaying an identification pattern showing the number of pieces of the information stored in the storage means on the display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific determination result is displayed on the display means. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that it has a display position changing means for changing a display position of the identification pattern to a display position corresponding to the new number of pieces of the information when the number of pieces of the information stored in the storage means changes, and an operation mode setting means for setting an operation mode of the identification pattern when the display position of the identification pattern is changed by the display position changing means.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and an effect is executed to notify the player of the result of the determination. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game.

According to the gaming machine F1, the operation mode when the display position of the identification pattern is changed can be set by the operation mode setting means, so that it is possible to execute a performance using the operation mode of the identification pattern, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine F1, the operation mode setting means is capable of setting a specific operation mode when the identification information corresponding to the identification pattern is the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result.

According to the gaming machine F2, when the identification pattern changes its display position, it operates in a specific manner, so that the player can recognize that the identification information corresponding to the identification pattern is identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result, and therefore it is possible to make the player interested in the manner in which the identification pattern operates, which has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.

<Feature G group> (Performance in which reserved patterns other than the reserved pattern are not displayed during reach performance)
A gaming machine G1 having an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the information when a discrimination condition is established, a display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, a presentation mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of presentation modes on the display means, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, characterized in that it has a blocking means capable of making the display means difficult to see, and a range setting means capable of setting the range within which the blocking means will make it difficult to see.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and an effect is executed to notify the player of the result of the determination. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, when multiple effects are executed simultaneously, there is a risk that the effect of the effects will be reduced because the player will not know which effect to focus on. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest of the game.

According to feature G1, a range is set by the range setting means, and the range is blocked by the blocking means, making it difficult for the player to see, which has the effect of drawing the player's attention to the presentation mode executed within the visible range.

A gaming machine G2, which is characterized in that it has a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means in feature G1, and the presentation mode display means is capable of displaying the presentation mode when the information is stored in the storage means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G1, gaming machine G2 has the effect of being able to determine the number of pieces of information stored in the storage means based on the number of presentation modes displayed, and predicting the number of times that can be determined.

A gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the storage means in the gaming machine G2 is capable of storing the information up to a specific number.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine G2, gaming machine G3 has the effect of preventing excessively large numbers of determinations from being made, since an upper limit can be set on the number of pieces of information that can be stored and used for determination by the determination means.

<Feature H Group> (Pattern Stock Reach)
In a gaming machine having a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, a display means for displaying a discrimination pattern composed of a plurality of symbol rows for indicating a discrimination result by the discrimination means, a display control means for dynamically displaying the discrimination pattern on the display means and then statically displaying the discrimination pattern in a display mode for indicating the discrimination result, and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to a player when the discrimination pattern is statically displayed in a static display mode for indicating a specific discrimination result by the discrimination means, the static display mode for indicating the specific discrimination result is a static display mode in which the plurality of symbol rows are statically displayed in a specific combination of symbols. the display control means is configured to be capable of displaying at least two or more of the plurality of pattern rows in a reach display mode in which a combination of patterns that is part of a combination for indicating the specific discrimination result is stopped or temporarily stopped, and a suggestion effect is capable of executing a suggestion effect for suggesting a display mode of the identification pattern that is stopped and displayed in the pattern rows that are dynamically displayed while the reach display mode is being displayed, and the gaming machine is capable of varying the display mode of the identification pattern that indicates the reach display mode based on the display mode of the identification pattern suggested by the suggestion effect.

In the past, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the game board of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and after a pattern for notifying the lottery result is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the pattern is displayed stationary in a manner that indicates the lottery result, and if a lottery result indicating a loss is announced, the variable display of the pattern for indicating the next lottery result is started. If the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and then, if a predetermined condition is met, a configuration has been proposed that can change the game state to a game state that is advantageous to the player (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A). However, there was a demand for further improvement in the interest of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine H1, it is possible to vary the identification pattern indicating the reach display mode while suggesting the stop display mode of the dynamically displayed identification pattern by using a suggestive performance executed while the reach display mode is displayed. Therefore, depending on the content of the suggestive performance, it is possible to execute a game in which the player expects the dynamically displayed identification pattern to be stopped and displayed without changing the identification pattern indicating the reach display mode, and a game in which the player expects the identification pattern indicating the reach display mode to be changed. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In gaming machine H1, the suggestion effect is characterized in that after displaying multiple decorative patterns having information corresponding to the display mode of the identification pattern, a predetermined number of the decorative patterns are displayed from among the multiple displayed decorative patterns to indicate the effect result. In gaming machine H2,

According to the gaming machine H2, by displaying multiple decorative patterns including decorative patterns for indicating the result of the suggestive performance, it is possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the result of the suggestive performance. In addition, by grasping the information contained in the multiple decorative patterns displayed, it is possible to execute a game in which the player hopes that the dynamically displayed identification pattern will be displayed stationary without the identification pattern indicating the reach display mode being changed by the current suggestive performance, and a game in which the player hopes that the identification pattern indicating the reach display mode will be changed. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In gaming machine H2, the suggestion effect is characterized in that the multiple decorative symbols are displayed in sequence, and the decorative symbol having information other than information corresponding to the identification symbol displayed in the reach display mode is displayed first. Gaming machine H3.

With gaming machine H3, the decorative pattern that is first displayed when the reach display mode is displayed can be a decorative pattern that has information other than the information corresponding to the identification pattern displayed in the reach display mode, which has the effect of preventing the player from mistakingly believing that an identification pattern indicating a specific judgment result has been stopped and displayed.

<Feature I Group> (Screen Press Preview)
A gaming machine I1 having a discrimination means capable of performing a discrimination, a display image creation means capable of creating a display image to indicate the discrimination result by the discrimination means, a display means capable of displaying the display image created by the display image creation means in a specified display area, and an image control means capable of variably controlling the display image created by the display image creation means, characterized in that the display image creation means is capable of creating the display image by superimposing a plurality of image layers, and the image control means is capable of variably controlling the display image on a layer-by-layer basis.

Conventionally, there have been gaming machines that use a display device such as a liquid crystal display device to perform a variable performance to show the result of the discrimination means, and in order to enhance the performance effect by performing a variety of variable performances, a gaming machine has been proposed that displays various display images on a display screen such as a liquid crystal display device (prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A). However, as the number of types of variable performances increases, the amount of display data required to create the display images increases, which creates a problem of putting pressure on manufacturing costs. Therefore, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that can enhance the performance effect and increase the player's interest in playing by performing a variety of variable performances while suppressing the increase in the amount of display data required to create the display images. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that further enhances the interest of playing.

According to gaming machine I1, the display image created by the display image creation means can be variably controlled in units of multiple image layers that form the display image, so that the same display image can be used to display various display modes in the display area. This has the effect of making it possible to execute a variety of variable effects while suppressing an increase in the amount of display data required to create the display image.

In gaming machine I1, the image creation means is capable of creating a display image of identification information to show the result of the discrimination means on a specific first image layer among the multiple image layers, and gaming machine I2 is characterized in having a correction means capable of executing correction control to make the identification information difficult to see when the first image layer is variably controlled by the image control means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine I1, gaming machine I2 provides the following effect. That is, when the display image of the identification information is variably controlled by the image control means, the display image of the identification information variably controlled by the correction means can be made difficult for the player to see, which has the effect of preventing the player from misinterpreting the identification information displayed on the display means.

A gaming machine I3, characterized in that the multiple images in the gaming machine I2 include at least a second image layer located in front of the first image layer, the image control means executes specific variable control of the same content on the first image layer and the first image layer, and the correction means, when the specific variable control is executed, makes the display image of the identification information displayed on the first layer difficult to see by the display image displayed on the second layer.

Gaming machine I3 has the following effect in addition to the effect of gaming machine I2. That is, in order to make the display image showing the variably controlled identification information difficult to see, a first image layer on which the display image of the identification information is created and a display image displayed on a second image layer on which specific variable control of the same content is executed are used, so that no matter what kind of variable control is executed, the display image on the second image layer can be easily displayed without being misaligned with the display position of the display image of the identification information.

<Characteristic Group J>
A gaming machine J1 having a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, the gaming machine J1 being characterized in having a presentation mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of presentation modes on the display means, a variable display means capable of varying the presentation mode displayed on the display means, and a display mode determination means capable of determining a display mode corresponding to the position at which the plurality of presentation modes are displayed.

Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines have been proposed in which, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a success or failure, and an effect is executed to notify the player of the result of the determination. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, there was a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the entertainment value of the game.

According to gaming machine A1, the notification mode is arranged so that the player can easily recognize the variable presentation mode, which has the effect of reducing the inconvenience of overlooking the variable presentation mode and increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine J2 in which the variable display means in the gaming machine J1 is capable of varying the degree of variability of the presentation mode depending on the display mode determined by the display mode determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine J1, gaming machine J2 has the effect of making it easier to generate interest in the displayed display mode, since the degree of variability of the presentation mode can be varied depending on the determined display mode.

A gaming machine J3 is characterized in that it has a notification means capable of placing a notification pattern at the position where the presentation pattern is displayed in the gaming machine J2, and a suggestion control means capable of suggesting the presentation pattern that can be changed by placing the notification pattern when the multiple presentation patterns are displayed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine J2, gaming machine J3 has the effect of making it easier for players to recognize the variable presentation mode by providing a notification mode, thereby reducing the inconvenience of overlooking the variable presentation mode and increasing the interest in the game.

<Feature K group>
A gaming machine K1 having an alarm means capable of alarming a predetermined alarm mode, an operation means operable by a player, a setting means capable of setting information for varying a setting based on the operation of the operation means, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect mode corresponding to the varied setting, characterized in that the gaming machine K1 has a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus based on the information being set by the setting means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game has been won or not, and an effect is executed to notify the player of the result of the judgment. Gaming machines have been proposed in which the game mode can be changed by operating an operating means that is provided on the gaming machine and can be operated by the player. (Prior art document: JP 2012-217766 A) However, there has been a problem in that when the operating means is operated, it is sometimes difficult to determine whether the game mode has been changed, which reduces the interest in the game. The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine K1, a bonus is awarded based on the information set, so the player can operate the operating means to receive the bonus. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine K2 is characterized in that it has a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination in a gaming machine K1, and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the result of the discrimination executed by the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, and the bonus granting means notifies the player that the result of the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result before the bonus game is executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine K1, gaming machine K2 can quickly notify the player that a bonus game is being played by the bonus granting means, so that the player can operate the operating means to receive the bonus. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine K3, characterized in that in the gaming machine K2, the bonus granting means is capable of granting the bonus when the information is set by the setting means while the identification information showing the result of the determination by the determination means is being dynamically displayed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine K2, gaming machine K3 can have the player operate the operating means to receive a special bonus even during the period when the identification information is being dynamically displayed. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

Among the gaming machines described above, gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the necessary condition being that the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the gaming medium include coins, medals, etc.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which is operated to launch a ball into a predetermined gaming area, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, as a necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. Also, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) according to the number of winning balls is given.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized by being a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. In particular, the basic configuration of the fusion gaming machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information, using balls as a gaming medium, and requiring a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
81 Display means 203va, 203vb Storage means F104 Dynamic display means F105 Acquisition means F208 Discrimination means F218 Benefit granting means F613 Advance discrimination means F2504 Presentation mode display means F3109 Variable display means F3206, F3213, F3214 Suggestion control means Ym1, Ym2 Notification means

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fusion gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop being a specific identification information as a necessary condition, using balls as a gaming medium, a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is held to determine whether the game will be a win or a loss, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that gives the player an advantage is executed (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2012-217766 A).
However, there is a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 has a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, and has a presentation mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of presentation modes on the display means, a variable display means capable of varying the presentation mode displayed on the display means, an announcement means capable of arranging an announcement mode at the position where the presentation mode is displayed, and a suggestion control means capable of suggesting the variable presentation mode by arranging the announcement mode when the plurality of presentation modes are displayed.
The gaming machine of technical idea 2 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1, which has an acquisition means capable of acquiring information that can be determined by the discrimination means, and a storage means in which the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, and the presentation mode display means is capable of displaying the presentation mode when the information is stored in the storage means.
The gaming machine of technical idea 3 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 2, which has a pre-discrimination means capable of performing a discrimination before the information stored in the memory means is discriminated by the discrimination means, and the variable display means is configured to be variable based on the discrimination result of the pre-discrimination means.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the gaming machine has a discrimination means capable of performing discrimination, a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means, and a bonus granting means capable of granting a bonus when identification information indicating a specific discrimination result is displayed on the display means, and has a presentation mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of presentation modes on the display means, a variable display means capable of varying the presentation mode displayed on the display means, a notification means capable of arranging a notification mode at the position where the presentation mode is displayed, and a suggestion control means capable of suggesting the variable presentation mode by arranging the notification mode when the plurality of presentation modes are displayed.
This has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.
The gaming machine according to Technical Concept 2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine according to Technical Concept 1. That is, the gaming machine has an acquisition means capable of acquiring information that can be determined by the determination means, and a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the presentation mode display means is capable of displaying the presentation mode when the information is stored in the storage means.
This has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Claims (3)

A discrimination means capable of executing discrimination;
a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying on a display means identification information for indicating a result of the determination by the determination means;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means,
A performance mode display means capable of displaying a plurality of performance modes on the display means;
A variable display means capable of varying the presentation mode displayed on the display means;
A notification means capable of arranging a notification mode at a position where the performance mode is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by having a suggestion control means that, when the multiple presentation modes are displayed, can suggest the variable presentation mode by arranging the notification mode. An acquisition means capable of acquiring information that can be determined by the determination means;
A storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein said presentation mode display means is capable of displaying said presentation mode when said information is stored in said storage means. a pre-determination means for executing a determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein said variable display means is configured to be variable based on the result of the determination by said pre-determination means.

Images